FN Thomson Reuters Web of Science™
VR 1.0
PT J
AU Carreiras, M
Baquero, S
Rodriguez, E
AF Carreiras, Manuel
Baquero, Silvia
Rodriguez, Esperanza
TI Syllabic processing in visual word recognition in Alzheimer patients,
elderly people, and young adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
DE visual word recognition; syllabic processing; Alzheimer;
neurodegeneration; dementia
ID SEMANTIC MEMORY LOSS; SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; OLDER-ADULTS; NEIGHBORHOOD
FREQUENCY; INHIBITORY CONTROL; LEXICAL DECISION; SENILE DEMENTIA;
DISEASE; INDIVIDUALS; SPANISH
AB Background: Over the last decade Carreiras and colleages have assembled compelling empirical evidence that the syllable plays an important role in the visual recognition of polysyllabic words in Spanish. One of the clearest demonstrations of this is the syllable frequency effect: Words with high-frequency syllables are responded to more slowly than words with low-frequency syllables. Another key finding is the syllable congruency effect that has been obtained using the masked priming technique: Word recognition is facilitated by primes that correspond to the first syllable, relative to primes that contain one letter more or less than the first syllable.
Aims: The study aimed to investigate the syllable frequency effect and the syllable congruency effect in Alzheimer patients, elderly people, and young adults. The goal was to examine whether and to what extent syllabic processing is preserved or deteriorates with age and/or this disease. If structural components of language are to some extent preserved in Alzheimer's disease (AD) patients and in elderly people, they should show the syllable congruency effect. If AD patients and elderly people have a breakdown in the ability to inhibit partially activated information, the syllable frequency effect may well turn out to be different in these two groups as compared to the young adults.
Methods & Procedures: Two experiments, one investigating the syllable frequency effect and the other the syllable congruency effect, were carried out with Alzheimer patients, elderly people, and young adults. In Experiment 1 we used the same materials and procedure used by Carreiras and Perea (2002) in their Experiment 4. In Experiment 2 we created new materials manipulating syllable frequency (high and low) and word frequency (high and low). AD patients, elderly people, and young controls participated in the two experiments.
Outcomes & Results: The results showed syllable congruency effects, replicating previous findings. However, syllable frequency effects were different for the three groups. Predictably, young adults responded more slowly to words with high-frequency syllables than to words with low-frequency syllables. In contrast, Alzheimer patients and elderly people responded more slowly to words with low-frequency syllables than to words with high frequency syllables.
Conclusions: In the context of activation models that take into account a syllabic level of representation, the present results suggest that the syllabic layer is preserved but the inhibitory process of competition between lexical candidates is impaired in Alzheimer patients and in elderly people.
C1 [Carreiras, Manuel] Univ La Laguna, Dept Psicol Cognit, Tenerife 38205, Spain.
[Baquero, Silvia; Rodriguez, Esperanza] Univ Nacl Colombia, Bogota, Colombia.
RP Carreiras, M (reprint author), Univ La Laguna, Dept Psicol Cognit, Tenerife 38205, Spain.
EM mcarreir@ull.es
RI Carreiras, Manuel/D-5267-2009
OI Carreiras, Manuel/0000-0001-6726-7613
CR ALLEN PA, 1993, PSYCHOL AGING, V8, P274, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.8.2.274
Alvarez CJ, 2001, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V27, P545, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.27.2.545
ALVAREZ CJ, 2004, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V9, P427
Amieva HA, 2002, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V24, P503, DOI 10.1076/jcen.24.4.503.1034
Balota D. A., 2001, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V6, P51, DOI DOI 10.1037/A0014888
BALOTA DA, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P181, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90124-J
Balota DA, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V10, P82, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.10.1.82
BALOTA DA, 1993, J MEM LANG, V32, P573, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1993.1029
Barber H, 2004, NEUROREPORT, V15, P545, DOI 10.1097/01.wnr.0000111325.38420.80
Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
BAYLES KA, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P454, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90079-T
Bell EE, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V76, P130, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2416
Caramelli P, 1998, HDB NEUROLINGUISTICS, P463, DOI 10.1016/B978-012666055-5/50036-8
Carreiras M, 2002, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V28, P1228, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.28.5.1228
CARREIRAS M, 1993, J MEM LANG, V32, P766, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1993.1038
Carreiras M, 2005, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V17, P1803, DOI 10.1162/089892905774589217
Carreiras M, 2005, PSYCHOL SCI, V16, P585, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.2005.01579.x
CHERTKOW H, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P420, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90078-3
CHERTKOW H, 1994, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V16, P608, DOI 10.1080/01688639408402672
CIPOLOTTI L, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P309, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253155
CONRAD M, 2008, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V23, P1
Conrad M, 2004, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V19, P369, DOI 10.1080/01690960344000224
Cuetos F, 2003, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V17, P549, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(03)00169-1
CUMMINGS JL, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P315, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90051-9
Zacks Rose T., 1994, P241
Davis CJ, 2005, BEHAV RES METHODS, V37, P665, DOI 10.3758/BF03192738
Faust ME, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P225, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1747
Ferrand L, 1996, J MEM LANG, V35, P708, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1996.0037
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
FRIEDMAN RB, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P400, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90109-R
Giffard B, 2001, BRAIN, V124, P1522, DOI 10.1093/brain/124.8.1522
HARTMAN M, 1991, PSYCHOL AGING, V6, P587, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.6.4.587
Hasher L., 1988, PSYCHOL LEARN MOTIV, V22, P193, DOI DOI 10.1016/S0079-7421(08)60041-9
Hasher L, 1999, GERONTOLOGY, V45, P355, DOI 10.1159/000022121
HODGES JR, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P301, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90104-T
Jefferies E, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V42, P639, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2003.10.002
Knott R, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P1165, DOI 10.1080/026432997381303
Margolin DI, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P275, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0076
Mathey S., 2002, CURRENT PSYCHOL LETT, V8, P107
May CP, 1999, PSYCHOL AGING, V14, P304, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.14.2.304
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
NEBES RD, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MEMO, P233
NEBES RD, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P237
Nestor PJ, 2004, NAT MED, V10, pS34, DOI 10.1038/nm1433
Nicholas M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P184, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0070
Pallier C, 1997, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V29, P322, DOI 10.3758/BF03200583
Patterson K., 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V8, P395, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.8.3.395
PATTERSON K, 1994, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V6, P57, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1994.6.1.57
Perea M, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V24, P767, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.24.3.767
Perea M, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V24, P134, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.24.1.134
RAPP BC, 1992, J MEM LANG, V31, P33, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(92)90004-H
REISBERG B, 1982, AM J PSYCHIAT, V139, P1136
Sebastian-Galles N., 2000, LEXESP BASE DATOS IN
Spieler DH, 1996, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V22, P461, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.22.2.461
SULLIVAN MP, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V9, P537, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.9.4.537
Taylor JK, 2002, PSYCHOL AGING, V17, P662, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.17.4.662
WOOLLAMS A, 2005, SD SQUARED ASS SEMAN
NR 57
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2008
VL 22
IS 11
BP 1176
EP 1190
DI 10.1080/02687030701820337
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 360IT
UT WOS:000260051900005
ER
PT J
AU Laganaro, M
AF Laganaro, Marina
TI Is there a syllable frequency effect in aphasia or in apraxia of speech
or both?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
DE Language production; Syllable frequency; Phonetic encoding; Phonological
encoding; Aphasia; Apraxia of speech
ID WORD; FRENCH; UNITS
AB Background: The observation of a syllable frequency effect on production latencies in healthy speakers has been an argument in favour of stored syllables in speech production. In Levelt, Roelofs, and Meyer's (1999) model of speech production, syllabic representations are accessed during phonetic encoding. Neurolinguistic studies have provided convergent evidence of a syllable frequency effect on production accuracy in speakers with acquired language disorders. However, the observation that syllable frequency also affected production in aphasic speakers with a pre-phonetic impairment (conduction aphasia and Wernicke's aphasia) seems in contradiction to the phonetic locus of syllabic representations. Aims: We illustrate the points of convergences and divergences between psycholinguistic and neurolinguistic results on the locus of the syllable frequency effect and explore whether a syllable frequency effect is observed in apraxia of speech (AoS) and in conduction aphasia when participants are tested with the same material. Methods Procedures: Reading and repetition was elicited with monosyllabic words (Experiment A) and with bisyllabic pseudowords (Experiment B) composed of high- or low-frequency syllables. Three speakers with AoS and three speakers with conduction aphasia participated in each experiment. Outcomes Results: Both subgroups displayed a tendency for a syllable frequency effect on production accuracy. A significant effect of syllable frequency was observed in each experiment in a participant with AoS and in a participant with conduction aphasia. Conclusions: The data confirmed similar syllable frequency effects in speakers with AoS and in conduction aphasia when tested with the same eliciting material. We discuss these apparently contradictory observations and suggest an explanation for the origin of the syllable frequency effect in these two populations.
C1 Univ Hosp Geneva, CH-1211 Geneva 14, Switzerland.
RP Laganaro, M (reprint author), Univ Hosp Geneva, Av Beau Sejour 26, CH-1211 Geneva 14, Switzerland.
EM marina.laganaro@hcuge.ch
RI Laganaro, Marina/A-2842-2011
FU Swiss National Science Foundation [105312-108284]
FX I wish to thank Lindsey Nickels and Manuel Carreiras for their
meticulous review and helpful comments on a previous version of the
manuscript. Research supported by Swiss National Science Foundation
Grant No. 105312-108284.
CR Aichert I, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P148, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00296-7
BLUMSTEIN S E, 1990, P33
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
Carreiras M, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V90, P393, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2003.12.003
Cholin J, 2006, COGNITION, V99, P205, DOI 10.1016/j.cognition.2005.01.009
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
CONTENT A, 1990, ANN PSYCHOL, V90, P551
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Ferrand L, 1997, MEM COGNITION, V25, P458, DOI 10.3758/BF03201122
Ferrand L, 1996, J MEM LANG, V35, P708, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1996.0037
Forster KI, 2003, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V35, P116, DOI 10.3758/BF03195503
Frauenfelder Uli H., 2000, LANG SPEECH, V44, P409
HENDRICKS H, 1996, M PLANCK I PSYCHOLIN
KOHN SE, 1994, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V15, P75, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400006986
Laganaro M, 2006, J MEM LANG, V55, P178, DOI 10.1016/j.jml.2006.05.001
Laganaro M, 2005, J NEUROLINGUIST, V18, P221, DOI 10.1016/j.jneuroling.2004.12.001
Levelt W. J. M., 1994, COGNITION, V50, P289
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
Perea M, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V24, P134, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.24.1.134
Perret C, 2006, EXP PSYCHOL, V53, P95, DOI 10.1027/1618-3169.53.2.95
SCHILLER NO, 2002, LAB PHONOLOGY, V7, P35
Schiller NO, 2000, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V26, P512, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.26.2.512
Shattuck-Hufnagel S., 1979, SENTENCE PROCESSING, P295
Staiger A, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P1201, DOI 10.1080/02687030701820584
Stenneken P, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V95, P221, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2005.07.114
Varley R, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P39
WHILSHIRE CE, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V84, P424
NR 28
TC 23
Z9 23
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2008
VL 22
IS 11
BP 1191
EP 1200
DI 10.1080/02687030701820469
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 360IT
UT WOS:000260051900006
ER
PT J
AU Staiger, A
Ziegler, W
AF Staiger, Anja
Ziegler, Wolfram
TI Syllable frequency and syllable structure in the spontaneous speech
production of patients with apraxia of speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
DE Spontaneous speech production; Apraxia of speech; Syllable frequency;
Syllable structure
ID LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; APHASIA; ERRORS; COMPLEXITY; ACCURACY; PATTERNS;
SPEAKERS; ACCESS
AB Background: The sublexical factors syllable frequency and syllable structure are known to influence error rates in patients with apraxia of speech (e.g., Aichert Ziegler, 2004; Romani Galluzzi, 2005). To our knowledge, these factors have almost exclusively been examined by single-word production paradigms. However, performance on single-word tasks is not necessarily a good predictor of spontaneous speech production, since the generation of conversational speech involves specific conditions and additional demands. This might influence the weights of syllable frequency and syllable structure in explanations of the accuracy of speech production in apraxic speakers.
Aims: Our aim was to determine if the spontaneous speech production of patients with apraxia of speech (AOS) is influenced by the factors syllable frequency and syllable structure. The two research questions that guided our investigation were: (1) Are the distribution properties of syllables in spontaneous speech different in patients with AOS compared to unimpaired speakers? (2) Do the factors syllable frequency and syllable structure affect articulatory accuracy in the spontaneous speech of patients with AOS?
Methods & Procedures: Three patients with AOS and 15 neurologically unimpaired control persons produced samples of spontaneous speech with a minimum of 1000 syllables each. Structure and frequency counts were made on the basis of the German CELEX database.
Outcomes & Results: The distribution properties of the spontaneous speech samples were similar in the apraxic speakers and the unimpaired controls. In all three patients the proportion of errors was significantly higher on low-than on high-frequency syllables. In two patients a significant effect even persisted when any confound with syllable structure was ruled out. Syllable structure effects were only found within the low-frequency syllables.
Conclusions: Syllable frequency and syllable structure play a decisive role with respect to articulatory accuracy in the spontaneous speech production of patients with AOS.
C1 [Staiger, Anja; Ziegler, Wolfram] EKN Clin Neuropsychol Res Grp, D-80992 Munich, Germany.
RP Staiger, A (reprint author), EKN Clin Neuropsychol Res Grp, Dachauerstr 164, D-80992 Munich, Germany.
EM anja.staiger@extern.lrz-muenchen.de
FU DFG-German research council [ZI 469/10-2]
FX The first author of this study was supported by a grant from the
DFG-German research council (ZI 469/10-2). We would also like to thank
the ReHa-Hilfe e. V. for their support. We are grateful to our
colleagues from the Neuropsychological Clinic, Munich-Bogenhausen
Hospital, Munich, and to the staff from the speech therapy departments
at the Rehabilitation Hospitals Bad Heilbrunn and Bad Aibling for their
collaboration on clinical issues. We would also like to express our
gratitude to all participants.
CR Aichert I, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P148, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00296-7
Aichert I, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P1216, DOI 10.1080/02687030701820303
AICHERT I, COMPUTER PROGR UNPUB
Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Brendel B., 2003, HIERARCHISCHE WORTLI
TROST JE, 1974, BRAIN LANG, V1, P63, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(74)90026-1
CANTER GJ, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P204, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90131-2
Carreiras M, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V90, P393, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2003.12.003
Cholin J, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P1127, DOI 10.1080/02687030701820352
Cholin J, 2006, COGNITION, V99, P205, DOI 10.1016/j.cognition.2005.01.009
CLEMENTS GN, 1983, CV PHONOLOGY GENERAT
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
Dabul B, 2000, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL, V2nd
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
Edmonds LA, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1121, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000561
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Itoh M., 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH PHYSL, P135
KOHLER KJ, 2001, AIPUK 35 SOUND PATTE, P1
KOHLER KJ, 1990, NATO ADV SCI I D-BEH, V55, P69
KOHN SE, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P133, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253440
Laganaro M, 2006, J MEM LANG, V55, P178, DOI 10.1016/j.jml.2006.05.001
Laganaro M, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P1191, DOI 10.1080/02687030701820469
Laganaro M, 2005, J NEUROLINGUIST, V18, P221, DOI 10.1016/j.jneuroling.2004.12.001
LAPOINTE LL, 1975, J COMMUN DISORD, V8, P259, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(75)90018-0
LEVELT WJM, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P239, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90030-2
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
McNeil MR, 2004, SPEECH MOTOR CONTROL, P389
Nespoulous J L, 1984, Adv Neurol, V42, P203
NICKELS L, 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO, P115
Nickels L, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P57, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000122
ODELL K, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P345
Romani C, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P817, DOI 10.1080/02643290442000365
Romani C, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P83, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1958
Rosenbek J., 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH PHYSL, P1
SCHILLER NO, 1997, MPI SERIES PSYCHOLIN
SHATTUCKHUFNAGEL S, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P213, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90044-I
STEMBERGER JP, 1986, J MEM LANG, V25, P163, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(86)90027-6
STEMBERGER JP, 1990, COGNITION, V35, P123, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(90)90012-9
STEMBERGER JP, 1991, J MEM LANG, V30, P161, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(91)90002-2
Varley R, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P39
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
Ziegler W., 2005, NEUROLINGUISTIK, V19, P5
Ziegler Wolfram, 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P231, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35798
NR 43
TC 29
Z9 29
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2008
VL 22
IS 11
BP 1201
EP 1215
DI 10.1080/02687030701820584
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 360IT
UT WOS:000260051900007
ER
PT J
AU Aichert, I
Ziegler, W
AF Aichert, Ingrid
Ziegler, Wolfram
TI Learning a syllable from its parts: Cross-syllabic generalisation
effects in patients with apraxia of speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
DE Apraxia of speech; Syllable; Motor learning; Generalisation
ID LEXICAL ACCESS; FREQUENCY; SPEAKERS; PATTERNS
AB Background: The impairment underlying apraxia of speech (AOS) is usually attributed to the phonetic encoding stage of the speech production process, where speech motor programs are accessed (e.g., Code, 1998). At this processing stage, Levelt, Roelofs, and Meyer (1999) postulate a store of motor patterns for frequently used syllables (syllabary). These syllable gestures are assumed to be holistically represented. However, the fact that syllable structure influences the error mechanism of AOS is in conflict with the assumption of holistic syllable gestures.
Aims: This study examined the assumption of holistic syllable-sized motor programs in apraxia of speech by a learning paradigm. We investigated if training of phonologically simple syllables, which were derived from more complex target syllables, showed a generalisation effect on these target syllables. If the assumption of holistic syllable programs is appropriate, no generalisation effects are expected.
Methods & Procedures: A learning experiment was conducted with four patients with AOS. For each of 24 complex target syllables a set of 15 training syllables was derived by deleting one or two of the onset and/or coda consonants or by assimilating consonantal features. The learning trials comprised repetitions of the training syllables, block-wise for each target syllable. To assess generalisation effects, segmental errors and disfluencies were counted and syllable durations were measured before and immediately after training, for the target syllables as well as for matched control syllables.
Outcomes & Results: In the patients as a group, the training resulted in significant and specific improvements on the complex target syllables. The strongest effect was found in RK, a patient with pure AOS. This patient additionally exhibited a significant reduction of target but not of control syllable durations.
Conclusions: In this learning study, patients with apraxia of speech showed specific generalisation effects from phonologically simple syllables to more complex syllables. These effects cannot be explained by the assumption of holistically stored syllable programs (Levelt et al., 1999). In contrast, the results suggest that syllabic motor programs comprise an internal phonological structure.
C1 [Aichert, Ingrid; Ziegler, Wolfram] City Hosp Bogenhausen, Munich, Germany.
RP Aichert, I (reprint author), EKN Clin Neuropsychol Res Grp, Dachauer Str 164, D-80992 Munich, Germany.
EM ingrid.aichert@extern.lrz-muenchen.de
FU German research foundation [Zi 469/6-2]
FX The first author of this study was supported by a grant from the German
research foundation (Zi 469/6-2). We are grateful to the patients for
their participation. We would also like to thank the speech therapists
from the following clinical institutions for their participation and
collaboration on clinical issues: Neuropsychological Department/City
Hospital Munchen-Bogenhausen, Neurological Clinic Bad Aibling,
Rehabilitation Hospital Lenggries, Speech Pathology Practice
Seith/Munchen. ReHa-Hilfe e. V. is acknowledged for continuing support.
CR Aichert I, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P148, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00296-7
AICHERT I, 2007, GERMAN DATABAS UNPUB
Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
Bose A, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P767, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000186
Brendel B, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P77, DOI 10.1080/02687030600965464
CANTER GJ, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P204, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90131-2
Cholin J, 2006, COGNITION, V99, P205, DOI 10.1016/j.cognition.2005.01.009
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
Crompton A., 1982, SLIPS TONGUE LANGUAG, P109
Croot Karen, 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P267, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35800
DABUL B, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P268
De Bleser B., 2004, LEMO LEXIKON MODELLO
Freed DB, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248477
HUBER W, 1983, AACHENER APASIE TEST
LEVELT WJM, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P239, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90030-2
Levelt WJM, 2001, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V98, P13464, DOI 10.1073/pnas.231459498
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
LINDBLOM B., 1983, PRODUCTION SPEECH, P217
Maas E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P609, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000266
MacNeilage PF, 2000, CHILD DEV, V71, P153, DOI 10.1111/1467-8624.00129
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MILLER N, 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P173
NICKELS L, 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO, P115
ODELL K, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P345
Odell Katharine H., 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P309, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35803
Roelofs A, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P657, DOI 10.1080/016909697386655
Romani C, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P817, DOI 10.1080/02643290442000365
Staiger A, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P1201, DOI 10.1080/02687030701820584
Thompson CK, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P661
Wambaugh JL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249569
ZIEGLER W, 2007, HDB CLIN NEUROLOGY
Ziegler Wolfram, 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P231, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35798
Ziegler W, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P603, DOI 10.1080/02643290442000211
NR 34
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2008
VL 22
IS 11
BP 1216
EP 1229
DI 10.1080/02687030701820303
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 360IT
UT WOS:000260051900008
ER
PT J
AU Ziegler, W
Thelen, AK
Staiger, A
Liepold, M
AF Ziegler, Wolfram
Thelen, Anne-Kathrin
Staiger, Anja
Liepold, Michaela
TI The domain of phonetic encoding in apraxia of speech: Which sub-lexical
units count?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
DE Apraxia of speech; Phonemic error; Syllable; Metrical foot; Phonetic
encoding
AB Background: Apraxia of speech (AOS) is generally viewed as a disorder of phonetic encoding. According to current theories, the phonetic encoding process is considered to be based on linear strings of holistic speech motor representations of the size of sub-lexical units (e.g., phonemes or syllables). This type of model predicts that error rate in apraxia of speech is proportional to the number of phonetic encoding units in an utterance and is not systematically influenced by structural factors originating above or below the level of the critical unit. Aims: In the present study we tested this prediction for five models based on different units of phonetic encoding. Methods and Procedures: Ten patients with AOS were examined with a list of words of varying phonological complexity. Phoneme errors in word repetition were counted in different ways, according to five models postulating different domains of phonetic encoding. Linear regression analyses were used to examine the scores obtained for these models for influences of structural factors. Outcomes Results: No sublexical unit could be identified that was not systematically influenced by one of the structural factors describing the materials. Major influencing factors were (1) the complexity of syllable constituents and (2) the number of metrical feet in a word. Conclusions: A model of phonetic encoding in apraxia of speech is proposed that is based on a hierarchy of structural relationships rather than on linearly ordered, holistic programming units. This model may also contain clues for a theory of normal processing mechanisms.
C1 [Ziegler, Wolfram; Thelen, Anne-Kathrin; Staiger, Anja; Liepold, Michaela] City Hosp Bogenhausen, Munich, Germany.
RP Ziegler, W (reprint author), EKN Clin Neuropsychol Res Grp, Dachauerstr 164, D-80992 Munich, Germany.
EM wolfram.ziegler@extern.lrz-muenchen.de
FU German research foundation [ZI 469/10-2]
FX This study was supported by a grant from the German research foundation
(DFG; ZI 469/10-2). We would like to thank ReHa-Hilfe e. V. for
additional support. We are also grateful to our colleagues from the
Neuropsychological Clinic, Bogenhausen Hospital, Munchen, for their
collaboration on clinical issues, and to Katrin Lindner and Patrizia
Noel for discussions of phonological issues. Moreover, we would like to
express our gratitude to the participants of this study.
CR Aichert I, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P148, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00296-7
Aichert I, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P1216, DOI 10.1080/02687030701820303
Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Brendel B., 2003, HIERARCHISCHE WORTLI
Browman CP, 1997, INT CONGR SER, V1146, P57
Cholin J, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P1127, DOI 10.1080/02687030701820352
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
Croot Karen, 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P267, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35800
Goldsmith J., 1990, AUTOSEGMENTAL METRIC
HUBER W, 1983, AACHENER APASIE TEST
Janssen U, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P1157, DOI 10.1080/02687030701820436
Krakow R. A., 1999, J PHONETICS, V27, P33
Levelt W. J., 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P38
Staiger A, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P1201, DOI 10.1080/02687030701820584
STEVENS KN, 1989, J PHONETICS, V17, P3
THELEN AK, 2007, THESIS I DTSCH PHILO
Varley R, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P39
Varley R, 1999, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V7, P127
Vennemann Th, 1988, PREFERENCE LAWS SYLL
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
ZIEGLER W, 2002, NEUROLINGUISTIK, V16, P5
Ziegler Wolfram, 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P231, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35798
Ziegler W, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P603, DOI 10.1080/02643290442000211
NR 23
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2008
VL 22
IS 11
BP 1230
EP 1247
DI 10.1080/02687030701820402
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 360IT
UT WOS:000260051900009
ER
PT J
AU Meinzer, M
Breitenstein, C
AF Meinzer, Marcus
Breitenstein, Caterina
TI Functional imaging studies of treatment-induced recovery in chronic
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE THERAPY; FRONTAL-CORTEX; POSTSTROKE APHASIA; ANTERIOR
CINGULATE; NONFLUENT APHASIA; ANOMIA TREATMENT; WORD RETRIEVAL;
ACTIVATION; STROKE; FMRI
AB Background: The reacquisition of language after stroke may profit from intense training with several hours of language exercises provided on each training day, especially in the chronic stage. Despite the general effectiveness of this, few studies to date have examined which brain regions mediate successful language recovery as a result of intense training. This knowledge is particularly important because the necessity of several hours of language exercises each day draws a considerable amount of (a) attentional and cognitive resources from the patients and (b) financial and personnel resources from the health system. Aims: Not all aphasia patients may be equally suited for intense training approaches. Functional imaging studies of treatment-induced recovery in chronic aphasia may provide answers to this question and may allow the target-oriented allocation of aphasia patients to (intense) training in the future. In the following sections we will provide a comprehensive review of functional imaging studies that employed intervention paradigms to explore the reacquisition of language functions in chronic aphasia. Main Contribution: A total of 13 studies have been published so far, including a total of 57 chronic aphasia patients. Most of these studies comprised case reports (N=1-3 patients), which preclude generalisation of the results. To date, only three group studies (N=10/11/16) have been accomplished. The majority of studies reported treatment-induced changes of activity in both hemispheres, indicating that both perilesional as well as right (frontal) brain regions mediate intense training success. As 10 of the studies reviewed were concerned with the remediation of word-retrieval difficulties, little is known of how treatment impacts on other aspects of impaired language functions like reading, comprehension, or syntactic processing. Furthermore, only immediate training effects were examined, and brain regions related to the long-term retention of treatment effects may be different. Conclusions: More methodologically sound group studies are required to determine the neural correlates of treatment-induced recovery in the chronic stage of aphasia. Supplemented by other imaging techniques, this knowledge may eventually contribute to the target-oriented allocation of treatment resources in aphasia patients and may increase treatment efficiency.
C1 [Meinzer, Marcus] Univ Florida, Dept Clin & Hlth Psychol, Gainesville, FL 32608 USA.
[Meinzer, Marcus; Breitenstein, Caterina] Univ Munster, D-4400 Munster, Germany.
RP Meinzer, M (reprint author), Univ Florida, Dept Clin & Hlth Psychol, 1601 Archer Rd, Gainesville, FL 32608 USA.
EM mmeinzer@ufl.edu
RI Meinzer, Marcus/I-3943-2013
FU German BMBF-Research Consortium [01GW0520]; German Volkswagen Stiftung
[Az.: I/80 708]; Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft (DFG) [ME 3161/2-1]
FX This work was supported by the German BMBF-Research Consortium:
Dopaminergic learning enhancement (01GW0520) and the German Volkswagen
Stiftung (Az.: I/80 708). MM was supported by a grant of the Deutsche
Forschungsgemeinschaft (DFG, ME 3161/2-1).
CR Abel S, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P831, DOI 10.1080/02687030500268902
Barch DM, 2000, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V12, P298, DOI 10.1162/089892900562110
Barthel G, 2008, APHASIOLOGY, V22, P408, DOI 10.1080/02687030701415880
Belin P, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V47, P1504
Blasi V, 2002, NEURON, V36, P159, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(02)00936-4
BLOMERT L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248666
Breitenstein C, 2005, NEUROIMAGE, V25, P958, DOI 10.1016/j.neuroimage.2004.12.019
Cabeza R, 2002, PSYCHOL AGING, V17, P85, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.17.1.85
Calhoun VD, 2008, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V29, P828, DOI 10.1002/hbm.20581
Cao Y, 1999, STROKE, V30, P2331
Cherney LR, 2006, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V12, P828, DOI 10.1017/S1355617706061017
Crinion J, 2005, BRAIN, V128, P2858, DOI 10.1093/brain/awh659
Crinion JT, 2007, CURR OPIN NEUROL, V20, P667
Crosson B, 2005, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V17, P392, DOI 10.1162/0898929053279487
Crosson B, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V13, P272, DOI 10.1162/089892901564225
Crosson B, 2007, NEUROPSYCHOL REV, V17, P157, DOI 10.1007/s11065-007-9024-z
Crosson B, 2003, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V9, P1061, DOI 10.1017/S135561770397010X
Fridriksson J, 2006, NEUROIMAGE, V32, P1403, DOI 10.1016/j.neuroimage.2006.04.194
Fridriksson J, 2007, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V45, P1812, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2006.12.017
GOLDENBERG G, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P684, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1063
Heiss WD, 1997, J NEUROL SCI, V145, P213, DOI 10.1016/S0022-510X(96)00252-3
Heiss WD, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V98, P118, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2006.02.002
Hillis AE, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P885, DOI 10.1080/0268703
Howard D, 1984, Adv Neurol, V42, P263
Huber H., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Kerns JG, 2004, SCIENCE, V303, P1023, DOI 10.1126/science.1089910
KOHN SE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P266, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90135-X
Lee A, 2006, NEUROPSYCHOL REV, V16, P171, DOI 10.1007/S11065-006-9014-6
Leger A, 2002, NEUROIMAGE, V17, P174, DOI 10.1006/nimg.2002.1238
Meinzer Marcus, 2004, BMC Biol, V2, P20, DOI 10.1186/1741-7007-2-20
Meinzer M, 2007, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V13, P846, DOI 10.1017/S1355617707071111
Meinzer M, 2005, STROKE, V36, P1462, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000169941.29831.2a
Meinzer M, 2006, BMC NEUROL, V6, DOI 10.1186/1471-2377-6-28
Meinzer M, 2007, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V45, P1247, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2006.10.003
Meinzer M, 2008, NEUROIMAGE, V39, P2038, DOI 10.1016/j.neuroimage.2007.10.008
Musso M, 1999, BRAIN, V122, P1781, DOI 10.1093/brain/122.9.1781
Naeser MA, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V93, P95, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.08.004
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Peck KK, 2004, STROKE, V35, P554, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000110983.50753.9D
Perani D, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P357, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00561-8
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
Poldrack RA, 2006, TRENDS COGN SCI, V10, P59, DOI 10.1016/j.tics.2005.12.004
Price CJ, 2005, CURR OPIN NEUROL, V18, P429, DOI 10.1097/01.wco.0000168081.76859.c1
Pulvermuller F, 2001, STROKE, V32, P1621
Raboyeau G, 2008, NEUROLOGY, V70, P290, DOI 10.1212/01.wnl.0000287115.85956.87
Richter M, 2008, BRAIN, V131, P1391, DOI 10.1093/brain/awn043
Rosen HJ, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V55, P1883
Saur D, 2006, BRAIN, V129, P1371, DOI 10.1093/brain/awl090
Squire LR, 2004, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V27, P279, DOI 10.1146/annurev.neuro.27.070203.144130
Vitali P, 2007, NEUROREHAB NEURAL RE, V21, P152, DOI 10.1177/1545968306294735
Warburton E, 1999, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V66, P155, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.66.2.155
WEILLER C, 1995, ANN NEUROL, V37, P723, DOI 10.1002/ana.410370605
Wierenga CE, 2006, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V12, P132, DOI 10.1017/S135561770606019X
Winhuisen L, 2007, STROKE, V38, P1286, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000259632.04324.6c
Zahn R, 2004, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V18, P322, DOI 10.1016/j.cogbrainres.2003.10.021
NR 55
TC 24
Z9 24
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2008
VL 22
IS 12
BP 1251
EP 1268
DI 10.1080/02687030802367998
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 368GG
UT WOS:000260609000001
ER
PT J
AU Rautakoski, P
Korpijaakko-Huuhka, AM
Klippi, A
AF Rautakoski, Pirkko
Korpijaakko-Huuhka, Anna-Maija
Klippi, Anu
TI People with severe and moderate aphasia and their partners as estimators
of communicative skills: A client-centred evaluation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
DE Aphasia; Significant others; AAC; Self-assessment; Functional
communication; Social model of disability
ID QUALITY-OF-LIFE; FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICATION; SUPPORTED CONVERSATION; ADULT
APHASIA; STROKE; PARTICIPATION; IMPAIRMENT; VALIDATION; VOLUNTEERS;
RELATIVES
AB Background: According to the philosophy of the social model of disability, clients are the best estimators of their own life situation. Eliciting the experiences of people with severe aphasia is demanding because of their language and possible other cognitive problems. They are therefore usually excluded from the studies. However, there is evidence that modified assessment tools are accessible for them and help them to give self-reports. Aims: The aim of the present study was to ascertain how people with aphasia evaluate their own communicative skills during rehabilitation by means of modified assessment tools. In addition, their answers were compared with the estimations of their significant others or other partners. Methods Procedures: The data were collected during regular rehabilitation courses, which were carried out in two parts (8+4 days) with 3 months in between. Participants were 35 respondents with aphasia, aged 26 to 65 years, and 35 of their significant others or other partners, aged 29 to 71 years. The study was completed according to an initial, interim, and delayed post-test questionnaire design. Two measures were used: the Finnish version of the Communicative Effectiveness Index (CETI) (Lomas et al., 1989) and an investigator-constructed questionnaire, the Use of Different Communication Methods (UDCM). The questionnaires for the people with aphasia were made more accessible by pictures. Outcomes Results: The self-assessments of the participants with aphasia indicated that their functional communication skills did not change, but that the use of different communication methods improved slightly during the intervention. The significant others' and other partners' estimations showed that their communication skills improved significantly. Ratings of the two groups in functional communication skills differed significantly from each other before the intervention but thereafter the estimates correlated. There were no significant differences in the ratings of the use of different communication methods at any phase of the follow-up study. However, the ratings correlated significantly only at the last assessment. Conclusions: The results of the present study indicate that people with severe and moderate aphasia are able to assess their communication skills with modified, aphasia-friendly self-assessment tools. The results also indicate that people with aphasia and their partners perceive the communicative skills quite similarly, especially after the intervention has begun. The use of accessible measures enables people with severe aphasia to participate in the evaluation of therapy outcomes, as suggested by the philosophies of the social model of rehabilitation.
C1 [Rautakoski, Pirkko] Abo Akad Univ, FIN-20500 Turku, Finland.
[Korpijaakko-Huuhka, Anna-Maija] Univ Tampere, FIN-33101 Tampere, Finland.
[Klippi, Anu] Univ Helsinki, FIN-00014 Helsinki, Finland.
RP Rautakoski, P (reprint author), Abo Akad Univ, FIN-20500 Turku, Finland.
EM pirkko.rautakoski@abo.fi
FU Finnish Cultural Foundation
FX This study was supported by grants from the Finnish Cultural Foundation.
We also thank those with aphasia and their significant others and other
partners who participated in this study, and the Finnish Stroke and
Dysphasia Association.
CR Aftonomos LB, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P951
Booth S, 1999, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V34, P291, DOI 10.1080/136828299247423
Brennan AD, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000958
Brumfitt SM, 1999, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V38, P387, DOI 10.1348/014466599162980
Byng S, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P906, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000128
Christensen R., 1996, ANAL VARIANCE DESIGN
Chwat S., 1981, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P212
CROCKFORD C, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P165
Cruice M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P333, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000707
Cruice M, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P111, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000651
DAVIES P, 1988, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V23, P141
Eadie TL, 2006, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V15, P307, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2006/030)
Elman Roberta J., 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P65, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064009
Elman RJ, 2004, CHALLENGING APHASIA THERAPIES: BROADENING THE DISCOURSE AND EXTENDING THE BOUNDARIES, P130, DOI 10.4324/9780203462706_chapter_8
Elman RJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P411
Engell B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000734
FIELD A, 2003, DISCOVERING STAT SPS
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
GUILFORD AM, 1982, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V63, P601
Guilford J. P., 1978, FUNDAMENTAL STAT PSY
HELMICK JW, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P238
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P513, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249019
HILARI K, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P465
Hilari K, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P86
HIRSCH FM, 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P35
Hoen B, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P681, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249415
Holland Audrey L., 1998, Seminars in Speech and Language, V19, P249, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064048
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
Howard D., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY HIST
Howe TJ, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1015, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000499
Irwin WH, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P823, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000086
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
KLIPPI A, 1994, COMMUNICATIVE UNPUB
KLIPPI A, 1978, TOKEN TESTI UNPUB
Knapp P, 1999, STROKE, V30, P934
KORPIJAAKKOHUUH.AM, 2008, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P99
KORPIJAAKKOHUUH.AM, 2003, HELSINGIN YLIOPISTON, V46
Laakso M., 1997, SELF INITIATED REPAI
Lawson R., 2001, APHASIA THERAPY FILE, P61
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LEHTIHALMES M, 1993, W APHASIA BATT UNPUB
LEMPINEN M, 1986, AFASIATUTKIMUS
Lesser R., 1993, LINGUISTICS APHASIA
Linebaugh C., 1981, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P226
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
Luck AM, 2007, APHASIOLOGY, V21, P208, DOI 10.1080/02687030601065470
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
MANOCHIOPINIG S, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249489
MULLER N, COMMUNICATION DISORD
OXENHAM D, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P477, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248710
Parr S., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P55
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
RAUTAKOSKI P, 2002, PUHE JA KIELI, V22, P63
Ross A, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P427, DOI 10.1080/02687030500532786
Sarno MT, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P665, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249414
SHEWAN CM, 1984, J COMMUN DISORD, V17, P175, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(84)90010-8
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
Sorin-Peters R., 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P565
Stern RA, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P59, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248455
van der Gaag A, 2005, CLIN REHABIL, V19, P372, DOI 10.1191/0269215505cr785oa
VOGEL D, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P237
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
Worrall L, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P923, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000137
WORRALL L, 2000, FCTP FUNCTIONAL COMM
Worrall L, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P911
NR 66
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2008
VL 22
IS 12
BP 1269
EP 1293
DI 10.1080/02687030802374788
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 368GG
UT WOS:000260609000002
ER
PT J
AU Seddoh, SA
AF Seddoh, S. Amebu
TI Conceptualisation of deviations in intonation production in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
DE Aphasia; Brain damage; Intonation; Fundamental frequency (F0) contour;
Autosegmental metrical theory
ID FUNDAMENTAL-FREQUENCY; RIGHT-HEMISPHERE; SPEECH PROSODY; LANGUAGE;
PERCEPTION; PATTERNS; FEATURES; TONE
AB Background: Most studies of intonation disorder in brain-damaged patients assume that normal intonation is made up of a single overall pitch contour that is holistically either linguistic or affective, and processed globally. However, data suggest that intonation may be processed in units smaller than the overall pitch contour, and that its disorder may be attributable to impaired ability to process aspects of those units. Aim: The present study was conducted to determine whether deviations in intonation production in aphasia are attributable to deficit in processing the global pitch (fundamental frequency) contour or components of it. Methods Procedures: Two sentence types of two lengths produced by patients with fluent and nonfluent aphasia, as well as neurologically normal control participants, were evaluated acoustically and perceptually. The acoustic evaluation included measures of declination and identifiable components of the fundamental frequency (F0) contour. Outcomes Results: For all groups, some measures differed according to sentence type whereas others differed according to sentence size. None of the size-sensitive measures differed according to sentence type for any group. However, group differences were exhibited on other measures including declination. The fluent group performed closer to normal compared to the nonfluent group. All groups were perceptually indistinguishable. Conclusion: The acoustic deviations taken with the perceptual data point to a deficit that might be phonetic in nature. The abnormal production of some but not all F0 components by the patients lends support to the hypothesis that intonation is processed in units smaller than its overall F0 contour, and that its disorder in brain-damaged patients may be attributable to deficit in processing aspect(s) of those units.
C1 Univ N Dakota, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Grand Forks, ND 58202 USA.
RP Seddoh, SA (reprint author), Univ N Dakota, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Montgomery Hall Room 110,290 Centennial Dr Stop 8, Grand Forks, ND 58202 USA.
EM seddoh@und.edu
FU NIH (NIDCD) [5R03DC004955-03]
FX Comments and suggestions of an anonymous reviewer on an earlier version
of this paper are gratefully acknowledged. This research was supported
by NIH (NIDCD) grant 5R03DC004955-03.
CR Arvaniti A, 1998, J PHONETICS, V26, P3, DOI 10.1006/jpho.1997.0063
BAUM SR, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P33, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90003-Y
BEHRENS SJ, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P181, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90014-X
Benton A. L., 1974, REVISED VISUAL RETEN
BLONDER LX, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P193, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90061-8
Bolinger D., 1958, WORD, V14, P109
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1987, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V1, P113, DOI 10.3109/02699208708985007
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P269, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50011-7
CANCELLIERE AEB, 1990, BRAIN COGNITION, V13, P133, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(90)90046-Q
COHEN A, 1965, P 5 INT C AC A16 LIE
Collier R., 1990, PERCEPTUAL STUDY INT
COLLIER R, 1975, J ACOUST SOC AM, V58, P249, DOI 10.1121/1.380654
Cooper W. E., 1980, SYNTAX SPEECH
Cooper W. E., 1981, FUNDAMENTAL FREQUENC
Couper-Kuhlen E., 1986, INTRO ENGLISH PROSOD
DANLY M, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P171, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90082-7
DANLY M, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90052-4
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
Enderby P. M., 1983, FRENCHAY DYSARTHRIA
GANDOUR J, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P337, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90105-N
Gandour J, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V84, P318, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00505-9
GANDOUR J, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V35, P201, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90109-5
GARDING E, 1965, STUD LINGUISTICA, V19, P61, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9582.1965.tb00527.x
Gelfer C.E., 1983, VOCAL FOLD PHYSL BIO, P113
HAUSER MD, 1992, J ACOUST SOC AM, V91, P363, DOI 10.1121/1.402779
HOCKING RR, 2003, METHODS APP LINEAR M
Howard D., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY HIST
JASSEM W, 1975, AUDITORY ANAL PERCEP, P523
Kaplan E., 2001, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Ladd D. R., 1983, PROSODY MODELS MEASU, P39
Ladd D. R., 1996, INTONATIONAL PHONOLO
LADD DR, 1983, LANGUAGE, V59, P721, DOI 10.2307/413371
Lehiste I., 1970, SUPRASEGMENTALS
Liberman Mark, 1984, LANGUAGE SOUND STRUC, P157
LIEBERMAN P, 1967, INTONATION PERCEPTIO, V38
MCNEIL MR, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P135, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90106-Q
NAGEL HN, 1994, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V23, P473
OSHAUGHNESSY D, 1979, J PHONETICS, V7, P119
OHALA JJ, 1973, J ACOUST SOC AM, V53, P345, DOI 10.1121/1.1982441
Pierrehumbert J, 1987, PHONOLOGY PHONETICS
ROSE P, 1987, SPEECH COMMUN, V6, P343, DOI 10.1016/0167-6393(87)90009-4
ROSS ED, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P561
RUSSELL EW, 1975, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V43, P800, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.43.6.800
Schatz P, 2005, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V20, P1053, DOI 10.1016/j.acn.2005.06.006
Seddoh SA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P1105, DOI 10.1080/02687030050174656
Seddoh SA, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P683, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000861
Seddoh SA, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V99, P53, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2006.06.036
SEDDOH SAK, 2005, J ACOUST SOC AM, V117, P2569
SEDDOH SAK, 2006, J NEUROLINGUIST, V19, P18
SEDDOH SAK, APHASIOLOGY IN PRESS
SHAPIRO BE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P19, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90118-X
SHAPIRO LP, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P240, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1047
Srinivasan RJ, 2003, LANG SPEECH, V46, P1
STUDDERT.M, 1973, LANG SPEECH, V16, P293
SUNDBERG J, 1979, J PHONETICS, V7, P71
Walker JP, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1155, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000392
WEINTRAUB S, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P742
NR 58
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2008
VL 22
IS 12
BP 1294
EP 1312
DI 10.1080/02687030701640289
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 368GG
UT WOS:000260609000003
ER
PT J
AU Bormann, T
Kulke, F
Blanken, G
AF Bormann, Tobias
Kulke, Florian
Blanken, Gerhard
TI The influence of word frequency on semantic word substitutions in
aphasic naming
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
DE Aphasia; Lexical access; Picture naming; Semantic errors
ID SPEECH PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; ERRORS; MODELS; RECOGNITION;
ACQUISITION; AGE
AB Background: Semantic word substitutions are frequent errors of aphasic speakers when naming a picture. The role of word frequency in the generation of these semantic errors provides an important testing ground for models of lexical access. The discrete two-stage model of Levelt, Roelofs, and Meyer (1999) predicts that frequency should not play a role in semantic errors. In contrast, cascading and interactive models of lexical access allow for an influence of frequency on lexical selection. Aims: To assess the role of word frequency in the generation of semantic substitutions. Methods Procedures: We re-analysed a large corpus of aphasic semantic word substitutions in response to target words from carefully controlled semantic categories. Frequency of these errors was compared to randomly selected pseudo-errors from the same semantic category. Outcomes Results: Errors were more frequent than randomly selected competitors from the same semantic category. Conclusions: The results support interactive or cascading models of lexical access and speak against the discrete two-stage model of lexical access. The data are discussed with regard to models of lexical access and to previous studies that failed to find a frequency effect for aphasic semantic naming errors.
C1 [Bormann, Tobias] Univ Erfurt, Dept Linguist, D-99105 Erfurt, Germany.
RP Bormann, T (reprint author), Univ Erfurt, Dept Linguist, POB 900221, D-99105 Erfurt, Germany.
EM tobias.bormann@uni-erfurt.de
CR Alario FX, 2002, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V17, P299, DOI 10.1080/01690960143000236
Baayen Harald, 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Barry C, 2001, J MEM LANG, V44, P350, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2743
BORMANN T, BRAIN LANGU IN PRESS
Butterworth B., 1989, LEXICAL REPRESENTATI, P108
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P177, DOI 10.1080/026432997381664
Caramazza A, 2001, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V27, P1430, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.27.6.1430
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
DELL GS, 1990, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V5, P313, DOI 10.1080/01690969008407066
Dell GS, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P125, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000320
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Ellis A. W., 2002, READ WRIT, V15, P759
Garrett M., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1, P177
GOODGLASS H, 1976, CORTEX, V12, P145
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
HUMPHREYS GW, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P67, DOI 10.1080/02643298808252927
Jescheniak JD, 2003, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V29, P432, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.29.3.432
JESCHENIAK JD, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P824, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.20.4.824
Jescheniak JD, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P1256, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.5.1256
KITTREDGE A, COGNITIVE N IN PRESS
Kremin H, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P33, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00183-4
Kulke F, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P3, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000070
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WILLEM, 1999, NEUROCOGNITION LANGU, P83
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MANNHAUPT HR, 1984, SPRACHE KOGNIT, V4, P264
MCCLELLAND JL, 1981, PSYCHOL REV, V88, P375, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.88.5.375
Miozzo M, 2003, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V132, P228, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.132.2.228
MORSELLA E, 2002, J EXPT PSYCHOL LEARN, V28, P228
MORTON J, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES
MORTON J, 1969, PSYCHOL REV, V76, P165, DOI 10.1037/h0027366
Navarrete E, 2006, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V59, P1681, DOI 10.1080/17470210600750558
NICKELS L, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P289, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251977
NICKELS L, 1995, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V10, P13, DOI 10.1080/01690969508407086
Roelofs A, 1997, COGNITION, V64, P249, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00027-9
Schroeder A., 2003, NEUROLINGUISTIK, V17, P83
NR 38
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2008
VL 22
IS 12
BP 1313
EP 1320
DI 10.1080/02687030701679436
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 368GG
UT WOS:000260609000004
ER
PT J
AU Ruigendijk, E
Baauw, S
AF Ruigendijk, Esther
Baauw, Sergio
TI Syntactic and pragmatic aspects of determiner and pronoun production in
Dutch agrammatic Broca's aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID ARTICLES; OMISSION; SPEECH; GENDER; TREE
AB Background: Agrammatic aphasic individuals produce a lower than normal number of pronouns and determiners in their spontaneous speech. Interestingly, linguistically these two types of functional categories have some properties in common. In Dutch, the language that was studied, both categories depend on case, both are marked for gender, and both carry pragmatic information. These properties relate to different levels of linguistic processing. Case is a syntactic property, gender is lexically specified for determiners, and semantically for pronouns (in Dutch), and the pragmatic function relates to the distinction between definiteness and indefiniteness; that is, whether something refers to information already introduced in the discourse or to new information respectively.
Aims: The aim of this study was therefore to find out if and how far each of these properties (case, gender, and pragmatic information) contributes to the problems agrammatic speakers have with the production of determiners and pronouns. Methods & Procedures: We analysed spontaneous speech samples of eight Dutch-speaking agrammatic aphasic individuals with regard to the omission and production rates of determiners and pronouns, taking into account the different linguistic properties.
Outcomes & Results: The analyses revealed that the syntactic property of determiners and pronouns, case, contributes most to the agrammatic problems. Gender information seems to be unproblematic. Finally, our aphasic speakers omitted relatively more indefinite determiners than definite determiners. It is not completely clear yet whether this is related to a problem with indefinites. The error analysis shows that pragmatic information as such seems to be unimpaired.
Conclusions: The syntactic aspects of determiners and pronouns play an important role in the problems agrammatic speakers have with these elements. More detailed research may be needed to investigate the distinction between indefiniteness and definiteness in determiners. Our results suggest that the production of determiners and pronouns should always be treated with a focus on their syntactic property: their dependency on case-assigning categories.
C1 Carl von Ossietzky Univ Oldenburg, Fak 3, Inst Fremdsprachemphilologien, D-26111 Oldenburg, Germany.
Univ Utrecht, NL-3508 TC Utrecht, Netherlands.
RP Ruigendijk, E (reprint author), Carl von Ossietzky Univ Oldenburg, Fak 3, Inst Fremdsprachemphilologien, Ammerlander Heestr 114-118, D-26111 Oldenburg, Germany.
EM esther.ruigendijk@uni-oldenburg.de
CR Abney S. P., 1987, THESIS MIT CAMBRIDGE
Avrutin S., 2006, BROCAS REGION
BAAUW S, 2002, P ANN BOSTON U C LAN, V26, P24
Bastiaanse R, 2003, CORTEX, V39, P405, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70256-9
BATES E, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P123, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90149-U
BERNSTEIN J, 2001, HDB CONT SYNTACTIC T
Chomsky N., 1981, LECT GOVT BINDING
DEBLESER R, 2005, STEM SPRAAK TAALPATH, V13, P35
DeBleser R, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P175, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00007-3
DEROO E, 1999, THESIS HOLLAND ACAD
DEUTSCH W, 1985, LINGUISTICS, V23, P793, DOI 10.1515/ling.1985.23.5.793
Friedmann N., 2006, BROCAS REGION, P63
Friedmann N, 2001, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V30, P71, DOI 10.1023/A:1005256224207
Friedmann N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1795
Giusti G., 2002, FUNCTIONAL STRUCTURE, P54
GIUSTI G, 2006, PHASES INTERPRETATIO
Graetz P., 1992, AKENSE AFASIE TEST
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
Haeseryn Walter, 1997, ALGEMENE NEDERLANDSE, V2nd
Havik E, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1093, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000543
Heim I, 1983, MEANING USE INTERPRE
HOFSTEDE BTM, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P278, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1017
KADMON N., 2001, FORMAL PRAGMATICS SE
Mansson AC, 2001, J NEUROLINGUIST, V14, P365, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00024-0
MENN L, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P347, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248936
Ouhalla Jamal, 1993, LINGUISTISCHE BERICH, V143, P3
POSTAL PM, 1966, MODERN STUDIES ENGLI
RUIGENDIJK E, 2002, CASE ASSIGNMENT AGRA, V36
Ruigendijk E, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000310
Ruigendijk E, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P962
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
VANHAERINGEN CB, 1956, ALGEMENE ASPECTEN GR, P27
WULFECK B, 1989, LANG SPEECH, V32, P315
NR 33
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 535
EP 547
DI 10.1080/02687030701191911
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900002
ER
PT J
AU Tissen, A
Weber, S
Grande, M
Gunther, T
AF Tissen, Andrea
Weber, Sandra
Grande, Marion
Guenther, Thomas
TI The "tree-pruning hypothesis" in bilingualism
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID SPEAKING AGRAMMATIC PATIENTS; FUNCTIONAL CATEGORIES; SYNTACTIC TREE;
VERB MOVEMENT; AGREEMENT; TENSE
AB Background: The "tree-pruning hypothesis" (TPH) suggests that syntactic deficits in agrammatic production are highly selective: most patients have impaired tense inflection while their agreement, inflection is preserved. The TPH states that the split-inflection tree is pruned at the tense node, which is why an obvious dissociation in performance exists between tense and agreement.
Aims: This study aims to determine whether the TPH applies to a bilingual individual by examining whether a dissociation in performance exists between agreement and tense inflection in the bilingual speaker's two languages: German and Luxembourgish. We expect the pattern of grammatical impairment to support the validity of the TPH in German and Luxembourgish.
Methods & Procedures: The participant examined in this study, AM, is a pre-onset balanced German-Luxembourgish speaker with Broca's aphasia and moderate agrammatism. We used a verb completion and grammatical assessment task to examine whether a dissociation in performance existed between tense and agreement in both languages.
Outcomes & Results: The results comply with the TPH. The agreement results produced by the participant were significantly better than the tense results in both German and Luxembourgish.
Conclusions: The results show a clear dissociation in each language as predicted by the TPH. This confirms that the TPH can be applied to both German and Luxembourgish.
C1 Zuyd Univ, Sch Speech & Language Pathol, NL-6400 AN Heerlen, Netherlands.
RWTH Aachen Univ Hosp, Aachen, Germany.
RP Gunther, T (reprint author), Zuyd Univ, Sch Speech & Language Pathol, POB 550, NL-6400 AN Heerlen, Netherlands.
EM gunther@hszuyd.nl
CR Alexiadou A, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V96, P207, DOI 10.1016/j.bandi.2005.04.006
Bastiaanse R, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P8
Benedet MJ, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P309, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70758-5
Burchert F, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V94, P188, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.12.006
Chomsky N., 1981, LECT GOVT BINDING
Chomsky Noam, 1991, PRINCIPLES PARAMETER, V20, P417
Chomsky Noam, 1992, MINIMALIST PROGRAM L
Friedmann N., 2006, BROCAS REGION, P63
Friedmann N, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V96, P151, DOI 10.1016/j.bandi.2005.06.002
Friedmann N, 2001, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V30, P71, DOI 10.1023/A:1005256224207
Friedmann N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1795
Friedmann N, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P160, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2587
GAVARRO A, 2004, TENSE AGREEMENT IMPA
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
HAGIWARA H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1041
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Lebrun Y., 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P11
Milman LH, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P126, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.065
Nanousi Y, 2006, J NEUROLINGUIST, V19, P209, DOI 10.1016/j.jneuroling.2005.11.003
NILIPOUR R, 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P123
Paradis M., 1987, ASSESSMENT BILINGUAL
Paradis Michel, 2004, NEUROLINGUISTIC THEO
POLLOCK JY, 1989, LINGUIST INQ, V20, P365
Rizzi L., 1990, RELATIVIZED MINIMALI
Shapiro L., 2000, LANGUAGE BRAIN REPRE, P73, DOI 10.1016/B978-012304260-6/50005-0
Wenzlaff M, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P57, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00298-0
NR 26
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 548
EP 557
DI 10.1080/02687030701191952
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900003
ER
PT J
AU Reilly, J
Cross, K
Trolani, V
Grossman, M
AF Reilly, Jamie
Cross, Katy
Trolani, Vanessa
Grossman, Murray
TI Single-word semantic judgements in semantic dementia: Do phonology and
grammatical class count?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; SURFACE DYSLEXIA; REPETITION; APHASIA; IMAGEABILITY;
CONCRETENESS; NOUNS; BRAIN; NORMS; MODEL
AB Background. Listeners make active use of phonological regularities such as word length to facilitate higher-level syntactic and semantic processing. For example, nouns are longer than verbs, and abstract words are longer than concrete words. Patients with semantic dementia (SD) experience conceptual loss with preserved syntax and phonology. The extent to which patients with SD exploit phonological regularities to support language processing remains unclear.
Aims: We examined the ability of patients with SD (1) to perceive subtle acoustic-phonetic distinctions in English, and (2) to bootstrap their accuracy of lexical-semantic and syntactic judgements from regularities in the phonological forms of English nouns and verbs.
Methods and Procedures: Four patients with SD made minimal pair judgements (same/different) for auditorily presented stimuli selectively varied by voice, place, or manner of the initial consonant (e.g., pa -ba). In Experiment 2 patients made forced-choice semantic judgements (abstract or concrete) for single words varied by (1) concreteness (abstract or concrete); (2) grammatical class (noun or verb); and (3) word length (one- or three-syllable words).
Outcomes and Results: The most semantically impaired patients paradoxically showed the highest accuracy of minimal pair phonologic discrimination. Judgements of word concreteness were less accurate for verbs than nouns. Among verbs, accuracy was worse for concrete than abstract items (e.g., eat was worse than think). Patients were more likely to misclassify longer concrete words (e.g., professor) as abstract, demonstrating sensitivity to an underlying phonologically mediated semantic property in English.
Conclusions: Single-word semantic judgements were sensitive to both grammatical class and phonological properties of the words being evaluated. Theoretical and clinical implications are addressed in the context of an anatomically constrained model of SD that assumes increasing reliance on phonology as lexical-semantic knowledge degrades.
C1 Univ Penn, Philadelphia, PA 19104 USA.
RP Reilly, J (reprint author), Hosp Univ Penn, Dept Neurol, Sch Med, 3 Gates Bldg,3400 Spruce St, Philadelphia, PA 19104 USA.
EM reillyjj@mail.med.upenn.edu
CR Barca L, 2002, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V34, P424, DOI 10.3758/BF03195471
Binder JR, 2005, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V17, P905, DOI 10.1162/0898929054021102
Bird H, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P17, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2293
BREEDIN SD, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P617, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251987
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
COLTHEART M, 1983, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V35, P469
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT REV, V12, P186
Friederici AD, 2000, CEREB CORTEX, V10, P698, DOI 10.1093/cercor/10.7.698
GATHERCOLE SE, 1995, MEM COGNITION, V23, P83, DOI 10.3758/BF03210559
Gonnerman LM, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P254, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1752
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Grossman M, 2004, NEUROCASE, V10, P3, DOI 10.1080/13554790490960440
Grossman M, 2002, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V8, P566, DOI 10.1017/S1355617701020318
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Jefferies E, 2004, NEUROCASE, V10, P290, DOI 10.1080/13554790490507623
KALINYAKFLISZAR M, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V99, P178, DOI DOI 10.1016/j.band1.2006.06.098
Kean J., 2007, COGNITIVE SCI, V31, P1, DOI 10.1080/03640210709336988
Kelly MH, 2004, J MEM LANG, V50, P231, DOI 10.1016/j.jml.2003.12.002
KERR NH, 1991, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V23, P461, DOI 10.3758/BF03209988
Knott R, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P1165, DOI 10.1080/026432997381303
Kucera H., 1982, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
Kwok S, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V99, P145, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2006.06.082
Ralph MAL, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V13, P341, DOI 10.1162/08989290151137395
Langenmayr A, 2001, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V93, P843, DOI 10.2466/PMS.93.7.843-850
Luce PA, 1998, EAR HEARING, V19, P1, DOI 10.1097/00003446-199802000-00001
MARTIN N, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P254, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90014-8
Neary D, 1998, NEUROLOGY, V51, P1546
Paivio A, 1985, MENTAL REPRESENTATIO
Reilly J., 2006, BRAIN LANG, V99, P218
Reilly J, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P329, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000787
Saffran E. M., 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL I
Saffran JR, 1996, SCIENCE, V274, P1926, DOI 10.1126/science.274.5294.1926
Weenink D., 1996, 132 U AMST I PHON SC
Yi H., 2007, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V21, P1
NR 34
TC 13
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 558
EP 569
DI 10.1080/02687030701191986
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900004
ER
PT J
AU Friedmann, N
Gvion, A
AF Friedmann, Naama
Gvion, Aviah
TI As far as individuals with conduction aphasia understood these sentences
were ungrammatical: Garden path in conduction aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; VERBAL WORKING-MEMORY; COMPREHENSION; DEFICIT;
REACTIVATION; INFORMATION; CAPACITY
AB Background: Recent studies have indicated that working memory is not a unitary resource and that different types of working memory are used for different types of linguistic processing: syntactic, semantic, and phonological. Phonological working memory was found to support the comprehension of sentences that require re-access to the word-form of a word that appeared earlier in the sentence.
Aims: This study explored the relation between phonological working memory and sentence comprehension by testing the comprehension of garden path sentences in individuals with conduction aphasia who have very limited phonological working memory. Our prediction was that if phonological working memory limitation hampers word-form reactivation, only the comprehension of garden paths that require wordform reactivation will be impaired, whereas garden paths that require only structural reanalysis will be better preserved.
Methods & Procedures: Five individuals with conduction aphasia and 15 matched controls participated in working memory tests and a garden path comprehension test. The phonological working memory assessment included a battery of 10 tests, which showed that four of the individuals, who had input conduction aphasia, had very limited phonological working memory, and one individual, with output conduction aphasia, had unimpaired working memory. The comprehension study included 60 garden path sentences of three types: structural garden paths, which require only structural reanalysis, lexical garden paths, which require lexical re-access in addition to structural reanalysis, and optional-complement garden paths, which require re-access to the lexical-syntactic frame of the verb in addition to the structural reanalysis.
Outcomes & Results: The main result was that the individuals with input conduction aphasia showed different degrees of impairment in different types of garden path sentences. The lexical garden paths were exceptionally hard for them, with a mere 10% correct, and significantly more difficult than the structural garden paths. The individual with output conduction aphasia whose working memory was intact comprehended the lexical garden paths similarly to the normal controls.
Conclusions: These findings indicate that phonological working memory impairment only affects the comprehension of sentences that require phonological, word-form re-access. The type of sentence and the type of processing it requires should be taken into account when trying to predict the effect of working memory limitation on a patient's ability to understand sentences. Whereas individuals with input conduction aphasia can understand complex syntactic structures well, they have considerable difficulties understanding sentences that also require re-access to a word-form.
C1 Tel Aviv Univ, Sch Educ, Language & Brain Lab, IL-69978 Tel Aviv, Israel.
Reuth Med Ctr, Tel Aviv, Israel.
RP Friedmann, N (reprint author), Tel Aviv Univ, Sch Educ, Language & Brain Lab, IL-69978 Tel Aviv, Israel.
EM naamafr@post.tau.ac.il
RI Friedmann, Naama/M-2688-2013
CR BUTTERWORTH B, 1986, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V38, P705
Butterworth B., 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL I, P187, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511665547.011
Caplan D, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P77
Caspari I, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P205, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0970
Christianson K, 2001, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V42, P368, DOI 10.1006/cogp.2001.0752
Crawford JR, 1998, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V12, P482, DOI 10.1076/clin.12.4.482.7241
DANEMAN M, 1980, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V19, P450, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(80)90312-6
DeDe G, 2004, PSYCHOL AGING, V19, P601, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.19.4.601
FERREIRA F, 1991, J MEM LANG, V30, P725, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(91)90034-H
Fodor Janet D., 1998, REANALYSIS SENTENCE
Friedmann N, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P288, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/023)
Friedmann N, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V86, P23, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00530-8
Friedmann N., 2002, FRIGVI FRIEDMANN GVI
Gil M., 2001, HEBREW VERSION PALPA
GVION A, 2007, UNPUB SENTENCE COMPR
Haarmann HJ, 2003, J MEM LANG, V48, P320, DOI 10.1016/S0749-596X(02)00506-5
Hanten G, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P335, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2731
Hanten G, 2001, BRAIN COGNITION, V45, P164, DOI 10.1006/brcg.2000.1236
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Love T, 1996, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V25, P5, DOI 10.1007/BF01708418
MACDONALD MC, 1992, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V24, P56, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(92)90003-K
MARGALIT S, 2005, LANGUAGE BRAIN DEV, V4, P33
Martin R., 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V8, P506, DOI [10.1037/0894-4105.8.4.506, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.8.4.506]
MARTIN RC, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P83, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1005
MARTIN RC, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90099-3
MARTIN RC, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P159, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90122-2
Martin RC, 2003, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V54, P55, DOI 10.1146/annurev.psych.54.101601.145201
Martin RC, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P122, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.063
Martin RC, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P76, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00300-6
McElree B, 2000, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V29, P111, DOI 10.1023/A:1005184709695
MILNE R, 1980, P COLING 80 C 8 INT
NICOL J, 1989, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V18, P5, DOI 10.1007/BF01069043
ONIFER W, 1981, MEM COGNITION, V9, P225, DOI 10.3758/BF03196957
Pritchett B. L., 1992, GRAMMATICAL COMPETEN
Romani C, 1999, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V128, P56, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.128.1.56
SHAPIRO LP, 1987, COGNITION, V27, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(87)80010-0
SHAPIRO LP, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P423, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1053
Smith E. E., 2000, LANGUAGE BRAIN REPRE, P123, DOI 10.1016/B978-012304260-6/50008-6
Soroker N., 1997, HEBREW W APHASIA BAT
Swinney D, 1989, J Cogn Neurosci, V1, P25, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1989.1.1.25
SWINNEY D, 1988, UNPUB TEMPORAL COUSE
SWINNEY DA, 1979, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V18, P645, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(79)90355-4
Swinney D. A., 2000, LANGUAGE BRAIN REPRE, P273, DOI 10.1016/B978-012304260-6/50016-5
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
WATERS G, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P81, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253368
Waters GS, 1996, MEM COGNITION, V24, P342, DOI 10.3758/BF03213298
Willis CS, 2001, MEMORY, V9, P349
Wright HH, 2005, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V14, P107, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2005/012)
ZURIF E, 1995, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V24, P165, DOI 10.1007/BF02145354
NR 50
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 570
EP 586
DI 10.1080/02687030701192000
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900005
ER
PT J
AU Corsten, S
Mende, M
Cholewa, J
Huber, W
AF Corsten, Sabine
Mende, Markus
Cholewa, Juergen
Huber, Walter
TI Treatment of input and output phonology in aphasia: A single case study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID LEXICAL ACCESS; SELECTIVE IMPAIRMENT; WORD PRODUCTION; SPEECH; MODEL;
RECOGNITION; REPETITION; SPEAKERS; ERRORS; BUFFER
AB Background: Based on models of speech perception and production, different stages in phonological processing can be distinguished: phonetic, sublexical, and lexical levels of decoding and encoding respectively. In theory they can be selectively impaired. To address the specific level of phonological processing disruption we developed training material that entailed practice demands for each level of processing.
Aims: This paper aims to demonstrate the utility of this material-based approach by presenting the results of PS, a 52-year-old man with chronic conduction aphasia who showed both decoding and encoding difficulties at sublexical levels.
Methods & Procedures: The main component of the treatment programme was practice of minimal phonemic contrasts. The training material consisted of monosyllabic stimuli that were systematically varied for certain linguistic criteria, such as phonemic contrast position (onset/coda), lexicality (words/pseudowords), and phonetic complexity (increasing/unspecific sonority). The impact of these factors was studied in an alternating-treatments design employing control tests to assess baseline, outcome, and maintenance. The treatment lasted for 6 weeks during which phonological processing was practised under six treatment conditions. All exercises were computer assisted, and each session consisted of three main tasks: discrimination, identification, and reproduction.
Outcomes & Results: As predicted, the participant showed improvement during therapy when practising those items that called specifically for sublexical phonological processing.
Conclusions: This study demonstrates that an impairment-specific and material-based therapy approach is promising for the treatment of impaired sublexical phonological processing. Furthermore, the results suggest common mechanisms of input and output phonology.
C1 Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, Dept Neurol, Sect Neurolinguist, D-52074 Aachen, Germany.
Coll Educ, Heidelberg, Germany.
RP Huber, W (reprint author), Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, Dept Neurol, Sect Neurolinguist, Pauwelsstr 30, D-52074 Aachen, Germany.
EM huber@neuroling.rwth-aachen.de
CR Abel S, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P152, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.079
Allport D. A, 1984, COGNITION MOTOR PROC, P209
Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
BARLOW DH, 1979, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V12, P199, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1979.12-199
Best W, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P443, DOI 10.1080/026432996381971
BLANKEN G, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P534, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90136-5
Blanken GDR, 1999, WORTPRODUKTIONSPRUFU
BROWN AS, 1991, PSYCHOL BULL, V109, P204, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.109.2.204
CAPLAN D, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P99, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252671
CARAMAZZA A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V18, P128, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90011-1
Clements G. N., 1990, PAPERS LAB PHONOLOGY, P283
Connine CM, 1997, J MEM LANG, V37, P463, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1997.2535
Corsten S, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V95, P176, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2005.07.095
CORSTEN S, 2004, SPRACHHEILARBEIT, V49, P284
CUTLER ANNE, 1999, NEUROCOGNITION LANGU, P123
Dell G. S., 2003, PHONETICS PHONOLOGY, P9
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Gow DW, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P386
Hanley JR, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P147, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000339
Harting C., 2000, WECHSLER GEDACHTNIS
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Huber W., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P55
JOANETTE Y, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P30, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90107-8
Kohn S. E., 1992, CONDUCTION APHASIA
Levelt W. J., 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P38
Levelt WJM, 2001, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V98, P13464, DOI 10.1073/pnas.231459498
Maas E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P609, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000266
MarslenWilson W, 1996, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V22, P1376
Martin N, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P107, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000447
Martin N, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P154, DOI 10.1080/02687030500472520
Martin RC, 1999, J MEM LANG, V41, P3, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1999.2637
McClelland J. L., 1986, PARALLEL DISTRIBUTED, P58
MICELI G, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P159, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90117-0
NEWMAN JE, 1978, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V13, P359
NICKELS L, 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO, P115
NICKELS L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P209
NORRIS D, 1994, COGNITION, V52, P189, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90043-4
ODELL K, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P345
Ravizza SM, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P95, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2435
ROMANI C, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P131, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409382
Schiller N. O., 2003, PHONETICS PHONOLOGY
Shallice T, 2000, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V17, P517, DOI 10.1080/02643290050110638
Slowiaczek LM, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P530, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2710
Vitevitch MS, 2002, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V28, P735, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.28.4.735
Wilshire CE, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1059
Ziegler Wolfram, 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P231, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35798
NR 47
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 587
EP 603
DI 10.1080/02687030701192034
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900006
ER
PT J
AU Dickey, MW
Thompson, CK
AF Dickey, Michael Walsh
Thompson, Cynthia K.
TI The relation between syntactic and morphological recovery in agrammatic
aphasia: A case study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID SENTENCE PRODUCTION; FUNCTIONAL CATEGORIES; BROCAS APHASIA; COMPLEXITY;
LANGUAGE; VERBS; TREE
AB Background: Production of grammatical morphology is typically impaired in agrammatic aphasic individuals, as is their capacity to produce the syntactic structure responsible for licensing that morphology. Whether these two impairments are causally related has been an issue of long-standing debate. If morphological deficits are a side-effect of underlying syntactic ones, as has been claimed (Friedmann & Groudzinsky, 1997; Izvorski & Ullman, 1999), therapy that improves the syntactic deficit should remediate the morphological deficit as well. This paper reports a case study of one individual with such co-occurring impairments and describes their recovery in response to linguistically motivated treatment targeting his syntactic deficits.
Methods & Procedures: MD is a 56-year-old male diagnosed with non-fluent Broca's aphasia subsequent to a left-hemisphere CVA, with limited capacity to produce syntactically complex utterances and grammatical morphology. He was enrolled in therapy using Treatment of Underlying Forms (TUF; Thompson & Shapiro, 2005), targeting production of sentences involving Wh-movement (object relative clauses). MD participated in twice-weekly treatment sessions for approximately 2 months, with daily probes assessing his production of treated and untreated sentence types. In addition, probes assessing his grammatical morphology and sentence production were administered pre- and post-treatment.
Outcomes & Results: Pre-treatment scores in tests of grammatical morphology and sentence production indicated deficits in both domains. During treatment, MD successfully acquired production of a variety of sentences with Wh-movement, although this did not generalise to sentences involving a grammatically distinct movement operation (NP-movement). Post-treatment scores also indicated a lack of improvement in production of grammatical morphology.
Conclusions: The dissociation between MD's morphological and syntactic recovery indicates that the recovery of syntactic and morphological processes in aphasia may occur independently in some individuals. The result would not be predicted by approaches in which morphological and syntactic impairments are strongly and causally related in aphasia, such as the tree-pruning hypothesis (Friedmann, 2001; Friedmann & Grodzinsky, 1997). Further, these results reinforce the conclusion that aphasia treatment can lead to generalisation, but only to linguistic material that is in a subset relation to trained structures (Thompson, Shapiro, Kiran, & Sobeeks, 2003).
C1 Northwestern Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Evanston, IL 60208 USA.
RP Dickey, MW (reprint author), Northwestern Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 2240 Campus Dr, Evanston, IL 60208 USA.
EM m-dickey@northwestern.edu
CR Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
Bastiaanse R, 2005, J NEUROLINGUIST, V18, P57, DOI 10.1016/j.jneuroling.2004.11.006
ECKMAN FR, 1988, APPL LINGUIST, V9, P1, DOI 10.1093/applin/9.1.1
Friedmann N, 2001, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V30, P71, DOI 10.1023/A:1005256224207
Friedmann N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1795
Gahl S, 2003, BRAIN COGNITION, V53, P223, DOI 10.1016/S0278-2626(03)00114-3
HAGIWARA H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1041
Izvorski R, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P288
KEAN ML, 1977, COGNITION, V5, P9, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(77)90015-4
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Lee M, 2004, J NEUROLINGUIST, V17, P315, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(03)00062-9
Menn L., 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA
Milman LH, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P126, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.065
PERLMUTTER DAVID, 1978, BERKELEY LINGUISTICS, V4, P157
Rochon E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P193, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2285
THOMPSON CK, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V99, P69, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2006.06.049
THOMPSON CK, 2005, UNPUB NW ASSESSMENT
THOMPSON CK, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P201, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1045
Thompson CK, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P228
Thompson CK, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P591, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/047)
Thompson CK, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, p[605, 612]
Thompson CK, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P151, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(02)00014-3
Thompson CK, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P1021, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000227
NR 23
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 604
EP 616
DI 10.1080/02687030701192059
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900007
ER
PT J
AU Lallini, N
Miller, N
Howard, D
AF Lallini, Nicole
Miller, Nick
Howard, David
TI Lexical influences on single word repetition in acquired spoken output
impairment: A cross language comparison
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID NEIGHBORHOOD ACTIVATION; SYLLABLE FREQUENCY; SPEECH PRODUCTION; APHASIA;
PHONOTACTICS; DENSITY; WORDLIKENESS; RECOGNITION; PERCEPTION; APRAXIA
AB Background: Among the many factors that may affect speech production, phonological neighbourhood density (ND) and phonotactic probability (PROB) have displayed effects on speech and language performance in healthy speakers. What is not clear is if they show an effect in impaired speech output after stroke and if they do, whether this effect is facilitatory or inhibitory.
Aims: To determine whether ND and/or PROB play a role in speech production accuracy in acquired output impairment after stroke. To compare the performance of English vs German speakers on a matched set of words in order to tease out language-specific and language-independent factors affecting impaired speech output.
Methods & Procedures: Seven English and seven German native speakers with acquired output impairment after stroke repeated in their respective languages 509 real words that are (near) homophones across German and English (e.g., leader-Lieder; vine-Wein). Responses were transcribed phonetically and scored as correct or incorrect.
Results & Outcomes: There was a small correlation between accuracy on near-homophones between English and German speakers (r =.201; p <.001). Correlating accuracy for speakers combined across both languages with language-independent factors (i.e., number of phonemes, syllables, clusters) showed significant independent effects of number of phonemes and clusters in the target, but multiple regressions did not show an effect of number of syllables. Within-language correspondence was greater than between-language correspondence (9.4% vs 4%; p <.00001). Correlating differences in accuracy in English/German with differences in language-specific factors (i.e., word and syllable frequency, PROB, ND) multiple regression displayed a significant independent effect of the target's word frequency but not of the target's ND, PROB, or syllable frequency.
Conclusions: The small but significant correlation between accuracy on (near) homophones for English and German speakers suggests there are language-independent determinants of production accuracy, whereas greater within-language correspondence indicates language-specific determinants of performance. Only word frequency appears to have a significant (facilitatory) effect on response accuracy. Neither ND nor PROB had a significant effect on response accuracy in this study. The results are discussed in light of theoretical and methodological issues within the study.
C1 Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
RP Lallini, N (reprint author), Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, King George VI Bldg, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
EM Nicole.Lallini@ncl.ac.uk
CR Aichert I, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P148, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00296-7
Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Bailey TM, 2001, J MEM LANG, V44, P568, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2756
Ballard KJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P969
Boyczuk JP, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P46, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2049
DELL GS, 2002, PHONETICS PHONOLOGY
Frisch SA, 2000, J MEM LANG, V42, P481, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1999.2692
Gordon JK, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V82, P113, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00001-9
HUBER W, 1983, AACHENER APHAISE TES
Laganaro M, 2005, J NEUROLINGUIST, V18, P221, DOI 10.1016/j.jneuroling.2004.12.001
LEVELT WJM, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P239, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90030-2
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
Luce P. A., 1986, 6 IND U PSYCH DEP SP
Luce PA, 2001, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V16, P565
Luce PA, 1998, EAR HEARING, V19, P1, DOI 10.1097/00003446-199802000-00001
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MCNEIL MR, 2001, P 4 INT SPEECH MOT C, P337
Miller N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P683
Miller Nick, 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P223, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35797
Munson B, 2004, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V47, P1048, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2004/078)
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
Nickels L, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P57, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000122
STEMBERGER JP, 1991, J MEM LANG, V30, P161, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(91)90002-2
Vitevitch MS, 1999, J MEM LANG, V40, P374, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1998.2618
Vitevitch MS, 1998, PSYCHOL SCI, V9, P325, DOI 10.1111/1467-9280.00064
Ziegler Wolfram, 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P231, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35798
NR 26
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 617
EP 631
DI 10.1080/02687030701192067
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900008
ER
PT J
AU Wambaugh, JL
Wright, S
AF Wambaugh, Julie L.
Wright, Sandra
TI Improved effects of word-retrieval treatments subsequent to addition of
the orthographic form
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID APHASIA
AB Background: The participant, an individual with moderate-severe Wernicke's aphasia, had not benefited from two word-retrieval cueing treatments in a previous investigation. The participant insisted that her performance would have been improved if the written word had been provided as part of the cueing process.
Aims: The purpose of this investigation was to examine the effects of adding the orthographic form of targeted action names to a semantic cueing treatment (SCT) and a phonologic cueing treatment (PCT).
Methods & Procedures: The participant received SCT and PCT applied to the retrieval of action names. The treatments both provided the written word form paired with the pictured action in conjunction with cueing hierarchies. Two, sequential multiple baseline designs across behaviours were employed to examine the acquisition and response generalisation effects of treatment.
Outcomes & Results: Improved accuracy of action naming was found for both treatments. Gains were limited to trained items; no changes were observed in naming of untrained actions.
Conclusions: It appeared that the participant utilised the orthographic word form to develop associations between the visual object recognition system and the orthographic input lexicon, thus facilitating access to the phonological output lexicon.
C1 Univ Utah, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, Salt Lake City, UT USA.
RP Wambaugh, JL (reprint author), 151 A Foothill Blvd, Salt Lake City, UT 84148 USA.
EM julie.wambaugh@health.utah.edu
CR Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
GERMAN D, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENTLADUL
Herbert R, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P7
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1047, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000618
Porch B., 2001, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V2
Raven J., 1998, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Wambaugh J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P979, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000471
WAMBAUGH JL, 2007, UNPUB EFFECTS CUEING
NR 13
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 632
EP 642
DI 10.1080/02687030701192133
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900009
ER
PT J
AU Gordon, JK
AF Gordon, Jean K.
TI A contextual approach to facilitating word retrieval in agrammatic
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID VERB RETRIEVAL; IMPLICIT; DEFICITS; SPEECH; ADULTS; NOUNS
AB Background: Although virtually all individuals with aphasia demonstrate problems with word retrieval, this symptom might arise for different reasons in individuals with different types of aphasia. A trade-off of dependence on semantic and syntactic information is hypothesised to underlie dissociations in word retrieval shown by fluent anomic and non-fluent agrammatic speakers. This division of labour predicts that strengthening semantic input will improve word retrieval for those with anomic aphasia, whereas strengthening syntactic input through contextual cues will improve word retrieval for those with agrammatic aphasia.
Aims: To explore the outcome of a new treatment approach that proposes to improve word retrieval in individuals with agrammatic aphasia by implicitly strengthening the links between target words and associated words which co-occur in a connected speech context.
Methods & Procedures: The outcomes of two therapy approaches were examined in two participants with agrammatic aphasia. One therapy approach focused on explicitly training semantic features of target words; the other, more novel, approach focused on implicitly strengthening contextual associations through story telling and retelling. It was predicted that the latter approach would result in greater benefits for the two agrammatic participants.
Outcomes & Results: Although both therapy approaches appeared to be effective, the predicted advantage of the contextually based approach was not found. The evolution of the error patterns throughout the treatment was examined to help understand the mechanisms underlying the improvements shown for each participant.
Conclusions: A novel treatment involving training words in a story context was shown to result in improved word retrieval for two participants with agrammatic aphasia. The merits of the approach are discussed, relative to more traditional explicit word retrieval therapy approaches.
C1 Univ Iowa, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
RP Gordon, JK (reprint author), Univ Iowa, 125 B,WJSHC,250 Hawkins Dr, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
EM jean-k-gordon@uiowa.edu
CR Barde LHF, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V97, P266, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2005.11.002
Bastiaanse R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249463
Bird H, 2002, J NEUROLINGUIST, V15, P209, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00031-8
Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P94
Breedin SD, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1923
Conley A, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P203, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000617
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
Druks J, 2002, J NEUROLINGUIST, V15, P289, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00029-X
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Goodglass H., 2001, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V3rd
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Gordon JK, 2003, COGNITIVE SCI, V27, P1
Howard JH, 1997, PSYCHOL AGING, V12, P634, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.12.4.634
Jakobson R., 1971, FUNDAMENTALS LANGUAG
Kim M, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00147-0
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
Midford R, 2005, AGING NEUROPSYCHOL C, V12, P359, DOI 10.1080/13825580500246894
Olness GS, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P175, DOI 10.1080/02687030500472710
Pashek GV, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P261, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000573
Roach A., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P121
Rossion B, 2004, PERCEPTION, V33, P217, DOI 10.1068/p5117
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
Schwartz MF, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P263, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000187
WILLIAMS SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P92, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90007-4
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 25
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 643
EP 657
DI 10.1080/02687030701192141
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900010
ER
PT J
AU van der Merwe, A
AF van der Merwe, Anita
TI Self-correction in apraxia of speech: The effect of treatment
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
AB Background. Overt attempts at self-correction of speech errors reflect conscious monitoring of speech output. The ability to monitor speech reveals something about the dynamics of motor control. Speakers with apraxia of speech (AOS) attempt to self-correct speech, but systematic analyses of self-correction in AOS have rarely been done.
Aims: The aims of the study were to determine the effect of treatment on the number of overt attempted self-corrections during the course of treatment, on the number of overt attempted self-corrections as a percentage of the total number of incorrect productions, and on successful self-corrections as a percentage of the total number of self-corrections.
Methods & Procedures: One speaker with AOS was treated for a period of 18 months. Self-corrections were noted during three repetitions of 110 words and 110 nonwords. Three pre-treatment baseline probes and four subsequent probes, spanning the treatment period, were performed.
Outcomes & Results: The number of attempted self-corrections decreased and the percentage of successful self-corrections increased during treatment. However, attempted self-corrections as a percentage of the total number of incorrect productions remained fairly stable during treatment.
Conclusions: The results indicate that success of overt self-corrections improved during treatment. However, the almost unchanged number of self-corrections as a percentage of the total number of incorrect productions suggests that the process of internal predictive control remained dysfunctional. The inadvertent occurrence of speech errors points towards a loss or dysfunction of volitional control of speech production. Mental practice as a complementary treatment technique may need to be considered. A continuum of volitional control of speech is presented to explain AOS.
C1 Univ Pretoria, Dept Commun Pathol, ZA-0002 Pretoria, South Africa.
RP van der Merwe, A (reprint author), Univ Pretoria, Dept Commun Pathol, ZA-0002 Pretoria, South Africa.
EM anita.vandermerwe@up.ac.za
CR Baars B., 1992, EXPT SLIPS HUMAN ERR, P3
DEAL JL, 1972, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V15, P639
Duffy J.R, 2005, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
KAWATO M, 1992, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V15, P445, DOI 10.1016/0166-2236(92)90008-V
KEELE SW, 1982, HUMAN MOTOR BEHAV IN, P161
Kelso J. A. S., 1982, HUMAN MOTOR BEHAV IN, P21
LEVELT WJ, 1995, SPEAKING INTENTION A
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS
Oomen CCE, 2001, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V30, P163, DOI 10.1023/A:1010377828778
Schmidt RA, 1999, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
Van der Merwe A., 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS
van der Merwe A, 1988, S Afr J Commun Disord, V35, P45
VANDERMERWE A, 1998, 9 BIENN C MOT SPEECH
VANDERMERWE A, 1998, 8 INT APH REH C PIL
VANDERMERWE A, 2006, 5 INT C SPEECH MOT C, V14, P72
VANDERMERWE A, 1985, TREATMENT PROGRAM DE
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
NR 17
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 658
EP 669
DI 10.1080/02687030701192174
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900011
ER
PT J
AU Lorenz, A
Nickels, L
AF Lorenz, Antje
Nickels, Lyndsey
TI Orthographic cueing in anomic aphasia: How does it work?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID RETRIEVAL; FACILITATION; THERAPY
AB Background: Both orthographic and phonological information from the target word can be appropriate cues in anomia treatment. Furthermore, both types of cues are used very frequently in clinical practice, although their underlying mechanisms of effectiveness and stability are still a matter of debate (e.g., Basso, Marangolo, Piras, & Galluzzi, 2001; Best, Herbert, Hickin, Osborne, & Howard, 2002; Howard & Harding, 1998). Ahus: The aim of the study was to examine the mechanisms by which orthographic cues are effective in detail. The study addresses two questions. First, what is the relationship between sublexical transcoding ability and the effectiveness of orthographic cues? And second, what is the relationship between effectiveness of orthographic cues and effectiveness of phonological cues?
Methods & Procedures: Three people with chronic aphasia and moderate to severe anomia participated in facilitation of spoken naming, using either the initial phoneme or initial letter of the target word. Both immediate and delayed effects were assessed over six facilitation sessions. Orthographic and phonological cue effects were investigated with regard to regularity of orthographic-phonological conversion (OPC) of the target's initial letter, and with regard to sub-lexical and lexical reading and repetition in the participants using a multiple single-case design (cf. Howard, 2003).
Outcomes & Results: In one participant both phonological and orthographic cues produced similar effects. In the other two participants, orthographic cueing effects were present in the absence of phonological cueing effects. With regard to regularity of the initial letter-phoneme conversion in the orthographic condition, a similar pattern overall was present for regular, ambiguous, and irregular target words, e.g., initial letter cues seemed to be similarly effective in words such as KNIFE (irregular OPC of initial letter) as in words such as KING or DOLL.
Conclusions: Initial letter cues are appropriate cues for the effective treatment of anomia as they may produce strong and long-lasting effects. In contrast to earlier predictions (e.g., Bruce & Howard, 1988), initial letter cues may be effective even in participants where the initial phoneme cue remains totally ineffective. There are likely to be various mechanisms of effectiveness underpinning orthographic cue effects: a sub-lexical mechanism and a lexical mechanism of effectiveness.
C1 Univ Potsdam, Dept Linguist, D-14476 Golm, Germany.
Macquarie Univ, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Lorenz, A (reprint author), Univ Potsdam, Dept Linguist, Karl Liebknecht Str 24-25, D-14476 Golm, Germany.
EM lorenz@ling.uni-potsdam.de
CR Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Bachy-Langedock N, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P211
Basso A, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P45, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2422
Bastiaanse R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P363, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248417
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
BRUCE C, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P253, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90078-4
Hickin J, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P981, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000509
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Howard D., 2003, SCI APHASIA THERAPY, P245, DOI 10.1016/B978-008044073-6/50017-1
Howard D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249540
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
LORENZ A, 2004, THESIS U POTSDAM
Monsell S., 1987, LANGUAGE PERCEPTION, P273
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
PATTERSON KE, 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P76
Wambaugh JL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P933
ZIERDT A, 1998, UNIVERSAL DATA ACQUI
NR 20
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 670
EP 686
DI 10.1080/02687030701192182
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900012
ER
PT J
AU Bowes, K
Martin, N
AF Bowes, Kelly
Martin, Nadine
TI Longitudinal study of reading and writing rehabilitation using a
bigraph-biphone correspondence approach
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID PHONOLOGICAL ALEXIA; DEEP ALEXIA; IMPAIRMENTS; CONTINUUM
AB Background: Treatments for sound-blending ability in phonological dyslexia that train single grapheme-phoneme correspondences have had mixed success. A more recent approach to re-establishing sound-blending abilities is to train correspondences of bigraph-biphone units (CV + VC = CVC) (Berndt, Haendiges, Mitchum & Wayland, 1996; Friedman & Lott, 2002). This approach has proved beneficial thus far, although the reasons for its success are not yet fully understood.
Aims: The purpose of this longitudinal investigation was to use the bigraph-biphone segment-blending approach to improve both reading and writing abilities in an individual with phonological dyslexia/dysgraphia. Re-establishing this ability laid the foundation for continued treatment with longer words and phrases.
Methods & Procedures: A case study design combining reading and writing treatment was used in three treatment protocols. Initially, treatment focused on improving the participant's awareness of bigraph-biphone correspondences and sound-blending abilities for one-syllable nonwords. The successful completion of this protocol was followed by two treatments to extend these abilities to reading and writing two-syllable words and eventually phrase-length material.
Outcomes & Results: Gains were made in all treatment protocols. The participant progressed from an inability to read one-syllable nonwords to reading and writing phrase-length material.
Conclusions: This study provides further evidence that using bigraph-biphone correspondences to train sound-blending abilities can improve both reading and writing abilities in cases of phonological dyslexia. Furthermore, the success of this treatment programme illustrates the benefit of a targeted treatment programme even 5 years post onset of aphasia, for reading and writing rehabilitation.
C1 Temple Univ, Dept Commun Sci, Ctr Cognit Neurosci, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
RP Bowes, K (reprint author), Temple Univ, Dept Commun Sci, Ctr Cognit Neurosci, Weiss Hall Room 110,1701 N 13th St, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
EM Kbowes@temple.edu
CR Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P763, DOI 10.1080/026432996381809
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
DELL GS, IN PRESS J MEMORY LA
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P114, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0006
Friedman RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P355, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000627
GLOSSER G, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P343
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST S
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
LAINE M, 1990, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P80
LaPointe L., 1998, READING COMPREHENSIO
Martin N, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P154, DOI 10.1080/02687030500472520
Martin N, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P641
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000129
Mitchum C. C., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P103, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90003-2
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, PHILADELPHIA COMPREH
Schwartz MF, 2006, J MEM LANG, V54, P228, DOI 10.1016/j.jml.2005.10.001
Siegel S., 1956, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
NR 22
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 687
EP 701
DI 10.1080/02687030701192117
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900013
ER
PT J
AU Duff, MC
Hengst, JA
Tranel, D
Cohen, NJ
AF Duff, Melissa C.
Hengst, Julie A.
Tranel, Daniel
Cohen, Neal J.
TI Talking across time: Using reported speech as a communicative resource
in amnesia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID MEMORY; LESIONS
AB Background: Patients with amnesia may have more than pure memory deficits, as evidenced by reports of subtle linguistic impairments on formal laboratory tasks in the amnesic patient HM. However, little attention has been given to the impact of memory impairments on language use in regular, colloquial interactions. We analysed reported speech use by individuals with amnesia. Reported speech (RS), in which speakers represent thoughts/words from another time and/or place, requires management of two temporal frames, making it an interesting discourse practice in which to explore the impact of memory deficits on interactional aspects of communication.
Aims: This study: (1) documents frequency, type, and temporal contexts of reported speech used in discourse samples; (2) compares reported speech use by amnesic and comparison participants; (3) examines the interactional character of reported speech use in these discourse samples. interactional aspects of communication in the empirical study of brain-behaviour relationships, and reconceptualise interaction as a target in the remediation of functional communication following brain injury.
Methods and Procedures: Derived from a broader study of the discourse practices of individuals with amnesia, this study uses quantitative group comparisons and close discourse analysis to analyse reported speech episodes (RSEs) in interactional discourse samples between a clinician and each of 18 participants, 9 individuals with amnesia and 9 comparison participants (NC).
Outcomes and Results: Reported speech was used by all participants. However, significantly fewer RSEs were produced in amnesia sessions (273) than in NC sessions (554). No significant group differences were observed for type or temporal domain. In addition, for the participants with amnesia, post-amnesia past RSEs differed qualitatively from the other RSEs in the data.
Conclusions: These findings have important implications for understanding the interdependent relationship of memory and language, point to the value of examining interactional aspects of communication in the empirical study of brain-behaviour relationships, and reconceptualise interaction as a target in the remediation of functional communication following brain injury.
C1 Univ Iowa, Coll Med, Dept Neurol, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
Univ Illinois, Urbana, IL 61801 USA.
RP Duff, MC (reprint author), Univ Iowa, Coll Med, Dept Neurol, 200 Hawkins Dr RCP 2100, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
EM melissa-duff@uiowa.edu
CR Allen JS, 2006, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V28, P457, DOI 10.1080/13803390590949287
Bayley PJ, 2003, NEURON, V38, P135, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(03)00156-9
Cherney L. R., 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU
CLARK HH, 1990, LANGUAGE, V66, P764, DOI 10.2307/414729
COHEN NJ, 1980, SCIENCE, V210, P207, DOI 10.1126/science.7414331
Cohen NJ, 1993, MEMORY AMNESIA HIPPO
Cohen NJ, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MEMO, P83
Corkin S, 2002, NAT REV NEUROSCI, V3, P153, DOI 10.1038/nrn726
Duff MC, 2006, NAT NEUROSCI, V9, P140, DOI 10.1038/nn1601
DUFF MC, 2005, LANGUAGE MEMORY ANAL
Eichenbaum H, 2001, CONDITIONING CONSCIO
Giles H., 1991, CONTEXTS ACCOMMODATI
HENGST J, 2007, TOP LANG DISORD, V27, P36
Hengst JA, 2005, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V48, P137, DOI 10.1044/1092-43888(2005/011)
Lucy J.A., 1993, REFLEXIVE LANGUAGE R, P91
MacKay DG, 1998, J MEM LANG, V38, P28, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1997.2544
McCarthy M., 1998, SPOKEN LANGUAGE APPL
Myers G, 1999, APPL LINGUIST, V20, P376, DOI 10.1093/applin/20.3.376
OCONNOR MG, 1995, BROKEN MEMORIES CASE, P45
Ogden J.A., 1991, MEMORY MECH TRIBUTE
SCOVILLE WB, 1957, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V20, P11, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.20.1.11
SQUIRE LR, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P195, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.99.2.195
Squire LR, 1987, MEMORY BRAIN
Tannen D., 1989, TALKING VOICES REPET
TATE R, 2002, HDB MEMORY DISORDERS, P17
Tranel D, 2006, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V28, P43, DOI 10.1080/13803390490919344
Tranel D, 2000, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V2, P85
Volosinov V. N, 1986, MARXISM PHILOS LANGU
Wilson B, 1999, CASE STUDIES NEUROPS
Wilson B. A., 1995, BROKEN MEMORIES CASE, P14
NR 30
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 702
EP 716
DI 10.1080/02687030701192265
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900014
ER
PT J
AU Scharp, VL
Tompkins, CA
Iverson, JM
AF Scharp, Victoria L.
Tompkins, Connie A.
Iverson, Jana M.
TI Gesture and aphasia: Helping hands?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID SPEECH; CUES
AB Background: The study of communicative gestures is one of considerable interest for aphasia, in relation to theory, diagnosis, and treatment. Significant limitations currently permeate the general (psycho)linguistic literature on gesture production, and attention to these limitations is essential for both continued investigation and clinical application of gesture for people with aphasia.
Aims: The aims of this paper are to discuss issues imperative to advancing the gesture production literature and to provide specific suggestions for applying the material herein to studies in gesture production for people with aphasia.
Main Contribution: Two primary perspectives in the gesture production literature are distinct in their proposals about the function of gesture, and about where gesture arises in the communication stream. These two perspectives will be discussed, along with three elements considered to be prerequisites for advancing the research on gesture production. These include: operational definitions, coding systems, and the temporal synchrony characteristics of gesture.
Conclusions: Addressing the specific elements discussed in this paper will provide essential information for both continued investigation and clinical application of gesture for people with aphasia.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
RP Scharp, VL (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
EM scharpvl@hotmail.com
CR Alibali MW, 1999, PSYCHOL SCI, V10, P327, DOI 10.1111/1467-9280.00163
BLONDER LX, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P203, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)00099-B
Butterworth B., 1978, RECENT ADV PSYCHOL L, P347
BUTTERWORTH B, 1981, JARGONAPHASIA, P113
CICONE M, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P324, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90060-9
Cunningham R, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P687, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000184
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
De Ruiter J. P., 2000, LANGUAGE GESTURE, P284, DOI DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620850.018
De Ruiter J.-P., 2006, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V8, P124, DOI DOI 10.1080/14417040600667285
DUFFY RJ, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P70
Duffy R. J., 1975, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V44, P156
Efron D., 1941, GESTURE ENV
FOUNDAS AL, 1995, BRAIN COGNITION, V29, P204, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1995.1277
Frick-Horbury D, 2002, AM J PSYCHOL, V115, P1, DOI 10.2307/1423671
BUTTERWORTH B, 1989, PSYCHOL REV, V96, P168, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.96.1.168
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
Kendon A., 1980, RELATIONSHIP VERBAL, P207
Krauss R., 1999, GESTURE SPEECH SIGN, P63
Krauss R. M., 2000, LANGUAGE GESTURE, P261, DOI DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620850.017
KRAUSS RM, 1996, ADV EXPT SOCIAL PSYC, V26, P389
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Mayberry R., 2000, LANGUAGE GESTURE, P199, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620850.013
McNeill D., 2005, GESTURE AND THOUGHT
McNeill D., 1992, HAND MIND GESTURES R
Melinger A., 2004, GESTURE, V4, P119, DOI DOI 10.1075/GEST.4.2.02MEL
MORRELSAMUELS P, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P615, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.18.3.615
Morsella E, 2005, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V34, P415, DOI 10.1007/s10936-005-6141-9
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
POWER E, 2006, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V8, P149
Rauscher FH, 1996, PSYCHOL SCI, V7, P226, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1996.tb00364.x
RECORDS NL, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P1086
Rime B., 1991, FUNDAMENTALS NONVERB, P239
RODRIGUEZ AD, 2006, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V8, P120, DOI 10.1080/14417040600667400
Rose M., 2006, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V8, P92, DOI 10.1080/14417040600657948
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
Tompkins CA, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P684, DOI 10.1080/02687030500334076
TUITE K, 1993, SEMIOTICA, V93, P83, DOI 10.1515/semi.1993.93.1-2.83
NR 37
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 717
EP 725
DI 10.1080/02687030701192273
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900015
ER
PT J
AU Bose, A
Buchanan, L
AF Bose, Arpita
Buchanan, Lori
TI A cognitive and psycholinguistic investigation of neologisms
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID JARGON APHASIA; PHONOLOGICAL ERRORS; WORD-RETRIEVAL; FACILITATION;
COMPREHENSION
AB Background: Jargon aphasia with neologisms (i.e., novel nonword utterances) is a challenging language disorder that lacks a definitive theoretical description as well as clear treatment recommendations (Marshall, 2006).
Aim: The aims of this two-part investigation were to determine the source of neologisms in an individual (FF) with jargon aphasia, to identify potential facilitatory semantic and/or phonological cueing effects in picture naming, and to determine whether the timing of the cues relative to the target picture mediated the cueing advantage.
Methods, and Procedures: FF's underlying linguistic deficits were determined using several cognitive and linguistic tests. A series of computerised naming experiments using a modified version of the 175-item Philadelphia Naming Test (Roach, Schwartz, Martin, Grewal, & Brecher, 1996) manipulated the cue type (semantic versus phonological) and relatedness (related versus unrelated). In a follow-up experiment, the relative timing of phonological cues was manipulated to test the effect of timing on the cueing advantage. The accuracy of naming responses and error patterns were analysed.
Outcome and Results: FF's performance on the linguistic and cognitive test battery revealed a severe naming impairment with relatively spared word and nonword repetition, auditory comprehension of words and monitoring, and fairly well-preserved semantic abilities. This performance profile was used to evaluate various explanations for neologisms including a loss of phonological codes, monitoring failure, and impairments in semantic system. The primary locus of his deficit appears to involve the connection between semantics to phonology, specifically, when word production involves accessing the phonological forms following semantic access. FF showed a significant cueing advantage only for phonological cues in picture naming, particularly when the cue preceded or coincided with the onset of the target picture.
Conclusions: When integrated with previous findings, the results from this study suggest that the core deficit of this and at least some other individuals with jargon aphasia is in the connection from semantics to phonology. The facilitative advantage of phonological cues could potentially be exploited in future clinical and research studies to test the effectiveness of these cues for enhancing naming performance in individuals like FF.
C1 Univ Windsor, Dept Psychol, Windsor, ON N9A 5G8, Canada.
RP Bose, A (reprint author), Univ Windsor, Dept Psychol, 401 Sunset Ave, Windsor, ON N9A 5G8, Canada.
EM bosea@uwindsor.ca
CR Baum SR, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1829
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
Buckingham H, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248861
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
CHRISTMAN SS, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P109, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1007
Croot K, 1999, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V16, P705, DOI 10.1080/026432999380627
ELLIS AW, 1983, COGNITION, V15, P111, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90036-7
ELMAN RJ, 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P255
Goodglass H., 2001, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V3rd
Hagoort P, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P287, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1849
Hillis AE, 1999, NEUROLOGY, V53, P1813
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A, 1970, Cortex, V6, P362
Lambon Ralph Matthew A., 2000, Neuropsychologia, V38, P186, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00056-1
LEDORZE G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P127
LI EC, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P1083
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P79, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1936
Marshall J, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P387, DOI 10.1080/02687030500489946
MARSHALL RC, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Martin N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P53
MEYER AS, 1991, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V17, P1146, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.17.6.1146
Moses MS, 2004, NEUROCASE, V10, P452, DOI 10.1080/13554790490894057
NICKELS L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P209
Roach A., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P121
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1042
Schwartz MF, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P159, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000519
Wilshire CE, 2005, COGNITION, V95, P31, DOI 10.1016/j.cognition.2004.02.004
NR 28
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 726
EP 738
DI 10.1080/02687030701192315
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900016
ER
PT J
AU Cote, H
Payer, M
Giroux, F
Joanette, Y
AF Cote, Helene
Payer, Melissa
Giroux, Francine
Joanette, Yves
TI Towards a description of clinical communication impairment profiles
following right-hemisphere damage
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID PROSODY
AB Background: It is estimated that approximately 50% of individuals who incur right-hemisphere damage (RHD) have subsequent communication disorders. Lexical-semantic, discourse, prosodic, and pragmatic deficits have been reported following RHD, but the co-occurrence of these deficits within the same individual has not yet been systematically investigated. Therefore clinical profiles of communication impairments in individuals with RHD still have to be identified and described in order to appreciate their communication impairment and provide strategies for rehabilitation.
Aims: The goal of the present study was to explore the clinical profiles of communication impairments subsequent to a right hemisphere lesion.
Methods and Procedures: A total of 28 French-speaking individuals with a right-hemisphere lesion were evaluated using the Protocole MEC (Joanette, Ska, & Cote, 2004), a normalised battery allowing the assessment of communication deficits after RHD. A hierarchical cluster analysis was used to group participants according to similarities in their results on the 14 tasks.
Outcomes and Results: Four subgroups of RHD individuals were identified on the basis of the overall similarities of performance on the 14 tasks of the Protocole, MEC. Participants in the first cluster showed impairments in all four language components evaluated, whereas the second cluster of participants was also impaired in prosodic, lexical-semantic, and pragmatic abilities, but was characterised by a relative preservation of discourse abilities. The third cluster of participants did not show any abnormal results. Finally, two individuals were mainly characterised by some lexical-semantic deficits.
Conclusions: The Protocole MEC used in conjunction with a cluster analysis provided a first step towards the identification of communication impairment profiles among the population of individuals with RHD. In the present study it was not possible to clearly identify the relationship between a given profile and factors such as lesion site, age, or
C1 Univ Montreal, Inst Univ Geriatr Montreal, Montreal, PQ H3W 1W5, Canada.
Hop Readaptat Villa Med, Montreal, PQ, Canada.
RP Cote, H (reprint author), Univ Montreal, Inst Univ Geriatr Montreal, 4565 Chemin Queen Mary, Montreal, PQ H3W 1W5, Canada.
EM helene.cote.1@umontreal.ca
CR Aldenderfer M, 1985, CLUSTER ANAL
Benton E, 1996, INT J REHABIL RES, V19, P47, DOI 10.1097/00004356-199603000-00005
Blake M. L., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P537, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000194
Bryan K., 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LAN
Bryan K., 1989, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LAN
CHANTRAINE Y, 1998, PRAGMATICS NEUROGENI, P21
Code C., 1987, LANGUAGE APHASIA RIG
Cote H., 2004, REEDUCATION ORTHOPHO, V219, P107
ECK K, 2001, 7 C LAT NEUR SAO PAU
Eisenson J., 1959, AM SPEECH HEARING AS, V1, P107
Gagnon L, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P217, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00057-9
GARDNER H, 1975, BRAIN, V98, P399, DOI 10.1093/brain/98.3.399
HALPER AS, 1996, RIC EVALUATION COMMU
Joanette Y, 2004, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL E
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
Joanette Y., 1991, REV NEUROPSYCHOL, V1, P3
JOANETTE Y, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P1
LojekOsiejuk E, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P58, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0037
Myers P. S, 1979, CLIN APH C P MINN, P38
Myers P. S., 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
Myers PS, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P195
Myers PS, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P1147, DOI 10.1080/02687030500331585
Pell MD, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P161, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2065
Sidtis DV, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V97, P135
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Vanhalle C, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P1127, DOI 10.1080/02687030050174665
Walker JP, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P321
NR 27
TC 13
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 739
EP 749
DI 10.1080/02687030701192331
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900017
ER
PT J
AU Marshall, RC
McGurk, SR
Karow, CM
Kairy, TJ
AF Marshall, Robert C.
McGurk, Susan R.
Karow, Colleen M.
Kairy, Tamar J.
TI Problem-solving abilities of participants with and without diffuse
neurologic involvement
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; BRAIN-INJURY; INDIVIDUALS; DEFICITS; ADULTS; AGE
AB Background: Impaired problem solving is a frequent consequence of brain trauma and other conditions that result in diffuse neurologic involvement. Information about how individuals with diffuse neurologic involvement solve problems is important to the development of strategies designed to help them achieve the highest degree of independent living despite neuropsychological compromise, and may aid clinical decision making in general.
Aims: To examine and compare problem-solving abilities of participants with and without diffuse neurologic involvement.
Methods & Procedures: We used the Rapid Assessment of Problem Solving test (RAPS; Marshall, Karow, Morelli, Iden, & Dixon, 2003a), a modification of Mosher and Hornsby's (1966) 20 Question task, to examine the problem-solving abilities of two groups of neurologically intact (NI) participants and three groups of participants with diffuse neurologic involvement (DNf). The RAPS is a clinical test of problem-solving abilities in which the client asks yes/no questions to identify a "target picture" in a 32-item array. The DNI groups included individuals with recent and chronic acquired traumatic brain injuries, and a third group of participants with severe mental illness. It was hypothesised that participants with DNI would perform less well on the RAPS than the NI participants, and that these differences would be reflected in lower scores on the RAPS and differences in the frequency with which certain types of questions were used to solve problems.
Outcomes & Results: Findings revealed significant differences between NI groups and two of the three DNI groups on objective scores, types of questions asked, and the strategies used to solve problems on the RAPS. The NI participants used a more systematic, organised approach to solving problems, whereas participants with DNI were less organised, inconsistent, and sometimes inflexible in their use of problemsolving strategies.
Conclusions: Findings suggest the problem-solving abilities of participants with and without DN1 are distinguishable in terms of selected components of Scholnick and Friedman's (1993) developmental theory of planning. These include a decision to plan, strategy choice and execution, and monitoring effects of prior actions.
C1 Univ Kentucky, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
Dartmouth Coll Sch Med, Hanover, NH USA.
Univ Tennessee, Knoxville, TN USA.
Hofstra Univ, Hempstead, NJ USA.
RP Marshall, RC (reprint author), Univ Kentucky, Room 120F,CTW Bldg,900 S Limestone, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
EM remarsh@uky.edu
CR Baddeley A. D., 1992, SCIENCE, V225, P556, DOI [10.1126/science.1736359, DOI 10.1126/SCIENCE.1736359]
Brookshire RH, 2003, INTRO NEUROGENIC COM
CHEN RC, 2004, EUROPEAN ARCHIVES PS, V254, P236
Cummings J. L., 1983, DEMENTIA CLIN APPROA
DENNEY DR, 1973, DEV PSYCHOL, V9, P275, DOI 10.1037/h0035092
DENNEY NW, 1981, J GERONTOL, V36, P323
DENNEY NW, 1985, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V21, P161, DOI 10.2190/A3J2-75L4-01C3-W81W
GLOSSER G, 1990, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V12, P485, DOI 10.1080/01688639008400995
GOLD JM, 1993, PSYCHIAT CLIN N AM, V16, P295
GOLDSTEIN FC, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V17, P23, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90063-E
GRANT DA, 1948, J EXP PSYCHOL, V38, P404, DOI 10.1037/h0059831
HAGAN C, 1979, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
Hochberg Y., 1987, MULTIPLE COMP PROCED
JASTEK JS, 1984, WIDE RANGE ACHIEVEME
Keil K, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P305, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000654
Kennedy Mary R. T, 2005, Seminars in Speech and Language, V26, P242, DOI 10.1055/s-2005-922103
LAPOINTE LL, 1995, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V3, P95
LEZAK MD, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
MARSHALL RC, 2006, SCHIZOPHR RES, V81, P331
Marshall RC, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P659, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000237
Marshall RC, 2007, APHASIOLOGY, V21, P235, DOI 10.1080/02687030600624400
Marshall RC, 2003, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V12, P333, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2003/079)
MARSHALL RC, 1999, CONV AM SPEECH LANG
Marshall RC, 2003, BRAIN INJURY, V17, P589, DOI 10.1080/0269905031000088496
MARSHALL RC, 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P181
Mosher F. A., 1966, STUDIES COGNITIVE GR, P86
Pfieffer E, 1975, J AM GERIATR SOC, V23, P433
Porteus S., 1965, PORTEUS MAZE TEST 50
Rath JF, 2000, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V15, P724
Rath JF, 2004, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V19, P613, DOI 10.1016/j.acn.2003.08.006
Raven J. C., 1984, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
SCHOLNICK EK, 1993, INT J BEHAV DEV, V16, P145
Willis SL, 1998, GERONTOLOGIST, V38, P569
NR 33
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 750
EP 762
DI 10.1080/02687030601154076
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900018
ER
PT J
AU Armstrong, E
Ulatowska, H
AF Armstrong, Elizabeth
Ulatowska, Hanna
TI Making stories: Evaluative language and the aphasia experience
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID AFRICAN-AMERICANS; NARRATIVES; DISCOURSE; STROKE
AB Background: Language used for expressing feelings and opinions-so-called evaluative language-is essential to the expression of the individual's identity. Illness narratives involving evaluative language are known to be important vehicles for coping with identity change during chronic illness, as well as reflecting on and sharing the experience. However, relatively little is known about the aphasic person's ability to engage in such narratives-in particular, the effects of their language difficulties on this endeavour.
Aims: This study discusses different types of evaluative language and ways in which they are relatively impaired or preserved in aphasia, focusing on stroke narrative.
Methods & Procedures: Examples from the stroke stories of three aphasic speakers are used as illustrations of their evaluative abilities. The stories were analysed according to evaluative language categories defined by Labov (1972) and Martin (2003). The function of each of these categories is described in terms of its contribution to the emotive nature of the discourse.
Outcomes & Results: The aphasic speakers were successful in using evaluative language and used similar devices to non-brain-damaged speakers. However, the realisation of the devices was simplified at both lexical and syntactic levels and in terms of quantity.
Conclusions: Emotive/evaluative language promises a different perspective on language usage across speakers of differing levels of severity for both assessment and treatment purposes. We will discuss implications of the use of emotive recounts in the clinical situation for facilitating language and working through identity issues.
C1 Univ Texas, Dallas, TX 75230 USA.
Macquarie Univ, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Armstrong, E (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, Dept Linguist, N Ryde, NSW 2019, Australia.
EM barmstrong@ling.mq.edu.au
CR Alaszewski A, 2006, HEALTH RISK SOC, V8, P43, DOI 10.1080/1369857050500532553
Armstrong E, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P285, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000750
Armstrong E, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P1029, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000375
BERKO-GLEASON J., 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P370
Borod JC, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P351, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00131-X
Borod JC, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V14, P112, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.14.1.112
Chapey R., 2000, ASHA LEADER, V5, P4
Faircloth CA, 2004, SOCIOL HEALTH ILL, V26, P242, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9566.2004.00388.x
Frank AW, 1995, WOUNDED STORYTELLER
HUNSTON S, 2003, EVALUATION TEXT AUTH, P1
Kagan A, 2004, CHALLENGING APHASIA THERAPIES: BROADENING THE DISCOURSE AND EXTENDING THE BOUNDARIES, P158, DOI 10.4324/9780203462706_chapter_10
Kovecses Z., 2000, METAPHOR AND EMOTION
LABOV W, 1993, DISCOURSE NEUROLOGIC, P115
Labov W., 1972, LANGUAGE INNER CITY
LaPointe LL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P249, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000241
MARSHALL R, 1999, GROUP TREATMENT NEUR, P57
Martin J. R., 2003, EVALUATION TEXT AUTH, P142
MARTIN J. R., 1995, AUSTR J LINGUISTICS, V15, P3
McCabe A., 1991, DEV NARRATIVE STRUCT
Moss B, 2004, DISABIL SOC, V19, P753, DOI 10.1080/0968759042000284222
Ochs Elinor, 2001, LIVING NARRATIVE CRE
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Shadden BB, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P211, DOI 10.1080/02687930444000697
STUBBS M, 1986, APPL LINGUIST, V7, P1, DOI 10.1093/applin/7.1.1
TANNEN D, 1989, TALKING VOICE DIALOG
Tannen Deborah, 1994, GENDER DISCOURSE
TAYLOR G, 1986, WRITING WRITING, P215
Ulatowska HK, 2000, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V30, P265, DOI 10.1207/S15326950dp3003_3
Ulatowska HK, 2004, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V6, P3
Ulatowska HK, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P69, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00202-5
ULATOWSKA HK, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V13, P345, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90100-0
ULATOWSKA HK, 1980, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P
Ulatowska HK, 2001, J NEUROLINGUIST, V14, P93, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00010-0
van Dijk T., 1988, NEWS DISCOURSE
NR 35
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 763
EP 774
DI 10.1080/02687030701192364
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900019
ER
PT J
AU McNeil, MR
Sung, JE
Yang, D
Pratt, SR
Fossett, TRD
Doyle, PJ
Pavelko, S
AF McNeil, Malcolm R.
Sung, Jee Eun
Yang, Dorothy
Pratt, Sheila R.
Fossett, Tepanta R. D.
Doyle, Patrick J.
Pavelko, Stacey
TI Comparing connected language elicitation procedures in persons with
aphasia: Concurrent validation of the Story Retell Procedure
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID LEXICAL DIVERSITY; RELIABILITY; ADULTS
AB Background: The Story Retell Procedure (SRP) (Doyle et al., 1998) is a well-described method for eliciting connected language samples in persons with aphasia (PWA). However, the stimuli and task demands of the SRP are fundamentally different from commonly employed picture description, narrative, and procedural description tasks reported in the aphasia literature. As such, the extent to which measures of linguistic performance derived from the SRP may be associated with those obtained from picture description, narrative, and procedural description tasks is unknown.
Aims: To assess the concurrent validity of linguistic performance measures obtained from the SRP with those obtained from picture description, narrative, and procedural description tasks by examining the correlations and the magnitude differences across the linguistic variables among the elicitation tasks. Secondarily, we examined the relationship of the percentage of information units per minute (%IU/Min) to other linguistic variables within the SRP and across the other elicitation tasks.
Methods and Procedures: This study compared the SRP to six different, frequently used sampling procedures (three sets of picture descriptions, one fairytale generation, one set of narratives, and one set of procedural description tasks) from which the same five verbal productivity, four information content, two grammatical, and two verbal disruption measures were computed. Language samples were elicited from 20 PWA, spanning the aphasia comprehension severity range. Tests of association and difference were calculated for each measure between the SRP and the other sampling methods.
Outcomes & Results: Significant and strong associations were obtained between the SRP and the other elicitation tasks for most linguistic measures. The SRP produced either no significant or significantly greater instances of the dependent variable except for the type-token ratio, which yielded a significantly lower value than the other sampling procedures.
Conclusions: The findings are interpreted as support for the concurrent validity of the SRP and as evidence that a single form of the SRP will yield a language sample that is generally equivalent in distribution to other sampling procedures, and one that is generally greater in quantity to those typically used to assess connected spoken language in PWA. Additionally, it was found that the %IU/Min metric predicted highly the information content linguistic measures on the SRP as well as on the other elicitation procedures. However, it did not predict well measures of verbal productivity, grammaticality, or verbal disruptions.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP McNeil, MR (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
EM mcneil@pitt.edu
RI Pratt, Sheila/H-7139-2013
CR Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
Berndt R. S., 2000, QUANTITATIVE PRODUCT
Brodsky MB, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P1124, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/088)
Brookshire R. H., 1997, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
DISIMONI FG, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P511
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
Doyle PJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P537
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Hula WD, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P523, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000139
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
McNeil MR, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P815, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000284
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P901
Miller L, 1998, J AGR ENVIRON ETHIC, V11, P1, DOI 10.1023/A:1007761031092
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
WACHAL RS, 1973, LANG SPEECH, V16, P169
Wright HH, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P443, DOI 10.1080/0268703044000166
NR 19
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 775
EP 790
DI 10.1080/02687030701189980
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900020
ER
PT J
AU Croteau, C
Le Dorze, G
Baril, G
AF Croteau, Claire
Le Dorze, Guylaine
Baril, Genevieve
TI Development of a procedure to evaluate the contributions of persons with
aphasia and their spouses in an interview situation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID CONVERSATION ANALYSIS; TURN-TAKING; REPAIR; SPEAKING; PARTICIPATION;
ORGANIZATION; STRATEGIES; SEQUENCES; COUPLES; PEOPLE
AB Background: Although there has been increasing interest in the study of conversations between people with aphasia and their partners, the participation of persons with aphasia in conversation with their spouses in the presence of a third party has not been extensively investigated. Nevertheless, opportunities for such situations are frequent, and therefore provide an interesting opportunity to examine how couples collaborate.
Aims: (1) To develop a procedure to analyse conversations that would specifically address the contributions of persons with aphasia and their spouses in an interview situation. (2) To describe spousal contributions in an interview situation, including what preceded and followed these contributions, in a group of couples with a member with aphasia. (3) To verify the inter-judge reliability of the procedure.
Methods & Procedures: Videos of three couples with aphasia in an interview situation were analysed. Contributions of the spouse when the participant with aphasia was clearly speaking with the interviewer, contexts in which spouses contributed, reactions of persons with aphasia, and their participation following contributions were described. Definitions were created, operationalised, tested, and refined on 11 other similar couples in the same interactive situation. Eight other couples were then videotaped and studied.
Outcomes & Results: Results revealed that half the contributions produced by the spouse were "repairs" and the other half were "speaking for" behaviours. Most often, contributions were unsolicited. Generally, the person with aphasia approved the spouse's contribution and continued afterwards to take an active part in the conversation. Inter-judge reliability coefficients varied between 89% and 97%.
Conclusions: The procedure employed is representative of situations encountered by couples affected by aphasia. The data collection and analysis methods could be applicable to clinical situations. It is important to consider spousal contributions and their impact on the person with aphasia in conversations when helping couples adjust to the consequences of aphasia.
C1 Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RP Croteau, C (reprint author), Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, CP 6128,Succursale Ctr Ville, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
EM claire.croteau@umontreal.ca
RI Le Dorze, Guylaine/A-1790-2014
CR CROCKFORD C, 1994, EUROPEAN J DISORDERS, V29, P55
Croteau C, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P327, DOI 10.1080/02687030500475051
Croteau C, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P291, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000616
Ferguson A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P1007, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249466
FERGUSON A, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P143, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248647
FERGUSON A, 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P299
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Laakso M, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P345
Lindsay J, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P305
Lubinski R., 1980, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P111
MANZO JF, 1995, SOCIOL HEALTH ILL, V17, P307, DOI 10.1111/1467-9566.ep10933323
MILROY L, 1992, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V6, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699209208985517
Nespoulous J. L., 1986, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL T
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V8, P62
Oelschlaeger ML, 2000, J COMMUN DISORD, V33, P205, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00019-8
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P459, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985238
Perkins L, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P259
Ramsberger G, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P337, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000636
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
SCHEGLOFF EA, 1977, LANGUAGE, V53, P31
Simmons-Mackie N, 2004, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V13, P114, DOI 10.1044/1058-0630(2004/013)
Wilkinson R, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P144
Wilkinson R, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P251, DOI 10.1080/026870399402082
NR 23
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 791
EP 801
DI 10.1080/02687030701192398
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900021
ER
PT J
AU Wright, HH
Downey, RA
Gravier, M
Love, T
Shapiro, LP
AF Harris Wright, Heather
Downey, Ryan A.
Gravier, Michelle
Love, Tracy
Shapiro, Lewis P.
TI Processing distinct linguistic information types in working memory in
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; INDIVIDUAL-DIFFERENCES; COMPREHENSION; PERFORMANCE;
CAPACITY; CORTEX; ADULTS; LOAD
AB Back-ground: Recent investigations have suggested that adults with aphasia present with a working memory deficit that may contribute to their language-processing difficulties. Working memory capacity has been conceptualised as a single "resource" pool for attentional, linguistic, and other executive processing-alternatively, it has been suggested that there may be separate working memory abilities for different types of linguistic information. A challenge in this line of research is developing an appropriate measure of working memory ability in adults with aphasia. One candidate measure of working memory ability that may be appropriate for this population is the n-back task. By manipulating stimulus type, the n-back task may be appropriate for tapping linguistic-specific working memory abilities.
Aims: The purposes of this study were (a) to measure working memory ability in adults with aphasia for processing specific types of linguistic information, and (b) to examine whether a relationship exists between participants' performance on working memory and auditory comprehension measures.
Method & Procedures: Nine adults with aphasia participated in the study. Participants completed three n-back tasks, each tapping different types of linguistic information. They included the PhonoBack (phonological level), SemBack (semantic level), and SynBack (syntactic level). For all tasks, two n-back levels were administered: a 1-back and 2-back. Each level contained 20 target items; accuracy was recorded by stimulus presentation software. The Subject-relative, ONect-relative, Active, Passive Test Of Svntactic Complexity (SOAP) was the syntactic sentence comprehension task administered to all participants.
Outcomes & Results: Participants' performance declined as n-back task difficulty increased. Overall, participants performed better on the SetnBack than PhonoBack and SynBack tasks, but the differences were not statistically significant. Finally, participants who performed poorly on the SynBack also had more difficulty comprehending syntactically complex sentence structures (i.e., passive & object-relative sentences).
Conclusions: Results indicate that working memory ability for different types of linguistic information can be measured in adults with aphasia. Further, our results add to the growing literature that favours separate working memory abilities for different types of linguistic information view.
C1 Arizona State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tempe, AZ 85287 USA.
San Diego State Univ, San Diego, CA 92182 USA.
RP Wright, HH (reprint author), Arizona State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, POB 870102, Tempe, AZ 85287 USA.
EM Heather.Wright.1@asu.edu
CR Angrilli A, 2003, NEUROIMAGE, V20, P657, DOI 10.1016/S1053-8119(03)00395-1
Belleville S, 2003, J MEM LANG, V48, P686, DOI 10.1016/S0749-596X(02)00532-6
Callicott JH, 2000, CEREB CORTEX, V10, P1078, DOI 10.1093/cercor/10.11.1078
Caplan D, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P114, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X99441780
Caspari I, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P205, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0970
DANEMAN M, 1980, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V19, P450, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(80)90312-6
DOWNEY RA, 2004, MEASURE WORKING MEMO
FRIEDMANN N, 2006, CLIN APH C GHENT BEL
Friedmann N, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V86, P23, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00530-8
Hinkin CH, 2002, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V8, P532, DOI 10.1007/S1355617701020276
Jonides J, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P462, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.4.462
JUST MA, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P122, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.1.122
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kubat-Silman AK, 2002, BRAIN COGNITION, V50, P178, DOI 10.1016/S0278-2626(02)00502-X
Levin HS, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V18, P240, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.18.2.240
Love T, 2002, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V31, P503, DOI 10.1023/A:1021208903394
Martin RC, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P341, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(03)00025-3
McEvoy LK, 1998, CEREB CORTEX, V8, P563, DOI 10.1093/cercor/8.7.563
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
VALLAR G, 1992, CORTEX, V28, P383
Waters G., 1999, CONSTRAINTS LANGUAGE, P107
Waters GS, 1996, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V49, P51, DOI 10.1080/027249896392801
Wright H. H., 2003, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V9, P302
Wright HH, 2005, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V14, P107, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2005/012)
Yasuda K, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P399, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2377
Yoo SS, 2004, INT J NEUROSCI, V114, P613, DOI 10.1080/00207450490430561
NR 26
TC 14
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 802
EP 813
DI 10.1080/02687030701192414
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900022
ER
PT J
AU Frankel, T
Penn, C
Ormond-Brown, D
AF Frankel, Tali
Penn, Claire
Ormond-Brown, Digby
TI Executive dysfunction as an explanatory basis for conversation symptoms
of aphasia: A pilot study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 36th Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2006
CL Ghent, BELGIUM
ID TRAUMATIC BRAIN-INJURY; ATTENTION; RECOVERY
AB Background: Lack of communicative success for people with aphasia is no longer seen as purely a linguistic deficit. Instead, the integrity of the executive functions (EF) is thought to be at least partly responsible for successful communication, particularly during conversation. In order to inform clinicians regarding both conversation and EF, a merging of two paradigms-conversational and neuropsychological approaches-is proposed.
Aims: First, we explore the relevance of both neuropsychological and conversational approaches to the assessment of aphasia. Second, we present the executive battery that was designed and administered to a single participant (MS) to assess various aspects of EF. The results of a Conversation Analysis (CA) undertaken on an excerpt of MS's conversation are given. Results of the EF analysis are presented with the CA in order to highlight proposed relationships that may impact on conversational strengths and difficulties.
Methods and Procedures: The executive battery was designed to assess the following constructs: attention, verbal and nonverbal working memory, memory, planning, generation, and concept formation. The participant was video-recorded in conversation with a familiar interlocutor. Transcriptions were derived and subjected to Conversation Analysis. A discussion of conversational features is presented in conjunction with results from the executive battery.
Outcomes and Results: Several areas including simple sustained attention, interference control, memory, and planning appeared to be preserved. This profile occurred together with the ability to maintain concentration and track meaning during interactions with one interlocutor. Memory for previously stated information was preserved as well as the ability to think and plan ahead. These strengths also co-occurred with intact turn taking and topic management. However MS's performance also indicated difficulty with shifting attention, verbal and nonverbal working memory, generation, and concept formation. The latter two especially appeared to be mediated by the effects of perseveration, which resulted from a reduced ability to shift focus. In terms of conversation, MS reported difficulty in multi-party settings. In addition, conversational repair was affected by poor generation and selection of strategies as well as an inability to shift away from current ineffectual forms of expression to more effective, flexible, and potentially successful forms of communication.
Conclusions: The notion of merging two distinct and historically separate paradigms presents unique and valuable opportunities for creative and effective treatment of individuals with aphasia who have reached plateaus or who, as in this case, present with relatively intact linguistic skills on formal testing but experience daily frustration during conversation.
C1 Univ Witwatersrand, Sch Human & Community Dev, ZA-2050 Wits, South Africa.
RP Frankel, T (reprint author), Univ Witwatersrand, Sch Human & Community Dev, Private Bag 3, ZA-2050 Wits, South Africa.
EM tdfranky@absamail.co.za
CR ALBERT ML, 1986, CORTEX, V22, P103
BAILEY S, 1981, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V16, P193
Beeke S, 2003, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V17, P109, DOI 10.1080/0269920031000061786
COEHLO CA, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P275
Crosson B, 2005, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V17, P392, DOI 10.1162/0898929053279487
FRANKEL T, IN PRESS APHASIOLOGY
Fuster J., 1989, PREFRONTAL CORTEX
Godfrey HPD, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P433
Golden J. C., 1978, STROOP COLOR WORD TE
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P171, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00063-1
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P469
Keil K, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P305, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000654
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Lesser R., 1993, LINGUISTICS APHASIA
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
Logie RH, 1999, PSYCHOLOGIST, V12, P174
McNeil MR, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P521, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000138
Miyake Akira, 2000, Seminars in Speech and Language, V21, P169, DOI 10.1055/s-2000-7563
Oelschlaeger M. L., 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P211
Ormond Software Enterprises, 1999, WISC CARD SORT TEST
Penn C, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P185, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2247
Purdy M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P549, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000176
Raven J, 1998, STANDARD PROGRESSIVE
Rende Barbara, 2000, Seminars in Speech and Language, V21, P121, DOI 10.1055/s-2000-7560
Riepe MW, 2004, DEMENT GERIATR COGN, V17, P49, DOI 10.1159/000074082
ROURKE SB, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A, P379
SCHAPIRO SR, 1993, MINOR HEAD TRAUMA AS, P86
SHALLICE T, 1982, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V298, P199, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1982.0082
Spreen O., 1998, COMPENDIUM NEUROPSYC
TENHAVE P, 1999, DOING CONSERVATION A
Watt N, 2000, S AFR J PSYCHOL, V30, P27
Ylvisaker M., 1998, COLLABORATIVE BRAIN
NR 32
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-AUG
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 6-8
BP 814
EP 828
DI 10.1080/02687030701192448
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 179XN
UT WOS:000247323900023
ER
PT J
AU Beeke, S
Wilkinson, R
Maxim, J
AF Beeke, Suzanne
Wilkinson, Ray
Maxim, Jane
TI Grammar without sentence structure: A conversation analytic
investigation of agrammatism
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT Stirling Discourse Colloquium
CY OCT, 2004
CL Stirling, SCOTLAND
HO Univ Stirling
ID TURN-TAKING; RESOURCE; APHASIA; THERAPY; TALK
AB Background: Although research into agrammatism has done much to characterise the nature of the underlying disorder, most studies have analysed elicited, task-based data. As a result, little is known about the grammar that people with agrammatism use in everyday talk with habitual conversational partners. There is evidence in the Conversation Analysis (CA) literature to suggest that conversational grammar may not mirror the grammar of elicited language samples.
Aims: To explore the notion that conversation and task-based data do not necessarily reveal the same grammatical phenomena, addressing the following questions: (1) What resources does a speaker with agrammatism make use of in order to construct a turn at talk? (2) Is the conversational grammar of a speaker with agrammatism organised in a systematic way? (3) What is the relationship between patterns of turn construction in conversation and the grammatical characteristics of output elicited by decontextualised language tests?
Methods & Procedures: A videotaped conversation between an agrammatic speaker and his adult daughter is analysed using CA. Four recurring turn construction formats are described and illustrated with extracts. Background information on the client presents the results of picture-naming and sentence production tests.
Outcomes & Results: There is great variation between the grammar of conversation and test data. Test results reveal a severe problem with verb access and sentence construction, with ability declining sharply as the number of verb arguments increases. However, the speaker deploys interactional alternatives to standard grammatical structures, and it is possible for him to recount events without explicit articulation of verbs and argument structures, using a combination of talk and mime. Only a minority of his conversational utterances are concerned with recounting events-commenting, assessing, and reasoning are highly prevalent.
Conclusions: Conversation and sentence-level tests provide complementary but essentially different information about grammatical ability. This implies that assessment of conversational grammar should become a routine part of any investigation of agrammatism in order to gain a more complete picture of an individual's ability to impose structural order on their talk, and to explore implications for successful interaction with others. Currently, approaches to assessment and intervention overemphasise events. In conversation, other actions such as giving an opinion are just as prevalent. Findings suggest a mismatch between what appears problematic on testing and what is treated as problematic by the interactants in conversation, and thatintervention might profitably seek to address grammatical difficulties that have a basis in interaction.
C1 UCL, Dept Human Commun Sci, London WC1E 7DP, England.
RP Beeke, S (reprint author), UCL, Dept Human Commun Sci, Remax House,31-32 Alfred Pl, London WC1E 7DP, England.
EM s.beeke@ucl.ac.uk
CR AUER JCP, 1984, J PRAGMATICS, V8, P627, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(84)90003-1
Auer P., 1996, PROSODY CONVERSATION, P57, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511597862.004
BASTIAANSE R, 2002, VERB SCI TEST
Beeke S, 2003, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V17, P81, DOI 10.1080/0269920031000061795
Beeke S, 2003, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V17, P291, DOI 10.1080/0269920031000080055
Beeke S, 2003, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V17, P109, DOI 10.1080/0269920031000061786
BEEKE S, 2001, STEM SPRAAK TAALPATH, V10, P215
Beeke S., 2005, THESIS U COLL LONDON
Burch K., 2002, BRIT APH SOC THER S, P1
BYNG S, 1993, FOUNDATIONS OF APHASIA REHABILITATION, P319
Couper-Kuhlen Elizabeth, 2001, STUDIES INTERACTIONA, P1
Couper-Kuhlen Elizabeth, 1996, PRAGMATICS, V6, P389
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P667
GELUYKENS R, 1992, DISCOURSE GRAMMATICA
GOODWIN C, 1987, SOC PSYCHOL QUART, V50, P115, DOI 10.2307/2786746
Goodwin C., 1981, CONVERSATIONAL ORG I
Goodwin C, 1992, CONTEXTUALIZATION LA, P77
Goodwin C, 1996, INTERACTION GRAMMAR, P370, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620874.008
Goodwin Charles, 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P3
Goodwin Charles, 1992, RETHINKING CONTEXT L, P147
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
Heeschen C., 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P231
Heeschen C, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P365
Helasvuo M.-L., 2001, STUDIES INTERACTIONA, P25
HERITAGE J, 1989, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC, P299
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTICS AS
KEENAN EO, 1983, ACQUIRING CONVERSATI, P158
Kim K.-H, 1995, WORD ORDER DISCOURSE, P247
LERNER GH, 1991, LANG SOC, V20, P441
Lesser R., 1993, LINGUISTICS APHASIA
Lind M., 2002, CONVERSATIONAL COOPE
Lind M, 2002, INVESTIGATIONS IN CLINICAL PHONETICS AND LINGUISTICS, P373
LINDSAY J, 1979, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P327
LOCAL JK, 1986, J LINGUIST, V22, P411, DOI 10.1017/S0022226700010859
Lock S., 2001, SPPARC SUPPORTING PA
Marshall J., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P351
Menn L., 1995, NONFLUENT APHASIA MU
Ochs E., 1996, INTERACTION GRAMMAR
Sacks H., 1979, EVERYDAY LANGUAGE ST, P15
Sacks H., 1992, LECT CONVERSATION, VI
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
Schegloff E, 1996, INTERACTION GRAMMAR, P52, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620874.002
Schegloff E. A., 1979, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, V12, P261
Schegloff EA, 1996, AM J SOCIOL, V102, P161, DOI 10.1086/230911
Schiffrin Deborah, 1987, DISCOURSE MARKERS
SCHWARTZ MF, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P93, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520177
Springer L, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P279
Thompson Sandra A., 1996, INTERACTION GRAMMAR, P238, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620874.005
WHITWORTH A, 1997, THESIS U CENTRAL ENG
WHITWORTH A, 1996, THEMATIC ROLES PRODU
Wilkinson R, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P327, DOI 10.1080/026870399402127
Wilkinson R, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P144
Wilkinson R, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P251, DOI 10.1080/026870399402082
WILKINSON R, 2005, R000239306 EC SOC RE
WILKINSON R, 2001, R000222754
Wilkinson R., 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P59
NR 56
TC 20
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-APR
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 3-4
BP 256
EP 282
DI 10.1080/02687030600911344
PG 27
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VN
UT WOS:000244678800002
ER
PT J
AU Horton, S
AF Horton, Simon
TI Topic generation in aphasia language therapy sessions: Issues of
identity
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT Stirling Discourse Colloquium
CY OCT, 2004
CL Stirling, SCOTLAND
HO Univ Stirling
ID ORGANIZATION; CONVERSATION
AB Background: Aphasia language therapy sessions have a general "order of phases'' and usually open with a period of casual conversation. It has been noted that the overall structure of participation in therapy, characterised by therapist control, is anticipated in this opening phase. The detailed mechanisms through which control is achieved and sustained have not been fully examined. The processes through which these mechanisms operate and their relationship with participant roles and identities appear to be especially relevant for study if the overall goal of aphasia therapy is to address life participation and the social context of communication (e. g., Shadden & Agan, 2004).
Aims: The concern of this paper is to examine in detail some of the mechanisms through which professional control is achieved and sustained, with a particular focus on ways in which speech and language therapists and people with aphasia work at generating and maintaining the topics that are observed to develop in the opening phase of aphasia language therapy sessions. In addition, there is a specific interest in how, in certain instances, the activity of topic generation and maintenance may be shown to relate to the participants' identities as "professional'' and "patient''.
Methods & Procedures: The paper focuses on analysis of data from the opening phase of five sessions, one each from three therapist/person with aphasia dyads, and two from separate sessions of a fourth dyad. Data from these sessions are taken from a larger study of aphasia language therapy in day-to-day practice. The turn-by-turn process of topic generation is examined in detail using techniques from Conversation Analysis in conjunction with a consideration of "membership categorisation'' and "category-bounded activities''.
Outcomes & Results: Close examination of the process of topic generation and maintenance in five sessions from four different dyads revealed how therapists selected certain topics for topicalisation and rejected others. Selected topics were related to activities closely tied to the person with aphasia's identity as a person with communication impairment. In so doing the therapists established a particular type of therapeutic identity for themselves.
Conclusions: Managing the person with aphasia's identity by addressing communication activities that are bound to the aphasic impairment and rejecting other types may, perversely, hamper a speech and language therapist's understanding of that person with aphasia's communicative competence, including broader issues that may be germane to intervention. Understanding and recognising where control resides and through which mechanisms it operates is of potential benefit to therapists and people with aphasia alike - for example, enabling more focused and realistic goal setting or more accurate insights into the impact of aphasia, and aphasia language therapy on everyday social participation. The challenge for therapists and for people with aphasia is to be able to shift roles appropriately and act as equals in the enterprise of therapy.
C1 Univ E Anglia, Sch Allied Hlth Profess, Norwich NR4 7PT, Norfolk, England.
RP Horton, S (reprint author), Univ E Anglia, Sch Allied Hlth Profess, Queens Bldg, Norwich NR4 7PT, Norfolk, England.
EM s.horton@uea.ac.uk
CR Atkinson J. M., 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC
Campion P, 2004, SOCIOL HEALTH ILL, V26, P81, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9566.2004.00379.x
Casey N., 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC, P167
Drew Paul, 1992, TALK WORK INTERACTIO, P3
Fitzgerald R, 2002, DISCOURSE SOC, V13, P579, DOI 10.1177/0957926502013005275
Goodwin C., 1981, CONVERSATIONAL ORG I
Hagstrom F, 2004, TOP LANG DISORD, V24, P225
Heritage J., 1997, QUALITATIVE RES THEO, P161
Heritage John, 1992, TALK WORK INTERACTIO, P359
Hollis GE, 1998, J CHART INST WATER E, V12, P9
Horton S, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P528, DOI 10.1080/02687030600590130
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
KAGAN A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P1
KAY J, 1996, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Lomax H., 1998, SOCIOLOGICAL RES ONL, V3
LUBINSKI R, 1980, CLN APH C P MINN MN
MAYNARD DW, 1984, SOC PSYCHOL QUART, V47, P301, DOI 10.2307/3033633
Mehan H., 1979, LEARNING LESSONS SOC
PANAGOS JM, 1986, CHILD LANG TEACH THE, V2, P211, DOI 10.1177/026565908600200206
PEARAKYLA A, 1995, AIDS COUNSELLING I I
Reddy MP, 1997, AM FAM PHYSICIAN, V55, P1742
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
Sacks Harvey, 1974, ETHNOMETHODOLOGY, P216
Schegloff Emanuel, 1973, SEMIOTICA, V8, P289
Shadden BB, 2004, TOP LANG DISORD, V24, P174
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P313
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V8, P218
Sinclair J. M., 1975, ANAL DISCOURSE ENGLI
Spradley J., 1980, PARTICIPANT OBSERVAT
ten Have Paul, 1991, TALK SOCIAL STRUCTUR, P138
Wareing D, 2002, DISABIL SOC, V17, P419, DOI 10.1080/09687590220140359
West Candace, 1991, MISCOMMUNICATION PRO, P166
NR 32
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-APR
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 3-4
BP 283
EP 298
DI 10.1080/02687030600911377
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VN
UT WOS:000244678800003
ER
PT J
AU Cocks, N
Hird, K
Kirsner, K
AF Cocks, Naomi
Hird, Kathryn
Kirsner, Kim
TI The relationship between right hemisphere damage and gesture in
spontaneous discourse
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT Stirling Discourse Colloquium
CY OCT, 2004
CL Stirling, SCOTLAND
HO Univ Stirling
ID BRAIN-DAMAGE; EMOTIONAL PROSODY; LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS; HEAD MOVEMENTS;
SPEECH; COMMUNICATION; SPEAKING; SPECIALIZATION; ORGANIZATION;
RECOGNITION
AB Background: The assessment and rehabilitation of acquired neurogenic communication disorders rarely involves a systematic analysis of gesture use. The right cerebral hemisphere has been identified as a possible locus of control for gesture. McNeill's (McNeill & Duncan, 2000) growth point theory posits a structure for the organisation of processes from both cerebral hemispheres which serves to support the integration of gestural and verbal messages that emerge from a non- modality specific cognitive growth point or idea unit.
Aims: The first aim of this research was to describe male non-brain-damaged (NBD) speakers' gesture use in the context of spontaneous discourse. The second aim was to compare the gesture production patterns of five individual males with right cerebral hemisphere damage (RHD) with the NBD group's pattern of performance.
Methods & Procedures: Gesture rates and variation of fundamental frequency were analysed across four speaking conditions; a personal narrative, two procedural narratives, two emotional narratives, and three comic book descriptions. The discourse stimuli were selected to elicit highly emotional versus neutral content. Gesture use was classified according to the system described by McNeill (1992) for digital video analysis. Discourse samples were segmented into intonational phrases (Pierrehumbert & Hirschberg, 1990). Gesture rates and variation in fundamental frequency were calculated within intonational phrases.
Outcomes & Results: The NBD group demonstrated higher rates of body beats and head movements in discourse samples with high emotional content. Procedural narratives were accompanied by higher rates of representational gestures than in the other conditions. The RHD participants showed variability in their gesture use across the discourse genres. The majority of RHD participants used lower non-body-focused gesture rates but significantly fewer gestures in the discourse samples with high emotional content. Differences in visuo-spatial ability, variations in fundamental frequency of speech, and body-focused gesture failed to reveal systematic patterns in the RHD participants.
Conclusions: McNeill's (1992) growth point theory provides a useful platform for interpreting the observed reduction in overall frequency of gesture use evident in the RHD participants, but cannot account for the observed interaction involving the emotional narrative. While the impact of emotion on gesture in the non-brain-damaged population was unsurprising, the reversal of this pattern in people with right hemisphere damage poses a challenge for theoretical work in this area. The results of this study indicate that the analysis of gesture use is important for a deeper understanding of expressive communication impairments associated with acquired neurogenic impairment.
C1 Curtin Univ Technol, Sch Psychol, Perth, WA 6845, Australia.
City Univ London, London EC1V 0HB, England.
Univ Western Australia, Perth, WA 6009, Australia.
RP Hird, K (reprint author), Curtin Univ Technol, Sch Psychol, GPO Box U1987, Perth, WA 6845, Australia.
EM K.Hird@curtin.edu.au
CR Alibali MW, 1999, PSYCHOL SCI, V10, P327, DOI 10.1111/1467-9280.00163
BENOWITZ LI, 1983, CORTEX, V19, P5
BLONDER LX, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P318, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1063
BLONDER LX, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1115, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.3.1115
BLONDER LX, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P203, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)00099-B
BLOOM RL, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P1227
Bloom RL, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P11, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00002-5
BOERSMA P, 2002, PRAAT 4 0
Brady M, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P35
Brady M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P881, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000292
Buchanan TW, 2000, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V9, P227, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(99)00060-9
BULL PE, 1977, BRIT J SOC CLIN PSYC, V16, P29
Chantraine Y, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P21, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00003-7
COLSHER PL, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P379, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90134-9
DEKOSKY ST, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V9, P206, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90141-8
Diller L., 1980, METHODS EVALUATION T
Duncan S., 2000, LANGUAGE GESTURE, P141, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620850.010
Dunn JC, 2003, CORTEX, V39, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70070-4
DUNN JC, 1988, PSYCHOL REV, V95, P91, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.95.1.91
Dunn L. M., 1959, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
Feyereisen P, 1999, J NONVERBAL BEHAV, V23, P153, DOI 10.1023/A:1021487510204
Feyereisen P., 1991, GESTURES SPEECH PSYC
FRICK RW, 1985, PSYCHOL BULL, V97, P412, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.97.3.412
George MS, 1996, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V53, P665
Goldin-Meadow S, 2002, COGNITIVE DEV, V17, P1385, DOI 10.1016/S0885-2014(02)00122-3
Goldin-Meadow S, 2001, PSYCHOL SCI, V12, P516, DOI 10.1111/1467-9280.00395
GORELICK PB, 1987, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V50, P553, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.50.5.553
HADAR U, 1983, LANG SPEECH, V26, P117
Hadar U, 1998, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V13, P59, DOI 10.1080/016909698386591
Hadar U, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P107, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1890
Hadar U, 1984, Adv Neurol, V42, P247
HADAR U, 1984, LANG SPEECH, V27, P333
Hadar U, 1999, J NEUROLINGUIST, V12, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(99)00001-9
HIRD K, 2004, AUSTR COMMUNICATION, V6, P63
Hird K, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P536, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2613
Iverson J. M., 1999, J CONSCIOUSNESS STUD, V6, P19
Joanette Y., 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P131
Kendon A., 1996, SEMIOTIC REV BOOKS, V7, P8
KENDON A, 1972, STUDIES DYDAIC COMMU
Kita S, 2003, J MEM LANG, V48, P16, DOI 10.1016/S0749-596X(02)00505-3
KLAPP ST, 1979, MEM COGNITION, V7, P375, DOI 10.3758/BF03196942
Klonoff Pamela S., 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V4, P147, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.4.3.147
Kluver H, 1939, ARCH NEURO PSYCHIATR, V42, P979
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING FORM INTENT
McClave EZ, 2000, J PRAGMATICS, V32, P855, DOI 10.1016/S0378-2166(99)00079-X
MCGLONE RE, 1963, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V6, P164
McNeill D., 1992, HAND MIND WHAT GESTU
MCNEILL D, 2003, THOUGHT IMAGERY LANG
MCNEILL D, 1995, LANGUAGE, GESTURE, AND SPACE, P63
NEIDLE C, 2002, SIGNSTREAM 2 0
Pell MD, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P161, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2065
PIERREHUMBERT J, 1990, INTENTIONS COMMUNICA
POECK K, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V24, P129, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(86)90046-1
PORT RF, 2000, ENCY COGNITIVE SCI
PRUTTING CA, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P105
PULVERMULLER F, 1994, LANG LEARN, V44, P681, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-1770.1994.tb00635.x
RAVEN JC, 1985, STANDARD PROGR MATRI
RISEBOROUGH MG, 1982, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V73, P497
ROSS ED, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P561
ROSS ED, 2001, BEHAV NEUROLOGY
ROSS ED, 1985, PRINCIPLES BEHAV CLI
Ross ED, 1996, PROG BRAIN RES, V107, P583
ROSS ED, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P144
Ross ED, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P27, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1731
Sabbagh MA, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V70, P29, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2139
SAXMAN JH, 1967, FOLIA PHONIATR, V19, P167
SHAPIRO BE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P19, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90118-X
Smith A, 1973, SYMBOL DIGIT MODALIT
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
TONKOVICH J D, 1989, Seminars in Speech and Language, V10, P343, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064273
VANLANCKER D, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P963
Wechsler D, 1997, WECHSLER ADULT INTEL, V3rd
Xue SA, 2001, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V15, P245
NR 73
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-APR
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 3-4
BP 299
EP 319
DI 10.1080/02687030600911393
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VN
UT WOS:000244678800004
ER
PT J
AU Sherratt, S
AF Sherratt, Sue
TI Right brain damage and the verbal expression of emotion: A preliminary
investigation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT Stirling Discourse Colloquium
CY OCT, 2004
CL Stirling, SCOTLAND
HO Univ Stirling
ID RIGHT-HEMISPHERE; DISCOURSE; PERFORMANCE; ADULTS; OLD; AGE;
SPECIALIZATION; IDENTIFICATION; INTONATION; NARRATIVES
AB Background: Emotional expression or evaluation is intrinsically involved in all communication. In discourse, it has the function of expressing the speaker's opinions, building rapport with the listener, and providing a discourse framework. Emotion may be expressed verbally (lexically), nonverbally (e.g., gesture), or extralinguistically (e.g., prosody). Although it has been established that individuals with right brain damage (RBD) are impaired in the comprehension and production of emotion, research to date has focused on nonverbal and extralinguistic channels. The verbal expression of emotion in this population has been investigated in some studies but most of these have used global rating scales. Therefore, data at the verbal or lexical level of emotional expression following RBD are scarce.
Aims: To explore the quantity and type of verbal emotional expression produced by individuals with RBD in their personal experience narratives.
Methods & Procedures: Two personal experience narratives (using a negative and a positive emotional discourse topic) were elicited from a group of 7 males with RBD and a matched group of 10 non-brain-damaged (NBD) males. The discourse samples were transcribed and analysed in terms of the frequency and type of appraisal resources, i.e., the semantic choices made to express emotions, judgements, and valuations, and the way these can be graded (Martin, 2000; Martin & Rose, 2003).
Outcomes & Results: The RBD group used fewer total appraisal resources in the verbal expression of emotion, particularly on the negative topic. Overall, they graded their emotional expression less and evaluated phenomena more than the NBD group. The major differences between the two groups were observed in the proportion of resources used in the negative topic: the RBD group evaluated phenomena more frequently than they expressed their own feelings, whereas the reverse was observed for the NBD group. On the positive topic, both groups used similar proportions of appraisal resources.
Conclusions: This preliminary investigation has revealed that individuals with RBD may be impaired in the quantity and choice of verbal emotional expression produced in personal experience narratives on a negative, but not a positive, topic. The novel application of the appraisal framework to the discourse of this population has indicated that this method has considerable merit in highlighting differences in lexical emotional expression. It can also provide further insight into the assessment and treatment of the interpersonal and social integration deficits observed in individuals with acquired neurogenic disorders.
C1 Univ Newcastle, Sch Humanities & Social Sci, Callaghan, NSW 2308, Australia.
RP Sherratt, S (reprint author), Univ Newcastle, Sch Humanities & Social Sci, Callaghan, NSW 2308, Australia.
EM sue.sherratt@newcastle.edu.au
CR Adams MA, 2002, EUR UROL SUPPL, V1, P28, DOI 10.1016/S1569-9056(02)00011-8
Berthoz S, 2002, INT J PSYCHOL, V37, P193, DOI 10.1080/00207590244000016
Blake Margaret Lehman, 2003, Seminars in Speech and Language, V24, P107
Bloom R. L., 1995, INT J NEUROSCI, V88, P125
BLOOM RL, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P1227
BLOOM RL, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P153, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90122-U
Borgaro SR, 2004, BRAIN INJURY, V18, P33, DOI 10.1080/0269905031000110562
BOROD J, 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LAN
Borod Joan C, 2002, Appl Neuropsychol, V9, P23, DOI 10.1207/S15324826AN0901_4
Borod JC, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V7, P445, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.7.4.445
BOROD JC, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P827, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90086-2
Borod JC, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P351, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00131-X
BOROD JC, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V14, P1
Borod JC, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P1209, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00166-8
Breitenstein C, 1998, BEHAV NEUROL, V11, P29
BROWNELL H, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P476
BRYAN K, 1996, COMMUNICATION DISABI
Canino E, 1999, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V89, P57
CIMINO CR, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V15, P106, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90019-5
Clark HH, 1997, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V23, P567
CORTAZZI M, 2000, EVALUATION TEXT AUTH
Davis GA, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P183
EGGINS S, 2000, RES LANGUAGE SCH COM
EGGINS S, 1979, ANAL CASUAL CONVERSA
Ekman P., 1999, HDB COGNITION EMOTIO
Fivush R., 2003, AUTOBIOGRAPHICAL MEM
FREEDMANSTERN R, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V22, P181, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90089-0
Gainotti G., 1999, HDB CLIN EXPT NEUROP
Galski T, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P769, DOI 10.1080/026990598122160
GARDNER H., 1983, COGNITIVE PROCESSING
Halliday MAK, 2004, INTRO FUNCTIONAL GRA, V3rd
Happe FGE, 1998, DEV PSYCHOL, V34, P358, DOI 10.1037//0012-1649.34.2.358
Heberlein AS, 2003, POLIT PSYCHOL, V24, P705, DOI 10.1046/j.1467-9221.2003.00348.x
Hunston S., 2000, EVALUATION TEXT AUTH
Joanette Y., 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR
Karoly DJ, 2003, CLIMATE RES, V24, P91, DOI 10.3354/cr024091
Kazdin A. E., 1982, SINGLE CASE RES DESI
Kesler West M. L., 2001, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V11, P213
Koven M, 2004, TEXT, V24, P471, DOI 10.1515/text.2004.24.4.471
LABOV W, 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE
Labov W, 1997, J NARRAT LIFE HIST, V7, P395
Labov W., 1972, LANGUAGE INNER CITY
Labov William, 1967, ESSAYS VERBAL VISUAL, P12
Lee Gregory P, 2004, Cogn Behav Neurol, V17, P9, DOI 10.1097/00146965-200403000-00002
Lehman MT, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P485
Longacre Robert, 1976, ANATOMY SPEECH NOTIO
Lorch MP, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P103, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00008-6
LUBINSKI R, 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
Macken-Horarik M., 2003, TEXT, V23, P313, DOI 10.1515/text.2003.013
Macken-Horarik M., 2003, TEXT, V23, P285, DOI DOI 10.1515/TEXT.2003.012
Mackenzie C, 1999, J NEUROLINGUIST, V12, P79, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(99)00004-4
Mackenzie C, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P269, DOI 10.1080/136828200247188
Mandal MK, 1999, J NERV MENT DIS, V187, P603, DOI 10.1097/00005053-199910000-00003
Martin J, 2003, TEXT, V23, P171, DOI 10.1515/text.2003.007
Martin J. R., 2003, WORKING DISCOURSE ME
Martin J. R., 2005, LANGUAGE EVALUATION
MARTIN JR, 2004, LANGUAGE ED DISCOURS
Martin J.R., 2000, EVALUATION TEXT AUTH
Martin JR, 2004, DISCOURSE SOC, V15, P321, DOI 10.1177/0957926504041022
Murphy Linda S, 2003, BMC Complement Altern Med, V3, P3, DOI 10.1186/1472-6882-3-3
MYERS PS, 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DIS
OLDFIELD RC, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V9, P97, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(71)90067-4
*OPCS, 1992, STAND OCC CLASS, V3
PENN C, 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
Peterson C, 1983, DEV PSYCHOLINGUISTIC
PRATT MW, 1991, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V14, P73
REHAK A, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P320, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90104-M
Sarangi S., 2003, TEXT, V23, P165, DOI 10.1515/text.2003.006
SHERRATT SM, 2006, ASHA ANN CONV MIAM B
SHERRATT SM, 2001, THESIS U COLL LONDON
Smith Stephen D, 2005, Brain Cogn, V57, P210, DOI 10.1016/j.bandc.2004.08.046
SOLBERG L, 1990, ASHA CONV SEATTL WA
TANNEN D, 1980, PEAR STORIES COGNITI
Thompson Geoff, 2000, EVALUATION TEXT AUTH
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Ulatowska HK, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P619, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249562
Ulatowska HK, 2004, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V6, P3
VANLANCKER D, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V17, P64, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90067-I
VANLANCKER D, 1998, HDB NEUROLINGUISTICS
VanLancker D, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1850
Wager TD, 2003, NEUROIMAGE, V19, P513, DOI 10.1016/S1053-8199(03)00078-8
Wallace JL, 1999, TRENDS PHARMACOL SCI, V20, P4, DOI 10.1016/S0165-6147(98)01283-8
WECHSLER AF, 1973, NEUROLOGY, V23, P130
White P, 2003, TEXT, V23, P259, DOI 10.1515/text.2003.011
WHITE PRR, 2002, APPRAISAL LANGUAGE A
Wildgruber D, 2004, CEREB CORTEX, V14, P1384, DOI 10.1093/cercor/bhh099
Wildgruber D, 2005, NEUROIMAGE, V24, P1233, DOI 10.1016/j.neuroimage.2004.10.034
NR 87
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-APR
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 3-4
BP 320
EP 339
DI 10.1080/02687030600911401
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VN
UT WOS:000244678800005
ER
PT J
AU Mackenzie, C
Brady, M
Norrie, J
Poedjianto, N
AF Mackenzie, Catherine
Brady, Marian
Norrie, John
Poedjianto, Ninik
TI Picture description in neurologically normal adults: Concepts and topic
coherence
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT Stirling Discourse Colloquium
CY OCT, 2004
CL Stirling, SCOTLAND
HO Univ Stirling
ID CONNECTED SPEECH SAMPLES; HEMISPHERE BRAIN-DAMAGE; NAMING
TEST-PERFORMANCE; DISCOURSE; AGE; EDUCATION; APHASIA; LANGUAGE;
COMMUNICATION; COMPREHENSION
AB Background: Evaluation of discourse is recognised as an important component in the diagnosis and management of adult acquired communication disorders. Picture description is a common and practical data elicitation procedure that has provided insights into the discourse of many adult groups. Such data may be analysed from several linguistic and pragmatic perspectives and, as is commonly the case with discourse measures, the usefulness of such data is limited by a paucity of relevant normative information.
Aim: To determine the influences of age, education, and gender on the concepts and topic coherence of the picture description of non-brain-damaged adults.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 225 adults described the "cookie theft'' picture (Goodglass, Kaplan, & Barresi, 2001). Responses were analysed for presence and completeness of concepts (Nicholas & Brookshire, 1995) and topic coherence (Mentis & Prutting, 1991), modified (Brady, Mackenzie, & Armstrong 2003).
Outcomes & Results: Both analyses, concept and topic coherence, confirmed education level as a highly important variable affecting the performance of non-brain-damaged adults. The number of concepts used accurately and completely, and the amount of topic subdivision, increased with amount of education (both with and without adjustment for age and gender). Clear influences of age or gender were not demonstrated, although some trends in favour of women and younger age were noted, and for one of the seven assessed concepts there was a steady reduction in the odds of being accurate and complete with every 5-year age increase.
Conclusions: Recognition of the impact of education is essential in the assessment and diagnosis of communication difficulty.
C1 Univ Strathclyde, Dept Educ & Profess Studies, Glasgow G13 1PP, Lanark, Scotland.
Glasgow Caledonian Univ, Nursing Midwifery & Allied Hlth Profess Res Unit, Glasgow G4 0BA, Lanark, Scotland.
Univ Aberdeen, Aberdeen AB9 1FX, Scotland.
Nagoya Univ Commerce & Business, Nagoya, Aichi, Japan.
RP Mackenzie, C (reprint author), Univ Strathclyde, Dept Educ & Profess Studies, Southbrae Dr, Glasgow G13 1PP, Lanark, Scotland.
EM c.mackenzie@strath.ac.uk
CR Altman D, 1991, PRACTICAL STAT MED R
Armstrong E, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P875, DOI 10.1080/02687030050127685
ARMSTRONG L, 2007, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P355
Beausoleil N, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P143, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000572
BELAND R, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P359, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249516
Brady M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P881, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000292
Brady M, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687030500141430
Brinton B., 1989, CONVERSATIONAL MANAG
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P399
Ceccaldi M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P75, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0061
Coates J., 1986, WOMEN MEN LANGUAGE
COELHO CA, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P409, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248707
COHEN G, 1979, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V11, P412, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(79)90019-7
Cooper P. V., 1990, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V45, P210
CRAIG HK, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P155, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249503
Deser T., 1990, BRAIN LANG, V40, P67
DIGGS CC, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V30, P130, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90033-2
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
EHRLICH JS, 1988, J COMMUN DISORD, V21, P1, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(88)90006-8
EMERY OB, 1985, EXPT AGING RES, V11, P1
Giles E, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P395, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248419
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Goren AR, 1996, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V31, P153
GOULET P, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P629
Hawkins KA, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1143, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000031
Holland A, 1996, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P27
KAUSLER DH, 1988, COMMUNICATION BEHAVI, P79
LeDorze G, 1998, J COMMUN DISORD, V31, P53, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(97)00051-8
LI EC, 1996, J SPEECH LANGUAGE PA, V20, P180
Mackenzie C, 2000, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V14, P151, DOI 10.1080/026992000298887
Mackenzie C., 1997, RIGHT HEMISPHERE STR
Mackenzie C, 1999, J NEUROLINGUIST, V12, P79, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(99)00004-4
Mackenzie C, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P269, DOI 10.1080/136828200247188
MENN L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248664
NEILS J, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1143
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
OBLER LK, 1980, LANG COMMUN, P75
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P636
OLDFIELD RC, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V9, P97, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(71)90067-4
Paterson L., 2003, SCOTTISH ED 20 CENTU
PATERSON L, 2003, SCOTTISH ED 2 EDITIO
MENTIS M, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P583
Ross KB, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P113, DOI 10.1080/026870399402235
Ross KB, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P115, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00044-7
RYAN EB, 1995, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI, P84
Salthouse T. A., 2000, MODELS COGNITIVE AGI, P19
SCHAIE KW, 1980, LANG COMMUN, P7
SHEWAN CM, 1988, J COMMUN DISORD, V21, P139, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(88)90002-0
Simmons-Mackie NN, 2003, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V12, P144, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2003/061)
Togher L, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P131, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00045-9
TOMPKINS CA, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P113
ULATOWSKA HK, 1991, HDB GERIATRIC COMMUN, P21
WEEKS DJ, 1988, ANOMALOUS SENTENCES
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
NR 54
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-APR
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 3-4
BP 340
EP 354
DI 10.1080/02687030600911419
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VN
UT WOS:000244678800006
ER
PT J
AU Armstrong, L
Brady, M
Mackenzie, C
Norrie, J
AF Armstrong, Linda
Brady, Marian
Mackenzie, Catherine
Norrie, John
TI Transcription-less analysis of aphasic discourse: A clinician's dream or
a possibility?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT Stirling Discourse Colloquium
CY OCT, 2004
CL Stirling, SCOTLAND
HO Univ Stirling
ID HEMISPHERE BRAIN-DAMAGE
AB Background: Discourse analysis as a clinical tool in speech and language therapy remains underused, at least partly because of the time-consuming nature of the process of transcription that currently precedes it. If transcription-less discourse analysis were valid and reliable, then there would be the clinical opportunity to use this method in order to describe a person's communication impairment (for example aphasia), to help plan therapy and to measure outcomes.
Aims: This study aimed to address the potential of transcription-less discourse analysis as a valid and reliable procedure for the measurement of gesture use, topic use, turn taking, repair, conversational initiation, topic initiation, and concept use. Methods & Procedures: Ten individuals with aphasia were audio- and video-recorded participating in a number of discourse tasks from three different discourse genres (conversation, procedural, and picture description). With the same analytical frameworks, the resulting data were compared using transcription-based discourse analysis and a transcription-less method in which the analysis was made directly from the recordings.
Outcomes & Results: Validity was measured by comparing transcription-based and transcription-less analyses. Overall the results from that comparison demonstrated the potential of the latter method-none of the measures gave significant differences between scores from the two methods. The main (non-significant) disparities related tosome aspects of gesture use and repair. The inter-rater reliability of the transcription-less method was also acceptable in general. Reliability was measured by the intraclass correlation coefficient (ICC) for the continuous measurements: it was strongest for the gesture totals and varied among the attributes of turn taking and repair. For the categorical measures (topic and conversation initiation and concept analysis) the percentage agreement was very good.
Conclusions: These results indicate the potential availability of a valid and reliable transcription-less approach to analysis that speech and language therapists can apply to analyse their clients' discourse.
C1 Glasgow Caledonian Univ, Nursing Midwifery & Allied Hlth Profess Res Unit, Glasgow G4 0BA, Lanark, Scotland.
Perth Royal Infirmary, Perth, WA, Australia.
Univ Strathclyde, Glasgow, Lanark, Scotland.
Univ Aberdeen, Aberdeen AB9 1FX, Scotland.
RP Brady, M (reprint author), Glasgow Caledonian Univ, Nursing Midwifery & Allied Hlth Profess Res Unit, Fac Hlth Bldg,Cowcaddens Rd, Glasgow G4 0BA, Lanark, Scotland.
EM m.brady@gcal.ac.uk
CR Altman D, 1991, PRACTICAL STAT MED R
Armstrong E, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P875, DOI 10.1080/02687030050127685
Boles L, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P547, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249557
Boles L, 1998, J COMMUN DISORD, V31, P261, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(98)00005-7
BRADY M, 2001, J LANGUAGE COMMUNICA, V36, P35
Brady M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P881, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000292
Brady M, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687030500141430
Cherney L. S., 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU, P1
COMRIE P, 1999, THESIS U STRATHCLYDE
Comrie P, 2001, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V15, P383, DOI 10.1080/02699200110036380
Fleiss JL, 1981, STAT METHODS RATES P
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Landis J. R., 1977, BIOMETRICS, V33, P174
LEMAY A, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P137
Lesser R., 1993, LINGUISTICS APHASIA
Mackenzie C, 2007, APHASIOLOGY, V21, P340, DOI 10.1080/02687030600911419
Miles Matthew B., 1994, QUALITATIVE DATA ANA
MILROY L, 1992, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V6, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699209208985517
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
Prins R, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1075, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000534
MENTIS M, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P583
PSATHAS G, 1990, SEMIOTICA, V78, P75, DOI 10.1515/semi.1990.78.1-2.75
Royal College of Speech & Language Therapists, 2005, RCSLT CLIN GUID
SAHDDEN BB, 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU, P9
SHERRATT S, 2004, P INT ASS LOG PHON C
Sherratt S, 2007, APHASIOLOGY, V21, P375, DOI 10.1080/02687030600911435
SHROUT PE, 1979, PSYCHOL BULL, V86, P420, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.86.2.420
Togher L, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P131, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00045-9
NR 28
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-APR
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 3-4
BP 355
EP 374
DI 10.1080/02687030600911310
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VN
UT WOS:000244678800007
ER
PT J
AU Sherratt, S
AF Sherratt, Sue
TI Multi-level discourse analysis: A feasible approach
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT Stirling Discourse Colloquium
CY OCT, 2004
CL Stirling, SCOTLAND
HO Univ Stirling
ID ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; ADULTS; APHASIA; SPEECH; AGE; VALIDATION; EDUCATION;
COHESION; LANGUAGE; STORY
AB Background: The analysis of discourse has now become commonplace but the focus continues to be on discrete aspects or levels of discourse processing. Although this has provided the necessary groundwork, investigating the relationships and interconnections between these levels continues to be stressed. Recently, some studies have formulated multi-level discourse-processing theories and models that explain these interrelationships and that identify the sub-processes involved in producing discourse. This study has used one such model to analyse different levels of discourse and investigate the interconnections between them.
Aims: To assess the applicability and utility of using a multi-level discourse-processing model to examine the interaction between levels of discourse produced by individuals without brain damage.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 14 narrative and procedural discourse samples were elicited from 32 non-brain-damaged males of different ages and socioeconomic status groups, yielding a total of 394 samples. These samples were analysed in terms of seven broad features (comprising 23 measures), relating to the levels of the multi-level discourse model. The correlations between these measures were determined using the Spearman's rho correlation test.
Outcomes & Results: From the clustering of correlations, a number of fruitful relationships were revealed. Greater relevance was related to more appropriate discourse grammar as well as greater cohesion and syntactic complexity. Longer samples were correlated with an increased proportion of cohesive ties, cohesive errors, and syntactic complexity. An increase in non-specific elements was related to reduced syntactic complexity and cohesion. A higher occurrence of left-branching clauses was associated with increased dysfluency. These correlations are explained in terms of the multi-level discourse model.
Conclusions: Three conclusions can be drawn. First, using a multi-level discourse-processing model can offer a more realistic perspective of discourse than the analysis of individual aspects. The differential diagnosis of relatively similar discourse impairments (e. g., following head injury, dementia, right brain damage) may ultimately rely on a comparison of the relative deficits at different levels. Second, certain discourse features that can be assessed more objectively (e. g., the number and type of conjunctions) can signal a breakdown at a more conceptual discourse level (e. g., the linking of propositions to each other at a semantic level). Third, these correlations can provide explanatory information regarding more subjective concepts that are difficult to define and measure (e. g., the perception of "relevance'' relates to more structured discourse at the macro and micro level). Although this approach to discourse is challenging, it can provide a starting point for more productive investigations of discourse.
C1 Univ Newcastle, Sch Humanities & Social Sci, Callaghan, NSW 2308, Australia.
RP Sherratt, S (reprint author), Univ Newcastle, Sch Humanities & Social Sci, Callaghan, NSW 2308, Australia.
EM sue.sherratt@newcastle.edu.au
CR Armstrong E, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P875, DOI 10.1080/02687030050127685
CAHFE WL, 1982, SPOKEN WRITTEN LANGU
CHAPMAN SB, 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P125
CHERNEY LR, 1990, THESIS U ILLINOIS EV
CHERNEY LR, 1990, ASHA CONV SEATTL WA
CHEUNG H, 1992, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V13, P53, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400005427
Clark HH, 1997, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V23, P567
Cramer D, 1998, FUNDAMENTAL STAT SOC
CRYSTAL D, 1987, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V1, P7
DEMBOWSKI J, 1989, ASHA NAT CONV ST LOU
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
Doyle PJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P537
Duong A, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V93, P173, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.10.007
Ellis L, 1994, SOCIAL STRATIFICATIO, V2, P145
FINE J, 1995, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V16, P25, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400006408
FNE J, 1999, PSYCHOL REP, V84, P84
Frederiksen C. H., 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR
Frederiksen C. H., 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE
FREDERIKSEN CH, 1991, TEXT TEXT PROCESSING
Grice H. P., 1975, SYNTAX SEMANTICS SPE, V3
GUBARCHUK J, 1997, DISOCURSE PROCESSES, V23, P63
Halliday Michael, 1976, COHESION ENGLISH
HARAVON A, 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL
HEDBERG NL, 1985, COHESIVE TIE ANAL MA
HOLLAND AL, 1990, RES S COMM SCI DIS A
Howell D. C., 1997, STAT METHODS PSYCHOL
HUNT KW, 1970, MONOGR SOC RES CHILD, V35, P1
Jakobson R., 1980, FRAMEWORK LANGUAGE
JOANETTE Y, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P81, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90035-0
Kazdin A. E., 1982, SINGLE CASE RES DESI
KEMPER S, 1989, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V10, P49, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400008419
Kemper S., 1990, EUROPEAN J COGNITIVE, V2, P205, DOI 10.1080/09541449008406205
KEMPER S, 1999, COGNITION AGING SELF
Labov W., 1972, LANGUAGE INNER CITY
LEEPER LH, 1995, FOLIA PHONIATR LOGO, V47, P1
Mackenzie C, 2000, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V14, P151, DOI 10.1080/026992000298887
Mackenzie C, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P269, DOI 10.1080/136828200247188
Maxim J., 1994, LANGUAGE ELDERLY
MCCABE A, 1990, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V11, P73, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400008298
MULLER RA, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249484
Myers P. S., 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE
NICHOLAS M, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P405
Olness GS, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P251, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000723
OLNESS GS, 2004, CLIN APH C PARK CIT
*OPCS, 1992, STAND OCC CLASS, V3
Orange JB, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P172, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2243
Peterson C, 1983, DEV PSYCHOLINGUISTIC
RIPICH DN, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P8
Sherratt S., 2000, 9 INT APH REH C ROTT
Sperber D., 1986, RELEVANCE COMMUNICAT
*SPSS INC, 1999, STAT PROC SOC SCI
Stemmer B, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P402, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2120
Stemmer B., 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LAN
Stemmer B, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P233, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2257
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
ULATOWSKA HK, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V18, P315, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90023-8
Ulatowska HK, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P249, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2261
Wallace JL, 1999, TRENDS PHARMACOL SCI, V20, P4, DOI 10.1016/S0165-6147(98)01283-8
Wirz S. L., 1995, PERCEPTUAL APPROACHE
NR 59
TC 16
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-APR
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 3-4
BP 375
EP 393
DI 10.1080/02687030600911435
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VN
UT WOS:000244678800008
ER
PT J
AU Body, R
AF Body, Richard
TI Decision making and somatic markers in conversation after traumatic
brain injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT Stirling Discourse Colloquium
CY OCT, 2004
CL Stirling, SCOTLAND
HO Univ Stirling
ID IOWA GAMBLING TASK; CLOSED-HEAD-INJURY; FRONTAL-LOBE DAMAGE; PRAGMATIC
LANGUAGE-SKILLS; HUMAN PREFRONTAL CORTEX; CLINICAL NEUROPSYCHOLOGY;
ORBITOFRONTAL CORTEX; DISCOURSE ABILITIES; BEHAVIORAL-CHANGES; SOCIAL
COGNITION
AB Background: Social decision making has been investigated in a range of client groups, resulting in the identification of the ventromedial prefrontal cortex (VMPC) as a significant structure in social decision making and the formulation of the somatic marker hypothesis (Damasio, 1994) to explain some of the mechanisms involved. The vulnerability of the VMPC following traumatic brain injury (TBI) suggests a potential degree of overlap between decision-making research and behaviour observed following TBI. Despite this, relatively little awareness of these concepts is evident in research on TBI in general and on communication after TBI in particular.
Aims: To review the literature on decision making and the mechanisms thought to mediate it. To examine the potential application of decision-making theory to conversational behaviour following TBI.
Main Contribution: The article will highlight the potential role of decision making in conversation, together with the mechanisms that support it, thereby raising awareness among clinicians and researchers of a potentially important contributor to communication after TBI.
Conclusions: Social decision making and the somatic marker hypothesis are important constructs for our understanding of behaviours associated with TBI, including conversation.
C1 Univ Sheffield, Dept Human Commun Sci, Sheffield S10 2TA, S Yorkshire, England.
RP Body, R (reprint author), Univ Sheffield, Dept Human Commun Sci, 31 Claremont Crescent, Sheffield S10 2TA, S Yorkshire, England.
EM r.body@sheffield.ac.uk
CR ADAMS JH, 1985, NEUROPATH APPL NEURO, V11, P299, DOI 10.1111/j.1365-2990.1985.tb00027.x
Adolphs R, 2001, CURR OPIN NEUROBIOL, V11, P231, DOI 10.1016/S0959-4388(00)00202-6
Adolphs R, 1999, TRENDS COGN SCI, V3, P469, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(99)01399-6
Bar-On R, 2003, BRAIN, V126, P1790, DOI 10.1093/brain/awg177
Bechara A, 1998, J NEUROSCI, V18, P428
Bechara A, 2005, TRENDS COGN SCI, V9, P159, DOI 10.1016/j.tics.2005.02.002
Bechara A, 2000, CEREB CORTEX, V10, P295, DOI 10.1093/cercor/10.3.295
Bechara A, 2005, GAME ECON BEHAV, V52, P336, DOI 10.1016/j.geb.2004.06.010
Bechara A, 2004, BRAIN COGNITION, V55, P30, DOI 10.1016/j.bandc.2003.04.001
BECHARA A, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P7, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90018-3
Bechara A, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1690, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00016-7
Bechara A, 2000, BRAIN, V123, P2189, DOI 10.1093/brain/123.11.2189
Bibby H, 2005, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V43, P99, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2004.04.027
Bigler ED, 2001, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V16, P95
Body R, 2005, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V19, P379, DOI 10.1080/02699200400027189
Body R, 1996, BRAIN INJURY, V10, P311, DOI 10.1080/026990596124485
Body R, 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P81
Bond F, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P319, DOI 10.1080/026990597123476
Brown G., 1983, DISCOURSE ANAL
Cavedini P, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P205, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00077-X
Channon Shelley, 2003, Cogn Neuropsychiatry, V8, P243, DOI 10.1080/135468000344000002
CHANNONS, 2005, BRAIN LANGUAGE, V93, P123
Clark H. H., 1996, USING LANGUAGE
Clark L, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V41, P1474, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(03)00081-2
Coelho CA, 1991, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V6, P92, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199106000-00011
COELHO CA, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P471, DOI 10.3109/02699059509008206
COURVILLE J, 1937, PATHOLOGY CENTRAL NE
Croker V, 2005, BRAIN INJURY, V19, P787, DOI 10.1080/02699050500110033
DAMASIO AR, 1991, FRONTAL LOBE FUNCTION AND DYSFUNCTION, P217
DAMASIO AR, 1994, DESCARTER ERROR EMOT
DENESRAJ V, 1994, J PERS SOC PSYCHOL, V66, P819, DOI 10.1037//0022-3514.66.5.819
Dennis M, 2001, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V16, P456, DOI 10.1097/00001199-200110000-00005
Dunn BD, 2006, NEUROSCI BIOBEHAV R, V30, P239, DOI 10.1016/j.neubiorev.2005.07.001
Elliott R, 2000, CEREB CORTEX, V10, P308, DOI 10.1093/cercor/10.3.308
ESLINGER PJ, 1985, NEUROLOGY, V35, P1731
Evans CEY, 2004, BRAIN COGNITION, V54, P240, DOI 10.1016/j.bandc.2004.02.022
Fein G, 2004, ALCOHOL CLIN EXP RES, V28, P1487, DOI 10.1097/01.ALC.0000141642.39065.9B
Fellows LK, 2005, CEREB CORTEX, V15, P58, DOI 10.1093/cercor/bhh108
Friedland D, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P1
Fuster JM, 2001, NEURON, V30, P319, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(01)00285-9
GENTRY LR, 1988, AM J NEURORADIOL, V9, P101
Godfrey HPD, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P433
GOODWIN C, 1990, ANNU REV ANTHROPOL, V19, P283, DOI 10.1146/annurev.an.19.100190.001435
Green REA, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V42, P133, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2003.07.005
Hartley LL., 1995, COGNITIVE COMMUNICAT
HARTMAN A, 1992, CLIN REHABIL, V6, P133, DOI 10.1177/026921559200600207
Hornak J, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P247, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00106-9
HARTLEY L L, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P267, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008097
JOHNSON R, 2002, HEAD INJURY REHABILI, P159
Kleeberg J, 2004, ANN NEUROL, V56, P787, DOI 10.1002/ana.20277
O'Driscoll K, 1998, BRIT MED J, V317, P1673
LEVIN HS, 1987, J NEUROSURG, V66, P706, DOI 10.3171/jns.1987.66.5.0706
Levine B, 2005, COGN BEHAV NEUROL, V18, P45, DOI 10.1097/01.wnn.0000152227.13001.c3
Lieberman MD, 2000, PSYCHOL BULL, V126, P109, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.126.1.109
Macmillan M., 2000, ODD KIND FAME STORIE
Maguire EA, 1999, BRAIN, V122, P1839, DOI 10.1093/brain/122.10.1839
Maia TV, 2004, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V101, P16075, DOI 10.1073/pnas.0406666101
Manes F, 2002, BRAIN, V125, P624, DOI 10.1093/brain/awf049
MCDONALD S, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P28, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1003
McDonald S., 2005, BRAIN IMPAIR, V6, P56, DOI 10.1375/brim.6.1.56.65481
MCDONALD S, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P255, DOI 10.3109/02699059509008197
McDonald S, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V18, P572, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.18.3.572
MCDONALD S, 1992, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V13, P295, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400005658
McDonald S, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P88, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1846
MCDONALD S, 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P19
Milders M, 2003, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V25, P157, DOI 10.1076/jcen.25.2.157.13642
Monterosso J, 2001, ADDICTION, V96, P1825, DOI 10.1046/j.1360-0443.2001.9612182512.x
Pearce S, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V38, P150, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1998.1018
Perkins M. R., 1995, CASE STUDIES CLIN LI, P293
PERKINS MR, 2002, INVESTIGATIONS CLIN, P2
Rahman S, 2001, TRENDS COGN SCI, V5, P271, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(00)01650-8
Rios M, 2004, BRAIN INJURY, V18, P257, DOI 10.1080/02699050310001617442
Ritter LM, 2004, SCHIZOPHR RES, V68, P65, DOI 10.1016/S0920-9964(03)00086-0
Rogers RD, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOPHARMACOL, V20, P322, DOI 10.1016/S0893-133X(98)00091-8
SAVER JL, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P1241, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(91)90037-9
Shurman B, 2005, SCHIZOPHR RES, V72, P215, DOI 10.1016/j.schres.2004.03.020
Snow P, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P911, DOI 10.1080/026990598121981
Spell LA, 2000, J NONVERBAL BEHAV, V24, P285, DOI 10.1023/A:1006675230193
Spikman JM, 1996, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V18, P755, DOI 10.1080/01688639608408298
Stuss DT, 2002, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V53, P401, DOI 10.1146/annurev.psych.53.100901.135220
Tate RL, 1999, PSYCHOL MED, V29, P713, DOI 10.1017/S0033291799008466
TOPLAK ME, 2005, BEHAV BRAIN FUNCTION, V1
Tranel D, 2002, CORTEX, V38, P589, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70024-8
Turnbull OH, 2005, BRAIN COGNITION, V57, P244, DOI 10.1016/j.bandc.2004.08.053
Whitlow CT, 2004, DRUG ALCOHOL DEPEN, V76, P107, DOI 10.1016/j.drugalcdep.2004.04.009
Ylvisaker M., 1998, COLLABORATIVE BRAIN
NR 86
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-APR
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 3-4
BP 394
EP 408
DI 10.1080/02687030600911450
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VN
UT WOS:000244678800009
ER
PT J
AU Murray, L
Timberlake, A
Eberle, R
AF Murray, Laura
Timberlake, Anne
Eberle, Rebecca
TI Treatment of underlying forms in a discourse context
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LINGUISTIC SPECIFIC TREATMENT; AGRAMMATIC APHASIA; SYNTACTIC COMPLEXITY;
SENTENCE PRODUCTION; MOVEMENT STRUCTURES; VERB RETRIEVAL; WH-MOVEMENT;
MEMORY; MODEL; INFORMATIVENESS
AB Background: Previous research indicates that Thompson and colleagues' ( Thompson, 2001; Thompson & Shapiro, 2005) Treatment of Underlying Forms (TUF) can efficiently remediate agrammatic sentence-processing deficits. The theoretical basis of TUF is that training production of complex, noncanonical sentence structures can concomitantly improve production of untrained, syntactically related but simpler sentence structures. Whereas this generalisation to untrained syntactic forms has been well established within constrained, sentence-level tasks, which exploit the same response modality used during training, TUF's generalisation potential in terms of cross-modal effects and discourse-level improvements requires further exploration.
Aims: DM, a 52-year-old male with an agrammatic Broca's aphasia profile, was provided with a modified version of TUF, which targeted his writing skills and included a Discourse Training Module that allowed direct rehearsal of targeted syntactic frames within a discourse context. The hypotheses tested were as follows: (a) DM would improve his written production of trained sentence structures and demonstrate generalisation to untrained exemplars of targeted sentence structures as well as untrained, syntactically related syntactic structures; (b) written sentence production treatment would facilitate gains in DM's spoken production of trained and related, untrained sentence structures; and (c) DM would exhibit improved sentence production abilities in discourse post-treatment.
Methods & Procedures: A single subject, multiple baseline across-behaviours design was implemented to evaluate acquisition of trained sentence types (object- and subject-extracted embedded who-question sentences), to discern generalisation to untrained sentence types (object- and subject-extracted matrix questions, passives) and discourse, or both, and to identify maintenance of treatment effects. Each week, DM completed two 90-minute sessions of modified TUF as well as written sentence production homework.
Outcomes & Results: DM displayed a pattern of sentence acquisition typical of TUF recipients, generalising gains in complex sentence production to the production of untrained, less complex, theoretically related structures. Gains in written production generalised to spoken production of the same structures, and improvements across predominately pragmatic versus morphosyntactic discourse variables were also noted.
Conclusions: The treatment outcomes of a modified, written version of TUF were comparable to those in previous studies (e. g., Ballard & Thompson, 1999), and indicated that training written sentence production can evoke substantial cross-modal generalisation to speech. Despite inclusion of a Discourse Training Module, pragmatic versus morphosyntactic aspects of DM's discourse showed most improvement. Therefore, continued investigation of TUF is recommended to determine whether it can efficiently treat structural aspects of discourse production, or what modifications will ensure generalisation to discourse contexts in a broader spectrum of aphasic patients.
C1 Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
RP Murray, L (reprint author), Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 200 S Jordan Ave, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
EM lmurray@indiana.edu
CR Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
Bastiaanse R., 2002, VERB SENTENCE TEST
Beeson PM, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P1038, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/083)
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Brookshire R. H., 1997, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
Cherney L. S., 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU, P1
CRAIK FIM, 1972, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V11, P671, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(72)80001-X
Dabul B, 2000, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL, V2nd
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
FREEDMAN JC, 1964, J ABNORMAL SOC PSYCH, V68, P262
Gibson E, 1998, COGNITION, V68, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(98)00034-1
Gierut JA, 2001, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V32, P229, DOI 10.1044/0161-1461(2001/021)
Grodzinsky Y., 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P467
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
Hammill D., 1994, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Jacobs BJ, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P115, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2452
Jacobs BJ, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P5
Kearns K. P., 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P223
KEARNS KP, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V14, P196
KIESLER CA, 1966, J PERS SOC PSYCHOL, V3, P349, DOI 10.1037/h0022943
Kim M, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00147-0
KIRAN S, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P602
Lewis RL, 2005, COGNITIVE SCI, V29, P375, DOI 10.1207/s15516709cog0000_25
LI EC, 1996, J SPEECH LANGUAGE PA, V20, P180
Maas E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P609, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000266
MAUNER G, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P340, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1050
MITCHUM CC, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P71, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249500
Murray L, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P785, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000273
Murray LL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P585
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Peach RK, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P429, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000147
Richards K, 2002, J REHABIL RES DEV, V39, P445
RICHARDS SB, 1999, SINGLE SUBJECT RES A
ROBERTSON IH, 1994, TEST EVERDAY ATTENTI
Robson J, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P471, DOI 10.1080/13682820110089371
Rose M, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1001, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000825
Rose M., 2006, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V8, P92, DOI 10.1080/14417040600657948
Ross KB, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P113, DOI 10.1080/026870399402235
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SHADDEN BB, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P327
Thompson CK, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P661
Thompson C. K., 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P124
Thompson CK, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P175, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0009
THOMPSON CK, 1996, UNPUB NW SENTENCE CO
Thompson CK, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P228
Thompson CK, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P591, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/047)
Thompson CK, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, p[605, 612]
Thompson CK, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P1021, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000227
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
Wambaugh JL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P965
Wambaugh JL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P603
NR 51
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 2
BP 139
EP 163
DI 10.1080/02687030601026530
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VM
UT WOS:000244678700001
ER
PT J
AU Marini, A
Caltagirone, C
Pasqualetti, P
Carlomagno, S
AF Marini, Andrea
Caltagirone, Carlo
Pasqualetti, Patrizio
Carlomagno, Sergio
TI Patterns of language improvement in adults with non-chronic non-fluent
aphasia after specific therapies
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE PRODUCTION; CONNECTED SPEECH; REFERENTIAL COMMUNICATION;
QUANTITATIVE-ANALYSIS; AGRAMMATIC APHASIA; BROCAS APHASIA; RECOVERY;
COMPREHENSION; RETRIEVAL; DISCOURSE
AB Background: Methods for functional and linguistic analysis of discourse have been used for describing recovery from aphasia and examining relationships between patterns of recovery and specific therapeutic programmes. This approach, however, has mainly concerned therapeutic programmes for chronic aphasic symptoms (e. g., therapy for chronic agrammatism in non-fluent aphasic subjects).
Aims: The first aim of this study was to examine whether functional and linguistic analyses of discourse are suitable to describe aspects of language improvement in subjects recovering from non-fluent aphasia in the first months post-onset. A second objective was to assess the effectiveness of two therapy programmes for chronic aphasia in increasing informativeness and/or morpho-syntactic organisation of connected speech. This was made by examining in-depth the correspondence between each of the two therapy programmes and the results from functional and linguistic analysis of discourse at pre- and post-therapy evaluation.
Methods & Procedures: Three subjects with non-fluent aphasia (12, 18, and 22 weeks post-onset, respectively), whose speech was characterised by reduced information content and poor morpho-syntactic organisation, received two consecutive therapy programmes, each consisting of 35 one-hour sessions in seven weeks. The first programme consisted of stimulus-response exercises for producing well-formed sentences (HELPSS, Helm-Estabrooks, Fitzpatrick, & Barresi, 1981). This was followed by a functional treatment programme in PACE format (Carlomagno, Losanno, Emanuelli, & Razzano, 1991) intended to increase informativeness of communicative (verbal and non-verbal) behaviour. At the three assessments (before and after HELPSS and after modified PACE) the three participants were asked to describe two cartoon stories and two single pictures. These connected speech samples underwent functional analysis (CIUs, Nicholas & Brookshire, 1993; Main Concept Analysis, Nicholas & Brookshire, 1995) and linguistic analysis (Marini, Caltagirone, Carlomagno, & Nocentini, 2005a; Marini, Boewe, Caltagirone, & Carlomagno, 2005b) in order to examine the pattern of language recovery. The three participants also received functional evaluation with the EFCP (Wirz, Skinner, & Dean, 1990) for assessing changes in language performance in communicative interaction. At the beginning and end of the therapy period, further evaluation was performed by means of standardised aphasia tests (AAT, Italian version, Luzzatti, Willems, & DeBleser, 1991; CADL, Italian version, Pizzamiglio et al., 1984).
Outcomes & Results: Following the therapy programmes, a few changes were observed on standard aphasia tests. However, the informativeness of the speech samples by the three subjects increased. This corresponded to better rating of their language in the EFCP interview. In two subjects, the linguistic analysis of connected speech samples failed to show consistent syntactic organisation at the post-therapy evaluation and differences between effects of the two programmes were marginal. In the third, the pattern of recovery did not correspond closely to that predicted by the type of treatment, i.e., better syntactic organisation of speech output became evident only after the second therapy programme.
Conclusions: It is suggested that discourse analysis methods are useful for studying functional and linguistic aspects of recovery in subjects with non-fluent aphasia in the early post-onset period. Furthermore, in this period, specific therapy for chronic agrammatic symptoms may not reduce them. Nonetheless, this therapeutic approach plays a role in improving language informativeness particularly when combined with a functional approach.
C1 Univ Udine, IRCCS E Med La Nostra Famiglia, San Vito al Tagliamento, UD, Italy.
IRCCS Santa Lucia, Rome, Italy.
AfAr Osped Fatebenefratelli Isola Tiberina, Ctr Stat Med, Rome, Italy.
IRCCS S Giovanni di Dio Fatebenefratelli, Brescia, Italy.
RP Marini, A (reprint author), Univ Udine, Cattedra Fondamenti Anat Fisiol Attiv Psich, Via T Petracco 8, I-33100 Udine, Italy.
EM andrea.marini@uniud.it
RI Caltagirone, Carlo/B-4930-2013; Pasqualetti, Patrizio/D-4496-2013
CR Armstrong E, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P875, DOI 10.1080/02687030050127685
Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
BASSO A, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P190
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P197, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1799
Beyn E.-S., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P96
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P399
BYNG S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P241, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248993
Carlomagno S, 2001, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V82, P1073, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2001.25155
CARLOMAGNO S, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P419, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248544
Carlomagno S, 1994, PRAGMATIC APPROACHES
Carlomagno S, 2005, CORTEX, V41, P520, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70192-8
CORREIA L, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P713
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
DOYLE PJ, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P143
Goodglass H., 1972, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP
Hadar U, 1997, SEMIOTICA, V115, P147, DOI 10.1515/semi.1997.115.1-2.147
Haravon A., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL, P47
HARTMAN J, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P646
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V46, P422
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P39
Herbert R, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P1163, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000454
HOLLAND A, 1990, HDN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
HUBER W, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90069-4
Jakobs B. J., 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P115
KERTESZ A, 1977, BRAIN, V100, P1, DOI 10.1093/brain/100.1.1
KERTESZ A, 1982, W APHASIS BATTERY
KOLK H, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P89, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409381
Larfeuil C, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P783, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250456
Linebarger MC, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P267, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000537
Linebaugh CW, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249555
Luzzatti C., 1991, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Marini A, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V93, P46, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.08.002
Marini A, 2005, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V34, P439, DOI 10.1007/s10936-005-6203-z
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
MAZZONI M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P387, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248609
MICELI G, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P65, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90056-1
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
MURRAY LL, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P397, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248212
Nespoulous J. L., 1986, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL T
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
PIZZAMIGLIO L, 1984, Archivio di Psicologia Neurologia e Psichiatria, V45, P187
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Rochon E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P193, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2285
Ross KB, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P113, DOI 10.1080/026870399402235
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
SHEWAN CM, 1988, J COMMUN DISORD, V21, P103, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(88)90001-9
SHEWAN CM, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P272, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90068-3
SKINNER C, 1984, EDINBURGH FUNCTIONAL
Springer L, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P279
Thompson CK, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P175, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0009
THOMPSON CK, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P201, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1045
THOMPSON CK, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P111, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249501
WERTZ RT, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P580
WILLMES K, 1984, NERVENARZT, V55, P62
Wirz SL, 1990, REVISED EDINBURGH FU
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
NR 60
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 2
BP 164
EP 186
DI 10.1080/02687030600633799
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VM
UT WOS:000244678700002
ER
PT J
AU Mahendra, N
Arkin, SM
Kim, ES
AF Mahendra, Nidhi
Arkin, Sharon M.
Kim, Esther S.
TI Individuals with Alzheimer's disease achieve implicit and explicit
learning: Previous success replicated with different stimuli
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SEMANTIC MEMORY IMPAIRMENT; DEMENTIA; INTERVENTIONS; KNOWLEDGE;
ACTIVATION; EXERCISE
AB Background: This study is a replication and extension of a verbal learning experiment reported in this journal (Arkin, Rose, & Hopper, 2000) with individuals who had Alzheimer's disease (AD). Those participants demonstrated implicit and explicit learning of exemplars from an inanimate semantic category ( items people wear).
Aims: The purpose of this study was to examine the effects of repeated exposure to animal exemplars on implicit and explicit learning of 13 individuals with mild to moderate dementia due to AD (of which 7 also participated in the earlier study).
Methods and Procedures: Following 18-20 60-second baseline fluency tests of the target category "animals'', participants engaged in eight sessions of a picture naming and related quiz exercise (study task) that contained 34 words from the target category (exposure words). One hour after each study task session, the fluency test used at baseline was re-administered (experimental fluency test (EFT)).
Outcomes and Results: On the study task, the group achieved a significant improvement in the number of correct answers from the first to their best and to their eighth trial (evidence of explicit learning). On the EFTs, 10 of the 13 AD participants produced one or more exposure words never named during the baseline fluency tests (evidence of implicit learning), and 12 out of 13 participants produced novel words that were not exposure words and not produced at baseline (evidence of spreading activation). Additionally, the explicit learning performance of the seven individuals who participated in our earlier study and in this study were compared for the "items people wear'' (nonliving) and "animals'' (living) categories. This comparison revealed a significantly greater improvement in naming performance from the first to the best study task trials for the "items people wear'' (nonliving) category than for the animals (living) category.
Conclusions: Results suggest that repeated exposure to and practice in retrieving category exemplars facilitate short-term (over a 1-hour time interval) implicit and explicit learning and semantic activation in AD participants with very mild to moderately severe dementia. Future directions include exploring the length of time over which this explicit and implicit learning is maintained post-intervention. The differential learning curve for living versus nonliving exemplars observed here is suggestive and requires further investigation under more rigorous conditions.
C1 Calif State Univ East Bay, East Bay, CA USA.
Univ Arizona, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Mahendra, N (reprint author), 4349 Santee Rd, Fremont, CA 94555 USA.
EM nidhi.mahendra@csueastbay.edu
CR American Psychiatric Association. DI, 1994, DIAGNOSTIC STAT MANU
ARKIN S, 2005, LANGUAGE ENRICHED CL
ARKIN S, 1994, 3 INT PRACT ASP MEM
Arkin S, 2000, AM J ALZHEIMERS DIS, V15, P152, DOI 10.1177/153331750001500301
Arkin SM, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V11, P273, DOI 10.1080/09602010143000059
Arkin SM, 1999, GERONTOLOGIST, V39, P729
Arkin SM, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P723
Baddeley A., 2002, EPISODIC MEMORY NEW, P1
Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
Bayles KA, 2003, J COMMUN DISORD, V36, P327, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(03)00047-9
BAYLES KA, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P98, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90057-3
BERG L, 1988, PSYCHOPHARMACOL BULL, V24, P637
Bird M, 1996, PSYCHOL AGING, V11, P45, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.11.1.45
Brustrom JE, 1996, AGING NEUROPSYCHOL C, V3, P56, DOI 10.1080/13825589608256612
Camp C. J., 1996, PROSPECTIVE MEMORY T, P351
Camp C. J., 1998, CLIN GERONTOLOGIST, V19, P51, DOI 10.1300/J018v19n01_05
COLLINS AM, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P407, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.82.6.407
Daum I, 1996, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V18, P648, DOI 10.1080/01688639608408289
Folstein MF, 1975, J PSYCHIATR RES, V12, P198
Garrard P, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P633, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.4.633
GLISKY EL, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P893, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(87)90094-7
GREEN RL, 1992, HUMAN MEMORY
HOPPER T, 2005, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V13, pR17
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
LIPINSKA B, 1994, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V16, P809, DOI 10.1080/01688639408402695
Lustig C, 2004, NEURON, V42, P865, DOI 10.1016/j.neuron.2004.04.002
Mahendra Nidhi, 2004, Seminars in Speech and Language, V25, P151
Mahendra N, 2003, J COMMUN DISORD, V36, P395, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(03)00048-0
Maki PM, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V10, P464
MARTIN A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P124, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90059-7
MAURI A, 1994, J CLIN EXPT NEUROPSY, V15, P685
Montanes P, 1995, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V1, P39
MORRIS JC, 1989, NEUROLOGY, V39, P1159
Rand-Giovannetti E, 2006, NEUROBIOL AGING, V27, P173, DOI 10.1016/j.neurobiolaging.2004.12.013
REICHARD CC, 1995, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V17, P325, DOI 10.1080/01688639508405126
SCHACTER DL, 1985, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V7, P79, DOI 10.1080/01688638508401243
SCHACTER DL, 1987, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V13, P501, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.13.3.501
Seger CA, 1998, HDB IMPLICIT LEARNIN, P295
SILVERI MC, 1991, NEUROLOGY, V41, P545
SLAMECKA NJ, 1978, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V4, P592, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.4.6.592
SQUIRE LR, 1987, MEMORY BRAIN, P151
Tippett LJ, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P143
TULVING E, 1972, ORG MEMEORY
Vaidya C. J., 1996, Society for Neuroscience Abstracts, V22, P1449
Vanholder R, 1998, EUR J DERMATOL, V8, P4
WARRINGTON EK, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P829, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.3.829
Zacks R. T., 2000, HDB AGING COGNITION, P293
Zakzanis KK, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REV, V13, P1, DOI 10.1023/A:1022318921994
NR 49
TC 2
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 2
BP 187
EP 207
DI 10.1080/02687030600647922
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VM
UT WOS:000244678700003
ER
PT J
AU Luck, AM
Rose, ML
AF Luck, Amy M.
Rose, Miranda L.
TI Interviewing people with aphasia: Insights into method adjustments from
a pilot study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COMMUNICATION; PARTNERS; FAMILIES; SPEAKING; SPOUSES; ADULTS; LIFE
AB Background: An increasing number of researchers are using qualitative methods to study the impact of aphasia. However, there is a paucity of published research outlining if and how qualitative interview methods are altered with participants with aphasia, and how potential modifications impact on the rigour of such research.
Aims: In a qualitative, pilot study we investigated (1) What services do males in Victoria with mild chronic aphasia perceive could be provided by the Australian Aphasia Association? (2) How is qualitative in-depth interviewing method altered to accommodate the communicative difficulties experienced by people with aphasia? This paper reports on the second aim.
Methods and Procedures: A qualitative phenomenological approach was adopted. Purposeful sampling was used to obtain four participants with mild chronic aphasia across the variables of geographical location and employment status at time of stroke. An interview guide was devised and refined with a fifth pilot participant. Interviews were videotaped to allow for transcription of total communication strategies and 20% of transcriptions were verified by an expert in aphasia.
Outcomes and Results: When using the traditional open-ended, non-directive approach to qualitative interviewing, very little information was obtained from the pilot participant. The results from four further participants revealed that with participants with aphasia, the researcher is required to step out of the traditional role of the qualitative interviewer by altering questioning style, offering ideas to participants, and using supportive conversation techniques. Strategies used by participants require that interviews be videotaped so that the meaning of the total communication strategies used can be verified.
Conclusions: Valuable data can be obtained from participants with aphasia when the interview method is altered appropriately to meet their communicative needs. The study highlights implications for enhancing rigour in qualitative interviews with people with aphasia.
C1 La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3086, Australia.
RP Rose, ML (reprint author), La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3086, Australia.
EM m.rose@latrobe.edu.au
CR ANDERSON CS, 1993, MED J AUSTRALIA, V158, P80
*AUSTR APH ASS, 2002, CONST AUSTR APH ASS
Bernicot J, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P245
Braunack-Mayer A, 2001, J CLIN ETHIC, V12, P388
BRUMFITT S, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687039308248631
Croteau C, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P291, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000616
Cunningham R, 1998, DISABIL REHABIL, V20, P346
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P651
DAMICO JS, 1995, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V23, P84
Elman RJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P411
Elman RJ, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P77
Fontana A., 2000, HDB QUALITATIVE RES, P361
HERRMANN M, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P527, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248505
Hersh D, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P80
Hilari K, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000725
Ireland C, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P585
JONES J, 1992, COLL SPEECH LANGUAGE, V478, P6
KAGAN A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P1
Kendon Adam, 1988, CROSS CULTURAL PERSP, P131
KERTESZ A, 1982, W APHAISIA BATTERY
LeDorze G, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P550
LEDROZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P229
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Michallet B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P835, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000238
Minichiello V., 1995, DEPTH INTERVIEWING
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
PARR S, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P223, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248197
Parr S., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P55
Parr S, 2001, FOLIA PHONIATR LOGO, V53, P266, DOI 10.1159/000052681
Portney LG., 2000, FDN CLIN RES APPL PR
Rose M., 2006, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V8, P92, DOI 10.1080/14417040600657948
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P807
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P248
WESTBY C., 1990, J CHILDHOOD COMMUNIC, V13, P101
Zemva N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P219, DOI 10.1080/026870399402190
NR 36
TC 23
Z9 23
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 2
BP 208
EP 224
DI 10.1080/02687030601065470
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VM
UT WOS:000244678700004
ER
PT J
AU Marshall, RS
Barnes, JK
AF Marshall, Rebecca Shisler
Barnes, Jennifer K.
TI The impact of directed vision in auditory extinction: Preliminary
evidence in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ATTENTION; NEGLECT; AWARENESS; BINDING
AB Background: Researchers have discovered that individuals with aphasia demonstrate deficits in auditory attention (McNeil, Odell, & Tseng, 1991; Murray, 2000), which arguably impedes rehabilitation progress. Additionally, recent research suggests that altering non-brain-damaged individuals' visual attention may work to increase auditory attention (Rorden & Driver, 1999).
Aims: In the present study, tasks for assessing extinction (Double Simultaneous Stimulation) were used to determine if directing eye gaze would increase auditory extinction performance for individuals with aphasia. It was hypothesised that directing a patient's eye gaze (visual attention) to the extinguished (omitted) side during the task would "cue'' the patient to the side omitted, thereby increasing performance on the auditory task.
Methods & Procedures: Five individuals with aphasia (M=71.6 years) and five healthy controls (M=77.8 years) completed three auditory tasks to test for extinction: two baseline (Letter(1) and Letter(2)) and one experimental (Look). All three tasks required participants to identify and localise the letters presented; however, in the experimental task the participants were directed to look at the sound source (a speaker) on the side where the omission errors were occurring.
Outcomes & Results: While participants with aphasia made more omission errors (extinction) than the control group, performance was not altered by static directed visual attention to the side of omissions. Although preliminary, these data suggest that auditory extinction may not decrease in individuals with aphasia similar to findings by Robin and Rizzo (1989).
Conclusions: These data provide preliminary results that, while auditory extinction may be evident in individuals with aphasia, simply directing their vision to a given location may not lead to increased performance. Further research in this area can lead to advancements in theoretical and functional assessment for individuals with aphasia who have auditory attention and require speech-language pathology intervention.
C1 Univ Georgia, Biomed & Hlth Sci Inst, Athens, GA 30602 USA.
Childrens Healthcare Atlanta, Atlanta, GA USA.
RP Marshall, RS (reprint author), Univ Georgia, Biomed & Hlth Sci Inst, 570 F Aderhold Hall, Athens, GA 30602 USA.
EM rshisler@uga.edu
CR Baylis GC, 2001, VIS COGN, V8, P359
Cusack R, 2000, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V12, P1056, DOI 10.1162/089892900563867
Deouell LY, 2000, NEUROREPORT, V11, P3059, DOI 10.1097/00001756-200009110-00046
DRIVER J, 1994, ATTENTION PERFORM, V15, P311
Driver J, 2001, COGNITION, V79, P39, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(00)00124-4
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
Molloy D., 1999, STANDARDIZED MINI ME
Muntner P, 2002, STROKE, V33, P1209, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000015031.57955.D1
Murray LL, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P40, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2281
OKITA T, 1993, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V30, P359, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1993.tb02057.x
Pantev C, 1996, HEARING RES, V100, P164, DOI 10.1016/0378-5955(96)00124-4
POSNER MI, 1984, J NEUROSCI, V4, P1863
POSNER MI, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P135, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(87)90049-2
ROBIN D. A., 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P61
Rorden C, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V37, P357, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00072-4
Shisler RJ, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P633, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000930
Shisler RJ, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V42, P836, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2003.06.001
Soroker N, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P249, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(96)00038-3
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
NR 19
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 2
BP 225
EP 234
DI 10.1080/02687030500532810
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VM
UT WOS:000244678700005
ER
PT J
AU Marshall, RC
Capilouto, GJ
McBride, JM
AF Marshall, Robert C.
Capilouto, Gilson J.
McBride, Jennifer M.
TI Treatment of problem solving in Alzheimer's disease: A short report
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SEMANTIC MEMORY; DEMENTIA; ADULTS; FLUENCY
AB Background: Treatments to help persons with Alzheimer's disease ( AD) improve and/or compensate for deteriorating functional abilities have largely focused on cognitive rather than executive functions. Problem solving is an executive function integral to most activities of daily living that is compromised by AD. Successful treatment of problem-solving deficits in persons with AD could potentially increase the amount of time a patient might remain at home by maintaining functional skills and possible delay institutionalisation.
Aims: This preliminary experimental study sought to determine the effects of treatment on problem solving by three participants with a diagnosis of AD.
Methods & Procedures: The study used a multiple probe design across participants. A single dependent variable, percentage of constraint questions, was used to measure the effects of treatment on solving of problems from the Rapid Assessment of Problem Solving Test ( RAPS; Marshall, Karow, Morelli, Iden, & Dixon, 2003a). Problems on the RAPS require the individual to identify a target picture in a 32-picture array by asking yes/no questions, and the goal is to do this by asking as few questions as possible. Following baseline, participants were treated individually over 12 sessions. Treatment demonstrated how constraint questions ( questions that eliminate more that one item from consideration regardless of whether they are answered yes or no) rather than guesses were useful in solving word problems that mimicked those of the RAPS. Additional probe measures, also using problems from the RAPS, were obtained throughout treatment, and 2 and 4 weeks after treatment (maintenance).
Outcomes and Results: All participants increased their asking of constraint questions and decreased guessing from baseline. These increases were apparent during treatment and maintenance. Improvement following treatment was due to participant's use of categorisation skills to ask constraint questions instead of guessing.
Conclusions: Improvements in solving problems of the RAPS were attained for all participants with only 12 brief treatment sessions. The treatment provided was relatively passive, participants were not trained to criterion levels, and all participants were treated identically. That treatment led to increased use of categorisation strategies by the participants is promising, categorisation skills often being compromised in AD. Results suggest that components of executive functions such as problem solving may be amenable to treatment in persons with AD, and that there is a need to generate testable hypotheses regarding treatment of problem solving by AD patients in the future.
C1 Univ Kentucky, Dept Rehabil Sci, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
RP Marshall, RC (reprint author), Univ Kentucky, Dept Rehabil Sci, 900 S Limestone,CTW 120F, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
EM rcmarsh@uky.edu
CR Allen G. J., 1976, COMMUNITY PSYCHOL SC
BADDELEY A, 1992, SCIENCE, V255, P556, DOI 10.1126/science.1736359
Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
Bayles KA, 2003, J COMMUN DISORD, V36, P327, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(03)00047-9
BAYLES KA, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P498, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90158-D
BINETTI G, 1995, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V17, P82, DOI 10.1080/13803399508406584
BLESSED G, 1968, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V114, P797, DOI 10.1192/bjp.114.512.797
BORKOWSK.JG, 1967, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V5, P135, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(67)90015-2
BOURGEOIS MS, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P831
Brookshire RH, 2003, INTRO NEUROGENIC COM
CHAN AS, 1993, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V5, P254, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1993.5.2.254
Cummings J. L., 1983, DEMENTIA CLIN APPROA
Folstein MF, 1975, J PSYCHIATR RES, V12, P198
FREEDMAN M, 1986, CAN J NEUROL SCI, V13, P410
GLICKSTEIN J, 1997, THERAPEUTIC INTERVEN
GOLPER LA, 1983, LANGUAGE HANDICAPS A, P119
Hough MS, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P589, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000110
Kafer K L, 1997, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V3, P108
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kuhn D., 1999, ALZHEIMERS EARLY STA
Lezak M., 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY ASSE
LUBINSKI R, 1995, DEMENETIA COMMUNICAT
Mahendra Nidhi, 2001, Seminars in Speech and Language, V22, P291, DOI 10.1055/s-2001-17427
MARSHALL RC, IN PRESS SCHIZOPHREN
Marshall RC, 2003, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V12, P333, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2003/079)
Marshall RC, 2003, BRAIN INJURY, V17, P589, DOI 10.1080/0269905031000088496
MCEVOY CL, 1986, GERONTOLOGIST, V26, P475
Murray L. L., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P55
Murray Laura L., 2000, Seminars in Speech and Language, V21, P153, DOI 10.1055/s-2000-7562
Phillips L. H., 1997, METHODOLOGY FRONTAL, P191
Purdy M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P549, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000176
RAU MT, 1993, COPING CHALLENGES AL
Raven J. C, 1965, COLORED PROGRESSIVE
SELINGER M, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P165, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249504
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
SOMMERS LM, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P573, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248508
Tappen R., 1997, INTERVENTIONS ALZHEI
YVLISAKER M, 1998, COLLABORATIVE BRAIN
NR 38
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 2
BP 235
EP 247
DI 10.1080/02687030600624400
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 142VM
UT WOS:000244678700006
ER
PT J
AU Bunning, K
Horton, S
AF Bunning, Karen
Horton, Simon
TI 'Border crossing'' as a route to inclusion: A shared cause with people
with a learning disability?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID QUALITY-OF-LIFE; APHASIA; HEALTH; RIGHTS; CARE
AB Background: A raft of legislation and social policy has been published in the United Kingdom to progress social inclusion for people with disabilities. Access and participation are central to the notion of inclusive living, which is about being part of a community that is sensitive to the ways of living and the needs of all its members. However, having a disability means that opportunities are not dealt out in equal measure and occupying a "place in society'' is rarely an assured thing. The opposite of inclusion is exclusion. This implies barriers to and remoteness from mainstream activity, where fewer opportunities may be available for self-expression and to influence the actions of others ( Scott & Larcher, 2002).
Aims: This paper seeks to broaden the debate on inclusion for people with aphasia by drawing on the documented experiences of people with learning disabilities, the development of practice initiatives, and visions for the future. The extent to which the narratives of people with aphasia find resonance in the life course of people with a learning disability gives rise to a simple question: "Is inclusion a shared cause?''
Main Contribution: Addressing diverse client groups, such as people with aphasia and people with a learning disability, draws out the common experience, despite their separate traditions of service provision. Living with a disabling condition, whether physical, communicative, or intellectual, whether developmental or acquired in type, means that the usual determinants of social inclusion often appear elusive. Review of UK government policy and assessment of its impact on the two communities ( people with aphasia and people with a learning disability) reveals the limitations of a single-track approach. The need for collaborative action involving multiple agencies at the mutually dependent levels of self, community, and society becomes clear. Synthesis of the literature and practice development initiatives from the two clinical groups serves to strengthen the ongoing debate. The right to be included is shared by all human beings regardless of individual characteristics. It is about having the opportunities to perform roles that are personally meaningful, to develop relationships, to engage in self-determination, and to have presence in the places that other people occupy.
Conclusion: No matter the primary cause of the disability, marginalisation is frequently a feature of the lived experience. For people with aphasia, it is the impact of having a communication difficulty on quality of life that leads to disruptions to sense of self, autonomy and choice, social life and community participation ( Cruice, Worrall, Hickson, & Murison, 2003). For people with learning disabilities, it is the incremental disempowerment with regard to the uptake of societal roles as maturation takes place ( Barnes, 1997). The concept of "border crossing'' is pertinent to the cause of both groups. It captures the many different ways in which individuals break out of the traditional roles cast for people with disabilities, and engage in self-advocacy. For individuals who grow up with a learning disability "` border crossing'' is affected by the surrounding social support infrastructure offered by statutory services, which is informed by targeted government policy. For people with acquired language impairment, the terrain is less clear. After the initial medical crisis has passed, it is the individual's personal context ( characterised by the roles and responses of marital partner, family members, work colleagues, etc.) rather than statutory service provision, that affects the degree to which individuals are able to resume former life courses.
C1 Univ E Anglia, Sch Allied Hlth Profess, Norwich NR4 2TJ, Norfolk, England.
RP Bunning, K (reprint author), Univ E Anglia, Sch Allied Hlth Profess, Norwich NR4 2TJ, Norfolk, England.
EM k.bunning@uea.ac.uk
CR ANDERSEN T, 2001, P TECHN PERS DIS C C
ATKINSON D, 2002, ADVOCACY LEARNING DI, P120
Avent JR, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P397, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000743
BARNES M, 1997, EMPOWERMENT EVERYDAY, P241
BLENKHORN P, 2002, P TECHN PERS DIS C C
BOLES L, 2003, J SOCIAL WORK DISABI, V2, P47
Bronfenbrenner U, 2005, MAKING HUMAN BEINGS, P106
Bronfenbrenner U., 1979, ECOLOGY HUMAN DEV EX
Bunning K, 2004, SPEECH LANGUAGE THER
Burke B., 1995, ANTIOPPRESSIVE PRACT
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P49
Byng S, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P89, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00059-X
CARNABY S, 2002, LEARNING DISABILITY, P95
CASSERLEY C, 2000, LAW RIGHTS DISABILIT, P139
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P235
CLEMENT T, 2002, ADVOCACY LEARNING DI, P50
Cottrell S, 2004, ROYAL COLL SPEECH LA, V630, P12
Cruice M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P333, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000707
*DEP HLTH MOD AG, 2003, ESS CAR PAT FOC BENC
Department of Health, 2001, VAL PEOPL NEW STRAT
Department of Health, 2001, NAT SERV FRAM OLD PE
Department of Health, 2005, CREAT PAT LED NHS
Department of Health, 1996, COMM CAR DIR PAYM AC
Department of Health, 1990, NHS COMM CAR ACT
*DFEE, 1995, DIS DISCR ACT
Dowson S., 1997, EMPOWERMENT EVERYDAY, P101
Felce D, 1996, J APPL RES INTELLECT, V9, P101
Freeman M, 2004, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V39, P481
Garcia LJ, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P187, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00064-3
GOBLE C, 2002, ADVOCACY LEARNING DI, P72
Goodley Dan, 2000, SELF ADVOCACY LIVES
GRANT G, 1997, EMPOWERMENT EVERYDAY, P121
HEDLEY I, 2004, ICT SPECIAL ED NEEDS, P64
Hilari K, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000725
Johnson R., 1994, PICTURE COMMUNICATIO
Kagan A, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00062-X
Kenworthy J, 2000, DISABIL SOC, V15, P219
Lasker JP, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000840
Law J, 2005, DISABIL SOC, V20, P169, DOI 10.1080/09687590500059267
LINDSAY G, 2002, CHILD LANGUAGE TECHI, V3, P91
Moore W, 2002, BRIT MED J, V324, P993, DOI 10.1136/bmj.324.7344.993
MOSELY J, 1994, YOU CHOOSE
MURPHY J., 2002, TALKING MATS LEARNIN
MURPHY J, 2002, SPEECH LANG THER SPR, P18
Murphy J., 2000, BRIT J THERAPY REHAB, V7, P454
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
PARR S, 2003, INCLUSIVE INTERNET T
Parr S., 2004, LIVING SEVERE APHASI
PETERS S, 1996, DISABILITY SOC EMERG, P215
Petheram B, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P267, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248412
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
RAHAMIN L, 2004, ICT SPECIAL ED NEEDS, P35
RAMCHARAN P, 1997, EMPOWERMENT EVERYDAY, P241
RITTEL H, 1973, POLICY SCI, V4, P156
SCOTT J, 2002, ADVOCACY LEARNING DI, P170
Shale A., 2004, RCSLT B, V621, P14
Silverman J, 1999, SKILLS COMMUNICATING
STALKER K, 2002, ADULT DAY SERVICES S, P46
Stevens C, 2004, ICT SPECIAL ED NEEDS, P21
STIRLING A, 2003, ROYAL COLL SPEECH LA, V614, P10
TYNE A, 1981, PRINCIPLE NORMALISAT
von Tetzchner S., 1996, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, P19
WADDINGTON L, 2000, LAW RIGHTS DISABILIT, P33
Walker M., 1980, MAKATON VOCABULARY
WALMSLEY J, 2002, ADVOCACY LEARNING DI, P24
Wanless D., 2002, SECURING OUR FUTURE
Wolfensberger W., 1992, BRIEF INTRO SOCIAL R
WOODCOCK R, 1968, PEABODY REBUS READIN
Young DA, 2000, DISABIL SOC, V15, P747, DOI 10.1080/713661998
NR 69
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 1
BP 9
EP 22
DI 10.1080/02687030600798162
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 131NX
UT WOS:000243877200002
ER
PT J
AU Pound, C
Duchan, J
Penman, T
Hewitt, A
Parr, S
AF Pound, Carole
Duchan, Judith
Penman, Tom
Hewitt, Alan
Parr, Susie
TI Communication access to organisations: Inclusionary practices for people
with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PARTNERS; SUPPORT; ADULTS
AB Background: When speech and language therapists/ pathologists talk about inclusion, they are usually referring to a client being included in events outside the clinic or the organisation that provides the speech and language therapy services. This article describes ways in which those providing services for and with people with aphasia can work to involve service users in their own organisations. A communication access pathway to inclusion and user involvement in organisations is presented. This draws on established methods in the field, as well as on methods and underpinning frameworks that require a shift in views about the nature of service provision. The pathway involves ( 1) targeting situations in which the "business'' of the organisation takes place and then ( 2) designing ways of achieving communication access to those situations.
Aims: The overall aim is to present ways in which an organisation can become more communicatively accessible to service users with aphasia and communication disabilities. We describe a range of involvement contexts and communication access conditions at Connect, a charity in the UK, where we have attempted to increase the engagement and power of people with aphasia in our organisation's business.
Main contribution: In order to show how organisations can create more inclusive practice, we present some of our own projects. We describe four different contexts in our organisation that we targeted for inclusion: ( 1) making therapy choices, ( 2) delivering therapy services, ( 3) providing courses to service providers, and ( 4) employment practices. For each of these contexts we present methods used to support the involvement of people with aphasia. Some types of support are tried and tested methods arising out of established theories, others are newer to the field and require a shift in thinking and values.
Conclusions: In order to attain authentic communication access for people with aphasia, service providers need to look beyond established theories and practices. The result, judging from anecdotal evidence as well as evidence from qualitative evaluation, suggests that creating communication access in a service organisation can serve as a powerful means for involving people with aphasia and in so doing can improve on the services provided to them.
C1 Connect, Commun Disabil Network, London SE1 1HL, England.
RP Pound, C (reprint author), Connect, Commun Disabil Network, 16-18 Marshalsea Rd, London SE1 1HL, England.
EM carolepound@ukconnect.org
CR Beukelman DR, 1992, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA
Byng S, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P906, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000128
Chapman R., 1981, ASSESSING LANGUAGE P, P111
CHAPSEY R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
DAVIS G, 1980, CLIN APH C P, P248
Department of Health, 2003, BUILD BEST CHOIC RES
Department of Health, 2005, NAT SERV FRAM LONG T
Department of Health, 2001, EXP PAT NEW APPR CHR
HEWITT A, 2003, APHASIA INSIDE OUT
HOLLAND AL, 1980, CADL TEST FUNCTIONAL
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
LIGHT J, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P865
LINDSAY J, 2000, PARTNERSHIPS PRACTIC
LYON J, 1989, CLIN APH C P
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Manolson A., 1992, IT TAKES 2 TALK
Pound C, 2004, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P161
PRUTTING CA, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P123
Stacey R. D., 2000, COMPLEXITY MANAGEMEN
Swain J., 2004, ENABLING RELATIONSHI
*US DEP ED NAT I D, 2005, PART ACT RES
VANDERGAAG A, 2005, SPEECH LANGUAGE THER, P10
van der Gaag A, 2005, CLIN REHABIL, V19, P372, DOI 10.1191/0269215505cr785oa
NR 23
TC 14
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 1
BP 23
EP 38
DI 10.1080/02687030600798212
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 131NX
UT WOS:000243877200003
ER
PT J
AU Simmons-Mackie, NN
AF Simmons-Mackie, Nina N.
TI Communicative access and decision making for people with aphasia:
Implementing sustainable healthcare systems change
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LONG-TERM-CARE; QUALITY-OF-LIFE; CONVERSATION PARTNERS; TRAINING
VOLUNTEERS; SUPPORTED CONVERSATION; ADULTS; RESIDENTS; PARTICIPATION;
CAREGIVERS; STROKE
AB Background: Communicative access to information and decision making in health care appears limited for people with aphasia in spite of research demonstrating that communicative participation can be enhanced with skilled communication partners and appropriate resources. In order to address this concern, a project was designed to target the "systems'' level of health care via a multi-faceted, team-based intervention called the Communicate Access Improvement Project ( CAIP).
Aims: This project aimed to improve communicative access to information and decision making for people with aphasia within three healthcare systems ( i.e., acute care, rehabilitation, long-term care) by increasing teams members' knowledge of and skill in providing communicative supports and by facilitating the implementation of facility-specific communicative access goals.
Methods & Procedures: Three teams representing diverse disciplines participated in the project that included a 2- day training session for each team, development of institution-specific communicative access improvement goals and materials, and on-site follow-up and support from a project speech- language pathologist. In order to determine the outcomes of team training and follow- up, qualitative research methods were employed including observation, focus groups, and open- ended interviews with team members. Qualitative data were collected before and after the 2- day skills training and after a 4-month follow- up period. Using qualitative thematic analysis the qualitative data were analysed in order to evaluate the training process, to estimate the impact of training on team knowledge, attitude, and practice, and to identify trends, themes, emerging patterns, and primary issues associated with communicative access ( Spradley, 1980).
Outcomes & Results: After the 2- day training, all teams demonstrated increased knowledge of methods of supporting communicative access, and improved understanding of access and inclusion for aphasia. After follow- up, the rehabilitation and long- term care teams achieved communicative access improvement goals and identified examples of systems changes and increased participation of people with aphasia within their programmes. They also perceived changes in team member values that supported communicative access. The acute care team reported less success in implementing goals for systems change after the 4- month follow- up. Barriers to and facilitators of sustainable system change were identified.
Conclusions: Targeting systems- level change appeared to be a useful approach to improving access to healthcare information and decision making for people with aphasia. The project provided insights into factors that facilitated or impeded communicative access in each healthcare setting and provided valuable information for future interventions designed to improve communicative access for people with aphasia.
C1 Aphasia Inst, Toronto, ON, Canada.
SE Louisiana Univ, Hammond, LA 70402 USA.
Baycrest Ctr Geriatr Care, Toronto, ON, Canada.
Univ Toronto, Toronto Western Hosp, Hlth Network, Toronto, ON M5T 2S8, Canada.
RP Simmons-Mackie, NN (reprint author), 131 Orchard Row, Abita Springs, LA 70420 USA.
EM nmackie@selu.edu
CR Alborz Alison, 2005, J Health Serv Res Policy, V10, P173, DOI 10.1258/1355819054338997
ALEJANDRO B, 2000, J MULTICULTURAL SUM, V6, P7
BYNG S, 2003, HAVING SAY INVOLVING
*COMM ACCR REH FAC, 2005, STAND MED REH
Cruice M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P333, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000707
DOWNING B, 2002, MODELS PROVISION LAN
Drew P, 2001, Health Expect, V4, P58, DOI 10.1046/j.1369-6513.2001.00125.x
FARRELL C, 1997, HLTH CARE PARTNERSHI
Genereux S, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1161, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000507
Hickey EM, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P625, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000093
Joint Commission on Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations, 2005, COMPR ACCR MAN HOSP
Kagan A., 1996, PICTOGRAPHIC COMMUNI
Kagan A, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00062-X
KAGAN A, 2003, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
KAGAN A, 2000, AM SPEECH L ANG HEAR
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Law J, 2005, DISABIL SOC, V20, P169, DOI 10.1080/09687590500059267
LEDORZE G, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P241
Le Dorze G, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P17
Legg C, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P559, DOI 10.1080/0268703054400029
Lyon J. G., 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P203
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Law M, 1994, Can J Occup Ther, V61, P191
MCEWEN S, 2006, SYSTEMS APPROACH IMP
Mertens D. M., 1997, RES METHODS ED PSYCH
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
Parr S., 2004, LIVING SEVERE APHASI
Rappolt S, 2005, J CONTIN EDUC HEALTH, V25, P116, DOI 10.1002/chp.16
Rayner H, 2003, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V38, P149, DOI 10.1080/1368282021000060308
Rose TA, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P947, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000319
Ross KB, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P355, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000716
Simmons-Mackie NN, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P583, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000408
Skinner HA, 2002, PROMOTING HLTH ORG C
Spradley J., 1979, ETHNOGRAPHIC INTERVI
SPRADLEY JP, 1980, PRTICIPANT OBSERVATI
THOMSONOBRIEN M, 2004, COCHRANE LIB
WESTBY C., 1990, J CHILDHOOD COMMUNIC, V13, P101
NR 38
TC 40
Z9 45
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 1
BP 39
EP 66
DI 10.1080/02687030600798287
PG 28
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 131NX
UT WOS:000243877200004
ER
PT J
AU Threats, T
AF Threats, Travis
TI Access for persons with neurogenic communication disorders: Influences
of Personal and Environmental Factors of the ICF
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID DISABILITY; APHASIA; CARE
AB Background: Access for persons with acquired communication disorders is an important area that has been evaluated and discussed using many different theoretical frameworks. Clinicians and researchers need practical frameworks and more direction to guide specific assessments of the issues influencing access. Aim: This article discusses the issue of access through the framework of the Personal and Environmental Factors of the World Health Organisation's International Classification of Functioning, Disability, and Health (ICF).
Main Contribution: The ICF's Personal and Environmental Factors are discussed in relationship to access and their interactions with each other. A fuller understanding of the complexities of access issues can be achieved though the ICF framework and this article uses clinical examples to demonstrate this complexity. The clinician's role in promoting or hindering access for their clients is discussed. Lastly, the challenge of evidence-based practice and research with access issues is addressed.
Conclusions: The Personal and Environmental Factors of the ICF can be used to help elucidate the different aspects and complexity of access issues with persons with acquired aphasia. These areas need further research in order to advance intervention towards improving the lives of this population.
C1 St Louis Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, St Louis, MO 63103 USA.
RP Threats, T (reprint author), St Louis Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 3750 Lindell Blvd, St Louis, MO 63103 USA.
EM threatst@slu.edu
CR [Anonymous], 2000, AM HERITAGE DICT ENG
Brush JA, 2003, J COMMUN DISORD, V36, P379, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(03)00049-2
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROLOGICA
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P235
Damico JS, 2003, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V12, P131, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2003/060)
Duchan JF, 2004, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V6, P63, DOI 10.1080/14417040410001669444
GALLOIS C, 2002, 10 INT APH REH C BRI
Garcia LJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P269
Howe TJ, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1015, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000499
Hurst R, 2003, DISABIL REHABIL, V25, P572, DOI 10.1080/0963828031000137072
LUTERMAN DM, 1991, COUNSELING COMMUNICA
Mayberry RM, 2000, MED CARE RES REV, V57, P108, DOI 10.1177/107755800773743628
Oliver M., 1996, UNDERSTANDING DISABI
PARR S, 1999, APHASIA HDB
PENN C, 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
PREECE J, 1995, DISABIL SOC, V10, P87, DOI 10.1080/09687599550023741
Reeve D, 2002, DISABIL SOC, V17, P493, DOI 10.1080/09687590220148487
Rioux MH, 1997, J INTELL DISABIL RES, V41, P102, DOI 10.1111/j.1365-2788.1997.tb00686.x
Stone E, 1996, BRIT J SOCIOL, V47, P699, DOI 10.2307/591081
Threats TT, 2002, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V10, pXVII
THREATS T, 2005, PERSPECTIVES COMMUNI, V12, P3, DOI 10.1044/cds12.3.3
Tregaskis C, 2002, DISABIL SOC, V17, P457, DOI 10.1080/09687590220140377
Williams DR, 2000, HEALTH CARE FINANC R, V21, P75
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
Ylvisaker M, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P407
NR 25
TC 34
Z9 37
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 1
BP 67
EP 80
DI 10.1080/02687030600798303
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 131NX
UT WOS:000243877200005
ER
PT J
AU Simmons-Mackie, NN
Damico, JS
AF Simmons-Mackie, Nina N.
Damico, Jack S.
TI Access and social inclusion in aphasia: Interactional principles and
applications
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID DOMINANT INTERPRETIVE FRAMEWORK; SUPPORTED CONVERSATION; COMPENSATORY
STRATEGIES; LANGUAGE; PEOPLE; COMMUNICATION; SPEAKING; PARTNERS;
SPOUSES; ADULTS
AB Background: People with aphasia are often excluded from full participation in communicative events and social interactions. Many consider the aphasic language deficit as the cause of social exclusion. However, social exclusion is a complex process that is situated within the wider realm of human social action. While the aphasia literature has provided data on resources and strategies that impact on inclusion and participation, other realms of social science have targeted social action in all its authenticity and complexity, and have focused on how social action is effectively established, negotiated, and sustained. A study of this literature can expand our understanding of issues involved in inclusion, participation, and communicative access of people with aphasia.
Aims: This article will review a selected corpus of social science research that is outside the clinician's typical experience, but that is relevant to the issues of accessibility and social inclusion in aphasia.
Main Contribution: Four interactional principles relevant to the enhancement of social accessibility and social inclusion will be discussed. These four principles concern social constructionism, local negotiation of social action, the collaborative nature of social action, and ways that social dimensions are manifested in social action. Understanding of broad principles of social interaction will improve our ability to enable social participation and inclusion of people with aphasia.
Conclusions: This paper will describe four principles of human social interaction and highlight clinical implications involving various therapeutic strategies and communicative values related to communicative inclusion and social participation.
C1 SE Louisiana Univ, Hammond, LA 70402 USA.
Univ Louisiana Lafayette, Lafayette, LA USA.
RP Simmons-Mackie, NN (reprint author), 131 Orchard Row, Abita Springs, LA 70420 USA.
EM nmackie@selu.edu
CR Artes R, 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P31
BELL A, 1984, LANG SOC, V13, P145
Berger P., 1967, SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION
Blumer H., 1969, SYMBOLIC INTERACTION
Booth S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P283
Bruner J. S., 1990, ACTS MEANING
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P49
Byng S, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P89, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00059-X
BYNG S, 2003, HAVING SAY INVOLVING
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P235
COLLINS R, 1991, RES AGENDAS SOCIOLOG, P27
COPELAND M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P301, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249001
Croteau C, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P291, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000616
Damico JS, 2005, LANG SOC-SER, P63, DOI 10.1002/9780470754856.ch6
DAMICO JS, 2000, UNPUB CLIN APH C WAI
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P651
Damico JS, 1997, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V28, P288
Davidson B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P243, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000653
Davis K. E., 1985, SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION
DURANTI Alessandro, 1992, RETHINKING CONTEXT L
Durkheim Emile, 1964, DIVISION LABOR SOC
Elman R. J., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P115
Enderby P, 1997, THERAPY OUTCOME MEAS
Fairclough N., 1989, LANGUAGE POWER
Ferguson A, 1996, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V10, P55, DOI 10.3109/02699209608985161
Garfinkel H, 1967, STUDIES ETHNOMETHODO
Garrett KL, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P237
Gergen K. G., 1991, SATURATED SELF
GOFFMAN E, 1974, INTERACTION RITUAL E
Goffman Ervin, 1967, INTERACTION RITUAL
Goffman Erving, 1964, STIGMA NOTES MANAGEM
Goffman Erving, 1969, STRATEGIC INTERACTIO
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
Goodwin Charles, 2002, LANGUAGE TURN SEQUEN, P56
Heritage John, 1984, GARFINKEL ETHNOMETHO
Hollis GE, 1998, J CHART INST WATER E, V12, P9
HYMES D, 1967, J SOC ISSUES, V23, P8
Kagan A, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00062-X
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Kagan A., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P199
KEMPER TD, 1991, RES AGENDAS SOCIOLOG
KINSELLA GJ, 1980, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V12, P73
Klippi A., 1996, STUDIA FENNICA LINGU, V6
KLIPPI A, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P373, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248538
KNOX D, 1971, PORTRAIT APHASIA
LAASKO M, 1997, STUDIA FENNICA LINGU, V8
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Lindsay J, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P305
LYON JG, 1996, ADULT APHASIA REHABI, P137
LYON JG, 1997, AGING COMMUNICATION, P299
Madden ML, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1199, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000437
MALONE RL, 1970, BRIT J DISORDERS COM, V59, P174
Michallet B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P835, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000238
MILROY L, 1992, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V6, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699209208985517
MULLER DJ, 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P101
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P459, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985238
Oelschlaeger T A, 2000, Subcell Biochem, V33, P3
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P971, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249464
Oliver M., 1983, SOCIAL WORK DISABLED
Panagos John M., 1996, P41
PARK R, 1928, AM J SOCIOL, V33, P888
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
Parr S., 2003, APHASIA INSIDE OUT R
PERKINS L, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P251
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
RAMSBERGER G, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P337
Rogers Mary F., 1980, VIEW GOFFMAN, P100
Sacks H., 1992, LECT CONVERSATION, VI
Scheff Thomas J., 1990, MICROSOCIOLOGY DISCO
SCHEGLOF.EA, 1968, AM ANTHROPOL, V70, P1075, DOI 10.1525/aa.1968.70.6.02a00030
SHOTTER J, 1984, CONVERSATIONAL REALI
Simmel Georg, 1950, SOCIOLOGY G SIMMEL
SIMMONS N, 1993, THESIS LOUISIANA STA
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P807
Simmons-Mackie N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P831, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249576
Simmons-Mackie N, 2004, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V13, P114, DOI 10.1044/1058-0630(2004/013)
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P313
Simmons-Mackie N, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P751, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000229
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V8, P218
Simmons-Mackie N. N., 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P37
SimmonsMackie NN, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P540
SIMMONSMACKIE NN, 2004, LANG SOC INT C PROV
SIMMONSMACKIE NN, 2001, TOP LANG DISORD, V21, P21
SimmonsMackie NN, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P95
SimmonsMackie NN, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P761, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250455
Tannen Deborah, 1987, POWER DISCOURSE, P3
Thompson C., 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S, P245
ULICHNY P, 1989, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V12, P309
Weber M., 1946, THEORY SOCIAL EC ORG
Wilkinson R., 1995, CASE STUDIES CLIN LI, P271
Worrall L, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P107, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00060-6
Worrall L., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
NR 94
TC 21
Z9 22
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 1
BP 81
EP 97
DI 10.1080/02687030600798311
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 131NX
UT WOS:000243877200006
ER
PT J
AU Parr, S
AF Parr, Susie
TI Living with severe aphasia: Tracking social exclusion
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Background: Little is known about what happens to people with severe aphasia in the years after stroke when rehabilitation comes to an end, or about day- to- day life for this group. Aims: This study aimed to track the day- to- day life and experiences of people with severe aphasia, and to document levels of social inclusion and exclusion as they occurred in mundane settings.
Methods and Procedures: Ethnography was chosen as the qualitative methodology most suitable for studying the experience of people with profoundly compromised language. 20 people who were judged to have severe aphasia following stroke agreed to be visited and observed three times in different domestic and care settings. The observer documented environments, protagonists, events, and interactions. Field notes were elaborated with personal, methodological, and interpretative notes. Written material ( for example information leaflets) was also documented and described. Data were subject to thematic analysis.
Outcomes and Results: The study revealed how social exclusion is a common experience for this group, played out in a variety of ways in a range of domestic and care settings. Social exclusion occurs at infrastructural, interpersonal, and personal levels.
Conclusions: The study suggests that the social exclusion of people who struggle to communicate could be addressed through training, for professional and lay carers, that promotes support for communication; opportunity and access; respect and acknowledgment; and attention to the environment.
C1 Connect, Commun Disabil Network, London SE1 1HL, England.
RP Parr, S (reprint author), Connect, Commun Disabil Network, 16-18 Marshalsea Rd, London SE1 1HL, England.
CR *ACT DYSPH AD, 1998, OP HOL STON WALL REP
ALLEN K, 2000, COMMUNICATION CONSUL
Bates P, 2004, DISABIL SOC, V19, P195, DOI 10.1080/0968759042000204202
Clarke H., 2003, APHASIA INSIDE OUT, P80
Davies C, 1999, REFLEXIVE ETHNOGRAPH
Department of Health, 2001, VAL PEOPL NEW STRAT
Department of Health, 2005, NAT SERV FRAM LONG T
Edgar I., 1998, ANTHR WELFARE
Fyson R., 2004, MAKING VALUING PEOPL
Hammersley M, 1995, ETHNOGRAPHY PRINCIPL
Hersh D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P207, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249447
Hewitt A., 2003, APHASIA INSIDE OUT, P51
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Layder Derek, 1993, NEW STRATEGIES SOCIA
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Lyon J. G., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P137
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
PARR S, 2003, APHASIA INSIDE OUT, P127
Parr S., 2004, LIVING SEVERE APHASI
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA
Pound C., 2004, DISABLING BARRIERS E, V2nd
Ritchie J., 2003, QUALITATIVE RES PRAC
Savage J, 2000, BRIT MED J, V321, P1400, DOI 10.1136/bmj.321.7273.1400
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P761
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P313
NR 26
TC 52
Z9 53
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 1
BP 98
EP 123
DI 10.1080/02687030600798337
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 131NX
UT WOS:000243877200007
ER
PT J
AU Worrall, L
Rose, T
Howe, T
McKenna, K
Hickson, L
AF Worrall, Linda
Rose, Tanya
Howe, Tami
McKenna, Kryss
Hickson, Louise
TI Developing an evidence-base for accessibility for people with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID HEALTH-EDUCATION MATERIALS; STROKE PATIENTS; INFORMATION; COMPREHENSION;
CARERS
AB Background: Discrimination on the basis of disability is prohibited in many countries and therefore research on communication accessibility for people with aphasia has become a priority.
Aims: The aim of this paper is to summarise and discuss the results of a series of research studies, carried out in one Centre, into accessibility issues for people with aphasia, focusing on the accessibility of community environments and the accessibility of information.
Main Contribution: When asked about the accessibility of the community generally, people with aphasia reported both physical and societal barriers and facilitators, as well as barriers and facilitators related to other people. Many people with aphasia still do not receive written health information about aphasia and, when they do, the information is often written at a level too high for them to read. In terms of the accessibility of written information on websites about aphasia, high- quality websites may not be easily accessible to people with aphasia. For accessible websites to be delivered, the involvement of people with aphasia is paramount.
Conclusions: There are three common themes emerging from this series of research studies. First, accessibility is an important and often emotive issue for people with aphasia. Second, people with aphasia are marginalised by a communicatively inaccessible society. Third, there is considerable diversity among people with aphasia about their perceptions of the barriers and facilitators to communication in the community.
C1 Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Ctr, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Worrall, L (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Ctr, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
EM l.worrall@uq.edu.au
RI Hickson, Louise/F-8748-2010; Rose, Tanya/D-2580-2010; Worrall,
Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR ALBERT T, 1992, BRIT MED J, V305, P1266
[Anonymous], 1999, OXFORD AM DICT CURRE
Brennan AD, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000958
Byng S, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P89, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00059-X
Doak CC, 1996, TEACHING PATIENTS LO
Eames Sally, 2003, Top Stroke Rehabil, V10, P70
ESTEY A, 1991, PATIENT EDUC COUNS, V18, P165, DOI 10.1016/0738-3991(91)90008-S
Flesch R, 1948, J APPL PSYCHOL, V32, P221, DOI 10.1037/h0057532
Ghidella CL, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P1134, DOI 10.1080/02687030500337871
Griffin Erin, 2004, Top Stroke Rehabil, V11, P29
Griffin J, 2006, AM J OCCUP THER, V60, P70
HANGER HC, 1993, STROKE, V24, P536
Hoffmann T, 2004, DISABIL REHABIL, V26, P1166, DOI 10.1080/09638280410001724816
HOWE T, 2006, ENV FACTORS INFLUENC
Howe TJ, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1015, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000499
JORDAN L, 1996, APHASIA SOCIAL APPRO
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KNIGHT K, IN PRESS TOPICS STRO
Lock S, 2005, DISABIL SOC, V20, P33, DOI 10.1080/0968759042000283629
Lomer M, 1987, CLIN REHABIL, V1, P33, DOI 10.1177/026921558700100108
Olofsson A, 2005, CLIN REHABIL, V19, P433, DOI 10.1191/0269215505cr788oa
OMahony PG, 1997, CLIN REHABIL, V11, P68, DOI 10.1177/026921559701100110
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
POUND P, 1994, CLIN REHABIL, V8, P7, DOI 10.1177/026921559400800102
Rodgers H, 2001, AGE AGEING, V30, P129, DOI 10.1093/ageing/30.2.129
ROSE T, 2006, WRITTEN HLTH INFORM
Rose TA, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P947, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000319
Sackett D, 2000, EVIDENCE BASED MED P
STEINFELD E, 1999, ENABLING ENV MEASURI, P11
Sullivan K, 2001, Top Stroke Rehabil, V7, P52
WELLWOOD I, 1994, AGE AGEING, V23, P293, DOI 10.1093/ageing/23.4.293
Wiles R, 1998, J ADV NURS, V28, P794, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2648.1998.00709.x
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
Worrall L, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P923, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000137
NR 34
TC 14
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 1
BP 124
EP 136
DI 10.1080/02687030600798352
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 131NX
UT WOS:000243877200008
ER
PT J
AU Abel, S
Willmes, K
Huber, W
AF Abel, Stefanie
Willmes, Klaus
Huber, Walter
TI Model-oriented naming therapy: Testing predictions of a connectionist
model
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID INTERACTIVE ACTIVATION MODEL; WORD-RETRIEVAL; LEXICAL RETRIEVAL;
COGNITIVE-NEUROPSYCHOLOGY; SEMANTIC IMPAIRMENT; CUEING TREATMENTS;
SPEECH PRODUCTION; APHASIC PATIENTS; STROKE APHASIA; REHABILITATION
AB Background: The two versions of the connectionist model of Dell and colleagues offer alternative explanations of aphasic naming disorders (Dell, Schwartz, Martin, Saffran, & Gagnon, 1997; Foygel & Dell, 2000). The semantic-phonological (SP) model hypothesises impairments in lexical-semantic or lexical-phonological connections, and the weight- decay (WD) model assumes global impairments in either connection weights or activation decay. In each version, a patient's error pattern in picture naming is simulated to assess the underlying disorder (connectionist "diagnosis''). A systematic comparison of both model versions in model-oriented naming therapy has not yet been performed. Moreover, if the normalisation of the error pattern during recovery is lesion-specific, as suggested in the SP model (Schwartz, Dell, Martin, Gahl, & Sobel, 2006), this should be observable in the patient data.
Aims: Predictions were made and tested regarding the relation between (1) connectionist diagnosis and therapy outcome, and (2) connectionist diagnosis and error pattern development. For example, patients with phonological disorders in the SP model should (1) benefit more from phonological as compared to semantic therapy, and (2) present a decrease of nonwords in their naming responses.
Methods & Procedures: The connectionist diagnosis and a 4- week therapy with cueing hierarchies (Howard, 2000; Wambaugh et al., 2001) were administered to 10 German-speaking aphasic patients with naming disorders. Six patients, who had been diagnosed by the SP model, received semantic and phonological therapy. The other four patients, diagnosed by the WD model, received increasing and vanishing therapy (Abel, Schultz, Radermacher, Willmes, & Huber, 2005).
Outcomes & Results: Cueing therapy was generally effective for 9 of 10 patients. The trend of improvement was always found in the direction predicted by the connectionist diagnosis, except for two patients diagnosed by the SP model who presented a numerical trend in the opposite direction. Nevertheless, the SP model offered a more plausible explanation of lesion-specific therapy outcomes, and it properly predicted the error pattern development. Moreover, the errorless learning procedure applied in vanishing therapy was favourable for patients with phonological (SP model) or weight (WD model) lesions, and this may be attributed to their characteristic error types and an impairment of editorial processes.
Conclusions: Models can be informative about the effectiveness of potential therapies and error pattern developments. Data from therapy studies can test competing models.
C1 Univ Freiburg, Dept Neurol, Neuroctr, D-79106 Freiburg, Germany.
Univ Aachen, Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, D-5100 Aachen, Germany.
RP Abel, S (reprint author), Univ Freiburg, Dept Neurol, Neuroctr, Breisacherstr 64, D-79106 Freiburg, Germany.
EM stefanie.abel@uniklinik-freiburg.de
CR ABEL S, 2007, UNPUB CONNECTIONIST
Abel S, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P831, DOI 10.1080/02687030500268902
Abel S, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P152, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.079
ABEL S, 2001, LEXIKALISCHE STORUNG
BADDELEY A, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P53, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90068-X
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
Cicerone KD, 2000, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V81, P1596, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2000.19240
Coltheart M., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Dell GS, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P27, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000168
Dell GS, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P125, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000320
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Dijkstra T., 1996, COMPUTATIONAL PSYCHO, P3
Doesborgh SJC, 2004, STROKE, V35, P141, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000105460.52928.A6
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
Fillingham JK, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P337, DOI 10.1080/09602010343000020
Forde EME, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P367
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Gagnon DA, 2002, CONNECTIONIST APPROACHES TO CLINICAL PROBLEMS IN SPEECH AND LAGUAGE, P147
GARDINER JM, 1973, MEM COGNITION, V1, P213
Genzel S., 1995, NEUROLINGUISTIK, V9, P41
GLISKY EL, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P899, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90034-J
GREENWALD ML, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P17
Hanley JR, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P147, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000339
Hickin J, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P981, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000509
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
HILLIS AE, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P5, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249497
Hinton Geoffrey E., 1993, SCI AM, V269, P58
HOWARD D, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P39
Howard D., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
HOWARD D, 1984, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V1, P163, DOI 10.1080/02643298408252021
Howard D., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY HIST
HUBER W, 2000, LEHRBUCH KLINISCHEN, P462
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Huber W., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P55
Jefferies E, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V95, P244, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2005.07.127
Jefferies E, 2006, BRAIN, V129, P2132, DOI 10.1093/brain/awl153
Jokel R, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P44, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00189-5
Jokel R, 2004, BRAIN COGNITION, V54, P251, DOI 10.1016/j.bandc.2004.02.033
Lesser R., 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P65
Levelt W. J., 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LI EC, 1987, J COMMUN DISORD, V20, P469, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(87)90034-7
LI EC, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P619, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249028
Lowell S., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P109
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P867, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000390
Martin N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P53
MARTIN N, 2003, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P375
Morton J, 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P91
MOTTAGHY FM, 1998, THESIS RWTH AACHEN U
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
OLDFIELD RC, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V9, P97, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(71)90067-4
PEASE D M, 1978, Cortex, V14, P178
Plaut DC, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0004
Ralph MAL, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P31, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000177
RAPP B, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P113, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253458
RAYMER AM, 2003, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P163
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
RIDDOCH MJ, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P1
Riley GA, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P133
Ruml W, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P217, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2730
Ruml W, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P131, DOI 10.1080/02643290442000031
Saito A, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2388
SCHNITKER R, 2007, AACHENER MAT DIAGNOS
Schwartz M. F., 2006, J MEM LANG, V54, P223
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1042
Schwartz MF, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P62, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2310
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
SHEWAN CM, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P184
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Wambaugh JL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P933
Wambaugh JL, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P433, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000085
Wambaugh JL, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P419
Welbourne SR, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P789, DOI 10.1080/02687030500268811
Whitworth A, 2005, COGNIITIVE NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL APPROACH TO ASSESSMENT AND INTERVENTION IN APHASIA: A CLINICIANS GUIDE, P1
WILLMES K, 2000, LEHRBUCH KLIN NEUROP, P82
Wolery M., 1992, TEACHING STUDENTS MO
Wright JF, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P367, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1821
NR 80
TC 13
Z9 13
PU ROUTLEDGE JOURNALS, TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI ABINGDON
PA 4 PARK SQUARE, MILTON PARK, ABINGDON OX14 4RN, OXFORDSHIRE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
EI 1464-5041
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 5
BP 411
EP 447
DI 10.1080/02687030701192687
PG 37
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 172VQ
UT WOS:000246833000001
ER
PT J
AU Koenig-Bruhin, M
Studer-Eichenberger, F
AF Koenig-Bruhin, Monica
Studer-Eichenberger, Felix
TI Therapy of short-term memory disorders in fluent aphasia: A single case
study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LEXICAL ACCESS; DEEP DYSPHASIA; CONDUCTION APHASIA; WORKING-MEMORY;
LANGUAGE; IMPAIRMENT; REPETITION; RETRIEVAL
AB Background: Repetition conduction aphasia is defined as a phonological short-term memory (STM) deficit. The interactive activation model of verbal STM proposed by N. Martin and Saffran (1992) accounts for this deficit by an increased activation decay rate. Recently Majerus and van der Linden (2001) suggested that these short-term memory impairments could be improved by therapy. Aims: The purpose of our single case study was to investigate whether the temporary storage of verbal information could be improved by therapy in a patient with repetition conduction aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: A patient suffering from a fluent aphasia was trained over 31 therapy sessions. In the therapy task he had to repeat sentences of four to seven words with an increasing delay between stimulus and response. The control task consisted of repeating sentences of four to six words without delay.
Outcomes & Results: The treatment improved sentence repetition significantly. In addition, sentence length in oral production and spans for digits and bisyllabic words, i. e., measures for phonological STM, improved.
Conclusions: Verbal STM performances were improved through therapy. It is argued that in the light of N. Martin and Saffran's theory, these improvements reflect a partially normalised activation decay, although the role of a probably very mild reduction of connection strength remains unclear.
C1 Spitalzentrum Biel Logopadie, CH-2501 Biel, Switzerland.
Univ Freiburg, Freiburg, Germany.
RP Koenig-Bruhin, M (reprint author), Spitalzentrum Biel Logopadie, Postfach 1664, CH-2501 Biel, Switzerland.
EM monica.koenig@szb-chb.ch
CR Allport DA, 1984, ATTENTION PERFORMANC
Blanken GDR, 1999, WORTPRODUKTIONSPRUFU
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Francis DR, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P723, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000201
HUBER W, 1983, AACHENER AP HASIE TE
KOENIGBRUHIN M, 2003, APHASIE VERWANDTE GE, V17, P29
KOHN SE, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P97, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90009-9
KOHN SE, 1990, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V25, P45
Majerus S, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V95, P174, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2005.07.094
MAJERUS S, 2001, ACTUALITES PATHOLOGI
Martin N, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P83, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0005
Martin N, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P641
MARTIN N, 2001, LANGUAGE APHASIA HDB, P137
MARTIN N, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P240, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90130-7
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
MARTIN RC, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P83, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1005
Rummer R, 2001, J MEM LANG, V45, P451, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2788
WARRINGT.EK, 1969, BRAIN, V92, P885, DOI 10.1093/brain/92.4.885
NR 21
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 5
BP 448
EP 458
DI 10.1080/02687030600670593
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 172VQ
UT WOS:000246833000002
ER
PT J
AU van de Sandt-Koenderman, WME
Wiegers, J
Wielaert, SM
Duivenvoorden, HJ
Ribbers, GM
AF van de Sandt-Koenderman, W. Mieke E.
Wiegers, Jiska
Wielaert, Sandra M.
Duivenvoorden, Hugo J.
Ribbers, Gerard M.
TI High-tech AAC and severe aphasia: Candidacy for TouchSpeak (TS)
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ALTERNATIVE COMMUNICATION; VISUAL COMMUNICATION; EXECUTIVE FUNCTION;
NATURAL-LANGUAGE; GLOBAL APHASIA; COMPUTER; THERAPY; PEOPLE;
INDIVIDUALS; COGNITION
AB Background: Increasingly, computerised communication aids are used by people with severe, chronic aphasia. Although the candidacy for these devices is relatively unknown, it has been hypothesised that cognitive deficits have a negative impact on the functional use of Augmentative and Alternative Communication (AAC). Deficits of executive functioning are assumed to be particularly important, but other functions, such as memory and semantic processing, may also be relevant. In a previous study (van de Sandt-Koenderman, Wiegers, Wielaert, Duivenvoorden, & Ribbers, in press) we reported the functional effect of TouchSpeak (TS), a computerised communication aid, in a group of stroke patients with severe aphasia. The successful participants showed different levels of proficiency. Some were able to use the system independently and creatively in many situations, some used it independently for trained situations, and others remained partner dependent in using TS.
Conclusions: Only a minority of patients with severe aphasia may be expected to become independent, flexible users of high- tech AAC. The finding that functional success was related to semantic processing is clinically important. Prospective studies are needed to support the predictive value of semantic processing for high- tech AAC use. The importance of intact executive functioning is not supported in this study. The broad concept of "executive functioning'' needs to be studied in more detail in relation to aphasia.
Aims: To find factors associated with the functional success of TS in people with severe aphasia, focusing on memory, executive functioning, semantic processing, and communication skills.
Methods & Procedures: The data of 30 patients with severe aphasia were analysed retrospectively. All were trained to use TS in two self-chosen communicative situations. Four outcome levels were differentiated: no use, dependent use, independent use, and extensive use of TS. Pre-training assessment included memory, executive functioning, semantic processing, and communication skills. The four outcome groups were compared regarding age, time post onset, gender, and aphasia type. The role of the cognitive variables was analysed with univariate ANCOVAs with contrast analysis, with correction for age, gender, aphasia type, or time post onset in case of significant differences between the groups on these variables.
Outcomes & Results: Seven participants were classified as extensive users of TS, five were independent TS users, and five were partner dependent. In 13 cases there was no functional use of TS. Extensive users were younger than the other outcome groups. Independent of this age effect, there was an effect of semantic processing; the no- use group scored significantly lower on semantics than all other groups.
C1 Rijndam Rehabil Ctr, NL-3001 KD Rotterdam, Netherlands.
Erasmus MC, Dept Rehabil Med, Rotterdam, Netherlands.
Erasmus MC, Dept Med Psychol & Psychotherapy, NIHES, Rotterdam, Netherlands.
RP van de Sandt-Koenderman, WME (reprint author), Rijndam Rehabil Ctr, Postbox 23181, NL-3001 KD Rotterdam, Netherlands.
EM m.sandt@rijndam.nl
CR Armstrong L, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P93
CHAPEY R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P397
De Renzi E, 1966, CORTEX, V2, P399
GARRETT KL, 1992, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA
GOLDENBERG G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248669
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P171, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00063-1
HELMESTABROOKS N, 2000, COGNITIVE LIENGUISTI
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Hux K. D., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P675
HUX KD, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Jacobs B, 2004, DISABIL REHABIL, V26, P1231, DOI 10.1080/09638280412331280244
Keil K, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P305, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000654
Koul R, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V92, P58, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.05.008
KRAAT AW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249086
Lasker JP, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000840
Lasker JP, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P217, DOI 10.1080/02687030500473411
McCall D, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P795
Nicholas M, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P1052, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000245
Purdy M, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P337, DOI 10.1080/02687030500475085
Shelton JR, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P319, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248415
STEELE RD, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90048-1
Van de Sandt-Koenderman M, 2005, DISABIL REHABIL, V27, P529, DOI 10.1080/09638280400018635
van de Sandt-Koenderman M, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P245, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000571
VANDESANDTKOEND.M, DISABILITY REHABILIT
VANMOURIK M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P491, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249486
Visch-Brink E, 2005, SEMANTISCHE ASS TEST
Visch-Brink EG, 2005, STEM SPRAAK TAALPATH, V13, P153
VischBrink EG, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P130
Wallesch CW, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P223, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000039
Weigl E., 1927, Z PSYCHOL, V103, P2
WEINRICH M, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248209
Wilson B. A., 1985, RIVERMEAD BEHAV MEMO
Worrall L., 1999, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
NR 34
TC 3
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 5
BP 459
EP 474
DI 10.1080/02687030601146023
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 172VQ
UT WOS:000246833000003
ER
PT J
AU Bartlett, MR
Fink, RB
Schwartz, MF
Linebarger, M
AF Bartlett, Megan R.
Fink, Ruth B.
Schwartz, Myrna F.
Linebarger, Marcia
TI Informativeness ratings of messages created on an AAC processing
prosthesis
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APHASIC LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; DIRECT MAGNITUDE ESTIMATION; SOCIAL
VALIDATION; AGRAMMATIC PRODUCTION; VALIDITY; SPEECH; IMPROVEMENT;
EFFICIENCY; SEVERITY; SUPPORT
AB Background: SentenceShaper (TM) (SSR) is a computer program that supports spoken language production in aphasia by recording and storing the fragments that the user speaks into the microphone, making them available for playback and allowing them to be combined and integrated into larger structures (i. e., sentences and narratives). A prior study that measured utterance length and grammatical complexity in story- plot narratives produced with and without the aid of SentenceShaper demonstrated an `` aided effect'' in some speakers with aphasia, meaning an advantage for the narratives that were produced with the support of this communication aid (Linebarger, Schwartz, Romania, Kohn, & Stephens, 2000). The present study deviated from Linebarger et al.' s methods in key respects and again showed aided effects of SentenceShaper in persons with aphasia.
Aims: Aims were (1) to demonstrate aided effects in `` functional narratives'' conveying hypothetical real- life situations from a first person perspective; (2) for the first time, to submit aided and spontaneous speech samples to listener judgements of informativeness; and (3) to produce preliminary evidence on topic- specific carryover from SentenceShaper, i. e., carryover from an aided production to a subsequent unaided production on the same topic.
Methods & Procedures: Five individuals with chronic aphasia created narratives on two topics, under three conditions: Unaided (U), Aided (SSR), and Post- SSR Unaided (Post- U). The 30 samples (5 participants, 2 topics, 3 conditions) were randomised and judged for informativeness by graduate students in speech- language pathology. The method for rating was Direct Magnitude Estimation (DME).
C1 Albert Einstein Healthcare Network, Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA 19141 USA.
Thomas Jefferson Univ, Philadelphia, PA 19107 USA.
Psycholinguist Technol Inc, Jenkintown, PA USA.
RP Fink, RB (reprint author), Albert Einstein Healthcare Network, Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Korman Bldg,Suite 213,1200 W Tabor Rd, Philadelphia, PA 19141 USA.
EM fink@shrsys.hslc.org
CR Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
BLOMERT L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248666
BROOKSHIR ERH, 1994, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P118
Brown G., 1983, DISCOURSE ANAL
CAMPBELL TF, 1992, TOP LANG DISORD, V12, P42
Clark H. H., 1996, USING LANGUAGE
Doyle P. J., 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P53, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0503.53
DOYLE PJ, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P143
FRIED S, 2002, NEW RABBI
Gordon JK, 2003, COGNITIVE SCI, V27, P1
Hickey EM, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P389, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000831
Jacobs BJ, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P115, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2452
KAZDIN AE, 1977, BEHAV MODIF, V1, P427, DOI 10.1177/014544557714001
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KOLK H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P282, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1049
KOLK HHJ, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P347, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252666
Lapointe LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P787
Linebarger M, 2007, BRAIN LANG, V100, P53, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2006.09.001
LINEBARGER M, 2000, UNISYS CORPORATION S
Linebarger MC, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V11, P57
Linebarger MC, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P930, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000146
Linebarger MC, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V83, P169
Linebarger MC, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P416, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2378
Linebarger MC, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P267, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000537
Martin RC, 2001, MEMORY, V9, P261
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Olness GS, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P251, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000723
Ross KB, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P113, DOI 10.1080/026870399402235
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SCHIAVETTI N, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P441
SCHIAVETTI N, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P568
Schnur TT, 2006, J MEM LANG, V54, P199, DOI 10.1016/j.jml.2005.10.002
SCHWARTZ MF, 2005, COMBINING ASSISTIVE
Schwartz MF, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P263, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000187
Stevens S. S., 1975, PSYCHOPHYSICS INTRO
NR 35
TC 8
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 5
BP 475
EP 498
DI 10.1080/02687030601154167
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 172VQ
UT WOS:000246833000004
ER
PT J
AU Renvall, K
Laine, M
Martin, N
AF Renvall, Kati
Laine, Matti
Martin, Nadine
TI Treatment of anomia with contextual priming: Exploration of a modified
procedure with additional semantic and phonological tasks
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WORD-FINDING DIFFICULTIES; NAMING DISORDERS; LEXICAL RETRIEVAL; SPEECH
PRODUCTION; THERAPY; APHASIA; DEFICITS; ACCESS; ANEMIA; MODEL
AB Background: We present an anomia treatment study using a modified contextual priming (CP) technique for two anomic participants. The reason for the modification attempt is that the most recent studies have indicated that the CP procedure is less effective in the case of impairment to lexical-semantic processes than in the case of phonological deficits (see Martin, Fink, & Laine, 2004a; Martin, Fink, Laine, & Ayala, 2004b; Renvall, Laine, & Martin, 2005).
Aims: Our aim is to study the within-and post-treatment effects of a modified CP procedure and especially whether additional semantic tasks can increase benefits from the CP treatment.
Methods & Procedures: The treatment was conducted for two participants with acquired anomia: LV has primarily a semantic component underlying her anomia, while JP suffers primarily from a phoneme-sequencing deficit. The CP procedure encompassed repeated cycles of spontaneous naming attempts and repetition of target names using arrays of multiple pictures where the targets were either semantically related or unrelated. Our modification was to add picture-to-word matching and phonological " rhyming syllable identification'' with the targets to the training sequence. The treatment was carried out in a single-subject multiple-baseline design consisting of several baseline measurements, treatment sessions along with within-treatment measurements, and a post-treatment measurement 1.5 months later.
Outcomes & Results: Both participants showed short-term facilitation of naming target items in all treatment conditions. For LV, post-treatment improvement of naming was statistically significant in the semantic condition irrespective of additional task type, even though the improvement was strongest when the semantic condition was coupled with the additional semantic tasks. In the case of JP, post-treatment improvement was observed in the semantic condition coupled with additional semantic tasks, and in the unrelated condition with both semantic and phonological tasks. No strong evidence of generalisation to untreated items was observed for either of the participants.
Conclusions: The modified CP procedure can provide longer-term improvement of naming target items than the CP training without additional tasks in the face of a lexical- semantic deficit. With lexical-semantic disturbance, the semantic context provided the best results. However, the nature of the additional tasks (semantic vs phonological) appeared to be less important for the treatment of target naming.
C1 Univ Turku, Dept Logoped, FIN-20014 Turku, Finland.
Abo Akad Univ, Turku, Finland.
Temple Univ, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
RP Renvall, K (reprint author), Univ Turku, Dept Logoped, FIN-20014 Turku, Finland.
EM kati.renvall@utu.fi
CR Basso A, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P45, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2422
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
Best W, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V7, P105
Bloom M., 1982, EVALUATING PRACTICE
Cave CB, 1997, PSYCHOL SCI, V8, P322, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1997.tb00446.x
Coelho CA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P133
CROFTS B, 2004, P 26 WORLD C INT ASS
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Eales C, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P913, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249459
Fink RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1061, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000400
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Franklin S, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1087, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000491
GREENWALD ML, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P17, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520174
Hickin J, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P981, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000509
Hillis A. E., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
Hillis AE, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P648, DOI 10.1017/S135561779846613X
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Howard D., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY HIST
Howard D., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P76
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kiran S, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000258
LAINE M, 1998, CATEGORY SPECIFIC OD
LAINE M, 1998, CATEGORY SPECIFIC NA
LAINE M, 1998, CATEGORY SPECIFIC WO
Laine M., 1999, WORDMILL LEXICAL SEA
Laine M., 1997, BOSTONIN NIMENTATEST
Laine M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P283, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0050
Laine M., 1997, BOSTONIN DIAGNOSTINE
LAINE M, 1992, CORTEX, V28, P537
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
Marshall RC, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P585, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000050
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P867, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000390
Martin N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P53
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000129
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
PORTIN R, 1980, PARKINSONS DIS CURRE, P271
Pulliainen V, 1999, CERAD KOGNITIIVINEN
RAPP B, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P113, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253458
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Renvall K, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P305, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000671
Renvall K, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V95, P327, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2005.02.003
Sbisa S, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P46
SUGISHITA M, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V31, P559, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(93)90052-2
Wambaugh JL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P933
Warrington EK, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P611, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.2.611
WELSH KA, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P609
NR 57
TC 10
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 5
BP 499
EP 527
DI 10.1080/02687030701254248
PG 29
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 172VQ
UT WOS:000246833000005
ER
PT J
AU Hough, MS
Givens, GD
Cranford, JL
Downs, RC
AF Hough, Monica Strauss
Givens, Gregg D.
Cranford, Jerry L.
Downs, Renee C.
TI Behavioural and electrophysiological measures of auditory attention in
right hemisphere brain damage
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID TEMPORAL-PARIETAL LESIONS; SPEECH-DISCRIMINATION; EVOKED-POTENTIALS;
SPATIAL DEFICITS; APHASIC PATIENTS; AGE-DIFFERENCES; LISTENING TASK;
VERBAL STIMULI; NEGLECT; PERCEPTION
AB Background: The right hemisphere (RH) has been found to play a major role in attention. However, most research has focused on the RH's role in visual attention associated with arousal, orienting, vigilance, and sustained and selective attention, and especially on the subsequent visuospatial deficits observed after RH brain damage. The RH's contribution to auditory attention and processing as well as the auditory abilities of the RH after brain damage has been explored to a lesser degree. Investigations using psychoacoustics and electrophysiology to examine the auditory processing abilities of non-brain-damaged and aphasic adults have been numerous and have revealed the influence of several variables on their findings including age, lesion site, lesion size, type of stimuli, etc. Investigations using these approaches to examine the auditory attention abilities of individuals with RH brain damage have been minimal. Furthermore, it is unclear whether both testing methods are examining similar components of auditory attention.
Aims: The purpose of this investigation was to determine if electrophysiological testing provided additional information not available from behavioural central auditory processing evaluation for three patients with RH brain damage as the result of a stroke. Another purpose was to investigate whether electrophysiological findings were consistent with those obtained from the behavioural evaluation.
Methods & Procedures: Participants were three males, aged 69, 71, and 78, all having suffered right hemisphere cerebro-vascular accidents, resulting in mild cognitive-communicative impairments. Experimental testing included: speech-language evaluation through administration of the Western Aphasia Battery and the Token Test; hearing evaluation using routine pure tone audiometry, speech audiometry, and middle ear measurements; behavioural CAP assessment using the auditory attention measures of Pitch Pattern Sequence and Dichotic Digits; and electrophysiological testing, consisting of evaluation of late auditory evoked potentials (N100, P200, P300) with and without distraction using an oddball paradigm.
Outcomes & Results: All three participants showed a consistent right ear advantage, with abnormal scores for the left ear on the behavioural central auditory attention tests. Electrophysiological testing revealed greater amplitudes for the right ear than the left ear for all three late auditory evoked potentials for the three participants. Furthermore, when auditory competition was introduced, the expected decrease in amplitude was observed for all three late auditory evoked potentials only for the right ear; all three participants exhibited this pattern.
Conclusions: Thus, the electrophysiological findings were congruent with the behavioural central auditory processing results for the three participants, revealing a consistent right ear advantage for auditory attention. Based on these findings, it is evident that the direct relationship between behavioural central auditory attention skills and electrophysiology requires further investigation with other patients with right hemisphere brain damage.
C1 E Carolina Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
Louisiana State Univ, Med Ctr, New Orleans, LA USA.
Driscoll Childrens Hosp, Hartford, CT USA.
RP Hough, MS (reprint author), E Carolina Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
EM houghm@Mail.ecu.edu
CR Alden JD, 1997, NEUROPSY NEUROPSY BE, V10, P239
*ASHA, 1995, CENTR AUD PROC CURR
BACKS RW, 1987, CURRENT TRENDS EVENT, V40, P163
BERLIN CI, 1972, ARCH OTOLARYNGOL, V96, P440
BISIACH E, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P37, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.1.37
BOUMA A, 1988, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V10, P709, DOI 10.1080/01688638808402809
BROUGHTON R, 1988, SLEEP, V88, P6
BROWN WS, 1983, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V55, P277, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(83)90205-5
Bryden M. P., 1982, LATERALITY FUNCTIONA
Bryden M. P., 1988, HDB DICHOTIC LISTENI, P1
BUTCHER J, 1983, DISS ABSTR INT
BUTCHNER J, 1994, PRINCIPLES APPL AUDI, P219
Carpenter M, 2002, J CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V19, P55, DOI 10.1097/00004691-200201000-00007
CLARK LE, 1973, J GERONTOL, V28, P173
DERENZI E, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P41
DERENZI E, 1989, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V52, P613, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.52.5.613
Fisher A L, 2000, J Am Acad Audiol, V11, P36
GOODIN DS, 1978, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V44, P447, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(78)90029-9
HAGOORT P, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P629
Hall J, 1992, HDB AUDITORY EVOKED
HEILMAN KM, 1972, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V26, P32
Heilman KM, 1985, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P243
HEILMAN KM, 1984, SEMIN NEUROL, V4, P209, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1041551
Hiscock M, 1999, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V21, P265
Hiscock M, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V13, P404, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.13.3.404
Hough MS, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P159, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000581
HYDE ML, 1994, PRINCIPLES APPL AUDI, P179
Hymel M R, 1998, J Am Acad Audiol, V9, P385
JACOBSON JT, 1994, PRINCIPLES APPL AUDI, P3
JERGER J, 1995, EAR HEARING, V16, P482, DOI 10.1097/00003446-199510000-00005
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KIMURA D, 1961, CAN J PSYCHOLOGY, V15, P166, DOI 10.1037/h0083219
KNIGHT RT, 1989, BRAIN RES, V502, P109, DOI 10.1016/0006-8993(89)90466-6
KNIGHT RT, 1980, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V50, P112, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(80)90328-4
KRAUS N, 1995, EAR HEARING, V16, P19, DOI 10.1097/00003446-199502000-00003
MAZZUCCHI A, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P381
MESULAM MM, 1981, ANN NEUROL, V10, P309, DOI 10.1002/ana.410100402
MOLFESE DL, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P285, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90129-7
MUSIEK FE, 1987, AUDIOLOGY, V26, P79
Musiek F E, 1992, J Am Acad Audiol, V3, P5
MUSIEK FE, 1983, EAR HEARING, V4, P79, DOI 10.1097/00003446-198303000-00002
Musiek F E, 1994, J Am Acad Audiol, V5, P265
Myers P. S., 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
NICCUM N, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P289, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90106-9
OSCARBERMAN M, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P345, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80075-7
PINBEIRO ML, 1985, ASSESSMENT CENTRAL A
PINEK B, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P175
POLICH J, 1987, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V68, P311, DOI 10.1016/0168-5597(87)90052-9
POLICH J, 1989, J CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V6, P277, DOI 10.1097/00004691-198907000-00003
POLLOCK VE, 1992, J GERONTOL, V47, P88
POLLOCK VE, 1989, INT J NEUROSCI, V45, P127, DOI 10.3109/00207458908986225
POSNER MI, 1984, J NEUROSCI, V4, P1863
POSNER MI, 1990, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V13, P25, DOI 10.1146/annurev.neuro.13.1.25
ROBERTSON I, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P157, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90168-1
ROTHENBERG A, 1982, ARCH PSYCHIAT NERVEN, V231, P155, DOI 10.1007/BF00343837
RUFF RM, 1981, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V19, P435, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(81)90073-7
SHANKS J, 1976, CORTEX, V12, P100
SIDTIS JJ, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90135-6
Sparks R, 1970, Cortex, V6, P249
WOODS DL, 1993, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V1, P227, DOI 10.1016/0926-6410(93)90007-R
YAMAGUCHI S, 1992, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V84, P139, DOI 10.1016/0168-5597(92)90018-7
ZURIF EB, 1972, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V10, P103, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(72)90047-4
NR 62
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 9
BP 831
EP 843
DI 10.1080/02687030600647757
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HV
UT WOS:000250007500001
ER
PT J
AU Kiran, S
Ntourou, K
Eubank, M
AF Kiran, Swathi
Ntourou, Katerina
Eubank, Megan
TI The effect of typicality on online category verification of inanimate
category exemplars in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SEMANTIC MEMORY; DISTRIBUTED ACCOUNT; NATURAL CATEGORIES; DOMAIN
DIFFERENCES; REPRESENTATIONS; NORMS; WORD; PROTOTYPICALITY;
DISTINCTIVENESS; FAMILIARITY
AB Background: A previous study (Kiran & Thompson, 2003a) investigated the effect of typicality on online category verification of animate categories in patients with fluent or nonfluent aphasia and their normal controls. Results revealed a robust effect of typicality: typical examples were faster and more accurate than atypical examples of animate categories. Patients with fluent aphasia did not demonstrate the expected effects of typicality.
Aims: The aim of the present study was to extend this work to examine the effect of typicality on inanimate categories such as furniture, clothing, and weapons.
Methods & Procedures: Normal young, older, and aphasic individuals participated in an online category verification task where primes were superordinate category labels whereas targets were either typical or atypical examples of inanimate categories (e. g., clothing, furniture, weapons) or nonmembers belonging to animate categories. Aphasic participants were divided into two groups, semantic impairment group (SI) and no semantic impairment group (NSI), based on their performance on offline standardised semantic processing tests. The reaction time to judge whether the target belonged to the preceding category label was measured.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that all four groups were significantly faster and more accurate on typical examples compared to atypical examples. Further, differences emerged in the processing of categories, wherein responses to clothing were more accurate than responses to furniture or weapons. In the SI group, representation of typical examples and atypical examples were impaired, as evidenced by poor accuracy rates.
Conclusions: The present experiment demonstrated the typicality effect in normal individuals and in individuals with aphasia. Further, differences emerged in the processing of categories, where responses to clothing were more accurate than responses to furniture or weapons.
C1 Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
RP Kiran, S (reprint author), Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, CMA 7-206, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
EM s-kiran@mail.utexas.edu
RI Kiran, S/B-1892-2013
CR ASHCRAFT MH, 1978, MEM COGNITION, V6, P227, DOI 10.3758/BF03197450
BARR RA, 1987, MEM COGNITION, V15, P397, DOI 10.3758/BF03197730
BARTON ME, 1989, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V18, P433, DOI 10.1007/BF01067309
BASSO A, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V26, P201, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90039-2
Bruner J. S., 1956, STUDY THINKING
Cabeza R, 2000, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V12, P1, DOI 10.1162/08989290051137585
Cao Y, 1999, STROKE, V30, P2331
CASEY PJ, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P823, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.18.4.823
Cole-Virtue J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P77, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000346
COLLINS AM, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P407, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.82.6.407
Del Toro JF, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P925
Devlin JT, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P54, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00066-5
Diesendruck G, 1999, PSYCHON B REV, V6, P338, DOI 10.3758/BF03212339
Estes Z, 2003, MEM COGNITION, V31, P199, DOI 10.3758/BF03194379
Frances N., 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Garrard P, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P125, DOI 10.1080/02643290125857
Gennari S, 2003, COGNITION, V89, pB27, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(03)00069-6
GROBER E, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P318, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90059-0
GROSSMAN M, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V12, P313, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90022-5
HAMPTON JA, 1995, J MEM LANG, V34, P686, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1995.1031
Hampton J., 1993, CATEGORIES CONCEPTS
HAMPTON JA, 1979, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V18, P441, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(79)90246-9
Heiss WD, 1999, ANN NEUROL, V45, P430, DOI 10.1002/1531-8249(199904)45:4<430::AID-ANA3>3.0.CO;2-P
HOUGH MS, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P335, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249515
JOHNSON MK, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V9, P529
Kaplan E., 2001, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Keil F. C., 1989, CONCEPTS KINDS COGNI
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kiran S, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P773, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/061)
KIRAN S, 2002, DISS ABSTR INT B, V62, P5076
KIRAN S, 2006, UNPUB EFFECT TYPICAL
Kiran S, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P441, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00064-6
KIRAN S, IN PRESS AM J SPEECH
LAROCHELLE S, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P796, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1038
Laws KR, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V37, P1263, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00018-4
MALT BC, 1982, MEM COGNITION, V10, P69, DOI 10.3758/BF03197627
MCCLOSKEY M, 1980, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V19, P485, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(80)90330-8
MCCLOSKEY ME, 1978, MEM COGNITION, V6, P462, DOI 10.3758/BF03197480
McRae K, 1997, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V126, P99, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.126.2.99
MERVIS CB, 1976, B PSYCHONOMIC SOC, V7, P283
MILBERG W, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P138, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90065-4
POSNER MI, 1968, J EXP PSYCHOL, V77, P353, DOI 10.1037/h0025953
RIPS LJ, 1973, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V12, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(73)80056-8
ROSCH E, 1975, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V7, P573, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(75)90024-9
Rosch E., 1973, COGNITIVE DEV ACQUIS
ROSCH E, 1975, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V104, P192, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.104.3.192
SMITH EE, 1974, PSYCHOL REV, V81, P214, DOI 10.1037/h0036351
Thompson-Schill SL, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V41, P280, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00161-6
Tyler LK, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P89
Tyler LK, 2001, TRENDS COGN SCI, V5, P244, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(00)01651-X
Tyler LK, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P195, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2353
UYEDA KM, 1980, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V12, P587, DOI 10.3758/BF03201848
Vanoverberghe V, 2003, EUR J COGN PSYCHOL, V15, P1, DOI 10.1080/09541440244000094
WILSON D, 1988, MRC PSYCHOLINGUISTIC
NR 55
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 9
BP 844
EP 866
DI 10.1080/02687030600743564
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HV
UT WOS:000250007500002
ER
PT J
AU Yasuda, K
Nemoto, T
Takenaka, K
Mitachi, M
Kuwabara, K
AF Yasuda, Kiyoshi
Nemoto, Tatsuya
Takenaka, Keisuke
Mitachi, Mami
Kuwabara, Kazuhiro
TI Effectiveness of a vocabulary data file, encyclopaedia, and Internet
homepages in a conversation-support system for people with
moderate-to-severe aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID GLOBAL APHASIA; COMMUNICATION; ADULTS; PARTNERS; NAMES; COMPREHENSION;
RESOURCES; RECOVERY; LANGUAGE; PATTERNS
AB Background: In order to facilitate conversation for people with moderate-to-severe aphasia, a conversation-support system has been developed. This system consists of three electronic resources: a vocabulary data file, an encyclopaedia, and homepages on the Internet. The vocabulary data file we created contains approximately 50,000 words, mostly consisting of various proper names, which are classified into 10 categories. These words function as keywords in conversation.
Aims: To evaluate the effectiveness of the three resources in eliciting new information from people with aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: Fifteen people with non-fluent and moderate-to-severe aphasia participated in the experiment. Participants conversed with their communication partners about four topics under use and non-use conditions. Under the use condition, partners showed pages from one of the three resources on the screen of a personal computer. Participants were asked to select words on the pages, or use other modalities (verbal or nonverbal), to answer questions. Three evaluators gave points for information conveyed correctly.
Outcomes & Results: Comparison of the points between the use and non-use conditions showed that significantly more information was conveyed when the vocabulary data file was used. On the other hand, the amount of points did not increase in the use condition using the encyclopaedia or homepages.
Conclusions: The vocabulary date file succeeded in eliciting more information from people with moderate-to-severe aphasia within a limited timeframe. Presentation of the keyword or proper name lists related to the topics was shown to be a useful conversation resource for people with moderate-to-severe aphasia. As for the encyclopaedia and homepages, further research is required to determine whether or not these resources in collaboration with the data file can further facilitate conversation.
C1 Chiba Rosai Hosp, Chiba 2900003, Japan.
ATR, Intelligent Robot & Commun Labs, Kyoto, Japan.
Kameda Gen Hosp, Kamogawashi, Japan.
Abiko City Welf Ctr Handicapped, Abiko, Chiba, Japan.
Educ Facilitat Off, Tokyo, Japan.
RP Yasuda, K (reprint author), Chiba Rosai Hosp, 2-16 Tatsumidai Higashi, Chiba 2900003, Japan.
EM fwkk5911@mb.infoweb.ne.jp
CR Aftonomos LB, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P841, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90197-0
Davidson B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P243, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000653
Davis G., 1981, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P169
Elman RJ, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P895, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000267
Finnema E, 2000, INT J GERIATR PSYCH, V15, P141, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1099-1166(200002)15:2<141::AID-GPS92>3.0.CO;2-5
Fox LE, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P171, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000133
Garrett KL, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P237
HASEGAWA T, 1977, STANDARDIZED LANGUAG
HATTA T, 1977, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V42, P111
Holland A. L., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P197, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90007-6
Holland AL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P844, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249578
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P851, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249580
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
KERTESZ A, 1986, W APHASIA BATTERY
KRAAT AW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249086
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
McCall D, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P795
*MICR, 2000, ENCARTA ENCY WORLD A
Oelschlaeger ML, 2000, J COMMUN DISORD, V33, P205, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00019-8
Rayner H, 2003, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V38, P149, DOI 10.1080/1368282021000060308
Rostron A, 1996, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V31, P11
Sasanuma S, 1971, Cortex, V7, P1
Schlosser R. W., 2003, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V19, P5, DOI 10.1080/0743461032000056450
Simmons-Mackie N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P831, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249576
Singh S, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P157, DOI 10.1080/026870300401531
Sugishita M., 1993, JAPANESE RAVENS COLO
VANLANCKER D, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P511, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90159-E
Waller A, 1998, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P45
WAPNER W, 1979, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V22, P765
WARRINGTON EK, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P1273, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.5.1273
Yasuda K, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P274, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1856
Yasuda K, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P623, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70721-4
YASUDA K, 2001, HIGHER BRAIN FUNCTIO, V21
YASUDA K, 1998, HIGHER BRAIN FUNCTIO, V18
Yasuda K, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P1067, DOI 10.1080/02687030050174638
NR 35
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 9
BP 867
EP 882
DI 10.1080/02687030600783024
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HV
UT WOS:000250007500003
ER
PT J
AU Heuer, S
Hallowell, B
AF Heuer, Sabine
Hallowell, Brooke
TI An evaluation of multiple-choice test images for comprehension
assessment in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID EYE-MOVEMENTS; CHILDREN; SEARCH; ADULTS
AB Background: Using images in multiple-choice formats for comprehension testing in aphasia is common. It is generally assumed that persons being assessed perceive the content of the images represented in such tasks. However, specific visual characteristics of individual images may influence visual attention, which may influence accuracy in the selection of a correct target image corresponding to a verbal stimulus. The validity of test responses may be confounded by (1) physical stimulus features, such as size, and (2) semantic content conveyed by images, such as image familiarity.
Aims: The first aim was to develop a rating instrument to assess visual stimulus properties and semantic content conveyance in multiple-choice images, based on an extensive review of empirical literature and validated by experts in graphic design. The second aim was to study the degree of relationship between viewers' subjective ratings of images selected from published aphasia batteries, using the rating instrument, and eye movement measures recorded as independent viewers looked at the same images. The third aim was to compare the viewers' actual eye movement indices of disproportionate visual attention to an ideal value of evenly proportionate visual attention for each image set.
Methods & Procedures: A rating instrument, based on an extensive review of literature and assessed and revised by graphic design and eye-tracking experts, was developed to identify such influences within multiple-choice images and was assessed through empirical testing of viewers' eye movement patterns as they looked at images from published aphasia tests. A total of 20 adults rated 20 image sets from five aphasia batteries. Eye movements were recorded for a separate group of 40 adults viewing the same images.
Outcomes & Results: Ratings were not statistically correlated with eye movement responses. All multiple-choice image sets prompted significantly disproportionate visual attention.
Conclusions: Results highlight the importance of: (1) considering the possible influence of visual stimulus confounds on any given patient's test performance, and (2) better controlled image design for multiple-choice test images to improve the validity of assessment. Further research is needed to improve subjective and objective means of assessment of images and guidelines for improved design of multiple-choice image displays.
C1 Ohio Univ, Sch Hearing Speech & Language Sci, Grover Ctr, Athens, OH 45701 USA.
RP Heuer, S (reprint author), Ohio Univ, Sch Hearing Speech & Language Sci, Grover Ctr, W218, Athens, OH 45701 USA.
EM sh167702@ohio.edu
CR Andrews TJ, 1999, VISION RES, V39, P2947, DOI 10.1016/S0042-6989(99)00019-X
BARBUR JL, 1980, VISUAL SEARCH
BEIDERMAN I, 1995, VIS COGN, P121
BOYCE SJ, 1992, EYE MOVEMENTS VISUAL
BOZKOV V, 1982, VISION RES, V22, P721, DOI 10.1016/0042-6989(82)90002-5
DEFFNER G, 1995, STUD VIS INFORM PROC, V6, P479
DENES G, 1982, BRAIN, V105, P542
Edman JA, 1987, CLIN REHABIL, V1, P273, DOI 10.1177/026921558700100403
Flanagan JL, 1997, J COMMUN DISORD, V30, P33, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(96)00039-1
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Greene HH, 2001, VISION RES, V41, P3763, DOI 10.1016/S0042-6989(01)00154-7
Hall CA, 2002, J THERMOPHYS HEAT TR, V16, P587, DOI 10.2514/2.6718
HALLOWELL B, 2004, POP OUT EFFECT CONTR
Hallowell B, 1999, CURRENT OCULOMOTOR R, P292
HALLOWELL B, 2006, UNPUB POP OUT STAT S
Hallowell B, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P611, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000084
Harrington D. O., 1990, VISUAL FIELDS
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P171, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00063-1
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
HYVARINEN L, 1980, ACTA OPHTHALMOL, V58, P507
Katz RC, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P303
Kay J., 1997, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LaPointe L., 1998, READING COMPREHENSIO
LASS U, 1993, STUD VIS INFORM PROC, V4, P93
LIESEGANG TJ, 1992, ESSENTIALS OPHTHALMO, P4
LOCHER P, 1993, STUD VIS INFORM PROC, V4, P59
MACKWORT.NH, 1970, HUM DEV, V13, P149
MIRSKY A F, 1991, Neuropsychology Review, V2, P109, DOI 10.1007/BF01109051
Murray Laura L., 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P107, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-24987
Myers P., 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
NEWELL FW, 1992, OPHTHALMOLOGY PRINCI, P143
Nothdurft HC, 2002, VISION RES, V42, P1287, DOI 10.1016/S0042-6989(02)00016-0
Rayner K., 1989, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V4, P21, DOI DOI 10.1080/01690968908406362
Rayner K., 1992, EYE MOVEMENTS VISUAL, P203, DOI DOI 10.1007/978-1-4612-2852-3_12
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
WILSON JTL, 1992, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V7, P29, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199206000-00006
Wolfe J., 2000, SEEING, P335, DOI 10.1016/B978-012443760-9/50010-6
Ylvisaker Mark, 1992, Seminars in Speech and Language, V13, P239, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064200
NR 39
TC 14
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 9
BP 883
EP 900
DI 10.1080/02687030600695194
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HV
UT WOS:000250007500004
ER
PT J
AU Moses, MS
Sheard, C
Nickels, LA
AF Moses, Melanie S.
Sheard, Christine
Nickels, Lyndsey A.
TI Insights into recurrent perseverative errors in aphasia: A case series
approach
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID JARGON APHASIA; SPEAKERS; PICTURES
AB Background: Recurrent perseverative errors are most commonly produced by speakers with aphasia (Albert & Sandson, 1986). While some research has proposed that recurrent perseverative errors are primarily caused by an impaired ability to inhibit a prior response, most recent research proposes that these errors occur as a direct result of underlying language impairment at any specified processing level (e.g., Cohen & Dehaene, 1998).
Aims: This investigation was designed to further explore the hypothesis that the type of recurrent perseverative errors produced reflects the level of language-processing breakdown. Two specific questions were addressed: ( 1) Is the distribution of types of perseverative error similar to that of non-perseverative errors within different language tasks? ( 2) Do the relative proportions of total and blended perseverative errors reflect an individual's language-processing profile?
Methods & Procedures: The recurrent perseverative error patterns of five individuals with aphasia with varying levels of language-processing breakdown were examined across three language tasks ( repetition, reading aloud, and picture naming).
Outcomes & Results: The incidence of different types of recurrent perseverative errors was found to be influenced by the processing demands of individual tasks, relative to each participant's language-processing breakdown. However, certain findings challenged current theories, such as the large proportion of perseverative errors that were unrelated to their targets and some participants' entire reproduction of prior neologisms across different responses. Different theoretical accounts are explored to attempt to understand these error patterns.
Conclusions: This study supports theories proposing that recurrent perseverative errors are a direct result of underlying language-processing breakdown in aphasia ( Cohen & Dehaene, 1998; Martin, Roach, Brecher, & Lowery, 1998). It is argued that examination of both whole word (total) and phoneme ( blended) perseverative errors is necessary for a comprehensive analysis of the proposed relationship between perseveration and language-processing impairment.
C1 Care Of Dr Lyndsey Nickles, Macquarie Univ, MACCS, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
Macquarie Univ, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Moses, MS (reprint author), Care Of Dr Lyndsey Nickles, Macquarie Univ, MACCS, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
EM mmoses@maccs.mq.edu.au
CR ALBERT ML, 1986, CORTEX, V22, P103
ALLISON RS, 1966, BRIT MED J, V2, P1095
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES, P113
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1979, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V4, P329
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P365
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
BUTTERWORTH B, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P133, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90046-4
BUTTERWORTH B, 1981, JARGONAPHASIA
Cohen L, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P1641, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.9.1641
Coltheart M, 1996, AUST J PSYCHOL, V48, P136, DOI 10.1080/00049539608259520
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
ELLIS AW, 1985, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, V2
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P7
HELMICK JW, 1976, J COMMUN DISORD, V9, P143, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(76)90006-X
Hirsh KW, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P377, DOI 10.1080/026432998381140
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
HUDSON AJ, 1969, BRAIN, V91, P571
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Martin N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P319, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249536
MOSES MS, 2004, AUSTR COMMUNICATION, V6, P70
Moses MS, 2004, NEUROCASE, V10, P452, DOI 10.1080/13554790490894057
Moses MS, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P157, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00364-X
Nickels L.A., 2000, SKETCH COGNITIVE PRO
Papagno C, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P67
SANDSON J, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P715, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90098-8
Santo Pietro M J, 1986, Brain Lang, V29, P1
Santo Pietro M J, 1982, J Speech Hear Res, V25, P184
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
VITKOVITCH M, 1991, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V17, P664, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.17.4.664
YAMADORI A, 1981, Neuropsychologia, V19, P591, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(81)90026-9
NR 32
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 10-11
BP 975
EP 1001
DI 10.1080/02687030701198312
PG 27
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HW
UT WOS:000250007600005
ER
PT J
AU Martin, N
Dell, GS
AF Martin, Nadine
Dell, Gary S.
TI Common mechanisms underlying perseverative and non-perseverative sound
and word substitutions
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID INTERACTIVE 2-STEP MODEL; CASE-SERIES TEST; SPEECH PRODUCTION; LEXICAL
ACCESS; ERRORS; RETRIEVAL; SPEAKERS; FACILITATION; REPETITION;
ACTIVATION
AB Background: Perseverations of sounds and words are common errors in aphasia. Understanding their mechanisms is of considerable interest to theories of word retrieval and also to treatment of anomia. Here, we explore the hypothesis that perseveration errors are generated by the same mechanisms as non-perseverative errors: weak activation of the intended word in the context of a competition from other activated words.
Aims: In analyses of perseverative and non-perseverative naming errors of 94 individuals with aphasia, we aimed to show that the only difference between the two kinds of errors is that perseverated words and sounds have an increased probability of being retrieved instead of the target word because of their residual activation potential from their prior activation.
Methods and Procedures: Correlational analyses were conducted to test (1) an interactive activation model's ( Schwartz, Dell, Martin, Sobel, & Gahl, 2006) account of the occurrence of sound and whole-word perseverations, ( 2) distributions of perseverative and non-perseverative across error categories, and ( 3) the relationship between weakened connection strength between semantic and lexical representations and the occurrence of "no response'' errors.
Outcomes and Results: Our analyses indicate that whole-word perseverative and non-perseverative errors are associated with weak spreading of activation between semantics and the target word form, and that sound perseverations and non-perseverations are associated with weak spreading of activation between the target word form and its corresponding sounds. Additionally, distributions of perseverative and non-perseverative errors across error categories are strongly associated. Finally, the occurrence of "no response'' type errors is associated with weak semantic activation and the occurrence of whole-word perseverations.
Conclusions: The data from this study support a model of word and sound perseverations in which their occurrence is attributed to the same mechanisms as non-perseverative errors: weakened activation of the intended word in the context of a competitive activation process in which other word forms that are related to the target word have potential to be retrieved instead of the target. Potential perseverated words and sounds participate in this process, but have an additional boost to their activation levels because of residual activation potential.
C1 Temple Univ, Dept Comp Sci, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
Univ Illinois, Chicago, IL 60680 USA.
RP Martin, N (reprint author), Temple Univ, Dept Comp Sci, 1701 N 13th St, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
EM nmartin@temple.edu
CR Arbuthnott KD, 1996, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V125, P261, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.125.3.261
Chute D. L., 1990, MACLABORATORY PSYCHO
Cohen L, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P1641, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.9.1641
DELL GS, 1981, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V20, P611, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(81)90202-4
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P123, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.1.123
Dell GS, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P125, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000320
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Dell GS, 2007, J MEM LANG, V56, P490, DOI 10.1016/j.jml.2006.05.007
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
FROMKIN VA, 1971, LANGUAGE, V47, P27, DOI 10.2307/412187
Garrett M. E., 1975, PSYCHOL LEARN MOTIV, P133
Gotts SJ, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1930, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00067-2
HARLEY TA, 1984, COGNITIVE SCI, V8, P191
Hirsh KW, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P377, DOI 10.1080/026432998381140
Houghton G., 1990, CURRENT RES NATURAL
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MARTIN N, 1989, J MEM LANG, V28, P462, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(89)90022-3
Martin Nadine, 2004, Seminars in Speech and Language, V25, P349, DOI 10.1055/s-2004-837247
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
Martin N, 1996, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V11, P257, DOI 10.1080/016909696387187
Martin N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P319, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249536
Roach A., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P121
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1042
Schwartz MF, 2006, J MEM LANG, V54, P228, DOI 10.1016/j.jml.2005.10.001
YAMADORI A, 1981, Neuropsychologia, V19, P591, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(81)90026-9
NR 27
TC 16
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 10-11
BP 1002
EP 1017
DI 10.1080/02687030701198346
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HW
UT WOS:000250007600006
ER
PT J
AU Ackerman, T
Ellis, AW
AF Ackerman, Tess
Ellis, Andrew W.
TI Case study: Where do aphasic perseverations come from?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ERRORS; MECHANISMS; ACTIVATION; RETRIEVAL; VARIABLES; SPEAKERS; NORMS;
SET
AB Background: Perseverations are common in the speech of people with aphasia but the phenomenon has been the subject of relatively little investigation. We had the opportunity to study an aphasic patient who produced a large number of perseverations in naming, reading, and repetition tasks.
Aims: To gain a better understanding of the origins and causes of perseverative errors in a man with aphasia ( MM) through a detailed analysis of his errors across naming, reading, and repetition, combined with a thorough assessment of his language disorder.
Methods & Procedures: MM was given a cognitive neuropsychological assessment of his language-processing system. He was then asked to name 140 black and white drawings of objects and to repeat and read aloud the same 140 object names. Each of these tasks was done on two occasions.
Outcomes & Results: MM showed major semantic impairment combined with some phonological and orthographic deficits. He was better at reading object names than repeating them, and worst at object naming. Analysis of his errors showed differences between naming, repeating, and reading. Whole-word perseverations were most common in object naming, where they were predominantly unrelated to the target items.
Conclusions: MM's aphasia and perseverations are discussed in terms of the theory put forward by Martin and Dell ( 2007, this issue). We endorse the proposition that perseverations should be understood within the wider context of aphasic breakdown, and that no special mechanisms may be required to explain perseverative errors. But the lack of any influence of lexical responses like word frequency on MM's performance, and the fact that perseverations mostly resulted in unrelated errors, are problematic for the Martin and Dell framework. They suggest that MM's perseverations mostly occurred when his semantic and phonological system were deprived of any useable input, with the target being unable to influence the response. Under such circumstances, either no response was available, or MM made an unconstrained and therefore unrelated response, in which case the endogenously driven reactivation of recent responses ( whole words or fragments) was likely to fill the void with a perseverative error.
C1 Univ York, Dept Psychol, York YO10 5DD, N Yorkshire, England.
Leeds E Primary Care Trust, Leeds, W Yorkshire, England.
RP Ellis, AW (reprint author), Univ York, Dept Psychol, York YO10 5DD, N Yorkshire, England.
EM awe1@york.ac.uk
CR ALBERT ML, 1986, CORTEX, V22, P103
ALLISON RS, 1967, BRAIN, V90, P442
Baayen R. H., 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Basso Anna, 2004, Seminars in Speech and Language, V25, P375, DOI 10.1055/s-2004-837249
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES, P113
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1979, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V4, P329
Byng S., 1999, REVERSIBLE SENTENCE
Cohen L, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P1641, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.9.1641
Cuetos F, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V82, P344, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00038-X
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P123, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.1.123
DELL GS, 2004, J MEM LANG, V43, P182
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
Ellis AW, 2006, CORTEX, V42, P817, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70423-4
ELLIS AW, 1978, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V30, P569, DOI 10.1080/00335557843000142
Ellis AW, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P165, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00008-5
Goodglass H., 1983, REVISED BOSTON NAMIN
Gotts Stephen J., 2004, Seminars in Speech and Language, V25, P323, DOI 10.1055/s-2004-837245
Gotts SJ, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1930, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00067-2
HALPERN H, 1965, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V20, P421
HIRSH K, 1992, WORD PRODUCTION COMP
Hirsh KW, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P377, DOI 10.1080/026432998381140
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Martin N, 2007, APHASIOLOGY, V21, P1002, DOI 10.1080/02687030701198346
Martin N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P319, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249536
MICELI G, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P317, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90134-1
MICELI G, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P57
Morrison CM, 1997, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V50, P528
Moses MS, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P157, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00364-X
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
Papagno C, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P67
QUINLAN PT, 1992, MRC PSYCHOLINGUISTIC
Riddoch M.J., 1993, BIRMINGHAM OBJECT RE
SANDSON J, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P715, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90098-8
SANPIETRO MJ, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P1
SANPIETRO MJ, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V25, P184
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
YAMADORI A, 1981, Neuropsychologia, V19, P591, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(81)90026-9
NR 41
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 10-11
BP 1018
EP 1038
DI 10.1080/02687030701198361
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HW
UT WOS:000250007600007
ER
PT J
AU Frankel, T
Penn, C
AF Frankel, Tali
Penn, Claire
TI Perseveration and conversation in TBI: Response to pharmacological
intervention
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID TRAUMATIC BRAIN-INJURY; ATTENTION; APHASIA; ORGANIZATION; INHIBITION;
DISCOURSE; PROFILE; CORTEX
AB Background: Perseveration is a frequently encountered characteristic of individuals with organic brain involvement, including individuals with traumatic brain injury (TBI). Current theory implicates disordered executive functioning, particularly deficient inhibitory control, in the manifestation of perseverative phenomena (McNamara & Albert, 2004). To date, no work has been published related to conversational data despite numerous allusions in the literature to the presence of perseveration during conversational discourse. Existing research indicates that pharmacological approaches to reduction of verbal perseveration may be effective, although no full-scale clinical trial of any pharmacological agent targeted specifically at reducing perseveration has been conducted ( McNamara & Albert, 2004).
Aims: This study examines conversational correlates of perseveration in TBI, the accompanying executive functioning profiles in relation to Barkley's hybrid model of executive functioning and self-regulation ( 1997) and responses to pharmacotherapy ( Ritalin).
Methods & Procedures: Two participants, in chronic stages following TBI with prefrontal and sub-cortical damage, participated in parallel case studies with a quasi-experimental research design. Baseline, active, placebo, and withdrawal phases were included as well as double blind and randomisation precautions. Conversational data were generated using Conversation Analysis. Neuropsychological data were generated following a full battery of tests investigating behavioural inhibition, nonverbal working memory, internalisation of language, regulation of affect, and reconstitution.
Outcomes & Results: Conversational data demonstrated disturbed topic management as a result of verbal perseveration. Participant AA demonstrated recurrent perseveration while PB demonstrated stuck-in-set perseveration, which influenced their conversations in highly specific ways. These findings were accompanied by discrete profiles indicating unique disruptions of executive functioning, particularly in relation to behavioural inhibition. Deficits in attention impacted profoundly on self-regulating functions, in particular nonverbal working memory and reconstitution. Improvements were noted during active drug phases related to improved behavioural inhibition and subsequent amelioration of perseverative manifestations with some evidence of improved topic shift and contribution and greater capacity for reconstitution and working memory tasks. Context was found to exert significant effects in relation to perseveration and its conversational manifestations.
Conclusions: Perseveration co-exists with marked deficits in behavioural inhibition, which differentially affects executive functioning abilities, resulting in discrete cognitive profiles with corresponding conversational outcomes. Positive responses to pharmacotherapy present optimistic potential for future treatment, while context variables highlight the need for individualised, data-driven intervention programmes with an emphasis on continuous conversational interaction to preserve and improve communicative skills in individuals with chronic TBI.
C1 Univ Witwatersrand, ZA-2050 Johannesburg, South Africa.
RP Frankel, T (reprint author), Univ Witwatersrand, Private Bag 3, ZA-2050 Johannesburg, South Africa.
EM tdfranky@absamail.co.za
CR Adamovich B, 1992, SCALES COGNITIVE ABI
Aten JL, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Barkley RA, 1997, PSYCHOL BULL, V121, P65, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.121.1.65
Benton AL, 1976, MULTILINGUAL APHASIA
BLANKEN G., 1993, LINGUISTIC DISORDERS
BOOTH S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P259
Bryant Shannon L., 1994, Seminars in Speech and Language, V15, P71, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064134
Christman Sarah S., 2004, Seminars in Speech and Language, V25, P295, DOI 10.1055/s-2004-837243
CODE C, 1982, CHARACTERISTICS APHA
Coelho CA, 1991, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V6, P92, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199106000-00011
Cohen L, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P1641, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.9.1641
EISENSON J, 1973, ADULT APHASIA ASSESS
FEENEY D, 1993, CRC CRIT R CLIN NEUR, V3, P135
Fuster J.M., 1997, PREFRONTAL CORTEX
Gathercole S. E., 1993, WORKING MEMORY LANGU
GILES M, 1993, BRAIN INJURY REHABIL
Gillis R.J., 1996, TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJU
Godfrey HPD, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P433
Golden J. C., 1978, STROOP COLOR WORD TE
Gotts SJ, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1930, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00067-2
GUALTIERI CG, 1991, RITALIN THEORY PATIE
Gualtieri C T, 1988, Brain Inj, V2, P273, DOI 10.3109/02699058809150898
Hartley LL., 1995, COGNITIVE COMMUNICAT
Hauser MD, 1999, CURR OPIN NEUROBIOL, V9, P214, DOI 10.1016/S0959-4388(99)80030-0
HOLMES VF, 1995, INT J PSYCHIAT MED, V25, P1, DOI 10.2190/2TVT-2LH0-AD5A-CP91
LAAKSO M, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P259
Landauer T. K., 1978, PRACTICAL ASPECTS ME
LANG PJ, 1995, AM PSYCHOL, V50, P372, DOI 10.1037//0003-066X.50.5.372
Lesser R., 1993, LINGUISTICS APHASIA
Lesser R., 1999, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Levin HS, 1991, FRONTAL LOBE FUNCTIO
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
Linscott RJ, 1996, BRAIN INJURY, V10, P397, DOI 10.1080/026990596124269
Lock S, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P25
Lubinski R, 1991, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI
LUNDGREN K, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P370
Luria A. R., 1980, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
McNamara Patrick, 2004, Seminars in Speech and Language, V25, P309, DOI 10.1055/s-2004-837244
McNeil M. R., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P76, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0404.76
MENTIS M, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P88
Milner B., 1995, EPILEPSY FUNCTIONAL
MILTON S, 1984, CLIN APH C P MINN
MOLLOY R, 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR
MOSES M, 2001, CAMEL CANDLE UNDERST
NELSON L, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY BEHA
Nelson LD, 1998, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V13, P549, DOI 10.1016/S0887-6177(97)00052-8
NEWCOMBE F, 1997, NEUROLOGICAL REHABIL
Paolo A. M., 1996, ASSESSMENT, V3, P137, DOI [10.1177/107319119600300205, DOI 10.1177/107319119600300205]
PARLOFF MB, 1986, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V54, P79, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.54.1.79
Pashler H., 1998, ATTENTION
Penn C, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P185, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2247
Penn C, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P535, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2127
Perkins L, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P33, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00004-9
Perkins L, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P259
PONSFORD J, 1992, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V14, P822, DOI 10.1080/01688639208402865
Prigatano GP, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL R
Rao V, 2000, PSYCHOSOMATICS, V41, P95, DOI 10.1176/appi.psy.41.2.95
RASKIN SA, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P95, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90018-H
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
SANDSON J, 1987, NEUROLOGY, V37, P1736
SCHACHAR R, 1995, J ABNORM CHILD PSYCH, V23, P411, DOI 10.1007/BF01447206
SCHEGLOFF EA, 1977, LANGUAGE, V53, P361, DOI 10.2307/413107
SEHAPIRO SR, 1993, MINOR HEAD TRAUMA AS
Spencer JP, 2004, PSYCHOL SCI, V15, P187, DOI 10.1111/j.0956-7976.2004.01503007.x
Spreen O., 1998, COMPENDIUM NEUROPSYC
STUSS DT, 1992, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V60, P349, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.60.3.349
STUSS DT, 1986, LOCALIZATION NEUROPS
STUSS DT, 1982, J COMP PHYSIOL PSYCH, V96, P913, DOI 10.1037/0735-7036.96.6.913
TENHAVE P, 1999, CONVERSATION ANAL
ULATOWSKA HK, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P317, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90074-3
van Zomeran AH, 1994, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY
Walker-Batson D., 1998, RESTORATIVE NEUROLOG
Watt N, 2000, S AFR J PSYCHOL, V30, P27
Wechsler DS, 1997, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
WILKINSON R, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P259
WYCKOFF LH, 1984, NARRATIVE PROCEDURAL
YLVISAKER M, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
NR 77
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 10-11
BP 1039
EP 1078
DI 10.1080/02687030701198395
PG 40
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HW
UT WOS:000250007600008
ER
PT J
AU Stark, J
Kristoferitsch, W
Graf, M
Gelpi, E
Budka, H
AF Stark, Jacqueline
Kristoferitsch, Wolfgang
Graf, Martin
Gelpi, Ellen
Budka, Herbert
TI Verbal perseveration as the initial symptom in a case of
Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FOCAL BRAIN DAMAGE; APHASIA; DEMENTIA; LANGUAGE; DIFFUSE; SPEECH; SIGN
AB Background: In the literature on cortical degenerative processes and primary progressive aphasia, language disorders have been discussed as the initial sign of higher cortical dysfunction. Verbal perseveration has also been cited to precede the occurrence of other cortical signs. In this paper we present language data from an autopsy-confirmed case of Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (CJD) who exhibited profound verbal perseveration as the initial symptom.
Aims: This case report aims to provide a description of the extent and pattern of verbal perseveration in a client with the rapidly progressing fatal CJD. Language test data and medical data, i.e., EEG and neuropathology-which confirm the diagnosis of CJD-are presented.
Methods & Procedures: Language testing was performed with our patient to determine the nature of the language disorder at a time when the diagnosis of CJD had not yet been made. The tape-recorded sessions were transcribed and the language data analysed.
Outcomes & Results: The pervasive perseverative behaviour mirrors the underlying language-processing difficulties and the magnitude of the progression of the disease process. Perseverative errors account for between 87% and 95% of the language-processing errors on the various language tasks. In general, the first items of each task were responded to correctly, indicating that our client was trying to meet the various test demands and at the time of testing was still able to process language, albeit in a very restricted manner.
Conclusions: The rapid deterioration of language functions in our case and in other reported cases necessitates acting quickly without delay. Immediate recognition and analysis of the language disturbance and verbal perseverative behaviour may provide relevant information for differentially diagnosing clients presenting with various cortical degenerative diseases at an early stage.
C1 Austrian Acad Sci, Dept Linguist & Commun Res, A-1030 Vienna, Austria.
Social Med Ctr SMZ E, Vienna, Austria.
Med Univ Vienna, Vienna, Austria.
RP Stark, J (reprint author), Austrian Acad Sci, Dept Linguist & Commun Res, Kegelgasse 27,3rd Floor, A-1030 Vienna, Austria.
EM jacqueline-ann.stark@univie.ac.at
CR ALLISON RS, 1966, BRIT MED J, V2, P1095
ALLISON RS, 1966, BRIT MED J, V2, P1027
BAYLES KA, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P102, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90123-3
BERNOULLI CC, 1979, SLOW TRANSMISSIBLE D, V1, P229
BOLLER F, 1973, NEUROLOGY, V23, P1117
BROWN P, 1979, ANN NEUROL, V6, P430, DOI 10.1002/ana.410060510
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES, P113
Cohen D, 2004, EPILEPSY BEHAV, V5, P792, DOI 10.1016/j.yebeh.2004.06.019
CRITCHLEY M, 1927, J NEUROL PSYCHOPATH, V7, P23
DEMPSTER FN, 1991, INTELLIGENCE, V15, P157, DOI 10.1016/0160-2896(91)90028-C
GALVEZ S, 1982, NERVENARZT, V53, P132
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
HEILBRONNER K, 1906, ERGANZUNGSHEFT MONAT, V18, P293
HIER DB, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P117, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90124-5
Hillis AE, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P743
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
JACKSON KH, 1880, BRAIN, V2, P323
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KEMPLER D, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P343
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KIRSHNER HS, 1984, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V41, P491
KLEIST K, 1934, GEHRINPATHOLOGIE VOR
LEBRUN Y, 1993, LINGUISTIC DISORDERS, P225
Lissauer H., 1890, ARCH PSYCHIATRIE NER, V21, P222, DOI 10.1007/BF02226765
MANDELL AM, 1989, NEUROLOGY, V39, P55
MATTHEWS WB, 1985, HDB CLIN NEUROLOGY, V46, P289
MOEN I, 1993, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V7, P1, DOI 10.3109/02699209308985540
Nagahama Y, 2005, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V76, P169, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.2004.039818
Pachalska M, 2001, Med Sci Monit, V7, P1307
Possin KL, 2005, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V27, P953, DOI 10.1080/13803390490919092
Rosenberg M, 1912, Z GESAMTE NEUROL PSY, V8, P123, DOI 10.1007/BF02866026
SHINDLER AG, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P148, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90013-0
SHUTTLEWORTH EC, 1985, J NATL MED ASSOC, V77, P649
Sowman R, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P579, DOI 10.1080/026870030500399129
STARK J, 1984, THESIS U VIENNA
Stark J, 2007, APHASIOLOGY, V21, P928, DOI 10.1080/02687030701198239
TEUBER HL, 1955, AM PSYCHOL, V10, P408
TSUJI S, 1983, NEUROLOGY, V33, P1503
VONSOLDER F, 1899, JB PSYCHIAT, V18, P479
WALLESCH CW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P133, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249066
WECHSLER AF, 1977, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V40, P303, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.40.3.303
Whitaker H., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V2, P1
YAMANOUCHI H, 1986, NEUROLOGY, V36, P1517
YATES AJ, 1966, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V17, P111, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ps.17.020166.000551
NR 44
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 10-11
BP 1079
EP 1113
DI 10.1080/02687030701198403
PG 35
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HW
UT WOS:000250007600009
ER
PT J
AU Stark, J
AF Stark, Jacqueline
TI Syntax detached from semantics: Qualitative analysis of examples of
verbal perseveration from a transcortical sensory aphasic patient
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE FORMULATION; ACCESSIBILITY
AB Background: An individual showing an intricate pattern of errors as a consequence of brain damage affords the clinician an opportunity to analyse language data, the exact pattern of which would be impossible to generate. This situation is particularly valuable when the phenomenon to be investigated is unique. This is the case with verbal perseveration. It does not always occur in aphasia. However, when it does, qualitative analysis of the perseveratory errors sheds light on the individual's underlying disorder(s).
Aims: In this paper verbal perseverative errors produced by a client with transcortical sensory aphasia during routine language testing are analysed. The aim of this study is to characterise the types of perseverative responses and related phenomena and to arrive at an understanding of the mechanisms of the underlying disorders on the various linguistic levels.
Methods & Procedures: Client MH, clinically diagnosed as having transcortical sensory aphasia, was administered several language tests. The language data were transcribed and a qualitative analysis of her oral language production was performed with particular emphasis on perseverative and paraphasic responses of the semantic, syntactic, and ideational error types.
Outcomes & Results: Verbal perseveration is the most prominent symptom in client MH's language data. The perseveratory errors display a complex development within a task ( interstimuli), across tasks and task types and they extend over 2 days. The produced perseverations in the different tasks vary in their linguistic complexity from word-level to text-level responses. Analysis of MH's perseverative errors within the framework of Levelt's ( 1993) model of language production and comprehension with modifications from Dietrich ( 2002) reveals impairment to several processing components of the conceptualiser: monitoring, discourse processing, message generation, and lexical/semantic aspects of the lexicon.
Conclusions: The pattern of perseveratory errors in client MH lends support to the relative preservation of grammatical encoding, phonological encoding, and articulation. She produced well-articulated, grammatically correct utterances. However, her responses were semantically inadequate and she showed word retrieval deficits. Pre- and post-production monitoring was impaired for semantic aspects of the utterances. Few phonological errors were made, and they were immediately corrected by MH. Self-corrections were not observed for semantically inadequate and contradictory responses.
C1 Austrian Acad Sci, Dept Linguist & Commun Res, A-1030 Vienna, Austria.
RP Stark, J (reprint author), Austrian Acad Sci, Dept Linguist & Commun Res, Kegelgasse 27,3rd Floor, A-1030 Vienna, Austria.
EM jacqueline-ann.stark@univie.ac.at
CR Basso Anna, 2004, Seminars in Speech and Language, V25, P375, DOI 10.1055/s-2004-837249
Benson DF, 1979, APHASIA ALEXIA AGRAP
BERNDT RS, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V4, P79, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252036
Berthier M., 1999, TRANSCORTICAL APHASI
Bock J. K., 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC, P945
BOCK JK, 1982, PSYCHOL REV, V89, P1, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.89.1.1
BOCK JK, 1986, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V18, P355, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(86)90004-6
BOCK JK, 1985, COGNITION, V21, P47
BOCK JK, 1980, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V19, P467
BOCK K, 1987, J MEM LANG, V26, P119, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(87)90120-3
Buckingham HW, 2007, APHASIOLOGY, V21, P916, DOI 10.1080/02687030701198205
CIMINOKNIGHT AM, 2005, APHASIA RELATED NEUR, P169
COSLETT HB, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P362, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90133-7
DE BEAUGRANDE Robert-Alain, 1981, EINFUHRUNG TEXTLINGU
Dietrich R., 2002, PSYCHOLINGUISTIK
DOGIL G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P577, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248716
Garrett M., 1975, PSYCHOL LEARNING MOT, V9
GOLDSTEIN K, 1915, TRANSKORTIKALEN APH
GONZALEZROTHI LJ, 1997, APHASIA RELATED NEUR, P91
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Goodglass H, 1972, Cortex, V8, P191
HUBER W, 1982, KLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGI
KEMPLER D, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P343
Levelt W. J. M, 1993, LINGUISTIC DISORDERS, P1
Lichtheim L., 1885, BRAIN, V7, P433
NORDEN I, 1953, BINETARIUM
Pick-Prag A, 1906, Z PSYCHOL PHYSIOL SI, V42, P241
RUBENS AB, 1983, LOCALIZATION NEUROPS, P245
Stark J, 2007, APHASIOLOGY, V21, P928, DOI 10.1080/02687030701198239
STARK J, 1984, VERBALE PERSERVATION
TEUBER HL, 1955, AM PSYCHOL, V10, P408
van Lancker D, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P343
van Lancker D, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P396
Wernicke C., 1874, APHASISCHE SYMPTOMEN
Whitaker H., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V2, P1
YATES AJ, 1966, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V17, P111, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ps.17.020166.000551
NR 36
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 10-11
BP 1114
EP 1142
DI 10.1080/02687030701198429
PG 29
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 218HW
UT WOS:000250007600010
ER
PT J
AU Marek, A
Habets, B
Jansma, BM
Nager, W
Muente, TF
AF Marek, Annette
Habets, Boukje
Jansma, Bernadette M.
Nager, Wido
Muente, Thomas F.
TI Neural correlates of conceptualisation difficulty during the preparation
of complex utterances
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID EVENT-RELATED POTENTIALS; SYNTACTIC POSITIVE SHIFT; SPEECH PRODUCTION;
TIME-COURSE; BRAIN POTENTIALS; LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; MODEL; ACTIVATION;
ERP; INFORMATION
AB Background: In language production, conceptualisation of the utterance precedes lamma retrieval, phonological encoding, and articulation. Knowledge about the neural correlates of conceptualisation is scarce.
Aims: The study aimed at the delineation of neurophysiological correlates of the macro-planning aspect of conceptualisation by manipulating difficulty of conceptualisation.
Methods & Procedures: Utterances were elicited by visual arrays containing a network of eight different shapes ( e. g., circle, square) of different colours. Upon the appearance of an arrow in the display, participants had to describe either the direction of the arrow only ( simple condition), the direction and the destination shape ( medium condition), or the direction, the destination shape, and its colour ( complex condition). Event-related brain potentials ( ERPs) were recorded from young healthy native speakers of German and analysed for epochs starting 100 ms prior to the onset of the arrow stimulus until 600 ms thereafter, i. e., prior to the onset of the vocalisation. ERPs were quantified by mean amplitude measures.
Outcomes & Results: ERPs uncontaminated by vocalisation artefacts were obtained. Brain potentials in the medium and complex conditions were more positive going than those from the simple condition from 300 ms onwards. This effect had a centro-parietal distribution akin the P300 component.
Conclusions: Reliable electrophysiological effects of conceptualisation difficulty were obtained, opening new possibilities for the neurophysiological investigation of language production in healthy participants and those with non-aphasic language disorders. The distribution of the conceptualisation effect suggests that it reflects general effects of conceptualisation difficulty ( e. g., demand for processing resources) rather than specific steps of the language planning process.
C1 Univ Magdeburg, D-39106 Magdeburg, Germany.
Maastricht Univ, Maastricht, Netherlands.
Hannover Med Sch, Hannover, Germany.
RP Muente, TF (reprint author), Univ Magdeburg, Dept Neuropsychol, Univplatz 2,Gabaude 24, D-39106 Magdeburg, Germany.
EM thomas.muente@medizin.uni-magdeburg.de
RI Munte, Thomas/C-2077-2014
CR Braun AR, 2001, BRAIN, V124, P2028, DOI 10.1093/brain/124.10.2028
Coulson S, 1998, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V13, P21, DOI 10.1080/016909698386582
DEUTSCH W, 1982, COGNITION, V11, P159, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(82)90024-5
DONCHIN E, 1981, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V18, P493, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1981.tb01815.x
Eulitz C, 2000, CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V111, P2088, DOI 10.1016/S1388-2457(00)00441-7
Friederici AD, 2002, TRENDS COGN SCI, V6, P78, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(00)01839-8
Garrett M., 1982, NORMALITY PATHOLOGY, P19
HAGOORT P, 1993, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V8, P439, DOI 10.1080/01690969308407585
Hagoort P, 2003, NEUROIMAGE, V20, pS18, DOI 10.1016/j.neuroimage.2003.09.013
HARLEY TA, 1984, COGNITIVE SCI, V8, P191
Heim S, 2002, NEUROSCI LETT, V328, P101, DOI 10.1016/S0304-3940(02)00494-9
Indefrey P, 2001, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V98, P5933, DOI 10.1073/pnas.101118098
Indefrey P, 2004, COGNITION, V92, P101, DOI 10.1016/j.cognition.2002.06.001
Indefrey P, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P312, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00352-3
JANSMA BM, 2004, MULTIDISCIPLINARY AP, P230
JENNINGS JR, 1976, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V13, P277
Jescheniak JRD, 2002, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V14, P951, DOI 10.1162/089892902760191162
JOHNSON R, 1986, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V23, P367, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1986.tb00649.x
Kolk HHJ, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00548-5
Kuperberg GR, 2003, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V17, P117, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(03)00086-7
KUTAS M, 1977, SCIENCE, V197, P792, DOI 10.1126/science.887923
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
LEVELT WJM, 1983, COGNITION, V14, P41, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90026-4
Liotti M, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P701, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00106-2
MCCARTHY G, 1985, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V62, P203, DOI 10.1016/0168-5597(85)90015-2
MOTLEY MT, 1983, COMMUN MONOGR, V50, P79
Munte T. F., 2000, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V1, P139
Munte TF, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P217, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00119-X
Oomen CCE, 2001, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V30, P163, DOI 10.1023/A:1010377828778
OSTERHOUT L, 1992, J MEM LANG, V31, P785, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(92)90039-Z
Pechmann T, 2002, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V28, P233, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.28.1.233
Rodriguez-Fornells A, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P778, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00188-9
BERG T, 1992, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V21, P405
Schmitt BM, 2001, NEUROSCI RES, V41, P293, DOI 10.1016/S0168-0102(01)00286-3
Schmitt BM, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V13, P510, DOI 10.1162/08989290152001925
Schmitt BM, 2000, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V37, P473, DOI 10.1017/S0048577200981782
Stemberger J. P., 1985, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, V1, P143
Turennout M, 1998, Science, V280, P572, DOI 10.1126/science.280.5363.572
van Herten M, 2005, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V22, P241, DOI 10.1016/j.cogbrainres.2004.09.002
vanTurennout M, 1997, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V23, P787, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.23.4.787
van Turennout M, 1999, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V28, P649, DOI 10.1023/A:1023221028150
VERLEGER R, 1988, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V11, P343
NR 43
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 12
BP 1147
EP 1156
DI 10.1080/02687030600646577
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 237FW
UT WOS:000251360600001
ER
PT J
AU Patricacou, A
Psallida, E
Pring, T
Dipper, L
AF Patricacou, Aggeliki
Psallida, Eirini
Pring, Tim
Dipper, Lucy
TI The Boston Naming Test in Greek: Normative data and the effects of age
and education on naming
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID TEST-PERFORMANCE; OLDER-ADULTS; SHORT FORMS; NORMS; POPULATION;
VOCABULARY; APHASIA; GENDER; URBAN
AB Background: The Boston Naming Test ( BNT) is widely used as a clinical assessment of language and cognitive deficits. It has been adapted and translated for use in other languages and cultures.
Aims: This study translated and adapted the test for use in Greece. Normative data were collected on the test for healthy Greek speakers of different ages and educational backgrounds.
Methods and Procedures: Participants in four different age ranges and with three levels of educational achievement were tested. They were screened for cognitive decline using a Greek version of the mini mental state examination.
Outcomes and Results: Strong effects of age and education were found on naming. The former replicates previous results. Results on the latter have been less consistent and their occurrence here reflects the greater inequality in educational opportunity that has existed in Greece until comparatively recent times. Significant interactions between age, education, and gender are interpreted as reflecting changing social and gender roles in Greek society. A reordering of items reflecting their difficulty for this Greek sample is presented for clinical use.
Conclusions: This study provides norms for a Greek version of the BNT. These highlight the effects of age and education on naming. Scores for many older and less-educated participants might be taken to indicate pathology despite their lack of neurological or cognitive problems. This illustrates the need for norms that reflect local circumstances and the need to update norms as social and educational changes occur.
C1 City Univ London, London, England.
RP Pring, T (reprint author), City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, Nothampton Square, London, England.
EM T.R.Pring@city.ac.uk
CR Allegri RF, 1997, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V11, P416, DOI 10.1080/13854049708400471
Au R, 1995, AGING COGNITION, V2, P300, DOI 10.1080/13825589508256605
Barker-Collo SL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P85, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000124
BOROD J C, 1980, Journal of Clinical Neuropsychology, V2, P209, DOI 10.1080/01688638008403793
Cheung RW, 2004, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V10, P46, DOI 10.1017/S1355617704101069
COLOMBO FT, 1992, EUR REV APPL PSYCHOL, V42, P67
Connor L. T, 2004, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V59, P203
Cruice MN, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P143
FARMER A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P293, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249081
Fastenau PS, 1998, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V20, P828, DOI 10.1076/jcen.20.6.828.1105
Fountoulakis K. N. ., 1994, ENCEPHALOS, V31, P93
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Hawkins KA, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1143, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000031
HAWKINS KA, 1993, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V8, P525, DOI 10.1016/0887-6177(93)90053-4
Henderson LW, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P901, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249458
*I LANG SPEECH PRO, 2000, ATHENS
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kim HH, 1999, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V21, P127, DOI 10.1076/jcen.21.1.127.942
KOHN SE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P266, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90135-X
LABARGE E, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P380, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90026-X
Lansing AE, 1999, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V14, P481, DOI 10.1016/S0887-6177(98)00022-5
LICHTENBERG PA, 1994, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V8, P109, DOI 10.1080/13854049408401548
Mack W. J., 1992, J GERONTOL, V47, P154
Marien P, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P447, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2000
NEILS J, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1143
NICHOLAS LE, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249023
NICHOLAS M, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P595
Quinones-Ubeda S, 2004, NEUROLOGIA, V19, P248
Randolph C, 1999, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V14, P489, DOI 10.1016/S0887-6177(98)00023-7
Roberts P. M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P635, DOI DOI 10.1080/02687030244000220
ROSS TP, 1995, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V9, P321, DOI 10.1080/13854049508400496
Ross TP, 1998, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V12, P475, DOI 10.1076/clin.12.4.475.7244
ROSSELLI M, 1990, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V12, P313, DOI 10.1080/01688639008400977
Schmitter-Edgecombe M, 2000, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V15, P479, DOI 10.1016/S0887-6177(99)00039-6
Tallberg IM, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V94, P19, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.11.004
Thompson L., 1989, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V3, P184, DOI 10.1080/13854048908403291
Tombaugh TN, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P922, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403773
VANGORP WG, 1986, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V8, P702, DOI 10.1080/01688638608405189
Welch LW, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P260, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0047
WILLIAMS BW, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P1073, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90186-3
WORRALL LE, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P541, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248713
NR 41
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 12
BP 1157
EP 1170
DI 10.1080/02687030600670643
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 237FW
UT WOS:000251360600002
ER
PT J
AU Barker-Collo, S
AF Barker-Collo, Suzanne
TI Boston naming test performance of older New Zealand adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID NORMATIVE DATA
AB Background: The Boston Naming Test (BNT) is the most commonly used confrontation-naming test in Anglophone countries. In a study of young New Zealand adults ( Barker-Collo, 2001) the average participant performed well below the mean of the most closely matched North American normative sample, and potentially culturally biased items were identified.
Aims: The first aim of this study was to examine overall BNT performance in a sample of healthy older New Zealand adults when compared to available normative data. The second aim was to determine potential for cultural bias of individual items: the extent and pattern of errors produced by this sample is compared to that of previously published data from younger New Zealand adults, and from other countries ( e. g., Australia).
Methods & Procedures: The 60-item BNT was administered to 20 healthy older New Zealand born adults (mean563.4; range=55-76 years). Total scores of the sample are compared to published age-referenced normative data, while the pattern of errors obtained is compared to a published data for New Zealand young adults and Australian and Canadian samples.
Outcomes & Results: The results indicate that performance of the present sample fell within or above one standard deviation from the normative mean. The sample produced most of its errors on three BNT items ( pretzel, beaver, and protractor). Only 65% and 70% of the present sample made correct responses on the first two items, compared to 27.6% and 31% of young New Zealanders. That both samples performed worst on these two items suggests they may be culturally biased.
Conclusions: It is suggested that the better overall performance of the present sample may have been due to sample characteristics ( e. g., high level of education). Items likely to reflect cultural bias (i.e., beaver, pretzel) are identified. Items previously found to impact performance of young New Zealanders that did not negatively impact the present sample ( e. g., globe), may reflect cohort effects, or the highly educated nature of the sample.
C1 Univ Auckland, Auckland 1, New Zealand.
RP Barker-Collo, S (reprint author), Univ Auckland, Dept Psychol, Private Bag 92019, Auckland 1, New Zealand.
EM s.barker-collo@auckland.ac.nz
CR Barker-Collo SL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P85, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000124
Beatty W W, 1989, J Geriatr Psychiatry Neurol, V2, P145, DOI 10.1177/089198878900200305
Cruice MN, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P143
FARMER A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P293, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249081
JORDAN F M, 1992, Brain Injury, V6, P39, DOI 10.3109/02699059209008120
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Katz RC, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P303
Kim HH, 1999, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V21, P127, DOI 10.1076/jcen.21.1.127.942
KOHN SE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V27, P380
LABARGE E, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P380, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90026-X
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
LINDMAN KK, 1996, GENDER DIFFERNECES D
MARGOLIN DI, 1990, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V12, P597, DOI 10.1080/01688639008401004
Marien P, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P447, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2000
POZZEBON M, 1990, MELBOURNE PAPERS APP, V2, P19
SANDSON J, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P715, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90098-8
Spreen O., 1998, COMPENDIUM NEUROPSYC
Tombaugh TN, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P922, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403773
Welch LW, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P260, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0047
WORRALL LE, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P541, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248713
NR 20
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 12
BP 1171
EP 1180
DI 10.1080/02687030600821600
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 237FW
UT WOS:000251360600003
ER
PT J
AU Douglas, JM
Bracy, CA
Snow, PC
AF Douglas, Jacinta M.
Bracy, Christine A.
Snow, Pamela C.
TI Exploring the factor structure of the La Trobe communication
questionnaire: Insights into the nature of communication deficits
following traumatic brain injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLOSED HEAD-INJURY; ORBITOFRONTAL CORTEX; DISCOURSE ASSESSMENT;
EXECUTIVE FUNCTIONS; ADULTS; COMPETENCE; EXPERIENCE; ABILITIES;
AWARENESS
AB Background: Self and close other reports of communication ability can provide a time-efficient means of evaluating conversational discourse after traumatic brain injury ( TBI). The La Trobe Communication Questionnaire (LCQ) measures perceived communication ability from various sources including self-perceptions and perceptions of others. Content and test-retest reliability and discriminant validity of the LCQ have been demonstrated previously with adults following TBI.
Aims: This study was undertaken to explore the factor structure of the LCQ as revealed within the data collected from 88 adults with severe TBI and their close others.
Methods & Procedures: Construct validity was examined using a Principal Component Factor Analytic procedure with Varimax rotation. Outcomes & Results: A seven-factor structure that accounted for 60.88% of the variance was revealed. Of the LCQ items, 27 clearly loaded on to one of the seven communication factors that were identified.
Conclusions: The factor structure that emerged depicts the multidimensional nature of conversation and the complex interplay between cognitive and communication processes that social discourse demands. These results support the construct validity of the LCQ and indicate that it can be used as a reliable and valid measure of communication ability after severe TBI.
C1 La Trobe Univ, Bundoora, Vic, Australia.
RP Douglas, JM (reprint author), La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3086, Australia.
EM J.Douglas@latrobe.edu.au
RI Douglas, Jacinta/C-2380-2009
CR American Speech-Language-Hearing Association, 1988, ASHA, V30, P79
Bracy C., 2005, BRAIN IMPAIR, V6, P1, DOI 10.1375/brim.6.1.1.65476
BRYANT FB, 1995, READING MULTIVARIATE
Coelho C. A., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P659, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000275
Coelho CA, 1991, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V6, P92, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199106000-00011
COELHO CA, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P471, DOI 10.3109/02699059509008206
COELHO CA, 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P55
Corrigan JD, 1998, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V79, P298, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(98)90010-7
Damico J. S., 1985, COMMUNICATION SKILLS, P165
Douglas J., 2004, EVIDENCE BASED PRACT
DOUGLAS J, IN PRESS J HEAD TRAU
Douglas JM, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P251
Fleming JM, 1996, BRAIN INJURY, V10, P1
Galski T, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P769, DOI 10.1080/026990598122160
GARSON GD, 2005, STATNOTES ONLINE TXB
Godfrey H.P.D., 1993, J CLIN EXP PSYCHOL, V15, P530
Goldstein G, 1995, INT J REHABILITATION, V1, P25, DOI 10.1007/BF02214959
Grafman J, 1999, LANCET, V354, P1921, DOI 10.1016/S0140-6736(99)90438-5
Grice P., 1975, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, V3, P41
Hagen C, 1984, LANGUAGE DISORDERS A, P245
Hartley LL., 1995, COGNITIVE COMMUNICAT
HARTLEY LL, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P353, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249088
Hutcheson G. D., 1999, MULTIVARIATE SOCIAL
HARTLEY L L, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P267, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008097
Kreutzer JS, 1999, NEUROBEHAVIORAL FUNC
Kringelbach ML, 2005, NAT REV NEUROSCI, V6, P691, DOI 10.1038/nrn1747
Lawley D. N., 1971, FACTOR ANAL STAT MET
LEVIN H, 1994, J NEUROPSYCH CLIN N, V6, P443
LILES BZ, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P356
MCDONALD S, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P28, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1003
MCDONALD S, 2002, AWARNESS SOCIAL INFE
McDonald S, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P81, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0038
MCDONALD S, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P535, DOI 10.1080/02687039308248629
McNeill-Brown D., 1997, INT PERSPECTIVES TRA, P247
Miller EK, 2000, NAT REV NEUROSCI, V1, P59, DOI 10.1038/35036228
NOWICKI S, 1993, J SOC PSYCHOL, V133, P749
OFlaherty CA, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P889, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250463
Olver JH, 1996, BRAIN INJURY, V10, P841, DOI 10.1080/026990596123945
PRIGATANO GP, 1985, LANG SCI, V1, P217
PRIGATANO GP, 1990, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V71, P1058
Prigatano GP, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, P1
MENTIS M, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P583
Reilly S., 2004, EVIDENCE BASED PRACT
Rolls ET, 1999, NEUROCASE, V5, P301, DOI 10.1080/13554799908411984
SARNO MT, 1980, J NERV MENT DIS, V168, P685, DOI 10.1097/00005053-198011000-00008
Snow P, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P409
Snow P, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P911, DOI 10.1080/026990598121981
SNOW P, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248210
Snow PC, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P529
Snow PC, 2000, BRAIN INJURY, V14, P397
Stuss DT, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P265
Tabachnik BG, 2001, USING MULTIVARIATE S
Togher L, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P365, DOI 10.1080/026870300401414
Togher L, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P169, DOI 10.1080/026990597123629
VANZOMEREN AH, 1985, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V48, P21, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.48.1.21
Watts AJ, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P707, DOI 10.1080/02687030500489953
Ylvisaker M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
NR 57
TC 15
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 12
BP 1181
EP 1194
DI 10.1080/02687030600980950
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 237FW
UT WOS:000251360600004
ER
PT J
AU Ballard, KJ
Maas, E
Robin, DA
AF Ballard, Kirrie J.
Maas, Edwin
Robin, Donald A.
TI Treating control of voicing in apraxia of speech with variable practice
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
DE motor learning; variable practice; voice onset time; apraxia of speech
ID GENERALIZED MOTOR PROGRAM; SCHEMA THEORY; ONSET TIME; BROCAS APHASIA;
SPEAKING RATE; FRICATIVES; ENGLISH; PERCEPTION; ERRORLESS; THERAPY
AB Background: Apraxia of speech (AOS) is generally considered a phonetic-motoric disorder. As such, it is reasonable to draw on the motor learning literature to develop interventions for improving articulation. The often cited problem of impaired voicing control is used to test the application of a variable practice approach to training skilled movements in AOS. It is predicted that variable practice-practising a behaviour over a range of possible values or contexts-increases accuracy and stability of a trained behaviour.
Aims: The aims of the study were to test the influence of variable practice conditions on acquisition and long-term maintenance of voiced and voiceless phonemes in words at the phrase/sentence level as well as on generalisation of treatment effects to phonemes of same and different manner. The protocol was tested on two individuals with moderate AOS, one of whom exhibited a concomitant moderate aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: A single subject multiple baseline across-subjects design was used to examine efficacy of treatment for improving control of voicing for three fricative/affricate phonemes ( Participant 1) or three plosive phonemes ( Participant 2). The training sets included two voiced phonemes and one voiceless phoneme, each presented in the initial position of 10 different words. This provided a range of voice onset times and a range of phonetic contexts for each target phoneme, thus providing the variable practice. The inclusion of a voiceless phoneme that was produced at a high level of accuracy during baseline was hypothesised to reduce the chance of overgeneralisation from voiced to voiceless phoneme production.
Outcomes & Results: Consistent with predictions, participants demonstrated improved production of trained voiced phonemes and generalisation of treatment effects to untrained phonemes of same manner only. These effects were maintained up to 3 parallel in a variety of phonetic contexts ( i. e., variable practice) as well as including a combination of voiced and voiceless phonemes in treatment to ensure maintenance of accurate voiceless phoneme production.
Conclusions: Results from two participants, varying in overall communication impairment severity, provide promising evidence that a variable practice approach to retraining speech behaviours in AOS is effective. Specifically, this approach resulted in long-term maintenance of treatment effects and generalisation of treatment effects to untrained phonemes within manner class. Just as importantly, it did not result in overgeneralisation of voicing to voiceless phonemes. Further testing is required before recommending general clinical application.
C1 Univ Iowa, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
Univ Sydney, Lidcombe, NSW, Australia.
San Diego State Univ, San Diego, CA 92182 USA.
Univ Calif San Diego, La Jolla, CA 92093 USA.
Boston Univ, Boston, MA 02215 USA.
MIT, Cambridge, MA 02139 USA.
Univ Texas Hlth Sci Ctr San Antonio, San Antonio, TX USA.
RP Ballard, KJ (reprint author), Univ Sydney, Sch Commun Sci & Disorder, E St, Sydney, NSW 2141, Australia.
EM k.ballard@usyd.edu.au
RI Robin, Donald/F-2109-2010; Ballard, Kirrie/F-9558-2011
CR Auzou P, 2000, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V14, P131
Ballard KJ, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P3, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00038-1
Ballard KJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P969
Clark HM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P699, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249567
CODE C, 1982, J PHONETICS, V10, P325
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
DABUL BL, 2000, APROXIA BATTERY ADUL
Duffy J.R, 2005, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
Fillingham JK, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P597, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000272
Fillingham JK, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P337, DOI 10.1080/09602010343000020
Guenther FH, 2006, BRAIN LANG, V96, P280, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2005.06.001
Guenther FH, 1998, PSYCHOL REV, V105, P611
GUENTHER FH, 2004, SPEECH MOTOR CONTROL
HOWARD S, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P246
Jongman A, 2000, J ACOUST SOC AM, V108, P1252, DOI 10.1121/1.1288413
Katz WF, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P1355
KERTSEZ A, 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kessinger RH, 1997, J PHONETICS, V25, P143, DOI 10.1006/jpho.1996.0039
Kessinger RH, 1998, J PHONETICS, V26, P117, DOI 10.1006/jpho.1997.0069
KLAPP ST, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V21, P1015, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.21.5.1015
KLUENDER KR, 1992, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V51, P328, DOI 10.3758/BF03211626
Knock TR, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P653
LISKER L, 1964, WORD, V20, P384
MAAS E, IN PRESS AM J SPEECH
McNeil M., 1976, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P151
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MCREYNOLDS LV, 1983, SINGLE PARTICIPANT E
Pirello K, 1997, J ACOUST SOC AM, V101, P3754, DOI 10.1121/1.418334
RAYMER AM, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P285
Robey RR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P445
Rogers MA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P793
RUBOW RT, 1982, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V63, P150
Schmidt R, 2005, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
Schmidt RA, 2003, RES Q EXERCISE SPORT, V74, P366
SCHMIDT RA, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P225, DOI 10.1037/h0076770
Shea CH, 2005, J MOTOR BEHAV, V37, P85, DOI 10.3200/JMBR.37.2.85-102
Shea CH, 2001, J MOTOR BEHAV, V33, P139
STEVENS KN, 1992, J ACOUST SOC AM, V91, P2979, DOI 10.1121/1.402933
TRYON WW, 1982, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V15, P423, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1982.15-423
Van Riper C., 1958, VOICE ARTICULATION
VARLEY R, 2005, WHOLE WORD THERAPY A
Wambaugh JL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249569
WAMBAUGH JL, 2006, MED J SPEECH LANGUAG, V14, P15
Wambaugh JL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P725
Wambaugh JL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P821
WAMBAUGH JL, 1998, TREATMENT AOS PERCEP
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
WULF G, 1993, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V19, P1134
Wulf G, 1997, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V23, P987, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.23.4.987
Young L. C., 1941, ANN MATH STAT, V12, P153
NR 50
TC 21
Z9 21
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 12
BP 1195
EP 1217
DI 10.1080/02687030601047858
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 237FW
UT WOS:000251360600005
ER
PT J
AU Jones, DK
Pierce, RS
Mahoney, M
Smeach, K
AF Jones, Doreen Krackenfels
Pierce, Robert S.
Mahoney, Molly
Smeach, Kim
TI Effect of familiar content on paragraph comprehension in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION; PRIOR KNOWLEDGE; WORKING-MEMORY; TEXT;
PERFORMANCE; WORLD
AB Background: Previous research has shown that context improves aphasic individuals' auditory comprehension. The specific contextual information that has been identified as beneficial includes semantic constraints, semantic plausibility, both predictive and non-predictive information, and familiar topics. However, context can also include familiar content such as the names of relatives, friends, local schools, and local stores.
Aims: The purpose of the present study was to assess the influence of familiar content on comprehension in individuals with aphasia. Specifically, it assessed whether individuals with aphasia answer questions about paragraphs more accurately when the paragraphs contain familiar content than when they do not.
Methods & Procedures: Eleven participants with aphasia and eleven participants without brain damage listened to short paragraphs that differed in the familiarity of the content included. In half of the paragraphs, the people and places were generic and not known specifically by the participants. In the other half, the people and places were known by the participants ( as provided by a spouse or other close individual). Approximately half of the subsequent questions asked of the participants related to this targeted information and half related to other, more generic, information in the paragraphs.
Outcomes & Results: The questions relating to the paragraphs with the familiar content were answered more accurately than were the questions relating to the paragraphs with neutral content. For the participants with aphasia, this result occurred for the questions relating to both the targeted ( and thus familiar) information and the non-targeted or neutral information. The extent to which each participant with aphasia benefited from the familiar content did not relate to age, education, time-post- onset, or comprehension and naming skills.
Conclusions: These results suggest that familiar content may be another type of context that enhances comprehension skills in individuals with aphasia. The results are interpreted with respect to attention and domain knowledge concepts.
C1 Kent State Univ, Kent, OH 44242 USA.
Westminster Thurber Community Nursing Home, Columbus, OH USA.
Breckenridge Village Nursing Home, Willoughby, OH USA.
RP Jones, DK (reprint author), Kent State Univ, Sch Pathol & Audiol, Kent, OH 44242 USA.
EM dkracken@kent.edu
CR CARAMAZZA A, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P572, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90048-1
CLARK A, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P174
DELOCHE G, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P57, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90064-X
ERICSSON KA, 1995, PSYCHOL REV, V102, P211, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.102.2.211
FINCHERKIEFER R, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P416, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90065-4
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GRAY L, 1977, CLIN APH C P MINN MN, P265
Hambrick DZ, 2002, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V44, P339, DOI 10.1006/cogp.2001.0769
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2004, MANUAL APHASIA APHAS, V2nd
HOUGH MS, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P325, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90069-2
HUFF FJ, 1986, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V8, P556, DOI 10.1080/01688638608405175
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kintsch W., 1998, COMPREHENSION PARADI
RECHT DR, 1988, J EDUC PSYCHOL, V80, P16, DOI 10.1037/0022-0663.80.1.16
LI EC, 1995, J COMMUN DISORD, V28, P39, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(95)91023-Z
Miller LMS, 2001, AGING NEUROPSYCHOL C, V8, P137
MORAVCSIK JE, 1995, READING LANGUAGE PRO, P232
Murray Laura L., 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P107, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-24987
PIERCE RS, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P577, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248968
PIERCE RS, 1985, J COMMUN DISORD, V18, P203, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(85)90021-8
PIERCE RS, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P250
Spilich G. J., 1979, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V22, P231
Van Overschelde JP, 2001, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V27, P1160, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.27.5.1160
Walker C. H., 1987, COGNITION INSTRUCT, V4, P25, DOI 10.1207/s1532690xci0401_2
WALLACE GL, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V50, P385
WALLER MR, 1978, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V21, P732
WRIGHT H, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, P555
Zwaan RA, 1998, PSYCHOL BULL, V123, P162, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.123.2.162
NR 28
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 12
BP 1218
EP 1229
DI 10.1080/02687030600790193
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 237FW
UT WOS:000251360600006
ER
PT J
AU Katz, WF
Carter, GC
Levitt, JS
AF Katz, William F.
Carter, Gregory C.
Levitt, June S.
TI Treating buccofacial apraxia using augmented kinematic feedback
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SIMPLE MOTOR-SKILLS; LIMB APRAXIA; SPEECH; APHASIA; KNOWLEDGE; MODEL;
ARTICULATION; RETENTION; MOVEMENT; SCHEMA
AB Background: Buccofacial apraxia ( BFA) may be defined as the inability to perform voluntary movements of the larynx, pharynx, mandible, tongue, lips, and cheeks, while automatic or reflexive control of these structures is preserved. BFA frequently co-occurs with aphasia and apraxia of speech (AOS). The treatment and management of BFA has received little emphasis in the clinical literature. However, recent studies suggest that principles of motor learning may provide an improved means of treating a variety of apraxic disorders, including limb apraxia and AOS. Also, research in our laboratory has suggested that augmented ( or extrinsic) feedback provided by an electromagnetic articulograph (EMA) system may lead to improved remediation of place-of-articulation errors in talkers with aphasia and AOS. Taken together, the data suggest that treatment based on motor training principles, including the use of augmented kinematic feedback, may be beneficial to individuals with BFA.
Aims: The aims of the present study were to explore whether BFA may be successfully treated with direct (restitutive) methods, and whether augmented kinematic feedback improves therapy effectiveness and maintenance.
Methods & Procedures: An ABA design with follow-up probes 6 weeks post-treatment was used to investigate two types of treatment for non-verbal oral errors produced by an individual with BFA. Over a 1-month period, the participant received structured motor practice for a set of oral gestures (" bite your upper lip'', " bite your lower lip''), and motor practice with EMA augmented feedback for a third oral gesture (" touch your upper lip and your lower lip, using your tongue''). Nine untrained oral motor behaviours were also probed throughout the experiment. The sessions were videotaped and later scored by two independent examiners who were unaware of the nature of the experiment.
Outcomes & Results: The main findings were ( 1) a mixed pattern of improvement with no lasting maintenance for the gestures treated with structured motor therapy, and ( 2) consistent improvement with maintenance at 6 weeks post-treatment for the gesture treated with augmented feedback therapy. In general, the observed gains were treatment specific, although possible cases of positive and negative stimulus were also observed. Conclusions: Augmented feedback provided by an EMA system appears to provide improved treatment effectiveness and maintenance compared to structured motor practice. However, the current preliminary findings should be tested with additional controls and more subjects before any strong conclusions are drawn.
C1 Univ Texas Dallas, Callier Ctr Commun Disorders, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
Univ Texas SW Med Ctr Dallas, Dallas, TX USA.
RP Katz, WF (reprint author), Univ Texas Dallas, Callier Ctr Commun Disorders, 1966 Inwood Rd, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
EM wkatz@utdallas.edu
CR Ballard KJ, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P37, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000482
Ballard KJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P969
Bizzozero I, 2000, BRAIN, V123, P2213, DOI 10.1093/brain/123.11.2213
Buxbaum LJ, 2000, BRAIN COGNITION, V44, P166, DOI 10.1006/brcg.2000.1227
CODE C, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P11
Cohen J., 1988, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA, V2nd
CUBELLI R, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P369, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253378
Cubelli R, 2000, BRAIN COGNITION, V44, P144, DOI 10.1006/brcg.2000.1226
Dabul B, 2000, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL, V2nd
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
De Renzi E., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P50
DERENZI E, 1980, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V37, P6
Dronkers NF, 1996, NATURE, V384, P159, DOI 10.1038/384159a0
Enderby P. M., 1983, FRENCHAY DYSARTHRIA
GESCHWIND N, 1985, HDB CLIN NEUROLOGY, P159
GESCHWIND N, 1975, AM SCI, V63, P188
Goodglass H., 2000, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
JACKSON JH, 1932, SELECTED WRITINGS J, V2, P153
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Katz WF, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V83, P187
Katz WF, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P1355
Katz WF, 2000, J PHONETICS, V28, P313, DOI 10.1006/jpho.2000.0118
Kromrey JD, 1996, J EXP EDUC, V65, P73
LANDIS JR, 1977, BIOMETRICS, V33, P159, DOI 10.2307/2529310
LANGE J, 1936, HDB NEUROLOGIE, V6, P885
LAPOINTE LL, 1974, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V39, P39
LAVERY JJ, 1962, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V15, P231
LAVERY JJ, 1962, CAN J PSYCHOLOGY, V16, P300, DOI 10.1037/h0083257
LIEPMANN H, 1908, DREI AUFSATZE APRAXI, V1
Liepmann H, 1900, MON PSYCHIATR NEUROL, V8, P15
Maher L.M., 1997, APRAXIA NEUROPSYCHOL, P75
Maher L.M., 1991, AM SPEECH HEAR ASS, V33, P195
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MCNEIL MR, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P221
Ochipa C., 1995, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V2, P149
Pilgrim E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P271
POECK K, 1975, CEREBRAL LOCALIZATIO, P98
RAADE AS, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V16, P130, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90002-P
ROTHI LJG, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P443, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253382
SALMONI AW, 1984, PSYCHOL BULL, V95, P355, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.95.3.355
SCHMIDT RA, 1991, NATO ADV SCI I D-BEH, V62, P59
Schmidt RA, 1976, MOTOR CONTROL ISSUES, P41
Schmidt RA, 1999, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
SCHMIDT RA, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P225, DOI 10.1037/h0076770
SHERWOOD DE, 1988, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V66, P267
Smania N, 2000, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V81, P379, DOI 10.1053/mr.2000.6921
Square P. A., 1997, APRAXIA NEUROPSYCHOL, P173
SQUARESTORER P, 1989, ACQUIRED APRAXIA SPE, P20
van der Merwe A, 1997, COMSIG '97 - PROCEEDINGS OF THE 1997 SOUTH AFRICAN SYMPOSIUM ON COMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING, P1
WAMBAUGH JL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P821
Ziegler W, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P3, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000554
NR 51
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2007
VL 21
IS 12
BP 1230
EP 1247
DI 10.1080/02687030600591161
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 237FW
UT WOS:000251360600007
ER
PT J
AU Rose, M
Douglas, J
AF Rose, Miranda
Douglas, Jacinta
TI A comparison of verbal and gesture treatments for a word production
deficit resulting from acquired apraxia of speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SOUND PRODUCTION TREATMENT; LEXICAL ACCESS; APHASIA; SPEAKERS
AB Background: Acquired apraxia of a speech (AOS) is a commonly encountered word production deficit following stroke. The efficacy of treatments for AOS is the subject of several recent studies. Evidence is mounting that verbal-based treatment methods result in improved production of treated phonemes in trained contexts (Schneider & Frens, 2005; Wambaugh et al., 1998; Wambaugh & Martinez, 2000; Wambaugh et al., 1999; Wambaugh & Nessler, 2004). Alternatively, arm and hand gestures have previously been suggested as a possible useful treatment method/modality for AOS (Rao, 2001; Skelly et al., 1974; Wertz et al., 1984), and multi-modality treatments are often considered more efficacious than single-modality treatments, but there is minimal empirical evidence to support these suggestions. Speech-language pathologists have little evidence on which to base their choice of gesture or verbal treatment methods. Such evidence is vital for ensuring treatment efficiency in clinical environments where total treatment times are reducing.
Aims: This study aimed to investigate the relative efficacy of gesture, verbal, and combined verbal plus gesture treatments for a patient with chronic moderate acquired apraxia of speech.
Methods & Procedures: AS, a 52-year-old male, participated in the study. AS sustained a single left fronto-temporal stroke 60 months prior to the study, which resulted in Broca's aphasia and a moderate apraxia of speech. AS participated in a controlled multiple-baseline single-case experiment comparing the efficacy of the three treatments for the production of multi-syllable words and words containing double and triple consonant clusters.
Outcomes & Results: Large, statistically significant, and clinically relevant treatment effects were found for all three treatment conditions and there were no significant differences between conditions. Improvements made in word production were maintained at both the 1-month and 3-month follow-up assessments. Generalisation of enhanced word production was found for trained sounds and clusters to untreated words and to conversation.
Conclusions: The results caution clinicians to question the superiority of multi-modal treatments for acquired apraxia of speech. Consistent with our previous work (Rose & Douglas, 2001, in press; Rose et al., 2002), it is suggested that the underlying treatment strategy-in this case, knowledge about phoneme place and manner of production-is a more potent factor in treatment outcome than the modality (gesture versus verbal) in which the strategy is presented. The suggestions recently made in the AOS literature to incorporate multiple sound targets in a session, blocked versus random order of practice, and complex stimuli all gained support from results of the current study.
C1 La Trobe Univ, Bundoora, Vic 3083, Australia.
RP Rose, M (reprint author), La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Melbourne, Vic 3086, Australia.
EM M.Rose@latrobe.edu.au
RI Douglas, Jacinta/C-2380-2009
CR Aichert I, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P148, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00296-7
Anderson John Robert, 1990, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL IT
Ballard KJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P969
Brickenkamp R., 1981, TEST D2 CONCENTRATIO
Busk P., 1992, SINGLE CASE RES DESI, P197
Code C, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2420
CODE C, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P11
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Frattali C. M., 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S
Hadar U, 1997, SEMIOTICA, V115, P147, DOI 10.1515/semi.1997.115.1-2.147
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1992, TEST ORAL LIMB APRAX
Hillis AE, 2004, BRAIN, V127, P1479, DOI 10.1093/brain/awh172
Hinckley JJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P989, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249465
Hoodin R., 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P62
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Knock TR, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P653
Krauss R., 1999, GESTURE SPEECH SIGN, P93
Kucera H., 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
Maas E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P609, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000266
Matyas TA, 1996, DESIGN ANAL SINGLE C, P215
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
McReynolds L. V., 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Passy J, 1990, CUED ARTICULATION
Patterson K. E., 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
RAMSBERGER G, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P395
RAO P, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P688
Rapp B, 2000, PSYCHOL REV, V107, P460, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.107.3.460
Raven J. C., 1995, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
RAYMER AM, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P285
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
Rose M, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1001, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000825
Rose M, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P977
ROSE M, IN PRESS APHASIOLOGY
Schmidt RA, 1999, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
Schneider SL, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P297, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248414
Schneider SL, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P451, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000886
SKELLY M, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P445
THORNDIKE EL, 1944, TEACHERS WORK BOOK 3
VANRIPER C, 1938, SPEECH CORRECTION PR
WAHRBORG P, 1991, ASSESSMENT MANAGEMEN
Wambaugh J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P407, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000165
WAMBAUGH J, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P725
Wambaugh JL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P821
Wambaugh JL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P603
WERTZ T, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
NR 50
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 12
BP 1186
EP 1209
DI 10.1080/02687030600757325
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 110EI
UT WOS:000242360700002
ER
PT J
AU Cruice, M
Worrall, L
Hickson, L
AF Cruice, Madeline
Worrall, Linda
Hickson, Louise
TI Quantifying aphasic people's social lives in the context of non-aphasic
peers
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID QUALITY-OF-LIFE; SENSORY IMPAIRMENT; STROKE PATIENTS; ELDERLY PEOPLE;
OLDER-PEOPLE; NETWORKS; SATISFACTION; DISABILITY; COMMUNITY; SUPPORT
AB Background: Developing the knowledge base on the impact of aphasia on people's social lives has become increasingly important in recent times to further our understanding of the broad consequences of communication disability and thus provide appropriate services. Past research clearly indicates that relationships and social activities with family members and others undergo change with the onset of aphasia in an individual, however more evidence of a quantitative nature would be beneficial.
Aims: The current research furthers our knowledge by quantifying chronically aphasic older people's regular social contacts and social activities, and places them in context by comparing them with healthy older people of similar age and education.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 30 aphasic participants aged 57 to 88 years, and 71 non-aphasic controls aged 62 to 98 years were interviewed by a speech and language therapist using self-report measures of Social Network Analysis (Antonucci & Akiyama, 1987) and Social Activities Checklist (Cruice, 2001, in Worrall & Hickson, 2003). Demographic information was also collected. Descriptive statistics are presented and independent samples t tests were used to examine differences between the groups. Outcomes & Results: Participants with primarily mild to moderate aphasic impairment reported a considerable range of social contacts (5-51) and social activities (8-18). Many significant differences were evident between the two groups' social contacts and activities. On average, aphasic participants had nine fewer social contacts (mainly "friend'' relationships) and three fewer social activities (mainly "leisure'' activities) than their non-aphasic peers. The majority of controls were satisfied with their social activities, whereas the majority of aphasic participants were not and wanted to be doing more. There were some general similarities between the groups, in terms of range of social contacts, overall pattern of social relationships, and core social activities.
Conclusions: Older people with chronic aphasia had significantly fewer social contacts and social activities than their peers. People with aphasia expressed a desire to increase the social activity of their lives. Given the importance of leisure activity and relationships with friends as well as family for positive well-being, speech and language therapists may direct their rehabilitation efforts towards two areas: (1) conversational partner programmes training friends to maintain these relationships; and (2) encouraging and supporting aphasic clients in leisure activities of their choice.
C1 City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, Sch Allied Hlth Sci, London EC1V 0HB, England.
Univ Queensland, St Lucia, Qld 4067, Australia.
RP Cruice, M (reprint author), City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, Sch Allied Hlth Sci, Northampton Sq, London EC1V 0HB, England.
EM m.cruice@city.ac.uk
RI Hickson, Louise/F-8748-2010; Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR ANTONUCCI TC, 1987, J GERONTOL, V42, P519
ASTROM M, 1992, STROKE, V23, P527
BARRY S, 2000, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V2, P77
Bethoux F, 1996, INT J REHABIL RES, V19, P291
BOWLING A, 1993, SOC SCI MED, V36, P641, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(93)90061-8
Bowling Ann, 1994, International Review of Psychiatry, V6, P41, DOI 10.3109/09540269409025242
BOWLING A, 1991, SOC PSYCH PSYCH EPID, V26, P115, DOI 10.1007/BF00782950
CARABELLESE C, 1993, J AM GERIATR SOC, V41, P401
Clark PS, 1999, AUSTRALAS J AGEING, V18, P124
Code C, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P379, DOI 10.1080/09602010244000255
Cruice M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P333, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000707
Cruice M., 2001, THESIS U QUEENSLAND
Cummins R. A., 1997, COMPREHENSIVE QUALIT
Dowswell G, 2000, J CLIN NURS, V9, P507, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2702.2000.00411.x
GIBSON D M, 1986, International Journal of Aging and Human Development, V24, P29, DOI 10.2190/NDU9-2175-HGD4-J9WL
HAWLEY PJ, 1988, J APPL GERONTOL, V7, P205, DOI 10.1177/073346488800700206
HICKSON LMH, 1995, AUST J AGEING, V14, P89, DOI 10.1111/j.1741-6612.1995.tb00703.x
Hilari K, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P17, DOI 10.1080/02687030500279982
HOLBROOK M, 1983, AGE AGEING, V12, P166, DOI 10.1093/ageing/12.2.166
Horgas AL, 1998, GERONTOLOGIST, V38, P556
Howe TJ, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1015, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000499
KAPPELLE LJ, 1994, STROKE, V25, P1360
Kempen GIJM, 1998, AGE AGEING, V27, P595, DOI 10.1093/ageing/27.5.595
Kendig H, 1997, AUST J AGEING, V16, P127, DOI 10.1111/j.1741-6612.1997.tb01072.x
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LABI MLC, 1980, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V61, P561
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LEMON BW, 1972, J GERONTOL, V27, P511
Lind C, 2003, AUSTRALAS J AGEING, V22, P20, DOI 10.1111/j.1741-6612.2003.tb00458.x
McAuley E, 2000, PREV MED, V31, P608, DOI 10.1006/pmed.2000.0740
McDowell I., 1996, MEASURING HLTH GUIDE
de Leon CFM, 1999, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V54, pS162
MENEC V, 2001, GERONTOLOGY S1, V47, P231
Mugford S, 1987, AGING FAMILIES SOCIA, P38
Müller D, 1999, Semin Speech Lang, V20, P85, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064011
NIEMI ML, 1988, STROKE, V19, P1101
OXENHAM D, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P477, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248710
RAU M T, 1988, Seminars in Speech and Language, V9, P167, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1082462
REITZES DC, 1995, RES AGING, V17, P260, DOI 10.1177/0164027595173002
Resnick HE, 1997, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V52, P135
Ross KB, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P355, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000716
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
Simmons-Mackie N, 2001, TOP LANG DISORD, V22, P21
SMALE B, 2001, GERONTOLOGY, V47, P497
Sveen U, 1999, DISABIL REHABIL, V21, P372
Tennant A, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P278
Unger JB, 1999, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V54, pS245
Wade D T, 1985, Int Rehabil Med, V7, P176
Wahl H. W., 1999, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V54, P304, DOI [DOI 10.1093/GERONB/54B.5.P304, 10.1093/geronb/54B.5.P304]
Worrall L. E., 2003, COMMUNICATION DISABI
Zemva N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P219, DOI 10.1080/026870399402190
NR 51
TC 29
Z9 29
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 12
BP 1210
EP 1225
DI 10.1080/02687030600790136
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 110EI
UT WOS:000242360700003
ER
PT J
AU Toraldo, A
Cattani, B
Zonca, G
Saletta, P
Luzzatti, C
AF Toraldo, Alessio
Cattani, Barbara
Zonca, Giusi
Saletta, Paola
Luzzatti, Claudio
TI Reading disorders in a language with shallow orthography: A multiple
single-case study in Italian
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID DEEP DYSLEXIC PATIENT; LEXICAL ACCESS; DUAL-ROUTE; CUMULATIVE-FREQUENCY;
SEMANTIC PARALEXIAS; WORD; ACQUISITION; AGE; ALOUD; MECHANISMS
AB Background: This study aimed (i) to verify whether the classical word-naming models developed for English-speaking participants also account for the performance of patients who speak a shallow-orthography language such as Italian, and (ii) to study the effects of word frequency, concreteness, and grammatical class on word naming.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 90 Italian aphasic patients participated in two reading tasks. The first task contained four sets of items: (i) concrete nouns (natural objects and artefacts), (ii) abstract nouns, (iii) function words, (iv) morphologically simple legal nonwords. The second task (trisyllabic words with unpredictable stress position) was designed to test reading ability along the lexical route (the position of the major word stress is the only opaque variable in the Italian reading system). The patients' performances on the two tasks were analysed for strong dissociations, and to test the effect of grammatical class, concreteness, word frequency, and item length. The effect of age of acquisition was tested in a subsequent analysis.
Outcomes & Results: Reading scores were pathological for all patients. The present sample reflected the entire spectrum of reading impairments: phonological (49), surface (4), undifferentiated (32), and letter-by-letter (5) dyslexia, which is in line with data reported for English-speaking aphasic patients. Only one of the phonological dyslexic patients made semantic errors (a reading impairment compatible with the diagnosis of deep dyslexia). The vast majority of Broca's aphasic patients suffered from phonological dyslexia (76%), while fluent aphasic patients were distributed more evenly across dyslexia types; all four surface dyslexic patients belonged to the fluent aphasia group. Overall, grammatical class (concrete nouns vs function words) had a significant effect on 14 patients (15.6%), concreteness (concrete vs abstract nouns) on 15 (16.7%), and word frequency on 5 (5.6%). Grammatical class and concreteness affected the performance of phonological and undifferentiated dyslexic patients, and seemed not to influence the scores of the surface dyslexic patients. Age of acquisition turned out to have a highly significant effect and may account for most of the lexical effects emerging from the first analysis.
Conclusions: The entire spectrum of reading impairments was observed in this group of Italian aphasic patients, thus confirming the validity of contemporary reading models also for shallow-orthography languages. Concreteness and grammatical class effects, present in deep dyslexia, also affected the performance of patients suffering from other types of dyslexia, although both phenomena might derive from a confounding effect of age of acquisition.
C1 Univ Milan Bicocca, Dept Psychol, I-20126 Milan, Italy.
Univ Pavia, I-27100 Pavia, Italy.
Salvatore Maugeri Fdn, Montescano, Italy.
Salvatore Maugeri Fdn, Pavia, Italy.
G Salvini Gen Hosp, Rho Passirana, Italy.
RP Luzzatti, C (reprint author), Univ Milan Bicocca, Dept Psychol, Piazza Atenco Nuovo 1, I-20126 Milan, Italy.
EM claudio.luzzatti@unimib.it
CR ANDREWS S, 1989, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V15, P802, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.15.5.802
ARDILA A, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P437, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90165-W
Barca L., 2002, RICERCHE PSICOLOGIA, V25, P73
Barca L, 2002, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V34, P424, DOI 10.3758/BF03195471
Barry C, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V84, P84, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00522-9
Bates E, 2001, MEM COGNITION, V29, P986, DOI 10.3758/BF03195761
Binder JR, 2005, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V17, P905, DOI 10.1162/0898929054021102
Bonin P, 2004, J MEM LANG, V50, P456, DOI 10.1016/j.jml.2004.02.001
BUCHANAN L, 1994, J NEUROLINGUIST, V8, P163, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(94)90024-8
CARAMAZZA A, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P81, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252862
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P22
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
Coltheart M, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P1, DOI 10.1080/026432998381203
Coltheart M, 2001, PSYCHOL REV, V108, P204, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.108.1.204
COLTHEART M, 1993, PSYCHOL REV, V100, P589, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.100.4.589
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P326
Coltheart M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P299, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2183
CUMMING TB, IN PRESS COGNITIVE N
Dejerine J., 1892, CR HEBD ACAD SCI, V4, P61
DELL GS, 1996, COMPUTATIONAL PSYCHO, P328
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
DEROUESNE J, 1985, SURFACE DYSLEXIA
FERRERES AR, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V49, P153, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1026
FEYEREISEN P, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P401, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90094-2
FORSTER KI, 1973, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V12, P627, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(73)80042-8
Gold BT, 2005, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V43, P833, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2004.10.005
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
Hirsh KW, 1995, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P23, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(95)00003-8
HIRSH KW, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P435, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251981
*IBM, 1989, VELI VOC EL LING IT
JOB R, 1984, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V36, P435
Juhasz BJ, 2005, PSYCHOL BULL, V131, P684, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.131.5.684
Lewis MB, 2001, COGNITION, V78, P189, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(00)00117-7
Luzzatti C, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P345, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2475
Luzzatti C., 1996, AACHENER APHASIE TES, V2nd
Luzzatti C, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P1721, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.9.1721
MICELI G, 1983, Archivio di Psicologia Neurologia e Psichiatria, V44, P185
MICELI G, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P317, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90134-1
MORRISON CM, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V21, P116, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.21.1.116
Morton J, 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P91
PAAP KR, 1991, PSYCHOL RES-PSYCH FO, V53, P13, DOI 10.1007/BF00867328
Patterson K., 1985, SURFACE DYSLEXIA
PATTERSON K, 1982, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V34, P411
Plaut DC, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P56, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.1.56
RUIZ A, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P245, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1015
SAFFRAN EM, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P80
Schwartz M. F., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
Shibahara N, 2003, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V56, P263, DOI 10.1080/02724980244000369
STRAIN E, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V21, P1140, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.21.5.1140
Zaidel E., 1990, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V4, P115
Zevin JD, 2002, J MEM LANG, V47, P1, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2001.2834
Zevin JD, 2004, MEM COGNITION, V32, P31, DOI 10.3758/BF03195818
NR 53
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 823
EP 850
DI 10.1080/02687030600738838
PG 28
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800002
ER
PT J
AU Sage, K
Ellis, AW
AF Sage, Karen
Ellis, Andrew W.
TI Using orthographic neighbours to treat a case of graphemic buffer
disorder
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ATTENTIONAL MECHANISMS; ACQUIRED DYSGRAPHIA; WORD RECOGNITION;
REPRESENTATIONS; REMEDIATION; DENSITY; SIZE; CATEGORIZATION; FREQUENCY;
DEFICITS
AB Background: The characteristics of graphemic buffer disorder have been described by Miceli, Silveri, and Caramazza (1985) and Caramazza and Miceli (1990) and include a length effect in spelling words and nonwords, in both written and oral format. Error patterns typically consist of omissions, substitutions, additions, and movement errors. Recently, lexical effects on spelling accuracy in many buffer cases have been shown (Sage & Ellis, 2004) and, in patient BH in particular, these included an influence of orthographic neighbourhood size (the number of words that can be generated by changing one letter in the target word; Coltheart, Davelaar, Jonassen, & Besner, 1977).
Aims: This paper aims to show that orthographic neighbours used in a therapy programme can bring about improvements in the spelling of targets that have not directly received therapy.
Methods & procedures: This was a single case treatment study of BH, who showed classic features of graphemic buffer disorder in her spelling. Two priming studies contrasting no prime, control primes, and orthographic neighbour primes (both word and nonword) established that positive effects on spelling accuracy and error pattern could be achieved. The use of orthographic neighbours was then extended into a therapy programme. Three word sets contrasted direct therapy to the words themselves (Set1), no therapy at all (Set 2), and therapy to neighbours of the words in a set (Set 3). An errorless learning paradigm was used throughout the therapy programme.
Outcome & results: Improvement was made both to the treated words in Set 1 and to the words in Set 3, even though these words had received no direct therapy. There was no change in accuracy in Set 2, the control set that had received no therapy. The paper also explores changes in error patterns due to therapy, showing that error patterns changed following therapy.
Conclusions: The priming studies showed that changes in accuracy could be achieved when orthographic neighbours were used. Following on from this, a therapy programme based on neighbours was effective in assisting the graphemic buffer. Specifically, the interaction between lexicon and buffer was used therapeutically to improve not only the spelling of words that had received direct treatment but also to a word set that did not directly receive treatment. These changes were brought about using an errorless learning paradigm.
C1 Univ Manchester, Sch Psychol Sci, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
Univ York, York YO10 5DD, N Yorkshire, England.
RP Sage, K (reprint author), Univ Manchester, Sch Psychol Sci, Oxford Rd, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
EM karen.sage@manchester.ac.uk
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
Annoni JM, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P64, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1934
Arguin M, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P53, DOI 10.1080/026432998381221
Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
BADDELEY A, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P53, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90068-X
Barry C., 1994, HDB SPELLING THEORY, P27
Boyczuk JP, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P46, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2049
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, COGNITION, V37, P243, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(90)90047-N
Coltheart M., 1977, ATTENTION PERFORM, P535
DEPARTZ MP, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P129, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520178
Ellis A. W., 2000, CASE STUDIES NEUROPS, P85
Ellis A. W., 1982, NORMALITY PATHOLOGY, P113
Fillingham JK, 2006, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V16, P129, DOI 10.1080/09602010443000254
Forster KI, 1996, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V22, P696, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.22.3.696
Garlock VM, 2001, J MEM LANG, V45, P468, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2784
GOODMAN RA, 1994, J HOPKINS U DYSGRAPH
Grainger J, 2005, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V58, P981, DOI 10.1080/02724980443000386
Grainger J, 2000, J MEM LANG, V42, P88, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1999.2675
Hillis A. E., 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P84
HILLIS AE, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P208, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90062-X
Jonsdottir MK, 1996, COGNITION, V59, P169, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00693-1
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KATZ RB, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P111
Kay J, 1994, HDB SPELLING THEORY
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
Lavidor M, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P45, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2583
LAXON V, 1994, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V9, P1, DOI 10.1080/01690969408402108
MCCLOSKEY M, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P341, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251979
McCloskey M, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P395
McKenna P., 1983, GRADED NAMING TEST
MICELI G, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P187, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90080-X
MORRIS J, 1995, CASE STUDIES CLIN LI, P245
Nelson H. E., 1982, NATL ADULT READING T
Parkin AJ, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P361
PATE D S, 1990, Neurology, V40, P241
Pound C, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P283, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248413
Rapp B, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P439, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000301
Raven J. C., 1985, RAVENS PROGR MATRICE
Raymer AM, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P607, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000058
SAGE K, 2004, THESIS U YORK UK
Sage K, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P381, DOI [10.1080/02643290342000438, 10.1090/02643290342000438]
Sage K, 2005, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V15, P619, DOI 10.1080/09602010443000155
Schiller NO, 2001, NEUROCASE, V7, P1
Tainturier MJ, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P537, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000021
Warrington EK, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V7, P143, DOI 10.1080/713755528
WILSON BA, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V4, P307, DOI 10.1080/09602019408401463
NR 47
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 851
EP 870
DI 10.1080/02687030600738945
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800003
ER
PT J
AU Castles, A
Bates, TC
Coltheart, M
AF Castles, Anne
Bates, Timothy C.
Coltheart, Max
TI John Marshall and the developmental dyslexias
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PHONOLOGICAL DYSLEXIA; SURFACE DYSLEXIA; READING ACQUISITION;
DUAL-ROUTE; IMPAIRMENT; DYSGRAPHIA; DEFICITS; MODELS; VARIETIES;
PATTERNS
AB Background: In 1984, John Marshall made the case that one can use a model of the skilled reading system not only to interpret the acquired dyslexias, but also to interpret the developmental dyslexias, and the particular model of the skilled reading system he favoured for this purpose was the dual-route model. This claim has been a controversial one, with many researchers claiming that static models of adult skilled reading, such as the dual-route model, are inappropriate for understanding the process of reading development and, consequently, the developmental reading disorders.
Aims: In this paper, we examine how Marshall's conjecture has fared over the past 20 years.
Main Contribution: We evaluate Marshall's conjecture by examining evidence for developmental analogues of acquired surface and phonological dyslexia, by reporting new data on cases of "pure'' developmental surface and phonological dyslexia, and by assessing the success of dual route versus connectionist accounts of these subtypes. We also report evidence that the dual-route model of skilled reading provides an accurate account of the reading performance of children at all stages of reading development.
Conclusion: We conclude that Marshall's controversial claim has been vindicated by subsequent research.
C1 Univ Melbourne, Sydney, NSW, Australia.
Macquarie Univ, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Castles, A (reprint author), Univ Melbourne, Dept Psychol, Parkville, Vic 3010, Australia.
EM acastles@unimelb.edu.au
RI Castles, Anne/B-3030-2013
CR Alexander JRM, 2000, AUST J PSYCHOL, V52, P139, DOI 10.1080/00049530008255381
Bates TC, 2004, AUST J PSYCHOL, V56, P115, DOI 10.1080/00049530410001734847
BEAUVOIS MF, 1979, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V42, P1115, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.42.12.1115
Blazely AM, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P695, DOI 10.1080/02643290442000257
BODER E, 1973, DEV MED CHILD NEUROL, V15, P663
CAMPBELL R, 1985, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V37, P435
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, NATURE, V346, P267, DOI 10.1038/346267a0
CASTLES A, 1993, COGNITION, V47, P149, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(93)90003-E
Castles A, 1999, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V72, P73, DOI 10.1006/jecp.1998.2482
Castles A, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P25, DOI 10.1080/026432996382051
Cestnick L, 1999, COGNITION, V71, P231, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(99)00023-2
Coltheart M, 2006, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V23, P96, DOI 10.1080/02643290500202649
COLTHEART M, 1987, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P22
COLTHEART M, 1983, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V35, P469
Coltheart M, 2001, PSYCHOL REV, V108, P204, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.108.1.204
COLTHEART M, 1993, PSYCHOL REV, V100, P589, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.100.4.589
Coltheart M, 1996, AUST J PSYCHOL, V48, P136, DOI 10.1080/00049539608259520
Edwards VT, 1999, AUST J PSYCHOL, V51, P37, DOI 10.1080/00049539908255333
Fletcher-Flinn CM, 2004, COGNITION, V90, P303, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(03)00162-8
FORSTER KI, 1973, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V12, P627, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(73)80042-8
Friedmann N, 2004, CORTEX, V40, P301, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70125-4
Friedmann N, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P673, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000051
Frith U., 1985, SURFACE DYSLEXIA
Glosser G, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P234, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1801
GOULANDRIS NK, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P127, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253369
HANLEY JR, 1992, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V44, P285
Harm MW, 1999, PSYCHOL REV, V106, P491, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.106.3.491
HEYWOOD M, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P577
HOLMES J, 1973, THESIS U EDINBURGH
Manis FR, 1996, COGNITION, V58, P157, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00679-6
Marshall J. C., 1984, DYSLEXIA GLOBAL ISSU
MARSHALL JC, 1973, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V2, P175, DOI 10.1007/BF01067101
MITTERER JO, 1982, CAN J PSYCHOL, V36, P445, DOI 10.1037/h0080660
Plaut DC, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P56, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.1.56
RAYNER K, 1989, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V6, P357, DOI 10.1080/02643298908253288
SCHWARTZ MF, 1987, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P259
SHALLICE T, 1987, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P119
SHARE DL, 1995, COGNITION, V55, P151, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)00645-2
SNOWLING M, 1989, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V6, P379, DOI 10.1080/02643298908253289
Snowling M, 1987, DYSLEXIA COGNITIVE D
SNOWLING M, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P309, DOI 10.1080/02643298608253362
Snowling MJ, 1996, READ WRIT, V8, P443
Stanovich KE, 1997, J EDUC PSYCHOL, V89, P114, DOI 10.1037//0022-0663.89.1.114
Stuart M, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P793, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251402
TEMPLE CM, 1983, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V74, P517
NR 45
TC 27
Z9 29
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 871
EP 892
DI 10.1080/02687030600738952
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800004
ER
PT J
AU Caplan, D
Dede, G
Michaud, J
AF Caplan, David
Dede, Gayle
Michaud, Jennifer
TI Task-independent and task-specific syntactic deficits in aphasic
comprehension
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE COMPREHENSION; LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION
AB We present 42 case studies of aphasic syntactic comprehension performances in sentence - picture matching and object manipulation, examining the data for the existence of deficits referable to particular syntactic structures, or such structures in a single sentence form, in both tasks. No deficits affected performance on all sentence types that contained a particular structure in both tasks. Most deficits affected single sentence forms in only one task, and no isolated deficits occurred. The implications of the pattern of performance for the nature of aphasic deficits are discussed.
C1 Massachusetts Gen Hosp, Neuropsychol Lab, Boston, MA 02114 USA.
Boston Univ, Boston, MA 02215 USA.
RP Caplan, D (reprint author), Massachusetts Gen Hosp, Neuropsychol Lab, 175 Cambridge St,Suite 340,Fruit St, Boston, MA 02114 USA.
EM dcaplan@partners.org
CR Caplan D., 1988, DISORDERS SYNTACTIC
Caplan D, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P542
CAPLAN D, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P325, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1051
Crawford JR, 2003, CORTEX, V39, P357, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70117-5
Crawford JR, 1998, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V12, P482, DOI 10.1076/clin.12.4.482.7241
CUPPLES L, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P201, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253461
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
GRODZINSKY Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P47
HAARMANN HJ, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P247, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248527
LINEBARGER MC, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1040
LINEBARGER MC, 1983, COGNITION, V13, P361, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90015-X
Swinney D, 1996, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V8, P174, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1996.8.2.174
TANENHAUS MK, 1995, SCIENCE, V268, P1632, DOI 10.1126/science.7777863
NR 13
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 893
EP 920
DI 10.1080/02687030600739273
PG 28
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800005
ER
PT J
AU Howard, D
Gatehouse, C
AF Howard, David
Gatehouse, Claire
TI Distinguishing semantic and lexical word retrieval deficits in people
with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID GENERATED PHONEMIC CUES; AUDITORY COMPREHENSION; NAMING LATENCY; ERRORS;
AGE; ACQUISITION; ANOMIA; ACCESS; IMPAIRMENT; DISORDERS
AB Background: Identifying the point of breakdown in people with aphasia with disorders of word retrieval is not straightforward. Evidence has been sought from: (i) the nature of the errors in naming; (ii) the variables affecting naming accuracy; (iii) the effects of correct and misleading cues; (iv) performance in other word comprehension and production tasks. However, previous research has demonstrated that each of these sources of evidence provides information compatible with more than level of breakdown.
Aims: The study investigates whether a combination of information from these sources can provide a coherent account of how word retrieval is breaking down in people with aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: Three people with aphasia (JGr, LM, and KS) took part in four experiments. The first investigated the errors made in picture naming and the factors (target word length, imageability, frequency.) affecting naming accuracy. The second experiment investigated the effects of correct phonemic cues and miscues on word retrieval. The third examined the participants' performance in tests of spoken and written word and picture comprehension. The fourth experiment investigated whether the participants had the processing abilities necessary to generate their own phonemic cues in spoken naming from orthographic information.
Outcomes & Results: Evidence from these investigations showed different levels of breakdown in the three participants. JGr's naming was characterised by semantic errors, effects of target imageability and familiarity on naming accuracy, improved naming with correct phonemic cues and semantic errors with miscues, and poor performance in word comprehension tasks. This pattern is consistent with a breakdown at a semantic level underlying JGr's difficulty in word retrieval. In contrast, LM shows performance indicating a breakdown in mapping between intact semantic and phonological representations. He makes primarily no response errors in naming and his accuracy is affected only by frequency and familiarity. Correct phonemic cues can improve his naming accuracy to near normal levels, and he makes no semantic errors, although he is slowed by miscues. His word and picture comprehension is intact. KS shows a more complex pattern of impairment. Like JGr, she shows evidence of a semantic impairment: she makes semantic errors in naming, and her accuracy is affected by target imageability. She makes errors in word comprehension and her word retrieval is adversely affected by miscues. There are two unusual features to her performance: her naming accuracy is not improved by initial phoneme cues (despite effects of miscues and more extensive phonemic cues), and she is better at naming pictures with longer names (a "reverse length effect''). Investigations in experiment four show that KS is using orthographic information on the initial letter of names to generate her own phonemic cues; it is concluded that in addition to her semantic deficit she has an impairment in access to lexical phonological representations.
Conclusions: We conclude that careful investigation of the performance of people with aphasia across a range of tasks can be used to identify underlying levels of breakdown in word retrieval. However, superficial resemblances between people with aphasia can be misleading.
C1 Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Sch Educ Commun & Language Sci, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
Plymouth Teaching Primary Care Trust, Plymouth, Devon, England.
RP Howard, D (reprint author), Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Sch Educ Commun & Language Sci, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
EM david.howard@newcastle.ac.uk
CR Allport D.A., 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES, P32
Best W, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P637
Breese EL, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P3, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00412-7
BROWN GDA, 1987, MEM COGNITION, V15, P208, DOI 10.3758/BF03197718
BRUCE C, 1987, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V22, P191
BRUCE C, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P253, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90078-4
Butterworth B., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
BUTTERWORTH B, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90036-8
Butterworth Brian, 1983, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, P257
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P1
CARAMAZZA A, 1986, BRAIN COGNITION, V5, P41, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(86)90061-8
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
CARROLL JB, 1973, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V25, P85, DOI 10.1080/14640747308400325
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
COLTHEART M, 1980, UNPUB ANAL ACQUIRED
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Ellis A., 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P207
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
Ellis A. W., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P287
ELLIS AW, 1983, COGNITION, V15, P111, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90036-7
FEYEREISEN P, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P401, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90094-2
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
FRANKLIN S, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P549, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252007
FUNNELL E, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P135, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252056
FUNNELL E, 1991, P ROY SOC B-BIOL SCI, V243, P173, DOI 10.1098/rspb.1991.0028
GAINOTTI G, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P18, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90031-3
GERNSBACHER MA, 1984, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V113, P256, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.113.2.256
Goodglass H, 1969, Cortex, V5, P104
HILLIS AE, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P191, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253442
HILLIS AE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251996
HIRSH KW, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P435, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251981
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
Howard D, 2006, COGNITION, V100, P464, DOI 10.1016/j.cognition.2005.02.006
HOWARD D, 1995, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V48, P999
Howard D., 1985, THESIS U LONDON
HOWARD D, 1984, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V1, P163, DOI 10.1080/02643298408252021
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Howard D, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P42, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000582
Howard D, 1984, Adv Neurol, V42, P263
Howard D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249540
Howard D., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P76
Katz RB, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P46, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1766
KAY J, 1992, MENTAL LIVES CASE ST
KAY J, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P613, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.3.613
KAY J, 1985, SURFACE DYSLEXIA NEU, P79
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KOHN SE, 1988, PHONOLOGICAL PROCESS
KOHN SE, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P209, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248992
Lambon Ralph Matthew A., 2000, Neuropsychologia, V38, P186, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00056-1
Ralph MAL, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V13, P341, DOI 10.1162/08989290151137395
LAMBON RM, 2000, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V17, P437
LAMBONRALPH MA, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P339, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1976
Lesser R., 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
LI EC, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P51, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248519
LI EC, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P1083
MARKMAN E, 1989, CATEGORISATION NAMIN
MORRISON CM, 1992, MEM COGNITION, V20, P705, DOI 10.3758/BF03202720
MYERSPEASE D, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P178
NICKELS L, 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO, P115
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
NICKELS L, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P289, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251977
Nickels L, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P57, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000122
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
NICKELS L, 1995, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V10, P13, DOI 10.1080/01690969508407086
OLDFIELD RC, 1965, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V17, P273, DOI 10.1080/17470216508416445
Pate D. S., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P43, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406351
Patterson K, 1999, CURR OPIN NEUROBIOL, V9, P235, DOI 10.1016/S0959-4388(99)80033-6
PATTERSON KE, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P111, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90044-0
Ralph MAL, 1998, NEUROCASE, V4, P311, DOI 10.1080/13554799808410630
Ralph MAL, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P56, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000448
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
Shallice T., 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P111
SMITH A, 1988, THESIS U NEWCASTLE N
STIMLEY MA, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P496, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90170-6
WALLEY AC, 1992, MEM COGNITION, V20, P171, DOI 10.3758/BF03197166
WHEELDON LR, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P332, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1016
ZINGESER LB, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P474
NR 81
TC 21
Z9 23
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 921
EP 950
DI 10.1080/02687030600782679
PG 30
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800006
ER
PT J
AU Di Dio, C
Schulz, J
Gurd, JM
AF Di Dio, Cinzia
Schulz, Joerg
Gurd, Jennifer M.
TI Foreign Accent Syndrome: In the ear of the beholder?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AMERICAN ENGLISH; LANGUAGE ATTITUDES; PATIENT
AB Background: The identification of accent type in patients with acquired accent change following brain damage (Foreign Accent Syndrome; FAS), may vary depending on the judge.
Aims: This experiment tests the accent identification abilities of naive judges listening to speech samples from FAS patients versus healthy controls.
Method & Procedures: A total of 52 naive judges listened to speech samples from speakers of British English, which were presented over audio CD. They were asked to identify the accent type, but were blind as to the identity of the participants vis-a-vis FAS versus control, and foreign versus native UK. Accuracy, variability, and confidence ratings were assessed as a function of participant and of accent type.
Outcomes & Results: The naive judges displayed greater accuracy, consistency, and confidence in typing the control versus the FAS accents. There was a positive familiarity effect for the control, but not the FAS accents.
Conclusions: The data provide preliminary support for the view that FAS is not exclusively "in the ear of the beholder''.
C1 Univ Parma, I-43100 Parma, Italy.
Univ Hertfordshire, Hatfield AL10 9AB, Herts, England.
Univ Oxford, Oxford, England.
RP Gurd, JM (reprint author), Univ Dept Clin Neurol, Radcliffe Infirm, Neoropsychol Res Unit, Woodstock Rd, Oxford OX2 6HE, England.
CR ARDILA A, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P493, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248955
Bayard D, 1995, KIWITALK SOCIOLINGUI
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P215, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90071-X
Boberg C, 1999, J LANG SOC PSYCHOL, V18, P49, DOI 10.1177/0261927X99018001004
Carbary TJ, 2000, BRAIN COGNITION, V43, P78
Cavanaugh JR, 2005, LANG COMMUN, V25, P127, DOI 10.1016/j.langcom.2005.02.002
Christoph DH, 2004, EUR NEUROL, V52, P198, DOI 10.1159/000082035
COLEMAN J, IN PRESS J NEUROLING
Dankovicova J, 2001, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V15, P195, DOI 10.1080/02699200010004656
Dixon JA, 2002, J LANG SOC PSYCHOL, V21, P162, DOI 10.1177/02627X02021002004
Doest L., 2002, J LANG SOC PSYCHOL, V21, P195
Edwards J, 1999, J LANG SOC PSYCHOL, V18, P101, DOI 10.1177/0261927X99018001007
Giles H., 1975, SPEECH STYLES SOCIAL
GRAFFRADFORD NR, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P86, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90093-3
GURD JM, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P237, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90077-2
Gurd JM, 2001, CORTEX, V37, P715, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70622-1
Hollander M., 1999, NONPARAMETRIC STAT M, VSecond
Kahn R, 1982, ATTITUDES LANGUAGE V, P148
KENT RD, 2005, HIGHER ORDER MOTOR D, P249
Krauss RM, 2002, J EXP SOC PSYCHOL, V38, P618, DOI 10.1016/S0022-1031(02)00510-3
Kurowski KM, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0059
Miller CA, 2002, GERIATR NURS, V23, P230, DOI 10.1067/mgn.2002.126970
MILLER N, IN PRESS J NEUROLING
Moen I, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P5, DOI 10.1080/026870300401577
MONRADKROHN GH, 1947, BRAIN, V70, P405, DOI 10.1093/brain/70.4.405
Niedzielski N, 1999, J LANG SOC PSYCHOL, V18, P62, DOI 10.1177/0261927X99018001005
Purnell T, 1999, J LANG SOC PSYCHOL, V18, P10, DOI 10.1177/0261927X99018001002
Ray GB, 1999, J LANG SOC PSYCHOL, V18, P310, DOI 10.1177/0261927X99018003005
RYALLS J, 1985, FOLIA PHONIATR, V37, P160
SIGEL S, 1988, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
Whitaker H. A., 1982, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY COGN, V1, P168
NR 31
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 951
EP 962
DI 10.1080/02687030600739356
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800007
ER
PT J
AU Jefferies, E
Crisp, J
Ralph, MAL
AF Jefferies, Elizabeth
Crisp, Jenni
Ralph, Matthew A. Lambon
TI The impact of phonological or semantic impairment on delayed auditory
repetition: Evidence from stroke aphasia and semantic dementia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; NONFLUENT PROGRESSIVE APHASIA; TEMPORAL-LOBE ATROPHY;
DUAL-ROUTE MODELS; DEEP DYSPHASIA; SPEECH PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS;
WORD COMPREHENSION; FLUENT APHASIA; SERIAL-RECALL
AB Background/Aims: This study aimed to evaluate the interactive account of repetition by examining the influence of factors that differentially tapped semantic and phonological processing in a case series of patients with semantic or phonological impairment.
Methods & Procedures: We compared two patient groups: predominantly phonologically impaired cases with aphasia following cerebrovascular accident, and patients with semantic dementia. Immediate repetition was contrasted with repetition after a 5-second filled delay, and lexicality, frequency, and imageability were manipulated - therefore both the task and the neuropsychological impairment biased processing in favour of either lexical-semantic or phonological capacities.
Outcomes & Results: Substantial interactivity was observed between phonological/ semantic impairment and variables largely tapping these processes. The phonologically impaired patients showed substantial effects of lexicality and imageability that were larger in delayed than immediate repetition. The semantically impaired patients exhibited the complementary pattern, showing reduced effects of these lexical-semantic variables and a delay effect that was larger for more poorly comprehended, low-frequency items. Semantic errors were related to phonological deficits whereas semantic impairment led to an increase in phonological errors. The phonologically impaired stroke cases also made more perseverative responses.
Conclusions: These findings support the view that repetition is underpinned by interaction between semantics and phonology within a single route and not by distinct lexical and sub-lexical pathways. The results also provide evidence of a continuum between phonological and deep dysphasia.
C1 Univ Manchester, Sch Psychol Sci, Neurosci & Aphasia Res Unit, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
N Tyneside Primary Care Trust, Newcastle Upon Tyne, Tyne & Wear, England.
Univ Newcastle, Newcastle Upon Tyne, Tyne & Wear, England.
RP Jefferies, E (reprint author), Univ Manchester, Sch Psychol Sci, Neurosci & Aphasia Res Unit, Oxford Rd, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
EM beth.jefferies@manchester.ac.uk
RI Jefferies, Elizabeth/A-7981-2011; Lambon Ralph, Matthew/A-1695-2009
CR Baayen R. H., 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Bozeat S, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P1207, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(00)00034-8
Caza N, 2002, NEUROCASE, V8, P255, DOI 10.1093/neucas/8.4.255
Crisp J, 2006, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V18, P348, DOI 10.1162/089892906775990543
Croot K, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P226, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1852
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Forde EME, 2002, NEUROCASE, V8, P13, DOI 10.1093/neucas/8.1.13
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Franklin S., 1992, ADA COMPREHENSION BA
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P114, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0006
FUNNELL E, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P497, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253162
Galton CJ, 2001, NEUROLOGY, V57, P216
Gotts SJ, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1930, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00067-2
Hanley JR, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P193, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000132
Hanley JR, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P147, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000339
Hanley JR, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P1065
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
Howard D., 1988, MISSING MEANING
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Jefferies E, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P183, DOI 10.1080/02643290442000068
Jefferies E, 2006, NEUROCASE, V12, P1, DOI 10.1080/13554790500428445
Jefferies E, 2004, COGN AFFECT BEHAV NE, V4, P20, DOI 10.3758/CABN.4.1.20
Jefferies E, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V42, P639, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2003.10.002
Jefferies E, 2006, J MEM LANG, V54, P81, DOI 10.1016/j.jml.2005.08.001
JONES GV, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90094-X
KATZ RB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P153, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90009-6
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTICS AS
Knott R, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P1165, DOI 10.1080/026432997381303
Knott R, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P125, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00069-X
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
Majerus S, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P385, DOI 10.1080/02643290126060
Martin N, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P83, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0005
Martin N, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P641
MARTIN N, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P240, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90130-7
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
Martin R. C., 1996, MODELS SHORT TERM ME, P149
Martin RC, 1999, J MEM LANG, V41, P3, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1999.2637
MCCARTHY R, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P463, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.2.463
MCCARTHY RA, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P1545, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.6.1545
MICHEL F, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V18, P212, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90016-0
Mummery CJ, 2000, ANN NEUROL, V47, P36
Patterson K., 1992, ANAL APPROACHES HUMA, VXV, P259
PATTERSON K, 1994, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V6, P57, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1994.6.1.57
Plaut David C., 1999, EMERGENCE LANGUAGE
PLAUT DC, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P377, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253469
Ralph MAL, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P56, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000448
Roodenrys S, 2002, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V28, P29, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.28.1.29
SANDSON J, 1987, NEUROLOGY, V37, P1736
Snowden J. S, 1989, BEHAV NEUROL, V2, P167
SNOWDEN JS, 1996, FRONTOTEMPEROL LOBAR
Tree JJ, 2001, NEUROCASE, V7, P473, DOI 10.1093/neucas/7.6.473
TREIMAN R, 1988, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V14, P145, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.14.1.145
VALDOIS S, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P681, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251399
Warrington EK, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P611, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.2.611
Warrington EK, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V8, P143
Wilshire CE, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1059
Wilshire CE, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000555
NR 59
TC 16
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 963
EP 992
DI 10.1080/02687030600739398
PG 30
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800008
ER
PT J
AU Druks, J
AF Druks, Judit
TI Morpho-syntactic and morpho-phonological deficits in the production of
regularly and irregularly inflected verbs
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PAST-TENSE MORPHOLOGY; WORD ORDER PROBLEM; ACQUIRED DYSLEXIA; LANGUAGE;
AGRAMMATISM; APHASIA; ENGLISH; LEXICON; SYSTEM; RULES
AB Background: The background to the study is the debate in relation to the English regular/irregular past tense forms.
Aims: The purpose of the investigation was the evaluation of the dual mechanism (DMT: Pinker, 1999; Marslen-Wilson & Tyler, 1997, 1998; Ullman, Corkin, Coppola, Hickok, Growdon, Koroshetz, et al., 1997) and connectionist single mechanism models (SMT: Bird, Lambon Ralph, Seidenberg, McClelland, & Patterson, 2003; Joanisse & Seidenberg, 1999; Patterson, Lambon Ralph, Hodges, & McClelland, 2001) through exploring the reading and oral production of regular and irregular past tense forms and other verbal and nominal inflections by a Broca's type aphasic and phonological dyslexic patient.
Methods & Procedures: Eight experimental tasks are reported. Three involved the reading of stems and inflected verbs and nouns in differently organised lists, two involved the oral production of past tense verbs and plural nouns, and three explored the ability to distinguish between written verbs inflected with various affixes.
Outcomes & Results: In reading randomly organised list of nouns, verb stems, and regular and irregular past tense forms the patient displayed dissociation between regular and irregular past tense forms as predicted by DMT. When the same items were presented in a list with present and past tense forms paired, and in the oral transformation task, the dissociation disappeared, and performance in regular and irregular past tense forms became comparable. There was a difference in the patient's reading of plural nouns and progressive verbs, which was good, and of past tense forms and third person forms, which was impaired. The recognition/comprehension tasks revealed that the patient was aware of the presence of an affix, but he could not reliably distinguish between different affixes.
Conclusions: Performance on regular/irregular past tense forms and the variable levels of performance in producing different regular inflections are in conflict with both DMT and SMT on a number of grounds. The task-related differences between randomly organised lists and paired present and past tense forms are accounted for by distinguishing between morpho-phonological and morpho-syntactic effects. It is argued that deficits confined to the production of regular past tense forms are morpho-phonological in nature, while deficits in both regular and irregular past tense forms originate in morpho-syntax. Since SMT and DMT are theories of morpho-phonological processes, they cannot account for the complex performance pattern presented by the patient in the present study and by other similar patients. The differences attested in the availability of differently affixed words and deficits in irregular past tense forms are only accountable at the level of morpho-syntax.
C1 UCL, Dept Human Commun Sci, London WC1 1PF, England.
RP Druks, J (reprint author), UCL, Dept Human Commun Sci, Chandler House,2 Wakefield St, London WC1 1PF, England.
EM j.druks@ucl.ac.uk
CR Baayen Harald, 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Badecker W, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P360, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1845
BADECKER W, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P335, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253377
BADECKER W, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P278, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90129-5
Balaguer RDD, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P212, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.02.007
Bird H, 2003, J MEM LANG, V48, P502, DOI 10.1016/S0749-596X(02)00538-7
BYBEE J, 1995, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V10, P425, DOI 10.1080/01690969508407111
Bybee J, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1016, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X99252223
BYBEE JL, 1983, LANGUAGE, V59, P251, DOI 10.2307/413574
Bybee Joan, 1985, MORPHOLOGY STUDY REL
Chomsky N., 1968, SOUND PATTERN ENGLIS
DAUGHERTY K, 1992, P 14 ANN M COGN SCI
De Bleser R., 1988, THEORETICAL MORPHOLO
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
Druks J, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V94, P1, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.11.003
Druks J, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P207, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000141
Faroqi-Shah Y, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P484, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2003.12.006
Friedmann N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1795
FUNNELL E, 1987, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V39, P497
GLUSHKO RJ, 1979, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V5, P674, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.5.4.674
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Goodglass H., 1976, HDB PERCEPTION, V7
GRODZINSKY J, 1990, THEORETICAL PERSPECT
HALLE M, 1985, LINGUIST INQ, V16, P57
IZVORKSI R, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P289
Joanisse MF, 1999, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V96, P7592, DOI 10.1073/pnas.96.13.7592
MACWHINNEY B, 1991, COGNITION, V40, P121, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(91)90048-9
Marcus GF, 1995, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V29, P189, DOI 10.1006/cogp.1995.1015
Marslen-Wilson W, 1998, TRENDS COGN SCI, V2, P428, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(98)01239-X
MarslenWilson WD, 1997, NATURE, V387, P592, DOI 10.1038/42456
MICELI G, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V35, P24, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90100-9
NANOUSI V, 2004, THESIS U ESSEX UK
Patterson K, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V39, P709, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00008-2
Penke M, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P225, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2103
PINKER S, 1991, SCIENCE, V253, P530, DOI 10.1126/science.1857983
Pinker S, 2002, TRENDS COGN SCI, V6, P456, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(02)01990-3
Pinker Steven, 1999, WORDS RULES INGREDIE
PLUNKETT K, 1991, COGNITION, V38, P43, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(91)90022-V
PLUNKETT K, 1993, COGNITION, V48, P21, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(93)90057-3
PRASADA S, 1993, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V8, P1, DOI 10.1080/01690969308406948
Rumelhart D. E., 1986, PARALLEL DISTRIBUTED, V2
SAFFRAN EM, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P263, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90056-5
SCHWARTZ MF, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P249, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90055-3
SHALLICE T, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P429, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252030
Shapiro K, 2000, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V17, P665, DOI 10.1080/026432900750038281
Shapiro K, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V41, P1189, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(03)00037-X
THOMPSON CK, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P285
Tsapkini K, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V81, P103, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2510
Tyler LK, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1154, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00232-9
Ullman MT, 2001, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V30, P37, DOI 10.1023/A:1005204207369
Ullman MT, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P266, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.2.266
ULLMAN MT, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P317
Ullman MT, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V93, P185, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.10.001
Ullman MT, 1999, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V20, P51
van der Lely HKJ, 2001, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V16, P177
Wenzlaff M, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P57, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00298-0
NR 56
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 993
EP 1017
DI 10.1080/02687030600739422
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800009
ER
PT J
AU Patterson, K
Graham, NL
Ralph, MAL
Hodges, JR
AF Patterson, Karalyn
Graham, Naida L.
Ralph, Matthew A. Lambon
Hodges, John R.
TI Progressive non-fluent aphasia is not a progressive form of non-fluent
(post-stroke) aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PHONOLOGICAL ALEXIA; ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; WORD RECOGNITION; LANGUAGE;
CONTINUUM; DEMENTIA; DEFICITS; DYSLEXIA
AB Background: The speech of patients with progressive non-fluent aphasia (PNFA) has been described as similar to that in non-fluent aphasia (NFA) consequent on stroke. There are, however, few direct empirical comparisons of these two patient populations in the literature.
Aims: To test the hypotheses that PNFA cases differ from NFA (a) in the extent to which their speech production deficit varies as a function of speaking task, and (b) in the nature of their phonological deficit.
Methods & Procedures: Groups of PNFA and NFA patients (N510 each), matched on scores in a picture-naming test, were assessed on tasks of narrative picture description, reading aloud of text and single words, and phonological abilities such as rhyme judgement and rhyme production.
Outcomes & Results: (a) The NFA cases showed equivalent speech rates in selfgenerated speech and reading text aloud, and equivalent error rates when reading text or isolated single words. In contrast, the PNFA cases spoke more rapidly when reading aloud than when producing narrative speech, and achieved higher accuracy when reading single words aloud than when reading words in text. (b) Variation in success rate for reading different types of words (e. g., content words, function words, and nonsense words), error types in reading, and performance on phonological tasks all indicated a different and better quality of phonological processing in PNFA than NFA.
Conclusions: Despite some surface similarities, there are telling differences between the speech impairments in PNFA and NFA. The deficit in PNFA particularly compromises self-generated connected speech.
C1 MRC, Cognit & Brain Sci Unit, Cambridge CB2 2EF, England.
Univ Manchester, Manchester, Lancs, England.
RP Patterson, K (reprint author), MRC, Cognit & Brain Sci Unit, 15 Chaucer Rd, Cambridge CB2 2EF, England.
EM karalyn.patterson@mrc-cbu.cam.ac.uk
RI Lambon Ralph, Matthew/A-1695-2009
CR Balasubramanian V., 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P115
Bird H, 2003, J MEM LANG, V48, P502, DOI 10.1016/S0749-596X(02)00538-7
Bishop D. V. M., 1989, TEST RECEPTION GRAMM
Bozeat S, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P1207, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(00)00034-8
Broca P., 1861, B SOC ANAT PARIS, V36, P330
Brown J. W., 1972, APHASIA APRAXIA AGNO
CAPLAN D, 1987, CAMBRIDGE STUDIES SP
CARAMAZZA A, 1981, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL C
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
COLTHEART M, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPYSHC, V13
Crisp J, 2006, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V18, P348, DOI 10.1162/089892906775990543
Farah MJ, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P849, DOI 10.1080/026432996381836
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P114, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0006
GARDNER H, 1975, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V13, P181, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(75)90027-5
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Gorno-Tempini ML, 2004, ANN NEUROL, V55, P335, DOI 10.1002/ana.10825
Graham NL, 2004, NEUROCASE, V10, P141, DOI 10.1080/13554790490497256
Grossman M, 1996, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V8, P135, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1996.8.2.135
GROSSMAN M, 2005, NEUROCASE, V10, P3
Hodges J R, 1996, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V2, P511
Howard D., 1988, MISSING MEANING
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kertesz A, 2003, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V9, P710, DOI 10.1017/S1355617703950041
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
Mendez MF, 2003, NEUROLOGY, V61, P1108
Mesulam MM, 2001, ANN NEUROL, V49, P425, DOI 10.1002/ana.91
MESULAM MM, 1982, ANN NEUROL, V11, P592, DOI 10.1002/ana.410110607
NELSON HE, 1976, CORTEX, V12, P313
Nestor PJ, 2003, BRAIN, V126, P2406, DOI 10.1093/brain/awg240
Patterson K., 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V8, P395, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.8.3.395
PATTERSON K, 1989, BRAIN, V112, P39, DOI 10.1093/brain/112.1.39
Patterson K, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P803, DOI 10.1080/026432996381818
Patterson K., 1992, ANAL APPROACHES HUMA
Patterson K. E., 1982, NORMALITY PATHOLOGY
Plaut DC, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P56, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.1.56
SAFFRAN EM, 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1
SEIDENBERG MS, 1989, PSYCHOL REV, V96, P523, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.96.4.523
SHALLICE T, 1975, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V27, P187, DOI 10.1080/14640747508400479
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Snowden J. S., 1996, FRONTOTEMPORAL LOBAR
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P297, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248473
NR 41
TC 28
Z9 28
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 1018
EP 1034
DI 10.1080/02687030600739463
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800010
ER
PT J
AU Code, C
Muller, N
Tree, JT
Ball, MJ
AF Code, Chris
Muller, Nicole
Tree, Jeremy T.
Ball, Martin J.
TI Syntactic impairments can emerge later: Progressive agrammatic agraphia
and syntactic comprehension impairment
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; VERB RETRIEVAL; WORKING-MEMORY; APHASIA; LANGUAGE;
SPEECH; DEMENTIA; DEGENERATION; PERFORMANCE; DISORDERS
AB Background & Aims: Recent studies suggest that agrammatism is not a major feature of progressive nonfluent aphasia, at least not in the earlier years post-onset. We investigated the emergence of syntactic impairments over a 3-year period in CS, a 63-year-old man 8 years post-onset of progressive speech difficulties. CS has a range of progressive cognitive impairments, including progressive nonfluent aphasia, and limb and other apraxias (with a progressive non-aphasic and mostly non-dysarthric speech deterioration), but relatively intact intelligence, perception, orientation, long-term memory, semantics, and phonology. Writing impairments did not emerge until some 8 years after naming and speech impairments were first noticed, and after CS became mute.
Methods & Procedures: We undertook detailed longitudinal examination of word and sentence writing and syntactic comprehension across a range of tasks and examined the impact of short-term memory. We were concerned to examine the data for evidence of agrammatic features, particularly in noun and verb use, and use of formulaic and simplified syntactic structures as the condition progressed.
Outcomes & Results: Analysis showed a progressive emergence of deficits on tests of written syntax, syntactic comprehension, and auditory-verbal short-term memory. There was a progressive reduction in verb and noun use, but this was related to the kind of stimulus used. Features of agrammatism were evident in writing with a progressive dependence on formulaic and simplified syntax.
C1 Univ Exeter, Sch Psychol, Ctr Cognit Neurosci, Washington Singer Labs, Exeter EX4 4QG, Devon, England.
Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
Univ Louisiana, Lafayette, LA USA.
Univ Wales Inst, Cardiff, Wales.
RP Code, C (reprint author), Univ Exeter, Sch Psychol, Ctr Cognit Neurosci, Washington Singer Labs, Exeter EX4 4QG, Devon, England.
EM c.f.s.code@exeter.ac.uk
CR ARMSTRONG DF, 1994, CURR ANTHROPOL, V35, P349, DOI 10.1086/204290
Baddeley A., 1987, ATTENTION PERFORM, VXII, P509
Baddeley A, 2003, J COMMUN DISORD, V36, P189, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(03)00019-4
BADDELEY A, 1985, J MEM LANG, V24, P490, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(85)90041-5
VALLAR G, 1984, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V23, P151, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(84)90104-X
Ball MJ, 2004, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V18, P447, DOI 10.1080/02699200410001703646
Bastiaanse R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249463
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Bishop D. V. M., 1989, TEST RECEPTION GRAMM
Broussolle E, 1996, J NEUROL SCI, V144, P44, DOI 10.1016/S0022-510X(96)00096-2
Byng S., 1999, REVERSIBLE SENTENCE
Caplan D., 1987, NEUROLINGUISTICS LIN
CAPLAN D, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P191, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1009
Caplan D., 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL I, P337, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511665547.019
CAPLAN D, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P895
CARAMAZZA A, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90078-X
Croot K, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P226, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1852
Dean MP, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P521, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000001
DeBleser R, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P175, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00007-3
Dede G, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P123, DOI 10.1080/02687030500472413
Garrard P, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P609
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Goodglass H., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V1
Gorno-Tempini ML, 2004, NEUROCASE, V10, P426, DOI 10.1080/13554790490894011
Graham NL, 2004, NEUROCASE, V10, P141, DOI 10.1080/13554790490497256
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
Guasti MT, 2002, BRAIN COGNITION, V48, P385, DOI 10.1006/brcg.2001.1383
Harasty JA, 1999, BRAIN, V122, P675, DOI 10.1093/brain/122.4.675
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Howard D, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P42, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000582
Isserlin M, 1922, Z GESAMTE NEUROL PSY, V75, P332, DOI 10.1007/BF02901581
JEFFERIES E, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P965
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
KERTESZ A, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P2065
LENNEBERG E, 1975, FDN LANGUAGE DEV MUL, V2
LESSER R, 1976, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V14, P79, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(76)90009-9
LORCH MP, 1989, CHARACTERISTICS APHA
Lucchelli F, 2005, NEUROCASE, V11, P234, DOI 10.1080/13554790590944889
LUZZATTI C, IN PRESS CORTEX
Luzzi S, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P355, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00134-2
MARSHALL J, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P177, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249505
MARSHALL J, 1999, EVENT PERCEPTION TES
Menn L., 1995, NONFLUENT APHASIA MU
Mesulam MM, 2003, NEW ENGL J MED, V349, P1535, DOI 10.1056/NEJMra022435
MESULAM MM, 1982, ANN NEUROL, V11, P592, DOI 10.1002/ana.410110607
Miceli G., 1984, CORTEX, V20, P217
Nestor PJ, 2003, BRAIN, V126, P2406, DOI 10.1093/brain/awg240
PATTERSON K, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P1020
ROMANI C, 1994, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V9, P29, DOI 10.1080/01690969408402109
Ruigendijk E, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000310
SAFFRAN EM, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P420, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80081-2
Snowden J. S, 1989, BEHAV NEUROL, V2, P167
Snowden J. S., 1996, FRONTOTEMPORAL LOBAR
Tree JJ, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P643, DOI 10.1080/02643290442000220
Tree JJ, 2001, NEUROCASE, V7, P473, DOI 10.1093/neucas/7.6.473
Webster J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P47, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000481
Webster J, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P748, DOI 10.1080/02687030500166957
WEBSTER J, 1999, THESIS U NEWCASTLE U
NR 58
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 1035
EP 1058
DI 10.1080/02687030600739539
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800011
ER
PT J
AU Lorch, MP
AF Lorch, Marjorie Perlman
TI Phrenology and methodology, or "playing tennis with the net down"
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Background: In 1835, the British Association for the Advancement of Science exhumed the skull of Jonathan Swift, author of Gulliver's Travels, to submit it to phrenological scrutiny and ascertain the cause of his final illness. The behaviour Swift exhibited during the final 3 years of his life - including memory impairment, personality alterations, language disorder, and facial paralysis -was the cause of much speculation among his contemporaries.
Aims: This paper will review the debate between Phrenologists and Alienists, which was focused on the significance of the physical evidence presented by Swift's skull, and its implications for explaining behavioural patterns during his lifetime. His skull was the subject of research and rebuttal over a 12-year period, played out in the major medical publications of the day.
Main Contribution: The focus of the arguments hinged on two issues that resonate today in research on cortical localisation of function: the correlation between anatomy and physiology, and the implications of pathology for both.
Conclusion: Examination of the 19th-century debate over the evidence represented by Jonathan Swift's skull for brain/behaviour correlations illuminates methodological and theoretical assumptions.
C1 Univ London, Birkbeck Coll, Sch Languages Linguist & Culture, London WC1H 0PD, England.
RP Lorch, MP (reprint author), Univ London, Birkbeck Coll, Sch Languages Linguist & Culture, 43 Gordan Sq, London WC1H 0PD, England.
EM m.lorch@bbk.ac.uk
RI Lorch, Marjorie/F-8493-2010
OI Lorch, Marjorie/0000-0001-8505-8815
CR COMBE G, 1946, LANCET 1219, V19, P661
COMBE G, 2006, LANCET 0102, P8
COMBE G, 1947, LANCET 0821, P194
Cooter Roger, 1984, CULTURAL MEANING POP
Franz SI, 1912, SCIENCE, V35, P321, DOI 10.1126/science.35.896.321
Gall F.J., 1835, FUNCTIONS BRAIN EACH
Hagner M, 2003, SCI CONTEXT, V16, P195, DOI 10.1017/S0269889703000784
HOUSTON J, 1934, PHRENOLOGICAL J MISC, V9, P603
JOHNSON S, 1890, LIVES POETS, V3, P2
LORCH M, 2005, BRAIN MIND MED 18 CE
MACLEOD R, 1936, LONDON MED GAZE 0102, P543
Malcolm E., 1989, SWIFTS HOSP HIST ST
Marshall JC, 2003, NEUROIMAGE, V20, pS2, DOI 10.1016/j.neuroimage.2003.09.001
MARSHALL JC, 1984, COGNITION, V17, P209, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(84)90007-6
Marshall JC, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P297, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(97)82800-X
MARSHALL JC, 1982, BIOL STUDIES MENTAL
Marshall JC, 2001, NATURE, V414, P151, DOI 10.1038/35102640
MARSHALL JC, 1995, J NEUROLINGUIST, V8, P289
SKAE D, 1847, LANCET 0731, P123
SKAE D, 1847, PHRENOLOGICAL J JUL
Uttal WR, 2001, NEW PHRENOLOGY LIMIT
WILDE W, 1949, CLOSING YEARS DEAN S
WILDE W, 1847, DUBLIN J MED CHEM 2, V4, P1
WILDE W, 1847, DUBLIN J MED CHEM 1, V3, P384
WILLIAMS H, 1965, CORRESPONDANCE J SWI
Wilson AM, 2003, GEOFLUIDS, V3, P291
Young Robert, 1970, MIND BRAIN ADAPTATIO
1846, BRIT Q REV NOV, P397
1836, LONDON MED GAZE 0102, P530
1836, LANCET 1226, P502
1835, LONDON MED GAZE 1024, P115
1834, PHRENOLOGICAL J MISC, V9, P466
1836, LONDON MED GAZE 0521, P296
1834, PHRENOLOGICAL J MISC, V9, P558
1847, PHRENOLOGICAL J MAGA, V20, P441
NR 35
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 1059
EP 1071
DI 10.1080/02687030600741592
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800012
ER
PT J
AU Eling, P
AF Eling, Paul
TI The psycholinguistic approach to aphasia of Chajim Steinthal
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Background: Aphasiology developed in the 19th century as a primary area of research for the localisation of function in the brain. It was based on a rather primitive notion of language as a psychological function: input and output of words, in particular nouns. Aphasiology turned into neurolinguistics in the second half of the 20th century, when researchers realised that a linguistically based theory should form the basis of the analysis of language performance deficits.
Aims: The current paper argues that in a very early stage of aphasiology the claim was already formulated that a psycholinguistically oriented approach was necessary. This claim was made by Chajim Steinthal (1823 - 1893), but it was completely neglected.
Main Contribution: In this paper, I will present Steinthal's psycholinguistic views on aphasia, described in his textbook on psycholinguistics in 1871.
Conclusions: Steinthal formulated a psycholinguistically based theory of language disorders, in which a distinction was made between disorders at the word level and at the sentence level. Moreover, the nature of the deficit was a reduction of the capacity to activate representations and not a loss of word forms. Steinthal thus may be considered a founder not only of psycholinguistics, but also of neurolinguistics.
C1 Radboud Univ Nijmegen, NICI, NL-6500 HE Nijmegen, Netherlands.
RP Eling, P (reprint author), Radboud Univ Nijmegen, NICI, POB 9104, NL-6500 HE Nijmegen, Netherlands.
EM p.eling@nici.ru.nl
RI Eling, Paul/D-5786-2012
CR Boring E. G., 1957, HIST EXPT PSYCHOL
BUMANN W, 1965, SPRACHTHEORIE HEYMAN
CHRISTY TC, 1989, THEORIEN URSPRUNG SP
CHRISTY TC, 1987, PAPERS HIST LINGUIST
DEBLESER R, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V4, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252039
Eggert G. H., 1977, WERNICKES WORKS APHA
Eling P., 1994, READER HIST APHASIA
Eling P, 2005, J NEUROLINGUIST, V18, P301, DOI 10.1016/j.jneuroling.2004.11.009
Finkelnburg F. C., 1870, BERLINER KLINISCHE W, V7, p[449, 460]
JACYNA S, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P5
LEVELT W, 1992, INT ENCY LINGUISTICS, V3
Lichtheim L., 1885, BRAIN, V7, P433
MARSHALL J, 1994, READER HIST APHASIA
Steinthal H, 1871, ABRISS SPRACHWISSENS
UTTAL W, 2001, BRAIN IMAGING NEW PH
Wernicke C, 1974, APHASISCHE SYMPTOMEN
Wiedebach Hartwig, 2002, CHAJIM STEINTHAL SPR
Wundt Wilhelm, 1901, SPRACHGESCHICHTE SPR
ZURIF EB, 1972, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V10, P405, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(72)90003-6
NR 19
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 1072
EP 1084
DI 10.1080/02687030600741600
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800013
ER
PT J
AU Buckingham, HW
AF Buckingham, Hugh W.
TI Was Sigmund Freud the first neogrammarian neurolinguist?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APHASIA; BEHAVIOR; HISTORY; FREUD
AB Background: Over 30 years ago in a paper, John C. Marshall suggested that Sigmund Freud was the first neogrammarian neurolinguist. This claim has only rarely been assessed in any depth as to its plausibility. Nevertheless, the issues, ideas, and personalities that Marshall in his study considered were significant in 19th-century neuropsychology, were being debated at the time he wrote his paper, and are still among the major questions being asked today in the "mind/brain'' approach to modern neuroscience.
Aims: The primary objective of the present contribution to John's Festschrift is to revisit his evaluation of Freud as the first neogrammarian neurolinguist. The basic point Marshall was considering was that Freud not only seriously read, understood, and incorporated the current works of anatomy and classical aphasiology, but also brought to bear on his theories works from the newly formed fields of evolutionary psychology and historical linguistics. The present paper will show how Freud wove these areas together within a framework of "mind and brain'', opting to work at the abstract levels of language description that were more in line with the ways in which psychologists and linguists approached the study of human language.
Main Contribution: The paper demonstrates the value of Marshall's claim as a focal point for an historical analysis of the contributions from psychology and linguistics to the early scientific study of language and the brain, and traces the often unappreciated role of 19th-century Indo-European linguistics, especially in the case where those, such as Berthold Delbruck, dared to delve into the data of aphasia - largely the anomias.
Conclusions: The compatible descriptive levels of psychology and linguistics served to guide the early formulations of a more mentalistic and less physicalistic nature of the aphasias, an account that reflects the 19th-century coalescence of the fields of historical, psycho- and neuro-linguistics. Whether Berthold Delbruck, the neogrammarian, deserves to be given equal billing as the first neogrammarian neurolinguist is considered, and the conclusion is that, indeed, he does.
C1 Louisiana State Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Baton Rouge, LA 70803 USA.
RP Buckingham, HW (reprint author), Louisiana State Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Baton Rouge, LA 70803 USA.
EM hbuck@lsu.edu
CR ARENS K, 1984, STANFORD GERMAN STUD, V23
Bay E, 1969, Cortex, V5, P302
Bickerton Derek, 1990, LANGUAGE SPECIES
Buckingham HW, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P76, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2043
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1980, SPEC S 18 ANN M AC A
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1986, MODELS MODULES STUDI, P209
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1982, SPEECH LANGUAGE ADV, P313
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1982, SPEECH LANGUAGE HEAR, P323
Buckingham HW, 2002, CONNECTIONIST APPROACHES TO CLINICAL PROBLEMS IN SPEECH AND LAGUAGE, P265
CAMPBELL L, 2001, HDB LINGUISTICS, P81
Chomsky N., 1968, SOUND PATTERN ENGLIS
CUTLER A, 1978, VERSPRECHEN VERLESEN
DEBLESER R, IN PRESS CORTEX
DECOURTENAY JB, 1985, BAUDOUIN COURTENAY A
DELBRUCK B, 1986, JENAISCHE ZEITSCHRIF, V20, P91
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
DEVINSKY O, 1997, N GESCHWIND SELECTED
ELING P, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P1074
Eling P., 1994, READER HIST APHASIA
Engelhardt H T Jr, 1975, Bull Hist Med, V49, P137
Finger S, 2000, MINDS BRAIN HIST PIO
Finger Stanley, 1994, ORIGINS NEUROSCIENCE
Freud S, 1891, APHASIA CRITICAL STU
Greenberg V. D., 1997, FREUD HIS APHASIA BO
Hammarberg R., 1976, J PHONETICS, V4, P353
HOMMES OR, 1994, READER HIST APHASIA, P169
Jackson JH, 1879, BRAIN, V2, P323
JACYNA LS, 2000, LAST WORDS NARRATIVE
JAREMA G, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P495, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1057
LECOURS AR, 1987, MOTOR SENSORY PROCES, P1
Liepmann H., 1905, MUNCHEN MED WOCHEN, V49, P2322
LORCH MP, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P1061
MARSHALL JC, 1974, FREUD COLLECTION CRI, P349
MARX OM, 1967, AM J PSYCHIAT, V124, P815
Menand L, 1998, NEW YORK REV BO 1217, P81
MERINGER M, 1995, VERSPRECHEN VERLESEN
MOTLEY MT, 1976, COGNITION, V4, P177, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(76)90003-2
Nespoulous JL, 1998, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V19, P311, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400010080
Pick A., 1931, APHASIA
Robins R. H., 1967, SHORT HIST LINGUISTI
ROY EA, 1982, NORMALITY PATHOLOGY, P265
SCHACTER SC, 1997, BEHAV NEUROLOGY LEGA
Schiller Francis, 1979, P BROCA FOUNDER FREN
Sebeok T. A., 1966, PORTRAITS LINGUISTS
Sidtis DVL, 2004, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V39, P1, DOI 10.1080/13682820310001601080
Spencer H., 1855, PRINCIPLES PSYCHOL
Starr MA, 1889, BRAIN, V12, P82, DOI 10.1093/brain/12.1-2.82
Wallesch CW, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P389, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000599
WICKELGR.WA, 1969, PSYCHOL REV, V76, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0026823
NR 49
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 1085
EP 1104
DI 10.1080/02687030600741626
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800014
ER
PT J
AU Semenza, C
Grana, A
Girelli, L
AF Semenza, Carlo
Grana, Alessia
Girelli, Luisa
TI On knowing about nothing: The processing of zero in single- and
multi-digit multiplication
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ARITHMETIC FACTS; DYSCALCULIA; KNOWLEDGE; PATIENT
AB Background: Zero has a special role in calculation: indeed it is not obvious which representation may be invoked in multiplication or division by zero. In particular, zero as an operand, unlike any other operand, makes any quantity disappear.
Aims: The study is intended to shed light on the mechanisms mediating the manipulation of zero.
Methods & Procedures: Three neuropsychological patients, AF, FV, and FS, are described, whose specific pattern of preserved/ impaired performance with single-and multi-digit multiplication shows selective problems with the use of zero (Nx0 and 0xN).
Outcome & Results: AF's performance in single-and multi-digit multiplication showed a clear dissociation between spared fact-based problems and impaired 0 rule-based problems. FV was totally unable, in multi-digit multiplication, to apply adequately the 0 rule that he could master in simple calculation. Finally, FS showed, within the rule-based problems, a clear-cut dissociation between a preserved performance on Nx0 problems and an impaired performance on 0xN problems, a difficulty that almost disappeared in multi-digit multiplications.
Conclusions: Overall the reported dissociations indicate that a full grasp of the concept of zero may not be used in routine calculation, and that processing of zero rather appears to rely on a collection of independent, shallow representations.
C1 Univ Trieste, Dipartimento Psicol, I-34134 Trieste, Italy.
Ist Med Fis & Riabilitaz, Udine, Italy.
Univ Milan Bicocca, Milan, Italy.
RP Semenza, C (reprint author), Univ Trieste, Dipartimento Psicol, Via S Anastasio 12, I-34134 Trieste, Italy.
EM semenza@univ.trieste.it
CR Butterworth B, 1999, MATH BRAIN
Dehaene S, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70002-9
Delazer M, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P697, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70727-5
GIRELLI L, 2006, UNPUB MISCONCEPTIONS
Girelli L, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P547
HITTMAIRDELAZER M, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P139
HITTMAIRDELAZER M, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P715, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.4.715
Kline M., 1972, MATH THOUGHT ANCIENT, VI
LUZZATI C, 1991, AACHENER APHASIA TES
MCCLOSKEY M, 1992, COGNITION, V44, P107, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90052-J
MCCLOSKEY M, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V17, P154, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90074-I
MICELI G, 1999, HDB CLIN EXPT NEUROP
Pesenti M, 2000, CORTEX, V36, P445, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70853-0
Resnick L. B., 1982, ADDITION SUBTRACTION, P136
SOKOL SM, 1991, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V17, P355, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.17.3.355
WELLMAN HM, 1986, BRIT J DEV PSYCHOL, V4, P31
Wynn K, 1998, TRENDS COGN SCI, V2, P296
NR 17
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 1105
EP 1111
DI 10.1080/02687030600741659
PG 7
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800015
ER
PT J
AU Bub, DN
Masson, MEJ
AF Bub, Daniel N.
Masson, Michael E. J.
TI Gestural knowledge evoked by objects as part of conceptual
representations
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONFIDENCE-INTERVALS; CATEGORIZATION; LANGUAGE; WORDS
AB Background: Theories of embodied knowledge argue that the representation and recruitment of motor processes may be important for deriving the meaning of many linguistic and perceptual elements.
Aims: We examined the conditions under which gestural knowledge associated with manipulable objects is evoked.
Methods & Procedures: A priming paradigm was used in which an object was presented in advance of a photograph of a hand gesture that participants were to mimic. On related trials, the target gesture was the same as the gesture typically used to interact with the object prime. On unrelated trials, the target gesture was not related to the object. In another set of experiments, a Stroop- like paradigm was used in which participants learned to produce manual responses to colour cues. After training, coloured photographs of manipulable objects were presented. The colour- cued gesture was either one typically used with the object or was unrelated to it.
Outcomes & Results: In the priming experiments, response latencies were shorter in the related condition, but only when participants also made an identification response to the object prime. In the Stroop experiments, interference effects indicated that gestures to colour were affected by gestural knowledge associated with the object.
Conclusions: These results indicate that conceptual representations of manipulable objects include specific forms of gestural knowledge that are automatically evoked when observers attend to an object.
C1 Univ Victoria, Dept Psychol, Victoria, BC V8W 3P5, Canada.
RP Bub, DN (reprint author), Univ Victoria, Dept Psychol, POB 3050 STN CSC, Victoria, BC V8W 3P5, Canada.
EM dbub@uvic.ca
CR Allport DA, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES
Barsalou LW, 2003, TRENDS COGN SCI, V7, P84, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(02)00029-3
Bub DN, 2003, PSYCHOL SCI, V14, P467, DOI 10.1111/1467-9280.02455
BUB DN, 2006, UNPUB EVOCATION FUNC
Chao LL, 2000, NEUROIMAGE, V12, P478, DOI 10.1006/nimg.2000.0635
Creem-Regehr SH, 2005, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V22, P457, DOI 10.1016/j.cogbrainres.2004.10.006
Devlin JT, 2002, NEUROIMAGE, V15, P675, DOI 10.1006/nimg.2001.1002
Fagg AH, 1998, NEURAL NETWORKS, V11, P1277, DOI 10.1016/S0893-6080(98)00047-1
Gallese V, 2005, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V22, P455, DOI 10.1080/02643290442000310
Gerlach C, 2002, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V14, P1230, DOI 10.1162/089892902760807221
Glenberg AM, 2002, PSYCHON B REV, V9, P558, DOI 10.3758/BF03196313
Glover S, 2004, EXP BRAIN RES, V154, P103, DOI 10.1007/s00221-003-1659-2
JEANNEROD M, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P369, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90084-1
Johnson SH, 2003, PROG BRAIN RES, V142, P127
LOFTUS GR, 1994, PSYCHON B REV, V1, P476, DOI 10.3758/BF03210951
Masson MEJ, 2003, CAN J EXP PSYCHOL, V57, P203, DOI 10.1037/h0087426
MYUNG JY, IN PRESS COGNITION
Sakata H, 1997, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V20, P350, DOI 10.1016/S0166-2236(97)01067-9
Stroop JR, 1935, J EXP PSYCHOL, V18, P643, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.121.1.15
Tucker M, 2004, ACTA PSYCHOL, V116, P185, DOI 10.1016/j.actpsy.2004.01.004
Tucker M, 2001, VIS COGN, V8, P769
Tucker M, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V24, P830, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.24.3.830
Zwaan RA, 2006, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V135, P1, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.135.1.1
NR 23
TC 19
Z9 21
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 9-11
BP 1112
EP 1124
DI 10.1080/02687030600741667
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MP
UT WOS:000240033800016
ER
PT J
AU Watts, AJ
Douglas, JM
AF Watts, Amy J.
Douglas, Jacinta M.
TI Interpreting facial expression and communication competence following
severe traumatic brain injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLOSED HEAD-INJURY; CLINICAL TOOL; DISCOURSE; RECOGNITION; PERCEPTION;
ABILITY; ADULTS; SKILLS
AB Background: Facial expression is generally understood as playing a crucial role in communication, conveying both information and emotion. This study explored the nexus between the ability to interpret facial expression and communication competence for individuals with traumatic brain injury (TBI).
Aims: Three research questions were addressed. The first two questions involved a comparison of TBI and control participants on perceived communication competence, and ability to interpret facial expression. The third research question addressed whether a relationship exists between ability to interpret facial expression and perceived communication competence, in individuals with TBI. Methods &
Procedures: Participants included 12 individuals with severe TBI ( PTA. 7 days), and a group of matched controls. A measure of perceived communication competence ( the La Trobe Communication Questionnaire, LCQ) and a measure related to the interpretation of facial expression ( the Emotion Evaluation Test) were administered to TBI and control participants All participants nominated a ''close-other'' who completed the close-other form of the LCQ.
Outcomes & Results: Results revealed that TBI participants were perceived to have significantly more difficulties with communication than control participants ( p = .002). Similarly, results also revealed that TBI participants had significantly more difficulty interpreting facial expression than control participants (p < .001). Pearson's Correlation Coefficient ( r) calculations demonstrated a significant relationship between ability to interpret facial expression and close-other perception of communication competence ( r = 5.532).
Conclusions: Results are consistent with previous research, and suggest that ability to interpret facial expression is closely related to perceived communication competence, in individuals with TBI. This understanding has implications for rehabilitation and may inform the development of treatment strategies specifically targeting impairment in the ability to read facial expression.
C1 La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3083, Australia.
RP Douglas, JM (reprint author), La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3083, Australia.
EM J.Douglas@latrobe.edu.au
RI Douglas, Jacinta/C-2380-2009
CR Bracy C., 2005, BRAIN IMPAIR, V6, P1, DOI 10.1375/brim.6.1.1.65476
Braun C M, 1989, Brain Inj, V3, P5, DOI 10.3109/02699058909008068
COHEN J, 1992, PSYCHOL BULL, V112, P155, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.112.1.155
Damico J. S., 1985, COMMUNICATION SKILLS, P165
Douglas J., 2004, EVIDENCE BASED PRACT
Douglas JM, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P251
FLANAGAN S, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P321, DOI 10.3109/02699059509005773
FRATTALI CM, 1995, ASHA FUNCTIONAL ASSE
Galski T, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P769, DOI 10.1080/026990598122160
Grice H. P., 1975, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, P41, DOI DOI 10.1017/S0022226700005296
JACKSON HF, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P293
HARTLEY L L, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P267, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008097
Karrow C.M., 2003, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V24, P69
LILES BZ, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P356
McDonald S, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P339, DOI 10.1080/026870300401397
MCDONALD S, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P28, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1003
McDonald S., 2005, BRAIN IMPAIR, V6, P56, DOI 10.1375/brim.6.1.56.65481
MCDONALD S, 2002, TVTC AWARENESS SOCIA
McDonald S, 2003, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V18, P219, DOI 10.1097/00001199-200305000-00001
MCDONALD S, 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P19
McNeill-Brown D., 1997, INT PERSPECTIVES TRA, P247
MENTIS M, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P88
Milders M, 2003, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V25, P157, DOI 10.1076/jcen.25.2.157.13642
Murdoch B. E., 2001, TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJU
NOWICKI S, 1993, J SOC PSYCHOL, V133, P749
PRIGATANO GP, 1982, J PERCEPTUAL MOTOR S, V54, P859
RUSSELL WR, 1961, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V5, P4
SHORES A, 1986, MED J AUSTRALIA, V144, P569
Snow P, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P409
SNOW P, 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P19
Snow P, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P911, DOI 10.1080/026990598121981
Spell LA, 2000, J NONVERBAL BEHAV, V24, P285, DOI 10.1023/A:1006675230193
Togher L, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P169, DOI 10.1080/026990597123629
Ylvisaker M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P745
NR 34
TC 26
Z9 27
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 8
BP 707
EP 722
DI 10.1080/02687030500489953
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MM
UT WOS:000240033500001
ER
PT J
AU Varlokosta, S
Valeonti, N
Kakavoulia, M
Lazaridou, M
Economou, A
Protopapas, A
AF Varlokosta, Spyridoula
Valeonti, Natalia
Kakavoulia, Maria
Lazaridou, Mirto
Economou, Alexandra
Protopapas, Athanassios
TI The breakdown of functional categories in Greek aphasia: Evidence from
agreement, tense, and aspect
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT International Conference on Science of Aphasia V
CY SEP 16-21, 2004
CL Potsdam, GERMANY
ID BROCAS APHASIA; LANGUAGE; AGRAMMATISM; MORPHOLOGY; DEFICITS; GRAMMAR;
SYNTAX; MODEL
AB Background: Verbal inflectional errors are among the most prominent characteristics of aphasic nonfluent speech. Several studies have shown that such impairment is selective: subject-verb agreement is relatively intact while tense is severely impaired. A number of researchers view the deficit as structural and attribute errors to a breakdown of functional categories and their projections. Agrammatic individuals are thought to produce trees that are intact up to the Tense node and ''pruned'' from this node up. Aims: The present study investigates ( a) the relative sensitivity of functional categories related to verbal inflection in Greek aphasia and the systematicity thereof; and ( b) the relation between patterns of impairment in production and grammaticality judgements.
Method & Procedures: We present results from a sentence completion and a grammaticality judgement task with seven Greek- speaking aphasic individuals and seven control participants matched for age and education. Materials were constructed to assess three functional categories: subject - verb agreement, tense, and aspect. Eight verbs were used, balancing estimated familiarity and regularity of aspectual conjugation.
Outcomes & Results: A great variability was observed among participants in overall performance but the pattern of performance was quite systematic. The results indicated that inflectional morphemes are not all impaired to the same degree in Greek aphasia. In both tasks, as a group, patients made more errors in aspect than in agreement. The group differences between tense and the other two conditions did not reach statistical significance. Moreover, a comparison of individual aphasic performance in the three functional categories indicated that in every case in which statistically significant differences were observed among the three functional categories, agreement was found to be less impaired than tense, aspect, or both.
Conclusions: These findings do not support a global impairment of inflectional morphemes in aphasia but support a selective one and, in particular, a dissociation between agreement, on the one hand, and tense and/or aspect, on the other hand. Moreover, our findings do not support a hierarchical account along the lines of Friedmann and Grodzinsky ( 1997) but are compatible with Chomsky's ( 2000) Minimalist Program and with Wenzlaff and Clahsen's ( 2004) tense under-specification theory.
C1 Univ Aegean, Dept Mediterranean Studies, Rhodes 85100, Greece.
Pante Univ, Athens, Greece.
Univ Athens, GR-10679 Athens, Greece.
Inst Language & Speech Proc, Athens, Greece.
RP Varlokosta, S (reprint author), Univ Aegean, Dept Mediterranean Studies, Rhodes 85100, Greece.
EM varlokosta@rhodes.aegean.gr
RI Protopapas, Athanassios/A-9571-2009; Protopapas, Athanassios/E-5626-2010
OI Protopapas, Athanassios/0000-0002-7285-8845
CR Bates E, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P507
Bates E, 2001, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V52, P369, DOI 10.1146/annurev.psych.52.1.369
BATES E, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P123, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90149-U
Berndt RS, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P242, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2130
BERNDT RS, 1980, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V1, P225, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400000552
BURCHERT F, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V94, P88
Caplan D., 1985, AGRAMMATISM
Chomsky N., 2000, STEP STEP ESSAYS MIN, P89
Crain S, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P294, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2403
DEBLESER R, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P21, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1002
Dick F, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P57
Dick F, 2001, PSYCHOL REV, V108, P759, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.108.4.759
Dronkers N. F., 1992, J CLIN EXPT NEUROPSY, V14, P52
Faroqi-Shah Y, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P484, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2003.12.006
FRIEDMANN N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P71
GERNSBACHER MA, 1984, J EXPT PSYCHOL GEN, V113, P156
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GOODGLASS H, 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS
GRODZINSKY Y, 1984, COGNITION, V16, P99, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(84)90001-5
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
HAGIWARA H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1041
Hatzigeorgiou N., 2000, P 2 INT C LANG RES E, V3, P1737
HOFSTEDE BTM, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P278, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1017
HOHLE B, 1995, APHASIE SPRACHPRODUK
Kolk HHJ, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P39, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00412392
LEONARD LB, 1998, CHILDREN SPECIFIC LA
Mackridge Peter, 1997, GREEK COMPREHENSIVE
MOHR JP, 1978, NEUROLOGY, V28, P311
MOSER A, 1994, PION KE APOPSIS RIMA
Philippaki-Warburton I, 1998, LINGUIST REV, V15, P159, DOI 10.1515/tlir.1998.15.2-3.159
Philippaki-Warburton I., 1984, STUDIES GREEK LINGUI, V5, P149
Philippaki-Warburton Irene, 1973, LINGUA, V32, P193
Philippaki-Warburton Irene, 1990, STUDIES GREEK LINGUI, V11, P119
PLAKOUDA A, 2001, THESIS U ATHENS GREE
RALLI A, 2004, LINGUE LINGUAGGIO, V2, P269
RALLI A, 1988, THESIS U MONTREAL CA
RIVERO ML, 1995, J LINGUIST, V31, P301, DOI 10.1017/S0022226700015620
Stavrakaki S, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V86, P129, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00541-2
Tsapkini K, 2001, J NEUROLINGUIST, V14, P281, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00018-5
Tsapkini K, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V81, P103, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2510
Tsimpli Ianthi Maria, 1990, UCL WORKING PAPERS L, V2, P226
Wechsler DS, 1997, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
Wenzlaff M, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P57, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00298-0
NR 43
TC 25
Z9 25
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 8
BP 723
EP 743
DI 10.1080/0267030500513703
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MM
UT WOS:000240033500002
ER
PT J
AU Harley, TA
O'Mara, DA
AF Harley, Trevor A.
O'Mara, David A.
TI Hyphenation can improve reading in acquired phonological dyslexia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID VISUAL WORD RECOGNITION; ALEXIA; ALOUD; MODEL; ORGANIZATION;
IMPAIRMENTS; MECHANISMS
AB Background: We describe JD, a person with severe phonological dyslexia. JD is good at reading words yet is extremely poor at reading nonwords. She shows no effect of word regularity on her reading performance. However, she has only a very mild general phonological deficit. Although it is known that teaching grapheme - phoneme correspondence rules and learning bigraph syllables can improve dyslexic reading, we investigate the possibility that segmenting the input string using hyphens can also improve reading.
Aims: We investigate the locus of JD's reading deficit and explore means of improving her reading. We examine the extent to which hyphenation can improve nonword reading.
Methods & Procedures: We use a battery of tasks in a single-case study. We test oral reading, writing and spelling ability, and lexical and semantic knowledge. We assess phonological processing using tests of repetition and phonological awareness. We focus on blending and segmentation, and test whether hyphenating the letter string can improve reading.
Outcomes & Results: JD is very good at reading words ( overall about 90%), but very poor at reading nonwords ( overall about 10%). She makes no semantic errors and shows little effect of word regularity. JD has only a mild concomitant phonological deficit. She also has a very good digit span ( 8). JD can read affixes in isolation, and can also read nonwords made up of inappropriately affixed morphemes ( e. g., ''dismove'') if a hyphen is inserted at the affixation point ( e. g., ''dis-move''). We found that hyphenation improves nonword reading in general, but particularly if it is the grapheme units that are separated by hyphens. \
Conclusions: We discuss the possibility that JD's phonological dyslexia arises from impaired graphemic parsing, and that affixes have inherent meaning for her. Hyphenation may be a therapeutic tool worthy of wider consideration for improving reading performance in people with dyslexia.
C1 Univ Dundee, Dept Psychol, Dundee DD1 4HN, Scotland.
RP Harley, TA (reprint author), Univ Dundee, Dept Psychol, Dundee DD1 4HN, Scotland.
EM t.a.harley@dundee.ac.uk
CR BEAUVOIS MF, 1979, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V42, P1115, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.42.12.1115
Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P763, DOI 10.1080/026432996381809
BUB D, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
BYRNE R, 1998, FDN LIT CHILDS ACQUI
Caccappolo-van Vliet E, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P820, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000465
Caccappolo-van Vliet E, 2004, PSYCHOL SCI, V15, P583
CARAMAZZA A, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P81, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252862
Castles A, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1041, DOI 10.1080/026432996381773
Coltheart M, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P749
Coltheart M, 2001, PSYCHOL REV, V108, P204, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.108.1.204
Coltheart M., 1978, STRATEGIES INFORMATI, P151
Coltheart M., 1985, ATTENTION PERFORM, VXI, P3
Cuetos F, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1, DOI 10.1080/026432996382042
Daniel Michael S., 1992, Brain Injury, V6, P529, DOI 10.3109/02699059209008150
DEROUESNE J, 1979, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V42, P1125, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.42.12.1125
Derouesne J., 1985, SURFACE DYSLEXIA, P399
Druks J, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P207, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000141
Farah MJ, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P849, DOI 10.1080/026432996381836
Friedman R., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P27
FRIEDMAN RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V26, P355
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P116
FRIEDMAN RB, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P397
FUNNELL E, 1983, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V74, P159
FUNNELL E, 1987, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V39, P497
Glosser G, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P32, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1924
GLUSHKO RJ, 1979, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V5, P674, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.5.4.674
GOODALL WC, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P113, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251993
Harley T. A., 2001, PSYCHOL LANGUAGE
Harm MW, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P71, DOI 10.1080/02643290125986
Howard D, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P887, DOI 10.1080/026432996381854
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Lesch MF, 1998, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V51, P905
Lott SN, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P188, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2054
MARTIN RC, 1982, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V34, P395
MORTON J, 1987, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P91
Newcombe F., 1985, SURFACE DYSLEXIA, P35
NORRIS D, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V20, P1212, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.20.6.1212
Patterson K, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P803, DOI 10.1080/026432996381818
Patterson K., 1985, SURFACE DYSLEXIA, P335
Patterson K, 2000, CASE STUDIES NEUROPS, P57
Plaut DC, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P56, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.1.56
SEIDENBERG MS, 1984, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V23, P383, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(84)90270-6
SEIDENBERG MS, 1989, PSYCHOL REV, V96, P523, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.96.4.523
SHALLICE T, 1983, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V35, P111
SHALLICE T, 1987, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P119
Small SL, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P298, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1951
SPOEHR KT, 1973, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V5, P71, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(73)90026-1
Treiman R., 1987, ATTENTION PERFORMANC
WECHSLER D, 1981, WAIS R
NR 49
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 8
BP 744
EP 761
DI 10.1080/02687030600591658
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MM
UT WOS:000240033500003
ER
PT J
AU Prins, R
Bastiaanse, R
AF Prins, Ronald
Bastiaanse, Roelien
TI The early history of aphasiology: From the Egyptian surgeons (c.1700 BC)
to Broca (1861)
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE; BRAIN
AB Background: According to many aphasiologists the scientific study of aphasia dates back to the second half of the 19th century when Broca and Wernicke described the two classical forms of aphasia that now bear their names. About 100 years later, Benton and Joynt presented a historical overview of the literature on aphasia from the Hippocratic writings ( c. 400 BC) to 1800. Since this seminal review ( Benton & Joynt, 1960) there has been a growing interest in the history of aphasiology, resulting in many papers (cf. the Journal of the History of the Neurosciences) and even books ( e. g., Eling, 1994; Finger, 2000; Jacyna, 2000) about hitherto unknown writings about aphasia.
Aims: The aim of this paper is to present a new, updated, and extensive review of the early history of aphasiology, starting with the earliest observation of ''speechlessness'' in an Egyptian papyrus ( c. 1700 BC) and ending with Broca's discovery of the ''speech centre'' in 1861.
Main Contribution: By presenting and discussing passages taken from major contributions to aphasiology in the past 3500 years, this literature survey offers a review of the clinical observations and theoretical analyses of aphasic phenomena preceding the pioneering article by Broca in 1861.
Conclusions: Although many forms and symptoms of aphasia were described and a few theoretical explanations of its nature had been advanced before 1800, significant hypotheses about the localisation of aphasia were not formulated until the period 1800-1860. Based on his ( otherwise misguided) ''phrenological'' theory, Gall ( in Gall & Stuart, 1806) was the first to localise language in the frontal cortex. This hypothesis was then tested and supported by neuropathological data collected by Bouillaud ( 1825) who not only localised language in the frontal lobes, but also made the fundamental distinction between ''a general faculty of language'' and ''the faculty of articulated speech'', thus preparing the ground for Broca's famous discovery in 1861.
C1 Univ Amsterdam, Dept Linguist, NL-1012 VT Amsterdam, Netherlands.
Univ Groningen, NL-9700 AB Groningen, Netherlands.
RP Prins, R (reprint author), Univ Amsterdam, Dept Linguist, Spuistr 210, NL-1012 VT Amsterdam, Netherlands.
EM R.S.Prins@uva.nl
CR ACKERKNECHT EH, 1956, F J GALL INVENTOR PH
ANDRAL G, 1834, CLIN MED
BENTON AL, 1960, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V3, P205
BENTON AL, 1964, CORTEX, V1, P314
BENTON A L, 1965, Med Hist, V9, P54
BOUILLARD JB, 1848, B ACAD ROYALE MED, P699
BOUILLAUD MJ, 1825, ARCH GEN MED, V3, P24
Breasted J.H., 1930, E SMITH SURG PAPYRUS
Broca P., 1861, B SOC ANAT PARIS, V36, P330
Broca Paul, 1865, B SOC ANTHROPOL PAR, V6, P337
BROWN JW, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P475, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90113-S
CAPLAN D, 1987, NEUROLINGUISTIC LING
CREUTZ W, 1934, NEUROLOGIE 1 7 JAHRL
DAX M, 1865, GAZETTE HEBDOMADAIRE, V33, P227
Eling P., 1994, READER HIST APHASIA
Finger S, 1996, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V53, P806
Finger S, 2000, MINDS BRAIN HIST PIO
Flourens P., 1842, EXAMEN PHRENOLOGIE
GALL FJ, 1806, HERINNERINGEN LESSEN
Gall F.J., 1822, FONCTIONS CERVEAU CE
GALL FJ, 1805, VOORLEZINGEN GEHOUDE
Galli P, 2005, EWEEK, V22, P20
Geschwind N., 1974, SELECTED PAPERS LANG
GESCHWIN.N, 1972, SCI AM, V226, P76
GREENBLATT SH, 1995, NEUROSURGERY, V37, P790
HECAEN H, 1969, NAISSANCE NEUROPSYCH
HOOD A, 1824, PHRENOLOGICAL J MISC, V2, P82
Jacyna LS, 2000, LOST WORDS NARRATIVE
JOYNT RJ, 1964, NEUROLOGY, V14, P851
Kaitaro T, 2001, J Hist Neurosci, V10, P262, DOI 10.1076/jhin.10.3.262.9085
Karenberg A, 1998, J Hist Neurosci, V7, P174, DOI 10.1076/jhin.7.3.174.1858
LALLEMAND CF, 1823, RECHERCHES ANATOMO P, V1
LALLEMAND CF, 1820, RECHERCHES ANATOMO P, V2
LICHT S, 1975, STROKE ITS REHABILIT
Lieberman P., 1998, EVE SPOKE HUMAN LANG
Lordat J., 1843, J SOC MED PRATIQUE M, V7, P333
LORDAT J, 1843, J SOC MED PRATIQUE M, V8, P1
Lordat J., 1843, J SOC MED PRATIQUE M, V7, P417
Luzzatti C, 2001, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V58, P1157, DOI 10.1001/archneur.58.7.1157
Luzzatti Claudio, 2002, J Hist Neurosci, V11, P29, DOI 10.1076/jhin.11.1.29.9094
Luzzatti C, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P157, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00009-7
Marce LV, 1856, COMPTE RENDU SOC BIO, V3, P93
MEUNIER L, 1924, HIST MED DEPUIS ORIG
O'Neill Ynez Viole, 1980, SPEECH SPEECH DISORD
OPPENHEIM AL, 1956, TAPS NS, V46, P230
OSBORNE J, 1833, DUBLIN J MED CHEM SC, V4, P157
REISCH G, 1517, MARGARITA PHILOS EIM
RIESE W, 1977, SELECTED PAPERS HIST
Rocca J, 1997, J Hist Neurosci, V6, P227
ROSTAN LL, 1820, RECHERCHES MALADIE E
SIGNORET JL, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V22, P303, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90096-8
Spurzheim J.C., 1815, PHYSIOGNOMICAL SYSTE
STOOKEY B, 1963, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V84, P1024
TENCATE PHJ, 1966, MURSILIS, V2
TROUSSEAU A, 1864, CLIN MED HOTEL DIEU, P669
van Wyhe John, 2002, HIST PHRENOLOGY WEB
Wernicke C., 1874, APHASISCHE SYMTOMENC
WHITAKER HA, 1998, HDB NEUROLINGUISTICS, P27, DOI 10.1016/B978-012666055-5/50005-8
WILKINS RH, 1964, J NEUROSURG, V3, P240
NR 59
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 8
BP 762
EP 791
DI 10.1080/02687030500399293
PG 30
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MM
UT WOS:000240033500004
ER
PT J
AU Buckingham, H
AF Buckingham, Hugh
TI A pre-history of the problem of Broca's aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CEREBRAL-DOMINANCE; LANGUAGE; HISTORY; DAX,GUSTAVE; SPEECH; LOBE
AB Twenty-five years ago, I wrote this essay for presentation at the May 1981 CAC meeting in Kerrville, TX. There are only a few sections cordoned off by separating lines; most new material with post-1981 citations has been integrated in the text for smoother transitioning. There are small added sections on Descartes, Bouillaud, and on induction in medicine. I have several new ''B'' headings, which improve the organisation of the essay: The Bell-Magendie principle; Muscle sense; Phrenology; The law of symmetry; Memory for language and speech; The French physicians; and The inductive method of clinico-pathological reasoning in medicine and the cerebral localisation of function. The bibliography is accordingly amplified.
C1 Louisiana State Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Baton Rouge, LA 70803 USA.
RP Buckingham, H (reprint author), Louisiana State Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Baton Rouge, LA 70803 USA.
EM hbuck@lsu.edu
CR ACKERKNECHT EH, 1958, HIST PHILOS BRAIN IT
Bastian HC, 1869, BRIT FOREIGN MED CHI, V43, p[209, 470]
Bastian HC, 1869, BRIT FOREIGN MED CHI, V43, p[209, 470]
BENTON A L, 1963, J Hist Med Allied Sci, V18, P381
Benton AL, 2000, EXPLORING HIST NEURO
BENTON AL, 1960, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V3, P205
BENTON AL, 1965, CORTEX, V1, P314
BENTON A L, 1965, Med Hist, V9, P54
BICHAT MFX, 1805, RECHERCHES PHYSIOLOG
Bouillaud J. B., 1825, ARCH GEN MED, V8, P25
Buckingham H W, 1997, J Hist Neurosci, V6, P21
Buckingham HW, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P76, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2043
BYNUM WF, 1975, PHILOS MED, V2
Carmichael L, 1926, PSYCHOL REV, V33, P188, DOI 10.1037/h0072659
CHRISTMAN SS, 2006, ENCY LANGUAGE LINGUI, V2
Clarke E, 1972, ILLUSTRATED HIST BRA
Clarke E, 1968, HUMAN BRAIN SPINAL C
CRITCHLEY M, 1964, Scott Med J, V9, P231
Cubelli R, 1994, J Hist Neurosci, V3, P215
DINGWALL WO, 1979, STUIDES NEUROLINGUIS, V4
DINGWALL WO, 1975, GEORGETOWN U ROUNDTA
Figlio K M, 1975, Hist Sci, V13, P177
FINGER S, 1994, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V51, P498
Finger S, 1996, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V53, P806
Finger S, 2000, MINDS BRAIN HIST PIO
Finger S, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P16, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2040
Finger S, 1995, J Hist Neurosci, V4, P166
Fritsch G., 1870, SOME PAPERS CEREBRAL
Gall F.J., 1835, FUNCTIONS BRAIN EACH
HARTLEY D, 1749, OBESERVATIONS MAN
HARTLEY D, 1746, VARIOUS CONJECTURES
Haymaker W, 1970, FOUNDERS NEUROLOGY
Head H., 1926, APHASIA KINDRED DISO
Hecaen H., 1978, HUMAN NEUROPSYCHOLOG
Jacyna LS, 2000, LOST WORDS NARRATIVE
Jørgensen C Barker, 2003, J Hist Neurosci, V12, P229, DOI 10.1076/jhin.12.3.229.16676
JOYNT RJ, 1964, CORTEX, V1, P206
KEARNS KP, 2005, APHASIA RELATED LANG
Lieberman Phillip, 1975, ORIGINS LANGUAGE INT
Luzzatti C, 2001, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V58, P1157, DOI 10.1001/archneur.58.7.1157
MESULAM MM, 1990, ANN NEUROL, V28, P597, DOI 10.1002/ana.410280502
Penfield W, 1959, SPEECH BRAIN MECH
RIESE WALTHER, 1950, JOUR HISTORY MED AND ALLIED SCI, V5, P50
RIESE W, 1977, SELECTED PAPERS HIST
Roe D, 1996, J Hist Neurosci, V5, P228
Russell B., 1912, PROBLEM PHILOS
Schiller J., 1968, HIST SCI, V7, P64
SHCILLER F, 1992, P BROCA FOUNDER FREN
STARR MA, 1889, T INIT MED C PHYS SU, V1, P879
STOOKEY B, 1963, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V184, P1024
TEMKIN O, 1953, SCI MED HIST, V2
von Bonin G., 1960, SOME PAPERS CEREBRAL
WALKER AE, 1957, J NEUROPHYSIOL, V20, P435
Wallace W, 2003, BRAIN COGNITION, V51, P66, DOI 10.1016/S0278-2626(02)00513-4
Willis T, 1971, ANATOMY BRAIN
Young R. M., 1990, MIND BRAIN ADAPTATIO
Zimmer C, 2004, SOUL MADE FLESH DISC
NR 57
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 8
BP 792
EP 810
DI 10.1080/02687030500334118
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 077MM
UT WOS:000240033500005
ER
PT J
AU Brown, K
McGahan, L
Alkhaledi, M
Seah, D
Howe, T
Worrall, L
AF Brown, K
McGahan, L
Alkhaledi, M
Seah, D
Howe, T
Worrall, L
TI Environmental factors that influence the community participation of
adults with aphasia: The perspective of service industry workers
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID INTERNATIONAL SURVEY; TRAINING VOLUNTEERS; AWARENESS; BARRIERS; PEOPLE;
STROKE; FOCUS; LIFE
AB Background: The loss of language and the inability to communicate effectively as a result of aphasia often affects community participation. Within the World Health Organisation International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health, disability is recognised as a dynamic interaction between the individual's health condition, such as aphasia, and his or her personal and environmental factors. There has been little research identifying the environmental facilitators and barriers to participation for people with aphasia in the community, and no research focusing on the perspective of service industry workers.
Aims: This study aimed to identify barriers and facilitators to community participation for adults with aphasia from the perspective of service industry workers.
Methods & Procedures: Eight focus groups were conducted with 24 service industry employees. Transcripts of the focus group discussions were analysed using qualitative content analysis procedures, and barriers to and facilitators for participation of people with aphasia were identified.
Outcomes & Results: Results revealed that the participation of people with aphasia in the community can be affected by many environmental factors within three broad categories: (1) people environmental factors, (2) physical environmental factors, and (3) business or organisational environmental factors.
Conclusions: Service industry employees were able to identify a range of factors that would act as barriers and facilitators for people with aphasia. Some of the more significant findings include the lack of other people's awareness about aphasia, the willingness of service industry workers at the individual level to accommodate people with aphasia, and the difficulty in making the necessary system, policy, and procedural changes at the organisational level. Speech pathologists are encouraged to assist service industry providers to be more aphasia-friendly through education and training, in addition to assisting people with aphasia to become self-advocates.
C1 Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Ctr, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Worrall, L (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Ctr, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
EM l.worrall@uq.edu.au
RI Hudson, Kyla/D-2575-2010; Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Hudson, Kyla/0000-0002-0328-3873; Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR *AUSTR BUR STAT, 2004, YB AUSTR SERV IND
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P49
Code C, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P379, DOI 10.1080/09602010244000255
Code C, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P1
Cruice M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P333, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000707
Davidson B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P243, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000653
EARLE D, 2002, U QUEENSLAND CLIN AU
Elman RJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P455
Garcia LJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P269
Graneheim UH, 2004, NURS EDUC TODAY, V24, P105, DOI 10.1016/j.nedt.2003.10.001
Gray DB, 2003, J ARCHIT PLAN RES, V20, P29
Hickey EM, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P625, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000093
HOWE T, 2004, M INT ASS LOG PHON B
Howe TJ, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1015, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000499
Kagan A, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00062-X
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kirk J., 1986, SAGE U PAPER SERIES, V01
KITZINGER J, 1995, BRIT MED J, V311, P299
Krueger R. A., 2000, FOCUS GROUP PRACTICA
Law M, 1999, J OCCUPATIONAL SCI, V6, P102
Meyers AR, 2002, SOC SCI MED, V55, P1435, DOI 10.1016/S0277-9536(01)00269-6
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
Parr S., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P55
Parr S, 2001, FOLIA PHONIATR LOGO, V53, P266, DOI 10.1159/000052681
Patton M. Q, 2002, QUALITATIVE RES EVAL
POUND C, 2001, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Rochette A, 2001, DISABIL REHABIL, V23, P559
Simmons-Mackie N, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P837, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000185
Simmons-Mackie N, 2005, J COMMUN DISORD, V38, P1, DOI 10.1016/j.jcomdis.2004.03.007
Simmons-Mackie NN, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P583, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000408
Stewart David W, 1990, FOCUS GROUPS THEORY
THREATS T, 2004, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V6, P3
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
Worrall L., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P3
NR 34
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 7
BP 595
EP 615
DI 10.1080/02687030600626256
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 052AJ
UT WOS:000238202500001
ER
PT J
AU Turner, S
Whitworth, A
AF Turner, S
Whitworth, A
TI Clinicians' perceptions of candidacy for conversation partner training
in aphasia: How do we select candidates for therapy and do we get it
right?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COMMUNICATION; STRATEGIES; ADULTS; VOLUNTEERS; DISCOURSE; CARERS; PEOPLE
AB Background: Recent studies have demonstrated success in training partners to facilitate conversation in people with aphasia (e. g., Booth & Swabey, 1999; Kagan, Black, Duchan, Simmons-Mackie, & Square, 2001). Among other issues highlighted by these studies are those related to partner selection and suitability, or candidacy, for such an approach, and whether outcome may be related to the characteristics of the conversation partner. This paper reports a study of speech and language therapists' perceptions of candidacy requirements for conversation partner training (CPT), exploring both the characteristics that clinicians attend to in judging candidacy for therapy of this nature and whether these have validity with respect to outcome.
Aims: The study aimed first to determine the criteria used by clinicians when making decisions on candidacy of partners of people with aphasia and recruiting to conversation training programmes, and second to use these criteria to develop a method of profiling candidacy for potential partners attending training. The resulting profiling procedure was subsequently piloted within a single case design to evaluate the outcome of intervention against initial candidacy criteria.
Methods & Procedures: A focus group methodology and questionnaires were used to establish the criteria on which experienced therapists based their judgement of conversation ability and their subsequent decisions to offer intervention involving CPT. Following an analysis of how frequently particular behaviours and attitudes needed to be present to influence therapists' decision making, a procedure to profile conversational partner characteristics (the Profile of Partner Candidacy for Conversation Training) was developed which integrated data from a structured interview and an analysis of conversation between the couple. The procedure was used to characterise the suitability of one carer, PM, who was subsequently offered a support and conversation training programme (Lock, Wilkinson, & Bryan, 2001) with his spouse who had aphasia. Post-intervention analysis of conversation evaluated the effectiveness of CPT in the light of partner characteristics.
C1 St Nicholas Hosp, Newcastle Community Stroke Serv, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE3 3XT, Tyne & Wear, England.
Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
RP Turner, S (reprint author), St Nicholas Hosp, Newcastle Community Stroke Serv, Jubilee Rd, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE3 3XT, Tyne & Wear, England.
EM sonja.turner@nmht.nhs.uk
CR Boles L, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P547, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249557
Boles L., 1997, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V2, P43
Booth S, 1999, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V34, P291, DOI 10.1080/136828299247423
Booth S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P283
Brumfitt SM, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P221
Clark H. H., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P1
Croteau C, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P811, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000221
CUNNINGHAM R, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P687
Garrett KL, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P523, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000149
HELMSLEY G, 1996, DISABILITY REHABILIT, V18, P567
Hickey EM, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P625, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000093
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
KAGAN A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P924
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
KLIPPI A, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P373, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248538
Likert R., 1932, TECHNIQUE MEASUREMEN
Lock S., 2001, SUPPORTING PARTNERS
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Menn Lisa, 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D
MILROY L, 1992, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V6, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699209208985517
Oelschlaeger ML, 2000, J COMMUN DISORD, V33, P205, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00019-8
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Rayner H, 2003, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V38, P149, DOI 10.1080/1368282021000060308
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P807
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Simmons-Mackie N., 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P106
Sorin-Peters R, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000453
Wilkinson R, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P144
WILKINSON R, 2001, BRIT APH SOC C EX UK
WILKINSON R, 1995, CASE STUDIES CLIN LI
ZRAICK RI, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P123
NR 32
TC 13
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 7
BP 616
EP 643
DI 10.1080/02687030600687860
PG 28
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 052AJ
UT WOS:000238202500002
ER
PT J
AU Edwards, S
Tucker, K
AF Edwards, S
Tucker, K
TI Verb retrieval in fluent aphasia: A clinical study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ARGUMENT STRUCTURE; AGRAMMATIC APHASIA; SENTENCE PRODUCTION; SPONTANEOUS
SPEECH; TREATMENT EFFICACY; CUEING TREATMENTS; NAMING DISORDERS; 3
LANGUAGES; THERAPY; DEFICITS
AB Background: Problems with lexical retrieval are common across all types of aphasia but certain word classes are thought to be more vulnerable in some aphasia types. Traditionally, verb retrieval problems have been considered characteristic of non-fluent aphasias but there is growing evidence that verb retrieval problems are also found in fluent aphasia. As verbs are retrieved from the mental lexicon with syntactic as well as phonological and semantic information, it is speculated that an improvement in verb retrieval should enhance communicative abilities in this population as in others. We report on an investigation into the effectiveness of verb treatment for three individuals with fluent aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: Multiple pre-treatment baselines were established over 3 months in order to monitor language change before treatment. The three participants then received twice-weekly verb treatment over approximately 4 months. All pre-treatment assessments were administered immediately after treatment and 3 months post-treatment.
Outcome & Results: Scores fluctuated in the pre-treatment period. Following treatment, there was a significant improvement in verb retrieval for two of the three participants on the treated items. The increase in scores for the third participant was statistically nonsignificant but post-treatment scores moved from below the normal range to within the normal range. All participants were significantly quicker in the verb retrieval task following treatment. There was an increase in well-formed sentences in the sentence construction test and in some samples of connected speech.
Conclusions: Repeated systematic treatment can produce a significant improvement in verb retrieval of practised items and generalise to unpractised items for some participants. An increase in well-formed sentences is seen for some speakers. The theoretical and clinical implications of the results are discussed.
C1 Univ Reading, Sch Psychol & Clin Language, Reading RG6 6AL, Berks, England.
Univ Limerick, Limerick, Ireland.
RP Edwards, S (reprint author), Univ Reading, Sch Psychol & Clin Language, Reading RG6 6AL, Berks, England.
EM s.i.edwards@reading.ac.uk
CR Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
BASSO A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P185, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249069
Bastiaanse R., 2002, VERB SENTENCE TEST
Bastiaanse R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248437
BATES E, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P545
Berndt RS, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P249, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2726
Berndt RS, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P83, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000212
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
DeDe G, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P465, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000094
Doesborgh SJC, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P413, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000077
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
EDWARDS S, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P333
EDWARDS S, 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER
Edwards S, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P31, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00332393
Edwards S., 2005, FLUENT APHASIA
FILLINGHAM J, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P505
Goodglass H., 2001, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V3rd
Goodglass H., 1993, UNDERSTANDING APHASI
GOODMAN S, 1993, SCOT J GEOL, V29, P131
HAEGEMANN L, 1994, INTRO GOVERNMENT BIN
Herbert R, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P1163, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000454
Inglis AL, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P265, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000662
JONES E, 1986, BRIT J DISORDERS COM, V21, P62
Edwards S, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P99, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250466
KAY J, 1994, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ANA
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LEE M, 2002, AGRAMMATIC APHASIC P
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Linebaugh CW, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249555
MANCHIOPINIG S, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P519
Marshall J., 1999, APHASIA THERAPY FILE
Marshall J, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250461
MARTIN RC, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P196, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90102-1
MCCANN C, 2005, THESIS U READING UK
McCann C, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V83, P42
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
MICELI G, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P351, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248937
Mitchum C. C., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
MURRAY L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P585
Murray L, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P785, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000273
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
NIEMI J, 1990, FOLIA LINGUIST, V24, P389, DOI 10.1515/flin.1990.24.3-4.389
PERRY H, 1995, STAT EXPLAINED
Pinker Steven, 1989, LEARNABILITY COGNITI
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
Pring T., 2005, RES METHODS COMMUNIC
RAYMER A, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V47, P582
Robey RR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P787, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249573
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
*ROY COLL SPEECH L, 1996, COMM QUAL PROF STAND
Schneider SL, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P213, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000635
Semenza C, 1997, J NEUROLINGUIST, V10, P33, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(96)00019-X
SHAPIRO LP, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P21, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90100-U
SHAPIRO LP, 1987, COGNITION, V27, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(87)80010-0
SHAPIRO LP, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P423, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1053
THOMPSON CK, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P201, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1045
THOMPSON CK, 2006, IN PRESS NW NARRATIV
Thompson CK, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P228
Thompson CK, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P591, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/047)
Thompson CK, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P151, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(02)00014-3
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
THOMPSON CK, IN PRESS J COMMUNICA
VISCHBRINK E, 2002, EFFICACY LEXICAL SEM
Wambaugh J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P979, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000471
Wambaugh JL, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P433, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000085
Webster J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P47, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000481
Webster J, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P748, DOI 10.1080/02687030500166957
Weinrich M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P23, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1757
NR 70
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 7
BP 644
EP 675
DI 10.1080/02687030600631827
PG 32
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 052AJ
UT WOS:000238202500003
ER
PT J
AU McDonald, S
Tate, R
Togher, L
Perdices, M
Moseley, A
Winders, K
Shultz, R
Smith, K
AF McDonald, S
Tate, R
Togher, L
Perdices, M
Moseley, A
Winders, K
Shultz, R
Smith, K
TI Improving evidence-based practice in rehabilitation: Introducing
PsycBITE (TM)
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID RANDOMIZED CONTROLLED-TRIALS
AB Background: Clinicians face significant obstacles in their access to evidence for the efficacy of different communicative and cognitive treatments after brain impairment. These include the need to search across diverse journals and different clinical conditions to find potential treatments and the lack of easily accessible standards by which to evaluate the methodological rigour of treatment studies once found.
Aims: We aimed to address these issues by developing a freely available, user-friendly database of all relevant treatment trials for psychologically based disorders that arise from brain impairment.
Methods & Procedures: PsycBITE (TM) (http://www.psycbite.com) was developed as an internet-based database and was officially launched in 2004. Included on PsycBITE (TM) are all trials that have been published that evaluate treatment for any communication, cognitive, or psychological disorder arising from any form of acquired brain impairment in children (above the age of 5 years) and adults. PsycBITE (TM) also provides a rating for the methodological rigour of each trial using the previously established PEDro scale (Maher, Sherrington, Herbert, Moseley, & Elkins, 2003) for randomised controlled trials (RCT) and non-RCT group comparisons. A PsycBITE (TM) rating scale for single case experimental studies is still under development. This report overviews the database, its contents, and the methodology by which papers are selected for inclusion.
Outcomes & Results: As of June 2005 there are 1167 treatment studies listed on PsycBITE (TM) with prospective searches being conducted on a regular basis. The highest proportion of studies report treatments for communication disorders followed by behavioural problems and memory. Ratings of the randomised controlled trials, group comparisons, and single case studies are available for a proportion of papers and are being updated continuously.
Conclusions: PsycBITE (TM) is an invaluable resource for clinicians and researchers interested in an evidence-based practice approach to treatment. It is a free, fast, and effective way of accessing and evaluating treatments for communicative and cognitive disorders following brain impairment.
C1 Univ New S Wales, Sch Psychol, Sydney, NSW 2052, Australia.
Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
Royal Rehabil Ctr, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
Royal N Shore Hosp, Sydney, NSW, Australia.
RP McDonald, S (reprint author), Univ New S Wales, Sch Psychol, Sydney, NSW 2052, Australia.
EM smcdonald@psy.unsw.edu.au
RI McDonald, Skye/G-4118-2014
OI McDonald, Skye/0000-0003-0723-6094
CR Code C, 2000, ROYAL COLL SPEECH LA, P14
Guyatt G, 2002, USERS GUIDE MED LIT
Herbert R, 1998, Health Inf Manag, V28, P186
HOWARD D, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P89
Maher CG, 2003, PHYS THER, V83, P713
Moseley A, 2000, BRAIN IMPAIR, V1, P130, DOI 10.1375/brim.1.2.130
National Health and Medical Research Council, 2000, US EV ASS APPL SCI E
Tate R, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V14, P517, DOI 10.1080/09602010343000182
TATE RL, 2005, J INT NEUROPSYCHO S2, V11, P78
TATE RL, 2005, BRAIN INJURY S, V19, P32
TOGHER L, 2004, ACQUIRING KNOWLEDGE, V6, P85
Togher L, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P313, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000535
NR 12
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 7
BP 676
EP 683
DI 10.1080/02687030600724861
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 052AJ
UT WOS:000238202500004
ER
PT J
AU Tompkins, CA
Scharp, VL
Marshall, RC
AF Tompkins, CA
Scharp, VL
Marshall, RC
TI Communicative value of self cues in aphasia: A re-evaluation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SUBORDINATE CATEGORY NAMES; SEMANTIC FEATURE ANALYSIS; WORD-RETRIEVAL;
GENERATED CUES; LISTENER FAMILIARITY; LEXICAL RETRIEVAL; NAMING
DISORDERS; FLUENT APHASIA; ADULTS; CONVERSATION
AB Background: Adults with aphasia often try mightily to produce specific words, but their word-finding attempts are frequently unsuccessful. However, the word retrieval process may contain rich information that communicates a desired message regardless of word-finding success.
Aims: The original article reprinted here reports an investigation that assessed whether patient-generated self cues inherent in the word retrieval process could be interpreted by listener/observers and improve on communicative effectiveness for adults with aphasia. The newly added commentary identifies and reports tentative conclusions from 18 investigations of self-generated cues in aphasia since the 1982 paper. It further provides a rationale for increasing research on self-generated cueing and notes a surprising lack of attention to the questions investigated in the original article. The original research is also connected with more recent qualitative investigations of interactional, as opposed to transactional, communicative exchange.
Methods & Procedures: While performing single-word production tasks, 10 adults with aphasia produced 107 utterances that contained spontaneous word retrieval behaviours. To determine the "communicative value'' of these behaviours, herein designated self cues or self-generated cues, the utterance-final (potential target) word was edited out and the edited utterances were dubbed onto a videotape. Six naive observers, three of whom received some context about the nature of word retrieval in aphasia and possible topics for the utterances, and three of whom got no information, predicted the target word of each utterance from the word-finding behaviours alone. The communicative value of the self-generated cues was determined for each individual with aphasia by summing percent correct word retrieval and percent correct observer prediction of target words, based on word retrieval behaviours. The newly added commentary describes some challenges of investigating a "communicative value'' outcome, and indicates what would and would not change about the methods, if we did the study today.
Outcomes & Results: The observer group that was given some context information appeared to be more successful at predicting target words than the group without any such information. Self-generated cues enhanced communication for the majority of individuals with aphasia, with some cues (e. g., descriptions/gestures of action or function) appearing to carry more communicative value than others (e. g., semantic associates). The commentary again indicates how and why we would change this portion of the investigation if conducting the study at this time. Conclusions: The results are consistent with Holland's ( 1977) premise that people with aphasia do well at communication, regardless of the words they produce. The finding that minimal context information may assist observers in understanding the communicative intent of people with aphasia has important implications for training family members to interpret self-generated cues. The new commentary reinforces these conclusions, highlights potential differences between self cues that improve word-finding success and those that enhance message transmission, and points to some additional research needs.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15238 USA.
Univ Kentucky, Lexington, KY 40506 USA.
RP Tompkins, CA (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15238 USA.
EM tompkins@pitt.edu
CR ATEN J, 1986, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
BACKMAN L, 1988, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V26, P241, DOI 10.2190/TQWD-W1AQ-1NV2-P73G
Barton M I, 1971, Cortex, V7, P73
Beeson PM, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P323, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248474
BERMAN M, 1967, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V32, P372
Boyle M, 2004, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V13, P236, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2004/025)
Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P94
CARROLL JB, 1973, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V25, P85, DOI 10.1080/14640747308400325
Coelho CA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P133
Cohen J., 1977, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA
Constantinidou F, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P216, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00399-7
Cranfill TB, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P577, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000417
Cunningham R, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P687, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000184
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
Davis GA, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000598
DeDe G, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P465, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000094
DRUMMOND SS, 1981, J COMMUN DISORD, V14, P287, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(81)90013-7
Elman R. J., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P115
Faroqi-Shah Y, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P409, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00586-2
Ferguson A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P1007, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249466
FERGUSON A, 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P299
Fink RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1061, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000400
Francis DR, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P243, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000564
Frattali C. M., 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S
Freed D, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P743, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000246
Freed D. B., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P105
FREED DB, 1995, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V23
FREED DB, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1081
Frick-Horbury D, 2002, AM J PSYCHOL, V115, P1, DOI 10.2307/1423671
GARDNER H, 1973, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V11, P213, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(73)90010-9
GOLPER LC, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V13, P52
Goodglass H., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P74
GOODGLASS H, 1976, CORTEX, V12, P145
Hillis AE, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P648, DOI 10.1017/S135561779846613X
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
Holland A., 1977, RATIONALE ADULT APHA
HOLLAND A. L., 1977, RATIONALE ADULT APHA, P167
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
HOUGH MS, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P246
Howard D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249540
Kagan Aura, 2004, Top Stroke Rehabil, V11, P67
LI EC, 1995, J COMMUN DISORD, V28, P39, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(95)91023-Z
LINEBAUGH C, 1977, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V7, P19
LINEBAUGH C, 1977, CLNI APH C P 1977 MI
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
Lowell S., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P109
LUBINSKI R, 1980, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V10, P111
Lustig AP, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P507, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000211
MANTYLA T, 1986, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V12, P66
MARSHALL RC, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P444
MARSHALL RC, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P567, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249492
MARSHALL RC, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P335
MARSHALL RC, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V46, P168
Marshall RC, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P585, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000050
Marshall RC, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P763, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000040
MARSHALL RC, 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P164
MARSHALL RC, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
MARSHALL RC, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V15, P292, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90061-X
Mayer JF, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P481, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000148
MILLS R, 1977, CLIN APH C P 1977
MILLS RH, 1979, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V22, P73
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V8, P62
OLDFIELD RC, 1965, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V17, P273, DOI 10.1080/17470216508416445
Pashek GV, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P261, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000573
PEASE D M, 1978, Cortex, V14, P178
Robey RR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P787, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249573
Saito A, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2388
SAUZEON H, 2001, CURRENT PSYCHOL LETT, P65
SERON X, 1982, J COMMUN DISORD, V15, P223, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(82)90035-1
SIMMONS NN, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 1995, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V23
Spencer KA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P567
STIMLEY MA, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P496, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90170-6
MASSARO M, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P245
TOMPKINS CA, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P129
TOMPKINS CA, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V12, P75
Wambaugh J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P979, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000471
WATAMORI TS, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20
WEIDNER WE, 1983, J COMMUN DISORD, V16, P111, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(83)90042-4
WHITNEY J, 1975, ANN CONV AM SPEECH H
WHITNEY JL, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P576
Williams Sarah E., 1994, Journal of Communication Disorders, V27, P207, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(94)90001-9
NR 82
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 7
BP 684
EP 704
DI 10.1080/02687030500334076
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 052AJ
UT WOS:000238202500005
ER
PT J
AU Duffy, JR
AF Duffy, JR
TI Apraxia of speech in degenerative neurologic disease
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PRIMARY-PROGRESSIVE-APHASIA; NONFLUENT APHASIA; PICKS-DISEASE; DEMENTIA;
DISORDERS; DIAGNOSIS; ANARTHRIA; LANGUAGE; APHEMIA
AB Background: Only a limited number of case reports or case series have provided unequivocal evidence that apraxia of speech (AOS) can be the first or predominant sign of neurodegenerative disease. This may reflect a very low frequency of occurrence but may also reflect a failure in many studies to identify AOS or distinguish it from the diagnosis of primary progressive aphasia (PPA). The distinction may be important to clinical neurological localisation and diagnosis, prognosis, management, and histopathology.
Aims: To describe the demographic characteristics, presenting complaints, perceptual attributes, associated speech- language and related clinical findings, neuroimaging findings, and clinical neurological diagnoses for a large group of patients with AOS due to degenerative neurologic disease.
Methods & Procedures: Retrospective review of patients seen between 1985 and 2004, who had AOS that was never less severe than any aphasia that might have been present and whose neurologic evaluation concluded that the cause was degenerative.
Outcomes & Results: A total of 80 patients met inclusion criteria. Of these patients, 61% were men. Average age at initial evaluation was 69 years (range = 36-86 years). Speech-language difficulty was the first symptom to emerge in 80% and the only patient complaint at the time of initial evaluation in 56%. Average duration of symptoms at initial evaluation was 29 months. Aphasia and dysarthria were unequivocally present in 49% and 50% of the sample, respectively. Of the 80 patients with AOS, 11% had neither aphasia nor dysarthria. When abnormal, neuroimaging often identified left or left. right hemisphere abnormalities. Of these patients, 44% received purely descriptive clinical neurologic diagnoses that were largely determined by speech-language findings; an additional 18% received diagnoses related to focal/ asymmetric cortical atrophy syndromes that localised to the left hemisphere; 29% received diagnoses of diseases with prominent motor manifestations, most often corticobasal degeneration, progressive supranuclear palsy, or motor neuron disease.
Conclusions: AOS can be the first and most prominent manifestation of neurodegenerative disease. It often co- occurs with aphasia and/ or dysarthria, but it can be the only speech- language disorder. It does not appear to be associated with any single neurologic disease but specific neurologic diagnoses, when they are possible, tend to reflect conditions with prominent motor manifestations. It is important to distinguish primary progressive AOS from PPA.
C1 Mayo Clin, Dept Neurol, Div Speech Pathol, Rochester, MN 55905 USA.
RP Duffy, JR (reprint author), Mayo Clin, Dept Neurol, Div Speech Pathol, Rochester, MN 55905 USA.
CR Abe K, 1997, NEURORADIOLOGY, V39, P556
Blake ML, 2003, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V11, P131
Boeve B, 2003, EUR NEUROL, V49, P72, DOI 10.1159/000068502
Broussolle E, 1996, J NEUROL SCI, V144, P44, DOI 10.1016/S0022-510X(96)00096-2
CASELLI RJ, 1993, ANN NEUROL, V33, P200, DOI 10.1002/ana.410330210
Chapman SB, 1997, NEUROLOGY, V49, P1298
COHEN L, 1993, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V56, P923, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.56.8.923
CRAENHALS A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P485, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248789
DERENZI E, 1962, BRAIN, V85, P665, DOI 10.1093/brain/85.4.665
Didic M, 1998, EUR NEUROL, V39, P90, DOI 10.1159/000007914
DUFFY JR, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P1, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248573
Duffy J.R, 2005, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
FRATTALI CM, 2000, CORTICOBASAL DEGENER, V82
Fukui T, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V47, P467
Gorno-Tempini ML, 2004, ANN NEUROL, V55, P335, DOI 10.1002/ana.10825
Greene JDW, 1996, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V53, P1072
Hart RP, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P73, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248456
Hodges J R, 1996, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V2, P511
Josephs KA, 2005, NEUROCASE, V11, P283, DOI 10.1080/13554790590963004
Kaplan E., 2001, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kareken DA, 1998, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V55, P107, DOI 10.1001/archneur.55.1.107
KARTSOUNIS LD, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P121
KAVRIE SH, 1994, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
Kertesz A, 2003, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V9, P710, DOI 10.1017/S1355617703950041
Lampl Y, 1997, J NUCL MED, V38, P1122
Mcneil M. R., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P472
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MCNEIL MR, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P221
Mesulam MM, 2001, ANN NEUROL, V49, P425, DOI 10.1002/ana.91
MESULAM MM, 1982, ANN NEUROL, V11, P592, DOI 10.1002/ana.410110607
Mesulam MM, 2003, ANN NEUROL, V54, pS11, DOI 10.1002/ana.10569
ROSENFIELD DB, 1991, ANN NEUROL, V30, P296
Sakurai Y, 1998, J NEUROL SCI, V159, P156, DOI 10.1016/S0022-510X(98)00159-2
Schuell H, 1972, MINNESOTA TEST DIFFE
Silveri MC, 2003, NEUROCASE, V9, P213, DOI 10.1076/neur.9.3.213.15555
TAMINGA CA, 1996, AM J PSYCHIAT, V153, P309
Turner RS, 1996, ANN NEUROL, V39, P166, DOI 10.1002/ana.410390205
TYRRELL PJ, 1991, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V54, P351, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.54.4.351
van Elst LHT, 2002, PSYCHIAT CLIN NEUROS, V56, P111
Wertz R. T., 1971, ANN CONV AM SPEECH H
Westbury C, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P381, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1840
NR 41
TC 36
Z9 37
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 6
BP 511
EP 527
DI 10.1080/02687030600597358
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 052AG
UT WOS:000238202200002
ER
PT J
AU Horton, S
AF Horton, S
TI A framework for description and analysis of therapy for language
impairment in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONVERSATION; AGRAMMATISM; FAMILIARITY; KNOWLEDGE
AB Background: The methods used by therapists in the process of language therapy with people with aphasia are seldom explicitly described in therapy studies. Language impairment therapy is often reported in terms of tasks or activities. Reference to cueing or feedback may be made, but the role played by the person with aphasia in these processes usually goes unreported. It has been argued, however, that therapy is not synonymous with the task but takes place through the interactive work between therapist and person with aphasia.
Aims: To examine therapy between experienced clinicians and people with aphasia in day-to-day practice, addressing a number of questions relating to: the characteristic features of the interaction between therapist and aphasic person; identification of the ``main business'' of the session; the relationship between the ``main business'' and other aspects of the session; the evidence for more explicit definitions of therapy techniques such as those described in the literature as ``cueing'', ``prompting'', ``scaffolding'', ``facilitation'', and ``feedback''. These questions were addressed with the aim of making description of therapy practice more explicit in order (1) to improve the quality of therapy studies, including replications (which rely on, among other things, detailed reporting of treatment variables); (2) to improve understanding of what ``works''/ ``doesn't work''; (3) to improve understanding of the contributions of both therapist and client; (4) to improve the quality and effectiveness of therapy; (5) to improve communication with clients, carers, other professionals, and students.
Methods and Procedures: In order to develop an explicit and consistent vocabulary for describing and analysing the enactment of therapy, an observational study was carried out. A total of 15 therapist-aphasic person dyads participated in the study, contributing videotape and audiotape recordings of 41 therapy sessions. Videotapes and audiotape transcriptions were subject to qualitative analysis using a variety of methods derived from ethnography and Conversation Analysis.
Outcomes & Results: This study describes the enactment of tasks in ways that (1) account for the interactive nature of therapist and aphasic person contributions; (2) demonstrate how processes of task- related work are distributed across the session as a whole; and (3) address task-related work as a technical and a social process.
Conclusions: In this study therapy is examined and the processes through which it takes place are made explicit in a systematic and orderly fashion, addressing the ways in which task- related work is enacted, and revealing the roles of the participants in the conduct of that work.
This study confirms the scope of previous conceptualisations of the enactment of therapy, and provides a data- driven description of therapy. In addition, processes through which therapists gained and maintained control of sessions were found to be similar to those reported in studies of other healthcare settings.
C1 Univ E Anglia, Sch Allied Hlth Profess, Norwich NR4 7TJ, Norfolk, England.
RP Horton, S (reprint author), Univ E Anglia, Sch Allied Hlth Profess, Queens Bldg, Norwich NR4 7TJ, Norfolk, England.
CR Atkinson J. M., 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC
Avent JR, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P1078, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249428
Basso A, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P219
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
BYNG S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P315, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248663
BYNG S, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P3
BYNG S, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P303
Casey N., 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC, P167
Damico JS, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P83
Davis G. A., 1993, SURVEY ADULT APHASIA
Duffy J. R., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P341
Eraut M, 2000, BRIT J EDUC PSYCHOL, V70, P113, DOI 10.1348/000709900158001
Ferguson A, 2001, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V15, P229
FERGUSON A, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P143, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248647
Francis DR, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P243, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000564
Freeman M, 2004, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V39, P481
Goldberg S. A., 1997, CLIN SKILLS SPEECH L
Goodwin C., 1981, CONVERSATIONAL ORG I
Halliday M. A., 1994, INTRO FUNCTIONAL GRA, V3rd
HEGDE MN, 1995, CLIN METHODS PRACTIC
Hollis GE, 1998, J CHART INST WATER E, V12, P9
Horton S, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P355
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Howard D., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY HIST
KAY J, 1996, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kovarsky D., 1990, J CHILDHOOD COMMUNIC, V13, P29
Kovarsky D, 1997, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V28, P297
Lesser R., 1993, LINGUISTICS APHASIA
LEVINSON SC, 1979, LINGUISTICS, V17, P365, DOI 10.1515/ling.1979.17.5-6.365
LI EC, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P619, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249028
Lincoln Y., 1985, NATURALISTIC ENQUIRY
Mason J, 1996, QUALITATIVE RES
McTear Michael, 1991, MISCOMMUNICATION PRO, P195
Mehan H., 1979, LEARNING LESSONS SOC
Miller G., 1997, QUALITATIVE RES THEO
MITCHUM CC, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P1, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520173
PANAGOS JM, 1986, CHILD LANG TEACH THE, V2, P211, DOI 10.1177/026565908600200206
Perakyla Anssi, 1995, AIDS COUNSELLING I I
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
RIPICH DN, 1985, APHASIA APRAXIA AGNO, V3, P9
ROBSON J, APHASIA THERAPY FILE, V2
SACKS H, 1992, LECT CONVERSATIONS, V2, P495
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
Schegloff E., 1986, DIRECTIONS SOCIOLING, P346
Schegloff Emanuel, 1973, SEMIOTICA, V8, P289
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
Seale C, 1999, QUALITY QUALITATIVE
SILVAST M, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248540
Silverman D, 2000, DOING QUALITATIVE RE
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 1999, CONSTRUCTING COMPETE
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P681
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V8, P218
Sinclair J. M., 1975, ANAL DISCOURSE ENGLI
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
SOBIECKAKOSZEL G, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P197, DOI 10.1080/02687039108249482
Spradley J., 1980, PARTICIPANT OBSERVAT
ten Have Paul, 1991, TALK SOCIAL STRUCTUR, P138
WALLACH GP, 1988, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
West Candace, 1991, MISCOMMUNICATION PRO, P166
WILLIAMSON K, 2001, UNDERPINNING KNOWLED
NR 60
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 6
BP 528
EP 564
DI 10.1080/02687030600590130
PG 37
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 052AG
UT WOS:000238202200003
ER
PT J
AU Law, SP
Wong, W
Kong, A
AF Law, SP
Wong, W
Kong, A
TI Direct access from meaning to orthography in Chinese: A case study of
superior written to oral naming
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CHARACTER IDENTIFICATION; PHONOLOGICAL ACTIVATION; WORD IDENTIFICATION;
ACQUIRED DYSLEXIA; CANTONESE; SPOKEN; REPRESENTATIONS; ORGANIZATION;
RECOGNITION; INFORMATION
AB Background: For alphabetic scripts, the obligatory phonological mediation hypothesis about written language processing has been seriously challenged by case reports of acquired dyslexia and dysgraphia. Evidence against the hypothesis mainly comes from superior performance on written production over oral production of the same lexical items. In Chinese, the absence of grapheme-to-phoneme conversion, the presence of a character component providing a semantic cue to the meaning of many phonetic compound characters, and the great extent of homophony have led to the view that the orthography is meaning based rather than speech based. However, psycholinguistic studies of character recognition have obtained conflicting results regarding the relative time course of activation of phonological vs semantic information.
Aims: This paper addresses the phonological mediation hypothesis through describing the performance pattern of a Cantonese-speaking brain-injured individual, LKY, on tasks involving oral and written production of single Chinese words.
Methods and Procedures: The range of tasks administered to LKY included visual-spatial analysis, auditory discrimination, written and spoken lexical decision, repetition, oral and written picture naming, reading aloud and writing-to-dictation of object names, homophone identification and judgements, and verbal and non- verbal semantic tests.
Outcomes and Results: LKY performed normally on tasks assessing the processing of visual, auditory, orthographic, and verbal input. He was moderately impaired in repeating words and phrases. His performance on the two naming tasks, reading aloud, and writing-to-dictation was clearly disrupted. In addition, he was unable to retrieve phonological information from orthographic input, given his poor ability to make homophone judgements and identification. While he could select objects that are functionally related in non-verbal semantic tests, he was impaired in accessing meaning from verbal materials. The most significant features of his performance pattern were his superior written over oral picture naming and better written naming than writing-to-dictation of the same stimuli.
Conclusions: The discrepancies in performance between oral and written naming and between the written tasks with pictorial vs oral input were due to deficits at the phonological level. Such dissociations support the view that written production of Chinese, similar to the situation with alphabetic writing systems, is not parasitic on phonology, and thereby disconfirm the obligatory phonological mediation hypothesis.
C1 Univ Hong Kong, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, Peoples R China.
RP Law, SP (reprint author), Univ Hong Kong, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Pokfulam Rd, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, Peoples R China.
EM splaw@hkucc.hku.hk
CR BUB D, 1982, BRAIN, V105, P697, DOI 10.1093/brain/105.4.697
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
CARAMAZZA A, 2003, LANGUAGE BRAIN REPRE, P203
CHEN HC, 1995, PSYCHOL RES-PSYCH FO, V58, P144, DOI 10.1007/BF00571102
Chen HC, 2001, PSYCHON B REV, V8, P511, DOI 10.3758/BF03196186
HILLIS AE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251996
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
LAW SP, 1995, SPEECH READING COMP, P143
Law SP, 2005, BEHAV NEUROL, V16, P169
Law SP, 2004, NEUROCASE, V10, P132, DOI 10.1080/13554790490497247
Law SP, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P729, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000024
LECK KJ, 1995, MEM COGNITION, V23, P468, DOI 10.3758/BF03197248
LESCH MF, 1993, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V19, P285, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.19.2.285
LUKETELA G, 1996, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V58, P823
PERFETTI CA, 1991, J MEM LANG, V30, P473, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(91)90017-E
Perfetti CA, 2005, PSYCHOL REV, V112, P43, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.112.1.43
Perfetti CA, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P101, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.24.1.101
PERFETTI CA, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V21, P24, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.21.1.24
Rapp B, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P248, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1735
Rapp B, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P71
Reich S, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P585, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000049
Riddoch M.J., 1993, BIRMINGHAM OBJECT RE
Shen D, 1999, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V14, P429
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
BARON J, 1976, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V2, P386, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.2.3.386
Tainturier MJ, 2001, NEUROCASE, V7, P89, DOI 10.1093/neucas/7.1.89
Tan LH, 1998, READ WRIT, V10, P165, DOI 10.1023/A:1008086231343
TAN LH, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V21, P43, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.21.1.43
VanOrden GC, 1997, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V14, P131
WANG WSY, 1973, SCI AM, V228, P50
WEEKES BS, 1998, READING WRITING INTE, V10, P47
Weekes BS, 1997, NEUROCASE, V3, P51, DOI 10.1080/13554799708404034
WU RT, 1987, STUDY PHONOLOGICAL S
YIU EML, 1992, J NEUROLINGUIST, V7, P379, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(92)90025-R
ZHANG WT, 1994, ADV STUDY CHINESE LA, P185
NR 36
TC 4
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 6
BP 565
EP 578
DI 10.1080/02687030600591799
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 052AG
UT WOS:000238202200004
ER
PT J
AU Sowman, R
Robinson, D
O'Riordan, R
Connolly, S
O'Neill, D
AF Sowman, R
Robinson, D
O'Riordan, R
Connolly, S
O'Neill, D
TI Rapidly deteriorating speech and language in a case of probable sporadic
Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SLOWLY PROGRESSIVE APHASIA; ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; SEMANTIC DEMENTIA;
IMPAIRMENT; DIAGNOSIS
AB Background: Language disorders are common features of the dementias but their use as diagnostic aids has probably been under utilised. Patterns of language disturbance tend to differ according to the cause of dementia. Identifying the type of language disturbance may assist in the diagnosis of the dementia. Furthermore, when a patient presents with unusual patterns of language disturbance, a detailed description of the presentation and the evolution of the language difficulties may aid in the diagnosis of similar cases in the future. We describe a 68-year-old man who presented to a university teaching hospital with a rapid onset of unusual language disturbance and concurrent cognitive deterioration. A diagnosis of probable sporadic Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (CJD) was made with the aid of serial EEGs and CSF analysis.
Aims: This article aims to provide a summary of some of the typical language presentations documented in other causes of dementia and in other reported cases of sporadic CJD, to provide a description of the patterns of language disturbance present in our patient with probable sporadic CJD, and to compare these with the pattern of language disturbance reported in other cases of CJD.
Main Contribution: A summary of some of the patterns of language change documented in the dementias is provided and a detailed description of rapidly progressing language disturbance in a case of probable sporadic CJD, which differs from those already documented in the literature. This language disturbance was characterised by an initial, relatively fluent, aphasia- like language disturbance affecting mainly semantic ability and comprehension, with a rapid progression (on a daily basis) through to an eventual global language and cognitive failure. The unusual patterns of language change in this case are described and comparisons are made to the reported patterns of language change in other cases of sporadic CJD. The need for detailed description of language change in the dementias is highlighted.
Conclusions: There are very few documented cases of rapid deterioration in language function in probable sporadic CJD. Of those documented, the type and speed of progression of the language disturbance differs greatly. We present this case of probable CJD to provide further description of language change which might highlight the need to add to the sparse number of reported cases in order to help with assessment and management in the future.
C1 Adelaide Hosp, Dept Speech & Language Therapy, Dublin 24, Ireland.
Meath Hosp, Dept Speech & Language Therapy, Dublin 24, Ireland.
RP Sowman, R (reprint author), Adelaide Hosp, Dept Speech & Language Therapy, Dublin 24, Ireland.
EM rebecca.sowman@amnch.ie
CR BAYLES KA, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P265, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90086-4
BAYLES KA, 1993, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V9, P131
Bayles KA, 2003, J COMMUN DISORD, V36, P209, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(03)00020-0
Campbell S, 2004, LANCET, V364, P2068, DOI 10.1016/S0140-6736(04)17520-X
Chapman T, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V55, P1396
Cohen D, 2004, EPILEPSY BEHAV, V5, P792, DOI 10.1016/j.yebeh.2004.06.019
Croot K, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P277, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2357
EASTLEY R, 2000, DEMENTIA, P41
Garrard P, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P609
Giraud P, 2002, EUR NEUROL, V48, P218, DOI 10.1159/000066174
Green AJE, 2002, BIOCHEM SOC T, V30, P382
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
Hopper Tammy, 2001, Seminars in Speech and Language, V22, P261, DOI 10.1055/s-2001-17425
Kempler D., 1995, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI, P98
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KIRK A, 1994, CAN J NEUROL SCI, V21, P350
KONTIOLA P, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P364, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90121-V
MANDELL AM, 1989, NEUROLOGY, V39, P55
Mesulam MM, 2003, NEW ENGL J MED, V349, P1535, DOI 10.1056/NEJMra022435
MESULAM MM, 1982, ANN NEUROL, V11, P592, DOI 10.1002/ana.410110607
POECK K, 1988, BRAIN, V111, P151, DOI 10.1093/brain/111.1.151
Ross-Swain D, 1996, ROSS INFORM PROCESSI
SHUTTLEWORTH EC, 1985, J NATL MED ASSOC, V77, P649
STEPHENS S, 1999, DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT, P137
Szabo K, 2004, CEREBROVASC DIS, V18, P251, DOI 10.1159/000080109
VOGEL D, 1995, EFFECTS DRUGS COMMUN
NR 26
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 6
BP 579
EP 592
DI 10.1080/026870030500399129
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 052AG
UT WOS:000238202200005
ER
PT J
AU Elman, RJ
AF Elman, RJ
TI Evidence-based practice: What evidence is missing?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID EVIDENCE-BASED MEDICINE; PERSPECTIVE; ETHICS; BIAS
AB Background: Evidence-based practice (EBP) is defined as "an approach in which current, high-quality research evidence is integrated with practitioner expertise and client preferences and values into the process of making clinical decisions" (ASHA, 2005). Evidence-based practice has gained significant momentum around the world. Many professional healthcare organisations, including those associated with speech-language pathology, have recommended that clinicians incorporate EBP into everyday clinical practice.
Aims: An approach such as EBP relies on the practitioner being able to locate high-quality research in order to provide data that informs his/her clinical decision making. The present paper lists at least five possible sources of bias that serve to reduce available evidence within EPB: funding bias, publication bias, consumer/researcher mismatch, reduced clinical applicability, and over-reliance on randomised controlled trials.
Main Contribution: Possible sources of bias within the EPB process, resulting in "missing" evidence are outlined and illustrated. Specific examples are provided from various healthcare fields.
Conclusions: It is suggested that discussion of sources of bias within EBP may help to maximise its potential. Audience suggestions provided at the 2005 Clinical Aphasiology Conference regarding possible directions for future work in this are appended.
C1 Aphasia Ctr Calif, Oakland, CA 94602 USA.
RP Elman, RJ (reprint author), Aphasia Ctr Calif, 3996 Lyman Rd, Oakland, CA 94602 USA.
EM RJElman@aol.com
CR Adams CE, 2001, PSYCHIAT B, V25, P291, DOI 10.1192/pb.25.8.291
*ASHA, 2005, EV BAS PRACT COMM DI
*ASHA, 2004, REP JOINT COORD COMM
*ASHA, 2004, EVID PRACT COMM DIS
Bensing JM, 2000, PATIENT EDUC COUNS, V39, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0738-3991(99)00107-X
BENSON K, 2000, NEW ENGL J MED, V342, P1879
BRADLEY F, 1995, LANCET, V346, P838
Cayley WE, 2003, J FAM PRACTICE, V52, P380
Concato J, 2000, NEW ENGL J MED, V342, P1887, DOI 10.1056/NEJM200006223422507
Edwards A, 2001, EVIDENCE BASED PATIE
Elman RJ, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P77
Frattali C, 2003, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V11, pIX
Green J, 1998, BRIT MED J, V316, P1230
Haynes RB, 2002, BMC HEALTH SERV RES, V2, DOI 10.1186/1472-6963-2-3
Kerridge I, 1998, BRIT MED J, V316, P1151
Kerridge RK, 2003, MED J AUSTRALIA, V179, P313
NAYLOR C, 1997, BRIT MED J, V315, P317
Orange JB, 2004, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V13, P264, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2004/027)
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
Sackett DL, 1996, BRIT MED J, V312, P71
Stern JM, 1997, BRIT MED J, V315, P640
Tallon D, 2000, LANCET, V355, P2037, DOI 10.1016/S0140-6736(00)02351-5
von Segesser Ludwig K, 2003, Interact Cardiovasc Thorac Surg, V2, P403, DOI 10.1016/S1569-9293(03)00237-8
Walker Kim, 2003, Nurs Inq, V10, P145, DOI 10.1046/j.1440-1800.2003.00179.x
Williams DDR, 2002, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V180, P8, DOI 10.1192/bjp.180.1.8
NR 26
TC 5
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 103
EP 109
DI 10.1080/02687030500472256
PG 7
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000002
ER
PT J
AU Fassbinder, W
Tompkins, CA
AF Fassbinder, Wiltrud
Tompkins, Connie A.
TI Hemispheric differences in word-meaning processing: Alternative
interpretations of current evidence
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID LEXICAL AMBIGUITY RESOLUTION; VISUAL-FIELD ASYMMETRIES; CEREBRAL
HEMISPHERES; SEMANTIC ACTIVATION; DECISION TASK; TIME-COURSE; CONTEXT;
RECOGNITION; INFORMATION; INTEGRATION
AB Background. Drawing heavily on results from studies with divided visual field (dvf) presentation, current models of hemispheric differences in word semantic processing converge on a proposal (henceforth, "the standard model") that is increasingly being applied in studies of individuals with brain damage. According to this model, left hemisphere processes focus word meanings to their core, whereas right hemisphere processes keep wider representations active.
Aims: This paper has three aims: (a) to raise concerns about methodological aspects of the dvf studies that are usually cited in support for the standard model, specifically assumptions about interpretation of lateral dvf prime presentation and priming measures; (b) to highlight areas of further research and theoretical clarification, with reference to studies with central presentation and general models of word-meaning processing; and (c) to discuss the implications of these concerns for deriving a model of hemispheric differences in word-meaning processing, using evidence from paired word priming studies as an example.
Main Contribution: The paper discusses problematic assumptions about paired word priming studies of hemispheric contributions to word semantic processing and proposes further research to clarify these assumptions. Furthermore, it introduces an alternative interpretation of the available data, which provides a more parsimonious account of hemispheric engagement in the paired word semantic priming task.
Conclusions: Current evidence about hemispheric differences in word-meaning processing is far from conclusive. It is important to consider alternative interpretations of the available evidence when applying models based on this evidence to the study of language disorders. The alternative account proposed in this paper suggests that LH processing, rather than generally reducing activated word meanings to their core, is important for maintaining meanings that are unambiguous and consistent.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Fassbinder, W (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
EM wiltrud.fassbinder@wiltrud.com
CR Anaki D, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P691, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00141-3
Atchley RA, 1996, BRAIN COGNITION, V30, P277
Atchley RA, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V13, P389, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.13.3.389
Beaumont JG, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOL REV, V7, P107, DOI 10.1023/B:NERV.0000005947.20270.80
BECKER CA, 1980, MEM COGNITION, V8, P493, DOI 10.3758/BF03213769
Beeman M, 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION, P255
Brown CM, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P158
BROWNELL H, 2000, LANGUAGE BRAIN REPRE
Burgess C, 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION, P215
BURGESS C, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P86, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90056-9
Cabeza R, 2000, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V12, P1, DOI 10.1162/08989290051137585
CANAS JJ, 1990, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V42, P121
CHIARELLO C, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P52, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90056-K
CHIARELLO C, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P75, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90103-N
Chiarello C, 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION, P141
Chiarello C, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V41, P721, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00220-8
Chiarello C, 2003, MIND, BRAIN, AND LANGUAGE: MULTIDISCIPLINARY PERSPECTIVES, P229
Copland DA, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V81, P131, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2512
Efron Robert, 1990, DECLINE FALL HEMISPH
Faust M, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P827, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00042-6
Fodor Jerry A., 1983, MODULARITY MIND
GRINDROD CM, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P5003
Hasbrooke RE, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V12, P78, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.12.1.78
HELLIGE JB, 1986, BRAIN COGNITION, V5, P200, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(86)90055-2
Hellige JB, 1993, HEMISPHERIC ASYMMETR
Hino Y, 1997, CAN J EXP PSYCHOL, V51, P195, DOI 10.1037/1196-1961.51.3.195
Hutchinson A, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P361, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00133-0
JOANETTE Y, 1998, LINGUISTIC LEVELS AP, P19
JONIDES J, 1984, PSYCHOL BULL, V96, P29, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.96.1.29
Koivisto M, 2000, LATERALITY, V5, P1
KOSSELYN SM, 1999, FUNDAMENTAL NEUROSCI, P1521
McDonald CR, 2005, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V11, P132, DOI 10.1017/S135561770505023X
McRae K, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P558, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.3.558
NAKAGAWA A, 1991, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V3, P313, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1991.3.4.313
Neely J. H., 1991, BASIC PROCESSES READ, P264
Neely JH, 2001, SCI CON SER, P69, DOI 10.1037/10394-005
ROBERTSON LC, 1991, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V23, P299, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(91)90012-D
SERGENT J, 1986, BRAIN COGNITION, V5, P174, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(86)90054-0
Shears C, 2003, LATERALITY, V8, P1, DOI 10.1080/13576500143000302
SHELTON JR, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P1191, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.18.6.1191
Simpson G., 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC, P359
SIMPSON GB, 1985, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V11, P28, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.11.1.28
Stolz JA, 1999, CURR DIR PSYCHOL SCI, V8, P61, DOI 10.1111/1467-8721.00015
STOLZ JA, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V21, P596, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.21.3.596
VANKLEECK MH, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P1165, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90099-7
NR 45
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 110
EP 122
DI 10.1080/02687030500472397
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000003
ER
PT J
AU Dede, G
Caplan, D
AF Dede, G
Caplan, D
TI Factor analysis of aphasic syntactic comprehension disorders
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID SENTENCE COMPREHENSION; DETERMINANTS; DEFICITS; TIME; AGE
AB Background: Many people with aphasia have impaired sentence comprehension. Previous studies using factor analysis have suggested that a single factor accounts for performance on measures of sentence comprehension (e.g., Caplan, Baker, & Dehaut, 1985). However, this work has been limited to measures of accuracy on single sentence comprehension tasks.
Aims: The purpose of this study is to further examine the factor structure underlying aphasic sentence comprehension using accuracy, reaction time (RT), and on-line measures using both exploratory and confirmatory factor analyses.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 42 people with aphasia and 40 non-brain-damaged controls were tested on 11 sentence types and five tasks. Accuracy and RT data are reported for the whole sentence presentation version of sentence-picture matching, and accuracy data are reported for object manipulation. Confirmatory factor analyses examining measurement invariance across groups and tasks are presented. Exploratory factor analyses of on-line syntactic processing are also presented.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that one-factor models best account for accuracy and RT data. Measurement of factors was partially invariant across groups and tasks. Factor structures suggestive of syntactic processes emerged in the analyses of on-line measures.
Conclusions: This study suggests that syntactic processes may load on separate factors during on-line parsing and that syntactic processes do not dissociate when the parser's Output is used in the service of a task at the end of the sentence.
C1 Boston Univ, Boston, MA 02215 USA.
Massachusetts Gen Hosp, Boston, MA 02114 USA.
RP Caplan, D (reprint author), Neuropsychol Lab, 175 Cambridge St,Suite 340,Fruit St, Boston, MA 02114 USA.
EM dcaplan@partners.org
CR Balogh J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P169, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1917
Bentler P.M., 1989, EQS STRUCTURAL EQUAT
BRTMEULRN J, 1996, CORTEX, V18, P287
Byrne B.M., 1994, STRUCTURAL EQUATION
Caplan D, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P933, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.3.933
Caplan D., 1988, DISORDERS SYNTACTIC
CAPLAN D, 2005, STUDY SYNTACTIC PROC
CAPLAN D, 1985, COGNITION, V21, P117, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(85)90048-4
Caplan D, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P542
Caplan D., 1992, LANGUAGE STRUCTURE P
DeDe G, 2004, PSYCHOL AGING, V19, P601, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.19.4.601
Dick F, 2001, PSYCHOL REV, V108, P759, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.108.4.759
Dunn J., 1994, SOUNDEDIT VERSION 2
GRODZINSKY Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P47
HAARMANN HJ, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P493, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1028
JACCARD J, 1996, 07114 SAG U
Salthouse TA, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P403, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.3.403
SCHUELL H, 1975, APHASIA ADULTS
TABACHNICK BG, 1996, USING MULTIVARIATE
WATERS GS, 2003, Q J EXPT PSYCHOL A, V57, P129
NR 20
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 123
EP 135
DI 10.1080/02687030500472413
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000004
ER
PT J
AU Friedmann, N
Gvion, A
Biran, M
Novogrodsky, R
AF Friedmann, N
Gvion, A
Biran, M
Novogrodsky, R
TI Do people with agrammatic aphasia understand verb movement?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE; BROCAS APHASIA; SYNTACTIC TREE; COMPREHENSION;
SENSITIVITY; SENTENCES; NEUROLOGY; LANGUAGE
AB Background. Many studies report that the comprehension of sentences derived by movement of phrases is impaired in agrammatism. However, only few studies have explored the comprehension of sentences that involve a movement of the verb. In several languages, the verb can or should move to the second position of a sentence, creating VSO sentences like "Yesterday ate the girl a watermelon" from an SVO sentence. Previous studies of comprehension of verb movement either allowed the patients to use a strategy, or used grammaticality judgement tasks, which probably tap different abilities from interpretation tasks. Aims: The present study tested the comprehension of sentences with verb movement to second position in agrammatism using a novel sentence type that prevented participants from employing strategy-based comprehension. Comprehension was tested using sentences with verb-noun homophones and homographs. In general, the choice between the noun and the verb meaning of homophones and homographs relies on the construction of the syntactic structure of the sentence, and the syntactic role of the ambiguous word. In the current study, we used sentences in which the ambiguous word was placed at the object position, such as "Yesterday caught the bat flies in the garden" (literally transcribed into English). In order to understand whether it is a verb or a noun (whether the bat in this sentence flies, or whether it catches flies), comprehension of the relation between the moved verb and its object is required. Thus, these sentences might shed light on whether individuals with agrammatism can understand verb movement.
Methods & Procedures: participants were six Hebrew-speaking individuals with agrammatic aphasia. In Experiment I they paraphrased auditorily presented sentences with homophones; in Experiment 2 they read aloud and then paraphrased written sentences with heterophonic homographs. Both experiments also included, in addition to the target sentences with verb movement, matched sentences with the same homographs and homophones that did not include verb movement. Experiment 1 included 51 sentences, Experiment 2 included 48 sentences per participant.
Outcomes & Results: The individuals with agrammatic aphasia failed to read and paraphrase the sentences with verb movement. They either took the object to be the verb. read the moved verb incorrectly, said they did not understand the sentence, or said that there were two parts of the sentence that did not connect. Matched sentences with the same homophones and homographs without verb movement were comprehended significantly better. Normal subjects performed correctly in all conditions.
Conclusions: Not only is the comprehension of movement of phrases impaired in agrammatism, but also the comprehension of sentences derived by verb movement.
C1 Tel Aviv Univ, Sch Educ, IL-69978 Tel Aviv, Israel.
Reuth Med Ctr, Tel Aviv, Israel.
Loewenstein Hosp Rehabil Ctr, Raanana, Israel.
RP Friedmann, N (reprint author), Tel Aviv Univ, Sch Educ, IL-69978 Tel Aviv, Israel.
EM naamafr@post.tau.ac.il
RI Friedmann, Naama/M-2688-2013
CR Bastiaanse R, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V84, P286, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00553-9
Bastiaanse R, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P165, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1972
BORER H, 1995, NAT LANG LINGUIST TH, V13, P527, DOI 10.1007/BF00992740
Chomsky N., 1986, BARRIERS
DEGOEDE D, 2004, TIME COURSE VERB PRO
DENOUDEN DB, 2004, 5 SCI APH C POTSD GE
FRIEDMANN N, 1998, FUNCTIONAL CATEGORIE
Friedmann N, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P288, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/023)
Friedmann N, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P1037, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000236
FRIEDMANN N, 2006, BROCAS REGION
FRIEDMANN N, 1998, BAFLA FRIEDMANNS BAT
Friedmann N., 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER, P152
Friedmann N, 2001, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V30, P71, DOI 10.1023/A:1005256224207
FRIEDMANN N, 2001, VERB MOVEMENT AGRAMM
FRIEDMANN N, 2003, HOMOGRAPH READING AG
Gernsbacher M. A., 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC, P1055
Grodzinsky Y, 1998, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V10, P281, DOI 10.1162/089892998562708
GRODZINSKY Y, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P480, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90031-X
Grodzinsky Y, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P134, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2050
GRODZINSKY Y, 1991, NAT LANG LINGUIST TH, V9, P431, DOI 10.1007/BF00135354
GRODZINSKY Y, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P27, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1039
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
KOLK H, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P89, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409381
LINEBARGER MC, 1983, COGNITION, V13, P361, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90015-X
LONZI L, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P306, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1048
MARSHALL JC, 1973, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V2, P175, DOI 10.1007/BF01067101
NOVOGRODSKY R, 2003, P 19 IATL C JER IATL
ONIFER W, 1981, MEM COGNITION, V9, P225, DOI 10.3758/BF03196957
SCHWARTZ MF, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P249, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90055-3
SCHWARTZ MF, 1987, LANGUAGE COGNITIVE, V2, P55
SHAPIRO LP, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P423, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1053
SHLONSKY U, 1992, P W COAST C, V10, P431
Shlonsky U., 1997, CLAUSE STRUCTURE WOR
Vikner Sten, 1995, VERB MOVEMENT EXPLET
ZURIF E, 1983, COGNITION, V15, P207, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90041-0
Zurif E., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V1
NR 36
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 136
EP 153
DI 10.1080/02687030500472462
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000005
ER
PT J
AU Martin, N
Schwartz, MF
Kohen, FP
AF Martin, N
Schwartz, MF
Kohen, FP
TI Assessment of the ability to process semantic and phonological aspects
of words in aphasia: A multi-measurement approach
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; SPEECH PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; MODELS;
REPRESENTATIONS; RETRIEVAL; OUTPUT
AB Background: Aphasia can disrupt processing of semantic and/or phonological aspects of words and each of these domains involves multiple operations. Adequate assessment of word processing requires multiple measurements probing in each domain.
Aims: This paper aims to facilitate accurate and comprehensive testing of the multiple operations involved in semantic and phonological processing of spoken words.
Methods & Procedures: Normative data (means and standard deviations) from aphasic samples on six measures of input semantic processing and five measures of input phonological processing are provided. Additionally, scores on these measures are correlated with performance on a picture-naming test to determine whether they could predict performance in word production. The benefits of using a multi-measurement approach are discussed.
Outcome & Results: We demonstrate how these norms can be used to establish z-score profiles of an individual's semantic and phonological abilities with reference to the aphasic sample. Additionally, we provide evidence that the measures of input processing on the semantic and phonological batteries can predict response patterns in a production task, picture naming. z-scores on the measures were positively correlated with picture-naming accuracy, and measures in each domain followed a predicted pattern of correlation with error patterns in naming.
Conclusions: Using the means and standard deviations from this study, a clinician or researcher can establish z-score profiles of participants that will indicate the severity of semantic or phonological impairment compared with other individuals with aphasia. Comparison with this reference group will aid in the development of a therapy programme that is at an appropriate level of difficulty and will facilitate interpretation of progress being made in treatment. Additionally, this battery of input measures can be used to estimate patterns of output (correct and erroneous responses) in picture naming.
C1 Temple Univ, Dept Commun Sci, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA USA.
RP Martin, N (reprint author), Temple Univ, Dept Commun Sci, Weiss Hall,Room 110,1701 N 13th St, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
CR Chute D. L., 1990, MACLABORATORY PSYCHO
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
Dell GS, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P125, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000320
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
Fink RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1061, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000400
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
FRANCIS WN, 1982, FRQUENCY ANAL ENGLIS
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Hillis A. E., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
HILLIS AE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251996
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TRESS
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LAMBONRALPH MA, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P56
LEVELT WJM, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90038-J
Martin N, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P107, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000447
Martin N, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P641
Martin N., 1999, INT J PSYCHOL, V34, P330
MARTIN N, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P240, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90130-7
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000129
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Norman D. A., 1970, MODELS HUM MEMORY, P203
Roach A., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P121
Saffran EM, 2003, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V18, P725, DOI 10.1080/01690960344000107
SAFFRAN EM, 1987, PHILADELPHIA COMPREH
SCHWARTZ MF, IN PRESS J MEMORY LA
WARRINGT.EK, 1969, BRAIN, V92, P885, DOI 10.1093/brain/92.4.885
NR 29
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 154
EP 166
DI 10.1080/02687030500472520
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000006
ER
PT J
AU McNeil, MR
Matthews, CT
Hula, WD
Doyle, PJ
Fossett, TRD
AF McNeil, MR
Matthews, CT
Hula, WD
Doyle, PJ
Fossett, TRD
TI Effects of visual-manual tracking under dual-task conditions on auditory
language comprehension and story retelling in persons with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID RESOURCE-ALLOCATION; DIVIDED ATTENTION; PERFORMANCE; INDIVIDUALS; FMRI
AB Background: Two recent studies (McNeil et al., 2004, 2005) evaluated non-brain-injured (N-BI) elderly persons' dual-task performance oil a story retell procedure (SRP) and a visual-manual line-tracking task. Results of both studies demonstrated a unidirectional cost whereby the difficulty of the language task had an effect on tracking performance; however, the difficulty of the tracking task had no effect on language comprehension as indexed by story retelling.
Aims: The specific aim of this investigation was to assess the effects of performing a concurrent visual-manual tracking task on the comprehension of stories in persons with aphasia (PWA).
Methods & Procedures: The current study evaluated the performance trading in these tasks in PWA using similar dual-task procedures as those employed ill the McNeil et al (2004 2005) studies. Specifically, two tracking difficulty levels were used to assess concurrent costs under a single difficulty level of the SRP.
Outcomes & Results: The results of this study replicate, in PWA, the null effect of tracking, difficulty on story retell performance that was found in the two earlier studies in N-BI elderly persons. Contrary to predictions, there was no significant effect of tracking difficulty on story retell performance. There was also no significant difference between story comprehension or visual manual-tracking tasks performed alone or in the competing conditions.
Conclusions: The results of this study do not support the hypothesis that a deficit in allocating processing resources in PWA would result in a concurrent cost of tracking difficulty on story comprehension. The results are discussed relative to the limitations of the story retell procedure for indexing potential dual-task effects and relative to the possible structure of the shared cognitive architecture used in these specific dual-tasks.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
Ctr Geriatr Res Educ & Clin, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP McNeil, MR (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
EM mcneil@pitt.edu
CR Arvedson J. C., 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P188
ARVEDSON JC, 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V16, P57
Backs RW, 1997, ACTA PSYCHOL, V96, P167, DOI 10.1016/S0001-6918(97)00010-3
BAYLES KA, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P74
BAYLES KA, 1993, ARIZON BATTERY COMMU
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1997, DISCOURSE COMPREHEN
Clark H. M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P143
DISIMONI FG, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P511
DOYLE PJ, 1998, QUANTIFYING SPOKEN L
Erickson RJ, 1996, BRAIN COGNITION, V30, P244, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1996.0016
Granier JP, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P501
ISREAL JB, 1980, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V17, P259, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1980.tb00146.x
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
McNeil MR, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P521, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000138
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P901
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
McNeill MR, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000895
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
Murray LL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P401, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248480
Navon D., 1980, ATTENTION PERFORM, P297
Navon D, 2002, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V44, P193, DOI 10.1006/cogp.2001.0767
Pashler H.E., 1998, PSYCHOL ATTENTION
Schubert T, 2003, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V17, P733, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(03)00198-8
Szameitat AJ, 2002, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V14, P1184, DOI 10.1162/089892902760807195
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
WILSON RH, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P223
NR 26
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 167
EP 174
DI 10.1080/02687030500472660
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000007
ER
PT J
AU Olness, GS
AF Olness, GS
TI Genre, verb, and coherence in picture-elicited discourse of adults with
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID DUTCH
AB Background: Discourse coherence is derived, in part, from the relationship between and among words and sentences. In studies of aphasia, the relationship between discourse-level and sentence-level phenomena may be examined through the verb. In clinical picture elicitations of discourse, the nature of the pictures or the accompanying elicitation instructions may influence the discourse genre of the response (descriptive vs narrative), which in turn may place different linguistic demands (e.g., verb production demands) on the speaker with aphasia.
Aims: This study explores aphasic speakers' partial construction of discourse coherence through relationships between and among action, background, and setting information carried largely by the verb, in picture-elicited discourse productions of two different genres: descriptive and narrative.
Methods & Procedures: Twelve individuals with aphasia of mild to moderate severity were presented with five pictures: two composite and three complex. Verbal discourse responses were elicited with common clinical instructions. For the three complex pictures, discourse was also elicited with instructions that explicitly requested temporal sequencing. Discourse genre (descriptive vs narrative) of each response was determined. Verbs within each response were categorised on dimensions of form (tense) and function (degree of association with storyline).
Outcomes & Results: For common clinical elicitations, discourse genre was descriptive, verb tense was present and/or non-finite, and verbs filled background and setting functions, regardless of picture type. For elicitations that requested temporal sequencing, participants produced more narrative discourse genre, and more past tense and storyline function on verbs. Exceptions to the group patterns are discussed and exemplified.
Conclusions: The patterns of group results and the exceptions to these patterns provide insights into the relationship between the discourse and sentence levels, and the ability of individuals with aphasia to negotiate this relationship in their discourse productions. Findings also hold methodological implications for sampling discourse production among individuals with aphasia.
C1 UTD, Callier Ctr, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
RP Olness, GS (reprint author), UTD, Callier Ctr, 1966 Inwood Rd, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
EM golness@utdallas.edu
CR Armstrong E, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P875, DOI 10.1080/02687030050127685
Bastiaanse R, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P91, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00306-7
Bastiaanse R, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P165, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1972
BOTTENBERG D, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P202
Cartier-Bresson H., 1952, DECISIVE MOMENT
FEATHERMAN DL, 1980, 7948 U WISCONSIN
GIVON T, SYNTAX FUNCTIONAL TY, V1
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Green L., 1998, AFRICAN AM ENGLISH S, P37
HOPPER PJ, 1980, LANGUAGE, V56, P251, DOI 10.2307/413757
KERTESZ, 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LONGACRE RE, 1989, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V12, P413
Longacre R. E., 1996, GRAMMAR DISCOURSE, V2nd
Luria AR, 1962, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
MYERS PS, 1984, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, V14, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Olness G. S., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P623, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000095
POTECHIN GC, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P216
Rubin C., 2001, CAPTURE MOMENT PULIT
Ulatowska Hanna K., 1991, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI, P115
Ulatowska HK, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P42, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.024
Ulatowska HK, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P249, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2261
NR 22
TC 18
Z9 18
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 175
EP 187
DI 10.1080/02687030500472710
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000008
ER
PT J
AU Gordon, JK
AF Gordon, JK
TI A quantitative production analysis of picture description
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID CONNECTED SPEECH SAMPLES; BROCAS APHASIA; AGRAMMATIC PRODUCTION; FLUENT;
ADULTS; RETRIEVAL; LANGUAGE; SPEAKERS; VERB
AB Background. The Quantitative Production Analysis (QPA) (Berndt et al., 2000; Saffran et al., 1989) was developed to provide an objective means of characterising the grammaticality of spontaneous speech in aphasia. However, there is still no consensus as to the profile of performance, on this or any other measure, that identifies agrammatism.
Aim: The aim of this study is to advance the effort to characterise agrammatic speech production, by examining the influence of aphasia severity and fluency on patterns of QPA scores obtained from a broad range of individuals with aphasia. The goal of this process is to identify the quantitative variables most predictive of agrammatism.
Methods & Procedures: Spontaneous speech samples were elicited from non-brain-damaged (NBD) older subjects and a group of participants with aphasia unselected by diagnosis, and analysed using the QPA. Data from the NBD and aphasia groups were statistically compared and correlated with ratings of severity. Fluent and non-fluent subjects within the group with aphasia were then compared. Last, the nonfluent group was explored for evidence of agrammatism.
Outcomes & Results: Many of the QPA's measures were found to reflect the severity of aphasia and/or the fluency of speech production, suggesting that results on these measures may not be indicative of agrammatism per se. In particular, measures of output productivity (the amount and efficiency of production) were largely determined by aphasia severity, and measures of lexical selection were related to the fluency of production. Profiles of the non-fluent subjects also varied widely, reinforcing the dissociability of different grammatical functions.
Conclusions: None of the QPA's measures could be interpreted to reflect agrammatism alone; in fact, many appeared to be reflective of aphasia severity or fluency. Diagnoses of agrammatism still depend on clinical judgement; however, this judgement is aided greatly by the array of objective quantitative information provided by the QPA.
C1 Univ Iowa, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
RP Gordon, JK (reprint author), Univ Iowa, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, 125 B,WJSHC, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
EM jean-k-gordon@uiowa.edu
CR BADECKER W, 1986, COGNITION, V24, P277, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(86)80005-1
BARNDT RS, 2000, QUANTITATIVE PRODUCT
Bastiaanse R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248437
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Bird H, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P187, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00006-1
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P399
CAPLAN D, 1986, COGNITION, V24, P263, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(86)80004-X
CRAIG HK, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P155, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249503
EDWARDS S, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P333
GLEASON JB, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P451, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80083-6
Goodglass H., 2001, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V3rd
Goodglass H., 1964, CORTEX, V1, P133, DOI [10.1016/S0010-9452(64)80018-6, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(64)80018-6]
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Gordon JK, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V82, P113, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00001-9
Hesketh A, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P49, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248398
Hollingshead A. B., 1975, 4 FACTOR INDEX SOCIA
Edwards S, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P99, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250466
KEAN ML, 1977, COGNITION, V5, P9, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(77)90015-4
KEGL J, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P151, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1044
KOLK H, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P221, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249075
KOLK H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P282, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1049
KOLK H, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P89, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409381
Maxwell SE, 1990, DESIGNING EXPT ANAL
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
MICELI G, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P447, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90079-5
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Rochon E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P193, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2285
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
Thomas D, 1995, PMA TECH SYMP PROC, V5, P1
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
ZINGESER LB, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P473, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253270
NR 32
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 188
EP 204
DI 10.1080/02687030500472777
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000009
ER
PT J
AU Capilouto, GJ
Wright, HH
Wagovich, SA
AF Capilouto, GJ
Wright, HH
Wagovich, SA
TI Reliability of main event measurement in the discourse of individuals
with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID CLOSED-HEAD-INJURY; TRAUMATIC BRAIN-INJURY; NARRATIVE DISCOURSE;
CONNECTED SPEECH; ADULTS; COMPREHENSION; STORY
AB Background: Quantitative measures of discourse skills of adults with aphasia can be valuable in documenting evidenced-based practice. Comprehensive assessment of narrative discourse should include a measure of the ability to relay main events (Nicholas & Brookshire, 1995; Wright, Capilouto, Wagovich, Cranfill, & Davis, 2005). Wright et al. (2005) compared the ability of younger and older healthy adults to relate main events in response to pictured stimuli. Results indicated that the younger group produced a significantly higher proportion of main events as compared to the older group and that the main events measure was stable for individual participants over time. However, performance data and data supporting the stability of the main events measure for individuals with aphasia are needed to extend the clinical usefulness of the main events measure as an assessment tool.
Aims: The purpose of this study was (a) to compare the performance of healthy adults and adults with aphasia on their ability to convey main events in pictured stimuli and (b) to establish session-to-session reliability of the authors' main events measure.
Methods & Procedures: Eight adults with aphasia (APH) and eight neurologically intact adults (NI) participated in the study. Participants attended two sessions, 7-21 days apart. Each time, participants gave an account of the events from two pictures and two picture sequences (Nicholas & Brookshire, 1993). The resulting language samples were analysed for the proportion of main events conveyed, and test-retest reliability of the measure was assessed.
Outcomes & Results: NI adults told a significantly higher proportion of main events than adults with aphasia. The main effect for picture stimulus was also significant; participants told significantly more main events in response to sequential versus single picture stimuli, regardless of group. Test-retest results yielded strong, positive correlations between sessions for both groups.
Conclusions: Results indicate that adults with and without aphasia differ in their ability to express the relations and causal links among units of information. Results also indicate that Wright and colleagues' (2005) main events measure demonstrates sufficient stability to provide the foundation for its potential use as a pre- and post-treatment measure. Finally, the finding that the proportion of main events provided in response to stimuli varied according to the nature of the stimuli is consistent with the findings of Wright et al. (2005) and suggests that even for individuals with aphasia, relationships between elements depicted in pictures may be more easily identified and conveyed when sequential pictures are provided as stimuli.
C1 Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
Arizona State Univ, Tempe, AZ USA.
Univ Missouri, Columbia, MO USA.
RP Capilouto, GJ (reprint author), Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, 900 S Limestone,CTW Bldg, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
EM gjcapi2@uky.edu
CR Armstrong E, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P875, DOI 10.1080/02687030050127685
BOND S, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C
BROWNELL HH, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P247, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248918
Capilouto G, 2005, J COMMUN DISORD, V38, P431, DOI 10.1016/j.jcomdis.2005.03.005
CAPLAN D, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P206, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90012-6
CHAPMAN SB, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P42, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90020-F
COELHO CA, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P409, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248707
Coelho CA, 2002, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V45, P1232, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2002/099)
Cooper P. V., 1990, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V45, P210
Davis GA, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P508, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.01.003
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Goodglass H, 2000, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
HEATH SB, 1986, TOP LANG DISORD, V7, P84
KERTESZ A, 1982, WK APHASIA BATTERY
KINTSCH W, 1978, PSYCHOL REV, V85, P363, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.85.5.363
LILES BZ, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P356
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
OLNESS G, 2005, CLIN APH C SAN FLOR
Olness G. S., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P623, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000095
POTECHIN GG, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P216
PRINS RS, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V6, P192, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90058-5
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
SKA B, 2004, MIT ENCY COMMUNICAT
Tucker FM, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P783
ULATOWSKA H, 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P191
ULATOWSKA HK, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V13, P345, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90100-0
Ulatowska HK, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P511, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000102
Ulatowska HK, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P249, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2261
WALLACH GP, 1988, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Wright HH, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P263, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000732
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
NR 34
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 205
EP 216
DI 10.1080/02687030500473122
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000010
ER
PT J
AU Lasker, JP
Garrett, KL
AF Lasker, JP
Garrett, KL
TI Using the Multimodal Communication Screening Test for Persons with
Aphasia (MCST-A) to guide the selection of alternative communication
strategies for people with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
AB Background: People with severe communication problems associated with aphasia and concomitant apraxia of speech are often unable to meet their daily communication needs through speech alone. For these people, augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) strategies may offer opportunities for improved communication effectiveness. However, it can be challenging to determine if individuals can learn to use alternative communication strategies independently or if they will require assistance from conversational partners to participate in meaningful communication interactions.
Aims: The authors developed an assessment tool, the Multimodal Communication Screening Task for Persons with Aphasia (MCST-A; Garrett & Lasker, 2005b), to help clinicians differentiate those individuals who would benefit most from partner-dependent communication strategies (e.g., written choice conversation, partner-presented symbol choices, tagged yes/no questions) and those who could learn to use AAC systems (e.g., digitised speech devices that store complete messages; multi-level devices with stored messages and spelling capabilities) to communicate independently. This article describes the tool and its administration protocol. We also compare MCSTA scores to profiles of actual communication strategy use for four individuals across a range of aphasia severity.
Methods & Procedures: Four individuals with communication disabilities associated with aphasia were asked to locate pictorial, textual, or graphic symbols from an eight-page stimulus manual to communicate simple needs and complex concepts, complete simple categories, tell and retell stories, or use partial spelling to convey novel information. Accuracy of responses and the amount and type of cueing required to complete each simulated communication task were tallied for each individual. MCST-A test results are discussed in light of each individual's observed pattern of AAC strategy and system use both during and following functional communication treatment.
Results: Descriptive analyses of the four cases revealed a correspondence between MCST-A test scores, level of impairment as measured by the Western Aphasia Battery (Kertesz, 1982), and patterns of communication strategy use. The two individuals who received the lowest response accuracy scores and the highest cueing scores on the MCST-A were primarily dependent on partner-supported communication strategies in their daily lives. The two individuals with the lowest cueing scores and highest response accuracy scores had learned to use complex AAC communication devices to communicate independently and generatively in community settings.
Conclusions: The hierarchy of scores seen on the MCST-A corresponded with individuals' abilities to communicate using AAC strategies after participating in functional therapy. The MCST-A may guide clinicians in identifying the most appropriate AAC strategies for individuals with aphasia. Further validation is warranted.
C1 Florida State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
Duquesne Univ, Pittsburgh, PA 15219 USA.
RP Lasker, JP (reprint author), Florida State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, 305 Reg Rehabil Ctr, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
EM joanne.lasker@comm.fsu.edu
CR BEUKELMAN D, 2005, AAC APHASIA REV VIS
DIETZ A, 2005, 2005 AM SPEECH LANG
GARRETT K, 1998, AUGMENTATIVE COMMUNI, P465
Garrett K, 1995, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V23, P203
Garrett KL, 2000, AUG ALTER COMMUN SER, P339
Garrett K. L., 2005, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, P467
GARRETT KL, 2005, MULTIMODAL COMMUNIC
GARRY F, 1989, VET CLIN N AM-FOOD A, V5, P55
GOODGLASS H, 1993, UNDERSTANING APHASIA
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KRAAT AW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249086
LASKER JP, 2002, PERSPECTICES AUGMENT, V1, P14
Lasker JP, 2001, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V17, P141, DOI 10.1080/714043378
Lasker JP, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000840
MCKELVEY M, 2005, PERFORMANCE PEOPLE C
STIERWALT JAG, 2004, 26 WORLD C INT ASS L
van de Sandt-Koenderman M, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P245, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000571
WALLACE GL, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V50, P385
Wood CA, 1998, CLIN GERIATR MED, V14, P267
NR 19
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 217
EP 232
DI 10.1080/02687030500473411
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000011
ER
PT J
AU King, KA
Hough, MS
Vos, P
Walker, MM
Givens, G
AF King, KA
Hough, MS
Vos, P
Walker, MM
Givens, G
TI Word retrieval following mild TBI: Implications for categorical deficits
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID TRAUMATIC BRAIN-INJURY; REPRESENTATION; PATIENT; OBJECTS; NOUNS; VERBS
AB Background: Theories on the organisation and structure of semantic knowledge of nouns and verbs have been based on findings with aphasic patients with focal lesions. Populations with diffuse lesions, such as mild traumatic brain injury (MTBI), may offer additional information relative to lexical access of nouns and verbs. Aims: The purpose of this study was to investigate possible dissociation between noun and verb retrieval after MTBI using the Test of Adolescent Adult Word Finding (TAWF).
Methods & Procedures: Two groups, 10 MTBI and 10 non-brain-damaged (NBD) persons, who had normal vision and hearing, and no history of developmental disabilities, previous head injury, or substance abuse, were participants. Criteria for MTBI included: loss of consciousness < 30 minutes and/or PTA < 24 hours, GCS 13-15, and negative CT scan. The experimental task was the TAWF, focusing on differences in accuracy and response time for noun and verb naming.
Outcomes & Results: Paired sample t-tests comparing nouns and verbs on accuracy and response time revealed no significant differences for the MTBI group; for the NBD group, there were significant differences for response time only. One-tailed independent sample t-tests revealed significant group differences for accuracy and response time on combined nouns and only response time for verbs. Paired sample t-tests revealed significant differences for naming living and nonliving items only for the MTBI group.
Conclusions: No significant accuracy differences were found for either group between nouns and verbs. However, the NBD group named nouns significantly faster than verbs, whereas the MTBI group showed no significant difference. The MTBI group was significantly slower and less accurate than the NBD group for noun naming but only significantly slower for verbs. The MTBI group exhibited higher accuracy in naming living items as compared to nonliving. Therefore, response times appeared to be more sensitive than accuracy in identifying group differences.
C1 E Carolina Univ, Greenville, NC USA.
RP King, KA (reprint author), 108 A Sunshine Lane, Winterville, NC 28590 USA.
EM kak1002@mail.ecu.edu
CR ABVOUD H, 1997, SUPERLAB PRO SAN PED
Adamovich B, 1992, SCALES COGNITIVE ABI
*ASHA PAN AUD ASS, 1996, ASHA DESK REF, V4, P333
Barrow IM, 2003, J TRAUMA, V54, P888, DOI 10.1097/01.TA.0000057150.60668.7C
Barth J. T., 1986, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V1, P63
Bird H, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V76, P213, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2432
Bird H, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P246, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2292
Caramazza A, 1998, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V10, P1, DOI 10.1162/089892998563752
Colohan A. R. T., 1986, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V1, P13
Dunn L. M., 1998, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Gomes H, 1997, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V6, P121, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(97)00023-2
HILLIS AE, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P396, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.3.396
JEANETTE B, 1974, LANCET, V1, P81
KING K, 2005, MILD TRAUMATIC BRAIN
Laforce R, 2001, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V93, P281, DOI 10.2466/PMS.93.4.281-288
Lu LH, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1608, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00014-3
Paniak C, 1998, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V20, P852
RAVEN JC, 1956, STANDARD PROGRESSIVE
RUFF RM, 1986, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V1, P43
Shapiro K, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V76, P202, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2397
Shelton JR, 1999, PSYCHON B REV, V6, P5, DOI 10.3758/BF03210809
Soros P, 2003, NEUROIMAGE, V19, P1787, DOI 10.1016/S1053-8119(03)00217-9
Tyler LK, 2001, BRAIN, V124, P1619, DOI 10.1093/brain/124.8.1619
Wallesch CW, 2001, BRAIN INJURY, V15, P401, DOI 10.1080/02699050010005959
NR 25
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 233
EP 245
DI 10.1080/02687030500473155
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000012
ER
PT J
AU Hillis, AE
Heidler-Gary, J
Newhart, M
Chang, S
Ken, L
Bak, TH
AF Hillis, AE
Heidler-Gary, J
Newhart, M
Chang, S
Ken, L
Bak, TH
TI Naming and comprehension in primary progressive aphasia: The influence
of grammatical word class
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID MOTOR-NEURON DISEASE; FRONTOTEMPORAL DEMENTIA; SPEECH ARTICULATION;
SEMANTIC DEMENTIA; VERBS; LANGUAGE; REGIONS; DETERIORATION;
DISSOCIATION; PATHOLOGY
AB Background: Various clinical types of primary progressive aphasia have been associated with distinct areas of atrophy and pathological changes. Therefore, differences in the patterns of language deterioration in the various types might reveal the types of language processes and representations that depend on the areas of brain that are disproportionately affected.
Aims: To test the hypotheses (1) that individuals with progressive nonfluent aphasia (associated with left posterior, inferior frontal, and insular atrophy) show progressive motor speech impairment and disproportionate deterioration in naming actions relative to objects, and (2) that individuals with semantic dementia (associated with anterior and inferior temporal atrophy) show disproportionate deterioration in semantic representations of objects relative to actions.
Methods & Procedures: The study population consisted of 56 participants with primary progressive aphasia, including 27 with progressive nonfluent aphasia, 16 with semantic dementia, and 13 with amyotrophic lateral sclerosis-frontotemporal dementia (ALSFTD). Participants were given tests of oral and written naming and tests of picture and word association with object and action stimuli. Differences across tests within each group were evaluated. Associations between motor speech impairment (based on a clinical motor speech examination) and naming impairment in each grammatical word class were evaluated.
Outcomes & Results: Participants with progressive nonfluent aphasia and ALS-FTD showed significantly more impairment in naming actions than objects. In contrast, participants with semantic dementia were significantly more impaired in naming objects than actions, and more impaired on semantic tests of objects relative to actions. In all groups, all participants who were more impaired in naming actions also had impaired motor speech (dysarthria and/or apraxia of speech).
Conclusions: Distinct patterns of deterioration across grammatical word classes in these clinical subtypes were documented. Together with evidence that these clinical subtypes are associated with different areas of brain atrophy in other studies, our results are consistent with a role of posterior inferior frontal cortex and insula in motor speech and naming actions, as well as the essential role of anterior temporal lobes in semantic representation of objects.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Sch Med, Johns Hopkins Hosp, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
Johns Hopkins Univ, Sch Med, Baltimore, MD USA.
MRC, Cognit & Brain Sci Unit, Cambridge, England.
Addenbrookes Hosp, Cambridge, England.
RP Hillis, AE (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ, Sch Med, Johns Hopkins Hosp, Phipps 126,600 N Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
EM argye@JHMI.edu
CR BAK TH, IN PRESS BRAIN
Bak TH, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P169, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(02)00011-8
Bak TH, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P354, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00357-2
Bak TH, 2001, BRAIN, V124, P103, DOI 10.1093/brain/124.1.103
Broca Paul, 1865, B SOC ANTHROPOL PAR, V6, P337
DANIELE A, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P1325, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)00066-2
Davies RR, 2005, BRAIN, V128, P1984, DOI 10.1093/brain/awh582
Dronkers NF, 1996, NATURE, V384, P159, DOI 10.1038/384159a0
Gorno-Tempini ML, 2004, ANN NEUROL, V55, P335, DOI 10.1002/ana.10825
Gorno-Tempini ML, 2004, NEUROCASE, V10, P426, DOI 10.1080/13554790490894011
Hillis AE, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P523, DOI 10.1080/02643290244000077
Hillis AE, 2004, ANN NEUROL, V55, P268, DOI 10.1002/ana.10812
Hillis AE, 2003, NAT NEUROSCI, V6, P19, DOI 10.1038/nn982
Hillis AE, 2002, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V14, P1099, DOI 10.1162/089892902320474544
Hillis AE, 2004, BRAIN, V127, P1479, DOI 10.1093/brain/awh172
Hodges JR, 2004, ANN NEUROL, V56, P399, DOI 10.1002/ana.20230
HOLLAND AL, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P36, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90096-3
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kemmerer D, 2003, NEUROCASE, V9, P421, DOI 10.1076/neur.9.5.421.16551
Kersaitis C, 2004, ACTA NEUROPATHOL, V108, P515, DOI 10.1007/s00401-004-0917-0
Kertesz A, 2005, BRAIN, V128, P1996, DOI 10.1093/brain/awh598
MESULAM MM, 1982, ANN NEUROL, V11, P592, DOI 10.1002/ana.410110607
Mesulam MM, 2003, ANN NEUROL, V54, pS11, DOI 10.1002/ana.10569
MOHR J. P., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V1
Neary D, 1998, NEUROLOGY, V51, P1546
Rowland L. P., 1995, MERRITTS TXB NEUROLO, P742
Tranel D, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P655, DOI 10.1080/02643290126377
ZINGESER LB, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P473, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253270
NR 28
TC 21
Z9 21
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 246
EP 256
DI 10.1080/02687030500473262
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000013
ER
PT J
AU Raymer, AM
Kohen, FP
Saffell, D
AF Raymer, AM
Kohen, FP
Saffell, D
TI Computerised training for impairments of word comprehension and
retrieval in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID NAMING DISORDERS; THERAPY
AB Background: Semantic comprehension training paired with verbal production leads to improved word retrieval in individuals with aphasia. Few studies have also examined effects of such training for word comprehension. MossTalk Words includes a training module to provide semantic comprehension training via computerised exercises. Variations in the treatment schedule may influence the impact of word retrieval and comprehension treatment gains.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to investigate the effects of the Multi-Mode Matching Exercises module of MossTalk Words for improving word comprehension and retrieval in individuals with aphasia. Effects of training were contrasted for two treatment schedules.
Methods & Procedures: Five individuals with word retrieval impairments associated with aphasia participated. Two had word comprehension difficulties suggesting semantic anomia, and three others with intact comprehension had impairments suggesting phonologic anomia. In a single-participant design, we investigated effects of training provided via computer with MossTalk multi-mode matching exercises (spoken and written word/picture matching) paired with spoken rehearsal. All participated in two phases of training administered 1-2 times/week and 3-4 times/week, with order of phases counterbalanced across participants.
Outcomes & Results: Improvements in word/picture yes/no verification for trained and some untrained words associated with large effect sizes (d > 2.5) were evident in one of two participants when trained 1-2 times/week. Increases in picture naming associated with large effect sizes for trained words were noted in 515 participants when trained 4-5 times/week, and in 2/5 participants when trained 1-2 times/week. Increases in picture naming for untrained words were evident in 2/5 participants in the more frequent training schedule. At I month post training, picture naming performance remained above baseline levels, with little difference evident between sets trained with the two different training schedules.
Conclusions: Computerised lexical training exercises may lead to increases in word comprehension and production, particularly for the target words trained. More frequent training leads to greater improvements during acquisition than less frequent training, but that advantage diminishes at 1 month post treatment, suggesting that a less frequent training schedule may be just as useful as more frequent training for promoting long-term effects of lexical training.
C1 Old Dominion Univ, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
VA Brain Rehabil Res Ctr, Gainesville, FL USA.
Temple Univ, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
RP Raymer, AM (reprint author), Old Dominion Univ, 110 Child Study Ctr, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
EM sraymer@odu.edu
CR Bhogal SK, 2003, STROKE, V34, P987, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000062343.64383.D0
Busk P. L., 1992, SINGLE CASE RES DESI, P159
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
FINK RB, 2001, MOSSTALK WORDS COMPU
Fink RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1061, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000400
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P469
Hinckley JJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P989, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249465
Kaplan E., 2001, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
McReynolds L. V., 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
PETHERAM B, 2004, COMPUTERS APHASIA
PRING T, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P479, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248788
RAYMER AM, 2005, APHASIA RELATED NEUR, P68
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
Schmitt RJ, 1996, DISORDERS MOTOR SPEE, P3
WILSHIRE CE, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P82
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 19
TC 17
Z9 18
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 257
EP 268
DI 10.1080/02687030500473312
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000014
ER
PT J
AU Cameron, RM
Wambaugh, JL
Wright, SM
Nessler, CL
AF Cameron, RM
Wambaugh, JL
Wright, SM
Nessler, CL
TI Effects of a combined semantic/phonologic cueing treatment on word
retrieval in discourse
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID SEMANTIC FEATURE ANALYSIS; CONNECTED SPEECH; NAMING DEFICITS; FLUENT
APHASIA; THERAPY; CONTEXT
AB Background: The application of word-finding treatments for aphasia, as well as the study of their effects, has typically centred on retrieval of single lexical items (Nickels, 2002b). Little is known about the effects of word-finding treatments on lexical retrieval in discourse tasks.
Aims: The purpose of this investigation was to study the effects of a combined semantic/phonologic cueing treatment on trained and untrained single words produced in the context of story retells. Generalisation to additional connected speech tasks was also assessed.
Methods & Procedures: A well-studied story retell procedure (Doyle et al., 2000) was used to guide selection of items for treatment and for measurement of treatment effects. A semantic/phonologic cueing hierarchy was applied to information units (IUs) that were consistently absent from the story retells produced by five participants with aphasia. Treatment effects on retrieval of targeted IUs and overall IUs were measured using single-subject multiple-baseline designs. Analyses of efficiency and informativeness of additional discourse tasks were performed prior to and following intervention.
Outcomes & Results: Four of five participants demonstrated improved retrieval of targeted IUs and negligible generalisation to production of overall IUs for both treated story forms. The remaining participant exhibited minimal improvements in production of both targeted and untrained IUs for both applications of treatment, but was the only individual who increased informativeness of discourse on a post-treatment measure of connected speech.
Conclusions: Findings indicated that a combined semantic/phonologic cueing treatment may be effective for increasing production of targeted words at a discourse level for some individuals with aphasia, but the effects may vary across speakers.
C1 VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, Salt Lake City, UT 84148 USA.
Univ Utah, Salt Lake City, UT USA.
RP Cameron, RM (reprint author), VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, 151A Bldg 2,500 Foothill Blvd, Salt Lake City, UT 84148 USA.
EM Rosalea.Cameron@med.va.gov
CR Boyle M, 2004, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V13, P236, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2004/025)
Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P94
Boyle M., 2004, DISCOURSE TREATMENT
Brookshire R. H., 1997, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
Chapman S B, 1992, Clin Commun Disord, V2, P64
Coelho CA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P133
Doyle PJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P537
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Herbert R, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P1163, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000454
KAY J, 1992, PSYCOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1980, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kiran S, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P608, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/048)
Mayer JF, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P481, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000148
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1047, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000618
Pashek GV, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P261, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000573
PORCH B, 2001, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V1
RAVEN J, 1988, COLOURED PROGRESSIVE
Raymer A. M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P524
STOKES TF, 1977, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V10, P349, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1977.10-349
Thompson C. K., 1989, GEN STRATEGIES TREAT, P82
Wambaugh J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P979, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000471
Wambaugh JL, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P433, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000085
Wambaugh JL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P603
WILLIAMS SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P92, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90007-4
NR 29
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 269
EP 285
DI 10.1080/02687030500473387
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000015
ER
PT J
AU Rodriguez, AD
Raymer, AM
Rothi, LJG
AF Rodriguez, AD
Raymer, AM
Rothi, LJG
TI Effects of gesture plus verbal and semantic-phonologic treatments for
verb retrieval in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID NOUNS; ANOMIA
AB Background. Reports have indicated that gesture+verbal treatments and semantic-phonologic treatments are effective for improving lexical retrieval in aphasia. Most studies focus on noun production, with verb production less commonly reported. Because of links between verbs and gesture knowledge, verbs may be particularly amenable to gesture+verbal training.
Aims: The purpose of this investigation was to study the effects of gesture+verbal and semantic-phonologic treatments on verb retrieval in patients with chronic aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: We report treatment results for four individuals, three men and one woman, with aphasia and verb retrieval impairments subsequent to left hemisphere stroke more than 8 months earlier. Word retrieval impairment was semantically based in one participant, phonologically based in another, and mixed semantic+phonologic in two others. In a single-participant experimental treatment design, we investigated the effects of gesture+verbal treatment and semantic-phonologic treatment for verb retrieval in two 10-session training phases. The effects of treatment were evaluated in a verb picture-naming task in which spoken naming and gestured responses were coded.
Outcomes & Results: Spoken naming improvements associated with large effect sizes were noted in one participant during both the semantic-phonologic training and gesture+verbal training. Gesture production improved in two other participants with severe anomia during gesture+verbal training. No improvements were evident in untrained words during either training phase.
Conclusions: Gesture+verbal training and semantic-phonologic training led to similar patterns of treatment results for verb spoken naming. The individual with phonologically based anomia responded better in treatment than the other three whose naming impairments were associated with semantic dysfunction. The item-specific improvement in spoken naming for trained verbs only suggests that both treatments may affect individual lexical representations engaged during word retrieval. Gesture+verbal treatment may encourage use of a viable means of gestural communication for those who do not improve verbal production, even in the presence of severe limb apraxia.
C1 Old Dominion Univ, Ctr Child Study 110, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
VA Brain Rehabil Res Ctr, Gainesville, FL USA.
Univ Florida, Gainesville, FL USA.
RP Raymer, AM (reprint author), Old Dominion Univ, Ctr Child Study 110, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
EM sraymer@odu.edu
RI Rodriguez, Amy/F-8332-2011
CR Busk P. L., 1992, SINGLE CASE RES DESI, P159
DAMASIO AR, 1993, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V90, P4957, DOI 10.1073/pnas.90.11.4957
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
Druks J, 2002, J NEUROLINGUIST, V15, P289, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00029-X
Kaplan E., 2001, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KIM M, 2005, 35 ANN CLIN APH C
MITCHUM CC, 2001, ASHA DIVISION 2 NEUR, V11, P4
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
OBLER LK, 1986, UNPUB ACTION NAMING
Pashek GV, 1997, J COMMUN DISORD, V30, P349, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(96)00079-2
PRING T, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P479, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248788
Ralph MAL, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P56, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000448
Raymer A. M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P524
Raymer AM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1031, DOI 10.1080/026870401430000609
RAYMER AM, 2005, APHASIA RELATED NEUR, P68
RAYMER AM, 2001, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V7, P248
RAYMER AM, 2004, ASHA LEADER, V9, P120
RAYMER AM, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P285
Rose M, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1001, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000825
Rose M, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P977
Rothi L. J. G., 1997, APRAXIA NEUROPSYCHOL, P61
ROTHI LJG, 1995, COMPENSATING PSYCHOL, P219
Shapiro KA, 2005, NEUROIMAGE, V24, P1058, DOI 10.1016/j.neuroimage.2004.10.015
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 25
TC 34
Z9 35
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 286
EP 297
DI 10.1080/02687030500474898
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000016
ER
PT J
AU Bastiaanse, R
Hurkmans, J
Links, P
AF Bastiaanse, R
Hurkmans, J
Links, P
TI The training of verb production in Broca's aphasia: A multiple-baseline
across-behaviours study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID AGRAMMATIC APHASIA; ARGUMENT STRUCTURE; SYNTACTIC COMPLEXITY; TREATMENT
EFFICACY; RETRIEVAL; DEFICITS; ORDER
AB Background: Verb production is often impaired in Broca's aphasia: Action naming is more affected than object naming and in spontaneous speech the number and/or diversity of lexical verbs is low. Because verbs play a pivotal role in the sentence, these verb problems have a serious impact on the communicative contents of speech in daily life.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to increase the informational content of spontaneous speech in two individuals with Broca's aphasia by training them in verb production.
Methods & Procedures: Verb production was trained at the sentence level, using the treatment programme Verb Production at the Word and Sentence Level (Bastiaanse, Jonkers, Quak, & Varela, 1997). Six baseline sessions were planned, followed by a training programme to learn infinitives, finite verbs, and sentence construction in one participant and finite verbs, infinitives, and sentences in the other. The participants were tested each week for progress on infinitives and finite verbs not in the programme and an unrelated test. Pre-treatment and post-treatment (directly after and 3 months after treatment stopped) the Aachen Aphasia Test (AAT) and the Amsterdam-Nijmegen Everyday Language Test (ANELT) were administered and spontaneous speech was elicited and analysed with respect to verbs, nouns, and utterance length.
Outcomes & Results: Both participants improved significantly on the production of untrained finite verbs. No improvement was made on the untrained infinitives. There was also significant improvement on related subtests of the AAT, but no improvement on unrelated subtests. Both also showed a significant improvement on verb production in spontaneous speech and in verbal communication, as measured on the ANELT.
Conclusions. The treatment programme has been shown to be an effective tool for training participants in verb production. The most important criteria for relevant treatment were met: generalisation to spontaneous speech and improvement in verbal communication.
C1 Univ Groningen, Dept Linguist, NL-9700 AS Groningen, Netherlands.
Rehabil Ctr Revalidatie Friesland, Beetsterzwaag, Netherlands.
Univ Groningen, Med Ctr, Ctr Rehabil Beatrixoord, Haren, Netherlands.
RP Bastiaanse, R (reprint author), Univ Groningen, Dept Linguist, POB 716, NL-9700 AS Groningen, Netherlands.
EM y.r.m.bastiaanse@rug.nl
CR Bastiaanse R, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V90, P198, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00432-2
Bastiaanse R., 1995, PALPA NEDERLANDSE VE
Bastiaanse R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249463
Bastiaanse R, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P142, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2585
BASTIAANSE R, 1997, VERB PRODUCTION WORD
Bastiaanse R, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P91, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00306-7
BLOMERT L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248666
Fucetola R, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P411, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000859
Graetz P., 1992, AKENSE AFASIE TEST
Kiran S, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P608, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/048)
Lee M, 2004, J NEUROLINGUIST, V17, P315, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(03)00062-9
LEVELT WJM, 1989, SPEAKING INTENSION A
Linebaugh CW, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249555
Maas E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P609, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000266
McNeil MR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P575, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249559
Miller N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P683
Murray L, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P785, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000273
Peach RK, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P429, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000147
Raymer AM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1031, DOI 10.1080/026870401430000609
Rodriguez AD, 2006, APHASIOLOGY, V20, P286, DOI 10.1080/02687030500474898
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
Thompson CK, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P661
Thompson CK, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P591, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/047)
Thompson CK, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P151, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(02)00014-3
Thompson CK, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P121
Wambaugh JL, 2002, J REHABIL RES DEV, V39, P455
Webster J, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P748, DOI 10.1080/02687030500166957
NR 27
TC 22
Z9 22
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 298
EP 311
DI 10.1080/02687030500474922
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000017
ER
PT J
AU Hengst, JA
AF Hengst, JA
TI "That mea :: n dog": Linguistic mischief and verbal play as a
communicative resource in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID INDIVIDUALS; PARTNERS
AB Background. Linguists, sociolinguists, and anthropologists point to verbal play (e.g., rhyming, punning, teasing) as a pervasive communicative practice that crosses contexts, serves developmental and interpersonal functions, and foregrounds participants' metacommunicative awareness, as utterances must be framed as playful. Researchers investigating the communicative practices of persons with aphasia have yet to explore the presence and functions of verbal play.
Aims: This study (1) presents a system for descriptively coding interactional forms, resources, and functions of verbal play; (2) documents verbal play in interactions of individuals with aphasia and partners; and (3) offers a close discourse analysis of a series of playful episodes.
Methods and Procedures: Derived from a broader ethnographic study of individuals with aphasia and their routine partners, this exploratory study analysed 13 hours of videotape data obtained in four sessions with each of four pairs (an individual with aphasia and a partner) playing a game-like barrier task. A grounded theory approach was used to develop descriptive codes, and those codes were used to support situated discourse analysis of playful episodes.
Outcomes and Results: With 1005 playful episodes identified, verbal play was a pervasive practice for these pairs. Playful episodes were diverse in form and function, and their production was dynamic as participants drew on the evolving interactions, recycled playful themes, shifted in and out of playful frames, and managed multiple functions simultaneously.
Conclusions: This analysis of the pervasive character of verbal play and the ongoing management of multiple frames highlights the complexity, heterogeneity, and distributed nature of situated communication. From a sociogenetic perspective, such rich, complex interactions could be a key ground for reorganisation of communicative practices and resources after aphasia, a theoretical and practical possibility of great interest to clinicians and researchers alike.
C1 Univ Illinois, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Champaign, IL 61821 USA.
RP Hengst, JA (reprint author), Univ Illinois, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 901 S 6th St MC-482, Champaign, IL 61821 USA.
EM hengst@uiuc.edu
CR Basso Keith H., 1979, PORTRAITS WHITEMAN L
Bateson G, 1972, STEPS ECOLOGY MIND
Clark Herbert H., 1992, ARENAS LANGUAGE USE
CRSYTAL D, 1998, LANGUAGE PLAY
DUFF M, 2005, CLIN APH C
DURANTI Alessandro, 1992, RETHINKING CONTEXT L
Goffman E, 1974, FRAME ANAL ESSAY ORG
Goncu A., 1999, CHILDRENS ENGAGEMENT
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GOODWIN C., 2000, LANGUAGE GESTURE, P84, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620850.006
Hanks W., 1990, REFERENTIAL PRACTICE
Hengst JA, 2005, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V48, P137, DOI 10.1044/1092-43888(2005/011)
Hengst JA, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P831, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/065)
Howe TJ, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1015, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000499
Irvine J. T., 1996, NATURAL HIST DISCOUR, P131
Kovarsky D, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P291
Miller Peggy, 1986, LANGUAGE SOCIALIZATI, P199
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P971, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249464
Perkins L., 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P147
SCHIEFFELIN B, 1998, LANGUAGE SOCIALISATI, P165
Shadden BB, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P211, DOI 10.1080/02687930444000697
SHERZER J, 2002, SPEECH PLAY VERBAL A
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P313
Simmons-Mackie N, 2004, CHALLENGING APHASIA THERAPIES: BROADENING THE DISCOURSE AND EXTENDING THE BOUNDARIES, P101, DOI 10.4324/9780203462706_chapter_6
STAEHLE CA, 1993, FRAMING DISCOURSE, P210
Strauss AL, 1987, QUALITATIVE ANAL SOC
Wertsch J. V., 1991, VOICES MIND SOCIOCUL
NR 27
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 312
EP 326
DI 10.1080/02687030500475010
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000018
ER
PT J
AU Croteau, C
Le Dorze, G
AF Croteau, Claire
Le Dorze, Guylaine
TI Overprotection, "speaking for", and conversational participation: A
study of couples with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID STROKE PATIENTS; SPOUSES; RELATIVES; MEMBERS; FAMILY
AB Background: Spouses play a major role in adaptation following the onset of their partner's aphasia. Sometimes, overprotection can occur in the relationship and this may be a disadvantage in adapting to aphasia. Overprotection from spouses can manifest itself in conversation when the spouse "speaks for" the person with aphasia and this could affect his or her participation in conversation.
Aim: The aim of the present research was to study the phenomenon of overprotection, "speaking for" behaviours in conversation as well as the person with aphasia's participation in conversation.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 18 couples, each including one person with aphasia, participated in this study. The perceptions of overprotection by persons with aphasia and their spouses were measured with the Overprotection Scale for Adults (Thompson & Sobolew-Shubin, 1993) and the Questionnaire oil Resources and Stress for Families with Chronically III or Handicapped Members (Holroyd, 1987). The participants were also videotaped in an interview situation where they answered questions on a systematic turn-by-turn basis. "Speaking for" behaviours, defined as the conversational turns in which the non-aphasic spouse expressed an opinion or added information when the person with aphasia was clearly talking with the interviewer, were measured. Participation was measured by tabulating the number of contributive turns produced by the person with aphasia and the spouse in the nine turns following the "speaking for" behaviour. Participation of the aphasic person was considered "minor" if the number of those turns was fewer than those produced by the Spouse.
Outcomes & Results: Results showed that overprotection reported by spouses was positively associated with "speaking for" behaviours produced by Spouses. "Speaking for" behaviours were positively related to minor participation in conversation. Aphasia severity and motor disability were also associated to minor participation of persons with aphasia in conversation.
Conclusions: More research on overprotection and its effects on conversation is needed to further Our understanding about the links between communication and psychosocial aspects of aphasia. In rehabilitation, attention should be given to overprotection and "speaking for" behaviours on the part of the spouse. In fact, the person with aphasia and the rehabilitation team's efforts to improve language and communication could be labour in vain if overprotection and "speaking for" behaviours on the part of the spouse develop and persist.
C1 Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophon & Audiol, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RP Croteau, C (reprint author), Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophon & Audiol, CP 6128,Succursale, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
EM claire.croteau@umontreal.ca
RI Le Dorze, Guylaine/A-1790-2014
CR Croteau C, 1999, DISABIL REHABIL, V21, P432
Croteau C, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P291, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000616
Denman A, 1998, DISABIL REHABIL, V20, P411
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
HARRIS BA, 1986, TOP GERIATR REHABIL, V1, P31
Holroyd J., 1987, QUESTIONNAIRE RESOUR
HOLROYD J, 1988, J CLIN PSYCHOL, V44, P335, DOI 10.1002/1097-4679(198805)44:3<335::AID-JCLP2270440306>3.0.CO;2-T
KINSELLA GJ, 1980, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V12, P73
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
MACWHINNEY B, 1988, MANUAL USE CHAT TRAN
MALONE RL, 1970, BRIT J DISORDERS COM, V59, P174
MANZO JF, 1995, SOCIOL HEALTH ILL, V17, P307, DOI 10.1111/1467-9566.ep10933323
MULHALL DJ, 1978, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V13, P127
NESPOULOUS LJ, 1986, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL T
Oelschlaeger ML, 2000, J COMMUN DISORD, V33, P205, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00019-8
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P459, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985238
PARKER G, 1979, BRIT J MED PSYCHOL, V52, P1
Parsons T, 1952, J SOC ISSUES, V8, P31
RAU M T, 1988, Seminars in Speech and Language, V9, P167, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1082462
THOMPSON SC, 1992, CLAR SYMP, P115
THOMPSON SC, 1993, BASIC APPL SOC PSYCH, V14, P363, DOI 10.1207/s15324834basp1403_8
Thompson SC, 2002, PSYCHOL HEALTH, V17, P297, DOI 10.1080/08870440290029557
WEBSTER EJ, 1982, CLIN APH C P MIN, P64
Zhao XQ, 2003, J COMMUN, V53, P347, DOI 10.1111/j.1460-2466.2003.tb02595.x
NR 24
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 327
EP 336
DI 10.1080/02687030500475051
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000019
ER
PT J
AU Purdy, M
Koch, A
AF Purdy, M
Koch, A
TI Prediction of strategy usage by adults with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID COMMUNICATION; SCHIZOPHRENIA; ACQUISITION; PEOPLE
AB Background: Management of aphasia often focuses on training augmentative communication strategies such as communication books, computerised systems, gestures, writing, or drawing. Although many individuals are able to acquire a targeted skill in a structured format, many do not successfully use the trained skill in more functional situations. Training alternative communication strategies can be a time-consuming project; thus, it would be beneficial if speech-language pathologists could predict, a priori, how a patient may respond to this type of treatment approach. It has been hypothesised that use of augmentative communication strategies requires executive functioning, specifically cognitive flexibility, which may be impaired following brain damage. Therefore, assessment of cognitive flexibility may help clinicians determine which persons with aphasia would most likely benefit from training of augmentative communication strategies.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to develop a measure of cognitive flexibility and to determine whether this measure predicted strategy usage during a functional communication task.
Methods and Procedures: A novel scoring system for the Communicative Abilities in Daily Living (CADL) was developed to capture the degree of participants' cognitive flexibility. This score was correlated with the Wisconsin Card Sorting Test (WCST), to determine the validity of the scoring system. The CADL cognitive flexibility score was then correlated with performance on a referential communication task. A multiple regression analysis was conducted with severity of aphasia as an additional predictor variable.
Outcomes and Results: There was a significant correlation between the cognitive flexibility score from the CADL and the WCST, confirming the validity of the scoring system as a measure of cognitive flexibility. Results of the regression analysis demonstrated a significant relationship between the cognitive flexibility score and strategy usage on a functional communication task. This relationship remained significant when the overall severity of aphasia was added to the regression analysis, suggesting that cognitive flexibility is a stronger predictor of strategy usage than severity of aphasia. These results may provide clinicians insight into which individuals would benefit most from the training of compensatory strategies, leading to the development of more appropriate goals and treatment methods.
C1 So Connecticut State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, New Haven, CT 06515 USA.
RP Purdy, M (reprint author), So Connecticut State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, 501 Crescent St, New Haven, CT 06515 USA.
EM purdym1@southernct.edu
CR Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
BELLAIRE K, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P219
CHAPEY R, 1977, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V42, P287
COELHO CA, 1990, J COMMUN DISORD, V23, P383, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(90)90026-U
DELAHUNTY A, 1993, PSYCHOL MED, V23, P221
Dirette D, 2002, BRAIN INJURY, V16, P861, DOI 10.1080/02699050210131902
Dirette DK, 1999, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V14, P595
Garrett KL, 2000, AUG ALTER COMMUN SER, P339
Garrett K. L., 1992, AUGMENTATIVE COMMUNI, P245
GARRY F, 1989, VET CLIN N AM-FOOD A, V5, P55
GLOSSER G, 1990, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V12, P485, DOI 10.1080/01688639008400995
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GRANT DA, 1948, J EXP PSYCHOL, V38, P404, DOI 10.1037/h0059831
Heaton RK, 1981, WISCONSIN CARD SORTI
Helm-Estrabrook N., 2000, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V21, P91
HOLLAND A, 1999, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
KRATT AW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P321
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Purdy M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P549, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000176
PURDY MH, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P345
Ramsberger G., 2000, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V21, P93
Rende Barbara, 2000, Seminars in Speech and Language, V21, P121, DOI 10.1055/s-2000-7560
Robson J, 1998, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P305, DOI 10.1080/136828298247767
Rostron A, 1996, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V31, P11
Walker JP, 2002, BRAIN INJURY, V16, P611, DOI 10.1080/02699050110119790
WILSON RS, 1978, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V46, P1554, DOI 10.1037//0022-006X.46.6.1554
Wykes T, 1999, SCHIZOPHRENIA BULL, V25, P291
YANAK K, 1991, NATL STUDENT SPEECH, V19, P27
Yoshihata H, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P1035, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249468
NR 31
TC 16
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 337
EP 348
DI 10.1080/02687030500475085
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000020
ER
PT J
AU Doyle, PJ
Matthews, C
Mikolic, JM
Hula, W
McNeil, MR
AF Doyle, PJ
Matthews, C
Mikolic, JM
Hula, W
McNeil, MR
TI Do measures of language impairment predict patient-reported
communication difficulty and distress as measured by the Burden of
Stroke Scale (BOSS)?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID SOCIAL SUPPORT; PSYCHOLOGICAL DISTRESS; FUNCTIONAL STATUS;
MENTAL-HEALTH; LIFE; OUTCOMES; SURVIVORS; THERAPY; IMPACT; CANCER
AB Background: Patient-reported measures of Communication difficulty and communication-related distress may be used to obtain efficient and valid indices of the functional consequences of aphasia and its treatment on the daily lives of many community-dwelling stroke survivors. However, they have not been employed to evaluate treatment outcomes or to examine hypotheses specifying their relationship to commonly employed measures of speech and language impairment in persons with aphasia.
Aims: This study examined whether the Shortened Porch Index of Communicative Abilities. (SPICA) (Disimoni, Keith, & Darley, 1980), 55-item Revised Token Test (55-item RTT) (Arvedson, McNeil, & West, 1986), and BDAE Severity Rating Scale (Good-lass, Kaplan, & Barressi, 2001) scores obtained at 3 months post-onset (MPO) predicted patient-reported communication difficulty and distress as measured by the Burden of Stroke Scale (BOSS) (Doyle et al., 2004) at 12 MPO. Methods & Procedures: A sample of 37 adults with mild to moderate aphasia (M SPICA %ile = 70.4) were identified from a larger sample (n = 178) of community-dwelling stroke survivors who participated in a longitudinal investigation designed to examine the psychometric properties of the BOSS. Speech and language data obtained from the sub-sample of participants with aphasia were retrospectively examined in two sequential regression models in which the 3-MPO test scores served as the predictor variables of interest, and 12-MPO BOSS Communication Difficulty and Communication Distress Scores served as dependent variables.
Results: Among the speech and language measures examined, only 3-month BDAE Severity Ratings contributed significantly to the prediction of 12-month patient-reported communication difficulty and distress as measured by the BOSS.
Conclusions: The findings suggest that performance-based measures of speech and language impairment such as the SPICA and 55-item RTT may not accurately predict the day-to-day communication difficulty and distress experienced by community-dwelling stroke survivors with mild to moderate aphasia. Replication of these findings in a prospectively designed study employing a larger more representative sample, and more comprehensive assessment instruments is needed to substantiate the relationship between performance-based measures of language impairment and patient-reported communication difficulty and distress in adults with aphasia.
C1 VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Med Ctr, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Doyle, PJ (reprint author), VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, 7180 Highland Dr,132A-H, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
EM patrick.doyle@med.va.gov
CR Agewall S, 1998, STROKE, V29, P2329
Aneshensel C.S., 1984, RES COMMUNITY MENTAL, V4, P35
ANGELERI F, 1993, STROKE, V24, P1478
ARVEDSON JC, 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V16, P57
Blazer D, 1991, J GERONTOL, V46, P210
BLAZER DG, 2005, AM J PSYCHIAT, V137, P439
BOMBARDIER C, 1986, AM J MED, V81, P565, DOI 10.1016/0002-9343(86)90539-5
Burke W J, 1991, J Geriatr Psychiatry Neurol, V4, P173, DOI 10.1177/089198879100400310
CLEARY PD, 1991, MED CARE, V29, P939, DOI 10.1097/00005650-199110000-00001
COATES A, 1992, J CLIN ONCOL, V10, P1833
CONNELLY JE, 1989, MED CARE, V27, P99
CROOG SH, 1986, NEW ENGL J MED, V314, P1657, DOI 10.1056/NEJM198606263142602
DAUT RL, 1983, PAIN, V17, P197, DOI 10.1016/0304-3959(83)90143-4
Diener E, 1999, PSYCHOL BULL, V125, P276, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.125.2.276
DISIMONI FG, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P511
DOYLE PJ, 2005, UNPUB BURDEN STROKE
Doyle PJ, 2004, J CLIN EPIDEMIOL, V57, P997, DOI 10.1016/j.jclinepi.2003.11.016
Doyle PJ, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P291, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000680
DOYLE PJ, IN PRESS J SPEECH LA
Duncan P. W., 1999, STROKE IMPACT SCALE
Duncan PW, 2003, NEUROLOGY, V60, P291
Enderby P. M., 1987, FRENCHAY APHASIA SCR
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
FRATTALI CM, 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S, P55
Friedman LC, 2005, QUAL LIFE RES, V14, P1925, DOI 10.1007/s11136-005-4326-1
Goodglass H., 2001, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V3rd
Hilari K, 2003, STROKE, V34, P1944, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000081987.46660.ED
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
JOHNSON TP, 1991, J HEALTH SOC BEHAV, V32, P408, DOI 10.2307/2137107
KAPLAN G, 1988, J GERONTOL, V43, pS114
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Likert R., 1932, ARCH PSYCHOL, V140, P5
LYNN MW, 1980, J CLIN PSYCHOL, V36, P675
MATT GE, 1993, J HEALTH SOC BEHAV, V34, P187, DOI 10.2307/2137201
McDowell I, 1987, MEASURING HLTH GUIDE
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
MOSSEY JM, 1982, AM J PUBLIC HEALTH, V72, P800, DOI 10.2105/AJPH.72.8.800
Newsom JT, 1996, PSYCHOL AGING, V11, P34, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.11.1.34
PATRICK D., 2003, QUAL LIFE NEWSLETTER, V31, P1
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
SHERBOURNE CD, 1991, SOC SCI MED, V32, P705, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(91)90150-B
Stewart AL, 1992, MEASURING FUNCTIONIN
STEWART AL, 1989, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V262, P907, DOI 10.1001/jama.262.7.907
TURNER RJ, 1981, J HEALTH SOC BEHAV, V22, P357, DOI 10.2307/2136677
Vidrine DJ, 2005, QUAL LIFE RES, V14, P923, DOI 10.1007/s11136-004-2148-1
WEISSMAN MM, 1981, ARCH GEN PSYCHIAT, V38, P1250
WELLS KB, 1986, MED CARE, V24, P75, DOI 10.1097/00005650-198601000-00008
Williams LS, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1362
Willke RJ, 2004, CONTROL CLIN TRIALS, V25, P535, DOI 10.1016/j.cct.2004.09.003
WILSON IB, 1995, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V273, P59, DOI 10.1001/jama.273.1.59
World Health Organization, 2001, ICF INT CLASS FUNCT
YELLEN S, 1998, J PAIN SYMPTOM MANAG, V13, P63
NR 52
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 349
EP 361
DI 10.1080/02687030500475135
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000021
ER
PT J
AU Donovan, NJ
Rosenbek, JC
Ketterson, TU
Velozo, CA
AF Donovan, NJ
Rosenbek, JC
Ketterson, TU
Velozo, CA
TI Adding meaning to measurement: Initial rasch analysis of the ASHA FACS
social communication subtest
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID QUALITY-OF-LIFE
AB Background: The American Speech-Language-Hearing Association Functional Assessment of Communication Skills (ASHA FACS) has established validity and reliability for individuals with aphasia. However, subtest scores are summed and averaged across subtests, making it difficult to describe individuals' communication behaviours. Item-response theory provides a methodology to assess the measurement properties of established assessments by transforming ordinal data into interval data, calibrated for both person ability measures and item difficulty on the same linear scale. The result is that behaviours can be ordered and described in ways that are more informative and useful than reporting raw scores.
Aims: The study aimed to use Rasch analysis to determine the psychometric properties of the ASHA FACS Social Communication Subtest (SCS) and to demonstrate how the Key form (a visual representation of the measure that results from the Rasch analysis) could add meaning to scoring and tracking progress.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 130 caregivers (76% female, 24% male) rated the performance of individuals with aphasia on the ASHA FACS SCS (21 items rated on a 7-unit scale). Participants' ages ranged from 31 to 88 years (M=60.5, SD=12.4). Rasch analysis was done by WINSTEP computer software.
Results: The ASHA FACS SCS demonstrated good measurement characteristics with two exceptions. First, three of seven units of the rating scale were used with such low probability that they were not useful to the measure. The data were re-analysed using the four-unit scale. The new rating scale covered the full range of sample abilities (2.94 statistically distinct levels). Second, the principal components analysis (an analysis of unidimensionality) found negative factor-item loading of easier items ("understanding") and positive factor-item loading of harder items ("conversing"), indicating that the scale contained two constructs rather than one. Fit statistics showed all 21 items within the established criteria (.6 < Mean Square < 1.4 ZStd < 2.0). The person separation reliability (analogous to Cronbach's alpha) was high at .90. The Key form linked the measure of item difficulty (logits) and rating scale with the item hierarchy.
Conclusions: Through Rasch analysis of the ASHA FACS SCS we demonstrated that: caregivers were reliable respondents (adding another use for the scale); the rating scale could be simplified; and the Key form could be used to demonstrate treatment progress. Future investigation could include: (1) analysis of the measurement properties of all subtests based on a large sample of caregivers; (2) item development for two constructs of social communication (e.g., understanding and conversing); and (3) test-retest reliability of respondents.
C1 Univ Florida, VA RR&D Rehabil Outcomes Res Ctr, Gainesville, FL 32608 USA.
RP Donovan, NJ (reprint author), Univ Florida, VA RR&D Rehabil Outcomes Res Ctr, 1601 SW Archer Rd 151B, Gainesville, FL 32608 USA.
EM ndonovan@phhp.ufl.edu
CR Bond T. G., 2001, APPLYING RASCH MODEL
COSTER WJ, 2004, MED CARE, V42
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
HALEY SM, 1994, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P566
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
WARE JE, 1995, MED CARE, V33, pAS264
Linacre John M, 2002, J Appl Meas, V3, P85
LINACRE JM, 1991, WINSTEPS MINISTEP RA
Sneeuw KCA, 2002, J CLIN EPIDEMIOL, V55, P1130, DOI 10.1016/S0895-4356(02)00479-1
Sneeuw KCA, 1997, STROKE, V28, P1541
VELOZO CA, 1995, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V76, P705, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(95)80523-0
White LJ, 2002, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V83, P822, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2002.32685
Wilkinson L, 1999, AM PSYCHOL, V54, P594, DOI 10.1037//0003-066X.54.8.594
Wright B. D., 1996, RASCH MEASUREMENT T, V10, P509
Wright B. D., 1994, RASCH MEASUREMENT T, V8, P370
Wright B. D., 1979, BEST TEST DESIGN
Wright B.D., 1997, PHYS MED REHABIL STA, V11, P261
Wright B. D., 2003, RASCH MEASUREMENT T, V17, P912
WRIGHT BD, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P857
NR 19
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 362
EP 373
DI 10.1080/02687030500475184
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000022
ER
PT J
AU Stanczak, L
Waters, G
Caplan, D
AF Stanczak, L
Waters, G
Caplan, D
TI Typicality-based learning and generalisation in aphasia: Two case
studies of anomia treatment
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 35th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 31-JUN 04, 2005
CL Sanibel Isl, FL
ID AGRAMMATIC APHASIA; PREFRONTAL CORTEX; LEXICAL DECISION; FRONTAL
LESIONS; REHABILITATION; GENERATION; COMPLEXITY; MODELS
AB Background: Simulation models (Plant, 1996) and anomia treatment (Kiran & Thompson, 2003b) have found that training with atypical items resulted in greater generalisation than training with typical items. The Complexity Account of Treatment Efficacy (CATE) predicts that therapy will produce greater generalisation when more complex items are trained (Thompson, Shapiro, Kiran, & Sobeck, 2003). Furthermore, learning and generalisation may be maximised when semantic training is directed towards semantic deficits (Plant, 1996).
Aims: The clinical application of Plant's model and the CATE was investigated in typicality-based learning and generalisation, following anomia treatment in one participant with mainly phonological deficits and one participant with both phonological and semantic deficits.
Methods & Procedures: Participants were trained with a semantic treatment to name typical items in one semantic category and atypical items of a different semantic category. Typicality-based learning and generalisation were compared.
Outcomes & Results: The participant with primarily phonological deficits learned typical items faster than atypical items, and showed no generalisation to untrained items. The participant with phonological and semantic deficits learned both typical and atypical items, and showed significant generalisation to untrained typical items and marginally significant generalisation to untrained atypical items.
Conclusions: Our results suggest that typical items may be easier to learn than atypical items when the semantic system is intact; however, typical items may be more difficult to learn with impairments in semantic knowledge and/or semantic selection, as these items have highly similar semantic features. Additionally, correspondence between the deficit and treatment may enhance learning and generalisation, as semantic treatment resulted in greater learning and generalisation for the participant with semantic deficits. Finally, family resemblance within semantic categories may produce generalisation to typical or atypical category members, but training with atypical members may produce more global changes within the semantic network, leading to greater generalisation.
C1 Boston Univ, Dept Speech Language & Hearing Sci, Boston, MA 02215 USA.
Massachusetts Gen Hosp, Boston, MA 02114 USA.
RP Stanczak, L (reprint author), Boston Univ, Dept Speech Language & Hearing Sci, 635 Commonwealth Ave, Boston, MA 02215 USA.
EM louises@bu.edu
CR Best W, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P231
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P301, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90023-2
Caplan D., 1993, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V2, P59
COHEN J, 1993, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V25, P257, DOI 10.3758/BF03204507
Frances N., 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Galizio M, 2004, J EXP ANAL BEHAV, V82, P253, DOI 10.1901/jeab.2004.82-253
Gierut JA, 2001, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V32, P229, DOI 10.1044/0161-1461(2001/021)
Hagoort P, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P287, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1849
HILLIS AE, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P5, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249497
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kaplan E., 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTICS AS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kiran S, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P773, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/061)
Kiran S, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P441, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00064-6
Maas E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P609, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000266
Meints K, 1999, DEV PSYCHOL, V35, P1072, DOI 10.1037/0012-1649.35.4.1072
Metzler C, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V15, P315, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.15.3.315
MILBERG W, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P371, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90086-9
Plaut DC, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0004
ROSCH E, 1975, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V7, P573, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(75)90024-9
ROSCH E, 1976, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V2, P491, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.2.4.491
Schmidt SR, 1996, MEM COGNITION, V24, P595, DOI 10.3758/BF03201086
Thompson CK, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P228
Thompson CK, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P591, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/047)
Thompson-Schill SL, 1999, NEURON, V23, P513, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(00)80804-1
Thompson-Schill SL, 1998, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V95, P15855, DOI 10.1073/pnas.95.26.15855
Thompson-Schill SL, 1997, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V94, P14792, DOI 10.1073/pnas.94.26.14792
NR 28
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB-APR
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 2-4
BP 374
EP 383
DI 10.1080/02687030600587631
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 047PA
UT WOS:000237890000023
ER
PT J
AU Jonkers, R
Bastiaanse, R
AF Jonkers, R
Bastiaanse, R
TI The influence of instrumentality and name-relation to a noun on verb
comprehension in Dutch aphasic speakers
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; RETRIEVAL; PATTERNS; IMPAIRMENT;
MODELS
AB Background: Different studies have examined the effect of verb type on comprehension, generally in non-fluent aphasic speakers. The current study includes the data of fluent aphasic speakers as well and considers the effect of conceptual and phonological factors on verb comprehension.
Aims: The role of the factors instrumentality and name-relation to a noun were studied. Both factors take the relation between nouns and verbs into account. Instrumentality concerns the conceptual relation between verbs and nouns, whereas name-relation expresses the phonological relation between these two.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 13 non-fluent aphasic speakers and 11 fluent aphasic speakers performed a word-to-picture matching task. This task consists of 60 items: 20 target verbs are non-instrumental, 40 verbs are instrumental. instrumental verbs are defined as verbs referring to actions for which an instrument is required in order to perform the action. Within the group of instrumental verbs, 20 are name-related to the corresponding instrument, whereas for the other 20 verbs no such relation exists. Results on the test were analysed both quantitatively and qualitatively.
Outcomes & Results: Both factors were of influence on the verb comprehension scores, but in different ways in the two subject groups. Instrumentality played a role for the non-fluent aphasic speakers: they were significantly better at comprehending non-name-related instrumental verbs as compared to the other types of verbs. Name-relation to a noun had a negative effect on the scores of the fluent aphasic speakers: they had a significantly lower score on name-related instrumental verbs, than on non-name-related instrumental verbs.
Conclusions: The factors instrumentality and name-relation to a noun influenced verb comprehension, but not in the same way in both types of aphasic speakers. It is discussed that this is due to different underlying disorders that lead to verb comprehension problems.
C1 Univ Groningen, Dept Linguist, NL-9700 AS Groningen, Netherlands.
RP Jonkers, R (reprint author), Univ Groningen, Dept Linguist, POB 716, NL-9700 AS Groningen, Netherlands.
EM rjonkers@rug.nl
CR Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Breedin SD, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P51, DOI 10.1080/026432996382060
BURNAGE G, 1990, GUIDE USERS
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Ferretti TR, 2001, J MEM LANG, V44, P516, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2728
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Graetz P., 1992, AKENSE AFASIE TEST
JONES EV, 1984, ADV NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V42
JONKERS R, 1998, THESIS GRODIL, P25
JONKERS R, 2005, UNPUB ACTION NAMING
Kemmerer D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2311
Kim M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P1, DOI 10.1006/brin.2000.2315
Luria A. R., 1966, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
Martin N, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P107, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000447
MCCARTHY R, 1985, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V23, P709, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(85)90079-X
MCCLELLAND JL, 1986, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V18, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(86)90015-0
MICELI G, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P351, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248937
NR 19
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 1
BP 3
EP 16
DI 10.1080/02687030500188440
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 011SU
UT WOS:000235289200001
ER
PT J
AU Hilari, K
Northcott, S
AF Hilari, K
Northcott, S
TI Social support in people with chronic aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID QUALITY-OF-LIFE; STROKE PATIENTS; FOLLOW-UP; CONVERSATION PARTNERS;
INTERNATIONAL SURVEY; MORTALITY; HEALTH; RECOVERY; NETWORK; ADULTS
AB Background & Aims: Stroke and aphasia can have a profound impact on people's social activities, and family and social relationships. This study looked at patterns of social support in people with chronic aphasia following stroke. It examined the relationship between social support and quality of life, exploring which aspects of social support (social network versus perceived social support) were most associated with health-related quality of life (HRQL).
Methods & Procedures: A cross-sectional interview-based survey study was conducted. A cluster-sampling framework was used to recruit participants with chronic aphasia following stroke (> 1 year) from three different sites in the south-east of England. Measures included the Stroke and Aphasia Quality of Life Scale-39 item version (SAQOL-39), the MOS Social Support Survey (SSS), and a social network questionnaire. Descriptive statistics, correlation, t-tests, and ANOVAs were used as appropriate.
Outcomes & Results: The results of those able to self-report (83 out of 95 participants, 87%) are reported here. In terms of social networks, the mode of the size of network was 4. Size of network was associated with HRQL for women only. Most participants (71%) reported they had the same amount of contact with their children following the stroke, while 64% reported they saw their friends less. Those who had the same level of contact with their family as before the stroke had the highest HRQL scores; those who saw them either less or more than before the stroke had lower HRQL. In terms of perceived social supports the SSS scores were negatively skewed with a mean (SD) of 3.69 (.95), suggesting that participants felt overall well supported. Two types of support were significantly correlated with HRQL: social companionship and informational support.
Clinical implications: Therapy services for people with aphasia could consider ways to enhance social companionship and informational support as this may positively impact on HRQL. Implications could include complementing and supporting existing social networks, and facilitating access to information and social participation.
C1 City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, London EC1V 0HB, England.
RP Northcott, S (reprint author), City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, NOrthampton Sq, London EC1V 0HB, England.
CR ANESHENSEL CS, 1982, J COMMUNITY PSYCHOL, V10, P363, DOI 10.1002/1520-6629(198210)10:4<363::AID-JCOP2290100407>3.0.CO;2-8
ANTONUCCI TC, 1987, SEX ROLES, V17, P737, DOI 10.1007/BF00287685
ASTROM M, 1992, CEREBROVASC DIS, V2, P28, DOI 10.1159/000108984
ASTROM M, 1992, STROKE, V23, P527
BELANGER L, 1988, INT J REHABIL RES, V11, P251
BERKMAN LF, 1979, AM J EPIDEMIOL, V109, P186
BERZON R, 1993, QUAL LIFE RES, V2, P367, DOI 10.1007/BF00422214
Billings A. G., 1982, HEALTH PSYCHOL, V1, P99, DOI 10.1037/0278-6133.1.2.99
BLAZER DG, 1982, AM J EPIDEMIOL, V115, P684
Bowling A, 1997, MEASURING HLTH REV Q
BROADHEAD WE, 1983, AM J EPIDEMIOL, V117, P521
BULLINGER M, 1993, QUAL LIFE RES, V2, P451, DOI 10.1007/BF00422219
Clarke PJ, 1999, DISABIL REHABIL, V21, P116, DOI 10.1080/096382899297855
Code C, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P379, DOI 10.1080/09602010244000255
Code C, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P1
COHEN S, 1985, PSYCHOL BULL, V98, P310, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.98.2.310
Cruice M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P333, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000707
*DEP HLTH, 1998, HLTH SURV ENGL CARD
Department of Health, 2001, GOOD PRACT CONS IMPL
Dowswell G, 2000, J CLIN NURS, V9, P507, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2702.2000.00411.x
Due P, 1999, SOC SCI MED, V48, P661, DOI 10.1016/S0277-9536(98)00381-5
DURKHEIM E, 1879, SUICIDE STUDY SOCIOL
Elman RJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P411
Elman RJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P455
Elman RJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P227, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249450
Enderby P. M., 1987, FRENCHAY APHASIA SCR
FRIEDLAND J, 1987, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V68, P475
FRIEDLAND JF, 1992, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V73, P573
GLASS TA, 1992, SOC SCI MED, V34, P1249, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(92)90317-J
Hilari K, 2003, STROKE, V34, P1944, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000081987.46660.ED
Hilari K, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000725
Hilari K, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P86
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
HOUSE JS, 1982, AM J EPIDEMIOL, V116, P123
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Knapp P, 1998, PSYCHOL HEALTH MED, V3, P275, DOI 10.1080/13548509808400602
LABI MLC, 1980, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V61, P561
LIN N, 1981, SCHIZOPHRENIA BULL, V7, P73
Lock S, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P25
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
MCCOLL MA, 1989, OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY, V9, P219
Nagurney AJ, 2004, PSYCHOL AGING, V19, P215, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.19.1.215
NORRIS VK, 1990, GERONTOLOGIST, V30, P535
OREILLY P, 1988, SOC SCI MED, V26, P863, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(88)90179-7
OLSEN O, 1993, J EPIDEMIOL COMMUN H, V47, P176, DOI 10.1136/jech.47.3.176
ORTHGOMER K, 1987, J CHRON DIS, V40, P949, DOI 10.1016/0021-9681(87)90145-7
OSBERG JS, 1988, AM J PHYS MED REHAB, V67, P94, DOI 10.1097/00002060-198806000-00002
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
ROBERTSO.EK, 1968, J PSYCHOSOM RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3999(68)90045-7
Robinson R G, 1999, Int Psychogeriatr, V11, P375, DOI 10.1017/S1041610299005992
ROSE D., 1997, CONSTRUCTING CLASSES
RUBERMAN W, 1984, NEW ENGL J MED, V311, P552, DOI 10.1056/NEJM198408303110902
Sarno MT, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P665, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249414
SCHULZ R, 1985, SOCIAL SUPPORT HLTH
SEEMAN TE, 1988, SOC SCI MED, V26, P737, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(88)90065-2
SHERBOURNE CD, 1991, SOC SCI MED, V32, P705, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(91)90150-B
Simmons-Mackie N, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P837, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000185
Simmons-Mackie N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P231, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249451
STANSFIELD S, 2000, SOCIAL DETERMINANTS
Stewart JA, 1999, BRIT MED J, V318, P967
Symister P, 2003, HEALTH PSYCHOL, V22, P123, DOI 10.1037/0278-6133.22.2.123
Tsouna-Hadjis E, 2000, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V81, P881, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2000.4435
TURNER RJ, 1981, J HEALTH SOC BEHAV, V22, P357, DOI 10.2307/2136677
VOGT TM, 1992, J CLIN EPIDEMIOL, V45, P659, DOI 10.1016/0895-4356(92)90138-D
WADE DT, 1994, HLTH CARE NEEDS ASSE, V1
Wahrborg P, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P709, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249417
WAXLERMORRISON N, 1991, SOC SCI MED, V33, P177, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(91)90178-F
Wenger GC, 1994, SUPPORT NETWORKS OLD
Wyller TB, 1998, STROKE, V29, P363
ZEMVA N, 2004, 11 INT APH REH C MIL
NR 72
TC 40
Z9 41
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 1
BP 17
EP 36
DI 10.1080/02687030500279982
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 011SU
UT WOS:000235289200002
ER
PT J
AU Ablinger, I
Weniger, D
Willmes, K
AF Ablinger, I
Weniger, D
Willmes, K
TI Treating number transcoding difficulties in a chronic aphasic patient
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WRITING ARABIC NUMERALS; REHABILITATION; DYSCALCULIA; ERRORS
AB Background: Number transcoding comprises the ability to read and write Arabic numerals and number words. Although number transcoding and counting are frequently impaired in aphasic patients, little attention has been given to the development of specific treatment methods and the evaluation of their efficiency. We report the treatment of the chronic aphasic patient PK who had severe difficulties in reading Arabic numerals. Number words could only be produced with an automatic counting strategy, always beginning with one.
Aims: The therapy study was aimed at examining whether PK's numeral transcoding abilities could be improved by an intensive remediation programme that comprised tasks in which Arabic numerals had to be transcoded into number words.
Methods & Procedures: Treatment consisted of specific training blocks of gradually increasing complexity. Therapy started with reading one-digit Arabic numerals, followed by teens, decades, and two- to five-digit numerals, which were divided into different subgroups according to complexity.
Outcomes & Results: After an 8-week therapy period significant improvement in the processing of one- to five-digit numbers was observed. PK was able to read 49.4% of the Arabic numerals as compared to 2.2% before treatment. Performance was influenced significantly by number length and number word structure. Transcoding abilities improved remarkably for two- and three-digit numbers containing a zero or ending with two zeros. Stability of the treatment effects was assessed in a follow-up study 6 months after termination of the treatment programme. PK was still able to read 48.3% of the Arabic numerals successfully.
Conclusions: In a single-case study of patient PK, suffering from chronic severe aphasia that was also characterised by severe transcoding and calculation impairments it could be demonstrated that these transcoding problems could be remedied to a substantial degree when employing a carefully graded intensive retraining programme for Arabic number naming.
C1 Univ Aachen, Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, Dept Neurol, Sect Neurolinguist, D-52074 Aachen, Germany.
Univ Zurich Hosp, CH-8091 Zurich, Switzerland.
RP Ablinger, I (reprint author), Univ Aachen, Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, Dept Neurol, Sect Neurolinguist, Pauwelsstr 30, D-52074 Aachen, Germany.
EM iablinger@ukaachen.de
CR BLANKEN G, 1996, AUDITIVES VISUELLES
Blanken GDR, 1999, WORTPRODUKTIONSPRUFU
CIPOLOTTI L, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P503, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90094-9
CIPOLOTTI L, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V124, P375, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.124.4.375
Claros Salinas D, 1994, EC 301 R UNTERSUCHUN
COHEN L, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P267, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.2.267
De Bleser B., 2004, LEMO LEXIKON MODELLO
DEHAENE S, 1992, COGNITION, V44, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90049-N
Dehaene S, 2003, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V20, P487, DOI 10.1080/02643290244000239
Delazer M, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P257, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1971
Delazer M, 1997, NEUROCASE, V3, P461
Delazer M, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P649, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000104
DELOCHE G, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P59, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90036-1
DELOCHE G, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V2, P257, DOI 10.1080/09602019208401413
Deloche G., 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACH N
DELOCHE G, 1989, PROTOCOLE DEPISTAGES
DeLongis A., 1982, HEALTH PSYCHOL, V1, P119, DOI 10.1037/0278-6133.1.2.119
Domahs F, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V14, P303, DOI 10.1080/09602010343000246
Girelli L, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P49
Girelli L, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P695, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000131
Grana A, 2003, NEUROCASE, V9, P308, DOI 10.1076/neur.9.4.308.15547
Guyard H, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V7, P419, DOI 10.1080/713755545
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
JACQUEMIN A, 1991, REEDUCATION NEUROPSY
KIMURA D, 1963, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V8, P264
MACARUSO P, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P405
MCCLOSKEY M, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V17, P285, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90078-M
NOEL MP, 1995, BRAIN COGNITION, V29, P151, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1995.1274
NUERK HC, 2003, MED MENTALITAT
PROIOS H, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P768
SCHELLIG D, 1997, BLOCK TAPPING TEST M
Sturm W, 1999, VERBALER NONVERBALER
Sullivan KS, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V6, P27, DOI 10.1080/713755495
TRYON WW, 1982, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V15, P423, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1982.15-423
NR 34
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 1
BP 37
EP 58
DI 10.1080/02687030500298719
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 011SU
UT WOS:000235289200003
ER
PT J
AU Davis, CH
Harrington, G
Baynes, K
AF Davis, CH
Harrington, G
Baynes, K
TI Intensive semantic intervention in fluent aphasia: A pilot study with
fMRI
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FUNCTIONAL MRI; LEXICAL ACCESS; WORD RETRIEVAL; QUANTITATIVE-ANALYSIS;
PREFRONTAL CORTEX; NAMING DISORDERS; HUMAN BRAIN; LANGUAGE; RECOVERY;
ACTIVATION
AB Background: This pilot study presents a method of rehabilitation based on the assumption that there is a widely distributed neural network that supports semantic processing and that can be used to improve word retrieval without explicit naming. it employs functional imaging to help understand the neural basis of response to treatment.
Aims: There are both behavioural and neural questions. First, this study investigates whether intensive therapy designed to reduce production errors by eliminating oral responses can yield improved naming of trained items. Second, it investigates whether changes in naming will be associated with changes in fMRI activation and whether the changes in activation pattern associated with recovery are primarily in the right hemisphere (RH) or in perilesional tissue.
Methods & Procedures: Four weeks of intensive semantic therapy designed to activate the semantic network and minimise errors was administered to AT, all individual with Wernicke's aphasia. Pre- and post-therapy behavioural testing included standard tests of aphasia, naming of pictures from training sets, and a narrative speech sample. Functional imaging of experimental and control tasks was completed pre- and post-therapy.
Outcomes & Results: After 4 weeks of training, AT demonstrated improved naming and showed increased use of nouns in narrative speech. FMRI demonstrated increased activation of the left inferior frontal cortex during verb generation as well as increased inferior posterior temporal RH activation.
Conclusions: These results support the effectiveness of intensive intervention methods that require semantic judgements rather than naming and the use of fMRI to understand the neural basis of the response.
C1 Univ Calif Davis, Ctr Neurosci, Davis, CA 95616 USA.
RP Baynes, K (reprint author), Univ Calif Davis, Ctr Neurosci, 1544 Newton Court, Davis, CA 95616 USA.
EM kbaynes@ucdavis.edu
CR Abel S, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P152, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.079
Adcock JE, 2003, NEUROIMAGE, V18, P423, DOI 10.1016/S1053-8119(02)00013-7
Annett M., 2002, HANDEDNESS BRAIN ASY
Ansaldo AN, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V82, P206, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00017-2
BADDELEY A, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P53, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90068-X
Basso A, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P307, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000304
BAYNES K, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P26
BAYNES K, IN PRESS LINGUISTIC
BAYNES K, 1988, LANGUAGE COMMUNICATI
Belin P, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V47, P1504
Berndt R. S., 2000, QUANTITATIVE PRODUCT
Bhatnagar SC, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P13, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00173-1
Bhogal SK, 2003, STROKE, V34, P987, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000062343.64383.D0
Bird H, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P187, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00006-1
Buonocore MH, 1997, MAGNET RESON MED, V38, P89, DOI 10.1002/mrm.1910380114
CARAMAZZA A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P217, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401437
Coelho CA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P133
Cox RW, 1996, COMPUT BIOMED RES, V29, P162, DOI 10.1006/cbmr.1996.0014
Cox RW, 1999, MAGNET RESON MED, V42, P1014, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1522-2594(199912)42:6<1014::AID-MRM4>3.0.CO;2-F
Crinion JT, 2003, BRAIN, V126, P1193, DOI 10.1093/brain/awg104
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
Dronkers NF, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P450
DUKETTE D, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P68
FERNANDEZ B, 2003, STROKE, V5, P5
Fillingham JK, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P337, DOI 10.1080/09602010343000020
FORMAN SD, 1995, MAGNET RESON MED, V33, P636, DOI 10.1002/mrm.1910330508
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Garrett Merrill, 1995, P881
GARRETT MF, 1988, LINGUISTICS CAMBRIDG
Gold BT, 2002, NEURON, V35, P803, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(02)00800-0
Herholz K, 1996, NEUROIMAGE, V3, P185, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1996.0020
Hillis AE, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P648, DOI 10.1017/S135561779846613X
Hinckley JJ, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P543, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00119-3
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
HOWARD DV, 1981, J GERONTOL, V36, P707
Humphreys GW, 1999, PSYCHOL RES-PSYCH FO, V62, P118, DOI 10.1007/s004260050046
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kiran S, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000258
Lacey EH, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P189, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.097
Lancaster JL, 2000, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V10, P120, DOI 10.1002/1097-0193(200007)10:3<120::AID-HBM30>3.0.CO;2-8
LEDORZE G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P127
Leger A, 2002, NEUROIMAGE, V17, P174, DOI 10.1006/nimg.2002.1238
Levelt W., 1993, LINGUISTIC DISORDERS
LEVELT WJM, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P122, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.98.1.122
Long DL, 2002, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V14, P228, DOI 10.1162/089892902317236867
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
MCCLOSKEY R, 1952, ONE MORNING MAINE
MERZENICH MM, 1984, J COMP NEUROL, V224, P591, DOI 10.1002/cne.902240408
Merzenich MM, 1996, SCIENCE, V271, P77, DOI 10.1126/science.271.5245.77
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Perani D, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P357, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00561-8
Phillips MD, 2001, RADIOLOGY, V220, P202
Price CJ, 2000, J ANAT, V197, P335, DOI 10.1046/j.1469-7580.2000.19730335.x
RECANZONE GH, 1992, J NEUROPHYSIOL, V67, P1015
RIDDOCH MJ, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P3, DOI 10.1080/02643298808252925
Rochon E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P193, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2285
Rosen HJ, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V55, P1883
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
Springer JA, 1999, BRAIN, V122, P2033, DOI 10.1093/brain/122.11.2033
Talairach J., 1988, COPLANAR STEREOTAXIC
Tallal P, 1998, EXP BRAIN RES, V123, P210, DOI 10.1007/s002210050563
Thomas C, 1997, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V102, P86, DOI 10.1016/S0921-884X(96)95653-2
Thompson-Schill SL, 1997, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V94, P14792, DOI 10.1073/pnas.94.26.14792
Thulborn KR, 1999, STROKE, V30, P749
Wagner AD, 2001, NEURON, V31, P329, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(01)00359-2
Xiong JH, 1995, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V3, P287, DOI 10.1002/hbm.460030404
2002, PICTURE PROFESSIONAL
NR 73
TC 21
Z9 22
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2006
VL 20
IS 1
BP 59
EP 83
DI 10.1080/02687030500331841
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 011SU
UT WOS:000235289200004
ER
PT J
AU Whelan, BM
Murdoch, BE
AF Whelan, BM
Murdoch, BE
TI Unravelling subcortical linguistic substrates: Comparison of thalamic
versus cerebellar cognitive-linguistic regulation mechanisms
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID RHESUS-MONKEY; LANGUAGE; LESIONS; ORGANIZATION; DIASCHISIS; DEFICITS;
THOUGHT
AB The basal ganglia and cerebellum traditionally constitute motor-dedicated neural systems that facilitate movement via basal ganglia-thalamo-cortical and cerebellar ponto-thalamo-cortical pathways. Lesions of the basal ganglia typically result in poverty of movement (e.g., akinesia) or excessive movement (e.g., hyperkinesia), and lesions of the cerebellum result in incoordination of movement (e.g., ataxia). However, recent research has revealed that in addition to the primary motor cortex, the basal ganglia and cerebellum also demonstrate projection zones to the premotor cortex, frontal eye field , and prefrontal, inferotemporal, and posterior parietal cortices, suggesting a supplementary role for these structures (i.e., basal ganglia and cerebellum) in the regulation of cognitive processes. Subcortical cognitive deficits paralleling motor impairments such as difficulty in shifting attentional set and difficulty in coordinating mental activity have been described in the neuropsychological literature. However, correlates relative to "hypolinguistic" or dysmetric language processes are yet to be adequately defined.
Aims: The aim of the current research, therefore, was to compare and contrast the language profiles of individuals with thalamic versus cerebellar lesions.
Methods & Procedures: Two cases with surgically induced lesions of the left ventral intermediate thalamus, and two cases with spontaneous vascular infarcts in the left cerebellar hemisphere, served as experimental subjects in this research. General and high-level language profiles were compiled for each subject and performance compared to a roup of 16 non-neurologically impaired controls (NC). The criterion for anomalous performance was established as >= 2 SD below the NC group mean.
Outcomes & Results : Evident deficits were largely restricted to complex language functions, irrespective of lesion type. Of note, however, was that thalamic lesions were associated with a higher overall proportion of significantly reduced test scores, as well as greater magnitudes of decline from normal when compared to cerebellar lesions.
Conclusions: These results lend support to working theories of subcortical participation in language that promote a superordinate role for the thalamus in the regulation of higher-level lexical-semantic processes. Further more , the present findings also highlight the need to consider a novel role for the left cerebellar hemisphere in coordinating cognitive-linguistic systems.
C1 Univ Queensland, Motor Speech & Neurogen Language Ctr, Div Speech Pathol, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Brisbane, Qld, Australia.
RP Whelan, BM (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Motor Speech & Neurogen Language Ctr, Div Speech Pathol, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Brisbane, Qld, Australia.
EM bmw@uq.edu.au
RI Murdoch, Bruce/C-1397-2012
CR ALEXANDER GE, 1990, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V13, P266, DOI 10.1016/0166-2236(90)90107-L
ALLEN GI, 1974, PHYSIOL REV, V54, P957
Barr M. L., 1993, HUMAN NERVOUS SYSTEM
Beldarrain MG, 1997, EUR NEUROL, V37, P82
BRODAL P, 1978, BRAIN, V101, P251, DOI 10.1093/brain/101.2.251
BROICH K, 1987, NEUROSCI LETT, V83, P7, DOI 10.1016/0304-3940(87)90207-2
Cook M, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P771, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000291
Copland DA, 2000, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V8, P1
CROSSON B, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P257, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90085-9
Desmond JE, 1998, TRENDS COGN SCI, V2, P355, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(98)01211-X
Deuschl G, 2000, J NEUROL, V247, P33
Fabbro F, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P173, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(00)00010-5
Huisingh R., 1990, WORD TEST REVISED TE
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Leggio MG, 2000, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V69, P102, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.69.1.102
LEGGIO MG, 1995, SOC NEUR ABSTR, V21, P364
Marien P, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P580, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2569
Mattis S., 1988, DEMENTIA RATING SCAL
Middleton FA, 1998, TRENDS COGN SCI, V2, P305, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(98)01224-8
Nadeau SE, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P355, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1707
Neau JP, 2000, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V102, P363, DOI 10.1034/j.1600-0404.2000.102006363.x
RIKLAN M, 1969, J NEUROL SCI, V8, P307, DOI 10.1016/0022-510X(69)90115-4
Schmahmann JD, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P561, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.4.561
Schmahmann JD, 1998, TRENDS COGN SCI, V2, P362, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(98)01218-2
SCHMAHMANN JD, 1991, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V48, P1178
Schmahmann JD, 1997, J NEUROSCI, V17, P438
Schmahmann JD, 1996, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V4, P174, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-0193(1996)4:3<174::AID-HBM3>3.0.CO;2-0
Schmahmann JD, 1997, INT REV NEUROBIOL, V41, P31
Spreen O, 1977, NEUROSENSORY CTR COM
VILKKI J, 1974, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V12, P11, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(74)90022-0
Wallesch CW, 1988, APHASIA, P256
WHELAN BM, 2003, ACTA NEUROPSYCHOLOGI, V1, P174
Wiig EH, 1989, TEST LANGUAGE COMPET
NR 33
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 12
BP 1097
EP 1106
DI 10.1080/02687030500174050
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 998YV
UT WOS:000234356700001
ER
PT J
AU Zanini, S
Bryan, K
De Luca, G
Bava, A
AF Zanini, S
Bryan, K
De Luca, G
Bava, A
TI The effects of age and education on pragmatic features of verbal
communication: Evidence from the Italian version of the Right Hemisphere
Language Battery (I-RHLB)
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BRAIN-INJURED ADULTS; WORKING-MEMORY; INDIVIDUAL-DIFFERENCES; IDIOM
COMPREHENSION; ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; COGNITIVE DECLINE; NAMING ABILITY;
OLDER ADULTS; PERFORMANCE; DISCOURSE
AB Background: The field of pragmatic impairments of verbal communication in cerebrally damaged subjects dates back almost three decades. However, a systematic investigation of pragmatic competences has never been completed in a large sample of normal adults controlling for age and education factors.
Aims: We aimed to examine the effects of age and education on the main features of pragmatics of verbal communication in a large sample of normal healthy subjects.
Methods & Procedures: We developed an Italian version of the Right Hemisphere Language Battery devised by Bryan (1995) and administered it to 440 normal volunteers. Age ranged from 20 to 79 years, and education corresponded to Italian levels of education.
Outcomes & Results: We found that ageing and low education influenced performance on almost all the sub tests of the I-RHLB. In particular, performance dropped at 70-79 years, particularly in those with the lowest level of education.
Conclusions: These results suggest that processing of the pragmatic features of verbal communication parallels the decline of other cognitive functions associated with ageing and low education that previous studies have already establish.
C1 Univ Udine, Neurol Clin, I-33013 Gemona Del Friuli, Udine, Italy.
Univ Trieste, I-34127 Trieste, Italy.
Univ Surrey, Guildford GU2 5XH, Surrey, England.
Res Inst Phys Med & Rehabil, Udine, Italy.
RP Zanini, S (reprint author), Univ Udine, Neurol Clin, Piazza Rodolone 2, I-33013 Gemona Del Friuli, Udine, Italy.
EM zanini.sergio@spes.uniud.it
CR ALBERT MS, 1988, PSYCHOL AGING, V3, P173, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.3.2.173
ARDILA A, 1989, BRAIN COGNITION, V11, P147, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(89)90015-8
Ardila A, 2000, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V15, P495, DOI 10.1016/S0887-6177(99)00040-2
Beeman M., 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LAN
Blake ML, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P423, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000120
BOWLES NL, 1985, J GERONTOL, V40, P71
Braun AR, 2001, BRAIN, V124, P2028, DOI 10.1093/brain/124.10.2028
BREBION G, 1995, PSYCHOL RES-PSYCH FO, V58, P225, DOI 10.1007/BF00419637
Brownell H. H., 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE
Bryan K., 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LAN
Bryan KL, 2001, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V7, P655, DOI 10.1017/S1355617701766015
Burgess PW, 1997, HAYLING BRIXTON TEST
Caramelli P, 1998, HDB NEUROLINGUISTICS, P463, DOI 10.1016/B978-012666055-5/50036-8
Ceccaldi M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P75, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0061
Chiarello C, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P360, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2483
Chiarello C, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V41, P721, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00220-8
Coelho CA, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P499, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000111
COHEN G, 1983, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V74, P239
COHEN G, 1979, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V11, P412, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(79)90019-7
CRITCHLEY M, 1984, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V41, P1135
Crystal D, 1998, INTRO LANGUAGE PATHO
DAIGNEAULT S, 1993, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V15, P881, DOI 10.1080/01688639308402605
Duong A, 2001, BRAIN COGNITION, V46, P121, DOI 10.1016/S0278-2626(01)80047-6
Evans D A, 1993, Ann Epidemiol, V3, P71
Faust M, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P438, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2601
Gardner H, 1986, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
GRACIBEH GA, 2003, NEUROLOGY, V60, P1192
Grant JD, 2000, AM J PSYCHOL, V113, P69, DOI 10.2307/1423461
HAMM VP, 1992, PSYCHOL AGING, V7, P56, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.7.1.56
Hays SJ, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000183
Heilman KM, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P411, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.01.006
Hillis A., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P429
Hutchinson A, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P361, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00133-0
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
JUST MA, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P122, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.1.122
KEMPER S, 1993, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V16, P405
LECOURS AR, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P221
Lehman MT, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P485
Levinson Stephen C., 1983, PRAGMATICS
Light L, 1990, HDB PSYCHOL AGING, P275
LIGHT LL, 1985, J GERONTOL, V40, P737
Lyketsos CG, 1999, AM J PSYCHIAT, V156, P58
Manly JJ, 1999, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V5, P191, DOI 10.1017/S135561779953302X
Marquardt TP, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P1091
Martin I, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P451, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00070-1
MAXIM J, 1999, CONCISE ENCY LANGUAG, P142
MAXIM J, 1982, MONOGRAPH, V3
McDonald S, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P339, DOI 10.1080/026870300401397
McDonald S., 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD
McNamara P, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V84, P414, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00558-8
Morris C., 1938, INT ENCY UNIFIED SCI, V2
Myers PS, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P913, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000285
NICHOLAS M, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P595
NIELS J, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1143
NORTH AJ, 1986, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V23, P267, DOI 10.2190/BPF0-2BWD-BGNQ-HWCW
Oberauer K, 2001, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V27, P948, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.27.4.948
OBLER LK, 1989, DEV LANGUAGE
Oliveri M, 2004, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V16, P848, DOI 10.1162/089892904970717
Palladino P, 1999, AGING-CLIN EXP RES, V11, P301
Papagno C, 2003, BRAIN, V126, P2419, DOI 10.1093/brain/awg243
Papagno C., 1995, Archivio di Psicologia Neurologia e Psichiatria, V56, P402
PARADIS M, 1999, PRAGMATICS NEUROGENI, P1
Coppens P, 1998, APHASIA IN ATYPICAL POPULATIONS, P175
Phillips LH, 1999, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V15, P249
RAMAGE AE, 2001, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V6, P81
Robbins TW, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P474
ROSSELLI M, 1990, BRAIN COGNITION, V12, P282
Salthouse T. S., 2001, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V6, P39
Salthouse TA, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P403, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.3.403
Shammi P, 2003, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V9, P855, DOI 10.1017/S135561770396005X
Tompkins C. A., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P559, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000202
Tsang HL, 2003, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V18, P81, DOI 10.1016/S0887-6177(01)00184-6
ULATOWSKA HK, 1986, AGING BRAIN COMMUNIC, P125
van Dijk TA, 1997, DISCOURSE STRUCTURE, VI, P1
Van der Linden M, 1999, AGING NEUROPSYCHOL C, V6, P32, DOI 10.1076/anec.6.1.32.791
West RL, 1996, PSYCHOL BULL, V120, P272, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.120.2.272
Wright HH, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P263, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000732
Wright HH, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P226, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2595
Yamadori A, 1999, BRAIN COGNITION, V39, P19
Youse KM, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P297, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000769
Zanini S, 2005, NEUROL SCI, V26, P13, DOI 10.1007/s10072-005-0377-x
Zanini S., 2003, BATTERIA LINGUAGGIO
NR 82
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 12
BP 1107
EP 1133
DI 10.1080/02687030500268977
PG 27
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 998YV
UT WOS:000234356700002
ER
PT J
AU Ghidella, CL
Murray, SJ
Smart, MJ
McKenna, KT
Worrall, LE
AF Ghidella, CL
Murray, SJ
Smart, MJ
McKenna, KT
Worrall, LE
TI Aphasia websites: An examination of their quality and communicative
accessibility
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID EDUCATION MATERIALS; HEALTH INFORMATION; INTERNET; WEB; COMPREHENSION;
CONSUMERS; USERS
AB Background: Studies have examined Internet use as a source of information by various populations, however no study has examined the quality and accessibility of websites for people with aphasia, or their use of such sites.
Aims: This study aimed to describe the quality, communicative accessibility, and readability of a sample of aphasia websites and to determine whether sites preferred by people with aphasia were those rated highly on measures of accessibility and quality. The perceptions of people with aphasia regarding the accessibility of the sites were compared with those of speech pathologists. The relationship between the quality and communicative accessibility of websites was analysed. Factors that may influence use of the Internet by people with aphasia and speech pathologists were explored.
Methods & Procedures: Tools for measuring quality and communicative accessibility were developed and a sample of five websites was selected. Two participant groups (18 speech pathologists and 6 people with aphasia) assessed aphasia websites in terms of communicative accessibility. Speech pathologists also rated website quality. Spearman's rho was used to determine levels of agreement between variables.
Outcomes & Results: People with aphasia and speech pathologists showed minimal agreement on their perceptions of communicative accessibility. However, when the preferences of websites (Aphasia Help and Speakability) were of a very high standard. There was a weak relationship between quality and communicative accessibility, however it was not statistically significant.
Conclusions: Accessible websites are not necessarily of high quality, and quality websites are not guaranteed to be easily accessible. People with aphasia did not agree with speech pathologists as to what makes a good aphasia website. Therefore, people with aphasia should be involved in the design of aphasia websites since they are often the intended users. If Internet use by people with aphasia increases in line with other health populations, speech pathologist need to have the skills and confidence to recommend appropriate sites to their clients.
C1 Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Worrall, LE (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
EM l.worrall@uq.edu.au
RI Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR Brown P, 2002, BRIT MED J, V324, P566
DAVIS TC, 1990, J FAM PRACTICE, V31, P533
Elman RJ, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P895, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000267
Eysenbach G, 2000, BRIT MED J, V320, P1713, DOI 10.1136/bmj.320.7251.1713
Eysenbach G, 2002, BRIT MED J, V324, P573, DOI 10.1136/bmj.324.7337.573
Gagliardi A, 2002, BRIT MED J, V324, P569, DOI 10.1136/bmj.324.7337.569
GRABER MA, 1999, J FAMILY PRACTICE, V48, P59
Jadad AR, 1999, BRIT MED J, V319, P761
Kim P, 1999, BRIT MED J, V318, P647
Mead Nicola, 2003, J Health Serv Res Policy, V8, P33, DOI 10.1258/13558190360468209
Paciello M. G., 2000, WEB ACCESSIBILITY PE
PETHERAM B, 2004, 11 INT APH REH C MIL
Rose TA, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P947, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000319
Shepperd S, 2002, BRIT MED J, V324, P556, DOI 10.1136/bmj.324.7337.556
Singh S, 1998, J COMMUN, V48, P86
Singh S, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P157, DOI 10.1080/026870300401531
WADDELL C, 1998, APPL ADA INTERNET WE
NR 17
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 12
BP 1134
EP 1146
DI 10.1080/02687030500337871
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 998YV
UT WOS:000234356700003
ER
PT J
AU Byng, S
Duchan, JF
AF Byng, S
Duchan, JF
TI Social model philosophies and principles: Their applications to
therapies for aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID ADULTS; PEOPLE
AB Background: The social model of disability has, on occasion, created confusion and contention among those working in the field of aphasia. Some have treated it as an alternative or substitute for traditional therapies.
Aims: This paper makes an effort to clarify the issues surrounding discussions of the social model, and attempts to reduce some of the disagreement associated with its use. It is argued that the social model can provide principles for practice that can be used as a guide for any types of therapies.
Methods & Procedures: The study examines the literature on the social model. A distinction is drawn between social model philosophies and social model principles. Once the distinction is made, a set of principles is presented as a guide for planning and evaluating support services for people with aphasia.
Outcomes & Results: The particular principles drawn from the social model philosophy are: equalising social relations, creating authentic involvement, creating engaging experiences, establishing user control, and becoming accountable to users. Illustrations are given of how each of these social model principles was used by staff and people with aphasia to guide different support services offered by a UK charity called Connect - The Communication Disability Network. The principles were also found useful in evaluating social model activities.
Conclusions: A case is made that the social model principles can provide speech therapists with a guide for conducting their therapies, whatever form those practices take.
C1 Connect Commun Disabil Network, London SE1 1HL, England.
RP Byng, S (reprint author), Connect Commun Disabil Network, 16-18 Marshalsea Rd, London SE1 1HL, England.
EM sallybyng@ukconnect.org
CR Abberley P, 2004, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P239
[Anonymous], 2001, NZ DISABILITY STRATE
BARNES C, 2000, CREATING INDEPENDENT
BERESFORD P, 2003, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P246
Beukelman D. R., 1998, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA
BLACK M, 2003, APHASIA INSIDE OUT, P21
BOAZMAN S, 2003, APHASIA INSIDE OUT R, P32
Byng S, 2001, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V3, P67
BYNG S, 2003, SCI APHASIA, P201, DOI 10.1016/B978-008044073-6/50015-8
CAIRNS D, IN PRESS APHASIA THE, V2
Davis K., 2004, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P203
*DEP HLTH, 2004, EXP PAT NEW APPR CHR
DUCHAN J, 2001, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V3, P73
DUCHAN J, 2004, FRAME WORK LANGUAGE
Duchan J. F., 2001, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V3, P37
Elman RJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P411
Ferguson Philip M., 1992, INTERPRETING DISABIL, P213
Gillman M, 1997, DISABIL SOC, V12, P675
GILLMAN M, 2004, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P251
Goble C., 2004, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P41
Hewitt CN, 2003, J ENVIRON MONITOR, V5, P1, DOI 10.1039/b204712h
Kagan A, 2004, CHALLENGING APHASIA THERAPIES: BROADENING THE DISCOURSE AND EXTENDING THE BOUNDARIES, P158, DOI 10.4324/9780203462706_chapter_10
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
KHOSA J, 2003, APHASIA INSIDE OUT R, P10
LPAA Project Group, 2000, ASHA LEADER, V5, P4
MCNEIL M, 2001, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V3, P55
MERCER G, 2004, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P176
MONTAGU A, IN PRESS APHASIA THE, V2
MORRIS J, 1993, SHAPE THINGS COME US
Oliver M., 2004, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P7
Oliver M., 1996, UNDERSTANDING DISABI
PARR S, 2004, LIVING SEVER APHASIA
Pound C, 2004, CHALLENGING APHASIA THERAPIES: BROADENING THE DISCOURSE AND EXTENDING THE BOUNDARIES, P32, DOI 10.4324/9780203462706_chapter_3
Pound C, 2004, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P161
Sarno MT, 2004, CHALLENGING APHASIA THERAPIES: BROADENING THE DISCOURSE AND EXTENDING THE BOUNDARIES, P19, DOI 10.4324/9780203462706_chapter_2
Simms NJ, 2001, EUR FED CORR PUBL, P246
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P313
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
Threats T, 2004, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V6, P83
UPIAS, 1976, FUND PRINC DIS
van der Gaag A, 2005, CLIN REHABIL, V19, P372, DOI 10.1191/0269215505cr785oa
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
NR 42
TC 38
Z9 40
PU ROUTLEDGE JOURNALS, TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI ABINGDON
PA 4 PARK SQUARE, MILTON PARK, ABINGDON OX14 4RN, OXFORDSHIRE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
EI 1464-5041
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 906
EP 922
DI 10.1080/02687030544000128
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100002
ER
PT J
AU Worrall, L
Rose, T
Howe, T
Brennan, A
Egan, J
Oxenham, D
McKenna, K
AF Worrall, L
Rose, T
Howe, T
Brennan, A
Egan, J
Oxenham, D
McKenna, K
TI Access to written information for people with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
AB Background: Accessibility is often constructed in terms of physical accessibility. There has been little research into how the environment can accommodate the communicative limitations of people with aphasia. Communication accessibility for people with aphasia is conceptualised in this paper within the World Health Organisation's International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF). The focus of accessibility is considered in terms of the relationship between the environment and the person with the disability. Thus: This paper synthesises the results of three Studies that examine the effectiveness of aphasia-friendly written material.
Main Contribution: The first study (Rose, Worrall, & McKenna, 2003) found that aphasia-friendly formatting of written health information improves comprehension by people with aphasia, but not everyone prefers aphasia-friendly formatting. Brennan, Worrall, and McKenna (in press) found that the aphasia-friendly strategy of augmenting text with pictures, particularly ClipArt and Internet images, may be distracting rather than helpful. Finally, Egan, Worrall, and Oxenham (2004) found that the use of ail aphasia-friendly written training manual was instrumental in assisting people with aphasia to learn the Internet.
Conclusion: Aphasia-friendly formatting appears to improve the accessibility of written material for people with aphasia. Caution is needed when considering the use of illustrations, particularly ClipArt and Internet images, when creating aphasia-friendly materials. A research, practice, and policy agenda for introducing aphasia-friendly formatting is proposed.
C1 Univ Queensland, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Ctr, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Worrall, L (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Ctr, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
EM l.worrall@uq.edu.au
RI Rose, Tanya/D-2580-2010; Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR Bernier M J, 1993, Orthop Nurs, V12, P39, DOI 10.1097/00006416-199311000-00008
BRENNAN A, IN PRESS APHASIOLOGY
EGAN J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P265
Hoffmann T., 2004, INT J THERAPY REHABI, V11, P303
Howe TJ, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1015, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000499
Kagan A., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P199
MCLAUGHLIN GH, 1969, J READING, V12, P639
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
Rose TA, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P947, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000319
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
NR 10
TC 23
Z9 23
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 923
EP 929
DI 10.1080/02687030544000137
PG 7
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100003
ER
PT J
AU Linebarger, MC
Schwartz, MF
AF Linebarger, MC
Schwartz, MF
TI AAC for hypothesis testing and treatment of aphasic language production:
Lessons from a "processing prosthesis"
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID AGRAMMATIC PRODUCTION; SENTENCE PRODUCTION; VERB RETRIEVAL
AB Background: The design of augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) technology for aphasic individuals must be informed by a theory of the underlying disorder in order to determine what kind of assistance will be most effective. AAC devices may therefore serve to test competing theories, each predicting the efficacy of a different kind of support for language production. They may also serve as heuristic tools, affording the opportunity to observe language production under radically altered conditions. A communication system that we have termed a "processing prosthesis" was directly inspired by the performance hypothesis, the view that processing factors rather than loss of linguistic knowledge underlie aphasic language production disorders. Unlike AAC technology, which focuses on the provision of direct linguistic support in the form of vocabulary items and pre-stored utterances, this system (referred to here and in previous literature as the "CS") emphasises indirect support to allow the user to more fully exploit his or her retained language production capabilities. If the CS is effective in facilitating aphasic sentence construction, this may be taken as evidence in support of the performance hypothesis embodied in its design. Aims: We illustrate the interplay between AAC technology and psycholinguistic theory by reviewing studies of the CS, and describe some approaches to language remediation that have emerged from this work.
Contributions: We review three published studies and preliminary data from a fourth. These studies demonstrate the efficacy of the CS through "aided" effects (i.e., the extent to which utterances produced on the system are more structured and/or informative than those produced without the system) and treatment effects (i.e., the impact of a period of CS use on the aphasic individual's spontaneous, unaided speech).
Conclusions: The CS data suggest that "indirect" support may play an important role in facilitating and treating aphasic sentence production; and, more generally, they demonstrate the bidirectional flow of insight between assistive technology and the psycholinguistic analysis of aphasic disorders.
C1 Psycholinguist Technol Inc, Jenkintown, PA 19046 USA.
Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA USA.
RP Linebarger, MC (reprint author), Psycholinguist Technol Inc, 93 Old York Rd,Suite 1 447, Jenkintown, PA 19046 USA.
EM Linebarger@psycholinguistic-technologies.com
CR Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
BERNSTEIN DS, 1995, INT J ROBUST NONLIN, V5, P1, DOI 10.1002/rnc.4590050102
Doyle P. J., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P130
Doyle P. J., 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P53, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0503.53
FRIED S, 2002, NEW RABBI
Jacobs BJ, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P115, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2452
Kohn SE, 1998, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V19, P631, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400010390
KOLK H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P282, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1049
LINEBARGER M, 2004, ANN M AC APH CHIC IL
Linebarger MC, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V11, P57
Linebarger MC, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V83, P169
Linebarger MC, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P416, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2378
Linebarger MC, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P267, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000537
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
MARSHALL J, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P517, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248712
Martin RC, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P99
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P87
Peach RK, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P429, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000147
Ross KB, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P113, DOI 10.1080/026870399402235
Saffran E., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SCHWARTZ M, 2005, UNPUB COMBINING ASSI
Schwartz MF, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P263, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000187
Thompson C. K., 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P124
Thompson CK, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P591, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/047)
WEINRICH M, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P21, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1031
WILLIAMS SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P92, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90007-4
ZINGESER L, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P13
NR 28
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 930
EP 942
DI 10.1080/02687030544000146
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100004
ER
PT J
AU Fink, RB
Brecher, A
Sobel, P
Schwartz, MF
AF Fink, RB
Brecher, A
Sobel, P
Schwartz, MF
TI Computer-assisted treatment of word retrieval deficits in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID NAMING DISORDERS; MAPPING THERAPY; REHABILITATION; MULTICUE; PROGRAM;
CUES
AB Background: There are now numerous experimental Studies demonstrating successful treatment of word retrieval deficits in aphasia. Technological advances allow us to implement many of these approaches on the computer and target the underlying impairment (e.g., in phonologically vs semantically based retrieval deficits). These computer-assisted treatments have the potential to facilitate the work of clinicians and, if geared towards independent Or volunteer-assisted usage, extend the rehabilitation process beyond the period of formal therapy.
Aims: Our aim is to review the benefits and limitations of computer-assisted treatment for word retrieval deficits, focusing on the lessons we have learned from a computerised therapy system, developed in Our laboratory, which was designed to be used in the clinical setting, as well as by patients working independently.
Contributions: We review relevant single and multiple case studies that use computer-assisted treatment programmes in various clinical and home settings. We then describe an Outcome Study that used the therapy system developed in our laboratory to deliver a hierarchical, multi-modality cueing protocol under clinician-guided and self-guided instruction. Through the use of mini case studies, we exemplify the system's application in the clinical setting and in home usage. Additionally we present use and satisfaction data which impact on clinical and home use.
Conclusions: Theoretically motivated, computer-assisted treatments for naming impairments can be beneficial as an adjunct to one-on-one speech/language therapy, and are an effective way to intensity and continue the rehabilitation process. While many of our patients are capable of working independently or with minimal assistance to achieve their goals, computers still represent an unfamiliar and intimidating technology for the majority of our patients and families; and access in the home remains limited. One way to provide needed support is through a Computer lab, staffed by trained Volunteers working under the supervision of a speech-language pathologist. Additional research is needed to replicate these findings with a larger and more diverse group of individuals with aphasia and to evaluate the effectiveness of the Multi-modality Matching Module of MossTalk Words (R) software in the treatment of semantically based anomia. This Could potentially provide pilot data for a largescale clinical trial.
C1 Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA 19141 USA.
Thomas Jefferson Univ, Philadelphia, PA 19107 USA.
RP Fink, RB (reprint author), Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Korman Bldg,Suite 213,1200 W Tabor Rd, Philadelphia, PA 19141 USA.
EM fink@shrsys.hslc.org
CR Best W, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V7, P105
BRUCE C, 1987, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V22, P191
DELOCHE G, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P201, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249506
Doesborgh S, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P213, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000580
Fink R. B., 2000, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V7, P32
FINK RB, 2002, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H, V12, P25
Fink RB, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P203
Fink RB, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P41
FINK RB, 2001, MOSSTALK WORDS COMPU
Fink RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1061, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000400
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
JONES EV, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P63
Kaplan E., 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Laganaro M., 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P707
LINEBAUGH C, 1977, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P19
MORTLEY J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P213
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Pedersen PM, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P151, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000106
RAYMER AM, 2004, COMPUTERISED TRAININ
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
SOBEL P, 2000, IMPACT COMPUTER ASSI
Thompson C.K., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P239
VANMOURIK M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P179, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248589
NR 27
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 943
EP 954
DI 10.1080/02687030544000155
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100005
ER
PT J
AU Stefanatos, GA
Gershkoff, A
Madigan, S
AF Stefanatos, GA
Gershkoff, A
Madigan, S
TI Computer-mediated tools for the investigation and rehabilitation of
auditory and phonological processing in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID LEARNING IMPAIRED CHILDREN; PURE WORD DEAFNESS; SPEECH-PERCEPTION;
LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION; DEVELOPMENTAL APHASIA; STOP CONSONANTS;
DEFICITS; SOUNDS; DISCRIMINATION; INTERNET
AB Background: Advances in technology have enhanced out-ability to use computer's to manipulate the spectrotemporal characteristics of speech waveforms in ways that can influence the processing of linguistically important features. These modifications are important in patients with auditory/phonetic processing disorders.
Aims: We present some preliminary data detailing the effect of modifying the spectrotemporal structure of speech on the ability to discriminate consonant-vowel syllables and comprehend spoken words and sentences in a case Of Pure Word Deafness (PWD). Methods & Procedures: We documented severe phonemic processing deficits in a patient with PWD resulting from a unilateral left temporal lesion. Her ability to distinguish between stop consonants was severely impaired while her perception of vowels was relatively spared. This pattern suggested problems with online perceptual elaboration of short-term acoustic features such as rapid formant frequency transitions. We digitally synthesised consonant-vowels with normal (40 millisecond) and extended (80 millisecond) formant frequency transitions and examined her ability to discriminate these stimuli when presented in rapid sequence. In addition, we temporally expanded natural words and sentences by 1.5 and 2 times their original duration (without altering voice pitch) and examined the effects of these manipulations on her auditory comprehension.
Outcomes & Results: Altering the temporal parameters of speech had varied effects on decoding auditory linguistic information. Temporal expansion of sentences produced a small but noteworthy increase in performance on all auditory language comprehension task. Extension of brief formant transitions had no substantial effect on phonemic discrimination of rapidly presented CV pairs.
Conclusions: These findings illustrate that temporal conditioning of auditory stimuli call potentially enhance the ability of patients with PWD to comprehend speech. The implications of the findings for aphasia therapy are discussed.
C1 Albert Einstein Med Ctr, Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA 19027 USA.
Univ Delaware, Wilmington, DE USA.
RP Stefanatos, GA (reprint author), Albert Einstein Med Ctr, Moss Rehabil Res Inst, 1200 W Tabor Rd, Philadelphia, PA 19027 USA.
EM gstefana@einstein.edu
CR ALBERT ML, 1974, BRAIN, V97, P373, DOI 10.1093/brain/97.1.373
AUERBACH SH, 1982, BRAIN, V105, P271, DOI 10.1093/brain/105.2.271
BASSO A, 1977, CORTEX, V13, P85
Bishop D. V. M., 1989, TEST RECEPTION GRAMM
Blumstein S. E., 2001, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V3, P95
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1977, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V15, P19, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(77)90111-7
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P246, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90134-8
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1994, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V346, P29, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1994.0125
BOERSMA P, 2003, PRAAT 4 1
BUCHMAN AS, 1986, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V49, P489, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.49.5.489
Crerar MA, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P229, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0010
Delattre P, 1952, WORD, V8, P195
DELATTRE PC, 1976, ACOUSTIC LOCI TRANSI
DIEHL RL, 1981, PSYCHOL BULL, V89, P1
DIVENYI PL, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P290, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90020-5
Doesborgh S, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P213, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000580
Dronkers NF, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P450
Egan J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P265, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000562
Fant G., 1973, SPEECH SOUNDS FEATUR, P110
FINK RB, 2001, MOSSTALK WORDS COMPU
GARDNER H, 1975, Cortex, V11, P155
Gow DW, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P386
KATZ R, 1992, MICROAPHASIOLOGY COM, V21
KEATING P, 1978, J ACOUST SOC AM, V64, P57, DOI 10.1121/1.381956
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kussmaul A, 1877, CYCLOPEDIA PRACTICE, P581
LIBERMAN AM, 1967, PSYCHOL REV, V74, P431, DOI 10.1037/h0020279
Lichtheim L., 1885, BRAIN, V7, P433
Linebarger MC, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P416, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2378
Louis M, 2001, BRAIN COGNITION, V46, P197, DOI 10.1016/S0278-2626(01)80065-8
Merzenich MM, 1996, SCIENCE, V271, P77, DOI 10.1126/science.271.5245.77
MICELI G, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V6, P47, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90042-1
MICELI G, 1982, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V20, P5, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(82)90083-5
Mortley J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P193, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000553
Nagarajan S S, 1998, IEEE Trans Rehabil Eng, V6, P257, DOI 10.1109/86.712220
OSCARBERMAN M, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P345, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80075-7
PETERSON GE, 1952, J ACOUST SOC AM, V24, P175, DOI 10.1121/1.1906875
PRAAMSTRA P, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1197, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.3.1197
*PSYCH SOFTW TOOLS, 2001, E PRIM VERS 1 0 20 2
REMEZ RE, 1981, SCIENCE, V212, P947, DOI 10.1126/science.7233191
SAFFRAN EM, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P209, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90018-3
Saygin AP, 2003, BRAIN, V126, P928, DOI 10.1093/brain/awg082
STACHOWIAK FJ, 1993, COMPUTER BASED APHAS
Stefanatos GA, 2005, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V11, P456, DOI 10.1017/S1355617705050538
TALLAL P, 1974, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V12, P83, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(74)90030-X
TALLAL P, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V33, P616
TALLAL P, 1975, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V13, P69, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(75)90049-4
TALLAL P, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V5, P13, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90003-2
Tallal P, 1996, SCIENCE, V271, P81, DOI 10.1126/science.271.5245.81
Tyler L. K., 1992, SPOKEN LANGUAGE COMP
VARNEY NR, 1984, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V41, P181
VARNEY NR, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P47
Wang E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P442, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2319
YAQUB BA, 1988, BRAIN, V111, P457, DOI 10.1093/brain/111.2.457
NR 54
TC 1
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 955
EP 964
DI 10.1080/02687030544000164
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100006
ER
PT J
AU Hinckley, JJ
Carr, TH
AF Hinckley, JJ
Carr, TH
TI Comparing the outcomes of intensive and non-intensive context-based
aphasia treatment
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID LANGUAGE TREATMENT; GLOBAL APHASIA; THERAPY; ADULTS
AB Background: Intensive rates of treatment have been shown to have positive outcomes but have rarely been directly compared with non-intensive treatment. Certain types of treatment may be more effective at intensive rates than others. Aims: The purpose of this study was to compare intensive and non-intensive rates of one particular, highly specified type of treatment termed "context-based treatment".
Methods & Procedures: Thirteen adults with moderately severe aphasia were assigned to either intensive or non-intensive treatment. A battery of assessments was designed to measure the effectiveness of the treatment and the transfer of the treatment to more and less similar contexts.
Outcomes & Results: There was no advantage of intensive treatment for achieving mastery of the trained context, or in transferring those skills to similar environments, or challenging environments.
Conclusions: If replicated, the results could suggest that context-based treatment may be a treatment type of choice when treatment time is limited.
C1 Univ S Florida, Tampa, FL 33620 USA.
Michigan State Univ, E Lansing, MI 48824 USA.
RP Hinckley, JJ (reprint author), Univ S Florida, 4202 E Fowler Ave,PCD1017, Tampa, FL 33620 USA.
EM jhinckle@chumal.cas.usf.edu
CR Bhogal Sanjit K, 2003, Top Stroke Rehabil, V10, P66
Denes G, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P385, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248418
Donovan JJ, 1999, J APPL PSYCHOL, V84, P795, DOI 10.1037//0021-9010.84.5.795
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Grant DA, 1993, WISCONSIN CARD SORTI
Hinckley JJ, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P463, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000340
Hinckley JJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P989, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249465
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
HOLLINGSHEAD AB, 1975, UNPUB 4 FACTOR INDEX
Hopper T, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P933, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249461
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
MACKENZIE C, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P435, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248547
MATTOON JS, 1994, ALHRTR19940041
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
Pulvermuller F, 2001, STROKE, V32, P1621
Raven JC, 1979, MANUAL RAVENS PROGR
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
VANMOURIK M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P491, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249486
WERTZ RT, 1986, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V43, P653
Wilson B. A., 1985, RIVERMEAD BEHAV MEMO
NR 21
TC 23
Z9 26
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 965
EP 974
DI 10.1080/02687030544000173
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100007
ER
PT J
AU Basso, A
AF Basso, A
TI How intensive/prolonged should an intensive/prolonged treatment be?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID APHASIC STROKE PATIENTS; SPEECH-THERAPY; LANGUAGE TREATMENT; RECOVERY;
COMMUNICATION; METAANALYSIS; EFFICACY; REHABILITATION; DETERMINANTS;
TRIAL
AB Background: The issue of efficacy of aphasia therapy has long been debated and there is now convincing evidence that treatment is effective. More focused questions on aphasia therapy have also been addressed, although less frequently. This paper reviews the literature on the effect of intensity and duration of treatment.
Aims: Data in the literature on intensity and duration of treatment are reviewed.
Main Contribution: Positive and negative studies on treated and untreated patients are reconsidered and the length of treatments in the two groups is compared. Studies directly tackling the question of intensity/duration of therapy are briefly reported as well as the results of a meta-analysis. Improvement in three pairs of matched subjects, all treated for very long periods of time but with different intensity, is compared.
Conclusions: Results clearly indicate that the number of therapy sessions is an important factor in recovery. Results of the meta-analysis support this Conclusion. There are also indications that when therapy is protracted for many months or even years with a very strict regimen (2-4 hours daily), aphasic subjects show clear improvement in their daily use of language and Communicative competence.
C1 Univ Milan, Inst Neurol Sci, Milan, Italy.
RP Basso, A (reprint author), Inst Neurol Sci Neurol, Via F Sforza 35, I-20122 Milan, Italy.
EM anna.basso@fastwebnet.it
CR Albert ML, 2003, STROKE, V34, P992
BASSO A, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, P294
BASSO A, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P190
BASSO A, 1975, REV NEUROL, V131, P607
Basso A, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P307, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000304
Bhogal SK, 2003, STROKE, V34, P987, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000062343.64383.D0
*BIRCH DAV ASS INC, 1997, STAT OF THE SCI MED, V1
BRINDLEY P, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P695, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249037
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
DAVID R, 1982, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V45, P957, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.45.11.957
Denes G, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P385, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248418
GLONING K, 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P57
Greener J., 1999, COCHRANE LIB
HAGEN C, 1973, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V54, P454
HARTMAN J, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P646
Hughes D., 2000, GENOME BIOL, V1, P00061
LEVITA E, 1978, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V47, P151
LINCOLN NB, 1984, LANCET, V1, P1197
MARSHALL J, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P177, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249505
MARSHALL RC, 1982, FOLIA PHONIATR, V34, P305
MARSHALL RC, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P462
MAZZONI M, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P553, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248714
MEIKLE M, 1979, BRIT MED J, V2, P87
Pedersen PM, 1996, ANN NEUROL, V40, P130, DOI 10.1002/ana.410400126
PEDERSEN PM, 1995, ANN NEUROL, V38, P659, DOI 10.1002/ana.410380416
PENN C, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P25
PICKERSGILL MJ, 1983, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V46, P130, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.46.2.130
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
PRINS RS, 1989, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V10, P85, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400008432
Pulvermuller F, 2001, STROKE, V32, P1621
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P582, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1060
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
SHEWAN CM, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P272, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90068-3
VIGNOLO LA, 1964, CORTEX, V1, P344
WERTZ RT, 1986, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V43, P653
Wertz RT, 1996, ANN NEUROL, V40, P129, DOI 10.1002/ana.410400125
WERTZ RT, 2003, SCI APHASIA THERAPY, P259, DOI 10.1016/B978-008044073-6/50018-3
WERTZ RT, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P580
WHURR R, 1992, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V27, P1
NR 39
TC 26
Z9 29
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 975
EP 984
DI 10.1080/02687030544000182
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100008
ER
PT J
AU Hillis, AE
Heidler, J
AF Hillis, AE
Heidler, J
TI Contributions and limitations of the cognitive neuropsychological
approach to treatment: Illustrations from studies of reading and
spelling therapy
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID PURE ALEXIA; SURFACE DYSGRAPHIA; NONFLUENT APHASIA; DEEP DYSLEXIA;
REHABILITATION; REMEDIATION; DEFICITS; PHARMACOTHERAPY; BROMOCRIPTINE;
AMPHETAMINE
AB Background: Cognitive neuropsychological research is focused on improving the understanding of cognitive processes and representations underlying normal tasks such as reading and spelling, on the basis of impaired performance of these tasks after brain damage.
Functional architectures of cognitive tasks developed through this approach have often assisted speech-language pathologists and other therapists in understanding the task to be treated, and in identifying the impaired and spared components of the task to be treated in each individual with brain damage.
Aims: To review the benefits and limitations of this approach, focusing On illustrations from treatment of reading and spelling, and to provide ideas about how the limitations]night be addressed. Contributions: We provide examples that demonstrate how disruption of particular cognitive functions in the process of reading or spelling might be identified and rationally treated. Additionally, we provide some illustrations of how limitations of this approach might be addressed by considering evidence from cognitive neuroscience regarding neural mechanisms of recovery and learning.
Conclusions: Insights from cognitive neuropsychology should be integrated with insights from neuroscience in developing rehabilitation strategies.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Baltimore, MD USA.
RP Hillis, AE (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ Hosp, Dept Neurol, Phipps 126,600 N Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
EM argye@JHMI.edu
CR ALBERT ML, 1988, NEUROLOGY, V38, P877
ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
BADDELEY A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P235, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401438
Beeson P. B., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P572
Beeson P. M., 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P153
Beeson P. M., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P101
Beeson P. M., 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P367
BERNDT RS, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P503
CARAMAZZA A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P217, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401437
Caramazza A., 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P383
Carlomagno S, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P485
CLARK ANG, 1979, J AM GERIATR SOC, V27, P174
DEPARTZ MP, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P369, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252065
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P116
Friedman RB, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P219, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2286
Gonzalez Rothi L. J., 1992, CLIN COMMUNICATION D, V2, P11
GUPTA SR, 1992, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V73, P373, DOI 10.1016/0003-9993(92)90012-L
Hillis A. E., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
Hillis A. E., 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P207
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
Hillis A. E., 2004, NEW COGNITIVE NEUROS
Hillis A. E., 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P84
Hillis AE, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P648, DOI 10.1017/S135561779846613X
HILLIS AE, 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P3
Hillis AE, 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D
HILLIS AE, IN PRESS EFFECTIVENE
HILLIS AE, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
HILLIS AE, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P5, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249497
Kiran S, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P773, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/061)
Kirkwood A, 1999, J NEUROSCI, V19, P1599
Maher LM, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P636
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P867, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000390
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000129
Mitchum C., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P317
MITCHUM C, 1988, ADV CLIN REHABILITAT, P160
MITCHUM CC, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P1, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520173
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
PLAUT DC, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P377, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253469
Plaut DC, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0004
Rapp B., 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
Riddoch M.J., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
RIDDOCH MJ, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P1
SABE L, 1992, NEUROLOGY, V42, P1637
SCOTT C, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P301, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248996
SEKI K, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P595, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)00138-F
SERON T, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
Walker-Batson D, 2001, STROKE, V32, P2093, DOI 10.1161/hs0901.095720
Walker-Batson D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P252, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2262
Walker-Batson D, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P137
Weekes B, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P277, DOI 10.1080/026432996382033
WILSON B, 1990, APPL COGNITIVE PSYCH, V4, P247, DOI 10.1002/acp.2350040403
Wilson BA, 1997, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V3, P487
NR 56
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 985
EP 993
DI 10.1080/02687030544000191
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100009
ER
PT J
AU Rapp, B
AF Rapp, B
TI The relationship between treatment outcomes and the underlying cognitive
deficit: Evidence from the remediation of acquired dysgraphia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID SURFACE DYSGRAPHIA; APHASIA; THERAPY; MEMORY
AB Background: It is unclear to what extent treatment outcomes are significantly influenced by the specific cognitive deficits that underlie an individual's language impairment. That is, it is not well understood if treatment benefits such as item-specific relearning, generalisation to untreated items, and long-term maintenance vary according to deficit type.
Aims: The aim of this investigation was to look at the relationship between deficit type and responsiveness to treatment by examining the results of applying the same remediation protocol to individuals suffering from deficits affecting different components of the spelling process.
Methods! & Procedures: Three adults with acquired dysgraphia were identified as suffering from deficits to either the orthographic lexicon or the graphemic buffer. They were administered the same spell-study-spell treatment protocol during bi-weekly sessions for periods of 7-11 weeks with periodic follow-up evaluations that continued for 40-112 weeks after the end of treatment.
Outcomes & Results: All three individuals exhibited significant item-specific treatment benefits that were apparent even 40-112 weeks after the end of treatment. Furthermore, the individuals with the graphemic buffer deficits showed generalisation to untreated words, while the individual with the orthographic lexicon deficit showed an item-specific benefit merely from the repeated testing of words.
Conclusions: The presence or absence of generalisation effects appears to be related to the nature of the underlying deficit, while the long-term stability of treatment benefits does not.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Dept Cognit Sci, Baltimore, MD 21218 USA.
RP Rapp, B (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ, Dept Cognit Sci, Baltimore, MD 21218 USA.
EM rapp@cogsci.jhu.edu
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
Beeson P. M., 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P367
BEESON PM, 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D
BEESON PM, 1998, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
BEHRMANN M, 1987, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P365, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252044
BEHRMANN M, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P327
CARAMAZZA A, 1988, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V11, P395, DOI 10.1146/annurev.neuro.11.1.395
CARAMAZZA A, 1987, COGNITION, V26, P59, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90014-X
Carlomagno S, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P485
Clausen NS, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P625, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000003
DEPARTZ MP, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P369, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252065
Ellis A. W., 1989, READING WRITING DYSL
Folk JR, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P653, DOI 10.1080/02643290244000184
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Goodman RA, 1985, J HOPKINS DYSGRAPHIA
HATFIELD MF, 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P65
Hillis A. E., 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P84
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
Martin N, 1999, INT J PSYCHOL, V34, P339
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000129
MARTIN RC, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P83, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1005
Rapp B, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P439, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000301
RAPP B, 2001, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V2, P221
Rapp B, 2002, NEUROREPORT, V13, P207, DOI 10.1097/00001756-200202110-00007
Raymer AM, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P607, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000058
Robson J, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P471, DOI 10.1080/13682820110089371
SERON X, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P45
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
Weekes B, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P277, DOI 10.1080/026432996382033
NR 30
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 994
EP 1008
DI 10.1080/02687030544000209
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100010
ER
PT J
AU Marshall, J
Cairns, D
AF Marshall, J
Cairns, D
TI Therapy for sentence processing problems in aphasia: Working on thinking
for speaking
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID DISORDERS; DEFICITS; EVENT
AB Background: There is evidence that language production requires specialised conceptual processes, or "thinking for speaking" (Slobin, 1996). These processes generate the pre-verbal message, which according to Levelt (1989, 1999) has propositional structure and perspective and is specifically adapted for the target language.
Aims/Main Contribution: This paper presents evidence that thinking for speaking may be impaired in aphasia. Even when not impaired, its complexities may prevent people with aphasia from revealing grammatical competencies. This may explain why therapy often fails to bring about improvements in open speaking conditions, such as narrative, which impose heavy message-level demands.
Conclusions: It is argued that, with some individuals, therapy should target thinking for speaking skills. Two therapy studies are reviewed that support this conclusion.
C1 City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, London EC1V 0HB, England.
RP Marshall, J (reprint author), City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, London EC1V 0HB, England.
EM J.Marshall@city.ac.uk
CR BERNSTEIN DS, 1995, INT J ROBUST NONLIN, V5, P1, DOI 10.1002/rnc.4590050102
BLACK M, 2000, SEMANTIC PROCESSING
BROWN G, 1993, COMP HAEMATOL INT, V3, P1, DOI 10.1007/BF00394918
BYNG S, UNPUB MULTIPLE EVENT
BYNG S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P315, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248663
CAIRNS D, 2005, UNPUB EVENT PROCESSI
Dean MP, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P521, DOI 10.1080/02687030544000001
DIPPER L, 1999, THESIS U COLL LONDON
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
Garrett M., 1988, LINGUISTICS CAMBRIDG, VIII
Hartsuiker RJ, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P221, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1905
KAGAN A, 1995, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V2, P5
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Langacker R. W., 1991, FDN COGNITIVE GRAMMA, VII
Langacker Ronald, 1987, FDN COGNITIVE GRAMMA, V1
LANGACKER RW, 1997, LANGUAGE CONCEPTUALI
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Levelt W. J. M., 1999, NEUROCOGNITION LANGU
LEVELT WJM, 1996, LANGUAGE SPACE
LINEBARGER MC, 1983, COGNITION, V13, P361, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90015-X
Linebarger MC, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P416, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2378
Linebarger MC, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P267, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000537
MARSHALL J, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P177, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249505
Marshall J., 1999, APHASIA THERAPY FILE
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
MARSHALL J, 1994, THESIS CITY U LONDON
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
NICKELS L, 1991, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V26, P175
Pinker Steven, 1989, LEARNABILITY COGNITI
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Slobin Dan, 1996, RETHINKING LINGUISTI
Thompson C., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D
Weinrich M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P327, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1759
Woll B., 1999, LINGUISTICS BRIT SIG
NR 34
TC 9
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 1009
EP 1020
DI 10.1080/02687030544000218
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100011
ER
PT J
AU Thompson, CK
Shapiro, LP
AF Thompson, CK
Shapiro, LP
TI Treating agrammatic aphasia within a linguistic framework: Treatment of
Underlying Forms
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID VERB-ARGUMENT STRUCTURE; BRAIN-DAMAGED SUBJECTS; SENTENCE COMPREHENSION;
LEXICAL ORGANIZATION; SYNTACTIC COMPLEXITY; MOVEMENT STRUCTURES;
TREATMENT EFFICACY; WERNICKE APHASIA; WH-MOVEMENT; DEFICITS
AB Background: Formal linguistic properties of sentences-both lexical, i.e., argument structure, and syntactic, i.e., movement-as well as what is known about normal and disordered sentence processing and production, were considered in the development of Treatment of Underlying Forms (TUF), a linguistic approach to treatment of sentence deficits in patients with agrammatic aphasia. TUF is focused on complex, non-canonical sentence Structures and operates on the premise that training underlying, abstract, properties of language will allow for effective generalisation to untrained structures that share similar linguistic properties, particularly those of lesser complexity.
Aims: In this paper we summarise a series of studies focused oil examining the effects of TUF.
Methods & Procedures: In each study, sentences selected for treatment and for generalisation analysis were controlled for their lexical and syntactic properties, with some structures related and others unrelated along theoretical lines. We use single-subject experimental designs-i.e., multiple baseline designs across participants and behaviours-to chart improvement in comprehension and production of both trained and untrained Structures. One structure was trained at a time, while untrained sentences were tested for generalisation. Participants included individuals with mild to moderately severe agrammatic, Broca's aphasia with characteristic deficits patterns.
Outcomes & Results: Results of this work have shown that treatment improves the sentence types entered into treatment, that generalisation occurs to sentences which are linguistically related to those trained, and that treatment Results in changes in spontaneous discourse in most patients. Further, we have found that generalisation is enhanced when the direction of treatment is from more to less complex structures, a finding that led to the Complexity Account of Treatment Efficacy (CATE, Thompson, Shapiro, Kiran, & Sobecks, 2003). Finally, results of recent work showing that treatment appears to affect processing of trained sentences in real time and that treatment gains can be mapped onto the brain using functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) are discussed.
Conclusions: These findings indicate that TUF is effective for treating sentence comprehension and production in patients who present with language deficit patterns like those seen in our patients. Patients receiving this treatment show strong generalisation effects to untrained language material. Given the Current healthcare climate, which limits the amount of treatment that aphasic patients receive following stroke, it is important that clinicians deliver treatment that results in optimal generalisation in the least amount of time possible.
C1 Northwestern Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Evanston, IL 60208 USA.
San Diego State Univ, San Diego, CA 92182 USA.
RP Thompson, CK (reprint author), Northwestern Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 2240 Campus Dr, Evanston, IL 60208 USA.
EM ckthom@northwestem.edu
CR Archibald J., 1998, STUDIES 2 LANGUAGE A, V20, P189, DOI 10.1017/S0272263198002046
Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
Barlow JA, 2001, LINGUA, V111, P667, DOI 10.1016/S0024-3841(00)00043-7
Ben-Shachar M, 2003, PSYCHOL SCI, V14, P433, DOI 10.1111/1467-9280.01459
Chomsky N., 1991, PRINCIPLES PARAMETER
Chomsky Noam, 1993, VIEW BUILDING 20
De Bleser R, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P213, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(02)00015-5
Dickey MW, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P108, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00283-9
ECKMAN FR, 1988, APPL LINGUIST, V9, P1, DOI 10.1093/applin/9.1.1
Gierut JA, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, pS85
Gierut JA, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P886, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/071)
Grodzinsky Y., 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P467
Jacobs BJ, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P5
Jonkers R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P245, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249453
Jonkers R, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P37
KEGL J, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P151, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1044
Kemmerer D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2311
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kim M, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00147-0
Kim M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P1, DOI 10.1006/brin.2000.2315
Kiran S, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P773, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/061)
Kiss K., 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER, P123
KOOPMAN H, 1991, LINGUA, V85, P211, DOI 10.1016/0024-3841(91)90022-W
Lee M, 2004, J NEUROLINGUIST, V17, P315, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(03)00062-9
Loverso FL, 1986, J REHABILITATION RES, V25, P47
Luzzatti C, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V81, P432, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2536
Maas E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P609, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000266
Murray L, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P785, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000273
Schmidt RA, 1999, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
Schwartz M. F., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P85, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406352
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
SHAPIRO LP, 1989, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V18, P223
SHAPIRO LP, IN PRESS BROCAS REGI
SHAPIRO LP, 1987, COGNITION, V27, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(87)80010-0
SHAPIRO LP, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P423, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1053
SHAPIRO LP, 1993, J MEM LANG, V32, P96, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1993.1006
Swinney D., 1990, INFERENCES TEXT COMP
TANNENHAUS MK, 1989, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V4, P211
Thompson CK, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P661
Thompson C. K., 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P124
Thompson CK, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P175, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0009
THOMPSON CK, 2005, UNPUB NW ASSESSMENT
THOMPSON CK, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P307
Thompson CK, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P228
Thompson CK, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P387
Thompson CK, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P591, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/047)
Thompson CK, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, p[605, 612]
Thompson CK, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P151, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(02)00014-3
Thompson CK, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P15, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.010
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
THOMPSON CK, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P111, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249501
Trueswell JC, 1998, J MEM LANG, V39, P102, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1998.2565
WAMBAUGH JL, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P509
YAO K, 1989, THESIS INDIANA U US
ZURIF E, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P448, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1054
NR 55
TC 29
Z9 29
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 1021
EP 1036
DI 10.1080/02687030544000227
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100012
ER
PT J
AU Friedmann, N
AF Friedmann, N
TI Degrees of severity and recovery in agrammatism: Climbing up the
syntactic tree
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID QUESTION PRODUCTION; INFLECTIONAL MORPHOLOGY; SENTENCE PRODUCTION;
PRUNING HYPOTHESIS; APHASIA; MOVEMENT; AGREEMENT; LANGUAGE; ENGLISH;
TENSE
AB Background: Agrammatic aphasia impairs syntactic abilities in production and comprehension. The Tree Pruning Hypothesis (TPH) suggests that the syntactic deficit in production can be described in terms of inability to access the high nodes of the syntactic tree.
Aims: The current study explored patterns of individual differences between individuals with agrammatic aphasia, and suggested a characterisation for different degrees of agrammatic severity using the syntactic tree. A second aim was to test the path of spontaneous recovery in agrammatic aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: The first experiment tested 18 individuals with agrammatism: 16 were Hebrew speakers, and 2 were speakers of Palestinian Arabic. The syntactic ability of the participants was assessed with respect to three levels of the syntactic tree. To test the ability at the Agreement Phrase (AgrP) level, a task of agreement completion was used. To test the ability at the Tense Phrase (TP) level, a task of tense inflection completion was used. The ability at the highest level of the tree, the Complementiser Phrase (CP), was tested using elicitation tasks for two structures: Wh-questions and relative clauses. The second experiment tested the recovery of these four abilities over time in SB, an individual with agrammatism. starting 4.5 months post her brain injury until 18 months post-onset.
Outcomes & Results: The main findings were that the variation between the performance of different individuals with agrammatism and degrees of agrammatic severity could be accounted for by different sites of pruning oil the syntactic tree. Severe agrammatism results from inability to access TP and the nodes above it, which impairs both tense inflection and CP-related abilities like the production of embedded sentences and Wh-questions. Milder agrammatism results from the inaccessibility of a higher node, CP, which causes a deficit to embedded sentences and Wh-questions, but leaves tense unimpaired. For both degrees of severity, agreement inflection was unimpaired. The second experiment showed that the spontaneous recovery of SB proceeded on the syntactic tree: the starting point was impairment in AgrP, TP, and CP, at the next stage AgrP recovered, and at the following stage TP recovered too.
Conclusions: The results show that the syntactic tree is not only a useful too] for the characterisation of agrammatic aphasia at one point in time;, it can also account for individual differences as well as for degrees of agrammatic severity, and can describe stages of spontaneous recovery. A milder impairment, or improvement in agrammatism, manifests itself in the ability to access higher nodes of the syntactic tree.
C1 Tel Aviv Univ, Sch Educ, IL-69978 Tel Aviv, Israel.
RP Friedmann, N (reprint author), Tel Aviv Univ, Sch Educ, IL-69978 Tel Aviv, Israel.
EM naamafr@post.tau.ac.il
RI Friedmann, Naama/M-2688-2013
CR BATES EA, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P323, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90072-7
Benedet MJ, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P309, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70758-5
BERNDT RS, 1980, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V1, P225, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400000552
Caplan D., 1985, AGRAMMATISM
Chomsky N., 1995, MINIMALIST PROGRAM
Crawford JR, 1998, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V12, P482, DOI 10.1076/clin.12.4.482.7241
DEBLESER R, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P21, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1002
FERREIRO SM, 2003, THESIS U AUTONOMA BA
FREIDMANN N, IN PRESS THEORETICAL
FRIEDMANN N, 2005, BROCAS REGION
Friedmann N, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P288, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/023)
FRIEDMANN N, 1998, THESIS TEL AVIV U IS
FRIEDMANN N, 2001, 2 SCI APH C GIENS FR
FRIEDMANN N, 1998, BAFLA FRIEDMANNS BAT
Friedmann N., 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER, P152
Friedmann N, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P250
Friedmann N, 2001, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V30, P71, DOI 10.1023/A:1005256224207
FRIEDMANN N, 1994, THESIS TEL AVIV U IS
Friedmann N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1795
Friedmann N, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P160, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2587
Goodglass H., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V1, P237
GOODGLASS H, 1960, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V3, P257
Grodzinslcy Y., 1990, THEORETICAL PERSPECT
Guttman L, 1944, AM SOCIOL REV, V9, P139, DOI 10.2307/2086306
HAGIWARA H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1041
Kolk H, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P558
Menn L., 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C
POLLOCK JY, 1989, LINGUIST INQ, V20, P365
Ruigendijk E, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P116, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.060
Thompson CK, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P175, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0009
THOMPSON CK, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P201, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1045
THOMPSON CK, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P307
Thompson CK, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P228
Wenzlaff M, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V89, P57, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00298-0
NR 34
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 1037
EP 1051
DI 10.1080/02687030544000236
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100013
ER
PT J
AU Nicholas, M
Sinotte, MP
Helm-Estabrooks, N
AF Nicholas, M
Sinotte, MP
Helm-Estabrooks, N
TI Using a computer to communicate: Effect of executive function
impairments in people with severe aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID VISUAL COMMUNICATION; GLOBAL APHASIA; SYSTEM
AB Background: Some individuals with severe non-fluent aphasia do not respond in a functional way to any form of communication therapy. Others show improved ability to communicate with treatment focused on alternative communication modalities such as drawing, gesturing, or using a computer. An important difference between these two patient groups may lie in their nonverbal executive function abilities. Executive functions refer to a range of cognitive abilities including goal formulation, planning, carrying out goal-directed plans, and monitoring the effects of actions.
Aims: We aimed to determine whether individuals with severely restricted verbal output due to aphasia could significantly improve their functional communication skills by using an alternative communication computer program called C-Speak Aphasia. We examined several factors to determine how they related to individual patients' ability to communicate expressively using C-Speak Aphasia, including linguistic factors related to semantic processing and extent of executive system dysfunction.
Methods and Procedures: Results from five patients who received at least 6 months of treatment to learn C-Speak Aphasia are presented. Communication skills on five untrained tasks were repeatedly probed throughout training to assess carryover of treatment effects. Response to treatment was then examined with respect to baseline measures of language and non-linguistic executive functioning.
Outcomes and Results: Using C-Speak Aphasia three of the five participants communicated significantly more information on selected probe tasks than they did without the computer. Executive function skills were more relevant to treatment response than severity of aphasia or semantic knowledge. Subjects with more intact executive function skills responded better to treatment with this alternative communication method than subjects with relatively greater impairment in these skills.
Conclusions: These results suggest that executive function impairments may underlie poor response to treatment of alternative modes of communication, and that non-linguistic measures of executive functioning should be part of every aphasia assessment when attempting to determine candidacy for certain types of treatment programmes.
C1 MGH, Grad Program Commun Sci & Disorders, Inst Hlth Profess, Boston, MA 02129 USA.
Boston Univ, Sch Med, Boston, MA 02118 USA.
RP Nicholas, M (reprint author), MGH, Grad Program Commun Sci & Disorders, Inst Hlth Profess, Charlestown Navy Yard,36 1st Ave, Boston, MA 02129 USA.
EM mlnicholas@mghihp.edu
CR Goodglass H, 2000, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
HELMESTABROOKS N, 2000, COGNITIVE LINGUISTIC
JOHANNSENHORBACH H, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P74, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90098-7
*KING SOFTW DEV, 1997, SPEAK DYN PRO
Koul R., 1998, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V14, P11, DOI 10.1080/07434619812331278166
Naeser MA, 1998, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V55, P1438, DOI 10.1001/archneur.55.11.1438
Nicholas M., 1998, C SPEAK APHASIA COMM
NICHOLAS M, 1998, THESIS EMERSON COLL
Purdy M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P549, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000176
Purdy M., 1990, THESIS U CONNECTICUT, V53, P5164
Shelton JR, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P319, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248415
STEELE RD, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P185, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248590
STEELE RD, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90048-1
VANMOURIK M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P491, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249486
WEINRICH M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P501, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249018
WEINRICH M, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P391, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90075-8
NR 16
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 1052
EP 1065
DI 10.1080/02687030544000245
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100014
ER
PT J
AU Ramsberger, G
AF Ramsberger, G
TI Achieving conversational success in aphasia by focusing on
non-linguistic cognitive WIN: A potentially promising new approach
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID ATTENTION; REHABILITATION; DAMAGE
AB Background: Recent reports from a variety of tabs have demonstrated that some patients with aphasia have concomitant non-linguistic cognitive compromises, especially in the area of attention/executive functions. Recent findings also suggest that attention/executive functions may play an important role in the conversational success of persons with aphasia. Aims: This paper provides a review of recent work being carried Out in a number of centres having to do with treatment of attention/executive function problems in persons with aphasia.
Main Contribution: Although results of the studies reviewed herein must be interpreted with caution, there is growing support for the notion that attention/executive function skills in persons with aphasia are remediable, and that there is an important relationship between attention/executive function and functional communication in people with aphasia. The results suggest that treatment of attention/executive function in aphasia-even in people many years post-onset-may result in measurable changes in attention/executive function skills and in the transactional success of conversational communication.
Conclusions: Of course further research must be completed in order to provide clinicians with adequate evidence for clinical decision making. However, this line of research represents a promising new direction in aphasia rehabilitation.
C1 Univ Colorado, Dept Speech Language & Hearing Sci, Boulder, CO 80309 USA.
RP Ramsberger, G (reprint author), Univ Colorado, Dept Speech Language & Hearing Sci, UCB 409, Boulder, CO 80309 USA.
EM Gail.Ramsberger@colorado.edu
CR Baddeley A, 1996, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V49, P5
BLOMERT L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248666
Bracy O. L., 1994, PSSCOGREHAB COMPUTER
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
CONNERS CK, 1990, CONNERS CONTINUOUS P
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
Gron G, 1998, PSYCHIAT RES, V80, P83, DOI 10.1016/S0165-1781(98)00053-5
Hardin K. H., 2004, CLIN APH C PARK CIT
Heaton R. K., 1981, MANUAL WISCONSIN CAR
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P469
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1991, MANUAL APHASIA THERA
HOLLAND A, 1988, DEEP S C COMM DIS BA
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
LINCOLN NB, 2003, COCHRANE LIB
Miyake A, 2000, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V41, P49, DOI 10.1006/cogp.1999.0734
Miyake Akira, 2000, Seminars in Speech and Language, V21, P169, DOI 10.1055/s-2000-7563
Park NW, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V15, P199, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.15.2.199
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Purdy M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P549, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000176
RAMSBERGER G, 2002, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
RAMSBERGER G, 1994, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V1, P1
Ramsberger G, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P337, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000636
Regard M., 1981, THESIS U VICTORIA
Reynolds CR, 2002, COMPREHENSIVE TRAIL
Robertson IH, 1999, PSYCHOL BULL, V125, P544, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.125.5.544
SANDFORD JA, 1995, MANUAL INTEGRATED VI
SIMMONS N, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P106
Stroop JR, 1935, J EXP PSYCHOL, V18, P643, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.121.1.15
Sturm W, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V7, P81, DOI 10.1080/713755526
Sturm W, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P259, DOI 10.1080/09602019108402258
NR 31
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 1066
EP 1073
DI 10.1080/02687030544000254
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100015
ER
PT J
AU Stark, JA
AF Stark, JA
TI Analysing the language therapy process: The implicit role of learning
and memory
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 41st Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia/Aphasia Therapy Workshop
CY OCT 21-23, 2003
CL Vienna, AUSTRIA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID APHASIC SUBJECTS; TERM-MEMORY; REHABILITATION; ACCESSIBILITY;
REGENERATION; ERRORLESS; RECALL; CUES
AB Background: Analysis of language recovery has focused primarily on the linguistic aspects of language therapy provided to people with aphasia. The preservation and influence of cognitive skills has been taken for granted, although factors such as memory, attention, and learning are fundamental to an understanding of the language rehabilitation process.
Aims: The goals of this paper are to elucidate the ELA-syntax treatment protocol, which aims at ameliorating oral sentence production, and to demonstrate how significant gains in performance might be attributed to aspects of its structure and content, in particular, its use of verbal recall in the therapy procedure.
Methods & Procedures: A qualitative analysis of the structure of a single ELA therapy session and data from a single-case study, TH, will be presented in support of the issues being addressed. Transcriptions of single therapy sessions from the beginning, middle, and end of the three protocols are analysed with particular emphasis on sentence recall,
Outcomes & Results: From early on in language therapy, TH demonstrated a relatively good ability to recall, i.e., convey the content of the sentences worked on in therapy sessions. This performance contrasted with his poor initial spontaneous production of each sentence. TH's severe verb retrieval difficulties improved and the length of the sentences produced in therapy increased from an average of 5.25 to 10.0 words. A carryover to discourse and pragmatic-level tasks and to written sentence production is also observed.
Conclusions: The use of "delay" and a form of personalised cueing appear to play a crucial role in facilitating the retrieval of information from memory for oral sentence production. Incorporating the task of recalling the content of a therapy session at the beginning of the next session and at the end of each session provides an immediate and repeated measure of a participant's learning abilities and his/her response to the ongoing therapy programme. It is postulated that this distinct feature of the treatment programme facilitates the use of language in everyday life.
C1 Austrian Acad Sci, Dept Linguist & Commun Res, A-1030 Vienna, Austria.
RP Stark, JA (reprint author), Austrian Acad Sci, Dept Linguist & Commun Res, Kegelgasse 27-1, A-1030 Vienna, Austria.
EM jacqueline-ann.stark@univie.ac.at
CR Anderson JR, 2000, LEARNING MEMORY INTE
ANDREWES D, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY FRON
BADDELEY A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P235, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401438
BERMAN M, 1967, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V32, P372
Bjork R A, 1994, METACOGNITION KNOWIN
BLOMERT L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248666
BOCK JK, 1985, COGNITION, V21, P47
BOCK K, 1987, J MEM LANG, V26, P119, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(87)90120-3
Burgio F, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P759, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00014-6
Byng S., 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA, P1
Byng S., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P115
BYNG S, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P303
Carson DH, 1968, CORTEX, V4, P92
CRAIK FIM, 1972, VERBAL LEARNING VERB, V11, P671
Craik FIM, 2002, MEMORY, V10, P305, DOI 10.1080/09658210244000135
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
ETTLINGE.G, 1970, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V8, P465, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(70)90042-4
Ferguson A, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P125, DOI 10.1080/026870399402244
Fillingham JK, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P337, DOI 10.1080/09602010343000020
Freed D, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P743, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000246
FREED D, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P105
Freed DB, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P227
Friedman RB, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P181, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00260-8
GOLPER LA, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P52
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Hatfield M. H., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY
HORNER J, 1979, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P101
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Lacey EH, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P189, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.097
LESSER R, 1988, APHASIA, P346
LINEBAUGH C, 1977, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P19
Lockhart RS, 2002, MEMORY, V10, P397, DOI 10.1080/09658210244000225
LOMBARDI L, 1992, J MEM LANG, V31, P713, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(92)90036-W
MANTYLA T, 1983, SCAND J PSYCHOL, V24, P303, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9450.1983.tb00504.x
MARSHALL RC, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P444
MARSHALL RC, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P335
Marshall RC, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P763, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000040
OBLER LK, 1979, UNPUB ACTION NAMING
POTTER MC, 1990, J MEM LANG, V29, P633, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(90)90042-X
PRESCOTT TE, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P178
RISSE GL, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P605, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.2.605
Robertson IH, 1999, PSYCHOL BULL, V125, P544, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.125.5.544
STARK J, 2005, UNPUB RECOVERY LANGU
Stark P, 2001, POPTRONICS, V2, P3
SULLIVAN MP, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P247
TULVING E, 1966, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V5, P381, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(66)80048-8
NR 46
TC 5
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 10-11
SI SI
BP 1074
EP 1089
DI 10.1080/02687030544000263
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 990MJ
UT WOS:000233747100016
ER
PT J
AU Welbourne, SR
Ralph, MAL
AF Welbourne, SR
Ralph, MAL
TI Using computational, parallel distributed processing networks to model
rehabilitation in patients with acquired dyslexia: An initial
investigation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID HAVE-A-FUTURE; COGNITIVE-NEUROPSYCHOLOGY; CONNECTIONIST NETWORKS;
ACQUISITION; INSIGHTS; RECOGNITION; PLASTICITY; ACTIVATION; SYSTEMS;
MEMORY
AB Background: Traditional cognitive neuropsychological models are good at diagnosing deficits but are limited when it comes to studying recovery and rehabilitation. Parallel distributed processing (PDP) models have more potential in this regard as they are dynamic and can actually learn. However, to date very little work has been done in using PDP models to study recovery and rehabilitation.
Aims: This study seeks to demonstrate how a PDP model of acquired dyslexia can be extended to provide a computational framework that is capable of making predictions about the relative effectiveness of therapeutic interventions.
Methods & Procedures: A replication of Plaut, McClelland, Seidenberg, and Patterson's (1996, simulation 2) model of word reading was trained and then damaged. This damaged network was then retrained in a number of different ways designed to model both natural (spontaneous) recovery and recovery that can be attributed to a specific therapeutic intervention.
Outcomes & Results: Interventions that used regular words were more effective than interventions based on inconsistent words. Early intervention (during the period of spontaneous recovery) was more effective than late intervention.
Conclusions: These results suggest that this technique has the potential to provide a useful input to the therapeutic arena. The potential opportunities for further work are discussed.
C1 Univ Manchester, Sch Psychol Sci, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
RP Welbourne, SR (reprint author), Univ Manchester, Sch Psychol Sci, Oxford Rd, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
EM Stephen.R.Welbourne@man.ac.uk
RI Lambon Ralph, Matthew/A-1695-2009
CR BADDELEY A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P235, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401438
Basso A, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P219
BESNER D, 1990, PSYCHOL REV, V97, P432, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.97.3.432
Buonomano DV, 1998, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V21, P149, DOI 10.1146/annurev.neuro.21.1.149
BURTON AM, 1990, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V81, P361
CARAMAZZA A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P217, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401437
Coltheart M, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P21, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000159
Coltheart M., 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES
Dell GS, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P27, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000168
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
Ellis AW, 2000, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V26, P1103, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.26.5.1103
GLUSHKO RJ, 1979, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V5, P674, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.5.4.674
Harley TA, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P3, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000131
Harm MW, 2004, PSYCHOL REV, V111, P662, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.111.3.662
Harm MW, 1999, PSYCHOL REV, V106, P491, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.106.3.491
Hinton G.E., 1986, PARALLEL DISTRIBUTED, V1, P282
Joanisse MF, 1999, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V96, P7592, DOI 10.1073/pnas.96.13.7592
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
MCCLELLAND JL, 1995, PSYCHOL REV, V102, P419, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.102.3.419
McCloskey M, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P37, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000186
Patterson K., 1989, PARALLEL DISTRIBUTED, P131
Patterson K., 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V3, P1024
PLAUT DC, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P377, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253469
Plaut DC, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P56, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.1.56
Plaut DC, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0004
Ralph MAL, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P31, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000177
Rogers TT, 2004, PSYCHOL REV, V111, P205, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.111.1.205
Rumelhart D. E., 1986, PARALLEL DISTRIBUTED, V2, P216
SAFFRAN EM, 1982, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V73, P317
SEIDENBERG MS, 1989, PSYCHOL REV, V96, P523, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.96.4.523
SERON X, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES
Shallice T, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P209, DOI 10.1080/096020100389129
Welbourne SR, 2005, COGN AFFECT BEHAV NE, V5, P77, DOI 10.3758/CABN.5.1.77
Zevin JD, 2002, J MEM LANG, V47, P1, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2001.2834
NR 35
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 9
BP 789
EP 806
DI 10.1080/02687030500268811
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 983PE
UT WOS:000233243800001
ER
PT J
AU Odell, KH
Wollack, JA
Flynn, M
AF Odell, KH
Wollack, JA
Flynn, M
TI Functional outcomes in patients with right hemisphere brain damage
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID UNILATERAL SPATIAL NEGLECT; STROKE REHABILITATION; INDEPENDENCE MEASURE;
PREDICTING LENGTH; INPATIENT REHABILITATION; RESOURCE UTILIZATION; STAY;
IMPAIRMENT; DISABILITY; COGNITION
AB Background: In this era of accountability in health care, the need to document treatment-related changes in health status is critical. However, few studies report outcomes in people with right cerebral hemisphere damage (RHD).
Aims: The objective of this study was to document, in a single population of patients with RHD, selected functional outcomes at the termination of inpatient treatment. Of particular interest were cognitive performance and its influence on motor and overall recovery.
Methods & Procedures: Functional outcomes were retrospectively examined in 101 RHD patients, at discharge from an in-patient rehabilitation programme. The Functional Independence Measure (FIM; Center for Functional Assessment Research, 1993) was the measurement tool. The five outcomes examined were: final functional status, amount of gain, efficiency of gain, length of stay (LOS), and discharge placement. FIM scores, produced on an ordinal rating scale, were statistically transformed by the Rasch method (Rasch, 1960) to generate interval-level data for regression analyses.
Outcomes & Results: Summary by outcomes: Gains were evident in cognitive and motor realms, with greater and more efficient improvement in the latter. Regression analysis indicated that final functional status was best predicted by age, initial motor severity (FIM motor score), and initial total cognitive severity (FIM cognitive scores); amount of gain was best predicted by age, evidence of previous neurological incident, and gender; efficiency of gain by initial cognitive item scores, initial motor severity (FIM score) and age; LOS by initial motor severity (FIM score); and discharge placement by age, marital status, and initial severity (FIM status). Major predictors tended to be age and the family of cognitive FIM scores, especially Problem Solving (PS). Memory and PS were the most challenging cognitive items for these patients, as indicated by scores on admission and discharge reflecting less than functional ability. A sizeable number of patients began and ended rehabilitation with functional levels of ability in comprehension, expression, and social interaction. Significant differences existed between patients with neglect and those without, but neglect was not a significant predictor of any outcome measure. Low initial cognitive FIM scores, presence of neglect, and older age were associated with poorer performance in motor and cognitive realms. Previous neurological episodes were negatively associated with amount of gain. Number of comorbidities was not statistically associated with outcomes.
Conclusions: Initial severity levels and age were the most influential factors on these outcomes. The presence of neglect had a relatively minor impact on most outcomes. Performance on the cognitive items was less impaired than motor items, and registered less gain and less efficient gain than motor items, but did predict various final status and gain-related measurements in overall and motor realms. Analyses in this study revealed that the FIM scale is less sensitive to cognitive change than to motor change.
C1 Meriter Hosp, Dept Speech Pathol, Madison, WI 53715 USA.
Univ Wisconsin, Madison, WI USA.
RP Odell, KH (reprint author), Meriter Hosp, Dept Speech Pathol, 202 S Brooks St, Madison, WI 53715 USA.
EM wollack@chem.umn.edu
CR *AM SPEECH LANG HE, 2003, WISC REH INP DAT 10
*AM SPEECH LANG HE, 1998, FUNCT COMM MEAS
ANDRICH D, 1978, PSYCHOMETRIKA, V43, P561, DOI 10.1007/BF02293814
BOHANNON RW, 1994, STROKE, V25, P1295
Brosseau L, 1996, AM J PHYS MED REHAB, V75, P422, DOI 10.1097/00002060-199611000-00005
Cherney LR, 2001, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V82, P322, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2001.21511
*CTR FUNCT ASS RES, 1993, GUID UN DAT SET MED
*DEP HLTH HUM SERV, 1994, INT CLASS DIS
Diamond PT, 1996, AM J PHYS MED REHAB, V75, P40, DOI 10.1097/00002060-199601000-00011
DUNN OJ, 1961, J AM STAT ASSOC, V56, P52, DOI 10.2307/2282330
Fleming J, 1999, BRAIN INJURY, V13, P417
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Frattali Carol M., 1998, Seminars in Speech and Language, V19, P209, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064045
Frattali C. M., 1995, FUNCTIONAL ASSESSMEN
GALSKI T, 1993, STROKE, V24, P1794
GRANGER CV, 1992, STROKE, V23, P978
GRANGER CV, 1993, AM J PHYS MED REHAB, V72, P84, DOI 10.1097/00002060-199304000-00005
Hajek VE, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P1331, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90306-3
Hall KM, 1996, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V11, P27, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199610000-00004
Harvey RL, 1998, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V79, P1349, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(98)90226-X
HEILMAN KM, 1993, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P455
HEINEMANN AW, 1994, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V75, P133
Heruti RJ, 2002, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V83, P742, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2002.32739
JONGBLOED L, 1986, STROKE, V17, P765
Katz N, 1999, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V80, P379, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(99)90273-3
Kinsella G, 1985, Int Rehabil Med, V7, P102
LEVIN HS, 1988, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V51, P14, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.51.1.14
Liu MG, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P166, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90259-8
MacNeill SE, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P755, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90085-X
MARUKI E, 1997, PARSCALE IRT ITEM AN
MASTERS GN, 1982, PSYCHOMETRIKA, V47, P149, DOI 10.1007/BF02296272
Myers P. S., 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
OCZKOWSKI WJ, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P1291, DOI 10.1016/0003-9993(93)90081-K
Odell KH, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P415, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248481
Paolucci S, 2001, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V82, P743, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2001.23191
Rasch G., 1960, PROBABILISTIC MODELS
Ring H, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P630, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90429-9
RONDINELLI RD, 1991, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V72, P447
Roth EJ, 2002, STROKE, V33, P1845, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.000020122.30516.FF
SCHUMAN JE, 1981, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V62, P612
Segalowitz SJ, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P337, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2283
SHAFFER JP, 1986, J AM STAT ASSOC, V81, P826, DOI 10.2307/2289016
Squire L. R., 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MEMO
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Tompkins Connie A., 1998, Seminars in Speech and Language, V19, P303, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064052
Ween JE, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V47, P388
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
NR 47
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 9
BP 807
EP 830
DI 10.1080/02687030500239226
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 983PE
UT WOS:000233243800002
ER
PT J
AU Abel, S
Schultz, A
Radermacher, I
Willmes, K
Huber, W
AF Abel, S
Schultz, A
Radermacher, I
Willmes, K
Huber, W
TI Decreasing and increasing cues in naming therapy for aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID MEMORY-IMPAIRED PATIENTS; SEMANTIC TREATMENT; CUEING TREATMENTS;
DEFICITS; DISORDERS; RETRIEVAL; GUIDELINES; SPEAKERS; ACCESS
AB Background: Applying a hierarchy of cues is a well-established method in therapy for aphasic naming disorders (see overview in Nickels, 2002b; and Hillis & Caramazza, 1994; Wambaugh, 2003). Usually, cues are used in the increasing direction. Giving assistance as sparsely as possible, the naming of an individual item remains effortful which enhances the chance to recall it later on. But the high opportunity to make errors may be disadvantageous. As an alternative, the method of vanishing cues (see Glisky, 1992), which was designed for treatment of memory disorders, provides as much assistance as needed, thereby helping patients to avoid errors (see Riley & Heaton, 2000). Therefore, this method complies with "errorless learning" (see Baddeley & Wilson, 1994). It is favoured when amnesic patients have to learn new information. In aphasia therapy, the errorless learning procedure may be interesting for patients with severe naming disorders because it prevents them from producing frequent errors.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to compare the effectiveness of increasing and vanishing cues for aphasic patients with naming disorders in a 4-week therapy programme. As patients may differ in the underlying mechanism of impairment, we expected a different therapy effect among and within patients. Furthermore, the importance of errorless learning should increase with severity of impairment because of error opportunity.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 100 line drawings were selected and split into four sets of 25 items each. The sets were assigned to four conditions: control (no training), vanishing cue, increasing cue, and both-cue condition (training with both methods). Then 20 therapy sessions were ordered according to the alternating treatments design. During treatment, the patient's attempts to name a picture were assisted by a hierarchy of oral cues given by the therapist. Treatment methods differed in order of application but not in the type of cues used.
Outcomes & Results: Cueing therapy in general was effective for 8 of 10 patients. Those patients with moderate naming disorders profited less than those with severe naming disorders. Both methods differed among and within patients. However, in contrast to our prediction, we found no patient who improved only under vanishing cues but several who showed positive effects with increasing cues alone or with both, increasing and vanishing cues.
Conclusions: Unlike patients with amnesia, patients with aphasia do not seem to be troubled by their errors and may not require the vanishing cue method.
C1 Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, Univ Hosp, D-52074 Aachen, Germany.
RP Huber, W (reprint author), Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, Dept Neurol, Pauwelsstr 30, D-52074 Aachen, Germany.
EM sabel@ukaachen.de
CR ABEL S, 2005, THESIS AACHEN U TECH
ABEL S, 2001, THESIS AACHEN U TECH
BADDELEY A, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P53, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90068-X
Baddeley A. D., 1999, ESSENTIALS HUMAN MEM
COHEN R, 1979, STUDIEN SPRACHTHERAP, P350
DANZ U, 1997, FORUM LOGOPADIE, V5, P9
DAVIES PO, 1991, MAMM GENOME, V1, P235, DOI 10.1007/BF00352330
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Doesborgh SJC, 2004, STROKE, V35, P141, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000105460.52928.A6
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
FILLINGHAM J, 2002, BAS BNS AUT M 3 4 OC
Fillingham JK, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P337, DOI 10.1080/09602010343000020
Frattali CM, 1997, MEASURING OUTCOMES S
GARDINER JM, 1973, MEM COGNITION, V1, P213
GLISKY EL, 1986, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V8, P292, DOI 10.1080/01688638608401320
GLISKY EL, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P899, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90034-J
GREENWALD ML, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P17
Hickin J, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P981, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000509
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
HOLM S, 1979, SCAND J STAT, V6, P65
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
Howard D., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
HOWARD D, 1984, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V1, P163, DOI 10.1080/02643298408252021
Howard D., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY HIST
Huber W., 1985, PROGR APHASIOLOGY, P291
HUBER W, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, P242
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Huber W., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P55
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LI EC, 1987, J COMMUN DISORD, V20, P469, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(87)90034-7
LI EC, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P619, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249028
MCREYNOLDS LV, 1988, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
MOTTAGHY FM, 1998, THESIS AACHEN TU
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1047, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000618
PEASE D M, 1978, Cortex, V14, P178
RAPP B, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P113, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253458
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Riley GA, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P133
RILEY GA, 1995, EDUC TRAIN MENT RET, V30, P231
SCHLENCK KJ, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V30, P226, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90100-3
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
SHEWAN CM, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P184
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
STIMLEY MA, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P496, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90170-6
THONE A, 1999, NEUROREHABILITATION, P660
Wambaugh JL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P933
Wambaugh JL, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P433, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000085
Wolery M., 1992, TEACHING STUDENTS MO
NR 53
TC 25
Z9 25
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 9
BP 831
EP 848
DI 10.1080/02687030500268902
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 983PE
UT WOS:000233243800003
ER
PT J
AU Kuroda, Y
Kuroda, R
AF Kuroda, Y
Kuroda, R
TI The relationship between verbal communication and observed psychological
status in aphasia: Preliminary findings
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID POSTSTROKE DEPRESSION; PSYCHOSOCIAL FACTORS; FREQUENCY; STROKE;
REHABILITATION; ADJUSTMENT
AB Background: Most aphasia therapists appear to assume that people with aphasia undergo psychological distress that is associated with communication problems. However, the relationship between aphasia and psychological status has not been sufficiently investigated.
Aim: The aim of this study was to explore the relationship between verbal communication and psychological status in people with aphasia.
Methods & Procedure: A total of 25 people with aphasia were assessed by the Observational Profile of Communication (OPC), the Questionnaire of Verbal Communication (QVC), and the Standard Language Test of Aphasia (SLTA). Two items of the OPC-Intetpersonal Attitude and Emotional State were used as measures of psychological status. Two domains of the QVC-Receptive Ability and Expressive Ability-were used as measures of verbal communication activity. The overall scoring system of the SLTA was used to rate the severity of aphasia. Correlations were calculated between the OPC and other variables, namely, Receptive Ability, Expressive Ability, the SLTA, age, and time since onset. The group effects of gender and aphasia type were examined.
Outcome & Results: Interpersonal Attitude had a moderate and significant correlation with Receptive Ability, but not with Expressive Ability, the SLTA, age, and time since onset. Emotional State had moderate and significant correlations with the SLTA and time since onset, but not with Receptive Ability, Expressive Ability, and age. Gender and aphasia type did not have a significant relationship with the measures of psychological status.
Conclusions: The relationship between verbal communication and psychological status was not straightforward in this small exploratory study. The severity of the communication problem in aphasic people does not necessarily appear to relate to psychological status.
C1 Amakusa Daiichi Hosp, Kumamoto, Japan.
Amakusa Jikei Hosp, Kumamoto, Japan.
RP Kuroda, Y (reprint author), 2886-2 Hondobaba,Hondo Machi, Kumamoto 8630002, Japan.
EM kuroda@athena.ocn.ne.jp
CR ASTROM M, 1993, STROKE, V24, P976
Benson D F, 1973, Br J Psychiatry, V123, P555, DOI 10.1192/bjp.123.5.555
Benson F. D., 1979, APHASIA ALEXIA AGRAP
BRUMFITT SM, 1989, APHASIA THERAPY, P89
Code Chris, 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P19, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064006
Code C, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P109, DOI 10.1080/09602010244000291
Gainotti G, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P635, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249412
Gainotti G, 1999, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V175, P163, DOI 10.1192/bjp.175.2.163
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
HASEGAWA T, 1977, STANDARD LANGUAGE TE
Hasegawa T., 1984, HIGHER BRAIN FUNCTIO, V4, P638, DOI 10.2496/apr.4.638
Hemsley G, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P567
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P513, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249019
HERRMANN M, 1993, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V56, P672, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.56.6.672
Herrmann M, 1993, Disabil Rehabil, V15, P55
Kauhanen ML, 2000, CEREBROVASC DIS, V10, P455, DOI 10.1159/000016107
KURODA Y, 1996, SOGO REHABILITATION, V24, P253
KURODA Y, 2003, HIGHER BRAIN FUNCTIO, V23, P297, DOI 10.2496/hbfr.23.297
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
MULLER DJ, 1983, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V18, P23
OXENHAM D, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P477, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248710
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
Pohjasvaara T, 1998, STROKE, V29, P2311
ROBINSON RG, 1982, STROKE, V13, P635
ROBINSON RG, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P282, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90080-8
SARNO JE, 1991, ACQUIRED APHASIA
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
Starkstein S. E., 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P1, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248883
Tanner D. C., 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P79, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248889
TATEISHI M, 1990, HIGHER BRAIN FUNCTIO, V10, P251, DOI 10.2496/apr.10.251
NR 30
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 9
BP 849
EP 859
DI 10.1080/02687030500225951
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 983PE
UT WOS:000233243800004
ER
PT J
AU Brennan, AD
Worrall, LE
McKenna, KT
AF Brennan, AD
Worrall, LE
McKenna, KT
TI The rellationship between specific features of aphasia-friendly written
material and comprehension of written material for people with aphasia:
An exploratory study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID READING-COMPREHENSION; PATIENT INFORMATION; WORKING-MEMORY; NORMAL
ADULTS; ALEXIA; DISORDERS; STROKE
AB Background: Written material is often inaccessible fro people with aphasia. The format of written material needs to be adapted to enable people with aphasia to read with understanding.
Aims: This study aimed to further explore some issues raised in Rose, Worrall, and MacKenna (2003) concerning the effects of aphasia-friendly formats on the reading comprehension of people with aphasia. It was hypothesised that people with aphasia would comprehend significantly more paragraphs that were formatted in an aphasia-friendly manner than control paragraphs. This study also aimed to investigate if each single aspect of aphasia-friendly formatting (i.e., simplified vocabulary and syntax, large print, increased white spacem and pictures) used in isolation would result in increased comprehension compared to control paragraphs. Other aims were to compare the effect of aphasia-friendly fromatting with the effects of each single adaptation, and to investigate if the effects of aphasia-friendly formates were related to aphasia severity.
Methods & Procedures: Participants with mild to moderately severe aphasia (N = 9) read a battery of 90 paragraphs and selected the best word of phrase from a choice of four to complete each paragraph. A linear mixed model (p < .05) was used to analyse the differences in reading comprehension with each paragraph fromat across three reading grade levels.
Outcomes & Results: People with aphasia comprehended significantly more aphasia-friendly paragraphs than control paragraphs. They also comprehended significantly more paragraphs with each of the following single adaptations: simplified vocabulary and syntax, large ptint, and increased white spaces. Although people with aphasia tended to comprehend more paragraphs with pictures added than control paragraphs, this difference was not significant. No significant correlation between aphasia severity and the effect of aphasia-friendly formatting was found.
Conclusion: This study supports the idea that aphasia-friendly formats increase the reading comprehension of people with aphasia. It suggests that adding pictures, particularly Clip Art pictures, may not significantly improve the reading the reading comprehension of people with aphasia. These findings have implications for all written communication with people with aphasia, both in the clinical setting and in the wider community. Applying these findings may enable people with aphasia to have equal access to written information and to participate in society.
C1 Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Worrall, LE (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
EM l.worrall@uq.edu.au
RI Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR ARTHUR VAM, 1995, J ADV NURS, V21, P1081, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2648.1995.21061081.x
Beeson PM, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P621
BUCHBINDER R, 2001, MED J AUSTRALIA, V174, P5775
CAPLAN D, 1985, COGNITION, V21, P117, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(85)90048-4
Caspari I, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P205, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0970
Chiappe P, 2000, MEM COGNITION, V28, P8, DOI 10.3758/BF03211570
Davidson B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P243, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000653
DEVLIN S, 2000, 9 INT APH REH C ROTT
Egan J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P265, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000562
ELMORENICHOLAS L, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P292
Flesch R, 1948, J APPL PSYCHOL, V32, P221, DOI 10.1037/h0057532
GERMANI MJ, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P308, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90103-L
GRODZINSKY Y, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P396, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1052
HOEHNER A, 1997, TEACHING EXCEPTIONAL, V29, P32
Kagan A, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00062-X
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KITCHING JB, 1990, J ROY SOC MED, V83, P298
Ley P, 1996, PSYCHOL HEALTH MED, V1, P7, DOI DOI 10.1080/13548509608400003
Lott SN, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P188, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2054
Mayer JF, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P727, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000870
McCooey R., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P295
MIYAKE A, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P671, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251989
Monsell S., 1991, BASIC PROCESSES READ, P148
NICKELS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P37
OWENS J, 2002, ACCESSIBLE INFORMATI
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
PARR S, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P223, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248197
PARR S, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P273, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248597
PARR S, 1999, APHASIA HDB
PICKERT JW, 1985, PATIENT EDUC COUNS, V7, P181
PIERCE RS, 1983, J COMMUN DISORD, V16, P181, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(83)90032-1
POUND C, 2001, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Puskaric NJ, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P249, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248468
RIDDOCH J, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Rose TA, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P947, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000319
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
Sacchett C, 1999, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V34, P265, DOI 10.1080/136828299247414
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
Thorburn L., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P174
THURSTONE T, 1999, READING UNDERSTANDIN
WALLACE GL, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V50, P385
WALLER MR, 1978, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V21, P732
Waller R., 1987, EXECUTIVE CONTROL PR, P81
WardLonergan JM, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P475
WEBB WG, 1987, TOP LANG DISORD, V8, P51
Wogalter MS, 2003, ERGONOMICS, V46, P327, DOI 10.1080/0014013021000048006
WOODS BT, 1974, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V12, P31, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(74)90024-4
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
NR 48
TC 31
Z9 31
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 8
BP 693
EP 711
DI 10.1080/02687030444000958
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 963NT
UT WOS:000231811700001
ER
PT J
AU Martin, I
McDonald, S
AF Martin, I
McDonald, S
TI Evaluating the causes of impaired irony comprehension following
traumatic brain injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLOSED-HEAD-INJURY; PRAGMATIC LANGUAGE-SKILLS; FRONTAL-LOBE DAMAGE;
STORY COMPREHENSION; LINGUISTIC HUMOR; MIND; COMMUNICATION; CHILDREN;
AUTISM; ABILITY
AB Background: Individuals with traumatic brain injury (TBI) are known to have difficulty in understanding non-literal language devices such as irony. There are at least two possible explanations for poor irony comprehension following TBI; first, deficits might be caused by a specific impairment to theory of mind (ToM) and, second, deficits could be attributed to more general impairment in executive functioning (EF).
Aims: This study aimed to evaluate the role of ToM and EF in the ability to comprehend non-literal ironic jokes.
Methods & Procedures: Participants were 16 individuals who had sustained a TBI and 16 age- and demographic-matched controls. The ability to make inferences about mental states was compared to inferential reasoning capacity more generally. Participants were also assessed on other aspects of EF thought to contribute to inference making (working memory, concept formation, and fluency). The extent to which scores on theses tasks were associated with participants' ability to comprehend ironic jokes was assessed using correlational and regression analyses.
Outcomes & Results: Participants with TBI were significantly impaired on tasks measuring both ToM and EF. ToM was not significantly associated with irony comprehension. Instead, inferential reasoning, more broasdly defined, demonstrated the strongest association. None of the component EF tasks were associated with irony comprehension.
Conclusion: The results of this study do not support the theory that a specific impairment to ToM causes poor irony comprehension in TBI. In contrast, general inferential reasoning was a strong and significant predictor.
C1 Univ New S Wales, Sch Psychol, Sydney, NSW 2052, Australia.
RP McDonald, S (reprint author), Univ New S Wales, Sch Psychol, Sydney, NSW 2052, Australia.
EM s.mcdonald@unsw.edu.au
RI McDonald, Skye/G-4118-2014
OI McDonald, Skye/0000-0003-0723-6094
CR Adamovich BLB, 1991, COGNITIVE REHABILITA
Bach K., 1994, FDN SPEECH ACT THEOR, P267
Bara BG, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P7, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1812
Bara BG, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P72, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2430
BARONCOHEN S, 1994, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V165, P640, DOI 10.1192/bjp.165.5.640
Bibby H, 2005, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V43, P99, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2004.04.027
Braun C M, 1989, Brain Inj, V3, P345, DOI 10.3109/02699058909004559
Brownell H, 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION, P309
Channon S, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P1006, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00154-2
Courtin C, 1998, PSYCHOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVES ON DEAFNESS, VOL 2, P79
DAVIS HL, 1995, AUST J PSYCHOL, V47, P25, DOI 10.1080/00049539508258765
Dennis M, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2431
DENNIS M, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P428, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90149-B
Dennis M, 2001, J AUTISM DEV DISORD, V31, P47, DOI 10.1023/A:1005661613288
Docking K, 2000, BRAIN INJURY, V14, P89, DOI 10.1080/026990500120952
Docking K, 1999, BRAIN INJURY, V13, P953
Duncan J, 1996, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V30, P257, DOI 10.1006/cogp.1996.0008
DUNCAN J, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P271, DOI 10.1080/02643298608253360
FLETCHER PC, 1995, COGNITION, V57, P109, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00692-R
Gibbs RW, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P466, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2123
GOEL V, 1995, NEUROREPORT, V6, P1741, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199509000-00009
Gordon ACL, 1998, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V68, P70, DOI 10.1006/jecp.1997.2423
Grattan LM, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V3, P175, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.3.3.175
Grice H. P., 1975, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, P41, DOI DOI 10.1017/S0022226700005296
Happe F, 1999, COGNITION, V70, P211, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(99)00005-0
HAPPE FGE, 1993, COGNITION, V48, P101, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(93)90026-R
HARTLEY L L, 1992, Brain Injury, V6, P271, DOI 10.3109/02699059209029669
HAVERKATE H, 1990, J PRAGMATICS, V14, P77, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(90)90065-L
JANOWSKY JS, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P1043, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90184-X
HARTLEY L L, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P267, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008097
Joanette Y., 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR
Kasher A., 1998, PRAGMATICS CRITICAL, VIV, P712
Keenan T, 1998, NEW ZEAL J PSYCHOL, V27, P36
LEVINE MJ, 1993, BRAIN INJURY, V7, P153, DOI 10.3109/02699059309008169
Levinson Stephen C., 1983, PRAGMATICS
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
MARTIN I, 2004, J AUTISM DEV DISORD, V3, P311
MCDONALD S, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V14, P285
MCDONALD S, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P28, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1003
McDonald S, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P81, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0038
MCDONALD S, 1993, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V18, P219
McDonald S, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V18, P572, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.18.3.572
MCDONALD S, 1992, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V13, P295, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400005658
MCDONALD S, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P297, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253466
MENNEL HD, 1997, SEVERE HEAD INJURIES, P19
Pearce S, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V38, P150, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1998.1018
Perkins MR, 1998, J PRAGMATICS, V29, P291, DOI 10.1016/S0378-2166(97)00055-6
Peterson CC, 1999, PSYCHOL SCI, V10, P126, DOI 10.1111/1467-9280.00119
Peterson CC, 2000, MIND LANG, V15, P123, DOI 10.1111/1468-0017.00126
PRIGATANO GP, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOGICAL REH
Russell J., 1997, AUTISM EXECUTIVE DIS, P256
Russell J, 1999, J CHILD PSYCHOL PSYC, V40, P859, DOI 10.1017/S0021963099004229
Russell J., 1997, AUTISM EXECUTIVE DIS
SANTORO J, 1994, BRAIN INJURY, V8, P265, DOI 10.3109/02699059409150978
SPERBER D, 1987, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V10, P697
SPERBER D, 1984, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V113, P130, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.113.1.130
Sperber D., 1986, RELEVANCE COMMUNICAT
Spreen O., 1998, COMPENDIUM NEUROPSYC
STUSS DT, 1993, DEMENTIA, V4, P220, DOI 10.1159/000107326
SULLIVAN K, 1995, BRIT J DEV PSYCHOL, V13, P191
Turkstra LS, 1996, BRAIN INJURY, V10, P329, DOI 10.1080/026990596124359
VILKKI J, 1992, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V14, P518, DOI 10.1080/01688639208402841
Walsh K, 1985, UNDERSTANDING BRAIN
Wechsler D., 1997, WAIS 3 ADM SCORING M
WINNER E, 1991, BRIT J DEV PSYCHOL, V9, P257
Winner E, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P89, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1889
NR 66
TC 28
Z9 30
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 8
BP 712
EP 730
DI 10.1080/0268870305500172203
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 963NT
UT WOS:000231811700002
ER
PT J
AU Brady, M
Armstrong, L
Mackenzie, C
AF Brady, M
Armstrong, L
Mackenzie, C
TI Further evidence on topic use following right hemisphere brain damage:
Procedural and descriptive discourse
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ADULTS; APHASIA; VARIABLES
AB Background: Ina previous report of topic use in semi-structured conversations (Brady, Mackenzie, & Armstrong, 2003), we did not find the often-described gross topic deficit in participants with right hemisphere brain damage (RHBD) when compared to non-brain-damaged participants (NBD). discourse genre is known to affect the production of discourse, to topic use was further explored in this population using procedural discourse and picture description tasks.
Aims: To explore topic coherence and management in procedural and descriptive discourse in individuals with RHBD as a result of stroke.
Methods & Procedures: Four discourse samples (three procedural and one picture description) were elicited from 17 individuals with RHBD at 1 and 6 month post-stroke and from a matched NBD group of 51. The samples were transcribed and analysed in terms of topic coherence and management. T-tests were used to compare the groups on a variety of measures of topic use. Intra-rater, inter-rater, and test-retest reliability were evaluated.
Outcomes & Results: As in our study of topic use in semi-structured conversations, no widespread or consistent difference between NBD and RHBD individuals was indicated in their procedural and descriptive discourse data. Some differences in subdivision of topic structure and in the use of fillersmaybe worth of further exploration. There was no notable task effect.
Conclusions: Again there is little support inour data for the perception that, as a group, people with RHBD experience significant topic use deficits. Over seven discourse tasks, including semi-structured conversation, procedures, and picture description, no consistent topic use deficit was noted among the individuals with RHBD in our analyses. Reasons for this apparent lack of difference.difficulty are discussed. Clinical implications and some indications for possible further experimental study in the area of topic use in people with RHBD post-stroke are described.
C1 Glasgow Caledonian Univ, Midwifery & Allied Hlth Prof Res Unit, Glasgow G4 0BA, Lanark, Scotland.
Univ Strathclyde, Glasgow, Lanark, Scotland.
RP Brady, M (reprint author), Glasgow Caledonian Univ, Midwifery & Allied Hlth Prof Res Unit, Fac Hlth Bldg,Cowcaddens Rd, Glasgow G4 0BA, Lanark, Scotland.
EM m.brady@gcal.ac.uk
CR Armstrong E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P647, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000112
Benton E, 1996, INT J REHABIL RES, V19, P47, DOI 10.1097/00004356-199603000-00005
Blake M. L., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P537, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000194
BRADY M, 2005, UNPUB PICTURE DESCRI
Brady M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P881, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000292
CORREIA L, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P713
Duong A, 2003, BRAIN COGNITION, V53, P177, DOI 10.1016/S0278-2626(03)00104-0
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Hux K, 1997, J COMMUN DISORD, V30, P133, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(96)00060-3
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
Lehman MT, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P485
LI EC, 1996, J SPEECH LANGUAGE PA, V20, P180
LI EC, 1995, J COMMUN DISORD, V28, P39, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(95)91023-Z
Mackenzie C, 2001, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V3, P81
MACKENZIE C, 1997, UNPUB RIGHT HEMISPHE
Myers P. S., 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
Myers PS, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P870
Myers PS, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P913, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000285
Orange JB, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00011-6
MENTIS M, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P583
ROMAN M, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P151, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90066-6
SHADDEN BB, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P327
Togher L, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P131, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00045-9
Tompkins CA, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P62
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Ulatowska H. K., 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P180
ULATOWSKA HK, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V13, P345, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90100-0
Wallace Gloriajean L., 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P343, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064028
NR 28
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 8
BP 731
EP 747
DI 10.1080/02687030500141430
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 963NT
UT WOS:000231811700003
ER
PT J
AU Webster, J
Morris, J
Franklin, S
AF Webster, J
Morris, J
Franklin, S
TI Effects of therapy targeted at verb retrieval and the realisation of the
predicate argument structure: A case study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE PRODUCTION; APHASIA; AGRAMMATISM; NOUNS; BRAIN
AB Background: Verb retrieval and sentence production difficulties are both common features of aphasia. Previous treatment studies have focused predominantly on verb retrieval and the mapping of semantic and syntactic structure. There have been more limited investigations of the production of the predicate argument structure (PAS).
Aims: This study aimed to evaluate the outcome of intensive therapy for a client with a aphasia. NS had multiple and interacting difficulties that resulted in problems in producing sentences. Therapy aimed to improve his sentence production by: (a) improving the retrieval of verbs, (b) increasing his awareness of the relationship between nouns and verbs, and (c) improving his production of one-, two-, and three-argument structures. The therapy thus targeted access to PAS information and PAS production as well as verb retrieval.
Methods and Procedures: A period of intensive therapy, based around a set of 48 self-selected verbs, was preceded and followed by detailed assessment of NS's single word and sentence production and comprehension.
Outcomes & Results: Therapy resulted in a significant improvement in NS's retrieval of the verbs involved in treatment but no generalisation to other verbs. His production of sentences showed more widespread changes. He produced more nouns within sentences, omitted fewer obligatory arguments, and produced a greater variety of argument structures in connected speech.
Conclusions: Therapy resulted in a greater awareness of the need for a verb within a sentence and a strategy for producing the argument structure frame around that verb. Improved sentence production was therefore seen, although verb retrieval difficulties were still evident. The study replicates previous research that verb and sentence production difficulties can be treated effectively in people with aphasia. The effects of therapy on sentence production in constarined tasks and narrative speech are discussed.
C1 Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Speech & Language Sci, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
Univ Limerick, Limerick, Ireland.
RP Webster, J (reprint author), Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Speech & Language Sci, King George 6 Bdg,Queen Victoria Rd, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
EM janet.webster@ncl.ac.uk
RI Franklin, Sue/F-9775-2011
CR Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Berndt RS, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P99
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Bird H, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P246, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2292
Bishop DVM, 1983, TEST RECEPTION GRAMM
BYNG S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P241, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248993
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
Fink R. B., 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P263
Haendiges AN, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0011
JONES EV, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P63
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
MARSHALL J, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P177, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249505
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
Mitchum C. C., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Mitchum CC, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P311
Murray LL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P585
NICKELS L, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P289, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251977
Raymer AM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1031, DOI 10.1080/026870401430000609
ReichmanNovak S, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P102
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SAFFRAN EM, 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION
SCHWARTZ MF, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P93, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520177
SCHWARTZ MF, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Swinburn K., 2004, COMPREHENSIVE APHASI
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
Webster J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P47, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000481
Webster J, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P197, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2460
Webster J., 2000, VAN VERB NOUN TEST
WEBSTER J, IN PRESS APHASIA THE, V2
WHITWORTH A, 1996, THEMATIC ROLES PRODU
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 33
TC 32
Z9 33
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 8
BP 748
EP 764
DI 10.1080/02687030500166957
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 963NT
UT WOS:000231811700004
ER
PT J
AU Hinckley, JJ
AF Hinckley, JJ
TI The piano lesson: An autoethnography about changing clinical paradigms
in aphasia practice
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID REALM; LIFE
AB Background: Managing the clinical relationship in the therapeutic process is a dificult issue to study, because it is based on cognitive knowledge as well as emotional processing. Addressing the emotional work of the clinician is particularly important in developing expertise as a therapist. In order to effectively change between therapeutic schools of thought, emotional aspects must be acknowledged, because different therapeutic schools of thought rely more or less on the authoritative role of the clinician.
Aims: The purpose of this paper is to discuss narrative autoethnography as a qualitative research tool with potential applications in aphasiology, and to demonstrate its usefulness through an example.
Methods& Procedures: An evocative story about a single aphasia therapy session is presented, written according to introspective autoethnographic techniques. The narrative reflects the inner emotional processes of a clinician and illustartes the emotional aspects of negotiating clinical roles. The story is an example of an autoethnographic narrative.
Outcomes &Results: One of the interpretive themes that can be identified in this autoethnography is the emotional work and experience of the clinician. The clinicians emotional processing is discussed in the context of cultural expectations and influences. Narratives in general and narrative autoethnography in particular are tools that can be used to explore the emotional experiences of clinicians.
Conclusions: The emotional work and experiences of clinicians are an important part of the therapeutic process. Narrative autoethnography may be one technique that clinical alphasiologists can use to discuss this aspect of the clinical process and with which research questions can be generated.
C1 Univ S Florida, Tampa, FL 33620 USA.
RP Hinckley, JJ (reprint author), Univ S Florida, 4202 E Fowler Ave,PCD1017, Tampa, FL 33620 USA.
EM jhinckle@chumal.cas.usf.edu
CR Anderson H., 1992, THERAPY SOCIAL CONST
ATEN JL, 1986, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
BARTON EL, 1999, CONSTRUCTING INCOMPE
Behar Ruth, 1997, VULNERABLE OBSERVER
Berger Leigh, 2001, QUALITATIVE INQUIRY, V7, P504
Carbaugh D., 2001, NARRATIVE IDENTITY S
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Damasio A., 1994, DESCARTES ERROR EMOT
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P651
Damico JS, 2003, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V12, P131, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2003/060)
Denzin N. K., 1992, INVESTIGATING SUBJEC, P17
Denzin N. K., 1978, RES ACT THEORETICAL
DUCHAN J, 1999, CONSTRUCTING INCOMPE
Ellis C., 1997, REPRESENTATION TEXT, P115
ELLIS C, 1991, SYMB INTERACT, V14, P23, DOI 10.1525/si.1991.14.1.23
ELLIS C, 1993, SOCIOL QUART, V34, P711, DOI 10.1111/j.1533-8525.1993.tb00114.x
Ellis C., 1995, FINAL NEGOTIATIONS
FRANCIS LE, 1997, SOCIAL PERSPECTIVES
Gabbard GO, 1999, COUNTERTRANSFERENCE
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
Greenhalgh T, 1998, NARRATIVE BASED MED
HINCKLEY JJ, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL I
Jennings L, 1999, J COUNS PSYCHOL, V46, P3, DOI 10.1037/0022-0167.46.1.3
JONES LC, 1997, SOCIAL PERSPECTIVES, V4
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
Katz RS, 2002, AM BEHAV SCI, V46, P327, DOI 10.1177/000276402237767
LOFLAND LH, 1989, J CONTEMP ETHNOGR, V17, P453, DOI 10.1177/089124189017004004
Reed-Danahay D., 2001, HDB ETHNOGRAPHY
Reed-Danahay Deborah, 1997, AUTO ETHNOGRAPHY REW
Richardson L., 2001, QUALITATIVE STUDIES, V14, P33, DOI DOI 10.1080/09518390010007647
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
SimmonsMackie NN, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P761, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250455
Sparkes AC, 2000, SOCIOL SPORT J, V17, P21
Spry T., 2001, QUALITATIVE INQUIRY, V7, P706, DOI DOI 10.1177/107780040100700605
WIDDERSHOVEN GAM, 1996, ETHICS PROCESS NARRA, V4
NR 35
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 8
BP 765
EP 779
DI 10.1080/02687030544000092
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 963NT
UT WOS:000231811700005
ER
PT J
AU Fillingham, JK
Sage, K
Ralph, MAL
AF Fillingham, JK
Sage, K
Ralph, MAL
TI Further explorations and an overview of errorless and errorful therapy
for aphasic word-finding difficulties: The number of naming attempts
during therapy affects outcome
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; MEMORY; REHABILITATION; PEOPLE
AB Background: Errorless learning continues to be much debated in rehabilitation literature. Emerging data suggest that errorless learning is as effective as errorful learning when applied to the treatment of aphasic word-finding difficulties (Fillingham, Hodgson, Sage, & Lambon Ralph, 2003; Fillingham, Sage, & Lambon Ralph, in press; Fillingham, Sage, & Lambon Ralph, 2005).
Aims: This paper presents a third investigation, which was designed to replicate this result and also to explore and extend other important and interesting findings from the previous empirical studies: (1) that withdrawing feedback during therapy (not giving information about whether a patient's response was correct or not) does not prevent learning; (2) that frontal executive skills are a predictor of therapy outcome but not language skill. We also used this third study to explore whether the number of naming attempts during therapy affects outcome.
Methods & Procedures: Seven of the original eleven participants took part in a multiple baseline, crossover, case-series design.
Outcomes & Results: The previous results were replicated: errorless and errorful therapy produced equivalent results immediately post-therapy and at follow-up. There was no effect of omitting feedback-the participants learned equally well without therapists' feedback. Also, executive/problem-solving skills and monitoring ability again predicted immediate naming improvements not language ability. In addition, we found that increasing the number of naming attempts during therapy affected learning outcome.
Conclusions: The final section of the paper draws together the results of all three studies, and their implications for the treatment of aphasic word-finding difficulties are discussed.
C1 Univ Manchester, Sch Psychol Sci, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
RP Fillingham, JK (reprint author), Univ Manchester, Sch Psychol Sci, Oxford Rd, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
EM joanne.fillingham@manchester.ac.uk
RI Lambon Ralph, Matthew/A-1695-2009
CR BACHRACH H, 1974, J CLIN PSYCHOL, V30, P58, DOI 10.1002/1097-4679(197401)30:1<58::AID-JCLP2270300115>3.0.CO;2-4
BADDELEY A, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P53, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90068-X
Clare L, 2000, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V22, P132, DOI 10.1076/1380-3395(200002)22:1;1-8;FT132
Clare L, 1999, NEUROCASE, V5, P37, DOI 10.1080/13554799908404063
Dunn L. M., 1997, BRIT PICTURE VOCABUL, V2nd
Evans JJ, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P67
FILLINGHAM JK, 2005, UNPUB TREATMENT ANOM
FILLINGHAM JK, IN PRESS NEUROPSYCHO
Fillingham JK, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P337, DOI 10.1080/09602010343000020
Grant DA, 1993, WISCONSIN CARD SORTI
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P171, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00063-1
HICNKLEY J, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL I, P182
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Howard D, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P140
Hunkin NM, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P25, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00106-1
Kaplan E, 1976, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTICS AS
McCarthy M, 2002, LANCET INFECT DIS, V2, P2, DOI 10.1016/S1473-3099(01)00156-6
McKenna P, 1997, CATEGORY SPECIFIC NA
McKenna P., 1983, GRADED NAMING TEST
Meyers JE, 1995, REY COMPLEX FIGURE T
O'Carroll RE, 1999, PSYCHOL MED, V29, P105, DOI 10.1017/S0033291798007673
Ralph MAL, 2003, BRAIN, V126, P2350, DOI 10.1093/brain/awg236
Ralph MAL, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P389
Robertson IH, 1994, TEST EVERYDAY ATTENT
Robertson IH, 1999, PSYCHOL BULL, V125, P544, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.125.5.544
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Tailby R, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V41, P1230, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(03)00036-8
Warrington EK, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V8, P143
Warrington EK, 1996, CAMDEN MEMORY TESTS
Wilson BA, 1996, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V11, P54, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199604000-00006
WILSON BA, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V4, P307, DOI 10.1080/09602019408401463
NR 32
TC 46
Z9 46
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 7
BP 597
EP 614
DI 10.1080/02687030544000272
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 954IO
UT WOS:000231149000001
ER
PT J
AU Mitchum, CC
Haendiges, AN
Berndt, RS
AF Mitchum, CC
Haendiges, AN
Berndt, RS
TI Oral reading of words and sentences: Investigating the source of context
effects
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PURE ANOMIA; ALEXIA; LANGUAGE; DYSLEXIA
AB Background: Aphasic speakers' oral reading of isolated words has been widely studied, yet little is known about how contextual information influences reading ability when words are placed in sentences. Embedding words in sentences or texts has been argued to provide syntactic and/or semantic constraints on oral word reading that are unavailable in word lists, but no details are available about how such constraints might operate. The few studies that have actually compared sentence vs list reading have yielded conflicting results, and fail to show any consistent reading pattern that would predict when and why a reading advantage would arise from sentence context.
Aims: We attempted to identify the pattern of aphasia/alexia that is associated with a sentence (vs list) reading advantage, and to assess the contribution of language and reading functions that might influence this context effect.
Methods & Procedures: Five fluent, aphasic patients read the same 100 words (nouns, verbs, adjectives, and function words) in lists and in sentences. Patients were selected to have relatively intact sentence production ability, which has been argued to be an important element when sentence reading is superior to list reading.
Outcomes & Results: Only two of the five patients showed a significant advantage for reading words in sentences, and additional analyses were carried out in an attempt to distinguish the reading patterns of the patients who showed the effect from the patterns of those who did not. The context effect exhibited by the two patients did not appear to be related to semantic influences, or to a cumulative build-up of contextual cues across words in sentences. Rather, the one finding that distinguished the two patients with significantly better reading of words in sentences compared to lists from the other patients was improved sensitivity in sentences to target words' grammatical class.
Conclusions: The results indicate that good sentence production abilities are not a strong predictor that sentence reading will be enhanced relative to list reading. We propose that the sentence context effects in the two patients arose from their ability to extract information from sentences about targets' grammatical class, an ability that was not apparently shared by the other patients. Knowledge of grammatical class was argued to improve patients' reading by combining with other influences (e.g., orthographic structure, imageability) to substantially reduce the number of candidate word responses. Further specification of the source of these effects will help to identify patients who are most likely to benefit from sentence- and text-level reading treatments.
C1 Univ Maryland, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, Baltimore, MD 21201 USA.
RP Mitchum, CC (reprint author), Univ Maryland, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, 22 S Greene St, Baltimore, MD 21201 USA.
EM cmitchum@umaryland.edu
CR Andreewsky E, 1975, Cortex, V11, P379
Beeson P. M., 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P153
Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P763, DOI 10.1080/026432996381809
Berndt RS, 2005, BRAIN LANG, V93, P55, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.110
BREEN K, 1994, CORTEX, V30, P231
CARAMAZZA A, 1981, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL C, P297
Cherney Leora Reiff, 2004, Top Stroke Rehabil, V11, P22
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P22
FEENEY JA, 2005, UNPUB INVESTIGATION
Friedman R., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P27
Friedman RB, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P869, DOI 10.1080/026432996381845
Garrett MF, 1976, NEW APPROACHES LANGU, P231
Greenwald ML, 1999, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V16, P513
KATZ RB, 1992, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V45, P575
Manning L, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P809, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00166-2
MIOZZO A, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P1101, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90156-2
MOODY S, 1988, CORTEX, V24, P473
MOYER SB, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P139
NESPOULOUS JL, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P273, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90069-7
OSeaghdha PG, 1997, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V23, P807
Patterson K., 1985, SURFACE DYSLEXIA
Rochon E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P193, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2285
Silverberg N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P335, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249537
TOUMAINEN J, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P401
WILSON M, 1988, MRC PSYCHOLINGUISTIC
ZINGESER LB, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P473, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253270
NR 27
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 7
BP 615
EP 631
DI 10.1080/02687030544000281
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 954IO
UT WOS:000231149000002
ER
PT J
AU Shisler, RJ
AF Shisler, RJ
TI Aphasia and auditory extinction: Preliminary evidence of binding
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID VISUAL EXTINCTION; ILLUSORY CONJUNCTIONS; REPETITION BLINDNESS;
DIVIDED-ATTENTION; SPATIAL ATTENTION; EAR EXTINCTION; INDIVIDUALS;
NEGLECT; MECHANISMS; ALLOCATION
AB Background: McNeil, Odell, and Tseng (1991), and Murray and colleagues (Murray, 2000; Murray, Holland, & Beeson, 1997a, 1997b) have suggested that variability of performance in patients with aphasia may be due to nonlinguistic cognitive variables, such as attention (i.e., resources, capacity, effort), which affect language comprehension and production. Given the research that has supported the relationship between aphasia and attention deficits, it is important to determine what effect this breakdown in attention may have on cognitive processes for individuals with aphasia.
Aims: This study aims to determine if auditory extinction is present in individuals with aphasia, and if so, if this is due to a breakdown in binding. If extinction is found for individuals with aphasia, it would further support the notion that auditory attention difficulties are present among individuals with aphasia, since visual and auditory research has attributed extinction to a breakdown in attention (Baylis, Driver, & Rafal, 1993; Deouell, Bentin, & Soroker, 2000; Deouell & Soroker, 2000). If binding is found to be deficient, the fact that individuals with both left and right hemisphere lesions demonstrate this phenomenon would lead to a number of implications regarding the relationship of attention and aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: Auditory extinction, in which one stimulus is not perceived during double simultaneous stimulation (DSS) presentation, was examined in six individuals with aphasia (aged 42-74 years) and six age-matched healthy adults. Two different experiments were conducted in which the auditory stimuli, consisting of male and female voices speaking the letters "T" or "O", were systematically varied to investigate whether binding of identification to location contributes to extinction.
Outcomes & Results: Participants with aphasia made more omission errors (extinction) than the control group, and extinction was significantly greater for binding versus nonbinding conditions, suggesting that binding may play a role in extinction for individuals with aphasia.
Conclusions: These data provide preliminary results that auditory extinction exists in individuals with aphasia and may be due to deficits in binding together identification and localisation information. Research on this phenomenon and how it influences language would be a worthwhile endeavour for future studies. Moreover, little is known about assessment of auditory attention in patients with aphasia. Further research in this area can lead to advancements in theoretical and functional assessment for individuals with aphasia who have auditory attention and/or binding deficits and require speech-language pathology intervention.
C1 Univ Georgia, Biomed & Hlth Sci Inst, Athens, GA 30602 USA.
RP Shisler, RJ (reprint author), Univ Georgia, Biomed & Hlth Sci Inst, 570 F Aderhold Hall, Athens, GA 30602 USA.
EM rshisler@coe.uga.edu
CR Ashbridge E, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P1121, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00003-1
Baylis GC, 2001, VIS COGN, V8, P359
BAYLIS GC, 1993, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V5, P453, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1993.5.4.453
BOUMA A, 1988, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V10, P709, DOI 10.1080/01688638808402809
CASTROCALDAS A, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P1418
CORBETTA M, 1995, SCIENCE, V270, P802, DOI 10.1126/science.270.5237.802
Deouell LY, 2000, NEUROREPORT, V11, P3059, DOI 10.1097/00001756-200009110-00046
Deouell LY, 2000, BRAIN, V123, P353, DOI 10.1093/brain/123.2.353
Erickson RJ, 1996, BRAIN COGNITION, V30, P244, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1996.0016
Goodglass H, 2000, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
KANWISHER N, 1991, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V17, P404, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.17.2.404
Kanwisher N, 1995, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V29, P303, DOI 10.1006/cogp.1995.1017
LAPOINTE LL, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P511, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248556
MARZI CA, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P99
McNeil M. R., 1986, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V7, P123, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1085226
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
Murray LL, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P40, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2281
Murray LL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P993, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249423
Murray LL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P213
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
Pantev C, 1996, HEARING RES, V100, P164, DOI 10.1016/0378-5955(96)00124-4
PETERSEN SE, 1994, CAN J EXP PSYCHOL, V48, P319, DOI 10.1037/1196-1961.48.2.319
PONCET M, 1987, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V50, P709, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.50.6.709
Reynolds JH, 1999, NEURON, V24, P19, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(00)80819-3
Shisler RJ, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V42, P836, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2003.06.001
Soroker N, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P249, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(96)00038-3
TREISMAN A, 1982, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V14, P107, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(82)90006-8
TREISMAN AM, 1980, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V12, P97, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(80)90005-5
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
VOLPE BT, 1979, NATURE, V282, P722, DOI 10.1038/282722a0
Vuilleumier PO, 2000, BRAIN, V123, P1263, DOI 10.1093/brain/123.6.1263
NR 31
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 7
BP 633
EP 650
DI 10.1080/02687030444000930
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 954IO
UT WOS:000231149000003
ER
PT J
AU Sohlberg, MM
Fickas, S
Ehlhardt, L
Todis, B
AF Sohlberg, MM
Fickas, S
Ehlhardt, L
Todis, B
TI The longitudinal effects of accessible email for individuals with severe
cognitive impairments
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID REHABILITATION; MEMORY; INTERFACES; ERRORLESS; APHASIA; PEOPLE; USERS;
AIDS
AB Background: Electronic communication has provided an unprecedented means of networking people for business, educational, and social purposes (eMarketer, 2001; Madden & Rainie, 2003). However, this mainstream form of communication remains largely inaccessible to individuals with severe cognitive-communicative disabilities (Elman, 2001; Lenhart et al., 2003). This report describes the longitudinal effects of using an adapted email interface by individuals with severe cognitive disabilities due to acquired brain injury.
Aims: Research questions included: (1) Can people with severe cognitive impairments learn to email independently using an adapted interface? (2) If participants successfully learn to email, what types of supports are needed to maintain long-term use of email? (3) What, if any, are the psychosocial effects of long-term email participation?
Methods & Procedures: A combination of qualitative and quantitative approaches was used to address the above questions for four participants with acquired brain injury, one female and three males, ranging in age from 37 to 65 years, all of whom reported significant social isolation due to their cognitive disabilities. Following assessment (e.g., mock email assessment, goal attainment scaling, neuropsychological testing), they were trained to use a simplified email program using an explicit instructional methodology. Weekly email statistic reports and activity logs were generated to measure frequency, efficiency, topic parameters, and satisfaction related to using email.
Outcomes & Results: All four participants became independent, satisfied emailers in their home environments and continued to engage in social email after 9 months. The weekly metrics and email logs showed progressive improvements in efficiency, complexity of written expression, and range of topics discussed. All participants endorsed the social benefits of email and achieved the "most successful outcome" possible for several of their individual goals, including learning a new skill, feeling more connected with friends and family, and increasing their list of email partners.
Conclusions: This study is one of the first longitudinal reports on the use of assistive technology by people with severe acquired cognitive impairments, and demonstrates the potential of adapted email as a means of increasing their social communication with friends and family. Issues related to the need to decrease the intensity of human support required to establish long-term use of assistive technology are discussed.
C1 Univ Oregon, Eugene, OR 97403 USA.
Western Oregon Univ, Monmouth, OR USA.
RP Sohlberg, MM (reprint author), Univ Oregon, Eugene, OR 97403 USA.
EM mckay@uoregon.edu
CR BARNACLE KA, 1999, THESIS COLUMBIA U NE
Ben-Yishay Y, 2000, REHABIL PSYCHOL, V45, P112, DOI 10.1037/0090-5550.45.2.112
Camp C. J., 1998, CLIN GERONTOLOGIST, V19, P51, DOI 10.1300/J018v19n01_05
CHUTE DL, 1994, EXP AGING RES, V20, P229, DOI 10.1080/03610739408253969
DELIS DC, 1987, CALIFORNIA VERBAL LE
EHLHARDT L, IN PRESS BRAIN INJUR
Elman RJ, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P895, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000267
Evans JJ, 2003, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V9, P925, DOI 10.1017/S1355617703960127
Evans JJ, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P67
GROBER E, 1991, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V13, P933, DOI 10.1080/01688639108405109
GRONWALL DMA, 1977, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V44, P367
HAUGEN K, 1996, ACCESSIBLE EMAIL MOT
HAUGEN K, 1997, INTERNET ON RAMPS KI
Heaton RK, 1981, WISCONSIN CARD SORTI
Kirsch N. L., 1992, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V7, P13
Kreutzer JS, 1989, COGNITIVE REHABILITA, V7, P30
Lenhart A, 2003, EVER SHIFTING INTERN
Levinson R., 1997, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V12, P769
LoPresti EF, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V14, P5, DOI 10.1080/09602010343000101
Madden M., 2003, AM ONLINE PURSUITS C
MADIGAN K, 1997, STUDENTS ACQUIRED BR, P23
Malec JF, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V9, P253, DOI 10.1080/096020199389365
Newell A. F., 2000, P ACM C UN US WASH D, P39, DOI 10.1145/355460.355470
*PEW INT STUD, 2004, ONL ACT DAIL
*QSR INT PTY LTD, 2002, QSR INT PTY LTD DONC
Rallis S. F., 1998, LEARNING FIELD INTRO
Reitan R., 1993, HALSTEADREITAN NEURO
SALIVIA J, 1998, ASSESSMENT
SimmonsMackie NN, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P540
Singh S, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P157, DOI 10.1080/026870300401531
Sohlberg M.K.M., 2001, COGNITIVE REHABILITA
Sohlberg MM, 2003, BRAIN INJURY, V17, P609, DOI 10.1080/0269905031000070189
Spreen O, 1977, NEUROSENSORY CTR COM
STEELE RD, 1989, P REH ENG SOC N AM R, P218
Stein M, 1998, INTERV SCH CLIN, V33, P227
Sutcliffe A, 2003, INTERACT COMPUT, V15, P577, DOI 10.1016/S0953-5438(03)00051-1
TODIS B, IN PRESS BRAIN INJUR
Weschler D, 1997, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
Wilson B. A., 2003, BRAIN IMPAIR, V4, P25, DOI DOI 10.1375/BRIM.4.1.25.27030
WILSON BA, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V4, P307, DOI 10.1080/09602019408401463
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
2001, EMAIL REPORT EREPORT
NR 42
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 7
BP 651
EP 681
DI 10.1080/02687030544000100
PG 31
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 954IO
UT WOS:000231149000004
ER
PT J
AU Wilcox, MJ
Davis, GA
AF Wilcox, MJ
Davis, GA
TI Speech act analysis of aphasic communication in individual and group
settings
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 Memphis State Univ, Memphis, TN 38152 USA.
RP Davis, GA (reprint author), Univ Massachusetts, Commun Disorders House,Box 30410, Amherst, MA 01003 USA.
EM albyn@comdis.umass.edu
CR GORDON D, 1975, SYNTAX SEMANTICS SPE
HOLLAND A, 1975, AM SPEECH HEAR ASS W
SEARLE J, 1975, SYNTAX SEMANTICS SPE
Searle John R., 1969, SPEECH ACTS
NR 4
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 7
BP 683
EP 690
DI 10.1080/02687030444000435
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 954IO
UT WOS:000231149000006
ER
PT J
AU Menn, L
Gottfried, M
Holland, AL
Garrett, MRF
AF Menn, L
Gottfried, M
Holland, AL
Garrett, MRF
TI Encoding location in aphasic and normal speech: The interaction of
pragmatics with language output processing limitations
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BRAIN-DAMAGE; COMPREHENSION; EXPRESSION; DISCOURSE
AB Background: Most pragmatic abilities are relatively preserved in aphasia, while ability to express spatial relationships is compromised. Do aphasic speakers observe the pragmatic constraint that unexpected information should be expressed while inferrable information may be omitted?
Aims: Asking aphasic speakers to describe unexpected spatial arrangements on objects should produce attempts at expressing spatial information that are likely to contain errors.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 16 participants with various types of aphasia and 10 controls described pictures showing expected and unexpected arrangements of furniture.
Outcomes & Results: As predicted, this pragmatic manipulation of stimulus materials produced large amounts of data for analysis: Participants tried to produce elaborated descriptions of unexpected arrangements, and these efforts contained many errors. Qualitative analysis showed that these errors were not perceptual or conceptual, yet involved encoding problems much broader than "difficulty with functors".
Conclusions: Since participants willingly exerted themselves to try to encode unexpected scenes, we suggest that such stimuli would be more effective than routine ones in therapy sessions.
C1 Univ Colorado, Colorado Springs, CO 80907 USA.
Aphasia Res Ctr, Philadelphia, PA USA.
Univ Arizona, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Menn, L (reprint author), Univ Colorado, Colorado Springs, CO 80907 USA.
EM Lise.menn@colorado.edu
CR ALLAN K, 2000, SEMANTICS
BATES E, 1983, CAN J PSYCHOL, V37, P59, DOI 10.1037/h0080695
BENEDET MJ, 2003, ADAPTATION THEORY SP
BIHRLE AM, 1986, BRAIN COGNITION, V5, P399, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(86)90042-4
BLOOM RL, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P1227
BOROD JC, 1985, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V42, P345
Chafe W., 1976, SUBJECT TOPIC
Chapman S., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL
CHRISTIANSEN JA, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V21, P9
CLARK EV, 1973, COGNITION, V2, P161, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(72)90010-8
FRIEDERICI AD, 1985, COGNITION, V19, P133, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(85)90016-2
FRIEDERICI AD, 1982, CORTEX, V18, P525
GARDNER H., 1983, COGNITIVE PROCESSING
Givon T., 1983, TOPIC CONTINUITY DIS
GOODGLASS, 1985, AGRAMMATISM, P1
Halliwell JF, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P1187, DOI 10.1080/02687030050205714
HUBER W, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90069-4
JOANETTE Y, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P217
Kiran S, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P773, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/061)
Kolk H, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P81, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248399
Levelt W. J. M., 1989, SPEAKING
LINEBARGER MC, 1983, COGNITION, V13, P361, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90015-X
MENN L, 1999, FUNCTION STRUCTURE
Menn L., 2000, METHODS STUDYING LAN
MENN L, 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA, V11
Menn L, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P183, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1838
Miller G. A., 1976, LANGUAGE PERCEPTION
Nilipour R, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P1205, DOI 10.1080/02687030050205723
Thompson CK, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P591, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/047)
ULATOWSKA HK, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P317, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90074-3
NR 30
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 6
BP 487
EP 519
DI 10.1080/0268703044400912
PG 33
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 941EL
UT WOS:000230198000001
ER
PT J
AU Dean, MP
Black, M
AF Dean, MP
Black, M
TI Exploring event processing and description in people with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BRAIN-DAMAGED SUBJECTS; VERB RETRIEVAL; SENTENCE PRODUCTION; NOUNS;
IMAGEABILITY; AGRAMMATISM; THERAPY; HOWARD; BIRD
AB Background: A recent proposal is that verb retrieval difficulties in some people with aphasia may reflect impairment to processes that construct event representations in a language-appropriate way. This level of processing has been termed "thinking for speaking" (Slobin, 1996), "conceptual preparation" (Level, Roelofs, & Meyer, 1999), or "event processing" (Marshall, Pring, & Chiat, 1993).
Aims: The present Study aims to extend understanding of this early stage of language production and the implications of its impairment. We examine verbs and sets of noun phrases produced in picture descriptions, comparing two people with disproportionate verb retrieval difficulties, and analyse their performance with respect to variables deemed to affect event processing. One person, EM, is argued to have event-processing difficulties, while the other, MH, is argued to have difficulties primarily in retrieving lexical verb forms.
Methods & Procedures: The two participants with aphasia were compared on a picture description task, with target descriptions provided by control data. The study examined effects of stimulus format (photograph vs line drawing) and complexity of the situation (whether a single act, process, or state was the focus, versus a combination of these). Both quantitative and qualitative analyses were performed.
Outcomes & Results: The event-processing variables influenced the sets of noun phrases produced by EM and not MH, as per our predictions. However, statistically reliable effects were not evident in rates of verb retrieval. Error analyses revealed that EM focused on nontarget aspects of the situation in many of her descriptions, while MH retained target situation type despite his verb retrieval deficit.
Conclusions: The performance of the two participants dissociated with respect to event-processing variables. This study extends understanding of the consequences of impaired event processing on language production, and suggests a novel and theoretically motivated means of examining the communicative abilities of people with aphasia.
C1 UCL, London, England.
RP Dean, MP (reprint author), UCL, Mortimer St, London, England.
EM michael.dean@nwlh.nhs.uk
CR Berndt RS, 2002, J NEUROLINGUIST, V15, P353, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00030-6
Berndt RS, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P83, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000212
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
BIERWISCH M, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P23, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90039-K
Bird H, 2001, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V33, P73, DOI 10.3758/BF03195349
Bird H, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V76, P213, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2432
Bird H, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P113, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(02)00016-7
Bird H, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P246, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2292
BLACK M, 2000, SEMANTIC PROCESSING
Black M, 2003, LINGUISTICS CLIN
Black M, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P231, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(02)00017-9
Breedin SD, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1923
BYNG S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P241, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248993
Byng S., 1999, REVERSIBLE SENTENCE
Caplan D, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P184, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1930
Chiarello C, 1999, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V31, P603, DOI 10.3758/BF03200739
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
DIPPER L, 1999, THESIS U COLL LONDON
DIPPER LT, IN PRESS LANGUAGE CO
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
Druks J, 2002, J NEUROLINGUIST, V15, P289, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00029-X
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
GARRETT M, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P143, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90042-G
Garrett M. F., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kemmerer D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P393, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2312
Kemmerer D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2311
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kim M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P1, DOI 10.1006/brin.2000.2315
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MARSHALL J, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P177, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249505
Marshall J, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250461
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
Morrison Catriona M., 2003, Quarterly Journal of Experimental Psychology Section A Human Experimental Psychology, V56A, P705, DOI 10.1080/02724980244000594
MYERSON R, 1972, LANG SPEECH, V15, P40
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
Pustejovsky James, 1995, GENERATIVE LEXICON
Rapp B, 2002, J NEUROLINGUIST, V15, P373, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00040-9
ROELOFS A, 2000, BILING-LANG COGN, V3, P25
Shapiro K, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V76, P202, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2397
Shapiro K, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2473
Slobin Dan, 1996, RETHINKING LINGUISTI
SWINBURN C, 1996, COMPREHENSIVE APHASI
Talmy Leonard, 2003, COGNITIVE SEMANTICS, V1
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
Vigliocco G, 2002, PSYCHOL BULL, V128, P442, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.128.3.442
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 51
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 6
BP 521
EP 544
DI 10.1080/02687030544000001
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 941EL
UT WOS:000230198000002
ER
PT J
AU Cuetos, F
Gonzalez-Nosti, M
Martinez, C
AF Cuetos, F
Gonzalez-Nosti, M
Martinez, C
TI The picture-naming task in the analysis of cognitive deterioration in
Alzheimer's disease
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PROGRESSIVE APHASIA; SEMANTIC ERRORS; LEXICAL ACCESS; DEMENTIA;
ACQUISITION; AGE; IMPAIRMENT; SPANISH; FAMILIARITY; PREDICTORS
AB Background: The picture-naming test has been widely used in determining cognitive deterioration in Alzheimer patients, because it has been found that the number of pictures patients can name, and the types of errors they commit, change as the illness advances.
Aims: The objective of this study was to examine the lexical-semantic deterioration of Alzheimer's patients over a period of time by analysing the changes in their errors and the variables that predict these changes.
Methods and Procedures: A total of 100 pictures were shown to a group of 10 probable Alzheimer's patients on two separate occasions spaced 2 years apart. The task of the patients was to name the pictures. For each picture, the values of name agreement, imageability, familiarity, frequency, age of acquisition, and length were available. Three types of analyses of the results of the naming test were performed: (a) relationship between stimulus variables and patient success, (b) analysis of errors from the first and second evaluations, and (c) relationship between stimulus variables and change in errors.
Outcome and Results: There was a considerable reduction of correct responses from the first to the second evaluation, and the determining variable in both cases was age of acquisition. What changed in this 2-year period were the types of errors produced by the patients, with a higher percentage of semantic errors and circumlocutions in the first evaluation and a predominance of "I don't know" responses in the second. But the most interesting discovery was that the nature of those changes, which resulted from the patients' cognitive deterioration, is determined by the age of acquisition of the stimuli.
Conclusions: The combination of these two indices-stimulus variables and types of errors-makes it possible to specify the level of lexical-semantic deterioration of Alzheimer's patients.
C1 Univ Oviedo, Oviedo, Spain.
RP Cuetos, F (reprint author), Univ Oviedo, Oviedo, Spain.
EM fcuetos@uniovi.es
RI Gonzalez-Nosti, Maria/B-4393-2011; Cuetos, Fernando/B-4337-2011
CR ALBERCA R, 1988, DEMENCIAS DIAGNOSTIC
Astell AJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P357, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249538
Barbarotto R, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P397, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00124-3
BOLLER F, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P9
Caramazza A, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P428, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2379
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
CHERTKOW H, 1990, BRAIN, V113, P397, DOI 10.1093/brain/113.2.397
Cuetos F, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V82, P344, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00038-X
Cuetos F., 2004, READING WRITING INTE, V17, P227, DOI 10.1023/B:READ.0000017661.98935.bd
Cuetos F, 2003, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V17, P549, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(03)00169-1
Cuetos F, 1999, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V31, P650, DOI 10.3758/BF03200741
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
FABERLANGENDOEN K, 1988, ANN NEUROL, V23, P365, DOI 10.1002/ana.410230409
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Garrard P, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V13, P892, DOI 10.1162/089892901753165818
GAVAZZI P, 1986, RICERCHE PSICOLOGIA, V4, P92
HAXBY JV, 1992, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V14, P575, DOI 10.1080/01688639208402846
Hirsh KW, 1995, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P23, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(95)00003-8
HODGES JR, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P301, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90104-T
HODGES JR, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P441, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)00127-B
HODGES JR, 1990, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V53, P10098
Hodgson C, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P146, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1960
Kremin H, 2001, BRAIN COGNITION, V46, P180, DOI 10.1016/S0278-2626(00)91270-3
Moreaud O, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P176, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2427
Morrison CM, 2000, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V91, P167, DOI 10.1348/000712600161763
MORRISON CM, 1992, MEM COGNITION, V20, P705, DOI 10.3758/BF03202720
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
Ober BA, 1999, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V5, P676
Ralph MAL, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P775, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00169-3
Silveri MC, 2002, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V24, P755, DOI 10.1076/jcen.24.6.755.8407
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
TIERNEY MC, 1988, NEUROLOGY, V38, P359
NR 32
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 6
BP 545
EP 557
DI 10.1080/02687030544000010
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 941EL
UT WOS:000230198000003
ER
PT J
AU Legg, C
Young, L
Bryer, A
AF Legg, C
Young, L
Bryer, A
TI Training sixth-year medical students in obtaining case-history
information from adults with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SUPPORTED CONVERSATION; PARTNERS; COMMUNICATION; VOLUNTEERS; PEOPLE;
SKILLS; TRIAL
AB Background: Recent studies have shown that partner training in supported communication strategies enhances communication for people with aphasia. Such training of healthcare providers may facilitate communication with adults with aphasia in the healthcare arena. Aims: In this Study, a group of sixth-year medical students were trained to use supported communication strategies for the specific purpose of obtaining a case history from an adult with aphasia. These strategies were based on principles of Supported Conversation for Adults with Aphasia (SCATM) (Kagan, 1995, 1998a). Methods & Procedures: A randomised controlled group design was employed, in which the control group received theoretical information about aphasia and the experimental group received training in supported communication techniques. Baseline and post-training measures were obtained through rating participants' performance in a medical case-history interview with an adult with aphasia. Outcomes & Results: Students who received communication skills training improved significantly in their abilities to conduct a medical interview with an adult with aphasia in terms of obtaining information and establishing rapport. Conclusions: The results of this study provide motivation for Communication skills training of healthcare professionals who interact with individuals with aphasia. Such training, utilising minimal resources and time, can effectively be incorporated into a medical training curriculum.
C1 Univ Cape Town, ZA-7925 Cape Town, South Africa.
RP Legg, C (reprint author), Univ Cape Town, ZA-7925 Cape Town, South Africa.
EM carollegg@wol.co.za
CR BINDMAN B, 1995, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V2, P46
Boles L., 1997, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V2, P43
Booth S, 1999, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V34, P291, DOI 10.1080/136828299247423
Cunningham R, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P687, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000184
FULFORD KWM, 1996, ESSENTIAL PRACTICE P
GARRETT K, 1995, AHSA SPECIAL INTERES, V4, P5
Garrett K. L., 1992, AUGMENTATIVE COMMUNI, P245
Green G., 1982, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V10, P11
Hickey EM, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P625, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000093
KAGAN A, 2001, MEASURE RATING CONVE
Kagan A., 1996, PICTOGRAPHIC COMMUNI
Kagan Aura, 2004, Top Stroke Rehabil, V11, P67
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P851, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249580
Kagan A., 1996, SUPPORTED CONVERSATI
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Kurtz S, 1998, TEACHING LEARNING CO
LAWSON R, 1999, APHASIA THERAPY FILE
LEDORZE G, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V25, P28
Ley P, 1988, COMMUNICATING PATIEN
Lock S., 2001, SUPPORTING PARTNERS
Lyon J., 1997, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P203
LYON JG, 1987, TOP LANG DISORD, V8, P61
LYON JG, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P33, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248687
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Marshall CJ, 1998, CURR OPIN GENET DEV, V8, P11, DOI 10.1016/S0959-437X(98)80055-5
McCooey R., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P295
McNeil M. R., 1986, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V7, P123, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1085226
*NUFF WORK PART, 1988, TALK PAT TEACH APPR
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
Penn C, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P839, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249577
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Rao PR, 1995, TOPICS STOKE REHABIL, V2, P49
Rayner H, 2003, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V38, P149, DOI 10.1080/1368282021000060308
Rose TA, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P947, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000319
Roter D. L., 1993, DOCTORS TALKING PATI
ROTER DL, 1995, ARCH INTERN MED, V155, P1877, DOI 10.1001/archinte.155.17.1877
Silverman J, 1998, SKILLS COMMUNICATING
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P807
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
Towle A, 1999, BRIT MED J, V319, P766
NR 42
TC 20
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 6
BP 559
EP 575
DI 10.1080/0268703054400029
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 941EL
UT WOS:000230198000004
ER
PT J
AU Shadden, BB
AF Shadden, BB
TI Aphasia as identity theft: Theory and practice
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, UT
ID QUALITY-OF-LIFE
AB Background: The impact of aphasia on identity is frequently acknowledged, but there have been few theoretical or research publications focusing on identity as an explanatory construct in understanding quality of life issues for persons with aphasia and their significant others. This article is abbreviated from a keynote address at the 2004 Clinical Aphasiology Conference.
Aims: The purpose of this article is to review concepts from the sociocultural literature that bear upon social identity and can be applied to an understanding of short- and long-term consequences of aphasia.
Main Contribution: Theoretical premises related to social identity are outlined, then applied to the life experiences of persons with aphasia and their significant others. The clinical relevance of such concepts is illustrated through specific examples. Particular attention is paid to the recognition work involved in moving on with life in the context of aphasia. The implications of the identity construct are also addressed through questions raised for both researchers and clinicians.
Conclusions: An understanding of identity provides a useful lens for viewing and improving quality of life for persons touched by aphasia. In particular, clinical work and research questions can be clarified through consideration both of identity as competent and of the mediation of identity through social interaction with social others. It is important to recognise that persons with aphasia and their significant others are involved in renegotiation of identity, and the success of their recognition work may be a major predictor of adaptation to aphasia.
C1 Univ Arkansas, Fayetteville, AR 72701 USA.
RP Shadden, BB (reprint author), Speech & Hearing Clin, 410 Arkansas Ave, Fayetteville, AR 72701 USA.
EM bshadde@uark.edu
CR Bahktin M. M., 1981, DIALOGIC IMAGINATION
BRUMFITT S, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687039308248631
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P49
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P235
Code C., 1992, CODE MULLER PROTOCOL
Cruice M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P333, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000707
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
Dowd J. J., 1980, STRATIFICATION AGED
Duchan J, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P3
Elman Roberta J., 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P65, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064009
Erikson E. H., 1968, IDENTITY YOUTH CRISI
Gainotti G, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P635, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249412
Gee J. P., 2000, HDB READING RES, VIII, P195
Gee J. P., 1999, INTRO DISCOURSE ANAL
GOFFMAN I, 1967, INTERACTION RITUA
Holland AL, 1999, COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVI
JOANNETTE Y, 1993, LIVING APHASIA PSYCH, P17
KEARNS KP, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P316
KOVARSKY D, 2003, M AM SPEECH LANG HEA
Lapointe Leonard L., 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P5, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064005
Lyon J, 1992, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V1, P7
Lyon J. G., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, V4th, P297
Mackay R, 2003, DISABIL SOC, V18, P811, DOI 10.1080/0968759032000119532
NORLIN PF, 1986, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P174
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
PENUEL WR, 1995, EDUC PSYCHOL, V30, P83, DOI 10.1207/s15326985ep3002_5
Pound C, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P222, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249449
PRATHER H, 1970, NOTES MYSELF MY STRU
Sarno MT, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P665, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249414
Shadden B. B, 1988, COMMUNICATION BEHAV, P309
SHADDEN BB, 1994, ANN M AM SPEECH LANG
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 2004, PERSPECTIVES NEUROPH, V14, P9
Simms NJ, 2001, EUR FED CORR PUBL, P246
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P313
Taylor C., 1994, MULTICULTURALISM EXA, P25
THREATS T, 2004, PERSPECTIVES NEUROPH, V14, P4
Vygotsky L. S., 1987, THINKING SPEECH
Wertsch J. V., 1991, VOICES MIND SOCIOCUL
Worrall LE, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P329, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000699
NR 39
TC 47
Z9 49
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 211
EP 223
DI 10.1080/02687930444000697
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900002
ER
PT J
AU Hillis, AE
Newhart, M
Heidler, J
Marsh, EB
Barker, P
Degaonkar, M
AF Hillis, AE
Newhart, M
Heidler, J
Marsh, EB
Barker, P
Degaonkar, M
TI The neglected role of the right hemisphere in spatial representation of
words for reading
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID POSTERIOR PARIETAL CORTEX; POSITRON EMISSION TOMOGRAPHY; CENTERED
REFERENCE FRAMES; UNILATERAL NEGLECT; VISUAL NEGLECT; COORDINATE FRAMES;
SOMATOSENSORY TARGETS; HEMISPATIAL NEGLECT; SPM NORMALIZATION; LESION
ANALYSIS
AB Background: Previous studies have indicated that focal brain damage can result in different types of "neglect dyslexia" (reading errors specific to the side of printed material contralateral to the side of brain damage).
Aims: To identify the sites of lesions (or dysfunctional brain tissue) responsible for distinct types of neglect dyslexia, to inform a functional neuroanatomical model of brain regions involved in early stages of reading.
Methods & Procedures: A battery of tests of hemispatial neglect and reading designed to distinguish neglect dyslexia in different reference frames (viewer-centred, stimulus-centred, and object-centred) was administered to 95 patients within 48 hours of onset of nondominant hemisphere stroke. Magnetic resonance diffusion and perfusion imaging was obtained on the same day as testing. Associations between each type of neglect dyslexia and areas of hypoperfusion and/or infarct were evaluated using chi-squared tests.
Outcomes & Results: Viewer-centred neglect dyslexia was associated with hypoperfusion and/or infarct in right angular and supramarginal gyri and visual association cortex ("dorsal stream"). Stimulus-centred neglect dyslexia was associated with hypoperfusion and/or infarct of right superior temporal cortex ("ventral stream"). Object-centred neglect dyslexia was observed only with hypoperfusion and/or infarct of non-dominant superior temporal cortex in left-handed individuals.
Conclusions: The identified associations provide evidence that different regions of cortex are critical for spatial attention to, or processing of, representations of words with distinct coordinate frames in the reading task.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Sch Med, Johns Hopkins Hosp, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
RP Hillis, AE (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ, Sch Med, Johns Hopkins Hosp, Phipps 126,600 N Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
EM argye@JHMI.edu
CR ALBERT ML, 1973, NEUROLOGY, V23, P658
Andersen RA, 2002, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V25, P189, DOI 10.1146/annurev.neuro.25.112701.142922
ARGUIN M, 1993, CORTEX, V29, P349
BARBUT D, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P1487, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.6.1487
Barton JJS, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P1117, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.6.1117
BAXTER DM, 1983, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V46, P1073, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.46.12.1073
Behrmann M, 1999, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V25, P83, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.25.1.83
BISIACH E, 1985, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V48, P141, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.48.2.141
CALVANIO R, 1987, NEUROLOGY, V37, P1179
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P391, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253450
Cate A, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P2206, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00128-8
CHATTERJEE A, 1994, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V57, P1236, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.57.10.1236
COSTELLO AD, 1987, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V50, P1110, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.50.9.1110
CUBELLI R, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V15, P139, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90023-2
DAMASIO AR, 1980, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V18, P123, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(80)90058-5
DESIMONE R, 1984, J NEUROSCI, V4, P2051
DRIVER J, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P475, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253384
ELLIS AW, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V4, P439, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252047
GOODALE MA, 1992, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V15, P20, DOI 10.1016/0166-2236(92)90344-8
Groh JM, 1996, J NEUROPHYSIOL, V75, P428
Groh JM, 1996, J NEUROPHYSIOL, V75, P412
GROSS CG, 1972, J NEUROPHYSIOL, V35, P96
Haywood M, 2000, NEUROCASE, V6, P33, DOI 10.1080/13554790008402755
Heilman K. M., 1983, LOCALIZATION NEUROPS, P471
HEILMAN KM, 1980, NEUROLOGY, V30, P327
HEILMAN KM, 1985, NEUROLOGY, V35, P855
HILLIS A E, 1990, P211
HILLIS AE, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P1223, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(91)90036-8
Hillis AE, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V55, P782
Hillis AE, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P491, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1998.1010
Hillis AE, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P1257, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00009-8
Hillis AE, 1995, NEUROCASE, V1, P189, DOI 10.1080/13554799508402364
Hillis AE, 2001, ANN NEUROL, V50, P561, DOI 10.1002/ana.1265
HILLIS AE, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P263, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1012
Karnath HO, 2001, NATURE, V411, P950, DOI 10.1038/35082075
Karnath HO, 2004, CEREB CORTEX, V14, P1164, DOI 10.1093/cercor/bhh076
Karnath HO, 2004, BRAIN, V127, pE10, DOI 10.1093/brain/awh111
LADAVAS E, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P167, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.1.167
Marr D, 1982, VISION
MARR D, 1978, PROC R SOC SER B-BIO, V200, P269, DOI 10.1098/rspb.1978.0020
MENNEMEIER M, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P1013, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.5.1013
MESULAM MM, 1981, ANN NEUROL, V10, P309, DOI 10.1002/ana.410100402
Mesulam MM, 1999, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V354, P1325, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1999.0482
MISHKIN M, 1983, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V6, P414, DOI 10.1016/0166-2236(83)90190-X
MONK AF, 1985, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V37, P613
Mort DJ, 2004, BRAIN, V127, pE11, DOI 10.1093/brain/awh112
Mort DJ, 2003, BRAIN, V126, P1986, DOI 10.1093/brain/awg200
NICHELLI P, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P264, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1018
OGDEN JA, 1985, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V23, P273, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(85)90112-5
Ota H, 2001, NEUROLOGY, V57, P2064
PARDO JV, 1991, NATURE, V349, P61, DOI 10.1038/349061a0
Riddoch M. J., 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P479, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253452
RIZZOLATTI G, 1988, HDB NEUROLOGY, V1
RIZZOLATTI G, 1981, BEHAV BRAIN RES, V2, P147, DOI 10.1016/0166-4328(81)90053-X
RIZZOLATTI G, 1985, ATTENTION PERFORMANC, V11
Snyder LH, 1997, NATURE, V386, P167, DOI 10.1038/386167a0
Subbiah I, 2000, NEUROCASE, V6, P13, DOI 10.1080/13554790008402754
VALLAR G, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V24, P609, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(86)90001-1
VALLAR G, 1985, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL N
VONGIESEN HJ, 1994, J NEUROL SCI, V125, P29, DOI 10.1016/0022-510X(94)90238-0
Warrington E. K., 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P191
Weintraub S, 1996, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V60, P342, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.60.3.342
Xing J, 2000, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V12, P601, DOI 10.1162/089892900562363
YOUNG AW, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P177, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253371
NR 64
TC 5
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 225
EP 238
DI 10.1080/02687030444000705
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900003
ER
PT J
AU Fridriksson, J
Morrow, L
AF Fridriksson, J
Morrow, L
TI Cortical activation and language task difficulty in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID POSITRON EMISSION TOMOGRAPHY; WORKING-MEMORY; SENTENCE COMPREHENSION;
VARIABILITY; SPEECH; CORTEX; FMRI
AB Background: Previous research using functional MRI (fMRI) suggests changes in cortical activation as a function of increased task difficulty. This relationship has not been explored in persons with aphasia even though it may have significant implications for pre- and posttreatment interpretation of fMRI data.
Aims: The purpose of this exploratory study was to investigate the relationship between changes in language task difficulty and cortical activation in persons with aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: Four persons with chronic anomic or Broca's aphasia and four matched control participants underwent fMRI while performing a picture-word matching task.
Outcomes & Results: Compared to the more difficult task condition, all participants performed with greater accuracy on the easier condition. Moreover, greater mean blood oxygenated level dependent (BOLD) signal intensity and area recruitment were noted during the more difficult condition for three out of four persons with aphasia as well as three of the four controls. The increase in cortical activity was mainly noted in the superior temporal and posterior inferior frontal lobes.
Conclusions: The present findings mirror those found in previous studies of normal subjects in that cortical activation increased in parallel to task difficulty for most of our participants. It is unclear what mechanism accounts for this effect; this phenomenon might need to be considered in future fMRI studies of neural plasticity associated with aphasia treatment.
C1 Univ S Carolina, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Columbia, SC 29208 USA.
RP Fridriksson, J (reprint author), Univ S Carolina, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Williams Brice Nursing Bldg,6th Floor,1621 Greene, Columbia, SC 29208 USA.
EM jfridrik@sc.edu
CR Aguirre GK, 1998, NEUROIMAGE, V8, P360, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1998.0369
Anderson KE, 2002, PROG NEURO-PSYCHOPH, V26, P647, DOI 10.1016/S0278-5846(01)00300-1
BINDER JR, 1994, ANN NEUROL, V35, P662, DOI 10.1002/ana.410350606
BOTTINI G, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P1241, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.6.1241
Braver TS, 1997, NEUROIMAGE, V5, P49, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1996.0247
Burton MW, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P119, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2444
Carpenter PA, 1999, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V11, P9, DOI 10.1162/089892999563210
Caspari I, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P205, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0970
Chein JM, 2003, J NEUROLINGUIST, V16, P315, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(03)00021-6
Coull JT, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P1085, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(96)00029-2
Cowan N., 1999, MODELS WORKING MEMOR, P62, DOI DOI 10.1017/CB09781139174909.006
Dhamala M, 2003, NEUROIMAGE, V20, P918, DOI 10.1016/S1053-8119(03)00304-5
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
FRIDRIKSSON J, 2005, UNPUB MEASURING HEMO
GASCHLERMARKEFSKI, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P198
GRASBY PM, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P1271, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.6.1271
Just MA, 1996, SCIENCE, V274, P114, DOI 10.1126/science.274.5284.114
Keller TA, 2001, CEREB CORTEX, V11, P223, DOI 10.1093/cercor/11.3.223
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
MAZOYER BM, 1993, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V5, P467, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1993.5.4.467
*MRI DEV CORP, 2000, INT FUNCT IM SYST
PASHEK GV, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V25, P377
Postle BR, 2001, COGN AFFECT BEHAV NE, V1, P10, DOI 10.3758/CABN.1.1.10
*PSYCH SOFTW TOOLS, 2000, E PRIM 1 0
Riecker A, 2003, NEUROIMAGE, V18, P731, DOI 10.1016/S1053-8119(03)00003-X
Rorden C, 2000, BEHAV NEUROL, V12, P191
Rypma B, 1999, NEUROIMAGE, V9, P216, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1998.0404
Santo Pietro M J, 1982, J Speech Hear Res, V25, P184
Silkes JP, 2004, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V47, P610, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2004/047)
Stromswold K, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P452, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0024
Talairach J., 1988, COPLANAR STEREOTAXIC
NR 31
TC 20
Z9 21
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 239
EP 250
DI 10.1080/02687030444000714
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900004
ER
PT J
AU Olness, GS
Ulatowska, HK
Carpenter, CM
Williams-Hubbard, LJ
Dykes, JC
AF Olness, GS
Ulatowska, HK
Carpenter, CM
Williams-Hubbard, LJ
Dykes, JC
TI Holistic assessment of narrative quality: A social validation study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID DISCOURSE; STORY; PERFORMANCE; APHASIA
AB Background: There is a tradition of social validation studies in the adult clinical treatment literature that has not yet been extended to narrative evaluation. This social validation process begins with lay listener holistic judgements of narrative quality for non-brain-injured narrators, and compares these judgements to clinician-researchers' assessments of the same narratives. The resulting narratives rated for quality reflect the premorbid range of skills in clinical populations, and overall narrative performance. Narratives whose quality has been assessed holistically by laypersons can be further examined for the qualitative and quantitative dimensions that characterise them.
Aims: This study explores the social validity of clinical narrative assessment. Specifically, it examines the degree to which clinicians' holistic and analytic assessments of narrative quality parallel holistic narrative quality judgements of a lay audience, for a set of narratives produced by non-brain-injured narrators. It also examines the characteristics of narratives along a continuum of quality.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 14 African American and 15 Caucasian lay individuals holistically rated the quality of personal narratives produced by ethnicity-matched groups of 37 African-American and 34 Caucasian non-brain-injured narrators, respectively. Five clinical raters holistically rated all narratives. Additionally, lay raters were asked for their intuitions about what contributes to narrative quality. They also ranked six researcher-specified dimensions for their importance in determining narrative quality. High-rated and low-rated narratives were compared on dimensions of length, content, and narrative structure.
Outcomes & Results: Agreement between lay and clinical rater groups was found for a subset of high-rated and low-rated stories, which constituted one-quarter to one-third of the total narratives. A similar level of agreement was found for male and female lay raters. Rater-group disagreements at the extremes of narrative quality were rare. Certain of the lay raters' characterisations of good and poor narratives corresponded to narrative dimensions discussed in the literature and defined by the researchers. High-rated stories were longer, more conventionally structured, and different in content from low-quality stories.
Conclusions: For personal narratives at the extremes of perceived quality (high and low), evidence for social validity in narrative assessment is manifested both at the holistic assessment level, and at the level of the dimensions thought to contribute to narrative quality. The results contribute to our understanding of the normal range of narrative performance.
C1 Univ Texas, Callier Ctr Commun Disorders, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
RP Olness, GS (reprint author), Univ Texas, Callier Ctr Commun Disorders, 1966 Inwood Rd, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
EM golness@utdallas.edu
CR Armstrong E, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P875, DOI 10.1080/02687030050127685
Elman RJ, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P77
FEATHERMAN DL, 1980, 7948 U WISC CTR DEM
Gillam R., 1994, J CHILDHOOD COMMUNIC, V16, P36
GLEITMAN H, 1979, INDIVIDUAL DIFFERENC, P103
Johnstone B., 1996, LINGUISTIC INDIVIDUA
Labov William, 1967, ESSAYS VERBAL VISUAL, P12
Lapointe LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P787
MCCABE A, 1984, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V13, P457, DOI 10.1007/BF01068179
McFadden TU, 1996, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V27, P48
Morgan M, 2002, LANGUAGE DISCOURSE P
Olness G. S., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P623, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000095
PATRY R, 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P3
Schneider P, 2002, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V45, P372, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2002/029)
Tannen Deborah, 1993, GENDER CONVERSATIONA
Ulatowska H. K., 2004, MIT ENCY COMMUNICATI, P300
Ulatowska HK, 2004, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V6, P3
Ulatowska HK, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P1007
Ulatowska HK, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P511, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000102
Van Dijk T. A., 1983, STRATEGIES DISCOURSE
NR 20
TC 9
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 251
EP 262
DI 10.1080/02687030444000723
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900005
ER
PT J
AU Wright, HH
Capilouto, GJ
Wagovich, SA
Cranfill, TB
Davis, JE
AF Wright, HH
Capilouto, GJ
Wagovich, SA
Cranfill, TB
Davis, JE
TI Development and reliability of a quantitative measure of adults'
narratives
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID LIFE-SPAN CHANGES; CONNECTED SPEECH; INJURED ADULTS; OLDER-ADULTS;
LANGUAGE
AB Background: Assessing narrative discourse production in persons with aphasia has long challenged clinicians seeking to improve functional outcomes. Fortunately, the development of single picture or picture sequence stimuli has enabled clinicians to quantify aspects of elicited narrative discourse production in a clinical context. However, also needed for the analysis of the narrative discourse of individuals with aphasia are performance data for adults without brain damage. Such comparative data of both younger and older adults would considerably extend the clinical usefulness of discourse tasks that incorporate picture stimuli. However, elicited narrative discourse samples are only valuable as assessment tasks if the procedure yields samples of similar quality for an individual over time.
Aims: The main objectives of this investigation were (a) to characterise the quality of the discourse narratives of non-brain-damaged (NBD) adults, examining the effects of stimulus types on their performance; (b) to compare the proportion of main events conveyed by younger and older NBD adults on the elicited narrative task, and (c) to estimate the test-retest reliability of these tasks with each group of participants.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 40 neurologically intact adults were divided into younger (YG; N= 21) and older (OD; N= 19) groups. Participants attended two sessions, 10-20 days apart. Each time, participants viewed two pictures and two picture sequences (Nicholas & Brookshire, 1993) and told what was going on in the pictures. The language samples of each participant were then evaluated for the proportion of main events included, and test-retest reliability was assessed.
Outcomes & Results: The YG group conveyed a significantly larger proportion of main events than the OD group. The main effect for picture stimulus was also significant; participants told significantly more main events in response to sequential versus single picture stimuli, regardless of age. Test-retest results yielded strong, positive correlations between sessions for both groups.
Conclusions: Our findings suggest that age does influence performance in elicited narrative discourse. The YG group conveyed more causal links and relationships between the events depicted in the pictures than the OD group. Test-retest results indicate that the measure is stable over time for younger and older adults without brain damage.
C1 Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
Univ Missouri, Columbia, MO USA.
RP Wright, HH (reprint author), Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, CT Wethington Bldg,900 S Limestone,Room 120K, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
EM hhwrig2@uky.edu
CR BENJAMIN BJ, 1988, COMMUNICATION BEHAV, P164
CAPILOUTO G, 2003, INOFRMATIVENESS EFFI
Coelho CA, 2002, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V45, P1232, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2002/099)
Cooper P. V., 1990, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V45, P210
FOLSTEIN M, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V72, P189
Garvey C., 1977, INTERACTION CONVERSA
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
HEATH SB, 1986, TOP LANG DISORD, V7, P84
James LE, 1998, PSYCHOL AGING, V13, P355, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.13.3.355
KEMPER S, 1989, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V10, P49, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400008419
Kemper S., 1990, EUROPEAN J COGNITIVE, V2, P205, DOI 10.1080/09541449008406205
KEMPER S, 1987, J GERONTOL, V42, P323
Kynette D., 1986, LANG COMMUN, V6, P43
LILES BZ, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P356
MACLACHLAN BG, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P2
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
NORTH AJ, 1986, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V23, P267, DOI 10.2190/BPF0-2BWD-BGNQ-HWCW
POTECHIN GC, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P216
Sacks Harvey, 1972, STUDIES SOCIAL INTER
Stein N. L., 1979, NEW DIRECTIONS DISCO
Stout CE, 2000, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V8, P15
ULATOWSKA HK, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P24, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90088-X
WALLACH GP, 1988, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
NR 25
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 263
EP 273
DI 10.1080/02687030444000732
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900006
ER
PT J
AU Coelho, CA
AF Coelho, CA
TI Direct attention training as a treatment for reading impairment in mild
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID WORKING-MEMORY; ALEXIA
AB Background: Although a variety of interventions for acquired reading disorders have been described in the aphasia literature, most have been designed for severe impairments. Individuals with mildly impaired reading characterised by inconsistent comprehension problems and/or by slower and variable reading rates, do not seem to benefit as much from these treatment approaches. These difficulties suggest relatively intact constituent reading processes that may be functioning inefficiently. Attentional deficits have been described in individuals with a variety of reading disabilities including acquired dyslexia. Although the treatment of nonlinguistic cognitive abilities such as attention has been suggested as an approach to improving language function in aphasia, little evidence exists documenting the treatment effectiveness of such interventions for aphasia in general, or reading in particular.
Aims: The present study is a case report of an individual with mild aphasia whose primary complaint was reading difficulty. A treatment approach directed towards improving various aspects of attention was implemented. Aspects of reading were monitored as outcome measures. It was hypothesised that treatment based on attention training would facilitate improvements in this individual's reading.
Methods & Procedures: The treatment programme was based on Attention Process Training-II (APT-II) (Sohlberg, Johnson, Paule, Raskin, & Mateer, 2001). The eight-week programme began with activities/tasks addressing sustained attention, and progressed through alternating, selective, and divided attention. Baseline and treatment probes consisted of the individual reading magazine articles and answering comprehension questions. Reading rate was also monitored.
Outcomes & Results: The individual treated in this study progressed steadily through the APT-II programme. Treatment effects for improved reading comprehension and decreased reading rate were noted. In addition, changes in pre- and post-treatment test scores, reported reading effort, and reading enjoyment were also documented.
Conclusions: The observed reading improvements were not felt to be the result of linguistic recovery. As this individual's proficiency to sustain attention, cope with distractions, and concentrate increased, her ability to read longer, more complex materials also improved. These results are consistent with previous studies that have noted improvements in nonlinguistic cognitive abilities of individuals with aphasia following direct intervention.
C1 Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
Hosp Special Care, New Britain, CT USA.
RP Coelho, CA (reprint author), Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, Unit 1085, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
EM coelho@uconn.edu
CR Beeson P. M., 1998, CLIN DECISION MAKING, P153
Beeson PM, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P621
Caspari I, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P205, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0970
Conway TW, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P608
HARDIN K, 2004, 34 CLIN APH C PARK C
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Korda RJ, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P525, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403742
Kromrey JD, 1996, J EXP EDUC, V65, P73
LaPointe L., 1998, READING COMPREHENSIO
Mayer JF, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P727, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000870
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
Murray LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P91, DOI 10.1080/026870399402226
Murray LL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P213
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Robertson IH, 1994, TEST EVERYDAY ATTENT
SHALLICE T, 1977, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V15, P31, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(77)90112-9
Sohlberg M., 1994, ATTENTION PROCESS TR
Sohlberg M.K.M., 2001, COGNITIVE REHABILITA
Sohlberg MM, 2003, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V11, pXIX
Steinman SB, 1998, OPTOMETRY VISION SCI, V75, P674, DOI 10.1097/00006324-199809000-00023
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
Wiederholt J. L., 2001, GRAY ORAL READING TE
NR 22
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 275
EP 283
DI 10.1080/02687030444000741
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900007
ER
PT J
AU Armstrong, E
AF Armstrong, E
TI Expressing opinions and feelings in aphasia: Linguistic options
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID VERB RETRIEVAL; DIVERSITY; NOUNS
AB Background: To date, most studies of verb usage in aphasia have focused on the use of relatively concrete action verbs, related to how a speaker conveys events and happenings. Few have focused on the speaker's ability to provide an opinion on these events or personal reactions to them, important skills in conveying personal identity in everyday contexts.
Aims: This study aims to examine the ability of aphasic speakers to express opinions, feelings, and attitudes through the use of particular verbs that are related to mental processes and to personal evaluation. In comparing their performance with non-brain-damaged speakers, the effects of aphasia on these particular linguistic functions will be investigated.
Methods & Procedures: Five individuals with aphasia and five non-brain-damaged speakers were matched for age, gender, and years of education. Their discourse across three topics was analysed using Halliday's (1994) framework of verb types-in particular focusing on mental and relational verbs. Outcomes & Results: Results demonstrated less ability overall by aphasic speakers to express opinions, feelings, and attitudes using the particular verb types studied. In addition, the aphasic speakers tended to have less lexical diversity and used more general and high-frequency mental verbs compared to their non-brain-damaged counterparts.
Conclusions: The study suggests that some aphasic speakers do have difficulty with mental and relational verbs used by non-brain-damaged speakers to express personal opinions and attitudes. This demonstrates that the lexical/grammatical problems encountered by aphasic speakers go beyond the relatively concrete action verbs previously studied, and in so doing, have a significant impact on the individual's ability to express their identity. Focusing on different types of verbs may be useful in treatment in order to facilitate the broader range of meanings that people with aphasia need in everyday situations.
C1 Macquarie Univ, Dept Linguist, N Ryde, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Armstrong, E (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, Dept Linguist, N Ryde, NSW 2109, Australia.
EM barmstrong@ling.mq.edu.au
CR Bastiaanse R, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P274, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2401
Bastiaanse R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249463
Beretta A, 2001, BRAIN COGNITION, V46, P42, DOI 10.1016/S0278-2626(01)80030-0
Berndt RS, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P83, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000212
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
Fairclough N., 1992, DISCOURSE SOCIAL CHA
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Grodzinsky Y, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P469, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1072
Halliday M. A., 1994, INTRO FUNCTIONAL GRA, V3rd
Kim M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P1, DOI 10.1006/brin.2000.2315
Martin JR, 2000, EVALUATION TEXT
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Raymer AM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1031, DOI 10.1080/026870401430000609
Silveri MC, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P49, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00504-7
WACHAL RS, 1973, LANG SPEECH, V16, P169
NR 16
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 285
EP 295
DI 10.1080/02687030444000750
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900008
ER
PT J
AU Youse, KM
Coelho, CA
Mozeiko, JL
Feinn, R
AF Youse, KM
Coelho, CA
Mozeiko, JL
Feinn, R
TI Discourse characteristics of closed-head-injured and non-brain-injured
adults misclassified by discriminant function analyses
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID NARRATIVES; COHESION
AB Background: In a previous study, discriminant function analyses (DFA) were employed to determine the accuracy of various story narrative and conversational discourse measures in classifying non-brain-injured (NBI) and closed-head-injured (CHI) adults (Coelho, Youse, Le, & Feinn, 2003). The DFAs correctly predicted group membership with 70-81% accuracy.
Aims: The present study re-examined the performance of the CHI and NBI participants who were incorrectly classified in an effort to determine what aspects of their discourse performance contributed to the misclassifications. It was hypothesised that the misclassifications were due to the relatively broad range in performance on the discourse measures, resulting in considerable overlap between the NBI and CHI participants.
Methods & Procedures: Scores for the story narrative and conversational discourse measures that made the largest contribution to the correct classification of the two participant groups were re-examined for the CHI and NBI participants who were misclassified by the DFA in the previous study (Coelho et al., 2003).
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that there was considerable overlap in the discourse performance of the two participant groups for several of the story narrative and conversational discourse measures.
Conclusions: The performance overlaps occurred on many of the same discourse measures that were noted to be fairly good discriminators of CHI versus NBI discourse performance in the original study. Consequently, recommendations regarding elimination of certain measures to streamline the discourse analysis procedure could not be made. Other factors such as sampling discourse acontextually and specific participant characteristics undoubtedly influenced these findings as well. In addition, the DFA procedure utilised in the original study did not take into account the heterogeneity of discourse data. Nonparametric procedures such as classification and regression trees (CART) (Breiman, Friedman, Olshen, & Stone, 1984; Johnson & Wichern, 2002) may be better suited for the classification of nonhomogeneous populations such as individuals with CHI.
C1 Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, CCC, SLP, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
Hosp Special Care, New Britain, CT USA.
Univ Connecticut, Ctr Hlth, Farmington, CT USA.
RP Youse, KM (reprint author), Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, CCC, SLP, 850 Bolton Rd,Unit 1085, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
EM kyouse@prodigy.net
CR Armstrong E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P647, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000112
BLANK M, 1980, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V1, P127, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400000801
Bond F, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P319, DOI 10.1080/026990597123476
Coelho C. A., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P659, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000275
Coelho CA, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P499, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000111
Coelho CA, 2002, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V45, P1232, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2002/099)
COELHO CA, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P471, DOI 10.3109/02699059509008206
COELHO CA, 1991, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V72, P465
HUGHES D, 1999, GUIDE NARRATIVE LANG
HARTLEY L L, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P267, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008097
Johnson RA, 2002, APPL MULTIVARIATE ST, V5th
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LEZAK MD, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
LILES BZ, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P123
MCGANN W, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P93, DOI 10.3109/02699059509004575
MENTIS M, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P88
Olshen R., 1984, CLASSIFICATION REGRE, V1st
Snow P, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P409
SNOW P, 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P217
SNOW P, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248210
Sohlberg M.K.M., 2001, COGNITIVE REHABILITA
TOGHER L, 1999, COMMUNICATION SKILLS, P113
WINTER P, 1976, BEAR FLY
NR 23
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 297
EP 313
DI 10.1080/02687030444000769
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900009
ER
PT J
AU Kiran, S
Tuchtenhagen, J
AF Kiran, S
Tuchtenhagen, J
TI Imageability effects in normal Spanish-English bilingual adults and in
aphasia: Evidence from naming to definition and semantic priming tasks
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID DUAL-CODING THEORY; WORD TRANSLATION; CONTEXT AVAILABILITY; LEXICAL
DECISIONS; CONCRETE WORDS; LANGUAGE; SPEAKERS; MEMORY; REPRESENTATION;
COGNATE
AB Background: Whereas the effect of imageability on lexical access has received attention in normal monolingual individuals and in individuals with aphasia, its effect on normal bilingual access and in bilingual aphasia has not been systematically addressed.
Aim: The goal of the present experiment was to examine the effects of imageability in normal bilingual adults and in one patient with bilingual aphasia by addressing the following questions: (a) Is there a difference in language performance in early L2 bilinguals? (b) Is there a difference between concrete and abstract words across both languages? (c) Is there a difference between accuracy on a naming to definition task and semantic priming task across language and imageability?
Methods & Procedures: A total of 15 normal Spanish-English bilingual adults and I bilingual aphasic individual performed two tasks - a naming to definition task and a semantic priming task in English and in Spanish. The targets in both tasks were either concrete or abstract nouns and the words were translation equivalents in the two languages. Naming accuracy in both languages and for both levels of imageability was measured during the naming to definition task. Mean reaction times and accuracy rates to judge relatedness of word pairs on the semantic priming task were also measured. Results: Results indicated that across tasks, performance was better in English than in Spanish, indicating an English dominance in the normal bilingual adults, although performance was the same across languages in the aphasic patient. Across tasks and languages, responses were faster and more accurate for concrete words than abstract words. Finally, retrieval of abstract words was significantly more difficult during naming to definition than during semantic priming, reflecting a processing difference between concrete and abstract words in retrieval of their respective phonological forms.
Conclusions: These results highlight differences between concrete and abstract words in conceptual/semantic representations and phonological retrieval that are notably consistent across both languages in a bilingual individual. Data from the one bilingual aphasic individual suggest the possibility of a systematic deterioration of the normal bilingual language system.
C1 Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
RP Kiran, S (reprint author), Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, CMA 7-206, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
EM s-kiran@mail.utexas.edu
CR Abutalebi J., 2001, BILING-LANG COGN, V4, P179
Costa A, 2000, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V26, P1283, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.26.5.1283
Costa A, 1999, J MEM LANG, V41, P365, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1999.2651
COSTA A, 2000, PSICOLOGICA, V21, P803
DEGROOT AMB, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P1001, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.18.5.1001
DEGROOT AMB, 1993, STUDIES BILINGUALISM, P27
de Groot AMB, 2002, J MEM LANG, V47, P91, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2001.2840
DEGROOT AMB, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P600, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1029
DRONKERS N, 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P57
DUFOUR R, 1995, MEM COGNITION, V23, P166, DOI 10.3758/BF03197219
Edmonds LA, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P567, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000057
deGroot AMB, 1997, LANG LEARN, V47, P215, DOI 10.1111/0023-8333.71997007
Frances N., 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
FRANKLIN S, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P1, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251964
FRANKLIN S, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P549, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252007
Grosjean F., 1998, BILING-LANG COGN, V1, P131, DOI DOI 10.1017/S136672899800025X
HERMEKING H, 1998, MOL CELL, V1, P3
JIN YS, 1990, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V70, P1139, DOI 10.2466/PMS.70.4.1139-1154
Juilland A., 1964, FREQUENCY DICT SPANI
Kaplan E., 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kohnert K, 2002, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V45, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2002/061)
KROLL JF, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P149, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1008
Lalor E, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P1047
Munoz ML, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V66, P249, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2021
Munoz ML, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P1115, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000427
Newton PK, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P481
PAIVIO A, 1988, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V14, P163, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.14.1.163
PAIVIO A, 1991, CAN J PSYCHOL, V45, P255, DOI 10.1037/h0084295
Paivio A., 1986, MENTAL REPRESENTATIO
Paradis M., 1989, BILINGUAL APHASIA TE
POTTER MC, 1984, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V23, P23, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(84)90489-4
Roberts PM, 1999, J COMMUN DISORD, V32, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(98)00026-4
Roberts PM, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P287, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1992
SCHWANENFLUGEL PJ, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P499, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90022-8
SCHWANENFLUGEL PJ, 1989, READ RES QUART, V24, P114, DOI 10.2307/748013
SHOLL A, 1995, PSYCHOL SCI, V6, P45, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1995.tb00303.x
STADIE N, 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P85
*U W AUSTR, 1988, MRC PSYCH DAT
VAID J, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P250, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90155-T
VAID J, 1980, CAN J PSYCHOL, V34, P417, DOI 10.1037/h0081108
Van Hell J. G., 1998, BILING-LANG COGN, V1, P193, DOI [10.1017/S1366728998000352, DOI 10.1017/S1366728998000352]
NR 42
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 315
EP 327
DI 10.1080/02687030444000778
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900010
ER
PT J
AU Reilly, J
Martin, N
Grossman, M
AF Reilly, J
Martin, N
Grossman, M
TI Verbal learning in semantic dementia: Is repetition priming a useful
strategy?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; MINI-MENTAL-STATE; FRONTOTEMPORAL DEMENTIA; SPEECH
PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; WORD-FREQUENCY; APHASIA; SPAN; INFORMATION;
IMPAIRMENT
AB Background: Semantic dementia (SD) is a neurodegenerative disease that impacts long-term conceptual and lexical knowledge (Hodges & Patterson, 1996). Severe naming difficulties are prevalent in SD, yet little is known about the potential for word learning in this population.
Aims: We assessed patterns of repetition and implicit learning in patients with moderate to advanced SD via repeated exposure to word lists varied by frequency and imageability. We propose a tentative framework for the language loss incurred in SD and open a dialogue for treatment approaches targeted towards progressive semantic anomia.
Methods and Procedures: In two experiments, we examined immediate serial recall and short-term learning in five patients with SD. We predicted reduced semantic effects (iinageability), preservation of lexical effects (frequency), and diminished primacy effects in serial recall, consistent with other semantically impaired populations (Martin & Saffran, 1997). We also predicted that severity of semantic impairment would modulate the facilitative effects of repeated exposure (i.e., repetition priming) on word list recall.
Outcomes and Results: In immediate serial recall, all participants showed reduced imageability effects, but only one patient showed a significant word frequency advantage. Two patterns of serial position effects emerged: (1) poor recall of initial list items and (2) better recall of initial and final items. All participants showed minimal gains across repeated trials; however, patients who poorly recalled initial items showed the least benefit from repeated exposure.
Conclusions: We discuss the usefulness of repetition-based interventions for SD and advocate maintenance of known vocabulary over reacquisition of forgotten words. We provide a theoretical framework for progressive language loss associated with SD; this model reflects an ordered reduction of lexical-semantic support coinciding with dementia severity.
C1 Temple Univ, Dept Psychol, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA USA.
Univ Penn, Sch Med, Philadelphia, PA 19104 USA.
RP Reilly, J (reprint author), Temple Univ, Dept Psychol, Weiss Hall, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
EM reillyj@temple.edu
CR Bowie P, 1999, LANCET, V354, P1527, DOI 10.1016/S0140-6736(99)03486-8
BREEDIN SD, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P617, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251987
CONRAD R, 1964, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V55, P429
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Graham K S, 1997, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V3, P534
GRAHAM KS, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P429
Grandmaison E, 2003, J NEUROPSYCH CLIN N, V15, P130, DOI 10.1176/appi.neuropsych.15.2.130
GROSSMAN M, 2004, NEUROCASE, V11, P1
Grossman M, 2002, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V8, P566, DOI 10.1017/S1355617701020318
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
Hodges J R, 1996, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V2, P511
HOPPER T, 2004, CLIN APH C PARK CIT
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Hulme C, 1999, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V25, P447, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.25.2.447
JESCHENIAK JD, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P824, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.20.4.824
Kaplan E, 1976, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Knott R, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P1165, DOI 10.1080/026432997381303
KROLL JF, 1986, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V12, P92, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.12.1.92
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
Ralph MAL, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V13, P341, DOI 10.1162/08989290151137395
Martin N, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P641
MARTIN N, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P254, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90014-8
Martin N, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V83, P92
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000129
MESULAM MM, 1982, ANN NEUROL, V11, P592, DOI 10.1002/ana.410110607
Mummery CJ, 1998, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V10, P766, DOI 10.1162/089892998563059
Neary D, 1998, NEUROLOGY, V51, P1546
PAIVIO A, 1968, J EXP PSYCHOL, V76, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0025327
PAIVIO A, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P1196, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.20.5.1196
Reilly J, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V91, P140, DOI 10.1016/j.bandl.2004.06.073
SAFFRAN EM, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P420, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80081-2
SHULMAN HG, 1971, PSYCHOL BULL, V75, P399, DOI 10.1037/h0031257
Simons JS, 2000, REV NEUROPSYCHOL, V10, P199
Snowden JS, 2002, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V180, P140, DOI 10.1192/bjp.180.2.140
WATKINS OC, 1977, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V3, P712, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.3.6.712
NR 36
TC 20
Z9 22
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 329
EP 339
DI 10.1080/02687030444000787
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900011
ER
PT J
AU Orjada, SA
Beeson, PM
AF Orjada, SA
Beeson, PM
TI Concurrent treatment for reading and spelling in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID ALEXIA; REHABILITATION; EFFICACY; ADULTS
AB Background: Behavioural treatments for impairments of written language have had positive therapeutic effects in patients with alexia and agraphia. However, few researchers have documented the effect of concurrent administration of treatments for reading and writing. Combined treatment has the potential to be an efficient means of rehabilitation for individuals with both reading and spelling impairments.
Aims: The present study was designed to examine the therapeutic value of a concurrent treatment for reading and spelling. The goals of treatment were to increase reading accuracy and rate for text and to improve spelling accuracy for single words.
Methods & Procedures: An individual with chronic aphasia, alexia, and agraphia participated in the treatment, which consisted of a combination of Oral Reading Treatment (ORT) and Copy and Recall Treatment (CART) that was conducted for 10 weeks. Repeated probes at the beginning of each session were used to determine progress and maintenance of treatment gains. Additional language assessments were administered before and after treatment.
Outcomes & Results: Large treatment effects were obtained for reading accuracy of personally relevant scripts and spelling of targeted words, and gains were maintained on follow-up probes. Reading rate for practiced text also improved, but did not generalise when reading new text. Pre- and post-treatment measures indicated significant improvement in reading and spelling of functors not specifically targeted in treatment, and increased grammatical complexity of spoken language. In addition, oral language performance as measured by the Western Aphasia Battery (WAB) showed clinically significant improvement.
Conclusions: Concurrent reading and spelling treatment was successful in this patient with moderate aphasia. It appears to be an efficient way to effect change in written and spoken language in individuals with aphasia.
C1 Univ Arizona, Dept Speech Language & Hearing Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Orjada, SA (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Dept Speech Language & Hearing Sci, POB 210071, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
EM sorjada@email.arizona.edu
CR BARCIKOWSKI RS, 1985, SAMPLE SIZE SELECTIO
Beeson P. B., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P572
Beeson P. M., 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P153
Beeson PM, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P1038, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/083)
Beeson PM, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P551
Beeson PM, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P767, DOI 10.1080/026870399401867
Beeson PM, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P621
Benson D. F., 1996, APHASIA CLIN PERSPEC
Busk P. L., 1992, SINGLE CASE RES DESI
Chapman R., 2000, SYSTEMATIC ANAL LANG
CHERNEY LR, 1986, REHABIL LIT, V47, P112
Cherney LR, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P57
Conway TW, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P608
Ellis A. W., 1993, READING WRITING DYSL
Goodglass H., 1993, UNDERSTANDING APHASI
GOODGLASS H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA O
HELMESTABROOKS N, 2004, MANUAL APHASIA THERA
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Holland A. L., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P413
Hunt K. W., 1965, 3 NAT COUNC TEACH EN
HUNT KW, 1970, MONOGR SOC RES CHILD, V35, P1
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
MOYER SB, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P139
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P582, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1060
Robey RR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P787, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249573
SCHWARTZ L, 1974, Cortex, V10, P278
TRUPE AEH, 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
TUOMAINEN J, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P401, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248542
Weekes B, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P277, DOI 10.1080/026432996382033
Wiederholt J. L., 1992, GRAY ORAL READING TE
Worrall L, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P911
Youmans G, 2005, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P435, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000877
NR 33
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 341
EP 351
DI 10.1080/02687030444000796
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900012
ER
PT J
AU Melton, AK
Bourgeois, MS
AF Melton, AK
Bourgeois, MS
TI Training compensatory memory strategies via the telephone for persons
with TBI
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID BRAIN INJURY; DEMENTIA; EFFICACY; ADULTS
AB Background: Spaced retrieval training has been used to teach individuals with dementia to use compensatory memory strategies. This training has been delivered over the telephone to some persons with dementia. Spaced retrieval applications for individuals with traumatic brain injury have not been reported to date.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to investigate the efficacy of spaced retrieval for teaching individuals with traumatic brain injury strategies and facts via the telephone, with an emphasis on generalisation.
Methods & Procedures: Seven participants with chronic everyday memory problems due to traumatic brain injury were trained to use memory aids for prospective and episodic memory tasks. Participants demonstrated borderline normal to mild global severity ratings. Functional memory problems were identified and external memory aids were provided if appropriate. Participants were trained using spaced retrieval via the telephone 30 minutes per day; each participant was trained on three memory goals. Participants and some caregivers reported strategy use and generalisation for most trained goals.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that goal attainment and generalisation were achieved in an average of five 30-minute training sessions, resulting in 94.4% spaced-retrieval goal maintenance at 1 month. Strategy execution at 1 month was reported on 77.7% of goals trained.
Conclusions: Spaced retrieval is a viable approach for training individuals with traumatic brain injury to use external memory aids and learn prospective memory tasks. Telephone intervention should be considered as an accessible service delivery alternative to promote generalisation with this population.
C1 Florida State Univ, Reg Rehabil Ctr 302, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
RP Bourgeois, MS (reprint author), Florida State Univ, Reg Rehabil Ctr 302, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
EM mbourgeo@garnet.acns.fsu.edu
CR Abrahams Joel P., 1993, Clinical Gerontologist, V12, P57, DOI 10.1300/J018v12n03_06
Baddeley A. D., 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MEMO, P309
BIRD M, 1995, INT J GERIATR PSYCH, V10, P305, DOI 10.1002/gps.930100407
Bourgeois MS, 2003, J COMMUN DISORD, V36, P361, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(03)00051-0
Brush J. A., 1998, THERAPY TECHNIQUE IM
BRUSH JA, 1997, ANN CONV OH SPEECH H
Camp C. J., 1996, PROSPECTIVE MEMORY T, P351
Camp CJ, 1996, APPL COGNITIVE PSYCH, V10, P193, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1099-0720(199606)10:3<193::AID-ACP374>3.0.CO;2-4
CAMP CJ, 1989, EDUC GERONTOL, V15, P641, DOI 10.1080/0380127890150608
CAMP CJ, 1990, CLIN GERONTOLOGIST, V10, P658
Coelho CA, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, pS5
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
FOSS JW, 1993, COGNITIVE INTERVENTI
FREEMAN M R, 1992, Brain Injury, V6, P65, DOI 10.3109/02699059209008124
GOLDSTEIN FC, 1991, MEMORY DISORDERS RES
Hayden Claudia M., 1995, Clinical Gerontologist, V16, P80
HONSINGER MJ, 1991, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P103
Hotz G., 1991, BRIEF TEST HEAD INJU
JACOBS HE, 1988, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V69, P425
Kowalske K, 2000, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V15, P989
Mateer C. A., 1987, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V2, P74, DOI DOI 10.1097/00001199-198709000-00009
McKitrick L. A., 1992, J GERONTOL, V47, P337, DOI 10.1093/geronj/47.5.P337
McMahon C. M., 2003, CLIN PSYCHOL, V7, P50, DOI 10.1080/13284200410001707483
MOFFAT N, 1989, EVERYDAY COGNITION A
Raskin SA, 1996, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V11, P32
SOHLBERG M M, 1992, Brain Injury, V6, P129, DOI 10.3109/02699059209029651
Sohlberg M. M., 1989, INTRO COGNITIVE REHA
SOHLBERG MM, 1985, PROSPECTIVE MEMORY T
Stevens Alan, 1993, Clinical Gerontologist, V13, P106
WEBB DM, 1991, COGNITIVE REHABILITA, P28
WHYTE J, 1988, REHABILITATION MED P, P565
NR 31
TC 19
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 353
EP 364
DI 10.1080/02687030444000804
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900013
ER
PT J
AU Avent, J
Glista, S
Wallace, S
Jackson, J
Nishioka, J
Yip, W
AF Avent, J
Glista, S
Wallace, S
Jackson, J
Nishioka, J
Yip, W
TI Family information needs about aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID SUPPORTED CONVERSATION; PARTNERS; STROKE; COMMUNICATION; INDIVIDUALS;
SPOUSES; ADULTS
AB Background: Comprehensive aphasia treatment includes interventions aimed at assisting family and friends in learning about and adjusting to aphasia. These interventions include education-oriented information, counselling and support, and communication skill training. While the need for family training and support is recognised, there is very little empirical evidence about the content or value of such assistance at different stages of aphasia.
Aims: The primary objective of this study was to identify information needed by family members at the onset of aphasia (hospitalisation), initial rehabilitation, and chronic phases of aphasia.
Methods and Procedures: A qualitative approach was used for this study. Focus groups of four to six participants were interviewed. Transcripts from the focus groups were analysed using a five-stage framework approach: familiarisation, identifying a thematic framework, indexing, charting, and mapping with interpretation. A total of 16 adult family members participated in the study.
Results: Three thematic recommendations were identified across the three time periods. Based on number of times cited, family members rated information about aphasia most important, followed by psychosocial support and hopefulness. The specific type of information needed by families varied depending on the time post-onset of aphasia.
Conclusions: Results from this study support research and educational materials that address the needs of family members of people with aphasia. This research provides guidelines for information from the perspective of a family member.
C1 Calif State Univ Hayward, Hayward, CA 94542 USA.
Western Michigan Univ, Kalamazoo, MI 49008 USA.
RP Avent, J (reprint author), Calif State Univ Hayward, Hayward, CA 94542 USA.
EM javent@csuhayward.edu
CR Bays C L, 2001, Rehabil Nurs, V26, P18
BLOOM RL, 2003, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P235
Chappell NL, 2002, GERONTOLOGIST, V42, P772
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P651
DOWRICHARDS C, 2000, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V7, P44
Eames Sally, 2003, Top Stroke Rehabil, V10, P70
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2004, MANUAL APHASIA APHAS, V2nd
HOLLAND A, 2002, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
Holland A, 2001, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V10, P19, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2001/004)
Kagan A, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00062-X
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Krueger R. A, 1994, FOCUS GROUPS PRACTIC
KUSTER J, 2000, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V7, P21
LAPOINTE LL, 1997, APHASIA RELATED NEUR
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LUBINSKI R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P269
Michallet B, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000087
Morgan D. L., 1993, SUCCESSFUL FOCUS GRO
Pound C, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P477, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000159
Richie J, 1994, ANAL QUALITATIVE DAT, P173
Rose TA, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P947, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000319
Rutledge DN, 2000, ONLINE J CLIN INNOVA, V3, P1
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
SHEWAN CM, 1984, J COMMUN DISORD, V17, P175, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(84)90010-8
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P807
Stewart D.W., 1990, FOCUS GROUPS THEORY
TANNER DC, 1999, FAMILY GUIDE SURVIVI
Westby C, 2003, ASHA LEADER, V8, P4
NR 30
TC 24
Z9 24
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 365
EP 375
DI 10.1080/02687030444000813
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900014
ER
PT J
AU Purdy, M
Hindenlang, J
AF Purdy, M
Hindenlang, J
TI Educating and training caregivers of persons with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, UT
ID COMMUNICATION; ADULTS; PARTNERS; FAMILY; LIFE
AB Background: Because communication deficits caused by aphasia affect both persons with aphasia and their communication partners, most speech-language pathologists are aware of the importance of client and caregiver education. To maximise the effectiveness of their communicative interactions, training should be conducted for both the aphasic clients and their caregivers. Training conducted in group environments offers peer support through shared learning experiences and joint problem solving.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to explore the benefits of a caregiver education and training programme in improving communication between caregivers and their aphasic partners using didactic and experiential approaches in a group setting.
Methods & Procedures: Ten caregivers and their aphasic partners, ranging from 4 to130 months post-stroke, participated in a 12-week group training and education programme. Information about stroke and aphasia was provided in a didactic format, and facilitative communication strategies were discussed and practised using Kolb's (1984) experiential learning cycle model. The experiential learning cycle involved drawing on concrete experiences, engaging in reflective observation and abstract conceptualisation, and practising what was learned through active experimentation.
Outcomes & Results: Analysis of communicative performance on transactional and interactional tasks demonstrated increased communicative success. Responses on a questionnaire indicated that participants had a better understanding of aphasia and were more confident using facilitating strategies.
Conclusions: Group education and training for caregivers and their aphasic partners can be beneficial, even after the couple has been living with aphasia for a number of years. Having an opportunity to practise, observe, and reflect on their performances facilitated participants' learning, and there were observed and reported positive alterations in interactions.
C1 So Connecticut State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, New Haven, CT 06515 USA.
RP Purdy, M (reprint author), So Connecticut State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, 501 Crescent St, New Haven, CT 06515 USA.
EM purdym1@southernct.edu
CR *ASHA, 1998, FUNCT COMM MEAS
BOYD M, 1998, PSYCHIAT NURSING, P296
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P235
Denby Florence, 2003, Top Stroke Rehabil, V9, P34
Elman Roberta J., 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P65, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064009
Elman RJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P411
Elman RJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P227, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249450
HELMICK JW, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P238
Johannsen-Horbach Helga, 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P73, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064010
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kagan A., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P199
Kolb D. A., 1984, EXPT LEARNING EXPERI
LINEBAUGH C, 1978, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Nichols F, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P767, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248449
SIMMONS N, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P
Simms NJ, 2001, EUR FED CORR PUBL, P246
Sorin-Peters R, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P405, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000752
TANNER D, 2003, PSYCHOL NEUROGENIC C
WAHRBORG P, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P371, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249089
WILLIAMS SE, 1993, ARCH PHYSICAL MED RE, V74, P3611
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
NR 22
TC 16
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 377
EP 388
DI 10.1080/02687030444000822
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900015
ER
PT J
AU Hickey, EM
Rondeau, G
AF Hickey, EM
Rondeau, G
TI Social validation in aphasiology: Does judges' knowledge of aphasiology
matter?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID APPLIED BEHAVIOR ANALYSIS; SUPPORTED CONVERSATION; TRAINING VOLUNTEERS;
TREATMENT OUTCOMES; VALIDITY; DISCHARGE; PARTNERS; PLATEAU; ADULTS;
COMMUNICATION
AB Background: Social validity assessments can be used to examine clinical significance of changes due to treatment of aphasia. Behavioural researchers have noted the need to investigate various methodological issues in social validity research. For example, differences in rater characteristics have been noted to influence social validation ratings of treatment outcomes.
Aims: This study examined the possibility of differences in social validity ratings across judges with varying degrees of knowledge of and experience with aphasia. The secondary purpose was to replicate results of previous research that showed the clinical significance of communication partner training. Research questions included: (1) Does the level of knowledge of aphasia and experience with persons with aphasia result in a difference in social validity ratings of pre- and post-training conversations between a student volunteer and an elder with aphasia? (2) Will the significant social validity findings previously obtained from members of the extended community be replicated (Hickey, 2000)?
Methods & Procedures: Ten naive individuals (no familiarity with aphasia), ten second-year graduate students majoring in speech-language pathology (some familiarity with aphasia), and ten Speech-Language Pathologists served as judges. After watching two pre- and two post-training videotaped conversations, the judges provided ratings for seven dimensions of conversations to examine clinical significance of changes in pre- and post-training conversations between a student volunteer and an elder with aphasia. A mixed design with between and within subjects effects, and interaction effects was used.
Outcomes & Results: Repeated measures ANOVA revealed significant main effects for group on two items, significant main effects for training on all seven items, and significant interaction effects for five items. Pre-training ratings showed greater variability than post-training ratings. Naive judges provided the lowest pre-training ratings, and generally, the most change in pre- and post-training ratings. Post-training ratings of the three groups became more similar.
Conclusions: This study suggests that truly naive judges who are representative of the general public may provide the most robust findings in social validation studies of aphasia treatment outcomes. However, further research is needed to determine the source of variability beyond level of knowledge of aphasia. This study also replicated the results of previous research by revealing the clinical significance of communication partner training for elders with aphasia.
C1 Dalhousie Univ, Halifax, NS, Canada.
RP Hickey, EM (reprint author), 5599 Fenwick St, Halifax, NS B3H 1R2, Canada.
EM ehickey@dal.ca
CR Carr JE, 1999, BEHAV INTERVENT, V14, P223, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1099-078X(199910/12)14:4<223::AID-BIN37>3.0.CO;2-Y
Doyle P. J., 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P53, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0503.53
DOYLE PJ, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P143
Elman RJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P227, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249450
Foster SL, 1999, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V67, P308, DOI 10.1037//0022-006X.67.3.308
Hersh D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P207, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249447
Hickey EM, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P625, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000093
HICKEY EM, 2000, THESIS U WASHINGTON
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
Jacobs BJ, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P115, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2452
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
KANE R, 1982, PREDICTING COURSE NU
KAZDIN AE, 1977, BEHAV MODIF, V1, P427, DOI 10.1177/014544557714001
KENEDY CH, 1992, BEHAV ANAL, V15, P147
Lapointe LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P787
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Lustig AP, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P507, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000211
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Newhoff M., 1981, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P234
Pound C, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P222, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249449
Ross KB, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P113, DOI 10.1080/026870399402235
SCHWARTZ IS, 1991, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V24, P189, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1991.24-189
SIMMONS N, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P106
Simmons-Mackie N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P231, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249451
TOMPKINS C, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P571
WOLF MM, 1978, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V11, P203, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1978.11-203
NR 27
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 389
EP 398
DI 10.1080/02687030444000831
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900016
ER
PT J
AU Lasker, JP
LaPointe, LL
Kodras, JE
AF Lasker, JP
LaPointe, LL
Kodras, JE
TI Helping a professor with aphasia resume teaching through multimodal
approaches
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
AB Background: Research and clinical evidence suggest that employment after stroke may be an important aspect of-preserving personal and social identity; however, few people with significant aphasia manage to return to work, particularly if their jobs are communicatively and cognitively demanding.
Aims: This study presents the case of a professor with aphasia, JK, who resumed teaching through a combination of voice-output technology and the Key Word Teaching technique. Researchers investigated student attitudes towards two teaching approaches-one utilising voice-output technology alone and the other combining voice-output with the Key Word Teaching technique.
Methods & Procedures: Ten student participants attended two simulated class sessions-one utilising voice-output technology alone and the other combining voice-output with the Key Word Teaching technique. Investigators analysed attitudinal survey results using nonparametric analyses. Qualitative approaches were employed to analyse transcripts of focus group discussions and written teaching evaluations. The investigators also compared university-based teaching evaluations from before JK's stroke to results obtained after the training protocol was completed. In addition, investigators videotaped and reviewed in-class teaching examples.
Outcomes & Results: In the Combined condition, students rated the professor and the presentation more positively on dependent measures related to rate, comfort, understandability, and their willingness to participate. In a ranking task, all students preferred the Combined teaching approach. The scores on JK's university-based teaching evaluations provided by her students the semester after Key Word Teaching training were similar to evaluations from before her stroke. In addition, excerpts from JK's classroom discourse revealed that she was now combining natural speech and synthesised speech output to enhance her teaching.
Conclusions: Results suggest that students preferred the Combined teaching approach utilising both the synthesised speech from the computer and the Key Word Teaching technique. Also, the training protocol enabled JK to combine natural speech and synthesised computer output within the classroom setting in ways that she had been unable to prior to training. The results demonstrate how a thorough analysis of JK's communication needs, accompanied by explicit training in techniques to overcome barriers to participation, resulted in a successful vocational outcome that enabled JK to retain an important aspect of her identity.
C1 Florida State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, Reg Rehabil Ctr 305, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
RP Lasker, JP (reprint author), Florida State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, Reg Rehabil Ctr 305, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
EM joanne.lasker@comm.fsu.edu
CR BEUKELMAN D, 1998, AUGMENTATIVE COMMUNI
BLACKSCHAFFER RM, 1990, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V71, P285
Bogdan R. C., 1992, QUALITATIVE RES ED I
GARRETT K, 1998, AUGMENTATIVE COMMUNI, P465
Helm-Estabrooks N., 2001, COGNITIVE LINGUISTIC
Hinckley JJ, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P543, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00119-3
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kongs SK, 2000, WISCONSIN CARD SORTI
Krueger R. A, 1994, FOCUS GROUPS PRACTIC
LASKER JP, 2002, PERSPECTIVES AUGMENT, V11, P14
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
VANDESANDTKOENDERM, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P245
NR 12
TC 9
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 399
EP 410
DI 10.1080/02687030444000840
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900017
ER
PT J
AU Fucetola, R
Tucker, F
Blank, K
Corbetta, M
AF Fucetola, R
Tucker, F
Blank, K
Corbetta, M
TI A process for translating evidence-based aphasia treatment into clinical
practice
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID SEMANTIC TREATMENT; LANGUAGE TREATMENT; CONTROLLED-TRIAL; NAMING
DEFICITS; THERAPY; COMMUNICATION; AGRAMMATISM; RECOVERY; STROKE
AB Background: Increased attention in the field of speech-language pathology is directed towards evidence-based treatment, particularly with regard to neurogenic communication disorders.
Aims: The paper describes the development of an evidence-based aphasia clinic. Core principles of the clinic are the use of language treatment techniques that have support in efficacy data, and the objective measurement of treatment effectiveness.
Main Contribution: Care paths for aphasia treatment are developed according to levels of evidence (Class I, II, III evidence); cognitive neuropsychological and life participation models; and the World Health Organisation International Classification of Health, Disability and Function (ICF). Multi-layered assessments are obtained at the ICF impairment and activity/participation levels throughout treatment (i.e., weekly treatment probes, monthly discourse probes, and biannual aphasia and neuropsychological assessments). Weekly multidisciplinary staffings address patient progress. The paper discusses limitations and challenges of addressing treatment effectiveness and efficacy within a typical outpatient clinical setting.
Conclusions: The principles of evidence-based aphasia therapy and single-subject methodology can be applied in routine clinical rehabilitation settings.
C1 Washington Univ, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, St Louis, MO 63108 USA.
Inst Rehabil, St Louis, MO USA.
RP Fucetola, R (reprint author), Washington Univ, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, 4444 Forest Pk Ave,Box 8518, St Louis, MO 63108 USA.
EM fucetolar@neuro.wustl.edu
CR FERGUSON JH, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P566
*AANS, 1995, GUID MAN SEV HEAD IN
Aftonomos LB, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P841, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90197-0
*ANCDS, 2004, PRACT GUID MAN COMM
*ASHA, 1997, EV BAS PRACT PRACT G
ATEN JL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P93
Bhogal SK, 2003, STROKE, V34, P987, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000062343.64383.D0
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
BYNG S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P315, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248663
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Chapman S., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL
Cicerone KD, 2000, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V81, P1596, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2000.19240
Doesborgh SJC, 2004, STROKE, V35, P141, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000105460.52928.A6
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
Frattali C. M., 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S
Freed D. B., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P105
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
GREENWALD ML, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P17, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520174
HAYDEN D, 1999, PROMPT MANUAL LEVEL
SPARKS R, 1974, Cortex, V10, P303
HELM NA, 1980, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P308
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P385
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P39
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P1253
Hillis A. E., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
Hillis AE, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P648, DOI 10.1017/S135561779846613X
Hillis AE, 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D
HILLIS AE, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Holland A., 1998, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
HOLLAND A, 1988, DEEP S C COMM DIS BA
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kearns K. P., 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P196
Kiran S, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000258
LI EC, 1988, J COMMUN DISORD, V21, P111
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
LOVERSO FL, 1998, J REHABILITATION RES, V25, P47
Lowell S., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P109
LPAA Project Group, 2000, ASHA LEADER, V5, P4
Lyon J. G, 1998, COPING APHASIA
LYON JG, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY P, V18, P339
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
Meline T, 2004, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V13, P202, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2004/021)
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Peach RK, 2003, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V12, P258, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2003/071)
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
Pulvermuller F, 2001, STROKE, V32, P1621
Robey RR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P445
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
Robson J, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P675
Schuell H, 1964, APHASIA ADULTS
Shadden B. B., 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU
SHEWAN CM, 1986, TREATMENT APHASIA LA
SIMMONS N, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P106
SKELLY M, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P445
STEELE RD, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90048-1
Stern R, 1997, VISUAL ANALOG MOOD S
Thompson CK, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P175, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0009
WAMBAUGH J, 2002, ASHA LEADER
Wambaugh JL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P725
Wechsler D., 1997, MANUAL WECHSLER MEMO
Wechsler D, 1997, MANUAL WECHSLER ADUL
WERTZ RT, 1986, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V43, P653
WERTZ RT, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P580
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
Worrall L, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P107, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00060-6
Yorkston K. M., 1999, MANAGEMENT MOTOR SPE
NR 66
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 411
EP 422
DI 10.1080/02687030444000859
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900018
ER
PT J
AU Blake, ML
Lesniewicz, KS
AF Blake, ML
Lesniewicz, KS
TI Contextual bias and predictive inferencing in adults with and without
right hemisphere brain damage
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID DISCOURSE COMPREHENSION IMPAIRMENT; MINI-MENTAL-STATE; WORKING-MEMORY;
AMBIGUITY RESOLUTION; TEXT COMPREHENSION; INDIVIDUALS; INFORMATION;
SUPPRESSION; MECHANISMS; CAPACITY
AB Background: Impaired inferencing has been suggested to contribute to the comprehension deficits exhibited by adults with right hemisphere brain damage (RHD); however, conflicting results exist concerning the inferencing deficits associated with RED. Although inference generation has been examined in most of the previous studies, little information is available regarding other processes, such as maintaining inferences over time, the plausibility of inferences in different contexts, and how contextual bias affects these inferencing processes.
Aims: The purpose of the study was to examine the influence of contextual bias on the inferencing processes of older adults without brain damage (NBD) and adults with RHD. It was expected that the NBD group would show clear effects of contextual bias. In contrast, the RHD group was expected to use strong contextual bias to guide inferencing, but to have more difficulty in stories that contained weaker contextual bias.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 18 older adults without brain damage and 8 individuals with RED participated in the study. Participants in the RHD group were selected on the basis of a lesion in the right hemisphere, and not the presence of a communication disorder. None evidenced neglect, and as a group they performed similarly to the NBD group on measures of language and working memory. Thinking Out Loud protocols were used to examine the generation, maintenance, and likelihood of predictive inferences, as well as generation of alternative inferences in stories with a low or high probability that a specific outcome would occur. The study was constructed as a mixed design, with group as a between-subjects variable and story condition as a within-subjects variable.
Outcomes & Results: Results suggest that contextual bias influenced inference processes in both healthy older adults and individuals with RHD. Both groups used context to qualify the likelihood of inferences, but adults with RHD were less adept at using context to maintain inferences and to restrict inference generation to the most likely outcomes.
Conclusions: Adults with RHD who have minimal language deficits can generate predictive inferences and use context to guide some inferencing processes, although they do not use context to constrain inferencing as much as healthy older adults do. The results provide potential insight into the nature of comprehension deficits that may occur after RHD, but the small sample of individuals with minimal cognitive-communication impairments precludes generalisation of the findings to the larger clinical population of adults with RHD.
C1 Univ Houston, Dept Commun Disorders, Clin Res Ctr, Houston, TX 77204 USA.
RP Blake, ML (reprint author), Univ Houston, Dept Commun Disorders, Clin Res Ctr, 4505 Cullen Blvd, Houston, TX 77204 USA.
EM mtblake@uh.edu
CR BEEMAN M, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P80, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1006
BENOWITZ LI, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V28, P231, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(90)90017-I
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
BROWNELL HH, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P310, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90022-2
BURNS MS, 1997, BURNS BRIEF INVENTOR
Calvo MG, 2000, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V15, P293, DOI 10.1080/016909600386066
Cherney LR, 2001, BRAIN INJURY, V15, P585, DOI 10.1080/02699050010009090
CRUM RM, 1993, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V269, P2386, DOI 10.1001/jama.269.18.2386
Dunn LM, 2000, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
ERICSSON KA, 1980, PSYCHOL REV, V87, P215, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.87.3.215
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
GARROD S, 1990, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V16, P250, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.16.2.250
GRAESSER AC, 1994, PSYCHOL REV, V101, P371, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.101.3.371
HOUGH MS, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P253, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90114-V
Klin CM, 1999, J MEM LANG, V40, P593, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1998.2628
Klin CM, 1999, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V27, P241
Lehman MT, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P485
Lehman MT, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P771, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249572
Lehman-Blake MT, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P639, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/052)
Leonard CL, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P309, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1743
Leonard CL, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P343, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1744
MCDONALD S, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P68, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90034-9
MCKOON G, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P440, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.3.440
MCKOON G, 1989, J MEM LANG, V28, P547, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(89)90012-0
MYERS PS, 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DIS
MYERS PS, 1986, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P870
OLSON Gary M., 1984, NEW METHODS READING, P253
OSTROVE JM, 1990, BRAIN COGNITION, V12, P144, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(90)90010-L
REHAK A, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P320, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90104-M
RIVERS DL, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P348, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90061-9
SWINNEY DA, 1991, UNDERSTANDING WORD S
Tompkins C. A., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P559, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000202
Tompkins CA, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P62
Tompkins CA, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P400, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/033)
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Tompkins CA, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P68
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
van den Broek P, 2001, MEM COGNITION, V29, P1081
WAPNER W, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P15, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90061-4
WHITNEY P, 1991, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V14, P133
Wilson B. A., 1987, BEHAV INATTENTION TE
NR 41
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 423
EP 434
DI 10.1080/02687030444000868
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900019
ER
PT J
AU Youmans, G
Holland, A
Munoz, ML
Bourgeois, M
AF Youmans, G
Holland, A
Munoz, ML
Bourgeois, M
TI Script training and automaticity in two individuals with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, UT
ID THERAPY; AUTOMATIZATION
AB Background: Automatic production of spoken language is compromised in many individuals with aphasia whose speech is consistently effortful. Linguistic-based and functional treatments for aphasia both may help to return some automaticity to language production. However, neither approach specifically targets automaticity of speech production for individual with aphasia.
Aims: A treatment protocol was developed to facilitate the automatic spoken production of trained scripts in specific functional contexts by individuals with aphasia. The purpose of this study was to measure its treatment outcomes.
Methods & Procedures: Two individuals with non-fluent aphasia participated. A multiple baseline design across behaviours examined the acquisition of personally relevant short scripts. Script production was probed at the initiation and termination of treatment, and during weekly treatment sessions. Scripts were transcribed and analysed according to several measures of accuracy and fluency.
Outcomes & Results: All scripts were mastered, and scripted speech productions were judged to have become more automatic based on naturalness and stability of speech, increased speaking rate, and relatively errorless production. Automatic script production also generalised to novel conversation partners and novel cues in a limited fashion.
Conclusions: Script training as used here was a successful treatment approach. It may be an effective, practical, and functional approach to the treatment of aphasic individuals with moderately spared comprehension and cognitive difficulties and with significant expressive speech difficulties.
C1 Long Isl Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, Brooklyn, NY 11201 USA.
Univ Arizona, Tucson, AZ USA.
Univ Tennessee, Knoxville, TN USA.
Florida State Univ, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
RP Youmans, G (reprint author), Long Isl Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, 1 Univ Plaza,Metcafe Bldg Suite 257, Brooklyn, NY 11201 USA.
EM ggb5466@fsu.edu
CR ATEN JL, 1986, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
ATEN JL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P93
Hickin J, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P981, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000509
Hinckley JJ, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P463, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000340
Holland A. L., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P197, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90007-6
Holland AL, 2004, CHALLENGING APHASIA THERAPIES: BROADENING THE DISCOURSE AND EXTENDING THE BOUNDARIES, P118, DOI 10.4324/9780203462706_chapter_7
Hopper T, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P933, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249461
Jacobs BJ, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P5
KERTESZ A, 1988, W APHASIA BATTERY
LABERGE D, 1974, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V6, P293, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(74)90015-2
Levelt W. J., 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LOGAN GD, 1978, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V107, P32, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.107.1.32
LOGAN GD, 1988, PSYCHOL REV, V95, P492, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.95.4.492
MITCHUM CD, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P71
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
SEGALOWITZ NS, 1993, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V14, P369, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400010845
SEUREN PAM, 1978, CHILDS CONCEPTION LA
NR 17
TC 19
Z9 19
PU ROUTLEDGE JOURNALS, TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI ABINGDON
PA 4 PARK SQUARE, MILTON PARK, ABINGDON OX14 4RN, OXFORDSHIRE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
EI 1464-5041
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 435
EP 449
DI 10.1080/02687030444000877
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900020
ER
PT J
AU Schneider, SL
Frens, RA
AF Schneider, SL
Frens, RA
TI Training four-syllable CV patterns in individuals with acquired apraxia
of speech: Theoretical implications
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID DEVELOPMENTAL APRAXIA; MOTOR CONTROL; APHASIA
AB Background: Acquired apraxia of speech (AOS) is known as a motor speech disorder because it affects both the motor planning and motor programming components of speech production (Darley, Aronson, & Brown, 1975; Kent & Rosenbek, 1983; Square & Martin, 1994). Although the clinical characteristics of acquired AOS are generally accepted, what specifically causes individuals to make the errors they do is less well understood. Four theories have been proposed that attempt to explain these errors. Few treatment studies have taken into account these theories when designing their studies. This could account for the limited generalisation effects that have been reported (Ballard, 2001).
Aims: This study investigated the effects of a treatment for three individuals with moderate acquired AOS and concomitant aphasia. Treatment focused on training four-syllable CV patterns of varying levels of difficulty. Acquisition, as well as generalisation effects and error patterns were examined and interpreted based on the proposed theoretical models of AOS in the literature.
Methods & Procedures: A single-subject multiple baseline design across behaviours and subjects was utilised to train each participant's ability to produce four-syllable CV patterns varying in levels of difficulty. A total of 277 stimuli were used in the study: 32 trained and untrained four-syllable CV patterns, 203 words and nonsense words, divided into one- to five-syllable words, and 42 common phrases. The CV patterns were further divided into specified levels of difficulty. Generalisation to untrained four-syllable CV patterns at the same level and across levels, as well as to words and phrases, was examined.
Outcomes & Results: All participants were successful in learning to produce the four-syllable CV patterns on which they were trained. No generalisation to the untrained patterns at the same level occurred. This finding suggested that some aspects of the phonological representations, specifically voicing, are not intact prior to the production being sent to the phonetic-motoric level, as the phonetic-motoric theory suggests (McNeil, Odell, Miller, & Hunter, 1995; McNeil, Robin, & Schmidt, 1997; Shriberg, Aram, & Kwaitowski, 1997a, 1997b, 1997c; Van der Merwe, 1997). Generalisation to untrained patterns across levels that were considered less complex than the pattern being trained was seen. This finding supports the conclusions of Gierut (1998), Thompson, Ballard, and Shapiro, (1998), and Plant (1996) that training complex behaviours generalises to less complex behaviours. Improvement of word/phrase production as treatment on the four-syllable CV patterns proceeded was not consistent with the motor theory of AOS (Ziegler, 2003). Instead it supports the more integrative theory of speech production proposed by Ballard, Robin, and Folkin (2003).
Conclusions: This study provided the opportunity to examine the theories attempting to explain the characteristics of AOS. Future treatment studies should consider these theories when designing their studies to further test and to advance our understanding of AOS.
C1 Ohio State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Columbus, OH 43210 USA.
RP Schneider, SL (reprint author), Ohio State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 1070 Carmack Rd,110 Pressey Hall, Columbus, OH 43210 USA.
EM schneider.291@osu.edu
CR Ballard KJ, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P37, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000482
Ballard KJ, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P3, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00038-1
Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
Chumpelik D., 1984, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V5, P139, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1085172
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DINNSEN DA, 1993, CONFLUENCE LINGUISTI, P137
Dogil G., 1998, PHONOLOGY, V15, P143, DOI 10.1017/S095267579800356X
DOGIL G, 1994, 4 S INT CLIN PHON LI
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Gierut JA, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, pS85
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINQUISTIC ASS
Kent R. D., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P181
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
McNeil MR, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P39
McReynolds L. V., 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
Plaut DC, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0004
Rogers MA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P793
ROSENBEK JC, 1973, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V38, P462
SAFFRAN EM, 1991, UNPUB PHILADELPHIA C
Shriberg LD, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P273
Shriberg LD, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P286
Shriberg LD, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P313
SQUARE P, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
SQUARE PA, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P319
Thompson CK, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P661
van der Merwe A, 1997, COMSIG '97 - PROCEEDINGS OF THE 1997 SOUTH AFRICAN SYMPOSIUM ON COMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING, P1
Varley R, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P39
Wambaugh JL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249569
Wambaugh JL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P725
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
Whiteside SP, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P221, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70749-4
Ziegler W, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P3, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000554
ZIEGLER W, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P34, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90032-5
NR 38
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 451
EP 471
DI 10.1080/02687030444000886
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900021
ER
PT J
AU McNeill, MR
Matthews, CT
Hula, WD
Doyle, PJ
Rubinsky, HJ
Fossett, TRD
AF McNeill, MR
Matthews, CT
Hula, WD
Doyle, PJ
Rubinsky, HJ
Fossett, TRD
TI A dual-task tool for quantifying normal comprehension of aphasic
connected speech production: A constructive replication
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 34th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY 2004
CL Park City, TX
ID DIVIDED-ATTENTION; RESOURCE-ALLOCATION; MULTIPLE RESOURCES; MANUAL
TRACKING; PERFORMANCE; INDIVIDUALS; SENSITIVITY; DIFFICULTY; LANGUAGE;
STIMULI
AB Background: Deficits of attention or its control secondary to brain damage have been proposed as all or part of the underlying mechanisms for the linguistic impairments that characterise aphasia (Clark & Robin, 1995; Granier, Robin, Shapiro, Peach, & Zimba, 2000; McNeil, 1982, 1988; McNeil, Odell, & Tseng, 1991; Murray, Holland, & Beeson, 1997a; Tseng, McNeil, & Milenkovic, 1993). McNeil, Doyle, Hula, Rubinsky, Fossett, and Matthews (2004) developed a set of tasks to quantify the difficulty that normal listeners have in understanding the language production of persons with varying amounts of aphasia. In their dual-task study, a significant decrement was found in the visual-manual tracking accuracy of normal older individuals while concurrently listening to the connected language of a person with moderate, as compared to mild, aphasia. No performance costs were observed on the listening tasks across three tracking difficulty levels. Possible reasons for the unidirectional performance cost were speculated and the present study was designed to investigate one of them.
Aims: Using the same story comprehension task used in the previous study and the same visual-manual tracking task, but increased in difficulty, this study sought to investigate whether the increased demands of the tracking task were sufficient to elicit a concurrent cost on story comprehension performance.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 24 normal participants performed the tracking and story comprehension tasks concurrently and in isolation. Story retell performance was evaluated within subjects across two tracking difficulty levels (easy and hard) and tracking performance was evaluated between subjects across three story difficulty levels (no story, mild difficulty, and moderate difficulty).
Outcomes & Results: Tracking performance varied significantly across story task difficulty in the easy tracking condition, with participants demonstrating better tracking performance in the mild story condition than in either the moderate story or no story conditions. None of the comparisons made with the harder tracking condition reached significance. There was no effect of tracking difficulty on story comprehension as measured by subsequent story retell performance.
Conclusions: The findings from this study replicate the findings from the McNeil et al. (2004) study that these dual-tasks show a reliable cost of story difficulty on concurrent tracking performance. Contrary to predictions, no effect of tracking difficulty on story retell performance was found, despite the increased tracking difficulty used compared to the previous study. While this finding does diminish the probability that insufficient tracking task difficulty was the source of the unidirectional costs in the previous study, it leaves a number of alternative explanations for the findings viable and unaddressed.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Otolaryngol, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Geriatr Res Educ & Clin Ctr, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP McNeill, MR (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
EM meneil+@pitt.edu
CR Arvedson J. C., 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P188
Backs RW, 1997, ACTA PSYCHOL, V96, P167, DOI 10.1016/S0001-6918(97)00010-3
Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
BAYLES KA, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P74
CAMPBELL TF, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P513
Clark H. M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P143
DISIMONI FG, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P511
DUFFY JR, 1980, APHASIA APRAXIA AGNO, V2, P1
Erickson RJ, 1996, BRAIN COGNITION, V30, P244, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1996.0016
GOPHER D, 1982, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V8, P146, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.8.1.146
Granier JP, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P501
HIRST W, 1987, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V116, P68, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.116.1.68
ISREAL JB, 1980, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V17, P259, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1980.tb00146.x
Kahneman D., 1973, ATTENTION EFFORT
MCLEOD P, 1977, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V29, P651, DOI 10.1080/14640747708400639
McNeil M. R, 1982, SPEECH LANGUAGE HEAR, VIII, P692
McNeil M. R., 1988, HDB SPEECH LANGUAGE, P738
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
McNeil MR, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P815, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000284
McNeil MR, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P521, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000138
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
MCNEIL MR, 1978, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V2, P71
Murray LL, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P40, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2281
Murray LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P91, DOI 10.1080/026870399402226
Murray LL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P213
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
Murray LL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P401, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248480
NAVON D, 1990, B PSYCHONOMIC SOC, V28, P155
Navon D., 1980, ATTENTION PERFORM, P297
NAVON D, 1984, PSYCHOL REV, V91, P216, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.91.2.216
NAVON D, 1979, PSYCHOL REV, V86, P214, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.86.3.214
PAYNE DG, 1994, HUM FACTORS, V36, P441
ROSENBAUM DA, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V109, P444, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.109.4.444
SCHMIDT RA, 1977, J MOTOR BEHAV, V9, P101, DOI 10.1080/00222895.1977.10735099
Schubert T, 2003, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V17, P733, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(03)00198-8
Slansky BL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P461, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248484
Szameitat AJ, 2002, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V14, P1184, DOI 10.1162/089892902760807195
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
WICKENS C, 1983, SCIENCE, V221, P1080, DOI 10.1126/science.6879207
WICKENS CD, 1976, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V2, P1
WICKENS CD, 1986, HDB PERCEPTION HUMAN, P1
Wickens C.D., 1984, VARIETIES ATTENTION
NR 42
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR-MAY
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 3-5
BP 473
EP 484
DI 10.1080/02687030444000895
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 931IL
UT WOS:000229478900022
ER
PT J
AU Davis, GA
AF Davis, GA
TI PACE revisited
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID REFERENTIAL COMMUNICATION; THERAPY; APHASIA; DEFICITS; ADULTS; EFFICACY
AB Background: PACE therapy is a widely referenced treatment procedure that was developed nearly 30 years ago. Since then, several critiques and studies of the procedure have been published, and the climate for rehabilitation in the United States has changed dramatically.
Aims: The main goals of this retrospective essay are to introduce new clinicians to PACE therapy and analyse what has been published about the procedure for experienced aphasiologists.
Main Contribution: The article provides a description and history of the procedure and then proceeds with discussions of conceptualisation, modifications, and efficacy. Responses to several concerns about PACE should clarify many aspects of the procedure. These concerns include the procedure's naturalness, applicability to a variety of patients, and absence of corrective feedback.
Conclusions: PACE has an uncertain place in the healthcare environment of the United States. Because of its mixed reviews and unsettled efficacy, it may still be considered to be an experimental treatment.
C1 Univ Massachusetts, Amherst, MA 01003 USA.
RP Davis, GA (reprint author), Univ Massachusetts, Arnold House,Box 30410, Amherst, MA 01003 USA.
EM albyn@comdis.umass.edu
CR AVENT JR, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P295, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248206
BANDUR DL, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P629
Barr DJ, 2002, J MEM LANG, V46, P391, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2001.2815
BONNE DR, 1987, HUMAN COMMUNICATION
BRENNEISESARSHAD R, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P168
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1978, INTRO APHASIA
Brookshire RH, 1997, INTRO NEUROGENIC COM
BRYNG S, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P3
BYNG S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P315, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248663
Carlomagno S, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P337
CARLOMAGNO S, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P419, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248544
Carlomagno S, 1994, PRAGMATIC APPROACHES
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Clerebaut N., 1984, REEDUCATION ORTHOPHO, V22, P329
Collins M, 1986, DIAGNOSIS TREATMENT
CORNETT BS, 2001, POFESSIONAL ISSUES S, P229
CUBELLI R, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P369, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253378
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
Davis G., 1981, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P169
Davis G. A., 2000, APHASIOLOGY DISORDER
Davis G. A., 1993, SURVEY ADULT APHASIA
DAVIS GA, 1986, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P251
DAVIS GA, 1980, CLIN APH C P
DERENZI E, 1962, BRAIN, V85, P665, DOI 10.1093/brain/85.4.665
DUFFY JR, 1981, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P105
Edelman G, 1987, PACE PROMOTING APHAS
EDMUNDSON A, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P137
European Observatory on Health Care Systems, 2000, HLTH CAR SYST TRANS
FRATTALI CM, 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P67
GLINDEMANN R, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P425, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248545
GLUCKSBERG S, 1967, MERRILL-PALMER Q BEH, V13, P309
Graham-Keegan Lisa, 1997, P42
Hanna JE, 2003, J MEM LANG, V49, P43, DOI 10.1016/S0749-596X(03)00022-6
Herbert R, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P1163, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000454
Hillis A, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P513
Holland A., 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P27
Holland A. L., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P413
HOLLAND AL, 1975, AM SPEECH HEAR ASS N
HOLLAND AL, 1999, GROUP TREATMENT NEUR, P77
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
Hopper T, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P933, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249461
HORNER J, 1983, TREATING LANGUAGE DI, P181
Howard D., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY HIST
JOHANNSENHORBAC.H, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P319
JOHNSON FK, 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE STR
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Kagan A., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P199
KATZ RC, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P253
KEARNS KP, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P316
LAPOINTE LL, 1997, APHASIA RELATED NEUR
Lawson R., 1999, APHASIA THERAPY FILE, P61
LEDORZE G, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P87
LI EC, 1988, J COMMUN DISORD, V21, P491
Lyon J, 2004, CHALLENGING APHASIA THERAPIES: BROADENING THE DISCOURSE AND EXTENDING THE BOUNDARIES, P54, DOI 10.4324/9780203462706_chapter_4
Lyon J. G., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, V4th, P297
Lyon J. G., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P137
LYON JG, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY P, V18, P339
MARSHALL RC, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P435
MARSHALL RC, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P389
Murray LL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P651, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249564
Newhoff M., 1981, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P234
PACHALSKA M, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P145
PEACH RK, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P487
PECH RK, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P429
PERKINS L, 1993, FOUNDATIONS OF APHASIA REHABILITATION, P211
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
PULVERMULLER F, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P39, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248518
RAO P, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P688
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
Roth FP, 2001, TREATMENT RESOURCE M
SASANUMA S, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P175
Schuell H, 1964, APHASIA ADULTS
SERON X, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P131
Simms NJ, 2001, EUR FED CORR PUBL, P246
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
SPRINGER L, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P391, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248541
SPRINGER L, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P563, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248562
Springer L, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P90
SWINDELL CS, 1990, HUMAN COMMUNICATION, P520
Thompson C., 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S, P245
THOMPSON CK, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P407
VISCHBRINK EG, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P227
Worrall L., 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA, P47
Worrall L., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P3
WORRALL LE, 2000, NEUROGEIC COMMUNICAT
NR 85
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 1
BP 21
EP 38
DI 10.1080/02687030444000598
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 898PV
UT WOS:000227089600002
ER
PT J
AU Kendall, DL
McNeil, MR
Shaiman, S
Pratt, S
AF Kendall, DL
McNeil, MR
Shaiman, S
Pratt, S
TI Phonetic encoding of infrequent articulatory phonetic transitions
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID RESPONSE DURATION; WORD RECOGNITION; LEXICAL ACCESS; REACTION-TIME;
FREQUENCY; SPEECH; MOVEMENT; TASKS
AB Background: The purpose of this experiment was to investigate the underlying mechanisms responsible for the phonetic encoding of novel articulatory speech gestures (i.e., nonwords). Understanding these mechanisms is critical to gain a comprehensive realisation of normal speech production as well as insight into the nature of pathologic speech.
Aims: The following research questions were addressed: (1) Is there a significant difference in the response latency among low, moderate, and high interphonemic transitional frequencies in nonwords? (2) Is there a significant difference in the response latency among low and high lexical frequencies in real words" (3) Is there a significant difference in total durations among low, moderate, and high interphonemic transitional frequencies in nonwords?
Methods & Procedures: A total of 19 females between the ages of 50 and 79 repeated nonwords that were constructed in three interphonemic transitional frequency categories (low, moderate, high) and elicited in an immediate response condition.
Outcomes & Results: The results showed an expected significant difference of shorter response latency for the high-frequency nonwords when compared to the moderate- and the low-frequency nonwords, and an unexpected significantly shorter duration for the low-frequency nonwords when compared to the moderate- and the high-frequency nonwords.
Conclusions: Results are consistent with the interpretation that the high-frequency nonwords were initiated immediately (short response latency) and encoded phonetically on-line during production (longer nonwords duration), while the motor programs for the low-frequency nonwords were pre-loaded prior to initiation of production (longer response latency) and executed without update (shorter nonwords duration).
C1 Univ Florida, Dept Neurol, Gainesville, FL 32610 USA.
VA RR&D, Brain Rehabil & Res Ctr, Gainesville, FL USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Kendall, DL (reprint author), Univ Florida, Dept Neurol, Box 100236, Gainesville, FL 32610 USA.
EM kendadl@neurology.ufl.edu
CR American Speech-Language-Hearing Association, 1990, ASHA S2, V2, P17
BALOTA DA, 1985, J MEM LANG, V24, P89, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(85)90017-8
BAYLES K, 1990, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
BROWMAN CP, 1992, PHONETICA, V49, P155
Dollaghan C, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P1136
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
ERIKSEN CW, 1970, J EXP PSYCHOL, V84, P502, DOI 10.1037/h0029274
KEELE SW, 1968, PSYCHOL BULL, V70, P387, DOI 10.1037/h0026739
Keele S. W., 1976, MOTOR CONTROL ISSUES, P109
Keller E., 1987, MOTOR SENSORY PROCES
KLAPP ST, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V21, P1015, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.21.5.1015
KLAPP ST, 1982, J MOTOR BEHAV, V14, P46
Lashley KS, 1917, AM J PHYSIOL, V43, P169
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P239, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90030-2
LIBERMAN AM, 1985, COGNITION, V21, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(85)90021-6
MCCANN RS, 1988, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V14, P693, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.14.4.693
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
McNeil M.R., 1990, CEREBRAL CONTROL SPE, P349
MONSELL S, 1989, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V118, P43, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.118.1.43
MONSELL S, 1990, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V119, P335, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.119.3.335
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
OWENS E, 1977, CALIFORNIA CONSONANT
RIDDOCH MJ, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P1431, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.6.1431
Roberts A. H., 1965, STAT LINGUISTIC ANAL
Rogers MA, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P258
Schmidt R, 1988, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
SECORD W, 1981, TEST MINIMAL ARTICUL
SHATTUCKHUFNAGE.S, 1979, SENTENCE PROCESSING
Shriberg LD, 1982, CLIN PHONETICS
SmileyOyen AL, 1996, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V49, P379, DOI 10.1080/027249896392694
STERNBERG S, 1988, PHONETICA, V45, P175
Sternberg S., 1978, INFORMATION PROCESSI, P117
THEOIS J, 1977, COGNITIVE THEORY, V2
Van der Merwe A., 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS
VANDERPLAATS RE, 1990, J MOTOR BEHAV, V22, P361
VIDAL F, 1991, J MOTOR BEHAV, V23, P226
Whiteside SP, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P221, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70749-4
NR 39
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 1
BP 39
EP 52
DI 10.1080/02687030444000606
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 898PV
UT WOS:000227089600003
ER
PT J
AU Kiran, S
AF Kiran, S
TI Training phoneme to grapheme conversion for patients with written and
oral production deficits: A model-based approach
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ACQUIRED DYSGRAPHIA; SURFACE DYSGRAPHIA; SPELLING PROCESS; NAMING
DEFICITS; REMEDIATION; REPRESENTATIONS; COMPONENTS; DISORDERS; APHASIA;
OUTPUT
AB Background: A previous study (Kiran, Thompson, & Hashimoto, 2001) investigated the effect of training sublexical conversion on improving oral reading of regular words in two individuals with aphasia, Results revealed that training grapheme to phoneme conversion improved acquisition of trained items and facilitated generalisation to trained and untrained stimuli during oral naming, written naming, and writing to dictation as well.
Aims: The aim of the present study was to extend this work to investigate if training phoneme to grapheme conversion would result in improvement of writing to dictation of trained items and facilitate generalisation to untrained stimuli and untrained tasks.
Methods & procedures: Using a single subject experimental design across three participants with aphasia, the effects of phoneme to grapheme conversion treatment were evaluated by periodic probing of both trained and untrained regular words across lexical tasks: writing to dictation, written naming, oral spelling, and oral naming.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that training phoneme to grapheme conversion resulted in improved writing to dictation of trained and untrained words in two out of three patients. In addition, improved written naming and oral spelling of trained words was observed. Marginal improvements were observed for untrained stimulation written naming, oral spelling, and oral naming.
Conclusions: The results of this experiment demonstrate the effectiveness of training sublexical conversion to improve written production deficits and to facilitate generalisation to untrained stimuli and untrained tasks. These results also complement findings of our previous study to suggest a more efficient method of improving single word production deficits than training each modality successively.
C1 Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
RP Kiran, S (reprint author), Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, CMA 7-206, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
EM s-kiran@mail.utexas.edu
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
ALLPORT DA, 1981, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V295, P397, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1981.0148
BEAUVOIS MF, 1981, BRAIN, V104, P21, DOI 10.1093/brain/104.1.21
Beeson P. M., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P101
Beeson P. M., 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P367
Beeson PM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000167
BEHRMANN M, 1987, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P365, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252044
Behrmann M., 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, COGNITION, V37, P243, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(90)90047-N
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, NATURE, V346, P267, DOI 10.1038/346267a0
Carlomagno S., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
CARLOMAGNO S, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES
CONNELL PJ, 1986, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V51, P214
De Partz M. P., 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P147
DEPARTZ MP, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P369, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252065
Edmonds LA, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P567, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000057
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
Ellis A. W., 1996, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
ELLIS AW, 1983, COGNITION, V15, P111, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90036-7
Frances N., 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
GOODGLASS H, 1980, AM SCI, V68, P647
GOODMANSCHULMAN R, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P143
Hatfield F. M., 1983, APHASIA THERAPY
HILLIS A, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
Hillis A. E., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
Hillis A E, 1992, Clin Commun Disord, V2, P19
Hillis A. E., 1995, BROKEN MEMORIES NEUR, P344
Hillis AE, 1999, CORTEX, V35, P337, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70804-9
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
Hillis Trupe A. E., 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P163
Kaplan E., 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KAY J, 1992, PSYHCOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kiran S, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000258
LUZATTI C, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P249
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Rapcsak S. Z., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P71
Rapp B, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P439, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000301
Rapp B, 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P47
Rapp B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P531, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000012
Rapp B, 1997, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V23, P1130, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.23.4.1130
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Raymer AM, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P607, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000058
SERON X, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P45
TRYON WW, 1982, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V15, P423, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1982.15-423
Weekes B, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P277, DOI 10.1080/026432996382033
NR 48
TC 14
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 1
BP 53
EP 76
DI 10.1080/02687030444000633
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 898PV
UT WOS:000227089600004
ER
PT J
AU Fridriksson, J
Holland, AL
Beeson, P
Morrow, L
AF Fridriksson, J
Holland, AL
Beeson, P
Morrow, L
TI Spaced retrieval treatment of anomia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WRITING TREATMENT; SEVERE APHASIA; DEFICITS; THERAPY
AB Background: Spaced Retrieval (SR) is a treatment approach developed to facilitate recall of information by individuals with dementia. Essentially an errorless learning procedure that can be used to facilitate recall by a variety of information, SR gradually increases the interval between correct recall of target terms.
Aims: Given the success of using SR in dementia, the purpose of this study was to explore its usefulness in improving naming by individuals with asphasia. The rate of acquisition and retention of items was compared between SR and a more traditional treatment technique-cueing hierarchy (CH). Also, each oral naming treatment was run concurrently with a single word writing treatment.
Methods M Procedures: Three participants who had moderate or severe naming impairments and agraphia were studied. Single-subject design was applied across oral and written naming and treated and untreated items.
Outcomes O Results: The results indicate that for these participants, SR resulted in improved naming of specific items. The data further suggest that SR compared favourably to CH with regard to both acquisition and retention of items. The participants also benefited nicely from the writing treatment.
Conclusions: These findings suggest SR may be an alternative for managing naming impairment resulting from asphasia. Furthermore, the study supports providing treatments aimed at two different modalities concurrently.
C1 Univ S Carolina, Norman J Arnold Sch Publ Hlth, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Columbia, SC 29208 USA.
Univ Arizona, Tucson, AZ USA.
RP Fridriksson, J (reprint author), Univ S Carolina, Norman J Arnold Sch Publ Hlth, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Columbia, SC 29208 USA.
EM jfridrik@sc.edu
CR Beeson PM, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P1038, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/083)
Beeson PM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000167
Beeson PM, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P767, DOI 10.1080/026870399401867
Bourgeois MS, 2003, J COMMUN DISORD, V36, P361, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(03)00051-0
Brush J. A., 1998, THERAPY TECHNIQUE IM
Camp C. J., 1996, PROSPECTIVE MEMORY T, P351
Camp C. J., 1998, CLIN GERONTOLOGIST, V19, P51, DOI 10.1300/J018v19n01_05
Clausen NS, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P625, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000003
GABRIELE TE, 1987, HUM MOVEMENT SCI, V6, P1, DOI 10.1016/0167-9457(87)90019-4
GARRY F, 1989, VET CLIN N AM-FOOD A, V5, P55
SPARKS R, 1974, Cortex, V10, P303
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LINEBAUGH CW, 1977, CLIN APH C P MINN MN
MELTON A, IN PRESS APHASIOLOGY
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1047, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000618
Plaut DC, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0004
Pulvermuller F, 2001, STROKE, V32, P1621
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Schuell H. M., 1964, APHASIA ADULTS DIAGN
SHEWAN CM, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P272, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90068-3
Thompson CK, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P661
NR 26
TC 21
Z9 23
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 2
BP 99
EP 109
DI 10.1080/02687003444000660
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 906TM
UT WOS:000227666300001
ER
PT J
AU Cruice, M
Worrall, L
Hickson, L
Murison, R
AF Cruice, M
Worrall, L
Hickson, L
Murison, R
TI Measuring quality of life: Comparing family members' and friends'
ratings with those of their aphasic partners
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID HEALTH-CARE PROVIDERS; SIGNIFICANT OTHERS; STROKE SURVIVORS; CHRONIC
DISEASE; IMPACT; RELIABILITY; ADULTS; SCALE; SF-36; QUESTIONNAIRE
AB Background: A greater awareness of the social consequences of impairments and a growing need for patient-centred outcomes in contemporary health care has made it increasingly important for clinicians to gather information on clients' quality of life (QoL). As QoL measures typically require respondents to perform a number of complex language and cognitive processes, there is a valid concern as to whether clients with aphasia can reliably self-report. In this situation, significant others and healthcare providers are called upon to make judgements as proxy respondents. Evidence from medical and chronic disability and health literature suggests that the responses of proxies may be interchangeable with those of patients, however it is not known whether the same is true for language-impaired respondents.
Aims: The current research compared scores from aphasic and proxy respondents to investigate whether proxy respondents could be used to obtain reliable information on aphasic people's QoL. Reliable information was considered as statistically similar group comparisons with small effect sizes, and moderate to good agreement between aphasic and proxy respondents' scores.
Methods M Procedures: A total of 30 aphasic respondents aged 57 to 88 years, and 30 proxy respondents (primarily spouses and children) aged 27 to 82 years were interviewed separately by a speech and language therapist using four QoL measures: a global rating, the Short Form 36 Health Survey, the Dartmouth COOP Charts, and the How I Feel About Myself well-being scale. A systematic cueing procedure was used to facilitate respondents' understanding. Subscale scores were compared for group differences using paired samples t tests and effect size calculations, and individually for agreement using intraclass correlations.
Outcomes O Results: Proxy respondents demonstrated a significant systematic negative bias in rating their aphasic partners' global QoL, physical functioning, general or overall health, pain, and vitality. Conversely, proxy respondents rated statistically the same as their aphasic partners on physical fitness, feelings, daily activities, quality of life (COOP), total well-being, autonomy, environmental mastery, and purpose in life, with at least moderate agreement. similar to other literature, there was generally higher agreement for objective domains than subjective domains, and greater agreement on the SF-36 than the global rating measure, the COOP Charts, or the well-being scale.
Conclusions: Family members and friends of people with aphasia cannot be interchangeably accepted as reliable informants of their partners' QoL. They rated their partners significantly lower in global and physical health-related QoL, and yet their systematic behaviours in ratings could be useful for clinicians and researchers as their aphasic partners' scores can be easily and confidently predicted. Conversely, they appeared to be reliable informants in other areas, namely feelings, daily activities, and well-being, as well as overall quality of life (when using the illustrated COOP QoL measure), however further research is needed to clarify statistical definitions and interpretations of reliability. Finally, there was no relationship between proxies' and aphasic partners' ratings of social health (functioning, activities, support, relations with others) and self-acceptance. Researchers and clinicians need to be aware of these biases when soliciting information from significant others, and further research is needed to develop QoL measures that are accessible for people with aphasia.
C1 City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, London EC1V 0HB, England.
Univ Queensland, Brisbane, Qld, Australia.
Univ New England, Armidale, NSW, Australia.
RP Cruice, M (reprint author), City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, Northampton Sq, London EC1V 0HB, England.
EM m.cruice@city.ac.uk
RI Hickson, Louise/F-8748-2010; Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR Addington-Hall J, 2001, BRIT MED J, V322, P1417, DOI 10.1136/bmj.322.7299.1417
AHLSIO B, 1984, STROKE, V15, P886
BERGNER M, 1981, MED CARE, V19, P787, DOI 10.1097/00005650-198108000-00001
Bethoux F, 1996, INT J REHABIL RES, V19, P291
Birren J., 1991, CONCEPT MEASUREMENT
Blake H, 2003, CLIN REHABIL, V17, P312, DOI 10.1191/0269215503cr613oa
Cruice M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P333, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000707
Cruice M., 2000, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V5, P85
Cruice M., 2000, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V5, P1
Cusick CP, 2000, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V15, P739
DEHAAN RJ, 1995, STROKE, V26, P402
DIXON P, 1994, OUTCOMES BRIEFING, V4, P3
Dorman PJ, 1997, STROKE, V28, P1883
DUNCAN P, 2002, STROKE, V30, P2593
Duncan PW, 1999, STROKE, V30, P2131
Engell B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000734
FELCE D, 1995, RES DEV DISABIL, V16, P51, DOI 10.1016/0891-4222(94)00028-8
GARRATT AM, 1993, BRIT MED J, V306, P1440
Hilari K, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P86
Hoen B, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P681, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249415
JENKINSON C, 1994, QUAL LIFE RES, V3, P7, DOI 10.1007/BF00647843
KAPPELLE LJ, 1994, STROKE, V25, P1360
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
King RB, 1996, STROKE, V27, P1467
Knapp P, 1999, STROKE, V30, P934
LANKHORST GJ, 1989, INT J REHABIL RES, V12, P201, DOI 10.1097/00004356-198906000-00012
LEDORZE G, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P241
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Lofgren B, 1999, STROKE, V30, P567
LOMAS J, 1987, MED CARE, V25, P764, DOI 10.1097/00005650-198708000-00009
Low JTS, 1999, SOC SCI MED, V49, P711, DOI 10.1016/S0277-9536(99)00194-X
MCCOLL E, 2003, WORKSH 10 ANN C INT
MEADOWS K, 2004, QUALITY LIFE NEWSLET, V19, P7
Muldoon MF, 1998, BRIT MED J, V316, P542
NELSON E, 1987, J CHRON DIS, V40, pS55
NELSON EC, 1990, MED CARE, V28, P1111, DOI 10.1097/00005650-199012000-00001
Neumann PJ, 2000, J AM GERIATR SOC, V48, P1646
NIEMI ML, 1988, STROKE, V19, P1101
NILSSON A, 2000, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V6, P30
OXENHAM D, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P477, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248710
Pal DK, 1996, J EPIDEMIOL COMMUN H, V50, P391, DOI 10.1136/jech.50.4.391
PIERRE U, 1995, QUAL LIFE RES, V4, P473
REIMER M, 1995, QUAL LIFE RES, V4, P477
RYFF CD, 1989, J PERS SOC PSYCHOL, V57, P1069, DOI 10.1037/0022-3514.57.6.1069
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
Schuling J, 1993, Disabil Rehabil, V15, P19
SEGAL ME, 1994, STROKE, V25, P2391
Sneeuw KCA, 2002, J CLIN EPIDEMIOL, V55, P1130, DOI 10.1016/S0895-4356(02)00479-1
Sneeuw KCA, 1997, J CLIN ONCOL, V15, P1206
Sneeuw KCA, 1997, STROKE, V28, P1541
SPRANGERS MAG, 1992, J CLIN EPIDEMIOL, V45, P743, DOI 10.1016/0895-4356(92)90052-O
Stewart A. L., 1996, QUALITY LIFE PHARMAC, P819
THELANDER M, 1994, YORK DURHAM APHASIA
WARE JE, 1992, MED CARE, V30, P473, DOI 10.1097/00005650-199206000-00002
*WHO, 1993, WHOQOL STUD PROTOCOL
Williams LS, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1362
Wyller TB, 2003, CLIN REHABIL, V17, P410, DOI 10.1191/0269215503cr627oa
Wyller TB, 1997, CLIN REHABIL, V11, P139, DOI 10.1177/026921559701100207
NR 58
TC 41
Z9 41
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 2
BP 111
EP 129
DI 10.1080/02687030444000651
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 906TM
UT WOS:000227666300002
ER
PT J
AU Pettigrew, CM
Murdoch, BE
Kei, J
Ponton, CW
Alku, P
Chenery, HJ
AF Pettigrew, CM
Murdoch, BE
Kei, J
Ponton, CW
Alku, P
Chenery, HJ
TI The mismatch negativity (MMN) response to complex tones and spoken words
in individuals with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID EVENT-RELATED POTENTIALS; LEFT-HEMISPHERE STROKE; HUMAN BRAIN;
AUDITORY-DISCRIMINATION; PHONEME REPRESENTATIONS; COGNITIVE
NEUROSCIENCE; BEHAVIORAL EVIDENCE; SPEECH STIMULI; SOUND DURATION;
MEMORY TRACES
AB Background: The mismatch negativity (MMN) is a fronto-centrally distributed event-related potential (ERP) that is elicited by any discriminable auditory change. It is an ideal neurophysiological tool for measuring the auditory processing skills of individuals with aphasia because it can be elicited even in the absence of attention. Previous MMN studies have shown that acoustic processing of tone or pitch deviance is relatively preserved in aphasia, whereas the basic acoustic processing of speech stimuli can be impaired (e.g., auditory discrimination). However, no MMN study has yet investigated the higher levels of auditory processing, such as language-specific phonological and/or lexical processing, in individuals with aphasia.
Aims: The aim of the current study was to investigate the MMN response of normal and language-disordered subjects to tone stimuli and speech stimuli that incorporate the basic auditory processing (acoustic, acoustic-phonetic) levels of non-speech and speech sound processing, and also the language-specific phonological and lexical levels of spoken word processing. Furthermore, this study aimed to correlate the aphasic MMN data with language performance on a variety of tasks specifically targeted at the different levels of spoken word processing.
Methods M Procedures: Six adults with aphasia (71.7 years +/- 3.0) and six healthy age-, gender-, and education-matched controls (72.2 years +/- 5.4) participated in the study. All subjects were right-handed and native speakers of English. Each subject was presented with complex harmonic tone stimuli, differing in pitch or duration, and consonant-vowel (CV) speech stimuli (non-word /de:/versus real world/deI/). The probability of the deviant for each tone or speech contrast was 10%. The subjects were also presented with the same stimuli in behavioural discrimination tasks, and were administered a language assessment battery to measure their auditory comprehension skills.
Outcomes O Results: The aphasic subjects demonstrated attenuated MMN responses to complex tone duration deviance and to speech stimuli (words and non-words), and their responses to the frequency, duration, and real word deviant stimuli were found to strongly correlate with performance on the auditory comprehension section of the Western Aphasia Battery (WAB). Furthermore, deficits in attentional lexical decision skills demonstrated by the aphasic subjects correlated with a word-related enhancement demonstrated during the automatic MMN paradigm, providing evidence to support the "word advantage effect", thought to reflect the activation of language-specific memory traces in the brain for words.
Conclusions: These results indicate that the MMN may be used as a technique for investigating general and more specific auditory comprehension skills of individuals with aphasia, using speech and/or non-speech stimuli, independent of the individual's attention. The combined use of the objective MMN technique and current clinical language assessments may result in improved rehabilitative management of aphasic individuals.
C1 Univ Queensland, Brisbane, Qld, Australia.
Neuroscan, El Paso, TX USA.
Helsinki Univ Technol, FIN-02150 Espoo, Finland.
RP Pettigrew, CM (reprint author), Natl Univ Ireland Univ Coll Cork, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Cork, Ireland.
EM c.pettigrew@ucc.ie
RI Chenery, Helen/F-5194-2010; Kei, Joseph/A-1284-2010; Alku,
Paavo/E-2400-2012; Murdoch, Bruce/C-1397-2012
CR AALTONEN O, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P139, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1009
Alho K, 1998, NEUROSCI LETT, V258, P9, DOI 10.1016/S0304-3940(98)00836-2
Alku P, 1999, CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V110, P1329, DOI 10.1016/S1388-2457(99)00088-7
Amenedo E, 2000, EUR J NEUROSCI, V12, P2570, DOI 10.1046/j.1460-9568.2000.00114.x
Auther LL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P461
BASSO A, 1977, CORTEX, V13, P85
Cheour M, 1998, NAT NEUROSCI, V1, P351, DOI 10.1038/1561
Connor LT, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2210
Csepe V, 1997, AUDIOL NEURO-OTOL, V2, P354
Csepe V, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V39, P1194, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00052-5
Dalebout S D, 1999, J Am Acad Audiol, V10, P388
DehaeneLambertz G, 1997, NEUROREPORT, V8, P919, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199703030-00021
DERENZI E, 1962, BRAIN, V85, P665, DOI 10.1093/brain/85.4.665
Dobel C, 2001, EXP BRAIN RES, V140, P77, DOI 10.1007/s002210100794
Friederici AD, 1997, CLIN NEUROSCI, V4, P64
Gainotti G., 1975, LINGUISTICS, V13, P15
Gow DW, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P386
Groenen P, 1996, Audiol Neurootol, V1, P112
HILLYARD SA, 2000, COGNITIVE NEUROSCIEN, P25
Hough MS, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P159, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000581
Ilvonen TM, 2001, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V38, P622, DOI 10.1111/1469-8986.3840622
Ilvonen TM, 2003, STROKE, V34, P1746, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000078836.26328.3B
Jasper H. H., 1958, ELECTROENCEPHALOGRAP, V10, P371, DOI DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(58)90053-1
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Kent Raymond D., 1992, ACOUSTIC ANAL SPEECH
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KRAUS N, 1995, EAR HEARING, V16, P19, DOI 10.1097/00003446-199502000-00003
KUTAS M, 2000, COGNITIVE NEUROSCI R, P431
LAINE M, 1997, AFASIAN LIITANNAISHA
Lavikainen J, 1997, NEUROSCI LETT, V222, P37, DOI 10.1016/S0304-3940(97)13336-5
Lesser R., 1993, LINGUISTICS APHASIA
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
MARSLENWILSON WD, 1987, COGNITION, V25, P71, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90005-9
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
MURDOCH BE, 1990, ACQUIRED SPEECH LANG
Murray LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P91, DOI 10.1080/026870399402226
Naatanen R, 2000, AUDIOL NEURO-OTOL, V5, P105, DOI 10.1159/000013874
Naatanen R, 1997, TRENDS COGN SCI, V1, P44, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(97)01013-9
NAATANEN R, 1995, EAR HEARING, V16, P6
Naatanen R, 1996, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V19, P252
NAATANEN R, 1978, ACTA PSYCHOL, V42, P313, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(78)90006-9
Naatanen R, 2001, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V38, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0048577201000208
Naatanen R, 1997, NATURE, V385, P432, DOI 10.1038/385432a0
NAATANEN R, 1993, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V30, P436, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1993.tb02067.x
Naatanen R, 1999, PSYCHOL BULL, V125, P826, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.125.6.826
PEKKONEN E, 1995, EVOKED POTENTIAL, V96, P546, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(95)00148-R
Pettigrew C, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P3, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000463
Pettigrew Catharine M, 2004, J Am Acad Audiol, V15, P47, DOI 10.3766/jaaa.15.1.6
Pettigrew CM, 2004, EAR HEARING, V25, P284, DOI 10.1097/01.AUD.0000130800.88987.03
PICTON TW, 1995, EAR HEARING, V16, P1, DOI 10.1097/00003446-199502000-00001
Ponton C, 2002, CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V113, P407, DOI 10.1016/S1388-2457(01)00733-7
Ponton CW, 1997, EVOKED POTENTIAL, V104, P143, DOI 10.1016/S0168-5597(97)96104-9
Pulvermuller F, 2001, NEUROIMAGE, V14, P607, DOI 10.1006/nimg.2001.0864
Pulvermuller F, 2004, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V41, P584, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.2004.00188.x
RUGG MD, 1995, ELECTROPHYSIOLOGY MI, V25
Schroger E, 1998, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V30, P131, DOI 10.3758/BF03209423
SEMLITSCH HV, 1986, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V23, P695, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1986.tb00696.x
SHARMA A, 1993, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V88, P64, DOI 10.1016/0168-5597(93)90029-O
Shtyrov Y, 2002, NEUROREPORT, V13, P521, DOI 10.1097/00001756-200203250-00033
Shtyrov Y, 2000, NEUROREPORT, V11, P2893, DOI 10.1097/00001756-200009110-00013
Sinkkonen J, 2000, AUDIOL NEURO-OTOL, V5, P235, DOI 10.1159/000013885
Tervaniemi M, 1999, CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V110, P1388, DOI 10.1016/S1388-2457(99)00108-X
Tervaniemi M, 2000, NEUROSCI LETT, V279, P29, DOI 10.1016/S0304-3940(99)00941-6
Thomas C, 1997, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V102, P86, DOI 10.1016/S0921-884X(96)95653-2
Wertz RT, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P499, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249553
Winkler I, 1998, NEUROSCI LETT, V242, P49, DOI 10.1016/S0304-3940(98)00022-6
Winkler I, 1999, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V36, P638, DOI 10.1017/S0048577299981908
Wunderlich JL, 2001, J ACOUST SOC AM, V109, P1526, DOI 10.1121/1.1349184
NR 68
TC 14
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 2
BP 131
EP 163
DI 10.1080/02687030444000642
PG 33
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 906TM
UT WOS:000227666300003
ER
PT J
AU John, A
Enderby, P
Hughes, A
AF John, A
Enderby, P
Hughes, A
TI Benchmarking outcomes in dysphasia using the therapy outcome measure
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE TREATMENT; SPEECH-THERAPY; STROKE; APHASIA; REHABILITATION;
POPULATION; DEPRESSION; MANAGEMENT; RECOVERY
AB Background: Quality improvement in health care seeks to drive equitable, effective, and appropriate services. Benchmarking can be used as a tool for acquiring clinical information to inform and monitor change in order to identify commonalities and significant differences.
Aims: This study reports on a benchmarking study of eight speech and language therapy services providing interventions for persons with dysphasia, addressing three questions related to equity of access to treatment; changes associated with treatment; and profiles on discharge.
Methods M Procedures: The Therapy Outcome Measure (TOM) (Enderby M John, 1997) was used as the indicator. The SLTs were trained and inter-rater reliability checked. Data were collected on consecutively referred cases on entry to treatment and on discharge.
Outcome O Results: No difference was found in the profiles of patients referred to the different services on entry to treatment. While a significant difference was found between the services in the number of cases changing in impairment and disability/activity, the final outcomes reported were similar on discharge on impairment, disability/activity, and participation, but showed significant statistical difference on well-being. The number of contacts and duration of treatment varied across the services, even on cases with mild impairment.
Conclusions: The results indicated equity of access, a difference in the effects of treatment on the different dimensions, and a significant difference on the dimension of well-being at discharge. Each service was able to compare their outcomes with those of the other services, observed the variations, and exchange information with those services in order to the identify reasons for the results.
C1 Univ Sheffield, No Gen Hosp, Inst Gen Practice & Primary Care, Sheffield S5 7AU, S Yorkshire, England.
Frenchay Hosp, Bristol BS16 1LE, Avon, England.
RP John, A (reprint author), Univ Sheffield, No Gen Hosp, Inst Gen Practice & Primary Care, Herries Rd, Sheffield S5 7AU, S Yorkshire, England.
EM A.K.John@sheffield.ac.uk
CR ANDERSON CS, 1995, STROKE, V26, P843
BASSO A, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P190
BENTON P, 2000, BRIDGING GAP
BULLIVANT J, 1997, 14 CRON PUBL LTD
Bullivant J R, 1996, Int J Health Care Qual Assur, V9, P9, DOI 10.1108/09526869610112707
Clark MS, 1998, CLIN REHABIL, V12, P73, DOI 10.1191/026921598669567216
Code C., 1992, CODE MULLER PROTOCOL
CODLING S, 1996, BEST PRACTICE BENCHM
Dewan NA, 2000, J BEHAV HEALTH SER R, V27, P431, DOI 10.1007/BF02287824
Ellis J, 1995, Nurs Stand, V9, P25
Ellis J, 2000, J ADV NURS, V32, P215, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2648.2000.01429.x
Emerson J, 1995, DOES SPEECH LANGUAGE
ENDERBY P, 1999, THERAPY OUTCOME MEAS
Enderby P, 2002, CLIN REHABIL, V16, P604, DOI 10.1191/0269215502cr505oa
Enderby P, 1992, Health Trends, V24, P61
Enderby P, 1997, THERAPY OUTCOME MEAS
FRATTALI CM, 1998, MEASUREING OUTCOMES
FRATTALI CM, 1999, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V1, P47
FRNAKLIN R, 1995, WHEN WILL PENNY DROP, P1
Greene J G, 1982, Age Ageing, V11, P121, DOI 10.1093/ageing/11.2.121
GREENER J, 2000, COCHRANE LIB, V4, P1
HAMMERTON J, 2004, THESIS U SHEFFIELD U
Higgins I, 1997, Aust Health Rev, V20, P60
HUNT J, 1999, SPEECH LANGUAGE THER, V4
JOHN A, 2002, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V4, P79, DOI 10.1080/14417040210001669301
JOHN A, 2001, THESIS U SHEFFIELD U
Johnson JN, 1998, BRIT MED J, V316, P1847
KEENAN J, 1973, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P257
LINCOLN NB, 1984, LANCET, V1, P1197
MACDONALD J, 1998, UNDERSTANDING BENCHM
Marshall EG, 1998, BRIT MED J, V316, P1701
MARSHALL M, 2004, THESIS SHEFFIELD U U
MARSHALL R, 1972, FOLIA PHONIATRIC, V34, P305
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P582, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1060
Sanderson C, 1998, BRIT MED J, V316, P1705
SARNO MT, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P607
*SECR STAT HLTH, 1998, NEW NHS MOD DEP
Shaw L J, 2000, Top Health Inf Manage, V20, P44
Sheeran P., 1999, VASES VISUAL ANALOGU
SHEWAN CM, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P272, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90068-3
Smollan T, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P56
SWAGE T, 2000, CLIN GOV HEALTHCARE
WERTZ RT, 1986, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V43, P653
World Health Organization, 2002, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
World Health Organization, 1980, INT CLASS IMP DIS HA
Wyller TB, 1997, CLIN REHABIL, V11, P139, DOI 10.1177/026921559701100207
Yaruss JS, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P62
NR 47
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 2
BP 165
EP 178
DI 10.1080/026870304400679
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 906TM
UT WOS:000227666300004
ER
PT J
AU McNeil, MR
Hageman, CF
Matthews, CT
AF McNeil, MR
Hageman, CF
Matthews, CT
TI Auditory processing deficits in aphasia evidenced on the Revised Token
Test: Incidence and prediction of across subtest and across item within
subtest patterns
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
Univ No Iowa, Cedar Falls, IA 50614 USA.
RP McNeil, MR (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
EM mcneil@pitt.edu
CR BROOKSHIRE RB, 1972, ANN CONV AM SPEECH H
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1974, ACTA SYMBOLICA, V1, P1
DISIMONI FG, 1979, UNPUB TUNING FADING
HAGEMAN CF, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V12, P302
HAGEMAN CF, 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V16, P227
HAGEMAN CF, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V12, P230
HAGEMAN CF, 1989, J FLUENCY DISORD, V14, P109, DOI 10.1016/0094-730X(89)90004-1
HAGEMAN CF, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V13, P177
HAGEMAN CF, 1980, THESIS U COLORADO CO
LAPOINTE LL, 1974, AC APH WARR WV
McNeil M. R, 1982, SPEECH LANGUAGE HEAR, VIII, P692
McNeil M. R., 1983, TOP LANG DISORD, V3, P1
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
MCNEIL MR, 1983, TOP LANG DISORD, V3, P4
MCNEIL MR, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V12, P220
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
NOLL JD, 1978, J COMMUN DISORD, V11, P543, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(78)90029-1
PORCH BE, 1970, PICA TALK, V2, P2
Schuell H, 1964, APHASIA ADULTS
SCHUELL H, 1974, APHASIA THEORY THERA
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
NR 21
TC 1
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2005
VL 19
IS 2
BP 179
EP 198
DI 10.1080/02687030444000426
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 906TM
UT WOS:000227666300005
ER
PT J
AU Havik, E
Bastiaanse, R
AF Havik, E
Bastiaanse, R
TI Omission of definite and indefinite articles in the spontaneous speech
of agrammatic speakers with Broca's aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Background: Cross-linguistic investigation of agrammatic speech in speakers of different languages allows us to tests theoretical accounts of the nature of agrammatism. A significant feature of the speech of many agrammatic speakers is a problem with article production. Mansson and Ahlsen (2001) report that Swedish agrammatic speakers have more problems with the indefinite than with the definite article. In Swedish, the indefinite article is a free morpheme, whereas the definite article is a suffix to the noun. However, in other languages all articles are free morphemes. We ask whether the indefinite article is more difficult.
Aims: The aim of the present study is to examine whether the discrepancy between the production of the definite and indefinite article is because it is indefinite or because it is a free morpheme. Our objective is to examine whether a discrepancy in definite and indefinite article production is also found in Dutch agrammatic speakers, where all articles are freestanding morphemes.
Methods & Procedures: The spontaneous speech of eight Dutch agrammatic speakers with Broca's aphasia was analysed with respect to the production of definite and indefinite articles.
Outcomes & Results: The Dutch agrammatic speakers had problems with the production of articles. However, no significant difference was found between definite and indefinite articles, although a trend was observed towards definite articles being more impaired than indefinite articles in a language where all articles are free morphemes.
Conclusions: The finding of Mansson and Ahlsen (2001) that Swedish agrammatic speakers have particular problems with the indefinite article is probably due to the fact that the definite article is a bound morpheme in Swedish, which is less prone to error than the freestanding indefinite article. Definiteness per se does not appear play a role in the problematic production of articles in agrammatic speakers. Theoretical implications of this finding are discussed.
C1 Univ Groningen, Dept Linguist, NL-9700 AS Groningen, Netherlands.
Univ Nijmegen, Nijmegen, Netherlands.
RP Bastiaanse, R (reprint author), Univ Groningen, Dept Linguist, POB 716, NL-9700 AS Groningen, Netherlands.
EM y.r.m.bastiaanse@let.rug.nl
CR Ahlsen E, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P543, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248436
AHLSEN E, 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C
Bastiaanse R, 2003, CORTEX, V39, P405, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70256-9
DEROO E, 1999, THESIS LEIDEN U NETH
de Roo E, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P1057, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000382
Goodglass H., 1968, DEV APPL PSYCHOLINGU
GRAETZ P, 1991, AKENSE AFASIETEST
JONKERS R, 1998, VERBS APHASIA
Mansson AC, 2001, J NEUROLINGUIST, V14, P365, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00024-0
Ruigendijk E, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000310
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SANTELMANN L, 1998, P ANN BOST U C CHILD, V22, P51
NR 12
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 12
BP 1093
EP 1102
DI 10.1080/02687030444000543
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 882ZA
UT WOS:000225977700002
ER
PT J
AU Salis, C
Edwards, S
AF Salis, C
Edwards, S
TI Adaptation theory and non-fluent aphasia in English
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID GRAMMATICAL MORPHOLOGY; AGRAMMATIC PRODUCTION; BROCAS APHASIA;
PREPOSITIONS; LANGUAGE; SPEECH; TENSE; SYMPTOMS
AB Baekground: Adaptation theory (Kolk & Heeschen, 1996) postulates that the fragmented output that is typical of non-fluent aphasia need not directly reflect an underlying impairment. According to the theory it may be a strategy, referred to as ellipsis, that the speaker adopts to avoid using an impaired grammatical system. It has been noted that variation in task results in different degrees of ellipsis. Evidence in support of the theory stems from investigations in Dutch and German, while the only English study yielded controversial results although the methodological changes that were adopted in that study concealed important linguistic differences.
Aims: Our aim was to investigate English speaking non-fluent aphasic speakers using the same experimental procedures of the original Dutch and German studies. The two research questions that guided this investigation were as follows: (1) Do English non-fluent aphasic speakers overuse ellipsis? (2) What is the effect of task variation in the grammatical output of English non-fluent aphasic and neurologically intact speakers?
Methods & Procedures: Spontaneous language samples and recordings of speech used in a picture description task were analysed. Samples were collected from four non-fluent aphasic speakers who exhibited agrammatic speech characteristics and from three control subjects. Outcomes & Results: Task variation revealed considerable variation in grammatical profiles of both the aphasic and the control groups. The trends we observed were very similar to those reported for the Dutch and German data.
Conclusions: The results lend some support to the hypothesis that the overuse of elliptical speech may a strategic choice but we also consider some of the grammatical errors of the non-fluent aphasic speakers within the framework of government and binding.
C1 Univ Reading, Sch Linguist & Appl Language Studies, Reading RG6 6AA, Berks, England.
Univ Limerick, Limerick, Ireland.
RP Edwards, S (reprint author), Univ Reading, Sch Linguist & Appl Language Studies, Reading RG6 6AA, Berks, England.
EM s.i.Edwards@reading.ac.uk
CR Ahlsen E, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P543, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248436
Arabatzi M, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P314, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2591
Beeke S, 2003, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V17, P109, DOI 10.1080/0269920031000061786
de Roo E, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V86, P99, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00538-2
de Roo E, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P1057, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000382
Druks J, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P11, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00172-X
EDWARDS S, 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER
EDWARDS S, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P217, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249507
Ellis A. W., 1996, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
FRIEDERICI AD, 1982, CORTEX, V18, P525
Friedmann N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1795
Froud K, 2001, LINGUA, V111, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0024-3841(00)00026-7
GRODZINSKY Y, 1984, COGNITION, V16, P99, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(84)90001-5
GRODZINSKY Y, 1988, LANG SPEECH, V31, P115
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
HAARMANN HJ, 1992, CORTEX, V28, P97
HAEGEMAN L, 1994, INTRO GOVT BINDING
HAGIWARA H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1041
Hesketh A, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P49, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248398
HOFSTEDE BTM, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P278, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1017
Kolk H., 1998, HDB NEUROLINGUISTICS
Kolk H, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P81, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248399
KOLK H, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P221, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249075
KOLK H, 1987, NATURAL LANGUAGE GEN
KOLK H, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P89, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409381
MARTIN RC, 1989, COGNITION, V32, P157, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(89)90002-4
Menn L., 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C
Ouhalla Jamal, 1993, LINGUISTISCHE BERICH, V143, P3
Ruigendijk E, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000310
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
TESAK J, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P463, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1025
Thompson CK, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P175, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0009
NR 32
TC 3
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 12
BP 1103
EP 1120
DI 10.1080/02687030444000552
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 882ZA
UT WOS:000225977700003
ER
PT J
AU Edmonds, LA
Marquardt, TP
AF Edmonds, LA
Marquardt, TP
TI Syllable use in apraxia of speech: Preliminary findings
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PERCEPTUAL CHARACTERISTICS; PATTERNS; SPEAKERS; LENGTH; VOWEL
AB Background: Apraxia of speech (AOS) is an acquired sensorimotor disorder characterised by an impairment in the ability to program purposeful movements for speech in the absence of muscle weakness or paralysis. Due to motor programming difficulties, individuals with AOS make more errors as the complexity of a phoneme, syllable, word, or phrase increases. They also tend to produce short words and exhibit "syllabic speech", the production of syllables lacking prosody with intersyllabic pauses. While the syllable is a fundamental unit of speech in AOS, little is known about the syllable shapes used by individuals with AOS in discourse.
Aims: The aim of this study was to determine if individuals with AOS produce shorter words with simpler syllable structure in spontaneous speech compared to neurologically normal individuals.
Methods & Procedures: Five speakers with AOS and Broca's aphasia and five gender- and age-matched neurologically normal individuals participated in the study. One hundred conversational turns related to a topic chosen by the participant and conversational partner were transcribed and analysed to determine the frequency of occurrence of (1) monosyllabic, disyllabic, and polysyllabic words, (2) syllable shapes (V, CV, VC, CVC, complex), and (3) syllabic alterations. The frequency of content and function words was also analysed for 50 conversational turns for both groups.
Outcomes & Results: The mean number of syllables per word was significantly greater for the normal group than for the group with AOS (p<.05). Compared to the normal participants, the participants with AOS used a significantly higher proportion of V and CV forms (p<.05) and a significantly lower proportion of CVC and complex syllables (p<.05). Participants with AOS used the same percentage of content words for all syllable shapes except for CVC words, where they used a significantly lower percentage than the normal group (p<.05).
Conclusions: Individuals with AOS use shorter words than neurologically normal individuals. Among monosyllabic words, they use more simple (open) syllable shapes and fewer complex (closed) syllable shapes in spontaneous speech. Except for CVC words, they use the same percentage of content words as neurologically normal individuals in order to convey meaning.
C1 Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, CCC SLP, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
RP Edmonds, LA (reprint author), Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, CCC SLP, Jones Commun Bldg,CMA 2-200,Mail Code A1100, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
EM lisaedmonds@mail.utexas.edu
CR Ballard KJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P969
TROST JE, 1974, BRAIN LANG, V1, P63, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(74)90026-1
CANTER GJ, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P204, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90131-2
CHATTERJEE A, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P133
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
Dronkers NF, 1996, NATURE, V384, P159, DOI 10.1038/384159a0
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DUNLOP JM, 1977, CORTEX, V13, P17
French NR, 1930, BELL SYST TECH J, V9, P290
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Haley KL, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2494
ITOH M, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P66, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90110-8
JOHNS DF, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P556
KELLER E, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH PHYSL, P221
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
KENT RD, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V15, P259, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90060-8
Liss JM, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P342, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1907
Marquardt T., 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH PHYSL, P91
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MCNEIL MR, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P135, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90106-Q
Meuse S, 1998, NEUROMOTOR SPEECH DISORDERS, P309
Nespoulous J L, 1984, Adv Neurol, V42, P203
ODELL K, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P67
ODELL K, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P345
PIERCE R, 1991, TREATING DISORDERED, P185
Rogers MA, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P258
ROSENBEK JC, 1976, VET ADM WORKSH SPEEC
SHEWAN CM, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P71, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90039-5
Square P., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P847
SQUARE P, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P
Strand EA, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P1018
van der Merwe A, 1997, COMSIG '97 - PROCEEDINGS OF THE 1997 SOUTH AFRICAN SYMPOSIUM ON COMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING, P1
WERTZ RT, 1984, APRAXIS SPEECH ADULT
ZEIGLER W, 2001, SPEECH MOTOR CONTROL, P343
NR 35
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 12
BP 1121
EP 1134
DI 10.1080/02687030444000561
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 882ZA
UT WOS:000225977700004
ER
PT J
AU Bauer, A
Kulke, F
AF Bauer, A
Kulke, F
TI Language exercises for dinner: Aspects of aphasia management in family
settings
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COMMUNICATION STRATEGIES; CONVERSATION ANALYSIS; QUALITATIVE METHODS;
REPAIR; REPETITION; DISCOURSE; SEQUENCES; FEEDBACK; SPEECH; TALK
AB Background: The introduction of didactic activities into the aphasic family's everyday interaction is a known aspect of the management of aphasia, and it is also known to be problematic, since didactic activities tend to entail tension and interactive stress. Therefore many therapists may discourage aphasic families from language exercising without professional guidance. However, systematic analyses of comprehensive sets of data documenting language exercises in aphasic families have previously not been available.
Aims: This study aims at the analysis of one instance of interactively realised aphasia management, thus broadening the empirical basis of a social approach to aphasia therapy and counselling. It presents a detailed insight into structural and social aspects of language exercises within informal contexts: How are these activities organised? Why do some of them entail tension while others do not? Is "improvement of aphasia" the only function they strive to fulfil?
Methods & Procedures: A corpus of 21 hours of video recordings of 10 aphasic families' informal conversations is analysed. The procedure of identifying, describing, and analysing sequences of exercising follows the principles of the qualitative paradigm of Conversation Analysis.
Outcomes & Results: In three of the ten families exercising is a relevant activity. In these cases, the exercises draw on an interactive pattern known from institutional teaching and therapy. Dealing exclusively with single words (naming and repeating), the Request-Response-Evaluation pattern is imported and adapted to the conditions of informal talk. The face-threatening potential of exercising in informal contexts appears to be closely linked to the way the adaptation of this format is actually realised. Here the determining structural factors are the positioning of the sequence in the ongoing talk, and the initiation and contextualisation techniques employed. In our corpus, type and severity of aphasia do not emerge as factors predicting either frequencies or formal aspects of language exercises.
Conclusions: Families engaging in language-exercising sequences, and those who do not, appear to have different orientations in adapting to aphasia: Exercising can express the family's orientation towards the restoration of linguistic competence as a joint project. Confined to private situations, collaboratively agreed upon and accomplished, exercises may lose their face-threatening potential. Language exercises can also serve to circumvent communicative distress, employing a calculable and precast pattern to maintain interaction and ensure the aphasic partner's participation in family activities. Aphasic family counselling should take into account the family's specific orientations, the face-threatening potential of exercising, and the surplus value of exercising as an interactive practice of adaptation.
C1 Univ Freiburg, D-79085 Freiburg, Germany.
Univ Erfurt, Erfurt, Germany.
RP Bauer, A (reprint author), Univ Freiburg, D-79085 Freiburg, Germany.
EM angelika.bauer@germanistik.uni-freiburg.de
CR BECKERMROTZEK M, 2001, UNTERRICHTSKOMMUNKIK
BIRKNER K, 1991, LINGUISTISCHE ARBEIT, V26, P1
Booth S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P283
CHUN AE, 1982, TESOL QUART, V16, P537, DOI 10.2307/3586471
Couper-Kuhlen E., 1992, CONTEXTUALIZATION LA, P337
Damico JS, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P83
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P651
Damico JS, 2003, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V12, P131, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2003/060)
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P667
DAUSENDSCHONGAY U, 1995, UNTERSUCHUNGEN KOMMU, P85
DAY RR, 1984, LANG LEARN, V34, P19, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-1770.1984.tb01002.x
Drew P., 1995, SOCIAL INTELLIGENCE, P111, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511621710.008
FAERCH C, 1984, LANG LEARN, V34, P45
FERGUSON A, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P143, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248647
Glenn Phillip, 2003, LAUGHTER INTERACTION
Goffman E, 1955, PSYCHIATR, V18, P213
Goffman E, 1963, STIGMA NOTES MANAGEM
Goffman Erving, 1979, SEMIOTICA, V25, P1, DOI DOI 10.1515/SEMI.1979
Goodwin C., 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
GOODWIN MH, 1986, SEMIOTICA, V62, P51
GOODWIN MH, 1992, CONTEXTUALIZATION LA, P77
HALLAMA R, 2003, THESIS A LUDWIGS U F
Heeschen C., 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P231
Hesketh A., 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13
Hutchby I., 1998, CONVERSATION ANAL PR
Jefferson Gail, 1979, EVERYDAY LANGUAGE ST, P79
Kasper G., 1997, COMMUNICATION STRATE
KEPPLER A, 1989, SOZ WELT, V4, P539
Laakso M, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P345
Laakso M., 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P163
Leiwo M, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P203
LETTS C, 1989, FUNCTIONAL EVALUATIO, P125
LEVINSON SC, 1979, LINGUISTICS, V17, P365, DOI 10.1515/ling.1979.17.5-6.365
Lindsay J, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P305
Luckmann T., 1991, ASYMMETRIES DIALOGUE, P143
Madden ML, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1199, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000437
Mehan H., 1979, LEARNING LESSONS SOC
MILROY L, 1992, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V6, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699209208985517
Oelschlaeger M. L., 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P211
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P971, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249464
Perkins L., 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P147
PERKINS L, 1995, INT J PSYCHOLINGUIST, V11, P167
SCHEGLOFF EA, 1977, LANGUAGE, V53, P361, DOI 10.2307/413107
Schegloff EA, 2000, APPL LINGUIST, V21, P205, DOI 10.1093/applin/21.2.205
Schegloff Emanuel A, 2003, CONVERSATION BRAIN D, P21
Schegloff EA, 1997, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V23, P499
SELTING M, 1990, PRAGMATICS STYLE, P106
Selting M., 1998, LINGUISTISCHE BERICH, V173, P91
SILVAST M, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248540
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P807
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 1998, CONSTRUCTING INCOMPE, P313
Simms NJ, 2001, EUR FED CORR PUBL, P246
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V8, P218
Snow C., 2002, TALKING ADULTS CONTR
Snow Catherine E., 1983, CHILDRENS LANGUAGE, V4, P29
TARONE E, 1980, LANG LEARN, V30, P417, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-1770.1980.tb00326.x
TOMASELLO M, 1990, J CHILD LANG, V17, P115
Wilkinson R, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P144
NR 59
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 12
BP 1135
EP 1160
DI 10.1080/02687030444000570
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 882ZA
UT WOS:000225977700005
ER
PT J
AU Genereux, S
Julien, M
Larfeuil, C
Lavoie, W
Soucy, O
Le Dorze, G
AF Genereux, S
Julien, M
Larfeuil, C
Lavoie, W
Soucy, O
Le Dorze, G
TI Using communication plans to facilitate interactions with
communication-impaired persons residing in long-term care institutions
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; NURSING-HOME; RESIDENTS; CAREGIVERS
AB Background: A large proportion of residents in long-term care institutions present severe and chronic communication disorders that may not respond well to therapy focused on improving language and speech. Moreover, given the ecological relevance of considering communication in situations of interaction, speech-language intervention could aim at facilitating interactions with those residents by informing caregivers about the residents' specific characteristics and communication disorders.
Aims: The aims of the present research were (1) to elaborate a Communication Plan that contained information about a resident's specific characteristics and communication disorder, and (2) to evaluate the effects of Communication Plans by considering the point of view of the resident's caregivers.
Methods & Procedures: In three long-term care institutions, 10 residents (between the ages of 63 and 95 years) who had severe aphasia or communication impairment, and 39 professional and non-professional caregivers attending to these residents, were recruited. An individual Communication Plan for each resident was constructed employing the results of speech-language and communication evaluations. Before and after these Communication Plans were used, participant caregivers completed a questionnaire designed to measure communication and interactions with residents.
Outcomes & Results: A qualitative and quantitative analysis of the results indicated that after using Communication Plans, professional and non-professional caregivers felt more comfortable in communicating with residents, were more knowledgeable about communication characteristics of a given resident, and employed more facilitating strategies in communicating with residents. They perceived Communication Plans as being clear, complete, easy to use, and adapted to their needs with communication-impaired residents.
Conclusions: The use of Communication Plans is an appropriate speech-language pathology tool, which may enable caregivers to adjust their manner of communicating to the specific needs of a given person residing in a long-term care unit. It is possible that Communication Plans helped caregivers become more skilled communicators with communication-impaired persons.
C1 Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
Inst Univ Geriatr Montreal, Montreal, PQ, Canada.
Ctr Hosp & Soins Longue Duree Jacques Viger, Montreal, PQ, Canada.
RP Genereux, S (reprint author), Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, CP 6128,Succursale Ctr Ville, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
EM Guylaine.le.dorze@umontreal.ca
RI Le Dorze, Guylaine/A-1790-2014
CR *ASHA COMM COMM PR, 1988, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE, V30, P80
CLARK LW, 1995, TOP LANG DISORD, V15, P47
Friedemann ML, 1997, RES NURS HEALTH, V20, P527
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
KAAKINEN J, 1995, TOP LANG DISORD, V15, P36
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
LEDORZE G, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P241
Le Dorze G, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P17
LUBINSKI R, 1995, TOP LANG DISORD, V15, P1
Mueller P B, 1981, ASHA, V23, P627
Nespoulous J, 1992, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL T
NUSSBAUM JF, 1993, J AGING STUD, V7, P237, DOI 10.1016/0890-4065(93)90013-A
NUSSBAUM JF, 1991, AGEING SOC, V11, P149, DOI 10.1017/S0144686X00003986
Orange JB, 2000, CLIN GERIATR MED, V16, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0749-0690(05)70015-X
PORCH BE, 1969, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Siegel S., 1988, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
*STAT CAN, 2000, 11 STAT CAN
WILDER CN, 1984, AGING COMMUNICATION, P41
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
NR 19
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 12
BP 1161
EP 1175
DI 10.1080/02687030444000507
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 882ZA
UT WOS:000225977700006
ER
PT J
AU Fox, LE
Poulsen, SB
Bawden, KC
Packard, D
AF Fox, LE
Poulsen, SB
Bawden, KC
Packard, D
TI Critical elements and outcomes of a residential family-based
intervention for aphasia caregivers
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PARTNERS; RELATIVES; ADULTS; NEEDS; LIFE
AB Background: Families living with aphasia often have unmet needs despite intervention provided in hospital and rehabilitation environments (Denman, 1998; Michallet, Le Dorze, & Tetreault, 2001). Michallet and colleagues found that families living with aphasia need information and support throughout the care continuum. If needs are unmet during the early stages of rehabilitation they persist, and as families deal with the long term sequelae of aphasia, new needs emerge in relation to communication and role changes. Few recent interventions have addressed the complex needs experienced by caregivers of people with aphasia (e.g., Hinckley Packard, 2001; Hinckley, Packard, Bardach, 1995; Pound, Parr, & Duchan, 2001).
Aims: This research aimed to identify the critical elements and outcomes of a residential intervention for families living with aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: Narrative data were collected from 19 spouses, siblings, and adult children of persons with aphasia who attended a residential intervention over 3 years. Data collected from participants during and following the intervention were triangulated with field notes recorded by 34 students trained in field observation techniques. All narrative data were transcribed, coded, and analysed using procedures described by Luborsky (1994).
Outcomes & Results: Data analysis revealed four critical intervention elements: (a) an emotionally and physically safe environment; (b) respite from the demands of caregiving; (c) peer teaming; and (d) participation of families with different amounts of time post aphasia onset. Outcomes from the perspective of the participants included: (a) a renewed sense of hope; (b) improved ability to access their social support resources; (c) improved ability of caregivers to monitor their well-being; (d) greater acceptance of the family's altered state; and (e) emergence of a new social support network. Analysis of thematic relationships showed a web of interconnections between all critical elements and outcomes of the intervention. A central intervention element was learning from peers with different levels of caregiving experience.
Conclusions: Some aspects of caregiver learning appear to depend on interventions that are structured to maximise reflective learning from peers. Professionals may underestimate the value of such learning in intervention for caregivers of persons with aphasia.
C1 Portland State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Portland, OR 97207 USA.
RP Fox, LE (reprint author), Portland State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, POB 751, Portland, OR 97207 USA.
EM foxl@ohsu.edu
CR BORENSTEIN P, 1987, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V19, P51
Code C, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V13, P379, DOI 10.1080/09602010244000255
Denman A, 1998, DISABIL REHABIL, V20, P411
Denzin N, 1994, HDB QUALITATIVE RES
Emerson R. M., 1995, WRITING ETHNOGRAPHIC
EWING SEA, 1999, GROUP TREATMENT NEUR, P9
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P513, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249019
Hinckley J. J., 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P53
Hinckley JJ, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P241, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(01)00049-1
HOLLAND AL, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P581, DOI 10.1080/02687039308248634
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
Kagan A, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00062-X
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kubler-Ross E., 1970, DEATH DYING
LECOMPTE MD, 1982, REV EDUC RES, V52, P31, DOI 10.3102/00346543052001031
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LOFLAND J, 1997, ANAL SOCIAL SETTINGS
Luborsky M., 1994, QUALITATIVE METHODS, P189
Michallet B, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000087
MOGAN DL, 1998, FOCUS GROUP KIT, V1
Montgomery-West P, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P1
Parr S, 2001, FOLIA PHONIATR LOGO, V53, P266, DOI 10.1159/000052681
Pound C, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P477, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000159
Sarno MT, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P665, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249414
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
Servaes P, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P889
Strauss A., 1990, BASICS QUALITATIVE R
Tanner D. C., 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P79, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248889
Turnbull A. P., 1991, HEAD INJURY FAMILY M, P37
NR 29
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 12
BP 1177
EP 1199
DI 10.1080/02687030444000525
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 882ZA
UT WOS:000225977700007
ER
PT J
AU Aichert, I
Ziegler, W
AF Aichert, I
Ziegler, W
TI Segmental and metrical encoding in aphasia: Two case reports
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WORD PRODUCTION; LEXICAL STRESS; SELECTIVE IMPAIRMENT; ASSIGNMENT;
RETRIEVAL; PATIENT; ACCESS; SPEECH
AB Background: Phonological impairment in aphasic patients most often affects the segmental structure of words, while metrical structure, i.e., syllable number and stress position, is usually preserved. There is an ongoing discussion on the question of where segmental and metrical errors may occur during the process of word form encoding. In the context of this discussion, a theoretically important aspect is how aphasic phonological impairment interacts with syllabification.
Aims: Two aphasic patients with phonological output impairments arc described to demonstrate that (1) disturbances of metrical and segmental structure can be dissociated and (2) aphasic phonological impairment may or may not interfere with syllabification.
Methods and Procedures: Single case study of word repetition.
Outcomes and Results: Patient WK had an impairment of metrical encoding with largely preserved segmental encoding processes. More specifically, he had a strong tendency to produce the unmarked metrical pattern of German, i.e., two-syllabic words stressed on the first syllable (trochaic pattern). JS showed a reverse pattern with preserved metrical structure but severely affected segmental encoding. While the pathomechanism underlying WK's impairment operated on unsyllabified representations, JS's error pattern was sensitive to syllable structure.
Conclusions: (1) At a lexical stage, metrical and segmental retrieval are two parallel processes which can be impaired independently. (2) Postlexically, these two types of information are combined in the syllabification process. The two cases show that phonological errors may arise before syllabification (i.e., at the lexical stage of word-form encoding) or at a stage after phonological words have been syllabified.
C1 City Hosp Bogenhausen, Munich, Germany.
RP Aichert, I (reprint author), EKN Clin Neuropsychol Res Grp, Dachauer Str 164, D-80992 Munich, Germany.
EM ingrid.aichert@aextern.lrz-muenchen.de
CR Aichert I, 2004, BRAIN LANG, V88, P148, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00296-7
AICHERT I, 2001, SPEECH MOTOR CONTROL, P167
BAAYEN RH, 1993, PHIL LING DAT CONS U
BLACK M, 1986, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V3, P369, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252028
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
BUTTERWORTH B, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P133, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90046-4
Cappa SF, 1997, COGNITION, V65, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00024-3
De Bleser R., 2004, LEMO LEXIKON MODELL
DELL GS, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P124, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90070-8
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Fary C, 1997, LINGUISTISCHE BERICH, V172, P461
Fery C, 1998, J COMP GER LINGUIST, V2, P101, DOI 10.1023/A:1009883701003
Goldrick M, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P367
Howard D, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P198, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000546
HUBER W, 1983, AACHENER APASIE TEST
Laganaro M, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V81, P601, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2550
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MARSHALL JC, 1973, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V2, P175, DOI 10.1007/BF01067101
MICELI G, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P273, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253465
Nickels L, 1999, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V13, P269
NICKELS L, 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO, P115
Roelofs A, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P922, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.4.922
Roelofs A., 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO, P71
Shallice T, 2000, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V17, P517, DOI 10.1080/02643290050110638
SHATTUCKHUFNAGEL S, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P213, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90044-I
Wilshire CE, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1059
NR 26
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 12
BP 1201
EP 1211
DI 10.1080/02687030444000516
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 882ZA
UT WOS:000225977700008
ER
PT J
AU Katz, RC
LaPointe, LL
Markel, NN
AF Katz, RC
LaPointe, LL
Markel, NN
TI Coverbal behavior and aphasic speakers
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 Los Angeles Vet Adm Outpatient Clin, Los Angeles, CA USA.
Gainesville Vet Adm Hosp, Gainesville, FL USA.
Univ Florida, Gainesville, FL 32611 USA.
RP Katz, RC (reprint author), Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Phoenix, AZ 85012 USA.
CR CHERRY C, 1968, HUMAN COMMUNICATION
Chester S L, 1974, Rehabil Lit, V35, P231
DUNCAN S, 1972, J PERS SOC PSYCHOL, V23, P283, DOI 10.1037/h0033031
Egolf D B, 1973, ASHA, V15, P511
EGOLF DB, 1975, 50 AM SPEECH HEAR AS
HOLLAND AL, 1975, 50 AM SPEECH HEAR AS
LAPOINTE LL, 1971, 13 FLOR LANG SPEECH
LAPOINTE LL, 1974, ASSESSING PATTERNS A
MARKEL N, 1976, ORG BEHAV FACE TO FA, P189
MARKEL NN, 1969, PSYCHOLINGUISTICS IN
MORRISON BF, 1968, MULTIVARIATE STAT ME
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V1
PORCH BE, 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V2
SCHEGLOF.EA, 1968, AM ANTHROPOL, V70, P1075, DOI 10.1525/aa.1968.70.6.02a00030
SKELLY M, 1973, HDB AM SIGNS
Sullivan H., 1953, INTERPERSONAL THEORY
THORNDIKE EL, 1963, TEACHERS WORD BOOK 3
NR 17
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 12
BP 1213
EP 1220
DI 10.1080/02687030444000345
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 882ZA
UT WOS:000225977700009
ER
PT J
AU Katz, RC
LaPointe, LL
Markel, NN
Silkes, JP
AF Katz, RC
LaPointe, LL
Markel, NN
Silkes, JP
TI Coverbal behavior and aphasic speakers: Revisited
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE; SPEECH; COMMUNICATION; LAUGHTER; SPEAKING; ADULTS; SKILLS
C1 Univ Washington, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Seattle, WA 98105 USA.
Arizona State Univ, Tempe, AZ USA.
Dept Vet Affairs, Phoenix, AZ USA.
Florida State Univ, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
Univ Florida, Gainesville, FL USA.
RP Silkes, JP (reprint author), Univ Washington, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 1417 NE 42nd St, Seattle, WA 98105 USA.
EM jsiIkes@u.washington.edu
CR ATEN JL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P93
Avent JR, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P207, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00014-1
BUCK R, 1980, CORTEX, V16, P351
Certner-Smith M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P383
Davis G., 1981, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P169
Dronkers NF, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P179, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00012-8
DUNCAN S, 1972, J PERS SOC PSYCHOL, V23, P283, DOI 10.1037/h0033031
Erickson RJ, 1996, BRAIN COGNITION, V30, P244, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1996.0016
FEYEREISEN P, 1983, INT J PSYCHOL, V18, P545, DOI 10.1080/00207598308247500
HADAR U, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P339, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90160-3
Hadar U, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P107, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1890
HADAR U, 1984, LANG SPEECH, V27, P333
HERRMANN M, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P339, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90022-9
Holland Audrey L., 1998, Seminars in Speech and Language, V19, P249, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064048
Holland AL, 2004, MIT ENCY COMMUNICATI, P283
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
Kagan A., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P199
KATZ RC, 1978, 8 CLIN APH C P MINN, P164
Katz RC, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P1213, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000345
KENDON A, 1970, STUDIES DYADIC COMMU
Laakso M, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P345
LaPointe LL, 2002, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V10, pVII
Madden ML, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1199, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000437
MARKEL N, 1976, ORG BEHAV FACE TO FA, P189
Murray LL, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P40, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2281
Norris MR, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P391, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00026-8
CONDON WS, 1966, J NERV MENT DIS, V143, P338, DOI 10.1097/00005053-196610000-00005
PRUTTING CA, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P105
Sayette MA, 2001, J NONVERBAL BEHAV, V25, P167, DOI 10.1023/A:1010671109788
NR 29
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 12
BP 1221
EP 1225
DI 10.1080/02687030444000354
PG 5
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 882ZA
UT WOS:000225977700010
ER
PT J
AU Wambaugh, J
Cameron, R
Kalinyak-Fliszar, M
Nessler, C
Wright, S
AF Wambaugh, J
Cameron, R
Kalinyak-Fliszar, M
Nessler, C
Wright, S
TI Retrieval of action names in aphasia: Effects of two cueing treatments
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BRAIN-DAMAGED SUBJECTS; VERB RETRIEVAL; LEXICAL RETRIEVAL; DEFICITS;
AGRAMMATISM; ANOMIA; NOUNS
AB Background: The treatment of word-retrieval deficits in aphasia has most frequently focused oil the retrieval of object names. The retrieval of action names has received relatively little attention in terms of rehabilitation despite the important role played by verbs in communication. Treatments that have been successful in promoting improved object name retrieval cannot be assumed to also facilitate improved action name retrieval.
Aims: The Purpose Of this investigation was to examine the effects Of two cueing treatments oil the retrieval of action names with speakers with chronic aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: The effects Of two Cueing treatments, Phonological Cueing Treatment (PCT) and Semantic Cueing Treatment (SCT), were examined with five speakers with aphasia. Treatment effects oil action naming were measured using single subject, multiple baseline, and alternating treatments designs.
Outcomes & Results: Results varied across participants. For two speakers, both treatments produced strong positive increases in naming, with effects being similar across treatments. For two other speakers, modest increases in correct naming were observed and for the remaining speaker, no increases were found.
Conclusions: These findings indicate that PCT and SCT may have utility in facilitating action naming for some speakers with aphasia, but that the effects may vary across speakers.
C1 VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, Res Serv 151A, Salt Lake City, UT 84148 USA.
Univ Utah, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
VA Philadelphia Healthcare Syst, Philadelphia, PA USA.
RP Wambaugh, J (reprint author), VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, Res Serv 151A, 500 Foothill Blvd, Salt Lake City, UT 84148 USA.
EM julie.wambaugh@health.utah.edu
CR Bastiaanse R., 2002, VERB SENTENCE TEST
Bastiaanse R, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P165, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1972
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Bock J. K., 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC, P945
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
Fiez JA, 1997, MEM COGNITION, V25, P543, DOI 10.3758/BF03201129
Fink R. B., 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P263
Fink RB, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P41
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
HORNER RD, 1978, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V11, P189, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1978.11-189
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Jonkers R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P245, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249453
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kemmerer D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2311
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kim M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P1, DOI 10.1006/brin.2000.2315
LEDORZE G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P127
Linebaugh CW, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249555
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
McNeil MR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P575, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249559
McNeil MR, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P385, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248479
McReynolds L. V., 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1047, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000618
PATTERSON JP, 2001, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H, V11, P11
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V2
Raven J., 1998, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Raymer AM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1031, DOI 10.1080/026870401430000609
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
Wambaugh JL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P933
Wambaugh JL, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P433, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000085
Wambaugh JL, 2002, J REHABIL RES DEV, V39, P455
Wambaugh JL, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P446
Yorkston K. M., 1981, ASSESSMENT INTELLIGI
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 36
TC 23
Z9 23
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 11
BP 979
EP 1004
DI 10.1080/02687030444000471
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 877LN
UT WOS:000225572200001
ER
PT J
AU Howland, J
Pierce, RS
AF Howland, J
Pierce, RS
TI Influence of semantic relatedness and array size on single-word reading
comprehension in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AUDITORY COMPREHENSION
AB Background: Previous research has shown that aphasic individuals' ability to select a pictured object from a group of pictures depends on (1) the number or pictures arrayed, (2) whether the pictures are situationally related to each other, and (3) whether they are displayed in a situational context versus a standard matrix.
Aims: The present Study expands on these results to include printed words and relationships based on semantic categories rather than common situational environments.
Methods &, Procedures: Ten aphasic participants were asked to match a spoken word to the printed word. The nature of the foils was systematically varied based on array size (two, four, six, and eight words) and whether the words were semantically related or not.
Outcomes Results: The result for array size was similar to previous results in that performance with larger arrays (eight words) was worse than with smaller arrays. However, the results for relatedness were different. Earlier results showed that performance with satuationally related Pictures was worse than with unrelated pictures only at larger array sizes (six and eight Pictures). In contrast, performance with semantically related printed words was worse than for unrelated printed words at all array sizes.
Conclusions: Whether similarity among stimuli is based on semantic or Situational relatedness changes how relatedness interacts with array size to affect performance. The impact of this on diagnostic test results and treatment considerations is discussed.
C1 Natl HealthCare, Anderson, SC USA.
Kent State Univ, Kent, OH 44242 USA.
RP Howland, J (reprint author), 107 Campers Way, Starr, SC 29684 USA.
EM WBHJEJ@aol.com
CR BUTTERWORTH B, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90036-8
GERMANI MJ, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P1, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248685
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GOODGLASS H, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P359, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90032-8
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
GROGAN S, 1994, FACTORS INFLUENCING
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1981, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P105
HOUGH MS, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P325, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90069-2
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LaPointe L., 1998, READING COMPREHENSIO
McNeil M. R., 1986, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V7, P123, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1085226
MCNEIL MR, 1990, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
PIERCE R, 1996, ADULT APHASIA REHABI, P175
PIERCE RS, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P155, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249067
ROSCH E, 1975, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V104, P192, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.104.3.192
USTIK G, 1989, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
Vecchi B, 1994, THESIS U STUDI PADOV
NR 17
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 11
BP 1005
EP 1013
DI 10.1080/02687030444000318
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 877LN
UT WOS:000225572200002
ER
PT J
AU Martin, N
Fink, R
Laine, M
Ayala, J
AF Martin, N
Fink, R
Laine, M
Ayala, J
TI Immediate and short-term effects of contextual priming on word retrieval
in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LEXICAL ACCESS; DEEP DYSPHASIA; LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; SPEECH PRODUCTION;
ANOMIA TREATMENT; FACILITATION; MODELS; ERRORS; THERAPY; INTERFERENCE
AB Background: Many therapy techniques for word retrieval disorders use some form of priming to improve access to words. Priming can facilitate or interfere with naming under different circumstances. We examined effects of priming when combined with semantic or phonological context (training words in groups that are semantically or phonologically related) and how these effects interact with the type of naming impairment (semantically or phonologically based).
Aims: We addressed three questions (1) Are word retrieval impairments differentially sensitive to priming with semantic or phonological contexts? (2) Would such differences be systematically related to deficits of semantic versus phonological processing? (3) Do effects of priming evolve from immediate interference to short-term facilitation, as predicted by an interactive activation model of word retrieval?
Methods & Procedures: A total of 11 chronic English-speaking aphasic subjects with varied types of aphasia participated in this experiment. Background measures of semantic and phonological processing ability were administered to determine the nature of each subject's naming impairment. The experiment involved one-session facilitation treatments for each of three context conditions (semantic, phonological, and unrelated), plus three replications (nine subjects) or one replication (two subjects). Ten pictures in each condition were tested before and after treatment. Five pictures were trained and five served as controls. Participants repeated the name of each picture four times (repetition priming) and then attempted to name each picture individually (naming probe). Repetition priming and naming probes were repeated eight times. We used McNemar tests to compare rates of correct responses before and after priming, and chi square analyses of correct responses and contextual errors on naming probes obtained during the priming sessions.
Outcome & results: Our predictions were borne out in the data. Participants varied in their sensitivity to the semantic and phonological contexts. The error data suggest that interference during training is more likely when the context (semantic or phonological) and underlying source of the word processing impairment (semantic or phonological) match. Additionally, we found two sequential effects of contextual priming: immediate interference followed short-term facilitation.
Conclusions: These data have theoretical implications regarding the time course of priming effects, but also have important clinical implications. The present contextual priming procedure is relatively short and could be used as a predictor of performance patterns in a long-term treatment protocol that uses this approach or other tasks that employ priming.
C1 Temple Univ, Dept Commun Sci, Ctr Cognit Neurosci, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA USA.
Abo Akad Univ, Turku, Finland.
RP Martin, N (reprint author), Temple Univ, Dept Commun Sci, Ctr Cognit Neurosci, Weiss Hall,1701 N 13th St, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
EM nmartin@temple.edu
CR Baayen R. H., 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
BAUM S, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V60, P347
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
Best W, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P231
BLAXTON TA, 1983, MEM COGNITION, V11, P500, DOI 10.3758/BF03196987
BOWLES NL, 1985, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V11, P272
Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P94
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
Chute D. L., 1990, MACLABORATORY PSYCHO
Cornelissen K, 2003, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V15, P444, DOI 10.1162/089892903321593153
Damian M. F., 2001, COGNITION, V81, P77
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
Dell GS, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P125, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000320
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
GARNHAM A, 1981, LINGUISTICS, V19, P805, DOI 10.1515/ling.1981.19.7-8.805
GORDON JK, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P661, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1062
HARLEY TA, 1984, COGNITIVE SCI, V8, P191
Hillis A. E., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
LAINE M, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V10, P139
Laine M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P283, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0050
LEDORZE G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P127
Martin N, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P83, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0005
MARTIN N, 1989, J MEM LANG, V28, P462, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(89)90022-3
Martin N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P53
Martin N, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P641
Martin N., 1999, INT J PSYCHOL, V34, P330
MARTIN N, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P240, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90130-7
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
Martin N, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000129
MEYER DE, 1971, J EXP PSYCHOL, V90, P227, DOI 10.1037/h0031564
MILBERG W, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P371, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90086-9
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Patterson K., 1983, APHASIA THERAPY
PRING T, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249517
RADEAU M, 1989, MEM COGNITION, V17, P525, DOI 10.3758/BF03197074
RAJARAM S, 1993, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V19, P765, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.19.4.765
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Renvall K, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P305, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000671
Roach A., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P121
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, UNPUB PHILADELPHIA C
SCHRIEFERS H, 1990, J MEM LANG, V29, P86, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(90)90011-N
Schwartz MF, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P263, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000187
Siegel S., 1956, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
SLOWIACZEK LM, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P1239
Weigl E, 1961, Z PHONETIK SPRACHWIS, V14, P337
Wilshire CE, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P165, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000169
NR 56
TC 23
Z9 24
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 10
BP 867
EP 898
DI 10.1080/02687030444000390
PG 32
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 851KJ
UT WOS:000223683700001
ER
PT J
AU de Riesthal, M
Wertz, R
AF de Riesthal, M
Wertz, R
TI Prognosis for aphasia: Relationship between selected biographical and
behavioural variables and outcome and improvement
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPONTANEOUS-RECOVERY; STROKE PATIENTS; IMPAIRMENT; PATTERNS; SEVERITY
AB Background: Numerous biographical and behavioural variables have been investigated for their prognostic value in aphasia. Tompkins, Jackson, and Schulz (1990) recommended ways to reconceptualise some of these variables and suggested exploration of additional variables that have been neglected.
Aims: The purpose of this investigation was to examine the relationship between selected biographical and behavioural variables and initial performance, outcome, and amount of change in aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 34 participants, from the first Veterans Administration Cooperative Study on Aphasia, composed the study sample. Each was evaluated with the Porch Index of Communicative Ability (PICA) and the Rating of Functional Performance (RFP) (a modification of the Functional Communication Profile) at 4 and 48 weeks post-onset (WPO), before and after a 44-week treatment trial. Information for 10 biographical and behavioural variables was available for each participant at 4 WPO. Spearman's correlations were employed to determine the relationship between each biographical and behavioural variable and initial performance, outcome, and amount of change on the PICA and RFP.
Outcomes & Results: Performance at 4 WPO, pre-treatment, on the PICA and RFP was significantly correlated. Similarly, performance on the PICA and RFP at 4 WPO was significantly correlated with conversational, Token Test , and word fluency performance at 4 WPO. Outcome on the PICA and the RFP at 48 WPO, post-treatment, was significantly correlated with PICA, RFP, and word fluency performance at 4 WPO. Moreover, outcome on the PICA at 48 WPO was significantly correlated with conversational and Token Test performance at 4 WPO. Amount of change on the PICA between 4 WPO and 48 WPO was significantly negatively correlated with PICA, word fluency, Token Test , and conversational performance at 4 WPO. Amount of change on the RFP between 4 WPO and 48 WPO was significantly negatively correlated with RFP performance at 4 WPO.
Conclusions: The results indicate that there are significant relationships between specific behavioural variables and initial performance, outcome, and amount of change on measures of language impairment and functional communication. Moreover, there is a difference between formulating a prognosis for outcome and amount of change in aphasia--individuals who attain higher outcomes do not necessarily make more improvement. However, the influence of a ceiling effect must be considered in this relationship. Finally, to determine the predictive precision of these relationships, future investigations will require a larger sample size and application of multiple regression analysis.
C1 Dept Vet Affairs N Florida S Georgia Healthcare S, Neurol Serv 127, Gainesville, FL 32608 USA.
Dept Vet Affairs Tennessee Valley Healthcare Syst, Nashville, TN USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
RP de Riesthal, M (reprint author), Dept Vet Affairs N Florida S Georgia Healthcare S, Neurol Serv 127, 1601 Archer Rd, Gainesville, FL 32608 USA.
EM michael.deriesthal2@med.va.gov
CR BAILEY S, 1981, BRIT J DISORDERS COM, V16, P1193
Basso A, 1996, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V18, P77, DOI 10.1080/01688639608408264
BASSO A, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P337, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248605
BORKOWSK.JG, 1967, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V5, P135, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(67)90015-2
CARHART R, 1971, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V36, P476
CRARY MA, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P163
CULTON GL, 1969, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V12, P825
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
DAVID RM, 1984, J CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V6, P302, DOI 10.1080/01688638408401220
DERENZI E, 1962, BRAIN, V85, P665, DOI 10.1093/brain/85.4.665
DUFFY JR, 1980, APHASIA APRAXIA AGNO, V2, P1
Eisenson J, 1949, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V14, P262
HARTMAN J, 1981, ANN NEUROL, V9, P89, DOI 10.1002/ana.410090119
HOLLAND AL, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V32, P232
HOLLAND AL, 1980, CADL TEST FUNCTIONAL
KEENAN JS, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P257
KERTESZ A, 1977, BRAIN, V100, P1, DOI 10.1093/brain/100.1.1
Kertesz A, 1974, Can J Neurol Sci, V1, P7
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LARZELERE RE, 1977, PSYCHOL BULL, V84, P557, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.84.3.557
Maeshima S, 2002, BRAIN INJURY, V16, P161, DOI 10.1080/02699050110102095
MARSHALL RC, 1982, FOLIA PHONIATR, V34, P305
MARSHALL RC, 1983, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V64, P597
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
PORCH BE, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P312
Raven J. C., 1962, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
Ross KB, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P113, DOI 10.1080/026870399402235
ROSS KB, 1999, THESIS VANDERBILT U
SANDS E, 1969, Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, V50, P202
SARNO M T, 1971, Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, V52, P175
Sarno MT, 1969, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
SARNO MT, 1992, SCANDINAVIAN J REH S, V26, P43
SMITH A, 1971, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V36, P167
TOMPKINS CA, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V33, P398
ULATOWSKA H K, 1989, Seminars in Speech and Language, V10, P298, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064270
ULATOWSKA HK, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P325, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248602
VIGNOLO LA, 1964, CORTEX, V1, P344
WALLESCH CW, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P373, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248608
Wechsler D., 1958, MEASUREMENT APPRAISA
WERTZ RT, 2000, TREATM EFF C NASHV T
WERTZ RT, 1990, P RES S COMM SCI DIS, P88
WERTZ RT, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P580
WILSON R S, 1979, Journal of Clinical Neuropsychology, V1, P49, DOI 10.1080/01688637908401097
World Health Organisation, 2000, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
NR 46
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 10
BP 899
EP 915
DI 10.1080/02687030444000381
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 851KJ
UT WOS:000223683700002
ER
PT J
AU Robson, J
Marshall, J
Pring, T
Montagu, A
Chiat, S
AF Robson, J
Marshall, J
Pring, T
Montagu, A
Chiat, S
TI Processing proper nouns in aphasia: Evidence from assessment and therapy
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SEMANTIC MEMORY DISORDER; I CANT REMEMBER; NAMING DISORDERS; PEOPLES
NAMES; ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; GEOGRAPHICAL NAMES; WORD RETRIEVAL; GLOBAL
APHASIA; COMMON NAMES; ANOMIA
AB Background: Dissociations between proper and common names following brain damage have frequently been reported (see Yasuda, Nakamura, & Beckman, 2000, for review) and suggest that these different word classes are processed by distinct mechanisms. The dissociations are often observed in people with relatively pure impairments, but might also be expected more generally in aphasia. There is the further possibility that the different vocabulary groups require different therapy approaches. Yet, to our knowledge, no study has explored whether treatments that are known to be successful with common nouns are also successful with proper nouns.
Aims: This study had two main aims: to compare the comprehension and production of common and proper nouns in 20 people with aphasia; and to investigate whether semantic naming therapy is equally effective for common and proper nouns.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 20 people with aphasia were tested in their ability to comprehend and produce matched sets of proper and common nouns. The stimuli comprised: 20 famous people, 20 famous places, 20 high-familiarity common nouns, and 20 low-familiarity common nouns. Participants were also tested with personally relevant proper names, such as the names of family members. In the second phase of the study 10 of the original participants were given semantic therapy for both common and proper nouns. Experimental measures explored effects on treated and untreated words.
Outcomes & Results: Initial testing found that comprehension scores were generally high, with no word class effect. In production, proper nouns were significantly more difficult to name than the matched common nouns. However, this finding excluded personally relevant proper nouns, which were the most successfully named items. Results from the second phase showed that semantic therapy was equally effective in improving naming of both common and proper nouns. As in many previous studies, effects were almost entirely confined to treated items.
Conclusions: Our findings suggest that proper nouns induce more naming failures in aphasia than common nouns. However, despite this, they seem equally amenable to therapy. Clinical and theoretical implications are discussed.
C1 City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, London EC1V 0HB, England.
RP Marshall, J (reprint author), City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, London EC1V 0HB, England.
EM J.Marshall@city.ac.uk
CR Brédart S, 1993, Memory, V1, P351, DOI 10.1080/09658219308258243
Bredart S, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P209
BURKE DM, 1991, J MEM LANG, V30, P542, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(91)90026-G
BURTON AM, 1992, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V83, P45
Caramazza A, 1998, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V10, P1, DOI 10.1162/089892998563752
CARNEY R, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P185, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253460
Cipolotti L, 2000, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V17, P709, DOI 10.1080/026432900750038308
Cipolotti L, 1993, Memory, V1, P289, DOI 10.1080/09658219308258240
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
Evrard M, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V81, P174, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2515
Fadda L, 1998, EUR J NEUROL, V5, P417, DOI 10.1046/j.1468-1331.1998.540417.x
FERY P, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P191
FLUDE BM, 1989, BRAIN COGNITION, V11, P60, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(89)90005-5
Hanley JR, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P155, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70745-7
HANLEY JR, 1995, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V48, P487
HARRIS DM, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P575
HARRIS DM, 1995, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V86, P345
HICKIN J, IN PRESS APHASIA THE, V2
HITTMAIRDELAZER M, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P465, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90091-4
Hollis J, 2001, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V27, P99, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.27.1.99
Kay J, 2001, CORTEX, V37, P501, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70590-2
Kay J, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P113, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000114
Kitchener EG, 1999, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V16, P589
Lyons F, 2002, CORTEX, V38, P23, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70636-1
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
MCKENNA P, 1978, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V41, P571, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.41.6.571
MCNEIL JE, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P193, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90005-1
Miceli G, 2000, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V17, P489, DOI 10.1080/02643290050110629
Milders M, 2000, CORTEX, V36, P139, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70842-6
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Ohnesorge C, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P135, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2365
Parkin AJ, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P361
Saetti MC, 1999, CORTEX, V35, P675, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70827-X
SEMENZA C, 1997, FDN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P115
Semenza C, 2000, BRAIN COGNITION, V43, P384
Semenza C, 1993, Memory, V1, P265, DOI 10.1080/09658219308258238
SEMENZA C, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P711, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253279
Semenza C, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P45
Tempini MLG, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P2103, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.11.2103
Thompson SA, 2004, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V42, P359, DOI 10.1016/j.neuropsychologia.2003.08.004
Toglia M. P., 1978, HDB SEMANTIC WORD NO
Valentine T., 1996, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL PR
VANLANCKER D, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P181
VANLANCKER D, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P511, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90159-E
VANLANCKER D, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P37, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248576
Van Lancker D, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P121, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2564
WALLACE GL, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V50, P385
WAPNER W, 1979, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V22, P765
Yasuda K, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P274, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1856
Yasuda K, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P1067, DOI 10.1080/02687030050174638
NR 52
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 10
BP 917
EP 935
DI 10.1080/02687030444000462
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 851KJ
UT WOS:000223683700003
ER
PT J
AU Sorin-Peters, R
AF Sorin-Peters, R
TI The evaluation of a learner-centred training programme for spouses of
adults with chronic aphasia using qualitative case study methodology
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENIOR PRECEPTORSHIP; STROKE PATIENTS; FAMILY-THERAPY; PARTNERS; STYLES;
COMMUNICATION; CONVERSATION; COMPETENCES; ADJUSTMENT; STUDENTS
AB Background: Family education, training, and counselling programmes have been cited as one way to complement traditional interventions for the individual with aphasia. However, the literature still represents the speech-language pathologist as the expert in a directive role.
Aims: This article describes the second phase of a research study aimed at addressing the psychosocial sequelae of aphasia by developing and studying the effects of a learner-centred training programme for spouses of adults with chronic aphasia designed to improve conversational interaction between couples. The first phase of this research included the development of a communication-training programme that integrated principles and strategies from speech-language pathology and adult education (Sorin-Peters, 2002). The second phase described in this paper included the delivery and evaluation of the programme using a qualitative case study methodology. The use of the qualitative case study methodology to study the psychosocial consequences of aphasia is described in a companion paper (Sorin-Peters, 2004). This paper presents the results of one qualitative case study in detail to demonstrate how the qualitative case study methodology was implemented, and a summary of the cross-case analysis for the five couples, examining the effectiveness of the programme.
Methods & Procedures: Using videotaped data, the Couple Questionnaire, and a semi-structured interview, this study examined changes in attitudes and communication behaviours in five couples immediately after conversation partner training and at 2 months follow-up. All data were transcribed and analysed for patterns of change. Outcomes & Results: Communication outcomes included changes in conversational interaction as well as in the transaction of information in conversation for all five couples. These included positive changes in the management of conversational repair. There was more balanced control after training and the cognitive competence of the partners with aphasia was revealed following the training. In addition, different conversational genres emerged throughout the programme that could be organised hierarchically. Results indicated ways in which the adult learning principles were actualised across the five cases. Themes emerged related to the expression of emotion about aphasia, including feelings of anger, sadness, and grief, and increased acceptance of the aphasia after the training. Themes related to marital issues emerged and were intertwined with emotions and communication.
Conclusions: The adult learning model approach promoted positive and comprehensive changes, and perhaps more than those achieved via existing medical-model or psychosocial approaches. The adult learning approach to individuals with chronic aphasia extends the existing psychosocial model by acknowledging both the spouse's and person with aphasia's competence as adult learners, by viewing the person with aphasia not only as part of a social unit, including the family, but also as part of a broader system, including multiple environmental and cultural factors that interact interdependently to effect change, and by focusing on the importance of communication for the expression of emotions and the maintenance and development of marital relations. The results suggest the benefits of the expansion of the speech-language pathologist's role with couples with aphasia to include an adult learning approach to improving conversational interaction between people with aphasia and their spouses.
C1 Toronto Rehabil Inst, Rumsey Ctr, Toronto, ON M4G 1R7, Canada.
RP Sorin-Peters, R (reprint author), Toronto Rehabil Inst, Rumsey Ctr, 345 Rumsey Rd, Toronto, ON M4G 1R7, Canada.
EM sorin-peters.riva@torontorehab.on.ca
CR ALARCON N, 1997, NONTR APPR APH C YOU
Barer- Stein T., 2001, CRAFT TEACHING ADULT
BOYD EM, 1983, J HUMANIST PSYCHOL, V23, P103
Brookfield S., 1990, SKILLFUL TEACHER
Bryan K, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P179, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250474
CAVANAGH SJ, 1995, NURS EDUC TODAY, V15, P177, DOI 10.1016/S0260-6917(95)80103-0
CHRISTENSEN JM, 1989, J COMMUN DISORD, V22, P225, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(89)90018-X
Csokasy J A, 1997, AORN J, V65, P787, DOI 10.1016/S0001-2092(06)63000-7
Csokasy J A, 1997, AORN J, V65, P396, DOI 10.1016/S0001-2092(06)63343-7
DANIEL JA, 2000, DISS ABSTR INT A, V60, P3900
Davies S M, 1995, Fam Med, V27, P444
DAVIS NHL, 1999, DISS ABSTR INT A, V59, P4410
Engleberg NC, 2001, TEACH LEARN MED, V13, P253, DOI 10.1207/S15328015TLM1304_07
Feagin J., 1991, CASE CASE STUDY
Ferguson A, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P125, DOI 10.1080/026870399402244
FISHERBRILLINGE.M, 1990, J HUM LACT, V6, P171
FOX LE, 1996, ISAAC, V12, P257
Gainotti G, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P635, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249412
GRIFFIN VR, 1994, CRAFT TEACHING ADULT
Hoen B, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P681, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249415
HOLLAND A, 2000, MCGEACHY MEM LECT
Hunt D., 1987, BEGINNING OURSELVES
Hunt D. E., 1974, PSYCHOL ED
Johannsen-Horbach Helga, 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P73, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064010
Kagan Aura, 2004, Top Stroke Rehabil, V11, P67
KAGAN A, 1999, THESIS U TORONTO CAN
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Knowles M., 1973, ADULT LEARNER NEGLEC
Kolb DA, 1984, EXPERIENTIAL LEARNIN
Kreber C., 2001, TEACH HIGH EDUC, V6, P217, DOI 10.1080/13562510120045203
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Linebaugh C. W., 1978, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P304
Lyon J, 1992, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V1, P7
Lyon J. G, 1998, COPING APHASIA
LYON JG, 1996, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
LYON JG, 1992, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V3, P7
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Merriam S., 1989, CASE STUDY RES ED QU
Mezirow J, 1991, TRANSFORMATIVE DIMEN
MURRELL P, 1987, COUNS EDUC SUPERV, V27, P4
Nichols F, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P767, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248449
OLSWANG L, 1998, UNPUB COUPLE QUESTIO
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
RICCI DM, 2000, DISS ABSTR INT A, V61, P459
RIDLEY MJ, 1995, J ADV NURS, V22, P58, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2648.1995.22010058.x
ROSS S, 1988, INT J REHABIL RES, V11, P383, DOI 10.1097/00004356-198812000-00008
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
Servaes P, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P889
SIMMONS N, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P
Simmons-Mackie N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P231, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249451
SORINPETERS R, 2002, THESIS U TORONTO CAN
Sorin-Peters R, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P937, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000444
Stake R.E., 1995, ART CASE STUDY RES
STUTSKY BJ, 1995, J ADV NURS, V21, P143, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2648.1995.21010143.x
WAHRBORG P, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P93, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248978
Wilkinson IAG, 1998, READ RES QUART, V33, P144, DOI 10.1598/RRQ.33.2.1
WILLIAMS SE, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P361
YIN R, 1995, APPL CASE STUDY RES
Zorga Sonja, 2002, J Interprof Care, V16, P265, DOI 10.1080/13561820220146694
ZRAICK RI, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P123
NR 60
TC 20
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 10
BP 951
EP 975
DI 10.1080/02687030444000453
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 851KJ
UT WOS:000223683700005
ER
PT J
AU Cook, M
Murdoch, B
Cahill, L
Whelan, BM
AF Cook, M
Murdoch, B
Cahill, L
Whelan, BM
TI Higher-level language deficits resulting from left primary cerebellar
lesions
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SUBCORTICAL LESIONS; DISTURBANCES; DIASCHISIS; DOMINANT; APHASIA;
DISEASE
AB Background: Contemporary neuropsychological studies suggest that cerebellar lesions may impact upon higher-level cognitive functioning via mechanisms of crossed cerebello-cerebral diaschisis. Accordingly, right cerebellar lesions have been previously associated with linguistic impairments such as reduced word fluency and agrammatic output. Recently, however, neuroimaging investigations have also identified ipsilateral cerebral hypoperfusion as a consequence of cerebellar lesions, implicating a potential role for the left cerebellum in the mediation of language processes.
Aims: The purpose of this research was to investigate the effects of left cerebellar lesions of vascular origin, on general as well as high-level language skills.
Methods & Procedures: Linguistic profiles were compiled for five individuals with left primary cerebellar lesions utilising a comprehensive language test battery. Individual scores relevant to each subtest were compared to a group of non-neurologically impaired controls. The criterion for anomalous performance was established as greater than or equal to 1.5 SD below the mean of the control group.
Outcomes & Results: The findings of this research suggest that higher-level language deficits may result from left primary cerebellar lesions. All participants demonstrated deficits on measures of word fluency, sentence construction within a set context, producing word definitions, and producing multiple definitions for the same word. Deficits were also noted for several participants on measures of understanding figurative language, forming word associations, identifying and correcting semantic absurdities, and producing synonyms and antonyms.
Conclusions: The results presented challenge the notion of a lateralised linguistic cerebellum, supporting a potential role for the left as well as right cerebellar hemispheres in the regulation of language processes, presumably via cerebellar-basal ganglia/thalamo-cortical pathways.
C1 Univ Queensland, Div Speech Pathol, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
Princess Alexandra Hosp, Brisbane, Qld 4102, Australia.
RP Whelan, BM (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Div Speech Pathol, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
EM bmw@uq.edu.au
RI Murdoch, Bruce/C-1397-2012
CR BARON JC, 1980, T AM NEUROL ASSOC, V8, P120
Beldarrain MG, 1997, EUR NEUROL, V37, P82
BOTEZ MI, 1991, EUR NEUROL, V31, P401
BROICH K, 1987, NEUROSCI LETT, V83, P7, DOI 10.1016/0304-3940(87)90207-2
Chafetz MD, 1996, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V77, P1303, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(96)90197-5
Chenery HJ, 2002, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V37, P459, DOI 10.1080/1368282021000007730
Copland DA, 2000, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V8, P1
DERENZI E, 1962, BRAIN, V85, P665, DOI 10.1093/brain/85.4.665
Fabbro F, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P173, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(00)00010-5
Fabbro F, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P83, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(00)00005-1
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
HUBRICHUNGUREAN.P, 2002, NEUROSCI LETT, V31, P91
Huisingh R., 1990, WORD TEST REVISED TE
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Laakso K, 2000, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V14, P329, DOI 10.1080/02699200050051065
Leggio MG, 2000, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V69, P102, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.69.1.102
LETHLEAN JB, 1993, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V1, P45
Lewis FM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P193, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249446
Marien P, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P145, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(00)00009-9
Marien P, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P580, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2569
Marien P, 1996, J NEUROL SCI, V144, P34, DOI 10.1016/S0022-510X(96)00059-7
Mattis S., 1988, DEMENTIA RATING SCAL
Middleton FA, 2000, BRAIN RES REV, V31, P236, DOI 10.1016/S0165-0173(99)00040-5
Neau JP, 2000, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V102, P363, DOI 10.1034/j.1600-0404.2000.102006363.x
Pujol J, 1996, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V93, P403
SILVERI MC, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P2047
Spreen O., 1969, NEUROSENSORY CTR COM
Vokaer M, 2002, NEUROLOGY, V58, P967
Whelan BM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1213, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000446
Wiig E. H., 1992, TEST WORD KNOWLEDGE
Wiig EH, 1989, TEST LANGUAGE COMPET
Zettin M, 1997, NEUROCASE, V3, P375, DOI 10.1080/13554799708411976
NR 33
TC 20
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 9
BP 771
EP 784
DI 10.1080/02687030444000291
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 845WK
UT WOS:000223275800001
ER
PT J
AU Murray, L
Ballard, K
Karcher, L
AF Murray, L
Ballard, K
Karcher, L
TI Linguistic specific treatment: Just for Broca's aphasia?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AGRAMMATIC APHASIA; SENTENCE PRODUCTION; SYNTACTIC COMPLEXITY; MOVEMENT
STRUCTURES; SPONTANEOUS SPEECH; NONFLUENT APHASIA; FLUENT APHASIA; VERB
RETRIEVAL; WORKING-MEMORY; WH-MOVEMENT
AB Background : Several studies have documented the efficacy of Linguistic Specific Treatment (LST) for addressing sentence production deficits associated with agrammatism (e.g., Ballard Thompson, 1999; Thompson, Shapiro, Kiran, & Sobecks, 2003). LST is based on the proposition that training production of complex, noncanonical sentence structures should produce generalisation to syntactically related, and less complex, sentence structures. Because empirical support for LST has been established via research that has exclusively involved patients with agrammatic production with or without asyntactic comprehension, it is not yet known whether this treatment is suitable for patients with other clinical aphasia types.
Aims : Four adults who represented a variety of clinical aphasia types were provided with LST to determine whether (a) these patients would show acquisition of trained sentences with generalisation to untrained but syntactically related sentence forms; (b) LST would enhance written sentence production if only spoken production was directly treated and writing was indirectly stimulated through a home work programme; (c) treatment of spoken sentence production would assist comprehension of trained and untrained sentence forms; and (d) LST would facilitate spoken narrative skills in terms of informativeness, syntactic accuracy or complexity, or both.
Methods & Procedures : Single subject, multiple baseline design across behaviours methodology was used to examine acquisition and generalisation of trained (object- and subject-extracted embedded questions) and untrained sentence structures (object- and subject-extracted matrix questions, passives) in four participants representing a spectrum of nonfluent and fluent aphasia types. They received individual, weekly 60-90 minute sessions of LST, and were asked to complete written sentence production homework practice.
Outcomes & Results : Variable response patterns were observed across the participants in terms of changes in their spoken production or comprehension of trained and untrained sentence forms, written production of trained forms, and narrative discourse. Generally, LST was less helpful to participants with poorer comprehension and concomitant cognitive deficits.
Conclusions : LST may provide some benefit not only to patients with nonfluent or agrammatic aphasia, but also to some patients with fluent aphasia profiles. Further investigation of LST is needed to delineate further the clinical populations for whom this treatment approach is most appropriate, and to evaluate LST procedural modifications that might foster production and comprehension generalisation effects.
C1 Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
Univ Iowa, Iowa City, IA USA.
RP Murray, L (reprint author), Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 200 S Jordan Ave, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
EM lmurray@indiana.edu
RI Ballard, Kirrie/F-9558-2011
CR BALLARD KJ, UNPUB TEMPORAL COORD
BALLARD KJ, 1997, THESIS NW U EVANSTON
Ballard KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P690
Bartha L, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V85, P93, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(02)00502-3
Bastiaanse R, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P72
Bastiaanse R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248437
Bates E, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P507
Berndt R. S., 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P91
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
BERNDT RS, 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P229, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50010-5
BERNDT RS, 1998, SENTENCE PRODUCTION
Bird H, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P187, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00006-1
BYNG S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P315, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248663
Caplan D, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P184, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1930
Dick F, 2001, PSYCHOL REV, V108, P759, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.108.4.759
DOYLE PJ, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P143
EDWARDS S, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P333
EDWARDS S, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P414
Fleiss JL, 1973, STAT METHODS RATES P
Francis DR, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P723, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000201
Gibson E, 1998, COGNITION, V68, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(98)00034-1
GOLDENBERG G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248669
GOODGLASS H, 1993, CORTEX, V29, P377
Grodzinsky Y, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P50
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
HAARMANN HJ, 1992, CORTEX, V28, P97
HANLON RE, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P298, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90116-X
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V46, P422
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1992, APHASIA DIAGNOSTIC P
JACOBS BJ, 1996, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
Jacobs BJ, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P115, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2452
Jacobs BJ, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P5
Edwards S, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P99, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250466
KOHN SE, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P57
Linebarger MC, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V11, P57
MacWhinney B., 1995, CHILDES PROJECT TOOL
Mitchum C. C., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
MIYAKE A, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P671, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251989
Murray LL, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P87, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00043-5
Murray LL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P585
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Raymer AM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P493, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000239
ReichmanNovak S, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P102
RICHARDS SB, 1999, SINGLE SUBJECT RES A
Rose M, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1001, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000825
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
Shapiro LP, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P254
SINOTTE MP, 2003, ANN INT NEUR SOC C W
Thompson CK, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P661
Thompson C. K., 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P124
Thompson CK, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P175, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0009
Thompson CK, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P228
Thompson CK, 2003, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V46, P591, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2003/047)
Thompson CK, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, p[605, 612]
THOMPSON CK, 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P113
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
WAMBAUGH JL, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P509
NR 58
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 9
BP 785
EP 809
DI 10.1080/02687030444000273
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 845WK
UT WOS:000223275800002
ER
PT J
AU Marshall, RC
Karow, CM
Morelli, CA
Iden, KK
Dixon, J
Cranfill, TB
AF Marshall, RC
Karow, CM
Morelli, CA
Iden, KK
Dixon, J
Cranfill, TB
TI Effects of interactive strategy modelling training on problem-solving by
persons with traumatic brain injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FRONTAL-LOBE DAMAGE; QUESTIONING STRATEGIES; CHILDREN; DEFICITS;
PERFORMANCE; LESIONS; ADULT
AB Background : Problem-solving skills may be affected by traumatic brain injury (TBI). Because the ability to solve problems is integral to the social, educational, and vocational reintegration of persons who have sustained a TBI, interventions to improve this executive function have become an important part of rehabilitation.
Aims : This Phase I study examined the effects of a behavioural intervention, interactive strategy modelling training (ISMT), on problem solving by individuals who had incurred a TBI.
Methods & Procedures : Study participants were 20 individuals recruited from TBI support groups. All lived at home and were several months post-injury. Participants received a period of ISMT intended to train them to use meta-cognitive strategies to solve 20-questions problems. RAPS (Rapid Assessment of Problem Solving), a clinical test of problem solving was used to assess the effects of ISMT (Marshall, Karow, Morelli, Iden, & Dixon, 2003a). RAPS was administered before (Pre-training), after (Post-training), and 1-month after training (Follow-up).
Outcomes & Results : Participants improved in problem solving significantly on RAPS from the Pre- to the Post-training tests. Specifically, they (a) solved problems with fewer questions, (b) asked more constraint-seeking questions, and (c) increased their question-asking efficiency scores. These improvements were maintained on the Follow-up test.
Conclusions : Improved problem solving on RAPS was associated with better planning and strategy use, less impulsivity, and strategy shifting. Results suggest that IMST had a therapeutic effect and indicate a need to develop further hypotheses for testing ISMT in functional contexts.
C1 Univ Kentucky, Dept Rehabil Sci, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
Univ Rhode Isl, Kingston, RI 02881 USA.
Univ Florida, Gainesville, FL USA.
Vet Adm Med Ctr, Providence, RI 02908 USA.
Massachusetts Hosp Sick Children, Boston, MA USA.
RP Marshall, RC (reprint author), Univ Kentucky, Dept Rehabil Sci, Room 124-F,900 S Limestone, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
CR ADAMOVICH B, 1985, CCOGNITIVE REHABILIT
AITKEN S, 1993, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V8, P212
Allen G. J., 1976, COMMUNITY PSYCHOL SC
BARONA A, 1984, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V52, P885, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.52.5.885
BARTON JA, 1988, J EDUC PSYCHOL, V80, P184, DOI 10.1037/0022-0663.80.2.184
Bond M. R., 1983, REHABILITATION HEAD, P367
BOYD TM, 1993, APPL COGNITIVE PSYCH, V7, P171, DOI 10.1002/acp.2350070208
Channon S, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V37, P757, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00138-9
Cicerone KD, 1992, NEUROREHABILITATION, V2, P12
CICERONE KD, 1987, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V68, P111
DENNEY DR, 1975, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V19, P476, DOI 10.1016/0022-0965(75)90077-6
DENNEY DR, 1973, DEV PSYCHOL, V8, P202, DOI 10.1037/h0034144
DENNEY DR, 1972, CHILD DEV, V43, P820
DENNEY NW, 1974, CHILD DEV, V45, P1108
DENNEY NW, 1974, DEV PSYCHOL, V10, P458, DOI 10.1037/h0036444
DENNEY NW, 1985, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V21, P161, DOI 10.2190/A3J2-75L4-01C3-W81W
Dimitrov M, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P357
Gillis R.J., 1996, TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJU
GLOSSER G, 1990, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V12, P485, DOI 10.1080/01688639008400995
GOLDSTEIN FL, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V7, P23
GRATTAN LM, 1994, NEUROPSY NEUROPSY BE, V7, P251
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KING A, 1991, J EDUC PSYCHOL, V83, P307, DOI 10.1037//0022-0663.83.3.307
Levin H S, 1997, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V3, P598
LEVIN HS, 1993, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V50, P897
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
Luria A. R., 1973, WORKING BRAIN INTRO
Mai N, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P45, DOI DOI 10.1080/09602019108401379
Marshall RC, 2003, BRAIN INJURY, V17, P589, DOI 10.1080/0269905031000088496
MARSHALL RC, 2003, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V12, P3
MERTZGARCIA J, 1986, J COMMUN DISORD, V19, P395
Mosher F. A., 1966, STUDIES COGNITIVE GR, P86
MURRAY L, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P85
NEZU CM, 1991, RES DEV DISABIL, V12, P371, DOI 10.1016/0891-4222(91)90033-O
ODDY M, 1984, CLOSED HEAD INJURY P, P285
OREILLY MF, 2000, J VOCATIONAL REHABIL, V14, P187
PURDY M, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P549
Raven J. C., 1984, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Rende Barbara, 2000, Seminars in Speech and Language, V21, P121, DOI 10.1055/s-2000-7560
SAARNIO P, 1993, ALCOHOL ALCOHOLISM, V28, P585
SELINGER M, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P165, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249504
SHALLICE T, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P727, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.2.727
SOHBERG MM, 1989, INTRO COGNITIVE REHA
Sohlberg M, 1993, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V8, P45, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199303000-00006
TWOMBLY CA, 1998, AM J OCCUPATIONAL TH, V52, P810
VILKKI J, 1988, CORTEX, V24, P119
Wilson B.A., 1996, BEHAV ASSESSMENT DYS
YLVISAKER M, 1989, TOP LANG DISORD, V9, P34
Ylvisaker M., 1998, COLLABORATIVE BRAIN
YLVISAKER M, 1987, COMMUNITY REENTRY HE
BURKE W H, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P241, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008095
NR 51
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 8
BP 659
EP 673
DI 10.1080/02687030444000237
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 835ZK
UT WOS:000222524300001
ER
PT J
AU Mitchum, CC
Haendiges, AN
Berndt, RS
AF Mitchum, CC
Haendiges, AN
Berndt, RS
TI Response strategies in aphasic sentence comprehension: An analysis of
two cases
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION; REPRESENTATIONS; DISSOCIATION; AGRAMMATISM;
ASSIGNMENT
AB Background : A consistent pattern of responding in a test of sentence comprehension has been interpreted both as a direct reflection of the aphasic patient's ability to understand specific sentence types, and as an indirect indication of the operation of systematic response strategies. Less attention has been directed at the questions of how residual comprehension abilities and response strategies might jointly influence response patterns, and of the potential modifiability of such strategies through intervention.
Aims : This study illustrates how patients' response patterns reflect a complex interaction between residual syntactic knowledge and different response strategies. These strategies may change in response to simple task manipulations and in response to therapeutic feedback.
Methods & Procedures : We report sentence comprehension data from two aphasic patients who produced dissimilar comprehension patterns for semantically reversible sentences tested in three experiments: sentence-picture verification (yes/no), sentence-picture matching (forced choice), and in response to systematic feedback (intervention).
Outcomes & Results : Both patients' performance was shown to reflect response strategies with distinct potential for modification by changes in task demands and by therapeutic intervention. The strategies adopted appeared to reflect differences in retained knowledge about structural cues to sentence meaning; paradoxically, the more superficial strategy--reflecting no initial appreciation of sentence structure--was the more amenable to modification.
Conclusions : Results highlight the importance of assessing comprehension with a number of different tasks, and of recognising patients' tendencies to rely on response strategies, when interpreting aphasic sentence comprehension. The clinical utility of identifying such response biases and comprehension strategies as a basis for intervention is discussed.
C1 Univ Maryland, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, Baltimore, MD 21201 USA.
RP Mitchum, CC (reprint author), Univ Maryland, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, 22 S Greene St, Baltimore, MD 21201 USA.
EM cmitchum@umaryland.edu
CR Berndt R. S., 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P91
Berndt RS, 1997, CLIN NEUROSCI, V4, P57
Berndt RS, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P99
Berndt RS, 2004, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V21, P229, DOI 10.1080/02643290342000456
Bever T., 1970, COGNITION DEV LANGUA, P279
Black M., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P79, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90002-Z
CAPLAN D, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P117, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90008-8
Caplan D., 1992, LANGUAGE STRUCTURE P
CARAMAZZA A, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P572, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90048-1
CARLSON G, 1988, THEMATIC RELATIONS S, V21
CHATTERJEE A, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V49, P125, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1024
Chatterjee A, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V37, P395, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00108-0
COHEN J, 1993, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V25, P257, DOI 10.3758/BF03204507
Ferreira F, 2002, CURR DIR PSYCHOL SCI, V11, P11, DOI 10.1111/1467-8721.00158
GREEN DM, 1966, SIGNAL DETECTION THE
Haendiges AN, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0011
Inglis AL, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P265, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000662
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
LINEBARGER MC, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1040
LINEBARGER MC, 1983, COGNITION, V13, P361, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90015-X
LINEBARGER MC, 1998, LINGUISTIC LEVELS AP
MITCHUM CC, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P503, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252006
Mitchum CC, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P311
Rochon E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P193, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2285
SAFFRAN EM, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V2, P255
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, PHILADELPHIA COMPREH
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P389, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248943
Schwartz M. F., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P85, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406352
SCHWARTZ MF, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P249, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90055-3
SLOBIN DI, 1966, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V5, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(66)80023-3
NR 30
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 8
BP 675
EP 692
DI 10.1080/02687030444000255
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 835ZK
UT WOS:000222524300002
ER
PT J
AU Hays, SJ
Niven, BE
Godfrey, HPD
Linscott, RJ
AF Hays, SJ
Niven, BE
Godfrey, HPD
Linscott, RJ
TI Clinical assessment of pragmatic language impairment: A generalisability
study of older people with Alzheimer's disease
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICATION; PSYCHOMETRIC EVALUATION; DISCOURSE ANALYSIS;
SENILE DEMENTIA; ADULT APHASIA; PERFORMANCE; DEFICITS; PROFILE; SPEECH;
MIND
AB Background : The Profile of Pragmatic Impairment in Communication (PPIC) is a clinical rating scale designed for the assessment of multiple facets of pragmatic language impairment in neuropsychiatric disorders. The PPIC has its origin in Grice's analysis of implicature and the Gricean principle of co-operation and conversational maxims.
Aims : We sought to evaluate the psychometric properties of the PPIC and to generate a profile of pragmatic language impairment associated with Alzheimer's disease (AD).
Methods & Procedures : Speech samples were solicited from patients with AD ( n = 13) and age-matched healthy volunteers ( n = 13) using several structured/semi-structured tasks. Three trained raters made blind ratings on the PPIC on two occasions. Other raters evaluated mental status, aphasia, and communicative effectiveness. A generalisability analysis was conducted.
Outcomes & Results : Good to excellent generalisability coefficients (0.86-0.94) were observed on most PPIC scales. PPIC ratings were strongly related to mental status and communicative effectiveness but not associated with aphasia. Diagnosis of AD made no substantive contribution to the prediction of PPIC ratings independently of mental status impairment.
Conclusions : Results demonstrate evidence of good to excellent reliability, convergent validity, and discriminant validity of most PPIC scales. The observed associations are consistent with the view that pragmatic language impairment in AD is primarily a function of cognitive decline.
C1 Univ Otago, Dept Psychol, Dunedin, New Zealand.
RP Linscott, RJ (reprint author), Univ Otago, Dept Psychol, POB 56, Dunedin, New Zealand.
EM linscott@psy.otago.ac.nz
RI Linscott, Richard/C-1431-2008
CR ALEXOPOULOS GS, 1988, BIOL PSYCHIAT, V23, P271, DOI 10.1016/0006-3223(88)90038-8
Arkin S, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P533, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000032
Armstrong E, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P875, DOI 10.1080/02687030050127685
Avent JR, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P207, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00014-1
Avent JR, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P253, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248411
BALL MJ, 1991, J COMMUN DISORD, V24, P367, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(91)90009-8
BAYLES KA, 1993, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V9, P131
CHENERY HJ, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P159, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248648
Cohen J., 1988, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA, V2nd
Cooren F, 2002, J PRAGMATICS, V34, P1045, DOI 10.1016/S0378-2166(02)00028-0
Cronbach L. J., 1972, DEPENDABILITY BEHAV
Emery VOB, 2000, INT J PSYCHIAT MED, V30, P145, DOI 10.2190/X09P-N7AU-UCHA-VW08
ENDLER NS, 1966, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V22, P559
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Garcia LJ, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1871
Giles E, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P395, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248419
Godfrey HPD, 2000, NEW ZEAL J PSYCHOL, V29, P20
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
GREENE JDW, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P128
Gregory C, 2002, BRAIN, V125, P752, DOI 10.1093/brain/awf079
Grice H. P., 1975, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, P41, DOI DOI 10.1017/S0022226700005296
Grice H. Paul, 1978, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, V9, P113
Hargrave R, 2002, J NEUROPSYCH CLIN N, V14, P64, DOI 10.1176/appi.neuropsych.14.1.64
HOLM S, 1979, SCAND J STAT, V6, P65
Irwin WH, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P823, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000086
Keller J, 1998, J PRAGMATICS, V29, P313, DOI 10.1016/S0378-2166(97)00054-4
Langdon R, 2002, PSYCHOL MED, V32, P1273, DOI 10.1017/S0033281702006396
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
Lindblom K, 2001, J PRAGMATICS, V33, P1601, DOI 10.1016/S0378-2166(00)00069-2
Linscott RJ, 1996, BRAIN INJURY, V10, P397, DOI 10.1080/026990596124269
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
MANOCHIOPINIG S, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249489
MCDONALD S, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P28, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1003
McPherson S, 2002, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V8, P373, DOI 10.1017/S1355617701020185
MORRIS RG, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P49
Myers PS, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P913, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000285
NORMAN DA, 1975, EXPLORATIONS COGNITI, P65
Nunnally J. C., 1994, PSYCHOMETRIC THEORY
ODONNELL JP, 1990, J CLIN PSYCHOL, V46, P310, DOI 10.1002/1097-4679(199005)46:3<310::AID-JCLP2270460311>3.0.CO;2-G
PATEL PG, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P1, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248638
Perkins L, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P33, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00004-9
PRUTTING CA, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P105
Reitan R., 1993, HALSTEADREITAN NEURO
RIPICH DN, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P330, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90133-L
RIPICH DN, 1994, ALZ DIS ASSOC DIS, V8, P95, DOI 10.1097/00002093-199404000-00011
Sadock Jerrold, 1978, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, P281
SHAVELSON RJ, 1989, AM PSYCHOL, V44, P922, DOI 10.1037/0003-066X.44.6.922
Thomas Jenny, 1995, MEANING INTERACTION
THOMSEN IV, 1984, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V47, P260, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.47.3.260
Ulatowska Hanna K., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL S, P108
Watson CM, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P195, DOI 10.1080/026870399402181
NR 51
TC 10
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 8
BP 693
EP 714
DI 10.1080/02687030444000183
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 835ZK
UT WOS:000222524300003
ER
PT J
AU Diesfeldt, HFA
AF Diesfeldt, HFA
TI Syntactic comprehension of reversible sentences in semantic dementia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PROGRESSIVE FLUENT APHASIA; EARLY ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; TEMPORAL-LOBE
ATROPHY; FRONTOTEMPORAL DEMENTIA; AGRAMMATISM; PATTERNS; MEMORY;
DEFICITS
AB Background : A patient with semantic dementia had difficulty comprehending semantically reversible passive sentences in the Test for the Reception of Grammar (TROG). Investigations of patients with semantic dementia have typically focused on the lexical and semantic components of language. Syntactic abilities have received less attention, presumably because these are reported to be preserved until later stages of the disease.
Aim : To localise the possible functional sources of deficient comprehension of passives in a Dutch man (EGY) with semantic dementia.
Methods & Procedures : Dutch written sentence picture-matching tasks were used to investigate whether EGY assigned the thematic role of agent on the basis of word order, the presence of auxiliary plus inflected verb morphology, the by phrase, the presence of a locative preposition ( against and after ), or the lexical-semantic specifications of the verbs push and chase .
Outcomes & Results : EGY was able to understand reversible active and truncated passive sentences. He was impaired when comprehension depended on understanding the agentive role of the by phrase, although his performance improved when a locative preposition was available to highlight the theme of the action.
Conclusions : Intact performance on reversible active sentences indicated spared ability to process canonical word order. EGY's ability to understand truncated passives showed comprehension of the auxiliary and inflected verb, perhaps resulting in a conceptual representation of the passive as an adjectival construction (e.g., the cow is pushed = the pushed cow ). EGY's deficit in comprehending full passive sentences is explained as a failure to process the syntactic and lexical information in the agentive by preposition. In semantic dementia, the division between lexicon and grammar may be more apparent than real.
C1 PgD De Stichtse Hof, NL-1251 BG Laren, Netherlands.
RP Diesfeldt, HFA (reprint author), PgD De Stichtse Hof, Naarderstr 81, NL-1251 BG Laren, Netherlands.
EM H.Diesfeldt@vivium.nl
CR BASTIAANSE R, 1995, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
BATES E, 1995, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V10, P487, DOI 10.1080/01690969508407113
BENNIS H, 2000, SYNTAXIS NEDERLANDS
BERG IJ, 1988, NEDERLANDS TIJDSCHRI, V43, P388
Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITION, V58, P289, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00682-6
Bird H, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P17, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2293
Bishop D. V. M., 1989, TEST RECEPTION GRAMM
Boogaart Pieter C, 1975, WOORDFREQUENTIES GES
Breedin SD, 1999, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V128, P547, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.128.4.547
Caplan D., 1988, DISORDERS SYNTACTIC
Chan D, 2001, ANN NEUROL, V49, P433, DOI 10.1002/ana.92
Croot K, 1999, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V5, P393
de Vries A. K., 1981, NIEUWE STREEFLIJST W
Deelman BG, 1981, SAN TEST AFASIETEST
Diesfeldt H. F. A., 1992, MEMORY FUNCTIONING D, P227
Diesfeldt H F, 1989, Tijdschr Gerontol Geriatr, V20, P241
DUYZENKUNSTFB, 2000, GRAMMATICA NEDERLAND
Friederici AD, 2002, TRENDS COGN SCI, V6, P78, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(00)01839-8
Gahl S, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1173, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000428
Galton CJ, 2001, NEUROLOGY, V57, P216
Garrard P, 2000, J NEUROL, V247, P409, DOI 10.1007/s004150070169
Graham KS, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V16, P380, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.16.3.380
GRIGSBY J, 1992, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V74, P883, DOI 10.2466/PMS.74.3.883-892
GRIMSHAW J, 1994, ARGUMENT STRUCTURE
Grossman M, 2003, NEUROLOGY, V60, P775
Harasty JA, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P181, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.1.181
HODGES JR, 2003, NEUROLOGICAL FDN COG, P67
Hodges JR, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V13, P31, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.13.1.31
HODGES JR, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P505, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251984
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
Hodges J R, 1996, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V2, P511
Jackendoff Ray, 1997, ARCHITECTURE LANGUAG
Kaan E, 2002, TRENDS COGN SCI, V6, P350, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(02)01947-2
Kako E, 2001, TRENDS COGN SCI, V5, P102, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(00)01594-1
Keenan Edward L., 1985, LANGUAGE TYPOLOGY SY, VI, P243
Kirsner Robert, 1976, SUBJECT TOPIC, P385
Kuperberg GR, 2003, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V15, P272, DOI 10.1162/089892903321208204
LAMBON RM, 2000, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V17, P437
Lambon Ralph M A, 1998, Neuropsychologia, V36, P775
Lindeboom J, 1993, Tijdschr Gerontol Geriatr, V24, P105
Luzzatti C, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P419, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000005
MacDonald MC, 2002, PSYCHOL REV, V109, P35, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.109.1.35
MACDONALD MC, 1994, PSYCHOL REV, V101, P676, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.101.4.676
MARTIN RC, 1989, COGNITION, V32, P157, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(89)90002-4
McClelland J. L., 1989, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V4, P287, DOI 10.1080/01690968908406371
McClelland JL, 2002, TRENDS COGN SCI, V6, P465, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(02)01993-9
Mesulam MM, 2001, ANN NEUROL, V49, P425, DOI 10.1002/ana.91
Meyers JE, 1995, REY COMPLEX FIGURE T
*NETH I PSYCH, 1998, BER PSYCH
Patterson K, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V39, P709, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00008-2
PULVERMULLER F, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P165, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.2.165
Riddoch M.J., 1993, BIRMINGHAM OBJECT RE
ROCHON E, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P329, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1018
Rosen HJ, 2002, NEUROLOGY, V58, P198
SCHWARTZ MF, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V7, P277, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90024-5
Snowden JS, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1715, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(02)00031-3
Snowden JS, 2001, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V70, P323, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.70.3.323
Townsend David J., 2001, SENTENCE COMPREHENSI
Ullman MT, 2001, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V30, P37, DOI 10.1023/A:1005204207369
VERRIPS M, 1996, POTATOES MUST PEEL A
VISCHBRINK EG, 1993, DEV ASSESSMENT REHAB
VischBrink EG, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P130
Warrington E., 1984, RECOGNITION MEMORY T
WARRINGTON EK, 1991, VISUELE PERCEPTIE OB
WATERS GS, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P1, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251990
1980, PHOTOGRAPHIC TEACHIN
NR 66
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 8
BP 715
EP 742
DI 10.1080/02687030344000607
PG 28
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 835ZK
UT WOS:000222524300004
ER
PT J
AU Freed, D
Celery, K
Marshall, RC
AF Freed, D
Celery, K
Marshall, RC
TI Effectiveness of personalised and phonological cueing on long-term
naming performance by aphasic subjects: A clinical investigation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SUBORDINATE CATEGORY NAMES; COMPREHENSION; FACILITATION; LANGUAGE;
IMAGERY
AB Background : Personalised cueing is a treatment for aphasic word-finding deficits that has been shown to have long-term effects on naming accuracy. However, prior investigations of personalised cueing used novel visual stimuli instead of the more traditional pictures and drawings used in clinical settings. Consequently, the clinical effectiveness of personalised cueing was unclear.
Aims : This study compared the effects of personalised cueing and phonological cueing on aphasic individuals' long-term naming accuracy using stimuli that are typical of those used in clinical treatments.
Methods & Procedures : Using a single-subject, alternating treatments design, this study trained three individuals with moderately severe aphasia on the names of 60 common objects. The training sessions were followed by naming probes administered 1 week, 1 month, 2 months, and 3 months after the completion of training.
Outcomes & Results : The results showed that the three participants had significantly higher levels of naming accuracy in the personalised cue condition up to 3 months post training compared to the phonological cue condition and an untrained control condition.
Conclusions : This study suggests that personalised cueing can be used as a simple, time-efficient treatment for the word-finding deficits associated with aphasia of moderate severity.
C1 Calif State Univ Fresno, Dept Communicat Disorders & Deaf Studies, Fresno, CA 93740 USA.
Univ Kentucky, Lexington, KY 40506 USA.
RP Freed, D (reprint author), Calif State Univ Fresno, Dept Communicat Disorders & Deaf Studies, 5048 N Jackson Ave,LS-80, Fresno, CA 93740 USA.
EM donfr@csufresno.edu
CR BADDELEY AD, 1973, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V11, P159, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(73)90003-1
CANCELLIERE AEB, 1991, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V72, P148
CRAIK FIM, 1972, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V11, P671, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(72)80001-X
Freed D. B., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P105
FREED DB, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1081
Freed DB, 1998, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V87, P795
SPARKS R, 1974, Cortex, V10, P303
JONES MK, 1974, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V12, P21, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(74)90023-2
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KERR JYK, 1979, PHOTO CUE CARDS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LEBRATO MT, 1974, AM J MENT DEF, V78, P704
Marshall HJ, 1999, EUROPACE, V1, P20, DOI 10.1053/eupc.1998.0003
MARSHALL RC, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P567, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249492
MARSHALL RC, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P335
Marshall RC, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P585, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000050
Marshall RC, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P763, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000040
MASTROPIERI MA, 1990, J LEARN DISABIL, V23, P92
Mastropieri MA, 1989, EDUC PSYCHOL REV, V1, P83, DOI 10.1007/BF01326638
Patten B. M., 1972, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V26, P28
Schwartz B., 1991, LEARNING MEMORY
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
VANLANCKER D, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V17, P64, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90067-I
VANLANCKER D, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P511, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90159-E
VANLANCKER D, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P37, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248576
WALLACE GL, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V50, P385
NR 26
TC 9
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 8
BP 743
EP 757
DI 10.1080/02687030444000246
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 835ZK
UT WOS:000222524300005
ER
PT J
AU Bakheit, AMO
Barrett, L
Wood, J
AF Bakheit, AMO
Barrett, L
Wood, J
TI The relationship between the severity of post-stroke aphasia and state
self-esteem
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID STROKE; ILLNESS; DISEASE
AB Background : The study of self-esteem after stroke may provide valuable prognostic information of the potential for functional recovery and may also inform the approach to treatment. Hitherto, research into the effect of post-stroke aphasia on self-esteem has received little attention. The purpose of the present study is to examine the relationship between aphasia and self-esteem and to establish whether the severity of aphasia correlates significantly with the level of self-esteem.
Methods & Procedures : Self-esteem was measured with the Visual Analogue Self-Esteem Scale (VASES) and aphasia was assessed with the Western Aphasia Battery (WAB). Assessments were made as soon as practicable after the stroke onset and 3 and 6 months after the first evaluation.
Outcomes & Results : Of 51 eligible patients, 40 completed the study. The mean (SD) VASES scores at baseline, 3 and 6 months post-entry were 36.8 (7.6), 37.6 (7.2), and 38.5 (7.7), respectively. WAB scores were 71.3 (22.9) at 3 months and 72.0 (21.1) at 6 months. This compares to a baseline score of 45.5 (26.2). The changes in WAB scores from baseline to the 3 and 6 months post-entry assessments were statistically significant. However, the correlation between the severity of aphasia and self-esteem did not reach statistical significance either at baseline, or at the subsequent assessments.
Conclusions : The severity of aphasia does not appear to correlate significantly with the level of self-esteem in the first 6 months after stroke.
C1 Plymouth Primary Care Trust, Mt Gould Hosp, Stroke Unit, Plymouth PL4 7QD, Devon, England.
RP Bakheit, AMO (reprint author), Plymouth Primary Care Trust, Mt Gould Hosp, Stroke Unit, Plymouth PL4 7QD, Devon, England.
EM magid.bakheit@pcs-tr.swest.nhs.uk
CR AHO K, 1980, B WORLD HEALTH ORGAN, V58, P113
Andersson S, 2002, J Psychiatr Ment Health Nurs, V9, P285, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2850.2002.00480.x
Bailey JA, 2003, J NATL MED ASSOC, V95, P388
BONITA R, 1992, LANCET, V339, P342, DOI 10.1016/0140-6736(92)91658-U
Brumfitt SM, 1999, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V38, P387, DOI 10.1348/014466599162980
BURY M, 1991, SOCIOL HEALTH ILL, V13, P451, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9566.1991.tb00522.x
Chang AM, 1998, STROKE, V29, P2325
Coates C, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P104
CROUCH MA, 1983, FAM COMMUNITY HEALTH, V6, P76
Ellis-Hill CS, 2000, CLIN REHABIL, V14, P279, DOI 10.1191/026921500671231410
EMERY OB, 1989, J GERONTOL, V44, P85
Enderby P M, 1987, Int Rehabil Med, V8, P166
GAGLIESE L, 1977, PAIN, V70, P3
HINSHELWOOD F, 1997, B ROYAL COLL SPEECH, V540, P11
Jopson NM, 2003, J PSYCHOSOM RES, V54, P503, DOI 10.1016/S0022-3999(02)00455-5
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kreisler A, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V54, P1117
Laska AC, 2001, J INTERN MED, V249, P413, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2796.2001.00812.x
LORING DW, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V28, P831, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(90)90007-B
Müller D, 1999, Semin Speech Lang, V20, P85, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064011
OLDFIELD RC, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V9, P97, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(71)90067-4
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
Price CIM, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1357
Schroevers MJ, 2003, SOC SCI MED, V57, P375, DOI 10.1016/S0277-9536(02)00366-0
Tennant A, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P278
WADE DT, 1987, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V50, P177, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.50.2.177
Wright JC, 1996, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V35, P399
NR 27
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 8
BP 759
EP 764
DI 10.1080/02687030444000372
PG 6
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 835ZK
UT WOS:000222524300006
ER
PT J
AU Wambaugh, J
Nessler, C
AF Wambaugh, J
Nessler, C
TI Modification of sound production treatment for apraxia of speech:
Acquisition and generalisation effects
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID OVERGENERALIZATION; APHASIA
AB Background: Sound errors are characteristic of acquired apraxia of speech (AOS) and are frequently the focus of treatment. One treatment for AOS, Sound Production Treatment (SPT), has been shown to facilitate improved sound production in trained sounds and untrained exemplars of those sounds (Wambaugh, Kalinyak-Fliszar, West, & Doyle, 1998a). Although the effects of SPT are relatively well understood when the treatment has been applied sequentially to single sounds in words, little is known about its application to multiple sounds. Additionally, the stimulus generalisation effects of SPT have not been well specified.
Aims: This investigation was designed to further investigate the acquisition and stimulus generalisation effects of SPT for AOS. Treatment application was modified from previous investigations to allow for application with multiple sounds and in a different treatment context.
Methods & Procedures: A multiple baseline design across behaviours and contexts was used to assess the effects of treatment with a speaker with chronic AOS and aphasia. Treatment was initially applied within the context of words elicited through repetition. In order to assess stimulus generalisation, the nine consonants of interest were elicited in words through sentence completion. Additionally, the target sounds were elicited in a different word position (i.e., word-final) from that utilised in treatment (i.e., word-initial).
Outcomes & Results: Treatment resulted in increased correct productions of the target sounds in trained contexts. Generalisation to the different stimulus contexts was limited and varied across sounds. Treatment was extended to the sentence completion context and additional treatment gains were observed.
Conclusions: The application of SPT to multiple sounds and to an additional treatment context appears to have promise in the treatment of AOS. Additional replications are required for external validity.
C1 VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, Res Serv 151A, Salt Lake City, UT 84148 USA.
Univ Utah, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
RP Wambaugh, J (reprint author), VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, Res Serv 151A, 500 Foothill Blvd, Salt Lake City, UT 84148 USA.
EM julie.wambaugh@health.utah.edu
CR Clark HM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P699, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249567
Croot Karen, 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P267, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35800
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
Dworkin J. P., 1996, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V2, P105
EDWARDS HT, 1992, APPL PHONETICS SOUND
Fink RB, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P41
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Kearns Kevin P., 1997, P1
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Knock TR, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P653
MARSHALL RC, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V35, P313, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90115-0
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
McNeil MR, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P39
MCNEIL MR, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P221
Mlcoch A. G., 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P235
NEWMAN PW, 1985, ASSESSMENT REMEDIATI
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1047, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000618
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V2
PRATHER EM, 1975, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V40, P179
Raymer AM, 2002, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V10, P313
RAYMER AM, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P285
SANDER EK, 1972, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V37, P55
Schmidt RA, 1999, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
Shriberg LD, 1982, CLIN PHONETICS
Shuster L, 2003, CLIN APH C ORC ISL W
Van Riper C., 1958, VOICE ARTICULATION
WAMBAUGH J, 2003, M AM SPEECH LANG HEA
Wambaugh J. L., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P97
Wambaugh JL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249569
Wambaugh JL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P725
Wambaugh JL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P821
WAMBAUGH JL, IN PRESS MED J SPEEC
WAMBAUGH JL, 2001, ASHA SPECIAL INTERES, V11, P9
Wambaugh Julie L., 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P293, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35802
WAMBAUGH JL, 2004, C MOT SPEECH ALB NM
Yorkston K. M., 1981, ASSESSMENT INTELLIGI
NR 37
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 407
EP 427
DI 10.1080/02687030444000165
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200002
ER
PT J
AU Peach, RK
Wong, PCM
AF Peach, RK
Wong, PCM
TI Integrating the message level into treatment for agrammatism using story
retelling
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID PROGRAM
AB Background: Treatments for agrammatic production generally target sentence forms, inflectional morphology, verb retrieval, thematic roles, or underlying grammatical forms. Reviews of these and related methods suggest that they address Garrett's functional and positional levels of sentence processing. Such reviews also demonstrate that little attention has been given to developing treatments that emphasise the message level of sentence production. Message-level representations appear to have robust potential for influencing sentence-level processes following aphasia, since varying levels of language representation are thought to influence their downstream counterparts.
Aims: The study aimed to determine whether functional and positional-level syntactic training applied in a context requiring structuring of message-level representations would improve expressive syntax in a patient with agrammatism.
Methods & Procedures: A 10-week programme was divided into two 5-week phases requiring story retelling of three fables in each phase with critical oral and written feedback. Story retellings were analysed along three dimensions: grammaticality, complexity, and content. The programme was evaluated using a multiple-baseline across behaviours single-subject design.
Outcomes & Results: Overall, this treatment programme appeared to produce highly beneficial outcomes with regard to improved expressive syntax. Substantial generalisation of treatment effects was observed in post-treatment testing, while long-term maintenance of the gains achieved in treatment was observed.
Conclusions: The story-retelling procedure, with oral and written feedback, stimulated and improved the participant's expressive syntax. Unlike treatment approaches that simply target surface grammar, the story retelling approach appears to be rich with regard to stimulating conceptual syntax as well as lower-level syntactic processes. Functional communication also benefited by treating discourse-level behaviours to improve linguistic processing.
C1 Rush Univ, Med Ctr, Chicago, IL 60612 USA.
RP Peach, RK (reprint author), Rush Univ, Med Ctr, 1653 W Congress Pkwy, Chicago, IL 60612 USA.
EM richard_k_peach@rush.edu
RI Wong, Patrick/A-8102-2012
CR BERNDT RS, 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P229, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50010-5
Bock Kathryn, 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC, P945
Brown J, 1997, Violence Against Women, V3, P5, DOI 10.1177/1077801297003001002
Chapman S B, 1992, Clin Commun Disord, V2, P64
CHATTERJEE A, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P133
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
Garrett M., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1, P177
Garrett M. F., 1984, BIOL PERSPECTIVES LA, P172
Garrett M. F., 1990, INVITATION COGNITIVE, P133
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V46, P422
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
LaPointe L., 1998, READING COMPREHENSIO
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
Mitchum C., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P551
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
Thompson CK, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, p[605, 612]
ULATOWSKA H K, 1989, Seminars in Speech and Language, V10, P298, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064270
NR 20
TC 21
Z9 21
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 429
EP 441
DI 10.1080/02687030444000147
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200003
ER
PT J
AU Haley, KL
AF Haley, KL
TI Vowel duration as a cue to postvocalic stop voicing in aphasia and
apraxia of speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID AMERICAN ENGLISH; SPEAKING RATE; INTELLIGIBILITY; PERCEPTION; PATTERNS
AB Background: In American English, vowel duration is, on average, longer preceding postvocalic voiced stops than preceding postvocalic voiceless stops. Preliminary investigations have reported a preservation of this acoustic contrast for speakers with aphasia and apraxia of speech (AOS) on the basis of mean data. However, clinical interpretation of the available research is difficult due to lack of attention to the range of performance among and within speakers from both normal and disordered populations. Concurrent perceptual analysis is warranted to evaluate functional implications of acoustic variations, but standard approaches using a single listener and presentation may not be sufficiently sensitive to reveal subtle variations.
Aims: (1) To determine whether aphasic and apraxic speakers produce a normal vowel duration differentiation between voiced and voiceless postvocalic stops. (2) To explore whether the produced vowel duration variations are associated with predicted perceptual effects.
Methods & Procedures: Eight speakers with coexisting aphasia and AOS, eight with aphasia and no AOS, and eight normal control speakers produced 24 repetitions of the words "had" and "hat" in a short carrier phrase. For each utterance, the duration of the vowel was measured. Perceptual testing was conducted using three normal listeners and a forced-choice perceptual identification paradigm.
Outcomes & Results: As expected, all normal speakers, and most aphasic and apraxic speakers, displayed a mean vowel duration distinction between the voicing cognates. The magnitude of the distinction did not differ across groups. Instead, there was substantial inter-speaker variability in the magnitude of duration contrast in all three groups. Some aphasic speakers with and without AOS did not distinguish in vowel duration between voicing cognates, and others displayed bimodal, but overlapping, distributions for /d/ and /t/. Results of the perceptual identification experiment indicated that there was good, but not perfect, agreement between variations in vowel duration and voicing perception and that several utterances produced by aphasic and apraxic speakers were perceptually ambiguous.
Conclusions: (1) Although the mean duration for vowels preceding voiced and voiceless stops may be indistinguishable from normal, several abnormal acoustic patterns are found among individual aphasic speakers both with and without AOS. (2) The magnitude of acoustic distinction can vary considerably across normal speakers and this variation must be considered when evaluating disordered speech. (3) Perceptual identification testing facilitates the interpretation of acoustic data, particularly when the two levels of analysis are matched on an utterance-by-utterance basis. (4) Perceptual ambiguity can be demonstrated in disordered speech through perceptual identification testing.
C1 Univ N Carolina, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
RP Haley, KL (reprint author), Univ N Carolina, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Med Sch Wing D,CB 7190, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
EM khaley@med.unc.edu
CR BAUM SR, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P33, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90003-Y
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1987, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V1, P113, DOI 10.3109/02699208708985007
CALIGIURI MP, 1983, FOLIA PHONIATR, V35, P226
CHEN M, 1970, PHONETICA, V22, P129
CRYSTAL TH, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V31, P497
Duffy J. R., 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH PHYSL, P167
Haley KL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P1107, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000519
Haley KL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P715, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249568
Haley KL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P619
HILLENBRAND J, 1984, J ACOUST SOC AM, V76, P18, DOI 10.1121/1.391094
HOGAN JT, 1980, J ACOUST SOC AM, V67, P1764, DOI 10.1121/1.384304
KENT RD, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P482
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KLATT DH, 1973, J ACOUST SOC AM, V54, P1102, DOI 10.1121/1.1914322
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MILENKOVIC PM, 1996, CSPEECH COMPUTER PRO
RAPHAEL LJ, 1972, J ACOUST SOC AM, V51, P1296, DOI 10.1121/1.1912974
Rogers MA, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P433, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248482
Schmidt RA, 1999, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
Smith BL, 2002, PHONETICA, V59, P232, DOI 10.1159/000068348
Snijders TAB, 1999, MULTILEVEL ANAL INTR, V1st
TULLER B, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P547, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90019-8
UMEDA N, 1975, J ACOUST SOC AM, V58, P434, DOI 10.1121/1.380688
WEISMER G, 1979, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V22, P516
WERTZ R T, 1992, Seminars in Speech and Language, V13, P39, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064185
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
NR 26
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 443
EP 456
DI 10.1080/02687030444000200
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200004
ER
PT J
AU Martin, N
Fink, R
Laine, M
AF Martin, N
Fink, R
Laine, M
TI Treatment of word retrieval deficits with contextual priming
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID ANOMIA TREATMENT; LEXICAL ACCESS; LANGUAGE; MEMORY
AB Background: Repetition priming is often a component of treatments for word-finding disorders. It can facilitate or interfere with naming success depending on a number of factors. Here we investigate the effectiveness of massed priming coupled with semantic or phonological context as a treatment for naming impairments arising from semantic and phonological deficits.
Aims: We aimed to determine whether (1) this procedure, used previously in a short-term facilitation study, would effectively improve word retrieval in a treatment study, and (2) the pattern of facilitation or interference observed in the facilitation study would carry over to the treatment programme.
Methods & Procedures: We used a single subject multiple baseline design. There were two participants: LP with a phonological encoding deficit and AS with both semantic and phonological deficits. Treatment involved identifying and repeating the names of words that were related semantically or phonologically, or unrelated. Pre and post measures of naming were used to assess overall effectiveness of the treatment. Acquisition, maintenance, and generalisation were measured with baseline tests at the start of each session. Correct responses and errors on within-training naming probes were used to measure sensitivity to priming in a particular context.
Outcomes & Results: LP benefited from this procedure regardless of the training context. AS showed interference in the semantic context during training and only modest short-term gains. These outcomes were predicted by their performance on an earlier facilitation study.
Conclusions: Contextual repetition priming has different effects on naming and these differences appear to be related to the context of training (semantic or phonological) and the primary source of an individual's naming impairment (semantic or phonological). This procedure is most effective when semantic processing of words is relatively spared.
C1 Temple Univ, Dept Commun Sci, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA USA.
Abo Akad Univ, Turku, Finland.
RP Martin, N (reprint author), Temple Univ, Dept Commun Sci, 1701 N 13th St, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
EM nmartin@temple.edu
CR Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P94
Cornelissen K, 2003, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V15, P444, DOI 10.1162/089892903321593153
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Laine M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P283, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0050
Marshall RC, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P585, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000050
MARTIN N, 2004, UNPUB IMMEDIATE SHOR
Martin N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P53
Martin N, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P641
Martin N., 1999, INT J PSYCHOL, V34, P330
McReynolds L. V., 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
PATTERSON KE, 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P76
PAULESU E, 1993, NATURE, V362, P342, DOI 10.1038/362342a0
Renvall K, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P305, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000671
Roach A., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P121
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, UNPUB PHILADELPHIA C
NR 18
TC 23
Z9 24
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 457
EP 471
DI 10.1080/02687030444000129
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200005
ER
PT J
AU Small, SL
AF Small, SL
TI A biological model of aphasia rehabilitation: Pharmacological
perspectives
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID ACUTE ISCHEMIC-STROKE; MIDDLE CEREBRAL-ARTERY; TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJURY;
TISSUE-PLASMINOGEN ACTIVATOR; SENSORIMOTOR CORTEX INJURY; POSTSTROKE
DEPRESSION; DOUBLE-BLIND; MOTOR RECOVERY; FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY;
BEHAVIORAL RECOVERY
AB Background: Aphasia is a multi-modality disturbance of speech, language, and memory caused by neurological injury, particularly stroke. Aims : This review article views aphasia as fundamentally a disease of the brain, and aims to survey biological treatments for aphasia that address amelioration of brain injury.
Main Contribution: The review examines the effects of different drugs on both direct and indirect mechanisms of neural circuit reorganisation, gauged through effects on multi-modal measures of speech, language, and memory. Based on this review, therapists might choose to analyse and change the pharmacological state of their patients with aphasia.
Conclusions: We conclude that (a) both biological and behavioural therapies affect brain repair and reorganisation; (b) pharmacotherapy is not yet proven, but has promise, but only when accompanied by concomitant behavioural therapy; (c) the most important biological interventions that can be accomplished at present are to withdraw certain drugs that impede aphasia recovery and to administer anti-depressants to all patients with major or minor post-stroke depression.
C1 Univ Chicago, Dept Neurol, Chicago, IL 60637 USA.
RP Small, SL (reprint author), Univ Chicago, Dept Neurol, 5841 S Maryland Ave,MC-2030, Chicago, IL 60637 USA.
EM small@uchicago.edu
CR AARSLAND D, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P1377, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.6.1377
ALBERT ML, 1988, NEUROLOGY, V38, P877
ANDERSEN G, 1994, STROKE, V25, P1099
Bakin JS, 1996, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V93, P11219, DOI 10.1073/pnas.93.20.11219
Baskerville KA, 1997, NEUROSCIENCE, V80, P1159, DOI 10.1016/S0306-4522(97)00064-X
BERGMAN PS, 1951, NEUROLOGY, V1, P471
Berthier ML, 2003, NEUROLOGY, V60, P1218
BOYESON MG, 1984, ANN M SOC NEUROSCIEN, V10, P68
BOYESON MG, 1993, AM J PHYS MED REHAB, V72, P286, DOI 10.1097/00002060-199310000-00007
Boyeson MG, 1996, STROKE, V27, P2145
BOYESON MG, 1994, AM J PHYS MED REHAB, V73, P76, DOI 10.1097/00002060-199404000-00002
BRACCO L, 1984, NEUROSCI LETT, V50, P301, DOI 10.1016/0304-3940(84)90503-2
Bragoni M, 2000, NEUROL SCI, V21, P19, DOI 10.1007/s100720070114
BROWN RM, 1974, ACTA PHYSIOL SCAND, V90, P789, DOI 10.1111/j.1748-1716.1974.tb05647.x
CASTREN E, 1992, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V89, P9444, DOI 10.1073/pnas.89.20.9444
*CEBM, 2003, VOL 2003
CLARK ANG, 1979, J AM GERIATR SOC, V27, P174
COHEN HP, 1975, J NEUROSURG, V43, P32, DOI 10.3171/jns.1975.43.1.0032
Connors John J 3rd, 2002, Rev Cardiovasc Med, V3 Suppl 2, pS92
CRISOSTOMO EA, 1988, ANN NEUROL, V23, P94, DOI 10.1002/ana.410230117
Darley F. L., 1977, CLIN APHASIOL, V7, P91
DeDeyn PP, 1997, STROKE, V28, P2347
De Keyser J, 1999, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V22, P535, DOI 10.1016/S0166-2236(99)01463-0
DIXON CE, 1994, J NEUROTRAUM, V11, P275, DOI 10.1089/neu.1994.11.275
DOWNHILL JE, 1994, J NERV MENT DIS, V182, P425, DOI 10.1097/00005053-199408000-00001
ENDERBY P, 1994, CLIN NEUROPHARMACOL, V17, P320, DOI 10.1097/00002826-199408000-00003
FEENEY DM, 1985, BRAIN RES, V342, P352, DOI 10.1016/0006-8993(85)91135-7
FEENEY DM, 1983, PSYCHOPHARMACOLOGY, V79, P67, DOI 10.1007/BF00433018
FEENEY DM, 1982, SCIENCE, V217, P855, DOI 10.1126/science.7100929
FERE C, 1886, REV GEN CLIN THERAPE, V785
FREUND HJ, 1997, BRAIN PLASTICITY
Friel KM, 1998, SOMATOSENS MOT RES, V15, P173, DOI 10.1080/08990229870745
Fruehwald S, 2003, J NEUROL, V250, P347, DOI 10.1007/s00415-003-1014-3
Gernsbacher M. A., 1998, FOREIGN LANGUAGE LEA, P231
GIL R, 1995, J NEUROL, V242, P251, DOI 10.1007/BF00919600
Giurgea C E, 1983, Acta Psychiatr Belg, V83, P349
GOLDBERG E, 1982, Journal of Clinical Neuropsychology, V4, P219, DOI 10.1080/01688638208401131
Goldstein Larry B, 2003, Phys Med Rehabil Clin N Am, V14, pS125, DOI 10.1016/S1047-9651(02)00060-8
Goldstein LB, 1998, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V55, P454, DOI 10.1001/archneur.55.4.454
GOLDSTEIN LB, 1995, NEUROLOGY, V45, P865
Goldstein LB, 2000, NEUROPHARMACOLOGY, V39, P852, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3908(99)00249-X
Goldstein LB, 2000, DRUG SAFETY, V22, P13, DOI 10.2165/00002018-200022010-00002
GOLDSTEIN LB, 1998, RESTORATIVE NEUROLOG
GOLDSTEIN LB, 1993, J NEURAL TRANSP PLAS, V4, P175
Goldstein LB, 1999, REV NEUROL-FRANCE, V155, P731
Goldstein LB, 1997, PHARMACOL BIOCHEM BE, V58, P1151, DOI 10.1016/S0091-3057(97)00324-9
GOLDSTEIN LB, 1988, ANN NEUROL, V22, P159
Grade C, 1998, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V79, P1047, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(98)90169-1
Greener J., 2001, COCHRANE DB SYST REV, DOI [10.1002/14651858.CD000424/abstract, DOI 10.1002/14651858.CD000424]
GROTTA JC, 1987, NEW ENGL J MED, V317, P1505, DOI 10.1056/NEJM198712103172405
Gupta SR, 1995, NEUROLOGY, V45, P2170
GUPTA SR, 1992, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V73, P373, DOI 10.1016/0003-9993(92)90012-L
GUSTAFSON Y, 1995, DRUG AGING, V7, P298
HACKE W, 1995, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V274, P1017, DOI 10.1001/jama.274.13.1017
HAMM RJ, 1993, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V1, P223, DOI 10.1016/0926-6410(93)90006-Q
Helmuth L, 2003, SCIENCE, V299, P1300, DOI 10.1126/science.299.5611.1300
HENDRY SHC, 1987, J NEUROSCI, V7, P1503
HERNANDEZ TD, 1994, BRAIN RES, V635, P300, DOI 10.1016/0006-8993(94)91451-6
Hillis A., 2001, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P397
HOVDA DA, 1984, BRAIN RES, V298, P358, DOI 10.1016/0006-8993(84)91437-9
Huber W, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P245, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90028-9
Huber W, 1999, PHARMACOPSYCHIATRY, V32, P38, DOI 10.1055/s-2007-979235
Hughes JD, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P96, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2223
Jacobs DH, 1996, NEUROCASE, V2, P83
JACOBS KM, 1991, SCIENCE, V251, P944, DOI 10.1126/science.2000496
Jambaque I, 1998, J CHILD NEUROL, V13, P296
JENKINS WM, 1987, PROG BRAIN RES, V71, P241
Johansson BB, 2000, STROKE, V31, P223
Kent TA, 1999, J NEUROSCI RES, V55, P357, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-4547(19990201)55:3<357::AID-JNR11>3.0.CO;2-W
Kessler J, 2000, STROKE, V31, P2112
Kilgard MP, 1998, SCIENCE, V279, P1714, DOI 10.1126/science.279.5357.1714
Koller G, 2003, NEUROPSYCHOBIOLOGY, V48, P87, DOI 10.1159/000072883
Kondziolka D, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V55, P565
Kondziolka D, 2002, J CLIN NEUROSCI, V9, P225, DOI 10.1054/jocn.2001.1043
Kondziolka Douglas, 2003, Phys Med Rehabil Clin N Am, V14, pS153, DOI 10.1016/S1047-9651(02)00057-8
LAZARUS LW, 1992, J CLIN PSYCHIAT, V53, P447
Lecours A. R., 1983, APHASIOLOGY
LIPSEY JR, 1984, LANCET, V1, P297
LINN L, 1947, ARCH NEURO PSYCHIATR, V58, P357
Lutsep H, 2001, Curr Opin Investig Drugs, V2, P1732
LYETH BG, 1992, BRAIN RES, V569, P281, DOI 10.1016/0006-8993(92)90640-U
MACKLIS JD, 1993, J NEUROSCI, V13, P3848
MacLennan D. L., 1991, CLIN APHASIOL, V21, P145
McCloskey M., 1989, PSYCHOL LEARN MOTIV, V24, P109
MERZENICH MM, 1984, J COMP NEUROL, V224, P591, DOI 10.1002/cne.902240408
Montanez S, 2000, BRAIN RES, V860, P29, DOI 10.1016/S0006-8993(00)01951-X
MORRIS PLP, 1992, MED J AUSTRALIA, V157, P239
Mula M, 2003, NEUROLOGY, V60, P1104
Mulrow C. D., 1998, SYSTEMATIC REV SYNTH
Neville HJ, 1998, CURR OPIN NEUROBIOL, V8, P254, DOI 10.1016/S0959-4388(98)80148-7
Nudo RJ, 1999, REV NEUROL, V155, P713
Nudo RJ, 1996, SCIENCE, V272, P1791, DOI 10.1126/science.272.5269.1791
OLSON L, 1994, J NEUROL, V242, P12
Orgogozo JM, 1999, PHARMACOPSYCHIATRY, V32, P25, DOI 10.1055/s-2007-979233
Pashek GV, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P179, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00259-1
PETERSEN RC, 1977, PSYCHOPHARMACOLOGY, V52, P283, DOI 10.1007/BF00426713
PORCH B, 1985, Society for Neuroscience Abstracts, V11, P52
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V1
ROBINSON RG, 1975, NATURE, V255, P332, DOI 10.1038/255332a0
ROBINSON RG, 1980, BRAIN RES, V181, P202, DOI 10.1016/0006-8993(80)91271-8
Robinson RG, 2000, AM J PSYCHIAT, V157, P351, DOI 10.1176/appi.ajp.157.3.351
Robinson RG, 1998, CLIN NEUROPSYCHIATRY
ROBINSON RG, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P81, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.1.81
Rocamora N, 1996, J NEUROSCI, V16, P4411
SABE L, 1992, NEUROLOGY, V42, P1637
Sackett D, 2000, EVIDENCE BASED MED P
SAIJA A, 1988, Journal of Neurotrauma, V5, P161, DOI 10.1089/neu.1988.5.161
SARNO MT, 1972, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V15, P42
Schallert T, 1992, PHYS MED REHABIL, V6, P375
SHERMAN SJ, 2003, BEHAV NEUROSCI, V11, P526
Singh A, 1998, CAN J PSYCHIAT, V43, P921
SMALL SL, 1994, STROKE, V25, P1282
Small SL, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P227, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2256
SMALL SL, 2001, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V3, P335
Snyder EY, 1997, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V94, P11663, DOI 10.1073/pnas.94.21.11663
STARKSTEIN SE, 1989, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V154, P170, DOI 10.1192/bjp.154.2.170
STARKSTEIN SE, 1991, J NEUROPSYCH CLIN N, V3, P276
Stroemer RP, 1998, STROKE, V29, P2381
STROEMER RP, 1995, STROKE, V26, P2135
Taffe MA, 1999, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V8, P203, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(99)00021-X
Tanaka Y, 1997, LANCET, V350, P116, DOI 10.1016/S0140-6736(05)61820-X
*TASK FORC DSM IV, 1994, DIAGN STAT MAN MENT, V4
MARLER JR, 1995, NEW ENGL J MED, V333, P1581
Tsz-Ming C., 2001, J NEUROPSYCHIATRY CL, V13, P140
van de Weg FB, 1999, CLIN REHABIL, V13, P268
VERNON M W, 1991, Drugs and Aging, V1, P17
WALKERBATSON D, 1995, STROKE, V26, P2254
Walker-Batson D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P252, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2262
Walker-Batson D, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P137
WEST R, 1965, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V8, P57
WHITEHOUSE PJ, 1981, ANN NEUROL, V10, P122, DOI 10.1002/ana.410100203
Wong ICK, 2000, DRUG SAFETY, V23, P35, DOI 10.2165/00002018-200023010-00003
Xerri C, 1998, J NEUROPHYSIOL, V79, P2119
Yu AJ, 2002, NEURAL NETWORKS, V15, P719, DOI 10.1016/S0893-6080(02)00058-8
Zhang WR, 1999, BRAIN RES, V842, P211, DOI 10.1016/S0006-8993(99)01818-1
Zlokovic BV, 1997, NEUROSURGERY, V40, P805, DOI 10.1097/00006123-199704000-00028
NR 136
TC 15
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 473
EP 492
DI 10.1080/02687030444000156
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200006
ER
PT J
AU Fossett, TRD
McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Rubinsky, H
Nixon, S
Hula, W
Brady, J
AF Fossett, TRD
McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Rubinsky, H
Nixon, S
Hula, W
Brady, J
TI Assessing the validity of multiple-choice questions for RAPP story
comprehension
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID SENTENCE READING-COMPREHENSION; APHASIA; ADULTS; DISCOURSE
AB Background: Passage dependency (PD) is a measure of how much information is required to answer test questions based only on information provided in the relevant text (Tuiman, 1974). Prior learning, information included in other test questions or responses, and the ability to eliminate less plausible or irrelevant foils are all factors that may affect PD. The PD of the multiple-choice questions for the auditory story comprehension task in the RAPP software environment has yet to be established.
Aims: The purpose of this experiment was to investigate the validity of newly developed multiple-choice comprehension questions for the story comprehension tasks used in the RAPP software environment.
Methods & Procedures: Participants were 40 young adults without speech or language impairment, 20 of whom heard each of 12 stimulus stories and answered 10 multiple-choice questions with 5 response choices, and 20 who answered the multiple-choice questions but were not exposed to the stimulus stories. Questions concerned information about stated and implied main ideas and details presented in the stories. Based on four pre-determined story forms (three stories each), analyses examined the questions' validity in terms of their PD compared to chance performance and to a pre-established Passage Dependency Index (PDI) criterion (.60). Significant differences in the PDI and in the percentage of correctly answered questions among predetermined forms were also evaluated. Analyses also examined the PD of questions based on the type of information queried both within and among forms.
Outcomes & Results: Results provide support for the validity of the multiple-choice questions without consideration of the nature of the information queried by them. The percentage of correctly answered questions exceeded chance for all story forms, PDIs met or exceeded the pre-established criterion, there were no significant differences in the PDIs among the four forms and there were no significant differences in the percentage of correctly answered questions among the four forms. There were no significant differences in the PDIs among the four question types by story form or among question types within a form and all PDIs met or exceeded pre-established criteria (except detail implied questions in one form).
Conclusions: These results provide support for the PD of the multiple-choice questions constructed for the four story forms that make up this version of a story-length auditory comprehension task. Results suggest that the questions are not biased relative to the content of the stories and results add to the overall validity of the task.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15232 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Health Syst, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP Fossett, TRD (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15232 USA.
EM fossett@shrs.pitt.edu
CR Brookshire R. H., 1997, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P21, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90033-6
Chapman SB, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P337, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248475
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
Doyle PJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P537
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
McNeil MR, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P815, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000284
NICHOLAS LE, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P358
NICHOLAS LE, 1986, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V51, P82
Thomas CA, 1997, J COMMUN DISORD, V30, P231, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(96)00075-5
TUIMAN J, 1974, READING RES Q, V2, P206
Ulatowska HK, 2001, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V10, P40, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2001/007)
Welland RJ, 2002, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V45, P1175, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2002/095)
NR 14
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 493
EP 519
DI 10.1080/02687030444000066
PG 27
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200007
ER
PT J
AU McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Hula, WD
Rubinsky, HJ
Fossett, TRD
Matthews, CT
AF McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Hula, WD
Rubinsky, HJ
Fossett, TRD
Matthews, CT
TI Using resource allocation theory and dual-task methods to increase the
sensitivity of assessment in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID STORY RETELL PROCEDURE; DIVIDED-ATTENTION; QUANTITATIVE-ANALYSIS;
MULTIPLE RESOURCES; MANUAL TRACKING; PERFORMANCE; INDIVIDUALS; LANGUAGE;
SPEECH; COMPREHENSION
AB Background: Quantifying the severity of language impairment and measuring change in language performance over time are two important objectives in the assessment of aphasia. The notion of cognitive effort as understood from a resource allocation perspective provides a potentially useful complement to traditional constructs employed in aphasia assessment.
Aims: The series of experiments described in this paper used resource allocation theory and dual-task methodology (1) to assess whether a language comprehension task (Story Retell Procedure) and a visual-manual tracking task trade performance under dual-task conditions, and (2) to investigate the potential utility of these methods in clinical assessment of aphasia. In Experiment 1, the validity of a difficulty manipulation of the SRP was investigated. In Experiments 2 and 3, the reliability and validity of the visual-manual tracking task were evaluated. Experiment 4 investigated whether the two tasks trade performance under dual-task conditions.
Methods & Procedures: In Experiment 1, 20 normal participants listened to and retold stories presented by a normal speaker and speakers with mild, moderate, and severe aphasia. Participants' comprehension performance was measured by calculating the amount of information retold per unit time. In Experiment 2, root mean square (RMS) tracking error data were collected under fixed joystick displacement conditions. In Experiment 3, 20 normal participants performed single-task tracking across 12 trials at each of three difficulty levels, and performance was evaluated in terms of RMS error. In Experiment 4, three groups of 20 normal individuals performed the tracking task while listening to stories told by the normal speaker and speakers with aphasia. Story retell performance was evaluated between subjects across three tracking difficulty levels and tracking performance was evaluated within subjects across story difficulty (normal, mild, moderate, and severe aphasia).
Outcomes & Results: The results of Experiments 1-3 supported the reliability and validity of the difficulty manipulations for the story retell and tracking tasks. In Experiment 4, tracking performance was found to vary significantly across story difficulty, with subjects demonstrating better tracking performance while listening to stories told by a mildly aphasic speaker than during stories told by a speaker with moderate aphasia. There was no effect of tracking difficulty on story comprehension as measured by subsequent story retell performance.
Conclusions: The results provide qualified support for both a resource allocation view of language performance in normal individuals and the potential utility of these methods in the assessment of aphasia. These conclusions, however, are mitigated by the finding of only a unidirectional (as opposed to bidirectional) performance trade, and by the fact that the effect of story difficulty on tracking performance was observed across only two levels of aphasia severity.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Ctr Geriatr Res Educ & Clin, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP McNeil, MR (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
EM mcneil@csd.pitt.edu
CR Arvedson J. C., 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P188
Backs RW, 1997, ACTA PSYCHOL, V96, P167, DOI 10.1016/S0001-6918(97)00010-3
Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
Brookshire R. H., 1997, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
BROWN ID, 1978, ERGONOMICS, V21, P221, DOI 10.1080/00140137808931716
Brown SW, 1998, PSYCHOL RES-PSYCH FO, V61, P71, DOI 10.1007/s004260050014
BROWN TL, 1989, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V15, P686
CAMPBELL TF, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P513
DISIMONI FG, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P511
DOLLAGHAN CA, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P582
DOYLE PJ, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P135
DOYLE PJ, 1998, 1 NAT M VA REH RES D
Doyle PJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P537
Erickson RJ, 1996, BRAIN COGNITION, V30, P244, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1996.0016
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
Goodglass H., 2001, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V3rd
GOPHER D, 1982, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V8, P146, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.8.1.146
Granier JP, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P501
Hirst W., 1987, J EXPT PSYCHOL GEN, V116, P63
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
Hula WD, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P523, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000139
ISREAL JB, 1980, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V17, P259, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1980.tb00146.x
Kahneman D., 1973, ATTENTION EFFORT
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LIVELY SE, 1993, J ACOUST SOC AM, V93, P2962, DOI 10.1121/1.405815
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
Matthews G., 1991, HUM PERFORM, V4, P107, DOI 10.1207/s15327043hup0402_2
MCLEOD P, 1977, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V29, P651, DOI 10.1080/14640747708400639
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
McNeil MR, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P815, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000284
MCNEIL MR, 1999, VA REH RES DEV C WAS
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
Murray LL, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P40, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2281
Murray LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P91, DOI 10.1080/026870399402226
Murray LL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P213
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
Murray LL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P401, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248480
NAVON D, 1990, B PSYCHONOMIC SOC, V28, P155
Navon D., 1980, ATTENTION PERFORM, P297
NAVON D, 1984, PSYCHOL REV, V91, P216, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.91.2.216
NAVON D, 1979, PSYCHOL REV, V86, P214, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.86.3.214
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Paul R., 2001, LANGUAGE DISORDERS I
PAYNE DG, 1994, HUM FACTORS, V36, P441
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Rochon E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P193, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2285
ROSENBAUM DA, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V109, P444, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.109.4.444
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
Sarno MT, 1969, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
SCHMIDT R, 1991, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
SCHMIDT RA, 1977, J MOTOR BEHAV, V9, P101, DOI 10.1080/00222895.1977.10735099
SIREVAAG EJ, 1989, ACTA PSYCHOL, V70, P77, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(89)90061-9
Slansky BL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P461, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248484
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
WICKENS C, 1983, SCIENCE, V221, P1080, DOI 10.1126/science.6879207
WICKENS CD, 1976, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V2, P1
Wickens C. D., 1984, VARIETIES ATTENTION, P63
WICKENS CD, 1986, HDB PERCEPTION HUMAN, P1
WICKENS CD, 1977, HUM FACTORS, V9, P365
Wilkinson G. S., 1993, WIDE RANGE ACHIEVEME
NR 62
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 521
EP 542
DI 10.1080/02687030444000138
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200008
ER
PT J
AU Antonucci, SM
Beeson, PM
Rapcsak, SZ
AF Antonucci, SM
Beeson, PM
Rapcsak, SZ
TI Anomia in patients with left inferior temporal lobe lesions
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID SEMANTIC DEMENTIA; OBJECT RECOGNITION; LANGUAGE AREA; IMPAIRMENT;
REGIONS; ACTIVATION; LOBECTOMY; KNOWLEDGE; ATROPHY; ANEMIA
AB Background: Damage to left inferior temporal cortex has been associated with naming deficits resulting either from impaired access to phonological word forms (pure anomia) or from degraded semantic knowledge (semantic anomia). Neuropsychological evidence indicates that pure anomia may follow damage to posterior inferior temporal cortex (BA 37), whereas semantic anomia is associated with damage to more anterior temporal lobe regions (BA 20, 21, 38). By contrast, some investigators have suggested that it is the overall severity of anomia, rather than the nature of the underlying cognitive impairment, that is affected by the anterior extent of the lesion.
Aims: To examine the naming performance of patients with left inferior temporal lobe damage and determine whether anterior extension of the lesion influences the nature and/or the severity of the naming impairment.
Methods & Procedures: Eight participants with focal damage to left inferior temporal cortex completed a battery of language measures that included confrontation naming, semantic processing, and single-word reading and spelling. Degree and type of anomia was examined relative to anterior lesion extension using both visual inspection and statistical analyses.
Outcomes & Results: Naming performance ranged from unimpaired to severely defective, with only two participants demonstrating an additional mild impairment of semantic knowledge. The underlying mechanism of anomia seemed to be degraded access to phonological word forms in all participants, regardless of lesion configuration. The severity of the naming impairment was positively correlated with anterior extension of the lesion towards the temporal pole, although additional analyses suggested that these findings were significantly influenced by participant age. Naming was not correlated with performance on the nonverbal semantic task or any other demographic variable.
Conclusions: The behavioural and neuroanatomical findings provide modest support for the hypothesis that a relationship exists between anterior lesion extension and the severity of concomitant anomia in patients with left inferior temporal lobe damage. The data suggest that such lesions may disconnect relatively preserved semantic knowledge from regions critical for access to phonological word forms. However, additional research is needed to discern to what extent age and individual variability temper these effects.
C1 Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
Univ Arizona, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
So Arizona VA Hlth Care Syst, Tucson, AZ USA.
RP Antonucci, SM (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, POB 210071, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
EM sharonnj@u.arizona.edu
CR ALBERT MS, 1988, PSYCHOL AGING, V3, P173, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.3.2.173
Bell I, 2000, SOUTHERN J PHILOS, V38, P1
BENSON DF, 1979, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V4
BENSON DF, 1985, CLIN NEUROLOGY, V1
Biederman I, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P271, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(96)00075-9
BINDER J, 2001, HDB FUNCTIONAL NEURO, pCH7
BURNSTINE TH, 1990, NEUROLOGY, V40, P966
Damasio H, 1996, NATURE, V381, P810
Damasio H, 1996, NATURE, V380, P499, DOI 10.1038/380499a0
DERENZI E, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P1099
DEsposito M, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P725, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(96)00121-2
Foundas AL, 1998, NEUROCASE, V4, P35, DOI 10.1080/13554799808410605
FREIDMAN L, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P231
Glosser G, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V15, P39, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.15.1.39
Goodglass H., 1993, UNDERSTANDING APHASI
Graham K, 1995, NEUROCASE, V1, P25
Hermann BP, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V13, P3, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.13.1.3
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Ivnik RJ, 1996, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V10, P262, DOI 10.1080/13854049608406689
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Ralph MAL, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V13, P341, DOI 10.1162/08989290151137395
LUDERS H, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P743, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.2.743
MARTIN A, 1995, SCIENCE, V270, P102, DOI 10.1126/science.270.5233.102
Mitrushina M. N., 1999, HDB NORMATIVE DATA N
Moore CJ, 1999, NEUROIMAGE, V10, P181, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1999.0450
Mummery CJ, 2000, ANN NEUROL, V47, P36
Mummery CJ, 1999, BRAIN, V122, P61, DOI 10.1093/brain/122.1.61
Mummery CJ, 1996, P ROY SOC B-BIOL SCI, V263, P989, DOI 10.1098/rspb.1996.0146
Murtha S, 1999, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V11, P399, DOI 10.1162/089892999563508
PIETRINI V, 1988, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V51, P1284, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.51.10.1284
Price CJ, 1996, P ROY SOC B-BIOL SCI, V263, P1501, DOI 10.1098/rspb.1996.0219
RAPCSAK SZ, IN PRESS NEUROLOGY
Raymer AM, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P137, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1786
Rorden C, 2000, BEHAV NEUROL, V12, P191
SAKURAI Y, 1994, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V57, P609, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.57.5.609
Schmolck H, 2002, HIPPOCAMPUS, V12, P520, DOI 10.1002/hipo.10039
Tombaugh TN, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P922, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403773
Vandenberghe R, 1996, NATURE, V383, P254, DOI 10.1038/383254a0
WARRINGTON EK, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P829, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.3.829
Whatmough C., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P143
NR 42
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 543
EP 554
DI 10.1080/02687030444000219
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200009
ER
PT J
AU Wright, HH
Newhoff, M
AF Wright, HH
Newhoff, M
TI Priming auditory comprehension in aphasia: Facilitation and interference
effects
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID CONTEXTUAL INFLUENCES; WORKING-MEMORY; SYNTACTIC COMPREHENSION; SENTENCE
COMPREHENSION; INFERENCE REVISION; TIME-COURSE; DISCOURSE; ADULTS
AB Background: Researchers have shown that adults with aphasia often demonstrate better comprehension for discourse than for single sentences. Investigations have included presenting preceding linguistic context to facilitate comprehension of target sentences in adults with aphasia. Priming paradigms have also been used to investigate sentence and discourse processing in adults with aphasia. In priming studies, significantly faster reaction times to related lexical probes compared to unrelated probes indicate the information activated during processing. However, the possible influence of the lexical probe on participants' comprehension of target sentences is unknown. It has been suggested that linguistic context provides redundant information that may allow the limited processing resources available to adults with aphasia to be adequately distributed to meet task demands; possibly, a related lexical probe, as opposed to other probe types, serves a similar purpose.
Aims: The objective of the current study was to examine the influence of related, incorrect, and neutral lexical probes on comprehension of sentence pairs by participants with aphasia and neurologically intact participants (NI).
Methods & Procedures: A total of 40 adults (20 presented with aphasia, 20 NI) participated in a cross-modal task. Stimuli were sentence pairs that required revision of the interpretation of the first sentence for adequate comprehension to occur. Participants listened to sentence pairs and completed a lexical decision task following each sentence pair. Lexical decisions consisted of target words that represented either the intended (revised) interpretation, initial (incorrect) interpretation, a neutral word (unrelated to the sentence pair's meaning), or a nonword. Following each sentence pair, participants answered four yes/no questions pertaining to the respective sentence pair.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that adults with aphasia and NI participants answered correctly significantly more questions when the lexical probe represented the intended interpretation of the sentence pair as compared to the baseline condition (neutral word). Also, participants missed significantly more questions when the lexical probe represented the initial (incorrect) interpretation as compared to the baseline.
Conclusions: Results of the study indicated that the type of probe presented influenced participants' comprehension of the sentence pairs. It is suggested that the presence of the inference revision target probe allowed participants to overcome limitations in working memory capacity or processing resources available to complete the task. Additionally, the initial inference target probe overextended participants' working memory capacity limits or available processing resources; thus, they did not perform as well during this condition.
C1 Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
San Diego State Univ, San Diego, CA 92182 USA.
RP Wright, HH (reprint author), Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, CHS Bldg,900 S Limestone, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
EM hhwrig2@uky.edu
CR BOYLE M, 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V16, P38
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P21, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90033-6
Cannito MP, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P235, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248410
CANNITO MP, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P38, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90003-9
Caspari I, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P205, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0970
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
GERMANI MJ, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P308, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90103-L
HOUGH MS, 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE IN NEUROLOGICALLY IMPAIRED AND NORMAL AGING ADULTS, P213
HOUGH MS, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P325, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90069-2
Hough MS, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P235, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248467
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kintsch W., 1998, COMPREHENSION PARADI
LaPointe L. L., 1998, READING COMPREHENSIO
LONG DL, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P1456, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.20.6.1456
McNeil M. R., 1981, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V10, P342
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
MIYAKE A, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P651, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252012
MIYAKE A, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P671, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251989
PIERCE RS, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P379, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248539
PIERCE RS, 1985, J COMMUN DISORD, V18, P203, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(85)90021-8
PIERCE RS, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P250
Proctor A, 2000, BRAIN INJURY, V14, P633
Ronnberg J, 1996, SCAND J PSYCHOL, V37, P46, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9450.1996.tb00638.x
TILL RE, 1988, MEM COGNITION, V16, P283, DOI 10.3758/BF03197039
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
WRIGHT HH, IN PRESS BRAIN LANGU
Wright HH, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P226, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2595
NR 27
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 555
EP 565
DI 10.1080/02687030444000192
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200010
ER
PT J
AU Edmonds, LA
Kiran, S
AF Edmonds, LA
Kiran, S
TI Confrontation naming and semantic relatedness judgements in
Spanish/English bilinguals
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID WORD TRANSLATION; ENGLISH; REPRESENTATION; SPANISH; LANGUAGES; SPEAKERS;
MEMORY; BRAIN
AB Background: The results of many current studies on naming in bilingualism have provided converging evidence for a semantic representation common to both languages within a bilingual individual. However, the interaction between lexical access and semantic representation in bilinguals is relatively unclear.
Aims: To further understand this relationship in normal bilingual individuals, we asked the following questions: (1) Is there homogeneity in naming accuracy for both languages across subjects? We predicted that naming accuracy would differ across subjects based on their proficiency levels in each language. (2) After separating subjects into groups based on their proficiency levels (balanced, Spanish dominant, English dominant), is there a difference in their mean ratings of the semantic similarity of word pairs across proficiency groups? According to the mixed model (De Groot, Dannenburg, & van Hell, 1994), it was predicted that similar mean ratings would be observed across all groups.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 23 Spanish/English bilinguals (average age = 35.5 years) completed a confrontation naming task and a semantic relatedness questionnaire in both languages. The same set of stimuli, controlled for various factors, was used for each task in both languages and counterbalanced by language across two sessions. Based on naming performances, participants were assigned to the balanced bilingual (N = 10), English dominant (N = 10), or Spanish dominant (N = 3) group (Kohnert, Hernandez, & Bates, 1998).
Outcomes & Results: Overall English mean correct was 94.29%; Spanish was 88.19%. Significant differences in naming were seen between groups, F(2, 85) = 4.3, p = .01, and within the language dominant groups across subjects (p < .05) and items (p < .05). On the semantic relatedness task, no significant difference was observed between the ratings of word pairs in each language across participants or items in any group.
Conclusions: Despite differences in lexical access, participants in all proficiency groups rated word pairs similarly, indicating a shared semantic representation for both languages. The mixed model (de Groot et al., 1994) can explain the findings for all groups. Results of this study have clinical implications for bilingual aphasic patients. It is imperative to ascertain a patient's pre-morbid language use prior to brain damage in order to gauge pre-morbid proficiencies. Treatment should consider proficiency levels in both languages, with consideration that the strength of connections between each lexicon and from each lexicon to semantic memory may differ.
C1 Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
RP Edmonds, LA (reprint author), Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Jones Commun Bldg,CMA A2-200,Mail Code A1100, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
EM lisaedmonds@mail.utexas.edu
CR *AM SPEECH LANG HE, 1989, OFF MIN NEWSL, V10
*AM SPEECH LANG HE, 1991, 3366101 ASHA
CARAMAZZA A, 1980, CAN J PSYCHOL, V34, P77, DOI 10.1037/h0081016
Chee MWL, 1999, J NEUROSCI, V19, P3050
DEGROOT AMB, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P1001, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.18.5.1001
DEGROOT AMB, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P600, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1029
DUFOUR R, 1995, MEM COGNITION, V23, P166, DOI 10.3758/BF03197219
FRANCES N, 1982, FREQUENCTY ANAL ENGL
Francis WS, 1999, PSYCHOL BULL, V125, P193, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.125.2.193
Goodglass H, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P287, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249534
Hermans D., 1998, BILING-LANG COGN, V1, P213, DOI DOI 10.1017/S1366728998000364
Hernandez AE, 2001, NEUROIMAGE, V14, P510, DOI 10.1006/nimg.2001.0810
Illes J, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V70, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2186
Juilland A., 1964, FREQUENCY DICT SPANI
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KLEIN D, 1995, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V92, P2899, DOI 10.1073/pnas.92.7.2899
Kohnert KJ, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P422, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2001
Kohnert KJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P1400
Kremin H, 2003, BRAIN COGNITION, V53, P243, DOI 10.1016/S0278-2626(03)00119-2
Kroll J. F., 1988, PRACTICAL ASPECTS ME, V2, P389
Kroll J. F., 1990, 31 ANN M PSYCH SOC N
KROLL JF, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P149, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1008
Munoz ML, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V66, P249, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2021
Pallier C, 2001, PSYCHOL SCI, V12, P445, DOI 10.1111/1467-9280.00383
Perani D, 1996, NEUROREPORT, V7, P2439, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199611040-00007
POTTER MC, 1984, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V23, P23, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(84)90489-4
Roberts P. M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P635, DOI DOI 10.1080/02687030244000220
Roberts PM, 1999, J COMMUN DISORD, V32, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(98)00026-4
Roelofs A, 2003, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V18, P175, DOI 10.1080/01690960143000515
Wartenburger I, 2003, NEURON, V37, P159, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(02)01150-9
NR 30
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 567
EP 579
DI 10.1080/02687030444000057
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200011
ER
PT J
AU Hough, MS
AF Hough, MS
TI Generative word fluency skills in adults with Parkinson's disease
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID VERBAL FLUENCY; NOUNS; COMPREHENSION; AGRAMMATISM; DIFFICULTY; DEMENTIA;
PATTERNS; TASKS
AB Background: Studies addressing cognitive function of adults with Parkinson's disease (PD) have revealed inconsistencies relative to language disturbances. Whereas some researchers have observed no evidence to support language dysfunction on semantic/generative naming tasks, others have found that adults with PD display decreased performance on these tasks. Generative naming may be problematic for adults with PD but its usefulness as a predictor for identifying cognitive impairment in this population is unclear.
Aims: The purpose of the investigation was to examine performance of a group of 20 PD individuals and an age-, education-, and gender-matched control group of 20 individuals on generative naming tasks for nouns, verbs, and adjectives. The primary hypothesis was that the adults with PD would demonstrate a deficit in verb generation.
Methods & Procedures: All participants with PD had a diagnosis based on the presence of two of three classic PD signs, bradykinesia, resting tremor, and rigidity, as determined by a neurologist. All participants were native English speakers, had normal or corrected vision, passed a hearing screening, and had no history of developmental disabilities, head injury, or substance abuse. There were no significant differences between groups on premorbid Full Scale IQ or cognitive functioning as measured by the MMSE. The experimental procedure consisted of noun, verb, and adjective fluency tasks. Participants were instructed to name as many exemplars as possible in 60 seconds for each part of speech. Scores were based on total number and percentage of accurate responses.
Outcomes & Results: Both groups produced significantly more nouns than verbs and adjectives. Percentage of accuracy data revealed that: (1) the control group was significantly more accurate than the Parkinson's group; (2) the Parkinson's group was significantly less accurate than controls on adjective generation; and (3) significantly higher accuracy was observed for nouns and verbs than adjectives across groups. Overall word retrieval performance as measured by the Test of Adolescent/Adult Word Finding was significantly related to adjective generation only.
Conclusions: The group with PD exhibited an impairment in adjective generation as compared to controls. Mental representations for adjectives appear to be more multifaceted than representations for nouns and verbs. The increased complexity of semantic networks for adjectives may be vulnerable to the effects of brain damage associated with PD.
C1 E Carolina Univ, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
RP Hough, MS (reprint author), E Carolina Univ, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
EM HoughM@Mail.ecu.edu
CR *ASHA AD HOC COMM, 1992, ASHA, V34, P81
Azuma T, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V11, P488, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.11.4.488
Barbosa ER, 1997, PSYCHIAT CLIN N AM, V20, P769, DOI 10.1016/S0193-953X(05)70344-0
BARONA A, 1984, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V52, P885, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.52.5.885
Barrett AM, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V54, P1258
Bayles K., 1997, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V5, P157
BAYLES KA, 1993, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V15, P547, DOI 10.1080/01688639308402578
Beatty W W, 1989, J Geriatr Psychiatry Neurol, V2, P145, DOI 10.1177/089198878900200305
Colcher A, 1999, MED CLIN N AM, V83, P327, DOI 10.1016/S0025-7125(05)70107-3
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Freed D., 2000, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Goodglass H., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P74
Kim M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P1, DOI 10.1006/brin.2000.2315
Lubinski R., 1997, COMMUNICATION TECHNO, P1
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
MICELI G, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P351, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248937
Piatt AL, 1999, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V21, P435, DOI 10.1076/jcen.21.4.435.885
PIERCE RS, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V22, P339, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90098-1
RASKIN SA, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P95, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90018-H
ROSEBERRYMCKIBB.C, 2000, NEUROLOGICALLY BASED, P411
RUBENSTE.H, 1971, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V10, P57, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(71)80094-4
Savage CR, 1997, PSYCHIAT CLIN N AM, V20, P911, DOI 10.1016/S0193-953X(05)70352-X
SIMPSON G, 1981, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V20, P121
YORKSTON KM, 1997, COMMUNICATION TECHNO, P235
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 27
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 581
EP 588
DI 10.1080/02687030444000101
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200012
ER
PT J
AU Hough, MS
AF Hough, MS
TI Naming and category concept generation in older adults with and without
dementia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; SEMANTIC MEMORY; CATEGORIZATION; ORGANIZATION;
INFORMATION; IMPAIRMENT; KNOWLEDGE; APHASIA; CONTEXT; ERRORS
AB Background: An intact semantic memory system is vital for accurate naming of objects; naming failures exhibited by individuals with dementia have been a means of identifying the nature of the semantic memory impairment. However, naming impairment has also been reported in healthy older adults. Categorisation is a process of concept formation within semantic memory. Category type influences ability to synthesise category concepts. Studies investigating categorisation skills in adults with dementia have revealed deterioration in conceptual knowledge as compared to age-matched healthy cohorts.
Aims: It is hypothesised that normal older adults are impaired at the lexical access stage of word retrieval; those with dementia have deficits in the earlier concept identification stages of word retrieval and lexical access difficulties.
Methods & Procedures: A group of adults with dementia of the Alzheimer's type (DAT) and a group of normal elderly adults were examined on naming and category concept generation tasks relative to accuracy and error types. Participants were 15 adults with DAT and 15 age-, education-, and gender-matched neurologically intact adults. MMSE results supported division of two groups. All participants were native English speakers, literate, with normal hearing. Experimental tasks were the Test of Adolescent/Adult Word Finding (TAWF) and a category concept generation task (CCGT). For the CCGT, participants were presented with four category examples for common and goal-directed categories and instructed to provide a category label. Context vignettes accompanied category examples for half the categories.
Outcomes & Results: For the TAWF, there were no significant group differences for standard scores. Further analysis revealed that: (1) the control group performed significantly poorer on picture naming: nouns than any other subtest; (2) normal controls performed better than the DAT group on all subtests except picture naming: nouns; and (3) the DAT group performed significantly worse on category naming than all other subtests. Analysis of CCGT revealed that: (1) normal controls performed better than the DAT participants on goal-directed categories with context but not without context; (2) performance was higher for goal-directed categories with context for controls only; and (3) performance was higher on common than goal-directed categories without context for controls.
Conclusions: The results indicate that normal older adults are impaired in lexical access; those with DAT have deficits in the earlier conceptual stages of word retrieval in addition to lexical access difficulties. DAT participants especially had difficulty with category naming. The DAT adults showed minimal differences in performance from a no-context to context condition. The findings support previous research that adults with DAT display semantic memory impairments.
C1 E Carolina Univ, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
RP Hough, MS (reprint author), E Carolina Univ, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
EM HoughM@Mail.ecu.edu
CR ALBERT MS, 1988, PSYCHOL AGING, V3, P173, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.3.2.173
*ASHA AD HOC COMM, 1992, ASHA, V34, P81
AU R, 1991, HDB GERIATRIC COMMUN, P293
BARONA A, 1984, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V52, P885, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.52.5.885
BARSALOU L, 1983, MEM COGNITION, V8, P211
BARSALOU LW, 1982, MEM COGNITION, V10, P82, DOI 10.3758/BF03197629
Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
BAYLES KA, 1991, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V3, P166, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1991.3.2.166
BAYLES KA, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P498, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90158-D
BINETTI G, 1995, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V17, P82, DOI 10.1080/13803399508406584
BOWLES NL, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P519
BOWLES NL, 1985, J GERONTOL, V40, P71
CARR TH, 1982, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V8, P757, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.8.6.757
CHAN AS, 1993, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V5, P254, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1993.5.2.254
Dunn LM, 1997, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
EMERY OB, 1989, EXPT AGING RES, V14, P181
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
GOULET P, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P629
HERLITZ A, 1991, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V13, P559, DOI 10.1080/01688639108401071
HODGES JR, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P301, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90104-T
HOUGH MS, 1992, NIH QUAL LIF AG C WA
HOUGH MS, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P335, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249515
HOUGH MS, 1988, THESIS KENT STATE U
HOUGH MS, 1998, ANN CLIN APH C ASH N
HOUGH MS, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P553, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249022
HUFF FJ, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90103-3
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
MEDIN DL, 1984, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V35, P113, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ps.35.020184.000553
MERVIS CB, 1981, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V32, P89, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ps.32.020181.000513
Nicholas M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P184, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0070
ROSCH E, 1975, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V7, P573, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(75)90024-9
ROSCH E, 1975, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V104, P192, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.104.3.192
SHUTTLEWORTH EC, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P222, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90134-4
SOMMERS LM, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P573, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248508
Tulving Endel, 1983, ELEMENTS EPISODIC ME
Ventry I M, 1983, ASHA, V25, P37
NR 37
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 589
EP 597
DI 10.1080/02687030444000110
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200013
ER
PT J
AU Wiener, DA
Connor, LT
Obler, LK
AF Wiener, DA
Connor, LT
Obler, LK
TI Inhibition and auditory comprehension in Wernicke's aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID OLDER ADULTS; INTERFERENCE; INDIVIDUALS; ALLOCATION; ATTENTION; TIME
AB Background: While research findings support the presence of inefficiencies in allocation of attention in individuals with aphasia, the cognitive mechanisms behind these inefficiencies remain unclear. One mechanism that would affect resource allocation for selective processing is an impaired inhibitory mechanism which, when normally functioning, would actively suppress distracting information.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to investigate the cognitive process of inhibition, at the lexical-semantic level of language processing, and its relation to auditory comprehension in Wernicke's aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: The classic Stroop Colour-Word Test was adapted to be applicable for use with an aphasic population. We administered this computerised manual-response, numerical version of the Stroop test to five individuals with Wernicke's aphasia and twelve age- and education-matched non-brain-injured controls. Correlations with Stroop interference examined associations with auditory comprehension as measured by the Token Test and the Complex Ideational Material subtest of the Boston Diagnostic Aphasia Examination.
Outcomes & Results: Analysis of the Stroop reaction time and error percentage data indicated that the interference effect was significantly larger for the participants with Wernicke's aphasia than for the controls, without an accompanying increase in facilitation, reflecting an impairment of inhibition in Wernicke's aphasia. In addition, the magnitude of Stroop interference was significantly positively correlated with the clinical-behavioural symptom of severity of auditory comprehension deficits as measured by the Token Test.
Conclusions: Findings support an impairment in inhibition at the lexical-semantic level of language processing in Wernicke's aphasia, reflecting the inability to effectively ignore the automatically evoked, distracting stimulus. The significant correlation between the Stroop interference effect and the severity of auditory comprehension deficits suggests that at least part of the attentional difficulties contributing to the striking reductions in auditory comprehension in this population can be attributed to impaired inhibition. Our findings expand upon our understanding of resource allocation in aphasia and reinforce our need to clinically assess and treat reductions in attention for maximised rehabilitation outcome.
C1 Boston Univ, Sch Med, Boston, MA 02118 USA.
Washington Univ, Sch Med, St Louis, MO USA.
CUNY Grad Sch & Univ Ctr, New York, NY 10036 USA.
RP Wiener, DA (reprint author), VA Med Ctr, Harold Goodglass Aphasia Res Ctr, 12A,150 S Huntington Ave, Boston, MA 02130 USA.
EM WienerDobn@aol.com
CR BALOTA DA, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V18, P485, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.18.2.485
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P301, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90023-2
BORADBENT DE, 1970, ATTENTION CONT THEOR
Cohen J., 1988, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA, V2nd
COHEN J, 1993, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V25, P257, DOI 10.3758/BF03204507
Earles JL, 1997, AGING NEUROPSYCHOL C, V4, P45, DOI 10.1080/13825589708256635
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
FOX LA, 1971, J EXP PSYCHOL, V91, P59, DOI 10.1037/h0031850
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Hasher L., 1988, PSYCHOL LEARNING MOT, V22
MACLEOD CM, 1991, PSYCHOL BULL, V109, P163, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.109.2.163
Maher B. A., 1983, PROGR EXPT PERSONALI, V12
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
MESULAM MM, 1981, ANN NEUROL, V10, P309, DOI 10.1002/ana.410100402
MILBERG W, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P33, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.1.33
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
OBLER LK, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V6, P318, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90065-2
Salthouse T. A., 1995, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V50, P297, DOI 10.1093/geronb/50B.6.P297
Sarno MT, 1969, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
SHOR RE, 1971, J GEN PSYCHOL, V85, P187
Spreen O., 1969, NEUROSENSORY CTR COM
Stroop JR, 1935, J EXP PSYCHOL, V18, P643, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.121.1.15
SULLIVAN MP, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V9, P537, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.9.4.537
TIPPER SP, 1985, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V37, P571
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
Verhaeghen P, 1998, PSYCHOL AGING, V13, P120, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.13.1.120
WIENER DA, 2000, THESIS CITY U NEW YO
WINDES JD, 1968, J EXP PSYCHOL, V78, P318, DOI 10.1037/h0026289
NR 28
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 599
EP 609
DI 10.1080/02687030444000228
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200014
ER
PT J
AU Hallowell, B
Douglas, N
Wertz, RT
Kim, S
AF Hallowell, B
Douglas, N
Wertz, RT
Kim, S
TI Control and description of visual function in research on aphasia and
related disorders
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID ADULTS; SUBJECT
AB Background: Most experimental and assessment tasks in studies of neurogenic language disorders rely on visual information processing. Failure to describe and/or control for visual function may lead to invalid data collection and interpretation.
Aims: An empirical study was initiated to describe current practice and needs for improvement in the description of and control for visual acuity, colour perception, visual fields, visual attention, and oculomotor functions.
Methods & Procedures: Data were collected from all articles (N = 668) on aphasia (subsequent to left hemisphere damage) and related language disorders (subsequent to TBI and right hemisphere damage) in adults published during a 10-year period in each of 17 journals.
Outcomes & Results: Few authors control for or describe even basic aspects of vision.
Conclusions: Specific needs and strategies for improvement are discussed. The need for improved continuing education concerning means of screening for various forms of visual function is highlighted. Researchers are encouraged to employ basic screenings corresponding to the visual functions implemented in their assessment and experimental tasks for a given study. Improved feedback to manuscript authors and those seeking grant funding regarding appropriate control for and description of visual function is advocated.
C1 Ohio Univ, Sch Hearing Speech & Language Sci, Athens, OH 45701 USA.
Munroe Reg Med Ctr, Ocala, FL USA.
Tennessee Valley Healthcare Syst, Nashville, TN USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, VA Med Ctr, Nashville, TN USA.
RP Hallowell, B (reprint author), Ohio Univ, Sch Hearing Speech & Language Sci, W231 Grover Ctr, Athens, OH 45701 USA.
EM hallowel@ohiou.edu
CR BROOKSHIRE RH, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V48, P342
CHANG DF, 1995, GEN OPHTHALMOLOGY, P2
DENES G, 1982, BRAIN, V105, P542
Edman JA, 1987, CLIN REHABIL, V1, P273, DOI 10.1177/026921558700100403
EGGERS HM, 1995, GEN OPHTHALMOLOGY, P208
ERIE CJ, 1992, ESSENTAILS OPHTHALMO, P4
Fisk GD, 2002, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V83, P469, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2002.31179
Harrington D. O., 1990, VISUAL FIELDS
HOHBERGER GG, 1992, ESSENTIALS OPHTHALMO, P254
Leonard CL, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P406
LIESEGANG TJ, 1992, ESSENTIALS OPHTHALMO, P4
LINCOLN NB, 1991, TOP GERIATR REHABIL, V7, P25
Lubinski R, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P103, DOI 10.1080/026990597123692
Myers P., 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
Myers PS, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P870
NEWELL FW, 1992, OPHTHALMOLOGY PRINCI, P143
RIDDOCH MJ, 1991, NEGLECT PERIPHERAL D, P369
SEGAL ES, 1996, PRACTICAL HDB CLIN, P3
SKA B, 1996, J SPEECH LANGUAGE PA, V20, P101
SKENES LL, 1985, J COMMUN DISORD, V18, P461, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(85)90033-4
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Weale R. A, 1963, AGING EYE
WHITBOURNE SK, 1996, PRACTICAL HDB CLIN G, P3
WICKSTROM S, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V50, P282
WILSON JTL, 1992, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V7, P29, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199206000-00006
Ylvisaker Mark, 1992, Seminars in Speech and Language, V13, P239, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064200
NR 26
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 611
EP 623
DI 10.1080/02687030444000084
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200015
ER
PT J
AU Hickey, EM
Bourgeois, MS
Olswang, LB
AF Hickey, EM
Bourgeois, MS
Olswang, LB
TI Effects of training volunteers to converse with nursing home residents
with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID PARTNERS; COMMUNICATION; ADULTS
AB Background: Nursing home residents with aphasia often experience social isolation. Providing trained conversation partners is one way to combat this problem, but evidence is needed for the effects of training conversation partners for persons with aphasia. The use of four college student volunteers was based on evidence for the benefits of intergenerational service-learning programmes.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to examine the effects of training four college student volunteers (SVs) to use multi-modality communication with two nursing home residents with Broca's aphasia (RAs).
Methods & Procedures: An ABA multiple baseline across subjects (SVs) and partners (RAs) design was used to examine the effects of the training programme in probe conversations. Each RA interacted with two SVs. Training consisted of five steps, with a criterion to move through each step of the programme, and to withdraw training. Thorough treatment fidelity procedures were used to ensure consistent training across subjects.
Outcomes & Results: The SVs demonstrated marked increases in multi-modality communication, with concomitant increases in RAs' comprehensibility. Sequential analyses revealed that multi-modality communication is more likely than speech only to elicit RAs' comprehensible responses, with a stronger effect after training. Social validity ratings demonstrated that the changes in the quality of the conversations were clinically significant.
Conclusions: This study revealed positive effects of training conversation partners of persons with aphasia to use multi-modality communication. Intergenerational service-learning programmes are one viable method to decrease social isolation and to increase opportunities for nursing home residents with aphasia to reveal their communicative competence.
C1 Dalhousie Univ, Halifax, NS, Canada.
Florida State Univ, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
Univ Washington, Seattle, WA 98195 USA.
RP Hickey, EM (reprint author), Sch Human Commun Disorders, 5599 Fenwick St, Halifax, NS B3H 1R2, Canada.
EM ehickey@dal.ca
CR Arkin SM, 1996, AM J ALZHEIMERS DIS, V11, P12, DOI 10.1177/153331759601100103
Bakeman R, 1997, OBSERVING INTERACTIO
BILLINGSLEY F, 1980, BEHAV ASSESS, V2, P229
Booth S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P283
HERSEN M, 1976, SINGLE CASE EXPT DES
HICKEY EM, 1998, ANN CLIN APH C ASH
HICKEY EM, 2000, TRAINING USE MULTIMO
HICKEY EM, 2000, THESIS U WASHINGTON
Hollenbeck A., 1978, OBSERVING BEHAVIOR, VII, P79
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kazdin A. E., 1982, SINGLE CASE RES DESI
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
MCGOWAN TG, 1994, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V39, P321, DOI 10.2190/B5RL-36EQ-525K-9L7L
MILLER JF, 1998, BASIC SALT PROGRAM W
MONCHER FJ, 1991, CLIN PSYCHOL REV, V11, P247, DOI 10.1016/0272-7358(91)90103-2
OLSWANG LB, 1998, S TREATM EFF RES COM
Raven J., 1938, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Raven J.C., 1960, GUIDE STANDARD PROGR
SIMMONS N, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P106
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P807
TAPP J, 1996, MOOSES
NR 24
TC 22
Z9 23
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 625
EP 637
DI 10.1080/02687030444000093
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200016
ER
PT J
AU Georgeadis, AC
Brennan, DM
Barker, LM
Baron, CR
AF Georgeadis, AC
Brennan, DM
Barker, LM
Baron, CR
TI Telerehabilitation and its effect on story retelling by adults with
neurogenic communication disorders
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 33rd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2003
CL Orcas Isl, WA
ID TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJURY; COGNITIVE FUNCTION; SPEECH; TELEHEALTH;
ATTENTION; PATHOLOGY
AB Background: Telerehabilitation (telerehab) is the method of using technology to provide rehabilitation services at a distance. The concept of delivering remote speech-language pathology (SLP) services using telerehab tools and techniques has been acknowledged for more than 25 years. While research has demonstrated videoconference-based telerehab to be a feasible, effective, and appropriate method for providing SLP services to a broad range of clients, studies have been primarily limited to technical feasibility or demonstration projects with relatively small sample sizes. There is an expressed need in the literature for controlled, randomised studies that track both quantitative outcomes of services delivered via telerehab as well as qualitative measures of satisfaction.
Aims: The purpose of the study was to measure performance of adults with acquired brain injury on a standardised SLP assessment conducted in both face-to-face (FF) and videoconference-based telerehab (T) settings. The objective was to determine if performance on the assessment, or subjective feedback from the participants, differed between settings.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 40 participants with a recent onset of brain injury--12 with traumatic brain injury (TBI), 14 with a left cerebrovascular accident (LCVA), and 14 with a right cerebrovascular accident (RCVA)--were enrolled in the study. Participants were asked to retell stories from the Story Retell Procedure (Doyle, McNeil, Spencer, Goda, Cotrell, & Lustig, 1998) in both FF and T settings. Responses from the stories were scored by the clinician using the percent information unit scoring metric (McNeil, Doyle, Fossett, Park, & Goda, 2001). Additionally, a survey tool was used to probe each participant's level of satisfaction and willingness to use telerehab services in the future.
Outcomes & Results: Across all participants, and within the TBI, LCVA, and RCVA groups, no significant difference in performance between the FF and T settings was found. Feedback from survey data demonstrated a high level of acceptance of the T setting. When compared to participants with LCVA or RCVA, however, participants with TBI were significantly more likely to show a lack of interest in future videoconferencing use.
Conclusions: Story-retelling performance by brain-injured adults was not affected by setting. Additionally, participants expressed a high level of interest in using videoconferencing in the future. These findings offer additional support for telerehab as a viable alternative mode of SLP treatment for survivors of stroke and TBI. Further research is needed to investigate the utility of telerehab for delivering services to clients with attention impairments as well as those with severe cognitive-communicative impairment, dysarthria, or aphasia.
C1 Natl Rehabil Hosp, Speech Language Pathol Serv, Washington, DC 20010 USA.
RP Georgeadis, AC (reprint author), Natl Rehabil Hosp, Speech Language Pathol Serv, 102 Irving St NW, Washington, DC 20010 USA.
EM amy.c.georgeadis@medstar.net
CR APPEL PR, 2002, P STAT SCI C TEL APP, P23
Ball C, 1997, J Telemed Telecare, V3, P126, DOI 10.1258/1357633971931020
Ball C, 1998, J TELEMED TELECARE, V4, P36, DOI 10.1258/1357633981931362
Brennan David, 2002, Top Stroke Rehabil, V8, P71
BRENNAN D, IN PRESS TELEMEDICIN
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
BUCKLEY KM, 2002, P STAT SCI C TEL APP, P35
Burnham AK, 1999, ENERG FUEL, V13, P1, DOI 10.1021/ef9800765
Cicerone KD, 2002, BRAIN INJURY, V16, P185, DOI 10.1080/02699050110103959
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
Duffy JR, 1997, MAYO CLIN PROC, V72, P1116
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Halstead Lauro S, 2003, Adv Skin Wound Care, V16, P91, DOI 10.1097/00129334-200303000-00010
Hill A, 2002, J TELEMED TELECARE, V8, P187, DOI 10.1258/135763302320272158
Kully D, 2000, J TELEMED TELECARE, V6, P39, DOI 10.1258/1357633001935509
Mashima P A, 1999, J Healthc Inf Manag, V13, P71
Mateer CA, 1996, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V11, P1
McCullough A, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P321
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
Menon AS, 2001, J NERV MENT DIS, V189, P399, DOI 10.1097/00005053-200106000-00009
SAVARD L, 2002, COMB SECT M AM PHYS
Savard L, 2003, NEUROREHABILITATION, V18, P93
Schopp L H, 2000, J Telemed Telecare, V6 Suppl 1, pS146
TRAN BQ, 2003, COMB SECT M AM PHYS
TREPAGNIER C, 2002, P STAT SCI C TEL APP, P42
Vaughn G R, 1976, ASHA, V18, P13
Vesmarovich S, 1999, Adv Wound Care, V12, P264
Werts R, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P117
WERTZ RT, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P195, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248591
WHITE MW, 2003, ANN C AM OCC THER AS
NR 30
TC 26
Z9 26
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUL
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 5-7
BP 639
EP 652
DI 10.1080/02687030444000075
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 817NC
UT WOS:000221183200017
ER
PT J
AU Croteau, C
Vychytil, AM
Larfeuil, C
Le Dorze, G
AF Croteau, C
Vychytil, AM
Larfeuil, C
Le Dorze, G
TI "Speaking for" behaviours in spouses of people with aphasia: A
descriptive study of six couples in an interview situation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONVERSATION; STRATEGIES; PARTICIPATION; PARTNERS; MODEL
AB Background : People with aphasia and their spouses frequently meet professionals to discuss health-related issues. In this situation, which is often in an interview form, various strategies may be employed by spouses to facilitate communication. One of these strategies is "speaking for" the person with aphasia.
Aims : (1) To identify the presence of "speaking for" behaviour, to measure the frequency of the spouses' "speaking for" and "rapid speaking for" behaviours, and to describe what preceded and followed these behaviours for all participating couples. (2) To describe each individual couple's patterns of "speaking for" in relationship to the members' perceptions of conversations before and after the onset of aphasia.
Methods & Procedures : Six couples were studied in an interactive situation. Both the spouse with aphasia and the non-aphasic spouse took turns being asked questions in a systematic way. Each member also participated individually in a semi-structured interview aiming to obtain information on perceptions of communication before and since the aphasia.
Outcomes & Results : Analysis of three-way conversations revealed that all of the spouses without aphasia in this study used some "speaking for" behaviours. However, there was great variability in the frequency of the behaviours within couples. For some couples, "speaking for" the person with aphasia may reduce that person's ability or willingness to participate in conversations. The findings from the semi-structured interviews suggest that "speaking for" a person with aphasia may be an integral behaviour for some couples that is consistent with pre-stroke interaction patterns.
Conclusions : It is important to consider the "speaking for" behaviour, the impact of this behaviour, and the pre-stroke interaction pattern when helping couples adjust to the consequences of aphasia.
C1 Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RP Croteau, C (reprint author), Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, CP 6128, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RI Le Dorze, Guylaine/A-1790-2014
CR Aries E, 1996, MEN WOMEN INTERACTIO
ARIES E, 1987, HUMAN HELPLESSNESS T, P149
Brinton B, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P1193
FAERCH C, 1984, LANG LEARN, V34, P45
Ferguson A, 1996, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V10, P55, DOI 10.3109/02699209608985161
FERGUSON A, 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P299
Goffman E, 1967, INTERACTION RITUAL E
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Goodwin C., 1981, CONVERSATIONAL ORG I
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
Holland AL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P844, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249578
KEENAN Elinor Ochs, 1976, SUBJECT TOPIC, P336
Kent Raymond D., 1992, ACOUSTIC ANAL SPEECH
KLIPPI A, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P373, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248538
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Lock S, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P25
MACWHINNEY B, 1988, CHAT MANUAL TRANSCRI
MANZO JF, 1995, SOCIOL HEALTH ILL, V17, P307, DOI 10.1111/1467-9566.ep10933323
MILROY L, 1992, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V6, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699209208985517
Nespoulous J. L., 1986, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL T
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V8, P62
Oelschlaeger ML, 2000, J COMMUN DISORD, V33, P205, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00019-8
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P459, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985238
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P971, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249464
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
SILVAST M, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248540
SimmonsMackie NN, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P540
Stewart D.W., 1990, FOCUS GROUP THEORY P
WEBSTER EJ, 1982, CLIN APH C P MIN, P64
Whitworth A, 1997, CONVERSATION ANAL PR
Wilkinson IAG, 1998, READ RES QUART, V33, P144, DOI 10.1598/RRQ.33.2.1
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
NR 32
TC 18
Z9 18
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 4
BP 291
EP 312
DI 10.1080/02687030344000616
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 814FG
UT WOS:000220960000001
ER
PT J
AU Togher, L
McDonald, S
Code, C
Grant, S
AF Togher, L
McDonald, S
Code, C
Grant, S
TI Training communication partners of people with traumatic brain injury: A
randomised controlled trial
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLOSED HEAD-INJURY; SOCIAL-SKILLS; APHASIA; ADULTS; CONVERSATION;
DISCOURSE; REHABILITATION; INDIVIDUALS; IMPAIRMENT; VOLUNTEERS
AB Background : Communication disorders after traumatic brain injury (TBI) are difficult to modify due to the cognitive limitation imposed by frontal lobe damage. As an alternative approach, this paper describes a training programme designed to improve communication partners' responsiveness to people with TBI during routine service inquiries with a community agency.
Aims : To evaluate the effectiveness of a training programme aimed at improving the communication of police officers during service encounters with people with TBI.
Methods & Procedures : A total of 20 police officers were randomly assigned to two groups (training or control). Prior to the 6-week training programme, participants with TBI made a routine telephone inquiry to the police officers. Training focused on specific aspects of telephone inquiries previously documented to be aberrant in service encounters of people with TBI. Following the training programme, police subjects received another telephone service inquiry. Service encounters were transcribed and analysed using generic structure potential analysis.
Outcome & Results : Comparison of pre- and post-training measures indicated that trained police had learned strategies to successfully establish the nature of the inquiry, provide a clear answer to the inquiry, and ensure appropriate leave taking, resulting in more efficient, focused interactions in the post-training telephone calls. People with TBI also altered their communication in the post-training calls, with reduced episodes of unrelated utterances and an increased proportion of the interaction devoted to completing the service encounter. This appeared to be in response to the communicative options they were given.
Conclusions : This study demonstrates the efficacy of an approach based on training communication partners rather than people with TBI themselves. Training communication partners led to the provision of appropriate feedback, support, and structure of everyday interactions. Service encounters account for a significant amount of everyday communication exchanges, therefore training service providers has the potential to have a significant impact on the communicative effectiveness of people with TBI.
C1 Univ Sydney, Fac Hlth Sci, Sch Commun Sci & Disorders, Lidcombe, NSW 2199, Australia.
Univ NSW, Kensington, NSW, Australia.
Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
Univ Exeter, Exeter EX4 4QJ, Devon, England.
Hanse Inst Adv Study, Delmenhorst, Germany.
RP Togher, L (reprint author), Univ Sydney, Fac Hlth Sci, Sch Commun Sci & Disorders, POB 170, Lidcombe, NSW 2199, Australia.
EM l.togher@fhs.usyd.edu.au
RI McDonald, Skye/G-4118-2014
OI McDonald, Skye/0000-0003-0723-6094
CR Boles L, 1998, J COMMUN DISORD, V31, P261, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(98)00005-7
Booth S, 1999, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V34, P291, DOI 10.1080/136828299247423
Booth S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P283
Bourgeois MS, 2001, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V17, P196
BRAUNLINGMCMORROW D, 1986, J REHABIL, V52, P39
Brennan M., 1994, CLEAR TALK POLICE RE
BROTHERTON FA, 1988, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V69, P827
BURGIO L, 2000, GERONTOLOGIST, V41, P449
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROLOGICA
Carnevale GJ, 1996, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V11, P27, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199602000-00005
Carney N, 1999, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V14, P277, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199906000-00008
CHAPMAN SB, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P442
Coelho CA, 1991, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V6, P92, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199106000-00011
Coelho CA, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, pS5
Cohen J., 1988, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA, V2nd
EGGINS S, 1997, ANAL CONVERSATION
FLANAGAN S, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P321, DOI 10.3109/02699059509005773
Frattali C M, 1993, Disabil Rehabil, V15, P1
GAJAR A, 1984, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V17, P353, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1984.17-353
Godfrey HPD, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P433
Halliday M. A., 1994, INTRO FUNCTIONAL GRA, V3rd
Hartley LL., 1995, COGNITIVE COMMUNICAT
Hasan Ruqaiya, 1985, LANGUAGE CONTEXT TEX
Helfenstien D. A., 1982, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V4, P139
Holland D, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P993, DOI 10.1080/026990598121918
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
JENNETT B, 1977, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V40, P291, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.40.3.291
JOHNSON DA, 1987, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V26, P289
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
LEWIS FD, 1988, BEHAV THER, V19, P203, DOI 10.1016/S0005-7894(88)80043-1
Lock S, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P25
Luiselli JK, 2000, INT J OFFENDER THER, V44, P647, DOI 10.1177/0306624X00446002
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
MARSH NV, 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P175
Martin J. R., 1992, ENGLISH TEXT SYSTEM
MCDONALD S, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P28, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1003
McDonald S., 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD
MCDONALD S, 2003, PSYCHOL INTERACTION, V13, P47
McDonald S, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P88, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1846
NEWHOFF M, 1981, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V11, P234
*NHIF, 1989, ED MAN WHAT ED NEED
OLVER J, 2001, 6 ANN BRAIN INJ REH
Olver JH, 1996, BRAIN INJURY, V10, P841, DOI 10.1080/026990596123945
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Poynton C., 1985, LANGUAGE GENDER MAKI
PRUTTING CA, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P105
MENTIS M, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P583
Ripich D. N., 1999, CLIN GERONTOLOGIST, V21, P37
RUSSELL WR, 1961, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V5, P4
Schiffrin Deborah, 1987, DISCOURSE MARKERS
SCHLOSS PJ, 1985, APPL RES MENT RETARD, V6, P269, DOI 10.1016/0270-3092(85)90001-3
SIMMONS N, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P106
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P807
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
SMITH L, 1986, B COLLEGE SPEECH THE, V409, P10
SNOW P, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248210
STRATTON MC, 1994, BRAIN INJURY, V8, P631, DOI 10.3109/02699059409151016
Szekeres Shirley F., 1992, Seminars in Speech and Language, V13, P293, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064204
Tate RL, 1998, AUST NZ J PUBL HEAL, V22, P419, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-842X.1998.tb01406.x
Togher L, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P559
TOGHER L, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P491
Togher L, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P709
Togher L, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P491, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248486
Togher L, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P169, DOI 10.1080/026990597123629
Wilkinson IAG, 1998, READ RES QUART, V33, P144, DOI 10.1598/RRQ.33.2.1
Wood RL, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P491, DOI 10.1080/713802183
World Health Organization, 2001, INT CLASSIFICATION F
Worrall L, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P911
Ylvisaker M., 1998, TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJU
YVISAKER M, 1993, STAFF DEV CLIN INTER, P57
NR 70
TC 36
Z9 40
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 4
BP 313
EP 335
DI 10.1080/02687030344000535
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 814FG
UT WOS:000220960000002
ER
PT J
AU Ross, KB
Wertz, RT
AF Ross, KB
Wertz, RT
TI Accuracy of formal tests for diagnosing mild aphasia: An application of
evidence-based medicine
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID USERS GUIDES; ARTICLE
AB Background : Normal elderly and mildly aphasic individuals may exhibit similar impairments in language comprehension and expression. Accurate differential diagnosis is essential for providing a prognosis, focusing treatment, and justifying reimbursement for services.
Aims : We employed the principles of evidence-based medicine to examine the accuracy of two general language tests (Porch Index of Communicative Ability; Western Aphasia Battery) and two functional communication tests (Communication Activities of Daily Living; American Speech-Language-Hearing Association's Functional Assessment of Communication Skills for Adults) for diagnosing mild aphasia, beyond individual clinical expertise.
Methods & Procedures : The test performance of 10 mildly aphasic patients was compared with that of 10 non-brain-injured (NBI) adults. An operational definition of aphasia was applied as a reference standard for correct diagnosis. Pre-test and post-test diagnostic probabilities were compared, using the likelihood ratio as an index of accuracy.
Outcomes & Results : In our sample, obtained positive likelihood ratios ranged from 3.00 to 6000.60, and the post-test probability of a correct positive diagnosis ranged from 91% to 100%. However, the pre-test probability of a correct positive diagnosis was already high (70-100%), because information necessary to diagnose correctly was available to the clinician prior to formal test administration. Thus, an overall score derived from subsequent administration of a formal test added, at best, moderate improvement over individual clinical expertise. The tests may prove more important for clinicians uncertain of a patient's diagnosis or for diagnosing "borderline" patients whose symptoms are unclear. For pre-test probabilities between 40% and 60%, administration of one of the formal tests we examined may increase or decrease diagnostic probability by as many as 60 percentage points.
Conclusion : Results indicate that overall scores derived from these tests are accurate but may or may not be important in confirming the presence or absence of mild aphasia, depending on the pre-test probability of a positive diagnosis. Suggestions for testing the validity of our results within a wider spectrum of patients are provided.
C1 Carl T Hayden Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Phoenix, AZ 85012 USA.
Arizona State Univ, Tempe, AZ 85287 USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
VA Tennessee Valley Healthcare Syst, Nashville, TN USA.
RP Ross, KB (reprint author), Carl T Hayden Vet Affairs Med Ctr, CS 126,650 Indian Sch Rd, Phoenix, AZ 85012 USA.
EM katherine.ross3@med.va.gov
CR Biddle AK, 2002, AHRQ PUBLICATION
BOWLES NL, 1985, J GERONTOL, V40, P71
CHAPEY R, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P80
Chapman S., 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P80
CHAPMAN SB, 1991, HDB GERIATRIC COMMUN
COHEN G, 1979, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V11, P412, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(79)90019-7
CRITCHLEY M, 1984, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V41, P1135
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
DARLEY FL, 1979, CLIN APH C P, P23
FEIER C, 1980, J GERONTOL, V35, P729
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
JAESCHKE R, 1994, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V271, P389, DOI 10.1001/jama.271.5.389
JAESCHKE R, 1994, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V271, P703, DOI 10.1001/jama.271.9.703
Kemper S., 1988, LANGUAGE MEMORY AGIN, P58
Kertesz A., 1979, APHASIA ASS DISORDER
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KIRSHNER HS, 1999, CONTINUUM LIFELONG L, V5, P9
LaPointe L. L., 1979, READING COMPREHENSIO
MOSS CS, 1972, RECOVERY APHASIA AFT
NORTH AJ, 1986, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V23, P267, DOI 10.2190/BPF0-2BWD-BGNQ-HWCW
OBLER LK, 1984, CLIN NEUROLOGY AGING, P245
OBLER LK, 1981, LANGUAGE ELDERLY APH
PEACH RK, 1987, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P238
PEDERSEN PM, 1995, ANN NEUROL, V38, P659, DOI 10.1002/ana.410380416
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
Sackett D, 1991, CLIN EPIDEMIOLOGY BA, V2nd
Sackett D, 2000, EVIDENCE BASED MED P
SCHOW RL, 1978, COMMUNICATION DISORD
WERTZ RT, 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P3
World Health Organization, 2001, ICIDH 2 INT CLASS FU
NR 32
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 4
BP 337
EP 355
DI 10.1080/02687030444000002
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 814FG
UT WOS:000220960000003
ER
PT J
AU Hough, MS
Givens, GD
AF Hough, MS
Givens, GD
TI Word fluency skills in dementia of the Alzheimer's type for common and
goal-directed categories
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SEMANTIC MEMORY LOSS; VERBAL FLUENCY; DISEASE; KNOWLEDGE; PERFORMANCE;
DETERIORATION; HUNTINGTONS; IMPAIRMENT; APHASIA; ACCESS
AB Background : Categorisation abilities, as measured by word fluency, have been observed to deteriorate in dementia of the Alzheimer's type (DAT). Specifically, patients with early dementia have been observed to produce fewer examples than their healthy age-matched cohorts. As disease severity increases, accuracy of responses decreases. This decrease appears to be related to increased deterioration in semantic memory. Thus, exemplar generation is a sensitive indicator of early effects of dementia. Individuals' responses on word fluency have been analysed in a variety of ways and reveal unique quantitative and qualitative profiles for adults with DAT. Furthermore, type of category may also affect performance of adults with DAT. Two types of categories that have been examined are common and goal-directed categories.
Aim : The purpose of the investigation was to study the categorisation skills of adults with dementia as the result of Alzheimer's disease. Specifically, the generation of goal-directed and common category exemplars by adults with mild and moderate severity DAT and normal elderly adults was examined. One concern of the study was participants' sensitivity to graded structure, examined through analysis of mean typicality ratings for responses. Another focus was identification and frequency of usage of particular response strategies. Total number of category examples produced and accuracy of these responses were also examined.
Methods & Procedures : A total of 30 adults, comprising 20 individuals meeting the NINCSD-ADRDA criteria for DAT and 10 neurologically intact elderly adults, participated. Dementia severity was determined using the Global Deterioration Scale and the Dementia Rating Scale resulting in 10 mildly impaired and 10 moderately impaired DAT participants. Four common and four goal-directed categories were presented to each participant. Common categories were four of ten categories for which Rosch (1975) established typicality norms with young adults; goal-directed categories were four of sixteen for which typicality norms were developed with normal middle-aged adults (Hough, 1988). Each participant was asked to generate as many exemplars as possible for each category. No preset time limit was established for the amount of time to respond to each category.
Outcomes & Results : The NBD participants produced significantly more exemplars for both category types than either DAT groups. However, the moderate DAT group was significantly less accurate than the mild DAT and NBD groups. The NBD group produced significantly more exemplars and had significantly lower mean typicality ratings for the common than the goal-directed categories; both DAT groups showed no differences between category types for these variables. Both DAT groups used fewer response strategies overall, regardless of category type, and utilised a significantly smaller percentage of semantic and subordinate association strategies than the NBD participants.
Conclusions : DAT may, to some extent, adversely affect sensitivity to the general process of category construction, regardless of category type. This pervasive deficit is apparent even in milder stages of the disease process and supports the hypothesis that as severity of DAT increases, there is an accompanying increase in the deterioration of semantic memory. This greater deterioration appears to result in increased problems with creation and ordering of ideas, one of the primary bases for exemplar generation.
C1 E Carolina Univ, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
RP Hough, MS (reprint author), E Carolina Univ, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
EM HoughM@Mail.ecu.edu
CR ADAMOVICH BLB, 1984, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P124
AU R, 1991, HDB GERIATRIC COMMUN, P293
Barsalou L, 1987, CONCEPTS CONCEPTUAL, P101
BARSALOU L, 1983, MEM COGNITION, V8, P211
Barsalou L. W., 1992, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL OV
Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
BAYLES KA, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P304
BAYLES KA, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P498, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90158-D
Benton AL, 1994, MULTILINGUAL APHASIA
BINETTI G, 1995, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V17, P82, DOI 10.1080/13803399508406584
BUTTERS N, 1987, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V9, P479, DOI 10.1080/01688638708410764
CHERTKOW H, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P420, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90078-3
CHERTKOW H, 1990, BRAIN, V113, P397, DOI 10.1093/brain/113.2.397
Crowe SF, 1998, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V20, P391, DOI 10.1076/jcen.20.3.391.810
Epker MO, 1999, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V21, P425, DOI 10.1076/jcen.21.4.425.890
GROSSMAN M, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V12, P313, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90022-5
Hart R P, 1988, Arch Clin Neuropsychol, V3, P313, DOI 10.1016/0887-6177(88)90044-3
HART S, 1988, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V27, P115
HODGES JR, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P301, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90104-T
HOUGH MS, 1992, NIH QUAL LIF AG C WA
HOUGH MS, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P335, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249515
HOUGH MS, 1988, THESIS KENT STATE U
HOUGH MS, 1991, ANN AM SPEECH LANG H
HOUGH MS, 1989, ANN AM SPEECH LANG H
HOUGH MS, IN PRESS J COMMUNICA
HOUGH MS, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P553, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249022
HUFF FJ, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90103-3
MARTIN A, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P323, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90088-4
MARTIN A, 1987, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V9, P191, DOI 10.1080/01688638708405361
MARTIN A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P124, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90059-7
Mattis S, 1976, GERIATRIC PSYCHIAT
Mattis S., 1988, DEMENTIA RATING SCAL
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
MERVIS CB, 1981, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V32, P89, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ps.32.020181.000513
Monsch A., 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V8, P25, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.8.1.25
MONSCH AU, 1992, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V49, P1253
MUELLER H, 1987, COMMUNICATION DISORD
REISBERG B, 1982, AM J PSYCHIAT, V139, P1136
ROSCH E, 1975, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V7, P573, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(75)90024-9
ROSCH E, 1975, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V104, P192, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.104.3.192
ROSENBERRY T L, 1980, Neurochemistry International, V2, P135, DOI 10.1016/0197-0186(80)90020-0
SHUTTLEWORTH EC, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P222, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90134-4
SOMMERS LM, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P573, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248508
Suhr JA, 1998, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V13, P447, DOI 10.1016/S0887-6177(97)00040-1
TROSTER AI, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P500, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90032-1
Troster AI, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P295, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00153-X
Troyer AK, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P137, DOI 10.1017/S1355617798001374
Troyer AK, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V11, P138, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.11.1.138
Tulving Endel, 1983, ELEMENTS EPISODIC ME
NR 49
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 4
BP 357
EP 372
DI 10.1080/0268703044000011
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 814FG
UT WOS:000220960000004
ER
PT J
AU Law, SP
AF Law, SP
TI Impairment to phonological processes in a Cantonese-speaking
brain-damaged patient
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; SELECTIVE IMPAIRMENT; OUTPUT BUFFER; DEEP DYSLEXIA;
ACTIVATION; ANOMIA; MODELS; REPETITION; RETRIEVAL; RECOVERY
AB Background : Previous studies have shown that brain-damaged patients with selective deficits to phonological processes produced frequent phonological errors and similar error patterns in all spoken tasks, exhibited the effects of word frequency, grammatical class, and imageability, and were unable to make rhyming judgements, due to impaired lexical retrieval and/or phonological representations.
Aims : This paper describes a Cantonese-speaking brain-damaged patient, LKK, whose performance patterns in spoken tasks indicate impairment to both the lexically mediated non-semantic and semantic pathways of oral production, as well as the phonological output buffer.
Methods & Procedures : A range of tasks was conducted including repetition, reading aloud, oral naming, written/spoken word-picture matching, non-verbal semantic tests, written lexical decision, and homophone judgements.
Outcomes & Results : LKK performed normally on written lexical decision, word-picture matching, and non-verbal semantic tests, but he was unable to make homophone judgements and showed impaired production in all oral tasks. He was better able to read aloud names of objects than to name them. He also made more semantic errors in naming than reading. His accuracy in reading single words was affected by word frequency and form class. Further observations of his oral production included better (but nevertheless impaired) performance on repetition than reading and naming, a consistent effect of word length across tasks, and a tendency for phonological errors to occur on the coda compared with the onset.
Conclusions : There was sufficient evidence for deficits of the phonological lexicon and/or the access to it along the non-semantic route and the semantic pathway at the post-semantic level in LKK. The effect of word length and comparable patterns of error distribution across spoken tasks suggested additional impairment to the phonological output buffer. The different levels of accuracy in repetition, reading, and naming, as well as the differential rates of semantic errors in these tasks were consistent with predictions of the summation hypothesis.
C1 Univ Hong Kong, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, Peoples R China.
RP Law, SP (reprint author), Univ Hong Kong, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, Peoples R China.
EM splaw@hkucc.hku.hk
RI Law, Sam Po/A-3162-2010
CR BISIACCHI PS, 1989, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V41, P293
BLUMSTEIN S E, 1990, P33
Blumstein S.E., 1973, PHONOLOGICAL INVESTI
BUB D, 1982, BRAIN, V105, P697, DOI 10.1093/brain/105.4.697
BUB D, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P79
CARAMAZZA A, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P37, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252669
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, SPR S NEUR, P1
CARAMAZZA A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V18, P128, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90011-1
COLTHEART M, 1993, PSYCHOL REV, V100, P589, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.100.4.589
ELLIS AW, 1983, COGNITION, V15, P111, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90036-7
Ellis A.W., 1998, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
FRANKLIN S, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P549, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252007
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P114, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0006
Gerhand S, 2000, NEUROCASE, V6, P393, DOI 10.1080/13554790008402710
Hanley JR, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P193, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000132
HILLIS AE, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P396, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.3.396
HILLIS AE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251996
HOWARD D, 1995, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V48, P999
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Katz RB, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P46, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1766
KAY J, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P613, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.3.613
Kohn SE, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P129, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0007
LAW SP, 1995, SPEECH READING COMP, P143
LAW SP, IN PRESS LANGUAGE CO
LAW SP, 1999, UNPUB READING WRITIN
Law SP, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P729, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000024
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
Martin RC, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V70, P437, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2184
PAIVIO AV, 1968, J EXPT PSYHOL 2 S, V76
PARADIS C, 1989, PHONOLOGY, V6, P317, DOI 10.1017/S0952675700001056
Patterson K, 1995, NEUROCASE, V1, P155
Riddoch M.J., 1993, BIRMINGHAM OBJECT RE
ROMANI C, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P131, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409382
Shallice T, 2000, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V17, P517, DOI 10.1080/02643290050110638
SHIBAHARA N, 2003, Q J EXPT PSYCHOL A, V56, P1
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Tainturier MJ, 2001, NEUROCASE, V7, P89, DOI 10.1093/neucas/7.1.89
Weekes B., 2005, NEUROCASE, V5, P101
Weekes BS, 1997, NEUROCASE, V3, P51, DOI 10.1080/13554799708404034
WU RT, 1987, ZUNGMAN ZICI JYUJAM
YIU EML, 1992, J NEUROLINGUIST, V7, P374
NR 42
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 4
BP 373
EP 388
DI 10.1080/02687030344000544
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 814FG
UT WOS:000220960000005
ER
PT J
AU Wallesch, CW
AF Wallesch, CW
TI History of aphasia - Freud as an aphasiologist
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Between 1891 and 1901, Sigmund Freud published both psychoanalytic and neurological works. This review analyses the interactions between Freud's On the interpretation of the aphasias (1891) and the development of psychoanalytic concepts, as well as Freud's theoretical views on brain-mind interrelations and his neurolinguistic theory. It is pointed out that in his aphasia book, Freud developed elements of a neurobiological theory of cognition and behaviour that became important for the theoretical foundation of psychoanalysis. Although Jackson, whom Freud regarded highly, had understood that people communicate by propositions, Freud followed Wernicke in that the word and the word concept were the basis of language. This assumption guided the interpretation of associations in psychoanalysis. For aphasiology, Freud is one proponent among others who criticised mechanistic localisationist theories. His major obstacle was the lack of linguistic theories. Freud's influence on aphasiology was rather limited, mainly because his book was hardly read, to his dismay.
C1 Otto Von Guericke Univ, Dept Neurol, D-39120 Magdeburg, Germany.
RP Wallesch, CW (reprint author), Otto Von Guericke Univ, Dept Neurol, Leipziger Str 44, D-39120 Magdeburg, Germany.
EM wallesch@medizin.uni-magdeburg.de
CR BARTELS C, 1996, CLASSIC CASES NEUROP, P53
Caplan D., 1987, NEUROLINGUISTICS LIN
CARAMAZZA A, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P9, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90032-4
Fodor Jerry A., 1983, MODULARITY MIND
Freud S, 1895, STUDIEN HYSTERIE
FREUD S, AUFFASSUNG APHASIEN
Greenberg V. D., 1997, FREUD HIS APHASIA BO
Hirschmuller Albrecht, 1991, FREUDS BEGEGNUNG PSY
JACKSON JH, 1879, SELECTED WRITINGS JH, V2, P155
Jones E., 1953, LIFE WORK S FREUD
Kleist K, 1934, GEHIRNPATHOLOGIE
KUSMAUL A, 1877, STORUNGEN SPRACHE
MARX OM, 1967, AM J PSYCHIAT, V124, P123
MAUDSLEY H, 1868, CONCERNING APHASIA, V2, P690
RIZZUTO AM, 1997, REFLECTIONS FREUDS A
Schiller Francis, 1979, P BROCA FOUNDER FREN
SCHOENWALD RL, 1954, OSIRIS, V7, P119
SCHULTZ JH, 1970, GROSSE NERVENRAZTE, P99
SCHWARTZ MF, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P3, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90031-2
SOLMS M, 1986, INT J PSYCHOANAL, V67, P397
STENGEL E, 1953, S FREUD APHASIA
Sulloway F., 1979, FREUD BIOL MIND
VOGEL P, 1992, S FREUD AUFFASSUNG A, P36
Wallesch C W, 1996, J Hist Neurosci, V5, P117
Wernicke C., 1874, APHASISCHE SYMPTOMEN
NR 25
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 4
BP 389
EP 399
DI 10.1080/02687030344000599
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 814FG
UT WOS:000220960000006
ER
PT J
AU Mortley, J
Wade, J
Enderby, P
AF Mortley, J
Wade, J
Enderby, P
TI Superhighway to promoting a client-therapist partnership? Using the
Internet to deliver word-retrieval computer therapy, monitored remotely
with minimal speech and language therapy input
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APHASIA THERAPY; REHABILITATION; HOME
AB Background : Advances in information and communications technology have not only made independent speech and language therapy practice using a computer possible, it is now feasible to monitor this therapy from a different location ("remotely").
Aims : This paper describes an evaluation of whether therapy delivered this way is efficacious and acceptable in improving word-retrieval and efficient in terms of therapist time.
Methods & Procedures : Seven participants were recruited to a case series study, with an ABA design, where A represented a no-treatment assessment phase. All were at least 2 years post CVA and had word-finding difficulties associated with aphasia. Participants had access to therapy software on a home computer. Therapy exercises were updated remotely by a therapist from a clinic computer via the Internet. No face-to-face therapy took place.
Outcomes & Results : Outcome measures included data on software usage, pre and post-therapy language assessments, and pre and post-therapy participant interviews to explore perceived benefits and user's views. Results showed intensive use of the system, and improvement in word retrieval skills.
Conclusions : Results suggest this mode of therapy delivery is efficacious, acceptable, and gave participants a high degree of independence. Relatively little input in terms of therapist time is required. The findings are discussed in terms of implications for therapy delivery for people with aphasia.
C1 N Bristol NHS Trust, Speech & Language Res Unit, Bristol, Avon, England.
Univ Sheffield, No Gen Hosp, Inst Gen Practice & Primary Care, Sheffield S5 7AU, S Yorkshire, England.
RP Mortley, J (reprint author), Steps Cottage, Littleton Drew SN14 7NB, Wilts, England.
EM jpmortley@btinternet.com
CR BASSO A, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P190
BYNG S, 1999, REVERSIBLE SENTENCES
DAMICO J, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P9
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P651
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
Enderby P, 2002, CLIN REHABIL, V16, P604, DOI 10.1191/0269215502cr505oa
Hickin J, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P13
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
MORTLEY J, 2004, UNPUB IMPACT REMOTEL
Mortley J, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000188
MORTLEY J, 1998, THESIS U EXETER UK
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
Pedersen PM, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P151, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000106
Petheram B, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P267, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248412
Pope C, 2000, BRIT MED J, V320, P114, DOI 10.1136/bmj.320.7227.114
*ROYAL COLL SPEECH, 1996, COMMUNICATING QUALIT, V2, P272
*STEPS CONS LTD, 2003, STEPBYSTEP
Wade J, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P1031, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000373
Weinrich M, 1997, CLIN NEUROSCI, V4, P103
Wertz R, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P229, DOI 10.1080/02687030444000048
WERTZ RT, 1986, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V43, P653
NR 21
TC 19
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 3
BP 193
EP 211
DI 10.1080/02687030344000553
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 810QO
UT WOS:000220719000002
ER
PT J
AU Doesborgh, S
van de Sandt-Koenderman, M
Dippel, D
van Harskamp, F
Koudstaal, P
Visch-Brink, E
AF Doesborgh, S
van de Sandt-Koenderman, M
Dippel, D
van Harskamp, F
Koudstaal, P
Visch-Brink, E
TI Cues on request: The efficacy of Multicue, a computer program for
wordfinding therapy
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID GENERATED PHONEMIC CUES; NAMING DISORDERS; SEMANTIC TREATMENT; APHASIA;
DEFICITS; SPEECH; RETRIEVAL; ERRORS
AB Background : Semantic and word form cues have been shown to have long-term effects on naming in aphasia. Multicue is a computer program that offers a variety of cues for improving word finding. It stimulates the users' independence by encouraging them to discover themselves which cues are most helpful.
Aims : We investigated the effects of Multicue on naming and verbal communication.
Methods & Procedures : A total of 18 individuals with aphasia caused by stroke, who had completed intensive impairment-oriented treatment, were randomised to 10-11 hours of Multicue ( n = 8) or no treatment ( n = 10).
Outcomes & Results : Only the Multicue group improved on the Boston Naming Test. However, mean improvement did not differ significantly between the treated and untreated groups, neither for the BNT (95% CI: -4.5 to 26.1), nor for the ANELT-A (95% CI: -2.4 to 9.4).
Conclusions : In the chronic phase of aphasia, following impairment-oriented treatment, Multicue may have a beneficial effect on word finding in picture naming, but not on verbal communication. The effect of Multicue may be the result either of self-cueing or of improved access. The lack of generalisation to verbal communication is discussed.
C1 Rotterdam Aphasia Fdn, Rijndam Rehabil Ctr, NL-3015 LJ Rotterdam, Netherlands.
Erasmus MC, Rotterdam, Netherlands.
RP van de Sandt-Koenderman, M (reprint author), Rotterdam Aphasia Fdn, Rijndam Rehabil Ctr, Westersingel 300, NL-3015 LJ Rotterdam, Netherlands.
EM m.sandt@rijndam.nl
CR Aftonomos LB, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1370
Avila C, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P185, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2472
Basso A, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P45, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2422
Bhogal SK, 2003, STROKE, V34, P987, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000062343.64383.D0
BLOMERT L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248666
Blomert L, 1995, AMSTERDAM NIJMEGEN T
Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P94
BRUCE C, 1987, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V22, P191
Coelho CA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P133
COLBY KM, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P272, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90079-1
DELOCHE G, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V2, P117, DOI 10.1080/09602019208401400
Doesborgh SJC, 2004, STROKE, V35, P141, DOI 10.1161/01.STR.0000105460.52928.A6
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
Fink RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1061, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000400
Franklin S, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1087, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000491
Helm-Estrabrook N., 2000, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V21, P91
Hickin J, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P981, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000509
HICKIN J, 2002, APHASIA THERAPY FILE, V2
Hickin J, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P13
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
HOWARD D, 1984, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V1, P163, DOI 10.1080/02643298408252021
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KATZ RC, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
KINSEY C, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P281, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249080
McNeil MR, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P385, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248479
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Purdy M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P549, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000176
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Robson J, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P675
STACHOWIAK FJ, 1993, DEV ASSESSMENT REHAB, P354
VANDESANTKOENDE.WM, 1993, DEV ASSESSMENT REHAB, P347
VANLOONVERVOORN WA, 1995, LOGOPEDIE FONIATRIE, V2, P35
VANMOURIK M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P179, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248589
Wambaugh JL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P933
Weigl E., 1927, Z PSYCHOL, V103, P2
NR 37
TC 23
Z9 23
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 3
BP 213
EP 222
DI 10.1080/02687030344000580
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 810QO
UT WOS:000220719000003
ER
PT J
AU Wallesch, CW
Johannsen-Horbach, H
AF Wallesch, CW
Johannsen-Horbach, H
TI Computers in aphasia therapy: Effects and side-effects
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COMMUNICATION-SYSTEM; VIRTUAL-REALITY; STROKE PATIENTS; REHABILITATION;
EFFICACY
AB We review published studies on the use of computers in aphasia therapy. Computer-based treatment seems attractive, especially as it may allow for massed practice. We discuss possible side-effects. Aphasia rehabilitation must aim at a reduction of handicap. At least one published study described an improvement in functional communication after treatment with a comprehensive programme that included both therapist-delivered speech-language therapy and home computer training. It cannot be decided to what extent functional communication-orientation of the programme, computer use, intensity of treatment, or even other factors contributed to the positive effect, as no control group was included. A randomised controlled trial with adequate control groups and adequate, handicap-oriented outcome measurements is warranted to evaluate the effectiveness of the computer component and its effect size.
C1 Otto von Guericke Univ, Dept Neurol, D-39120 Magdeburg, Germany.
Inst Neurol & Neurosurg Rehabil Res, Magdeburg, Germany.
Sch Speech Therapy, Freiburg, Germany.
RP Wallesch, CW (reprint author), Otto von Guericke Univ, Dept Neurol, Leipziger Str 44, D-39120 Magdeburg, Germany.
EM neuro.wallesch@medizin-uni-magdeburg.de
CR Aftonomos LB, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1370
Grealy MA, 1999, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V80, P661, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(99)90169-7
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P513, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249019
Hillis AE, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P648, DOI 10.1017/S135561779846613X
Jacobs BJ, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P115, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2452
JOHANNSENHORBACH H, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P74, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90098-7
KASTEN E, 1998, NAT MED, V4, P1005
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
Liepert J, 2001, J NEUROL, V248, P315, DOI 10.1007/s004150170207
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
MATTHEWS CG, 1992, TCN GUIDE PROFESSION, P120
Petheram B, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P21
Pulvermuller F, 2001, STROKE, V32, P1621
Reimer WJMSO, 1998, STROKE, V29, P1605
Ring H, 1998, DISABIL REHABIL, V20, P98
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P582, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1060
TAUB E, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P347
Waller A, 1998, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P45
Webster JS, 2001, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V82, P769, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2001.23201
WEINRICH M, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248209
Weinrich M, 1997, CLIN NEUROSCI, V4, P103
WENZ C, 1990, PSYCHOTHER PSYCH MED, V40, P488
Wright P, 2001, BRAIN INJURY, V15, P787, DOI 10.1080/02699050110045161
NR 23
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 3
BP 223
EP 228
DI 10.1080/02687030444000039
PG 6
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 810QO
UT WOS:000220719000004
ER
PT J
AU Wertz, R
Katz, R
AF Wertz, R
Katz, R
TI Outcomes of computer-provided treatment for aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID VISUAL COMMUNICATION; REHABILITATION; REMEDIATION; EFFICACY; LANGUAGE;
THERAPY
AB Background : Computers have become a familiar component of aphasia treatment over the past 20 years. Published research continues to indicate the influence computerised treatment may have on improving language performance of aphasic adults. As a result of the move to develop evidenced-based clinical guidelines, there is a need to evaluate the research methodology and the level of evidence provided by computerised interventions for aphasia.
Aims : The purposes of this paper are to evaluate examples of reports in the computerised treatment for aphasia outcomes research literature by applying precise definitions of the treatment outcome research terminology, placing the examples within the context of the five-phase treatment outcomes research model, applying a level of evidence scale to rate the evidence provided by the selected examples, and speculating where we are and where we may need to go in demonstrating the influence of computer-provided treatment on improvement in aphasia.
Methods & Procedures : We applied Robey and Schultz's (1998) model for conducting clinical-outcome research in aphasia and the level of evidence scale developed by the American Academy of Neurology (1994) to the results of computer-provided aphasia treatment studies. Eight Phase 1 studies, three series of Phase 2 studies, and one Phase 3 study are described as examples.
Outcomes & Results : While several Phase 1 and 2 studies imply that computer-provided treatment is active in the treatment of people with aphasia, evidence to support the efficacy of computerised treatment for adults with aphasia is based on a single Phase 3 study. Additional Phase 3 studies are needed to demonstrate the efficacy of additional treatment software, and Phase 4 and Phase 5 studies are necessary to demonstrate the effectiveness and efficiency of computerised treatment for people with aphasia.
C1 Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
VA Med Ctr, Phoenix, AZ USA.
Arizona State Univ, Tempe, AZ USA.
RP Wertz, R (reprint author), Vet Affairs Med Ctr, 1310 24th Ave S, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
EM robert.wertz@med.va.gov
CR FERGUSON JH, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P566
Aftonomos LB, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P841, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90197-0
CRERAR MA, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P223
Crerar MA, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P229, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0010
DELOCHE G, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P201, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249506
Duffy J. R., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P341
GARDNER RA, 1969, SCIENCE, V165, P664, DOI 10.1126/science.165.3894.664
GARDNER H, 1976, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V14, P275, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(76)90023-3
HORNER J, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P1135
Katz R. C., 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY 198, P153
KATZ RC, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY 198, P65
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
KATZ RC, 1984, CLIN APHASIOLOGY 198, P159
KATZ RC, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY 198, P321
KATZ RC, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P184
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Loverso F L, 1988, J Rehabil Res Dev, V25, P47
LOVERSO FL, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P155, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248587
LOVERSO FL, 1979, CLIN APHASIOLOGY 197, P229
LOVERSO FL, 1988, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P297
LOVERSO FL, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P189
Mills R., 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY 198, P147
Office of Technology Assessment, 1978, OTAH75
PORCH BE, 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V1
PREMACK D, 1970, PSYCHOL TODAY, V4, P55
Robey RR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P787, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249573
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
ROBINSON I, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P381
Schuell H, 1964, APHASIA ADULTS
SCHUELL H, 1974, APHASIA THEORY THERA
SCOTT C, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P301, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248996
Sederer L, 1996, OUTCOMES ASSESSMENT, P1
SERON X, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P45
Steele R. D., 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY 198, P46
STEELE RD, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90048-1
WEINRICH M, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P21, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1031
WEINRICH M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P501, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249018
Wertz RT, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P231, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000232
NR 38
TC 18
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 3
BP 229
EP 244
DI 10.1080/02687030444000048
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 810QO
UT WOS:000220719000005
ER
PT J
AU van de Sandt-Koenderman, M
AF van de Sandt-Koenderman, M
TI High-tech AAC and aphasia: Widening horizons?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COMMUNICATION; ADULTS; REHABILITATION; THERAPY; CONVERSATION;
IMPROVEMENT; EFFICACY; OUTCOMES; PEOPLE; SPEECH
AB Background : Many people with aphasia are trained to use low-tech AAC strategies (Alternative and Augmentative Communication) to support communication, but high-tech communication aids are introduced only incidentally. The factors influencing success and failure of low-tech AAC are relevant for the development of high-tech communication aids for aphasia.
Aims : To review the state of the art in low-tech and high-tech AAC applications for aphasia.
Main Contribution : Although there is there is a wealth of knowledge among therapists, there is very little research to support the efficacy of AAC techniques. Many authors stress the heterogeneity of the aphasic population, not only in the characteristics of the aphasia, but also in communicative abilities and needs, cognitive abilities, motivation, and social situation. Therefore, AAC devices should be individualised and "tailor-made", taking advantage of residual language skills and communicative strengths. A common problem is that acquired AAC skills are often not used in daily communication. Several factors may play a role, e.g., lack of motivation, inadequate vocabulary, insufficient training, or cognitive or linguistic limitations. So far, functional use of assistive technology has received relatively little attention, but a portable device with ready-made messages for specific communicative situations appeared to be used in every day life.
Conclusions : Computer technology has much to offer for supporting aphasic communication, not only for people with a very severe aphasia, who do not benefit from disorder-oriented therapy, but also for people with a moderate or mild aphasia. Research into AAC and aphasia, focusing on functional use, is needed in order to build and refine communication aids that are easy to use and can be tailored individually.
C1 Rotterdam Aphasia Fdn, Rijndam Rehabil Ctr, NL-3015 LJ Rotterdam, Netherlands.
RP van de Sandt-Koenderman, M (reprint author), Rotterdam Aphasia Fdn, Rijndam Rehabil Ctr, Westersingel 300, NL-3015 LJ Rotterdam, Netherlands.
EM m.sandt@rijndam.nl
CR Aftonomos LB, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P841, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90197-0
Aftonomos LB, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1370
Aitchison Jean, 1987, WORDS MIND
Beck A. R., 1998, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V14, P184, DOI 10.1080/07434619812331278356
BERTONI B, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P341, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248535
BRUCE C, 1987, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V22, P191
Bryan K, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P179, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250474
Cicerone KD, 2000, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V81, P1596, DOI 10.1053/apmr.2000.19240
COLBY KM, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V14, P272
Cruice M, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P333, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000707
Davidson B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P243, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000653
Davis G., 1981, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P169
DEVRIES LA, 2001, HET TAALZAKBOEK
Doesborgh S, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P213, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000580
Dye R., 1998, NAT LANG ENG, V4, P57, DOI 10.1017/S1351324998001867
Feyereisen P., 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P21, DOI 10. 1080/02687038808248884
Fox LE, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P171, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000133
FUNNELL E, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P279, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248995
Garrett K. L., 1992, AUGMENTATIVE COMMUNI, P245
Garrett KL, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P523, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000149
HIER DB, 1977, BRAIN LANG, V4, P208
HUX K, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P338
Hux K. D., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P675
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
KATZ RC, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P718
Koul R., 1998, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V14, P11, DOI 10.1080/07434619812331278166
KRAAT AW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249086
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LIGHT J, 1991, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V1, P186
Linebarger MC, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V83, P169
Linebarger MC, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P416, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2378
LYON JG, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P33, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248687
Murphy J, 1996, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V31, P31
Pedersen PM, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P151, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000106
Pulvermuller F, 2001, STROKE, V32, P1621
RAO P, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P688
Robey RR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P787, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249573
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P585
SCOTT C, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P301, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248996
SEMENZA C, 1992, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V55, P205, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.55.3.205
Shelton JR, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P319, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248415
STEELE RD, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90048-1
STOCHOWIAK FJ, 1993, DEV ASSESSMENT REHAB, P354
STUMPEL MJE, 1989, AFASIETHERAPIE, P182
VANDESANTKOENDE.WM, 1993, DEV ASSESSMENT REHAB, P347
VANMOURIK M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P179, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248589
VANMOURIK M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P491, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249486
VERSCHAEVE MAH, 1994, LOGOPEDIE FONIATRIE, V5, P151
VERSCHAEVE MAW, 1998, LOGOPEDIE FONIATRIE, V11, P81
VISCHBRINK EG, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO
VISCHBRINK EG, 1999, WORDS ACTION
Waller A, 1998, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P45
WEINRICH M, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248209
WHURR R, 1992, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V27, P1
WIEGERS JJ, 2002, LOGOPEDIE FONIATRIE, V74, P180
World Health Organization, 2001, ICF INT CLASS FUNCT
Worrall L., 1999, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
Worrall L., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
Yoshihata H, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P1035, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249468
NR 60
TC 18
Z9 18
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 3
BP 245
EP 263
DI 10.1080/02687030344000571
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 810QO
UT WOS:000220719000006
ER
PT J
AU Egan, J
Worrall, L
Oxenham, D
AF Egan, J
Worrall, L
Oxenham, D
TI Accessible Internet training package helps people with aphasia cross the
digital divide
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AGE; TASKS
AB Background : The Internet is a source of information, communication, and leisure opportunities for people with aphasia. However, accessible training is one of several barriers for people with aphasia in using the Internet.
Aims : This study developed and trialled special aphasia-friendly Internet training materials for people with aphasia.
Methods & Procedures : A total of 20 people with aphasia were matched with volunteer tutors. The tutor-student pairs met for six lessons. Pre- and post-test Internet skills assessments were conducted and attitudinal questionnaires were completed. The training materials were based on Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and consisted of a tutor's manual and a manual for the Internet student with aphasia. These materials are available as a free download from: http://www.shrs.uq.edu.au/cdaru/aphasiagroups/
Outcomes & Results : Significant differences between pre and post scores were found and participants reached a range of levels of independence following the training. The majority reported favourable outcomes.
Conclusions. Results indicated that it was possible for people with aphasia to learn to use the Internet when they were taught in a one-to-one teaching situation with the use of accessible training manuals.
C1 Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Worrall, L (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
EM l.worrall@uq.edu.au
RI Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR CLOTHIER P, 1996, COMPLETE COMPUTER TR
Echt KV, 1998, EDUC GERONTOL, V24, P3, DOI 10.1080/0360127980240101
EGAN J, 2001, QUEENSLAND U APHASIA
Elman RJ, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P895, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000267
JORDAN L, 1996, APHASIA SOCIAL APPRO
KAYE HS, 2000, 13 CAL U
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
MORRELL RW, 1993, PSYCHOL AGING, V8, P389
*NAT OFF INF EC, 2001, STRAT FRAM INF EC
OWENS J, 2001, LIT REV COMPUTER INT
PARR S, 1999, APHASIA HDB
PENG R, 1998, STROKE ENHANCING QUA, P233
PILLAY H, 2000, TECHNOLOGY UPTAKE SC
*R PRYOR ASS COMM, 2000, WEBS FOUND DISCR
Riviere CN, 1996, J REHABIL RES DEV, V33, P6
Morrell RW, 1996, AGING AND SKILLED PERFORMANCE, P241
STODDARD S, 2001, AM REHABILITATION, V26, P1
2001, COMMONWEALTH DISABIL
NR 18
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 3
BP 265
EP 280
DI 10.1080/02687030344000562
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 810QO
UT WOS:000220719000007
ER
PT J
AU Cole-Virtue, J
Nickels, L
AF Cole-Virtue, J
Nickels, L
TI Spoken word to picture matching from PALPA: A critique and some new
matched sets
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APHASIA; PROOF; TASKS
AB Background : PALPA (Psycholinguistic Assessments of Language Processing in Aphasia; Kay, Lesser, & Coltheart, 1992) is a widely used clinical and research tool. Subtest 47, Spoken word-picture matching, requires the individual with aphasia to listen to a spoken word and correctly choose from five distractor pictures (target, close semantic, distant semantic, visually related, and semantically unrelated). It contributes diagnostically to the clinical evaluation of semantic processing. The authors claim that, first, errors on this test indicate that a semantic comprehension problem is present, and second, that distractor choice reflects the semantic specificity of the problem. For accurate clinical assessment the validity of these claims must be evaluated.
Aims : This paper aims to evaluate the internal validity of PALPA spoken word-picture matching. It addresses two questions; first, is the relationship between the target and distractors what the authors claim it to be? Second, what is the relationship between the target and distractor stimuli in relation to a number of psycholinguistic variables? In addition it allows the clinician to examine the effects of individual variables on performance by including matched subsets of stimuli from this test (matched across five psycholinguistic variables: frequency, imageability, number of phonemes, semantic and visual similarity, word association).
Methods and Procedures : Target and distractor relationships were investigated (in terms of semantic and visual similarity and word category) and psycholinguistic variables (including word frequency, word association, imageability, number of phonemes, semantic and visual similarity).
Outcomes and Results : Analysis revealed a number of confounds within this test: close semantic distractors were not only more semantically similar but also more visually similar to their targets than distant semantic distractors; the semantic and visual (SV) close semantic distractors were more semantically similar to their targets than the non-SV close semantic distractors; targets and distractors did not bear a consistent categorical relationship to their targets, and there were significant intercorrelations between variables for these stimuli (e.g., frequency and length; semantic/visual similarity and length).
Conclusions : The authors' claim that this test assesses semantic comprehension is certainly still tenable. Individuals making errors on this test have a high probability of some semantic processing deficit. However, this study shows that the test fails to assess the nature of the semantic processing deficit, as error patterns are subject to the effect of confounding factors. In its current form clinicians should exercise caution when interpreting test findings and be aware of its limitations. The development, here, of matched subsets of stimuli allows performance to be re-evaluated in terms of the influence of semantic and visual similarity, imageability, frequency, word length, and word association.
C1 Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci MACCS, Div Linguist & Psychol, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Cole-Virtue, J (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci MACCS, Div Linguist & Psychol, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
EM jenny@maces.mq.edu.au; lyndsey@maces.mq.edu.au
CR Baayen R. H., 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Basso A, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P190, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248405
BISHOP D, 1984, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V1, P233, DOI 10.1080/02643298408252024
*CISD, 1996, ED ASS THES
Cole-Virtue J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P153, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000517
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
CUTLER A, 1981, COGNITION, V10, P65, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(81)90026-3
FERGUSON F, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P193
FORDE E, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P265, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253154
Kay J, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P159, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248403
Kay J, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P202, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248408
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
LESSER R, 1981, LINGUISTIC INVESTIGA
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
Morrison CM, 1997, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V50, P528
Morton J., 1970, MODELS HUMAN MEMORY
Neely J. H., 1991, BASIC PROCESSES READ
SHELTON JR, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P1191, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.18.6.1191
SILVERI MC, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P597, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90085-S
Silveri MC, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P326, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0078
Wertz RT, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P180, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248404
NR 22
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 2
BP 77
EP 102
DI 10.1080/02687030344000346
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 804ON
UT WOS:000220308100002
ER
PT J
AU Nickels, L
Cole-Virtue, J
AF Nickels, L
Cole-Virtue, J
TI Reading tasks from PALPA: How do controls perform on visual lexical
decision, homophony, rhyme, and synonym judgements?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SCORE DIFFERENCES; NEUROPSYCHOLOGY; ABNORMALITY; PROOF
AB Background : PALPA (Psycholinguistic Assessments of Language Processing in Aphasia; Kay, Lesser, & Coltheart, 1992) is a resource widely used by both clinicians and researchers. However, several of the subtests lack data regarding the performance of proficient English language speakers on these tasks.
Aims : This paper investigates factors affecting the speed and accuracy of performance of young control participants on four assessments from PALPA: Visual lexical decision (subtest 25); synonym judgements (subtest 50); rhyme judgements (subtest 15); and homophone judgements (subtest 28).
Methods and Procedures : Data are presented regarding both speed and accuracy of performance on each of the four tasks, and statistical analysis of those factors that influence performance within each test is carried out, for the participants as a group and also for the individuals within the group.
Outcomes and Results: Visual lexical decision showed significant effects of frequency on response latency and accuracy, and of lexicality and imageability on response latency alone; synonym judgements showed significant effects of imageability on response latency; significant effects of word type were found on response latency for homophone judgements; for rhyme judgements there was a significant effect of rhyme for both accuracy and latency, and a significant interaction between rhyme and visual similarity.
Conclusions : For the clinician seeking to interpret the performance of the person with aphasia on the tasks we have described here, we have presented data that provide some indication of the speed and accuracy of performance of young controls on these tasks. It is clear that ceiling effects in accuracy mask effects of psycholinguistic variables on normal performance that become apparent when speed of response is considered. However, performance is far from at ceiling for all the tasks described--some participants perform close to chance on some conditions. Finally, these data highlight the fact that comparison of the pattern of performance of individual participants with that of a group of controls can be problematic given the variability of control patterns of performance.
C1 Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci MACCS, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Nickels, L (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci MACCS, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
EM lyndsey@maces.mq.edu.au
CR Basso A, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P190, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248405
BEST W, 2000, SEMANTIC PROCESSING
Crawford JR, 1998, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V20, P898, DOI 10.1076/jcen.20.6.898.1112
Crawford JR, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1196, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00224-X
Crawford JR, 1998, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V20, P755, DOI 10.1076/jcen.20.5.755.1132
Forster KI, 2003, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V35, P116, DOI 10.3758/BF03195503
Kay J, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P202, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248408
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Marshall J, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P197, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248407
NICKELS LA, 2004, UNPUB EFFECTS IMAGEA
Wertz RT, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P180, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248404
NR 11
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 2
BP 103
EP 126
DI 10.1080/02687030344000517
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 804ON
UT WOS:000220308100003
ER
PT J
AU Cole-Virtue, J
Nickels, L
AF Cole-Virtue, J
Nickels, L
TI Why cabbage and not carrot? An investigation of factors affecting
performance on spoken word to picture matching
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AUDITORY COMPREHENSION; APHASIA; NEUROPSYCHOLOGY; ACQUISITION;
FREQUENCY; DAMAGE; ANOMIA; EASIER; AGE
AB Background: Word-picture matching tasks have been widely used to assess semantic processing in aphasia, but as yet have received little critical evaluation. Successful performance on a word-picture matching task employs several components of the language-processing system, including lexical and semantic processing of word stimuli and the visual and semantic processing of picture stimuli. Hence it is not only semantic impairments that can affect performance on this task--breakdown in processing at any point from early auditory or visual processing of the word or visual perception of the pictures can affect accuracy. Consequently, performance on a word-picture matching task might be affected by psycholinguistic variables that pertain to any of these levels of processing, such as imageability, word length, word frequency, and the relationship of the distractors to the target.
Aims: This study aimed to investigate the factors affecting word-picture matching performance, using one of the most widely used word-picture matching tasks (Subtest 47, Spoken word-picture matching, from PALPA; Kay, Lesser, & Coltheart, 1992).
Methods and Procedures: The performance and error patterns of 54 participants with aphasia and 51 elderly control participants, who had completed spoken word-picture matching (subtest number 47) from PALPA, were evaluated. Correlation and regression analyses were used to investigate effects of psycholinguistic variables on performance (frequency, imageability, number of phonemes, semantic and visual similarity, and word association).
Outcomes and Results: No variable was found to significantly affect control performance, due to ceiling effects. Imageability, semantic similarity, and word association affected the aphasic participant group performance. Six of the individuals with aphasia showed a significant effect on performance of at least one of four variables; imageability, semantic similarity, frequency, and word association.
Conclusions: This study demonstrates that three psycholinguistic variables significantly affect the performance of both the group with aphasia and some individual participants with aphasia. It suggests that accuracy can be influenced not only by the nature of the relationship of the stimuli within the test but also by the individual level of language processing breakdown. Clinicians and researchers need to be mindful of this when using word-picture matching as the basis of their assessment of semantic processing in aphasia.
C1 Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci MACCS, Div Linguist & Psychol, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Cole-Virtue, J (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci MACCS, Div Linguist & Psychol, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
EM jcole@maces.mq.edu.au
CR Baayen R. H., 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Best W, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P637
BISHOP D, 1984, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V1, P233, DOI 10.1080/02643298408252024
BREEDIN SD, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P617
BUTTERWORTH B, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90036-8
CARAMAZZA A, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P9, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90032-4
CIPOLOTTI L, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P309, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253155
Cole-Virtue J, 2004, APHASIOLOGY, V18, P77, DOI 10.1080/02687030344000346
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
*CSID, 1996, ED ASS THES
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
FORDE E, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P265, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253154
FORSTER KI, 1990, LANGUAGE INVITATION, V1, P95
Franklin S., 1992, ADA COMPREHENSION BA
FRANKLIN S, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P549, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252007
Franklin S, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1139, DOI 10.1080/026432996381683
FRANKLIN S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P189, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248991
GERMANI MJ, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P1, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248685
GILHOOLY KJ, 1980, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V12, P395, DOI 10.3758/BF03201693
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
Howard D., 1988, MISSING MEANING
Kay J, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P159, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248403
KAY J, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P613, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.3.613
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LESSER R, 1981, LINGUISTIC INVESTIGA
Marshall J, 2001, CORTEX, V37, P33, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70556-2
McRae K, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P558, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.3.558
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
MORRIS J, 1997, THESIS U YORK
Morrison CM, 1997, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V50, P528
Morton J., 1970, MODELS HUMAN MEMORY
MURPHY K, 1999, THESIS MACQUARIE U S
Neely J. H., 1991, BASIC PROCESSES READ
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
PLAUT DC, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P377, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253469
SCHUELL H, 1961, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V4, P30
NR 39
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 2
BP 153
EP 179
DI 10.1080/02687030344000517
PG 27
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 804ON
UT WOS:000220308100005
ER
PT J
AU Burchert, F
De Bleser, R
AF Burchert, F
De Bleser, R
TI Passives in agrammatic sentence comprehension: A German study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BROCAS APHASIA; STRATEGIES; ARGUMENTS; VARIETIES; DEFICITS
AB Background: A large number of studies examining agrammatic comprehension of canonical and non-canonical sentences in Broca's aphasia have focused on passives and results have been interpreted in theoretical frameworks such as the trace deletion hypothesis (TDH: Grodzinsky, 1995a). However, there are a number of unresolved issues associated with passives. The linguistic analysis of passive structures in different languages has remained controversial as well as the empirical neurolinguistic basis of agrammatic passive comprehension. In addition, a variety of morphological and semantic questions have been raised with respect to the implicit argument in short passives and the ordering of thematic roles reflected by different positions of the by-phrase in long passives.
Aims: The major aims of the present study were to re-examine the analyses of passives with and without traces, the role of an implicit argument in short passives, and the influence of the position of the by-phrase on agrammatic sentence comprehension.
Methods & Procedures: A binary picture-sentence matching task was administered to six non-fluent German agrammatic speakers. Various types of passives including long, short, and topicalised passives were tested. Additionally, comprehension of active SVO sentences was assessed in a separate but similar session. Only those patients whose comprehension on active sentences was above chance were included.
Outcomes & Results: As a group, the six subjects performed above chance over all passive types. If only long canonical passives are considered, as is done in most studies, five subjects showed a pattern compatible with the TDH. However, the picture was modified if other passive constructions were taken into account, in which case only three of the six subjects showed TDH conformity.
Conclusions: There is no unique pattern of agrammatic passive comprehension and only half of the agrammatic subjects conformed to the trace deletion hypothesis. Given the results on long canonical and topicalised passives, our data support linguistic analyses that assume a trace-based derivation of passives. Furthermore, the results are in line with linguistic analyses adopting an implicit argument in short passives. Since comprehension of topicalised passives with a canonical order of theta-roles was not better than that of long passives without a canonical order, the agrammatic problem with passives does not seem to hinge on semantics.
C1 Univ Potsdam, Inst Linguist, PF 601553, D-14415 Potsdam, Germany.
RP Burchert, F (reprint author), Univ Potsdam, Inst Linguist, PF 601553, D-14415 Potsdam, Germany.
CR BADECKER W, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P311
BAKER M, 1989, LINGUIST INQ, V20, P219
Balogh J., 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER, P88
Balogh J, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P54
BATES E, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P19, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90116-7
Beretta A, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P407, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2495
Beretta A, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P149, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2051
Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITION, V58, P289, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00682-6
Berndt RS, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P242, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2130
Burchert F, 2003, BRAIN LANG, V87, P323, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(03)00132-9
CARAMAZZA A, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P572, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90048-1
Chomsky N., 1981, LECT GOVT BINDING
DRUKS J, 1995, COGNITION, V55, P311, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)00651-Z
ENBESTEN H, 1985, STUDIES GERMAN GRAMM, P23
Fox D, 1998, LINGUIST INQ, V29, P311, DOI 10.1162/002438998553761
FRIEDERICI AD, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V30, P93, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90030-7
Gnmshaw Jane, 1990, ARGUMENT STRUCTURE
Grodzinsky Y, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P134, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2050
GRODZINSKY Y, 1991, NAT LANG LINGUIST TH, V9, P431, DOI 10.1007/BF00135354
GRODZINSKY Y, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P27, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1039
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
Grodzinsky Y, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P469, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1072
Grodzinslcy Y., 1990, THEORETICAL PERSPECT
HAGIWARA H, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P318, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1049
Haider Hubert, 1993, DTSCH SYNTAX GENERAT
Jackendoff Ray S., 1972, SEMANTIC INTERPRETAT
JAEGGLI OA, 1986, LINGUIST INQ, V17, P587
Lenerz J, 1977, ABFOLGE NOMINALER SA
LINEBARGER MC, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1040
MANZINI MR, 1983, LINGUIST INQ, V14, P421
Otsu Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P45, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00482397
PINANGO M, 2000, LANGUAGE BRAIN
RAIN S, 1985, P 16 ANN M NELS GLSA
SCHWARTZ MF, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P249, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90055-3
WILLIAMS E, 1985, NAT LANG LINGUIST TH, V3, P297, DOI 10.1007/BF00154265
NR 35
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 1
BP 29
EP 45
DI 10.1080/02687030344000409
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 768DY
UT WOS:000188515100002
ER
PT J
AU Webster, J
Franklin, S
Howard, D
AF Webster, J
Franklin, S
Howard, D
TI Investigating the sub-processes involved in the production of thematic
structure: An analysis of four people with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WORD ORDER PROBLEM; SENTENCE PRODUCTION; VERB RETRIEVAL; AGRAMMATISM;
THERAPY; COMPREHENSION; IMPAIRMENT; BRAIN
AB Background: Schwartz (1987) suggested that three discrete sub-processes may be involved in the production of the thematic structure of sentences. These are: (1) The retrieval of the semantic representations of the main lexical items; (2) The specification of the predicate argument structure (PAS); and (3) The assignment of the lexical items to thematic roles within the PAS. There has been no comprehensive investigation of the three aspects of processing in the performance of individual people with aphasia.
Aims: This study aimed to investigate the presence of the three sub-processes by determining whether they can be differentially impaired in aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: Four people with aphasia (GW, JM, KD, and TJ) who had apparent difficulties in producing thematic structure were included in the study. They presented with similar surface symptoms in connected speech: a high percentage of single phrases, limited production of complex three-argument structures, and the omission of obligatory arguments. Their performance on various tests of single word and sentence processing was compared to that of normal control subjects and the pattern of errors analysed.
Outcomes & Results: The clients presented with different patterns of impaired and retained performance and different patterns of error. This suggested that different underlying impairments were responsible for their poor production of thematic structure. All four clients presented with some verb retrieval difficulties, although only GW and TJ's deficits were of a semantic nature. TJ also had difficulty understanding and retrieving nouns, but when given the words showed awareness of the PAS and could assign thematic roles appropriately. JM presented with a specific difficulty specifying the PAS, and KD had a specific difficulty with thematic role assignment. GW had difficulties both with the specification of PAS and thematic role assignment.
Conclusions: The results of the study suggest that difficulties in producing the thematic structure of sentences may be a consequence of different underlying impairments. The different impairments provide some support for the sub-processes suggested by Schwartz. The same surface symptoms in connected speech can be a consequence of different underlying impairments and thus if therapy is be targeted at the impaired process, treatment needs to be preceded by detailed assessment.
C1 Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
RP Webster, J (reprint author), Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, King George VI Bldg,Queen Victoria Rd, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
EM janet.webster@ncl.ac.uk
RI Franklin, Sue/F-9775-2011
CR Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Black M., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P79, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90002-Z
Black M, 2003, LINGUISTICS CLIN
Breedin SD, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P51, DOI 10.1080/026432996382060
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
BYNG S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P241, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248993
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
CARAMAZZA A, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P625, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90091-6
Fink R. B., 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P263
Garrett M. F., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1
GLEASON JB, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P370
JONES EV, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P63
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90038-J
Marshall J, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250461
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
MARSHALL J, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P517, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248712
SAFFRAN EM, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P263, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90056-5
Schwartz M. F., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P85, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406352
SCHWARTZ MF, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P93, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520177
SCHWARTZ MF, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P163
SCHWARTZ MF, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P249, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90055-3
SHAPIRO LP, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P21, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90100-U
SWINBURN K, IN PRESS COMPREHENSI
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
Webster J, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P197, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2460
Webster J., 2000, VAN VERB NOUN TEST
WEBSTER J, 2001, APHASIA THERAPY FILE, V2
WEBSTER J, 1999, THESIS U NEWCASTLE U
WHITWORTH A, 1996, THEMATIC ROLES PRODU
WHITWORTH AB, 1994, THESIS U NEWCASTLE U
NR 33
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2004
VL 18
IS 1
BP 47
EP 68
DI 10.1080/02687030344000481
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 768DY
UT WOS:000188515100003
ER
PT J
AU Kim, M
Thompson, C
AF Kim, M
Thompson, C
TI Semantic anomaly judgement in individuals with probable Alzheimer's
disease
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID MINI-MENTAL-STATE; DEMENTIA; NOUNS; VERBS; COMPREHENSION; ORGANIZATION;
IMPAIRMENT; KNOWLEDGE
AB Background : Research has shown that individuals with probable Alzheimer's disease (PrAD) show impaired semantic knowledge of nouns. More specifically, while they demonstrate preserved superordinate category information, information regarding specific semantic attributes associated with subordinates appears to be disrupted. Results of some recent studies suggest that PrAD participants may also be impaired in processing semantic information associated with verbs.
Aims : Provided that a parallel exists between PrAD participants' noun and verb impairment, it is plausible that the semantic deficits observed in the breakdown of their noun lexicon may also exist in their knowledge of verb-related information. This experiment examined PrAD participants' knowledge of the semantic restrictions associated with the complements of verbs.
Methods & Procedures : Fourteen PrAD participants were asked to judge the semantic plausibility of 44 auditorily presented sentences. To examine their knowledge of the selection restriction of verbs, each verb was paired with two plausible complements that fully met the restriction, an implausible complement that violated the specific attributes required but belonged to the correct semantic category, and an implausible complement that violated the semantic category requirement.
Outcomes & Results : Results showed that PrAD participants' errors were primarily on anomalous sentences that contained implausible complements that belonged to the correct semantic category.
Conclusions : This finding confirms our hypothesis and suggests that a parallel pattern exists in PrAD participants' breakdown in noun and verb knowledge.
C1 Univ Rhode Isl, Dept Communicat Disorders, Kingston, RI 02881 USA.
Northwestern Univ, Evanston, IL USA.
RP Kim, M (reprint author), Univ Rhode Isl, Dept Communicat Disorders, 3071 Kingstown Rd, Kingston, RI 02881 USA.
EM mkim@uri.edu
CR BAYLES KA, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P98, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90057-3
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
Chan AS, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P241, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(96)00067-X
CHERTKOW H, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P420, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90078-3
DAMASIO AR, 1993, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V90, P4957, DOI 10.1073/pnas.90.11.4957
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
GROBER E, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V26, P276, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90043-4
Grossman M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P443, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1841
Grossman M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P216, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0072
Grossman M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P369, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0054
HODGES JR, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P301, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90104-T
HODGES JR, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1547, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.4.1547
HUTTENLOCHER J, 1979, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V18, P141, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(79)90091-4
JACKENDOFF R, 1976, LINGUIST INQ, V7, P89
Jackendoff Ray, 1983, SEMANTICS COGNITION
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KIM M, IN PRESS BRAIN LANGU
MARTIN A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P124, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90059-7
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
Monsch A., 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V8, P25, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.8.1.25
Schank R.C., 1973, COMPUTER MODELS THOU
SMITH SR, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P314, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90068-0
TOMBAUGH TN, 1992, J AM GERIATR SOC, V40, P922
NR 23
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 12
BP 1103
EP 1113
DI 10.1080/02687030344000391
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 762QX
UT WOS:000187994600001
ER
PT J
AU Munoz, ML
Marquardt, TP
AF Munoz, ML
Marquardt, TP
TI Picture naming and identification in bilingual speakers of Spanish and
English with and without aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SELECTIVE DEFICIT; ONE LANGUAGE; RECOVERY; AGREEMENT; NORMS
AB Background: Equivalent language knowledge is assumed in interpreting assessment results from bilingual speakers with aphasia, regardless of pre-morbid language experience. Aims: The purpose of this study was to investigate the affect of pre-morbid language skill, estimated from the performance of 20 neurologically normal bilinguals, on picture identification and naming in four bilingual speakers of Spanish and English with aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: Statistical and qualitative analyses of proficiency, language use patterns, literacy, and concentrated language experience were investigated in relation to between-language differences in picture identification and naming.
Outcomes & Results: Three patterns of impairment were identified: higher scores in English consistent with pre-morbid skill, higher scores in Spanish inconsistent with pre-morbid skill, and variable performance inconsistent with pre-morbid skill.
Conclusions: Results suggest that interpretation of language impairment in adult bilingual speakers within a given bilingual community must consider expected variability in the proficiency and use of the languages spoken and the differential effects of proficiency on expressive and receptive language performance.
C1 Univ Texas, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
RP Munoz, ML (reprint author), Univ Tennessee, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, 578 S Stadium Hall, Knoxville, TN 37996 USA.
EM mmunoz2@utk.edu
CR ARAMBULA G, 1992, HISPANIC CHILDREN AD, P373
BOND RF, 1985, HDB ENDOTOXIN PATHOP, V2, P36
Davis G. A., 2000, APHASIOLOGY DISORDER
FREDMAN M, 1975, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V10, P61
GOGGIN JP, 1994, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V15, P177, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400005312
GOMEZTORTOSA E, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P320, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1014
Grosjean F., 1998, BILING-LANG COGN, V1, P131, DOI DOI 10.1017/S136672899800025X
Hidalgo M., 1995, INT J SOCIOL LANG, V114, P29
JUNQUE C, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P16, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90049-7
JUNQUE C, 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KOHNERT K, 1998, ELDERLY BILINGUAL PE
Kohnert KJ, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P422, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2001
KREMIN H, 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P101
Munoz ML, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V66, P249, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2021
NIKPOUR R, 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P123
Obler L. K., 1999, LANGUAGE BRAIN
Paradis M., 1977, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, P65
PARADIS M, 2000, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V3, P69
Paradis M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P170, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0065
Paradis M., 1987, ASSESSMENT BILINGUAL
PERECMAN E, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P49, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90051-5
Roberts P. M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P635, DOI DOI 10.1080/02687030244000220
Roberts PM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P119, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250467
Sasanuma S., 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P111
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
STADIE N, 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P85
SWAIN D, 1996, ROSS INFORMATION PRO
WATAMORI TS, 1976, J COMMUN DISORD, V9, P157, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(76)90007-1
WATAMORI TS, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V6, P127, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90052-4
NR 30
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 12
BP 1115
EP 1132
DI 10.1080/02687030344000427
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 762QX
UT WOS:000187994600002
ER
PT J
AU Laures, J
Odell, K
Coe, C
AF Laures, J
Odell, K
Coe, C
TI Arousal and auditory vigilance in individuals with aphasia during a
linguistic and nonlinguistic task
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CORTISOL-LEVELS; SALIVARY CORTISOL; HUMAN-PERFORMANCE; SEX-DIFFERENCES;
WORD-FREQUENCY; BLOOD-PRESSURE; ATTENTION; STRESS; RESPONSES; STROKE
AB Background: Attentional deficits have been observed in individuals with aphasia. Attention, specifically vigilance, is believed to be related to arousal. However, our understanding of arousal and its impact on vigilance performance in individuals with aphasia is very limited.
Aims: The purpose of the current study was to investigate whether there is nonoptimal arousal in individuals with aphasia that would affect auditory processing of linguistic and nonlinguistic stimuli. Additionally, this study explored whether there was generalised, nonoptimal arousal and impaired vigilance or deficits specific to linguistic processing.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 20 males (10 with left-hemisphere stroke and aphasia and 10 nonbrain-damaged controls) participated in this study. Physiologic arousal indexed by cardiovascular and neuroendocrine measures and vigilance performance was compared between the two groups during linguistic and nonlinguistic vigilance tasks.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that arousal levels and vigilance performance differed between the two groups. However, within groups arousal and vigilance did not differ between the linguistic and nonlinguistic tasks.
Conclusions: The present findings suggest that individuals with aphasia have decreased overall vigilance and nonoptimal arousal regardless of the linguistic or nonlinguistic nature of the stimuli.
C1 Georgia State Univ, Dept Educ Psychol & Special Educ, Program Commun Disorders, Atlanta, GA 30303 USA.
Univ Wisconsin, Madison, WI USA.
RP Laures, J (reprint author), Georgia State Univ, Dept Educ Psychol & Special Educ, Program Commun Disorders, 30 Pryor St, Atlanta, GA 30303 USA.
EM spejsl@langate.gsu.edu
CR Allport D.A., 1980, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL NE, P112
ARVEDSON JC, 1986, THESIS U WISCONSIN M
BALOTA DA, 1985, J MEM LANG, V24, P89, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(85)90017-8
Bayles KA, 1991, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
Bishop G. D, 1994, HLTH PSYCHOL
BORN J, 1987, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V24, P286, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1987.tb00297.x
CAPLAN D, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P397
Clark H. M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P143
COHEN J, 1993, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V25, P257, DOI 10.3758/BF03204507
Davies DR, 1982, PSYCHOL VIGILANCE
Duffy E., 1962, ACTIVATION BEHAV
Erickson RJ, 1996, BRAIN COGNITION, V30, P244, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1996.0016
Everly G. S., 1987, ASSESSMENT HUMAN STR
FASSBENDER K, 1994, STROKE, V25, P1105
FILLEY C, 2002, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V22, P89
FRANKENHAEUSER M, 1980, COPING HLTH, P203
FRANKLIN S, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P1, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251964
FRANKLIN S, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P549, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252007
GARWOOD M, 1982, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V19, P378, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1982.tb02491.x
Gescheider G. A., 1985, PSYCHOPHYSICS METHOD
Glosser G, 1999, NEUROLOGY, V52, P1583
GORMAN AM, 1961, J EXP PSYCHOL, V61, P23, DOI 10.1037/h0040561
GREDEN JF, 1986, PSYCHONEUROENDOCRINO, V11, P195, DOI 10.1016/0306-4530(86)90054-5
GRIER JB, 1971, PSYCHOL BULL, V75, P424, DOI 10.1037/h0031246
GUNNAR MR, 1992, PEDIATRICS, V90, P491
Guyton AC, 1997, HUMAN PHYSL MECH DIS
HEILMAN KM, 1978, NEUROLOGY, V28, P229
Heilman Kenneth M., 1995, P217
HILLHOUSE JE, 1991, STRESS IMMUNITY, P3
Hino Y, 2000, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V26, P166, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.26.1.166
Hockey GRJ, 1997, BIOL PSYCHOL, V45, P73
JENNINGS J, 1986, ENERGETICS HUMAN INF, P199
Johansson A, 2000, J INTERN MED, V247, P179, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2796.2000.00600.x
JUST MA, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P122, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.1.122
Kahneman D., 1973, ATTENTION EFFORT
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KIRSCHBAUM C, 1994, PSYCHONEUROENDOCRINO, V19, P313, DOI 10.1016/0306-4530(94)90013-2
KIRSCHBAUM C, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOBIOLOGY, V28, P76, DOI 10.1159/000119004
KOELEGA HS, 1989, HUM FACTORS, V31, P45
Kok A, 1997, BIOL PSYCHOL, V45, P19, DOI 10.1016/S0301-0511(96)05221-0
Korda RJ, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P525, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403742
Kudielka BM, 1998, J CLIN ENDOCR METAB, V83, P1756, DOI 10.1210/jc.83.5.1756
LAESSLE RG, 1992, PSYCHONEUROENDOCRINO, V17, P475, DOI 10.1016/0306-4530(92)90006-S
LAPOINTE LL, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P511, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248556
LEVINE S, 1993, PSYCHONEUROENDOCRINO, V18, P297, DOI 10.1016/0306-4530(93)90026-H
LUNDBERG U, 1980, J PSYCHOSOM RES, V24, P125, DOI 10.1016/0022-3999(80)90033-1
LUNDBERG U, 1979, BIOL PSYCHOL, V9, P79, DOI 10.1016/0301-0511(79)90055-3
LUPIEN S, 1994, J NEUROSCI, V14, P2893
Matthews G., 2000, HUMAN PERFORMANCE CO
MCEWEN BS, 1993, ARCH INTERN MED, V153, P2093, DOI 10.1001/archinte.153.18.2093
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
McNeil M. R, 1997, ANN M AC NEUR COMM D
McNeil MR, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P154, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2238
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
MILENKOVIC P, 1994, CSPEECH
MIYAKE A, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P671, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251989
Murray Laura L., 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P107, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-24987
Murray LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P91, DOI 10.1080/026870399402226
Murray LL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P993, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249423
MURROS K, 1993, J NEUROL SCI, V116, P12, DOI 10.1016/0022-510X(93)90083-B
NAVON D, 1984, PSYCHOL REV, V91, P216, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.91.2.216
NAVON D, 1979, PSYCHOL REV, V86, P214, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.86.3.214
Nicolson N, 1997, J GERONTOL A-BIOL, V52, pM68
OLSSON T, 1990, J INTERN MED, V228, P177
PAIVIO A, 1968, J EXP PSYCHOL, V76, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0025327
PARASURAMAN R, 1984, ATTENTIVE BRAIN, P243
PARK MK, 1987, PEDIATRICS, V79, P907
ROBIN D, 1988, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P61
Rogers SL, 1998, J NEUROIMMUNOL, V91, P113, DOI 10.1016/S0165-5728(98)00157-X
Rogoza AN, 2000, BLOOD PRESS MONIT, V5, P227, DOI 10.1097/00126097-200008000-00006
Roozendaal B, 2000, PSYCHONEUROENDOCRINO, V25, P213, DOI 10.1016/S0306-4530(99)00058-X
Sanders AF, 1998, ELEMENTS HUMAN PERFO
SANDERS AF, 1983, ACTA PSYCHOL, V53, P61, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(83)90016-1
Sanders AF, 1997, BIOL PSYCHOL, V45, P5, DOI 10.1016/S0301-0511(96)05220-9
Sapolsky R. M., 1998, WHY ZEBRAS DONT GET
SCHWANENFLUGEL P, 1989, READING RES Q, V29, P250
SEE JE, 1995, PSYCHOL BULL, V117, P230, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.117.2.230
Seeman TE, 2001, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V98, P4770, DOI 10.1073/pnas.081072698
SHARMA M, 1989, BIOL PSYCHIAT, V25, P305, DOI 10.1016/0006-3223(89)90178-9
Stanislaw H, 1999, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V31, P137, DOI 10.3758/BF03207704
STONEY CM, 1988, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V25, P645, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1988.tb01902.x
THACKRAY R. I., 1977, VIGILANCE THEORY OPE, P203
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
TYLER LK, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V9, P354
WARBURTON DM, 1986, ENERGETICS HUMAN INF, P217
Warm J. S., 1984, SUSTAINED ATTENTION, P15
Warm J. S., 1984, SUSTAINED ATTENTION, P1
Watkins MJ, 2000, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V26, P239, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.26.1.239
WHYTE J, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P797, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00029-3
Wickens C.D., 1984, VARIETIES ATTENTION
Williams C, 2002, BEHAV ENDOCRINOLOGY, P527
YOKOYAMA K, 1987, NEUROLOGY, V37, P624
NR 92
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 12
BP 1133
EP 1152
DI 10.1080/02687030344000436
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 762QX
UT WOS:000187994600003
ER
PT J
AU Docking, K
Murdoch, B
Ward, E
AF Docking, K
Murdoch, B
Ward, E
TI Cerebellar language and cognitive functions in childhood: A comparative
review of the clinical research
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID POSTERIOR-FOSSA TUMORS; CHILDREN; LESION; CONTRIBUTES; MOVEMENT;
DEFICITS; SURGERY; DAMAGE; SPEECH
AB Background: Recent research addressing evidence from functional neuroimaging studies, neurophysiological research, and new advances in neuropsychology together with traditional cerebellar lesion studies have recently implicated the cerebellum in adult language and cognitive functions. However, more limited information is currently available in describing the functional connectivity present in the paediatric population.
Aims: It is the purpose of this paper to review recent clinical research pertaining to paediatric populations, outlining the impact of site of lesion and specific associated clinical changes in children with cerebellar disturbances.
Main contribution: The specific contribution of the right cerebellar hemisphere to language function is identified to also exist in the paediatric population, highlighting the existence of functional connections between this region of the brain and left frontal cortical areas early in development.
Conclusions: Implications for future research in paediatric populations are extensive, as a greater awareness and an understanding of the recently acknowledged involvement of the cerebellum in cognition and nonmotor linguistic function is anticipated to also add new dimension and direction to the analysis of childhood language outcomes associated with the cerebellum.
C1 Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Docking, K (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Sch Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
EM k.docking@uq.edu.au
RI Ward, Elizabeth/F-9652-2010; Murdoch, Bruce/C-1397-2012
OI Ward, Elizabeth/0000-0002-2680-8978;
CR Barinaga M, 1996, SCIENCE, V272, P482, DOI 10.1126/science.272.5261.482
Cabeza R, 2000, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V12, P1, DOI 10.1162/08989290051137585
Dow R.S., 1958, PHYSL PATHOLOGY CERE
Fabbro F, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P83, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(00)00005-1
Fawcett AJ, 1996, ANN DYSLEXIA, V46, P259, DOI 10.1007/BF02648179
Holmes G, 1939, BRAIN, V62, P1, DOI 10.1093/brain/62.1.1
HUDSON LJ, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P17, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248574
HUDSON LJ, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P135, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248585
HUDSON LJ, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P1, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248972
HUDSONTENNENT LJ, 1993, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V1, P95
Levisohn L, 2000, BRAIN, V123, P1041, DOI 10.1093/brain/123.5.1041
Marien P, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P145, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(00)00009-9
Marien P, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P580, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2569
Molinari M, 2002, NEUROSCIENCE, V111, P863, DOI 10.1016/S0306-4522(02)00024-6
Molinari M, 1997, BRAIN, V120, P1753, DOI 10.1093/brain/120.10.1753
Muller RA, 1998, J CHILD NEUROL, V13, P16
MURDOCH BE, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P507, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248679
MURDOCH BE, 1999, COMMUNICATION DISORD, P55, DOI 10.1002/9780470699232.ch3
Nicholson R. I., 1995, P ROY SOC LOND B BIO, V259, P43
Oki J, 1999, PEDIATR NEUROL, V21, P745, DOI 10.1016/S0887-8994(99)00075-2
Riva D, 2000, HUM PHYSL, V26, P21, DOI 10.1007/BF02760712
Riva D, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P215, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(00)00012-9
Riva D, 2000, BRAIN, V123, P1051, DOI 10.1093/brain/123.5.1051
Riva D, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P279, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70755-X
Schatz J, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P491
Schmahmann JD, 1996, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V4, P174, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-0193(1996)4:3<174::AID-HBM3>3.0.CO;2-0
Schmahmann JD, 1997, INT REV NEUROBIOL, V41, P3
Scott RB, 2001, DEV MED CHILD NEUROL, V43, P685, DOI 10.1017/S0012162201001232
Silveri MC, 2001, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V71, P114, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.71.1.114
Silveri MC, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P2175, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.11.2175
SILVERI MC, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P2047
Silveri MC, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P129, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(00)00008-7
Steinlin M, 1999, NEUROLOGY, V53, P966
NR 33
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 12
BP 1153
EP 1161
DI 10.1080/02687030344000445
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 762QX
UT WOS:000187994600004
ER
PT J
AU Herbert, R
Best, W
Hickin, J
Howard, D
Osborne, F
AF Herbert, R
Best, W
Hickin, J
Howard, D
Osborne, F
TI Combining lexical and interactional approaches to therapy for word
finding deficits in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COMMUNICATIVE EFFECTIVENESS INDEX; PACE-THERAPY; CONVERSATION; RETRIEVAL
AB Background: There are two distinct theoretical positions underlying approaches to aphasia therapy. The first addresses the language impairment directly through tasks designed to improve performance in that language function. This form of therapy was employed in a related study involving the participants reported here (Hickin et al., 2002a). The second seeks to bypass the language impairment by, for example promoting alternative forms of communication, and stressing the importance of successful rather than normal communication. There are few studies that combine the structured principled methods of the first with the ecologically valid basis of the second approach.
Aims: Our aim was to investigate the effectiveness of combining a lexical therapy, targeting a discrete set of items and using cues to prompt name retrieval, with communicative use of those items, in tasks ranging from naming to definition through to structured conversation. We investigated the effects of the therapy in terms of gains in picture naming, and performance in a task simulating communication situations (production of nouns in everyday communication).
Methods & Procedures: The study is a case series design involving six people with aphasia. All were adult English speakers aged 39 and upwards who were aphasic following a single left hemisphere stroke. Picture naming and production of nouns in everyday communication was assessed prior to and after therapy.
Outcomes & Results: The combined therapy described here was effective for five of the six participants in terms of gains in picture naming, and an increase in communicatively effective responses in the noun production task. One person, for whom the lexical therapy described in Hickin et al. (2002a) was not effective, did however respond to the therapy reported here. For one of the six participants, the therapy was not effective.
Conclusions: Therapy that targets a specific set of words, and encourages their use in tasks approaching everyday communication, can be effective in improving word finding in picture naming and in a functional speech task. As therapy effects are restricted to items undergoing therapy on the whole it is essential that words are selected for therapy on the basis of their functional use to the participant. This therapy was effective for most of the six participants and we are unable at this stage to identify exclusion criteria for undergoing this therapy.
C1 Univ Sheffield, Dept Human Commun Sci, Sheffield S10 2TA, S Yorkshire, England.
UCL, London, England.
De Montfort Univ, Leicester LE1 9BH, Leics, England.
Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
Univ London Birkbeck Coll, London WC1E 7HX, England.
RP Herbert, R (reprint author), Univ Sheffield, Dept Human Commun Sci, 31 Claremont Crescent, Sheffield S10 2TA, S Yorkshire, England.
RI Herbert, Ruth/I-4760-2013
OI Herbert, Ruth/0000-0002-7139-1091
CR ATEN JL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P93
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
BLOMERT L, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P463
BOOTH S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P289
Booth S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P283
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
Hickin J, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P981, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000509
HICKIN J, 2002, 2 APHASIA THERAPY FI
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
Holland A. L., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P197, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90007-6
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LESSER R, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P67, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520176
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Osborne F, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P208
Pedersen PM, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P787, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000195
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
PULVERMULLER F, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P39, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248518
Robson J, 1998, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P305, DOI 10.1080/136828298247767
Sheeran P., 1999, VASES VISUAL ANALOGU
SPRINGER L, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P391, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248541
SWINBURN K, IN PRESS COMPREHENSI
Worrall L, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P911
NR 29
TC 29
Z9 30
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 12
BP 1163
EP 1186
DI 10.1080/02687030344000454
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 762QX
UT WOS:000187994600005
ER
PT J
AU Roberts, PM
Code, C
McNeil, MR
AF Roberts, PM
Code, C
McNeil, MR
TI Describing participants in aphasia research: Part 1. Audit of current
practice
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLINICAL-OUTCOME RESEARCH; NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL RESEARCH; LANGUAGE;
TRIALS; AGE
AB Background: In order for readers to fully understand the results of published studies of aphasia, and in order to replicate studies and conduct meta-analyses, it is critical that authors adequately describe the participants in these studies. A number of authors have made recommendations as to which variables should be included in descriptions of participants in studies of aphasia. In addition, the American Psychological Association (APA) publication manual (2001)-the most widely recognised standard for the social sciences-includes specific guidelines for describing research participants.
Aims: To review how aphasic participants in current studies are described, and to assess the adequacy of these descriptions in relation to both the APA guidelines (2001), and the recommendations made by Brookshire (1983).
Methods & Procedures: We reviewed 100 articles on aphasia, published in 2001 and 2002, and identified which of 43 variables were included in the descriptions of participants. The audit included only articles that were peer-reviewed and focused on the linguistic features of or treatment for aphasia subsequent to stroke. Separate results are reported for group studies and single case studies, and for studies of symptoms and treatment studies.
Outcomes & Results: Most articles fell far short of the recommended standards. Only seven variables were reported in 65% or more of studies. Single case studies and group studies provided similar levels of detail.
Conclusions: More complete descriptions of participants in aphasia research are needed if published studies are to meet the standard set by the APA, advance our understanding of aphasia, and inform future treatment studies.
C1 Univ Ottawa, Sch Rehabil Sci, Ottawa, ON K1H 8M5, Canada.
Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
Univ Exeter, Exeter EX4 4QJ, Devon, England.
Hanse Inst Adv Study, Delmenhorst, Germany.
Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Roberts, PM (reprint author), Univ Ottawa, Sch Rehabil Sci, 505 Smyth Rd, Ottawa, ON K1H 8M5, Canada.
CR Altman DG, 2001, ANN INTERN MED, V134, P663
*AM PSYCH AS, 2001, PUBL MAN AM PSYCH AS
Bergman B, 2001, SCAND AUDIOL, V30, P255, DOI 10.1080/01050390152704779
Bettoni Camilla, 1991, LANGUAGE AUSTR, P263, DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620881.020
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V48, P342
Bryan KL, 2001, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V7, P655, DOI 10.1017/S1355617701766015
CARAMAZZA A, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P9, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90032-4
Fozard J., 2001, HDB PSYCHOL AGING, P241
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GROSJEAN F, 1991, LINGUISTIQUE, V27, P35
Helm-Estabrooks N., 2001, COGNITIVE LINGUISTIC
HOWARD D, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P89
Katz RC, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P303
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Miller N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P683
Pavlenko A, 2002, APPL LINGUIST, V23, P190, DOI 10.1093/applin/23.2.190
Pavlenko A., 2000, ISSUES APPL LINGUIST, V11, P175
Penn C, 2001, J NEUROLINGUIST, V14, P111, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00011-2
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V2
Roberts P. M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P208
ROBERTS PM, 2003, UNPUB DESCRIBING P 2
Robey RR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P787, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249573
Robey RR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P445
ROSENBEK JC, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P357
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
Seliger HW, 1991, 1 LANGUAGE ATTRITION
Shallice T, 1979, J CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLO, V1, P183, DOI DOI 10.1080/01688637908414450
Spreen O., 1991, COMPENDIUM NEUROPSYC
Stanczak EM, 2000, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V15, P587
STURM W, 1993, NONVERBAL LEARNING T
Tombaugh TN, 1999, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V14, P167, DOI 10.1016/S0887-6177(97)00095-4
TOMPKINS CA, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V33, P398
van Hell JG, 2002, PSYCHON B REV, V9, P780
Whitbourne S. K., 2002, AGING INDIVIDUAL PHY
NR 34
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 10
BP 911
EP 932
DI 10.1080/02687030344000328
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 739JR
UT WOS:000186341800001
ER
PT J
AU Roberts, PM
AF Roberts, PM
TI Performance of Canadian adults on the Graded Naming Test
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AGE-OF-ACQUISITION; NORMATIVE DATA; WORD-FREQUENCY; NEW-ZEALAND; NORMS;
TIMES; FLUENCY; PEOPLE
AB Background: The Graded Naming Test (McKenna & Warrington, 1983) is designed to assess mild naming deficits. In order to do so, it uses relatively uncommon stimuli such as cowl and bellows . There are two studies reporting scores obtained by adults in England, but there is no published study of test-retest reliability. There is no study documenting performance of Canadian adults on this test.
Aims: This study examined the performance of English-speaking Canadian adults on the Graded Naming Test (GNT), in order to: (1) compare their performance to that of the two normative samples; (2) determine whether the 30 test items met the psychometric standards set in the test manual; and (3) assess the test-retest reliability of the GNT.
Methods and Procedures: A total of 30 adults, aged 20 to 52 years, named the 30 pictures making up the GNT. The unusual cueing procedures specified in the test manual were not followed. Of the 30 participants, 28 returned for a second test, 7 to 15 days later.
Outcomes and Results: The mean score of 17.5 was below that reported in the two studies of English adults. Scores were significantly correlated with level of education, and with estimated frequency of occurrence and age of acquisition. Item difficulty differed in many ways and for many pictures from that reported in the test manual. Problems with multiple names for several pictures and with the instructions for cueing are discussed. The mean score improved significantly on retesting.
Conclusions: The Graded Naming Test requires further investigation, including clarification of administration and scoring procedures, and studies of larger samples of adults in other countries to determine local norms.
C1 Univ Ottawa, Fac Hlth Sci, Ottawa, ON K1H 8M5, Canada.
RP Roberts, PM (reprint author), Univ Ottawa, Fac Hlth Sci, 451 Smyth Rd,Room 3071, Ottawa, ON K1H 8M5, Canada.
CR Barca L, 2002, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V34, P424, DOI 10.3758/BF03195471
Barker-Collo SL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P85, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000124
Bonin P, 2001, CAH PSYCHOL COGN, V20, P401
Bonin P, 2001, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V54, P469, DOI 10.1080/02724980042000219
FARMER A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P293, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249081
Harrison JE, 2000, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V39, P181, DOI 10.1348/014466500163202
Harvey JA, 1999, NEW ZEAL J PSYCHOL, V28, P124
Ivnik RJ, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V13, P121, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.13.1.121
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Lewis MB, 2001, COGNITION, V78, P189, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(00)00117-7
Marien P, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P447, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2000
McKenna P, 1983, GRADED NAMING TEST M
Morrison CM, 2002, EUR J COGN PSYCHOL, V14, P435, DOI 10.1080/09541440143000159
Nelson H, 1992, NATL ADULT READING T
PICKETT J, 2000, AM HERITAGE DICT
Pind J, 2002, SCAND J PSYCHOL, V43, P221, DOI 10.1111/1467-9450.00290
ROBERTS P, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248682
Roberts P. M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P635, DOI DOI 10.1080/02687030244000220
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Tombaugh TN, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P922, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403773
WARRINGTON EK, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V7, P143
Wilson BA, 2000, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V6, P469
WORRALL LE, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P541, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248713
2002, MERRIAMWEBSTERS 3 NE
NR 24
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 10
BP 933
EP 946
DI 10.1080/02687030344000300
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 739JR
UT WOS:000186341800002
ER
PT J
AU Rose, TA
Worrall, LE
McKenna, KT
AF Rose, TA
Worrall, LE
McKenna, KT
TI The effectiveness of aphasia-friendly principles for printed health
education materials for people with aphasia following stroke
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WRITTEN INFORMATION; CARERS; KNOWLEDGE; FAMILIES
AB Background: Provision of health information to people with aphasia is inadequate. Current practice in providing printed health education materials to people with aphasia does not routinely take into consideration their language and associated reading difficulties.
Aims: This study aimed to investigate if people with aphasia can comprehend health information contained in printed health education materials and if the application of aphasia-friendly principles is effective in assisting them to comprehend health information. It was hypothesised that participants with aphasia would comprehend significantly more information from aphasia-friendly materials than from existing materials. Other aims included investigating if the effectiveness of the aphasia-friendly principles is related to aphasia severity, if people with aphasia are more confident in responding to health information questions after they have read the aphasia-friendly material, if they prefer to read the aphasia-friendly brochures, and if they prefer to read the brochure type that resulted in the greatest increase in their knowledge.
Methods & Procedures: Twelve participants with mild to moderately severe aphasia were matched according to their reading abilities. A pre and post experimental design was employed with repeated measures ANOVA (p<.05) used to investigate the effectiveness of the aphasia-friendly principles.
Outcomes & Results: While participants with aphasia comprehended health information from the existing printed education materials, participants comprehended 11.2% more information from materials that had an aphasia-friendly format. No significant correlation between aphasia severity and aphasia-friendly effectiveness was found. Participants were more confident in answering questions after they had read the aphasia-friendly brochures. A clear preference for aphasia-friendly brochures was not found and participants did not consistently select the brochure type that resulted in the greatest increase in their health knowledge.
Conclusions: This preliminary investigation has found that aphasia-friendly material does assist people with aphasia to comprehend health information. The benefits of providing aphasia-friendly information have many clinical applications that extend beyond the provision of health information. The application of aphasia-friendly principles to all written materials could prove beneficial in removing some of the barriers people with aphasia face in trying to comprehend written materials. In addition, this research has highlighted that a greater understanding of people with aphasia's reactions to aphasia-friendly materials and also the social impact of providing aphasia-friendly information is required. Future research, that incorporates a qualitative research approach, will add valuable insight to these topics.
C1 Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Worrall, LE (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RI Rose, Tanya/D-2580-2010; Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR ALBERT T, 1992, BRIT MED J, V305, P1266
Anderson R, 1988, Int Disabil Stud, V10, P107
*ARTHR FDN AUSTR, ARTHR BROCH
Barlow JH, 1997, PSYCHOL HEALTH MED, V2, P3, DOI 10.1080/13548509708400556
Beeson P. B., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P572
Bernier M J, 1993, Orthop Nurs, V12, P39, DOI 10.1097/00006416-199311000-00008
Buckland S, 1994, Health Libr Rev, V11, P82, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2532.1994.1120082.x
Buxton T, 1999, J HLTH ED, V30, P47
Cruice M., 2000, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V5, P85
DENNIS KE, 1990, NURS RES, V39, P162
Draper M., 1995, ROLE PATIENT SATISFA
EGAN J, 2002, UNPUB ACCESSIBLE INT
Farrell-Miller P, 1989, Diabetes Educ, V15, P418, DOI 10.1177/014572178901500505
Flesch R, 1948, J APPL PSYCHOL, V32, P221, DOI 10.1037/h0057532
Funnell M M, 1992, Diabetes Educ, V18, P139, DOI 10.1177/014572179201800207
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
Hanger HC, 1998, CLIN REHABIL, V12, P45, DOI 10.1191/026921598668677675
HANGER HC, 1993, STROKE, V24, P36
HAYWARD J, 1994, INFORMATION PRESCRIP
Kahn A, 2000, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V9, P3
KAY EA, 1988, BRIT J RHEUMATOL, V27, P396
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
King O, 1997, HEALTH PROMOT J AUST, V7, P160
Ley P, 1988, COMMUNICATING PATIEN
Lomer M, 1987, CLIN REHABIL, V1, P33, DOI 10.1177/026921558700100108
McKenna KT, 2003, AUSTRALAS J AGEING, V22, P15, DOI 10.1111/j.1741-6612.2003.tb00457.x
MEREDITH P, 1995, BRIT MED J, V311, P4
*MOT NEUR SOC QUEE, MOT NEUR DIS BROCH
MURPHY PW, 1993, ADULT LITERACY COMPE, P79
MYERSCOUGH PR, 1989, TALKING PATIENTS BAS
*NAT STROK FDN, 2001, ANSW TOP 10 QUEST ST
OMahony PG, 1997, CLIN REHABIL, V11, P68, DOI 10.1177/026921559701100110
*OST AUSTR, 2000, PREV OST GOOD HLTH T
OWEN PM, 1993, J CARDIOPULMONARY RE, V13, P20
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
PARR S, 1999, APHASIA HDB
Patterson C, 1997, AGE AGEING, V26, P41, DOI 10.1093/ageing/26.1.41
Paul C. L., 1997, HEALTH PROMOT J AUST, V7, P153
PHILIPP R, 1990, J ROY SOC HEALTH, V110, P10, DOI 10.1177/146642409011000104
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
POUND P, 1994, CLIN REHABIL, V8, P7, DOI 10.1177/026921559400800102
QUINTANA LA, 1995, OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY, P539
RANKIN S, 1990, PATIENT ED ISSUES PR
REYNOLDS M, 1978, BRIT MED J, V1, P1673
Rodgers H, 2001, AGE AGEING, V30, P129, DOI 10.1093/ageing/30.2.129
Rosenbeck J. C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
SCHWALB E, 1988, PATIENT ED, V15, P651
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
Sullivan K, 2001, Top Stroke Rehabil, V7, P52
TACKETTSTEPHENS S, 1992, PATIENT ED, V19, P83
Vahabi M, 1995, HLTH ED J, V54, P99, DOI 10.1177/001789699505400110
WADE DT, 1986, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V49, P11, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.49.1.11
WEINMAN J, 1990, J ROY SOC MED, V83, P303
WELLS R, 1974, STROKE, V5, P393
WELLWOOD I, 1994, AGE AGEING, V23, P293, DOI 10.1093/ageing/23.4.293
Wiles R, 1998, J ADV NURS, V28, P794, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2648.1998.00709.x
WILSONBARNETT J, 1981, J ADV NURS, V6, P435, DOI 10.1111/j.1365-2648.1981.tb03247.x
WILSONBARNETT J, 1983, INT J NURS STUD, V20, P33, DOI 10.1016/0020-7489(83)90037-8
NR 58
TC 50
Z9 50
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 10
BP 947
EP 963
DI 10.1080/02687030344000319
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 739JR
UT WOS:000186341800003
ER
PT J
AU Ferguson, A
Worrall, L
McPhee, J
Buskell, R
Armstrong, E
Togher, L
AF Ferguson, A
Worrall, L
McPhee, J
Buskell, R
Armstrong, E
Togher, L
TI Testamentary capacity and aphasia: A descriptive case report with
implications for clinical practice
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONSENT
AB Background: Testamentary capacity (the capacity to make a will) is recognised in the literature as an important issue for speech-language pathologists' assessment of people with aphasia, but current guidelines for clinical practice lack an empirical base.
Aims: The research aimed to suggest some guidelines for clinical practice based on information considered relevant for the court in determining testamentary capacity.
Methods & Procedures: A recent legal case involving a challenge to the will of a woman with severe aphasia was critically examined with reference to current guidelines in the literature regarding assessment of testamentary capacity.
Outcomes & Results: Examination of the information available on the case indicated that the judge gave priority to accounts of the everyday communication of the person with aphasia (including reported discourse samples) over the information provided by expert medical witnesses. The extent to which communication effectiveness could be maximised was found to be a matter of key significance to the determination of capacity.
Conclusions: This study has implications for speech-language pathologists' assessment practices and reports, as well as for scope of practice with regard to legal decision making of people with aphasia. These issues are discussed in relation to the World Health Organisation's ICF framework of functioning for social participation.
C1 Univ Newcastle, Sch Language & Media, Fac Educ & Arts, Newcastle, NSW 2308, Australia.
Univ Queensland, St Lucia, Qld 4067, Australia.
Nepean Hosp, Penrith, NSW, Australia.
Macquarie Univ, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
RP Ferguson, A (reprint author), Univ Newcastle, Sch Language & Media, Fac Educ & Arts, Univ Dr, Newcastle, NSW 2308, Australia.
EM Alison.Ferguson@newcastle.edu.au
RI Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR Armstrong Elizabeth, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO
BATES PW, 1994, BRAIN DAMAGE MEDICOL
Bazeley P., 2000, NVIVO QUALITATIVE PR
BOOTH S, 2001, LAWYERS PRACTICE MAN, pA1201
Braunack-Mayer A, 2001, J CLIN ETHIC, V12, P388
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P235
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Cherney L. R., 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU
Connelly J., 1992, QUESTION RIGHTS GUID
COOK G, 1985, AM J FORENSIC PSYCH, V3, P10
Critchley M., 1970, APHASIOLOGY, P288
Darzins P, 2000, WHO CAN DECIDE 6 STE
Davis G. A., 2000, APHASIOLOGY DISORDER
Enderby P, 1994, Med Leg J, V62 ( Pt 2), P70
Faerch C., 1986, LEARNING TEACHING CO, P179
FAERCH C, 1984, LANG LEARN, V34, P45
Ferguson A., 2000, PRAGMATIC APPROACHES, P53
FERGUSON A, 2002, 10 INT APH REH C BRI
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Fraser D, 2000, QSR NVIVO REFERENCE
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P171, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00063-1
HERSH D, 2000, RES REFLECT RENEW, P126
Holland A., 1998, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
Jain N, 2000, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V14, P13, DOI 10.1076/1385-4046(200002)14:1;1-8;FT013
Kagan A, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P65
Keil K, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P305, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000654
Likourezos A, 2001, GERIATRICS, V56, P55
LOWE S, 2001, 9 APH S AUSTR AD
Perkins L, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P259
Pound C., 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Purdy M., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P549, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000176
Richards L., 2000, USING NVIVO QUALITAT
Silverman F. H., 1992, LEGAL ETHICAL CONSID
SPAR JE, 1992, AM J PSYCHIAT, V149, P169
UDELL R, 1980, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V61, P374
Wong JG, 1999, PSYCHOL MED, V29, P437, DOI 10.1017/S0033291798008113
World Health Organization, 2001, ICF INT CLASS FUNCT
Worrall L., 1999, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
Worrall L., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
NR 39
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 10
BP 965
EP 980
DI 10.1080/02687030344000337
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 739JR
UT WOS:000186341800004
ER
PT J
AU Adrian, JA
Gonzalez, M
Buiza, JJ
AF Adrian, JA
Gonzalez, M
Buiza, JJ
TI The use of computer-assisted therapy in anomia rehabilitation: A
single-case report
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTION; SPEECH PRODUCTION; NAMING DISORDERS; LEXICAL
ACCESS; COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCHOLOGY; VISUAL COMMUNICATION; APHASIA;
RETRIEVAL; ANEMIA; ERRORS
AB Background: Research has shown there are three different recognised levels of processing involved in spoken word production: the semantic level, the lexical level, and the phonological level. All of these influence the naming performance of anomic patients. However, there is disagreement regarding the most appropriate strategies for the treatment of anomic problems (repetition, lexical-phonological cueing, semantic cueing, or a combination of all three). The use of computers seems to offer considerable advantages for the daily work of speech therapists, however there is still discussion as to whether or not computers can help patients achieve goals in therapy, and whether computers really can assist therapists in helping their patients to reach their full potential.
Aims: This report describes the Computer-assisted Anomia Rehabilitation Program (CARP) designed to be used by a speech therapist working with anomic patients. The program uses semantic, phonological, written, and semantic/phonological cueing procedures to promote the naming of objects and actions. A single-case study is described in an attempt to demonstrate the effectiveness of the program. We hoped to increase naming ability and help the patient internalise these strategies and apply them to untreated items in order to demonstrate the effectiveness of the treatment.
Methods & Procedures: This is a single-case report using ABA design, in which a pre-treatment naming baseline was obtained followed by a computer-assisted intervention procedure over a 12-day period. Post-treatment evaluation was conducted a month later to determine the extent of the improvement in the subject's denomination performance. We compare the results to control measurements (PALPA Oral Picture Naming test, Raven's Progressive Matrices, and Yesavage Geriatric Scale).
Outcomes & Results: Comparison of pre- vs post-treatment results of the practised words indicated improvement in target naming from 53% to 70% correct responses, when tested 30 days after the end of treatment. In addition, significant improvement was also found in an untrained PALPA Oral Picture Naming test (pre: 13/40; post: 26/40). Results in the generalisation group of stimuli can be related to the patient's internalisation of strategies provided during treatment and its application to untreated items. On the other hand, no significant gains were observed in other areas of cognition taken as control (IQ measured by the Raven's Matrices).
Conclusions: This report shows the effectiveness of the Computer-assisted Anomia Rehabilitation Program (CARP) in this single case. It suggests that computer-based programmes can be valid in the treatment of anomic disorders, and proposes further study and development of these systems in clinical practice.
C1 Univ Malaga, Fac Psicol, E-29071 Malaga, Spain.
RP Adrian, JA (reprint author), Univ Malaga, Fac Psicol, Campus Teatinos S-N, E-29071 Malaga, Spain.
RI Farkas, Nicole/L-2557-2014
CR Aftonomos LB, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P841, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90197-0
Albert ML, 1998, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V55, P1417, DOI 10.1001/archneur.55.11.1417
Bachoud-Levi AC, 1998, J MEM LANG, V39, P331, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1998.2572
Basso A, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P45, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2422
BASSO A, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P209
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P177, DOI 10.1080/026432997381664
CRERAR MA, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P223
Crerar MA, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P229, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0010
CUETOS F, 1998, EVALUACION REHABILIT
Cuetos F, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P451, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2383
Cuetos F, 1999, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V31, P650, DOI 10.3758/BF03200741
CUETOS F, 1999, P 6 C LAT NEUR VAR C, P17
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Ellis A., 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P207
Ellis AW, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P515, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.2.515
ENNIS MR, 2000, DISS ABSTR INT SCI E, V60
FEINSTEIN A, 1999, COGNITIVE NEUROREHAB, P230
Fink R. B., 2000, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V7, P32
Fink RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1061, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000400
GARCIAALBEA JE, 1996, EVALUACION AFASIA TR
Goldrick M, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P20, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000203
Gonzalez M, 2000, J NEUROLINGUIST, V13, P289
GOODGLASS H, 1986, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
HART J, 1985, NATURE, V316, P439, DOI 10.1038/316439a0
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P69
Herbert R, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P7
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Howard D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249540
JESCHENIAK JD, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P824, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.20.4.824
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
KATZ RC, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P253
KAY GG, 1997, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P143
KAY J, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P613, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.3.613
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
LEDORZE G, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P51
LEDORZE G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P127
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Levelt W. J. M., 1994, INT PERSPECTIVES PSY, V1, P89
LEVELT WJM, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90038-J
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MARSHALL JC, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V24, P5, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(86)90040-0
Martin P, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P225, DOI 10.1080/026870399402208
McCall D, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P795
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
MICELI G, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P351, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248937
Mortley J, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000188
NADEAU S, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
NICKELS L, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P289, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251977
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P3, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000645
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
NICKELS L, 1995, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V10, P13, DOI 10.1080/01690969508407086
Pate D. S., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P43, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406351
Patterson K., 1983, APHASIA THERAPY
Pedersen PM, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P151, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000106
Ralph MAL, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P186
REIS A, 1994, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V16, P939, DOI 10.1080/01688639408402705
ROELOFS A, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P107, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90041-F
Sebastian N., 2000, LEXESP LEXICO INFORM
Siegel S., 1988, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
Valle F., 1995, EPLA EVALUACION PROC
WALLER A, 1999, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P45
Weekes BS, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P77, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249445
WEINRICH M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P501, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249018
Wilson R, 2002, J CHART INST WATER E, V16, P1
ZINGESER LB, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P473, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253270
NR 70
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 10
BP 981
EP 1002
DI 10.1080/02687030344000256
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 739JR
UT WOS:000186341800005
ER
PT J
AU Hersh, D
AF Hersh, D
TI "Weaning" clients from aphasia therapy: Speech pathologists' strategies
for discharge
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID DECISION-MAKING; REHABILITATION; PLATEAU; STROKE; MANAGEMENT; ENCOUNTER;
ILLNESS; CARE
AB Background : Although the concept of weaning clients from therapy is clinically familiar, it is not an area of practice that has ever been systematically investigated or rendered explicit. This is a serious omission because weaning is an important part of the discharge process which is itself a crucial aspect of therapy as a whole.
Aims : This article discusses speech pathologists' reports about how they discharge their clients with chronic aphasia. It explores the process of weaning in order to define its nature and raise awareness of it as a common aspect of clinical practice.
Methods & Procedures : This research draws on qualitative research carried out for a broader Australian study on both speech pathologists' and clients' experiences of aphasia treatment termination. The data on which this paper is based were gathered through semi-structured interviews with 30 Australian speech pathologists and analysed using principles of grounded theory.
Outcomes & Results : This research exposes 19 weaning strategies grouped into five categories: wait-and-see; negotiation; preparation; separation; and replacement. It also discusses five possible reasons why speech pathologists use these strategies in preparation for discharge.
Conclusions : This paper explores the practice of weaning by which speech pathologists try to achieve their imperative of moving clients on while maintaining the integrity of their therapeutic relationships. It argues that weaning is, at least in part, a manipulative process that reflects speech pathologists' response to the dilemma of acting as both client advocate and resource gatekeeper. It suggests that speech pathologists' use of weaning strategies is often implicit and deserves greater reflection by the profession.
C1 Flinders Univ S Australia, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Adelaide, SA 5001, Australia.
RP Hersh, D (reprint author), Flinders Univ S Australia, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Adelaide, SA 5001, Australia.
CR *AM SPEECH LANG HE, 1994, ADM DISCH CRIT SPEEC
*AUSTR I HLTH WELF, 1999, CARD HLTH REP HEART
Baum F, 1998, NEW PUBLIC HLTH AUST
BECKER G, 1995, MED ANTHROPOL Q, V9, P165, DOI 10.1525/maq.1995.9.2.02a00040
Bonta Z, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P218, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249448
BROWN L, 1993, NEW SHORTER OXFORD E, V2
BURY M, 1991, SOCIOL HEALTH ILL, V13, P451, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9566.1991.tb00522.x
Byng Sally, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO
Charles C, 1997, SOC SCI MED, V44, P681, DOI 10.1016/S0277-9536(96)00221-3
Charles C, 1999, SOC SCI MED, V49, P651, DOI 10.1016/S0277-9536(99)00145-8
Charmaz K., 1991, GOOD DAYS BAD DAYS S
*COLL SPEECH LANG, 1991, COMM QUAL PROF STAND
Collins M, 1986, DIAGNOSIS TREATMENT
Coulter A, 1997, J Health Serv Res Policy, V2, P112
Elman RJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P227, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249450
Faden Ruth R., 1986, HIST THEORY INFORMED
FAULKNER A, 1998, NEWS IS BAD GUIDE HL
FAULKNER A, 1995, MED EDUC, V29, P303
Frattali C. M., 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S
Glaser B., 1967, DISCOVERY GROUNDED T
Goffman E, 1959, PRESENTATION SELF EV
GOLD SJ, 1983, QUALITATIVE SOCIOLOG, V6, P238, DOI 10.1007/BF00987448
Greener J, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P162
GREENER J, 1998, B ROYAL COLL SPEECH, V551, P11
Gremmen I, 1999, NURS ETHICS, V6, P515, DOI 10.1177/096973309900600607
Hallowell B, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P173
Hersh D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P207, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249447
Hersh D, 2003, THESIS FLINDERS U AU
Hersh D, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P80
Horton S, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P355
Hugman Richard, 1991, POWER CARING PROFESS
JORDAN L, 1996, APHASIA SOCIAL APPRO
Katz RC, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P303
Kvale S., 1996, INTERVIEWS INTRO QUA
Lawrie M., 1996, AUSTR COMMUNICAT SPR, P65
LENDREM W, 1994, THESIS U NEWCASTLE U
LEWINTER M, 1995, DISABIL REHABIL, V17, P211
LYON JG, 1996, ADULT APHASIA REHABI, P137
MACKENZIE C, 1993, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V28, P43
Maclean N, 2000, SOC SCI MED, V50, P495
MATISON V, 2000, SAYING GOODBYE STORI
MILLER RM, 1990, MED SPEECH PATHOLOGY
MINICHIELLO V, 1995, IN DEPTH INTERVIEWIN
Mizrahi Terry, 1986, GETTING RID PATIENTS
*NAT HLTH STRAT, 1993, 12 NAT HLTH STRAT
OLEARY I, 1991, B COLL SPEECH LANGUA, V470, P7
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
Pickering M, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P5
Pound C, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P222, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249449
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
SAMO MT, 1986, 5 ANN HEMPH LECT REH
SANKAR A, 1986, SOC SCI MED, V22, P973, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(86)90170-X
Schon D., 1983, REFLECTIVE PRACTITIO
SCOFIELD GR, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P341
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 1999, CONSTRUCTING INCOMPE
Simmons-Mackie N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P231, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249451
SMITH M, 1999, ROYAL COLL SPEECH LA, V562, P16
Strauss A, 1975, CHRONIC ILLNESS QUAL
Strauss A., 1998, BASICS QUALITATIVE R
WARREN L, 1976, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, V6, P358
Wiles R, 2002, DISABIL REHABIL, V24, P841, DOI 10.1080/09638280210142158
Worrall L., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
1988, COLLINS POCKET REFER
NR 64
TC 13
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 11
BP 1007
EP 1029
DI 10.1080/02687030344000364
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 754GD
UT WOS:000187295400001
ER
PT J
AU Wade, J
Mortley, J
Enderby, P
AF Wade, J
Mortley, J
Enderby, P
TI Talk about IT: Views of people with aphasia and their partners on
receiving remotely monitored computer-based word finding therapy
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID QUALITATIVE METHODS; CONVERSATION ANALYSIS; REHABILITATION; DISORDERS;
EFFICACY; PATIENT; STROKE; ISSUES
AB Background : Research into computerised aphasia therapy has investigated effects of computer therapy on language skills. Little is known about views of people with aphasia on using computers in therapy. New technology has made possible delivery of therapy via the Internet ("remotely"), without face-to-face contact with the therapist. The acceptability to clients and carers of this novel mode of delivering aphasia therapy warranted investigation. Aims : This paper reports an exploratory investigation of the views and experiences of six people with aphasia and their partners on receiving computer-based word-retrieval therapy delivered remotely.
Methods & Procedures : Six people with aphasia received therapy via computer over a 6-month period. A speech and language therapist monitored therapy remotely via the Internet. In-depth interviews were carried out with participants and carers after therapy, by a therapist not involved in treatment, to elicit views on expectations, experiences, and effects of therapy. Five men and one woman with aphasia were interviewed (median age 63 years). Participants ranged from 2 to 12 years post CVA (median 2yrs 6 months). All had word retrieval difficulties. Five had partners, all of whom were interviewed.
Outcomes & Results : All participants responded positively to this mode of therapy delivery and all perceived gains to have been made. Organisation of practice varied but all reported a sense of increased autonomy for the person with aphasia and believed this mode of therapy had facilitated more intensive practice than previously experienced. Intensity of practice was seen as crucial in leading to benefits at the level of language impairment. Benefits to functional communication were attributed not only to improved language skills but also to improved confidence and self-esteem. Negative effects all related to amount of time spent in practice and reduced time available for other activities.
Conclusions : A wide range of benefits to functional communication was reported from receiving therapy that was purely impairment-based and involved no face-to-face contact with a therapist. Participants valued the increased autonomy and increased opportunity for practice associated with the remotely monitored therapy but viewed the supervisory role of the speech and language therapist as crucial. The remote mode of therapy delivery may offer potential advantages compared with face-to-face therapy, which warrant further investigation.
C1 Frenchay Hosp, N Bristol NHS Trust, Speech & Language Therapy Res Unit, Bristol BS16 1LE, Avon, England.
No Gen Hosp, Sheffield S5 7AU, S Yorkshire, England.
RP Wade, J (reprint author), Frenchay Hosp, N Bristol NHS Trust, Speech & Language Therapy Res Unit, Bristol BS16 1LE, Avon, England.
CR Aftonomos LB, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1370
BYNG S, 1999, REVERSIBLE SENTENCES
Cant R, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P297
Coulter A, 2002, BRIT MED J, V325, P668, DOI 10.1136/bmj.325.7366.668
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P651
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P667
Department of Health, 2000, NHS PLAN PLAN INV PL
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
Fink RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1061, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000400
Frattali Carol M., 1998, Seminars in Speech and Language, V19, P209, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064045
Guba E. G., 1994, HDB QUALITATIVE RES, P105
Hafsteinsdottir TB, 1997, J ADV NURS, V26, P580, DOI 10.1046/j.1365-2648.1997.t01-19-00999.x
Holland AL, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, pS27
JORDAN L, 1996, APHASIA SOCIAL APPRO
KATZ R, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P160
KATZ R, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P323
KATZ RC, 1999, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V20, P351
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LOVERSO FL, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P155, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248587
Marshall C, 1995, DESIGNING QUALITATIV
MORTLEY J, IN PRESS APHASIOLOGY
MORTLEY J, 2003, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V5, P27, DOI 10.1080/14417040510001669021
Mortley J, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000188
Murphy E., 1998, HLTH TECHNOLOGY ASSE, V2
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
Parr S., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P55
Patton M. Q., 1987, USE QUALITATIVE METH, P108
Pedersen PM, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P151, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000106
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
Petheram B, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P267, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248412
Pope C, 2000, BRIT MED J, V320, P114, DOI 10.1136/bmj.320.7227.114
Pope C, 1996, QUALITATIVE RES HLTH, P1
Pound C, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P477, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000159
Ritchie J, 1994, ANAL QUALITATIVE DAT, P173, DOI DOI 10.4324/9780203413081_CHAPTER_9
ROBERTSON I, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249090
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P681
*STEPS CONS LTD, 2002, STEPBYSTEP
Vidich A., 1994, HDB QUALITATIVE RES, P23
WADE J, 2003, P CPLOL C ED, V4, P103
Weinrich M, 1997, CLIN NEUROSCI, V4, P103
WERTZ RT, IN PRESS APHASIOLOGY
WERTZ RT, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P195, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248591
World Health Organization, 2001, ICF INT CLASS FUNCT
Worrall L., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
NR 46
TC 16
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 11
BP 1031
EP 1056
DI 10.1080/02687030344000373
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 754GD
UT WOS:000187295400002
ER
PT J
AU de Roo, E
AF de Roo, E
TI Null subject pronouns in Broca's speech production
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AGRAMMATIC PRODUCTION; QUANTITATIVE-ANALYSIS; CHILD LANGUAGE; APHASICS
AB Background : Pronouns are known to be often missing from the spontaneous speech production of Broca's aphasic patients. Null subject pronouns are found in nonfinite utterances. These structures may result from the underspecification of the Tense head and the unavailability of Nominative case for a subject. It is not clear, though, whether null subject pronouns are restricted only to nonfinite structures.
Aims : The paper investigates the occurrence of null subject pronouns in finite sentences of Broca's patients. A detailed study into the syntactic and distributional properties of finite null subjects will reveal their nature and origin in aphasic speech production.
Methods & Procedures : The spontaneous speech of 13 Dutch patients was investigated. The following variables were included: finiteness (finite versus nonfinite utterances), sentence position (initial versus non-initial position), and type of pronoun (personal versus demonstrative pronoun). The speech production of the patients was contrasted to normal spoken Dutch.
Outcomes & Results : The results demonstrate that finite null subject pronouns in Broca's speech production can be interpreted as instances of normal omission phenomena found in Germanic languages (Topic Drop and I -Drop).
Conclusion : A unified account is proposed for nonfiniteness and finite null subjects in terms of underspecification of functional heads in the syntactic structure. Underspecification is not due to a linguistic impairment, but rather a means to reduce the processing load of the utterance. It is concluded that nonfiniteness is a core phenomenon in Broca's speech production, while finite null subjects reflect an additional omission phenomenon.
C1 Leiden Univ, ULCL, NL-2300 RA Leiden, Netherlands.
RP de Roo, E (reprint author), Leiden Univ, ULCL, POB 9515, NL-2300 RA Leiden, Netherlands.
CR Abney S.P., 1987, ENGLISH NOUN PHRASE
Avrutin S., 1999, DEV SYNTAX DISCOURSE
BAAUW S, 2002, BUCLD P, V26
Bastiaanse R, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V80, P142, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2585
CAHANAAMITAY D, 1997, THESIS BOSTON U US
Cardinaletti Anna, 1990, GRAMMAR PROGR, P75
Chomsky N., 1981, LECT GOVT BINDING
Chomsky N., 1995, MINIMALIST PROGRAM
de Haan Ger Jan, 1988, LANGUAGE DEV, P101
De Roo E., 1999, THESIS U LEIDEN
DEROO E, 2002, PROUNOUNS REPRESENTA, P253
de Roo E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P555
de Roo E, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V83, P47
de Roo E, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P398, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2410
FRIEDMANN N, 2000, ACQUISITION SYNTAX, P84
Friedmann N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1795
Graetz P., 1992, AKENSE AFASIETEST NE
HAEGEMAN L, 1996, P GALA 1995 GRON CTR
HAEGEMAN L, 1990, GRAMMAR PROGR GLOW E
Haegeman Liliane, 2000, ACQUISITION SYNTAX, P129
HAGIWARA H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1041
HOEKSTRA T, 1996, P BUCLD, V20, P293
HOFSTEDE B, 1992, THESIS U NIJMEGEN
HUANG CTJ, 1984, LINGUIST INQ, V15, P531
Indefrey P, 2001, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V98, P5933, DOI 10.1073/pnas.101118098
JANSEN F, 1981, THESIS U LEIDEN NETH
KOLK H, 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C, P179
Kolk H, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P340, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2406
KOLK H, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P221, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249075
KOLK H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P282, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1049
KOLK H, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P89, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409381
Lasser I., 1997, FINITENESS ADULT CHI
Menn L., 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C
Ouhalla Jamal, 1993, LINGUISTISCHE BERICH, V143, P3
Penke M, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P351, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2407
Rizzi Luigi, 1994, LANG ACQUIS, P151
Rochon E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P193, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2285
RUIGENDIJK E, 2002, CASE ASSIGNMENT AGRA
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
Schlenck C, 1995, BEHANDLUNG SCHWEREN
STARK JA, 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C, P281
van Kampen J., 1997, THESIS U UTRECHT
VANZONNEVELD R, 1994, KLEINE SYNTAXIS NEDE
Wexler K, 1998, LINGUA, V106, P23, DOI 10.1016/S0024-3841(98)00029-1
NR 44
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 11
BP 1057
EP 1072
DI 10.1080/02687030344000382
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 754GD
UT WOS:000187295400003
ER
PT J
AU Kendall, DL
Conway, T
Rosenbek, J
Gonzalez-Rothi, L
AF Kendall, DL
Conway, T
Rosenbek, J
Gonzalez-Rothi, L
TI Phonological rehabilitation of acquired phonologic alexia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID DEEP DYSLEXIA; ORGANIZATION; PATIENT; MODEL
AB Background : Acquired alexia can result from impairment in either the direct (lexical) or indirect (nonlexical) reading routes. The direct route involves visual word knowledge, is supported by semantics and used to read familiar words, is especially important in irregular word reading, and cannot be used to read unfamiliar or nonwords. The nonlexical or indirect route involves parsing graphemes into component parts, application of grapheme to phoneme correspondence rules, and blending of graphemes, and is pertinent when reading unfamiliar or nonwords. Impairment of the indirect route results in either phonological or deep alexia. Several investigations have reported successful attempts in the rehabilitation of indirect route processing with minimal generalisation to untrained items. The present study reports treatment of indirect route processing using a phonological treatment approach typically used for individuals with developmental dyslexia.
Aims : The aim of the present study was to investigate effects of a phonologically based rehabilitation programme on reading abilities for two adults with acquired alexia and impairment of indirect route processing. The following research questions were asked: (1) Does phonological treatment improve reading comprehension and the ability to read aloud? (2) Does treatment generalise to untreated behaviours? (3) Are treatment and generalisation effects maintained following treatment termination?
Methods & Procedures : Two subjects who suffered a left hemisphere cerebral vascular accident participated in this study. A single-subject multiple baseline design used pre and post testing and repeated treatment, generalisation, and control probes. Data were analysed using visual inspection from three judges uninvolved in this study as well as effect size ( f -statistic).
Outcomes & Results : Results showed a treatment effect for real word reading aloud as well as improvement in post-test measures of real word comprehension. The presence of a treatment effect was defined and judged to be dependent on the presence of generalisation to untreated stimuli (research question 2). Finally, treatment and generalisation effects were maintained following treatment termination.
Conclusions : The phonologically based treatment programme utilised in this study was effective in treatment of the indirect route process with some effects of generalisation to behaviours such as consonant repetition, nonword repetition, real word repetition, oral praxis, and auditory syllable discrimination. These results support the view that language has a core phonological processor which comprise a neural network that links representations responsible for articulatory motor programming and naming. This study also supports the notion that phonologic treatment may be beneficial in individuals with aphasia and acquired alexia.
C1 Univ Florida, Dept Neurol, Gainesville, FL 32610 USA.
RP Kendall, DL (reprint author), Univ Florida, Dept Neurol, Box 100236, Gainesville, FL 32610 USA.
CR Adair JC, 2000, NEUROPSY NEUROPSY BE, V13, P303
ALEXANDER AW, 1991, ANN DYSLEXIA, V41, P193, DOI 10.1007/BF02648086
BALL EW, 1988, ANN DYSLEXIA, V38, P208, DOI 10.1007/BF02648257
BEAUVOIS MF, 1979, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V42, P1115, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.42.12.1115
BERNDT RS, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P503
Blumstein S. E., 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P157, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50008-7
Coltheart M, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P749
Conway TW, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P608
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
FIEZ JA, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P357, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.3.357
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P116
Friedman RB, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P223, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00098-7
Hammill D., 1994, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Heilman KM, 1996, ANN NEUROL, V39, P407, DOI 10.1002/ana.410390323
HILLIS AE, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P191, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253442
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kendall DL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P587, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249560
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LaPointe L. L., 1979, READING COMPREHENSIO
Lichtheim L., 1885, BRAIN, V7, P433
Lindamood C. H., 1975, AUDITORY DISCRIMINAT
Lindamood C. H., 1979, LINDAMOOD AUDITORY C
LINDAMOOD CH, 1998, LINDAMOOD PHONEME SE
LUNDBERG I, 1988, READING RES Q, V23, P262
MATTHEWS C, 1991, J COMMUN DISORD, V24, P21, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(91)90031-D
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
Mitchum C. C., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P103, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90003-2
MITCHUM CC, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P71, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249500
NADEAU S, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE, P40
Plaut DC, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P56, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.1.56
Pugh KR, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P1221, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.4.1221
Raven J. C., 1985, RAVENS PROGR MATRICE
RUMSEY JM, 1995, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V1, P180
SEIDENBERG MS, 1989, PSYCHOL REV, V96, P523, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.96.4.523
SHAYWITZ BA, 1995, NATURE, V373, P607, DOI 10.1038/373607a0
Sokolov A. N., 1972, INNER SPEECH THOUGHT
Torgesen J., 1999, TEST WORD READING EF
TORGESEN JK, 1992, J EDUC PSYCHOL, V84, P364
Wagner R. K., 1998, COMPREHENSIVE TEST P
Woodcock R., 1987, WOODCOCK READING MAS
NR 40
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 11
BP 1073
EP 1095
DI 10.1080/02687030344000355
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 754GD
UT WOS:000187295400004
ER
PT J
AU Postler, J
De Bleser, R
Cholewa, J
Glauche, V
Hamzei, F
Weiller, C
AF Postler, J
De Bleser, R
Cholewa, J
Glauche, V
Hamzei, F
Weiller, C
TI Neuroimaging the semantic system(s)
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID INFERIOR PREFRONTAL CORTEX; TEMPORAL LANGUAGE AREA; FUNCTIONAL MRI;
MODALITY SPECIFICITY; OPTIC APHASIA; WILLED ACTION; NEURAL BASIS;
CATEGORY; MEMORY; WORD
AB Background: The organisation of the semantic system is controversially discussed among cognitive scientists. Whereas some authors assume that semantic processing is amodal, others propose modality-specific semantic systems. The amodal account holds that there is a single semantic system independent of the modality of stimulus presentation and nature of the concept. The multi-modal account, on the other hand, postulates that semantic knowledge is represented in modality-specific, distinct semantic systems. Attempts to integrate both accounts resulted in a hybrid model of semantic processing. Although an amodal semantic network is assumed in this view, input-dependent semantic specialisation coexists.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to examine contrasting theories of the representation of the semantic knowledge with functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI).
Methods & Procedures: Nine healthy subjects performed a semantic judgement task on graphemic words and pictures in the experimental condition, as well as a visual identity judgement task on pseudoword and three-dimensional geometric objects in the control condition.
Outcomes & Results: A common activation pattern for words and pictures was found in the left inferior frontal gyrus and in the left middle temporal gyrus. Word-specific effects occurred in the left superior parietal, the left inferior occipital, the left anterior cingulate gyrus, and the right inferior frontal gyrus as well as bilaterally in the anteriomedial temporal area. Picture-specific areas involved the left supramarginal gyrus and the left cingulate gyrus. Further activation was found in the right middle frontal gyrus and bilaterally in the fusiform and inferior occipital gyrus.
Conclusions: The results can best be accommodated in the framework of an integrative, hybrid model of semantic representation combining features of the amodal and the modality-specific account.
C1 Univ Potsdam, Dept Cognit Neurolinguist, D-14415 Potsdam, Germany.
Pedag Univ Heidelberg, Heidelberg, Germany.
RP Postler, J (reprint author), Univ Potsdam, Dept Cognit Neurolinguist, PF 601553, D-14415 Potsdam, Germany.
CR Allport D.A., 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES, P32
Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
BEAUVOIS MF, 1982, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V298, P35, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1982.0070
Binder JR, 1997, J NEUROSCI, V17, P353
Binder JR, 1999, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V11, P80, DOI 10.1162/089892999563265
Buchel C, 1998, NATURE, V394, P274, DOI 10.1038/28389
BURNSTINE TH, 1990, NEUROLOGY, V40, P966
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P161, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253441
Caramazza A, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P944, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(00)00022-1
Chee MWL, 1999, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V7, P15, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-0193(1999)7:1<15::AID-HBM2>3.0.CO;2-6
Chertkow H, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P203, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1771
Coltheart M, 1998, NEUROCASE, V4, P353, DOI 10.1080/13554799808410632
DEBLESER R, 1997, ANOMIA NEUROANATOMIC, P93, DOI 10.1016/B978-012289685-9/50007-7
DEMB JB, 1995, J NEUROSCI, V15, P5870
DEMONET JF, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P671, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.4.671
DEsposito M, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P725, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(96)00121-2
Devlin JT, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P54, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00066-5
EVANS AC, 1994, NATO ADV SCI INST SE, V264, P263
Fiez JA, 1997, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V5, P79, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-0193(1997)5:2<79::AID-HBM1>3.0.CO;2-J
Friston K, 1995, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V2, P1
Friston KJ, 1994, HUMAN BRAIN MAPPING, V2, P189, DOI DOI 10.1002/HBM.460020402
Friston KJ, 1999, NEUROIMAGE, V10, P385, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1999.0484
FRITH CD, 1991, P ROY SOC B-BIOL SCI, V244, P241, DOI 10.1098/rspb.1991.0077
Gabrieli JDE, 1996, PSYCHOL SCI, V7, P278, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1996.tb00374.x
Gabrieli JDE, 1998, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V95, P906, DOI 10.1073/pnas.95.3.906
Genzel S., 1995, NEUROLINGUISTIK, V9, P41
Gold BT, 2002, NEURON, V35, P803, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(02)00800-0
HART J, 1990, ANN NEUROL, V27, P226, DOI 10.1002/ana.410270303
Hickok G, 2000, NEUROSCI LETT, V287, P156, DOI 10.1016/S0304-3940(00)01143-5
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
KAPUR S, 1994, NEUROREPORT, V5, P2193, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199410270-00051
LUDERS H, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P743, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.2.743
LUDERS H, 1986, NEUROLOGY, V36, P505
Mummery CJ, 1999, BRAIN, V122, P61, DOI 10.1093/brain/122.1.61
OLDFIELD RC, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V9, P97, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(71)90067-4
Paulesu E., 1993, NATURE, V363, P583
PELLEGRINO JW, 1977, MEM COGNITION, V5, P383, DOI 10.3758/BF03197377
Penfield W, 1959, SPEECH BRAIN MECH
Perani D, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V37, P293, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00073-6
PETERSEN SE, 1988, NATURE, V331, P585, DOI 10.1038/331585a0
Plaut DC, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P603, DOI 10.1080/02643290244000112
Poldrack RA, 1999, NEUROIMAGE, V10, P15, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1999.0441
POTTER MC, 1984, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V23, P23, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(84)90489-4
POTTER MC, 1975, NATURE, V253, P437, DOI 10.1038/253437a0
Price CJ, 1998, TRENDS COGN SCI, V2, P281, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(98)01201-7
Price CJ, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P727, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.6.727
Price CJ, 1997, NEUROIMAGE, V5, P261, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1997.0269
Ricci PT, 1999, NEUROIMAGE, V9, P88, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1998.0386
RIDDOCH MJ, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P3, DOI 10.1080/02643298808252925
ROSCH E, 1975, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V104, P192, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.104.3.192
SHALLICE T, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P133, DOI 10.1080/02643298808252929
SHEPARD RN, 1971, SCIENCE, V171, P701, DOI 10.1126/science.171.3972.701
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
SNODGRASS JG, 1986, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V12, P147, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.12.1.147
Swick D, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P1019, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(96)00011-5
te Linde J, 1982, J Exp Psychol Learn Mem Cogn, V8, P584
Thompson-Schill SL, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V37, P671, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00126-2
Thompson-Schill SL, 1997, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V94, P14792, DOI 10.1073/pnas.94.26.14792
Tippett LJ, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P139, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00098-4
Vandenberghe R, 1996, NATURE, V383, P254, DOI 10.1038/383254a0
Wagner AD, 1999, NEURON, V22, P19, DOI 10.1016/S0896-6273(00)80674-1
WARRINGTON EK, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P829, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.3.829
WARRINGTON EK, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P1273, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.5.1273
NR 63
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 9
BP 799
EP 814
DI 10.1080/02687030344000265
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 719CF
UT WOS:000185185500001
ER
PT J
AU Caporali, A
Basso, A
AF Caporali, A
Basso, A
TI A survey of long-term outcome of aphasia and of chances of gainful
employment
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Background : Recovery from aphasia in the first 12 months post-onset has been extensively studied. However, far less research effort has been directed towards documenting the course of long-term aphasia. The few existing studies indicate a trend towards a decline in the long term.
Aims : Aims of the present research were: (1) to investigate the long-term course of aphasia, and (2) to collect data about the occupational status of individuals with aphasia.
Methods & Procedures : We present data from 52 left-hemisphere-damaged vascular aphasic individuals who underwent three aphasia examinations and had a mean post-onset time of 5 years. All subjects were treated between the first and second examination and none received treatment between the second and the final examination. At final examination the aphasic individuals and/or an important other were asked to respond to a questionnaire about the aphasic individuals' use of language, social life, and employment status.
Outcomes & Results : Subjects significantly recovered between the first and second examination but there were no further significant changes between the second and the final examination. Only one subject showed a very mild general decline. Nine subjects were still gainfully employed at the time of the last evaluation and their working status is described.
Conclusions : From our data it may be concluded that the passing of time has no negative effect on chronic aphasia. In view of the many variables involved, no general conclusion can be drawn concerning aphasic individuals' chances of gainful employment or their social life.
C1 Univ Milan, Dept Neurol Sci, Neurol Unit, I-20122 Milan, Italy.
RP Basso, A (reprint author), Univ Milan, Dept Neurol Sci, Neurol Unit, Via F Sforza 35, I-20122 Milan, Italy.
CR BASSO A, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P190
CARRIERO MR, 1987, CORTEX, V26, P667
DERENZI E, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P41
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
HANSON WR, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248973
HATFIELD FM, 1975, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V7, P57
Huber W., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P55
Irwin WH, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P823, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000086
NICHOLAS ML, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P830, DOI 10.1016/0003-9993(93)90009-Y
OLDFIELD RC, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V9, P97, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(71)90067-4
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Wahrborg P, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P709, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249417
NR 12
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 9
BP 815
EP 834
DI 10.1080/02687030344000247
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 719CF
UT WOS:000185185500002
ER
PT J
AU Michallet, B
Tetreault, S
Le Dorze, G
AF Michallet, B
Tetreault, S
Le Dorze, G
TI The consequences of severe aphasia on the spouses of aphasic people: A
description of the adaptation process
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID STROKE; ADJUSTMENT; DISEASE; FAMILY; MODEL
AB Background : Aphasia changes the links an individual has with his/her social milieu. However, information about these changes is sparse as most research on aphasia has been centred on understanding this language disorder and testing treatment methods. Moreover, information about the psycho-social consequences of severe aphasia is even rarer.
Aims : To determine the consequences of severe aphasia as experienced by spouses of persons with aphasia.
Methods & Procedures : A qualitative phenomenological approach was adopted. Spouses of five persons with relatively longstanding severe aphasia were interviewed with a semi-structured qualitative schedule. The analysis was guided by the data and by a model of the adaptation process.
Outcomes & Results : Spouses' perceived sources of stress related to various changes in lifestyle habits more or less explicitly related to the aphasic person's communication impairment. These consequences were experienced in the realms of communication, interpersonal relationships, responsibilities, leisure activities, and finances. Spouses employed coping strategies. These strategies were directly based on the problems they encountered or on the control of the significance of these problems. Spouses experienced various indicators of adaptation such as fatigue, anxiety, discouragement, loss of privacy, social isolation and burden. These consequences, coping strategies, and indications of adaptation were functions of the contextual stimuli of these couples.
Conclusions : These results serve to describe how spouses experience lifestyle changes associated to the aphasia in their partner. Speech-language therapy could contribute to minimise the impact of aphasia on both spouses and aphasic people by considering how spouses adapt to aphasia.
C1 Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
Univ Laval, Quebec City, PQ, Canada.
RP Le Dorze, G (reprint author), Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, CP 6128,Succursale Ctr Ville, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RI Le Dorze, Guylaine/A-1790-2014
CR Andrews H. A., 1999, ROY ADAPTATION MODEL
ANNONI JM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P271, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249510
Artes R, 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P31
CHRISTENSEN JM, 1989, J COMMUN DISORD, V22, P225, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(89)90018-X
Cohen M H, 1993, West J Nurs Res, V15, P77, DOI 10.1177/019394599301500106
Deloche G., 1996, Annales de Readaptation et de Medecine Physique, V39, P1, DOI 10.1016/0168-6054(96)88044-5
Deslauriers J., 1991, RECHERCHE QUALITATIV
Ducharme F, 1998, NURS SCI QUART, V11, P149, DOI 10.1177/089431849801100407
DUQUETTE A, 1996, RECHERCHE SOINS INFI, V44, P61
EDELMAN G, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P75, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248813
FRIEDLAND J, 1987, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V68, P475
GOODGASS H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
Grant JS, 1997, J FAMILY NURSING, V3, P36, DOI 10.1177/107484079700300103
Guba E. G., 1989, 4 GENERATION EVALUAT
HARTUNIAN NS, 1980, AM J PUBLIC HEALTH, V70, P1249, DOI 10.2105/AJPH.70.12.1249
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P513, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249019
Herrmann M, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P717, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249418
Holstein James A., 1994, HDB QUALITATIVE RES, P262
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
KELLYHAYES M, 1988, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V69, P415
Kinsella G, 1978, MANAGEMENT APHASIA, P26
Lazarus R. S., 1984, HDB BEHAV MED, P282
Lazarus R.S., 1976, PATTERNS ADJUSTMENT
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LEMAY MA, 1989, APHASIQUE, P179
Levy R, 1994, RUPTURES, V1, P92
Mayer R, 1991, METHODOLOGIE RECHERC
Michallet B, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000087
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
Parsons T., 1987, PHILOS PERSPECTIVES, V1, P1, DOI 10.2307/2214141
PEARLIN LI, 1978, J HEALTH SOC BEHAV, V19, P2, DOI 10.2307/2136319
PEARLIN LI, 1981, J HEALTH SOC BEHAV, V22, P337, DOI 10.2307/2136676
REESE DR, 1994, GERONTOLOGIST, V34, P534
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
WAHRBORG P, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P479, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249009
WAHRBORG P, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P371, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249089
Wertz R. T., 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P87, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248815
Williams A, 1994, J Neurosci Nurs, V26, P155
ZRAICK RI, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P123
NR 39
TC 29
Z9 29
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 9
BP 835
EP 859
DI 10.1080/02687030344000238
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 719CF
UT WOS:000185185500003
ER
PT J
AU Wunderlich, A
Ziegler, W
Geigenberger, A
AF Wunderlich, A
Ziegler, W
Geigenberger, A
TI Implicit processing of prosodic information in patients with left and
right hemisphere stroke
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE COMPREHENSION; FUNDAMENTAL-FREQUENCY; INTONATION CONTOURS;
DECISION PROCESSES; EMOTIONAL PROSODY; DAMAGED SUBJECTS; SPEECH PROSODY;
BRAIN-DAMAGE; STRESS; SPECIALIZATION
AB Background : Investigations of prosodic processing in brain-damaged patients have primarily focused on hemispheric specialisations in the processing of prosodic structures. Most studies of receptive prosodic abilities in brain-damaged people share a common methodological approach, i.e., they are based on explicit tasks. No attention has been paid so far to the impact of explicit or implicit experimental methodologies.
Aims : The aim of this study was to compare implicit and explicit experimental paradigms of receptive prosodic processing in patients with focal left and right hemisphere lesions.
Methods & Procedures : Two implicit processing paradigms were used to investigate the comprehension of turn-related prosody (turn-detection task) and of prosodic focus (phoneme-detection task) in patients with focal cerebro-vascular lesions to the left or right cerebral hemisphere. The results were compared with explicit processing data of two matched patient groups selected from a larger sample of an earlier study.
Outcomes & Results : (a) In the turn-detection experiment normal subjects and left hemisphere damaged patients relied on prosodic information to detect conversational turns, whereas right hemisphere damaged patients were unable to benefit from the prosodic structure of utterances. A comparison of these results with the performance of two matched patient groups on an explicit "non-linguistic prosodic" paradigm (rating of emotional prosody) revealed the same pattern. b) In the phoneme-detection experiment prosodic focus information influenced detection latencies in both patient groups, i.e., RHD and LHD patients were able to process prosodic focus in an implicit manner. In the explicit processing of prosodic focus (identification task), RHD patients were moderately disturbed, while LHD patients showed more severe impairments.
Conclusions : The finding that RHD patients showed impaired performance in three out of four tasks confirmed a substantial deficit in the processing of prosodic information. Their preserved performance in the implicit processing of prosodic focus can be explained by the presence of local cues. On the contrary, the results of the LHD subjects indicate that earlier findings of an impaired prosodic focus processing in these patients might be attributable to the explicit nature of the tasks used in most studies rather than to a primary deficit in the processing of prosodic structures.
C1 City Hosp Bogenhausen, Munich, Germany.
RP Wunderlich, A (reprint author), EKN Clin Neurophysiol Res Grp, Dachauer Str 164, D-80992 Munich, Germany.
CR Adolphs R, 1996, J NEUROSCI, V16, P7678
Baum SR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P581
Baum SR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P31
Baum SR, 2002, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V23, P233, DOI 10.1017/S0142716402002047
BEATTIE GW, 1982, NATURE, V300, P744, DOI 10.1038/300744a0
BEHRENS SJ, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P181, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90014-X
BLONDER LX, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1115, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.3.1115
BOROD JC, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P827, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90086-2
Boutsen Frank R., 2002, Seminars in Speech and Language, V23, P245, DOI 10.1055/s-2002-35799
BOUTSEN FR, 2001, SPEECH MOTOR CONTROL
BOWERS D, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P317, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(87)90021-2
BRYAN KL, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P285, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249000
CANCELLIERE AEB, 1990, BRAIN COGNITION, V13, P133, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(90)90046-Q
Cutler A, 1997, LANG SPEECH, V40, P141
CUTLER A, 1976, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V20, P55, DOI 10.3758/BF03198706
CUTLER A, 1977, LANG SPEECH, V20, P1
EMMOREY KD, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V30, P305, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90105-2
FOSS DJ, 1969, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V8, P457, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(69)80089-7
FOSS DJ, 1969, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V5, P145, DOI 10.3758/BF03209545
Geigenberger A, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P1169, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000555
Grela B, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P361, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1975
GROSJEAN F, 1983, LINGUISTICS, V21, P501, DOI 10.1515/ling.1983.21.3.501
Grosjean F, 1996, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V11, P107, DOI 10.1080/016909696387231
HELLER W, 1981, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V19, P263, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(81)90110-X
HRUSKA C, 2000, ANN REP 2000 M PLANC, V54
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
JACKENDOFF R, 1999, NEUROCOGNITION LANGU
Jackendoff R., 2002, FDN LANGUAGE
Johnsrude IS, 1997, NEUROREPORT, V8, P1761
KIMELMAN MDZ, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P295
Kimelman MDZ, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P212, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2142
KLOUDA GV, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V35, P154, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90106-X
LEHTIHALMES M, 1993, 3 TAG INT CLIN PHON
Pell MD, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P701, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00008-6
Pell MD, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P161, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2065
Perkins JM, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248416
Rao SM, 2001, NAT NEUROSCI, V4, P317, DOI 10.1038/85191
ROSS ED, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P561
SHAPIRO BE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P19, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90118-X
Sheskin D.J., 2000, HDB PARAMETRIC NONPA
SHIPLEYBROWN F, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P16, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90051-X
Snow D, 2000, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V17, P1, DOI 10.1207/S15326942DN1701_01
Steinhauer K, 1999, NAT NEUROSCI, V2, P191, DOI 10.1038/5757
SWINNEY DA, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P132, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90044-9
TISCHER BERND, 1993, VOKALE KOMMUNIKATION, V18
Tyler L. K., 1992, SPOKEN LANGUAGE COMP
van Lancker D., 1980, LINGUISTICS INT J HU, V13, P201
VANLANCKER D, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P963
Walker JP, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P169, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2454
Weniger D, 1984, Adv Neurol, V42, P41
Zattore R. J., 1992, SCIENCE, V256, P846
ZATTORE RJ, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P2403
Zeman A, 2001, BRAIN, V124, P1263, DOI 10.1093/brain/124.7.1263
ZIERDT A, 2002, UNPUB UDAP HDB
Zimmermann P., 1994, TESTBATTERIE AUFMERK
NR 55
TC 11
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 9
BP 861
EP 879
DI 10.1080/02687030344000283
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 719CF
UT WOS:000185185500004
ER
PT J
AU Brady, M
Mackenzie, C
Armstrong, L
AF Brady, M
Mackenzie, C
Armstrong, L
TI Topic use following right hemisphere brain damage during three
semi-structured conversational discourse samples
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE DISORDERS; EMOTIONAL CONTENT; ADULTS; ORGANIZATION; DEMENTIA;
MANIPULATION; PERFORMANCE; KNOWLEDGE; PATTERNS; REQUESTS
AB Background: Right hemisphere brain damage (RHBD) has been linked to a diverse range of discourse-level communicative deficits generally based on subjective impressions. Investigative evidence to support or refute the reports is limited and what evidence is available is frequently restricted in the conclusions it can make as a result of small sample sizes, inadequate reporting of onset time, and site of lesion. Comparisons with matched NBD individuals' performance are rare. Many of the descriptions could reflect a difficulty with the use of topic. Disorganised, verbose, tangential discourse with poor topic maintenance may reflect difficulties with the structural aspects of topic use, i.e., topic coherence. Other descriptions of discourse with an excessive focus on details, personalisations, and anecdotal elements are also prevalent but are not reflected within a topic coherence model. They may be linked to a deficit in the management of topic on an utterance by utterance level.
Aims: To explore topic coherence and topic management during semi-structured conversational discourse by individuals with RHBD as a result of stroke.
Methods & Procedures: Three cue-elicited conversational discourse samples were taken from a group of 17 individuals with post-stroke RHBD and a matched group of 51 non-brain-damaged individuals. The participants with RHBD were sampled at 1 and 6 months post-stroke. Discourse samples were transcribed and analysed in terms of topic coherence and management. The intra-test, inter-test, and test-retest reliability of the analysis was also evaluated.
Outcomes & Results: The method of discourse sampling and the topic coherence and management analyses used proved to be reliable. There was no indication of a widespread consistent difference in the use of topic by the RHBD and NBD groups during the discourse samples. The exploratory results suggest the individuals with RHBD had some difficulties with topic coherence at subdivisional levels in comparison to NBD individuals. The groups' use of main topics differed little. Some differences between the RHBD and NBD individuals' use of fillers and repetition were observed. The proportion of on-topic utterances rather than off-topic or topic-shading utterances also indicated some between-group differences.
Conclusions: These exploratory results provide little support for the perception that the RHBD population experiences widespread topic difficulties. The results highlight specific elements of discourse topic use that may differ between the RHBD and NBD individuals, but which requires further targeted investigation.
C1 Glasgow Caledonian Univ, NRIS, Glasgow G4 0BA, Lanark, Scotland.
Univ Strathclyde, Glasgow G1 1XQ, Lanark, Scotland.
Queen Margaret Univ Coll, Edinburgh, Midlothian, Scotland.
Perth Royal Infirm, Perth, Scotland.
RP Brady, M (reprint author), Glasgow Caledonian Univ, NRIS, Fac Hlth Bldg,Cowcaddens Rd, Glasgow G4 0BA, Lanark, Scotland.
CR AICKIN M, 1999, BRIT MED J, V318, P1237
AUER P, 1995, ASPECTS ORAL COMMUNI, P419
BAMFORD J, 1991, LANCET, V337, P1521, DOI 10.1016/0140-6736(91)93206-O
BAYLES KA, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P102, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90123-3
Bender R, 1999, BRIT MED J, V318, P600
Bland M, 1995, INTRO MED STAT
BLOOM RL, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P1227
BLOOM RL, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P153, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90122-U
BODEN D, 1986, LANG COMMUN, V6, P73, DOI 10.1016/0271-5309(86)90007-8
Body R, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P963
BRINTON B, 1984, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V27, P350
Brownell H, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P442, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2122
BRYAN KL, 1988, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V23, P111
CHERNEY LR, 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V22, P67
Cools C, 1998, INT J REHABIL RES, V21, P323, DOI 10.1097/00004356-199809000-00007
Davidson B, 2003, APHASIOLOGY, V17, P243, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000653
DELIS DC, 1983, CORTEX, V19, P43
DOYLE PJ, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P135
EASTERBROOK A, 1982, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V17, P93
Garcia L. J., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL, P161
Gardner H., 1983, COGNITIVE PROCESSING, P169
GLOSSER G, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P67, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90117-J
Halliday Michael, 1976, COHESION ENGLISH
HARAVON A, 1994, STUDIES ADULT CLIN P, P47
HOUGH MS, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P253, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90114-V
HOUGH MS, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P489
Jefferson G., 1989, CONVERSATION INTERDI, P166
Jefferson G, 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC, P346
Joanette Y., 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P131
JOANETTE Y, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P1
JOANETTE Y, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P81, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90035-0
KENNEDY MRT, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P67
Kennedy MRT, 2000, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V9, P72
Klonoff Pamela S., 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V4, P147, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.4.3.147
Lehman MT, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P485
LojekOsiejuk E, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P58, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0037
Mackenzie C, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P929, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249420
MACKISACK EL, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P143
MENTIS M, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1054
MYERS P, 1990, APHASIA RELATED NEUR, P177
Myers P. S, 1979, CLIN APH C P MINN, P38
Myers P. S., 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
MYERS PS, 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE IN NEUROLOGICALLY IMPAIRED AND NORMAL AGING ADULTS, P279
MYERS PS, 1986, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P444
Obler L. K., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL, P15
OBLER LK, 1980, LANG COMMUN, P75
OLDFIELD RC, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V9, P97, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(71)90067-4
Orange JB, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00011-6
OSIEJUK E, 1989, POLISH PSYCHOL B, V10, P139
Perneger TV, 1998, BRIT MED J, V316, P1236
Prigatano GP, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, P1
PRUTTING CA, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P105
MENTIS M, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P583
PSATHAS G, 1990, SEMIOTICA, V78, P75, DOI 10.1515/semi.1990.78.1-2.75
REHAK A, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P203, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90125-X
REHAK A, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P320, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90104-M
RIPICH DN, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P8
RIVERS DL, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P348, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90061-9
ROMAN M, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P151, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90066-6
Rothman K J, 1990, Epidemiology, V1, P43, DOI 10.1097/00001648-199001000-00010
Schank R. C., 1977, COGNITIVE SCI, V1, P421, DOI 10.1207/s15516709cog0104_3
Schegloff Emanuel Abraham, 1987, TALK SOCIAL ORG, P70
Schegloff Emmanuel, 1973, SEMIOTICA, V7, P289, DOI DOI 10.1515/SEMI.1973.8.4.289
SCHNEIDERMAN EI, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P107, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90024-9
SHERRATT SM, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P539, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248506
Snow P, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P409
STEMMER B, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P565, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1031
STOVER SE, 1989, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V3, P137, DOI 10.3109/02699208908985277
TERRELL B Y, 1989, Seminars in Speech and Language, V10, P282, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064269
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
TOMPKINS CA, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P626
TONKOVICH J D, 1989, Seminars in Speech and Language, V10, P343, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064273
Trupe E. H., 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P83
Ulatowska H. K., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL, P29
URYASE D, 1990, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P125
VARLEY R, 1997, LANGUAGE DISORDERS C, P219
WAPNER W, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P15, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90061-4
WEEKS DJ, 1988, ANOMALOUS SENTENCE R
NR 78
TC 8
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 9
BP 881
EP 904
DI 10.1080/02687030344000292
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 719CF
UT WOS:000185185500005
ER
PT J
AU Cunningham, R
Ward, C
AF Cunningham, R
Ward, C
TI Evaluation of a training programme to facilitate conversation between
people with aphasia and their partners
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID DEPRESSION SCALE; HOSPITAL ANXIETY; SUPPORTED CONVERSATION;
COMMUNICATION; ADULTS; STRATEGIES; VALIDATION; RESOURCES; CARERS; TALK
AB Background: The investigation into conversational interaction in aphasia and its therapeutic implications has received much interest. It is increasingly accepted that people with aphasia cannot be treated in isolation but as part of a social unit. Training conversation partners has been shown to impact on the disabling effect of aphasia.
Aims: The principal aim of this study was to evaluate a programme designed to train a relative/friend to communicate more effectively with an aphasic partner. The intervention was assessed in terms of effects on communication and on wellbeing.
Methods & Procedures: Four single-case studies were completed. The aphasic participants had severe impairment affecting both comprehension and expression. The baseline was a series of three assessments. The dyads were videotaped having a conversation, and completed a Visual Assessment for Self-Esteem Scale (VASES). The non-aphasic partner also completed a Hospital Anxiety and Depression Scale (HADS). The training programme ran for 5 weeks (1.5 hours/week) at the couples' homes. It included education, video feedback, and role-play. The initial assessments were repeated post-intervention.
Outcomes & Results: Conversation data were subject to a conversation analysis as well as frequency counts of nonverbal behaviours. We found positive individual changes and positive trends: three of the four dyads increased their use of gesture and the proportion of successful repair sequences increased post-intervention, although these changes were not statistically significant. There were no significant differences for the HADS but there were differences between the aphasics and the non-aphasics on the VASES.
Conclusions: The positive trends suggest that working with couples can produce beneficial effects. Future research may help establish who will benefit from this approach and the optimal number of sessions.
C1 Amber Valley Primary Care Trust, Derby City Gen Hosp, Derby DE22 3NE, England.
Univ Nottingham, Nottingham NG7 2RD, England.
RP Cunningham, R (reprint author), Amber Valley Primary Care Trust, Derby City Gen Hosp, Kings Lodge,Uttoxeter Rd, Derby DE22 3NE, England.
CR BINDMAN B, 1995, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V2, P46
Booth S, 1999, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V34, P291, DOI 10.1080/136828299247423
Booth S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P283
BORENSTEIN P, 1987, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V19, P51
BRUMFITT SM, 1999, VISUAL ASSESSMENT
Bryan K, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P179, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250474
FINKLESTEIN V, 1993, DISABLING BARRIERS E
Herrmann C, 1997, J PSYCHOSOM RES, V42, P17, DOI 10.1016/S0022-3999(96)00216-4
HOLLAND AL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P50
Holland AL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P844, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249578
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
Johnston M, 2000, J PSYCHOSOM RES, V48, P579, DOI 10.1016/S0022-3999(00)00102-1
JORDAN L, 1996, APHASIA SOCIAL APPRO
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
KAGAN A, 1999, THESIS U TORONTO CAN
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Kagan A., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P199
Lindsay J, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P305
Livneh H., 1997, PSYCHOSOCIAL ADAPTAT
Lock S., 2001, SUPPORTING PARTNERS
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
MCLEOD H, 1996, INT J PRACTICAL APPR, V19, P5
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
PARR S, 1995, BULLETIN, V517, P8
PENMAN T, 1998, BULLETIN, V556, P14
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
Pound C, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P477, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000159
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Purcell M, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P147
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P807
SimmonsMackie NN, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P761, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250455
WAHRBORG P, 1991, ASSESSMENT MANAGEMEN
Whitworth A, 1997, CONVERSATION ANAL PR
ZIGMOND AS, 1983, ACTA PSYCHIAT SCAND, V67, P361, DOI 10.1111/j.1600-0447.1983.tb09716.x
NR 34
TC 33
Z9 33
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 8
BP 687
EP 707
DI 10.1080/02687030344000184
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 706MM
UT WOS:000184457500001
ER
PT J
AU Laganaro, M
Di Pietro, M
Schnider, A
AF Laganaro, M
Di Pietro, M
Schnider, A
TI Computerised treatment of anomia in chronic and acute aphasia: An
exploratory study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID NAMING DISORDERS; THERAPY; REHABILITATION; LANGUAGE
AB Background: Studies on computer assisted therapy (CAT) show encouraging outcomes with chronic aphasic speakers. However, there have been no studies investigating efficacy of CAT carried out with acute in-patients.
Aims: This paper aims to evaluate the effects and feasibility of an unsupervised computer-based therapy for anomia in chronic out-patient and acute in-patient aphasic participants. The computerised training programmes were selected according to each participant's anomic syndrome.
Methods & Procedures: A multiple single-case design was used with two subgroups of aphasic participants. In the out-patients group (N = 4), CAT sessions were alternated with an equal number of clinical treatment sessions. In a second group of seven in-patients with acute aphasia, CAT was added to daily individual aphasia therapy.
Outcomes & Results : In four chronic out-patients, a significant item-specific effect of CAT was shown. For two participants, this effect was similar to the effect of an equal number of individual clinical therapy sessions. Results were more heterogeneous in the in-patient group: an item-specific effect of CAT, not accounted for by spontaneous recovery, was observed in three of the seven participants.
Conclusions: The present data suggest that individually adapted CAT can be effective as an adjunct to clinical therapy for anomia, not only with chronic aphasic out-patients but also in acute in-patients. Further investigation is needed in order to specify the conditions of application of CAT, given the varied results among our participants specially in the in-patients group.
C1 Univ Hosp Geneva, Clin Reeduc, CH-1211 Geneva 14, Switzerland.
RP Laganaro, M (reprint author), Univ Hosp Geneva, Clin Reeduc, Av Beau Sejour 26, CH-1211 Geneva 14, Switzerland.
RI Laganaro, Marina/A-2842-2011
CR Basso A, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P307, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000304
Best W, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P231
BRUCE C, 1987, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V22, P191
CONTENT A, 1990, ANN PSYCHOL, V90, P551
Crerar MA, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P229, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0010
DELOCHE G, 1991, REEDUCATION NEUROPSY
Fink RB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1061, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000400
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P818
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
Linebarger MC, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V11, P57
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Mortley J, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000188
Nespoulous J, 1992, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL T
Nickels L, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P935, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000563
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Pedersen PM, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P151, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000106
Petheram B, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P267, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248412
PETHERAM BL, 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P177, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90006-5
ROBERTSON I, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249090
Robson J, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P675
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
NR 24
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 8
BP 709
EP 721
DI 10.1080/02687030344000193
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 706MM
UT WOS:000184457500002
ER
PT J
AU Francis, DR
Clark, N
Humphreys, GW
AF Francis, DR
Clark, N
Humphreys, GW
TI The treatment of an auditory working memory deficit and the implications
for sentence comprehension abilities in mild "receptive" aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; CAPACITY THEORY; SYNTACTIC COMPREHENSION;
INDIVIDUAL-DIFFERENCES; PROCESSING DEFICITS; NONWORD REPETITION;
CONDUCTION APHASIA; THERAPY; DISORDERS; ALEXIA
AB Background: Theoretical studies have shown that some deficits in verbal short-term/working memory can impact comprehension abilities. Clinicians often suspect that their clients are failing to understand speech because they cannot remember what has been said. Yet there are no reports of how to treat such a problem.
Aims: To see if improving the short-term/working memory abilities of a person with aphasia would improve her comprehension at the sentence level. In addition, we sought to explore the issues involved in carrying out research-based therapy in a clinical environment.
Methods & Procedures: The memory and language impairments of a person with aphasia were assessed. The memory impairments were then targeted in therapy by requiring the repetition of gradually more demanding sentences. Comprehension itself was not practised at all during therapy.
Outcome and Results: Certain aspects of short-term and working memory improved post-therapy, notably an increase in digit span and an ability to repeat more words in sentences. There was a limited generalisation of improvement to comprehension tasks, meaning that the client could understand longer sentences and required fewer repetitions. The existence of possible additional impairments was revealed post-therapy.
Conclusions: If memory limitations are causing comprehension difficulty, therapy may need to take the focus away from language and on to short-term/working memory. However, improvement may be limited. In addition, we suggest that within the context of a clinical setting, a reasonable balance between research and therapy can be struck (albeit with some difficulty) if compromises are made.
C1 Univ Birmingham, Sch Psychol, Behav Brain Sci Ctr, Birmingham B15 2TT, W Midlands, England.
S Birmingham Primary Care Trust, Moseley Hall Hosp, Birmingham, W Midlands, England.
RP Francis, DR (reprint author), Univ Birmingham, Sch Psychol, Behav Brain Sci Ctr, Birmingham B15 2TT, W Midlands, England.
CR Baddeley A., 1987, ATTENTION PERFORMANC, VXII
BADDELEY AD, 1966, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V18, P362, DOI 10.1080/14640746608400055
Baddeley A. D., 1986, WORKING MEMORY
Baddeley A. D., 1976, PSYCHOL MEMORY
BADDELEY AD, 1975, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V14, P575, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(75)80045-4
BADDELEY A, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P439
Baddeley AD, 1974, PSYCHOL LEARNING MOT, V8
BADDELEY A, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P479, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90021-6
BADDELEY AD, 1970, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V9, P176, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(70)80048-2
BADDELEY AD, 1978, PROCESSING VISIBLE L, V1
VALLAR G, 1984, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V23, P151, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(84)90104-X
Bates E, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P96, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X99241787
Beeson PM, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P621
Bell M, 2001, ARCH GEN PSYCHIAT, V58, P763, DOI 10.1001/archpsyc.58.8.763
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P197, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1799
Bishop D. V. M., 1989, TEST RECEPTION GRAMM
BLACKWELL A, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P228, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.2.228
BUTTERWORTH B, 1986, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V38, P705
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
BYNG S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P315, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248663
Byng S., 1999, REVERSIBLE SENTENCE
Caplan D, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P77
CAPLAN D, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P637, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252011
CARAMAZZA A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P217, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401437
CARAMAZZA A, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90078-X
CARAMAZZA A, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES
Caspari I, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P205, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0970
Clark H. H., 1977, PSYCHOL LANGUAGE INT
CONRAD R, 1964, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V55, P429
DANEMAN M, 1980, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V19, P450, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(80)90312-6
deJonge P, 1996, PERS INDIV DIFFER, V21, P1007, DOI 10.1016/S0191-8869(96)00161-4
Dick F, 2001, PSYCHOL REV, V108, P759, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.108.4.759
Engle R. W., 1999, MODELS WORKING MEMOR
Freedman ML, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P193, DOI 10.1080/02643290126002
FRIEDRICH FJ, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P385, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252667
Gathercole S. E., 1993, WORKING MEMORY LANGU
GATHERCOLE SE, 1995, MEM COGNITION, V23, P83, DOI 10.3758/BF03210559
Gathercole SE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P857, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251405
Golding E, 1989, MIDDLESEX ELDERLY AS
GOODGLAS.H, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P595
Gordon JK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P845, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250460
GORDON WP, 1983, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V21, P325, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(83)90019-2
Helm-Estabrooks N, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P469
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT
HESKETH A, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P47
HOWARD D, 1989, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V6, P455, DOI 10.1080/02643298908253425
HOWARD D, 1993, ATTENTION PERFORM, V14, P425
Just MA, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P773, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.103.4.773
JUST MA, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P122, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.1.122
JUST MA, 1982, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V111, P228, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.111.2.228
Kail R, 2001, MEM COGNITION, V29, P1, DOI 10.3758/BF03195735
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
KOHN SE, 1990, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V25, P45
MARSHALL J, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V110, P197
MARTIN RC, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90099-3
MARTIN RC, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P623, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252010
MARTIN RC, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P159, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90122-2
MARTIN RC, 1995, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V48, P536
Mayer JF, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P727, DOI 10.1080/02687030143000870
MCCARTHY RA, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P1565, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.6.1565
MCCARTHY RA, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P1545, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.6.1545
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
MIYAKE A, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P651, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252012
MIYAKE A, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P671, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251989
MOODY S, 1988, CORTEX, V24, P473
MOYER SB, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P139
Murray LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P91, DOI 10.1080/026870399402226
Murray LL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P993, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249423
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
NICKELS L, 1991, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V26, P175
Riddoch M.J., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
SAFFRAN EM, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P420, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80081-2
SALAME P, 1982, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V21, P150, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(82)90521-7
SHALLICE T, 1982, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V298, P199, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1982.0082
Sohlberg M, 1986, ATTENTION PROCESS TR
Sohlberg MM, 2000, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V22, P656
STEVENS ER, 1989, ACQUIRED APRAXIA SPE
TUOMAINEN J, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P401, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248542
TURNER ML, 1989, J MEM LANG, V28, P127, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(89)90040-5
VALLAR G, 1984, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V1, P121, DOI 10.1080/02643298408252018
VALLAR G, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V4, P417, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252046
VALLAR G, 1989, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V6, P465, DOI 10.1080/02643298908253426
Warrington E., 1984, RECOGNITION MEMORY T
WATERS G, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P81, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253368
WATERS GS, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P1, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251990
Waters GS, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P761, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.4.761
Waters GS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P64
WILSON BA, 1993, CORTEX, V29, P153
NR 89
TC 18
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 8
BP 723
EP 750
DI 10.1080/02687030344000201
PG 28
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 706MM
UT WOS:000184457500003
ER
PT J
AU Simmons-Mackie, N
Schultz, M
AF Simmons-Mackie, N
Schultz, M
TI The role of humour in therapy for aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LAUGHTER
AB Background & Aims: A diverse literature exists touting the positive effects of humour on mental and physical health. While speech-language pathologists frequently use humour in therapeutic interactions, the role of humour in therapy for individuals with communication disorders is not clear. Therefore, this study was undertaken to describe humour in therapy for aphasia and to analyse the functions of humour in therapy. Such information will contribute to developing effective and efficient therapy and to training student clinicians.
Methods & Procedures: Qualitative methods employed by ethnographers of communication were used to study humour in aphasia therapy. Descriptive data were drawn from videotapes of eight individual aphasia therapy sessions and from interviews with therapy participants. Instances of humour on videotapes were identified, and patterns of humour occurrence were analysed using methodology adapted from Hymes (1966) and Spradley (1980). Findings of the analysis were verified via ethnographic interviews with therapists and re-cycling through videotapes to confirm or refute findings. The result was a detailed description of the modalities, content, occurrence pattern, and functions of humour within the analysed sessions.
Outcomes & Results: Humour was used in the sessions in order to manage the interpersonal interaction between therapist and client and to lubricate the therapy process. Overall, humour was a "helpful" tool that served to build solidarity, to mitigate embarrassment, and to solicit cooperation with tasks. However, there was an asymmetry to humour occurrence, with therapists doing most of the "joking".
Conclusions: The results suggest that humour is not a frivolous endeavour, but a tool to aid in managing therapy interactions; thus, natural humour within sessions is not only acceptable, but also important. In addition, the possibility of encouraging greater "humour equality" between therapists and clients should be considered. For example, clinicians might consider encouraging clients to feel comfortable initiating humour in sessions as a method of expanding social communication and building communicative confidence.
C1 SE Louisiana Univ, Hammond, LA 70402 USA.
RP Simmons-Mackie, N (reprint author), 59020 Highway 433, Slidell, LA 70460 USA.
CR Agar M., 1986, SPEAKING ETHNOGRAPHY
Atkinson Maxwell, 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC
BACH K, 1979, LINGUISTIC COMMUNICA, P42
Berger A.A., 1993, ANATOMY HUMOR
BUCKMAN ES, 1994, HDB HUMOR CLIN APPL, P1
COSER RL, 1960, PSYCHIATR, V23, P81
Cousins N., 1979, ANATOMY ILLNESS PERC
DANA RS, 1994, HDB HUMOR CLIN APPL, P41
Davis G. A., 1993, SURVEY ADULT APHASIA
Du Pre A., 1998, HUMOR HEALING ARTS
Duffy J. R., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P341
EMERSON JP, 1973, PEOPLE PLACES SOCIOL, P269
Glenn P. J., 1987, COMMUNICATION Q, V35, P48
Glenn Phillip, 1989, W J SPEECH COMMUNICA, V53, P127
Glenn P.J., 1991, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V25, P139
Goffman E, 1974, FRAME ANAL ESSAY ORG
Goffman Ervin, 1967, INTERACTION RITUAL
GOODWIN C, 1996, INTERACTION GRAMMAR, P37
Gumperz J., 1982, DISCOURSE STRATEGIES
Hymes D., 1966, AM ANTHROPOL, V66, P12
Jefferson G., 1985, HDB DISCOURSE ANAL, VIII, P25
Jefferson G, 1987, TALK SOCIAL ORG, P152
Jefferson G, 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC, P346
Jefferson Gail, 1979, EVERYDAY LANGUAGE ST, P79
Kovarsky D, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P291
LAPOINTE L, 1985, COGNITIVE REHABILITA, V6, P22
LAPOINTE L, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P53
MARSHALL RC, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P389
Norris MR, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P391, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00026-8
O'Donnell-Trujillo N., 1983, W J SPEECH COMMUNICA, V47, P175
POTTER RE, 1983, J COMMUN DISORD, V16, P41, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(83)90025-4
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
Sacks H., 1974, EXPLORATIONS ETHNOGR, P337
Schegloff E.A., 1987, TALK SOCIAL ORG
Schenkein JN, 1972, SEMIOTICA, V6, P344, DOI 10.1515/semi.1972.6.4.344
SIMMONSMACKIE N, IN PRESS CHALLENGING
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, CONSTRUCTING (IN) COMPETENCE, P313
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P681
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V8, P218
Spradley J., 1980, PARTICIPANT OBSERVAT
Spradley J., 1979, ETHNOGRAPHIC INTERVI
Tennant K F, 1990, J Gerontol Nurs, V16, P11
WESTBY C., 1990, J CHILDHOOD COMMUNIC, V13, P101
WILLIAMS SE, 1996, ADULT APHASIA REHABI, P303
WOOTEN P, 1996, COMPASSIONATE LAUGHT
WOOTEN P, 1993, PULMONARY REHABILITA
NR 46
TC 15
Z9 18
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 8
BP 751
EP 766
DI 10.1080/02687030344000229
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 706MM
UT WOS:000184457500004
ER
PT J
AU Jackson-Waite, K
Robson, J
Pring, T
AF Jackson-Waite, K
Robson, J
Pring, T
TI Written communication using a Lightwriter in undifferentiated jargon
aphasia: A single case study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID THERAPY; COMPREHENSION; PATIENT; DYSGRAPHIA
AB Background: The difficulties of language rehabilitation in jargon aphasia are well known. The presence of fluent, empty, often neologistic speech makes these clients largely unintelligible, and lack of awareness of their language problems often makes them resistant to therapy. In some clients, writing, although impaired, differs from speech. Neologisms do not occur and output is monitored. Studies have shown that these residual writing skills can respond to therapy, and act as an alternative form of communication.
Client: MA has undifferentiated jargon aphasia. Her spoken output had not responded to treatment, and therapy had failed to establish a nonverbal mode of communication. Her writing was impaired, and its slow and effortful execution hindered her progress. However, she retained some ability to access written words and was aware of her errors. Aims: Therapy aimed to improve access to written words, and to facilitate writing by using a Lightwriter.
Methods & Procedures: Three stages of therapy were conducted. Words selected by MA for their usefulness were treated. In stage 1 solving anagrams, copying, delayed copying, and written naming were used to improve access to their orthographies. Written naming improved but only to the pictures used in therapy. In stages 2 and 3 further words were introduced, and steps taken to encourage generalisation. In stage 2 several different pictures of each item were used to overcome the picture-specific effect. In stage 3 written words were used to describe situations and answer questions in order to encourage their use in communication.
Outcomes & Results: MA improved significantly in writing treated words, and her rate of acquisition accelerated as therapy progressed. Performance was largely maintained after periods without treatment or exposure to the treated items. MA made progress in using her written vocabulary to answer questions in therapy, but needed prompting to use the Lightwriter rather than speech and rarely made functional use of it outside the clinic setting.
Conclusion: MA's progress demonstrates the potential for treating writing in jargon aphasia. Her progress in accessing word orthographies allowed her to use the Lightwriter for communication. Her inability to use writing spontaneously suggests that further therapy is needed and that it should include a regular partner to encourage functional use.
C1 Northampton Gen Hosp, Northampton NN1 5BD, England.
City Univ London, London EC1V 0HB, England.
RP Jackson-Waite, K (reprint author), Northampton Gen Hosp, Billing Rd, Northampton NN1 5BD, England.
CR ASSAL G, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V13, P223, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90092-4
Beeson PM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000167
Beeson PM, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P767, DOI 10.1080/026870399401867
BISHOP D, 1988, TEST RECEPTION GRAMM
BUB D, 1982, BRAIN, V105, P697, DOI 10.1093/brain/105.4.697
BUTTERWORTH B, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES
CAPPA SF, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(87)90139-4
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
Geschwind N., 1969, CONTRIBUTIONS CLIN N
Graham NL, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P343, DOI 10.1080/02643290125983
Grayson E, 1997, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V32, P257
HIER DB, 1977, BRAIN LANG, V4, P115, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(77)90010-4
Hough Monica Strauss, 1993, Journal of Communication Disorders, V26, P101, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(93)90003-S
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
KAY J, 1992, PSYCHOLINGUSITIC ASS
Kertesz A, 1970, Cortex, V6, P362
KINSBOURNE M, 1963, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V1, P27, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(63)90010-1
KOTTEN A, 1982, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V17, P61
LEBRUN Y, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P251
Luria AR, 1970, TRAUMATIC APHASIA
MAHER LM, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P402, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1022
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P79, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1936
Mortley J, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000188
PANZERI M, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P919, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(87)90096-0
Patterson K. E., 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
PEUSER G, 1981, JARGONAPHASIA
Rapp B, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P439, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000301
Rapp B, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P248, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1735
Rapp B, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P71
Robson J, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P471, DOI 10.1080/13682820110089371
Robson J, 1998, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P305, DOI 10.1080/136828298247767
SCHONAUER K, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P279, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1053
Shelton JR, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P105
SIMMONS NN, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P403, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248611
NR 34
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 8
BP 767
EP 780
DI 10.1080/02687030344000012
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 706MM
UT WOS:000184457500005
ER
PT J
AU Tainturier, MJ
Rapp, B
AF Tainturier, MJ
Rapp, B
TI Is a single graphemic buffer used in reading and spelling?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ACQUIRED DYSGRAPHIA; PHONOLOGICAL DYSLEXIA; SELECTIVE IMPAIRMENT;
REPRESENTATIONS; DEFICIT; INFORMATION; MECHANISMS; LEXICON;
DISSOCIATIONS; ARCHITECTURE
AB Background: The graphemic buffer was originally conceived as a component dedicated to the temporary storage of abstract orthographic representations prior to their format-specific expression in spelling (Caramazza, Miceli, Villa, & Romani, 1987). Since then, it has been argued that the graphemic buffer is also involved in reading (Caramazza, Capasso, & Miceli, 1996).
Aims: The goal of this study was to test the hypothesis that a single graphemic buffer is used in reading and spelling. In addition, we examined the hypothesis that, under normal reading circumstances, words and pseudowords place different demands on the graphemic buffer because of differences in the degree to which they can be processed globally.
Methods & Procedures: We performed detailed analyses of the reading and spelling performance of MC who presented with dyslexia (restricted to pseudowords) and dysgraphia following resection of a left parietal lobe tumour. Additionally, we compared the effect of presentation format (standard print, mirror reversed, and orally spelled stimuli) on word and pseudoword naming.
Outcomes & Results: First, MC's spelling impairment showed all the characteristics of a graphemic buffer deficit. Second, MC's spelling of words and pseudowords as well as his reading of pseudowords were remarkably similar, both quantitatively and qualitatively (quasi-identical distribution of errors, length effect, and error position curves). Third, MC's reading of words (but not pseudowords) was disrupted under conditions that interfered with global (i.e., whole-word) processing.
Conclusions: This study supports the claim that a single graphemic buffer is used in reading and spelling. It also suggests that reading nonwords places greater demands on the graphemic buffer than reading words.
C1 Univ Wales, Sch Psychol, Bangor LL57 2AS, Gwynedd, Wales.
Johns Hopkins Univ, Baltimore, MD 21218 USA.
RP Tainturier, MJ (reprint author), Univ Wales, Sch Psychol, Bangor LL57 2AS, Gwynedd, Wales.
CR ALLPORT DA, 1981, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V295, P397, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1981.0148
Annoni JM, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P64, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1934
Ans B, 1998, PSYCHOL REV, V105, P678, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.105.4.678-723
BADECKER W, 1990, COGNITION, V35, P205, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(90)90023-D
BEAUVOIS MF, 1979, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V42, P1115, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.42.12.1115
BEAUVOIS MF, 1981, BRAIN, V104, P21, DOI 10.1093/brain/104.1.21
BEHRMANN M, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P209, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252059
Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P763, DOI 10.1080/026432996381809
Blanken G, 1999, J NEUROLINGUIST, V12, P13, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(99)00002-0
BROWN DA, 1994, HDB SPELLING THEORY
CARAMAZZA A, 1988, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V11, P395, DOI 10.1146/annurev.neuro.11.1.395
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P391, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253450
CARAMAZZA A, 1987, COGNITION, V26, P59, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90014-X
CARAMAZZA A, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P81, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252862
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, COGNITION, V37, P243, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(90)90047-N
Caramazza A, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P673, DOI 10.1080/026432996381881
Coltheart M, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P749
Coltheart M, 2001, PSYCHOL REV, V108, P204, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.108.1.204
CUBELLI R, 1991, NATURE, V353, P258, DOI 10.1038/353258a0
DEPARTZ MP, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P129, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520178
Ellis A. W., 1982, NORMALITY PATHOLOGY
Ellis A. W., 1993, READING WRITING DYSL
Farah MJ, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P849, DOI 10.1080/026432996381836
Ferrand L, 2000, PSYCHON B REV, V7, P142, DOI 10.3758/BF03210733
Folk JR, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P653, DOI 10.1080/02643290244000184
Funnell E., 1987, LANGUAGE PERCEPTION
GOODMAN RA, 1987, J HOPKINS U DYSGRAPH
Graham NL, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P143, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00060-3
Hanley JR, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P313
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
HILLIS AE, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P263, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1012
Holmes VM, 2002, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V17, P345, DOI 10.1080/01690960143000263
Houghton G., 1994, HDB SPELLING THEORY
Houghton G, 2003, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V20, P115, DOI 10.1080/02643290242000871
Jonsdottir MK, 1996, COGNITION, V59, P169, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00693-1
KATZ RB, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P111
KAY J, 1994, HDB SPELLING
MARGOLIN DI, 1984, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V36, P459
MCCLOSKEY M, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P341, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251979
MICELI G, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P161
Miceli G, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P355, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70011-X
PATTERSON K, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P341, DOI 10.1080/02643298608253363
PICCIRILLI M, 1992, ITAL J NEUROL SCI, V13, P113, DOI 10.1007/BF02226958
Plaut DC, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P56, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.1.56
POSTERARO L, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V35, P274, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90112-5
Rapp B, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P1, DOI 10.1080/0264329014300060
Rapp B., 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
ROELTGEN DP, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P257, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90020-9
Schiller NO, 2001, NEUROCASE, V7, P1
Tainturier M. J., 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
TAINTURIER MJ, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P433
Tainturier MJ, 1996, J MEM LANG, V35, P53, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1996.0003
VanOrden GC, 1997, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V14, P131
Wechsler D, 1987, MANUAL WECHSLER MEMO
ZINGESER LB, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P473, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253270
NR 55
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-JUL
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 6-7
BP 537
EP 562
DI 10.1080/02687030344000021
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 690VB
UT WOS:000183570200002
ER
PT J
AU Weekes, B
Davies, R
Parris, B
Robinson, G
AF Weekes, B
Davies, R
Parris, B
Robinson, G
TI Age of acquisition effects on spelling in surface dysgraphia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COGNITIVE-NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL ANALYSIS; PRIMARY PROGRESSIVE APHASIA;
SEMANTIC DEMENTIA; WORD-FREQUENCY; ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; VANDERWART
PICTURES; ACQUIRED DYSGRAPHIA; NAMING LATENCY; NAME AGREEMENT; OBJECT
NAMES
AB Background: It is not known whether the age of acquisition (AoA) of a word has any significant effect on the spelling performance of normal or impaired speakers. One way to explore this question is to examine the effects of AoA on surface dysgraphia.
Aims: We report MK, a patient who suffered herpes simplex viral encephalitis (HSVE) resulting in semantic anomia and surface dysgraphia that we characterise as a tendency to produce a legitimate alternative spelling of a component defined as a LASC error.
Methods & Procedures: We describe MK's neuropsychological profile, giving details of impaired naming, spoken and written word comprehension, written picture naming, oral reading, and spelling to dictation, but preserved repetition of whole words. We report experiments designed (1) to test the effect of AoA on spelling by controlling for word frequency as well as other correlated variables using logistic regression and ANOVA, and (2) to test the effects of AoA and sound to spelling predictability on MK's spelling.
Outcomes and Results: The results show an effect of AoA but no independent effect of frequency on spelling and an interaction between AoA and predictability, i.e., an effect of AoA on unpredictable word spelling but no effect of AoA on predictable word spelling.
Conclusions: We discuss these data with reference to accounts of AoA that locate the effect at the level of mappings between input (phonological) and output (orthographic) representations. We argue that the effect of AoA on spelling is not the result of lexeme activation per se but instead reflects the largely unpredictable mappings between sound and spelling that characterise the majority of English word spellings.
C1 Univ Sussex, Sch Biol Sci, Dept Expt Psychol, Brighton BN1 9QG, E Sussex, England.
UCL Natl Hosp Neurol & Neurosurg, London WC1N 3BG, England.
RP Weekes, B (reprint author), Univ Sussex, Sch Biol Sci, Dept Expt Psychol, Brighton BN1 9QG, E Sussex, England.
EM bsw@biols.susx.ac.uk
RI Weekes, Brendan/E-9897-2010; Parris, Benjamin /G-6385-2013
OI Parris, Benjamin /0000-0003-2402-2100
CR BARRY C, 1988, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V40, P5
Barry C, 2001, J MEM LANG, V44, P350, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2743
Barry C, 1997, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V50, P560, DOI 10.1080/027249897392026
BAXTER DM, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P11
BEAUVOIS MF, 1981, BRAIN, V104, P21, DOI 10.1093/brain/104.1.21
BEHRMANN M, 1987, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P365, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252044
Bell BD, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P83, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00047-0
Bonin P, 2001, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V54, P469, DOI 10.1080/02724980042000219
Bosman A. M. T., 1997, LEARNING SPELL RES T, P173
BREEDIN SD, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P617, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251987
BROWN GDA, 1987, MEM COGNITION, V15, P208, DOI 10.3758/BF03197718
Brysbaert M, 1996, EUR J COGN PSYCHOL, V8, P185, DOI 10.1080/095414496383149
COLTHEART V, 1988, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V79, P1
DeBleser R, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P76
DEPARTZ MP, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P369, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252065
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
Ellis A. W., 1982, NORMALITY PATHOLOGY, P113
Ellis AW, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P515, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.2.515
Ellis AW, 2000, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V26, P1103, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.26.5.1103
FEYEREISEN P, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P401, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90094-2
Gerhand S, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P267, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.24.2.267
Gilhooly K. J., 1981, CURR PSYCHOL RES REV, V1, P251
Glosser G, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V13, P350, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.13.3.350
Glosser G, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V37, P807, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00142-0
Graham NL, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P143, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00060-3
Graham NL, 1997, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V14, P975
HATFIELD FM, 1983, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V35, P451
HAUCK WW, 1977, J AM STAT ASSOC, V72, P851, DOI 10.2307/2286473
Hirsh KW, 1995, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P23, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(95)00003-8
HIRSH KW, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P435, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251981
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
HODGES JR, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P463, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253161
Hodges J R, 1996, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V2, P511
Hodgson C, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P146, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1960
Hokkanen L, 1996, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V61, P478, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.61.5.478
Hosmer Jr DW, 1989, APPL LOGISTIC REGRES
HOWARD D, 1995, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V48, P999
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Hughes JC, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P533, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(96)00102-9
KAWAMOTO AH, 1992, J MEM LANG, V31, P349, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(92)90018-S
KAY J, 1992, PSYCHOL ASSESSMENTS
Kertesz A, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P388
KERTESZ A, 1997, NEUROLOGY, V48, P293
Kessler B, 2001, J MEM LANG, V44, P592, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2745
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
LACHMAN R, 1974, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V13, P613, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(74)80049-6
MARSHALL JC, 1973, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V2, P175, DOI 10.1007/BF01067101
Monaghan J, 2002, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V28, P183, DOI 10.1037//0278.7393.28.1.183
Morrison CM, 1997, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V50, P528
Nelson H. E., 1982, NELSON ADULT READING
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
PARKIN AJ, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P201, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1014
PATTERSON K, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P1025, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90096-5
Perry C, 2002, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V23, P43, DOI 10.1017/S0142716402000036
Plaut DC, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P56, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.1.56
Ralph MAL, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P775, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00169-3
RAPCSAK SZ, 1989, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V46, P65
Rapp B, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P1, DOI 10.1080/0264329014300060
Rapp B, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P71
SASANUMA S, 1995, SPEECH READING COMP, P207
Schwarz M, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P115, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.1.115
SEIDENBERG MS, 1989, PSYCHOL REV, V96, P523, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.96.4.523
Siegel S., 1956, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
Snodgrass JG, 1996, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V28, P516, DOI 10.3758/BF03200540
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
VANORDEN GC, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V20, P1269, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.20.6.1269
Weekes B, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P277, DOI 10.1080/026432996382033
Weekes BS, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P813, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250457
WEEKES BS, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P409, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248667
Yamazaki M, 1997, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V88, P407
Ziegler JC, 1997, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V29, P600, DOI 10.3758/BF03210615
NR 71
TC 16
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-JUL
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 6-7
BP 563
EP 584
DI 10.1080/02687030344000030
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 690VB
UT WOS:000183570200003
ER
PT J
AU Reich, S
Chou, TL
Patterson, K
AF Reich, S
Chou, TL
Patterson, K
TI Acquired dysgraphia in Chinese: Further evidence on the links between
phonology and orthography
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID VISUAL WORD RECOGNITION; IMPAIRMENT; DYSLEXIA; NEGLECT; KANA;
JARGONAGRAPHIA; INFARCTION; CHARACTERS; APHASIA; ACCESS
AB Background: How similar is the "architecture" of language function in different languages? In the domain of reading and writing, the relationship between orthographic and phonological units of the language differs dramatically between alphabetic and logographic writing systems. It is therefore appropriate to ask whether an architecture assumption, such as direct links between word pronunciations and their written forms, developed in the course of research on English and other alphabetic writing systems, applies to logographic Chinese.
Aims: We describe a native Cantonese speaker, TUA, with an acquired dysgraphia following a right hemisphere stroke. The study was designed to identify the conditions under which TUA succeeded or failed to produce the correct orthographic form of words in his native language, and thereby to draw inferences about his impaired and intact writing procedures with further implications for normal writing.
Methods & Procedures: Nine different single-word tests were administered to TUA, mainly of writing to dictation but also of written picture naming and other relevant skills. Almost all monosyllabic words in Cantonese are homophones and, in the majority of our tests, the target words were lower-frequency homophones, with the intended alternative disambiguated by a semantic cue.
Outcomes & Results: TUA made few errors in writing high-frequency words to dictation, but had error rates as high as 60-70% on lower-frequency homophonic target words. The majority of his errors were homophones of, or at least closely phonologically related to, the target item. This deficit in writing to dictation co-existed with adequate ability to define the correct lower-frequency homophonic alternative, and with the unusual pattern of more correct responses in written picture naming than in writing to dictation of the same target items. Although TUA's poor performance in writing was accompanied by several nonlinguistic impairments (e.g., in visual memory, sequencing, and visuo-constructional ability), his dysgraphia had a predominantly linguistic nature and did not invite an account in terms of these additional cognitive impairments.
Conclusions: We propose that TUA had a disrupted ability to activate lower-frequency orthographic representations, especially under conditions of response competition from a higher-frequency written word with the same pronunciation. This pattern is compatible with a proposal of direct activation of orthography by phonology, at least for higher-frequency words, in Chinese.
C1 St Thomas Hosp, Elderly Care Unit, London SE1 7EH, England.
MRC, Cognit & Brain Sci Unit, Cambridge, England.
RP Reich, S (reprint author), St Thomas Hosp, Elderly Care Unit, London SE1 7EH, England.
CR ALBERT ML, 1973, NEUROLOGY, V23, P658
Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
BURGESS PW, 1997, BRIXTON SPATIAL ANTI
Chua FK, 1999, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V25, P876, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.25.4.876
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
Cubelli R, 2000, BRAIN COGNITION, V44, P629, DOI 10.1006/brcg.2000.1239
Frost R, 1998, PSYCHOL BULL, V123, P71, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.123.1.71
GAO J, 1993, XIANDAI HANZI XUE
Goodman R. A., 1986, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V1, P263, DOI 10.1080/01690968608404678
Graham NL, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P143, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00060-3
HARTMAN DE, 1985, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V66, P182
Hashimoto R, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P50, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1865
HECAEN H, 1974, HEMISPHERE FUNCTION
HINDSON DA, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P387
HU YH, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P347
IHORI N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P197, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1049
LAW S, 1995, SPEECH READING, P141
Law SP, 2001, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V18, P729, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000024
LESCH MF, 1993, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V19, P285, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.19.2.285
Osterrieth PA, 1944, ARCH PSYCHOL-GENEVE, V30, P206
PATTERSON K, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P341, DOI 10.1080/02643298608253363
Raven J.C., 1960, GUIDE STANDARD PROGR
Romani C, 1999, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V52, P97, DOI 10.1080/027249899391241
SCHENKENBERG T, 1980, NEUROLOGY, V30, P509
Seki K, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P256, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1944
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
LUKATELA G, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V123, P331, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.123.4.331
WARRINGTON E K, 1973, Cortex, V9, P152
Warrington E, 1996, TOPOGRAPHICAL RECOGN
Weekes B, 1999, NEUROCASE, V5, P161
Weekes BS, 1997, NEUROCASE, V3, P51, DOI 10.1080/13554799708404034
Wu J.T., 1987, NSC750301H002024 TAI
Xu YD, 1999, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V25, P838, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.25.4.838
Zhang SL, 1999, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V25, P858, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.25.4.858
Zhou XL, 1999, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V25, P819, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.25.4.819
NR 35
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-JUL
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 6-7
BP 585
EP 604
DI 10.1080/02687030344000049
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 690VB
UT WOS:000183570200004
ER
PT J
AU Raymer, AM
Cudworth, C
Haley, MA
AF Raymer, AM
Cudworth, C
Haley, MA
TI Spelling treatment for an individual with dysgraphia: Analysis of
generalisation to untrained words
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ACQUIRED DYSGRAPHIA; REMEDIATION; DEFICITS
AB Background: Despite the fact that spelling impairments are common following left hemisphere injury, only a limited number of studies have examined effects of treatments for acquired spelling disorders. In general, following spelling treatment, individuals with spelling impairments related to the orthographic output lexicon have demonstrated improvements restricted to trained words, whereas individuals with impairments of the graphemic buffer demonstrate spelling improvements for both trained and untrained items.
Aims: This study was designed to examine patterns of spelling generalisation following treatment in an individual whose spelling impairment related to disruption affecting at least these two stages in the spelling process.
Methods & Procedures: Assessment of spelling abilities in one gentleman, NM, with severe agraphia indicated impairment related to the orthographic output lexicon and graphemic buffer stages of spelling. In a single subject experimental treatment design, we employed a copy and recall treatment for two sets of words trained sequentially, and examined generalisation of training improvements to untrained words with similar beginning or ending spellings and nonwords.
Outcomes & Results: NM improved spelling of two sets of trained words. He also demonstrated generalised improvements in spelling some untrained whole words. Generalisation was greater for parts of untrained words that were similar in spelling to trained words, and was also greater for the beginnings compared to the endings of words.
Conclusions: We contend that the pattern of spelling generalisation observed in NM implicates improvements affecting two stages of spelling. Greater improvements when spelling beginning or ending parts of untrained words with similar spellings to trained words implicates changes mediated by the orthographic output lexicon. Improvements for some untrained words and an advantage to beginning over ending spellings suggests strengthening of the graphemic buffer. These spelling improvements also led to a functional impact on NM's use of spelling in daily activities.
C1 Old Dominion Univ, Child Study Ctr 110, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
RP Raymer, AM (reprint author), Old Dominion Univ, Child Study Ctr 110, 45th St & Hampton Blvd, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
Beeson P. B., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P572
Beeson P. M., 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P367
Beeson PM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000167
BERNDT RS, 1987, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V19, P1, DOI 10.3758/BF03207663
Busk P. L., 1992, SINGLE CASE RES DESI, P159
CARAMAZZA A, 1987, COGNITION, V26, P59, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90014-X
Damasio H., 1989, LESION ANAL NEUROPSY
Ellis A. W., 1993, READING WRITING DYSL
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
GOODMAN RA, 1986, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P596
Hillis A E, 1992, Clin Commun Disord, V2, P19
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
Hillis AE, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P425, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000248
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kertesz A., 1979, APHASIA ASS DISORDER
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
RAPCSAK SZ, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P184
Rapp B, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P439, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000301
Roeltgen D. P., 1993, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P63
TRYON WW, 1982, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V15, P423, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1982.15-423
NR 21
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-JUL
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 6-7
BP 607
EP 624
DI 10.1080/02687030344000058
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 690VB
UT WOS:000183570200005
ER
PT J
AU Clausen, NS
Besson, PM
AF Clausen, NS
Besson, PM
TI Conversational use of writing in severe aphasia: A group treatment
approach
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID JARGON APHASIA; COMMUNICATION; REMEDIATION; EFFICACY; DEFICITS; THERAPY
AB Background: Several studies have documented the ability of individuals with severe aphasia to relearn the spelling of target words so that written communication can augment limited spoken language abilities. To date, there has been little documentation of clinical methods to facilitate the conversational use of written communication in such individuals.
Aims: The present study was designed to examine treatment outcomes in response to single-word writing treatment complemented by a group treatment approach to facilitate the use of writing for conversation.
Methods & Procedures: Four individuals with chronic, severe aphasia and agraphia received copy and recall treatment (CART) that included repeated copying and recall trials for spelling target words, as well as small group writing treatment. Single-subject multiple baseline designs were implemented to document progress on sets of words sequentially targeted for treatment. Writing was probed in the context of individual treatment sessions, structured group conversation, and in conversation with an unfamiliar person.
Outcomes & Results: All four participants responded positively to treatment by demonstrating improved spelling of target words in individual sessions, and use of single-word writing in structured group conversations. In addition, all subjects showed the ability to use telegraphic written communication with new people, albeit with fewer words written in the most naturalistic context.
Conclusions: Single-word writing abilities may improve with treatment despite persistent impairments to spoken language and considerable passage of time since the onset of aphasia. Group treatment appears to be an appropriate context to facilitate conversational use of written communication in such individuals.
C1 Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Besson, PM (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, POB 210071, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
Beeson P. M., 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P367
Beeson PM, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000167
BEESON PM, IN PRESS J SPEECH LA
Carlomagno S., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Cohen J., 1988, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA, V2nd
Goodglass H, 2001, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V3rd
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kromrey JD, 1996, J EXP EDUC, V65, P73
Rapp B, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P439, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000301
Raven JC, 1976, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Robson J, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P471, DOI 10.1080/13682820110089371
Robson J, 1998, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P305, DOI 10.1080/136828298247767
NR 17
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-JUL
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 6-7
BP 625
EP 644
DI 10.1080/02687030344000003
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 690VB
UT WOS:000183570200006
ER
PT J
AU Beeson, PM
Rapcsak, SZ
Plante, E
Chargualaf, J
Chung, A
Johnson, SC
Trouard, TP
AF Beeson, PM
Rapcsak, SZ
Plante, E
Chargualaf, J
Chung, A
Johnson, SC
Trouard, TP
TI The neural substrates of writing: A functional magnetic resonance
imaging study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID POSITRON EMISSION TOMOGRAPHY; PURE APRAXIC AGRAPHIA;
CEREBRAL-BLOOD-FLOW; LEXICAL AGRAPHIA; PARIETAL CORTEX; FRONTAL-CORTEX;
LESION; FMRI; KANJI; ACTIVATION
AB Background: Hypotheses regarding the neural substrates of writing have been derived from the study of individuals with acquired agraphia. Functional neuroimaging offers another methodology to test these hypotheses in neurologically intact individuals.
Aims: This study was designed to identify possible neural substrates for the linguistic and motor components of writing in normal English-speaking individuals.
Methods & Procedures: Functional magnetic resonance imaging was used with 12 adults to examine activation associated with generative writing of words from semantic categories contrasted with writing letters of the alphabet and drawing circles. In addition, the generative writing condition was contrasted with a subvocal generative naming condition.
Outcomes & Results: Semantically guided retrieval of orthographic word forms for the generative writing condition revealed activation in the left inferior and dorsolateral prefrontal cortex, as well as the left posterior inferior temporal lobe (BA 37). However, no activation was detected in the left angular gyrus (BA 39). The motor components of writing were associated with activation in left fronto-parietal cortex including the region of the intraparietal sulcus, superior parietal lobule, dorsolateral and medial premotor cortex, and sensorimotor areas for the hand.
Conclusions: These observations suggest an important role of the left posterior inferior temporal cortex in lexical-orthographic processing and fail to support the long-held notion that the dominant angular gyrus is the storage site for orthographic representations of familiar words. Our findings also demonstrate the involvement of left superior parietal and frontal premotor regions in translating orthographic information into appropriate hand movements.
C1 Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
So Arizona Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Tucson, AZ USA.
Barrow Neurol Inst, Phoenix, AZ 85013 USA.
RP Beeson, PM (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, POB 210071, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
CR ALEXANDER MP, 1992, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V49, P246
ANDERSON SW, 1990, BRAIN, V113, P749, DOI 10.1093/brain/113.3.749
BASSO A, 1978, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V41, P556, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.41.6.556
Beauregard M, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P441, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.4.441
BEAUVOIS MF, 1981, BRAIN, V104, P21, DOI 10.1093/brain/104.1.21
Bookheimer SY, 1995, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V3, P93, DOI 10.1002/hbm.460030206
Cabeza R, 2000, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V12, P1, DOI 10.1162/08989290051137585
Cohen L, 2000, BRAIN, V123, P291, DOI 10.1093/brain/123.2.291
CROISILE B, 1989, REV NEUROL, V145, P2587
Dejerine J, 1891, MEMOIRES SOC BIOL, V3, P197
DEMONET JF, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1753, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1753
Ellis A. W., 1988, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V3, P99, DOI 10.1080/01690968808402084
ELLIS AW, 1995, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
Exner S., 1881, UNTERSUCHUNGEN LOCAL
Friston KJ, 1994, HUMAN BRAIN MAPPING, V2, P189, DOI DOI 10.1002/HBM.460020402
GOLDENBERG G, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P641, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90110-3
Hillis AE, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P425, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000248
HODGES JR, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P469
Holmes AP, 1998, NEUROIMAGE, V7, pS754
Horwitz B, 1998, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V95, P8939, DOI 10.1073/pnas.95.15.8939
HOWARD D, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1769, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1769
Katanoda K, 2001, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V13, P34, DOI 10.1002/hbm.1023
Kato C, 1999, NEUROREPORT, V10, P1335, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199904260-00033
KAWAHATA N, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P296, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90070-3
LEVINE DN, 1982, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V20, P391, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(82)90039-2
Martin A, 1996, NATURE, V379, P649, DOI 10.1038/379649a0
Menon V, 2001, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V12, P337, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(01)00063-5
Nakamura K, 2000, BRAIN, V123, P954, DOI 10.1093/brain/123.5.954
OLDFIELD RC, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V9, P97, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(71)90067-4
Otsuki M, 1999, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V66, P233, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.66.2.233
PATTERSON K, 1982, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V34, P411
PETRIDES M, 1995, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V92, P5803, DOI 10.1073/pnas.92.13.5803
PRICE CJ, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P1255, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.6.1255
Price CJ, 1998, TRENDS COGN SCI, V2, P281, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(98)01201-7
Price CJ, 1996, CEREB CORTEX, V6, P62, DOI 10.1093/cercor/6.1.62
Price CJ, 1997, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V5, P264, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-0193(1997)5:4<264::AID-HBM11>3.0.CO;2-E
Rapcsak S. Z., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D, P71
RAPCSAK SZ, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE
RAPCSAK SZ, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P504, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90134-3
RAPCSAL SZ, 1997, APRAXIA NEUROPSYCHOL
Rapp B, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P71
Roeltgen D. P., 1993, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY
Roeltgen D. P., 1994, LOCALIZATION NEUROIM
ROELTGEN DP, 1983, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V40, P46
ROELTGEN DP, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P811, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.3.811
RUBENS A B, 1975, Cortex, V11, P239
SAKURAI Y, 1994, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V57, P609, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.57.5.609
Seitz RJ, 1997, EUR J NEUROSCI, V9, P378, DOI 10.1111/j.1460-9568.1997.tb01407.x
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
SOMA Y, 1989, BRAIN, V112, P1549, DOI 10.1093/brain/112.6.1549
Sugishita M, 1996, NEUROREPORT, V7, P1917, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199608120-00009
Tagamets MA, 2000, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V12, P281, DOI 10.1162/089892900562101
Vandenberghe R, 1996, NATURE, V383, P254, DOI 10.1038/383254a0
Warburton E, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P159, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.1.159
WATSON RT, 1986, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V43, P787
WORSLEY KJ, 1995, NEUROIMAGE, V2, P173, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1995.1023
Worsley KJ, 1996, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V4, P58, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-0193(1996)4:1<58::AID-HBM4>3.0.CO;2-O
NR 57
TC 60
Z9 61
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-JUL
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 6-7
BP 647
EP 665
DI 10.1080/02687030344000067
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 690VB
UT WOS:000183570200007
ER
PT J
AU Nakamura, K
Kouider, S
AF Nakamura, K
Kouider, S
TI Functional neuroanatomy of Japanese writing systems
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID INFERIOR TEMPORAL CORTEX; PARIETAL CORTEX; PURE AGRAPHIA; WRITERS CRAMP;
LEXICAL AGRAPHIA; BRAIN ACTIVITY; KANA AGRAPHIA; MOTOR; ACTIVATION;
ORGANIZATION
AB Background: Most of the brain imaging studies to date have addressed the skill of writing as a paradigm to examine the neural correlates for complex limb movements. Although these data have enriched our view of the functional organization of the brain for motor aspects of writing, there have been few attempts to discuss their relevance to aphasiology research.
Aims: The aim of the present article is two-fold. First, we examined neuroimaging data on writing to provide an overview of the neurophysiological basis subserving the motor aspects of the skill. Second, while taking into consideration the framework provided by these data, we reviewed lesion and functional imaging studies of Japanese to discuss the possible difference in neural correlates that has been assumed for its two orthographic systems, kanji (logogram) and kana (syllabogram).
Main Contributions: The fronto-parietal cortical circuit linking the premotor with posterior parietal areas in the left hemisphere seems to constitute a basic neural substrate for the motor act of writing. Lesion and imaging data with Japanese suggest that writing of kana utilises these structures in conjunction with the left perisylvian area for spoken language. In contrast, writing of kanji shares this network for the later phase of motor execution, but recruits the left basal temporal area as an additional device for the generation of motor output.
Conclusions: The execution of writing, irrespective of the script type, is achieved by common brain structures used for a wide range of limb movements. Writing of kanji seems to differ from that of kana only in that the former needs the retrieval of visuospatial information of characters as an additional cognitive operation. This difference does not necessarily imply that the two kinds of script have distinct neural substrates.
C1 Lab Sci Cognit & Psycholinguist, Paris, France.
RP Nakamura, K (reprint author), Univ Tokyo, Grad Sch Med, 7-3-1 Hongo, Tokyo 11333, Japan.
CR Abe K., 1993, SHINKEISHINRIGAKU, V9, P196
ALEXANDER MP, 1992, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V49, P246
Bartolomeo P, 2002, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V40, P1363, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00209-3
BEAUVOIS MF, 1981, BRAIN, V104, P2
Berg D, 2000, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V69, P780, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.69.6.780
BLOOMFIELD L, 1933, LANGUAGE, P281
Braun C, 2001, BRAIN, V124, P2259, DOI 10.1093/brain/124.11.2259
Crammond DJ, 1997, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V20, P54, DOI 10.1016/S0166-2236(96)30019-2
CRYSTAL D, 1997, CAMBRIDGE ENCY LANGU, P196
Destreri ND, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P353
FARAH MJ, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT, P121
FRIEDLAND J, 1990, J COMMUN DISORD, V23, P171, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(90)90021-P
FUJII T, 1995, SEISHIN IGAKU, V37, P853
GALABURDA AM, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V28, P529, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(90)90032-J
Hasegawa I, 1998, SCIENCE, V281, P814, DOI 10.1126/science.281.5378.814
Hashimoto R, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P50, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1865
Ibanez V, 1999, NEUROLOGY, V53, P96
IHORI N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P197, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1049
IWATA M, 1984, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V7, P290, DOI 10.1016/S0166-2236(84)80198-8
KAIHO H, 1983, KANJI JOUHOU SHORI N
KALMUS H, 1960, LANG SPEECH, V3, P96
Katanoda K, 2001, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V13, P34, DOI 10.1002/hbm.1023
Kato C, 1999, NEUROREPORT, V10, P1335, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199904260-00033
KAWAHATA N, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P296, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90070-3
KAWAMURA M, 1987, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V50, P1125, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.50.9.1125
KIMURA B, 1986, NEUROLOGICAL MED, V24, P484
Kokubo K, 2001, CORTEX, V37, P187, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70567-7
LACQUANITI F, 1989, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V12, P287, DOI 10.1016/0166-2236(89)90008-8
LASHLEY KS, 1951, CEREBRAL MECH BEHAV, P478
MARGOLIN DI, 1984, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V36, P459
MIYASHITA Y, 1993, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V16, P245, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ne.16.030193.001333
Morton J., 1984, ORTHOGRAPHIES READIN, P25
Nakamura K, 2000, BRAIN, V123, P954, DOI 10.1093/brain/123.5.954
NAKAMURA K, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V14, P104
Odergren T, 1998, MOVEMENT DISORD, V13, P497, DOI 10.1002/mds.870130321
Otsuki M, 1999, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V66, P233, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.66.2.233
Paradis M., 1985, NEUROLINGUISTIC ASPE
PETRIDES M, 1995, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V92, P5803, DOI 10.1073/pnas.92.13.5803
Preibisch C, 2001, J NEUROL, V248, P10, DOI 10.1007/s004150170263
PRICE CJ, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P1255, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.6.1255
Price CJ, 1998, TRENDS COGN SCI, V2, P281, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(98)01201-7
Rapp B, 1997, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V23, P1130, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.23.4.1130
Rizzolatti G, 1998, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V106, P283, DOI 10.1016/S0013-4694(98)00022-4
Roeltgen D. P., 1993, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P63
ROELTGEN DP, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P811, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.3.811
SAITO H, 1997, GENGO NO KAGAKU, P93
Sakurai Y, 1997, NEUROLOGY, V49, P946
SASANUMA S, 1987, DEEP DYSLEXIA
Scholz VH, 2000, BRAIN RES, V879, P204, DOI 10.1016/S0006-8993(00)02749-9
Seitz RJ, 1997, EUR J NEUROSCI, V9, P378, DOI 10.1111/j.1460-9568.1997.tb01407.x
Siebner HR, 2001, EUR J NEUROSCI, V14, P726, DOI 10.1046/j.0953-816x.2001.01694.x
Sirigu A, 1996, SCIENCE, V273, P1564, DOI 10.1126/science.273.5281.1564
SMITH WM, 1960, SCIENCE, V132, P1013, DOI 10.1126/science.132.3433.1013
SOMA Y, 1989, BRAIN, V112, P1549, DOI 10.1093/brain/112.6.1549
Sugishita M, 1996, NEUROREPORT, V7, P1917, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199608120-00009
TANAKA Y, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P679
TEASDALE N, 1993, ACTA PSYCHOL, V82, P179, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(93)90011-F
TOKUNAGA H, 1999, NEUROREPORT, V10, P3313
van Mier H, 1998, J NEUROPHYSIOL, V80, P2177
Verschueren SMP, 1999, EXP BRAIN RES, V127, P171, DOI 10.1007/s002210050787
Wise SP, 1997, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V20, P25, DOI 10.1146/annurev.neuro.20.1.25
Wydell TN, 1999, COGNITION, V70, P273, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(99)00016-5
Yaguchi H, 1998, Rinsho Shinkeigaku, V38, P499
YOKOTA T, 1990, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V53, P335, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.53.4.335
NR 64
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN-JUL
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 6-7
BP 667
EP 683
DI 10.1080/02687030344000076
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 690VB
UT WOS:000183570200008
ER
PT J
AU Blake, ML
Duffy, JR
Tompkins, CA
Myers, PS
AF Blake, ML
Duffy, JR
Tompkins, CA
Myers, PS
TI Right hemisphere syndrome is in the eye of the beholder
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 32nd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 2002
CL RIDGEDALE, MISSOURI
AB Background: Specific information about prevalence and patterns of deficits associated with right hemisphere brain damage (RHD) is incomplete. A recent large-scale study of inpatients in a United States rehabilitation centre (Lehman Blake, Duffy, Myers & Tompkins, 2002) provided initial estimates of deficit prevalence and co-occurrence. The data obtained were based on information from multiple medical disciplines, and may not adequately reflect the typical caseload seen by US speech-language pathologists (SLP). Differences in how professionals view RHD may influence whether patients are appropriately referred for services.
Aims: The first aim was to evaluate whether prevalence and patterns of deficits differ when diagnoses are made by SLPs versus other disciplines. The second aim was to examine whether the presence of certain deficits is associated with referrals to SLP.
Methods and Procedures: A retrospective chart review was conducted examining medical records for 122 adults with RHD in an inpatient rehabilitation unit. Diagnoses were obtained from speech-language pathology versus a group of other medical professionals, including neurology/physiatry, neuropsychology, and occupational therapy. Frequencies and cluster analyses were computed for both groups of diagnosticians to examine differences between groups. Relationships between performance on a screening measure of mental status and cognitive/communicative diagnoses were examined to determine if there were obvious connections between specific disorders and referrals to SLP.
Outcomes and Results: Diagnoses of pragmatic and communicative deficits were made more often by SLPs, while the other professionals more often diagnosed deficits in attention, visuoperception, and learning/memory. Moderate-strong correlations between diagnoses from the two groups were obtained only for deficits of attention, linguistics, and neglect. Referral to SLP was not related to performance on a general mental status screening test. Patients who presented with neglect, aprosodia, or deficits in interpersonal interactions were more likely to be referred to SLP than when these deficits were absent.
Conclusions: This study raises the question of how to ensure appropriate referrals to SLP when referring professionals may not always identify the communicative disorders exhibited by individuals with RHD. A descriptive definition of right hemisphere syndrome and a consistent set of terminology would facilitate communication about right hemisphere deficits within and across disciplines. A broader scope of referrals to SLP would increase the number of patients who receive appropriate care for their cognitive and communicative deficits.
C1 Syracuse Univ, Syracuse, NY 13244 USA.
Mayo Clin, Rochester, MN USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Blake, ML (reprint author), Univ Houston, Clin Res Ctr 100, Houston, TX 77204 USA.
CR ALDENDERFER MS, 1984, CLUSTER ANAL, P62
Blake M. L., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P537, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000194
Cohen J., 1988, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA, V2nd
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
JOANETTE Y, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P1
KOKMEN E, 1987, MAYO CLIN PROC, V62, P281
Myers P. S., 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
SPSS, 1999, SPSS BAS 10 0 US GUI
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
NR 9
TC 3
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 5
BP 423
EP 432
DI 10.1080/02687030344000120
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 669DB
UT WOS:000182335700002
ER
PT J
AU Wambaugh, JL
AF Wambaugh, JL
TI A comparison of the relative effects of phonologic and semantic cueing
treatments
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 32nd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 2002
CL RIDGEDALE, MISSOURI
ID APHASIA; DEFICITS; THERAPY
AB Background: Lexical retrieval problems are pervasive in aphasia and are often an important focus of treatment. Although many treatments have been demonstrated to positively impact lexical retrieval in aphasia, comparisons of such treatments have been relatively rare.
Aims: The purpose of this investigation was to compare the relative effects of two lexical retrieval cueing treatments when administered concurrently with a participant with chronic anomic aphasia. The cueing treatments, phonological cueing treatment (PCT) and semantic cueing treatment (SCT) were designed to target the lexical phonologic and lexical semantic levels of processing, respectively.
Methods & Procedures: The participant received both treatments concomitantly in the context of an alternating treatments design and multiple baseline design across behaviours. Separate lists of words were assigned to each treatment and additional word lists were designated for generalisation assessment. Following achievement of criterion levels of performance, each treatment was then applied to the additional lists in order to attempt to replicate treatment effects.
Outcomes & Results: The participant showed a positive response to both treatments. However, he achieved higher levels of accuracy of naming for items treated with SCT. This effect was observed in both phases of treatment application.
Conclusions: For this participant, SCT appeared to be the preferred treatment, at least in the context of concurrent administration of the treatments. This preferential response may be related to a pretreatment pattern of responding in which the participant routinely used descriptions and semantically related sentence cues to attempt to retrieve words.
C1 Univ Utah, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
VA Salt Lake Healthcare Syst, Salt Lake City, UT 84148 USA.
RP Wambaugh, JL (reprint author), Univ Utah, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Rm 1201,390 South 1530 East, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
CR BARLOW DH, 1984, SINGLE CASE EXPT DES
Blomert L., 1992, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, P121
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
PATTERSON JP, 2001, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H, V11, P11
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
VISHCHBRINK E, 2002, ANN CLIN APH C BRANS
WAMBAUGH JL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P933
WAMBAUGH JL, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V73, P446
Wambaugh JL, 2002, J REHABIL RES DEV, V39, P455
NR 16
TC 27
Z9 27
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 5
BP 433
EP 441
DI 10.1080/02687030344000085
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 669DB
UT WOS:000182335700003
ER
PT J
AU Wright, HH
Silverman, SW
Newhoff, M
AF Wright, HH
Silverman, SW
Newhoff, M
TI Measures of lexical diversity in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 32nd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 2002
CL RIDGEDALE, MO
ID LANGUAGE IMPAIRMENT; PRESCHOOL-CHILDREN; SPONTANEOUS SPEECH
AB Background: Important to the assessment of aphasia are analyses of discourse production and, in particular, lexical diversity analyses of verbal production of adults with aphasia. Previous researchers have used type-token ratio (TTR) to measure conversational vocabulary in adults with aphasia; however, this measure is known to be sensitive to sample size, requiring that only samples of equivalent length be compared. The number of different words (NDW) is another measure of lexical diversity, but it also requires input samples of equivalent length. An alternative to these measures, D, has been developed (Malvern & Richards, 1997) to address this problem. D allows for comparisons across samples of varying lengths.
Aims: The first objective of the current study was to examine the relationships among three measures of productive vocabulary in discourse for adults with aphasia: TTR, NDW, and D. The second objective was to use these measures to determine in what ways, and to what degree, they each can differentiate fluent and nonfluent aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: Eighteen adults with aphasia participated in this study (nine with nonfluent aphasia; nine with fluent aphasia). Participants completed the Western Aphasia Battery (WAB) and produced language samples consisting of conversation and picture description. Samples were then subjected to the three lexical diversity analyses.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that, although the measures generally correlated with each other, adults with fluent aphasia evidenced significantly higher D and NDW values than those with nonfluent aphasia when whole samples were subjected to analyses. Once samples were truncated to 100- and 200-word samples, groups differed significantly for all three measures.
Conclusions: These findings add further support to the notion that because TTR and, although to a lesser extent, NDW are sensitive to sample size, length differences across samples tend to confound results. As an alternative to these measures, the use of D for the measurement of conversational vocabulary of adults with aphasia enables the analysis of entire language samples, so that discarding language sample data is not necessary. In the present study, D values differed for fluent and nonfluent aphasia samples.
C1 Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
Univ Missouri, Columbia, MO USA.
San Diego State Univ, San Diego, CA 92182 USA.
RP Wright, HH (reprint author), Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, CHS Bldg,900 S Limestone, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
EM hhwrig2@uky.edu
CR CHOTLOS JW, 1944, PSYCHOL MONOGR, V56, P77
Dollaghan CA, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P1432
FILLENBAUM S, 1961, LANG SPEECH, V4, P91
Goffman L, 2000, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V9, P151
Guiraud P., 1959, PROBLEMES METHODES S
Herdan G., 1960, TYPE TOKEN MATH TXB
HESS CW, 1986, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V29, P129
Johnson W, 1944, PSYCHOL MONOGR, V56, P1
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
MacWhinney B., 2000, CHILDES PROJECT TOOL
Malvern D, 1997, BRIT S AP L, V12, P58
McKee G., 2000, Literary & Linguistic Computing, V15, DOI 10.1093/llc/15.3.323
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
Miller J.F., 1981, ASSESSING LANGUAGE P
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Owen AJ, 2002, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V45, P927, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2002/075)
PRINS RS, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V6, P192, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90058-5
Ratner NB, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P1252
SILVERMAN S, IN PRESS J FLUENCY D
SPREEN O, 1973, LANG SPEECH, V16, P130
Templin M., 1957, CERTAIN LANGUAGE SKI
WACHAL RS, 1973, LANG SPEECH, V16, P169
WATKINS RV, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1349
NR 23
TC 26
Z9 26
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 5
BP 443
EP 452
DI 10.1080/0268703044000166
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 669DB
UT WOS:000182335700004
ER
PT J
AU Rose, M
Douglas, J
AF Rose, M
Douglas, J
TI Limb apraxia, pantomine, and lexical gesture in aphasic speakers:
Preliminary findings
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 32nd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 2002
CL RIDGEDALE, MISSOURI
ID ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; ICONIC GESTURES; LEFT-HEMISPHERE; COMMUNICATION;
DISSOCIATION; LANGUAGE; OBJECT
AB Background: Speech-language pathologists considering the use of gesture as a therapeutic modality for clients with aphasia must first evaluate the integrity of their cleints' gesture systems. Questions arise with respect to which behaviours to assess and how to assess the chosen behaviours. There has been a long-held belief that tests of limb apraxia and pantomime provide valid information about candidacy for gesture-based interventions, yet the theoretical and empirical basis of this assumption is limited. Further, the relationship between conversational gesture skill and limb apraxia in co-occurring aphasia has been largely unexplored. It is possible that a client's gesture performance in natural conversation provides more valid information about gesture treatment candidacy than do tests of limb apraxia.
Aims: This study aimed to investigate the relationship between the presence of limb apraxia and conversational gesture use in speakers with nonfluent aphasia. Following the assumption that limb praxis and conversational gesture reflect differing underlying processing, it was hypothesised that speakers with aphasia and limb apraxia would produce the full range of conversational gesture types in a conversational context. Further, it was hypothesised that speakers with demonstrated pantomime deficits on formal tests of pantomime would produce pantomimes naturally in conversation. Thus, a dissociation would be demonstrated between the processing responsible for gesture production as measured in limb apraxia tests and that subserving the production of conversational gesture.
Methods & Procedure: Seven participants with nonfluent aphasia and ideomotor and conceptual limb apraxia conversed in a semi-structured conversation with the researcher. All arm and hand gestures produced by the participants were counted and rated according to guidelines provided by Hermann, Reichle, and Lucius-Hoene (1988), and the time they spent in either gesture or spoken expression was compared. Correlations were calculated between limb apraxia scores and proportions of meaning-laden gestures used in conversation.
Outcomes & Results: All seven participants produced a wide range of gesture types. Participants with limited verbal output produced large amounts of meaning-laden gesture. Importantly, even participants with severe limb apraxia produced high proportions of meaning-laden gestures (codes and pantomimes) in the natural setting. There were no significant relationships found between scores on limb apraxia tests and natural gesture use.
Conclusions: Patients with nonfluent aphasia and limb apraxia may still use meaningful conversational gesture in naturalistic settings. Tests of limb apraxia may be poor predictors of use of lexical gesture. Thus, clinicians are advised to sample lexical gesture use in spontaneous interactions.
C1 La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3086, Australia.
RP Rose, M (reprint author), La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3086, Australia.
RI Douglas, Jacinta/C-2380-2009
CR BEHRMANN M, 1984, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V19, P155
BOROD JC, 1989, BRAIN COGNITION, V10, P121, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(89)90079-1
Bryden M, 1982, LATERALITY FUNCTIONA, P157
Chainay H, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P67, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000097
CHRISTOPOULOU C, 1985, J COMMUN DISORD, V18, P1, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(85)90010-3
CICONE M, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P324, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90060-9
COELHO C, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19
CORINA DP, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P414, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90110-Z
DERENZI E, 1983, CORTEX, V19, P333
DUFFY RJ, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P70
Feyereisen P., 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P21, DOI 10. 1080/02687038808248884
Feyereisen P., 1991, GESTURES SPEECH PSYC
FEYEREISEN P, 1983, INT J PSYCHOL, V18, P545, DOI 10.1080/00207598308247500
GLOSSER G, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P345, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90024-6
Glosser G, 1998, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V20, P1, DOI 10.1076/jcen.20.1.1.1484
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GOODGLASS H, 1963, BRAIN, V86, P703, DOI 10.1093/brain/86.4.703
Hadar U, 1997, SEMIOTICA, V115, P147, DOI 10.1515/semi.1997.115.1-2.147
Hadar U, 1999, J NEUROLINGUIST, V12, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(99)00001-9
HANLON RE, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P298, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90116-X
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P385
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1992, TEST ORAL LIMB APRAX
HERRMANN M, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P41, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90053-3
Kearns K., 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P183
KERTESZ A, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P40
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KIMURA D, 1974, BRAIN, V97, P337, DOI 10.1093/brain/97.1.337
Krauss R. M., 2000, LANGUAGE GESTURE, P261, DOI DOI 10.1017/CBO9780511620850.017
Lausberg H, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P1654, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(00)00071-3
LEMAY A, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P137
McNeill D., 1992, HAND MIND WHAT GESTU
McNeill D., 1990, CEREBRAL CONTROL SPE, P203
Neiman MR, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P429
OCHIPA C, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1061, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.4.1061
Patterson K. E., 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Pett M. A., 1997, NONPARAMETRIC STAT H
RAO P, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P688
Rao PR, 1995, TOPICS STOKE REHABIL, V2, P49
ROSE M, 1920, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P1001
Rose M, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P977
Rothi L.J.G., 1997, APRAXIA NEUROPSYCHOL
SKELLY M, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V34, P445
WANG LZ, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P402, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90076-Q
WERTZ T, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
NR 44
TC 18
Z9 18
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 5
BP 453
EP 464
DI 10.1080/02687030344000157
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 669DB
UT WOS:000182335700005
ER
PT J
AU DeDe, G
Parris, D
Waters, G
AF DeDe, G
Parris, D
Waters, G
TI Teaching self-cues: A treatment approach for verbal naming
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 32nd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 2002
CL RIDGEDALE, MISSOURI
ID DISORDERS; DEFICITS; APHASIA
AB Background: Very few treatment studies have examined the effects of training individuals with anomia to self-generate phonological cues. There is evidence that treatments using written language can improve phonological access for some patients. Such approaches are most effective when the patients are taught strategies to facilitate oral reading of targets.
Aim: The goal of the present study was to evaluate the effects of a naming treatment designed to teach a chronic nonfluent aphasic to generate self-cues based on partial access to the written form of words and tactile (placement) cues.
Methods: Therapy focused on naming items using a modified cueing hierarchy that incorporated written naming and tactile cues. An AB design was used to examine treatment effects in an individual with aphasia and apraxia of speech.
Outcomes and Results: Verbal naming improved in target compared to control items. Generalisation was observed to verbal and written naming on standardised measures but not to novel stimuli with initial target and control phonemes. Testing 6 weeks post-treatment revealed limited loss of treatment gains.
Conclusions: The results provide qualified support for the treatment programme.
C1 Boston Univ, Sargent Coll Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Dept Commun Disorders, Boston, MA 02215 USA.
RP DeDe, G (reprint author), Boston Univ, Sargent Coll Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Dept Commun Disorders, 635 Commonwealth Ave, Boston, MA 02215 USA.
CR BASHIR AS, 1984, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V5, P127, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1082519
Best W, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P435
BRUCE C, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P253, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90078-4
CAPLAN D, 1992, LANGUAGE STRUCTURE P, P403
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Hillis AE, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P648, DOI 10.1017/S135561779846613X
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
JOHNS DF, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P556
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
NICHOLAS M, 1999, C SPEAK APHASIA COMM
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Wambaugh JL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P933
Yampolsky S, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P455, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000068
NR 19
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 5
BP 465
EP 480
DI 10.1080/02687030344000094
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 669DB
UT WOS:000182335700006
ER
PT J
AU Mayer, JF
Murray, LL
AF Mayer, JF
Murray, LL
TI Functional measures of naming in aphasia: Word retrieval in
confrontation naming versus connected speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 32nd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 2002
CL RIDGEDALE, MISSOURI
ID BRAIN-DAMAGED SUBJECTS; VERB RETRIEVAL; CONVERSATIONAL DISCOURSE; FLUENT
APHASIA; CONTEXT; COMMUNICATION; DIFFICULTIES; PERFORMANCE; DEFICITS;
ROUTES
AB Background: Word-finding difficulties are central to aphasia and as such have received a great deal of attention in aphasia research. Although treatment for lexical retrieval impairments can be effective, studies often use measurement of single-word performance (e.g., confrontation naming) to support such claims. In contrast, what matters most to patients with aphasia and their families is the ability to converse. Few aphasia studies, however, have addressed word retrieval in connected speech. Furthermore, one could debate whether generating names for single pictured stimuli bears resemblance to the online, multifaceted retrieval required during conversation.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to assess the adequacy of Percent Word Retrieval (%WR) as well as two supplementary analyses, Percent Substantive Verbs (%SV) and Percent Corrected Errors (%CERR), to depict word retrieval in connected and conversational speech with respect to lexical class (noun vs verb) and aphasia severity (mild vs moderate). Specifically, we examined: (1) the relationship between lexical retrieval in confrontation naming, composite description, and conversational samples; and (2) the clinical utility and feasibility of %WR, %SV, and %CERR in quantifying such data.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 14 individuals with aphasia, divided into mild (n = 7) and moderate (n = 7) groups based on aphasia severity, participated. Word retrieval was tested in three different contexts: single-word confrontation naming, composite description, and conversational speech. Lexical retrieval was analysed in each context using the analyses described above (%WR, %SV, and %CERR). The effects of context, grammatical class, and measurement technique were explored using repeated measures ANOVA and correlational analyses.
Outcomes & Results: Statistical analyses revealed a significant effect of context for both %WR and %CERR, with superior lexical retrieval and self-correction of errors in connected speech versus single-word naming tasks. Moreover, %SV in conjunction with %WR was sensitive to possible verb retrieval deficits undetected by %WR alone, particularly for mild patients. Confrontation naming scores were strongly related to aphasia severity classification (mild vs moderate), but were not significantly correlated with naming abilities in connected speaking tasks.
Conclusions: These findings endorse the incorporation of discourse-level tasks into aphasia assessment and treatment protocols. Use of simple and easily quantifiable measures (e.g., %WR) may be an option to extend current methodology and reconcile issues of ecological validity and clinical feasibility.
C1 Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
RP Mayer, JF (reprint author), Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 200 S Jordan Ave, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
CR Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Boles L, 1998, J COMMUN DISORD, V31, P261, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(98)00005-7
Breedin SD, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1923
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P119
BROWN C, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P358
Cooper P. V., 1990, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V45, P210
CROCKFORD C, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P165
DAMASIO AR, 1993, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V90, P4957, DOI 10.1073/pnas.90.11.4957
Doesborgh SJC, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P413, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000077
DOLLAGHAN CA, 1992, TOP LANG DISORD, V12, P56
DOYLE PJ, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P135
Edwards S, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P190
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1997, ANOMIA NEUROANATOMIC, P189, DOI 10.1016/B978-012289685-9/50012-0
HICKIN J, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DI S, V36, P3
Hillis AE, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P523, DOI 10.1080/02643290244000077
HILLIS AE, 1998, LINGUISTIC LEVELS AP, P35
HOLLAND AL, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P275
Hopper T, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P745, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000059
Ingles JL, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P199
Jordan F, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P877, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250462
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kemmerer D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P393, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2312
Kemmerer D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2311
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Larfeuil C, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P783, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250456
Lock S, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P25
MACWHINNEY B, 1995, CHILDES PROJECT TOOL, P41
Manning L, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P809, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00166-2
Marshall J, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P625, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248496
McNeil MR, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P385, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248479
Murray LL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P585
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P87
NICHOLAS M, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P405
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P636
Osborne F, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P208
Pashek GV, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P261, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000573
Penn C, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P185, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2247
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
Raymer A. M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P524
Schwartz MF, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P263, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000187
Segalowitz SJ, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P376, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2361
SHEWAN CM, 1988, J COMMUN DISORD, V21, P103, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(88)90001-9
SHEWAN CM, 1986, TREATMENT APHASIA LA, P243
SNOW P, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248210
Togher L, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P131, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00045-9
VERMEULEN J, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P252, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90064-3
Wilkinson IAG, 1998, READ RES QUART, V33, P144, DOI 10.1598/RRQ.33.2.1
WILLIAMS SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P92, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90007-4
WILLIAMS SE, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P124, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90120-9
Wilshire CE, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P165, DOI 10.1080/02643290143000169
World Health Organization, 2001, ICIDH 2 INT CLASS FU
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 55
TC 28
Z9 28
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 5
BP 481
EP 497
DI 10.1080/02687030344000148
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 669DB
UT WOS:000182335700007
ER
PT J
AU Coelho, CA
Youse, KM
Le, KN
Feinn, R
AF Coelho, CA
Youse, KM
Le, KN
Feinn, R
TI Narrative and conversational discourse of adults with closed head
injuries and non-brain-injured adults: A discriminant analysis
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 32nd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 2002
CL RIDGEDALE, MISSOURI
ID DEFICITS; CHILDREN
AB Background: Although there is general agreement regarding the clinical utility of discourse analyses for detecting the often subtle communicative impairments following closed head injuries (CHI), there is little consensus regarding discourse elicitation or analysis procedures. Consequently it has been difficult to compare findings across studies.
Aims: In an effort to facilitate a movement towards the adoption of a more consistent methodology for the assessment of discourse abilities, the current study examined several commonly used measures of discourse performance and the accuracy with which these measures were able to distinguish individuals with CHI from non-brain-injured (NBI) controls. Previous studies have suggested that conversation is less demanding than narrative discourse because such narratives require greater manipulation of extended units of language while conversational discourse can be maintained with minimal responses (Chapman, 1997; Galski, Tompkins, & Johnston, 1998). On the basis of these reports it was hypothesised that the measures of narrative story performance would more accurately discriminate the participant groups than conversational measures.
Methods & Procedures: Discourse samples were elicited from 32 adults with CHI and 43 NBI adults. Discourse samples included two story narratives, generation and retelling, and 15 minutes of conversation. A variety of discourse analyses were performed including story narrative measures of grammatical complexity, cohesive adequacy, and story grammar. Measures of conversation included appropriateness and topic initiation. Discriminant function analyses (DFA) were then employed to determine the accuracy of the selected measures in classifying the participants into their respective groups.
Outcomes & Results: Results of the DFA with only the story narrative measures indicated that 70% of the cases, 64.5% of the CHI group, and 74.4% of the NBI group were accurately classified. This finding was not significant, suggesting that the story narrative measures did not reliably discriminate the CHI from the NBI participants. The DFA with the conversational measures correctly classified over 77% of the cases, 78.1% of the CHI participants, and 72.1% of the NBI group. This finding was significant, which suggests that the measures of conversational discourse were better able to discriminate the participant groups. A third DFA was performed, with all of the story narrative and conversational discourse measures included, which revealed that the conversational measures, comments and adequate plus responses, and the story narrative measure, T-units within episode structure in the generation task, made the greatest contributions to discriminating between the groups. Overall, group membership was correctly classified by the DFA in 81% of the cases, 84.4% of the CHI group, and 77.5% of the NBI participants. This finding was significant, suggesting that these three discourse measures discriminated the two participant groups with the highest degree of reliability.
Conclusions: These findings did not support the hypothesis that the narrative discourse measures would more accurately predict group membership of the CHI and NBI participants than the conversational measures. A variety of factors may account for these findings including the interactive nature of conversation as well as social factors which appear to make this genre more difficult for individuals with CHI and a more sensitive index of their cognitive-communicative impairments.
C1 Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, Unit 1085, Storrs, CT 06268 USA.
Hosp Special Care, New Britain, CT USA.
Univ Connecticut, Ctr Hlth, Farmington, CT USA.
RP Coelho, CA (reprint author), Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, Unit 1085, Storrs, CT 06268 USA.
CR Armstrong E., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P647, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000112
BLANK M, 1980, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V1, P127, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400000801
Brinton B., 1989, CONVERSATIONAL MANAG
Chapman S. B., 1997, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V6, P50
Coelho C. A., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P659, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000275
COELHO CA, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P409, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248707
Coelho CA, 2002, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V45, P1232, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2002/099)
COELHO CA, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P471, DOI 10.3109/02699059509008206
COELHO CA, 1991, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V72, P465
Doyle P. J., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P130
Galski T, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P769, DOI 10.1080/026990598122160
Hagan C, 1980, REHABILITATION HEAD
HOLLINGSHEAD AB, 1972, UNPUB 4 FACTOR INDEX
HARTLEY L L, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P267, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008097
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LEVIN HS, 1979, J NERV MENT DIS, V167, P675, DOI 10.1097/00005053-197911000-00004
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
LILES BZ, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P123
LILES BZ, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P415
Mackenzie C, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P269, DOI 10.1080/136828200247188
MANDLER JM, 1977, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V9, P111, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(77)90006-8
Mattis S, 1976, GERIATRIC PSYCHIAT
Mentis M., 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P583
Prince S, 2002, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V10, P19
SNOW P, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248210
Snow P, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P947, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249421
TOGHER L, 1999, COMMUNICATION SKILLS, P113
Togher L, 2001, J COMMUN DISORD, V34, P131, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00045-9
Wilkinson R, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P327, DOI 10.1080/026870399402127
WINTER P, 1976, BEAR FLY
Ylvisaker M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P745
NR 31
TC 21
Z9 21
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 5
BP 499
EP 510
DI 10.1080/02687030344000111
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 669DB
UT WOS:000182335700008
ER
PT J
AU Ulatowska, HK
Olness, GS
Wertz, RT
Samson, AM
Keebler, MW
Goins, KE
AF Ulatowska, HK
Olness, GS
Wertz, RT
Samson, AM
Keebler, MW
Goins, KE
TI Relationship between discourse and Western Aphasia Battery performance
in African Americans with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 32nd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 2002
CL RIDGEDALE, MISSOURI
ID NARRATIVES
AB Background: There is a need for discourse research with African Americans who have aphasia, highlighted by ethnic group differences in stroke prevalence, and potential ethnic group differences in dialect. Identification of ethnic dialect is critical to differentiate communication changes associated with pathology from normal communicative differences associated with ethnicity. Also, preliminary research on adults with aphasia indicates an uncertain relationship between discourse performance and standardised test performance.
Aims: This study was designed to assess: (1) the relationship between performance on a standardised language measure and discourse performance, and (2) the use of ethnic dialect and discourse features, in the narrative productions of African-American adults with moderate aphasia on a variety of discourse tasks.
Methods & Procedures: We investigated the discourse of 12 African Americans with scores in the moderate severity range on the Western Aphasia Battery, Aphasia Quotient (WAB-AQ). Each subject produced a fable retell, a story derived from a picture sequence, two stories derived from single pictures, and a topic-elicited personal narrative of a frightening experience. Analysis consisted of ratings of discourse quality (coherence, reference, and emplotment); a measure of discourse quantity (number of propositions); and a tally of the presence or absence of ethnic dialect and discourse features.
Outcomes & Results: The correlation between WAB-AQ and discourse quality was statistically significant on the picture sequence task and one single-picture task, but not on the other discourse tasks. There was a significant relationship between WAB-AQ and overall quality ratings of coherence, reference, and emplotment. The correlation between WAB-AQ and discourse quantity was not significant for any task, and discourse quality was not significantly correlated with discourse quantity. Ethnic features appeared most often on one single-picture task and the personal narrative. No ethnic dialect features occurred on the fable retell.
Conclusions: These findings suggest the need to supplement standardised assessment of aphasia with assessment of discourse performance, using less structured discourse tasks, such as a personal narrative task. Less structured discourse tasks may also be optimal for eliciting natural ethnic patterns of communication. The lack of relationship between narrative quantity and narrative quality may not generalise to individuals with aphasia that is severe or mild. This study contributes towards development of a discourse assessment tool for culturally and linguistically diverse populations that may supplement information provided by standardised testing.
C1 Univ Texas, Callier Ctr Commun Disorders, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
Dept Vet Affairs Tennessee Valley Healthcare Syst, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
RP Ulatowska, HK (reprint author), Univ Texas, Callier Ctr Commun Disorders, 1966 Inwood Rd, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
CR CHAPMAN SB, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P651, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90092-8
CHAPMAN SB, 1998, PRAGMATICS NEUROGENI, P55
FEATHERMAN DL, 1980, 7948 U WISC CTR DEM
Green L., 1998, AFRICAN AM ENGLISH S, P37
HOLLAND AL, 1983, TOP LANG DISORD, V3, P67
KERTESZ A, 1979, APHASIA RELATED DISO
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KITTNER SJ, 1990, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V264, P1267, DOI 10.1001/jama.264.10.1267
Mitchell-Kernan C., 1972, RAPPIN STYLIN OUT CO, P315
MROSS EF, 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P50
Mufwene SS, 1998, AFRICAN AM ENGLISH S
Olness G. S., 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P623, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000095
PATRY R, 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P3
Ulatowska H. K., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL, P29
Ulatowska HK, 2001, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V10, P40, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2001/007)
Ulatowska HK, 2000, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V30, P265, DOI 10.1207/S15326950dp3003_3
ULATOWSKA HK, 2002, M NAT BLACK ASS SPEE
Ulatowska HK, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P1007
Ulatowska HK, 2001, J NEUROLINGUIST, V14, P93, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(01)00010-0
Ulatowska HK, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P249, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2261
WALLACE GL, 1996, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
WERTZ RT, 2000, M AM SPEECH HEAR ASS
Wolfram W., 1974, STUDY SOCIAL DIALECT
WOLFRAM W, 1992, INT C INT PERSP SPEE
NR 24
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 5
BP 511
EP 521
DI 10.1080/02687030344000102
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 669DB
UT WOS:000182335700009
ER
PT J
AU Hula, WD
McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Rubinsky, HJ
Fossett, TRD
AF Hula, WD
McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Rubinsky, HJ
Fossett, TRD
TI The inter-rater reliability of the story retell procedure
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 32nd Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 2002
CL RIDGEDALE, MISSOURI
ID CONNECTED SPEECH; APHASIA; ADULTS
AB Background: McNeil, Doyle, Fossett, Park, and Goda (2001) have presented the story retell procedure (SRP) as an efficient means of assessing discourse in adults with aphasia, in part because it provides reliable, valid, and sensitive indices of performance without the need for time-consuming transcription of language samples.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to demonstrate that the SRP, when scored without transcription by judges with minimal training, produces a reliable measure of information transfer.
Methods & Procedures: Four judges who had not used the SRP previously scored audio-recorded language samples, produced by four subjects with aphasia and eleven normal subjects, for percent information units per minute (%IU/Min).
Outcomes & Results: The results demonstrate that the SRP has high inter-rater reliability. Reliability coefficients ranged from .89 to .995, and the standard error of measurement associated with inter-rater scoring error ranged from .59 to 1.42 %IU/Min. Point-to-point reliability in scoring individual information units ranged from 85-95% and averaged 91% for both subject groups.
Conclusions: The SRP is a potentially useful tool for quantifying connected language behaviour, and may be particularly valuable in clinical and research settings where economy of assessment procedures is essential.
C1 VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Ctr Geriatr Res Educ & Clin, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Hula, WD (reprint author), VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Ctr Geriatr Res Educ & Clin, 7180 Highland Dr, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
CR Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
Berndt R. S., 2000, QUANTITATIVE PRODUCT
BRODSKY M, 2000, AC APH C MONTR CA
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
Denegar CR, 1993, J SPORT REHABIL, V2, P35
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
Doyle PJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P537
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
McNeil M. R., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P76, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0404.76
McNeil MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P991
McNeil MR, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P815, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000284
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P636
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Raven JC, 1976, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Ulatowska HK, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P619, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249562
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
NR 19
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 5
BP 523
EP 528
DI 10.1080/02687030344000139
PG 6
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 669DB
UT WOS:000182335700010
ER
PT J
AU Ross, KB
Wertz, RT
AF Ross, KB
Wertz, RT
TI Quality of life with and without aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID OF-LIFE; PSYCHOSOCIAL ADJUSTMENT; DISABILITY; SPEECH; STROKE; ADULTS
AB Background: Although the social approach to managing aphasia is designed to improve the quality of life (QOL) of the aphasic person, the influence of being aphasic on different facets of QOL is unknown.
Aims: To delineate socially valid therapy targets, we examined 24 facets of QOL proposed by the World Health Organisation (WHO) to determine which facets differentiate QOL between aphasic and nonaphasic people.
Methods & Procedures: A prospective, observational, non-randomised group design was employed. Two measures-the WHO QOL Instrument, Short Form (WHOQOL-BREF) and the Psychosocial Well-Being Index (PWI)-were administered to 18 adults with chronic aphasia and 18 nonaphasic adults. Indices of determination (ID) and degrees of overlap (DO) were calculated to determine which of the 24 facets were best in differentiating between the aphasic and nonaphasic groups.
Outcomes & Results: Facets within three domains-level of independence, social relationships, and environment-were best in distinguishing QOL between the aphasic and nonaphasic groups.
Conclusion: Therapy that focuses on situation-specific communication and societal participation appears to be most appropriate for enhancing the QOL of people with chronic aphasia.
C1 Carl T Hayden Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Phoenix, AZ 85012 USA.
Arizona State Univ, Tempe, AZ 85287 USA.
Dept Vet Affairs Tennessee Valley Healthcare Syst, Nashville, TN USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
RP Ross, KB (reprint author), Carl T Hayden Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, CS-126,650 E Indian Sch Rd, Phoenix, AZ 85012 USA.
CR ABBERLY P, 1991, SOCIAL WORK DISABLED
Artes R, 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P31
BERGER R, 1998, J CLIN BAS CARDIOL, V1, P19
Brown M, 1999, MT SINAI J MED, V66, P160
BRUMFITT S, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687039308248631
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P49
CARHART R, 1971, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V36, P476
CODE C, 1992, CODEMULLER PROTOCOLS
DEHAAN R, 1993, STROKE, V24, P1178
DUFFY J, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P47
DUFFY JR, 1980, APHASIA APRAXIA AGNO, V2, P1
FINKELSTEIN Victor, 1993, DISABLING BARRIERS E
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
GILL TM, 1994, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V272, P619, DOI 10.1001/jama.272.8.619
Hemsley G, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P567
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P513, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249019
HERRMANN M, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P527, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248505
HIRSCH FM, 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P35
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kinsella G, 1978, MANAGEMENT APHASIA, P26
Power M, 1998, SOC SCI MED, V46, P1569
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
MCSWEENY AJ, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY EVER, P185
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
POUND C, 2001, BEYOND APHASIA THERA, P1
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
ROSS KB, 2000, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
Ross KB, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P791, DOI 10.1080/02687030244000130
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
Sneeuw KCA, 1997, STROKE, V28, P1541
Spilker B, 1996, QUALITY LIFE PHARMAC, P1
SPITZER WO, 1987, J CHRON DIS, V40, P465, DOI 10.1016/0021-9681(87)90002-6
Harper A, 1998, PSYCHOL MED, V28, P551
Veldhuyzen Van Zanten SJ, 1991, CONTROLLED CLIN TRIA, V12, pS234
Orley J, 1996, WORLD HEALTH FORUM, V17, P354
YOUNG MA, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V19, P5
NR 38
TC 36
Z9 39
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 4
BP 355
EP 364
DI 10.1080/02687030244000716
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 667LP
UT WOS:000182233900003
ER
PT J
AU Hilari, K
Wiggins, RD
Roy, P
Byng, S
Smith, SC
AF Hilari, K
Wiggins, RD
Roy, P
Byng, S
Smith, SC
TI Predictors of health-related quality of life (HRQL) in people with
chronic aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COLORED-PROGRESSIVE-MATRICES; OF-LIFE; STROKE PATIENTS; COGNITIVE
IMPAIRMENT; ISCHEMIC STROKE; SURVIVORS; REINTEGRATION; SATISFACTION;
INSTRUMENTS; HANDICAP
AB Background: In recent years, quality of life measures have been used increasingly to evaluate the effectiveness of services or interventions. For people with chronic disabilities, research has focused on identifying the main predictors of their health-related quality of life (HRQL), in order to address the issue of how to meet their needs in rehabilitation in a more holistic way.
Aims: This study assessed the main predictors of HRQL in people with chronic aphasia following stroke. We investigated the relationship between HRQL and various demographic and stroke-related variables and other variables that have been associated with HRQL in stroke survivors (e.g., emotional distress, daily activities, social support).
Methods: A cross-sectional design was adopted. A cluster sampling framework was used to recruit participants with chronic aphasia (>1 year) from three different sites. Questionnaires and assessments on the different variables were administered to all participants by a speech and language therapist, in an interview format. Multiple regression analysis was used to assess what were the main predictors of HRQL in people with aphasia.
Results: Of 95 participants, 83 (87%) were able to self-report on all the assessments. Emotional distress, involvement in home and outdoors activities, extent of communication disability, and number of comorbid conditions explained 52% of the variance in HRQL (adjusted R-2 =.52). Stroke type (infarct vs haemorrhage), time post-onset, and demographic variables (gender, ethnicity, marital status, employment status, and socioeconomic status) were not significantly associated with HRQL in these participants.
Conclusions: Increased distress, reduced involvement in activities, increased communication disability, and comorbidity predict poorer HRQL in people with chronic aphasia after stroke. Service providers need to take these factors into account when designing intervention programmes.
C1 City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, London EC1V 0HB, England.
Connect Commun Disabil Network, London, England.
London Sch Hyg & Trop Med, London WC1, England.
RP Hilari, K (reprint author), City Univ London, Dept Language & Commun Sci, Northampton Sq, London EC1V 0HB, England.
CR AHLSIO B, 1984, STROKE, V15, P886
ANGELERI F, 1993, STROKE, V24, P1478
HERRMAN H, 1993, QUAL LIFE RES, V2, P153
[Anonymous], 1999, SPSS BAS 10 0 APPL G
ASTROM M, 1992, CEREBROVASC DIS, V2, P28, DOI 10.1159/000108984
ASTROM M, 1992, STROKE, V23, P527
BERZON R, 1993, QUAL LIFE RES, V2, P367, DOI 10.1007/BF00422214
Bethoux F, 1999, AM J PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P19, DOI 10.1097/00002060-199901000-00006
BULLINGER M, 1993, QUAL LIFE RES, V2, P451, DOI 10.1007/BF00422219
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROLOGICA
Clarke PJ, 1999, DISABIL REHABIL, V21, P116, DOI 10.1080/096382899297855
Cruice M., 2000, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V5, P85
Cruice M., 2000, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V5, P1
Jonkman EJ, 1998, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V98, P169
DEHAAN R, 1993, STROKE, V24, P1178
DEHAAN RJ, 1995, STROKE, V26, P402
Dennis M, 1997, BRIT MED J, V314, P1071
Dennis M, 2000, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V68, P47, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.68.1.47
Dorman PJ, 1999, STROKE, V30, P2146
Duncan PW, 1997, STROKE, V28, P740
EBRAHIM S, 1986, J EPIDEMIOL COMMUN H, V40, P166, DOI 10.1136/jech.40.2.166
Enderby P. M., 1987, FRENCHAY APHASIA SCR
FERRANS C, 1985, ADV NURS SCI, V8, P24
FOSTER A, 1996, BRIT MED J, V312, P1642
Frattali C. M., 1995, FUNCTIONAL ASSESSMEN
FREY WD, 1984, FUNCTIONAL ASSESSMEN
Goldberg D, 1972, DETECTION PSYCHIAT I
Goldberg D. P., 1988, USERS GUIDE GEN HLTH
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Hackett ML, 2000, STROKE, V31, P440
HAYS RD, 1993, QUAL LIFE RES, V2, P441, DOI 10.1007/BF00422218
Hemsley G, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P567
HILARI K, 2002, THESIS CITY U LONDON
HILARI K, 2000, QUAL LIFE RES, V9, P285
Hilari K, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P86
Hochstenbach J B, 1996, Ned Tijdschr Geneeskd, V140, P1182
Hoen B, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P681, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249415
Keith RA, 1987, ADV CLIN REHABILITAT, P6
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
King RB, 1996, STROKE, V27, P1467
KNAPP P, 1999, STROKE, V30, P938
Kwa VIH, 1996, J NEUROL, V243, P599, DOI 10.1007/BF00900948
LAWRENCE L, 1979, AGE AGEING, V8, P167, DOI 10.1093/ageing/8.3.167
LAWTON MP, 1975, J GERONTOL, V1, P89
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Lofgren B, 1999, STROKE, V30, P567
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Maclean N, 2000, BRIT MED J, V321, P1051, DOI 10.1136/bmj.321.7268.1051
MAYOU R, 1993, BRIT HEART J, V69, P460
Menard S, 1995, APPL LOGISTIC REGRES
Neau JP, 1998, CEREBROVASC DIS, V8, P296, DOI 10.1159/000015869
*NHS EX, 1999, CLIN GOV NEW NHS
*NHS EX, 1996, PROM CLIN EFF FRAM A
NIEMI ML, 1988, STROKE, V19, P1101
OSBERG JS, 1988, AM J PHYS MED REHAB, V67, P94, DOI 10.1097/00002060-198806000-00002
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
PATRICK DL, 1993, QUALITY OF LIFE ASSESSMENT : KEY ISSUES IN THE 1990S, P11
POUND C, 2000, BEYOND APHASIA THERA
Raven J, 2000, STANDARD PROGR MATRI
Raven J., 1962, COLOURED PROGRESSIVE
Robinson R G, 1999, Int Psychogeriatr, V11, P375, DOI 10.1017/S1041610299005992
ROSE D., 1997, CONSTRUCTING CLASSES
ROTH M, 1986, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V149, P698, DOI 10.1192/bjp.149.6.698
Royal College of Physicians, 2000, NAT CLIN GUID STROK
Sarno MT, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P665, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249414
SHERBOURNE CD, 1991, SOC SCI MED, V32, P705, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(91)90150-B
Smits CHM, 1997, J CLIN PSYCHOL, V53, P687, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-4679(199711)53:7<687::AID-JCLP6>3.0.CO;2-F
Sneeuw KCA, 1997, STROKE, V28, P1541
Stevens J, 1992, APPL MULTIVARIATE ST, V2nd
Tabachnick B., 2001, USING MULTIVARIATE S
TUOMILEHTO J, 1995, STROKE, V26, P971
TURNER RR, 1990, QUALITY LIFE ASSESSM, P247
Vieweg B. W., 1983, J OPER PSYCHIATR, V14, P74
VIITANEN M, 1988, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V20, P17
VILLARDITA C, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P627
Wade D T, 1985, Int Rehabil Med, V7, P176
WENGER NK, 1984, AM J CARDIOL, V54, P908, DOI 10.1016/S0002-9149(84)80232-5
Wilkinson PR, 1997, QUAL HEALTH CARE, V6, P125, DOI 10.1136/qshc.6.3.125
Williams LS, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1362
WOODDAUPHINEE S, 1987, J CHRON DIS, V40, P491, DOI 10.1016/0021-9681(87)90005-1
WOODDAUPHINEE SL, 1988, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V69, P583
Wyller TB, 1998, STROKE, V29, P363
NR 82
TC 43
Z9 44
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 4
BP 365
EP 381
DI 10.1080/02687030244000725
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 667LP
UT WOS:000182233900004
ER
PT J
AU Engell, B
Hutter, BO
Willmes, K
Huber, W
AF Engell, B
Hutter, BO
Willmes, K
Huber, W
TI Quality of life in aphasia: Validation of a pictorial self-rating
procedure
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SICKNESS IMPACT PROFILE; OF-LIFE; STROKE SURVIVORS; METAANALYSIS;
VALIDITY; SCALES; STATE
AB Methods & Procedures: Quality of life was assessed for stroke patients with aphasia in postacute and chronic stages by means of the Aachen Life Quality Inventory (ALQI), a German adaptation of the Sickness Impact Profile (SIP). A modified written version of the ALQI was given to relatives, and a newly developed pictorial version designed to minimise language demands was given to aphasic patients. Ratings of 24 patient-relative pairs were assessed.
Outcomes & Results: Overall the two versions were found to be highly parallel and internally consistent, and they could be separated equally well along physical and psychosocial dimensions. In addition to rating complaints, patients were asked to score the burden caused by them; high intercorrelations between complaints and burden were found. The physical subscore was influenced by presence and degree of hemiparesis, and the psychosocial subscore by patients' mood state as rated by the relatives. Age had an impact on relatives' ratings of language and cognition as well as on physical functions. Patients and relatives differed in rating of psychosocial and cognitive complaints. Relatives took a more functional perspective, patient ratings were more dependent upon degree and quality of the aphasic impairment.
C1 Univ Technol RWTH, Dept Neurol, Sect Neurolinguist, D-52074 Aachen, Germany.
RP Huber, W (reprint author), Univ Technol RWTH, Dept Neurol, Sect Neurolinguist, D-52074 Aachen, Germany.
CR Aaronson N K, 1988, Oncology (Williston Park), V2, P69
Allison PJ, 1997, SOC SCI MED, V45, P221, DOI 10.1016/S0277-9536(96)00339-5
BERGNER M, 1981, MED CARE, V19, P787, DOI 10.1097/00005650-198108000-00001
Borg I., 1992, GRUNDLAGEN ERGEBNISS
Carod-Artal J, 2000, STROKE, V31, P2995
Damiano AM, 1996, SICKNESS IMPACT PROF
DEHAAN R, 1993, STROKE, V24, P320
DEHAAN RJ, 1995, STROKE, V26, P402
Emerson J, 1995, DOES SPEECH LANGUAGE
FLANAGAN JC, 1982, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V63, P56
GRANGER CV, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P133
GREENER J, 2002, COCHRANE LIB
Hoen B, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P681, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249415
Huber W., 1985, PROGR APHASIOLOGY, P291
Huber W., 1993, WORLD PERSPECTIVES A, P55
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Hutter BO, 1997, PSYCHOL HEALTH, V12, P149, DOI 10.1080/08870449708407396
HUTTER BO, 1996, BEFUNDERHEBUNG PSYCH, P83
Hutter BO., 2001, COMPENDIUM QUALITY L
KATZ S, 1987, J CHRON DIS, V40, P459, DOI 10.1016/0021-9681(87)90001-4
Kim P, 1999, QUAL LIFE RES, V8, P293, DOI 10.1023/A:1008927431300
King RB, 1996, STROKE, V27, P1467
Lingoes J.C., 1979, GEOMETRIC REPRESENTA
McNair DM, 1971, MANUAL PROFILE MOOD
NIEMI ML, 1988, STROKE, V19, P1101
Orley J, 1994, QUALITY LIFE ASSESSM
Parker CJ, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P1
PEARSON VAH, 1995, PUBLIC HEALTH, V109, P143, DOI 10.1016/S0033-3506(05)80008-3
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P582, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1060
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
Sarno MT, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P665, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249414
SPITZER WO, 1987, J CHRON DIS, V40, P465, DOI 10.1016/0021-9681(87)90002-6
Stern RA, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P59, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248455
VISSER MC, 1996, MEASUREMENT QUALITY
ZRAICK RI, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P123
NR 36
TC 21
Z9 21
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 4
BP 383
EP 396
DI 10.1080/02687030244000734
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 667LP
UT WOS:000182233900005
ER
PT J
AU Avent, JR
Austermann, S
AF Avent, JR
Austermann, S
TI Reciprocal scaffolding: A context for communication treatment in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Background: The goal of social approaches to aphasia treatment is to improve life quality. This study explored the potential therapeutic value of increasing participation in life through natural language use with communicative partners during shared learning activities. Reciprocal Scaffolding Treatment (RST), based on an apprenticeship model of learning where novices are taught skills by a more skilled partner, was developed to provide an individual with aphasia an opportunity to use pre-stroke knowledge and vocabulary during teaching interactions.
Aims: The purposes of the study were to determine whether an individual with aphasia in the role as a teacher would improve language production and whether changes in quality of life were evident as a result of the experience.
Methods & Procedures: A descriptive case study approach was used to compare RST and peer discourse group treatment. The participant was a former physicist with moderate aphasia. He was placed in a preschool classroom to teach science to 4- and 5-year-old children. Correct information unit (CIU) analysis and type token ratio (TTR) scores were used to compare language samples. Journal entries were used to document psychosocial and quality of life changes.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated better verbal word retrieval skills within the classroom (RST) as compared to discourse group treatment. While involved in the teaching experience, the participant's lesson plans improved in detail and clarity. Journal entries showed improvements in quality of life.
Conclusions: These findings show how the re-application of prestroke vocational skills can enhance quality of life and improve language performance. While these results support a social approach to aphasia treatment, additional research is needed.
C1 Calif State Univ Hayward, Hayward, CA 94542 USA.
RP Avent, JR (reprint author), Calif State Univ Hayward, Hayward, CA 94542 USA.
CR AVENT J, 1997, MAN COOP GROUP TREAT
Bruner J. S., 1983, CHILDS TALK LEARNING
BYNG S, 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC
Chapey R., 2000, ASHA LEADER, V5, P4
Chapey R, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
FRIEDMAN MI, 1997, IMPROVING QUALITY LI
FRIEDRICH DD, 2002, SUCCESSFUL AGING INT
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Lapointe Leonard L., 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P5, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064005
LYON JG, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Lyon JG, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P689, DOI 10.1080/026870399401795
Malvern D. D., 1997, EVOLVING MODELS LANG
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
Retherford K., 1993, GUIDE ANAL LANGUAGE
Rogoff B, 2001, LEARNING TOGETHER CH
Rogoff Barbara, 1990, APPRENTICESHIP THINK
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Templin M., 1957, CERTAIN LANGUAGE SKI
WACHAL RS, 1973, LANG SPEECH, V16, P169
Wepman J M, 1976, ASHA, V18, P131
NR 21
TC 10
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 4
BP 397
EP 404
DI 10.1080/02687030244000743
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 667LP
UT WOS:000182233900006
ER
PT J
AU Sorin-Peters, R
AF Sorin-Peters, R
TI Viewing couples living with aphasia as adult learners: Implications for
promoting quality of life
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FAMILY-THERAPY; COMMUNICATION
AB Background: Current interventions for addressing the psychosocial consequences of aphasia have been based on professionally driven constructs as opposed to insider accounts of aphasia. An adult learning approach offers the possibility of developing a programme for individuals with aphasia and their families that involves a more holistic and person-centred approach. This approach offers insights about promoting the quality of life of couples living with aphasia.
Aims: The primary objective of this paper is to discuss the implications of adopting an adult learning approach in promoting the quality of life of couples living with chronic aphasia. This paper outlines current interventions for addressing the psychosocial consequences of aphasia. It describes an innovative approach of working with couples with aphasia that explicitly integrates adult education principles and strategies. The basic assumption of this approach is that learning begins with the learner, as opposed to the therapist or treatment plan.
Main Contribution: The main contribution of this paper is to outline an alternative approach to intervention that is based on an adult learning model. This approach suggests that improving quality of life for couples living with aphasia involves more than simply promoting increased participation in conversation. Placing the learner in the central role results in intervetion goals that encompass emotional and marital issues, as well as communication.
Conclusions: The implications of the adult learning approach on promoting quality of life in the area of emotions, marital issues, and communication outcomes are discussed. Implications of this approach on the role of the speech-language pathologist are also examined.
RP Sorin-Peters, R (reprint author), 190 Winding Lane, Thornhill, ON L4J 5J2, Canada.
EM rsorinpeters@rogers.com
CR ALARCON N, 1997, NONTR APPR APH C YOU
BOSS P, 1991, LIVING BEYOND LOSS D
Brookfield S., 1990, SKILLFUL TEACHER
BYNG S, 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC
Calman KC, 1987, QUALITY LIFE CANC PA
Canary D. J., 1994, COMMUNICATION RELATI
CANARY DJ, 1992, COMMUN MONOGR, V59, P242
Chapey R., 2000, ASHA LEADER, V5, P4
Gainotti G, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P635, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249412
HELMICK JW, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P238
HERMANN M, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P717
HOLLAND A, 2000, COUNSELLING INDIVIDU
HUNT DE, 1987, OURSELVES PRACTICE T
Johannsen-Horbach Helga, 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P73, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064010
KAGAN A, 1999, THESIS U TORONTO
King RB, 1996, STROKE, V27, P1467
Knowles M., 1973, ADULT LEARNER NEGLEC
Kolb D. A., 1984, EXPT LEARNING EXPERI
Lapointe Leonard L., 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P5, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064005
LaPointe LL, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P135, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2233
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LINEBAUGH CW, 1978, CLIN APH C P
LUTERMAN D, 1995, SHADOWS LIVING COPIN
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Nichols F, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P767, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248449
OLSWANG L, 1998, UNPUB TREATING DISAB
Parr S, 2001, FOLIA PHONIATR LOGO, V53, P266, DOI 10.1159/000052681
SIMMONS NN, 1989, CLIN APH C P
SORINPETERS R, 2003, UNPUB EVALUATION LEA
SORINPETERS R, 2002, THESIS U TORONTO CAN
SPILKER B., 1990, QUALITY LIFE ASSESSM
WAHRBORG P, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P93, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248978
Wilkinson IAG, 1998, READ RES QUART, V33, P144, DOI 10.1598/RRQ.33.2.1
WILLIAMS SE, 1993, ARCH PHYSICAL MED RE, V74, P3611
NR 34
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 4
BP 405
EP 416
DI 10.1080/02687030244000752
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 667LP
UT WOS:000182233900007
ER
PT J
AU Conley, A
Coelho, CA
AF Conley, A
Coelho, CA
TI Treatment of word retrieval impairment in chronic Broca's aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Background: The present study describes a treatment approach that was applied to improve word retrieval for an individual with chronic Broca's aphasia. The procedure combined elements of loose training with aspects of structured treatment. Treatment involved presentation of semantic cues according to semantic feature analysis [SFA] (Boyle & Coelho, 1995), as well as a forward chaining technique as in response elaboration training [RET] (Kearns, 1985). The technique was intended to elicit the targeted response by activating a semantic network without inhibiting related or creative responses.
Aims: The purpose was to investigate whether the combined SFA-RET treatment approach would improve naming accuracy of object noun pictures. This study also focused on an issue related to degradation in word retrieval, but instead of frequency of occurrence the focus was familiarity. Familiarity was based on to how often the individual with aphasia encountered the object nouns in her everyday life.
Methods & Procedures: The individual studied, LP, was a 57-year-old, right-handed female who was 8 years post-onset of a left cerebrovascular accident and demonstrated a moderate to severe Broca's aphasia. LP's naming scores were consistent with a severe impairment and the majority of her paraphasic errors were semantic in nature. Treatment materials consisted of 30 photographs of object nouns, of which 15 represented "high-familiarity" objects and 15 represented "low-familiarity". The 30 pictures were divided into three sets of 10 pictures. Each set consisted of five high- and five low-familiarity objects. Two sets of pictures were designated as treatment stimuli and the third as the control set. The treatment programme was carried out in an ABA single subject design. After the baseline phase the individual with aphasia was treated for 3 hours per week for 6 weeks and was seen for three follow-up sessions 6 weeks later.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that the combined SFA-RET treatment resulted in improved naming of the treatment pictures as well as the untreated control pictures. In addition, during the treatment phase naming accuracy and consistency were greater for the high-familiarity than the low-familiarity objects. During the follow-up phase it was noted that the treatment effect was maintained at a higher level for the treatment pictures than for the control pictures. A similar trend was observed for the high- versus the low-familiarity words.
Conclusions: These findings indicate that the combined treatment approach described was effective in improving this individual's word retrieval of object nouns. However, it is unclear whether the combined approach was necessary or what the individual contributions of each approach were to the final outcome. Finally, it appeared that LP was able to generate semantic features associated with the high-familiarity words and name the stimulus pictures more easily than the low-familiarity words, perhaps because of her regular contact with those objects in her daily life. This finding supports the contention that personalising treatment stimuli can be an important adjunct to any treatment task.
C1 Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, Unit 1085, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
Hosp Special Care, New Britain, CT USA.
RP Coelho, CA (reprint author), Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, Unit 1085, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
CR BADECKER W, 1995, COGNITION, V34, P205
Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P94
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
Coelho CA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P133
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
DUFFY JR, 2000, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Kearns K. P., 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P196
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LEDORZE G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P127
LEVELT WJM, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90038-J
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Sarno M., 1981, ACQUIRED APHASIA
THOMPSON C, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
WILSHIRE CE, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE
NR 15
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 3
BP 203
EP 211
DI 10.1080/02687030244000617
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 656MD
UT WOS:000181610800001
ER
PT J
AU Schneider, SL
Thompson, CK
AF Schneider, SL
Thompson, CK
TI Verb production in agrammatic aphasia: The influence of semantic class
and argument structure properties on generalisation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPREADING-ACTIVATION THEORY; BRAIN-DAMAGED SUBJECTS; SENTENCE
PRODUCTION; SINGLE-SUBJECT; RETRIEVAL; REPRESENTATION; COMPREHENSION;
RELEVANT; LANGUAGE; DESIGN
AB Background: Some individuals with agrammatic aphasia have difficulty producing verbs when naming and generating sentences (Miceli, Silveri, Villa, & Caramazza, 1984; Saffran, Schwartz, Marin, 1980; Zingeser & Berndt, 1990). And when verbs are produced there is an over-reliance on verbs requiring simple argument structure arrangements (Thompson, Lange, Schneider, Shapiro, 1997; Thompson, Shapiro, Schneider, & Tait, 1994). Verbs, as argument-taking elements, show especially complex semantic and argument structure properties. This study investigated the role these properties have on verb production in individuals with agrammatic aphasia.
Aim: This treatment study examined the extent to which semantic class and argument structure properties of verbs influenced the ability of seven individuals with agrammatic Broca's aphasia to retrieve verbs and then use them in correct sentence production. Verbs from two semantic classes and two argument structure categories were trained using either a semantic or an argument structure verb retrieval treatment. Specifically, acquisition and generalisation to trained and untrained verbs within and across semantic and argument structure categories was examined. In addition, the influence of verb production on each participant's sentence production was also examined.
Methods & Procedures: Utilising a single-subject crossover design in combination with a multiple baseline design across subjects and behaviours, seven individuals with agrammatic aphasia were trained to retrieve verbs with specific argument structures from two semantic classes under two treatment conditions-semantic verb retrieval treatment and verb argument structure retrieval treatment. Treatment was provided on two-place and three-place motion or change of state verbs, counterbalanced across subjects and behaviours. A total of 102 verbs, depicted in black and white drawings, were utilised in the study, divided equally into motion and change of state verbs (semantic classes) and one-place, two-place, and three-place verbs (argument structure arrangements). Verbs were controlled for syllable length, picturability, phonological complexity, and frequency. These same stimulus items were used to elicit the sentence production probe.
Outcomes & Results: Both treatments revealed significant effects in facilitating acquisition of verb retrieval in all participants. Minimal within and across verb category generalisation occurred. However, it was found that as retrieval of verbs improved, grammatical sentence production improved. This occurred without direct treatment on sentence production.
Conclusions: The results of this study lend support for treatment focused on verb production with individuals with agrammatic aphasia and support the use of linguistic-based treatment strategies.
C1 Ohio State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Columbus, OH 43210 USA.
Northwestern Univ, Evanston, IL 60208 USA.
RP Schneider, SL (reprint author), Ohio State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 110 Pressey Hall,1070 Carmack Rd, Columbus, OH 43210 USA.
CR BARLOW DH, 1979, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V12, P199, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1979.12-199
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Bock Kathryn, 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC, P945
COLLINS AM, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P407, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.82.6.407
CONNELL PJ, 1986, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V51, P214
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Garrett M., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1, P177
Garrett M. F., 1975, PSYCHOL LEARN MOTIV, V1, P133, DOI 10.1016/S0079-7421(08)60270-4
Garrett M. F., 1988, LINGUISTICS CAMBRIDG, V3, P69
Gentner Dedre, 1982, LANGUAGE DEV, P301
GLASER WR, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P61, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90040-O
Hale K., 1987, LEXICON PROJECT WORK
Hale Kenneth, 1986, LEXICON PROJECT WORK
Hovav M. R., 1998, PROJECTION ARGUMENTS, P97
Jackendoff Ray S., 1972, SEMANTIC INTERPRETAT
KEGL J, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P151, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1044
Kemmerer D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2311
Kemmerer D, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P997, DOI 10.1080/02687030050156584
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kim M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P1, DOI 10.1006/brin.2000.2315
Kiss K., 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER
KOHN SE, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P57
Levelt W. J. M, 1993, LINGUISTIC DISORDERS, P1
Levin Beth, 1992, THEMATIC STRUCTURE I, P247
Levin Beth, 1993, ENGLISH VERB CLASSES
Levin Beth, 1995, LINGUISTIC INQUIRY M, V26
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
Marslen-Wilson W. D., 1987, SPOKEN WORD RECOGNIT, P71
McReynolds L. V., 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
Miller J., 1993, SYSTEMATIC ANAL LANG
NEELY JH, 1977, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V106, P226, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.106.3.226
Pinker Steven, 1989, LEARNABILITY COGNITI
ROELOFS A, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P107, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90041-F
SAFFRAN EM, 1982, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V73, P317
SAFFRAN EM, 1991, UNPUB PHILADELPHIA C
SAFFRAN EM, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P263, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90056-5
SCHRIEFERS H, 1990, J MEM LANG, V29, P86, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(90)90011-N
SHAPIRO LP, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P21, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90100-U
Shapiro LP, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P254
SHAPIRO LP, 1987, COGNITION, V27, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(87)80010-0
SHAPIRO LP, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P431, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90078-S
Thompson C. K., 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P124
THOMPSON CK, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V23, P56
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
THOMPSON CK, 2000, BRIT PSYCH SOC COGN
THOMPSON CL, 1994, TENNET 5 C MONTR CAN
VERSPOOR M, 1997, LEXICAL SYNTACTICAL
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 51
TC 26
Z9 26
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 3
BP 213
EP 241
DI 10.1080/02687030244000635
PG 29
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 656MD
UT WOS:000181610800002
ER
PT J
AU Davidson, B
Worrall, L
Hickson, L
AF Davidson, B
Worrall, L
Hickson, L
TI Identifying the communication activities of older people with aphasia:
Evidence from naturalistic observation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICATION; PERSPECTIVE; STRATEGIES
AB Background: Increasingly there is a call from clinicians and researchers for measures that document the impact of aphasia on a person's everyday communication. Do existing assessments of communication disability adequately sample communication activities relevant to our clients? Communication skills and networks change with age. A need exists to determine the everyday communication activities of older people and in particular those with aphasia.
Aims: The primary aim of this study was to describe and compare the everyday communication activities of older people with aphasia and healthy older people who are living in the community. A secondary aim was to investigate the content validity of the American Speech-Language Hearing Association Functional Assessment of Communication Skills for Adults (ASHA FACS, 1997) for older Australians.
Methods & Procedures: Naturalistic observation was the method of choice for detailing the everyday communication of 15 older people with chronic aphasia following stroke and a matched group of 15 healthy older people who were living in the community. Researchers, in the role of participant observer, took field notes for 8 hours, over three occasions within a week. A total of 240 hours of observation have been coded in terms of communication activity, topic, communication partners, and place of communication. A brief 5-day diary served to check the representativeness of the observational data. After each hour of observation, the researcher checked which ASHA FACS items had been observed.
Outcomes & Results: Naturalistic observation provided a rich, rigorous, and systematic methodology for detailing the dynamics and complexities of authentic communication. The most common communication activities for both groups were conversations at home and in social groups. Real-life communication was revealed to serve the dual purposes of transaction and interaction. Results indicate that older people with aphasia engage in similar communication activities to healthy older people although differences were evident in the frequency of communication and in specific activities such as story telling, writing, commenting, and acknowledging. ASHA FACS items were generally relevant to older Australians living in the community.
Conclusions: This study demonstrated that communication activity is multifaceted in terms of the type of communication and contextual factors. The observational data describe the effects of aphasia on a person's everyday communication activity and reveal the impact of aphasia on the social functions of communication including sharing information, maintaining and establishing relationships, and telling one's story. Functional communication assessment requires a greater focus on the interactional and uniquely interpersonal aspects of social communication.
C1 Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Davidson, B (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
EM b.davidson@uq.edu.au
RI Davidson, Bronwyn/F-8741-2010; Hickson, Louise/F-8748-2010; Worrall,
Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR *ASHA, 1990, FUNCT COMM MEAS PROJ
Baltes PB, 1990, SUCCESSFUL AGING PER
BIRREN JE, 2000, HIST GEROPSYCHOLOGY
Brown G., 1983, DISCOURSE ANAL
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P49
CODE C, 2002, CLIN APH C SPRINGF M
Creswell JW, 1998, QUALITATIVE INQUIRY
DAVIDSON B, 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P19
Elman R. J., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P115
Enderby P, 1997, THERAPY OUTCOME MEAS
Frank AW, 1995, WOUNDED STORYTELLER
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
Frattali C. M., 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S
Frattali C M, 1993, Disabil Rehabil, V15, P1
HICKSON LMH, 1995, AUST J AGEING, V14, P89, DOI 10.1111/j.1741-6612.1995.tb00703.x
Holland Audrey L., 1998, Seminars in Speech and Language, V19, P249, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064048
HOLLAND AL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P50
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
Holmes Janet, 1992, INTRO SOCIOLINGUISTI
HOSEK S, 1986, CHARGES OUTCOMES REH
Kagan A., 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
Kagan A., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P199
KEARNS KP, 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P67
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
Lyon J., 1997, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P203
Lyon J. G., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P137
Mahoney F, 1965, MD STATE MED J, V14, P62
Maxim J., 1994, LANGUAGE ELDERLY
McAdams D. P., 2001, REV GEN PSYCHOL, V5, P100, DOI DOI 10.1037/1089-2680.5.2.100
McDowell I, 1987, MEASURING HLTH GUIDE
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
Parr S., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P55
Parr S, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P469, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248426
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
RAMSBERGER G, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P337
Rice PL, 1999, QUALITATIVE RES METH
Riessman C. K., 1993, NARRATIVE ANAL
Robson C., 1993, REAL WORLD RES
Sarno MT, 1969, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
SIMMONS N, 1993, THESIS
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P761
Simms NJ, 2001, EUR FED CORR PUBL, P246
Simmons-Mackie N., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P162
SimmonsMackie NN, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P540
SimmonsMackie NN, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P95
SMITHWORRALL L, 1990, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V18, P53
Spradley J., 1980, PARTICIPANT OBSERVAT
Thompson C., 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S, P245
World Health Organisation, 2001, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
Worrall L, 2002, J COMMUN DISORD, V35, P107, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(02)00060-6
Worrall L., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
WORRALL L, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P105, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248581
Worrall L., 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA, P47
Worrall L. E., 2003, COMMUNICATION DISABI
NR 56
TC 37
Z9 38
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 3
BP 243
EP 264
DI 10.1080/02687030244000653
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 656MD
UT WOS:000181610800003
ER
PT J
AU Inglis, AL
AF Inglis, AL
TI Taking expectations to task in aphasic sentence comprehension:
Investigations of off-line performance
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; ASYNTACTIC COMPREHENSION; PROCESSING DEFICITS;
THERAPY; COMPLEXITY; AGRAMMATISM; SENSITIVITY; NEUROPSYCHOLOGY;
INTERFERENCE; FOUNDATIONS
AB Background: A major weakness of off-line assessments of "asyntactic" comprehension is that the task is transparently related to the comprehension performance that is the researcher's interest. Not only might the patient recruit problem-solving strategies, but his/her conception of the task may have confounding effects on performance.
Aim: This study investigates the nature of individual differences in two patients' performance on two off-line comprehension tasks (selected for their low task demands) by manipulating task variables.
Methods & Procedures: The two single-case studies investigate, in a test-hypothesis-retest experimental design, performance on auditory meaning classification and actor identification. Both participants (NJ and CV) exhibited agrammatism following a stroke, although CV's was milder. McNemar exact (Binomial) probabilities were calculated on non-canonical versus canonical comparisons, whereas the Binomial test and chi(2) probabilities gauged departures from chance.
Outcomes & Results: The two patients departed from baseline for different reasons: CV showed unexpected learning, and maintenance of that learning, on one task, despite washout periods; NJ's fall from baseline was only reinstated with manipulation of the instructions in between washout periods, and he failed to generalise to the second task on a subset of the items.
Conclusions: It was surmised that strong induction skills in CV made for easy abstraction of "rules" from the sentence stimuli, unlike weak induction skills in NJ which led to bias and failure to detect rules despite feedback on practice items. The findings have relevance for treatment outcomes and extend Berndt and Mitchum's (1998) claim that only minimal intervention is needed for strongly analytical candidates-it may be as minimal as feedback to exemplars.
C1 Macquarie Univ, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
Rice Univ, Houston, TX 77251 USA.
RP Inglis, AL (reprint author), Charles Sturt Univ, Sch Social Sci & Liberal Studies, Panorama Ave, Bathurst, NSW 2795, Australia.
CR ANSELL BJ, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P61, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90072-4
BADDELEY A, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P479, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90021-6
BANDURA A, 1977, PSYCHOL REV, V84, P191, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.84.2.191
Bandura A, 1997, SELF EFFICACY EXERCI
BERNDT RS, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P263
BERNDT RS, 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT
Bishop D. V. M, 1982, TEST RECEPTION GRAMM
Black M., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P79, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90002-Z
Breedin SD, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P51, DOI 10.1080/026432996382060
BUTTERWORTH B, 1986, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V38, P705
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
BYNG S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P315, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248663
Caplan D., 1988, DISORDERS SYNTACTIC
CAPLAN D, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P117, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90008-8
CARAMAZZA A, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90078-X
Code C, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2420
CUPPLES L, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P201, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253461
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
DERENZI E, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P41
DUNN LM, 1981, MANUAL FORMS L M PEA
Evans J. St. B. T., 1989, BIAS HUMAN REASONING
FORD M, 1983, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V22, P203, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(83)90156-1
FORSTER KI, 1973, COGNITION, V2, P319
FRAZIER L, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P51, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90116-I
Frazier L, 1998, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V27, P123, DOI 10.1023/A:1023241830722
Gibson E, 1998, COGNITION, V68, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(98)00034-1
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Goodglass H, 1972, Cortex, V8, P191
Gordon PC, 2001, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V27, P1411, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.27.6.1411
GRODZINSKY Y, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P135, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90009-X
HAARMANN HJ, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P493, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1028
HAENDIGES AN, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P275
HAKES DT, 1976, MEM COGNITION, V4, P283, DOI 10.3758/BF03213177
HAMBURGER H, 1984, COGNITION, V17, P85, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(84)90015-5
Heit E, 2000, PSYCHON B REV, V7, P569, DOI 10.3758/BF03212996
HICKOK G, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P10, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1038
HOLMES VM, 1981, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V20, P417, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(81)90533-8
Holyoak K. J., 1988, PSYCHOL HUMAN THOUGH, P50
Inglis AL, 1999, J NEUROLINGUIST, V12, P41, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(99)00003-2
Jacobs BJ, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P5
JEPSON C, 1993, RULES REASONING
Johnson-Laird P. N., 1988, PSYCHOL HUMAN THOUGH, P429
JONES EV, 1984, ADV NEUROLOGY, V42
JONES EV, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P63
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kazdin A. E., 1982, SINGLE CASE RES DESI
KEMPER S, 1993, ADULT INFORMATION PR, P489
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KILBORN KW, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V8, P83
KLAYMAN J, 1987, PSYCHOL REV, V94, P211, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.94.2.211
Lewis RL, 1996, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V25, P93, DOI 10.1007/BF01708421
LINEBARGER MC, 1983, COGNITION, V13, P361, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90015-X
MARSHALL J, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P177, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249505
Marshall J, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250461
MARTIN RC, 1993, MEM COGNITION, V21, P176, DOI 10.3758/BF03202730
MCELREE B, 1989, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V18, P21, DOI 10.1007/BF01069044
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
MITCHUM CC, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P503, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252006
MIYAKE A, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P651, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252012
MIYAKE A, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P671, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251989
NICKELS L, 1991, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V26, P175
OSTRIN RK, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P345, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252002
ROSENTHAL V, 1997, J PSYCHOLINGUISTIC R, V26, P537
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
Saffran EM, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P255, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1918
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P389, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248943
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
Smith E. M., 1997, TRAINING RAPIDLY CHA, P89, DOI 10.1037/10260-004
SMITH WD, 1995, J MATH PSYCHOL, V39, P82, DOI 10.1006/jmps.1995.1007
Vallar G, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL I
WATERS G, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P81, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253368
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 72
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 3
BP 265
EP 289
DI 10.1080/02687030244000662
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 656MD
UT WOS:000181610800004
ER
PT J
AU Doyle, PJ
McNeil, MR
Hula, WD
AF Doyle, PJ
McNeil, MR
Hula, WD
TI The Burden of Stroke Scale (BOSS): Validating patient-reported
communication difficulty and associated psychological distress in stroke
survivors
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID QUALITY-OF-LIFE; HEALTH; SYMPTOMS
AB Background: The Burden of Stroke Scale (BOSS) (Doyle et al., 2002) is a health-status assessment instrument designed to measure patient-reported difficulty in multiple domains of functioning, psychological distress associated with specific functional limitations, and general well-being in stroke survivors.
Aims: This study was designed to examine the discriminative and concurrent validity of the BOSS Communication Difficulty (CD) and Communication-Associated Psychological Distress (CAPD) scales. A secondary purpose was to provide a preliminary examination of the relationships between the BOSS CD and CAPD scales and aspects of subjective well-being, including the frequency with which participants reported experiencing general positive and negative emotional states.
Methods & Procedures: The BOSS was administered as a face-to-face interviewer-assisted survey to 281 medically stable, community-dwelling stroke survivors selected from five collaborating centres in the USA. Prior to administration of the BOSS, all subjects were rated for severity of communication impairment using the Boston Diagnostic Aphasia Examination (BDAE) Severity Rating Scale (Goodglass, Kaplan, & Baressi, 2001) and were administered Subtest 8 of the Revised Token Test (RTT), (McNeil & Prescott, 1978). The discriminant validity of the BOSS CD and CAPD scales was examined by comparing scores in stroke survivors with (N = 135) and without (N = 146) communication impairment, and within the communicatively impaired sample when classified according to BDAE ratings and RTT performance. Concurrent validity of the BOSS CD and CAPD scales was examined by correlating BOSS scores with BDAE ratings and RTT performance. Finally, correlations between the BOSS CAPD, BOSS CD, Positive Mood, and Negative Mood scales were calculated.
Outcomes & Results: Statistical analyses revealed significant differences between communicatively impaired and non-communicatively impaired subjects on the BOSS CD and CAPD scales, as well as significant differences between communicatively impaired subjects of differing severity levels classified both by BDAE severity ratings and RTT performance. Correlational analyses revealed moderately strong relationships among the BOSS CD scale, BDAE severity ratings, and RTT performance. Finally, correlations among the BOSS CAPD, CD, Positive Mood, and Negative Mood scales revealed true covarying relationships of moderate strength between the BOSS CAPD and CD scales, and also between the CAPD and Negative Mood Scales.
Conclusions: These findings provide preliminary support for the discriminant and construct validity of the BOSS Communication Difficulty (CD) and Communication Associated Distress (CAPD) Scales, and provide an empirical rationale for further research into the relationships between functional status, patient-reported health perceptions, and subjective well-being in stroke survivors with communication disorders.
C1 VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Geriatr Res Educ & Clin Ctr 132AH, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Doyle, PJ (reprint author), VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Geriatr Res Educ & Clin Ctr 132AH, 7180 Highland Dr, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
CR Agewall S, 1998, STROKE, V29, P2329
BERGNER M, 1981, MED CARE, V19, P787, DOI 10.1097/00005650-198108000-00001
BRIEF AP, 1993, J PERS SOC PSYCHOL, V64, P646, DOI 10.1037//0022-3514.64.4.646
BROTT T, 1989, STROKE, V20, P864
Patrick D L, 1973, Health Serv Res, V8, P228
COATES A, 1992, J CLIN ONCOL, V10, P1833
Dahlöf C, 1990, Scand J Prim Health Care Suppl, V1, P19
DIENER E, 1995, J PERS SOC PSYCHOL, V69, P130, DOI 10.1037//0022-3514.69.1.130
Diener E, 1999, PSYCHOL BULL, V125, P276, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.125.2.276
DIMENAS ES, 1989, J HYPERTENS, V7, P885, DOI 10.1097/00004872-198911000-00006
DOYLE PJ, 2002, UNPUB CONCEPTUAL PSY
DOYLE PJ, 2001, 8 ANN M INT SOC QUAL
DOYLE PJ, 2002, ARCH PHYSICAL MED S, V83
DUCHAN JF, 2001, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V1, P37
Duncan PW, 1999, STROKE, V30, P2131
Dupuy H., 1984, ASSESSMENT QUALITY L, P170
Goodglass H., 2001, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V3rd
Hamilton BB, 1987, REHABILITATION OUTCO, P137
Hays RD, 1988, MULTITRAIT ANAL PROG
Hunt SM, 1986, MEASURING HLTH STATU
LARSON R, 1978, J GERONTOL, V33, P109
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
MCNEIL MR, 2001, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V1, P55
OKUN MA, 1984, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V19, P111, DOI 10.2190/QGJN-0N81-5957-HAQD
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 2001, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V1, P47
Spilker B, 1996, QUALITY LIFE PHARMAC
Stewart A. L., 1993, MEASURING FUNCTIONIN
VANSWIETEN JC, 1988, STROKE, V19, P604
Watten RG, 1997, EUR J PERSONALITY, V11, P57, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1099-0984(199703)11:1<57::AID-PER276>3.0.CO;2-Q
Williams LS, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1362
World Health Organization, 2001, ICF INT CLASS FUNCT
WORRALL L, 2001, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V1, P51
NR 32
TC 27
Z9 28
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 3
BP 291
EP 304
DI 10.1080/02687030244000680
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 656MD
UT WOS:000181610800005
ER
PT J
AU Renvall, K
Laine, M
Laakso, M
Martin, N
AF Renvall, K
Laine, M
Laakso, M
Martin, N
TI Anomia treatment with contextual priming: A case study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LEXICAL RETRIEVAL; SPEECH PRODUCTION; APHASIA; DEFICIT; REHABILITATION;
REMEDIATION; THERAPY; ANEMIA; ERRORS; MEMORY
AB Background: We present a multiple-baseline single-case treatment study on anomia. The present anomia treatment technique originates from several studies whose aim was to test word-production models in a multiple object naming paradigm by eliciting naming responses in normal (Martin, Weisberg, & Saffran, 1989) and aphasic speakers (Laine Martin, 1996; Martin & Laine, 2000). In addition to evidence in favour of interactive word-production models, the studies of Laine and Martin (1996) and Martin and Lame (2000) have suggested that the procedure, known as contextual priming, might facilitate target naming in anomic patients at least in some naming conditions.
Aims: Our aim was to test further the therapeutic potential of the contextual priming technique with the following questions: (1) Does the treatment technique facilitate the naming of target words? (2) Does a particular treatment condition (semantic, phonological, unrelated) show more facilitation than others? (3) Does the treatment technique facilitate the naming of untrained control items? (4) If there is a facilitatory effect, is it enduring?
Methods & Procedures: A single anomic person with a long-standing anomia was treated with contextual priming. The technique included repeated cycles of spontaneous naming attempts and repetition of target names after the examiner. In the treatment, the target items were presented in sets of five pictures that were related either semantically or phonologically or were unrelated. The treatment was carried out in a multiple-baseline design consisting of 10 baseline measurements, 27 treatment sessions along with 27 within-training measurements, and 1 post-measurement 1.5 months after the treatment.
Outcomes & Results: The anomic patient showed facilitation of the target naming in all contextual conditions. Generalisation to the untrained control items was evident in the semantic context only. The effect of naming facilitation was present up to the last follow-up measurement 1.5 months post-training.
Conclusions: The results indicate that the contextual priming technique can provide long-term facilitation of target naming in anomia and induce some generalisation to untreated items.
C1 Univ Turku, Dept Psychol, Turku 20014, Finland.
Univ Helsinki, FIN-00014 Helsinki, Finland.
Abo Akad Univ, Turku, Finland.
Temple Univ, Sch Med, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
RP Renvall, K (reprint author), Univ Turku, Dept Psychol, Turku 20014, Finland.
CR Basso A, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P45, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2422
Bastiaanse R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P363, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248417
Best W, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P231
Bloom M., 1982, EVALUATING PRACTICE
CARAMAZZA A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P217, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401437
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
Cave CB, 1997, PSYCHOL SCI, V8, P322, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1997.tb00446.x
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
DELL GS, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P604, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.98.4.604
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Hanten G, 2001, BRAIN COGNITION, V45, P164, DOI 10.1006/brcg.2000.1236
Heiman G. W., 1999, RES METHODS PSYCHOL
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
KOHN SE, 1990, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V25, P45
LAINE M, 1998, CATEGORY SPECIFIC OD
LAINE M, 1998, CATEGORY SPECIFIC NA
LAINE M, 1998, CATEGORY SPECIFIC WO
Laine M., 1999, WORDMILL LEXICAL SEA
Laine M., 1997, BOSTONIN NIMENTATEST
Laine M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P283, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0050
Laine M., 1997, BOSTONIN DIAGNOSTINE
LAINE M, 1992, CORTEX, V28, P537
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P122, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.98.1.122
LEVELT WJM, 1983, COGNITION, V14, P41, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90026-4
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P79, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1936
MARTIN N, 1989, J MEM LANG, V28, P462, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(89)90022-3
Martin N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P53
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
MARTIN RC, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P83, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1005
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
Plaut DC, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0004
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1042
Shallice T, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P209, DOI 10.1080/096020100389129
Wambaugh JL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249569
NR 37
TC 28
Z9 28
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 3
BP 305
EP 328
DI 10.1080/02687030244000671
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 656MD
UT WOS:000181610800006
ER
PT J
AU Bastiaanse, R
Edwards, S
Mass, E
Rispens, J
AF Bastiaanse, R
Edwards, S
Mass, E
Rispens, J
TI Assessing comprehension and production of verbs and sentences: The Verb
and Sentence Test (VAST)
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPONTANEOUS SPEECH; APHASIA THERAPY; FLUENT APHASIA; ANEMIC APHASIA;
RETRIEVAL; BROCAS; PARAGRAMMATISMS; AGRAMMATISM; CATEGORIES; NEUROLOGY
AB Background : In this paper we present a new aphasia test for the asessment of comprehension and production of verbs and sentences, the Verb and Sentence Test (VAST). A description is given of selected theories underlying the construction of the test, the diagnostic properties, and how results from the test can be used to motivate therapy.
Methods & Procedures : Information about the construction and standardisation of the VAST is provided. Justification for item selection and results obtained from 80 non-aphasic and 25 aphasic subjects are described. Details are given of the discriminative power of each task, and validity and reliability are discussed.
Results : Data from the subjects demonstrate that the VAST effectively discriminates between the aphasic and non-aphasic population and between different types of verb and sentence deficits. Case studies are given to illustrate these points.
Conclusions : The VAST provides a reliable research and clinical tool for the assessment of comprehension and production of verbs and sentences, and gives clear directions for treatment.
C1 Univ Groningen, Dept Linguist, NL-9700 AS Groningen, Netherlands.
Univ Reading, Reading, Berks, England.
RP Bastiaanse, R (reprint author), Univ Groningen, Dept Linguist, POB 716, NL-9700 AS Groningen, Netherlands.
CR BALOGH J, 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER
BASSO A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P185, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249069
Bastiaanse R., 2000, WERKWOORDEN ZINNENTE
Bastiaanse R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249463
Bastiaanse R, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P165, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1972
Bastiaanse R, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P72
Bastiaanse R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248437
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Bird H, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P187, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00006-1
Breedin SD, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1923
BUTTERWORTH B, 1987, COGNITION, V26, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90012-6
BUTTERWORTH B, 1990, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V5, P115, DOI 10.1080/01690969008402101
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
BYNG S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P315, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248663
CARAMAZZA A, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P575
Druks J., 2000, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
Edwards S, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P560
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Friedmann N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1795
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Grodzinsky Y, 1998, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V10, P281, DOI 10.1162/089892998562708
GRODZINSKY Y, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P27, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1039
Grodzinsky Y, 2000, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X00002399
Haendiges AN, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0011
HAGIWARA H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1041
HUBER W, 1984, ADV NEUROLOGY, V42
JONES EV, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P63
Edwards S, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P99, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250466
Jonkers R., 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER
Jonkers R, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P37
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
KOHN SE, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P57
Linebarger M., 1983, COGNITION, V3, P361
LUKETELA K, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V49, P50
MARSHALL J, 1998, SENTENCE PROCESSING
MARSHALL J, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P517, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248712
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
Miller N, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P683
Mitchum C. C., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
NIEMI J, 1990, FOLIA LINGUIST, V24, P389, DOI 10.1515/flin.1990.24.3-4.389
Orgass B., 1976, DIAGNOSTICA, V22, P141
Schwartz M. F., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P85, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406352
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
SCHWARTZ MF, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P97
SPRINGER L, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P251, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249509
Thompson CK, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P175, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0009
THOMPSON CK, 1997, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V40, P193
WHITWORTH A, 1995, THEMATIC ROLES PRODU
WILLIAMS SE, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P124, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90120-9
ZINGESER LB, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P473, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253270
NR 51
TC 17
Z9 18
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 1
BP 49
EP 73
DI 10.1080/02687030244000455
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 641UF
UT WOS:000180764600003
ER
PT J
AU Bonakdarpour, B
Eftekharzadeh, A
Ashayeri, H
AF Bonakdarpour, B
Eftekharzadeh, A
Ashayeri, H
TI Melodic intonation therapy in Persian aphasic patients
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AUDITORY COMPREHENSION; LESION LOCALIZATION; NONFLUENT APHASIA;
COMPLEXITY; SPEECH; SITES; TIME
AB Background : Melodic intonation therapy (MIT) is a well-known method of aphasia rehabilitation using prosodically based melodic phrases. The literature includes MIT adapted to many languages and efficiently applied to certain groups of non-fluent aphasic patients. However, there has been no report on the efficacy of the method for Persian-speaking patients.
Aims : The objective of this study was primarily to investigate the effects of 15 sessions of MIT treatment (adapted to the Persian language) in selected patients with non-fluent aphasia; primarily on expository speech (phrase length and number of correct content units) and oral expression skills (repetition, responsive naming, and confrontational naming), and secondarily, on auditory comprehension abilities (word discrimination, commands).
Methods and Procedures : Participants in the study included seven right-handed Persian-speaking patients afflicted with chronic (>14 months post-onset) non-fluent aphasia. Based on the rules of Persian prosody, MIT was adapted to the Persian language. Using a pre, post treatment design, each outcome measure was tested twice before and twice after MIT treatment. Changes in the variables not treated were also measured as baselines controlling treatment effects. Outcomes and Results : Using the Wilcoxon signed-rank test, improvements in the selected variables were shown to be statistically significant after the treatment phase and not during the treatment-free phases. Non-target variables remained unchanged after the treatment and throughout the non-treatment phases.
Conclusions : Our study showed that MIT can be adapted for Persian aphasic patients and administered with measurable positive results after 15 sessions of treatment. MIT improved primarily spontaneous speech production, and as minor effects, selected oral expression and auditory comprehension subtests. Therefore MIT might be considered as a method for the rehabilitation of selected non-fluent Persian aphasic patients. More long-term follow-up studies with randomised controlled clinical trials are needed for stronger conclusions.
C1 Univ Tehran Med Sci, Tehran, Iran.
RP Bonakdarpour, B (reprint author), Northwestern Univ, Aphasia & Neurolinguist Lab, Evanston, IL 60208 USA.
EM borna@northwestern.edu
CR FERGUSON JH, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P566
ALBERT ML, 1973, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V29, P130
ALBERT ML, 1974, BRAIN, V97, P373, DOI 10.1093/brain/97.1.373
ALEXANDER MP, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P961, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.4.961
Belin P, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V47, P1504
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P246, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90134-8
Bonakdarpour B., 2000, IRANIAN J MED SCI, V25, P156
DARLEY FL, 1982, APHASIA, P217
EASTERBROOK A, 1982, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V17, P93
FIEZ JA, 1993, J CEREB BLOOD FLO S1, V13, pS504
GARDNER H, 1975, Cortex, V11, P155
HAGHSHENAAS AM, 1990, PHONETICS, P127
HARGROVE PM, 1994, PROSODY MANAGEMENT C, P153
HATFIELD FM, 1972, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V7, P64
SPARKS R, 1974, Cortex, V10, P303
HELM N, 1981, CLIN ASPECTS DYSPHAS, P161
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1991, MANUAL APHASIA THERA, P207
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P39
Helm-Estabrooks N, 1983, COGNITIVE PROCESSING, P229
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1989, MELODIC INTONATION T
KHAANLARI PN, 1978, HIST PERSIAN LANGUAG, P90
Kimelman MDZ, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P212, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2142
LASKY EZ, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P386, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90034-1
LAUGHLIN SA, 1979, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V22, P311
MENN L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248664
NAESER MA, 1978, NEUROLOGY, V28, P545
NAESER MA, 1982, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V39, P2
NAESER MA, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P203
NILIPOUR R, 1993, FARSI APHASIA TEST
NILIPOUR R, 1992, MAJALLE YE ZABAANSHE, V9, P49
Popovici Mariana, 1992, Revue Roumaine de Neurologie et Psychiatrie, V30, P99
Popovici Mariana, 1995, Romanian Journal of Neurology and Psychiatry, V33, P57
Seki K, 1983, No To Shinkei, V35, P1031
SEPANTAA S, 1996, SEASONAL J ACAD PERS, V2, P82
SEPANTAA S, 1972, THESIS TEHRAN U
Sparks R. W., 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P368
SPARKS RW, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P287
VANDERLUGTVANWI.K, 1989, SPRACHE STIMME GEHOE, V13, P142
WEIDNER WE, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P34, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90004-3
NR 39
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 1
BP 75
EP 95
DI 10.1080/02687030244000464
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 641UF
UT WOS:000180764600004
ER
PT J
AU Mackenzie, C
Paton, G
AF Mackenzie, C
Paton, G
TI Resumption of driving with aphasia following stroke
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ABILITY
AB Background: Fitness to drive may be compromised by a variety of medical conditions, including stroke. Driving may legally be resumed 1 month after stroke if clinical recovery is deemed satisfactory. Advice available for patients and medical practitioners is unclear and inconsistent as to whether return to driving is influenced by aphasia. Information on the opinions of medical practitioners and aphasia therapists regarding resumption of driving with aphasia, the return to driving experience of people with aphasia, and their road sign recognition ability, has been largely anecdotal.
Aims: (1) To determine the views and practice of medical practitioners and aphasia therapists on return to driving with aphasia caused by stroke and the experience and effects for aphasic people of resuming or not resuming driving. (2) To assess the road sign recognition ability of aphasic people who had returned to driving or wished to do so in relation to a comparable non-stroke population.
Methods and Procedures: People with aphasia following stroke ( n = 18) who had returned to driving or wished to do so, medical practitioners ( n = 11), and aphasia therapists ( n = 18) were interviewed to determine the patient experience and medical practitioners' and therapists' views on driving with aphasia. Road sign recognition was assessed in the aphasic and a matched non-brain-damaged control group ( n = 18).
Outcome and Results : The majority of medical practitioners and aphasia therapists thought that in some cases driving with aphasia was contra-indicated. Reading comprehension was the communication aspect considered to be most important for driving fitness. The aphasic group was significantly less proficient than the control group in road sign recognition and in understanding written and spoken road sign descriptions. Few aphasic drivers described new driving problems and most now drove less, more carefully, and for reduced distances. Those who had not returned to driving felt social activity and wellbeing had been affected.
Conclusions : Despite difficulties with road sign recognition and related reading and auditory comprehension, people with aphasia are driving, including some whose communication loss is severe. Where relevant, practice in recognition of road signs and written road information might be included in speech and language therapy management.
C1 Univ Stathclyde, Dept Speech & Language Therapy, Glasgow G13 1PP, Lanark, Scotland.
Stobhill Dist Gen Hosp, Glasgow, Lanark, Scotland.
RP Mackenzie, C (reprint author), Univ Stathclyde, Dept Speech & Language Therapy, Southbrae Dr, Glasgow G13 1PP, Lanark, Scotland.
CR *DRIV STAND AG, 1999, HIGHW COD
EARL C, 1995, MED ASPECTS FITNESS
Fisk GD, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P1338, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90307-5
Galski T, 2000, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V15, P895, DOI 10.1097/00001199-200006000-00004
GOLPER LAC, 1980, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V61, P34
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Hartje W, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P161, DOI 10.1080/09602019108520162
Hochstenbach J, 1998, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V20, P503
IRVINE RJM, 1993, BRIT MED J, V307, P1066
Kelly R, 1999, POSTGRAD MED J, V75, P537
LEBRUN Y, 1978, MANAGEMENT APHASIA, P56
LEGHSMITH J, 1986, J ROY SOC MED, V79, P200
Lundqvist A, 2001, BRAIN INJURY, V15, P981, DOI 10.1080/02699050110065637
MATSKO TA, 1975, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V56, P552
Mazer BL, 1998, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V79, P743, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(98)90350-1
Nouri F, 1988, Int Disabil Stud, V10, P101
Nouri F M, 1987, Int Disabil Stud, V9, P110
NOURI FM, 1993, BRIT MED J, V307, P482
NOURI FM, 1994, STROKE DRIVER SCREEN
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
RANNEY TA, 1994, ACCIDENT ANAL PREV, V26, P733, DOI 10.1016/0001-4575(94)90051-5
Raven J. C., 1962, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
SANDERCOCK PAG, 1986, LANCET 1018, P901
*STROK ASS, 1997, DRIV STROK
Warlow CP, 2000, STROKE PRACTICAL GUI
WYKE MA, 1988, APHASIA
NR 26
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 2
BP 107
EP 122
DI 10.1080/02687030244000527
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 641UK
UT WOS:000180765100002
ER
PT J
AU Jacobs, B
Schneider, S
AF Jacobs, B
Schneider, S
TI Analysis of lexical-semantic processing and extensive neurological,
electrophysiological, speech perception, and language evaluation
following a unilateral left hemisphere lesion: Pure word deafness?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BILATERAL LESIONS; AUDITORY AGNOSIA; DISCRIMINATION; COMPREHENSION;
CORTEX
AB Background : Theoretical models of lexical-semantic processing that explicate the relationships between spoken word comprehension, repetition, and writing to dictation are discussed in relation to pure word deafness (PWD). Various theories relative to the neuroanatomical sites and pathophysiological/electrophysiological mechanisms that cause the speech perception deficit seen in PWD are reviewed, as well as case studies that have identified variables that facilitate comprehension of spoken language for individuals with PWD.
Aims : A case study of an individual with an extensive and complex neurological history and a constellation of symptoms suggestive of PWD is presented. Extensive evaluation, including experimental tasks developed to test a theoretical lexical processing model, was undertaken to determine whether this case fitted the criteria for a diagnosis of PWD.
Methods & Procedures : Extensive neurological, electrophysiological, speech perception, and language testing was undertaken to confirm site of lesion, assess neurophysiological processes underlying speech perception, and determine overall language status. Experimental tasks based on a lexical-semantic processing model assessed word and nonword repetition and writing to dictation under two conditions: presentation with and without facial cues.
Outcomes & Results : MRI confirmed a lesion in the participant's left frontoparietal area. Electrophysiological measures indicated his auditory nerve and auditory brainstem functions were intact, middle latency response (MLR) was normal over his right hemisphere and absent over his left hemisphere, and a significant mismatch negativity (MMN) response was elicited by pitch, but not phonetic, differences. Speech perception testing indicated he had difficulty with spectral or spectro-temporal discrimination and combining phonological and semantic information, as well as decreased ability to use formant motion in sentence perception and to perceive speech in noise. Language testing revealed relatively intact spontaneous language production and reading comprehension. The participant's performance on experimental tasks indicated an effect of syllable length and presentation mode for both words and nonwords. That is, as the number of syllables increased, his performance decreased; however, repetition and writing to dictation reflected superior performance with facial cues regardless of word and nonword length when compared to presentation without cues. Relative to the lexical processing model, the participant's performance suggested impoverished phonetic processing in the auditory analysis system.
Conclusions : The results of extensive evaluation revealed a selective impairment in acoustic phonetic perception that is consistent with a diagnosis of PWD. The findings of this study support other studies that have demonstrated that speech perception involves cortical areas other than the temporal lobes.
C1 E Tennessee State Univ, Johnson City, TN 37614 USA.
Ohio State Univ, Columbus, OH 43210 USA.
RP Jacobs, B (reprint author), Western Carolina Univ, Program Commun Disorders, 162 Killian Annex, Cullowhee, NC 28723 USA.
CR AUERBACH SH, 1982, BRAIN, V105, P271, DOI 10.1093/brain/105.2.271
BAUER RM, 1985, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P210
CAPLAN D, 1995, NEUROLOGY, V45, P293
COSLETT HB, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P347
DEBIJL MAO, 1993, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V15, P395
DENES G, 1975, Cortex, V11, P401
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
FRANKLIN S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P189, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248991
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Grafman J, 2000, J COMMUN DISORD, V33, P345, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00030-7
HILLIS AE, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P191, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253442
HO KJ, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P982
HOUSE AS, 1965, J ACOUST SOC AM, V37, P158, DOI 10.1121/1.1909295
KALIKOW DN, 1977, J ACOUST SOC AM, V61, P1337, DOI 10.1121/1.381436
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
MENDEZ MF, 1988, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V51, P1, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.51.1.1
METZLUTZ MN, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P13, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90002-6
Morton J., 1980, COGNITIVE PROCESSES
Muhlnickel W, 1998, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V95, P10340, DOI 10.1073/pnas.95.17.10340
OKADA S, 1963, STUDIA PHNOLOGICA, V3, P58
RAPP BC, 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P187, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50009-9
REMEZ RE, 1981, SCIENCE, V212, P947, DOI 10.1126/science.7233191
ROBERTS M, 1987, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V50, P1708, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.50.12.1708
SAFFRAN EM, UNPUB PHILADELPHIA C
SAFFRAN EM, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P209, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90018-3
SHANKWEI.D, 1967, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V19, P59, DOI 10.1080/14640746708400069
SHINDO M, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P153, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90122-H
TAKAHASHI N, 1992, CORTEX, V28, P295
TANAKA Y, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P381, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.2.381
VONSTOCKERT TR, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P133, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90077-3
Wang E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P442, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2319
Wechsler D., 1987, WESCHLER MEMORY SCAL
WOLBERG SC, 1990, S AFR MED J, V78, P668
ZATORRE RJ, 1992, SCIENCE, V256, P846, DOI 10.1126/science.1589767
NR 35
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 2
BP 123
EP 141
DI 10.1080/02687030244000536
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 641UK
UT WOS:000180765100003
ER
PT J
AU Beausoleil, N
Fortin, R
Le Blanc, B
Joanette, Y
AF Beausoleil, N
Fortin, R
Le Blanc, B
Joanette, Y
TI Unconstrained oral naming performance in right- and
left-hemisphere-damaged individuals: When education overrides the lesion
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID VERBAL-FLUENCY; CEREBRAL HEMISPHERES; RIGHT-HANDERS; TIME-COURSE;
IMPAIRMENT
AB Background : The nature of the contribution of the right hemisphere to the semantic processing of words is still unclear. Moreover, studies that looked at this question using a production oral naming task offered contradictory results, partly because of differences in production criteria used for this task.
Aims : The goal of this study was to investigate the contribution of the right hemisphere to lexico-semantic abilities using an unconstrained oral naming task, looking at both qualitative and qualitative dimensions of the words produced, including a time-course analysis.
Methods and Procedure : A total of 30 right-hemisphere-damaged (RHD), 30 left-hemisphere-damaged (LHD) without aphasia or with only a mild aphasia, and 30 control subjects (NC) were submitted to an unconstrained oral naming task.
Outcome and Results : Results showed that hemisphere-damaged subjects produced fewer words than NC and that LHD produced fewer semantic categories than NC and RHD. Time-course analysis showed that, for all groups, more words were produced at the beginning of the task. Qualitatively, RHD showed a tendency to produce a lower mean degree of prototypicality than NC. Finally, the cluster analysis identified three clusters according to the overall performance, revealing an interaction between education and the presence of a brain lesion.
Conclusion : Altogether, these results indicate that the impairment of the semantic processing of words following a right-hemisphere lesion might be specifically determined by the prototypicality of words, a result that has some convergence with other results in the literature at the discourse or pragmatic levels. However, results also show the existence of an interaction between the ability to look at very mild lexico-semantic impacts of a brain lesion and the influence of degree of education on these abilities. The latter result stresses the importance of a strict control of education in any studies looking at very mild language disorders in brain-lesioned individuals.
C1 Univ Montreal, Inst Geriatrie, Montreal, PQ H3W 1W5, Canada.
RP Joanette, Y (reprint author), Univ Montreal, Inst Geriatrie, 4565 Chemin Queen Mary, Montreal, PQ H3W 1W5, Canada.
CR Anaki D, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P691, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00141-3
Atchley RA, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V13, P389, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.13.3.389
Beeman M, 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION, P373
BEEMAN M, 1994, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V6, P26, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1994.6.1.26
BENTIN S, 1979, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V42, P715, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.42.8.715
BENTON AL, 1968, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V6, P53, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(68)90038-9
BOLLER F, 1968, CORTEX, V4, P247
BOLTER JF, 1983, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V5, P77
BORKOWSK.JG, 1967, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V5, P135, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(67)90015-2
BRUYER R, 1980, Encephale, V6, P287
BURGESS C, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P86, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90056-9
CAPPA SF, 1987, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V9, P263
CAVALLI M, 1981, CORTEX, V17, P545
CHIARELLO C, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P52, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90056-K
CODE C, 1991, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V14, P121, DOI 10.1016/0166-2236(91)90076-7
DIGGS CC, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V30, P130, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90033-2
EISENSON J, 1962, LANG SPEECH, V5, P49
FAURE S, 1994, REV NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P403
GAGNON J, 1994, LINGUISTICHE BERICHT, V6, P33
GROSSMAN M, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V12, P313, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90022-5
HOUGH MS, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P35
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
JOANETTE Y, 1998, LINGUISTIC LEVELS AP, P19
JOANETTE Y, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P54, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90124-1
Joanette Y., 1991, REV NEUROPSYCHOL, V1, P3
JOANETTE Y, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V24, P875, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(86)90087-4
LAINE M, 1987, 3 FINN C NEUR JOH FI
LAINE M, 1988, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V10, P28
Leblanc B, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P42
Monetta L, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V79, P61
OLDFIELD RC, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V9, P97, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(71)90067-4
RAMIER AM, 1970, REV NEUROL, V123, P17
ROSENBERRY T L, 1980, Neurochemistry International, V2, P135, DOI 10.1016/0197-0186(80)90020-0
SABOURIN L, 1988, CANADIAN PSYCHOL, V29, pA2
WARD JH, 1963, J AM STAT ASSOC, V58, P236, DOI 10.2307/2282967
NR 35
TC 8
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 2
BP 143
EP 158
DI 10.1080/02687030244000572
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 641UK
UT WOS:000180765100004
ER
PT J
AU Hough, MS
Downs, CR
Cranford, J
Givens, G
AF Hough, MS
Downs, CR
Cranford, J
Givens, G
TI Measures of auditory processing in aphasia: Behavioural and
electrophysiological analysis
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
ID DICHOTIC-LISTENING PERFORMANCE; SPEECH-DISCRIMINATION;
EVOKED-POTENTIALS; AGE-DIFFERENCES; ALLOCATION; ATTENTION; FREQUENCY;
STIMULI; LESIONS; LOCALIZATION
AB Background: Lesions resulting in aphasia frequently involve areas associated with auditory processing. Investigations using psychoacoustics and/or electrophysiology to examine the auditory processing abilities of aphasic as well as non-brain-damaged individuals have revealed the influence of several variables on findings, including age, type of stimuli, task difficulty/instructions, response modality, and lesion site/size. It is unclear whether both methods of testing are examining similar components of auditory processing and furthermore, if the variables identified as affecting findings for the two testing methodologies influence results in a similar manner. An electrophysiological approach to auditory processing may assist in the objective evaluation of patients who have difficulty consistently providing accurate responses.
Aims: The purpose of this investigation was to explore behavioural and electrophysiological CAP abilities of several aphasic individuals using a set of divided attention tasks and to investigate whether electrophysiological results were congruent with those obtained from behavioural testing.
Methods and Procedures: Participants were two females and five males, age range 33-73, all suffering left cerebrovascular accidents, resulting in aphasia. Experimental testing included: speech-language evaluation via administration of the Western Aphasia Battery and the Token Test ; hearing evaluation using routine pure-tone audiometry, speech audiometry, and middle ear measurements; behavioural central auditory processing assessment using Pitch Pattern Sequence and Dichotic Digits ; and electrophysiology testing, consisting of evaluation of late auditory evoked potentials (N100, P200, P300) with and without distraction using an oddball paradigm.
Outcomes and Results: Results are presented individually for each patient. Overall, patients showed unique results relative to ear advantage pattern and congruence between electrophysiological and behavioural testing. One patient showed inconclusive findings due to a hearing loss; one patient showed no clear ear advantage pattern on either behavioural or electrophysiological testing; one patient showed no ear advantage on dichotic testing but showed a clear pattern on electrophysiology; and one patient showed incongruence in ear advantage pattern between electrophysiological and behavioural testing. Three patients showed congruent ear advantage patterns across both behavioural and electrophysiological testing; however, one showed a right ear advantage and two showed a left ear advantage.
Conclusions: Based on these findings, it is evident that the direct and/or statistical relationship between behavioural CAP and electrophysiological findings requires more in-depth exploration. The testing of additional patients is imperative prior to making decisions regarding the utility and value of such a statistical approach. Thus, the use of these and other CAP measures bears additional investigation as clinical and experimental tools in evaluating auditory processing capabilities of the aphasic patient.
C1 E Carolina Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
RP Hough, MS (reprint author), E Carolina Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
CR Alden JD, 1997, NEUROPSY NEUROPSY BE, V10, P239
Arvedson J. C., 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P188
*ASHA, 1995, CENTR AUD PROC CURR
AUTHER LL, 1998, 1 INT C MISM NEG ITS
BACKS RW, 1987, CURRENT TRENDS EVENT, V40, P163
BOUMA A, 1988, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V10, P709, DOI 10.1080/01688638808402809
BROUGHTON R, 1988, SLEEP 88, P6
BROWN WS, 1983, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V55, P277, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(83)90205-5
Bryden M. P., 1982, LATERALITY FUNCTIONA
Bryden M. P., 1988, HDB DICHOTIC LISTENI, P1
BUTCHER J, 1983, THESIS U KANSAS
BUTCHNER J, 1994, PRINCIPLES APPL AUDI, P219
Carpenter M, 2002, J CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V19, P55, DOI 10.1097/00004691-200201000-00007
CLARK LE, 1973, J GERONTOL, V28, P173
DERENZI E, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P41
Fisher A L, 2000, J Am Acad Audiol, V11, P36
GOODIN DS, 1978, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V44, P447, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(78)90029-9
HAGOORT P, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P629
Hall J, 1992, HDB AUDITORY EVOKED
Hiscock M, 1999, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V21, P265
Hiscock M, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V13, P404, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.13.3.404
Hugdahl K., 1988, HDB DICHOTIC LISTENI
HYDE ML, 1994, PRINCIPLES APPL AUDI, P179
Hymel M R, 1998, J Am Acad Audiol, V9, P385
ILVONEN T, 1998, 1 INT C MISM NEG ITS
JACOBSON JT, 1994, PRINCIPLES APPL AUDI, P3
JERGER J, 1995, EAR HEARING, V16, P482, DOI 10.1097/00003446-199510000-00005
Kertesz A, 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY TE
KIMURA D, 1961, CAN J PSYCHOLOGY, V15, P166, DOI 10.1037/h0083219
KNIGHT RT, 1989, BRAIN RES, V502, P109, DOI 10.1016/0006-8993(89)90466-6
KNIGHT RT, 1980, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V50, P112, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(80)90328-4
KRAUS N, 1995, EAR HEARING, V16, P19, DOI 10.1097/00003446-199502000-00003
MCPHERSON D, 1995, LATE POTENTIALS AUDI
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
MUSIEK FE, 1987, AUDIOLOGY, V26, P79
Musiek F E, 1992, J Am Acad Audiol, V3, P5
MUSIEK FE, 1983, EAR HEARING, V4, P79, DOI 10.1097/00003446-198303000-00002
Musiek F E, 1994, J Am Acad Audiol, V5, P265
NAATANEN R, 1987, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V24, P375, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1987.tb00311.x
NICCUM N, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P289, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90106-9
NICCUM N, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P42
NICCUM N, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P526
OSCARBERMAN M, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P345, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80075-7
Petit J. M., 1979, BRAIN LANG, V7, P191, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90016-6
PINHEIRO ML, 1985, ASSESSMENT CENTRAL A
POLICH J, 1987, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V68, P311, DOI 10.1016/0168-5597(87)90052-9
POLICH J, 1989, J CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V6, P277, DOI 10.1097/00004691-198907000-00003
POLLOCK VE, 1992, J GERONTOL, V47, P88
POLLOCK VE, 1989, INT J NEUROSCI, V45, P127, DOI 10.3109/00207458908986225
POOL KD, 1989, EAR HEARING, V10, P144, DOI 10.1097/00003446-198906000-00002
ROTHENBERG A, 1982, ARCH PSYCHIAT NERVEN, V231, P155, DOI 10.1007/BF00343837
SELINGER M, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P377, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90074-6
SIDTIS JJ, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90135-6
Sparks R, 1970, Cortex, V6, P249
Squires KC, 1983, SEMIN HEAR, V4, P415, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1094203
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
WOOD CC, 1982, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V54, P25, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(82)90228-0
WOODS DL, 1993, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V1, P227, DOI 10.1016/0926-6410(93)90007-R
NR 58
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 2
BP 159
EP 172
DI 10.1080/02687030244000581
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 641UK
UT WOS:000180765100005
ER
PT J
AU Coelho, C
Flewellyn, L
AF Coelho, C
Flewellyn, L
TI Longitudinal assessment of coherence in an adult with fluent aphasia: A
follow-up study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Background: It has been suggested that individuals with fluent aphasia demonstrate microlinguistic impairments and relatively preserved macrolinguistic abilities (Glosser & Deser, 1990). However, results of a previous study in which measures of sentence production, intersentential cohesion, and story grammar were assessed longitudinally over a period of 12 months did not support this contention (Coelho, Liles, Duffy, Clarkson, & Elia, 1994). In that investigation, as the individual with fluent aphasia recovered severity of aphasia decreased and microlinguistic abilities improved, but macrolinguistic skills remained quite limited.
Aims: The present study sought to clarify the discrepancy between these two studies by re-analysing the narrative samples collected by Coelho et al. for adequacy of coherence in order for similar macrolinguistic measures to be compared across studies.
Methods & Procedures: Two types of story narratives were elicited from a 55-year-old male with mild-moderate anomic aphasia on a monthly basis over a 12-month period. Story narratives were analysed for local and global coherence, and coherence ratings were compared to the mean performance of three matched non-brain-injured participants.
Outcomes & Results: Neither local or global coherence improved appreciably over the 12-month period and both remained moderately impaired, inspite of gains noted in microlinguistic abilities. The individual with fluent aphasia also consistently demonstrated greater difficulties with global than local coherence.
Conclusions: This pattern of impaired macrolinguistic abilities, is consistent with that of individuals with Alzheimer's disease and closed head injuries, and suggests that difficulty with discourse organisation may result from focal as well as diffuse brain pathology. These findings suggest the importance of expanding assessment procedures for individuals with aphasia, particularly mild aphasia, to include macrolinguistic dimensions of discourse organisation such as the analysis of coherence and story grammar-and further, that such macrolinguistic abilities need to addressed specifically in language therapy.
C1 Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
Hosp Special Care, New Britain, CT USA.
RP Coelho, C (reprint author), Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, Unit 1085, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
CR COELHO CA, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P145
Deser T., 1990, BRAIN LANG, V40, P67
Glosser G., 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
HOLLINGSHEAD AB, 1972, UNPUB 4 FACTOR INDEX
HUNT KW, 1970, MONOGRAPHS SOC RES C, V134
PORCH BE, 1984, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Ulatowska H. K., 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P180
Van Leer E, 1999, J COMMUN DISORD, V32, P327, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(99)00008-8
WINTER P, 1976, BEAR FLY
NR 10
TC 15
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 2
BP 173
EP 182
DI 10.1080/02687030244000590
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 641UK
UT WOS:000180765100006
ER
PT J
AU Hough, MS
Barrow, I
AF Hough, MS
Barrow, I
TI Descriptive discourse abilities of traumatic brain-injured adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLOSED HEAD-INJURY; NARRATIVE DISCOURSE; ADOLESCENTS; CHILDREN; COHESION
AB Background: Studies examining the discourse abilities of adults who have suffered traumatic brain injuries (TBI) have revealed that although these individuals display relatively normal language skills on traditional aphasia tests, they demonstrate varying levels of impairment in the coherence, cohesion, and informational content of their extended verbal output. Discourse studies with the TBI population have varied relative to the type of discourse task as well as the level or approach of analysis. One approach to discourse analysis has involved examination of the cognitive functions distinguishing macrostructural and microstructural discourse processing. Macrostructural analyses are global analyses focused at the level of the entire text, dealing with large supra-sentential discourse units. Microstructural analyses are concerned with smaller structural elements in a text and the relations between these elements; the focus is at the local level of the word or sentence.
Aims: In the current investigation, three analyses were undertaken to examine descriptive discourse production of five high-functioning TBI adults (three males, two females) who had suffered brain injury as the result of motor vehicle accidents. The first analysis, thematic coherence, is a macrostructural analysis, whereas the other two analyses, cohesion and lexical errors, are microstructural analyses.
Methods & Procedures: Two topics, family description and work experience, were used to elicit discourse; performance was compared between the language samples. Each participant's performance was reviewed individually and findings were compared to the mean performance of a group of 15 normal functioning young adults. For thematic coherence, global and local coherence were evaluated and scored separately on different 5-point rating scales. Cohesion analysis involved identification of three types of cohesive ties (closed-class appropriate, open-class appropriate, incomplete cohesion) with scores computed as proportions of total spoken words. Lexical error production included identification of verbal paraphasias and indefinite terms, also computed as proportions of total words spoken.
Outcomes & Results: The results revealed that mean coherence ratings for each TBI participant were consistently lower than those observed for the control group, regardless of coherence type (local, global) or discourse topic (family, work). Furthermore, the TBI participants demonstrated greater difficulty with global than local coherence and showed more performance variability among participants in global as compared to local coherence. However, all five TBI adults displayed minimal deficits in lexical production and cohesion.
Conclusions: Overall, the findings revealed dissociation of microlinguistic and macrolinguistic cognitive functions in the TBI participants, thus providing support for the distinction between and independent organisation of microstructural and macrostructural discourse components.
C1 E Carolina Univ, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
Hampton Univ, Hampton, VA 23668 USA.
RP Hough, MS (reprint author), E Carolina Univ, Greenville, NC 27858 USA.
CR ASHA, 1997, GUID AUD SCREEN
CHAPMAN SB, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P42, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90020-F
Cherney L. R., 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU
Coelho CA, 1991, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V6, P92, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199106000-00011
COELHO CA, 1991, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V72, P465
COELHO CA, 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL
Deser T., 1990, BRAIN LANG, V40, P67
EHRLICH JS, 1988, J COMMUN DISORD, V21, P1, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(88)90006-8
Fayol M., 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE
Glosser G., 1992, J CLIN EXPT NEUROPSY, V14, P40
Glosser G., 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE
GLOSSER G, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P115
Glosser G., 1992, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V47, P266
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
HAGEN C, 1984, LANGUAGE DISORDERS A
HAGEN C, 1979, INTERVENTION STRATEG
Halliday M. A. K., 1989, LANGUAGE CONTEXT TEX
Halliday Michael, 1976, COHESION ENGLISH
HODGES T, 1998, THESIS CAROLINA U
HARTLEY L L, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P267, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008097
Loban W. D., 1963, LANGUAGE ELEMENTARY
MCDONALD S, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P28, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1003
MENTIS M, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P88
Myers P. S., 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
PARSONS CL, 1989, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V17, P37
PIERCE RS, 1990, COGNITIVE LANGUAGE A
MENTIS M, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P583
Snow P, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P947, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249421
Van Dijk T. A., 1983, STRATEGIES DISCOURSE
Van Leer E, 1999, J COMMUN DISORD, V32, P327, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(99)00008-8
YLVISAKER M, 1989, TOP LANG DISORD, V9, P34
YLVISAKER M, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
NR 32
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PY 2003
VL 17
IS 2
BP 183
EP 191
DI 10.1080/02687030244000608
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 641UK
UT WOS:000180765100007
ER
PT J
AU Walker, JP
Daigle, T
Buzzard, M
AF Walker, JP
Daigle, T
Buzzard, M
TI Hemispheric specialisation in processing prosodic structures: Revisited
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BRAIN-DAMAGED ADULTS; DISCOURSE COMPREHENSION; INTONATION; PERCEPTION;
CUES; SUPPRESSION; RESOLUTION; CONTOURS; LANGUAGE; ABILITY
AB Background: Research addressing prosodic deficits in brain-damaged populations has concentrated on the specialised capabilities of the right and the left cerebral hemispheres in processing the global characteristics of prosody. This focus has been of interest in that the fundamental frequency (F0), duration and intensity acoustic characteristics within a prosodic structure can convey different linguistic and nonlinguistic information. Much of the research investigating this interesting phenomenon has produced conflicting results. As such, different theories have been proposed in an attempt to provide plausible explanations of the conflicting findings regarding hemispheric specialisation in processing prosodic structures.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to examine one of the theories, the functional lateralisation theory, through four experiments that altered the linguistic and nonlinguistic functions across a range of prosodic structures.
Methods & Procedures: Three groups of subjects participated in each of the four experiments: (1) eight subjects with LHD, (2) eight subjects with RHD, and (3) eight control subjects. The first experiment addressed the extent to which the processing of lexical stress differences would be lateralised to the left or right hemisphere by requiring listeners to determine the meanings and grammatical assignments of two-syllable words conveyed through stressed or unstressed syllables. In another linguistic condition, the second experiment placed demands on syntactic parsing operations by requiring listeners to parse syntactically ambiguous sentences which were disambiguated through the perception of prosodic boundaries located at syntactic junctures. A third linguistic condition required listeners to determine the categorical assignment of a speaker's intention of making a statement or asking a question conveyed through the prosodic structures. The fourth experiment was designed to determine hemispheric lateralisation in processing nonlinguistic prosodic structures. In this experiment, listeners were required to determine the emotional state of a speaker conveyed through the prosodic structures in sentences that contained semantic information which was either congruent or incongruent with the emotional content of the prosodic structures.
Results: When subjects were asked to identify lexical stress differences (Experiment 1), syntactically ambiguous sentences (Experiment 2), and questions and statements (Experiment 3) conveyed through prosody, the LHD group demonstrated a significantly poorer performance than the control and RHD groups. When asked to identify emotions conveyed through prosody (Experiment 4), the RHD group demonstrated a significantly poorer performance than the control and LHD groups.
Conclusion: These findings support the functional lateralisation theory that proposes a left hemisphere dominance for processing linguistic prosodic structures and a right hemisphere dominance for processing nonlinguistic prosodic structures.
C1 Univ Maine, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Orono, ME 04469 USA.
RP Walker, JP (reprint author), Univ Maine, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 339 Dunn Hall, Orono, ME 04469 USA.
CR BAUM S, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V14, P31
Baum SR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P581
Baum SR, 1997, LANG SPEECH, V40, P313
BEHRENS SJ, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P181, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90014-X
BEHRENS SJ, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V26, P332, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90047-1
BERNDT RS, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P65, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90125-3
BLONDER LX, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1115, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.3.1115
BOROD JC, 1990, J COMMUN DISORD, V23, P247, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(90)90003-H
Burns MS, 1985, RIC EVALUATION COMMU
BLUMSTEIN S, 1974, Cortex, V10, P146
DIVENYI PL, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P290, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90020-5
EMMOREY KD, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V30, P305, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90105-2
HEILMAN KM, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P917
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LACKNER JR, 1973, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V11, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(73)90027-4
MOSCICKI EK, 1985, EAR HEARING, V6, P184, DOI 10.1097/00003446-198507000-00003
MUSIEK FE, 1984, EPILEPSY CORPUS CALL
Pell MD, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P701, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00008-6
Pell MD, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P80, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1638
Pell MD, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P195, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1736
Perkins JM, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248416
ROBIN DA, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P539, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90161-9
SHAPIRO LP, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P240, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1047
TOMPKING CA, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P527
Tompkins CA, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P62
TOMPKINS CA, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P185, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90130-0
Tompkins CA, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P505, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248487
van Lancker D., 1980, INT J HUMAN COMMUNIC, V13, P227
VANLANCKER D, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P963
Walker JP, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P169, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2454
WEINTRAUB S, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P742
WENIGER D, 1984, ADV NEUROLOGY, V42
NR 32
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 12
BP 1155
EP 1172
DI 10.1080/02687030244000392
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611YF
UT WOS:000179045000002
ER
PT J
AU Gahl, S
AF Gahl, S
TI Lexical biases in aphasic sentence comprehension: An experimental and
corpus linguistic study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BROCAS APHASICS; VERB RETRIEVAL; AUTOMATIC ACCESS; AGRAMMATISM;
CONSTRAINTS; COMPLEXITY; PREFERENCE; DEFICIT; TIME; TRANSITIVITY
AB Background: This study investigates the role of lexical information in normal and aphasic sentence comprehension. Effects of verb biases in normal comprehension have been well documented in previous studies (e. g., Spivey-Knowlton Sedivy, 1995; Trueswell, Tanenhaus, & Kello, 1993), but their role in aphasic language processing has largely been ignored (with the exceptions of Menn et al., 1998, and Russo, Peach, & Shapiro, 1998).
Aims: The aim of the study is to test the lexical bias hypothesis, i.e., the hypothesis that sentence comprehension is influenced by lexical biases in aphasic listeners, as well as in normals.
Method & Procedures: Using a sentence plausibility judgement task, we probe for sensitivity to verb transitivity bias, i.e., the likelihood, as estimated from corpus counts, that a verb will be transitive, rather than intransitive. Five normal controls and eighteen participants with aphasia (six with Broca's aphasia, four with Wernicke's aphasia, two with conduction aphasia, and six with anomic aphasia) are included in the study. Based on the lexical bias hypothesis, we predicted that participants would make more errors in sentences with a mismatch of verb bias and syntactic structure, such as a transitive sentence containing a verb with intransitive bias.
Outcomes & Results: Both the group of normal controls and the mixed group of aphasic patients make significantly more errors on sentences in which there is a mismatch between verb bias and syntactic structure, as predicted by the lexical bias hypothesis. Specifically, patients with fluent aphasia types, particularly anomic aphasia, show a sensitivity to verb bias, contrary to earlier findings.
Conclusions: These results are consistent with the view that lexical factors, not purely syntactic ones, are to blame for many previously observed patterns in aphasic comprehension. The results are further consistent with the view that many aphasic errors differ not qualitatively but quantitatively from normal comprehension errors.
C1 Harvard Univ, Dept Linguist, Cambridge, MA 02138 USA.
RP Gahl, S (reprint author), Univ Illinois, Beckman Inst, 2143, Urbana, IL 61801 USA.
CR BATES E, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P19, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90116-7
Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITION, V58, P289, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00682-6
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P197, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1799
Berndt RS, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P242, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2130
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
BERNDT RS, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P597, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90177-3
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Blumstein SE, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P149, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1839
BOCK JK, 1986, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V18, P355, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(86)90004-6
Boland JE, 1995, J MEM LANG, V34, P774, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1995.1034
CAPLAN D, 1985, COGNITION, V21, P117, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(85)90048-4
CARAMAZZA A, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P572, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90048-1
Clifton C., 1996, CONSTRUAL
CLIFTON C, 1984, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V23, P696, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(84)90426-2
COHEN J, 1993, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V25, P257, DOI 10.3758/BF03204507
DAMASIO AR, 1993, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V90, P4957, DOI 10.1073/pnas.90.11.4957
DAVIS GA, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V32, P143
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
FERREIRA F, 2002, UNPUB MISINTERPRETAT
Ferreira F, 2002, CURR DIR PSYCHOL SCI, V11, P11, DOI 10.1111/1467-8721.00158
FERREIRA F, 1990, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V16, P555, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.16.4.555
FRAZIER L, 1995, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V24, P437, DOI 10.1007/BF02143161
FRIEDERICI AD, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P279, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248924
GAHL S, 1998, P 1998 COLING ACL C, V1, P428
GAHL S, 1998, P 8 EURALEX INT C LI, V2, P445
GAHL S, 2002, BRAIN COGNITION
GAHL S, 2000, THESIS UC BERKELEY
Garnsey SM, 1997, J MEM LANG, V37, P58, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1997.2512
GERRATT BR, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V30, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90031-9
Givon Talmy, 1979, UNDERSTANDING GRAMMA
Goodglass H., 1968, DEV APPL PSYCHOLINGU, P177
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
GOTTFRIED M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P37
GRISHMAN R, 1994, COL 1994 KYOT
HAARMANN HJ, 1991, COGNITIVE SCI, V15, P49, DOI 10.1207/s15516709cog1501_2
HAARMANN HJ, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P389
HAARMANN HJ, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P493, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1028
Hagoort P, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P287, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1849
HAGOORT P, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P189, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1043
Hartsuiker RJ, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P221, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1905
JONES EV, 1984, ADV NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V42
Jonkers R, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P33
JONKERS R, 1998, GRONINGEN DISSERTATI, V25
Jonkers R, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P37
KEGL J, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P151, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1044
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kim M, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P30
KOHN SE, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P57
LALAMI L, 1997, THESIS U SO CALIFORN
MacDonald MC, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P121, DOI 10.1080/016909697386826
MACDONALD MC, 1994, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V9, P157, DOI 10.1080/01690969408402115
Marin JW, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P174
MCELREE B, 1993, J MEM LANG, V32, P536, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1993.1028
Menn L., 1985, AGRAMMATISM, P1
Menn L, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P183, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1838
Menn L, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V71, P157, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2239
MEYERS A, 1995, COMLEX SYNTAX 2 0 MA
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
MICELI G, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P351, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248937
MILBERG W, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P279, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90139-3
Mitchell D. C., 1989, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V4, P123, DOI 10.1080/01690968908406366
MITCHELL DC, 1995, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V24, P469, DOI 10.1007/BF02143162
Mitchell P, 1993, COMPUTATIONAL LINGUI, V19, P313
MIYAKE A, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P671, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251989
OBLER LK, 1991, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V12, P433, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400005865
ROLAND D, 2000, P WORKSH COMP CORP H, P28, DOI 10.3115/1604683.1604691
Russo KD, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P537, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249556
SCHWARTZ MF, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P249, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90055-3
SHAPIRO LP, 1990, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
SHAPIRO LP, 1993, J MEM LANG, V32, P96, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1993.1006
SILVER LS, 1992, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V21, P317, DOI 10.1007/BF01067919
SPIVEYKNOWLTON M, 1995, COGNITION, V55, P227, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)00647-4
Stevenson S, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P349
SWAAB T, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P159
Swaab T, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P39, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.1.39
Swinney D, 1989, J Cogn Neurosci, V1, P25, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1989.1.1.25
TRUESWELL JC, 1993, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V19, P528, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.19.3.528
TYLER LK, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P131, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1007
TYLER LK, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P1001, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90049-3
WILLIAMS SE, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P124, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90120-9
NR 80
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 12
BP 1173
EP 1198
DI 10.1080/02687030244000428
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611YF
UT WOS:000179045000003
ER
PT J
AU Madden, ML
Oelschlaeger, ML
AF Madden, ML
Oelschlaeger, ML
TI The conversational value of laughter for a person with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID QUALITATIVE METHODS; WORD; STRATEGIES; REPAIR
AB Background: In clinical aphasiology, laughter has been mentioned as an important ingredient in treatment but few studies have directly investigated its contribution.
Aims: To increase our understanding, we designed this study to specifically investigate laughter as a conversational resource.
Methods & Procedures: A naturally occurring conversation was videotaped and subsequently reviewed to identify conversational segments that included the laughter of a person with aphasia. Using conversational analysis, 47 laughter segments were coded and categorised to reveal similarities and differences in their sequential organisation.
Outcomes & Results: Results showed four ways in which laughter was used to achieve conversational goals: as a turn-taking cue, a display of understanding, an orienting cue, and as instruction to hear. Descriptive comparison of laughter uses in aphasic and nonaphasic conversation showed similarities in organisational structure of laughter segments but differences in conversational context. Laughter was frequently associated with "trouble spots'' in this study: no report of laughter associated with "trouble spots'' was noted in nonaphasic literature.
Conclusions: From a theoretical perspective, these results, in concert with those from previous studies of conversation, provide evidence that a nonlinguistic behaviour-laughter-contributes to the re-establishment of social interaction and meaning-making despite linguistic deficits. From a clinical perspective, laughter may be recognised as a viable conversational strategy, allowing for increased communicative access that positively impacts perceptions of competence and psychosocial well-being of persons with aphasia.
C1 No Arizona Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Flagstaff, AZ 86011 USA.
Univ Louisiana, Lafayette, LA USA.
RP Oelschlaeger, ML (reprint author), No Arizona Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, POB 15045, Flagstaff, AZ 86011 USA.
CR Atkinson J. M., 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC
BEESON P, 1994, APHASIA GROUPS APPRO
BERK LS, 1989, AM J MED SCI, V298, P390, DOI 10.1097/00000441-198912000-00006
COCHRANE M, 1983, TREATING LANGAUGE DI, P143
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P651
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P667
FERGUSON A, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P143, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248647
FERGUSON A, 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P299
GLENN P, 1998, THESIS U TEXAS AUSTI
Glenn P.J., 1991, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V25, P139
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
GOODWIN MH, 1986, SEMIOTICA, V62, P51
Holland A, 1996, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P27
Jefferson G., 1985, HDB DISCOURSE ANAL, VIII, P25
Jefferson G, 1987, TALK SOCIAL ORG, P152
Jefferson G, 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC, P346
Jefferson G, 1987, TALK SOCIAL ORG, P86
Jefferson Gail, 1979, EVERYDAY LANGUAGE ST, P79
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KLIPPI A, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P373, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248538
Lindsay J, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P305
Lyon J, 1992, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V1, P7
Lyon JG, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P689, DOI 10.1080/026870399401795
Norris MR, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P391, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00026-8
O'Donnell-Trujillo N., 1983, W J SPEECH COMMUNICA, V47, P175
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V8, P62
Oelschlaeger ML, 2000, J COMMUN DISORD, V33, P205, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(00)00019-8
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P459, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985238
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P971, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249464
PACHE I, 1992, WORKING PAPERS LANGU, V2, P87
POTTER RE, 1983, J COMMUN DISORD, V16, P41, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(83)90025-4
SACKS H, 1992, LECT CONSERVATION, V1
Sacks H., 1992, LECT CONSERVATION, VII
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
Sacks H., 1974, EXPLORATIONS ETHNOGR, P337
SCHEGLOF.EA, 1968, AM ANTHROPOL, V70, P1075, DOI 10.1525/aa.1968.70.6.02a00030
SCHLEGLOFF EA, 1977, LANGUAGA, V53, P361
Simmons-Mackie N. N., 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P37
SimmonsMackie NN, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P761, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250455
STEWART S, 1997, ANN M C LING LIT DEN
NR 41
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 12
BP 1199
EP 1212
DI 10.1080/02687030244000437
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611YF
UT WOS:000179045000004
ER
PT J
AU Whelan, BM
Murdoch, BE
Theodoros, DG
AF Whelan, BM
Murdoch, BE
Theodoros, DG
TI A role for the dominant thalamus in language? A linguistic comparison of
two cases subsequent to unilateral thalamotomy procedures in the
dominant and non-dominant hemispheres
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID INTERACTIVE ACTIVATION MODEL; VENTROLATERAL THALAMOTOMY; STEREOTAXIC
THALAMOTOMY; PARKINSONS-DISEASE; STIMULATION; ALZHEIMERS; PERCEPTION;
DEMENTIA; APHASIA; MEMORY
AB Background: Thalamotomy has been reported to be successful in ameliorating the motor symptoms of tremor and/or rigidity in people with Parkinson's disease (PD), emphasising the bona fide contribution of this subcortical nucleus to the neural circuitry subserving motor function. Despite evidence of parallel yet segregated associative and motor cortico-subcortical-cortical circuits, comparatively few studies have investigated the effects of this procedure on cognitive functions. In particular, research pertaining to the impact of thalamotomy on linguistic processes is fundamentally lacking.
Aims: The purpose of this research was to investigate the effects of thalamotomy in the language dominant and non-dominant hemispheres on linguistic functioning, relative to operative theoretical models of subcortical participation in language. This paper compares the linguistic profiles of two males with PD, aged 75 years (10 years of formal education) and 62 years (22 years of formal education), subsequent to unilateral thalamotomy procedures within the language dominant and non-dominant hemispheres, respectively.
Methods & Procedures: Comprehensive linguistic profiles comprising general and high-level linguistic abilities in addition to on-line semantic processing skills were compiled up to 1 month prior to surgery and 3 months post-operatively, within perceived "on'' periods (i.e., when optimally medicated). Pre- and post-operative language performances were compared within-subjects to a group of 16 non-surgical Parkinson's controls (NSPD) and a group of 16 non-neurologically impaired adults (NC).
Outcomes & Results: The findings of this research suggest a laterality effect with regard to the contribution of the thalamus to high-level linguistic abilities and, potentially, the temporal processing of semantic information. This outcome supports the application of high-level linguistic assessments and measures of semantic processing proficiency to the clinical management of individuals with dominant thalamic lesions.
Conclusions: The results reported lend support to contemporary theories of dominant thalamic participation in language, serving to further elucidate our current understanding of the role of subcortical structures in mediating linguistic processes, relevant to cortical hemispheric dominance.
C1 Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
Mater Private Hosp, Brisbane, Australia.
RP Whelan, BM (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RI Theodoros, Deborah/F-1362-2010; Murdoch, Bruce/C-1397-2012
CR ALMGREN PE, 1969, SCAND J PSYCHOL, V10, P243, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9450.1969.tb00033.x
ALMGREN PE, 1972, CONFIN NEUROL, V34, P162
Azuma T, 1997, J MEM LANG, V36, P484, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1997.2502
Chenery HJ, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P423, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248423
CROSSON B, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P257, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90085-9
Crosson Bruce A., 1992, SUBCORTICAL FUNCTION
DARLEY FL, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P65, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80054-X
Fukuda M, 2000, STEREOT FUNCT NEUROS, V74, P11, DOI 10.1159/000056458
HOEHN MM, 1967, NEUROLOGY, V17, P427
Hugdahl K, 2000, BRAIN COGNITION, V42, P231, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1999.1102
HUGDAHL K, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90001-W
Huisingh R., 1990, WORD TEST REVISED TE
JACOBS AM, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V18, P1174, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.18.4.1174
Johnson MD, 2000, BRAIN COGNITION, V42, P218, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1999.1101
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
LaBarge E, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V6, P77, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.6.1.77
LEDORZE G, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P381
LundJohansen M, 1996, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V60, P564, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.60.5.564
Mattis S., 1988, DEMENTIA RATING SCAL
MCCLELLAND JL, 1981, PSYCHOL REV, V88, P375, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.88.5.375
MCCLELLAND JL, 1985, J EXPT PSYCHOL GEN, V114, P15
MURDOCH BE, 1996, EVALUATING THEORIES, P137
Nadeau SE, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P355, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1707
OJEMANN G, 1975, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V38, P408, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.38.4.408-a
Ojemann G. A., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V1, P103
RIKLAN M, 1969, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V28, P723
ROSSITCH E, 1988, SURG NEUROL, V29, P11, DOI 10.1016/0090-3019(88)90116-4
RUBENSTE.H, 1970, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V9, P487, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(70)80091-3
SAMARA K, 1969, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V12, P510
SMITH SR, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P314, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90068-0
Spreen O., 1969, NEUROSENSORY CTR COM
TROSTER AI, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P500, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90032-1
Troster AI, 2000, BRAIN COGNITION, V42, P173, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1999.1098
VANORDEN GC, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V20, P1269, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.20.6.1269
VILKKI J, 1974, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V12, P11, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(74)90022-0
VILKKI J, 1976, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V14, P67, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(76)90008-7
Wallesch C. W., 1988, APHASIA
WARRINGTON EK, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P829, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.3.829
Wester K, 1997, STEREOT FUNCT NEUROS, V69, P80, DOI 10.1159/000099856
Wiig E. H., 1992, TEST WORD KNOWLEDGE
WIIG EH, 1974, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V38, P171
Wiig EH, 1989, TEST LANGUAGE COMPET
NR 42
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 12
BP 1213
EP 1226
DI 10.1080/02687030244000446
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611YF
UT WOS:000179045000005
ER
PT J
AU Hickin, J
Best, W
Herbert, R
Howard, D
Osborne, F
AF Hickin, J
Best, W
Herbert, R
Howard, D
Osborne, F
TI Phonological therapy for word-finding difficulties: A re-evaluation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID GENERATED PHONEMIC CUES; APHASIA; RETRIEVAL; FACILITATION; DEFICITS;
ANEMIA; LANGUAGE; SPEECH; DAMAGE
AB Background: Treatments for word-finding difficulties in aphasia using semantic techniques have been shown to be effective (e. g., Marshall, Pound, White-Thomson, & Pring, 1990). The evidence with regard to phonological treatment is more equivocal, however, with some studies reporting only short-term improvement in word retrieval (e. g., Howard, Patterson, Franklin, Orchard-Lisle, & Morton, 1985a) and other studies reporting lasting effects (e. g., Miceli, Amitrano, Capasso, & Caramazza, 1996). There is also little in the literature on the use of orthographic cues in treatment (Howard & Harding, 1998). Additionally, whereas several studies have reported the results of using cues in facilitation of word-finding difficulties (e. g., Patterson, Purrell, & Morton, 1983), none so far has attempted to relate response to facilitation and response to treatment using similar techniques in the same individuals.
Aims: This study set out to investigate whether the use of phonological and orthographic cues in the treatment of word-finding difficulties could produce lasting improvements in word retrieval. The response of the participants to phonological and orthographic cues in a facilitation study was also related to their response to treatment using similar cues.
Methods & Procedures: The study used a case series design. The participants were eight people with acquired aphasia who were all at least 1 year post-onset, had a single left CVA, and had word-finding difficulties as a significant aspect of their aphasia. Detailed assessment of each participant was carried out to identify the nature of their word-finding difficulties and this was related to response to treatment.
Outcomes & Results: Results are given for the eight participants, seven of whom benefited overall from treatment. Both phonological and orthographic cues were effective in improving word retrieval. For the group as a whole there was a significant correlation between the overall outcome of facilitation and response to treatment.
Conclusions: The theoretical and clinical implications of the relationship between the individual's level of language impairment and their response to therapy are discussed. It is also suggested that the results from facilitation appear to have potential in predicting the outcome of phonological/orthographic therapy with aphasic participants. Finally, it is concluded that phonological and orthographic treatments for word-finding difficulties can be highly effective and that they represent an under-utilised and under-researched tool in the clinician's armoury.
C1 De Montfort Univ, Div Psychol & Speech & Language Therapy, Leicester LE7 9SU, Leics, England.
UCL, London, England.
Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
Univ London Birkbeck Coll, London WC1E 7HX, England.
RP Hickin, J (reprint author), De Montfort Univ, Div Psychol & Speech & Language Therapy, Scraptoft Campus, Leicester LE7 9SU, Leics, England.
EM JHickin@dmu.ac.uk
RI Herbert, Ruth/I-4760-2013
OI Herbert, Ruth/0000-0002-7139-1091
CR BARRY C, 1991, BRIT APH SOC C SHEFF
Basso A, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V77, P45, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2422
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
Best W, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P435
Best W, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V7, P105
Bird H, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P187, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00006-1
BRUCE C, 1987, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V22, P191
BRUCE C, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P253, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90078-4
BYNG S, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P303
BYNG S, 1993, BRIT APH SOC C WARW
CARAMAZZA A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P217, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401437
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Franklin S., 1992, ADA COMPREHENSION BA
Hatfield M. H., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY
HERBERT R, 2002, UNPUB COMBINING LEXI
HICKIN J, 1997, BRIT APH SOC C MANCH
HICKIN J, IN PRESS 2 APHASIA T
Horton S, 2000, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V35, P355
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
Howard D., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Howard D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249540
HOWARD D, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P89
LESSER R, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P67, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520176
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Osborne F, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P208
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
PATTERSON KE, 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P76
Ralph MAL, 1999, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V16, P157, DOI 10.1080/026432999380933
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Robertson IH, 1999, PSYCHOL BULL, V125, P544, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.125.5.544
Robey RR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P445
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
SWINBURN K, 2002, UNPUB COMPREHENSIVE
NR 41
TC 71
Z9 71
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 10-11
BP 981
EP 999
DI 10.1080/02687030244000509
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611PF
UT WOS:000179026400002
ER
PT J
AU Rose, M
Douglas, J
Matyas, T
AF Rose, M
Douglas, J
Matyas, T
TI The comparative effectiveness of gesture and verbal treatments for a
specific phonologic naming impairment
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ICONIC HAND GESTURES; WORD MATCHING TASKS; LEXICAL ACCESS; SPEECH
PRODUCTION; APHASIA; RETRIEVAL; PATIENT; THERAPY; FAMILIARITY; MOVEMENTS
AB Background: Arm and hand gesture has been considered a potential facilitator of word production (Skelly, Schinsky, Smith, & Fust, 1974), and gesture is often considered as a therapeutic modality for the treatment of aphasia (Rao, 1994), but there is limited empirical evidence of the efficacy of gesture-based treatments. Models of the relationship between word production and gesture production have been developed (Hadar & Butterworth, 1997; Krauss & Hadar, 1999) but they are currently under-specified and provide little guidance as to whether gesture might be an efficacious treatment for word production deficits arising from particular underlying levels of impairment.
Aims: This study had two main aims: First, to examine the comparative facilitation effects of gesture production and visualisation processes on object naming skills, and second, to compare the effectiveness of three types of treatment, gesture, verbal, and combined verbal plus gesture, for word production deficits arising from impairment at the level of phonological access and encoding.
Methods & Procedures: A 68-year-old female, AB, participated in the study. AB sustained a single, left, frontoparietal, subarachnoid haemorrhage 6 months prior to the study, which resulted in a highly specific, mild, phonologic access and encoding impairment. AB initially participated in a trial comparing the relative effectiveness of gesture and visualisation processes for facilitating oral picture naming. A controlled multiple-baseline single-case experiment was then carried out comparing the three naming treatments.
Outcomes & Results: The use of iconic gesture was found to significantly facilitate picture naming. Pointing, visualisation, and cued articulation produced negligible change from baseline rates. Clinically and statistically significant treatment effects were found for all three treatment conditions, with only marginal differences between conditions. Improvements made in picture naming were maintained at 1 and 3 month follow-up assessments and generalisation of enhanced object naming was found with novel stimuli and during spontaneous conversation.
Conclusions: The results supported Krauss and Hadar's (1999) model of speech and gesture production, suggesting frank interaction between the kinesic monitor of the gesture production system and the formulator of the word production system. The results caution clinicians to question the long-held axiom of the superiority of multi-modality treatments, and encourage clinicians to consider the underlying knowledge and processes generated by particular treatment protocols, rather than simply the modality in which the treatment is transmitted.
C1 La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3086, Australia.
RP Rose, M (reprint author), La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3086, Australia.
RI Douglas, Jacinta/C-2380-2009
CR ANDERSON J, 1990, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL IT, P256
Beattie G, 1999, SEMIOTICA, V123, P1, DOI 10.1515/semi.1999.123.1-2.1
Beattie G, 1999, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V90, P35, DOI 10.1348/000712699161251
Beattie G, 2000, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V91, P473, DOI 10.1348/000712600161943
BEATTIE G, 1994, SEMIOTICA, V99, P239, DOI 10.1515/semi.1994.99.3-4.239
Beattie G, 1998, SEMIOTICA, V119, P221, DOI 10.1515/semi.1998.119.3-4.221
Best W., 1997, LANGUAGE DISORDERS C, P102
BRICKENKAMP R, 1981, TEST DI CONCENTRATIO
Bryden M, 1982, LATERALITY FUNCTIONA, P157
Butterworth B., 1978, RECENT ADV PSYCHOL L, P347
BUTTERWORTH B, 1981, JARGONAPHASIA, P113
Capirci O, 1996, J CHILD LANG, V23, P645
Cappa SF, 1997, COGNITION, V65, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00024-3
CODE C, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P11
Coelho C., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P209
Conlon C., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P185
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
DITTMAN AT, 1972, STUDIES DYADIC COMMU, P135
Efron David, 1972, GESTURE RACE CULTURE
EKMAN P, 1972, J COMMUN, V22, P353, DOI 10.1111/j.1460-2466.1972.tb00163.x
Feyereisen P, 1997, J MEM LANG, V36, P13, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1995.2458
Francis N., 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Freedman N., 1972, STUDIES DYADIC COMMU, P153
Frick D., 1998, AM J PSYCHOL, V3, P43
FRICK DJ, 1991, THESIS U N CAROLINA
Goldin-Meadow S, 1998, NEW DIRECTIONS CHILD, V79, P29
Goodwyn S. W., 1998, NEW DIR CHILD ADOLES, V79, P61
Gorman B. S., 1996, DESIGN ANAL SINGLE C, P159
Hadar U, 1998, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V13, P59, DOI 10.1080/016909698386591
Hadar U, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P107, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1890
Hadar U, 1997, SEMIOTICA, V115, P147, DOI 10.1515/semi.1997.115.1-2.147
BUTTERWORTH B, 1989, PSYCHOL REV, V96, P168, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.96.1.168
Hadar U, 1999, J NEUROLINGUIST, V12, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(99)00001-9
HADAR U, 1994, J NEUROLINGUIST, V8, P57, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(94)90007-8
HANLON RE, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P298, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90116-X
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1992, TEST ORAL LIMB APRAX
Hillis A. E., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
Hillis A. E., 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P207
Hoodin R., 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P62
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kendon A., 1980, RELATIONSHIP VERBAL, P207
Kendon Adam, 1988, CROSS CULTURAL PERSP, P131
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Klima E, 1979, SIGNS LANGUAGE
Krauss R., 1999, GESTURE SPEECH SIGN, P63
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1985, J MEM LANG, V24, P133, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(85)90021-X
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
Matyas TA, 1996, DESIGN ANAL SINGLE C, P215
MATYAS TA, 1990, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V23, P341, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1990.23-341
McNeill D., 1992, HAND MIND WHAT GESTU
MCNEILL D, 1985, PSYCHOL REV, V92, P350, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.92.3.350
McNeill D., 1990, CEREBRAL CONTROL SPE, P203
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
MORRELSAMUELS P, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P615, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.18.3.615
Nickels L, 1999, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V13, P269
Nickels L., 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP, P291
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
Pashek GV, 1997, J COMMUN DISORD, V30, P349, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(96)00079-2
Passy J, 1990, CUED ARTICULATION
PRING T, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249517
RAMSBERGER G, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P395
RAO PR, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P358
Rapp B, 2000, PSYCHOL REV, V107, P460, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.107.3.460
Rauscher FH, 1996, PSYCHOL SCI, V7, P226, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1996.tb00364.x
Raven J. C., 1995, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
RAYMER AM, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P285
Rime B., 1991, FUNDAMENTALS NONVERB, P239
Robey RR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P445
Robson J, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P675
Rose M, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P977
Schneider SL, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P297, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248414
Siegel S., 1956, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
SKELLY M, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P445
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Spencer KA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P567
THOMPSON CK, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P239
NR 83
TC 40
Z9 40
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 10-11
BP 1001
EP 1030
DI 10.1080/02687030143000825
PG 30
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611PF
UT WOS:000179026400003
ER
PT J
AU Raymer, AM
Ellsworth, TA
AF Raymer, AM
Ellsworth, TA
TI Response to contrasting verb retrieval treatments: A case study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BRAIN-DAMAGED SUBJECTS; LEXICAL ORGANIZATION; SENTENCE PRODUCTION;
NOUNS; APHASIA; IMPAIRMENTS; AGRAMMATISM; THERAPY
AB Verb retrieval treatments for individuals with aphasia that have led to greater improvements in sentence production typically have incorporated semantic as compared to repetition treatments. However, studies have not contrasted treatments within subjects to compare treatment effectiveness. We compared effects of sequential verb retrieval treatments in one participant and analysed effects on sentence production. We tested one woman, WR, with nonfluent aphasia and mild verb retrieval impairment related to semantic dysfunction. She participated in three phases of verb retrieval treatment, semantic, phonologic, and rehearsal, in a multiple baseline crossover design. We examined accuracy of picture naming and sentence production for trained and untrained verbs. All treatments resulted in significantly improved naming of trained verbs, some generalised sentence production, and no improvement for untrained verbs. No difference was evident in effects across treatments. Unlike earlier studies, the repetition and phonologic treatments were as effective as semantic treatment for improving sentence production. These positive findings for all three treatments may relate to semantic activation that occurs whenever a word is retrieved in the context of picture presentation, thereby fundamentally altering semantic activation patterns and making the word more easily accessible in subsequent retrieval attempts, whether in isolation or in sentences.
C1 Old Dominion Univ, Ctr Child Study, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
VA RR&D Brain Rehabil Res Ctr, Gainesville, FL USA.
RP Raymer, AM (reprint author), Old Dominion Univ, Ctr Child Study, 45th St & Hampton Blvd, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
CR Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Breedin SD, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1923
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
DAMASIO AR, 1993, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V90, P4957, DOI 10.1073/pnas.90.11.4957
ENNIS MR, 1999, THESIS U FLORIDA
Fink R. B., 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P263
Fink RB, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P41
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Hillis A. E., 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP, P185
HILLIS AE, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P5, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249497
Hillis A.E., 1989, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kemmerer D, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V73, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2311
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kim M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P1, DOI 10.1006/brin.2000.2315
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
MARSHALL J, 1999, APHASIA THERAPY FILE, P111
McReynolds L. V., 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
Mitchum C., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P317
MITCHUM CC, 1907, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P551
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Nickels L., 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP, P291
OBLER LK, 1986, UNPUB ACTION NAMING
Raymer A. M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P524
Raymer AM, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P108
ReichmanNovak S, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P102
ROTHI LJG, 1984, BATTERY ADULT READIN
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
WILLIAMSON DJG, 1995, UNPUB FLORIDA NOUN V
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 34
TC 46
Z9 49
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 10-11
BP 1031
EP 1045
DI 10.1080/026870401430000609
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611PF
UT WOS:000179026400004
ER
PT J
AU Nickels, L
AF Nickels, L
TI Improving word finding: Practice makes (closer to) perfect?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID NAMING DISORDERS; MATCHING TASKS; PICTURE; RETRIEVAL; APHASIA; THERAPY;
REPETITION; FREQUENCY; FACILITATION; DEFICITS
AB Background: One application of a task, such as word-picture matching or repetition, has been demonstrated to affect subsequent picture naming ('facilitation' or 'priming') in both aphasic and non-aphasic subjects. As aphasia assessment frequently involves repeated use of the same stimuli in different tasks, it is suggested that some aphasic individuals may have improved performance in picture naming as a result of assessment.
Aims: The aim of this paper is to demonstrate that there can be improvements in picture naming as a result of repeated presentation of stimuli and promote discussion regarding the mechanisms that may have caused such effects and their corresponding implications for treatment.
Methods & Procedures: This paper describes a single case study of JAW, a man with aphasia. JAW's picture naming had been observed to improve over time while other tasks remained stable. An investigation was performed to identify the source of this improvement. Three treatment tasks were used, attempting to name the picture, reading aloud and delayed copying of the picture names.
Outcomes and Results: All three tasks significantly improved subsequent picture naming of the treated items despite the fact that no feedback or error correction was provided. It is argued that the source of this improvement is from priming of retrieval of the phonological form. In the 'attempted naming' condition, this priming occurred every time a picture name was successfully produced. As JAW was not perfectly consistent, on each attempt at naming some additional items were primed. Thus, over time an increasing proportion of stimulus items were primed and were hence more likely to be successfully produced.
Conclusions: This study demonstrated that for at least one aphasic man, JAW, practice makes (closer to) perfect, even without correction. Not only was there significant improvement from tasks that provided the word form (reading aloud and delayed copying) as has been shown in the past, but also there was the novel finding that simply attempting to name a picture can improve subsequent word retrieval. It is argued that this novel finding could be applicable to other aphasic individuals and has functional significance.
C1 Macquarie Univ, MACCS, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Nickels, L (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, MACCS, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
CR BARRY C, 1991, BRIT APH SOC C SHEFF
Best W, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P151
Best W, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P231
Best W, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P443, DOI 10.1080/026432996381971
Cave CB, 1997, PSYCHOL SCI, V8, P322, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1997.tb00446.x
Ferrand L, 1998, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V60, P263, DOI 10.3758/BF03206035
FERRAND L, 1994, MEM COGNITION, V22, P431, DOI 10.3758/BF03200868
FORSTER KI, 1984, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V10, P680, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.10.4.680
Griffin ZM, 1998, J MEM LANG, V38, P313, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1997.2547
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
Howard D., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC
Howard D., 1984, ADV NEUROLOGY, V42
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
La Heij W, 1999, ACTA PSYCHOL, V102, P77, DOI 10.1016/S0001-6918(99)00020-7
LEDORZE G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P127
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Monsell S., 1987, LANGUAGE PERCEPTION
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
NICKELS L, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P289, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251977
NICKELS LA, 2002, UNPUB REAL WORD ERRO
NICKELS LA, 2000, P APH S AUSTR MELB O
PRING T, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P479, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248788
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
vanBerkum JJA, 1997, COGNITION, V64, P115, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00026-7
WHEELDON LR, 1992, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V44, P723
NR 31
TC 49
Z9 49
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 10-11
BP 1047
EP 1060
DI 10.1080/02687040143000618
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611PF
UT WOS:000179026400005
ER
PT J
AU Fink, RB
Brecher, A
Schwartz, MF
Robey, RR
AF Fink, RB
Brecher, A
Schwartz, MF
Robey, RR
TI A computer-implemented protocol for treatment of naming disorders:
Evaluation of clinician-guided and partially self-guided instruction
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID EFFECT SIZES; APHASIA; THERAPY; EFFICACY
AB Background: Computer-based rehabilitation programs are now available for patients' use at home and in the clinical setting, yet we have meagre outcome data associated with their usefulness under self- and/or clinician-guided conditions.
Aims: We assess the benefits of a computer-delivered, hierarchical phonological cueing protocol (cued naming) under two conditions of instruction, (1) with full clinician guidance or (2) in partial independence.
Methods & procedures: We employed a single-subject experimental design, which was replicated over six chronic aphasic subjects, three in each instruction condition. Subjects with deficits identified as primarily phonological in nature were administered a phonological treatment, utilising a computerised therapy program (MossTalk Words), under one of the two conditions.
Outcomes & Results: Training-specific acquisition and maintenance was demonstrated in both conditions. Limited and variable generalisation patterns were noted.
Conclusions: Chronic aphasic individuals with moderate-to-severe phonologically based naming impairment can benefit from a computerised cued-naming protocol and independent work on the computer can be an effective adjunct to clinician-guided therapy.
C1 Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA 19141 USA.
Univ Virginia, Charlottesville, VA 22903 USA.
RP Fink, RB (reprint author), Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Korman 213,1200 W Tabor Rd, Philadelphia, PA 19141 USA.
RI Robey, Randall/G-1199-2010
CR Aftonomos LB, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P841, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90197-0
Baayen R. H., 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Best W., 1997, LANGUAGE DISORDERS C, P102
BLUESTONE R, 1998, 10 ANN STROK REH C O
Cohen J., 1988, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA, V2nd
CROSBIE J, 1993, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V61, P966, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.61.6.966
CROSBIE J, 1995, ANAL CHANGE
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
FAITH MS, 1997, DESIGN ANAL SINGLE C
Fink R. B., 2001, MOSS TALK WORDS
GORSUCH RL, 1983, BEHAV ASSESS, V5, P141
Gottman JM, 1981, TIME SERIES ANAL COM
GREENWALD ML, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P17, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520174
Hillis A. E., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Kromrey JD, 1996, J EXP EDUC, V65, P73
Linebarger MC, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V11, P57
LINEBAUGH C, 1977, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P19
McReynolds L. V., 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
PATTERSON KE, 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P76
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P109
Roach A., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P121
ROBERTSON I, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249090
Robey RR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P445
Robson J, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P675
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, UNPUB PHILADELPHIA C
SCHWARTZ MF, 1998, AC APH SANT FE NM NO
THOMPSON C, 1981, CLIN APH C P, P35
Thompson C.K., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P239
WILSHIRE CE, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P82
NR 39
TC 50
Z9 51
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 10-11
BP 1061
EP 1086
DI 10.1080/02687030244000400
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611PF
UT WOS:000179026400006
ER
PT J
AU Franklin, S
Buerk, F
Howard, D
AF Franklin, S
Buerk, F
Howard, D
TI Generalised improvement in speech production for a subject with
reproduction conduction aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LEXICAL ACCESS; PHONEMIC APPROXIMATIONS; LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; WORD
RETRIEVAL; OUTPUT BUFFER; TIME-COURSE; REPETITION; IMPAIRMENT;
COMPREHENSION; SEQUENCES
AB Background: Reproduction conduction aphasia is a disorder of phonological production characterised by phonological errors occurring particularly with longer words in all tasks requiring spoken output. There have been few previous studies of therapy for subjects with this disorder.
Aims: The study investigates the effects of a treatment procedure involving the detection and correction of the errors in speech production with a single subject, MB. We also seek to establish the nature of MB's underlying deficit, and show how it changes as a result of treatment.
Methods & Procedures: Treatment effects were investigated in a single case study using multiple baselines over tasks, materials, and time. An in-depth cognitive neuropsychological case study was used to investigate the nature of MB's speech production deficit.
Outcomes & Results: MB had impaired naming, repetition, and oral reading particularly with longer words, but good word comprehension. Her errors were primarily phonological, with many repeated attempts ("conduite d'approche''). Production of non-words was less accurate than real words. The treatment improved production in all modalities and across a variety of tasks (including non-word reading). Further analysis of assessment results suggested that MB's impairment was at the level of phonological encoding and that therapy had improved phoneme production across all word positions.
Conclusions: Treatment was successful and generalised across items and to connected speech. MB's deficit could be characterised as a difficulty in the process of phoneme retrieval, and this improved as a result of the treatment.
C1 Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Dept Speech, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
Newcastle Integrated Older Peoples Serv, Newcastle Upon Tyne, Tyne & Wear, England.
RP Franklin, S (reprint author), Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Dept Speech, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
RI Franklin, Sue/F-9775-2011
CR Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Best W, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P443, DOI 10.1080/026432996381971
Bishop D. V., 1982, TROG TEST RECEPTION
Blanken G, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P321, DOI 10.1080/026432998381122
BUB D, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
CAPLAN D, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P99, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252671
CARAMAZZA A, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P37, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252669
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
DUBOIS J, 1964, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V2, P9, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(64)90029-6
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
FROMKIN VA, 1971, LANGUAGE, V47, P27, DOI 10.2307/412187
GOLDSTEIN K, 1948, LANGUAGE LANGUAGE DI
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
Howard D, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P198, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000546
HOWARD D, 1995, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V48, P999
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Howard D., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P76
JOANETTE Y, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P30, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90107-8
KAY J, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P613, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.3.613
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
KINSBOUR.M, 1972, NEUROLOGY, V22, P1126
KOHN SE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P266, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90135-X
KOHN SE, 1990, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V25, P45
LEDORZE G, 1991, J SPEECH LANGUAGE PA, V15, P21
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P239, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90030-2
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MAHER LM, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P402, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1022
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
MEYER AS, 1990, J MEM LANG, V29, P524, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(90)90050-A
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
MILLER D, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Nickels L, 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
NICKELS L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P209
NICKELS LA, 1992, THESIS U LONDON
Pate D. S., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P43, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406351
Roelofs A., 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO, P71
Roelofs A, 2002, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V55, P465, DOI 10.1080/02724980143000488
Roelofs A, 1997, COGNITION, V64, P249, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00027-9
ROMANI C, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P131, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409382
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SCHLENCK KJ, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V30, P226, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90100-3
Shallice T, 2000, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V17, P517, DOI 10.1080/02643290050110638
SHALLICE T, 1977, BRAIN LANG, V4, P479, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(77)90040-2
SHATTUCKHUFNAGEL S, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P213, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90044-I
STRUB RL, 1974, BRAIN LANG, V1, P241, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(74)90039-X
SWINBURN K, UNPUB COMPREHENSIVE
VALDOIS S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248976
WHEELDON LR, 1995, J MEM LANG, V34, P311, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1995.1014
Wilshire CE, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1059
NR 54
TC 40
Z9 40
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 10-11
BP 1087
EP 1114
DI 10.1080/02687030244000491
PG 28
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611PF
UT WOS:000179026400007
ER
PT J
AU Biedermann, B
Blanken, G
Nickels, L
AF Biedermann, B
Blanken, G
Nickels, L
TI The representation of homophones: Evidence from remediation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPEECH PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; SENTENCE PRODUCTION; GRAMMATICAL
GENDER; NAMING DISORDERS; APHASIA; RETRIEVAL; THERAPY; FREQUENCY;
KNOWLEDGE
AB Background: This single case study examines the linguistic phenomenon of ambiguous spoken words: homophones. In the psycholinguistic research literature the lexicalisation of homophones is the subject of extensive debate. A common assumption is that these words share one word form but have two grammatical representations (lemmas). An opposing view postulates two separate word form entries for homophones-without assuming a lemma level.
Aims: The single case study presented here searches for empirical evidence for the representation of homophones using aphasic speech production. Can aphasic speech production give us some evidence regarding how many processing levels have to be completed prior to articulation?
Methods & Procedures: A treatment study with MW, a man with global aphasia and severe anomia, is presented. Treatment comprised an intensive picture-naming training with exclusively phonological cues. Naming was facilitated using the following cueing hierarchy: (i) giving the initial phoneme, (ii) tapping the syllable number, and (iii) giving the target word for repetition. How this pure phonological training would affect naming performance of homophones, semantically and phonologically related words, and unrelated words was investigated.
Outcomes & Results: The results showed significant short-term, item-specific effects for treated words and generalisation to untreated homophone words alone. The outcome is discussed with reference to the debate regarding homophone production in psycholinguistics and the debate regarding the facilitatory effects of phonological techniques.
Conclusions: The results support the two stage model, with only one word form and two lemma entries for homophones. In addition, the outcome of this phonological treatment supports the common assumption that pure word form training rarely results in long-term improvement or generalisation.
C1 Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
Univ Freiburg, Freiburg, Germany.
Otto von Guericke Univ, Magdeburg, Germany.
RP Biedermann, B (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
CR Baayen R. H., 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
BADECKER W, 1995, COGNITION, V57, P193, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00663-J
BIERWISCH M, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P23, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90039-K
BLANKEN G, 1988, FREIBURGER FUNKTIONE
Blanken G., 1989, NEUROLINGUISTIK, V2, P107
BLANKEN G, IN PRESS NEUROSCIENC
BLANKEN G, THESIS SPRACHPRODUKT
BLANKEN G, 1996, MAT NEUROLINGUISTISC
Caramazza A, 1998, COGNITION, V69, P231
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITION, V64, P309, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00031-0
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P177, DOI 10.1080/026432997381664
Caramazza A, 2001, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V27, P1430, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.27.6.1430
DELL GS, 1990, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V5, P313, DOI 10.1080/01690969008407066
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Druks J, 1999, OBJECT ACTION NAMING
Henaff Gonon M A, 1989, Neuropsychologia, V27, P391
HICKIN J, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIA TES
JESCHENIAK JD, IN PRESS J EXPT PSYC
JESCHENIAK JD, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P824, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.20.4.824
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
KEMPEN G, 1983, COGNITION, V14, P185, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90029-X
Kulke F, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P3, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000070
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Levelt WJM, 1999, TRENDS COGN SCI, V3, P223, DOI 10.1016/S1364-6613(99)01319-4
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Miozzo M, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P160, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.1.160
Morton J., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
NEUBERT C, 1995, NEUROLINGUISTISCHE A
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Nickels L., 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
Pechmann T, 2002, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V28, P233, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.28.1.233
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Robson J, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P675
Roelofs A, 1998, COGNITION, V69, P219
Ruoff Arno, 1981, HAUFIGKEITSWORTERBUC
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
vanTurennout M, 1997, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V23, P787, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.23.4.787
Vigliocco G, 1997, PSYCHOL SCI, V8, P314, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1997.tb00444.x
NR 46
TC 14
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 10-11
BP 1115
EP 1136
DI 10.1080/02687030244000545
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 611PF
UT WOS:000179026400008
ER
PT J
AU Fridriksson, J
Holland, AL
Coull, BM
Plante, E
Trouard, TP
Beeson, P
AF Fridriksson, J
Holland, AL
Coull, BM
Plante, E
Trouard, TP
Beeson, P
TI Aphasia severity: Association with cerebral perfusion and diffusion
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ISCHEMIC STROKE; TEMPOROPARIETAL CORTEX; WEIGHTED MRI; RECOVERY;
HYPOPERFUSION; PREDICTION; EVOLUTION; VOLUME
AB Background: Previous studies of the relationship between perfusion, diffusion, and stroke suggest that the extent of cerebral hypoperfusion may be a better indicator of neurological status than lesion size in the early phases of recovery, It is not clear how these factors are related to aphasia severity.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to investigate the relationship between cerebral perfusion, diffusion, and aphasia severity in stroke,
Methods & Procedure: Nine participants were examined within 24 hours of stroke onset and six were re-examined at 1 month post stroke. The examination included administration of an aphasia test. a face recognition task, and a neuroimaging session including T2-, perfusion-, and diffusion-weighted MRI.
Outcomes & Results: Participants with a variety of aphasia types and severity were included in the study. Visual inspection suggested larger perfusion abnormality than the actual lesion in eight of nine subjects at day 1. The correlation between aphasia severity and hypoperfusion was significant at day 1 and at 1 month post stroke, However, this was not the case for the relationship between aphasia severity and lesion size where the correlation was not statistically significant at day 1 or at 1 month post stroke.
Conclusions: These results suggest that cerebral hypoperfusion is a more accurate indicator of aphasia severity in early stroke than lesion volume.
C1 Univ S Carolina, Columbia, SC 29208 USA.
Univ Arizona, Tucson, AZ USA.
RP Fridriksson, J (reprint author), Univ S Carolina, Williams Brice Bldg, Columbia, SC 29208 USA.
CR Baird AE, 1998, J CEREBR BLOOD F MET, V18, P583
Barber PA, 1998, NEUROLOGY, V51, P418
Beaulieu C, 1999, ANN NEUROL, V46, P568, DOI 10.1002/1531-8249(199910)46:4<568::AID-ANA4>3.0.CO;2-R
Bowers D, 1991, FLORIDA AFFECT BATTE
Cappa SF, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P55, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1737
Chalela JA, 2000, STROKE, V31, P680
Heiss WD, 1997, J NEUROL SCI, V145, P213, DOI 10.1016/S0022-510X(96)00252-3
Hillis AE, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V55, P782
Hillis AE, 2001, ANN NEUROL, V50, P561, DOI 10.1002/ana.1265
Hillis AE, 2002, APHASIOLOGY, V16, P885, DOI 10.1080/0268703
Kaplan E., 2001, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KERTESZ A, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P34, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90038-5
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KWONG KK, 1995, MAGNET RESON MED, V34, P878, DOI 10.1002/mrm.1910340613
Lev MH, 2001, STROKE, V32, P2021, DOI 10.1161/hs0901.095680
MAZZONI M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P387, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248609
METTER EJ, 1990, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V47, P1235
METTER EJ, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P349, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248606
Neumann-Haefelin T, 2000, ANN NEUROL, V47, P559, DOI 10.1002/1531-8249(200005)47:5<559::AID-ANA2>3.0.CO;2-S
PEDERSEN PM, 1995, ANN NEUROL, V38, P659, DOI 10.1002/ana.410380416
Thomas DL, 2000, PHYS MED BIOL, V45, pR97, DOI 10.1088/0031-9155/45/8/201
Tong DC, 1998, NEUROLOGY, V50, P864
West J.F., 1998, BEDSIDE EVALUATION S
NR 23
TC 12
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 9
BP 859
EP 871
DI 10.1080/02687030244000347
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 594BX
UT WOS:000178029800002
ER
PT J
AU Love, T
Swinney, D
Wong, E
Buxton, R
AF Love, T
Swinney, D
Wong, E
Buxton, R
TI Perfusion imaging and stroke: A more sensitive measure of the brain
bases of cognitive deficits
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Aims: We provide evidence that the use of perfusion imaging reveals the neuroanatomical basis for a behaviourally demonstrated cognitive deficit that is not revealed via standard neuroradiological imaging techniques,
Methods & Procedures: We present a case study of a 52-year-old female stroke survivor (16 years post onset) whose speech was fluent and grammatical with some word-finding difficulties that were typically overcome with common circumlocution strategies. Based on standardised measures, the patient's clinical diagnosis was anomic aphasia. In addition to word-finding deficits, it was discovered that this patient also demonstrated difficulties in reading; while able to eventually read and understand text, there was extreme difficulty in completing such tasks. A series of experimental findings exploring this reading deficit are presented. This patient's lesion, as revealed via structural brain imaging, did not involve a brain region typically implicated in reading dysfunction. This behaviour lesion inconsistency was explored via perfusion MRI technology as a means of assessing whether other neural regions not directly implicated in the structural scans (such as the angular gyrus) could in fact show some level of dysfunction. Outcomes & Results: Behavioural. Analysis of the patient's overall reading time demonstrated that as compared to a matched control, this patient took significantly more time in reading paragraphs both silently and aloud. In addition, the patient produced more errors (filters, pauses, elongations) than the matched control during the reading paragraphs aloud and story-retelling conditions. There were no differences exhibited between the patient and control with respect to content accuracy produced during these conditions.
Outcomes & Results: Neuroradiological. Structural images demonstrate damage to the tell basal ganglia and surrounding white matter with sparing of the left insular cortex. Collection of perfusion images (pulsed arterial spin labelling) clearly demonstrates hypoperfusion in the seemingly intact brain regions of the left angular gyrus and the left supramarginal gyrus.
Conclusions: This paper presents evidence from a detailed case study that the use of perfusion imaging successfully reveals the neural basis for a reading deficit in a stroke survivor that is not revealed via standard "structural" neuroradiological imaging techniques. We argue for more standardised use of perfusion imaging, in that it reveals a brain basis for "functional lesions". which less sensitive neuroimaging measures often fail to capture.
C1 Univ Calif San Diego, Dept Psychol 0109, La Jolla, CA 92093 USA.
RP Love, T (reprint author), Univ Calif San Diego, Dept Psychol 0109, La Jolla, CA 92093 USA.
CR ALBERT ML, 1973, NEUROLOGY, V23, P658
DEMONET JF, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1753, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1753
DETRE JA, 1992, MAGNET RESON MED, V23, P37, DOI 10.1002/mrm.1910230106
EDELMAN RR, 1994, RADIOLOGY, V192, P513
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
Goodglass H., 1997, ANOMIA NEUROANATOMIC
Hillis AE, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P919
LOVE T, IN PRESS J PSYCHOLIN
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Small SL, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P298, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1951
Wong EC, 1998, MAGNET RESON MED, V39, P702, DOI 10.1002/mrm.1910390506
Wong EC, 1997, NMR BIOMED, V10, P237, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1099-1492(199706/08)10:4/5<237::AID-NBM475>3.0.CO;2-X
WONG EC, 1992, P SMRM 11 ANN M BERL, P105
NR 13
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 9
BP 873
EP 883
DI 10.1080/02687030244000356
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 594BX
UT WOS:000178029800003
ER
PT J
AU Hillis, AE
Heidler, J
AF Hillis, AE
Heidler, J
TI Mechanisms of early aphasia recovery
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ACUTE STROKE; ISCHEMIC PENUMBRA; MOTOR RECOVERY; REORGANIZATION
AB Background: The course of recovery of aphasia after stroke is highly variable. Some patients. even with severe aphasia. recover rapidly over the first days after onset. The mechanism of this early recovery (and later recovery) is unclear, Plausible accounts include reperfusion of ischaemic tissue surrounding the stroke, and rapid reorganisation of structure/function relationships.
Aims: Based on a recent study showing that the severity of word comprehension impairment in acute stroke patients is strongly correlated with the severity of hypoperfusion (low blood flow) in Wernicke's area, we hypothesised that early recovery of spoken word comprehension is due to reperfusion (restored blood flow) to Wernicke's area. Our objective was to evluate this hypothesis using advanced magnetic resonance imaging techniques of perfusion-weighted imaging (PWI) and diffusion-weighted imaging (DWI).
Methods and Procedures: A series of 100 patients with acute, left hemisphere ischaemic stroke were evaluated within 24 hours of onset or worsening of symptoms, and 3 days later, using PWI, DWI, and a battery of lexical tasks, including spoken word/picture verification. p A subset of 18 patients with impaired spoken word comprehension at Day 1 were included in the study. Chi square analysis was used to identify the association between early recovery of spoken word comprehension and reperfusion of each of 10 Brodmann's areas (BA).
Outcomes & Results: Early recovery of spoken word comprehension was significantly associated with reperfusion of BA 22 (Wernicke's area), but not with reperfusion of other BAs. All patients who showed early recovery of word comprehension also showed reperfusion of Wernicke's area, due to carotid endarterectomy. carotid stenting, induced blood pressure elevation, or spontaneous reperfusion.
Conclusions: Tissue recovery. brought about by restored blood pressure elevation, likely accounts for cases of rapid resolution of aphasia in the first few days of stroke. Other mechanisms of recovery, including reorganisation of structure/function relationships, and learning of compensatory strategies, are likely important in later stages of recovery.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Sch Med, Loyola Coll Baltimore, Baltimore, MD USA.
RP Hillis, AE (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ Hosp, Dept Neurol, Meyer 5-185,600 N Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
CR Binkert Franz, 1996, European Journal of Human Genetics, V4, P39
CHOLLET F, 1991, ANN NEUROL, V29, P63, DOI 10.1002/ana.410290112
Coq JO, 1999, EUR J NEUROSCI, V11, P2597, DOI 10.1046/j.1460-9568.1999.00673.x
Cramer SC, 1997, STROKE, V28, P2518
DUFFY RJ, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P572
Furlan M, 1996, ANN NEUROL, V40, P216, DOI 10.1002/ana.410400213
HILLIS AE, 2002, BRAIN LANG, V79, P495
Hillis AE, 2001, ANN NEUROL, V50, P561, DOI 10.1002/ana.1265
Hillis AE, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P919
Jenkins WM, 1987, PROG BRAIN RES , V71, P249
JENKINS WM, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V28, P573, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(90)90035-M
KEARNS KP, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P421
MERZENICH MM, 1983, NEUROSCIENCE, V8, P33, DOI 10.1016/0306-4522(83)90024-6
Nudo RJ, 1996, SCIENCE, V272, P1791, DOI 10.1126/science.272.5269.1791
OLSEN TS, 1983, STROKE, V14, P332
Raymer A. M., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P524
Schwamm LH, 1998, STROKE, V29, P2268
Seitz RJ, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1844
TONI D, 1997, STROKE, V22, P10
von Monakow C, 1969, MOODS STATES MIND, P27
Walker-Batson D, 2001, STROKE, V32, P2093, DOI 10.1161/hs0901.095720
NR 21
TC 26
Z9 27
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 9
BP 885
EP 895
DI 10.1080/0268703
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 594BX
UT WOS:000178029800004
ER
PT J
AU Selnes, OA
van Zijl, PCM
Barker, PB
Hillis, AE
Mori, S
AF Selnes, OA
van Zijl, PCM
Barker, PB
Hillis, AE
Mori, S
TI MR diffusion tensor imaging documented arcuate fasciculus lesion in a
patient with normal repetition performance
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONDUCTION APHASIA; ABNORMALITIES; STROKE; BRAIN
AB Background: The pathophysiology of the syndrome of conduction aphasia has been thought to involve a disconnection between posterior and anterior language areas. The arcuate fasciculus has been one of the principal candidates for an anatomical link between Wernicke's and Broca's area, but direct evidence for its involvement in conduction aphasia has been difficult to obtain.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to examine white matter tract integrity, using the novel magnetic resonance imaging technique of diffusion tensor imaging, in a patient with transcortical aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: A case study of a 55-year-old, right-handed man with aphasia following a left hemisphere stroke is reported. The patient's language performance was assessed with the Boston Diagnostic Aphasia Examination twice: at 10 days and at 2 years after his stroke. An MR diffusion tensor imaging study was obtained approximately 2 years after his stroke using the 1.5 T Phillips Gyroscan NT system. White matter fibre tracts maps were reconstructed using the "FACT" algorithm.
Outcomes and Results: Ten days after his stroke. the patient had a non-fluent aphasia with marked impairment of both auditory comprehension and spontaneous speech. However. repetition was relatively intact. By 2 years, when the MR diffusion tensor imaging study was performed. repetition was completely normal and the patient had only subtle deficits in areas of naming and auditory comprehension, The MR diffusion tensor imaging study revealed a lesion of the dominant hemisphere arcuate fasciculus.
Conclusions: This study documents normal repetition performance in a patient who on subsequent MR diffusion tensor imaging was found to have a lesion involving the dominant hemisphere arcuate fasciculus lesion. This case adds to previously published cases of normal repetition performance despite a documented lesion of the arcuate fasciculus, and thus further challenges the traditional model of conduction aphasia invoking a critical role of this white matter tract. Our case also suggests that MR diffusion tensor imaging may be a potentially useful technique to evaluate regional involvement of specific white matter tract projections in patients with aphasia.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
RP Selnes, OA (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, Meyer 100,600 N Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
RI van Zijl, Peter/B-8680-2008
CR Arnett PA, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V47, P576
Axer H, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V76, P317, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2425
BASSER PJ, 1994, BIOPHYS J, V66, P259
BROWN J W, 1975, Cortex, V11, P37
DAMASIO H, 1980, BRAIN, V103, P337, DOI 10.1093/brain/103.2.337
DEBLESER R, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P475, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1056
GESCHWIN.N, 1965, BRAIN, V88, P237, DOI 10.1093/brain/88.2.237
Gillard JH, 2001, BRIT J RADIOL, V74, P642
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
MORI S, 1995, MAGNET RESON MED, V33, P41, DOI 10.1002/mrm.1910330107
Mori S, 2002, MAGNET RESON MED, V47, P215, DOI 10.1002/mrm.10074
Mori S, 1999, ANN NEUROL, V45, P265, DOI 10.1002/1531-8249(199902)45:2<265::AID-ANA21>3.0.CO;2-3
Mukherjee P, 2001, RADIOLOGY, V219, P756
Pajevic S, 1999, MAGNET RESON MED, V42, P526, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1522-2594(199909)42:3<526::AID-MRM15>3.0.CO;2-J
PETRIDES M, 1988, J COMP NEUROL, V273, P52, DOI 10.1002/cne.902730106
Pomara N, 2001, PSYCHIAT RES-NEUROIM, V106, P15, DOI 10.1016/S0925-4927(00)00082-2
Rugg-Gunn FJ, 2001, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V70, P530, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.70.4.530
SELNES OA, 1985, ANN NEUROL, V17, P549, DOI 10.1002/ana.410170604
SHUREN JE, 1995, J NEUROL, V242, P596, DOI 10.1007/BF00868813
TANABE H, 1987, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V76, P422
VANGELDEREN P, 1994, MAGNET RESON MED, V31, P154, DOI 10.1002/mrm.1910310209
WHITTLE IR, 1991, BRIT J NEUROSURG, V5, P647, DOI 10.3109/02688699109002891
NR 22
TC 18
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 9
BP 897
EP 901
DI 10.1080/02687030244000374
PG 7
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 594BX
UT WOS:000178029800005
ER
PT J
AU Crone, NE
Hao, L
AF Crone, NE
Hao, L
TI Functional dynamics of spoken and signed word production: A case study
using electrocorticographic spectral analysis
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LEFT TEMPORAL-LOBE; MASSIVE CORTICAL REORGANIZATION; EVENT-RELATED
DESYNCHRONIZATION; POSITRON EMISSION TOMOGRAPHY; HUMAN SENSORIMOTOR
CORTEX; CEREBRAL BLOOD-FLOW; LANGUAGE AREA; WERNICKES AREA; GRASP
REPRESENTATIONS; OLFACTORY SYSTEM
AB Background: Event-related changes in the EEG power spectrum have recently been used to study functional brain activation in humans. Like traditional event-related potentials, event-related spectral changes provide information about the temporal evolution of cortical activation that is difficult to obtain with fMRI or PET. These spectral changes include event-related suppression of power in the alpha band (8-13 Hz) and even-related augmentation of power in the gamma band (>30 Hz). Most studies of the gamma band have focused on frequencies in and around 40 Hz. Using electrocorticographic (ECoG) signals recorded with subdural electrodes implanted for the surgical management of epilepsy, we have also observed a broadband augmentation of power in higher gamma frequencies (>80 Hz). This index of cortical activation has compared favourably with alpha suppression and with electrical cortical stimulation mapping in Studies utilising simple motor and auditory processing, but such a comparison has not been done for tasks requiring more complex language processing.
Aims: We used two different spectral indices of cortical activation-alpha power suppression and gamma power augmentation, to study the spatial and temporal patterns of human cortical activation during different word production tasks.
Methods: Subdural ECoG electrodes were implanted for clinical purposes in a patient with normal hearing, who had learned sign language as an adult and later developed intractable epilepsy. We measured event-related spectral changes during language tasks with different input and output modalities: Picture naming and word reading (visual inputs), and word repetition (auditory input) were performed with spoken responses (oral-articulatory output) and with signed responses (manual-gestural output). In addition we used a visually guided motor task to map tongue and hand representations independent of language.
Results: Speech and signing differentially activated tongue and hand regions of sensorimotor cortex. Although posterior superior temporal gyrus was activated early during auditory word repetition, picture naming and word reading also activated this region, albeit slightly later, consistent with phonological and/or lexical-semantic processing. In contrast. basal temporal-occipital cortex was activated earlier and with greater magnitude during picture naming and word reading than during word repetition, Suggesting semantic processing or object and word recognition. In all of the tasks, event-related gamma augmentation occurred in more discrete spatial and temporal patterns than event-related alpha suppression.
Conclusions: Event-related alpha suppression and gamma augmentation provide complementary information about task-related cortical activation. This study demonstrates the utility of ECoG spectral analysis for studying the functional anatomy of human language with excellent temporal resolution.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ Hosp, Dept Neurol, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
RP Crone, NE (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ Hosp, Dept Neurol, 600 N Wolfe St,Meyer Bldg,Room 2-147, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
CR Adrian ED, 1934, BRAIN, V57, P355, DOI 10.1093/brain/57.4.355
ALLISON T, 1994, CEREB CORTEX, V4, P544, DOI 10.1093/cercor/4.5.544
BELLUGI U, 1989, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V12, P380, DOI 10.1016/0166-2236(89)90076-3
BENSON DF, 1979, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V4
BOATMAN D, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P269, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1061
BOGEN JE, 1976, ANN NY ACAD SCI, V280, P834, DOI 10.1111/j.1749-6632.1976.tb25546.x
Bookheimer SY, 1995, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V3, P93, DOI 10.1002/hbm.460030206
BRESSLER SL, 1980, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V50, P19, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(80)90319-3
BROWN GDA, 1987, J MEM LANG, V26, P1, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(87)90059-3
Buchel C, 1998, NATURE, V394, P274, DOI 10.1038/28389
BURNSTINE TH, 1990, NEUROLOGY, V40, P966
Chee MWL, 1999, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V7, P15, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-0193(1999)7:1<15::AID-HBM2>3.0.CO;2-6
CREUTZFELDT O, 1989, EXP BRAIN RES, V77, P476, DOI 10.1007/BF00249601
Crone N. E., 1995, Society for Neuroscience Abstracts, V21, P274
Crone NE, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P2271, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.12.2271
Crone NE, 2001, CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V112, P565, DOI 10.1016/S1388-2457(00)00545-9
CRONE NE, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P466
Crone NE, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P2301, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.12.2301
Cronin B, 2001, J DOC, V57, P1
DAMASIO A, 1986, NATURE, V322, P363, DOI 10.1038/322363a0
DEMONET JF, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1753, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1753
ECKHORN R, 1988, BIOL CYBERN, V60, P121, DOI 10.1007/BF00202899
EECKMAN FH, 1990, BRAIN RES, V528, P238, DOI 10.1016/0006-8993(90)91663-2
Fiez JA, 1998, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V95, P914, DOI 10.1073/pnas.95.3.914
FLORENCE SL, 1995, J NEUROSCI, V15, P8093
McGuire PK, 1996, PSYCHOL MED, V26, P29
FRITH CD, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P1137, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(91)90029-8
Gallese V, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P593, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.2.593
Geschwind N., 1969, CONTRIBUTIONS CLIN N
GEVINS A, 1994, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V92, P282
GOODALE MA, 1992, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V15, P20, DOI 10.1016/0166-2236(92)90344-8
Gordon B., 1997, ANOMIA NEUROANATOMIC, P31, DOI 10.1016/B978-012289685-9/50004-1
Grafton ST, 1996, EXP BRAIN RES, V112, P103
GREENBLATT SH, 1983, LOCALIZATION NEUROPS, P323
HART J, 1990, ANN NEUROL, V27, P226, DOI 10.1002/ana.410270303
Hart J, 1998, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V95, P6498, DOI 10.1073/pnas.95.11.6498
Hart J, 2000, NEUROPSY NEUROPSY BE, V13, P1
Heilman KM, 1993, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P279
Heiss WD, 1997, J NEUROL SCI, V145, P213, DOI 10.1016/S0022-510X(96)00252-3
Henry TR, 1998, NEUROLOGY, V50, P787
Herbster AN, 1997, HUM BRAIN MAPP, V5, P84, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-0193(1997)5:2<84::AID-HBM2>3.0.CO;2-I
Hickok G, 1996, NATURE, V381, P699, DOI 10.1038/381699a0
Kaplan E., 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Karbe H, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P108, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1937
Krauss GL, 1996, EPILEPSIA, V37, P476, DOI 10.1111/j.1528-1157.1996.tb00594.x
Kraut M, 1997, NEUROLOGY, V48, P1416
LESSER RP, 1986, NEUROLOGY, V36, P658
LESSER RP, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P275, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.1.275
LESSER RP, 1985, NEUROLOGY, V35, P1760
LESSER RP, 1987, J CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V4, P27, DOI 10.1097/00004691-198701000-00003
LEVELT WJM, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P122, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.98.1.122
Levelt WJM, 1998, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V10, P553, DOI 10.1162/089892998562960
LUDERS H, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P743, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.2.743
Magistretti PJ, 1999, SCIENCE, V283, P496, DOI 10.1126/science.283.5401.496
Martin A, 1996, NATURE, V379, P649, DOI 10.1038/379649a0
MCCARTHY G, 1995, J NEUROSCI, V15, P1080
McGuire PK, 1997, NEUROREPORT, V8, P695, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199702100-00023
MESULAM MM, 1990, ANN NEUROL, V28, P597, DOI 10.1002/ana.410280502
Moore CJ, 1999, NEUROIMAGE, V10, P181, DOI 10.1006/nimg.1999.0450
NAESER MA, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P73
NAESER MA, 1990, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V47, P425
Neville HJ, 1998, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V95, P922, DOI 10.1073/pnas.95.3.922
NOBRE AC, 1995, J NEUROSCI, V15, P1090
NOBRE AC, 1994, NATURE, V372, P260, DOI 10.1038/372260a0
Nudo RJ, 1996, J NEUROSCI, V16, P785
Pantev Christo, 1995, Brain Topography, V7, P321, DOI 10.1007/BF01195258
PASCUALLEONE A, 1994, SCIENCE, V263, P1287, DOI 10.1126/science.8122113
Penfield W, 1937, BRAIN, V60, P389, DOI 10.1093/brain/60.4.389
PETERSEN SE, 1988, NATURE, V331, P585, DOI 10.1038/331585a0
PFURTSCHELLER G, 1994, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V90, P456, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(94)90137-6
PFURTSCHELLER G, 1975, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V38, P93, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(75)90215-1
PFURTSCHELLER G, 1989, J CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V6, P75, DOI 10.1097/00004691-198901000-00003
PFURTSCHELLER G, 1977, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V42, P817, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(77)90235-8
POIZNER H, 1984, AM J PHYSIOL, V246, pR868
POIZNER H, 1993, ANN NY ACAD SCI, V682, P192, DOI 10.1111/j.1749-6632.1993.tb22969.x
Poizner H., 1987, WHAT HANDS REVEAL BR
PONS TP, 1991, SCIENCE, V252, P1857, DOI 10.1126/science.1843843
Price CJ, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P919, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.3.919
Price CJ, 1996, P ROY SOC B-BIOL SCI, V263, P1501, DOI 10.1098/rspb.1996.0219
Pugh KR, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P1221, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.4.1221
Pulvermuller F, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P253, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X9900182X
RAMACHANDRAN VS, 1992, NEUROREPORT, V3, P583, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199207000-00009
Rizzolatti G, 1996, EXP BRAIN RES, V111, P246
Rizzolatti G, 1998, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V21, P188, DOI 10.1016/S0166-2236(98)01260-0
SCHAFFLER L, 1994, EPILEPSIA, V35, P525, DOI 10.1111/j.1528-1157.1994.tb02472.x
SCHLAUG G, 1994, EXP BRAIN RES, V98, P523
SELNES OA, 1985, ANN NEUROL, V17, P549, DOI 10.1002/ana.410170604
SHEER DE, 1966, PSYCHOL REP, V19, P1333
SINGER W, 1993, ANNU REV PHYSIOL, V55, P349, DOI 10.1146/annurev.physiol.55.1.349
Smith CD, 1996, NEUROREPORT, V7, P781, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199602290-00024
Spitzer M, 1998, COGNITIVE BRAIN RES, V6, P309, DOI 10.1016/S0926-6410(97)00020-7
SPITZER M, 1995, NEUROREPORT, V6, P2109, DOI 10.1097/00001756-199511000-00003
TallonBaudry C, 1996, J NEUROSCI, V16, P4240
Toglia M. P., 1978, HDB SEMANTIC WORD NO
VONDERMALSBURG C, 1995, CURR OPIN NEUROBIOL, V5, P520
NR 95
TC 4
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 9
BP 903
EP 926
DI 10.1080/02687030244000383
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 594BX
UT WOS:000178029800006
ER
PT J
AU Peach, RK
AF Peach, RK
TI Treatment for phonological dyslexia targeting regularity effects
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ACCESSING LEXICAL REPRESENTATIONS; SIMULTANEOUS ACTIVATION; DEEP
DYSLEXIA; ALEXIA; MECHANISMS; CONTINUUM; RECOVERY; APHASIA; OUTPUT
AB Background: A treatment programme for an adult case of acquired phonological dyslexia is described. In addition to disproportionate difficulty in reading nonwords and predominately visual errors for real words, this case of phonological dyslexia demonstrated clear regularity effects (fewer irregular than regular words read aloud and regularised pronunciations for irregular words) on testing. Based on Hillis and Caramazza's summation hypothesis (1991, 1995), it was assumed that the participant's difficulty with irregular words arose from an impaired semantic system that produced equal activation of both the target and related lexical representations. With an impaired grapheme to phoneme conversion mechanism (as suggested by his inability to read nonwords), the phonological information associated with the target was insufficient to cause the correct lexical representation to reach threshold from among the alternatives. In this situation, the participant's phonological impairment formed the basis for his difficulty with reading irregular words aloud. The treatment programme for this participant therefore targeted GPC processes to strengthen the phonological information necessary for producing irregular words.
Aims: The study aimed to determine whether the accuracy and promptness of oral reading for irregular words could be improved by targeting grapheme to phoneme conversion processes, and whether any effects would be observed on other standardised reading tasks. Methods & Procedures: The treatment programme focused on improving grapheme to phoneme conversion for irregular words controlled for frequency of occurrence and imageability through repeated exposures to multiple exemplars demonstrating target phonological contrasts. Written production and syllable parsing followed oral productions. A multiple-baseline across-behaviours single-subject design was used to evaluate the effects of the programme.
Outcome & Results: Increased sensitivity to the production of two graphemes in low-frequency conditions was suggested by the participant's performance. Clear treatment effects could not be demonstrated, however, because of ceiling effects and unstable baselines. Improvements in reading comprehension, reading rate, and nonword reading were observed post-treatment. Conclusions: As the theory used to guide this participant's treatment also implicates increased thresholds for the semantic activation of target lexical items as a basis for difficulty in reading irregular words, future work should continue to assess the relative contributions of treating lexical semantic versus GPC processes in these participants. Studies should persist in attempting to circumvent the experimental problems that might arise during the early stages of recovery while continuing to exploit more recent theoretical accounts of reading to identify effective treatments.
C1 Rush Univ, Rush Presbyterian St Lukes Med Ctr, Chicago, IL 60612 USA.
RP Peach, RK (reprint author), Rush Univ, Rush Presbyterian St Lukes Med Ctr, 1653 W Congress Pkwy, Chicago, IL 60612 USA.
CR BEAUVOIS MF, 1979, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V42, P1115, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.42.12.1115
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
COLTHEART M, 1978, DEEP DYSLEXIA
Coltheart M, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P749
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
Ellis A., 1984, READING WRITING DYSL
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P114, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0006
GLOSSER G, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P343
Grayson E, 1997, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V32, P257
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
HILLIS AE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251996
Johnson W., 1963, DIAGNOSTIC METHODS S
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Kendall DL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P587, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249560
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LaPointe L., 1998, READING COMPREHENSIO
MATTHEWS C, 1991, J COMMUN DISORD, V24, P21, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(91)90031-D
Mitchum C. C., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P103, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90003-2
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Patterson K., 1987, ATTENTION PERFORMANC, VXII
Peach RK, 2001, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V10, P29, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360(2001/005)
SCHELL RE, 1972, LETT SOUNDS MANUAL R
Southwood MH, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V76, P18, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2384
Southwood MH, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2046
Wilson M., 1987, MRC PSYCHOLINGUISTIC
NR 26
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 8
BP 779
EP 789
DI 10.1080/02687030244000103
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 581LQ
UT WOS:000177294200001
ER
PT J
AU Ross, KB
Wertz, RT
AF Ross, KB
Wertz, RT
TI Relationships between language-based disability and quality of life in
chronically aphasic adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID OF-LIFE; INDEX; HEALTH
AB Background: A growing consensus among speech-language pathologists that treatment goals should be significant to the consumer and society has spurred clinicians to address stroke survivors' quality of life (QOL) as a possible target for remediation. Use of formal measures to detect decreased QOL presumes that test performance of aphasic patients is different from that of non-brain-injured (NBI) adults. Treatment directed towards decreased QOL presupposes that its symptoms are attributable to a diagnosis of aphasia. Differential performance for chronically aphasic and NBI adults on two QOL measures has been established. However, relationships between residual language and/or communication deficits and QOL have not been confirmed.
Aims: We examined relationships between residual language and/or communication deficits and QOL to determine whether, within NBI adult and chronically aphasic adult groups, there are significant relationships between language impairment and QOL measures; whether there are significant relationships between communication activity limitation and QOL measures; and, whether the strengths of these relationships differ between groups.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 18 NBI controls and 18 adults with chronic aphasia were administered two language impairment tests (WAB, PICA), two communication activity limitation assessments (CADL-2, ASHA FACS), and two QOL measures (WHOQOL-BREF, PWI). Correlation analyses were used to examine relationships between residual language and/or communication deficits and QOL.
Outcome & Results: Although chronically aphasic adults scored significantly lower on all measures than did NBI adults, language-based disability generally was not significantly related with QOL in either group. Within the NBI group, only one language impairment and one QOL measure were significantly related. Within the chronically aphasic group, there were no significant relationships between language impairment and QOL measures, and there were no significant between-groups differences in the strengths of these relationships. Within either group, there were no significant relationships between communication activity limitation and QOL measures. Furthermore, there were no significant between-groups differences in the strengths of these relationships.
Conclusions: The results of this investigation may be interpreted to suggest that decreased QOL in chronically aphasic adults is not closely related with language-based disablement. Thus, speech therapy that directly targets QOL in aphasic patients may not be justified. However, the use of correlational analysis limits the ability to rule out viable, alternative hypotheses or to account for misinterpretation due to measurement error. To examine relationships between language-based disablement, other undetermined factors, and QOL, further study, using larger sample sizes and causal modelling techniques, is recommended.
C1 Carl T Hayden Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, CS 126, Phoenix, AZ 85012 USA.
Tennessee Valley Healthcare Syst, Dept Vet Affairs, Nashville, TN USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN USA.
RP Ross, KB (reprint author), Carl T Hayden Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, CS 126, 650 E Indian Sch Rd, Phoenix, AZ 85012 USA.
CR BERGNER M, 1981, MED CARE, V19, P787, DOI 10.1097/00005650-198108000-00001
Brown M, 1999, MT SINAI J MED, V66, P160
Cohen B., 1996, EXPLAINING PSYCHOL S
DEHAAN R, 1993, STROKE, V24, P1178
DUFFY J, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P47
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
FRATTALI CM, 1998, MEASURING OUTCOMES S, P55
GLASS GV, 1996, STAT METHODS ED PSYC, P355
Goodglass H., 1972, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
IRWIN WH, 2000, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
MCINTOSH KW, 1997, THESIS U COLORADO DE
PAULBROWN D, 2001, UNPUB QUALITY COMMUN
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
ROBINSON BC, 1983, J GERONTOL, V38, P344
ROSENBEK JC, 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC, P53
ROSS KB, 2001, UNPUB DISCRIMINATIVE
ROSS KB, 1999, THESIS VANDERBILT U
SPITZER WO, 1981, J CHRON DIS, V34, P585, DOI 10.1016/0021-9681(81)90058-8
Harper A, 1998, PSYCHOL MED, V28, P551
TOMPKINS CA, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P35
WOLF MM, 1978, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V11, P203, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1978.11-203
WOODDAUPHINEE SL, 1988, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V69, P583
World Health Organization, 2001, ICIDH 2 INT CLASS FU
Orley J, 1996, WORLD HEALTH FORUM, V17, P354
NR 28
TC 16
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 8
BP 791
EP 800
DI 10.1080/02687030244000130
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 581LQ
UT WOS:000177294200002
ER
PT J
AU Park, GH
McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
AF Park, GH
McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
TI Lexical access rate of closed-class elements during auditory sentence
comprehension in adults with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLASS WORDS; TIME; COMPLEXITY; LANGUAGE; CONTEXT; MODEL
AB Background: One hypothesis regarding the underlying impairment in agrammatic comprehension suggests that individuals with this disorder suffer from a reduction in lexical activation of closed-class words and therefore cannot appropriately construct a syntactic frame on which lexical semantic information can be applied (Friederici, 1988). Aims: Given the temporally based hypothesis, this investigation examined the effects of increased inter-word intervals (IWI) following closed-class words on auditory comprehension of various sentence types by individuals with agrammatic comprehension. It was hypothesised that providing a longer temporal window for access and processing of closed-class words would improve sentence structure comprehension.
Methods & Procedures: Twelve adults with aphasia participated in an agent identification task given varying auditory sentence stimuli. Six sentence types and six IWI durations served as independent variable while accuracy and response times were measured.
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that auditory sentence comprehension performance improves when IWIs are increased. However, differences exist among individuals in response to specific IWI durations.
Conclusions: Implications of delayed access rates of closed-class words in agrammatic comprehension are discussed.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
Va Pittsburgh Hlth Care Syst, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Passavant Hosp, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Park, GH (reprint author), NIDCD, NIH, Language Sect, Bldg 10,Room 3C-716, Bethesda, MD 20892 USA.
CR ARVEDSON JC, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V15, P57
Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P246, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90134-8
BRADLEY D. C., 1980, BIOL STUDIES MENTAL, P269
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1984, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V27, P323
Brown CM, 1999, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V11, P261, DOI 10.1162/089892999563382
BROWN JW, 1973, APHASIA A PICK
Caplan D, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P542
CAPLAN D, 1995, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGI
FERREIRA F, 1986, J MEM LANG, V25, P348, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(86)90006-9
FRAZIER L, 1978, COGNITION, V6, P291, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(78)90002-1
FRIEDERICI AD, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P259, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1048
FRIEDERICI AD, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P279, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248924
FRIEDERICI AD, 1983, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V21, P351, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(83)90021-0
FRIEDERICI AD, 1985, COGNITION, V19, P133, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(85)90016-2
GARRETT M, 1978, HDB SENSORY PHYSL, V8
Garrett MF., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION
GLEASON JB, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P451, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80083-6
Goodglass H, 1972, Cortex, V8, P191
GREENBERG SN, 1991, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V17, P1051, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.17.6.1051
GRODZINSKY Y, 1988, LANG SPEECH, V31, P115
HAARMANN HJ, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P493, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1028
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
King JW, 1998, NEUROSCI LETT, V244, P61, DOI 10.1016/S0304-3940(98)00140-2
KOLK H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P282, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1049
KOLK HHJ, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P347, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252666
KORIAT A, 1993, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V19, P34, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.19.1.34
LASKY EZ, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P386, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90034-1
LILES BZ, 1975, J COMMUN DISORD, V8, P221, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(75)90015-5
LUKATELA K, 1991, AC APH OCT 13 15 ROM
MCNEIL M, 1999, CLIN APH C 4 8 JUN K
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
NEVILLE H J, 1992, Cerebral Cortex, V2, P244, DOI 10.1093/cercor/2.3.244
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
SALVATORE A, 1976, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
Schmauder AR, 1996, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V25, P443
Swinney D, 1989, J Cogn Neurosci, V1, P25, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1989.1.1.25
SWINNEY DA, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P132, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90044-9
ter Keurs M, 1999, BRAIN, V122, P839, DOI 10.1093/brain/122.5.839
Zurif E., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V1
NR 40
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 8
BP 801
EP 814
DI 10.1080/02687030244000158
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 581LQ
UT WOS:000177294200003
ER
PT J
AU McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Park, GH
Fossett, TRD
Brodsky, MB
AF McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Park, GH
Fossett, TRD
Brodsky, MB
TI Increasing the sensitivity of the Story Retell Procedure for the
discrimination of normal elderly subjects from persons with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONNECTED SPEECH; MEMORY; ADULTS; INFORMATION
AB Background: Clinicians have long recognised the need for assessing language production at multiple levels of complexity and at impairment, participation, and activity levels. Methods for the elicitation of connected spoken language have taken many forms, typically selected with a balance between validly sampling linguistic performance, and reliability and economy of the sampling and scoring procedures. A Story Retell Procedure (SRP) has been proposed as a preferred method for achieving valid, reliable, and economic assessment of connected language (Doyle et al., 2000), and an information unit (IU) metric has been developed for validly and economically capturing important linguistic aspects of the retelling (McNeil, Doyle, Fossett, Park & Goda, 2001).
Aims: In keeping with the goal of making assessment procedures as efficient and economic as possible, a study was undertaken to investigate the refinement of the IU metric for increasing the sensitivity of the SRP as an instrument for the detection of connected paragraph-level language production deficits in persons with aphasia. This metric involved the calculation of the percentage of lUs (%IU) produced relative to the time taken to produce them (%IU/Min). Methods & Procedures: A total of 15 persons with aphasia, and 31 normal control individuals without a communication disorder served as participants for this study. Subjects heard, and immediately retold each of 12 stories originally taken from the Discourse Comprehension Test (Brookshire & Nicholas, 1997). The retellings were scored using the procedures outlined by McNeil et al. (2001) with the addition of the %IU calculated over the time of the retelling. Comparisons between subject groups and groups stratified by age, among SRP forms, between scoring methods (%IU vs %IU/Min.), and group misclassification by scoring method were made.
Outcome & Results: Application of the %IU/Min with the SRP yielded equivalence among alternate forms as evidenced by non-significant differences and high correlation coefficients among the SRP forms for persons with aphasia. The %IU/Min also decreased the percentage of misclassified aphasic and normal individuals compared to the %IU measure. Older normal subjects were misclassified as aphasic with greater frequency compared to the younger normal subjects.
Conclusions: The %IU/Min is a more sensitive metric than the %IU in differentiating individuals with aphasia from older normal controls.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Passavants Hosp, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
Va Pittsburgh Hlth Care Syst, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP McNeil, MR (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorder, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
CR ARVEDSON JC, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V15, P57
Balota DA, 2000, OXFORD HDB MEMORY, P395
Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
Berndt R. S., 2000, QUANTITATIVE PRODUCT
BRODSKY MB, 2000, AC APH MONTR CAN
Brookshire R. H., 1997, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
Carlesimo GA, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P155
Chafe W. L., 1980, ADV DISCOURSE PROCES, V3, P9
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
Doyle PJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P537
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Korsnes MS, 1996, ACTA PSYCHOL, V94, P133, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(95)00056-9
KORSNES MS, 1993, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V76, P1011
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
McNeil M. R., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P76, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0404.76
MCNEIL MR, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P991
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P636
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Ulatowska HK, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P619, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249562
ULATOWSKA HK, 1980, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V9, P17
WAMBAUGH JL, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P343
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
NR 24
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 8
BP 815
EP 822
DI 10.1080/02687030244000284
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 581LQ
UT WOS:000177294200004
ER
PT J
AU Irwin, WH
Wertz, RT
Avent, JR
AF Irwin, WH
Wertz, RT
Avent, JR
TI Relationships among language impairment, functional communication, and
pragmatic performance in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ADULT APHASIA
AB Background: Severity of and change in aphasia may be indexed by a language impairment measure or a functional communication measure, including assessment of pragmatic performance. The relationship of severity of and change in aphasia between different measures has not been clearly established.
Aims: Performance on measures of language impairment, Porch Index of Communicative Abilities (PICA); functional communication, Rating of Functional Performance (RFP); and pragmatic performance, Pragmatic Protocol (PP) was examined to determine whether there are significant relationships among severity of performance deficits and among change in performance on each measure. The research questions were: Are there significant relationships among aphasic patients' language impairment, functional communication, and pragmatic performance at 4, 15, 26, 37, and 48 weeks postonset? Are there significant relationships among change scores between 4-15, 15-26, 26-37, 37-48, and 4-48 weeks postonset?
Methods & Procedures: A total of 20 adults who were aphasic subsequent to a first, single thromboembolic stroke were administered the PICA, the RFP, and the PP at 4 weeks postonset and every 1 1 weeks thereafter during the first year postonset. A priori predictions about the relationships between measures were made, and correlational analyses were used to examine the relationships among measures. Partial correlations and comparisons of correlation coefficients were also employed.
Outcomes & Results: Severity of both pragmatic performance and functional communication were significantly related with language impairment. Severity of pragmatic performance and functional communication were significantly related only at 4 weeks postonset. Correlations between measures of severity were not significantly different from each other. Correlations between change scores on repeated test administrations were significant only for the RFP and PICA between 4-15 weeks and 4-48 weeks.
Conclusions: Results suggest that while a measure of language impairment may be significantly related with severity of functional communication and pragmatic performance, severity of pragmatic performance is significantly related with severity of functional communication only at 1 month postonset. Moreover, change on any one of the measures is generally not significantly related with change on the other measures. The use of correlational analysis to determine whether different assessments measure different constructs in aphasia is discussed, and alternative methods of analysis are presented.
C1 Dept Vet Affairs Tennessee Valley Healthcare Syst, Nashville, TN USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN USA.
Calif State Univ Hayward, Hayward, CA 94542 USA.
RP Irwin, WH (reprint author), VA Tennessee Valley Healthcare Syst, Audiol & Speech Pathol Serv 126, 1310 24th Ave S, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
CR ATEN JL, 1986, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P266
ATEN JL, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P292
Avent JR, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P207, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00014-1
Avent JR, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P253, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248411
BLOMERT L, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P307, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249085
Bloom RL, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P11, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00002-5
Chapman SB, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P55, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00005-0
Chwat S., 1981, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P212
Davis G. A., 1993, SURVEY ADULT APHASIA
DUFFY J, 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P48
FLOWERS CR, 1979, APHASIA APRAXIA AGNO, V1, P18
Frattali Carol M., 1998, Seminars in Speech and Language, V19, P209, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064045
Holland Audrey L., 1998, Seminars in Speech and Language, V19, P249, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064048
HOLLAND A, 1999, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
HOLLAND AL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P50
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
Holland AL, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, pS27
Horner J, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P135
Howell D. C., 1992, STAT METHODS PSYCHOL
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Linebaugh C. W., 1978, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P304
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
Lorch MP, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P103, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00008-6
MANOCHIOPINIG S, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249489
Murray L. L., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P55
Newhoff Marilyn, 1997, P250
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
PRUTTING CA, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P105
Ross KB, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P113, DOI 10.1080/026870399402235
Sarno MT, 1969, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
STUDEBAKER GA, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P455
TAYLOR M L, 1965, Arch Phys Med Rehabil, V46, P101
ULATOWSKA H K, 1989, Seminars in Speech and Language, V10, P298, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064270
WERTZ RT, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P580
World Health Organization, 1999, ICIDH 2 INT CLASS FU
World Health Organization, 1980, INT CLASS IMP DIS HA
NR 36
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 8
BP 823
EP 835
DI 10.1080/02687030244000086
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 581LQ
UT WOS:000177294200005
ER
PT J
AU Simmons-Mackie, N
Code, C
Armstrong, E
Stiegler, L
Elman, RJ
AF Simmons-Mackie, N
Code, C
Armstrong, E
Stiegler, L
Elman, RJ
TI What is aphasia? Results of an international survey
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Background: Although the literature implies that there is limited public awareness of aphasia, direct data have been lacking.
Aims: Therefore, a survey was undertaken to sample public awareness of aphasia.
Methods & Procedures: A face-to-face survey of individuals in public places in England, the USA, and Australia was undertaken. A total of 978 individuals were surveyed. Data were analysed to determine the number of informants who had "heard of aphasia" and the number with "basic knowledge of aphasia". In addition, characteristics of informants were analysed.
Outcomes & Results: Of the individuals surveyed, 133 said they had heard of aphasia (13.6%), but only 53 (5.4%) met the criterion of having "basic knowledge of aphasia".
Conclusions: These findings lend support to the notion that the public lacks awareness or understanding of aphasia. As public awareness can affect funding, quality of services, and public acceptance of individuals with a disorder, public awareness and advocacy campaigns are needed.
C1 SE Louisiana Univ, Hammond, LA 70402 USA.
Univ Exeter, Exeter EX4 4QJ, Devon, England.
Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
Macquarie Univ, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
Aphasia Ctr Calif, Oakland, CA USA.
RP Simmons-Mackie, N (reprint author), 59020 Highway 433, Slidell, LA 70460 USA.
CR BOJORQUEZ J, 1998, NAPLES DAILY NE 1208
BREAKEY L, 2000, ASHA SPECIAL INTERES, V10
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC, P49
Code Chris, 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P19, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064006
Code C, 2001, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V36, P41
Elman RJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P455
Garcia LJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P269
HELMESTABROOKS N, 2000, ASHA SPECIAL INTERES, V10
Kagan A., 2000, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
LUCAS L, 2000, ASHA SPECIAL INTERES, V10, P13
MUSSON N, 2000, ASHA SPECIAL INTERES, V10, P4
*NAT ALL MENT ILL, 1995, GAPS EX PUBL UND BIP
*NAT MENT HLTH ASS, 2000, FACTSH MHIC MENT ILL
*NAT STROK ASS, 2000, BRAIN ATT STAT
National Aphasia Association, 1988, IMP APH PAT FAM RES
Office of Population Censuses and Surveys, 1980, CLASS OCC
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
Speakability, 2000, PHON SURV
NR 18
TC 30
Z9 32
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 8
BP 837
EP 848
DI 10.1080/02687030244000185
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 581LQ
UT WOS:000177294200006
ER
PT J
AU Law, SP
Cheng, MY
AF Law, SP
Cheng, MY
TI Production of grammatical morphemes in Cantonese aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCHOLOGY; QUANTITATIVE-ANALYSIS; SENTENCE PRODUCTION;
AGRAMMATIC APHASIA; SYNTACTIC DEFICITS; BROCAS APHASIA; COMPREHENSION;
MORPHOLOGY; FLUENT; SPEECH
AB Background: The manifestation of impaired production of closed-class morphemes in Chinese aphasia has been examined in recent years (Lu, 1994; Packard, 1990, 1993; Tzeng, Chen, Hung, 1991; Yiu & Worrall, 1996). However, these studies employed tasks that either allowed the patients to use avoidance strategies to conceal their impairment or modelled the target morphemes and thus provided cues to the patient. Hence, a contextually highly constrained task was used in this study.
Aims: This study aimed at confirming previous observations regarding continuity across clinical types in grammatical morpheme production, dissociable performances among markers of the same morpheme category and among homophonous functors serving different functions, and to identify factors determining the accessibility of grammatical morphemes.
Methods & Procedures: The Cloze test without modelling of target morphemes was employed. A wide range of functors were examined including: aspect markers; negative markers; classifiers with sub-types of verbal, sortal, container, and collective classifiers; pronouns encompassing personal, predicative, and adverbial pronouns; coverbs; structural particles including the nominative, adjectival, and adverbial particles, and one modal particle; and structural suffixes including one associated with descriptive complements and one with resultative complements. Six fluent and four non-fluent Cantonese-speaking aphasic patients were involved. They suffered either a head trauma or a unilateral left CVA at least 6 months prior to the first test session.
Outcomes & Results: The main findings were largely consistent with previous reports: (1) Pronouns, coverbs, structural and modal particles, and structural suffixes presented greater difficulty to the patients than aspect markers, negative markers and classifiers. (2) Dissociations in performance were found among different members of the same category and between homophonous morphemes serving different functions. (3) Performances of the fluent and non-fluent groups differed quantitatively rather than qualitatively, with better performance on all categories by the fluent group. (4) Neither substitutions nor omissions dominated the error patterns of either aphasia group.
Conclusions: The results confirm previous observations that the difference between fluent and non-fluent aphasic patients with regard to the production of grammatical morphemes is non-categorical, and that morphemes of the same category and homophonous markers of different functions may present different degrees of difficulty to the patients. Furthermore, factors including global vs local relationships, conceptual complexity, semantic value, frequency of occurrence, and optionality of occurrence may help determine the relative accessibility of functors.
C1 Univ Hong Kong, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, Peoples R China.
RP Law, SP (reprint author), Univ Hong Kong, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, Peoples R China.
RI Law, Sam Po/A-3162-2010
CR BADECKER W, 1985, COGNITION, V20, P97, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(85)90049-6
BATES E, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P545
BAUM SR, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P327, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90021-7
Berndt R. S., 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P221
Bird H, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P187, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00006-1
BUTTERWORTH B, 1987, COGNITION, V26, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90012-6
CARAMAZZA A, 1986, BRAIN COGNITION, V5, P41, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(86)90061-8
CARAMAZZA A, 1992, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V4, P80, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1992.4.1.80
DEBLESER R, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V4, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252039
Goodglass H., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V1, P237
Goodglass H., 1968, DEV APPL PSYCHOLINGU, P177
Grodzinsky Y, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P134, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2050
GRODZINSKY Y, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P555, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90174-Y
Heeschen C., 1985, AGRAMMATISM, P207
Hesketh A, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P49, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248398
KOLK HHJ, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P347, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252666
LAW SP, 2000, HKCAC HONG KONG CANT
LEE SF, 1995, GWONGZAU FONGJIN JIN
LU L, 1994, THESIS BOSTON U US
MARTIN RC, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P196, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90102-1
MATTHEWS S, 1994, CANTONESE COMPREHENS, P115
Menn L., 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C
MICELI G, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P65, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90056-1
MICELI G, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V35, P24, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90100-9
MICELI G, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P447, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90079-5
Miceli G., 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C, P717
NESPOULOUS JL, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P273, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90069-7
Packard J., 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C, P1191
Packard J., 1993, LINGUISTIC INVESTIGA
Rochon E, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P193, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2285
Saffran E., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SI KS, 1995, JYUJIN JINGAU, V1, P114
TYLER LK, 1989, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V6, P333, DOI 10.1080/02643298908253423
TZENG OJL, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P184, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90152-Q
VONSTOCKERT TR, 1976, CORTEX, V12, P49
YIU EML, 1996, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V1, P105
YIU EML, 1992, J NEUROLINGUIST, V7, P374
ZHU DX, 1984, YUFA JIANGYI
NR 39
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 7
BP 693
EP 714
DI 10.1080/02687040143000807
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 564LM
UT WOS:000176315900002
ER
PT J
AU Garcia, JM
Garrett, KL
Pimentel, JT
Garcia, RG
AF Garcia, JM
Garrett, KL
Pimentel, JT
Garcia, RG
TI Clinical services for aphasia: A survey of university clinics
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID DISCHARGE; PLATEAU
AB Background: University speech and hearing clinics are an essential component of most graduate students' clinical training (ASHA, 1985). In addition, they provide comprehensive clinical services to a diverse clientele, including individuals with aphasia. University clinics may provide an important service-delivery option in the continuum of care for individuals with aphasia particularly in light of service-delivery challenges created by changes in health care reimbursement in the USA.
Aims: The purpose of this survey research was to investigate the role of university speech and hearing clinics in the United States in the management of aphasia. A specific aim was to determine the nature of the aphasia clientele, reasons for referral, types of therapy programmes, and other issues related to the delivery of clinical services to individuals with aphasia in university speech and hearing clinics.
Methods & Procedures: A 16-item survey was mailed to clinic directors of 241 university training programmes in the United States. The data were collected from autumn of 1997 through spring of 1998.
Outcomes & Results: Responses were received from 133 programmes, representing a 55.2% response rate. Data are presented from 126 speech and hearing clinics in the USA that reported outpatient clinical services for people with aphasia. Survey results showed that the typical profile of a person referred for clinical service was someone with nonfluent aphasia in the moderate-to-severe range of impairment who was over 6 months post-onset of injury. Survey findings also indicated that many individuals with aphasia had exhausted their rehabilitation dollars at acute-level facilities and were subsequently referred to university clinics by a speech-language pathologist or a friend or family member. Almost half (48%) received clinical services for 1-2 years, and the majority of university clinics provided clinical services at a relatively low cost.
Conclusions: University training programmes varied in their number and type of clinical services provided to people with aphasia. Overall, programmes with more diverse clinical services appeared to assess or treat a greater number of individuals with aphasia in their university clinics. In addition, many university programmes integrated clinical services within their communities through activities such as support groups. The results from this survey study suggested that university speech and hearing clinics are a legitimate component of the "continuum of care'', particularly for people with chronic aphasia.
C1 Kansas State Univ, Manhattan, KS 66506 USA.
Duquesne Univ, Pittsburgh, PA 15219 USA.
Eastern Washington Univ, Cheney, WA 99004 USA.
RP Garcia, JM (reprint author), Kansas State Univ, 303 Justin, Manhattan, KS 66506 USA.
CR *ASHA, 1985, ASHA, V27, P57
ATEN J, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P299
CORNETT BS, 2001, PROFESSIONAL ISSUES, P123
Elman R. J., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P115
ELMAN RJ, 1999, GROUP TREATMENT NEUR, P3
Elman RJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P227, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249450
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
FRATTALI CM, 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA, P67
GARCIA J, 1995, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
GARRETT K, 1998, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
GOLPER LC, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P194
Hersh D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P207, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249447
HOLLAND A, 1994, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V3, P34
HOLLAND AL, 1992, NIDCD MONOGRAPH, V2, P147
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
Lyon J, 1992, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V1, P7
Marshall R. C., 1997, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V6, P5
Simmons-Mackie N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P231, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249451
NR 18
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 7
BP 715
EP 726
DI 10.1080/02687030143000852
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 564LM
UT WOS:000176315900003
ER
PT J
AU Mayer, JF
Murray, LL
AF Mayer, JF
Murray, LL
TI Approaches to the treatment of alexia in chronic aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WORKING-MEMORY; ATTENTION; COMPREHENSION; LANGUAGE; INDIVIDUALS;
DYSLEXIA; READERS; ADULTS
AB Background: Reading problems are a common consequence of brain damage, whether as an isolated symptom or part of an aphasic syndrome. Despite the prevalence of acquired alexia, accurate and reliable assessment and treatment strategies have not yet been definitively identified. Furthermore, a growing volume of research has documented generalised cognitive deficits (separate from language-specific deficits) in individuals with acquired disorders of spoken or written language. Little to no data exist regarding whether addressing those deficits (e. g., attention and working memory) might facilitate reading abilities.
Aims: The purposes of the current study were to determine the following: (1) Whether a variation of a text-level reading treatment, modified to address comprehension, would have a specific rehabilitative effect with a mildly aphasic and alexic patient. (2) Whether a working memory treatment would generalise to improve the cognitive processes (working memory and attention) necessary for decoding and comprehending high-level text. (3) Which treatment, the specific reading programme or generalised cognitive protocol, would yield a greater positive effect on reading speed and comprehension accuracy.
Methods & Procedures: A cognitive neuropsychological analysis of deficit patterns in a subject with acquired alexia was utilised to identify two possible sources of reading difficulty: (1) diminished lexical-semantic abilities for decoding and analysing complex orthographic stimuli, and (2) deficits in attention and working memory. Based on this pretreatment analysis, two treatment protocols were implemented and compared via a single subject, alternating treatment design. The first was a variation of Multiple Oral Reading (MOR; Beeson, 1998), a text-level reading treatment, and the second was an experimental cognitive treatment, Sequenced Exercises for Working Memory (SEW), created to address cognitive components relevant to reading disorders.
Outcomes & Results: Both approaches yielded within-treatment positive effects. Probes indicated improved reading rates with little to no improvement in comprehension. Neither treatment effected greater or more rapid change than the other. Post-treatment testing revealed modest improvements in reading comprehension, processing efficiency, and working memory abilities.
Conclusions: Results are discussed in terms of cognitive neuropsychological theories of reading, possible treatment alternatives, and the need for a multi-factorial model of reading, to extend the single-word models postulated by current theories. Without an adequate model, current reading assessments inadequately depict the nature of high-level reading impairments. This allows clinicians limited resources from which to document and treat such deficits.
C1 Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
RP Mayer, JF (reprint author), Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
CR Beeson P. M., 1998, CLIN DECISION MAKING, P153
Beeson PM, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P621
BRADLEY VA, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V22, P292, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90095-6
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
Caspari I, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P205, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0970
Conway TW, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P608
Crosson B, 1999, BRAIN COGNITION, V40, P414, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1999.1088
DANEMAN M, 1980, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V19, P450, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(80)90312-6
Daneman M., 1987, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P57
DOWHOWER SL, 1987, READ RES QUART, V22, P389, DOI 10.2307/747699
*ED TEST SERV, 1998, GRE BIG BOOK PRACT T
HANLON R, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P317
Harris JL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P603
HOLLAND AL, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P275
KAPLAN HI, 1998, SYNOPSIS PSYCHIAT, P90
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LESSER R, 1999, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P1
LEVY BA, 1995, READING LANGUAGE PRO, P273
MCCARTHY RA, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P214
Murray LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P91, DOI 10.1080/026870399402226
Murray LL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P213
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Perfetti C., 1999, NEUROCOGNITION LANGU, P167
Robertson IH, 1994, TEST EVERYDAY ATTENT
SHALLICE T, 1977, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V15, P31, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(77)90112-9
Sohlberg M, 1986, ATTENTION PROCESS TR
Steinman SB, 1998, OPTOMETRY VISION SCI, V75, P674, DOI 10.1097/00006324-199809000-00023
Swanson HL, 1997, J EDUC PSYCHOL, V89, P128, DOI 10.1037/0022-0663.89.1.128
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
TSENG C, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V89, P276
VACCA RT, 1989, CONTENT AREA READING, P35
VALLAR G, 1992, CORTEX, V28, P383
WEBB W, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P446
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
WHYTE J, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P99, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251969
Wiederholt J.L., 1986, GRAY ORAL READING TE
NR 38
TC 19
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 7
BP 727
EP 743
DI 10.1080/02687030143000870
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 564LM
UT WOS:000176315900004
ER
PT J
AU Hopper, T
Holland, A
Rewega, M
AF Hopper, T
Holland, A
Rewega, M
TI Conversational coaching: Treatment outcomes and future directions
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APHASIA; PARTNERS; ADULTS
AB Background: Conversational coaching involves teaching communication strategies to individuals with aphasia and their spouses. Strategies are chosen by the couple and are taught and practised in the context of a conversation. Although strategy training has been explored in previous research studies, many questions regarding treatment implementation and outcomes remain unanswered.
Aims: The aims of this study were to investigate the effects of conversational coaching and to determine variables for consideration in future efficacy research of this treatment technique.
Methods & Procedures: Two couples participated in a single-subject experimental design across subjects. Mr and Mrs Y were 76 and 70 years old, and Mr and Mrs G were 41 and 39 years old, respectively. During baseline sessions, the individual with aphasia watched a videotaped story about a real-life event and then attempted to share the content of that story with his spouse. During treatment sessions, the same procedure was used, but the clinician intervened and coached both participants in the use of selected verbal and non-verbal strategies to improve the quality of the conversation. The primary dependent measure in the study was the number of main concepts successfully communicated during conversations.
Outcome measures included pre/post treatment probes, standardised testing using the Communications Activities of Daily Living - Second Edition (CADL-2; Holland, Frattali, & Fromm, 1999) and social validation ratings. Outcome and Results: Experimental data were variable for both dyads. However, positive outcomes were obtained. First, the percentage of main concepts successfully communicated was significantly greater during post-treatment probes than during pre-treatment probes for both dyads. Second, Mr Y demonstrated significant improvement in his total CADL-2 scores following treatment. Third, individuals who judged the quality of pre- and post-treatment conversations understood more of the conversation between both couples during post-treatment probe conversations than during pre- treatment ones.
Conclusions: Positive outcomes, including participants' perceptions of treatment effects, support further experimental study of this technique. Strategy selection, stimuli for conversational topics, and procedural specificity of the intervention were variables identified as necessitating further research in a controlled experiment design.
C1 Univ Arizona, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Hopper, T (reprint author), Fac Rehabil Med, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, 3-81 Corbett Hall, Edmonton, AB, Canada.
CR American Speech-Language-Hearing Association, 1997, GUID AUD SCREEN
Boles L., 1997, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V2, P43
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
Holland A. L., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P197, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90007-6
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
HOPPER T, 1999, ANN CLIN APH C KEY W
Kagan A., 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P811
KAGAN A, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO
Kagan A, 2001, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V44, P624, DOI 10.1044/1092-4388(2001/051)
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LYON J, 1997, AGING COMMUNICATION
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P636
ROGERS M, 2001, ANN CLIN APH C SANT
NR 15
TC 57
Z9 59
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 7
BP 745
EP 761
DI 10.1080/02687030244000059
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 564LM
UT WOS:000176315900005
ER
PT J
AU Marshall, RC
Karow, CM
Freed, DB
Babcock, P
AF Marshall, RC
Karow, CM
Freed, DB
Babcock, P
TI Effects of personalised cue form on the learning of subordinate category
names by aphasic and non-brain-damaged subjects
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FACILITATION; MEMORY; RECALL; DEPTH
AB Background. Personalised cueing is a training method designed to facilitate naming of unknown, realistic visual stimuli (dog breed names). Creation of a personalised cue is similar to the use of mnemonic devices by normal individuals to remember important bits of information. Theoretical support for the method comes from Craik and Lockhart's depth-of-processing model of memory (1972). Several studies have shown that training with personalised cueing methods results in significantly higher levels of long-term naming accuracy than when subjects are trained with phonological cueing techniques. However, it has also been observed that all individuals are not equally proficient in creating personalised cues and that the nature of the information in personalised cues varies markedly from individual to individual.
Aims. The objective of this study was to determine if the type of information contained in a personalised cue (cue form) affects the degree to which these cues facilitate learning of subordinate category names (dogs).
Methods & Procedures. 600 personalised cues developed by 15 non-brain-damaged (NBD) and 15 aphasic individuals to learn the names of unknown dog breeds (e. g., Maltese) were examined. The cues were classified as one of five cue forms by three judges on two separate occasions approximately 1 month apart. Examination of intra-judge agreements for the cue forms yielded a total of 251 cues for analysis of cue form effects (127 aphasic; 124 non-brain-damaged).
Outcomes and Results. To examine the effects of cue form on facilitation of naming, weighted recall scores were calculated for each cue based on accurate naming on probes one week, one month, and 6 months after training. Kruskal-Wallis analysis of variance by ranks (KWANOVA) was used to determine the effects of cue form on learning of the subordinate category names. Significant cue forms effects were found for aphasic but not non-brain-damaged participant cues. Mann-Whitney post-hoc comparisons of aphasic cues revealed that cues containing semantic information had significantly higher mean rankings than those containing phonological information and those containing a combination of phonological and semantic information.
Conclusions. Two implications arise from the study with respect to the use of personalised cueing as a clinical procedure. One is that it may be necessary to exert some limited control over the creative process of developing a personalised cue to ensure the inclusion of semantic information in the cue itself. A second is that individuals who have problems accessing semantic information may require some training before attempting to create personalised cues. In such instances, it would be important to obtain information about the source of the individual's anomic deficits through careful testing before embarking on a training programme featuring personalised cueing.
C1 Univ Kentucky, Dept Rehabil Sci, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
Univ Rhode Isl, Kingston, RI 02881 USA.
RP Marshall, RC (reprint author), Univ Kentucky, Dept Rehabil Sci, Room 110B CAHP Bldg,121 Washington Ave, Lexington, KY 40536 USA.
CR Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P94
Coelho CA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P133
CRAIK FIM, 1975, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V104, P268, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.104.3.268
CRAIK FIM, 1972, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V11, P671, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(72)80001-X
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
FISHER RP, 1977, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V3, P701, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.3.6.701
FREED D, 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P164
FREED DB, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1081
Freed DB, 1998, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V87, P795
MARSHALL R, 1994, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V22, P235
MARSHALL R, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P77
MARSHALL RC, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P567, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249492
Marshall RC, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P585, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000050
Marshall RC, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P438
MOSCOVITCH M, 1976, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V15, P447, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(76)90040-2
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
NR 16
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 7
BP 763
EP 771
DI 10.1080/02687030244000040
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 564LM
UT WOS:000176315900006
ER
PT J
AU Ruigendijk, E
Bastiaanse, R
AF Ruigendijk, E
Bastiaanse, R
TI Two characteristics of agrammatic speech: Omission of verbs and omission
of determiners, is there a relation?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
ID APHASICS
AB Background: Telegraphic speech of individuals with Broca's aphasia has been described as lacking verbs and determiners (and other function words). In theoretical linguistics, it has been suggested that a determiner cannot be realised in sentences without a (finite) verb. This led to the hypothesis that determiner omission in agrammatic speech is related to verb omission: once a verb is used, determiners will be produced.
Aims: The aim of the present study is to show that determiner omission in agrammatic speech production is related to verb production problems.
Methods & Procedures: The free speech production of 10 German agrammatic speakers was analysed. Additionally, they were presented with two experimental tasks: one in which a determiner and noun should be inserted in a sentence, and one in which a sentence should be produced, with the lexical verb provided. It was analysed whether the poor determiner production in free speech improved when the verb was given (as in the experiments).
Outcomes & Results: All participants omitted verbs and determiners in free speech. On the experimental tasks, however, when they were presented with a verb, determiner production increased significantly.
Conclusion: The results show that the production of determiners strongly depends on the production of verbs. Therefore, the lack of verbs and the lack of determiners in agrammatic speech production cannot be seen separately: the impaired use of determiners is not caused by poor production of function words in general, but by problems with the production of verbs.
C1 Univ Utrecht, Uil OTS, NL-3512 JK Utrecht, Netherlands.
Univ Groningen, NL-9700 AB Groningen, Netherlands.
Rehabil Ctr Het Roesingh, Enschede, Netherlands.
RP Ruigendijk, E (reprint author), Univ Utrecht, Uil OTS, Trans 10, NL-3512 JK Utrecht, Netherlands.
CR BASTIAANSE R, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1001
Bastiaanse R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249463
Bastiaanse R, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P165, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1972
Chomsky N., 1995, MINIMALIST PROGRAM
DeBleser R, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P175, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00007-3
EDWARDS S, 1994, LANGUAGE TESTING, V11, P99
Friedmann N., 2000, GRAMMATICAL DISORDER, P152
Grimshaw Jane, 1990, STUDIES GERMAN GRAMM
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Kim M, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P1, DOI 10.1006/brin.2000.2315
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Ruigendijk E, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P962
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
TESAK J, 1991, LINGUISTICS, V29, P1111, DOI 10.1515/ling.1991.29.6.1111
VANZONNEVELD R, 1994, KLEINE SYNTAXIS NEDE
VERMEULEN J, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P252, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90064-3
NR 16
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 383
EP 395
DI 10.1080/02687030244000310
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200002
ER
PT J
AU Baumgaertner, A
Tompkins, CA
AF Baumgaertner, A
Tompkins, CA
TI Testing contrasting accounts of word meaning activation in Broca's
aphasia: Experiences from a cross-modal semantic priming study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
ID SENTENCE COMPREHENSION; LEXICAL AMBIGUITIES; AMBIGUOUS WORDS;
ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; AUTOMATIC ACCESS; WERNICKE APHASIA; INDIVIDUALS;
DECISION; CONTEXT; TIME
AB Background: Disordered sentence comprehension in Broca's aphasia may be due in part to deficient lexical-semantic processes. Three conflicting accounts, "reduced activation" (Milberg, Blumstein, Katz, Gershberg, & Brown, 1995), "slowed activation" (Swinney, Zurif, & Nicol, 1989), and "normal activation" (Hagoort, 1993; Swaab, Brown, & Hagoort, 1998), are reviewed, and controversial issues related to testing each account are identified.
Aims: Based on these considerations, we designed a cross-modal lexical decision (CMLD) experiment to test the three accounts.
Methods & Procedures: We auditorily presented polarised ambiguities which were embedded in sentence contexts to ten healthy older participants and seven individuals with aphasia. The contextual constraint was established by biasing towards characteristic semantic features of the alternate meanings of the ambiguous words. Lexical decision probe words were visually presented for 2750 ins, beginning at the acoustic offset of the ambiguous words.
Outcomes & Results: A repeated measures analysis of covariance (adjusting for lexical decision reaction times to the ambiguous words in isolation) evidenced no priming effects for the control group. Hence, no conclusions could be drawn about the performance of participants with aphasia. The surprising finding for the control group is discussed in light of potential caveats associated with the dual-task nature of the CMLD paradigm.
Conclusions: Based on our findings we propose a number of parameters that should be specified in order to validly examine persons with aphasia with on-line tasks such as cross-modal lexical decision.
C1 Univ Hamburg, Hosp Eppendorf, Neurol Klin, D-20246 Hamburg, Germany.
Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Baumgaertner, A (reprint author), Univ Hamburg, Hosp Eppendorf, Neurol Klin, Haus B,Martinistr 52, D-20246 Hamburg, Germany.
CR Azuma T, 1997, J MEM LANG, V36, P484, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1997.2502
Balota DA, 1999, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V5, P626
Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P301, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90023-2
Carroll J. B., 1971, AM HERITAGE WORD FRE
Copland DA, 2000, CORTEX, V36, P601, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70541-0
Del Toro JF, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P925
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
FERREIRA F, 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC, P33
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GROSJEAN F, 1980, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V28, P267, DOI 10.3758/BF03204386
Hagoort P, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P627, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.2.627
Hagoort P, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P287, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1849
HAGOORT P, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P189, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1043
Hillert D, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P95, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2053
Kellas G., 1991, UNDERSTANDING WORD S, P47
Kiran S, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P127
MARSLENWILSON W, 1984, ATTENTION PERFORM, V10, P125
MCKOON G, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P1219, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.20.5.1219
MILBERG W, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P138, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90065-4
MILBERG W, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P33, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.1.33
MILBERG W, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P371, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90086-9
ONIFER W, 1981, MEM COGNITION, V9, P225, DOI 10.3758/BF03196957
OSTRIN RK, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P147, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1040
Park GH, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P527
PRATHER P, 1991, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V20, P271, DOI 10.1007/BF01067219
PRATHER PA, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P326
Prather PA, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P391, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1751
SERENO SC, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V21, P582, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.21.3.582
SHAPIRO LP, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P21, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90100-U
Shapiro L, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P49
SHAPIRO LP, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P423, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1053
SIMPSON GB, 1991, J MEM LANG, V30, P627, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(91)90029-J
SIMPSON GB, 1985, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V11, P28, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.11.1.28
SOLSO RL, 1980, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V12, P297, DOI 10.3758/BF03201669
Swaab T, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P39, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.1.39
Swaab TY, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P737, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(97)00174-7
Swinney D, 1996, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V8, P174, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1996.8.2.174
Swinney D, 1989, J Cogn Neurosci, V1, P25, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1989.1.1.25
SWINNEY DA, 1979, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V18, P645, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(79)90355-4
TABOSSI P, 1993, J MEM LANG, V32, P359, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1993.1019
TABOSSI P, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P324, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90058-7
Tompkins CA, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P68
Ware JE, 1994, SF 36 PHYSICAL MENTA
ZURIF E, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P448, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1054
NR 46
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 397
EP 411
DI 10.1080/0268703024000329
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200003
ER
PT J
AU Doesborgh, SJC
van de Sandt-Koenderman, WME
Dippel, DWJ
van Harskamp, F
Koudstaal, PJ
Visch-Brink, EG
AF Doesborgh, SJC
van de Sandt-Koenderman, WME
Dippel, DWJ
van Harskamp, F
Koudstaal, PJ
Visch-Brink, EG
TI The impact of linguistic deficits on verbal communication
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NM
ID LEXICAL-SEMANTIC DEFICITS; CONDUCTION APHASIA; COMPREHENSION; THERAPY;
ERRORS
AB Background: The verbal communication of persons with aphasia may be disturbed by semantic, phonological, and/or syntactic processing deficits. For those with prominent linguistic-level disorders at least part of aphasia therapy is spent on the main linguistic skills, aimed at improvement of verbal communicative abilities. However, the relationship between these linguistic levels and verbal communication is not straightforward. This is especially true for deficits at the word level: semantic and phonological disorders.
Aims: Exploration of the relative impact of semantic and phonological deficits on verbal communicative ability was the aim of the study. The hypothesis was that a lexical semantic deficit has a larger impact on the verbal communicative ability of persons with aphasia than a phonological deficit.
Methods & Procedures: A total of 29 persons with aphasia who had both a semantic and phonological deficit were assessed by means of semantic and phonological tasks, and a test of verbal communication (ANELT-A). Semantic measures: Semantic Association Test, Synonym Judgement (receptive tasks), Wordfluency Categories, AAT spontaneous speech: semantics (expressive tasks). Phonological measures: Repetition of words, Repetition of non-words, Wordfluency Letters, AAT spontaneous speech: phonology. Linear regression analyses were performed with the ANELT-A as dependent variable and the semantic and phonological measures as independent variables. Multivariate regression analyses were performed to directly compare the independent contribution of the semantic version of a measure with the phonological version of the same measure.
Outcomes & Results: Univariate regression analysis showed that the expressive semantic measures, Wordfluency Categories and AAT semantics, contributed significantly to the prediction of ANELT-A. One phonological measure, Wordfluency Letters, was selected as a significant predictor. However, in the multivariate regression analysis, only the semantic measures appeared to contribute independently to the prediction of the ANELT-A. The contribution of Wordfluency Letters, found in the univariate regression analysis, can be explained by a correlation with its semantic counterpart.
Conclusions: These results support the hypothesis that semantic measures contribute more to the prediction of the ANELT-A (Understandability in verbal communication) than phonological measures. The ability to generate semantically correct content words, both in connected speech and in isolation, appears to be decisive for the aphasics' verbal communicative skills. Taking into account the severity of the semantic disorder in relation to other deficits, perhaps the best way to improve verbal communication in persons with both a semantic and a phonological deficit is to address the deficit with the greatest impact: the lexical semantic deficit.
C1 Erasmus Univ, Dept Neuropsychol, Med Ctr, NL-3000 DR Rotterdam, Netherlands.
Aphasia Fdn Rotterdam, Rehabil Ctr, Rijndam, Netherlands.
RP Visch-Brink, EG (reprint author), Erasmus Univ, Dept Neuropsychol, Med Ctr, Room EE 2291,POB 1738, NL-3000 DR Rotterdam, Netherlands.
EM visch@neuro.fgg.eur.nl
CR BLOMERT L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248666
Blomert L, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P64
Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P135
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1981, JARGONAPHASIA, P39
BUTTERWORTH B, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES
BUTTERWORTH B, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P133, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90046-4
CAPLAN D, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P191, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1009
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, SPR S NEUR, P1
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
DUBOIS J, 1964, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V2, P9, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(64)90029-6
GRAETZ P, 1992, AKENSE AFASIE TEST N
HART J, 1990, ANN NEUROL, V27, P226, DOI 10.1002/ana.410270303
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Huber W, 1983, AACHENER APHASIETEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kohn S. E., 1992, CONDUCTION APHASIA
KOHN SE, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P209, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248992
Kremin H, 1988, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V1
KREMIN H, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P291, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248658
Kremin H, 1986, J NEUROLINGUIST, V2, P131, DOI DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(86)80008-2
MANOCHIOPINIG S, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249489
McNeil MR, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P385, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248479
MICELI G, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P159, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90117-0
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
NICKELS L, 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI, P109
NICKELS L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P209
NICKELS LA, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P259
Patterson K., 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P273
PERECMAN E, 1981, JARGONAPHASIA
Raymer AM, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P108
Raymer AM, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P211
Raymer A M, 1996, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V2, P340
Raymer AM, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P137, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1786
ROMANI C, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P131, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409382
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
Thompson CK, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P228
Visch-Brink E. G., 1993, DEV ASSESSMENT REHAB, P211
VischBrink EG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P1057, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249427
VischBrink EG, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P130
WILLSHIRE CE, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1059
NR 41
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 413
EP 423
DI 10.1080/02687030244000077
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200004
ER
PT J
AU Hillis, AE
Kane, A
Tuffiash, E
Beauchamp, NJ
Barker, PB
Jacobs, MA
Wityk, RJ
AF Hillis, AE
Kane, A
Tuffiash, E
Beauchamp, NJ
Barker, PB
Jacobs, MA
Wityk, RJ
TI Neural substrates of the cognitive processes underlying spelling:
Evidence from MR diffusion and perfusion imaging
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
ID ACCESSING LEXICAL REPRESENTATIONS; WERNICKES AREA; SEMANTIC DEFICIT;
FRONTAL-CORTEX; ACUTE STROKE; HYPOPERFUSION; COMPREHENSION; IMPAIRMENTS;
APHASIA; REGIONS
AB Background: Despite a rich literature on the cognitive processes underlying spelling, there is little known about the neural substrates of these processes.
Aims: The study aimed to identify regions of brain dysfunction associated with impairment of each cognitive process underlying spelling. It was hypothesised that impairments of distinct components of the spelling task would be associated with different areas of low blood flow or infarction in acute stroke patients.
Methods & Procedures: Associations between impairment of each component of the spelling process and hypoperfusion and/or infarct of any of 11 Brodmann's areas (BAs) were identified in a consecutive series of 80 patients studied within 24 hours of onset of left hemisphere stroke. Impairment of each component of spelling was identified with tests of written naming, word comprehension, spelling words and pseudowords to dictation, direct and delayed copying, and case transcoding. Infarct and/or hypoperfusion in each BA was identified with MR diffusion-weighted imaging and perfusion-weighted imaging. Significant associations were identified with a correlation matrix, and the strongest associations were confirmed with chi square analysis.
Outcomes & Results: Impairments of various cognitive processes were associated with separate regions of tissue dysfunction.
Conclusions: It was concluded that spelling involves a network of relatively independent processes that rely on different brain regions.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Baltimore, MD USA.
RP Hillis, AE (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ Hosp, Dept Neurol, Meyer 5-185,600 N Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
RI Jacobs, Michael/G-2901-2010
CR ANDERSON SW, 1990, BRAIN, V113, P749, DOI 10.1093/brain/113.3.749
Bak TH, 2001, BRAIN, V124, P103, DOI 10.1093/brain/124.1.103
BEESON P, 2001, CLIN APH C SANT FE N
Beeson P. B., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P572
Benson DF, 1979, APHASIA ALEXIA AGRAP
CARAMAZZA A, 1987, COGNITION, V26, P59, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90014-X
CHERTKOW H, 1994, LOCALIZATION NEUROIM, P152
Damasio H., 1989, LESION ANAL NEUROPSY
DEMONET JF, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1753, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1753
Exner S., 1881, LOKALISATION FUNCKTI
GRABOWSKI TJ, 2000, BRAIN MAPPING SYSTEM, P425, DOI 10.1016/B978-012692545-6/50016-7
Hillis AE, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V55, P782
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
Hillis AE, 2001, ANN NEUROL, V50, P561, DOI 10.1002/ana.1265
HILLIS AE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251996
Hillis AE, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P471
Hillis AE, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P919
Hillis AE, 2001, NEUROLOGY, V56, P670
Jenkins WM, 1987, PROG BRAIN RES , V71, P249
KATONODA K, 2001, HUMAN BRAIN MAPPING, V13, P34
LESSER RP, 1986, NEUROLOGY, V36, P658
Miceli G., 1984, CORTEX, V20, P217
Neumann-Haefelin T, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1591
Rapcsak SZ, 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D
Rapp B., 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D
RAPP BC, 2000, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
Shapiro KA, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V13, P713, DOI 10.1162/08989290152541386
Tainturier MJ, 2000, HANDBOOK OF COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCHOLOGY: WHAT DEFICITS REVEAL ABOUT THE HUMAN MIND, P263
WISE R, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1803, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.4.1803
Wise RJS, 2001, BRAIN, V124, P83, DOI 10.1093/brain/124.1.83
NR 31
TC 23
Z9 24
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 425
EP 438
DI 10.1080/02687030244000248
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200005
ER
PT J
AU Rapp, B
Kane, A
AF Rapp, B
Kane, A
TI Remediation of deficits affecting different components of the spelling
process
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
ID ACQUIRED DYSGRAPHIA; SURFACE DYSGRAPHIA; REPRESENTATIONS; OUTPUT
AB Background: There have been relatively few studies concerned with the treatment of spelling deficits. Among these, there have been a small number that have targeted specific components of the spelling process. Although most of these studies report success using treatments that involve repeated spelling and/or copy, the results have been mixed, especially as concerns the generalisation of treatment benefits to untreated items.
Aims: This investigation was designed to examine the responsiveness to the same treatment protocol of deficits affecting different cognitive mechanisms of the spelling process.
Methods & Procedures: We applied the same delayed-copy treatment protocol to two individuals with selective deficits of the orthographic output lexicon and the graphemic buffer. The two individuals were otherwise matched in terms of the severity of their deficits and their general cognitive profiles.
Outcomes & Results: Both individuals exhibited long-lasting word-specific benefits from the treatment. However, they differed in that the graphemic buffer deficit exhibited generalisation to untreated words, whereas the orthographic output lexicon did not.
Conclusions: The absence of presence of generalisation effects in response to the successful treatment of target items is determined by the specific cognitive component/s that constitute the source of the deficit.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Dept Cognit Sci, Baltimore, MD 21218 USA.
RP Rapp, B (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ, Dept Cognit Sci, Baltimore, MD 21218 USA.
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
Basso A, 1999, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V5, P405
Beeson P. M., 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P367
BEESON PM, 2002, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D
Beeson PM, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P551
BEESON PM, 1998, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
BEHRMANN M, 1987, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P365, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252044
BEHRMANN M, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P327
CARAMAZZA A, 1988, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V11, P395, DOI 10.1146/annurev.neuro.11.1.395
CARAMAZZA A, 1987, COGNITION, V26, P59, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90014-X
Carlomagno S, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P485
DEPARTZ MP, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P369, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252065
Ellis A. W., 1989, READING WRITING DYSL
Folk JR, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P532
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Goodman RA, 1985, J HOPKINS DYSGRAPHIA
Hatfield M., 1983, APHASIA THERAPY
HATFIELD MF, 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P65
Hillis A E, 1992, Clin Commun Disord, V2, P19
Hillis A. E., 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P84
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
HILLIS AE, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
Luzzatti C, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V10, P249, DOI 10.1080/096020100389156
MICELI G, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P187, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90080-X
Rapp B, 2002, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V19, P1, DOI 10.1080/0264329014300060
RAPP B, 2001, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V2, P221
SERON X, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P45
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
Weekes B, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P277, DOI 10.1080/026432996382033
NR 31
TC 32
Z9 32
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 439
EP 454
DI 10.1080/02687030244000301
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200006
ER
PT J
AU Yampolsky, S
Waters, G
AF Yampolsky, S
Waters, G
TI Treatment of single word oral reading in an individual with deep
dyslexia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
AB Background: Deep dyslexia is an acquired reading disorder in which the lexical and non-lexical reading routes are impaired, resulting in poor nonword reading, semantic errors in oral reading, visual-perceptual errors in oral reading, poor reading of functors, and imageability effects. There is evidence that individuals combine information from the lexical (semantic system) and the non-lexical routes to read words aloud. This evidence shows that partial phonological and semantic information combined at the level of the phonological output lexicon reduces semantic errors in reading aloud and increases the ability to produce the correct words.
Aims: The aim of the present study was to use a phonologically based oral reading treatment to treat impaired single word oral reading in an individual with deep dyslexia. We hypothesised that phonologically based treatment would improve oral reading of real words, decreasing the amount of semantic errors.
Methods & Procedures: The Wilson Reading System was used in therapy. This phonics-based programme focuses on the use of grapheme-phoneme correspondences, blending, and phonological awareness. A multiple-baseline design was used to evaluate the treatment effects in a single individual with deep dyslexia.
Outcomes & Results: Following treatment at the single word level, the individual showed a significant improvement in single word oral reading for the targeted syllabic structure and in nonword reading. There was also a significant reduction in semantic errors in oral reading. One month post-treatment, the individual maintained treatment gains.
Conclusions: Results support the hypothesis that the partial use of phonological information, combined with semantic information, results in improved accuracy of oral reading. This suggests that treatment of oral reading in people with deep dyslexia may benefit from attention to the non-lexical (phonological) component of reading in addition to the lexical/semantic component.
C1 Boston Univ, Sargent Coll Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Dept Commun Disorders, Boston, MA 02215 USA.
RP Yampolsky, S (reprint author), Boston Univ, Sargent Coll Hlth & Rehabil Sci, Dept Commun Disorders, Room 351,635 Commonwealth Ave, Boston, MA 02215 USA.
CR CAPLAN D, 1992, LANGUAGE STRUCTURE P, P403
COLTHEART M, 1987, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P22
Conway TW, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P608
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
DOLCH EW, 1950, TEACHING PRIMARY REA
ELLIS AW, 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR, P191
HILLIS AE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251996
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kendall DL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P587, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249560
MATTHEWS C, 1991, J COMMUN DISORD, V24, P21, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(91)90031-D
Mitchum C. C., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P103, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90003-2
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
ORTON J, 1964, GUIDE TEACHING PHONI
ROBERTSON R, 1997, PHONOLOGICAL AWARENE
WATERS G, 2002, UNPUB NORMS MANUAL P
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
Wechsler D, 1981, WECHSLER ADULT INTEL
WILSON BA, 1976, WILSON READING SYSTE
NR 18
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 455
EP 471
DI 10.1080/02687030244000068
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200007
ER
PT J
AU Beeson, PM
Hirsch, FM
Rewega, MA
AF Beeson, PM
Hirsch, FM
Rewega, MA
TI Successful single-word writing treatment: Experimental analyses of four
cases
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
AB Background: Individuals with severe aphasia may fail to regain spoken language, so that treatment should target other communication modalities such as writing. There is relatively limited documentation of successful writing treatment, particularly in individuals with severe aphasia.
Aims: The present study was designed to examine treatment outcomes in response to two writing treatment protocols intended to rebuild single-word vocabulary for written communication.
Methods & Procedures: Writing treatments were implemented with four individuals who had significant aphasia and severe agraphia. Two participants received Anagram and Copy Treatment (ACT) which involved arrangement of component letters and repeated copying of target words, along with a homework programme called Copy and Recall Treatment (CART) that included copying and recall of target words. The other two participants received the homework-based CART only. Single-subject multiple-baseline designs were used with sets of words sequentially targeted for treatment.
Outcomes & Results: All four participants responded positively to treatment. Three of the participants had severely limited spoken language, so that mastery of written words provided a much-needed means of communication. The fourth participant, who had adequate spoken language for face-to-face conversation, employed his improved spelling for written messages such as e-mail.
Conclusions: Single-word writing abilities may improve with treatment despite long times post onset and persistent impairments to spoken language.
C1 Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Beeson, PM (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, POB 210071, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
Beeson P. B., 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P572
Beeson P. M., 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P367
Carlomagno S, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P485
Ellis A. W., 1988, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V3, P99, DOI 10.1080/01690968808402084
GOODMAN RA, 1986, J HOPKINS U DYSLEXIA
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
PARNWELL EC, 1993, NEW OXFORD PICTURE D
RAPCSAK SZ, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P184
Raven JC, 1976, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
NR 15
TC 32
Z9 32
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 473
EP 491
DI 10.1080/02687030244000167
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200008
ER
PT J
AU Raymer, AM
Rowland, L
Haley, M
Crosson, B
AF Raymer, AM
Rowland, L
Haley, M
Crosson, B
TI Nonsymbolic movement training to improve sentence generation in
transcortical motor aphasia: A case study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
ID NONFLUENT APHASIA; INTERVENTIONS
AB Background: Nonfluent verbal production in individuals with transcortical motor aphasia (TMA) relates primarily to impaired initiation of verbalisation. Luria (1973) proposed the notion of gestural reorganisation, limb movements used to provoke verbalisations, as a means to improve verbal initiation in aphasia. In particular, movements performed with the left hand in left space may engage right frontal mechanisms to enhance verbal initiation (Crosson, Singletary, Richards, Koehler, & Rothi, 2000). However, little evidence is available as to the effects of this type of treatment for nonfluent verbal production in TMA.
Aims: We administered a treatment in which we incorporated nonsymbolic limb movements during production of sentences and evaluated the effects on verbal fluency in our participant, MP, who had TMA.
Methods & Procedures: We used a single-participant experimental treatment design across behaviours. During training, MP tapped with his left hand in left space as he practised production of sentences for polysemous words (e.g., bank: money, river). In daily probes, we measured percent correct sentences generated and time to produce correct sentences for trained and untrained polysemous words, as well as number of words generated per minute in a control letter category fluency task.
Outcomes & Results: Sentence-generation accuracy improved in two trained sets and one untrained set when movement was included during treatment. Little change was evident in the control letter category fluency task. Following training, MP produced increased numbers of words and well-formed utterances in connected speech samples as well.
Conclusions: These findings suggest that movement training had some benefit for NIP's sentence generation, perhaps due to recruitment of alternative frontal regions to enhance verbal initiation and fluency. Replication is needed with similar subjects who undergo treatment in conjunction with functional neuroimaging to evaluate this possibility.
C1 Old Dominion Univ, Child Study Ctr 110, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
Dept Vet Affairs, Brain Rehabil Res Ctr, Gainesville, FL USA.
Univ Florida, Gainesville, FL USA.
RP Raymer, AM (reprint author), Old Dominion Univ, Child Study Ctr 110, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
RI Crosson, Bruce/L-3128-2013
CR Belin P, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V47, P1504
Berndt R. S., 2000, QUANTITATIVE PRODUCT
BORKOWSK.JG, 1967, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V5, P135, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(67)90015-2
Boucher V, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P131, DOI 10.1080/02687040042000098
COSLETT HB, 1985, UNPUB BATTERY ADULT
CROSSON B, 2000, 2 NAT DEP VET AFF RE
Damasio H., 1989, LESION ANAL NEUROPSY
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Gold M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P374, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1750
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1991, MANUAL APHASIA THERA
Hoodin R., 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P62
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kearns K., 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P183
Kertesz A., 1979, APHASIA ASS DISORDER
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
Luria A., 1970, TRAUMATIC APHASIA IT
Luria A. R., 1973, THE WORKING BRAIN
NICHOLAS M, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P595
Pashek GV, 1997, J COMMUN DISORD, V30, P349, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(96)00079-2
PICKARD N, 1996, CEREB CORTEX, V6, P342
RICHARDS K, 2000, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V6, P241
Robinson G, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P77, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.1.77
Rothi Leslie J. Gonzalez, 1997, P91
Shewan C. M., 1979, AUDITORY COMPREHENSI
SINGLETARY FF, 2000, ASHA LEADER, V5, P226
SPARKS RW, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P703
TRYON WW, 1982, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V15, P423, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1982.15-423
WERTZ RT, 1982, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
NR 29
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 493
EP 506
DI 10.1080/02687030244000239
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200009
ER
PT J
AU Lustig, AP
Tompkins, CA
AF Lustig, AP
Tompkins, CA
TI A written communication strategy for a speaker with aphasia and apraxia
of speech: Treatment outcomes and social validity
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
ID CONVERSATIONAL DISCOURSE; LANGUAGE; VALIDATION; RECOVERY;
INFORMATIVENESS; PERFORMANCE; EFFICIENCY; THERAPY
AB Background: Self-generated cueing strategies have been shown to facilitate communication in persons with speech and language impairments, and multiple benefits may be associated with targeting conversational competence.
Aims: The purpose of this study was to train an individual (LG) with longstanding aphasia and apraxia of speech to substitute a self-initiated written word for protracted articulatory struggle, in three conversational settings.
Methods & Procedures: A multiple-baseline design across three different settings was utilised, providing an opportunity for strategy practice with both familiar and unfamiliar conversational partners. Topics were constructed to be relevant and meaningful to LG. Several subject-evaluated psychosocial measures, including locus of control, were employed, and social validity ratings were solicited from unfamiliar raters.
Outcomes & Results: LG adopted and successfully used the strategy across all settings, with both familiar and unfamiliar partners, at performance levels well above baseline. The number of abandoned conversational targets decreased considerably with strategy use, and social validation ratings indicated beneficial effects pertaining to communicative efficiency and comprehensibility in shorter, but not longer, conversational segments extracted from treatment videotapes.
Conclusions: The training protocol was successful in improving LG's facility with targeted compensatory strategy use across designated conversational contexts. However, the clinical significance and social value of LG's strategy use in these settings may be mitigated by the accompanying communicative variables affecting the conversational exchange as a whole. Future efforts could focus on examining what variables in the longer treatment segments appeared to counter the positive effects of LG's strategy use as perceived in the shorter conversational samples. On a more positive note, changes in LG's locus of control scores from extreme internal to more moderate could reflect a greater degree of willingness on her part to allow others to participate in her recovery process, or perhaps herald a more realistic attitude towards the extent of her loss.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Lustig, AP (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower,Atwood & Sennott St, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
CR ANDREWS G, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P312
ARONSON M, 1972, APHASIA SELECTED REA, P425
BERMAN M, 1967, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V32, P372
Boles L, 1998, J COMMUN DISORD, V31, P261, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(98)00005-7
Brumfitt SM, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P221
CAMPBELL TF, 1992, TOP LANG DISORD, V12, P42
Christensen AL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P727, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249419
Code Chris, 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P19, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064006
CROCKFORD C, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P165
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P667
DOYLE PJ, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P143
DOYLE PJ, 1989, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V22, P157, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1989.22-157
Elman Roberta J., 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P65, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064009
GARRY F, 1989, VET CLIN N AM-FOOD A, V5, P55
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Hemsley G, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P567
Howard D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249540
Jacobs BJ, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P115, DOI 10.1006/brln.2001.2452
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
KEARNS KP, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P223
KEARNS KP, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P196
KEARNS KP, 1988, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P223
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KRAAT AW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249086
Lapointe LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P787
LETOURNEAU PY, 1993, LIVING APHASIA PSYCH, P173
LINEBAUGH C, 1982, CLIN APH C OSHK WI
MARSHALL RC, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V15, P292, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90061-X
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
Müller D, 1999, Semin Speech Lang, V20, P85, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064011
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
PACKARD MEW, 1997, ASHA CONV BOST MA
PARTRIDGE C, 1989, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V28, P53
PEACH RK, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P335
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
PRINS RS, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V6, P192, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90058-5
Raven JC, 1976, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Rosenberg M, 1965, SOC ADOLESCENT SELF
Rotter J. B., 1954, SOCIAL LEARNING CLIN
SIMMONS NN, 1993, THESIS, V1
SIMMONS NN, 1993, THESIS, V2
SimmonsMackie NN, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P761, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250455
STEVENS SS, 1971, PSYCHOL REV, V78, P426, DOI 10.1037/h0031324
STOKES TF, 1977, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V10, P349, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1977.10-349
Thompson C., 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P195
THOMPSON CK, 1984, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V14, P132
THOMPSON CK, 1987, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
MASSARO M, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P245
ULATOWSKA HK, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P325, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248602
WALLACE GL, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V50, P385
NR 52
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 507
EP 521
DI 10.1080/02687030244000211
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200010
ER
PT J
AU Garrett, KL
Huth, C
AF Garrett, KL
Huth, C
TI The impact of graphic contextual information and instruction on the
conversational behaviours of a person with severe aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 31st Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY 29-JUN 02, 2001
CL SANTA FE, NEW MEXICO
ID SUPPORTED CONVERSATION; ADULTS; RESOURCES; PARTNERS
AB Backgrounds: Individuals with severe expressive aphasia often have difficulty sharing adequate amounts of specific information to sustain topical conversations.
Aims: This single subject experiment investigated whether graphic representations of topics increased conversational duration, number of information exchanges, proportion of participant initiations, and percentage of successful communication exchanges during dyadic conversations involving a communicator with severe, nonfluent aphasia (SD).
Methods & Procedures: SD conversed with two partners about personal and current events in "no treatment" and "graphic topic-setter" conditions. He also participated in an additional "instruction" condition with Partner 2. Conversations were videotaped, transcribed, and coded for the dependent variables. Results were averaged by condition, graphed, and analysed for statistical significance using randomisation testing.
Outcomes & Results: Despite variability in conversational parameters across sessions, mean data from each condition revealed that graphic topic setters increased the average duration of interactions and mean number of communication exchanges per topic across both partners. Proportion of initiations increased significantly with graphic context for Partner I but not Partner 2; this effect was more pronounced for current event topics than personal events. Information transmission was significantly more successful when graphic context was present with both partners, but differences were more noticeable with Partner 1.
Conclusions: Participants appeared better able to co-construct conversations when graphic topic setters were available to supplement the natural communication signals of a communicator with severe aphasia. Clinical implementation issues are discussed.
C1 Duquesne Univ, Dept Speech Language Pathol, CCC SLP, Pittsburgh, PA 15282 USA.
Allegheny Intermediate Unit, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP Garrett, KL (reprint author), Duquesne Univ, Dept Speech Language Pathol, CCC SLP, 403 Fisher Hall, Pittsburgh, PA 15282 USA.
CR BARLOW DH, 1984, SINGLE CASE EXPT DES
BEUKELMAN D, 1998, AUGMENTATIVE COMMUNI
Beukelman D., 1985, COMMUNICATION AUGMEN
Edgington E. S., 1995, RANDOMIZATION TESTS
FOX LE, 1996, ISAAC, V12, P257
Franklin R. D., 1996, DESIGN ANAL SINGLE C
GARRETT K, 1999, GROUP TREATMENT NEUR, P85
GARRETT K, 2000, ANN AM SPEECH LANG H
GARRETT KL, 1993, THESIS U NEBRASKA LI
Hayes AF, 1996, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V28, P473, DOI 10.3758/BF03200530
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1984, LANGUAGE DISORDERS A, P159
Holland AL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P844, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249578
HUNT P, 1991, AAC (Augmentative and Alternative Communication), V7, P117, DOI 10.1080/07434619112331275783
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Marshall RC, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P811, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249574
MUSSELWHITE C, 1990, 4 BIENN C INT SOC AU
PACKARD M, 1997, ANN AM SPEECH LANG H
Simmons-Mackie N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P831, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249576
WEISS S, 1997, ANN M AM SPEECH LANG
NR 20
TC 30
Z9 30
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR-JUN
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 4-6
BP 523
EP 536
DI 10.1080/02687030244000149
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 548UX
UT WOS:000175409200011
ER
PT J
AU Francis, DR
Clark, N
AF Francis, DR
Clark, N
TI Circumlocution-induced naming (CIN): A treatment for effecting
generalisation in anomia?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WORD RETRIEVAL; APHASIC PATIENTS; DAMAGE; REHABILITATION; DEFICITS;
DYSLEXIA
AB Background: Many studies of clients with 'pure' anomia (i.e. word finding difficulties in the absence of semantic impairment) have found a lack of generalization to the naming of items that are not treated in therapy. One explanation for this result is that the phonological output lexicon consists of discrete entries which are not as interconnective as those in the semantic system (Miceli, Amatrano, Capasso, and Caramazza 1996). However, more recent studies suggest that therapy which requires more explicit and unaided access on the part of the client might indeed effect generalization (McNeil, Small, Masterton, and Fossett, 1995; Spencer, Doyle, McNeil, Wambaugh, Park, and Carroll, 2000).
Aims: The main aim of our study was to investigate whether requiring a client to name pictures with minimal help (i.e. cueing, repetition) from therapists would result in generalization.
Methods & Procedures: We used a single case design, employing multiple baselines across behaviours to control for possible spontaneous recovery. The participant was MB, a 79 year old client who was anomic subsequent to a stroke. Therapy sessions required MB to name a set of pictures. Instead of cues, she was required to describe and 'talk around' each picture for as long as it took until the name came to her. We termed this therapy 'Circumlocution-induced naming' (CIN). Nonparametric statistical analysis was performed on pre and post test results.
Outcomes & Results: Therapy resulted in improvement to untreated as well as to treated words, and there was also a qualitative change in error patterns on untreated words (namely fewer unrelated errors and more semantic errors). Performance on unrelated control tasks did not improve.
Conclusions: Our results suggest that CIN may effect a generalized improvement on the phonological output lexicon. We hypothesize that the therapy 'exercises' the impaired link between semantics and phonology to a greater degree than do other methods (e. g. phonemic cueing, repetition). This suggests that clients with moderate to mild anomia might benefit from therapy that requires them to take a more active and independent part in accessing words. We discuss some difficulties in the interpretation of our results, including the possible existence of spontaneous recovery, and the issue of exactly what our therapy targeted.
C1 Univ Birmingham, Sch Psychol, Behav Brain Sci Ctr, Birmingham B15 2TT, W Midlands, England.
Birmingham Heartlands & Solihull NHS Trust Teachi, Heartlands Hosp, Birmingham, W Midlands, England.
RP Francis, DR (reprint author), Univ Birmingham, Sch Psychol, Behav Brain Sci Ctr, Birmingham B15 2TT, W Midlands, England.
CR Annoni JM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P1093, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249475
BADDELEY A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P235, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401438
BATEMAN A, THESIS BIRMINGHAM U
BEST W, 1997, LANGUAGE DISORDERS C
Burgess PW, 1997, HAYLING BRIXTON TEST
CARAMAZZA A, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V3, P217, DOI 10.1080/09602019308401437
CARAMAZZA A, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES
COLLINS AM, 1969, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V8, P240, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(69)80069-1
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
Golding E, 1989, MIDDLESEX ELDERLY AS
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
HODGES JR, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P310
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
Howard D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249540
Humphreys G.W., 1987, VISUAL OBJECT PROCES
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
LEDORZE G, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P51
LEDORZE G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P127
Lesser R., 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
McNeil M. R., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P76, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0404.76
McNeil MR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P575, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249559
McNeil MR, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P385, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248479
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
NICKELS L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P2147
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Parkin AJ, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P361
Plaut DC, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P25, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0004
Riddoch M. J., 1993, BORB BIRMINGHAM OBJE
Rumiati RI, 1997, VIS COGN, V4, P207
SARTORI G, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P105, DOI 10.1080/02643298808252928
SERON X, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P149
Spencer KA, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P567
WARRINGTON EK, 1979, BRAIN, V102, P43, DOI 10.1093/brain/102.1.43
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
Weekes B, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P277, DOI 10.1080/026432996382033
WIEGEL-CRUMP C, 1973, Cortex, V9, P411
Wilson B. A., 1987, BEHAV INATTENTION TE
NR 39
TC 16
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 3
BP 243
EP 259
DI 10.1080/02687040143000564
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 525ZU
UT WOS:000174104600001
ER
PT J
AU Pashek, GV
Tompkins, CA
AF Pashek, GV
Tompkins, CA
TI Context and word class influences on lexical retrieval in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE PRODUCTION; VERB RETRIEVAL; LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; NAMING
PERFORMANCE; GRAMMATICAL CLASS; DISCOURSE; REPRESENTATION;
COMPREHENSION; CONSTRAINTS; DISORDERS
AB Background: Perceived differences in word retrieval between naming and connected speech contexts have been of clinical interest to clinicians and researchers for the last 50 years. However, empirical studies of contextual influences on retrieval have surfaced only in the last two decades.
Aims: The purpose of this exploratory investigation was to study lexical retrieval in both connected speech and naming tasks in a group of participants with mild aphasia. As previous studies have outlined possible relationships between word class (noun vs. verb) and elicitation context, retrieval of both nouns and verbs were investigated in naming and connected speech tasks.
Methods & Procedures: Twenty individuals with mild aphasia presenting primarily as residual anomia and 10 age- and education-matched controls participated in this study. Accuracy in lexical retrieval attempts was compared across two contexts - confrontation naming and video narration, for targets in two word classes - nouns and verbs. Lexical targets in these two word classes had been matched as groups on an a priori basis for frequency and familiarity
Outcomes & Results: Results indicated that all participants experienced greater word finding difficulty in confrontation naming than in video narration. Individuals with aphasia also demonstrated greater word finding difficulty for nouns than verbs, although subsequent analyses suggest that these findings may be explained by joint effects of word length and word frequency on of target stimuli.
Conclusions: Context influenced lexical retrieval of both aphasic and normal aging subjects, although "word class'' effects may have been attributable to combined characteristics of lexical targets. Although results appear to have implications for both assessment and treatment of lexical retrieval deficits, discussion emphasizes ways in which word finding abilities in connected speech may require different methods of study than those traditionally employed in the analysis of naming responses.
C1 Med Univ S Carolina, Charleston, SC 29425 USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Pashek, GV (reprint author), Coll Hlth Profess, Commun Sci & Disorders Program, Dept Rehabil Sci, 77 President St,Suite 117,POB 50700, Charleston, SC 29425 USA.
CR ATKINSON RC, 1975, ATTENTION PERFORMANC, V5
Au R, 1995, AGING COGNITION, V2, P300, DOI 10.1080/13825589508256605
BASSO A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P185, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249069
CARAMAZZA A, 1978, PSYCHOL BULL, V85, P898, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.85.4.898
Berndt RS, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P249, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2726
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
BIRREN JE, 1995, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V46, P329, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ps.46.020195.001553
BOCK JK, 1987, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA
BOCK K, 1995, SPEECH LANGUAGE COMM, V3, P181
BREEN K, 1994, CORTEX, V30, P231
BUTTERWORTH B, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90036-8
CHRISTIANSEN JA, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P291, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1062
Cohen J., 1988, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA, V2nd
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P123, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.1.123
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
DOLLAGHAN CA, 1992, TOP LANG DISORD, V12, P56
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Geschwind N., 1967, CORTEX, V3, P97
GLOSSER G, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P67, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90117-J
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GREENWOOD A, 1999, APHASIA THERAPY FILE
GROSJEAN F, 1984, B PSYCHONOMIC SOC, V22, P180
HADAR U, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P505
HELLER RB, 1993, PSYCHOL AGING, V8, P443, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.8.3.443
Jakobson Roman, 1956, FUNDAMENTALS LANGUAG
Jesperson O, 1965, MODERN ENGLISH GRAMM
Jonkers R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P245, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249453
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KEMPEN G, 1983, COGNITION, V14, P185, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90029-X
KOHN SE, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P57
Kohn SE, 1998, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V19, P631, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400010390
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 2000, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
Loban W., 1976, LANGUAGE DEV KINDERG
Luria A. R., 1966, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
Luria AR, 1970, TRAUMATIC APHASIA
MACDONALD MC, 1994, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V9, P157, DOI 10.1080/01690969408402115
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
MCCLELLAND JL, 1985, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V114, P159, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.114.2.159
MICELI G, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P351, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248937
MILLER JF, 1992, MACSALT SYSTEMATIC A
MITCHUM CC, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P1, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520173
NICHOLAS LE, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249023
Pashek G, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P177
REYNA VF, 1987, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA
Salthouse T. A., 1996, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V51B, P30
Selkirk E, 1996, SIGNAL TO SYNTAX: BOOTSTRAPPING FROM SPEECH TO GRAMMAR IN EARLY ACQUISITION, P187
SHAPIRO LP, 1987, COGNITION, V27, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(87)80010-0
SHAPIRO LP, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P423, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1053
Steel R.G.D., 1960, PRINCIPALS PROCEDURE
STEIN DW, 1984, THESIS U PITTSBURGH
Stemberger J. P., 1985, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, V1, P143
Tabor W, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P211
Toglia M. P., 1978, HDB SEMANTIC WORD NO
WEGNER ML, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P37, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90034-8
WILLIAMS SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P92, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90007-4
WILLIAMS SE, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P124, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90120-9
WILSON R S, 1979, Journal of Clinical Neuropsychology, V1, P49, DOI 10.1080/01688637908401097
Yorkston K. M., 1981, ASSESSMENT INTELLIGI
ZINGESER LB, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P473, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253270
Zipf G. K., 1965, PSYCHOBIOLOGY LANGUA
NR 66
TC 20
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 3
BP 261
EP 286
DI 10.1080/02687040143000573
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 525ZU
UT WOS:000174104600002
ER
PT J
AU Ansaldo, AI
Arguin, M
Lecours, AR
AF Ansaldo, AI
Arguin, M
Lecours, AR
TI Initial right hemisphere take-over and subsequent bilateral
participation during recovery from aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE; IMAGEABILITY; RECOGNITION; ASYMMETRIES; PLASTICITY; STROKE
AB Background: In 1887, Gowers proposed that supplemental action by the right frontal cortex could sustain language following aphasia. Since then, many studies using a wide variety of experimental paradigms have examined the role of the right hemisphere in the recovery from aphasia.
Aims: This study examines the right hemisphere's participation in the recovery from aphasia between four and sixteen months following brain damage.
Methods & Procedures: RJ, a young woman with severe Broca's aphasia resulting from a left fronto-temporal hematoma, was followed up at four-month intervals with a divided visual field presentation lexical decision task (LDT). At each time of measurement, we examined her performance with high- and low-imageability nouns and verbs, directed to either cerebral hemisphere and in central vision. A language test was used to examine the pattern of language recovery over time, and a non-verbal version of the Stroop test (NVST) served to follow up changes in attention. The results obtained with the LDT and the NVST were analyzed with ANOVAs; the changes in the pattern of language recovery and the results on the attentional task were also considered in the analysis.
Outcomes & Results: There was a left visual field advantage with high-imageability words, regardless of their grammatical class, at four months post stroke. The right hemisphere advantage extended to low-imageability words at eight months after aphasia onset. Concurrently, language comprehension tasks made a significant recovery, whereas language expression tasks recovered only slightly. Furthermore, there was no significant improvement on the attentional task within the same time period. One year after the stroke, RJ's pattern of lateralization changed; there was a marginally significant central vision advantage on word processing, and no significant difference in her performance on lateralized presentations. There was a remarkable recovery on oral expression tasks, and some improvement on the attentional task within the same period.
Conclusions: The results of the present study indicate that recovery from aphasia may be sustained by both cerebral hemispheres. The participation of either hemisphere may vary with time elapsed. Our results suggest that high-imageability nouns and verbs may constitute a good target for speech therapy during the first months post stroke, in order to benefit from right hemisphere takeover capacities. Furthermore, low imageability nouns and verbs are candidates for right hemisphere takeover as well, if enough time is allowed. Finally, the results of this study suggest that right hemisphere involvement in language recovery may occur in the absence of a concurrent improvement of attention. In line with previous studies, our results indicate that the recovery of oral expression coincides with the improvement of left hemisphere function. Hence, the fact that language expression started to improve one year after the stroke suggests that recovery from a severe language expression deficit is a long process, and may require long-term follow-up.
C1 Inst Univ Geriatrie Montreal, Montreal, PQ H3W 1W5, Canada.
Univ Montreal, Montreal, PQ, Canada.
RP Ansaldo, AI (reprint author), Inst Univ Geriatrie Montreal, 4565 Queen Mary, Montreal, PQ H3W 1W5, Canada.
CR BASSO A, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P555
Beauchemin MJ, 1996, BRAIN COGNITION, V32, P255
BEAUDOT J, 1990, FREQUENCE UTILISATIO
BELAND R, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P439, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248786
CAMBIER J, 1983, REV NEUROL, V139, P55
CAPLAN D, 1971, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V12, P331
Cappa SF, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P55, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1737
CASTROCALDAS A, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P145, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90045-0
CZPOF D, 1979, APHASIA APRAXIA AGNO, V2, P27
DAY J, 1979, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V17, P515, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(79)90059-9
Dejerine J., 1914, SEMIOLOGIE AFFECTION
DEMEURISSE G, 1985, EUR NEUROL, V24, P134, DOI 10.1159/000115774
Demeurisse G, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P301, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248851
ELLIS HD, 1974, J EXP PSYCHOL, V103, P1035, DOI 10.1037/h0037363
EVIATAR Z, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P611
Gowers WR, 1887, LECT DIAGNOSIS DIS B
Henschen SE, 1926, BRAIN, V49, P110, DOI 10.1093/brain/49.1.110
HOGENRAAD R, 1981, PSYCHOL BELG, V21, P21
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
Karbe H, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P215, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1961
Karbe H, 1997, ADV NEUROL, V73, P347
Kertesz A, 1988, Adv Neurol, V47, P277
KINSBOUR.M, 1971, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V25, P302
KINSBOUR.M, 1970, ACTA PSYCHOL, V33, P193, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(70)90132-0
KNOPMAN D, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V33, P1170
LANDIS T, 1983, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V21, P359, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(83)90022-2
LEE H, 1984, ANN NEUROL, V15, P304, DOI 10.1002/ana.410150319
MAYZNER MS, 1965, J EXP PSYCHOL, V71, P66
McLeod C. M., 1991, PSYCHOL BULL, V109, P163
METTER EJ, 1989, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V46, P27
MOORE WH, 1975, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V39, P1003
MOORE WH, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P123
NICCUM N, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P273, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90105-7
Nielsen JM, 1946, AGNOSIA APRAXIA APHA
Nieto A, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V70, P421, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2180
PAIVIO A, 1968, J EXPT PSYCHOL S MON, P76
PAPANICOLAOU AC, 1988, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V45, P1025
Petit J. M., 1979, BRAIN LANG, V7, P191, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90016-6
SCHWEIGER A, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P73, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90102-8
Seron X., 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIE HUM
SILVESTRINI M, 1993, STROKE, V24, P1673
Thomas C, 1997, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V102, P86, DOI 10.1016/S0921-884X(96)95653-2
NR 42
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 3
BP 287
EP 304
DI 10.1080/02687040143000591
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 525ZU
UT WOS:000174104600003
ER
PT J
AU Keil, K
Kaszniak, AW
AF Keil, K
Kaszniak, AW
TI Examining executive function in individuals with brain injury: A review
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FRONTAL-LOBE LESIONS; AMYGDALO-HIPPOCAMPECTOMY; STRATEGY APPLICATION;
RECOGNITION MEMORY; PLANNING ABILITY; SHORT-TERM; APHASIA; PERFORMANCE;
INTELLIGENCE; IMPAIRMENT
AB Background: Patients with aphasia resulting from a stroke may exhibit cognitive impairments in addition to their language disturbance. The ability to detect and quantify executive function impairment, in particular, may be critical to treating these patients. Furthermore, the effects of executive dysfunction on daily activities may interact with or amplify limitations due to their language disorder. Multiple measures exist in the clinical and research neuropsychological literatures for assessing executive function, however these vary in reliability, validity, and language demands.
Aims: This review explores the definition of executive function, describes tests of executive function, and makes recommendations regarding their use in populations with language impairment. Initially a literature search was undertaken for reviews and empirical studies addressing the definition and measurement of executive function, as well as studies of cognitive function in patients with frontal lobe damage. Included in this review are tasks on which patients with frontal lesions showed impairments, activations were seen in neuroimaging studies, or which were developed for the purpose of tapping a cognitive process hypothesized to be an executive function.
Main Contribution: Studies of cognitive ability in those with aphasia are reviewed. Purported executive function tests are organized into a proposed substructure for grouping executive processes, and are evaluated for their usefulness in assessing those with aphasia. Tests that have been used hint at impairments in some individuals with aphasia, suggesting a need to look at correlation with severity of auditory comprehension and constructional praxis.
Conclusions: Although few executive function tests are currently appropriate for use in a language-disordered population without modifications, many have potential. In order to advance our understanding of the construct of executive function, it is important to develop a clearer definition of the processes involved. In the meantime, the tests reviewed here may be helpful in assessing whether cognitive impairment exists in addition to the language dysfunction in those with aphasia.
C1 Univ Arizona, Dept Psychol, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Keil, K (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Dept Psychol, Box 210068, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
EM keil@u.arizona.edu
CR Akert K., 1964, FRONTAL GRANULAR COR, P353
ALBERT M, 1981, CLIN ASPECTS DYSPHAS, V2
ALDERMAN N, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P193, DOI 10.1080/09602019508401467
BADDELEY A, 1998, METHODOLOGY FRONTAL, P61
BAILEY S, 1981, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V16, P193
Baker SC, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P515, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00133-6
Baser C A, 1987, Arch Clin Neuropsychol, V2, P13, DOI 10.1016/0887-6177(87)90031-X
BASSO A, 1981, BRAIN, V104, P721, DOI 10.1093/brain/104.4.721
BASSO A, 1985, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V23, P51, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(85)90043-0
BAY E, 1962, BRAIN, V85, P410
BAYLES KA, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
BEESON PM, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P253, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1045
Bigler E D, 1988, Arch Clin Neuropsychol, V3, P279, DOI 10.1016/0887-6177(88)90020-0
BOROD JC, 1982, CORTEX, V18, P199
Burgess PW, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V34, P263, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00104-2
Burgess PW, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P547
Butler R. W., 1993, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V7, P519, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.7.4.519
BUTLER RW, 1989, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V3, P235, DOI 10.1080/13854048908404085
Channon S, 1999, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V37, P757, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00138-9
COHEN R, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P331, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90060-7
COSTA L, 1988, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V2, P3, DOI 10.1080/13854048808520079
CREMONINI W, 1980, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V18, P1, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(80)90078-0
Demakis GJ, 1997, PSYCHOL REP, V81, P443
Denckla M. B., 1996, ATTENTION MEMORY EXE, P263
DeRenzi E., 1965, CORTEX, V1, P410
DERENZI E, 1972, BRAIN, V95, P293, DOI 10.1093/brain/95.2.293
DUNCAN J, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P261, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)00124-8
Ellis A. W., 1996, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
ESLINGER PJ, 1985, NEUROLOGY, V35, P1731
Fuster J.M., 1997, PREFRONTAL CORTEX
GAINOTTI G, 1978, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V16, P301
GLOSSER G, 1990, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V12, P485, DOI 10.1080/01688639008400995
Godefroy O, 1997, NEUROLOGY, V49, P695
GOEL V, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P623, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)90866-P
GOLDENBERG G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248669
GOLDSTEIN K, 1948, LANGUAGE LANGUAGE DI
GUTBROD K, 1989, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V11, P821, DOI 10.1080/01688638908400938
HAMSHER K, 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P341, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50013-0
Humes GE, 1997, ASSESSMENT, V4, P249
JONESGOTMAN M, 1977, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V15, P653, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(77)90070-7
Kaszniak AW, 1996, LEARN INDIVID DIFFER, V8, P355, DOI 10.1016/S1041-6080(96)90023-0
KERTESZ A, 1977, BRAIN, V100, P1, DOI 10.1093/brain/100.1.1
KERTESZ A, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P387, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80079-4
Lang C. J. G., 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P619
LAWSON MJ, 1989, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V11, P842, DOI 10.1080/01688638908400939
LESSER R, 1978, LINGUISTIC INVESTIGA
Levine B, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P247
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
Luria A. R., 1973, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
MACK JL, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V9, P556, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.9.4.556
Mai N, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P45, DOI DOI 10.1080/09602019108401379
MALY J, 1977, BRAIN LANG, V4, P78, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(77)90008-6
McDonald S, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P88, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1846
Milner B., 1964, FRONTAL GRANULAR COR, P313
Miotto EC, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P639, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70770-6
MORRIS RG, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V31, P1367, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(93)90104-8
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
Nagahama Y, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P1667, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.5.1667
De Renzi E, 1975, Cortex, V11, P341
Nolte J., 1993, HUMAN BRAIN
OWEN AM, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V28, P1021, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(90)90137-D
Owen AM, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P1597, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.5.1597
OWEN AM, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)00098-A
Paulsens JS, 1996, ASSESSMENT, V3, P327, DOI 10.1177/1073191196003003012
Pennington BF, 1996, J CHILD PSYCHOL PSYC, V37, P51, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-7610.1996.tb01380.x
PERRET E, 1974, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V12, P323, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(74)90047-5
Phillips L. H., 1997, METHODOLOGY FRONTAL, P191
PURDY M, 1992, DISS ABSTR INT, V53, P5164
REITAN RM, 1960, J PSYCHOL, V50, P355
REITAN RM, 1988, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V2, P331, DOI 10.1080/13854048808403272
REITAN RM, 1959, J NERV MENT DIS, V129, P257, DOI 10.1097/00005053-195909000-00006
REITAN RM, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOL REV, V4, P161, DOI 10.1007/BF01874891
REZAI K, 1993, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V50, P636
RIEGE WH, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P60, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90038-3
ROBBINS TW, 1997, METHODOLOGY FRONTAL, P215
SAVER JL, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P1241, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(91)90037-9
Shallice T, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
SHALLICE T, 1982, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V298, P199, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1982.0082
SHALLICE T, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P727, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.2.727
Spreen O., 1998, COMPENDIUM NEUROPSYC
STUSS DT, 1993, DEMENTIA, V4, P220, DOI 10.1159/000107326
STUSS DT, 1984, PSYCHOL BULL, V95, P3, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.95.1.3
Stuss DT, 1986, FRONTAL LOBES
TRANEL D, 1994, HANDB NEUR, V9, P125
VANMOURIK M, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P491, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249486
ZANGWILL OL, 1966, INT J NEUROL, V5, P395
NR 86
TC 43
Z9 43
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 3
BP 305
EP 335
DI 10.1080/02687030143000654
PG 31
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 525ZU
UT WOS:000174104600004
ER
PT J
AU Ramsberger, G
Rende, B
AF Ramsberger, G
Rende, B
TI Measuring transactional success in the conversation of people with
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONNECTED SPEECH; COMMUNICATION; ADULTS
AB Background: Conversation is one of the most important forms of human communication. The way in which one participates in conversation is necessarily impacted by aphasia. Recent changes in delivery of rehabilitation services place greater emphasis on functional outcome and this, in turn, has been a catalyst for the development of rehabilitation approaches that focus on conversation. However, an important missing element in studies of the efficacy of such approaches is a method for evaluating success in conversation.
Aims: The object of this study was to develop an ecologically valid and reliable measure of transactional success in conversation.
Methods & Procedures: The procedures for measuring transactional success in conversation described in this study utilizes standardized procedures while simulating natural conversations as much as possible. It provides a method for measuring what has been understood/exchanged when the conversation concludes, and affords an external reference against which the accuracy of this information can be judged. Data for this study were gathered from 14 people with aphasia of moderate severity each of whom engaged in 4 semi-structured conversations with unfamiliar partners.
Outcomes & Results: The method of measuring transactional success in conversation described in this study was shown to have good validity and reliability.
Conclusions: Transactional success in conversation is clearly a unique construct that is not predicted by traditional aphasia assessment. The method for measuring transactional success in conversation developed in this investigation provides a much-needed means for clinicians to evaluate the efficacy of conversation therapy. Furthermore, combining this new measure with Conversation Analysis (CA) offers a potentially powerful tool to identify those conversational behaviors that contribute to successful transfer of ideas. Such information could then be used to inform the design of treatment programs that seek to improve conversational success for people with aphasia.
C1 Univ Colorado, Boulder, CO 80309 USA.
RP Ramsberger, G (reprint author), Univ Colorado, Campus Box 409, Boulder, CO 80309 USA.
CR Atkinson Maxwell, 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC
Booth S, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P283
CAMPBELL DT, 1959, PSYCHOL BULL, V56, P81, DOI 10.1037/h0046016
Crocker L., 1986, INTRO CLASSICAL MODE
CROCKFORD C, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P165
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P667
Doyle P. J., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P130
Doyle P. J., 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P53, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0503.53
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
Doyle PJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P537
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
Hedberg N, 1993, ANAL STORYTELLING SK
Heeschen C, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P365
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1992, APHASIA DIAGNOSTIC P
Heritage J, 1984, GARFINKEL ETHNOMETHO, P233
Hesketh A, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P239
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Lasker J, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P857
Lyon J. G., 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P203
MARSH HW, 1983, J EDUC MEAS, V20, P231, DOI 10.1111/j.1745-3984.1983.tb00202.x
MENN L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248664
Messick S., 1989, ED MEASUREMENT, P13
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P459, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985238
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P636
OPPENHEIMER J, 1989, I LOVE LUCY
OPPENHEIMER J, 1990, I LOVE LUCY
OPPENHEIMER J, 1991, I LOVE LUCY
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
SCHEGLOFF EA, 1988, LINGUISTICS CONTEXT
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 1993, THESIS LOUISIANA STA
Wilkinson R, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P327, DOI 10.1080/026870399402127
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
NR 36
TC 12
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 3
BP 337
EP 353
DI 10.1080/02687040143000636
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 525ZU
UT WOS:000174104600005
ER
PT J
AU Friedman, RB
Lott, SN
AF Friedman, RB
Lott, SN
TI Successful blending in a phonological reading treatment for deep alexia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONTINUUM
AB Background: Patients with deep alexia have great difficulty reading pseudowords, indicating an impairment in phonological reading. One method that has been used in attempting to retrain phonologic reading is to teach the patient to sound out words using grapheme-to-phoneme correspondence rules. Most of these studies found that the patients could learn the individual correspondences, but then could not blend them together in order to read words. Previous studies have reported that both children learning to read and patients with phonologic alexia are more successful blending syllables, rather than individual phonemes, into words. This may be due to the fact that phonemes are pronounced differently in isolation than they are in context.
Aims: The hypothesis of the current study is that patients will be successful blending letter-to-sound correspondences into words if those correspondences are trained in context rather than in isolation.
Methods & Procedures: The correspondences were trained, therefore, as bigraph-phoneme correspondences, rather than as individual grapheme-phoneme correspondences (e. g., "pa''-/pae/ and "at''-/aet/, rather than "p''-(sic)/p, "a''-/ae/ and "t''-/t(sic)). The study followed a single-subject multiple baseline design in which three sets of bigraphs, and words composed of those trained bigraphs, were trained sequentially. Two subjects with deep alexia participated in the study.
Outcomes & Results: Subjects LR and KT successfully blended trained bigraphs in order to read both trained and untrained words that were composed of the trained bigraphs.
Conclusions: It is suggested that the patients are learning a new means of decoding words, and that the underlying phonologic processing deficit remains. In terms of clinical application, the bigraph approach offers a viable alternative approach for re-training reading for those patients who are unable to blend individual phonemes into words.
C1 Georgetown Univ, Med Ctr, Washington, DC 20007 USA.
Natl Rehabil Hosp, Res Ctr, Washington, DC USA.
RP Friedman, RB (reprint author), Bldg D,Room 207E,4000 Reservoir Rd NW, Washington, DC 20007 USA.
CR Abboud H., 1991, SUPERLAB
BEAUVOIS MF, 1979, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V42, P1115, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.42.12.1115
BERNDT RS, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P763
Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P763, DOI 10.1080/026432996381809
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA, P22
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
COLTHEART M, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P114, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0006
FRIEDMAN RB, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P397
GLEITMAN LR, 1973, READ RES QUART, V8, P447, DOI 10.2307/747169
GLOSSER G, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P343
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
LAINE M, 1990, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P80
LaPointe L., 1984, READING COMPREHENSIO
Mitchum C. C., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P103, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90003-2
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
NR 18
TC 14
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 3
BP 355
EP 372
DI 10.1080/02687040143000627
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 525ZU
UT WOS:000174104600006
ER
PT J
AU Nickels, L
AF Nickels, L
TI Theoretical and methodological issues in the cognitive neuropsychology
of spoken word production
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ACCESSING LEXICAL REPRESENTATIONS; GRAMMATICAL GENDER; SPEECH
PRODUCTION; SEMANTIC ERRORS; APHASIA; OUTPUT; TIP; INFORMATION;
RECOGNITION; RETRIEVAL
AB This paper reviews the "state of the art'' in the cognitive neuropsychology of spoken word production. It first examines current theoretical issues, specifically addressing the questions: How many levels of processing are there in word production? How does activation flow between levels of processing? What is the relationship between spoken word production and other aspects of language processing? What is the relationship between phonology for lexical and non-lexical forms? The discussion then turns to methodological issues in cognitive neuropsychology, contrasting group, case series, and single case study approaches. Finally, a detailed examination is made of different types of case series approach.
C1 Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
RP Nickels, L (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci, Sydney, NSW 2109, Australia.
CR BADECKER W, 1995, COGNITION, V57, P193, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00663-J
BEAUVOIS MF, 1982, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V298, P35, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1982.0070
Behrmann M, 1998, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V15, P7, DOI 10.1080/026432998381212
BEST W, 2000, SEMANTIC PROCESSING
Best W, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P443, DOI 10.1080/026432996381971
Bird H, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P246, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2292
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
CAPLAN D, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P99, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252671
Caramazza A, 1998, COGNITION, V69, P231
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITION, V64, P309, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00031-0
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P177, DOI 10.1080/026432997381664
CARAMAZZA A, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P517, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253271
Coltheart M, 2001, PSYCHOL REV, V108, P204, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.108.1.204
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
Hartley T, 1996, J MEM LANG, V35, P1, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1996.0001
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
HILLIS AE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251996
HILLIS AE, 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
HILLIS AE, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P333, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253156
Howard D., 1988, MISSING MEANING
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Leach C., 1979, INTRO STAT NONPARAME
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P61, DOI 10.1017/S0140525X99451775
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MCCLOSKEY M, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P583, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253276
MCCLOSKEY M, 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
Miozzo M., 1997, J EXPT PSYCHOL LEARN, V23, P1
Morton J., 1970, MODELS HUMAN MEMORY
MORTON J, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES
Morton J., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
Nickels L, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P161, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1732
Nickels L, 1999, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V13, P269
Nickels L, 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
Nickels L., 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
NICKELS L, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P289, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251977
NICKELS L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P209
NICKELS L, 1995, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V10, P13, DOI 10.1080/01690969508407086
NICKELS LA, 1992, THESIS U LONDON
Pate D. S., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P43, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406351
Patterson K. E., 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Rapp B, 2000, PSYCHOL REV, V107, P460, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.107.3.460
Rapp B., 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
Rapp B, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P71
Roelofs A, 1998, COGNITION, V69, P219
Roelofs A, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P657, DOI 10.1080/016909697386655
Shallice T, 2000, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V17, P517, DOI 10.1080/02643290050110638
SHATTUCKHUFNAGE.S, 1979, SENTENCE PROCESSING
SHATTUCKHUFNAGE.S, 1987, MOTOR SENSORY PROCES
Stemberger J. P., 1985, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, V1
Vigliocco G, 1997, PSYCHOL SCI, V8, P314, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1997.tb00444.x
Vigliocco G, 1999, J MEM LANG, V40, P534, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1998.2626
WARREN C, 1982, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V73, P117
NR 58
TC 27
Z9 29
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN-FEB
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 1-2
BP 3
EP 19
DI 10.1080/02687040143000645
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 521NU
UT WOS:000173847700001
ER
PT J
AU Goldrick, M
Rapp, B
AF Goldrick, M
Rapp, B
TI A restricted interaction account (RIA) of spoken word production: The
best of both worlds
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPREADING-ACTIVATION THEORY; SPEECH PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; LANGUAGE
PRODUCTION; NAMING ERRORS; SENTENCE PRODUCTION; FORMAL PARAPHASIAS;
MENTAL LEXICON; MODELS; APHASIA
AB Theories of spoken word production generally assume that mapping from conceptual representations (e. g., [furry, feline, domestic]) to phonemes (e. g., /k/, /ae/, /t/) involves both a meaning-based process and a sound-based process. A central question in this framework is how these two processes interact with one another. Two theories that occupy extreme positions on the continuum of interactivity are reviewed: a highly discrete position (e. g., Levelt, Roelofs, & Meyer, 1999), in which the two processes occur virtually independently; and a highly interactive position (e. g., Dell et al., 1997) in which the two processes exert considerable mutual influence over one another. Critical examination of the empirical data reveals that neither position can account for the full range of findings. An alternative position, the restricted interaction account (RIA), is described. By combining aspects of both highly discrete and highly interactive accounts, RIA can account for the existing empirical data, as well as for more recent challenges to interactive accounts.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Dept Cognit Sci, Baltimore, MD 21218 USA.
RP Goldrick, M (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ, Dept Cognit Sci, Baltimore, MD 21218 USA.
RI Goldrick, Matthew/E-8516-2012
CR Abd-El-Jawad H., 1987, LANG SCI, V9, P145, DOI 10.1016/S0388-0001(87)80017-7
Arnaud PJL, 1999, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V20, P269
BAARS BJ, 1975, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V14, P382, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(75)80017-X
Beland R., 1990, J NEUROLINGUIST, V5, P125, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(90)90009-N
BELAND R, 1991, PHONETICS PHONOLOGY, V2, P201
BERG T, 1992, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V13, P199, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400005567
Best W, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P443, DOI 10.1080/026432996381971
Blanken G, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P321, DOI 10.1080/026432998381122
BLANKEN G, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P534, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90136-5
BREDART S, 1992, COGNITION, V45, P187, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90017-C
Butterworth B., 1989, LEXICAL REPRESENTATI, P108
CAPLAN D, 1987, MOTOR SENSORY PROCES, P111
CAPLAN D, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P191, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1009
CAPLAN D, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P99, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252671
Caramazza A, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P428, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2379
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P177, DOI 10.1080/026432997381664
de Smedt K., 1987, Natural Language Generation: New Results in Artificial Intelligence, Psychology and Linguistics. Proceedings of the NATO Advanced Research Workshop
DELL GS, 1981, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V20, P611, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(81)90202-4
DELL GS, 1990, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V5, P313, DOI 10.1080/01690969008407066
DELL GS, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P604, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.98.4.604
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
ell G. S., 1980, ERRORS LINGUISTIC PE, P273
FAY D, 1977, LINGUIST INQ, V8, P505
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Gagnon DA, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P450, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1792
DELVISO S, 1991, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V20, P161
Garrett M., 1982, NORMALITY PATHOLOGY, P19
Garrett M. F., 1976, NEW APPROACHES LANGU, P231
GOLDRICK M, 2000, 2 INT C MENT LEX MON
GOLDRICK M, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V59, P367
HARLEY TA, 1993, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V8, P291, DOI 10.1080/01690969308406957
Harley T. A., 1995, CONNECTIONIST MODELS, P311
HARLEY TA, 1984, COGNITIVE SCI, V8, P191
HARLEY TA, 1995, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V10, P47, DOI 10.1080/01690969508407087
HILLIS AE, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P191, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253442
Hillis AE, 1999, NEUROLOGY, V53, P1813
Igoa JM, 1996, LANGUAGE PROCESSING, P305
KELLY MH, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V23, P49
KELLY MH, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P349, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.2.349
KOHN SE, 1994, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V15, P75, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400006986
LAVER J, 1969, WORK PROGR, V3
Laver J. D. M., 1980, ERRORS LINGUISTIC PE, P287
LEUNINGER H, 1994, LINGUISTICS COGNITIV, P83
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P122, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.98.1.122
LEVELT WJM, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90038-J
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
LEVELT WJM, 1983, COGNITION, V14, P41, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90026-4
MARTIN N, 1989, J MEM LANG, V28, P462, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(89)90022-3
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
Martin N, 1996, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V11, P257, DOI 10.1080/016909696387187
MATTSON ME, 1992, EXPT SLIPS HUMAN ERR, P263
NEWSOME MR, 2000, LEXICAL VERSUS SEGME
NICKELS L, 2000, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP, P271
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
NICKELS L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P209
NICKELS L, 1995, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V10, P13, DOI 10.1080/01690969508407086
Nooteboom S. G., 1969, LEYDEN STUDIES LINGU, P114
Peterson RR, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P539, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.3.539
PLAUT DC, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P377, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253469
Postma A, 2000, COGNITION, V77, P97, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(00)00090-1
Rapp B, 2000, PSYCHOL REV, V107, P460, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.107.3.460
Rapp B, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P71
Rapp B, 1998, NEUROCASE, V4, P127, DOI 10.1093/neucas/4.2.127
ROELOFS A, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P107, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90041-F
Roelofs A, 1997, COGNITION, V64, P249, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00027-9
Shallice T., 1978, ATTENTION PERFORM, P193
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Starreveld PA, 2000, J MEM LANG, V42, P497, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1999.2693
Stemberger J. P., 1985, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, V1, P143
WILSHIRE CE, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1058
NR 73
TC 32
Z9 32
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN-FEB
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 1-2
BP 20
EP 55
DI 10.1080/02687040143000203
PG 36
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 521NU
UT WOS:000173847700002
ER
PT J
AU Ralph, MAL
Moriarty, L
Sage, K
AF Ralph, MAL
Moriarty, L
Sage, K
CA York Speech Therapy Interest Grp
TI Anomia is simply a reflection of semantic and phonological impairments:
Evidence from a case-series study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PROGRESSIVE FLUENT APHASIA; WORD MEANING BLINDNESS; SPEECH PRODUCTION;
LEXICAL ACCESS; LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; VISUAL COMPLEXITY; CLASSICAL
ANEMIA; DYSLEXIA; MODELS; COMPREHENSION
AB A number of recent studies have attempted to explain patterns of normal and impaired performance in a variety of different language tasks with respect to the same set of "primary'' systems rather than resorting to explanations in terms of dedicated processes, specific to each and every language activity. In this study we consider whether the same approach can be taken to patterns of impaired single-word speech production. Specifically, using cross-sectional data from 21 aphasic patients we tested the hypothesis that the degree and nature of anomia can be explained using independently derived measures of the integrity of the patients' phonological and semantic/conceptual representations, without postulating a role for an abstract lexical level of representation. At a global level, we found that these two measures explained 55-80% of the variance in the patients' naming accuracy, a figure which approaches that found for test reliability. There was also a close fit between observed and expected naming accuracy for all individual patients. The same two measures also predicted the rate of different types of anomic error across individuals. Measures intended to assess lexical integrity did not explain any additional, unique variance in naming accuracy. We discuss these results and the theoretical approach with respect to existing theories of speech production, and evaluate the case-series methodology itself, both as a tool to reveal the underpinnings of speech production and as a neuropsychological technique in general.
C1 Univ Manchester, Dept Psychol, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
MRC, Cognit & Brain Sci Unit, Cambridge, England.
Sheffield Speech & Language Therapy Agcy, Sheffield, S Yorkshire, England.
RP Ralph, MAL (reprint author), Univ Manchester, Dept Psychol, Oxford Rd, Manchester M13 9PL, Lancs, England.
RI Lambon Ralph, Matthew/A-1695-2009
CR Behrmann M, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P1115, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00005-0
Behrmann M, 1998, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V15, P7, DOI 10.1080/026432998381212
Bozeat S, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P1207, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(00)00034-8
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
BUTTERWORTH B, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90036-8
Butterworth B, 1989, LEXICAL REPRESENTATI
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P177, DOI 10.1080/026432997381664
Chertkow H, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P203, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1771
COLTHEART M, 1993, PSYCHOL REV, V100, P589, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.100.4.589
Croot K, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P226, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1852
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
DELL GS, 1993, COGNITIVE SCI, V17, P149, DOI 10.1016/0364-0213(93)90010-6
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Farah MJ, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P849, DOI 10.1080/026432996381836
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Franklin S., 1992, ADA COMPREHENSION BA
Franklin S, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1139, DOI 10.1080/026432996381683
FRANKLIN S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P189, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248991
Friedman RB, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P114, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0006
Gagnon DA, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P450, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1792
Goodglass H, 1997, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V3, P128
Graham K, 1995, NEUROCASE, V1, P25
GRAHAM KS, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P299, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90133-3
Graham NL, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P143, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(99)00060-3
Harm MW, 1999, PSYCHOL REV, V106, P491, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.106.3.491
HODGES JR, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1783, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1783
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
JESCHENIAK JD, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P824, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.20.4.824
Joanisse MF, 1999, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V96, P7592, DOI 10.1073/pnas.96.13.7592
Kaplan E, 1976, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Ralph MAL, 2001, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V13, P341, DOI 10.1162/08989290151137395
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P122, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.98.1.122
LEVELT WJM, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90038-J
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MEYER AS, 1992, MEM COGNITION, V20, P715, DOI 10.3758/BF03202721
MEYER AS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P181, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90043-H
MORTON J, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES
Neville HJ, 1998, CURR OPIN NEUROBIOL, V8, P254, DOI 10.1016/S0959-4388(98)80148-7
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
Patterson K, 1999, CURR OPIN NEUROBIOL, V9, P235, DOI 10.1016/S0959-4388(99)80033-6
Patterson K, 2001, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V39, P709, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(01)00008-2
Patterson K, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P803, DOI 10.1080/026432996381818
PATTERSON K, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P1025, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90096-5
Pinker Steven, 1999, WORDS RULES INGREDIE
Plaut David C., 1999, EMERGENCE LANGUAGE
PLAUT DC, 1999, CONNECTIONIST MODELS
Plaut DC, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P765, DOI 10.1080/016909697386682
PLAUT DC, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P377, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253469
Plaut DC, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P56, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.1.56
Ralph MAL, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P339
Ralph MAL, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P186
Ralph MAL, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P617, DOI 10.1080/026432996381863
Ralph MAL, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P389
Riddoch M. J., 1992, BIRMINGHAM OBJECT RE
Rumelhart D. E., 1986, PARALLEL DISTRIBUTED, V2
Seidenberg M. S., 1999, EMERGENCE LANGUAGE
Seidenberg MS, 1997, SCIENCE, V275, P1599, DOI 10.1126/science.275.5306.1599
SEIDENBERG MS, 1989, PSYCHOL REV, V96, P523, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.96.4.523
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Ullman MT, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P266, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.2.266
NR 64
TC 42
Z9 42
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN-FEB
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 1-2
BP 56
EP 82
DI 10.1080/02687040143000448
PG 27
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 521NU
UT WOS:000173847700003
ER
PT J
AU Berndt, RS
Burton, MW
Haendiges, AN
Mitchum, CC
AF Berndt, RS
Burton, MW
Haendiges, AN
Mitchum, CC
TI Production of nouns and verbs in aphasia: Effects of elicitation context
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID OPTIC APHASIA; SENTENCE PRODUCTION; NAMING PERFORMANCE; GRAMMATICAL
CLASS; ANEMIC APHASIA; LEXICAL ACCESS; NEURAL SYSTEMS; PURE ANOMIA;
RETRIEVAL; DEFICITS
AB This study investigated the ability of 10 aphasic speakers and 9 normal controls to produce unambiguous, frequency-matched nouns and verbs in four elicitation conditions. Two auditory conditions included naming to definition and sentence completion; two picture conditions preceded the presentation of the picture with an auditory cue consisting of a question (what is the action shown here?) or a sentence completion (this is a picture of the action to...). Patients were grouped in terms of whether they demonstrated only word retrieval problems (anomia), or also showed difficulty with sentence comprehension and production. Contrary to expectations, there were no reliable effects of elicitation condition on performance. Although both groups of aphasic speakers found verbs more difficult than nouns to retrieve across conditions, the sentence production-impaired group showed a more severe impairment of verb production that was reliable for individual subjects. Results reinforce the importance of grammatical class as a factor in the word retrieval impairments found in aphasia.
C1 Univ Maryland, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, Baltimore, MD 21201 USA.
RP Berndt, RS (reprint author), Univ Maryland, Sch Med, Dept Neurol, 22 S Greene St, Baltimore, MD 21201 USA.
CR Bastiaanse R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249463
BEAUVOIS MF, 1982, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V298, P35, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1982.0070
Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITION, V58, P289, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00682-6
BERNDT RS, 2001, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
Berndt RS, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P249, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2726
BERNDT RS, IN PRESS J NEUROLING
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Bird H, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P246, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2292
BREEN K, 1994, CORTEX, V30, P231
Campbell R, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P183, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0044
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P177, DOI 10.1080/026432997381664
Chiarello C, 1999, BEHAV RES METH INS C, V31, P603, DOI 10.3758/BF03200739
Clark-Carter D., 1997, DOING QUANTITATIVE P
COHEN J, 1993, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V25, P257, DOI 10.3758/BF03204507
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
DAMASIO AR, 1993, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V90, P4957, DOI 10.1073/pnas.90.11.4957
DANIELE A, 1993, ITAL J NEUROL SCI, V14, P87, DOI 10.1007/BF02339048
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Druks J, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V72, P100, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2165
Ferreira CT, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P499, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70232-6
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
GILHOOLY KJ, 1980, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V12, P395, DOI 10.3758/BF03201693
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Goodglass H., 1993, UNDERSTANDING APHASI
GOODGLASS H, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P199
GREENWALD ML, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P17, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520174
Jonkers R, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P37
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
MANNING L, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P587, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90061-P
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
McCall D, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P581, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248491
MEHTA C, 1991, STATXACT, V2
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
MIOZZO A, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P1101, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90156-2
Mitchum C. C., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
MITCHUM CC, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P503, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252006
PAIVIO A, 1968, J EXP PSYCHOL, V76, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0025327
PLAUT DC, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P377, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253469
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, PHILADELPHIA COMPREH
Shelton JR, 1999, PSYCHON B REV, V6, P5, DOI 10.3758/BF03210809
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Toglia M. P., 1978, HDB SEMANTIC WORD NO
WILLIAMS SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P92, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90007-4
ZINGESER LB, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P473, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253270
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 49
TC 18
Z9 18
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN-FEB
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 1-2
BP 83
EP 106
DI 10.1080/02687040143000212
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 521NU
UT WOS:000173847700004
ER
PT J
AU Martin, N
Saffran, EM
AF Martin, N
Saffran, EM
TI The relationship of input and output phonological processing: An
evaluation of models and evidence to support them
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SHORT-TERM-MEMORY; LEXICAL ACCESS; SELECTIVE IMPAIRMENT; LANGUAGE
PRODUCTION; SPEECH PRODUCTION; DEEP DYSPHASIA; TIME COURSE; APHASIA;
PARAPHASIAS; RETRIEVAL
AB In this paper, we review studies of the relationship between input and output phonological processing and discuss the means by which an interactive activation model that assumes a single phonological network or functionally connected input and output phonological networks could account for apparent dissociations of these two pathways. Following this, we report data from 24 aphasic subjects with word processing deficits that indicate associations between input and output phonological processing. Input phonological measures correlated with output phonological measures, but not with output lexical-semantic measures. Input lexical-semantic measures did not significantly correlate with any of the output measures. We identified one subject, EF, who did not show this overall pattern. She performed well on two measures of phonological input processing (discrimination and rhyme judgements), but produced a high rate of phonological errors in picture naming. On an auditory lexical decision task, however, EF produced a high rate of false alarm errors (misperception of nonwords as words). False alarm errors have been attributed to a disturbance in input phonological processing. Consistent with this hypothesis, the rates of false alarm errors made by this group of subjects on the same auditory lexical decision task correlated with (1) input tasks that require maintaining activation of phonological representations and (2) a measure of output phonological processing (rates of phonologically related nonword errors in picture naming). These results are discussed with reference to current approaches to the study of input and output phonological processing and possible future investigations of this question.
C1 Temple Univ, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
Moss Rehabil Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA USA.
RP Martin, N (reprint author), Ctr Cognit Neurosci, Dept Neurol, 3401 N Broad St, Philadelphia, PA 19140 USA.
EM nmartin@astro.ocis.temple.edu
CR ALLPORT A, 1984, COGNITION MOTOR PROC, P209
BLANKEN G, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P534, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90136-5
Blumstein S., 1991, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P151
BREEDIN SD, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P617, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251987
BRYAN A, 1992, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V27, P343
Caplan D., 1992, CONDUCTION APHASIA, P117
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
CARAMAZZA A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V18, P128, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90011-1
Chute D. L., 1990, MACLABORATORY PSYCHO
DELL GS, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P287, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90046-K
Dell GS, 2000, PSYCHOL REV, V107, P635, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.107.3.635
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Gupta P, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P267, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1819
HOWARD D, 1993, ATTENTION PERFORM, V14, P425
Howard D., 1988, MISSING MEANING COGN
KROLL JF, 1986, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V12, P92, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.12.1.92
Leahy J., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P115, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406353
LEVELT WJM, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P122, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.98.1.122
LEVELT WJM, 1983, COGNITION, V14, P41, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90026-4
MARTIN N, 2001, HDB ADULT LANGUAGE D
Martin N, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P641
MARTIN N, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P240, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90130-7
MARTIN N, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P609, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1061
MARTIN RC, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P83, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1005
Martin RC, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V70, P437, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2184
Martin RC, 1999, J MEM LANG, V41, P3, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1999.2637
MICELI G, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P159, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90117-0
MILBERG W, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P279, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90139-3
Monsell S., 1987, LANGUAGE PERCEPTION, P273
Nickels L, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P161, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1732
NICKELS L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P209
Peters N, 1998, NEUROPATH APPL NEURO, V24, P3
Plaut DC, 1999, CARN S COGN, P381
Roach A., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P121
ROMANI C, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P131, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409382
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, PHILADELPHIA COMPREH
SCHRIEFERS H, 1990, J MEM LANG, V29, P86, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(90)90011-N
Shallice T, 2000, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V17, P517, DOI 10.1080/02643290050110638
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
Shallice T, 1979, J CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLO, V1, P183, DOI DOI 10.1080/01688637908414450
SHALLICE T, 1985, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V37, P507
WARRINGTON EK, 1981, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V72, P175
NR 47
TC 35
Z9 35
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN-FEB
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 1-2
BP 107
EP 150
DI 10.1080/02687040143000447
PG 44
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 521NU
UT WOS:000173847700005
ER
PT J
AU Best, W
Herbert, R
Hickin, J
Osborne, F
Howard, D
AF Best, W
Herbert, R
Hickin, J
Osborne, F
Howard, D
TI Phonological and orthographic facilitation of word-retrieval in aphasia:
Immediate and delayed effects
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; TIME COURSE; SPEECH PRODUCTION;
INTERFERENCE; REPETITION; THERAPY; ANEMIA; LOCUS; TIP
AB In the literature on repetition priming of word-production in normal participants, long-lasting effects can be found from a single prime. This contrasts with the findings with adults with anomia (as part of their aphasia) where phonological cues, such as first sound or rhyme, have been shown to have very short-lasting effects on word retrieval (Patterson, Purell, & Morton, 1983). In addition, the research into treatment of anomia suggests that semantic techniques produce longer-lasting effects than phonological techniques (Howard et al., 1985b). One difference between phonological and semantic techniques is in the element of choice available. Typically phonological cues are simply provided. This contrasts with semantic techniques where a choice is available, for example selecting from a set of pictures to match a word.
This study, using a case series design, set out to replicate the finding, that phonological techniques have only short-lasting effects on word retrieval in aphasia and to investigate the influence of providing a choice of cues. Items that participants with aphasia were unable to name after 5 seconds were allocated to one of three conditions: extra time (control condition), single cue, and choice of two cues. Naming was assessed immediately and at a delay (over 10 minutes later). Four different cue types were used: whole word, spoken CV, written CV, and rime.
The results were surprising. The cues influenced immediate naming, as predicted. However, this effect was still significant a delayed naming. Additionally, the benefits from a choice of cues were generally similar to those from a single cue. Different patterns of cue effectiveness were found for different participants. Further investigations shed some light on the mechanisms of cueing, orthographic cueing in particular.
C1 UCL, Dept Human Commun Sci, London WC1N 1PF, England.
Univ London Birkbeck Coll, London WC1E 7HX, England.
Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
RP Best, W (reprint author), UCL, Dept Human Commun Sci, Chandler House,Wakefield St, London WC1N 1PF, England.
CR BARRY C, 1991, BRIT APH SOC C SHEFF
BROWN AS, 1991, PSYCHOL BULL, V109, P204, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.109.2.204
BRUCE C, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P253, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90078-4
Cave CB, 1997, PSYCHOL SCI, V8, P322, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1997.tb00446.x
*CELEX CTR LEX INF, 1993, CELEX DAT
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
ELLIS AW, 1985, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, V2
ELLIS AW, IN PRESS J EXPT PSYC
Franklin S., 1992, ADA COMPREHENSION BA
HICKIN J, IN PRESS APHASIOLOGY
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Howard D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P399, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249540
Laine M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P283, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0050
Leach C., 1979, INTRO STAT NONPARAME
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MARSLENWILSON WD, 1987, COGNITION, V25, P71, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90005-9
Martelli MF, 2000, NEUROREHABILITATION, V14, P1
Meddis R., 1984, STAT USING RANKS UNI
MEYER AS, 1991, J MEM LANG, V30, P69, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(91)90011-8
MEYER AS, 1991, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V17, P1146, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.17.6.1146
MEYER AS, 1990, J MEM LANG, V29, P524, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(90)90050-A
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Monsell S., 1987, LANGUAGE PERCEPTION
MONSELL S, 1992, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V44, P763
MORTON J, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Osborne F, 1998, Int J Lang Commun Disord, V33 Suppl, P208
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
Patterson K., 1983, APHASIA THERAPY
Peterson RR, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P539, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.3.539
Ralph MAL, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V38, P186
Rapp B, 2000, PSYCHOL REV, V107, P460, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.107.3.460
SCHRIEFERS H, 1990, J MEM LANG, V29, P86, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(90)90011-N
STUART M, 1995, BRIT J EDUC PSYCHOL, V65, P287
SWINBURN K, 2001, UNPUB COMPREHENSIVE
WHEELDON LR, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P332, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1016
WHEELDON LR, 1992, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V44, P723
NR 42
TC 43
Z9 45
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN-FEB
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 1-2
BP 151
EP 168
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 521NU
UT WOS:000173847700006
ER
PT J
AU Wilshire, CE
AF Wilshire, CE
TI Where do aphasic phonological errors come from? Evidence from phoneme
movement errors in picture naming
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPEECH PRODUCTION; LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; CONDUCTION APHASIA; WORD
PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; SERIAL ORDER; FORMAL PARAPHASIAS; MODEL;
SPEAKERS; SLIPS
AB This paper analyses the incidence and distribution of phonemic misordering errors (or "contextual'' errors) in the phonologically related nonword responses of aphasic individuals. A diverse group of 22 individuals was examined in two separate picture naming studies. Contextual error rates were found to be above chance for only two of the participants. These participants had one unique feature: both were more accurate at word endings than word beginnings. Both also had a diagnosis of conduction aphasia and produced errors that were phonologically close to their targets, and at least one showed strong word length effects; however, none of these features was unique to them. The "contextual'' individuals were not distinguishable from the other participants on the basis of: their production of formal paraphasias; their relative performance on word naming and repetition; or their performance on words relative to nonwords. The findings from this study are inconsistent with the notion that contextual errors result from a malfunction involving a dedicated postlexical phoneme sequencing stage. An alternative, single-stage account of phonological encoding is offered, in which differences in contextual error rates are attributed to individual variation in word production strategies.
C1 Victoria Univ Wellington, Sch Psychol, Wellington, New Zealand.
Moss Rehab Res Inst, Philadelphia, PA USA.
RP Wilshire, CE (reprint author), Victoria Univ Wellington, Sch Psychol, POB 600, Wellington, New Zealand.
CR Baayen R. H., 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
Beland R., 1990, J NEUROLINGUIST, V5, P125, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(90)90009-N
Best W, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P443, DOI 10.1080/026432996381971
BLANKEN G, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P534, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90136-5
Blumstein S.E., 1973, PHONOLOGICAL INVESTI
BUB D, 1987, MOTOR SENSORY PROCES, P79
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1980, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V1, P199, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400000849
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1986, COGNITIVE SCI, V10, P195, DOI 10.1207/s15516709cog1002_4
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1976, NEOLOGISTIC JARGON A
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1979, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V4, P329
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1981, JARGONAPHASIA, P39
BURNS MS, 1977, BRAIN LANG, V24, P204
BUTTERWORTH B, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P133, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90046-4
Caplan D., 1992, LANGUAGE STRUCTURE P
CAPLAN D, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P99, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252671
DELL GS, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P124, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90070-8
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P123, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.1.123
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
DELL GS, 1993, COGNITIVE SCI, V17, P149, DOI 10.1016/0364-0213(93)90010-6
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
Foygel D, 2000, J MEM LANG, V43, P182, DOI 10.1006/jmla.2000.2716
Gagnon DA, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P450, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1792
Garrett M., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1, P177
Garrett M., 1982, NORMALITY PATHOLOGY, P19
Garrett M. F., 1975, PSYCHOL LEARN MOTIV, V1, P133, DOI 10.1016/S0079-7421(08)60270-4
Garrett M. F., 1988, LINGUISTICS CAMBRIDG, V3, P69
GOLDMANN RE, 2001, BRAIN LANG, V78, P1
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Houghton G., 1990, Current Research in Natural Language Generation
JOANETTE Y, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P30, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90107-8
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A, 1970, Cortex, V6, P362
Kessler B, 1997, J MEM LANG, V37, P295, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1997.2522
KOHN SE, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P209, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248196
KOHN SE, 1985, PHONOLOGICAL BREAKDO
KOHN SE, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P133, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253440
KOHN SE, 1994, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V15, P75, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400006986
KOHN SE, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P209, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248992
Lecours A R, 1969, Cortex, V5, P193
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90038-J
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MacKay D. G., 1987, ORG PERCEPTION ACTIO
MACKAY DG, 1970, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V8, P323, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(70)90078-3
MacNeilage P. F., 1983, PRODUCTION SPEECH, P109
MARTIN N, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P240, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90130-7
MCCARTHY R, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P463, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.2.463
MILLER D, 1987, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P253
MORTON J, 1979, STRUCTURES PROCESS P, V2, P157
Nespoulous J.-L., 1987, MOTOR SENSORY PROCES, P53
NICKELS L, 1995, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V10, P13, DOI 10.1080/01690969508407086
Norman D. A., 1970, MODELS HUM MEMORY, P203
Pate D. S., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P43, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406351
Rapp B, 2000, PSYCHOL REV, V107, P460, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.107.3.460
Roach A., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P121
Roelofs A, 1997, COGNITION, V64, P249, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00027-9
SAFFRAN EM, 1988, UNPUB PHILADELPHIA C
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1042
SCHWARTZ MF, 2001, UNPUB ORIGINS NONWOR
Shattuck-Hufnagel S., 1987, MOTOR SENSORY PROCES, P17
Shattuck-Hufnagel S., 1979, SENTENCE PROCESSING, P295
SHATTUCKHUFNAGEL S, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P213, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90044-I
Stemberger J. P., 1985, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, V1, P143
STEMBERGER JP, 1990, COGNITION, V35, P123, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(90)90012-9
TALO ES, 1980, ERRORS LINGUISTIC PE, P81
Wheeler DW, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P147, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1816
Wilshire CE, 1998, COGNITION, V68, P143, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(98)00045-6
WILSHIRE CE, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1058
Wing A. M., 1980, COGNITIVE PROCESS, P251
NR 69
TC 24
Z9 24
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN-FEB
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 1-2
BP 169
EP 197
DI 10.1080/02687040143000528
PG 29
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 521NU
UT WOS:000173847700007
ER
PT J
AU Howard, D
Smith, K
AF Howard, D
Smith, K
TI The effects of lexical stress in aphasic word production
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPEECH PRODUCTION; PROSODIC PHONOLOGY; ACCESS; LANGUAGE; ENGLISH;
REPRESENTATION; SEGMENTATION; SYLLABLES; DYSLEXIA; SPEAKERS
AB This paper investigates the effects of lexical stress pattern on speech production by aphasic subjects. The subjects are more accurate at producing words with first syllable stress than those with stress on the second syllable in both word and non-word repetition and picture naming. The subjects' accuracy in repetition is unaffected by the stress pattern of a preceding word in a phrase, but strongly affected by the phrase's syllable length. With three-syllable words, subjects are most accurate in both repetition and naming with words whose primary stress falls on either the first or the third syllable. Explanations of these results in terms of the vulnerability of initial unstressed syllables, or simple frequency-dependent stress assignment strategies, are rejected. Instead it is argued that an utterance's segmental and metrical structure are computed in parallel, but the computation requires resources that are limited in subjects who make phonological errors in speech production.
C1 Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Dept Speech, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
RP Howard, D (reprint author), Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Dept Speech, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
CR Baayen R. H., 1995, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
BLACK M, 1986, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V3, P369, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252028
BLACK M, 1989, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V6, P85, DOI 10.1080/02643298908253286
BUTTERWORTH B, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P261, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90045-J
CAPLAN D, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P99, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252671
Cappa SF, 1997, COGNITION, V65, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00024-3
Carter A, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P202
Cutler A., 1987, Computer Speech and Language, V2, DOI 10.1016/0885-2308(87)90004-0
Coleman John, 1998, PHONOLOGICAL REPRESE
COLOMBO L, 1991, PSYCHOL RES-PSYCH FO, V53, P71, DOI 10.1007/BF00867334
COLTHEART M, 1983, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V35, P469
CROMPTON A, 1982, SLIPS TONGUE LANGUAG
Cutler A, 1997, LANG SPEECH, V40, P141
CUTLER A, 1988, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V14, P113, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.14.1.113
CUTLER A, 1989, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V6, P67, DOI 10.1080/02643298908253285
CUTLER A, 1980, SLIPS TONGUE LANGUAG, P11
Cutler A, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P839, DOI 10.1080/016909697386718
DELL GS, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P124, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90070-8
FEAR BD, 1995, J ACOUST SOC AM, V97, P1893, DOI 10.1121/1.412063
FRANKLIN S, 1992, ADA COMPREHENSION TE
Franklin S, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1139, DOI 10.1080/026432996381683
Fudge E., 1984, ENGLISH WORD STRESS
GERKEN L, 1994, J CHILD LANG, V21, P565
Gerken L, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P38
GERKEN LA, 1991, J MEM LANG, V30, P431, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(91)90015-C
GERKEN LA, 1994, J MEM LANG, V33, P19, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1994.1002
Gerken LA, 1996, LANGUAGE, V72, P683, DOI 10.2307/416099
Giegerich H. J., 1992, ENGLISH PHONOLOGY
GOODGLAS.H, 1967, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V10, P5
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kager Rene, 1989, METRICAL THEORY STRE
Kehoe M, 1997, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V11, P389, DOI 10.3109/02699209708985202
Kelly MH, 1998, MEM COGNITION, V26, P822, DOI 10.3758/BF03211401
KLEIN HB, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P535
LAHIRI A, 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO, P165
Leach C., 1979, INTRO STAT NONPARAME
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P239, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90030-2
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
LLOYD AJ, 1998, THESIS U YORK
McGregor KK, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P1220
Meddis R., 1984, STAT USING RANKS UNI
MICELI G, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P273, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253465
NICKELS L, 2001, UNPUB DISSOCIATING E
Nickels L, 1999, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V13, P269
NICKELS L, 2000, ASPECTS LANGUAGE PRO, P115
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
NIEMI J, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V26, P28, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90026-4
Pate D. S., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P43, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406351
Roelofs A, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P922, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.4.922
Roelofs A, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P657, DOI 10.1080/016909697386655
Snow D, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P1171
SWINBURN K, UNPUB COMPREHENSIVE
Wheeldon L, 1997, J MEM LANG, V37, P356, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1997.2517
NR 55
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN-FEB
PY 2002
VL 16
IS 1-2
BP 198
EP 237
DI 10.1080/02687040143000546
PG 40
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 521NU
UT WOS:000173847700008
ER
PT J
AU Haley, KL
Ohde, RN
Wertz, RT
AF Haley, KL
Ohde, RN
Wertz, RT
TI Vowel quality in aphasia and apraxia of speech: Phonetic transcription
and formant analyses
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SINGLE WORD INTELLIGIBILITY; AMERICAN ENGLISH VOWELS; BROCAS APHASIA;
1ST FORMANT; PERCEPTION; REPRESENTATION; FREQUENCY; PATTERNS
AB We examined acoustic and perceptual features of vowel quality in aphasia and apraxia of speech. Twenty aphasic speakers with and without apraxia of speech and ten normal speakers produced the words "hid'' and "head'' approximately 24 times. Each production was transcribed with broad phonetic transcription, and the first and second formant frequencies were measured at the midpoint of the vowel steady state. According to the phonetic transcription, some aphasic and apraxic speakers displayed a large number of vowel substitutions, whereas others were indistinguishable from normal speakers. Perceived substitutions were generally close to the target and affected almost exclusively vowel height rather than vowel frontness. Acoustically, several speakers in both aphasic groups displayed a formant pattern that deviated from normal. The nature of the deviation pattern varied across individual aphasic and apraxic speakers. For some, formant frequencies were abnormally variable, whereas others displayed a pattern of only occasional deviations, and yet others demonstrated a collapsing of phonetic categories. The results are consistent with previous reports that articulatory positioning for vowels is impaired in many aphasic and apraxic speakers. The existence of individual articulatory patterns is emphasised, and the limitations of a static approach to formant analysis are noted.
C1 Univ N Carolina, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
Vanderbilt Bill Wilkerson Ctr Otolaryngol & Commu, Nashville, TN USA.
Vanderbilt Vet Adm Med Ctr, Nashville, TN USA.
RP Haley, KL (reprint author), Univ N Carolina, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Med Sch wing D,CB 7190, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
CR AHLEY KL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P1125
Assmann PF, 2000, J ACOUST SOC AM, V108, P1856, DOI 10.1121/1.1289363
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1987, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V1, P113, DOI 10.3109/02699208708985007
TROST JE, 1974, BRAIN LANG, V1, P63, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(74)90026-1
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
DIBENEDETTO MG, 1989, J ACOUST SOC AM, V86, P67, DOI 10.1121/1.398221
DIBENEDETTO MG, 1989, J ACOUST SOC AM, V86, P55, DOI 10.1121/1.398220
Haley KL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P715, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249568
Haley KL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P619
Haley KL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P179
HILLENBRAND J, 1995, J ACOUST SOC AM, V97, P3099, DOI 10.1121/1.411872
JENKINS JJ, 1994, J ACOUST SOC AM, V95, P1030, DOI 10.1121/1.410014
Joos M., 1948, LANGUAGE SUPPL, V24, P1, DOI DOI 10.2307/522229
KELLER E, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V5, P265, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90026-3
KELLER E, 1975, THESIS U TORONTO CAN
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
KENT RD, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P482
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LAPOINTE LL, 1975, J COMMUN DISORD, V8, P259, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(75)90018-0
LISS JM, 1992, J ACOUST SOC AM, V92, P2984, DOI 10.1121/1.404364
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
McNeil M.R., 1990, CEREBRAL CONTROL SPE, P349
MILENKOVIC PM, 1996, CSPEECH COMPUTER PRO
MONOI H, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V20, P175, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90041-X
NEAREY TM, 1989, J ACOUST SOC AM, V85, P2088, DOI 10.1121/1.397861
ODELL K, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P67
PETERSON GE, 1952, J ACOUST SOC AM, V24, P175, DOI 10.1121/1.1906875
PISONI DB, 1973, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V13, P253, DOI 10.3758/BF03214136
Ryalls J., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P23
RYALLS JH, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P48, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90033-7
RYALLS JH, 1981, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V19, P365, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(81)90066-X
Snijders TAB, 1999, MULTILEVEL ANAL INTR, V1st
STRANGE W, 1989, J ACOUST SOC AM, V85, P2081, DOI 10.1121/1.397860
SYRDAL AK, 1986, J ACOUST SOC AM, V79, P1086, DOI 10.1121/1.393381
Ventry I M, 1983, ASHA, V25, P37
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
ZIEGLER W, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P449, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249006
NR 37
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 12
BP 1107
EP 1123
DI 10.1080/02687040143000519
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 492HN
UT WOS:000172162500001
ER
PT J
AU Haley, KL
Bays, GL
Ohde, RN
AF Haley, KL
Bays, GL
Ohde, RN
TI Phonetic properties of aphasic-apraxic speech: A modified narrow
transcription analysis
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SINGLE WORD INTELLIGIBILITY; BROCAS APHASIA; PERCEPTUAL CHARACTERISTICS;
SOUND ERRORS; DYSARTHRIA; PATTERNS; SPEAKERS; ARTICULATION; CONSONANTS;
VOWEL
AB We used a modified narrow phonetic transcription procedure to examine a speech sample produced by 10 speakers with coexisting aphasia and apraxia of speech. The transcription protocol was limited to eight diacritic marks selected based on previous perceptual descriptions of phonetic distortion among speakers with pure apraxia of speech. Additionally, there was one general distortion category for perceived distortions not captured by the main diacritic marks. The results showed that distortion errors were as common as substitution errors, that vowel and consonant segments were equally vulnerable to misproduction, and that there was no difference between the frequency of consonants produced incorrectly in prevocalic and postvocalic syllable positions. Among distortion errors, 32% were classified as segment prolongations and 41% were classified as general distortions. An independent transcription that used a comprehensive system of diacritic marks was performed as a follow-up. Most general distortions were not further specified by the comprehensive transcription system. A phonetic contrast analysis of errors detected at the broad transcription level yielded different speech characteristics from the observed distortion errors, but were in general correspondence with previously reported error patterns in intelligibility testing of the same speech sample. The results are discussed relative to the role of single word intelligibility testing in aphasia and apraxia of speech assessment and the challenges associated with transcribing disordered speech.
C1 Univ N Carolina, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
Vanderbilt Bill Wolkerson Ctr Otolaryngol & Commu, Nashville, TN USA.
RP Haley, KL (reprint author), Univ N Carolina, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Med Sch Wing D,CB 7190, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
CR Ackermann H, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P321, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1740
ANSEL BM, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P296
Blumstein S., 1991, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P151
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1987, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V1, P113, DOI 10.3109/02699208708985007
TROST JE, 1974, BRAIN LANG, V1, P63, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(74)90026-1
CANTER GJ, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P204, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90131-2
Haley KL, 2001, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P1107, DOI 10.1080/02687040143000519
Haley KL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P715, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249568
Haley KL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P619
Haley KL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P179
Hardcastle W. J., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P113
Hardcastle William J., 1992, INTELLIGIBILITY SPEE, P287
HARMES S, 1984, J PHONETICS, V12, P367
International Phonetic Association, 1949, PRINC INT PHON ASS
JOHNS DF, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P556
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
KENT RD, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P721
KENT RD, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P482
Kent RD, 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P7, DOI DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0503.07
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KLICH RJ, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P451
LAPOINTE LL, 1975, J COMMUN DISORD, V8, P259, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(75)90018-0
McNeil M.R., 1990, CEREBRAL CONTROL SPE, P349
MILLER N, 1995, EUROPEAN J DISORDERS, V30, P246
MONOI H, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V20, P175, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90041-X
ODELL K, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P67
ODELL K, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P345
Ohde RN, 1992, PHONETIC ANAL NORMAL
Oller D K, 1975, Phonetica, V31, P288
PISONI DB, 1973, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V13, P253, DOI 10.3758/BF03214136
Redford MA, 1999, J ACOUST SOC AM, V106, P1555, DOI 10.1121/1.427152
ROSENBEK JC, 1991, DYSARTHRIA AND APRAXIA OF SPEECH, P289
SEIKEL JA, 1990, J COMMUN DISORD, V23, P417, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(90)90028-W
Shankweiler D., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P277
Shewan C. M., 1979, AUDITORY COMPREHENSI
SHRIBERG LD, 1984, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V27, P456
Shuster LI, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P635
SQUARE PA, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P245
Sussman HM, 1997, J ACOUST SOC AM, V101, P2826, DOI 10.1121/1.418567
WAMBAUGH JL, 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P186
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
WILLIAMS SE, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P171, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90041-6
ZIEGLER W, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P449, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249006
NR 43
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 12
BP 1125
EP 1142
DI 10.1080/02687040143000537
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 492HN
UT WOS:000172162500002
ER
PT J
AU Geigenberger, A
Ziegler, W
AF Geigenberger, A
Ziegler, W
TI Receptive prosodic processing in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID HEMISPHERE-DAMAGED SUBJECTS; UNILATERAL BRAIN-DAMAGE; SPEECH PROSODY;
FUNDAMENTAL-FREQUENCY; AFFECTIVE CONTEXTS; LINGUISTIC STRESS; AUDITORY
COMPREHENSION; CUES; INTONATION; BOUNDARIES
AB The aim of this study was to systematically investigate the capacity of aphasic patients in the comprehension of emotional, conversational, and linguistic prosody in relation to the degree of severity of aphasia. In order to make a contribution to an ongoing discussion about the role of the two cerebral hemispheres in prosodic processing, we compared the results of the left-hemisphere-damaged aphasic group with those of a group of right-hemisphere-damaged patients. We found deficits in both patient groups, but with different profiles across tasks: The processing of emphatic stress was significantly impaired in the aphasic group, but relatively spared in the patients with lesions to the right hemisphere. On the other hand, relatively good performance by the aphasic patients and significantly inferior results from the right hemisphere damaged patients were found in the processing of emotional and conversational prosodic information. The disturbances found in the left hemisphere group were independent of the severity of aphasic impairment.
C1 City Hosp Bogenhausen, Munich, Germany.
RP Ziegler, W (reprint author), EKN Clin Neuropsychol Res Grp, Dachauer Str 164, D-80992 Munich, Germany.
CR Alcock KJ, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V75, P47, DOI 10.1006/brln.2000.2324
ALPERT M, 1995, PSYCHOPHARMACOL BULL, V31, P421
Balan A, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P73, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2035
Barrett AM, 1999, NEUROPSY NEUROPSY BE, V12, P117
Baum SR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P581
Baum SR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P31
Baum SR, 1997, LANG SPEECH, V40, P313
BEATTIE GW, 1982, NATURE, V300, P744, DOI 10.1038/300744a0
BEHRENS SJ, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P181, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90014-X
Blasko DG, 1998, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V87, P3
BLONDER LX, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1115, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.3.1115
Borod JC, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V7, P445, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.7.4.445
BOROD JC, 1990, J COMMUN DISORD, V23, P247, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(90)90003-H
Bowers D., 1993, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V7, P433, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.7.4.433
BRADVIK B, 1991, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V84, P114
COHEN MJ, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P171, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1047
COOPER WE, 1984, LANG SPEECH, V27, P17
Cutler A, 1997, LANG SPEECH, V40, P141
CUTLER A, 1995, LANG SPEECH, V38, P1
CUTLER A, 1990, SPEECH COMMUN, V9, P485, DOI 10.1016/0167-6393(90)90024-4
CUTLER A, 1996, INTONATION DISCOURSE
Dronkers NF, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P179, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00012-8
FRICK RW, 1985, PSYCHOL BULL, V97, P412, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.97.3.412
Gandour J, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P422, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1069
GEIGENBERGER A, 2000, CLIN LANGUISTICS PHO, V15, P85
GEIGENBERGER A, 1999, VERARBEITUNG EMOTION
GROSJEAN F, 1983, LINGUISTICS, V21, P501, DOI 10.1515/ling.1983.21.3.501
Grosjean F, 1996, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V11, P107, DOI 10.1080/016909696387231
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Kimelman MDZ, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P212, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2142
KIMELMAN MDZ, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P334
Kjelgaard MM, 1999, J MEM LANG, V40, P153, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1998.2620
LEHTIHALMES M, 1993, 3 C INT CLIN PHON LI
LEVELT JM, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LINFIELD KC, 1999, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V20, P395
Lorch MP, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P103, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00008-6
MCQUEEN JM, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P621, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.20.3.621
MCROBERTS GW, 1995, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V57, P159, DOI 10.3758/BF03206502
Montreys CR, 1998, INT J NEUROSCI, V96, P269
OUELLETTE GP, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P257
Pell MD, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P80, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1638
PELL MD, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P710
Pell MD, 1999, CORTEX, V35, P455, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70813-X
PERETZ I, 1990, BRAIN, V113, P1185, DOI 10.1093/brain/113.4.1185
Perkins JM, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248416
Rao SM, 2001, NAT NEUROSCI, V4, P317, DOI 10.1038/85191
RYALLS J, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P685
SALMASO D, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P533
SERON X, 1982, J COMMUN DISORD, V15, P223, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(82)90035-1
SHAPIRO BE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P19, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90118-X
Steinhauer K, 1999, NAT NEUROSCI, V2, P191, DOI 10.1038/5757
TERKEN J, 1991, J ACOUST SOC AM, V89, P1768, DOI 10.1121/1.401019
TISCHER B, 1993, VOKALE KOMMUNKATION
VANLANCKER D, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P963
VANLANCKER DR, 1989, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V11, P665, DOI 10.1080/01688638908400923
Warren P, 1996, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V11, P1, DOI 10.1080/016909696387204
Zatorre RJ, 1997, ACOUSTICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING IN THE CENTRAL AUDITORY SYSTEM, P453, DOI 10.1007/978-1-4419-8712-9_42
ZATORRE RJ, 1992, SCIENCE, V256, P846, DOI 10.1126/science.1589767
ZATORRE RJ, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P2403, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.6.2403
NR 59
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 12
BP 1169
EP 1187
DI 10.1080/02687040143000555
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 492HN
UT WOS:000172162500004
ER
PT J
AU Elman, RJ
AF Elman, RJ
TI The Internet and aphasia: Crossing the digital divide
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
AB The information age is rapidly changing the world in which we live. Given the increasing dominance of the Internet and the World Wide Web, many functions in our society are rapidly becoming transacted via computer. Email communication and website commerce are becoming more popular. While such advances are of benefit to many in our society, there is also a digital divide that is separating those with and without computer access into "haves'' and "have nots''. The purpose of the present paper is to discuss the ramifications that a digital society may have for those affected by aphasia, and what aphasiologists can do.
C1 Aphasia Ctr Calif, Oakland, CA 94602 USA.
RP Elman, RJ (reprint author), Aphasia Ctr Calif, 3996 Lyman Rd, Oakland, CA 94602 USA.
CR Alliance for Technology Access, 2000, COMP WEB RES PEOPL D
BREWER J, 1999, SEB ACCESSIBILITY IN
CAMPBELL L, 1997, CALIFORNIA ASS P SPR
Cook A. M., 1995, ASSISTIVE TECHNOLOGI
Elman RJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P455
LASATER J, 1999, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V6, P66
Paciello M. G., 2000, WEB ACCESSIBILITY PE
SEILER R, 1998, P EXP HOR SPEECH PAT, P49
Singh S, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P157, DOI 10.1080/026870300401531
STEWART TA, 1999, FORTUNE, V140, P184
*US DEP COMM, 1999, FALL NET DEF DIG DIV
WADDELL CD, 1998, APPLYING ADA INTERNE
WADDELL CD, 1999, GROWING DIGITAL DIVI
World Health Organisation, 2000, INT CLASS FUNCT DIS
NR 14
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 895
EP 899
DI 10.1080/02687040143000267
PG 5
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600002
ER
PT J
AU McNeil, MR
Pratt, SR
AF McNeil, MR
Pratt, SR
TI Defining aphasia: Some theoretical and clinical implications of
operating from a formal definition
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
AB Theoretical and philosophical issues related to the need for and criteria of a formal definition of aphasia are discussed. Following a review of several definitions of aphasia and the contrast of two, a formal definition is advanced that meets the specific requirements of a scientific definition: criteria for group membership and the assumed mechanisms for these criteria. The specific criteria for group membership are discussed and the assumed mechanisms are presented. It is argued that this definition (or a well justified alternative) can serve as a first approximation to a general theory of aphasia. It is also claimed that it can inform the research consumer about important but unstated assumptions of researchers as well as provide clinical guidance.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP McNeil, MR (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RI Pratt, Sheila/H-7139-2013
CR ARISTOTLE, 1976, COMPLETE WORKS ARIST
Benson DF, 1979, APHASIA ALEXIA AGRAP
Boyer M., 1983, AM HERITAGE DICT
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V48, P342
CHAKRABARTI KK, 1995, MONOGRAPHS SOC ASIAN, V13, P1
CHAPEY R, 1981, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P31
COPPENS P, 1998, APHASIA ATYPICAL POP
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
HALPERN H, 1976, CORTEX, V12, P365
Head H., 1926, APHASIA KINDRED DISO
JACKSON JH, 1931, SELECTED WRITINGS, V2
JOANETTE Y, 1999, CLIN APH C KEY WEST
Kussmaul A, 1877, CYCLOPEDIA PRACTICE, V14, P581
McNeil M. R., 1988, HDB SPEECH LANGUAGE, P738
McNeil M. R., 1978, REV TOKEN TEST
MCNEIL MR, 1982, SPEECH LANGUAGE HEAR, V3, P692
MYERS PS, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P913
OSGOOD C, 1963, APPROACHES STUDY APH
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
RYAN WJ, 1982, NURSE COMMUNICATIVEL
Schuell H. M., 1964, APHASIA ADULTS DIAGN
NR 23
TC 29
Z9 31
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 901
EP 911
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600003
ER
PT J
AU Myers, PS
AF Myers, PS
TI Toward a definition of RHD syndrome
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID ATTENTION
AB Research and clinical efforts aimed at understanding and improving the communication impairments associated with acquired right hemisphere damage (RHD) are hampered by lack of a formal definition or label. This paper addresses that issue in light of the recent proposal by Joanette and Anslado (1999a, b) that RHD communication disorders be called "Pragmatic Aphasia''. Underlying assumptions regarding the use of the term aphasia to describe these deficits and the concept that pragmatics is inherent to language are questioned. The potential value of "pragmatics'' as it relates to communicative intents, and its potential application to a definition of RHD communication impairments are also explored.
C1 Mayo Clin, Rochester, MN USA.
RP Myers, PS (reprint author), 2705 Bamber Lane SW, Rochester, MN 55902 USA.
CR Bara BG, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P7, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1812
Benson DF, 1979, APHASIA ALEXIA AGRAP
BROWNELL HH, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V22, P253, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90093-2
BURGESS C, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P86, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90056-9
CHIARELLO C, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P75, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90103-N
CHIARELLO C, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V24, P623, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(86)90002-3
Heilman KM, 1987, NEUROPHYSIOLOGICAL N, P115
Joanette Y, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P529, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2126
JOANETTE Y, 1999, CLIN APHAS C KEY WES
LADAVAS E, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P353, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90024-9
McNeil M. R., 1988, HDB SPEECH LANGUAGE, P738
MCNEIL MR, APHASIOLOGY, V15, P901
MESULAM MM, 1981, ANN NEUROL, V10, P309, DOI 10.1002/ana.410100402
Myers P., 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
Myers PS, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P870
Penn C, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P535, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2127
POSNER MI, 1990, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V13, P1863
SABBAGH MA, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P29
Tirassa M, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P419, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2121
Tompkins CA, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P172
TUCKER DM, 1984, PSYCHOL REV, V91, P185, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.91.2.185
NR 21
TC 12
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 913
EP 918
DI 10.1080/02687040143000285
PG 6
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600004
ER
PT J
AU Hillis, AE
Kane, A
Barker, P
Beauchamp, N
Gordon, B
Wityk, R
AF Hillis, AE
Kane, A
Barker, P
Beauchamp, N
Gordon, B
Wityk, R
TI Neural substrates of the cognitive processes underlying reading:
Evidence from magnetic resonance perfusion imaging in hyperacute stroke
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID COMPREHENSION; DIFFUSION; ANATOMY; APHASIA
AB Although it is widely agreed that reading aloud entails multiple cognitive processes, there is little evidence for localisation of these processes. We investigated regions of brain dysfunction associated with impairment of each process. Forty patients were studied within 24 hours of onset of dominant hemisphere stroke, using: (1) a battery of tasks to identify impaired processes underlying reading, and (2) magnetic resonance perfusion imaging (MRPI) and diffusion-weighted imaging (DWI). Impairment of each component of reading, except motor speech, was highly correlated with one or more regions of hypoperfusion identified by MRPI, but not with areas of infarct on DWI.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Baltimore, MD USA.
RP Hillis, AE (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Univ Hosp, Dept Neurol, Meyer 5-185,600 N Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
CR Allport DA, 1985, CURRENT PERSPECTIVES
Barber PA, 1998, NEUROLOGY, V51, P418
Beaulieu C, 1999, ANN NEUROL, V46, P568, DOI 10.1002/1531-8249(199910)46:4<568::AID-ANA4>3.0.CO;2-R
BENSON DF, 1969, HDB CLIN NEUROPSYCHO, V4
Black S., 1994, LOCALIZATION NEUROIM
CHERTKOW H, 1994, LOCALIZATION NEUROIM
CHERTKOW H, 1993, NEUROLOGY, V43, pA19
Coltheart M., 1980, DEEP DYSLEXIA
Damasio H., 1989, LESION ANAL NEUROPSY
Dejerine J., 1891, CR HEBD ACAD SCI, V3, P197
DEMONET JF, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1753, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1753
*EC INC, 1988, MICR 2 REL 1 5
GOODGLASS H, 1997, ANOMIA
HART J, 1990, ANN NEUROL, V27, P226, DOI 10.1002/ana.410270303
Hillis AE, 2000, NEUROLOGY, V55, P782
HILLIS AE, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Hillis AE, 2001, NEUROLOGY, V56, P670
HILLIS AE, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P333, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253156
HILLIS AE, 2000, HDB COGNITIVE NEUROP
HILLIS AE, 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P150
HOWARD D, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1769, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1769
Jenkins WM, 1987, PROG BRAIN RES , V71, P249
LESSER RP, 1986, NEUROLOGY, V36, P658
MARSHALL JC, 1973, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V2, P175, DOI 10.1007/BF01067101
MERZENICH MM, 1983, NEUROSCIENCE, V8, P33, DOI 10.1016/0306-4522(83)90024-6
Patterson K., 1985, SURFACE DYSLEXIA
PETERSEN SE, 1988, NATURE, V331, P585, DOI 10.1038/331585a0
Petersen S E, 1989, J Cogn Neurosci, V1, P153, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1989.1.2.153
Raymer AM, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P137, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1786
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
WERNICKE K, 1874, APHASISCHE SYMPTOMKO
NR 31
TC 18
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 919
EP 931
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600005
ER
PT J
AU Wambaugh, JL
Linebaugh, CW
Doyle, PJ
Martinez, AL
AF Wambaugh, JL
Linebaugh, CW
Doyle, PJ
Martinez, AL
TI Effects of two cueing treatments on lexical retrieval in aphasic
speakers with different levels of deficit
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID NAMING DISORDERS; THERAPY; PRINCIPLES; ACCESS
AB The effects of two cueing treatments for lexical retrieval were examined with three aphasic speakers who demonstrated different levels of lexical processing impairment (i.e., predominately semantic, predominately phonologic, and mixed semantic-phonologic). Each speaker received both treatments, with treatments being applied sequentially to different word lists in a multiple baseline design. Both treatments consisted of a prestimulation phase followed by the application of a response-contingent cueing hierarchy. One treatment employed semantic-level cueing, whereas the other treatment utilised phonologic-level cueing. All participants evidenced a positive response to both of the treatments and one participant (predominately phonologic-level deficit) showed a superior response to lexical-semantic treatment.
C1 Univ Utah, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, Salt Lake City, UT USA.
George Washington Univ, Washington, DC USA.
VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
GRECC, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP Wambaugh, JL (reprint author), Univ Utah, 1201 Behav Sci Bldg,390 S 1530 E, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
CR Best W., 1997, LANGUAGE DISORDERS C, P102
BOYLE M, 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P94
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
DELOCHE G, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P201, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249506
Drew RL, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P972
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
Hillis A. E., 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P207
HILLIS AE, 1990, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P207
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Laine M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P283, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0050
LEVELT WJM, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P122, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.98.1.122
LI EC, 1996, ADULT APHASIA REHABI, P229
Linebaugh CW, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249555
Linebaugh Craig W., 1997, P112
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V2
PRING T, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P383, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249517
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
Yorkston K. M., 1981, ASSESSMENT INTELLIGI
NR 28
TC 44
Z9 44
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 933
EP 950
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600006
ER
PT J
AU Aftonomos, LB
Steele, RD
Appelbaum, JS
Harris, VM
AF Aftonomos, LB
Steele, RD
Appelbaum, JS
Harris, VM
TI Relationships between impairment-level assessments and functional-level
assessments in aphasia: Findings from LCC treatment programmes
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID OUTCOMES; METAANALYSIS; TECHNOLOGY; RECOVERY; EFFICACY; PATIENT
AB We report an outcome study of persons with aphasia participating in community-based treatment programmes. Patients (n=50) were assessed before and after treatment using: (i) a standardised test of impairment, the Western Aphasia Battery, administered by treating clinicians; and (ii) a standardised assessment of disability (functional communication), the Communicative Effectiveness Index, rated by family members. Pretreatment and posttreatment means are calculated and compared, with matched t-tests utilised to probe statistical significance of improvements after treatment. We then calculate impairment- and functional-level means by aphasia diagnostic categories, assigning rank orders and calculating Spearman rank-order correlations. Data analysis shows that, before treatment, patients spanned a wide range of times after onset, aphasia diagnostic types, and severity levels at start of care. Following treatment, means of the 50 patients improved significantly on every measure administered at both the impairment and the functional levels. Absolute improvements ranged from 6.5% to 26.2%, with statistical significance ranging from p<.01 to p<<.0001. Before treatment, there is strong positive correlation ( = +.90) between impairment- level and functional-level assessment means by diagnostic categories; after treatment, improvement means by these diagnostic categories show moderate negative correlation (rho = -.60). Further examination shows that post-treatment improvements are found to be best viewed as functions of same-type severity levels pretreatment, with patterns of improvement at the impairment and functional levels diverging distinctly.
C1 Mills Peninsula Hlth Serv, San Mateo, CA USA.
LingraphiCARE Amer Inc, Oakland, CA USA.
Kanza Multispecialty Grp, Kansas City, KS USA.
RP Steele, RD (reprint author), LingraphiCARE Amer Inc, E 1325 20th Ave, Spokane, WA 99203 USA.
CR AFTONOMOS LB, 2000, 30 ANN CLIN APHAS C
Aftonomos LB, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P841, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90197-0
Aftonomos LB, 1999, STROKE, V30, P1370
APPELBAUM JS, 1998, 28 ANN CLIN APH C 17
APPELBAUM JS, 1998, 10 ANN STROK REH C 1
Benson DF, 1979, APHASIA ALEXIA AGRAP
Brookshire RH, 1997, INTRO NEUROGENIC COM
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
Downie N. M., 1970, BASIC STAT METHODS
ELLWOOD PM, 1988, NEW ENGL J MED, V318, P1549, DOI 10.1056/NEJM198806093182329
Frattali C. M., 1995, FUNCTIONAL ASSESSMEN
Goodglass H., 1993, UNDERSTANDING APHASI
Harris I, 1997, APPROPRIATE TECH, V23, P9
HARRIS VM, 2000, ASHA SPECIAL INTERES, V10, P11
Hatch E., 1982, RES DESIGN STAT APPL
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ACTIVI
Holland AL, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, pS27
KEARNS K, 2000, 30 ANN CLIN APH C 31
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LOMAS J, 1987, MED CARE, V25, P764, DOI 10.1097/00005650-198708000-00009
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
PEDERSEN PM, 1995, ANN NEUROL, V38, P659, DOI 10.1002/ana.410380416
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P582, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1060
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
SARNO MT, 1984, FUNCTIONAL ASSESSMEN, P210
SHEWAN CM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P308
STEELE RD, 1995, P INT WORKSH HUM INT, P53
NR 27
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 951
EP 964
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600007
ER
PT J
AU Wambaugh, JL
Martinez, AL
Alegre, MN
AF Wambaugh, JL
Martinez, AL
Alegre, MN
TI Qualitative changes following application of modified response
elaboration training with apraxic-aphasic speakers
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
AB The purpose of this study was to examine the qualitative changes in verbal productions of two apraxic-aphasic speakers who had exhibited positive changes in content production following application of Response Elaboration Training (RET). Picture descriptions and personal recounts were analysed utilising a modification of the procedures developed by Saffran, Berndt, & Schwartz, 1989. Results revealed that the use of nouns was predominately greater than any other lexical type at the beginning and the end of treatment for both participants. The majority of the gains made in increased production of content took the form of nouns. One speaker showed increases in other lexical types (i.e., verbs, articles, personal pronouns) as well. Increased use of constructions such as noun phrases and verb phrases were also noted.
C1 Univ Utah, Dept CMDIS, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
VAMC Salt Lake City, Salt Lake City, UT USA.
RP Wambaugh, JL (reprint author), Univ Utah, Dept CMDIS, 1201 Behav Sci Bldg,1530 E 390 S, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
CR DABUL B, 1979, APHRAXIA BATTERY ADU
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
EDELMAN G, 1987, PROMOTING APHASICS C
Gaddie A., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P171
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Kearns K. P., 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P223
KEARNS KP, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P223
KEARNS KP, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P196
Kearns Kevin P., 1997, P1
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V2
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
STOKES T, 1977, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V22, P157
Wambaugh JL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P603
YEDOR KE, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P213
Yorkston K. M., 1981, ASSESSMENT INTELLIGI
NR 18
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 965
EP 976
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600008
ER
PT J
AU Rose, M
Douglas, J
AF Rose, M
Douglas, J
TI The differential facilitatory effects of gesture and visualisation
processes on object naming in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID SPEECH PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; FAMILIARITY
AB This study investigated the differential facilitation effects of gesture and visualisation processes on object naming in individuals with aphasia. Six participants with word production deficits resulting from varying levels of impairment in the word production system, underwent a series of naming trials. Baseline measures of naming were compared to those obtained following instructions to point, visualise, and produce gesture. The results supported the superiority of iconic gesture as a facilitator of object naming in aphasia. In particular, individuals with phonological access, storage, or encoding difficulties demonstrated significantly enhanced naming abilities with the use of iconic gesture as compared to individuals with a semantic impairment or an apraxia of speech. Pointing, cued articulation, and visualisation processes did not significantly enhance naming skills in these individuals. These results are discussed within the model of lexical gesture and word production proposed by Krauss and Hadar (1999).
C1 La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3083, Australia.
RP Rose, M (reprint author), La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Bundoora, Vic 3083, Australia.
RI Douglas, Jacinta/C-2380-2009
CR Bryden M, 1982, LATERALITY FUNCTIONA, P157
BUTTERWORTH B, 1981, JARGONAPHASIA, P113
Capirci O, 1996, J CHILD LANG, V23, P645
CODE C, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P11
Coelho C., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P209
CONLON C, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P185
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Goldin-Meadow S, 1998, NEW DIRECTIONS CHILD, V79, P29
Goodwyn S. W., 1998, NEW DIR CHILD ADOLES, V79, P61
Hadar U, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P107, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1890
HADAR U, 1994, J NEUROLINGUIST, V8, P57, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(94)90007-8
HANLON RE, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P298, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90116-X
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1992, TEST ORAL LIMB APRAX
Hoodin R., 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P62
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
KERTESZ A, 1983, W APHASIA BATTERY
Krauss R., 1999, GESTURE SPEECH SIGN, P93
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
MORRELSAMUELS P, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P615, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.18.3.615
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
Pashek GV, 1997, J COMMUN DISORD, V30, P349, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(96)00079-2
Passy J, 1990, CUED ARTICULATION
RAMSBERGER G, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P395
RAO PR, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P358
Rauscher FH, 1996, PSYCHOL SCI, V7, P226, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1996.tb00364.x
RAYMER AM, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P285
RIME B, 1992, FUNDAMENTALS NONVERB, P239
Rothi L.J.G., 1997, APRAXIA NEUROPSYCHOL
SKELLY M, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P445
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
NR 32
TC 41
Z9 41
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 977
EP 990
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600009
ER
PT J
AU McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Fossett, TRD
Park, GH
Goda, AJ
AF McNeil, MR
Doyle, PJ
Fossett, TRD
Park, GH
Goda, AJ
TI Reliability and concurrent validity of the information unit scoring
metric for the story retelling procedure
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID CONNECTED SPEECH; DISCOURSE; APHASIA; ADULTS; TASKS
AB This study reports the reliability and concurrent validity of the information units (IU) metric as an efficient method for quantifying the amount of information comprehended and reproduced on the Story Retelling Procedure (SRP) (Doyle et al., 2000). Subjects were 31 normal adults and 15 adults with aphasia. Significant and moderately high correlation coefficients were obtained for subjects with aphasia between %IUs and most linguistic measures including the correct information unit (Nicholas & Brookshire 1993, 1995) while low and non-significant correlations were found for many measures of language productivity, efficiency, and disruption. The %IUs among the four SRP forms within group was non-significant (p>.05) and correlations were significant and high. Normal speakers produced significantly greater %IUs than aphasic speakers. Standard error of measurement was low across forms for both groups (3-4%) and the range of individual subjects' performance overlapped between 20 and 27% for the group with aphasia and between 36 and 55% for the normal group.
These results support the conclusion that %IU is a reliable and valid measure and differentiates aphasic from normal individuals better than normal individuals from persons with aphasia.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Hlth Care Syst, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP McNeil, MR (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
CR Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
Berndt R. S., 2000, QUANTITATIVE PRODUCT
BOTTENBERG D, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P109
Brookshire R. H., 1997, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
Chafe W. L., 1980, ADV DISCOURSE PROCES, V3, P9
Chapman R, 1986, SYSTEMATIC ANAL LANG
Cherney LR, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P351, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248476
Doyle P. J., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P130
Doyle P. J., 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P53, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0503.53
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
DOYLE PJ, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P135
Doyle PJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P537
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Kearns K. P., 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P196
LI EC, 1995, J COMMUN DISORD, V28, P39, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(95)91023-Z
McNeil M. R., 1988, HDB SPEECH LANGUAGE, P738
McNeil M. R., 1978, REV TOKEN TEST
McNeil M. R., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P76, DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0404.76
MENN L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248664
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Oelschlaeger ML, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P636
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Raven JC, 1976, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
SHADDEN BB, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P327
Stout CE, 2000, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V8, P15
Ulatowska HK, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P619, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249562
ULATOWSKA HK, 1980, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V9, P17
WAMBAUGH JL, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P343
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
NR 30
TC 25
Z9 25
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 991
EP 1006
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600010
ER
PT J
AU Ulatowska, HK
Olness, GS
Wertz, RT
Thompson, JL
Keebler, MW
Hill, CL
Auther, LL
AF Ulatowska, HK
Olness, GS
Wertz, RT
Thompson, JL
Keebler, MW
Hill, CL
Auther, LL
TI Comparison of language impairment, functional communication, and
discourse measures in African-American aphasic and normal adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
AB We compared performance on language impairment, functional communication, and discourse measures between 33 African-American aphasic patients and 30 African-American normal subjects. The aphasic group performed significantly lower than the normal group on the Western Aphasia Battery Aphasia and Cortical Quotients, Token Test, and ASHA Functional Assessment of Communication Skills for Adults. Moreover, the aphasic group performed significantly lower than the normal group in their quality of language on a discourse task that required telling a frightening experience. Significant relationships between performance on the measures were confined to those that index language impairment. Use of a normal ethnic cohort for comparison with African-American aphasic performance may control for potential ethnic bias in the measures. In addition, use of a discourse task permits observation of grammatical and stylistic features in African-American English that may not be captured or are ignored by traditional language impairment and functional communication measures.
C1 Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
Univ Texas, Dallas, TX 75230 USA.
Baylor Univ, Med Ctr, Waco, TX 76798 USA.
RP Wertz, RT (reprint author), VA Med Ctr, 1310 24th Ave, S Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
CR ANDERSON E, 1978, CLIN APHASIOLOGY COL, pUIK
BERNDT RS, 1997, C COMM DIS STROK AFR
CAMPBELL AL, 1997, C COMM DIS STROK AFR
CARTIER M, 1992, NAT GENET, V2, P343
CHAPMAN SB, 1998, PRAGMATICS NEUROGENI, P55
ETTERLEWIS G, 1991, DISCOURSE SOC, V2, P425, DOI 10.1177/0957926591002004004
Frattali C, 1995, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC EX
HOLLAND AL, 1983, TOP LANG DISORD, V3, P67
HORNER RD, 1991, STROKE, V22, P1497
Kenyon G. M, 1996, AGING BIOGRAPHY EXPL, P21
Kertesz A., 1979, APHASIA ASS DISORDER
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KITTNER SJ, 1990, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V264, P1267, DOI 10.1001/jama.264.10.1267
Labov William, 1972, STUDIES BLACK ENGLIS
Mitchell JB, 2000, HEALTH SERV RES, V34, P1413
PAYNE JC, 1997, C COMM DIS STROK AFR
Polanyi Livia, 1989, TELLING AM STORY
Spreen O., 1969, NEUROSENSORY CTR COM
TAYLOR OL, 1992, RES RES TRAINING NEE, P1
TAYLOR OL, 1997, C COMM DIS STROK AFR
Ulatowska H. K., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL, P29
ULATOWSKA HK, 1999, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
WALLACE GL, 1996, ADULT APHASIA REHABI, P103
WALLEY T, 1993, POSTGRADUATE ED GENE, V4, P50
WERTZ RT, 1997, C COMM DIS STROK AFR
Wertz RT, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P533, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248489
World Health Organization, 1980, INT CLASS IMP DIS HA
NR 28
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 1007
EP 1016
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600011
ER
PT J
AU McCarney, CT
Johnson, AF
AF McCarney, CT
Johnson, AF
TI Examining conversational characteristics of persons with chronic aphasia
during three group conversations
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID EFFICACY
AB This study recorded and analysed conversation samples from a group of six people with chronic aphasia during three different sampling conditions. The authors examined each group member's verbal output using components of SALT for Windows(R) (Miller & Chapman, 1999) and a preliminary conversational-turn rating system. Results showed high variability in the SALT data (i.e., quantitative performance) and slight variability in the preliminary conversational-turn ratings (i.e., qualitative performance) for participants in each conversational topic. Possible key features of aphasia group communication were identified. New directions for aphasia group study are discussed.
C1 Wayne State Univ, CCC SLP, Detroit, MI 48202 USA.
RP McCarney, CT (reprint author), Wayne State Univ, CCC SLP, 581 Manoogian Hall,906 W Warren Ave, Detroit, MI 48202 USA.
CR ATEN JL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P93
AVENT J, 1997, MANUAL COOPERATIVE G
Avent J., 1997, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V5, P9
BEESON P, 1995, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V2, P85
BOLES L, 1993, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
BOLLINGER RL, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P301, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249512
COELHO CA, 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P667
DOYLE PJ, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P135
Elman R. J., 1999, GROUP TREATMENT NEUR
Elman RJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P411
ERLICH J, 1985, COGNITIVE REHABITATI, V3, P32
ERLICH J, 1989, BRAIN INJURY, V3, P193
GARRETT K, 1999, GROUP TREATMENT NEUR
Guilford J. P., 1954, PSYCHOMETRIC METHODS
KEARNS K, 2001, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
KLIPPI A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P373
Liles B., 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU
MARSHALL RC, 1999, GROUP TREATMENT NEUR
Marshall Robert, 1993, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V2, P31
McGraw KO, 1996, PSYCHOL METHODS, V1, P30, DOI 10.1037/1082-989X.1.4.390
MILLER JF, 1999, SYSTEMATIC ANAL LANG
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
Shadden B. B., 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU
SITTNER M, 1996, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
SPITZBERG BH, 1987, COMMUN EDUC, V36, P28
WAMBAUGH JL, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P343
WERTZ RT, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P580
NR 28
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 1017
EP 1028
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600012
ER
PT J
AU Armstrong, E
AF Armstrong, E
TI Connecting lexical patterns of verb usage with discourse meanings in
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID SENTENCE PROCESSING DEFICITS; SPONTANEOUS SPEECH; FLUENT APHASIA;
RETRIEVAL; THERAPY; REPAIR; AGRAMMATISM; LANGUAGE; ADULTS
AB The paper describes the impact of lexical patterns found in the discourse of aphasic speakers on overall discourse meanings and ability to participate in everyday genres such as the recount. In particular, the usage of different types of verbs by four aphasic speakers and their functions in the discourse are examined and compared with that of normal control speakers. Results suggest that the semantic patterns of verbs used by aphasic speakers are different from those of normal speakers, leading to restricted variety of meanings conveyed in recounts and for some speakers, restricted communicative functions. Effects of word frequency and imageability are also discussed.
C1 Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
RP Armstrong, E (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, Dept Linguist, N Ryde, NSW 2109, Australia.
CR Bastiaanse R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249463
Bastiaanse R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248437
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Bird H, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P187, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(96)00006-1
Breedin SD, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1923
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P399
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
CLORAN C, 1993, THESIS MACQUARIE U S
COLTHEART M, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P497
DALY FM, 1977, CURTIN KERR
EGGINS S, 1997, WORKING FUNCTIONAL G
Ferguson A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P1007, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249466
FERGUSON A, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P143, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248647
Goodglass H., 1964, CORTEX, V1, P133, DOI [10.1016/S0010-9452(64)80018-6, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(64)80018-6]
GOODGLASS H, 1993, CORTEX, V29, P377
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Halliday M. A. K., 1985, INTRO FUNCTIONAL GRA
HOLLAND AL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P50
Jesperson O, 1965, MODERN ENGLISH GRAMM
JONES EV, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P63
Edwards S, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P99, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250466
Kerschensteiner M, 1972, Cortex, V8, P233
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
LEBRUN Y, 1999, ADV SPEECH LANGUAGE, V2, P1
Lindsay J, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P305
LOAMS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
MARIN OSM, 1976, ANN NY ACAD SCI, V280, P868, DOI 10.1111/j.1749-6632.1976.tb25550.x
Marshall J, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250461
Martin J. R., 1986, WORKING PAPERS LINGU
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
MYERSON R, 1972, LANG SPEECH, V15, P40
NICKELS L, 1991, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V26, P175
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
ULATOWSKA HK, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P325, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248602
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 37
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 1029
EP 1045
DI 10.1080/02687040143000375
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600013
ER
PT J
AU Lalor, E
Kirsner, K
AF Lalor, E
Kirsner, K
TI The role of cognates in bilingual aphasia: Implications for assessment
and treatment
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID WORDS; LEXICON
AB A morphological description of the bilingual lexical system suggests that bilingual lexical organisation is similar to that in monolinguals and is governed by the morphological relationships between words. According to this theory, lexical items are stored in clusters according to their morphology and regardless of language. Cognates (words that are similar across languages) are stored together in the same lexical cluster, whereas non-cognates (words that are dissimilar across languages) are stored separately. This paper presents the results of a study that examined performance on word recognition tasks for cognates and non-cognates in an Italian/English aphasic subject. The subject completed naming and lexical decision tasks involving cognates and non-cognates. Performance was better on cognates in both languages, and low-frequency cognates in the more impaired language benefited from their high-frequency translations. These results have implications for current theories of bilingual lexical organisation and the assessment and treatment of bilingual aphasia.
C1 Royal Perth Hosp, Speech Pathol Dept, Perth, WA 6847, Australia.
Univ Western Australia, Nedlands, WA 6009, Australia.
RP Lalor, E (reprint author), Royal Perth Hosp, Speech Pathol Dept, POB X2213, Perth, WA 6847, Australia.
CR Bybee Joan, 1985, MORPHOLOGY STUDY REL
CHEN HC, 1989, MEM COGNITION, V17, P454, DOI 10.3758/BF03202618
COLLINS AM, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P407, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.82.6.407
CRISTOFFANINI P, 1986, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V38, P367
de Groot A. M. B., 1992, ORTHOGRAPHY PHONOLOG, P389, DOI 10.1016/S0166-4115(08)62805-8
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
FOWLER CA, 1985, MEM COGNITION, V13, P241, DOI 10.3758/BF03197687
Kirsner K., 1993, BILINGUAL LEXICON, P215
KIRSNER K, 1986, LANGUAGE PROCESSING
LALOR E, IN PRESS PSYCHOL B R
LEWANDOWSKY S, 1989, IMPLICIT MEMORY, P185
MASSON MEJ, 1990, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V16, P355, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.16.3.355
Monsell S., 1985, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, V2, P147
NAPPS SE, 1987, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V16, P257, DOI 10.1007/BF01067546
PARADIS M, 2000, FOLIA PHONIATR LOGO, V52, P65
Paradis M., 1989, BILINGUAL APHASIA TE
Roberts PM, 1999, J COMMUN DISORD, V32, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(98)00026-4
Roberts PM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P119, DOI 10.1080/02687039808250467
Snodgrass J. G., 1993, BILINGUAL LEXICON, V6, P83
STADIE N, 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P85
TAFT M, 1979, MEM COGNITION, V7, P263, DOI 10.3758/BF03197599
NR 21
TC 16
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 1047
EP 1056
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600014
ER
PT J
AU Bibeau, LA
Davis, GA
O'Neill, T
AF Bibeau, LA
Davis, GA
O'Neill, T
TI Measuring lexical-semantic activation over time for an aphasic
individual
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID AUTOMATIC ACCESS; BROCAS APHASICS; DECISION; NORMS
AB We were interested in whether we could identify priming effects in a mildly aphasic individual and whether these effects would be consistent over time. The method consisted of repeated semantically primed lexical decision tasks across 24 sessions. To compare automatic and controlled processing, we compared short and long stimulus onset asynchronies, and we used a neutral prime to separate facilitation and inhibition as components of overall priming. The long-term goal is to determine whether we can measure the progress of aphasic patients at automatic and controlled levels of cognitive processing. A particular configuration of prime facilitation led us to begin testing certain hypotheses regarding this configuration during the course of the study. In general, priming effects were identified, but they occurred inconsistently with repeated testing.
C1 Univ Massachusetts, Amherst, MA 01003 USA.
RP Davis, GA (reprint author), 90 Hawk Hill Rd, Shelburne Falls, MA 01370 USA.
CR BALOTA DA, 1989, Q J EXPT PSYCHOL A, V41, P84
BATTIG WF, 1969, J EXP PSYCHOL, V80, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0027577
Baum SR, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1829
BIBEAU LA, 1999, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
Del Toro JF, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P925
Hagoort P, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P287, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1849
HAGOORT P, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P189, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1043
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LUPKER SJ, 1984, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V23, P709, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(84)90434-1
MILBERG W, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P33, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.1.33
MILBERG W, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P371, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90086-9
MILBERG W, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P279, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90139-3
Neely J. H., 1991, BASIC PROCESSES READ, P264
NEELY JH, 1989, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V15, P1003, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.15.6.1003
NELSON DL, 1980, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V12, P16, DOI 10.3758/BF03208320
Norusis M.J., 1993, SPSS WINDOWS RELEASE
OSTRIN RK, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P147, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1040
RATCLIFF R, 1993, PSYCHOL BULL, V114, P510, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.114.3.510
SCHUELL HS, 1973, DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOS
Tompkins CA, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P48
TWILLEY LC, 1994, MEM COGNITION, V22, P111, DOI 10.3758/BF03202766
TYLER LK, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P131, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1007
NR 23
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 1057
EP 1068
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600015
ER
PT J
AU Wright, HH
Newhoff, M
AF Wright, HH
Newhoff, M
TI Revised inference processing as a measure of the working
memory-processing relationship
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID INDIVIDUAL-DIFFERENCES; LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION; TIME-COURSE; DISCOURSE;
APHASIA; ADULTS; CAPACITY; AGE
AB Processing and resource allocation models have been used in cognitive psychology and aphasiology in an attempt to investigate and explain the possible relationships among working memory and normal/disordered language-processing abilities. The interest of the present study was to determine potential benefits of employing revised inferences as the linguistic stimuli to explore these relationships further. Before application can be made to individuals with brain damage, however, results from neurologically intact individuals are needed. Therefore, we asked 30 individuals without neurological symptoms to participate in a cross-modal lexical priming study designed to measure revised inference-processing abilities, and a listening span task devised by Tompkins, Bloise, Timko, and Baumgaertner (1994) was used to measure working memory ability. Participants demonstrated priming effects for contextually appropriate target words in the two lexical decision positions housed within the revised inferences. These findings are discussed with respect to models of processing and resource allocation. Implications and applications to studies of the brain-damaged population are also considered.
C1 Univ Georgia, Athens, GA 30602 USA.
RP Wright, HH (reprint author), Univ Kentucky, Div Commun Disorders, 1030 S Broadway,Suite 5, Lexington, KY 40504 USA.
CR Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P197, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1799
BLOISE CGR, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P145
BREBION G, 1995, PSYCHOL RES-PSYCH FO, V58, P225, DOI 10.1007/BF00419637
BROWNELL HH, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P310, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90022-2
CARPENTER PA, 1989, COMPLEX INFORMATION
Caspari I, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V37, P205, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0970
COHEN G, 1979, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V11, P412, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(79)90019-7
DANEMAN M, 1980, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V19, P450, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(80)90312-6
JUST MA, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P122, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.1.122
Kintsch W., 1998, COMPREHENSION PARADI
KINTSCH W, 1988, PSYCHOL REV, V95, P163, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.95.2.163
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
Lehman MT, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P771, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249572
Light L, 1990, HDB PSYCHOL AGING, P275
LIGHT LL, 1985, J GERONTOL, V40, P737
LONG DL, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V20, P1456, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.20.6.1456
NORTH AJ, 1986, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V23, P267, DOI 10.2190/BPF0-2BWD-BGNQ-HWCW
SWINNEY D, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P225, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1046
TILL RE, 1988, MEM COGNITION, V16, P283, DOI 10.3758/BF03197039
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
NR 20
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 1069
EP 1077
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600016
ER
PT J
AU Fassbinder, W
Tompkins, CA
AF Fassbinder, W
Tompkins, CA
TI Slowed lexical-semantic activation in individuals with right hemisphere
brain damage?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
ID SENTENCE COMPREHENSION; CONTEXT; AGE; SENSITIVITY; SUPPRESSION;
KNOWLEDGE; INCREASE; ACCESS; ADULTS
AB This study investigated whether prolonged interference from contextually inappropriate semantic activation after right hemisphere damage (RHD) could be related to a slowing of lexical-semantic activation. A total of 9 adults with RHD and 8 non-brain-damaged adults judged whether auditory probe words fit the overall meaning of sentence stimuli that were biased to one interpretation of a sentence-final lexical ambiguity. Probes, presented at 0 and 1000 ms interstimulus intervals (ISI), represented the contextually inappropriate meanings of the ambiguities. At 0 ms ISI, the control group was predicted to show interference from these contextually inappropriate meanings, but if lexical activation was slowed for RHD participants, no interference would be expected. Although the previous finding of prolonged interference at 1000 ms ISI (Tompkins, Baumgaertner, Lehman, & Fassbinder, 2000) was replicated for the RHD group, neither group showed interference at 0 ms ISI. Potential accounts for these results relate to the possibility of slowed activation in normal ageing, and/or the effects of strategic processing.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Fassbinder, W (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
CR Balogh J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P169, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1917
Benton A, 1983, CONTRIBUTIONS NEUROP
BOTWINICK J, 1978, AGING BEHAV COMPREHE
BROWNELL HH, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V22, P253, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90093-2
Cohen J., 1983, APPL MULTIPLE REGRES, V2nd
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
Feyereisen P, 1998, EXP AGING RES, V24, P21
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
GAGNON J, 1989, LANGUAGE, V96, P95
GERNSBACHER MA, 1991, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V17, P245, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.17.2.245
GERNSBERGER MA, 1990, LANGUAGE COMPREHENSI
HENIK A, 1993, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V5, P45, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1993.5.1.45
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
LAVER GD, 1993, PSYCHOL AGING, V8, P34, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.8.1.34
MARSLENWILSON W, 1980, COGNITION, V8, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(80)90015-3
Molloy R., 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P113
Myers P. S., 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
Myerson J, 1997, ACTA PSYCHOL, V96, P83, DOI 10.1016/S0001-6918(97)00002-4
PERFETTI CA, 2000, C CONS MEAN SEL U TE
SEIDENBERG MS, 1982, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V14, P489, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(82)90017-2
Shapiro L, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P49
SWINNEY DA, 1979, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V18, P645, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(79)90355-4
TOMPKINS CA, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V33, P307
Tompkins CA, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P62
TOMPKINS CA, IN PRESS HDB ADULT L
Tompkins CA, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P68
Tyler L. K., 1992, SPOKEN LANGUAGE COMP
ZWITSERLOOD P, 1989, COGNITION, V32, P25, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(89)90013-9
NR 28
TC 7
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 1079
EP 1090
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600017
ER
PT J
AU Marquardt, TP
Rios-Brown, M
Richburg, T
AF Marquardt, TP
Rios-Brown, M
Richburg, T
TI Comprehension and expression of affective sentences in traumatic brain
injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 30th Annual Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY MAY, 2000
CL WAIKOLON, HAWAII
AB The comprehension and production of affective prosody and facial expression was investigated in subjects with traumatic brain injury and matched normal subjects. Performance on tasks designed to assess the ability to recognise affect in congruous, neutral, and ambiguous sentences and the ability to portray emotions in affectively neutral sentences revealed significant impairments for the subjects with traumatic brain injury. Analysis of correct responses to ambiguous sentences found increased reliance of brain-injured subjects on verbal compared to paralinguistic cues in interpreting the emotion of the sentence. The clinical implications of the findings relative to counselling, compensation strategies, and direct intervention for patients with traumatic brain injury are discussed.
C1 Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
Univ Calif San Diego, San Diego, CA 92103 USA.
Univ Memphis, Memphis, TN 38152 USA.
RP Marquardt, TP (reprint author), Univ Texas, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
CR Antonak R. F., 1993, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V8, P87
Borod JC, 1993, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V7, P445, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.7.4.445
Braun C M, 1989, Brain Inj, V3, P345, DOI 10.3109/02699058909004559
Hagen C, 1984, LANGUAGE DISORDERS A, P245
Hartley LL., 1995, COGNITIVE COMMUNICAT
JACKSON HF, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P293
LEZAK MD, 1978, J CLIN PSYCHIAT, V39, P592
MORTON MV, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P81, DOI 10.3109/02699059509004574
PATTERSEN L, 1991, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V73, P1139
PRIGATANO GP, 1982, J PERCEPTUAL MOTOR S, V54, P859
STRATTON MC, 1994, BRAIN INJURY, V8, P631, DOI 10.3109/02699059409151016
Wechsler D., 1955, WECHSLER ADULT INTEL
WEDDELL RA, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V28, P49, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(90)90085-3
YLVISAKER M, 1987, COMMUNITY REENTRY HE, P137
NR 14
TC 14
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT-NOV
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 10-11
BP 1091
EP 1101
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 483EW
UT WOS:000171621600018
ER
PT J
AU Croteau, C
Le Dorze, G
AF Croteau, C
Le Dorze, G
TI Spouses' perceptions of persons with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID STROKE; SELF
AB Spouses' perceptions of 21 persons with aphasia and of 25 controls were measured with the Adjective Check List (ACL, Gough & Heilbrun, 1983). Results suggest that persons with aphasia are perceived differently from controls on the following scales: likeability, achievement, endurance, order, and succorance. Also, wives of men with and without aphasia differ on the scales of achievement and endurance. Descriptive results suggest a different experience of being a spouse of a person with aphasia compared to being a spouse of a person without aphasia. Moreover, there also appears to be a difference in being a husband or a wife of a person with aphasia. The adjectives used more frequently to describe persons with aphasia were favourable ones. The changed abilities of persons with aphasia and their familial and social environments may underlie the findings. Gender, time post-onset, the type of measure used, and the therapeutic situation need to be considered when studying psychosocial aspects of aphasia.
C1 Univ Montreal, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RP Croteau, C (reprint author), Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, CP 6128,Succ Ctr Ville, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RI Le Dorze, Guylaine/A-1790-2014
CR BRUMFITT S, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687039308248631
COUPLAND N, 1991, LANGUAGE SOC ELDERLY, P25
FINE M, 1985, WOMEN DISABILITIES E
FORSBERGWARLEBY G, 1996, SCANDINAVIAN J OCCUP, V3, P114, DOI 10.3109/11038129609106694
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Gough H. G., 1983, ADJECTIVE CHECK LIST
HARRIS BA, 1986, TOP GERIATR REHABIL, V1, P31
HUBERTY CJ, 1989, PSYCHOL BULL, V105, P302, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.105.2.302
Hummert ML, 1994, INTERPERSONAL COMMUN, P162
KINSELLA GJ, 1980, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V12, P73
KITCHIN W, 1972, ADULTS ED, V2, P136
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LUTSKY SM, 1994, PSYCHOL AGING, V9, P513
MALONE RL, 1970, BRIT J DISORDERS COM, V59, P174
MORRIS J, 1993, DISABLING BARRIERS E, P8
Moscovici S., 1984, SOCIAL REPRESENTATIO, P3
MURRAY HA, 1962, EXPLOR PERS, P36
MYERS DG, 1992, PSYCHOL SOCIALE, P77
Nespoulous J. L., 1986, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL T
OConnor BP, 1996, PSYCHOL AGING, V11, P147, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.11.1.147
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
Parsons T, 1952, J SOC ISSUES, V8, P31
RYAN EB, 1986, LANG COMMUN, V6, P1, DOI 10.1016/0271-5309(86)90002-9
SCARR S, 1969, CHILD DEV, V40, P823, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1969.tb04544.x
Scott C B, 1993, West J Nurs Res, V15, P230, DOI 10.1177/019394599301500207
Stephenson W., 1953, STUDY BEHAV
SUSMAN J, 1968, EVALUATING EFFECTIVE, P363
THOMPSON SC, 1989, SOC SCI MED, V28, P239, DOI 10.1016/0277-9536(89)90267-0
THOMPSON SC, 1990, J APPL SOC PSYCHOL, V20, P115, DOI 10.1111/j.1559-1816.1990.tb00402.x
Ville I, 1992, Disabil Rehabil, V14, P168
WAHRBORG P, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P93, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248978
ZRAICK RI, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P123
NR 32
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 9
BP 811
EP 825
DI 10.1080/02687040143000221
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 477LM
UT WOS:000171285100001
ER
PT J
AU Coppens, P
Hungerford, S
AF Coppens, P
Hungerford, S
TI Crossed aphasia: Two new cases
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID RIGHT-HANDED PATIENT; CEREBRAL ORGANIZATION; FAMILIAL SINISTRALITY;
RIGHT-HEMISPHERE; DEXTRALS; LANGUAGE; HYPOTHESIS; LABILITY; STROKE
AB Crossed aphasia is caused by a right-hemisphere lesion in a right-handed person. Although this unusual language lateralisation pattern is a defining characteristic, there is disagreement among authors on additional diagnostic criteria. In addition, there is a significant amount of variability between patients as to the associated symptomatology, such as the presence of apraxic or visuospatial signs. Because of the rarity of crossed aphasia, the understanding of this clinical entity depends entirely on the analysis of published case studies. This paper presents two new cases of crossed aphasia, and discusses the major issues related to crossed aphasia diagnosis and symptomatology. Procedures for the assessment of crossed aphasia patients are also suggested.
C1 Plattsburgh SUNY, Plattsburgh, NY 12901 USA.
RP Coppens, P (reprint author), Plattsburgh SUNY, Plattsburgh, NY 12901 USA.
EM coppens@mnstate.edu
CR Alexander MP, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P213, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0102
ALEXANDER MP, 1989, BRAIN, V112, P953, DOI 10.1093/brain/112.4.953
Arlazaroff A, 1998, ISRAEL J PSYCHIAT, V35, P184
ASSAL G, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P455
Barroche G, 1981, Rev Otoneuroophtalmol, V53, P389
BASSO A, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P25
BISHOP DVM, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P153
Bramwell B, 1899, LANCET, V1, P1473, DOI 10.1016/S0140-6736(01)50703-5
BROOKSHIRE R, 1992, INTRO NEUROGENIC COM
Brown E., 1979, PERCEPTION SENSES
BROWN JW, 1976, NEUROLOGY, V26, P183
Burns A, 1999, INT J GERIATR PSYCH, V14, P681, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1099-1166(199908)14:8<681::AID-GPS49>3.0.CO;2-Z
CAPPA SF, 1993, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V56, P665, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.56.6.665
Castro-Caldas A, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P403, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248863
CLARKE B, 1965, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V3, P81, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(65)90020-5
COPPENS P, 1998, APHASIA ATYPICAL POP
Coppens P, 1998, APHASIA IN ATYPICAL POPULATIONS, P203
COPPENS P, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P585, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249493
DAVOUS P, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P1263, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90108-2
DONOSO A, 1980, ACTA NEUROL LATINOAM, V26, P238
FAGLIA L, 1990, ITAL J NEUROL SCI, V11, P131, DOI 10.1007/BF02335556
GOLDSTEIN B, 1979, CONCOURS MED, V101, P549
HAALAND KY, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P240, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90019-0
HABIB M, 1983, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V21, P413, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(83)90029-5
Hooper H. E., 1983, HOOPER VISUAL ORG TE
JOANETTE Y, 1982, REV NEUROL-FRANCE, V138, P575
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Keane AM, 1999, BRAIN COGNITION, V40, P500, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1999.1115
Kennedy F., 1916, AM J MED SCI, V152, P849, DOI 10.1097/00000441-191612000-00006
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Lecours A. R., 1979, APHASIE
MCCLOSKEY M, 1985, BRAIN COGNITION, V4, P171, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(85)90069-7
MORRIS PLP, 1993, AUST NZ J PSYCHIAT, V27, P601, DOI 10.3109/00048679309075822
Myers P. S., 1999, RIGHT HEMISPHERE DAM
Osterrieth PA, 1944, ARCH PSYCHOLOGIE, V30, P205
PILLON B, 1979, REV NEUROL, V135, P15
PIMENTAL PA, 1989, MINI INVENTORY RIGHT
PUEL M, 1982, REV NEUROL, V138, P587
Raven JC, 1990, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Raymer AM, 1997, BRAIN COGNITION, V34, P287, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1997.0919
RETIF J, 1987, EXTR COMPT REND C PS, P429
ROSS ED, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P561
SNOW P, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248210
Spreen O., 1998, COMPENDIUM NEUROPSYC
Springer JA, 1999, BRAIN, V122, P2033, DOI 10.1093/brain/122.11.2033
Tsai WC, 1998, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V30, P145
URBAIN E, 1978, REV NEUROL, V134, P751
Wechsler D, 1981, WECHSLER ADULT INTEL
Wechsler D, 1997, WECHSLER ADULT INTEL, V3rd
ZANGWILL OL, 1979, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V17, P167, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(79)90007-1
NR 50
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 9
BP 827
EP 854
DI 10.1080/02687040143000249
PG 28
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 477LM
UT WOS:000171285100002
ER
PT J
AU Kiran, S
Thompson, CK
Hashimoto, N
AF Kiran, S
Thompson, CK
Hashimoto, N
TI Training grapheme to phoneme conversion in patients with oral reading
and naming deficits: A model-based approach
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SEMANTIC ERRORS; LANGUAGE; REPRESENTATIONS; APHASIA
AB A model-based treatment focused on improving grapheme to phoneme conversion as well as phoneme to grapheme conversion was implemented to train oral reading skills in two patients with severe oral reading and naming deficits. Initial assessment based on current cognitive neuropsychological models of naming indicated a deficit in the phonological output lexicon and in grapheme to phoneme conversion. Using a single subject experimental design across subjects, the effects of treatment were evaluated by periodic probing of both trained and untrained regular words across lexical tasks: oral reading, oral naming, written naming, and writing to dictation. Results indicated successful acquisition of trained reading targets for both patients, as well as generalisation to untrained reading items, oral and written naming of trained items, and writing to dictation of trained and untrained items. Irregular words probed across the four lexical tasks did not demonstrate any improvement, as the trained grapheme to phoneme conversion skills were unsuccessful when applied to irregular words. The present experiment provides evidence for incorporating cognitive neuropsychological models in aiding the development of appropriate treatment protocols, and demonstrates the importance of rule-based learning, rather than compensatory strategies, in maximising the effects of generalisation.
C1 Northwestern Univ, Evanston, IL 60208 USA.
RP Kiran, S (reprint author), Northwestern Univ, Evanston, IL 60208 USA.
CR Bachy-Langedock N, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P211
Bastiaanse R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P363, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248417
BREEN K, 1994, CORTEX, V30, P231
BUCHANAN L, 1994, J NEUROLINGUIST, V8, P163, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(94)90024-8
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, COGNITION, V37, P243, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(90)90047-N
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
Coltheart M, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P159
CONNELL PJ, 1986, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V51, P214
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
ELLIS AW, 1983, COGNITION, V15, P111, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90036-7
Frances N., 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
FRIEDMAN RB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P278, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90115-W
HILLIS A, 1999, CORTEX, V35, P1
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
HILLIS AE, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P333, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253156
Kaplan E., 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
MCREYNOLDS LV, 1983, SINGLE PARTICIPANT E
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
NITZBERGLOTT S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P181
Nitzberg Lott S, 1999, Brain Lang, V67, P188
ORPWOOD L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P239
Ralph MAL, 1999, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V16, P157, DOI 10.1080/026432999380933
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
SHALLICE T, 1983, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V35, P111
NR 28
TC 20
Z9 20
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 9
BP 855
EP 876
DI 10.1080/02687040143000258
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 477LM
UT WOS:000171285100003
ER
PT J
AU Karow, CM
Marquardt, TP
Marshall, RC
AF Karow, CM
Marquardt, TP
Marshall, RC
TI Affective processing in left and right hemisphere brain-damaged subjects
with and without subcortical involvement
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COMPREHENSION; PROSODY; PERCEPTION; LANGUAGE; ORGANIZATION; LESION;
SPEECH; SPECIALIZATION; IDENTIFICATION; EXPRESSION
AB Affective processing ability was examined in right and left hemisphere brain-damaged subjects with cortical lesions that were grouped according to the presence or absence of concomitant subcortical basal ganglia damage. The ability to process affective speech prosody, emotional facial expressions, and linguistically coded emotional messages was measured in isolated identification tasks. Results indicated that subjects with damage to subcortical structures in addition to cortical left or right hemisphere brain damage had difficulty processing emotional words, facial expressions, and prosodic intonations. Subjects with cortical damage only, regardless of side of lesion (left or right), performed without significant difficulty across all tasks. There were hemispheric differences found in the cortical-subcortical groups. The left cortical-subcortical subjects had the greatest difficulty processing linguistic information and the right cortical-subcortical subjects had the most difficulty processing facial expression and prosodic information. Findings support the connection between higher- and lower-order brain structures in processing messages that are affectively coded.
C1 Univ Rhode Isl, Dept Commun Disorders, Kingston, RI 02881 USA.
Univ Texas, Austin, TX 78712 USA.
Univ Kentucky, Lexington, KY 40506 USA.
RP Karow, CM (reprint author), Univ Rhode Isl, Dept Commun Disorders, 2 Butterfield Rd, Kingston, RI 02881 USA.
CR ALEXANDER GE, 1986, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V9, P357, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ne.09.030186.002041
BEATON AA, 1979, ACTA PSYCHOL, V43, P103, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(79)90016-7
BLONDER LX, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P193, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90061-8
BLONDER LX, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1115, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.3.1115
BLONDER LX, 1993, BRAIN COGNITION, V21, P44, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1993.1003
BOROD JC, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V24, P169
BOROD JC, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V30, P827, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(92)90086-2
BOROD JC, 1990, J COMMUN DISORD, V23, P247, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(90)90003-H
BOROD JC, 1989, J COMMUN DISORD, V22, P93, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(89)90026-9
BOWERS D, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P317, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(87)90021-2
BRADSHAW JL, 1981, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V4, P51
Brink T., 1982, CLIN GERONTOLOGIST, V1, P37, DOI DOI 10.1300/J018V01N01_
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
BRYDEN MP, 1982, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V20, P83, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(82)90089-6
CANCELLIERE A, 1988, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V10, P62
CANCELLIERE AEB, 1990, BRAIN COGNITION, V13, P133, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(90)90046-Q
CARMON A, 1973, ACTA PSYCHOL, V37, P351, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(73)90002-4
Code C., 1987, LANGUAGE APHASIA RIG
BLUMSTEIN S, 1974, Cortex, V10, P146
CUMMINGS JL, 1984, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V41, P874
DIVAC I, 1986, CIBA FDN S, V107
GORELICK PB, 1987, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V50, P553, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.50.5.553
GRAYBIEL AM, 1995, MODELS INFORMATION P
HAGGARD MP, 1971, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V23, P168, DOI 10.1080/14640747108400237
HEATH R, 1986, EMOTION THEORY RES E
HEILMAN KM, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P917
HEILMAN KM, 1975, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V38, P69, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.38.1.69
Jackson J.H, 1879, BRAIN, V2, P203
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
KAROW CM, 1997, THESIS U TEXAS AUSTI
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KOLB B, 1981, SCIENCE, V214, P89, DOI 10.1126/science.7280683
LELANDE S, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P165
LEY RG, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V7, P127, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90010-5
Marquardt T. P., 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P235
Mills C. K., 1912, T COLLEGE PHYSICIANS, V34, P381
MONRADKROHN GJ, 1963, PROBLEMS DYNAMIC NEU, P110
NEBES RD, 1978, SYMMETRICAL FUNCTION, P99
NOLTE J, 1999, HUMAN BRAIN
PANKSEPP J, 1982, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V5, P407
Papez JW, 1937, ARCH NEURO PSYCHIATR, V38, P725
Pell MD, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P195, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1736
POECK K, 1985, HDB CLIN NEUROLOGY, V49
ROBIN D, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V33, P128
ROSS ED, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P561
ROSS ED, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P745
ROSS ED, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P144
SCHLANGER BB, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P396, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90035-3
SCOTT S, 1984, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V47, P840, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.47.8.840
SERON X, 1982, J COMMUN DISORD, V15, P223, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(82)90035-1
SIDTIS JJ, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90135-6
SPEEDIE LJ, 1990, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V53, P607, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.53.7.607
STRAUSS E, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V13, P308, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90098-5
TOMPKING CA, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P527
TUCKER DM, 1976, NEUROLOGY, V26, P354
VANLANCKER D, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P963
Vuilleumier P, 1998, NEUROPSY NEUROPSY BE, V11, P40
Weniger D, 1984, Adv Neurol, V42, P41
WOLFE GI, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P668
NR 59
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 8
BP 715
EP 729
DI 10.1080/02687040143000069
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 462VN
UT WOS:000170440600001
ER
PT J
AU Michallet, B
Le Dorze, G
Teatreault, S
AF Michallet, B
Le Dorze, G
Teatreault, S
TI The needs of spouses caring for severely aphasic persons
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CRITICALLY ILL PATIENTS; FAMILY CAREGIVERS; STRESS PROCESS; STROKE;
ADJUSTMENT; RELATIVES; PARTNERS; SERVICES; SUPPORT; DISEASE
AB This qualitative research aimed to identify and describe the needs perceived by spouses of persons with severe aphasia. The analyses revealed different categories of needs: (1) information, (2) need to acquire an effective mode of communication with the aphasic partner, (3) better interpersonal relationships, (4) need to be considered as a partner in the caring process, (5) support, (6) respite. These needs were not static but in interaction with one another. Moreover, they varied within a temporal axis and appeared at different time periods: within the acute hospitalisation phase, rehabilitation phase, and after the aphasic person returned home. Taking into consideration the needs of spouses of persons with severe aphasia requires an eco-systemic and interdisciplinary approach aiming for the social reintegration of the person with aphasia. Services should be developed in order to respond to the unique and individual experiences and needs of people affected by aphasia. Speech-language pathologists play a pivotal role within this approach because communication problems are central to the consequences of severe aphasia.
C1 Univ Montreal, Fac Med, Ctr Readaptat, Montreal, PQ H3J 3J7, Canada.
Univ Montreal, Fac Med, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, Montreal, PQ H3J 3J7, Canada.
RP Michallet, B (reprint author), Univ Montreal, Fac Med, Ctr Readaptat, CP 6128,Succursale Ctr Ville, Montreal, PQ H3J 3J7, Canada.
RI Le Dorze, Guylaine/A-1790-2014
CR ANNONI JM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P271, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249510
Artes R, 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P31
Bertalanffy L. von, 1968, GEN SYSTEMS THEORY F
Biegel D, 1991, FAMILY CAREGIVING CH
Boise L, 1996, PATIENT EDUC COUNS, V27, P75, DOI 10.1016/0738-3991(95)00791-1
BOUCHARD JM, 1998, FREQUENCES, V10, P16
BOUCHARD JM, 1996, APPRENTISSAGE SOCIAL, V17, P21
BOWERS BJ, 1987, ADV NURS SCI, V9, P20
BRODY EM, 1985, GERONTOLOGIST, V25, P19
CHENOWETH B, 1986, GERONTOLOGIST, V26, P267
CHRISTENSEN JM, 1989, J COMMUN DISORD, V22, P225, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(89)90018-X
CLARK NM, 1983, GERONTOLOGIST, V23, P637
Cohen M H, 1993, West J Nurs Res, V15, P77, DOI 10.1177/019394599301500106
Corbin J, 1988, Nurs Times, V84, P32
CYRSTAFFORD C, 1989, S APH C CPOAQ OCT
D'Amour D, 1999, SCI SOC SANTE, V17, P67
DAVIS AJ, 1980, J ADV NURS, V5, P475, DOI 10.1111/j.1365-2648.1980.tb03179.x
Deloche G., 1996, Annales de Readaptation et de Medecine Physique, V39, P1, DOI 10.1016/0168-6054(96)88044-5
Denman A, 1998, DISABIL REHABIL, V20, P411
Deslauriers J., 1991, RECHERCHE QUALITATIV
Duhamel F., 1995, SANTE FAMILLE APPROC
FRIEDLAND J, 1987, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V68, P475
GARAND L, 1990, AIDE PROCHES MYTHES
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GOODMAN C, 1986, J ADV NURS, V11, P705, DOI 10.1111/j.1365-2648.1986.tb03388.x
Grant JS, 1997, J FAMILY NURSING, V3, P36, DOI 10.1177/107484079700300103
Guba E. G., 1989, 4 GENERATION EVALUAT
GUSDORF G, 1990, B PSYCHOL, V42, P869
GWYTHER LP, 1986, GERONTOLOGIST, V26, P245
HAMPE SO, 1975, NURS RES, V24, P114
HARTUNIAN NS, 1980, AM J PUBLIC HEALTH, V70, P1249, DOI 10.2105/AJPH.70.12.1249
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P513, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249019
Herrmann M, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P717, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249418
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
Kahana E., 1994, FAMILY CAREGIVING LI, P3
KELLYHAYES M, 1988, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V69, P415
KINSELLA G, 1978, MANAGEMENT APHASIA
Le Dorze G, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P922
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LESKE JS, 1986, HEART LUNG, V15, P189
Levy R, 1994, RUPTURES, V1, P92
LYON JG, 1994, ADULT APHASIA REHABI, P137
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
MACKENZIE C, 1993, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V28, P43
Mathis M, 1984, J Neurosurg Nurs, V16, P36
Mayer R, 1991, METHODOLOGIE RECHERC
Medalie JH, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P163
Medalie J.H., 1994, FAMILY CAREGIVING LI, P312
MICHALLET B, 2001, UNPUB CONSEQUENCES A
Michallet B., 1999, Annales de Readaptation et de Medecine Physique, V42, P260, DOI 10.1016/S0168-6054(99)80064-6
Michallet B., 1999, Annales de Readaptation et de Medecine Physique, V42, P546, DOI 10.1016/S0168-6054(00)88382-8
*MIN SANT SERV SOC, 1995, VER PART VIE COMM CO
MOLTER NC, 1979, HEART LUNG, V8, P332
Mucchielli Alex, 1996, DICT METHODES QUALIT
NOLAN MR, 1989, J ADV NURS, V14, P950, DOI 10.1111/j.1365-2648.1989.tb01483.x
NOLAN MR, 1990, J ADV NURS, V15, P544, DOI 10.1111/j.1365-2648.1990.tb01853.x
NORRIS LO, 1986, HEART LUNG, V15, P194
PAQUET M, 1997, NOUVELLES PRATIQUES, V10, P111
Paquet M, 1996, CAN J AGING, V15, P442, DOI 10.1017/S0714980800005870
PAQUET M, 1992, GERONTOPHILE, V14, P3
PEARLIN LI, 1990, GERONTOLOGIST, V30, P583
PEARLIN LI, 1981, J HEALTH SOC BEHAV, V22, P337, DOI 10.2307/2136676
Pineault R., 1995, PLANIFICATION SANTE
REESE DR, 1994, GERONTOLOGIST, V34, P534
ROBINSON KM, 1988, ADV NURS SCI, V10, P59
ROBINSON KM, 1988, NURS TIMES, V84, P30
Rosenthal S G, 1993, Rehabil Nurs, V18, P148
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
TALBOT LR, 1998, INNOVATIONS APPRENTI, P75
Testani-Dufour L, 1992, J Neurosci Nurs, V24, P317
TOMM K, 1986, SYSTEMES HUMAINS, V2, P9
WAHRBORG P, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P479, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249009
WAHRBORG P, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P371, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249089
Williams A, 1994, J Neurosci Nurs, V26, P155
ZRAICK RI, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P123
NR 75
TC 32
Z9 32
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 8
BP 731
EP 747
DI 10.1080/02687040143000087
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 462VN
UT WOS:000170440600002
ER
PT J
AU Francis, DR
Riddoch, MJ
Humphreys, GW
AF Francis, DR
Riddoch, MJ
Humphreys, GW
TI Cognitive rehabilitation of word meaning deafness
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID DEFICIT; APHASIA; SOUND
AB Theoretical accounts of pure word meaning deafness are rare; accounts of its rehabilitation are virtually non-existent. We contrast the effects of two therapies in a patient with pure word meaning deafness. One therapy required only implicit auditory access from the patient (silent reading comprehension exercises). The second required explicit auditory access (auditory comprehension exercises), and thus appeared to be more suited to the exact locus of the patient's impairment. Improvement was observed after both types of therapy. However, improvement on implicit access therapy was influenced by the use of a compensatory strategy developed by the patient. In contrast, improvement on explicit access therapy was more durable, and appeared to be due to a direct effect on the audition-semantics link, rather than to compensation. We conclude that pure word meaning deafness is amenable to treatment, and that cognitive models can be useful in designing such therapy studies.
C1 Univ Birmingham, Sch Psychol, Behav Brain Sci Ctr, Birmingham B15 2TT, W Midlands, England.
RP Francis, DR (reprint author), Univ Birmingham, Sch Psychol, Behav Brain Sci Ctr, Birmingham B15 2TT, W Midlands, England.
CR BARRY C, 1994, HDB SPELLING THEORY
BEHRMANN M, 1989, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V24, P281
BEST W, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P223, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248655
BYNG S, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P303
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P161, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253441
Cardebat D, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P170
ELLIS A, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
ELLIS AW, 1984, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V1, P245, DOI 10.1080/02643298408252025
FRANKLIN S, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P1, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251964
Franklin S, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P1139, DOI 10.1080/026432996381683
FRANKLIN S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P189, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248991
Fukkink R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P741, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248447
Hall DA, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P1131
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
KOHN SE, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P291, DOI 10.1080/02643298608253361
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Morris J, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P137, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248402
PATTERSON K, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P341, DOI 10.1080/02643298608253363
Price CJ, 1996, CEREB CORTEX, V6, P62, DOI 10.1093/cercor/6.1.62
SCOTT C, 1987, THESIS CITY U LONDON
Siegel S., 1988, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
Stuart M, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P793, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251402
VANORDEN GC, 1987, MEM COGNITION, V15, P181
NR 24
TC 9
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 8
BP 749
EP 766
DI 10.1080/02687040143000177
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 462VN
UT WOS:000170440600003
ER
PT J
AU Bose, A
Square, PA
Schlosser, R
van Lieshout, P
AF Bose, A
Square, PA
Schlosser, R
van Lieshout, P
TI Effects of PROMPT therapy on speech motor function in a person with
aphasia and apraxia of speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID VOWEL PRODUCTION
AB This research examined the effectiveness of PROMPT treatment, a tactile-kinaesthetic speech motor treatment, on the acquisition and generalisation of precision and automaticity of speech movements in an individual with Broca's aphasia and apraxia of speech. Using a single subject multiple probe design across behaviours, treatment effects and generalisation were examined for three linguistically different forms of sentences including imperatives, active declaratives, and interrogatives. Results indicated improved speech precision and sequencing of speech movements for trained and untrained sentences for imperative and active declarative forms only. There was no effect of treatment on the interrogatives. Findings are discussed in the context of motor facilitation and its relationship to the linguistic complexity of utterances. Furthermore, the relevance of the interface between motor-linguistic processes in individuals with aphasia and apraxia of speech and implications for resource allocation constructs are addressed.
C1 Univ Toronto, Dept Speech Language Pathol, Toronto, ON M5S 3H2, Canada.
Northeastern Univ, Boston, MA 02115 USA.
RP Bose, A (reprint author), Univ Toronto, Dept Speech Language Pathol, 6 Queens Pk Crescent W, Toronto, ON M5S 3H2, Canada.
RI van Lieshout, Pascal/A-1371-2008
OI van Lieshout, Pascal/0000-0001-8139-8900
CR BAUM SR, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P431, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1026
BAUM SR, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P33, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90003-Y
BAUM SR, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P501, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249487
Baum SR, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P328, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0015
Benson D. F., 1996, APHASIA CLIN PERSPEC
BERNDT RS, 1988, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P347
Blumstein S. E., 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P157, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50008-7
BLUMSTEIN S E, 1990, P33
Chumpelik D., 1984, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V5, P139, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1085172
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
Deck J., 1986, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P320
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
Freed DB, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248477
GLEASON JB, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V24, P451
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Hayden D., 1999, VERBAL MOTOR PRODUCT
HAYDEN D, 1999, PROMPT MANUAL LEVEL
Hayden D A, 1994, Clin Commun Disord, V4, P162
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1981, HELM ELICITED LANGUA
HORNER RD, 1978, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V11, P189, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1978.11-189
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KEARNS KP, 1986, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V51, P204
Kent R. D., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P181
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
MANNER KJ, 2000, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V43, P560
MAURY C, 1979, LINGUISTIQUE, V15, P69
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
McNeil M.R., 1990, CEREBRAL CONTROL SPE, P349
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
Murray LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P91, DOI 10.1080/026870399402226
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
ROSENBEK JC, 1973, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V38, P462
ROY EA, 1985, RECHERCHES SEMIOTIQU, V5, P402
RYALLS JH, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P48, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90033-7
SQUARE PA, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P467
SQUARE PA, 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P221
SQUARE PA, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P319
TONKOVICH JD, 1989, ADQUIRED APRAXIA SPE, P115
VANLIESHOUT PHHM, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P360
vanLieshout PHHM, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P76
VIJAYAN A, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P106, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1004
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
NR 45
TC 15
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 8
BP 767
EP 785
DI 10.1080/02687040143000186
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 462VN
UT WOS:000170440600004
ER
PT J
AU Pedersen, PM
Vinter, K
Olsen, TS
AF Pedersen, PM
Vinter, K
Olsen, TS
TI The Communicative Effectiveness Index: Psychometric properties of a
Danish adaptation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICATION; APHASIA; STROKE
AB The study investigated the psychometric characteristics of a Danish adaptation and translation of the Communicative Effectiveness Index (CETI). A total of 68 patients with left hemisphere strokes, who had aphasia on admission, were assessed with the CETI at least 1 year after stroke, when 53 of them were still aphasic. Language functions were also assessed with the Western Aphasia Battery (WAB) in 65 and the Porch Index of Communicative Abilities (PICA) in 33 patients. After about 4 months 19 patients were retested in order to compare sensitivity to chance in language function. Activities of daily living were assessed with the Barthel Index (BI) and the Frenchay Activities Index (FAI), and depression was assessed with an illustrated, seven-item visual-analogue scale in a subset of the patients. Reliability measured as internal consistency was satisfactory and on the level of the original standardisation. The 3 1/2 month test-retest reliability was lower than in the WAB and the PICA when measured by correlation coefficients, but this might express real communication improvements in some patients that are not reflected in their aphasia scores. Concerning validity, the CETI had high correlations with WAB and PICA. Factor analysis suggests two factors which are interpreted as: (1) ability to formulate spoken language; and (2) ability to communicate by nonverbal means. It is concluded that the CETI can be adapted to other languages without major problems. Its general validity as a measure of functional communication is supported by the analysis of the translated version.
C1 Bispebjerg Hosp, Dept Neurol, Copenhagen Aphasia Study, DK-2400 Copenhagen NV, Denmark.
RP Pedersen, PM (reprint author), Bispebjerg Hosp, Dept Neurol, Copenhagen Aphasia Study, Bispebjerg Bakke 23, DK-2400 Copenhagen NV, Denmark.
EM pmp@vip.cybercity.dk
CR Beck A. T., 1979, COGNITIVE THERAPY DE
BYNG S, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P67, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249055
Code C., 1992, CODE MULLER PROTOCOL
CROCKFORD C, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P165
Davis G. A., 1993, SURVEY ADULT APHASIA
FRATTALI CM, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P63, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248577
KERTESZ A, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P40
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Lesser R., 1993, LINGUISTICS APHASIA
LINDENSTROM E, 1991, CEREBROVASC DIS, V1, P103, DOI 10.1159/000108825
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
Mahoney F, 1965, MD MED J, V14, P61
Pedersen OD, 1996, FIBRINOLYSIS, V10, P153, DOI 10.1016/S0268-9499(96)80074-9
Pedersen PM, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P161, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90258-6
Pedersen PM, 1996, J NEUROL REHABIL, V10, P91
Pedersen PM, 1996, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V77, P336, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(96)90080-5
Penn C, 1992, S Afr J Commun Disord, V39, P74
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
ASPLUND K, 1985, STROKE, V16, P885
SPSS Inc, 1999, SPSS 10 0
Stern RA, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P59, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248455
Teasdale TW, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P543
Wade D T, 1985, Int Rehabil Med, V7, P176
NR 23
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 8
BP 787
EP 802
DI 10.1080/02687040143000195
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 462VN
UT WOS:000170440600005
ER
PT J
AU Geary, DC
Hoard, MK
AF Geary, DC
Hoard, MK
TI Numerical and arithmetical deficits in learning-disabled children:
Relation to dyscalculia and dyslexia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID OF-PROCESSING DIFFERENCES; BRAIN-DAMAGED SUBJECTS; COGNITIVE ADDITION;
DEVELOPMENTAL DYSCALCULIA; DOUBLE DISSOCIATION; COUNTING KNOWLEDGE;
STRATEGY CHOICE; WORKING-MEMORY; DIFFICULTIES; DISABILITIES
AB Cognitive research on the number, counting, and arithmetic competencies of children with a learning disability in arithmetic (AD) is reviewed, and similarities between the associated deficits of AD children and the deficits of individuals afflicted with dyscalculia are highlighted. It is concluded that the defining features of AD and most dyscalculias are difficulties with the procedural features associated with the solving of complex arithmetic problems and difficulties in remembering basic arithmetic facts. The procedural deficits and one form of retrieval deficit appear to be associated with functioning of the prefrontal cortex, while a second form of retrieval deficit appears to be associated with the functioning of the left parieto-occipito-temporal areas and several subcortical structures. The review ends with a discussion of the potential relation between this second form of retrieval deficit and dyslexia.
C1 Univ Missouri, Dept Psychol, Columbia, MO 65211 USA.
RP Geary, DC (reprint author), Univ Missouri, Dept Psychol, 210 McAlester Hall, Columbia, MO 65211 USA.
CR ACKERMAN PT, 1995, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V11, P351
ASHCRAFT MH, 1982, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V33, P216, DOI 10.1016/0022-0965(82)90017-0
Ashcraft MH, 1995, MATH COGNITION, V1, P3
ASHCRAFT MH, 1992, BRAIN COGNITION, V19, P208, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(92)90046-O
ASHCRAFT MH, 1982, DEV REV, V2, P213, DOI 10.1016/0273-2297(82)90012-0
Badian NA, 1983, PROGR LEARNING DISAB, V5, P235
Barrouillet P, 1997, INT J BEHAV DEV, V21, P253
BRIARS D, 1984, DEV PSYCHOL, V20, P607, DOI 10.1037//0012-1649.20.4.607
Bull R, 1999, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V15, P421
Bull R, 1997, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V65, P1, DOI 10.1006/jecp.1996.2358
Carpenter T., 1984, J RES MATH EDUC, V15, P179, DOI DOI 10.2307/748348
CONWAY ARA, 1994, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V123, P354, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.123.4.354
DEHAENE S, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P1045, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(91)90076-K
DEHAENE S, 1992, COGNITION, V44, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90049-N
Dehaene S, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70002-9
Dehaene S., 1995, MATH COGNITION, V1, P83
DENCKLA MB, 1976, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V14, P471, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(76)90075-0
Fuson K., 1982, ADDITION SUBTRACTION, P67
Fuson K. C., 1988, CHILDRENS COUNTING C
Gallistel C. R., 1978, CHILDS UNDERSTANDING
GARNETT K, 1983, LEARN DISABILITY Q, V6, P223, DOI 10.2307/1510801
GEARY DC, 1990, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V49, P363, DOI 10.1016/0022-0965(90)90065-G
Geary DC, 2000, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V77, P236, DOI 10.1006/jecp.2000.2561
GEARY DC, 1991, DEV PSYCHOL, V27, P787, DOI 10.1037/0012-1649.27.5.787
GEARY DC, 1995, AM PSYCHOL, V50, P24, DOI 10.1037/0003-066X.50.1.24
GEARY DC, 1991, DEV PSYCHOL, V27, P398, DOI 10.1037/0012-1649.27.3.398
Geary DC, 1999, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V74, P213, DOI 10.1006/jecp.1999.2515
GEARY DC, 1993, PSYCHOL BULL, V114, P345, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.114.2.345
Geary DC, 1994, CHILDRENS MATH DEV R
GEARY DC, 1992, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V54, P372, DOI 10.1016/0022-0965(92)90026-3
GEARY DC, 1987, COGNITIVE DEV, V2, P249, DOI 10.1016/S0885-2014(87)90075-X
Girelli L, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P49
GROEN GJ, 1972, PSYCHOL REV, V79, P329, DOI 10.1037/h0032950
GrossTsur V, 1996, DEV MED CHILD NEUROL, V38, P25
HITCH GJ, 1991, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V82, P375
HITTMAIRDELAZER M, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P139
Hoard M. K., 1999, MATH COGNITION, V5, P65, DOI 10.1080/135467999387324
HYND GW, 1989, PSYCHOL BULL, V106, P447, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.106.3.447
JORDAN NC, 1995, J LEARN DISABIL, V28, P53
Jordan NC, 1997, J LEARN DISABIL-US, V30, P624
Koontz K. L., 1996, MATH COGNITION, V2, P1, DOI [10.1080/135467996387525, DOI 10.1080/135467996387525]
KOSC L, 1974, J LEARN DISABIL, V7, P164
Levin HS, 1996, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V53, P88
Luria A. R., 1980, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
MCCLOSKEY M, 1986, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V115, P307, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.115.4.307
MCCLOSKEY M, 1992, COGNITION, V44, P107, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90052-J
MCCLOSKEY M, 1995, AM PSYCHOL, V50, P351, DOI 10.1037//0003-066X.50.5.351
MCCLOSKEY M, 1985, BRAIN COGNITION, V4, P171, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(85)90069-7
Morris RD, 1998, J EDUC PSYCHOL, V90, P347, DOI 10.1037/0022-0663.90.3.347
OLSON R, 1989, J LEARN DISABIL, V22, P339
Ostad S., 1998, MATH COGNITION, V4, P1, DOI 10.1080/135467998387389
Ostad SA, 1997, BRIT J EDUC PSYCHOL, V67, P345
PESENTI M, 1994, CORTEX, V30, P661
RASANEN P, 1995, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V11, P275
ROURKE BP, 1993, J LEARN DISABIL, V26, P214
ROURKE BP, 1978, J ABNORM CHILD PSYCH, V6, P121, DOI 10.1007/BF00915788
Russell R. L., 1984, COGNITION INSTRUCT, V1, P217, DOI DOI 10.1207/S1532690XCI0102_3
Semenza C, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P483, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70231-4
SERON X, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V17, P116, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90072-G
SERON X, 1994, BRIT J DEV PSYCHOL, V12, P281
SHANWEILER D, 1995, PSYCHOL SCI, V6, P149, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1995.tb00324.x
Siegler R. S., 1996, EMERGING MINDS PROCE
SIEGLER RS, 1987, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V116, P250
Siegler R. S., 1984, ORIGINS COGNITIVE SK, P229
SIEGLER RS, 1988, CHILD DEV, V59, P833, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1988.tb03238.x
SVENSON O, 1975, SCAND J PSYCHOL, V16, P143, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9450.1975.tb00175.x
TEMPLE CM, 1989, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V6, P93, DOI 10.1080/02643298908253287
TEMPLE CM, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253370
Temple E, 1998, P NATL ACAD SCI USA, V95, P7836, DOI 10.1073/pnas.95.13.7836
WELSH MC, 1988, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P199
NR 70
TC 72
Z9 74
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 7
BP 635
EP 647
DI 10.1080/02687040143000113
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 462VG
UT WOS:000170440000002
ER
PT J
AU Girelli, L
Delazer, M
AF Girelli, L
Delazer, M
TI Numerical abilities in dementia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID MILD ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; ARABIC NUMERALS; PROGRESSIVE DECLINE; SEMANTIC
MEMORY; NUMBER; DYSCALCULIA; PATIENT; DEFICIT; SKILLS; ORGANIZATION
AB The purpose of the present paper is to provide a critical review of the neuropsychological evidence elucidating the incidence and nature of numerical difficulties in dementia. Though long neglected, the occurrence of dyscalculia in the early stage of Alzheimer's disease (AD) has caught the attention of many, and both group studies and single-case investigations converge in identifying number processing and numerical difficulties among the early signs of dementia. Yet analysis of the available data suggests that the pattern of decline may vary greatly across individuals: numerical difficulties may be highly selective and limited to single processing mechanisms but also extended to all aspects of numerical abilities.
Overall, data from AD, in agreement with acquired disorders in focal lesioned patients, confirm the dissociations between multiple functional components of the number processing and calculation system.
C1 Univ Milano Bicocca, Dipartimento Psicol, I-20126 Milan, Italy.
Univ Klin Neurol, Innsbruck, Austria.
RP Girelli, L (reprint author), Univ Milano Bicocca, Dipartimento Psicol, Edifico U6,Piazza Ateneo Nuovo 1, I-20126 Milan, Italy.
CR BADDELEY A, 1986, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V38, P603
BECKER JT, 1988, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V10, P739, DOI 10.1080/01688638808402811
Cano C., 1998
Carlomagno S, 1999, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V99, P166
CIPOLOTTI L, 1995, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V124, P375, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.124.4.375
CIPOLOTTI L, 1995, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V12, P313, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252001
COHEN L, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P267, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.2.267
DAGENBACH D, 1992, BRAIN COGNITION, V20, P345, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(92)90026-I
Dehaene S, 1999, SCIENCE, V284, P970, DOI 10.1126/science.284.5416.970
Delazer M, 1997, NEUROCASE, V3, P461
DELOCHE G, 1995, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V17, P634, DOI 10.1080/01688639508405151
DELOCHE G, 1994, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V16, P195, DOI 10.1080/01688639408402631
DIESFELDT HFA, 1993, BEHAV NEUROL, V6, P239, DOI 10.3233/BEN-1993-6411
Fuson K., 1982, ADDITION SUBTRACTION
Fuson K. C., 1988, CHILDRENS COUNTING C
Gallistel C. R., 1978, CHILDS UNDERSTANDING
GENTILESCHI V, 1998, 16 EUR WORKSH COGN N
Girelli L, 1999, BRAIN COGNITION, V40, P132
Girelli L, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P547
GOODGLASS H, 1984, ANN C INT NEUR SOC H
GRAFMAN J, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P121
GROBER E, 1991, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V13, P667, DOI 10.1080/01688639108401081
Hirono N, 1998, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V65, P913, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.65.6.913
HODGES JR, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1547, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.4.1547
JACKSON M, 1986, CORTEX, V22, P611
KAHN HJ, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V17, P102, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90071-F
Kaufmann L., 1998
KENNEDY AM, 1995, BRAIN, V118, P185, DOI 10.1093/brain/118.1.185
Kessler J, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P755
MANDLER G, 1982, J EXPT PSYCHOL GEN, V11, P1
Mantovan MC, 1999, CORTEX, V35, P21, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70783-4
Marterer A, 1996, ARCH GERONTOL GERIAT, V23, P189, DOI 10.1016/0167-4943(96)00720-0
MCCLOSKEY M, 1985, BRAIN COGNITION, V4, P171, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(85)90069-7
MCGLINCHEYBERROTH R, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P697
NEBES RD, 1989, PSYCHOL BULL, V106, P377, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.106.3.377
NEE LE, 1983, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V40, P203
NOEL MP, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P317, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253467
NOEL MP, 1995, BRAIN COGNITION, V29, P151, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1995.1274
Norton LE, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P857, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403766
PARLATO V, 1992, INT J GERIATR PSYCH, V7, P599, DOI 10.1002/gps.930070810
PESENTI M, 1994, CORTEX, V30, P661
POWER RJD, 1990, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V5, P237, DOI 10.1080/01690969008402106
POWER R J D, 1978, Proceedings of the Royal Society of London Series B Biological Sciences, V200, P391, DOI 10.1098/rspb.1978.0024
Remond-Besuchet C., 1999, MATH COGNITION, V5, P41, DOI 10.1080/135467999387315
SALMON DP, 1988, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V10, P477, DOI 10.1080/01688638808408254
Semenza C, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P483, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70231-4
SERON X, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V17, P116, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90072-G
TEGNER R, 1990, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V81, P177
Thioux M, 1999, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V16, P749
NR 49
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 7
BP 681
EP 694
DI 10.1080/02687040143000122
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 462VG
UT WOS:000170440000004
ER
PT J
AU Girelli, L
Seron, X
AF Girelli, L
Seron, X
TI Rehabilitation of number processing and calculation skills
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FACTS; PATIENT; DYSCALCULIA; KNOWLEDGE; LESIONS; DEFICIT
AB The main purpose of this article is to present the research that has been done on the rehabilitation of number and calculation disorders. It is argued that theoretically based rehabilitation of arithmetical processing requires the formulation of a detailed functional diagnosis based on a theoretically driven evaluation of numerical processing and calculation skills. Up to now, the strategies that have been adopted in this rehabilitation field have mainly consisted in attempts to re-teach lost knowledge via extensive practice. These therapeutic programmes are described in two domains: the transcoding of numerals and the retrieval of arithmetical facts. Finally, the authors underline the necessity to develop in the near future programmes of rehabilitation adopting a more ecological perspective.
C1 Univ Milano Bicocca, Dipartimento Psicol, I-20126 Milan, Italy.
Univ Catholique Louvain, B-1348 Louvain, Belgium.
RP Girelli, L (reprint author), Univ Milano Bicocca, Dipartimento Psicol, Edifico U6,Piazza Ateneo Nuovo 1, I-20126 Milan, Italy.
CR ASHCRAFT MH, 1992, COGNITION, V44, P75, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90051-I
BUTTERWORTH B, 1995, Q J EXPT PSYCHOL, V1, P251
Butterworth B, 1999, MATH BRAIN
CAMPBELL JID, 1988, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V117, P204, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.117.2.204
CARAMAZZA A, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACH N
Carlomagno S, 1999, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V99, P166
Christensen A. L., 1975, LURIAS NEUROPSYCHOLO
DAHMEN W, 1982, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V20, P145, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(82)90004-5
DECORTE E, 1987, COGNITIVE PROCESS, P42
Dehaene S, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70002-9
de la Guardia M, 1999, ADV ATOM SP, V5, P1
Delazer M, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P697, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70727-5
Delazer M, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V8, P401
Deloche G., 1987, MATH DISABILITIES CO, P137
DELOCHE G, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V2, P257, DOI 10.1080/09602019208401413
Deloche G., 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACH N
Fasotti L., 1992, ARITHMETICAL WORD PR
Fasotti L., 1992, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V2, P3, DOI DOI 10.1080/09602019208401392
Girelli L, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P49
Girelli L, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P547
HECAEN H., 1961, REV NEUROL [PARIS], V105, P85
HITTMAIRDELAZER M, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P715, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.4.715
JACKSON M, 1986, CORTEX, V22, P611
JACQUEMIN A, 1991, REEDUCATION NEUROPSY
KOSC L, 1974, J LEARNING DISABILIT, V7, P159
LAMPL Y, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P1759
LeFevre JA, 1996, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V125, P284, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.125.3.284
LEWIS C, 1994, J CHILD PSYCHOL PSYC, V35, P283, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-7610.1994.tb01162.x
LHERMITT.F, 1972, REV NEUROL, V127, P415
Luria A. R., 1966, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
Mayer R. E., 1984, ADV PSYCHOL HUMAN IN, V2, P231
Mayer R. E., 1983, THINKING PROBLEM SOL
MAYER RE, 1987, APPL COGNITIVE PSYCH
MCCLOSKEY M, 1992, COGNITION, V44, P107, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90052-J
MCCLOSKEY M, 1991, BRAIN COGNITION, V17, P154, DOI 10.1016/0278-2626(91)90074-I
Miceli G., 1991, DISTURBI CALCOLO DIA
MICELI G, 1987, Archivio di Psicologia Neurologia e Psichiatria, V48, P260
MILNER B, 1982, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V298, P211, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1982.0083
NOEL MP, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P317, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253467
Nunes T., 1993, STREET MATH SCH MATH
PESENTI M, 2000, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIE TRO
Resnick L. B., 1982, ADDITION SUBTRACTION, P136
ROSSOR MN, 1995, J NEUROL, V242, P78, DOI 10.1007/BF00887820
SAXE GB, 1983, DEV MATH THINKING, P291
Semenza C, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P483, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70231-4
SIEGLER RS, 1988, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V117, P258, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.117.3.258
Sokol S. M., 1990, REPRESENTING NOTHING
Sokol S. M., 1991, COMPLEX PROBLEM SOLV, P85
SOKOL SM, 1989, COGNITION INDIVIDUAL
Sullivan KS, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V6, P27, DOI 10.1080/713755495
Thioux M, 1998, NEUROCASE, V4, P371, DOI 10.1080/13554799808410633
WHESTONE T, 1998, BRAIN COGNITION, V36, P290
NR 52
TC 11
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 7
BP 695
EP 712
DI 10.1080/02687040143000131
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 462VG
UT WOS:000170440000005
ER
PT J
AU Arkin, S
Mahendra, N
AF Arkin, S
Mahendra, N
TI Discourse analysis of Alzheimer's patients before and after
intervention: Methodology and outcomes
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PICTURE DESCRIPTION TASK; IMPLICIT MEMORY; FLUENT APHASIA; DISEASE;
DEMENTIA; INFORMATION; IMPAIRMENT; ABILITIES; HISTORY
AB This article describes a content-focused easy-to-use method of analysing the discourse of Alzheimer's patients. It also reports the results of the method's application to the discourse of seven experimental and four control Alzheimer's patients before and after two semesters of participation in different versions of a multi-modality intervention programme. Eight discourse prompts, representing five different discourse types, were used. Rules for demarcating respondents' transcripts into utterances are presented. Three classes of codes-positive, neutral, and negative-are described, with examples given for each code. Discourse-based outcome measures used were ratio of topic comments to total utterances (TC/U), ratio of different nouns to total nouns (DN/TN), and ratio of vague nouns to total nouns (VN/TN). Other outcome measures were information units (IUs) produced on a picture description task, and scores on a mental status test and a standardised language test battery. All participants received twice weekly physical fitness training and, during the second semester, a weekly session of supervised volunteer work. Experimental participants received, in addition, a prescribed set of memory- and language-stimulation exercises during their fitness workout; control participants experienced unstructured conversation during that time. Interventions were administered by students, supplemented by caregivers. Experimentals outperformed controls on the MMSE and the DN/TN ratio. Neither group declined significantly on the ABCD, TC/U ratio, and VN/TN ratio. Both declined by three IUs on the picture description task, but only the control group's decline was significant. Between-group difference was significant only on the DN/TN ratio. Two experimental participants increased and two had the same MMSE score; three declined. All four controls declined. Discourse assessment is an ecologically valid method of monitoring change in Alzheimer's disease.
C1 Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Arkin, S (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, POB 210071, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
CR Aguero-Torres H, 1998, INT J GERIATR PSYCH, V13, P755, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1099-1166(1998110)13:11<755::AID-GPS862>3.0.CO;2-Y
APPEL J, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P265
ARKIN S, IN PRESS NEUROPSYCHO
ARKIN S, 1999, ANN CONV ANM SPPECH
ARKIN S, 1999, 52 ANN S M GER SOC A
ARKIN S, 1999, GOING GOLD CONTENT F
ARKIN S, 2000, ALZHEIMERS DIS, V15, P314, DOI 10.1177/153331750001500502
ARKIN S, 2001, IN PRESS AM J ALZHEI
Arkin S, 2000, AM J ALZHEIMERS DIS, V15, P152, DOI 10.1177/153331750001500301
Arkin SM, 1999, GERONTOLOGIST, V39, P729
ARKIN SM, 1995, VOLUNTEERS PARTNERSH
Arkin SM, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P723
Arkin SM, 1996, AM J ALZHEIMERS DIS, V11, P12, DOI 10.1177/153331759601100103
BAECKMANN L, 1992, ACTA SCANDINAVICA, V84, P84
BAYLES AK, 1991, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
BAYLES KA, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P265, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90086-4
BAYLES KA, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P454, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90079-T
BAYLES KA, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P102, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90123-3
BAYLES KA, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P98, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90057-3
BEESON PM, 1987, 1987 ANN CONV AM SPE
BOURGEOIS MS, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P831
Bourgeois M. S., 1996, BEHAV INTERVENT, V11, P3, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1099-078X(199601)11:1<3::AID-BRT150>3.0.CO;2-0
Bourgeois MS, 1997, GERONTOLOGIST, V37, P30
BROWN R, 1977, COGNITION, V5, P73, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(77)90018-X
BROWNELL HH, 1993, NARATIVE DISCOURSE N
Brush J. A., 1998, THERAPY TECHNIQUE IM
Burns MS, 1985, RIC EVALUATION COMMU
Camphuysen C.J., 1995, Sula, V9, P1
Chapman SB, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P337, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248475
COLLINS AM, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P407, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.82.6.407
Crovitz H.F., 1986, AUTOBIOGRAPHICAL MEM, P273
DELIS DC, 1984, CALIFORNIA PROVERB T
DESANTI S, 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL, P201
EHRLICH J, 1990, THESIS CUNY NY, P201
Ehrlich J. S., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL, P149
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Garcia L. J., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL, P161
GEWIRTH LR, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P307, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90054-3
Giles E, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P395, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248419
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1992, APHASIA DIAGNOSTIC P
HIER DB, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P117, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90124-5
HIRSCH ED, 1988, DICT CULTURAL LIT WH
HOLLAND AL, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P156, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90101-4
HOPPER T, 1998, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V6, P73
HUFF FJ, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90103-3
JOHNSON K, 1998, ASAH SPECIAL INTERES, P11
KAGAN A, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kempler D., 1995, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI, P98
KIRSHNER HS, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P23, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90004-6
LAINE M, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V14, P79
LIGHT LL, 1991, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V42, P333, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ps.42.020191.002001
MAHENDRA N, 1998, MAXIMIZING FUNCTIONA
MAHENDRA N, 1996, THESIS U MYSORE INDI
MARTIN A, 1987, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V9, P191, DOI 10.1080/01688638708405361
Maslow K, 1997, ALZ DIS ASSOC DIS, V11, P186
Mattis S., 1988, DEMENTIA RATING SCAL
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
MORRIS JC, 1989, NEUROLOGY, V39, P1159
MUELLER AA, 1993, Z GERONTOPSYCHOLOGIE, V6, P119
NICHOLAS M, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P405
Obler L. K., 1981, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P385
RIPICH D, 1991, HDB GERIATRIC COMMUN
Ripich D. N., 1997, AM J ALZHEIMERS DIS, V12, P258, DOI 10.1177/153331759701200604
RIPICH DN, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P8
RIPICH DN, 1983, CLIN APH C P MINN BR, P316
RIPICH DN, 1988, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
RIPICH DN, 2000, AM J ALZHEIMERS DIS, V15, P217, DOI 10.1177/153331750001500407
SALMON DP, 1995, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI, P37
Santo Pietro M J, 1985, Brain Lang, V26, P230
SANTOPIETRO MJ, 1984, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
Schacter D., 1996, SEARCHING MEMORY
SCHACTER DL, 1987, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V13, P501, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.13.3.501
SCHACTER DL, 1992, AM PSYCHOL, V47, P559, DOI 10.1037//0003-066X.47.4.559
SHADDEN BB, 1995, TOP LANG DISORD, V15, P75
SHADDEN BB, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P327
Shekim L. O., 1984, 12 ANN M INT NEUR SO
SMITH SR, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P533, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90084-9
STEVENS AB, 1993, EDUC GERONTOL, V19, P651, DOI 10.1080/0360127930190706
Strunk W., 1979, ELEMENTS STYLE
TOMOEDA CK, 1993, ALZ DIS ASSOC DIS, V7, P223
Tomoeda CK, 1996, ALZ DIS ASSOC DIS, V10, P204, DOI 10.1097/00002093-199601040-00006
ULATOWSKA H, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V23, P179
ULATOWSKA HK, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL S, V2, P108
ULATOWSKA HK, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P24, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90088-X
VICKERS C, 1998, COMMNICATION RECOVER
WECHSLER D, 1981, MANUAL WAIS R
NR 89
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 6
BP 533
EP 569
DI 10.1080/02687040143000032
PG 37
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 439CE
UT WOS:000169092600002
ER
PT J
AU Singh, S
Bucks, RS
Cuerden, JM
AF Singh, S
Bucks, RS
Cuerden, JM
TI Evaluation of an objective technique for analysing temporal variables in
DAT spontaneous speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ADULT AGE-DIFFERENCES; ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; CONVERSATIONAL SPEECH;
LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; SENILE DEMENTIA; WORKING MEMORY; APHASIA;
PROGRESSION; IMPAIRMENT; COGNITION
AB This paper describes a technique for quantifying the degree of speech deficits in probable dementia of Alzheimer's type (DAT). The technique involves interviewing individuals with DAT and transcribing their speech. From these transcripts five measurements that reflect the physical characteristics of this speech can be calculated, each measure being dependent on speech fluency and pauses. Eight patients with DAT and eight healthy participants were interviewed and their conversational speech analysed. The paper discusses statistical results obtained with these parameters and explores their usefulness for quantifying speech deficits in DAT. The paper recommends similar analysis with a larger sample and its integration with other linguistic methods of analysing the language deficits experienced by people with DAT.
C1 Univ Exeter, Dept Comp Sci, Exeter EX4 4PT, Devon, England.
Univ Bristol, Bristol BS8 1TH, Avon, England.
RP Singh, S (reprint author), Univ Exeter, Dept Comp Sci, Exeter EX4 4PT, Devon, England.
RI Bucks, Romola/B-9164-2011
OI Bucks, Romola/0000-0002-4207-4724
CR Alzheimer A., 1907, CENTRALBLATT NERVENH, V30, P177
ANDREASEN NJC, 1976, ARCH GEN PSYCHIAT, V33, P1361
APA, 1995, DIAGN STAT MAN MENT
APPELL J, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P73, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90006-2
BADDELEY A, 1992, SCIENCE, V255, P556, DOI 10.1126/science.1736359
BADDELEY AD, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P2521, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.6.2521
Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
BAYLES KA, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P265, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90086-4
BAYLES KA, 1991, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V48, P155
BECKER JT, 1992, PSYCHOL MED, V22, P437
BECKER JT, 1988, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V45, P263
BENSON DF, 1967, CORTEX MILANO, V3, P373
BLANKEN G, 1987, COGNITION, V27, P247, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(87)80011-2
Bucks RS, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P71
CROCKFORD C, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P165
DELOCHE G, 1986, BRIAN LANGUAGE, V8, P241
FEYEREISEN P, 1986, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V8, P393, DOI 10.1080/01688638608401329
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Fu L. M., 1994, NEURAL NETWORKS COMP
HENDERSO.A, 1966, LANG SPEECH, V9, P207
ILLES J, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P628, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90116-8
Jolliffe IT, 1986, PRINCIPAL COMPONENTS
KEMPER S, 1994, J GERONTOL, V49, P223
Kempler D., 1994, DEMENTIA NORMAL AGIN
Kertesz A, 1974, Can J Neurol Sci, V1, P7
KREINDLER A, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V9, P199, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90140-6
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
Newman S, 1938, AM J PSYCHIAT, V94, P913
NORUSIS J, 1997, STAT PACKAGE SOCIAL
Obler L. K., 1983, LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS B, P267
Pindzola R. H., 1989, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V20, P133
RIPICH DN, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P8
Romero B, 1996, DEMENTIA, V7, P35, DOI 10.1159/000106850
SALTHOUSE TA, 1993, DEV PSYCHOL, V29, P722, DOI 10.1037//0012-1649.29.4.722
Salthouse TA, 1996, PSYCHOL REV, V103, P403, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.103.3.403
Salthouse TA, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V12, P242, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.12.2.242
SCHWARTZ MF, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V7, P277, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90024-5
SEVUSH S, 1993, J NEUROPSYCH CLIN N, V5, P66
SINGH S, 1995, P 3 INT C STAT AN TE
SINGH S, 1996, THESIS U W ENGLAND B
SINGH S, 1994, P 5 INT C SPEECH SCI
SPINNLER H, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P193, DOI 10.1080/02643298808252933
Ulatowska H. K., 1995, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI, P115
VANDONGEN HR, 1994, CORTEX, V30, P619
NR 44
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 6
BP 571
EP 583
DI 10.1080/02687040143000041
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 439CE
UT WOS:000169092600003
ER
PT J
AU Marshall, RC
Freed, DB
Karow, CM
AF Marshall, RC
Freed, DB
Karow, CM
TI Learning of subordinate category names by aphasic subjects: A comparison
of deep and surface-level training methods
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT Annual Meeting of the Academy-of-Aphasia
CY OCT, 2000
CL MONTREAL, CANADA
SP Acad Aphasia
ID FACILITATION; PICTURE; MEMORY; RECALL; DEPTH
AB This study compared the effects of two cueing methods on aphasic subjects' learning and recall of unknown subordinate category names of dogs. One method, personalised cueing, required a deep level of stimulus processing. The second, phonological cueing, provided the subject with surface-level information about the target word's phonemic characteristics. A total of 30 aphasic subjects were assigned randomly to Personalised (PERS) or Phonological (PHON) training conditions. Training was identical for the groups with the exception that PERS group subjects created their own cues to aid recall of unknown dog names (e.g., Kuvasz), whereas PHON group subjects were provided a first phoneme cue (e.g., /kuh/) and the number of syllables in the dog's name by the examiner. During training, the examiner presented the personalised or phonological cue, and the subject named a coloured picture of the dog. Naming accuracy was measured across the 12 training trials. A dog name was considered as learned if the subject responded correctly after a personalised or phonological cue for the final four training trials. Recall of learned items was assessed with post-training probes 1 week, 1 month, and 6 months after completion of training. Subjects were not provided with cues for the probes. Subjects in the PERS group had significantly higher levels of naming accuracy after cues and recalled significantly more of the learned dog names on the probes. Findings confirmed the authors' hypothesis regarding the durability of personalised cueing in aiding subjects in learning unfamiliar names. Results of the study are discussed in terms of three attributes of traditional aphasic naming treatments put forth by Howard and colleagues (Howard et al., 1985): prompting, facilitation, and therapy.
C1 Univ Rhode Isl, Dept Commun Disorders, Kingston, RI 02881 USA.
Calif State Univ Fresno, Fresno, CA 93740 USA.
RP Marshall, RC (reprint author), Univ Rhode Isl, Dept Commun Disorders, 2 Butterfield Rd,Suite 1, Kingston, RI 02881 USA.
CR CRAIK FIM, 1975, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V104, P268, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.104.3.268
CRAIK FIM, 1972, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V11, P671, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(72)80001-X
FISHER RP, 1977, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V3, P701, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.3.6.701
Freed D. B., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P105
Freed D. B., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P193
FREED DB, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1081
Freed DB, 1998, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V87, P795
GOODGLASS H, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P199
Healy A., 1992, LEARNING PROCESSES C, V2, P35
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
LI EC, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P51, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248519
LI E, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P96
LI EC, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P619, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249028
LOVE R, 1977, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V42, P17
MARSHALL R, 1994, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V22, P3335
MARSHALL RC, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P567, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249492
Marshall RC, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V74, P438
MOSCOVITCH M, 1976, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V15, P447, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(76)90040-2
PEASE D M, 1978, Cortex, V14, P178
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
VANLANCKER D, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P511, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90159-E
VANLANCKER D, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P37, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248576
WALLACE GJ, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V50, P37
NR 23
TC 14
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 6
BP 585
EP 598
DI 10.1080/02687040143000050
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 439CE
UT WOS:000169092600004
ER
PT J
AU Pachalska, M
MacQueen, BD
AF Pachalska, M
MacQueen, BD
TI Episodic aphasia with residual effects in a patient with progressive
dementia resulting from a mitochondrial cytopathy (MELAS)
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LACTIC-ACIDOSIS; MYOPATHY; ENCEPHALOPATHY; FEATURES; MUTATION; DISEASE;
ADULTS; DNA
AB This paper describes an unusual case of aphasia, not previously reported in the literature, in a patient diagnosed with MELAS, a mitochondrial cytopathy. The patient (KS, a 22-year-old right-handed Polish female) presents with episodic aphasia against the background of progressive dementia, with the successive episodes leaving a residual effect that has slowly but steadily accumulated.
A variety of standardised neurolinguistic and neuropsychological instruments (including WAIS-R, WMS-R, WAB, BNT, CNAB-R) were used to develop a dynamic, holistic clinical picture of K.S.'s disturbances, in terms of both semantic and pragmatic performance. She experiences dramatic but brief episodic aphasia (including severe anomia) occurring in the course of repeated "stroke-like episodes'', which typically end with rapid (but incomplete) spontaneous remission. At the same time, she exhibits progressive dementia and steadily deteriorating communication skills on the pragmatic level.
The authors discuss the possible reasons for the configuration of aphasia symptoms in this patient and their association with the course of the disease, and the implications of the results for aphasiological theory and practice.
C1 Cracow Rehabil Ctr, Dept Rehabil Med, Krakow, Poland.
RP Pachalska, M (reprint author), Cracow Rehabil Ctr, Dept Rehabil Med, Krakow, Poland.
CR BARKOVICH AJ, 1993, AM J NEURORADIOL, V14, P1119
Brownell Hiram, 2000, LANGUAGE BRAIN REPRE, P185, DOI 10.1016/B978-012304260-6/50012-8
CHANTRAINE Y, 1998, HDB NEUROLINGUISTICS, P261, DOI 10.1016/B978-012666055-5/50021-6
Chinnery PF, 1997, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V63, P559, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.63.5.559
Code C., 1987, LANGUAGE APHASIA RIG
CRIMMINS D, 1993, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V56, P900, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.56.8.900
DiMauro S, 1999, ANN NEUROL, V45, P693, DOI 10.1002/1531-8249(199906)45:6<693::AID-ANA2>3.0.CO;2-#
DIMAURO S, 1999, ELSEVIERS ENCY NEURO
DiMauro S, 1997, MOL GENETIC BASIS NE, P201
DiMauro S, 1998, NAT GENET, V19, P214, DOI 10.1038/883
DIMAURO S, 1999, NEUROLOGIA NEUROCHIR, V1, P41
Goto Y., 1995, MUSCLE NERVE S, V3, P107
Hart R P, 1996, Appl Neuropsychol, V3, P8, DOI 10.1207/s15324826an0301_2
Helm-Estabrooks N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P689, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249566
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1991, MANUAL APHASIA THERA
Hillis AE, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P743
HIRANO M, 1994, J CHILD NEUROL, V9, P4
HIRANO M, 1999, MOTOR DISORDERS
JACKSON M, 1999, MELAS PRIMER
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KOTSIMBOS N, 1994, HUM MUTAT, V4, P132, DOI 10.1002/humu.1380040207
Leech Geoffrey N., 1983, PRINCIPLES PRAGMATIC
LEHMAN MT, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P483
MURDOCH BE, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P183, DOI 10.1080/02687039108249481
Ogrezeanu V, 1994, Rom J Neurol Psychiatry, V32, P77
PACHALSKA M, 1996, ZACHODNIA BATERIA AF
PACHALSKA M, 2000, 9 INT APH REH C ABST
PACHALSKA M, 1999, NEUROLOGIA NEUROC S3, V1, P212
PACHALSKA M, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P193, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248706
PACHALSKA M, 1995, PATOMECHANIZM CHARAK
PACHALSKA M, 1999, AFAZIOLOGIA
PACHALSKA M, 1986, WYDAWNICTWO MONOGRAF, V28
PAVLAKIS SG, 1984, ANN NEUROL, V16, P481, DOI 10.1002/ana.410160409
Prayson RA, 1998, ARCH PATHOL LAB MED, V122, P978
SCHLAKE HP, 1994, CLIN NEUROL NEUROSUR, V96, P92, DOI 10.1016/0303-8467(94)90037-X
Schmahmann JD, 1997, INT REV NEUROBIOL, V41, P433
Sue CM, 1998, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V65, P233, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.65.2.233
Tompkins CA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P725
TROUNCE I, 1989, LANCET, V1, P637
Vanhalle C, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P1127, DOI 10.1080/02687030050174665
Vilarinho L, 1999, J NEUROL SCI, V163, P168, DOI 10.1016/S0022-510X(99)00030-1
WALLACE DC, 1992, SCIENCE, V33, P28
WECHSLER D, 1986, WMS R MANUAL WECHSLE
Wechsler D, 1981, WAIS R MANUAL WECHSL
NR 44
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 6
BP 599
EP 615
DI 10.1080/02687040143000078
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 439CE
UT WOS:000169092600005
ER
PT J
AU Luzzatti, C
Toraldo, A
Guasti, MT
Ghirardi, G
Lorenzi, L
Guarnaschelli, C
AF Luzzatti, C
Toraldo, A
Guasti, MT
Ghirardi, G
Lorenzi, L
Guarnaschelli, C
TI Comprehension of reversible active and passive sentences in agrammatism
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 10th Annual Meeting of Theoretical and Experimental Neuropsychology
CY JUN 17-19, 1999
CL MONTREAL, CANADA
ID WORD ORDER PROBLEM; WORKING-MEMORY; BROCAS APHASIA; LANGUAGE; CAPACITY;
DEFICITS; ROLES
AB Agrammatism is a language disorder characterised by a morphological and/or syntactic deficit in spontaneous speech. Such deficits are usually associated with comprehension disorders-though it is said that this is not always the case-which result in a certain degree of variability in syntactic, lexical, and morpholexical performance. The purpose of this study is to reconsider the nature of comprehension disorders in agrammatism, to test whether Grodzinsky's Trace Deletion Hypothesis (TDH) can be generalised to all agrammatic patients, and to ascertain whether the pattern of impairment observed in agrammatism differs from that present in fluent aphasic patients. Eleven agrammatic patients were tested by means of a sentence comprehension task comprising simple active and passive reversible sentences. The performance of the agrammatic patients was compared to that of 16 fluent aphasic (10 Wernicke's and 6 conduction) and 10 control subjects.
The deficits observed in the agrammatic subjects were compatible with the TDH, but there was also impaired processing of pronouns (elements that are also subject to movement) and a mild deficit on the processing of simple active sentences. The fluent aphasic patients showed a similar pattern of impairment. A logistic regression analysis was then applied to each single case separately, in order to study the homogeneity of the patients' performance within each aphasic subgroup. Of the 11 agrammatic patients, 3 did not show comprehension disorders, 5 had a specific deficit for passive movement, 1 a lexical deficit for pronouns only, and 1 a pattern of impairment compatible with Linebarger et al.'s trade-off theory. The last patient showed a deficit for simple active reversible sentences compatible with damage to the mapping of grammatical functions to thematic roles. Similar patterns of impairment were also found in the fluent aphasic sample. Overall, the results lead to the conclusion that the TDH cannot be generalised to all agrammatic patients, that the mechanism it invokes is not the only source responsible for agrammatic comprehension disorders and also contributes to comprehension disorders in fluent aphasic patients.
C1 Univ Milan Bicocca, Dept Psychol, I-20126 Milan, Italy.
Int Sch Adv Studies, Trieste, Italy.
G Salvini Gen Hosp, Rho, Italy.
S Maugeri Fdn, Veruno, Italy.
S Maugeri Fdn, Montescano, Italy.
RP Luzzatti, C (reprint author), Univ Milan Bicocca, Dept Psychol, Bld U6,Piazza Ateneo Nuovo 1, I-20126 Milan, Italy.
CR BASSO A, 1980, CORTEX, V16, P631
Berndt RS, 1996, COGNITION, V58, P289, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(95)00682-6
Berndt RS, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P242, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2130
BERNDT RS, 1980, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V1, P225, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400000552
Bradley D. C., 1980, BIOL STUDIES MENTAL
Caplan D, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P933, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.3.933
Caplan D., 1988, DISORDERS SYNTACTIC
CAPLAN D, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P117, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90008-8
Caplan D, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P77
CAPLAN D, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P637, DOI 10.1080/02643299508252011
CARAMAZZA A, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P572, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90048-1
Cecchetto C., 2000, PROBUS, V12, P93, DOI 10.1515/prbs.2000.12.1.93
Chomsky N., 1981, LECT GOVT BINDING
CINQUE G, 1990, TYPES DEPENDENCIES
De Mauro T., 1993, LESSICO FREQUENZA IT
DRUKS J, 1995, COGNITION, V55, P311, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)00651-Z
Gnmshaw Jane, 1990, ARGUMENT STRUCTURE
Goodglass H., 1968, DEV APPL PSYCHOLINGU
GRODZINSKY Y, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P135, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90009-X
GRODZINSKY Y, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P480, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90031-X
GRODZINSKY Y, 1988, 26 ANN M AC APH MONT
Grodzinsky Y, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P134, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2050
Grodzinsky Y, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P469, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1072
HICKOK G, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P371, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1051
Hickok G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P314, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0014
Isserlin M, 1922, Z GESAMTE NEUROL PSY, V75, P332, DOI 10.1007/BF02901581
Jackendoff Ray, 1990, SEMANTIC STRUCTURES
JAREMA G, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P215, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90125-8
JUST MA, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P122, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.1.122
KAYNE R, 1989, DIALECTS VARIATION T
KEAN ML, 1977, COGNITION, V5, P9, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(77)90015-4
KOLK H, 1992, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V7, P89, DOI 10.1080/01690969208409381
KOOPMAN H, 1991, LINGUA, V85, P211, DOI 10.1016/0024-3841(91)90022-W
Lenneberg E., 1967, BIOL FDN LANGUAGE
LINEBARGER MC, 1983, COGNITION, V13, P361, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90015-X
LONZI L, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P306, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1048
Luzzatti C., 1996, AACHENER APHASIE TES, V2nd
McCullagh P, 1983, GEN LINEAR MODELS
MCNALLY L, 1992, LINGUIST INQ, V23, P336
MICELI G, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P65, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90056-1
OBLER LK, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V6, P318, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90065-2
Ouhalla Jamal, 1993, LINGUISTISCHE BERICH, V143, P3
Rizzi L., 1990, RELATIVIZED MINIMALI
SAFFRAN EM, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P263, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90056-5
SCHWARTZ MF, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P249, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90055-3
Sportiche D., 1995, PHRASE STRUCTURE LEX
WILLMES K, 1985, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V7, P331, DOI 10.1080/01688638508401268
NR 47
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 5
BP 419
EP 441
DI 10.1080/02687040143000005
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 439CD
UT WOS:000169092500001
ER
PT J
AU Mortley, J
Enderby, P
Petheram, B
AF Mortley, J
Enderby, P
Petheram, B
TI Using a computer to improve functional writing in a patient with severe
dysgraphia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID THERAPY; REHABILITATION; DISORDERS; APHASIA; BUFFERS; ADULTS
AB This case study describes and evaluates the therapy administered to MF to improve his severe writing impairment caused by a stroke eighteen months prior to this therapy intervention. Therapy was based on developing a compensatory strategy using his residual skills of being able to spell a word orally. A detailed account of the sequence of therapy procedures is given, initially focusing on specific non-functional tasks, followed by therapy with a more functional focus. A computer was used throughout the intervention to facilitate intensive repetitive practice. The intervention proved to be successful, both in terms of improvements on assessments and with evidence of functional benefits. The use of both a dictionary to support the strategy and an adaptive word processor to promote functional carryover is described. The role of the computer in therapy is discussed as a tool to facilitate repetitive practice of therapy and encourage the independent use of the strategy embodied in therapy.
C1 Frenchay Hosp, Speech & Language Therapy Res Unit, Aphasia Comp Team, Bristol BS16 1LE, Avon, England.
RP Mortley, J (reprint author), Frenchay Hosp, Speech & Language Therapy Res Unit, Aphasia Comp Team, Bristol BS16 1LE, Avon, England.
CR BRUCE C, 1987, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V22, P191
BURTON E, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P479, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248954
Byng S., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P115
CARAMAZZA A, 1987, COGNITION, V26, P59, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(87)90014-X
DELOCHE G, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P201, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249506
EDMUNDSON A, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P223
FISHER L, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P355
FRERAR AM, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P223
KATZ R, 1984, CLIN APH C MINN
KATZ R, 1989, CLIN APH C
KATZ R, 1983, CLIN APH C MINN
KATZ R, 1982, CLIN APH C MINN
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
KAY J, 1996, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
KINSEY C, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P281, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249080
KINSEY C, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P125
LESSER R, 1990, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V7, P347, DOI 10.1080/02643299008253448
LOVERSO FL, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P157, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248827
MORTLEY J, 1999, APHASIA THERAPY FILE, P79
MORTLEY J, 1998, THESIS U EXETER UK
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Petheram B., 1996, DISABILITY REHABILIT, V16, P61
Petheram B, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P267, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248412
PETHERAM BL, 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P177, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90006-5
Pound C, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P283, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248413
ROBERTSON I, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249090
SERON X, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P45
STACHOWIAK FJ, 1993, DEV ASSESSMENT REHAB
NR 28
TC 24
Z9 25
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 5
BP 443
EP 461
DI 10.1080/02687040042000188
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 439CD
UT WOS:000169092500002
ER
PT J
AU Hinckley, JJ
Patterson, JP
Carr, TH
AF Hinckley, JJ
Patterson, JP
Carr, TH
TI Differential effects of context- and skill-based treatment approaches:
Preliminary findings
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICATION; APHASIA; THERAPY; EFFICACY; DISORDERS; SPEECH
AB Context- and skill-based treatment approaches, as embodied by functional and cognitive neuropsychological interventions, predict different patterns of acquisition and transfer of skill based on their theoretical foundations. This project was designed to compare the relative outcomes of these two treatment approaches on a comprehensive set of functional and psycholinguistic measures among aphasic adults. Twelve subjects with chronic, nonfluent aphasia were randomly assigned to each of the two treatments, and their performance compared to that of a baseline group consisting of five nonfluent aphasic subjects. Context-based training focused on role-plays of a functional task, and skill-based training focused on a naming intervention divorced from a functional context. Preliminary findings suggested that patterns of improvement and transfer at post-treatment testing were generally consistent with predictions. The results are a preliminary step towards making empirically based clinical decisions about what treatment type is appropriate for which individual.
C1 Univ S Florida, Tampa, FL 33620 USA.
Cent Michigan Univ, Mt Pleasant, MI 48859 USA.
Michigan State Univ, E Lansing, MI 48824 USA.
RP Hinckley, JJ (reprint author), Univ S Florida, 4202 E Fowler Ave,BEH 255, Tampa, FL 33620 USA.
CR ATEN JL, 1986, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
ATEN JL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P93
BYNG S, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P303
BYNG S, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P265
Carr T. H., 1990, READING ITS DEV COMP
Coltheart M., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
DARLEY FL, 1972, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V37, P3
FISK AD, 1989, APPL ERGON, V20, P2, DOI 10.1016/0003-6870(89)90002-1
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
HOLLAND AL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P50
Holland A. L., 1999, COMMUNICATION ACTIVI
HOLLAND AL, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
Hollingshead A. B., 1975, 4 FACTOR INDEX SOCIA
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
LEDORZE G, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P51
LOGAN GD, 1988, PSYCHOL REV, V95, P492, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.95.4.492
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
MITCHUM CC, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V5, P1, DOI 10.1080/09602019508520173
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
PARMELEE PA, 1990, J AM GERIATR SOC, V38, P1379
PRINS RS, 1989, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V10, P85, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400008432
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P585
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
Ross KB, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P113, DOI 10.1080/026870399402235
SHEWAN CM, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P272, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90068-3
SPRINGER L, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P251, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249509
NR 28
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 5
BP 463
EP 476
DI 10.1080/02687040042000340
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 439CD
UT WOS:000169092500003
ER
PT J
AU Pound, C
Parr, S
Duchan, J
AF Pound, C
Parr, S
Duchan, J
TI Using partners' autobiographical reports to develop, deliver, and
evaluate services in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID QUALITATIVE METHODS; PSYCHIATRIC MORBIDITY; FAMILY CAREGIVERS; STROKE;
INTERVENTIONS; SUPPORT; CONVERSATION; SATISFACTION; IMPACT; ISSUES
AB Four women whose husbands had aphasia were asked to talk about their lives in several in-depth interviews. Themes from their accounts were used to plan, deliver, and evaluate a support course. Themes from their initial interviews were used to create a course plan containing skill training, provision of information, and discussion topics. Themes emerging from their reports during course discussions provided a means for participants to explore and problem-solve their current issues. Evaluation of the course was based on themes drawn from two post-course interviews. Findings suggest that (1) aphasia affected these four participants differently, (2) themes from autobiographical reports were useful in planning content of a course to assure its relevance, (3) issues raised by participants during the course served to assure course relevance in its delivery, and (4) autobiographical descriptions offered a way of discovering whether and how the course experience had an ongoing impact on the lives of the participants. It is concluded that the collection and analysis of autobiographical reports provide an effective way to design, deliver and evaluate learning in a support course for partners of those with aphasia.
C1 Connect Commun Disabil Network, London SE1 1HL, England.
City Univ London, London EC1V 0HB, England.
SUNY Buffalo, Buffalo, NY 14260 USA.
RP Pound, C (reprint author), Connect Commun Disabil Network, 16-18 Marshalsea Rd, London SE1 1HL, England.
CR ANDERSON C, 1992, AFTERMATH STROKE EXP
ANDERSON CS, 1995, STROKE, V26, P843
Becker G., 1997, DISRUPTED LIVES PEOP
Bevington L. J., 1985, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V13, P117
BORENSTEIN P, 1987, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V19, P51
Bowling J. H., 1977, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V5, P29
BRYMAN, ANAL QUALITATIVE DAT
Byng S., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROLOGICA
Cant R, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P900, DOI 10.1080/026870399401641
CARNWATH TCM, 1987, BRIT MED J, V294, P409
Crossley M, 2000, INTRO NARRATIVE PSYC
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P651
Damico JS, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P667
Dennis M, 2000, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V68, P47, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.68.1.47
Department of Health, 1999, PAT PUBL INV NHS
Frank AW, 1995, WOUNDED STORYTELLER
HAMMELL KRW, 1992, DISABILITY HANDICAP, V7, P349
JOHANNSENHORBAC.M, 1999, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V20, P73
JUDGE K, 1993, J SOC POLICY, V22, P299
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P851, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249580
Kleinman A, 1988, ILLNESS NARRATIVES S
KNIGHT B, 1999, GERONTOLOGIST, V33, P240
Le Dorze G, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P922
LONG A, 1994, RES PEOPLES HLTH
LOVETT S, 1988, BEHAV THER, V19, P321, DOI 10.1016/S0005-7894(88)80005-4
LPAA Project Group, 2000, ASHA LEADER, V5, P4
LYON JG, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P33, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248687
MCADAMS DP, 1993, STORIES WE LIVE BY P
MCLEOD J, 1994, DOING COUNSELING RES
MINER M, 1997, BODY PHYSICAL DIFFER
Mykyta L J, 1976, Age Ageing, V5, P87, DOI 10.1093/ageing/5.2.87
O'Rourke S, 1998, STROKE, V29, P980
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
POUND C, 2000, APHASIA THERAPIES LI
Pring T, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P914, DOI 10.1080/026870399401687
Rice B, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P247, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248841
Riessman C. K., 1993, NARRATIVE ANAL
Ritchie J, 1994, ANAL QUALITATIVE DAT
Sacks Oliver, 1985, MAN WHO MISTOOK HIS
Servaes P, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P889
Simmons-Mackie N, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P681
TOMKINS C, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P902
TOSELAND RW, 1989, GERONTOLOGIST, V29, P465
Turnblom M, 1952, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V17, P393
WAHRBORG P, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P93, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248978
Wells A, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P911, DOI 10.1080/026870399401678
Wilkinson IAG, 1998, READ RES QUART, V33, P144, DOI 10.1598/RRQ.33.2.1
WILLIAMS SE, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P361
WILLIAMS SE, 1986, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V67, P250
ZIGMOND AS, 1983, ACTA PSYCHIAT SCAND, V67, P361, DOI 10.1111/j.1600-0447.1983.tb09716.x
NR 50
TC 24
Z9 24
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 5
BP 477
EP 493
DI 10.1080/02687040143000159
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 439CD
UT WOS:000169092500004
ER
PT J
AU Basso, A
Caporali, A
AF Basso, A
Caporali, A
TI Aphasia therapy or the importance of being earnest
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE; REHABILITATION; METAANALYSIS; RECOVERY
AB Effectiveness of aphasia therapy, at least for some patients, is no longer under discussion but the specific effect of most of the variables influencing recovery is unknown. In this paper we address a question relative to the therapeutic regimen. Three pairs of patients with similar age, educational level, sex, aetiology, lesion site, and type and severity of aphasia are compared. Except for one of the control patients who was 2 months post-onset, all patients were at least 6 months post-onset (range: 6-22 months) and had already been rehabilitated when they entered the study. The three experimental subjects underwent a very long and intensive therapeutic programme (2/3 hours per day, 7 days per week, for many months), with the help of the family and volunteers. The control patients were rehabilitated daily (1 hour, 5 days a week) for similar periods of time. It is argued that the intensive treatment achieved higher test scores and more prolonged recovery and that the experimental patients made better use of their recovered language in daily life.
C1 Univ Milan, I-20122 Milan, Italy.
RP Basso, A (reprint author), Neurol Clin, Via F Sforza 35, I-20122 Milan, Italy.
CR BASSO A, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P190
BASSO A, 1977, PAZIENTE AFASICO
BASSO A, 1975, REV NEUROL, V131, P607
BASSO A, 1974, ESAME LINGUAGGIO
BASSO A, 1999, RIABILITAZIONE NEURO, P125
BASSO A, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P337, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248605
Beyn E.-S., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P96
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
Capitani E., 1979, AP RIV APPLICAZIONI, V1, P551
Ciurli P., 1996, ESAME LINGUAGGIO
De Renzi E., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P50
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
DERENZI E, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P41
DERENZI E, 1980, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V37, P6
GLONING K, 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P57
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
HAGEN C, 1973, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V54, P454
Howard D., 1987, APHASIA THERAPY HIST
JONES EV, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P63
KERTESZ A, 1977, CORTEX, V8, P56
LUZZATTI C, 1987, Archivio di Psicologia Neurologia e Psichiatria, V48, P480
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
MAZZONI M, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P553, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248714
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
MICELI G, 1991, BATTERIA ANAL DEFICI
PENN C, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P25
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P582, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1060
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
SANDS E, 1969, Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, V50, P202
SELNES OA, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P72, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90037-3
NR 31
TC 29
Z9 29
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 4
BP 307
EP 332
DI 10.1080/02687040042000304
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 414EW
UT WOS:000167653900001
ER
PT J
AU Cuetos, F
Labos, E
AF Cuetos, F
Labos, E
TI The autonomy of the orthographic pathway in a shallow language: Data
from an aphasic patient
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SEMANTIC ERRORS; PARALEXIAS; SPEECH; OUTPUT
AB This paper reports the case of a Spanish monolingual aphasic patient, JD, who showed a severe impairment in language production. Overall, the patient's difficulties were much more severe in oral than in written production. This study was an attempt to test whether writing without phonological mediation is possible in a shallow orthography such as Spanish. The results suggest that even in Spanish, despite its orthographic and phonological transparency, there are two writing routes, one based on the phonological representations of words and the other based on a direct access from semantic to the orthographic representations of words. The role played by each route seems to depend on the strategy used by the writer.
C1 Univ Oviedo, Dept Psicol, Oviedo 33003, Spain.
Univ Buenos Aires, RA-1053 Buenos Aires, DF, Argentina.
RP Cuetos, F (reprint author), Univ Oviedo, Dept Psicol, Plaza Feijoo S-N, Oviedo 33003, Spain.
RI Cuetos, Fernando/B-4337-2011
CR Ardila A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P885, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249457
Beaton A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P459
BUB D, 1982, BRAIN, V105, P697, DOI 10.1093/brain/105.4.697
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
CUETOS F, 1993, READ WRIT, V5, P17, DOI 10.1007/BF01026916
DE VEGA M., 1990, LECT COMPRENSION PER
FERRERES AR, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V49, P153, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1026
GESCHWIND N, 1969, CONTROBUTIONS CLIN N
Hanley JR, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P3
Hendriks AW, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P321
Hillis AE, 1999, CORTEX, V35, P337, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70804-9
HILLIS AE, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90119-L
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
LAINE M, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P207, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90111-S
Luria A. R., 1966, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
MALDONADO S, 1998, PROTOCOLO EVALUACION
Miceli G, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P35
MICELI G, 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V32, P317, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)90134-1
Rapp B, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P71
Riddoch M. J., 1993, BORB BIRMINGHAM OBJE
Shelton JR, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P105
Valle F., 1995, EPLA EVALUACION PROC
NR 23
TC 14
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 4
BP 333
EP 342
DI 10.1080/02687040042000313
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 414EW
UT WOS:000167653900002
ER
PT J
AU Holland, AL
Turkstra, L
AF Holland, AL
Turkstra, L
TI Darley's contributions to differential diagnosis of the neuropathologies
of language
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID STROKE
C1 Univ Arizona, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
Case Western Reserve Univ, Cleveland, OH 44106 USA.
RP Holland, AL (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
CR Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
BAYLES KA, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P74
Chapey R., 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DARLEY FL, 1977, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V42, P161
DARLEYFL, 1964, DIAGNOSIS APPRAISAL
FROMM D, 1985, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V42, P943
HALPERN H, 1973, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V38, P162
Hartley LL., 1995, COGNITIVE COMMUNICAT
JACKSON JH, 1958, SELECTED WRITINGS, V2
Marie P, 1906, SEM MED, V26, P241
*MAYO CLIN MEMB SE, 1963, CLIN EX NEUR
Schuell H, 1965, MINNESOTA TEST DIFFE
Schuell H. M., 1964, APHASIA ADULTS DIAGN
Wepman J. M., 1951, RECOVERY APHASIA
WERTZ RT, 1985, CLIN NEUROGENIC COMM
NR 17
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 3
BP 213
EP 220
DI 10.1080/02687040042000214
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 403LL
UT WOS:000167043300002
ER
PT J
AU McNeil, MR
Kimelman, MDZ
AF McNeil, MR
Kimelman, MDZ
TI Darley and the nature of aphasia: The defining and classifying
controversies
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AUDITORY VIGILANCE; DIVIDED-ATTENTION; INDIVIDUALS
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
Duquesne Univ, Pittsburgh, PA 15219 USA.
RP McNeil, MR (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
CR Aristotle, TOPICS
BROWN JR, 1968, ANN M AC APH ROCH MI
CARAMAZZA A, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P9, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90032-4
CLARK C, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V7, P240, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90020-8
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
DARLEY FL, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V13, P281
Erickson RJ, 1996, BRAIN COGNITION, V30, P244, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1996.0016
Geshwind N, 1965, BRAIN, V88, P237
GOLDSTEIN K, 1948, LANGUAGE LANGUAGE DI
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
Head H., 1926, APHASIA KINDRED DISO
HOLLAND AL, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V13, P289
JACKSON JH, 1931, SELECTED WRITINGS, V2
Joanette Y, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V68, P529, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2126
JONES LV, 1961, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V4, P220
Kay J, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P202, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248408
Kussmaul A, 1877, CYCLOPEDIA PRACTICE, V14, P581
LAPOINTE LL, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P511, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248556
Luria A. R., 1966, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
McNeil M. R., 1988, HDB SPEECH LANGUAGE, P738
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
MCNEIL MR, 2001, IN PRESS APHASIOLOGY, V15
Murray LL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P213
Murray LL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P401, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248480
MURRAY LL, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P56
POWELL GE, 1979, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V14, P111
Rosenbek J.C., 1989, APHASIA CLIN APPROAC
SCHUELL H, 1954, NEUROLOGY, V4, P179
SCHUELL H, 1961, BRAIN, V84, P243, DOI 10.1093/brain/84.2.243
SCHUELL H, 1953, NEUROLOGY, V3, P176
SCHUELL H, 1961, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V4, P295
SCHUELL H, 1959, PSYCHOL REV, V66, P45, DOI 10.1037/h0045014
Schuell H. M., 1964, APHASIA ADULTS DIAGN
SCHUELL H, 1962, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V5, P349
SCHWARTZ MF, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V21, P3, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90031-2
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
WEPMAN JM, 1960, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V25, P323
Wepman JM, 1955, FOLIA PHONIATR, V7, P223
WEPMAN JM, 1964, DISORDERS COMMUNICAT
WERTZ RT, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V13, P296
NR 41
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 3
BP 221
EP 229
DI 10.1080/02687040042000223
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 403LL
UT WOS:000167043300003
ER
PT J
AU Wertz, RT
Irwin, WH
AF Wertz, RT
Irwin, WH
TI Darley and the efficacy of language rehabilitation in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPEECH-THERAPY; METAANALYSIS; RECOVERY; ADULTS; STROKE
AB In 1972, Frederic L. Darley provided the first comprehensive review on the efficacy of language rehabilitation for aphasia. The "data to date'' were sparse-ten reports, mostly descriptive, and mostly retrospective. He concluded that"... any all-inclusive statement about the efficacy of aphasia therapy would be ill-advised'' (Darley, 1972, p. 7). Nevertheless, Darley listed the questions that required answers, discussed the problems that plague treatment studies, and suggested study patient selection criteria that required attention. His message was clear: "More data are needed applying to clearly specified samples of the aphasic population subjected to clearly specified regimens of therapy by clinicians, for clearly specified periods'' (p. 8). In addition, he concluded that aphasia treatment studies require a richness of description and rigour of procedure to "... increase the likelihood that 10 years hence the profession will enjoy substantial agreement about the nature of language breakdown and what can best be done for it'' (p. 20). This paper examines whether, almost 30 years hence, the subsequent efforts have followed Darley's directions and answered his questions.
C1 Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
RP Wertz, RT (reprint author), Vet Affairs Med Ctr, 1310 24th Ave S, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
CR FERGUSON JH, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P566
BASSO A, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P190
Beyn E.-S., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P96
*BIRCH DAV ASS INC, 1997, STAT SCI MED REH, V1
Boysen A. E., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P207
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1994, ASHA SPECIAL INTERES, V4, P5
BUTFIELD E, 1946, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V9, P75, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.9.2.75
COHEN WJ, 1968, COMMUNICATION
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
Darley F L, 1979, ASHA, V21, P628
DARLEY FL, 1972, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V37, P3
DAVID R, 1982, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V45, P957, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.45.11.957
Eisenson J, 1949, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V14, P262
Elman RJ, 1999, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P411
Frazier CH, 1920, ARCH NEURO PSYCHIATR, V3, P17
HADRON DC, 1996, J CLIN EPIDEMIOL, V49, P749
HAGEN C, 1973, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V54, P454
HARTMAN J, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P646
Holland AL, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, pS27
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
LINCOLN NB, 1984, LANCET, V1, P1197
MARKS M, 1957, Arch Phys Med Rehabil, V38, P219
MEIKLE M, 1979, BRIT MED J, V2, P87
Office of Technology Assessment, 1978, OTAH75
OLSWANG LB, 1990, TREATMENT EFFICACY R, P99
Pedersen PM, 1996, ANN NEUROL, V40, P130, DOI 10.1002/ana.410400126
PEDERSEN PM, 1995, ANN NEUROL, V38, P659, DOI 10.1002/ana.410380416
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
ROBEY RR, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P582, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1060
Robey RR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P787, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249573
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
RUFF RM, 1991, HDB CLIN TRIALS NEUR, P89
SANDS E, 1969, Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, V50, P202
SARNO MT, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P607
Schuell H. M., 1964, APHASIA ADULTS DIAGN
Sederer L, 1996, OUTCOMES ASSESSMENT, P1
SHEWAN CM, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P272, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90068-3
VIGNOLO LA, 1964, CORTEX, V1, P344
Weisenberg T., 1935, APHASIA CLIN PSYCHOL
Wepman J. M., 1951, RECOVERY APHASIA
WERTZ RT, 1986, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V43, P653
WERTZ RT, 1998, TREATM EFF C VAND U
WERTZ RT, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P580
WHURR R, 1992, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V27, P1
WHURR R, 1997, NEUROLOGY REV INT, V1, P9
1969, MED WORLD NEWS, V10, P37
NR 46
TC 8
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 3
BP 231
EP 247
DI 10.1080/02687040042000232
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 403LL
UT WOS:000167043300004
ER
PT J
AU LaPointe, LL
AF LaPointe, LL
TI Darley and the psychosocial side
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 Florida State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, Reg Rahbil Ctr 301, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
RP LaPointe, LL (reprint author), Florida State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, Reg Rahbil Ctr 301, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
CR Biegel D, 1991, FAMILY CAREGIVING CH
CODE C, 1989, APHASIA THERAPY, P3
DARLEY F, 1983, CLIN DYSARTHRIA, pR15
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DARLEY FL, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P9
GREGG C, 1998, PSYCHOSOCIAL ASPECTS
Herrmann M., 1993, LIVING APHASIA PSYCH, P187
Hymovich DP, 1992, CHRONIC ILLNESS CHIL
Lapointe Leonard L., 1997, P265
MANOCHIOPINING S, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P657
Morse J. M., 1991, ILLNESS EXPERIENCE D
POLLOCK SE, 1986, NURS RES, V35, P90
Skelly M, 1975, Am J Nurs, V75, P1140, DOI 10.2307/3423493
Smyth J., 1999, COPING PSYCHOL WHAT, P70
Snyder C. R., 1999, COPING PSYCHOL WHAT
STOICHEFF ML, 1960, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V3, P75
Watson D., 1999, COPING PSYCHOL WHAT, P119
NR 18
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 3
BP 249
EP 260
DI 10.1080/02687040042000241
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 403LL
UT WOS:000167043300005
ER
PT J
AU Rosenbek, JC
AF Rosenbek, JC
TI Darley and apraxia of speech in adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID MOTOR CONTROL; SPEAKERS; PATIENT
AB This essay summarises Dr Frederic L. Darley's contributions to the understanding and treatment of apraxia of speech (AOS). He defined and described the disorder as it appeared to him in his clinic. He explained it using the psychological and neurological models and vocabularies of his day. His students, and other interested clinical investigators, worked to confirm, expand, and in some cases, revise portions of his original contribution. Opponents tried to recast his notions altogether. The contributions of both, including the motor programming and linguistic models they used and perceptual, acoustic, and physiologic data they collected, have formed part of our modern understanding of AOS. Improved evaluation and conceptually-based treatments are among the best parts of Fred's legacy.
C1 Coll Hlth Profess, Dept Commun Disorders, Gainesville, FL 32610 USA.
RP Rosenbek, JC (reprint author), Coll Hlth Profess, Dept Commun Disorders, POB 100174, Gainesville, FL 32610 USA.
CR ATEN JL, 1971, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V14, P131
ATEN JL, 1975, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V40, P416
BALLARD K, 1999, NATL CTR VOICE SPEEC, V14, P173
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P202, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90050-6
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P269, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50011-7
CANTER GJ, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P251, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248919
Clark HM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P699, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249567
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
DARLEY FL, 1969, UNPUB AM SPEECH HEAR
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DARLEY FL, 1968, UNPUB AM SPEECH HEAR
DARLEY FL, 1967, BRAIN MECH UNDERLYIN, P236
DEAL JL, 1974, J COMMUN DISORD, V7, P135, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(74)90026-4
DEAL JL, 1972, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V15, P639
DISIMONI FG, 1977, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V42, P257
Dronkers NF, 1996, NATURE, V384, P159, DOI 10.1038/384159a0
FOLKINS JW, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P596
HAGEMAN CF, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P219
ITOH M, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P66, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90110-8
JOHNS DF, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P556
JOHNS DF, 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V1, P161
Kent R. D., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P181
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
KLICH RJ, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P451
KNOCK T, 1999, NATL CTR VOICE SPEEC, V14, P163
LAPOINTE LL, 1969, UNPUB THESIS U COLOR
LAPOINTE LL, 1975, J COMMUN DISORD, V8, P259, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(75)90018-0
LESSER R, 1978, LINGUISTIC INVESTIGA
MARTIN AD, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P53
MARTIN AD, 1975, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V40, P421
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MCNEIL MR, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE, P221
McNeil M.R., 1990, CEREBRAL CONTROL SPE, P349
MCNEIL MR, UNPUB INTERLABIAL SP
MCNEIL MR, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V33, P255
ODELL K, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P295
ODELL K, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P345
ROBIN DA, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V32, P512
Rogers MA, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P433, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248482
Rosenbek J., 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH PHYSL, P1
ROSENBEK JC, 1973, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V16, P22
SCHILLER F, 1992, P BROCA EXPLORER BRA
Schmidt R, 1988, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
SCHMIDT RA, 1999, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI, V3
Smiley Jane, 1995, MOO
Square P. A., 1997, APRAXIA NEUROPSYCHOL, P173
SQUARE PA, 1981, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P83
SQUARE PA, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P467
SQUARE PA, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P245
SQUARESTORER PA, 1991, DYSARTHRIA AND APRAXIA OF SPEECH, P271
TRAGER GL, 1961, 3 AM COUNC LEARN SOC
van der Merwe A, 1997, COMSIG '97 - PROCEEDINGS OF THE 1997 SOUTH AFRICAN SYMPOSIUM ON COMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING, P1
Wambaugh JL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P521, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248488
WAMBAUGH JL, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P231
WAMBAUGH JL, 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P35
WEISMER G, 1991, DYSARTHRIA AND APRAXIA OF SPEECH, P245
Weismer G., 1984, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V5, P293, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064291
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
ZIEGLER W, 1986, EUR ARCH PSY CLIN N, V236, P44, DOI 10.1007/BF00641058
NR 59
TC 8
Z9 9
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 3
BP 261
EP 273
DI 10.1080/02687040042000250
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 403LL
UT WOS:000167043300006
ER
PT J
AU Duffy, JR
Kent, RD
AF Duffy, JR
Kent, RD
TI Darley's contributions to the understanding, differential diagnosis, and
scientific study of the dysarthrias
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID AMYOTROPHIC-LATERAL-SCLEROSIS; ADULT CEREBRAL-PALSY; PARKINSONS-DISEASE;
SPEECH-INTELLIGIBILITY; PERCEPTUAL ANALYSIS; PALLIDOTOMY; STIMULATION;
TREMOR; VOICE; IMPAIRMENT
AB The work of Frederic L. Darley and his colleagues has done much to shape approaches to the clinical diagnosis and understanding of the dysarthrias and the scientific study of speech production. From the perspective of the speech pathologist and the perspective of the speech scientist, this paper examines Darley's contributions to the clinical diagnosis and management of the dysarthrias, to the localisation and diagnosis of neurologic disease, to descriptions of the perceptual representations of disordered speech, and to efforts to integrate information about disordered neural control of speech with information about the normal neural control of speech. Gaps in knowledge and directions for future work in each of these areas are also discussed.
C1 Mayo Clin & Mayo Fdn, Dept Neurol, Div Speech Pathol, Rochester, MN 55905 USA.
Univ Wisconsin, Madison, WI 53706 USA.
RP Duffy, JR (reprint author), Mayo Clin & Mayo Fdn, Dept Neurol, Div Speech Pathol, 200 1st St SW, Rochester, MN 55905 USA.
CR ALWAN AA, 2000, VOICE QUALITY MEASUR
ARONSON AE, 1992, ANN OTO RHINOL LARYN, V101, P511
Barlow S., 1999, HDB CLIN SPEECH PHYS
BERRY WR, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V17, P169
BOUTSEN FR, 1997, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V5, P27
Brain W. R., 1965, SPEECH DISORDERS APH
Brown J R, 1968, Trans Am Neurol Assoc, V93, P193
BROWN JR, 1970, INT J NEUROL, V7, P302
CALLAN DE, 2000, HDB VOICE QUALITY
CARROW E, 1974, ARCH OTOLARYNGOL, V100, P212
Darley F. L., 1982, APHASIA
DARLEY FL, 1969, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V12, P462
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DARLEY FL, 1968, MED CLIN N AM, V52, P835
DARLEY FL, 1969, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V12, P246
DARLEY FL, 1972, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V15, P229
Dreyfus H. L., 1986, MIND OVER MACHINE PO
Duffy J. R., 1996, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V4, P57
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
FINK BR, 1986, SCIENCE, V231, P319, DOI 10.1126/science.231.4736.319-b
Froeschels E, 1943, J SPEECH DISORD, V8, P301
GENTIL M, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P438, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90126-2
Gentil M, 1998, PROG NEURO-PSYCHOPH, V22, P1261, DOI 10.1016/S0278-5846(98)00081-5
GERRATT BR, 1991, DYSARTHRIA APRAXIA S
Ghika J, 1999, J NEUROSURG, V91, P313, DOI 10.3171/jns.1999.91.2.0313
GOLPER LAC, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V48, P128
GREWEL F, 1957, ACTA PSYCH NEUROL, V32, P325, DOI 10.1111/j.1600-0447.1957.tb09469.x
HARTMAN DE, 1992, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V27, P187
HARTMAN DE, 1989, RECENT ADV DYSARTHRI
HOIT JD, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V33, P798
JOANETTE Y, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P39, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90036-X
KEARNS KP, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V31, P131
KENT JF, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P723
Kent R. D., 1998, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V6, P165
Kent RD, 2000, VOICE QUALITY MEASUR
KENT RD, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P721
Kent RD, 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P7, DOI DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0503.07
KLUIN KJ, 1993, NEUROLOGY, V43, P563
KREIMAN J, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V33, P103
Kuhn T., 1962, STRUCTURE SCI REVOLU
LAPOINTE LL, 1994, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
LINEBAUGH C, 1979, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V44, P55
LOGEMANN JA, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V46, P348
LOGEMANN JA, 1978, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V43, P47
Luchsinger R., 1965, VOICE SPEECH LANGUAG
McNeil M.R., 1984, DYSARTHRIAS PHYSL AC
METTER EJ, 1991, DYSARTHRIA APRAXIA S
METTER EJ, 1986, J COMMUN DISORD, V19, P347, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(86)90026-2
METZ DE, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P516
MURDOCH BE, 1994, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V2, P177
MURDOCH BE, 1999, DYSARTHRIA PHYSL APP
NETSELL R, 1986, NEUROBIOLOGIC VIEW S
Pahwa R, 1999, NEUROLOGY, V53, P1447
PERKINS WH, 1983, DYSARTHRIA APRAXIA
PLATT LJ, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P41
PLATT LJ, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V23, P28
Poluha PC, 1998, ACTA PSYCHOL, V100, P71, DOI 10.1016/S0001-6918(98)00026-2
PUTNAM AHB, 1988, HUMAN COMMUNICATION
SAMAR VJ, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V31, P307
SCHIAVETTI N, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P441
SCHIAVETTI N, 1984, ARTICULATION ASSESSM
Schiavetti N., 1992, INTELLIGIBILITY SPEE
Schrag A, 1999, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V67, P511, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.67.4.511
Scott R, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P659, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.4.659
SHEARD C, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P285
Simmons KC, 1997, J COMMUN DISORD, V30, P117, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(96)00058-5
Southwood M., 1993, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V1, P151
Stevens S. S., 1975, PSYCHOPHYSICS
Taha JM, 1999, J NEUROSURG, V91, P68, DOI 10.3171/jns.1999.91.1.0068
Urban PP, 1997, BRAIN, V120, P1077, DOI 10.1093/brain/120.6.1077
Van der Merwe A., 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS
WERTZ R T, 1992, Seminars in Speech and Language, V13, P39, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064185
ZEPLIN J, 1996, DISORDERS MOTOR SPEE
ZYSKI BJ, 1987, J COMMUN DISORD, V20, P367, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(87)90025-6
NR 74
TC 11
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 3
BP 275
EP 289
DI 10.1080/02687040042000269
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 403LL
UT WOS:000167043300007
ER
PT J
AU Strand, EA
AF Strand, EA
TI Darley's contributions to the understanding and diagnosis of
developmental apraxia of speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB In addition to his well-acknowledged work in the area of acquired neurologic communication disorders, Fred Darley also made significant contributions to how we think about speech disorders in children. His careful attention to nosology and his expertise in differential diagnosis led to a specific and important contribution in the area of developmental apraxia of speech. His work, along with Dr Yoss, contributed significantly to our understanding of this developmental motor speech disorder, as well as to the development of assessment and treatment strategies for this group of children. This paper will examine Darley's work in developmental apraxia of speech, both as a clinician and as a researcher.
C1 Mayo Clin & Mayo Fdn, Dept Neurol, Div Speech Pathol, Rochester, MN 55905 USA.
RP Strand, EA (reprint author), Mayo Clin & Mayo Fdn, Dept Neurol, Div Speech Pathol, E 8-A,200 1St St SW, Rochester, MN 55905 USA.
CR ATEN JL, 1975, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V40, P416
BROWN JR, 1967, PEDIATR CLIN N AM, V14, P725
CHAPPELL GE, 1973, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V38, P362
Crary M. A., 1993, DEV MOTOR SPEECH DIS
DARLEY FL, 1961, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V26, P272
DARLEY FL, 1971, J MINNESOTA SPEECH H, V10, P106
DARLEY FL, 1975, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V3, P47
Davis BL, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P25, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985211
EISENSON J, 1966, J NEUROL SCI, V3, P313, DOI 10.1016/0022-510X(66)90029-3
Guyette T. W., 1981, SPEECH LANGUAGE ADV, P1
Hall P. K., 1993, DEV APRAXIA SPEECH T
HAYNES S, 1985, CLIN MANAGEMENT NEUR, P259
LITZOW TJ, 1966, MAYO CLIN PROC, V41, P524
MARQUARDT TP, 1991, TREATING DISORDERED, P341
MARTIN AD, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P53
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MILLER H, 1950, P ROY SOC MED, V43, P579
MOLL D, 1960, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V25, P377
MORLEY M, 1954, BRIT MED J, V1, P8
MORLEY M, 1955, BRIT MED J, V2, P463
MORLEY ME, 1965, DEV DISORDERS SPEECH
MORRIS HL, 1961, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V4, P48
ROSENBEK J, 1974, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V5, P13
ROSENBEK JC, 1973, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V38, P462
Schmidt R, 1988, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
Shriberg LD, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P273
Shriberg LD, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P286
Shriberg LD, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P313
Simonsen KM, 1946, ACTA PSYCH NEUROL, V21, P715, DOI 10.1111/j.1600-0447.1946.tb07307.x
SPRIESTERSBACH DC, 1956, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V21, P436
SPRIESTERSBACH DC, 1958, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V1, P279
SQUARE PA, 1999, CLIN MANAGEMENT MOTO, P149
STRAND E, 2000, C MOT SPEECH SAN ANT
Strand Edythe A., 1995, Seminars in Speech and Language, V16, P126, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064115
Strand E. A., 1999, CLIN MANAGEMENT MOTO, P109
Strand EA, 1999, CLIN MANAGEMENT MOTO
TEMPLIN M, 1969, TEMPLINDARLEY TEST A
Velleman SL, 1994, CHILD PHONOLOGY CHAR, P110
YOSS KA, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V17, P399
Yoss K. A., 1974, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V5, P23
1974, DORLANDS ILLUSTRAED
NR 41
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 3
BP 291
EP 303
DI 10.1080/02687040042000278
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 403LL
UT WOS:000167043300008
ER
PT J
AU Boucher, V
Garcia, LJ
Fleurant, J
Paradis, J
AF Boucher, V
Garcia, LJ
Fleurant, J
Paradis, J
TI Variable efficacy of rhythm and tone in melody-based interventions:
Implications for the assumption of a right-hemisphere facilitation in
non-fluent aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FUNDAMENTAL-FREQUENCY; SPEECH; PERCEPTION; PROSODY; LATERALIZATION;
PRESERVATION; INSTRUCTION; THERAPY; APRAXIA; LESION
AB This study examines the effects of tonal and rhythmic components of a melody-based intervention on the repetition abilities of two individuals with non-fluent aphasia. The subjects presented lesions restricted to the left hemisphere and showed moderate to severe limitations on repetition tasks. An alternate-treatment design was used where pre-recorded stimuli served to guide a therapist's production of models in treatment conditions emphasising the tonal or rhythmic attributes of target utterances. The results show that, relative to baseline performance, treatment emphasising the tonal attributes of target phrases had little or no impact on the subjects' immediate or deferred repetitions of the phrases. By comparison, exercises emphasising rhythm corresponded to substantial gains in the subjects' ability to repeat target utterances. Implications are drawn with respect to the rationale of melody-based therapies, specifically on the assumption that a right-hemisphere processing of tone may facilitate fluent speech.
C1 Univ Ottawa, Sch Rehabil Sci, Audiol & Speech Language Pathol Program, Ottawa, ON K1N 6N5, Canada.
Ottawa Hosp, Ottawa, ON, Canada.
RP Boucher, V (reprint author), Univ Ottawa, Sch Rehabil Sci, Audiol & Speech Language Pathol Program, 545 King Edward, Ottawa, ON K1N 6N5, Canada.
EM vboucher@uottawa.ca
CR Ackermann H, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P228, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2056
BAKEN R, 1987, J VOICE, V1, P68, DOI 10.1016/S0892-1997(87)80027-9
BAKEN RJ, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V31, P207
Baum SR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P581
BEHRENS SJ, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V26, P332, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90047-1
BERMAN IW, 1981, S AFR MED J, V59, P78
BLOEDEL JR, 1994, MOVEMENT CONTROL, P64, DOI 409831717,12,1
Borchgrevink H, 1982, MUSIC MIND BRAIN, P151
BORCHGREVINK HM, 1991, MUSIC LANGUAGE SPEEC, P327
BORCHGREVINK HM, 1980, APHASIA ASSESSMENT T, P186
BREITLING D, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P765, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(87)90114-X
COHEN NS, 1993, J MUSIC THER, V30, P81
COHEN NS, 1992, J MUSIC THER, V29, P87
EMMOREY KD, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V30, P305, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90105-2
FRIEDRICH FJ, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V22, P266, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90094-4
GOLDSTEIN K, 1948, LANGUAGE LANGUAGE DI
SPARKS R, 1974, Cortex, V10, P303
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1981, HELM ELICITED LANGUA
HELMESTABROOKS N, 1991, MANUAL APHASIA THERA, P207
Helm-Estabrooks N., 1989, MELODIC INTONATION T
HOMER J, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P135
INHOFF AW, 1989, BRAIN, V112, P565, DOI 10.1093/brain/112.3.565
IVRY R, 1988, EXPT BRAIN RES, V71, P167
IVRY R, 1993, ANN NY ACAD SCI, V682, P214, DOI 10.1111/j.1749-6632.1993.tb22970.x
Ivry R B, 1992, Curr Opin Neurobiol, V2, P212, DOI 10.1016/0959-4388(92)90015-D
Ivry R B, 1989, J Cogn Neurosci, V1, P136, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1989.1.2.136
JOHNSON PR, 1977, CORTEX, V13, P385
KEITH RL, 1975, BRAIN LANG, V2, P483, DOI 10.1016/S0093-934X(75)80085-X
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KIMURA D, 1964, Q J EXP PSYCHOL, V16, P355, DOI 10.1080/17470216408416391
LALANDE P, 1984, REV NEUROL, V140, P49
Lehiste I., 1996, PRINCIPLES EXPT PHON, P226
MORGAN OS, 1982, W INDIAN MED J, V31, P159
NAESER MA, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P203
OEPEN G, 1983, NEUROLOGIE PSYCHIAT, V21, P168
Pell MD, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P161, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2065
POLK M, 1993, BRAIN COGNITION, V22, P98, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1993.1027
ROBINSON GM, 1974, J EXP PSYCHOL, V102, P508, DOI 10.1037/h0036025
ROGERS A, 1981, MUSIC THERAPY, V8, P102
SPARKS R, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V49, P287
Sparks R. W., 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P368
Van Eeckhout P., 1982, REEDUQUER CERVEU, P109
VANLANCKER D, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P963
WING AM, 1973, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V14, P5, DOI 10.3758/BF03198607
YAMADORI A, 1977, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V40, P221, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.40.3.221
ZATORRE RJ, 1994, J NEUROSCI, V14, P1908
NR 47
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 2
BP 131
EP 149
DI 10.1080/02687040042000098
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 402QM
UT WOS:000166999700002
ER
PT J
AU Pedersen, PM
Vinter, K
Olsen, TS
AF Pedersen, PM
Vinter, K
Olsen, TS
TI Improvement of oral naming by unsupervised computerised rehabilitation
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID THERAPY; DISORDERS; APHASIA
AB The effects of unsupervised, computerised rehabilitation of anomia in aphasia were investigated with three single-case studies. The training was carried out in the patients' own homes without any supervision. It included semantic and phonemic tasks as well as written naming tasks. The computer was programmed to progress through a preselected set of tasks according to set criteria of performance. The patient could not alter the preselected sequence, but could start and stop a session at any time. The length of the training was determined by the time it took the patient to work through the full set of tasks. Comparison was made of their progress in naming of trained and untrained words. A cross-over design was used, and baselines were established with two patients. All patients improved in their general naming performance, but to different degrees. A relatively specific effect for the trained words was found in two patients, whereas the third showed a somewhat more general effect. The chosen therapy was probably not equally appropriate for all three patients. It is concluded that oral naming can be improved with unsupervised computer rehabilitation in the home even though the patient is not required to speak during the training.
C1 Bispebjerg Hosp, Dept Neurol, DK-2400 Copenhagen NV, Denmark.
Gentofte Hosp, Gentofte, Denmark.
RP Pedersen, PM (reprint author), Bispebjerg Hosp, Dept Neurol, DK-2400 Copenhagen NV, Denmark.
CR [Anonymous], 1999, SPSS WIND
BASSO A, 1989, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V2
Benson D. F., 1996, APHASIA CLIN PERSPEC
Bergenholtz H., 1992, DANSK FREKVENS ORDBO
Caplan D., 1992, LANGUAGE STRUCTURE P
DELOCHE G, 1992, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V2, P117, DOI 10.1080/09602019208401400
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
Kay J., 1992, PALPA PSYCHOLINGUIST
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LOVERSO FL, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P155, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248587
Luria A R, 1972, Cortex, V8, P34
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Nickels L., 1997, SPOKEN WORD PRODUCTI
SERON X, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P149
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
WILLMES K, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH
NR 20
TC 32
Z9 32
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 2
BP 151
EP 169
DI 10.1080/02687040042000106
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 402QM
UT WOS:000166999700003
ER
PT J
AU Fox, LE
Sohlberg, MM
Fried-Oken, M
AF Fox, LE
Sohlberg, MM
Fried-Oken, M
TI Effects of conversational topic choice on outcomes of augmentative
communication intervention for adults with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WORK PERFORMANCE; PARTNERS; THERAPY; PEOPLE; SELF
AB Few variables have been found to predict successful use of augmentative and alternative communication devices (AAC) by persons with aphasia. The present study used a single case alternating treatment design to test whether choice of conversational topic improved the ability of three adults with aphasia to use symbol-based communication aids in clinical dialogues with familiar and unfamiliar partners, and in natural environment conversations with family members and friends. Results showed that the youngest participant with most recent onset of aphasia benefited clinically from choice in communication aid training. However, the benefit of topic choice did not extend to natural environments. At home and in other natural environments, use of communication aids was dependent on multiple social and contextual factors. Findings of this study were interpreted using a model of human motivation that considers both personal and environmental influences on achievement.
C1 Portland State Univ, Speech & Hearing Sci Program, Portland, OR 97207 USA.
Univ Oregon, Eugene, OR 97403 USA.
Oregon Hlth Sci Univ, Portland, OR 97201 USA.
RP Fox, LE (reprint author), Portland State Univ, Speech & Hearing Sci Program, POB 751, Portland, OR 97207 USA.
CR ALARCON N, 1996, M NONTR APPR APH YOU
ARTES R, 1978, RECOVERY APHASICS, P31
AVENT JR, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P295, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248206
BAILEY S, 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P178
BAILEY SE, 1978, MOTIV EMOTION, V2, P191, DOI 10.1007/BF00993039
Bambara LM, 1995, J ASSOC PERS SEVERE, V20, P185
BAMBARA LM, 1994, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V27, P555, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1994.27-555
BANDURA A, 1986, SOCIAL FDN THOUGHT A
BANDURA A, 1983, J PERS SOC PSYCHOL, V45, P1017, DOI 10.1037//0022-3514.45.5.1017
BARLOW DH, 1984, SINGLE CASE EXPT DES
Beck A. R., 1998, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V14, P184, DOI 10.1080/07434619812331278356
Bellaire K. J., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P219
Beukelman D., 1985, COMMUNICATION AUGMEN
Beukelman D. R., 1998, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA
Beukelman D. R., 1993, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V9, P95, DOI 10.1080/07434619312331276481
Brookshire RH, 1997, INTRO NEUROGENIC COM
BRUMFITT S, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687039308248631
CHWAT S, 1980, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P127
CODE C, 1992, CODEMULLER PROTOCOLS
Coelho C., 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V15, P222
COELHO CA, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P1, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249050
Deci E. L., 1985, INTRINSIC MOTIVATION
DOYLE PJ, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P229
FLEMING CC, 1981, EXP AGING RES, V7, P71
Ford M.E., 1992, MOTIVATING HUMANS
Fox L. E., 2000, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA
FOX LE, 1996, IS 96 P 7 BIENN C IN, P390
FOX LE, 1996, ISAAC, V12, P257
FOX LE, 1990, RECREATION FOCUSED T
FREED DB, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1081
GARRETT KL, 1992, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, P331
Garrett KL, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P237
GARRY F, 1989, VET CLIN N AM-FOOD A, V5, P55
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P513, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249019
Hoen B, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P681, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249415
HUNT P, 1991, AAC (Augmentative and Alternative Communication), V7, P117, DOI 10.1080/07434619112331275783
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
Kagan A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P816, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249575
Kagan A., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P199
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KINSELLA G, 1978, MANAGEMENT APHASIA
KRATT AW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P321
Lasker J., 1997, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V13, P108, DOI DOI 10.1080/07434619712331277908
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Light J, 1988, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V4, P66, DOI [10.1080/07434618812331274657, DOI 10.1080/07434618812331274657]
Light JC, 1998, BUILDING COMMUNICATI
LUBINSKI R, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P270
Lyon J, 1992, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V1, P7
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
MALONE R, 1969, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V24, P146
Marshall Robert, 1993, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V2, P31
McNaughton D., 1989, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V5, P35, DOI 10.1080/07434618912331274946
MONTY RA, 1979, J EXP PSYCHOL, V37, P170
MONTY RA, 1973, J EXP PSYCHOL, V97, P16, DOI 10.1037/h0033784
MONTY RA, 1975, MEM COGNITION, V3, P183, DOI 10.3758/BF03212896
MYERS PS, 1980, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P68
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
Parr S, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P469, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248426
PARSONS MB, 1990, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V23, P253, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1990.23-253
PERLMUTER LC, 1979, NEW ENGL PSYCH ASS B
PERLMUTER L C, 1980, Motivation and Emotion, V4, P35, DOI 10.1007/BF00995928
PERLMUTER LC, 1989, PSYCHOL PERSPECTIVES, P395
Purdy M., 1994, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P345
Rao P. R., 1978, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P180
ROGERS M, 1999, M AM SPEECH LANG HEA
Rotter J. B., 1954, SOCIAL LEARNING CLIN
SHEWAN CM, 1984, J COMMUN DISORD, V17, P175, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(84)90010-8
SimmonsMackie NN, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P761, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250455
SKELLY M, 1979, AMERIND GESTURAL COD
SMITH T, 1996, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V4, P257
SPARKS RW, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P287
Stuart S., 1994, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V2, P89
VAUGHN B, 1995, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V11, P89, DOI 10.1080/07434619512331277179
WILLIAMS SE, 1986, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V67, P250
NR 74
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 2
BP 171
EP 200
DI 10.1080/02687040042000133
PG 30
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 402QM
UT WOS:000166999700004
ER
PT J
AU Kulke, F
Blanken, G
AF Kulke, F
Blanken, G
TI Phonological and syntactic influences on semantic misnamings in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPEECH PRODUCTION; LEXICAL ACCESS; LANGUAGE PRODUCTION; SENTENCE
PRODUCTION; NAMING ERRORS; ACTIVATION; KNOWLEDGE; RETRIEVAL; TONGUE;
MODELS
AB Semantic paraphasias from two group studies of picture naming by German aphasic patients were analysed for phonological and syntactic similarities with their targets. Phonological similarity was determined by comparing the targets' phonological form with both the actual semantic paraphasias and the respective semantic competitors (as defined by membership to the targets' semantic fields). Applying this category-sensitive method, the semantic paraphasias were found to be phonologically similar to their targets significantly more often than expected by chance. Syntactic similarity was determined by examining the paraphasias for preservation of the targets' grammatical genders. The number of gender-preserving paraphasias differed significantly from the number expected by chance. Both results are used to discuss the status of semantic paraphasias in current aphasiology and to test predictions derived from psycholinguistic models of language production.
C1 Univ Freiburg, Forsch Grp Neurolinguist, Deutsch Seminar 1, D-79085 Freiburg, Germany.
Otto von Guericke Univ, Magdeburg, Germany.
RP Kulke, F (reprint author), Univ Freiburg, Forsch Grp Neurolinguist, Deutsch Seminar 1, D-79085 Freiburg, Germany.
CR Arnaud PJL, 1999, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V20, P269
Baayen R. H., 1993, CELEX LEXICAL DATABA
BERG T, 1992, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V13, P199, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400005567
BLANKEN G, 1996, NEUROLINGUISTIK, V10, P29
BLANKEN G, IN PRESS SPRACHPRODU
Blanken G, 1998, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V15, P321, DOI 10.1080/026432998381122
BLANKEN G, 2000, BRAIN LANG, V47, P84
BREDART S, 1992, COGNITION, V45, P187, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90017-C
Caramazza A, 1998, COGNITION, V69, P231
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITION, V64, P309, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(97)00031-0
Caramazza A, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P177, DOI 10.1080/026432997381664
DELL GS, 1981, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V20, P611, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(81)90202-4
DELL GS, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P604, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.98.4.604
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
DELVISO S, 1991, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V20, P161
GARRETT MF, 1992, FRAMES FIELDS CONCEP
HARLEY TA, 1993, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V8, P291, DOI 10.1080/01690969308406957
HARLEY TA, 1984, COGNITIVE SCI, V8, P191
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Jescheniak JD, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P1256, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.5.1256
Jescheniak JD, 1997, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V12, P847, DOI 10.1080/016909697386727
KOPKE KM, 1983, Z GERMANISTISCHE LIN, V11, P166
KOPKE KM, 1984, LINGUISTISCHE BERICH, V93, P26
KOPKE KM, 1982, UNTERSUCHUNGEN ZUM G
KULKE F, 1997, NEUROLINGUISTIK, V11, P53
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1991, PSYCHOL REV, V98, P122, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.98.1.122
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
LEVELT WJM, 1983, COGNITION, V14, P41, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90026-4
MANNHAUPT HR, 1984, SPRACHE KOGNIT, V4, P264
MARTIN N, 1989, J MEM LANG, V28, P462, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(89)90022-3
Martin N, 1996, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V11, P257, DOI 10.1080/016909696387187
Marx E, 1999, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V28, P601, DOI 10.1023/A:1023216927241
Miozzo M, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P160, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.1.160
NICKELS L, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P289, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251977
Peterson RR, 1998, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V24, P539, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.24.3.539
NR 36
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 1
BP 3
EP 15
DI 10.1080/02687040042000070
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 393EY
UT WOS:000166457300001
ER
PT J
AU Garcia, LJ
Metthe, L
Paradis, J
Joanette, Y
AF Garcia, LJ
Metthe, L
Paradis, J
Joanette, Y
TI Relevance is in the eye and ear of the beholder: An example from
populations with a neurological impairment
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONVERSATIONAL DISCOURSE; ALZHEIMERS-DISEASE; APHASIA; DEMENTIA;
COMMUNICATION; REPAIR; COMPREHENSION; PRAGMATICS; STRATEGIES; PATTERNS
AB Describing problems of relevance in clinical populations has been a subject of interest for both theoreticians and clinicians. The argument that conversational relevance is a product of listener interpretation is supported in the present paper. Study 1 examines the topic-shifting profiles of a social worker in conversation with normal elderly participants as compared to her profiles in conversation with participants with dementia. Study 2 compares semantic segments in conversations between this same social worker and a normal adult and a traumatically brain-injured adult. Qualitative differences were found in Study 1 in the types of topic shifts used, the possible reasons for these shifts, and the context to which the shifts related. In Study 2, differences were found in the types of relationships between semantic segments and in the relative proportion of implicit and explicit segments. Support is given for considering conversational partners' roles in determining relevance.
C1 Univ Ottawa, Fac Hlth Sci, Sch Rehabil Sci,Inst Hlth & Elderly, Audiol & Speech Language Pathol Program, Ottawa, ON K1N 6N5, Canada.
Ottawa Hosp, Ottawa, ON, Canada.
Univ Montreal, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RP Garcia, LJ (reprint author), Univ Ottawa, Fac Hlth Sci, Sch Rehabil Sci,Inst Hlth & Elderly, Audiol & Speech Language Pathol Program, 545 King Edward, Ottawa, ON K1N 6N5, Canada.
EM lgarcia@uottawa.ca
CR AHLSEN E, 1993, J PRAGMATICS, V19, P57, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(93)90070-6
Bach Kent, 1979, LINGUISTIC COMMUNICA
BERG J, 1991, J PRAGMATICS, V16, P411, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(91)90134-J
Bloom R. L., 1994, DISCOURSE ANAL APPL
Boles L, 1998, J COMMUN DISORD, V31, P261, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(98)00005-7
BYNG S, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P67, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249055
CHAMETZKY R, 1992, J PRAGMATICS, V17, P63, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(92)90029-B
Cherney L. R., 1998, ANAL DISCOURSE COMMU
Clark H., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P19, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406350
COELHO CA, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P409, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248707
Coelho CA, 1991, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V6, P92, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199106000-00011
COLE MG, 1987, PSYCHOSOMATICS, V28, P298
COPELAND M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P301, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249001
Crow B. K., 1983, CONVERSATIONAL COHER, P136
Deser T., 1990, BRAIN LANG, V40, P67
FERGUSON A, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P143, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248647
FEYEREISEN P, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P323, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248533
FOLDI NS, 1983, LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS B, P51
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
FRATTALI CM, 1995, ASHA FUNCTIONAL ASSE
FREDERIKSEN CH, 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE IN NEUROLOGICALLY IMPAIRED AND NORMAL AGING ADULTS, P239
FREDERIKSEN CH, 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P69
Friedland D, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P1
GAJAR A, 1984, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V17, P353, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1984.17-353
Garcia LJ, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1871
GOLDBERG JA, 1983, CONVERSATIONAL COHER
GOODENOUGH DR, 1978, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V1, P395
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
Grice H. P., 1975, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, P41, DOI DOI 10.1017/S0022226700005296
GUILFORD AM, 1982, J COMMUN DISORD, V15, P337, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(82)90001-6
HACHINSKI VC, 1975, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V32, P632
Hathaway SR, 1943, MINNESOTA MULTIPHASI
HOPPER R, 1983, CONVERSATIONAL COHER, P81
Hotz G., 1991, BRIEF TEST HEAD INJU
HUGHES CP, 1982, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V140, P566, DOI 10.1192/bjp.140.6.566
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
Joanette Y., 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
KATZMAN R, 1983, AM J PSYCHIAT, V140, P734
KEENAN Elinor Ochs, 1976, SUBJECT TOPIC, P336
Kertesz A, 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY WA
KINTSCH W, 1978, PSYCHOL REV, V85, P363, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.85.5.363
Lyon J. G., 1998, APPROACHES TREATMENT, P203
LYON JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P696
MACDONALD S, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P28
MANOCHIOPINIG S, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P519, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249489
Mattis S, 1976, GERIATRIC PSYCHIAT
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
METTHE L, 1995, THESIS U OTTAWA
MILROY L, 1992, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V6, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699209208985517
MOESCHLER J, 1991, DIALOGANALYSE 1, V3, P185
MOESCHLER J, 1993, LINGUA, V90, P149, DOI 10.1016/0024-3841(93)90065-5
MURPHY GL, 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR, P28
Nespoulous J, 1992, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL T
Orange JB, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P881
Planalp S., 1980, COMMUNICATION YB, V4, P237
RANDT CT, 1983, RANDT MEMORY TEST AD
REHAK A, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P203, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90125-X
Reichman R., 1978, COGNITIVE SCI, V2, P283, DOI 10.1207/s15516709cog0204_1
REISBERG B, 1982, AM J PSYCHIAT, V139, P9
RIPICH DN, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P330, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90133-L
RIPICH DN, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P8
SANDERS RE, 1983, CONVERSATIONAL COHER, P67
SCHIFFRIN D, 1990, ANNU REV APPL LINGUI, V11, P3
Schuell H, 1965, MINNESOTA TEST DIFFE
SOBIECKAKOSZEL G, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P197, DOI 10.1080/02687039108249482
Sperber D., 1986, RELEVANCE COMMUNICAT
Stroop JR, 1935, J EXP PSYCHOL, V18, P643, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.121.1.15
Stubbs Michael, 1983, DISCOURSE ANAL SOCIO
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Tracy K., 1983, CONVERSATIONAL COHER, P116
ULATOWSKA HK, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P325, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248602
Van Dijk T. A., 1983, STRATEGIES DISCOURSE
VANDIJK TA, 1977, J PRAGMATICS, V1, P211, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(77)90035-2
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
Wechsler D, 1981, WECHSLER ADULT INTEL
WERTH P, 1981, CONVERSATION DISCOUR, P129
WILCOX MJ, 1983, TOP LANG DISORD, V3, P35
WILSON D, 1981, GRICES THEORY CONVER
WULFECK B, 1989, LANG SPEECH, V32, P315
NR 80
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 1
BP 17
EP 38
DI 10.1080/02687040042000089
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 393EY
UT WOS:000166457300002
ER
PT J
AU Varley, R
Whiteside, SP
AF Varley, R
Whiteside, SP
TI What is the underlying impairment in acquired apraxia of speech?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FOREIGN ACCENT SYNDROME; MODELS; APHASIA; ERRORS; FORM
AB Acquired apraxia of speech (AOS) is traditionally viewed as a disorder of speech programming that results from loss or failure to access segmental movement plans, and/or the subsequent assembly of segments to form cohesive syllables. However, more recent psycholinguistic research has proposed that speech control systems are capable of establishing movement plans for frequently used syllables and words. Dual-route theories suggest that movement gestalts are stored for high-frequency words, whereas low-frequency tokens are assembled afresh from sub-lexical components each time they are used. We review the implications of a dual-route model of speech control for output models of lexical processing and for the conceptualisation and management of AOS.
C1 Univ Sheffield, Dept Human Commun Sci, Sheffield S10 2TA, S Yorkshire, England.
RP Varley, R (reprint author), Univ Sheffield, Dept Human Commun Sci, 31 Claremont Crescent, Sheffield S10 2TA, S Yorkshire, England.
CR ALLPORT DA, 1981, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V295, P397, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1981.0148
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P215, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90071-X
Bybee JL, 1994, COGN LINGUIST, V5, P285, DOI 10.1515/cogl.1994.5.4.285
CARAMAZZA A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V18, P128, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90011-1
Chomsky N., 1968, SOUND PATTERN ENGLIS
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
COLTHEART M, 1981, VISIBLE LANG, V15, P245
COLTHEART M, 1993, PSYCHOL REV, V100, P589, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.100.4.589
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DELL GS, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P124, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90070-8
Dronkers NF, 1996, NATURE, V384, P159, DOI 10.1038/384159a0
ELLIS AW, 1983, COGNITION, V15, P111, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90036-7
Fromkin V., 1973, SPEECH ERRORS LINGUI
GRAFFRADFORD NR, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P86, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90093-3
HANKAMER J, 1989, LEXICAL REPRESENTATI
SPARKS R, 1974, Cortex, V10, P303
HOUGH MS, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V15, P271
INGRAM JCL, 1992, J PHONETICS, V20, P457
ITOH M, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH PHYSL
JACKSON JH, 1979, SELECTED WRITINGS JH, V2
Jakobson Roman, 1956, FUNDAMENTALS LANGUAG
JOHNS DF, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P556
KAY J, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P613, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.3.613
Keller E., 1987, MOTOR SENSORY PROCES
KELSO JAS, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V12, P224, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90016-X
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
Kimura D, 1993, NEUROMOTOR MECH HUMA
LAPOINTE LL, 1975, J COMMUN DISORD, V8, P259, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(75)90018-0
Lebrun Y., 1990, J NEUROLINGUIST, V5, P379, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(90)90021-P
LECOURS AR, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P88, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90008-0
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT W, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P39
LEVELT WJM, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90038-J
Luria A. R., 1966, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
MCNEIL MR, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P203
MILLER N, 1999, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
MORRISON CM, 1992, MEM COGNITION, V20, P705, DOI 10.3758/BF03202720
Morton J., 1980, COGNITIVE PROCESSES
Nespoulous JL, 1998, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V19, P311, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400010080
NORMAN D, 1980, CONSCIOUSNESS SELF R
Rosenbek JC, 1985, CLIN MANAGEMENT NEUR
Schmidt R, 1988, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
SHATTUCKHUFNAGEL S, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P213, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90044-I
SHATTUCKHUFNAGE.S, 1979, SENTENCE PROCESSING
Square-Storer P., 1989, ACQUIRED APRAXIA SPE
STEMBERGER JP, 1986, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V18, P329, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(86)90003-4
STEMBERGER JP, 1989, J MEM LANG, V28, P164, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(89)90042-9
TALO ES, 1980, ERRORS LINGUISTIC PE
Van Lancker D, 1987, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, VIII
Varley R, 1999, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V7, P127
Whiteside SP, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P221, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70749-4
ZEIGLER W, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P34
ZEIGLER W, 1993, NEUROLINGUISTIK, V7, P17
ZEIGLER W, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V26, P117
ZWITSERLOOD P, 1989, COGNITION, V32, P25, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(89)90013-9
NR 55
TC 50
Z9 50
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 1
BP 39
EP 49
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 393EY
UT WOS:000166457300003
ER
PT J
AU Ballard, KJ
Barlow, JA
Robin, DA
AF Ballard, KJ
Barlow, JA
Robin, DA
TI The underlying nature of apraxia of speech: A critical evaluation of
Varley and Whiteside's dual route speech encoding hypothesis
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID FOREIGN ACCENT SYNDROME; APHASIA; ERRORS
C1 Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
San Diego State Univ, San Diego, CA 92182 USA.
RP Ballard, KJ (reprint author), Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 200 S Jordan Ave, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
RI Robin, Donald/F-2109-2010; Ballard, Kirrie/F-9558-2011
CR ACKERMANN H, 1993, FORTSCHR NEUROL PSYC, V61, P241, DOI 10.1055/s-2007-999092
Ballard KJ, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P969
Bell-Berti F, 1995, PRODUCING SPEECH CON, P77
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P215, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90071-X
BOYCE SE, 1990, J PHONETICS, V18, P173
Browman C. P., 1995, PRODUCING SPEECH CON, P19
Clark HM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P699, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249567
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
Dogil G., 1998, PHONOLOGY, V15, P143, DOI 10.1017/S095267579800356X
DOGIL G, 1994, 4 S INT CLIN PHOEN L
DWORKIN JP, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P280
EASTON TA, 1972, AM SCI, V60, P591
ELLIS AW, 1996, HUMAN COGNITIE NEURO
Fowler C, 1977, TIMING CONTROL SPEEC
HAGEMAN CF, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P219
Kelso J. A. S., 1995, DYNAMIC PATTERNS SEL
KELSO JAS, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V12, P224, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90016-X
KELSO JAS, 1979, SCIENCE, V203, P1029, DOI 10.1126/science.424729
Kenstowicz Michael, 1994, PHONOLOGY GENERATIVE
Kent R. D., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P181
Kent R. D, 1989, PERSPECTIVES COORDIN, P415
Knock TR, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P653
MACKAY DG, 1972, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V3, P210, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(72)90004-7
MACKAY DG, 1978, SYLLABLES SEGMENTS, P201
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
Robin DA, 1992, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V1, P19
Rochon E, 1990, J NEUROLINGUIST, V5, P237, DOI DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(90)90013-0
ROGERS MA, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V42, P258
Rogers MA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P793
SCHMIDT RA, 1992, PSYCHOL SCI, V3, P207, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1992.tb00029.x
Schmidt RA, 1999, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
SCHMIDT RA, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P225, DOI 10.1037/h0076770
Shattuck-Hufnagel S., 1986, PHONOLOGY YB, V3, P117
SQUARESTORER PA, 1989, ACQUIRED APRAXIA SPE, P145
TAKAYAMA Y, 1993, NEUROLOGY, V43, P1361
Thelen E., 1994, DYNAMIC SYSTEMS APPR
Turvey MT, 1977, PERCEIVING ACTING KN, P211
van der Merwe A, 1997, COMSIG '97 - PROCEEDINGS OF THE 1997 SOUTH AFRICAN SYMPOSIUM ON COMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING, P1
Wambaugh JL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P731, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249569
Wambaugh JL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P725
Wambaugh JL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P821
WAMBAUGH JL, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P231
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
Whiteside SP, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P221, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70749-4
NR 45
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 1
BP 50
EP 58
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 393EY
UT WOS:000166457300004
ER
PT J
AU Croot, K
AF Croot, K
TI Integrating the investigation of apraxic, aphasic and articulatory
disorders in speech production: A move towards sound theory
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
RP Croot, K (reprint author), Macquarie Univ, Macquarie Ctr Cognit Sci, N Ryde, NSW 2109, Australia.
CR BROWMAN CP, 1992, PHONETICA, V49, P155
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
CROOT K, 1999, BRIT APH SOC BIENN I
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
FEY M, 1985, HUMAN COMMUNICATION, V9, P7
Hawkins S., 1992, PAPERS LABORATORY PH, P9
Itoh M., 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH PHYSL, P135
Keller E, 1987, MOTOR SENSORY PROCES, P125
KENT RD, 1997, NEW PHONOLOGIES DEV, P247
LEVELT WJM, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P239, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90030-2
Martin N, 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V14, P641
MCNEIL MR, 2000, APHASIA LANGUAGE THE
MILLER N, 1991, CHARACTERISTICS APHA, P131
Rogers MA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P793
SEIDENBERG MS, 1989, PSYCHOL REV, V96, P523, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.96.4.523
SQUARESTORER PA, 1989, ACQUIRED APRAXIA SPE, P145
van der Merwe A, 1997, COMSIG '97 - PROCEEDINGS OF THE 1997 SOUTH AFRICAN SYMPOSIUM ON COMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING, P1
NR 20
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 1
BP 58
EP 62
PG 5
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 393EY
UT WOS:000166457300005
ER
PT J
AU Miller, N
AF Miller, N
TI Dual or duel route?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SPEECH PRODUCTION; APRAXIA; ACTIVATION; DISORDERS; SPEAKERS; ERRORS;
NEIGHBORHOOD; APHASIA
C1 Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Dept Speech, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
RP Miller, N (reprint author), Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Dept Speech, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
CR Baum SR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P513, DOI 10.1080/026870399401984
Bernstein N., 1967, COORDINATION REGULAT
BERNSTEIN N, 1935, ARCH BIOL SCI, V38
BROWMAN CP, 1992, PHONETICA, V49, P155
BROWMAN CP, 1997, SPEECH PRODUCTION MO
Clark HM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P699, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249567
Coleman J, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P295, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(97)00014-6
Dogil G., 1998, PHONOLOGY, V15, P143, DOI 10.1017/S095267579800356X
FOWLER C, 1985, SPEECH SCI
GOLDINGER S, 1997, TALKER VARIABILITY S
Gordon JK, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P346
HARLEY TA, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P221, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249508
HARLEY TA, 1984, COGNITIVE SCI, V8, P191
HOUGH M, 1996, DISORDERS MOTOR SPEE
HOUGH M, 1998, NEUROMOTOR SPEECH DI
KELSO JAS, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V12, P224, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90016-X
Liss JM, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P342, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1907
Lum C, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V70, P95, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2147
MCNEIL MR, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P135, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90106-Q
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS
MILLER N, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P346
Miller N., 2000, ACQUIRED NEUROGENIC
MULLER RA, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P443, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249484
Rogers MA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P871
Rogers MA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P793
Saffran EM, 1999, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V16, P777, DOI 10.1080/026432999380654
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P52, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1042
Southwood MH, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2046
Strand EA, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P1018
Van Lancker D, 1987, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, VIII
Varley R, 1999, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V7, P127
Vitevitch MS, 1999, J MEM LANG, V40, P374, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1998.2618
WEISMER G, 1995, J PHONETICS, V23, P149, DOI 10.1016/S0095-4470(95)80039-5
WEISMER G, 1991, DYSARTHRIA APRAXIA S
NR 34
TC 3
Z9 3
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 1
BP 62
EP 68
PG 7
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 393EY
UT WOS:000166457300006
ER
PT J
AU Rogers, MA
Spencer, KA
AF Rogers, MA
Spencer, KA
TI Spoken word production without assembly: Is it possible?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APRAXIA; SPEECH
C1 Univ Washington, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Seattle, WA 98105 USA.
RP Rogers, MA (reprint author), Univ Washington, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 1417 NE 42nd St, Seattle, WA 98105 USA.
CR FROMKIN VA, 1971, LANGUAGE, V47, P27, DOI 10.2307/412187
FUJIMURA O, 1978, SYLLABLES SEGMENTS
Hillis A. E., 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P207
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
Rogers MA, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P258
Rogers MA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P793
Schmidt R, 1988, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
Varley R, 1999, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V7, P127
WICKELGR.WA, 1969, PSYCHOL REV, V76, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0026823
NR 10
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 1
BP 68
EP 74
PG 7
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 393EY
UT WOS:000166457300007
ER
PT J
AU Ziegler, W
AF Ziegler, W
TI Apraxia of speech is not a lexical disorder
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID ACCESS
C1 City Hosp Bogenhausen, Munich, Germany.
RP Ziegler, W (reprint author), EKN, Dachauer Str 164, D-80992 Munich, Germany.
CR Jeannerod M., 1997, COGNITIVE NEUROSCIEN
LEVELT W, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
LEVELT WJM, 1994, COGNITION, V50, P239, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(94)90030-2
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
Moore CA, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P1034
MULDER TW, IN PRESS HDB NEUROLO
MUNHALL KG, 1994, J ACOUST SOC AM, V95, P3605, DOI 10.1121/1.409929
NR 7
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 1
BP 74
EP 77
PG 4
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 393EY
UT WOS:000166457300008
ER
PT J
AU Barker-Collo, SL
AF Barker-Collo, SL
TI The 60-item Boston Naming Test: Cultural bias and possible adaptations
for New Zealand
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID NORMATIVE DATA; PERFORMANCE; ADULTS; NORMS
AB This study examined whether a sample of New Zealand university students performed differently on the 60-item Boston Naming Test (BNT) when compared to published North American norms. The BNT was administered to 58 New Zealand university students, and their performance was compared to published data from North America. Mean performance of the sample was significantly worse than published North American norms. In comparing proportion of errors made on BNT items, New Zealanders made 60% more error on the items pretzel and beaver, and 20% more errors on the items globe, funnel, and tripod than did North Americans. In addition, the New Zealand sample made 20% more errors on the item asparagus than North American and Australian samples. Within the New Zealand sample, Maori individuals performed significantly worse than European individuals. Items contributing to this difference included canoe, beaver, and abacus. It was concluded that in administering the BNT to New Zealanders attention should be given to the potential for cultural biases. Adaptations to better reflect New Zealand culture are suggested.
C1 Univ Auckland, Dept Psychol, Auckland, New Zealand.
RP Barker-Collo, SL (reprint author), Univ Auckland, Dept Psychol, Private Bag 92019, Auckland, New Zealand.
CR Barnfield TV, 1998, BRAIN INJURY, V12, P951
Beatty W W, 1989, J Geriatr Psychiatry Neurol, V2, P145, DOI 10.1177/089198878900200305
FARMER A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P293, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249081
HERMEKING H, 1998, MOL CELL, V1, P3
JORDAN F M, 1992, Brain Injury, V6, P39, DOI 10.3109/02699059209008120
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST E
KIM H, 1999, J CLIN EXPT NEUROPSY, V12, P127
KOHN SE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V27, P380
Kohnert KJ, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P422, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2001
LINDMAN KK, 1996, M INT NEUR SOC CHIC
MARGOLIN DI, 1990, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V12, P597, DOI 10.1080/01688639008401004
Ogden JA, 1997, NEW ZEAL J PSYCHOL, V26, P2
POZZEBON M, 1990, MELBOURNE PAPERS APP, V2, P19
SANDSON J, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P715, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90098-8
Spreen O., 1998, COMPENDIUM NEUROPSYC
Tombaugh TN, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P922, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403773
VANGORP W, 1996, J CLIN EXPT NEUROPSY, V8, P702
Welch LW, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P260, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0047
WORRALL LE, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P541, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248713
NR 19
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2001
VL 15
IS 1
BP 85
EP 92
DI 10.1080/02687040042000124
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 393EY
UT WOS:000166457300010
ER
PT J
AU Halliwell, JF
AF Halliwell, JF
TI Korean agrammatic production
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APHASIA
AB This study examines general characteristics of agrammatic production in Korean. Using the methodology found in Menn and Obler (1990b), which provides a consistent format for collecting, analysing, and presenting data, the study provides a description of the patterns of sparing and loss based on four types of narratives from two Korean agrammatic speakers. The subjects were seen to display the general properties associated with clinical descriptions of agrammatism: nonfluent, effortful, and dysprosodic. There was a tendency to substitute verbal inflections and omit nominal morphemes. Additionally, the subjects showed a preference for simple syntactic constructions and for canonical word order. It is concluded that the Korean findings parallel others, in that agrammatic aphasia in Korean involves similar basic production parameters but different language-specific characteristics. The findings are also considered in light of the most current syntactic account, the Tree-pruning Hypothesis (Friedmann & Grodzinsky, 1997).
C1 Michigan State Univ, Dept Linguist & German Slav Asian & African Langu, E Lansing, MI 48824 USA.
RP Halliwell, JF (reprint author), Michigan State Univ, Dept Linguist & German Slav Asian & African Langu, A-614 Wells Hall, E Lansing, MI 48824 USA.
CR AHN SH, 1990, THESIS U CONNECTICUT
Baker M., 1988, INCORPORATION THEORY
CHO DI, 1994, THEORETICAL ISSUES K, P233
Chomsky N., 1995, MINIMALIST PROGRAM
Friedmann N, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P397, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1795
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
GOODGLASS H, 1958, WORD, V14, P197
GRODZINSKY Y, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P135, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90009-X
GRODZINSKY Y, 1997, GENGENP, V5, P1
Grodzinslcy Y., 1990, THEORETICAL PERSPECT
HAGIWARA H, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P92, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1041
HALLIWELL J, 1998, THESIS MICHIGAN STAT
KANG MY, 1988, THESIS MIT
KEAN ML, 1977, COGNITION, V5, P9, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(77)90015-4
KERTESZ A, 1983, W APHASIA BATTERY
KIM SH, 1997, THESIS HONG IK U SEO
LAPOINTE SG, 1983, COGNITION, V14, P1, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90025-2
MENN L, 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C, P13
Menn L., 1995, NONFLUENT APHASIA MU
Menn Lise, 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C
Mimouni Z, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P125, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248460
PICK A, 1913, APHASIA
POLLOCK JY, 1989, LINGUIST INQ, V20, P365
Sohn Ho-min, 1994, KOREAN
NR 24
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 12
BP 1187
EP 1203
DI 10.1080/02687030050205714
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 383UP
UT WOS:000165901700002
ER
PT J
AU Nilipour, R
AF Nilipour, R
TI Agrammatic language: Two cases from Persian
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB The grammar of two right-handed monolingual native speakers of Persian who became aphasic subsequent to left traumatic brain damage is analysed, discussed, and compared with control data. Assessment on the Farsi version of the Bilingual Aphasia Test (Paradis, Paribakht, & Nilipour 1987) and the CLAS I connected speech analysis procedures (Menn & Obler 1990, ch. 2) indicated that the two patients met the clinical picture of Broca's aphasia and showed the general characteristics of agrammatic speech. The data suggest that Persian agrammatism resembles the syndrome in other languages in having severe disruption of the verbs and more reliance on nouns than on verbs. There are language-particular and individual patterns of interest, notably the use of "is'' as a completely general default verb by one subject and the tendency to omit NP-internal conjunctions. The present tense of the verb is also used as a default, in spite of being longer than corresponding past tense forms.
C1 Univ Social Welf & Rehabil Sci, Dept Speech & Language Pathol, Tehran 19834, Iran.
Inst Studies Theoret Phys & Math, Tehran, Iran.
RP Nilipour, R (reprint author), Univ Social Welf & Rehabil Sci, Dept Speech & Language Pathol, Tehran 19834, Iran.
CR BHATNAGAR SC, 1990, AGRAMMATISM CROSS LA, V2, P975
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
JAREMA G, 1990, AGRAMMATISM CROSS LA, V2, P817
KEGL J, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P151, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1044
MENN L, 1990, AGRAMMATISM CROSS LA
Menn L., 1985, AGRAMMATISM, P1
MICELI G, 1990, AGRAMMATIC APHASIA C, V1, P717
NILIPOUR R, 1989, J NEUROLINGUIST, V4, P243, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(89)90016-X
NILIPOUR R, 1989, 22 C IALP P PRAG, V1, P88
NILPOUR R, 1995, ASPECTS BILINGUAL AP, P123
Paradis M., 1987, BILINGUAL APHASIA TE
Tissot R., 1973, AGRAMMATISME
Windfuhr Gernot L., 1987, WORLDS MAJOR LANGUAG, P523
ZEI B, 1990, AGRAMMATISM CROSS LA, V2, P895
NR 14
TC 6
Z9 6
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 12
BP 1205
EP 1242
DI 10.1080/02687030050205723
PG 38
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 383UP
UT WOS:000165901700003
ER
PT J
AU Lafavor, JM
Brundage, SB
AF Lafavor, JM
Brundage, SB
TI Correlation among demographic estimates of intellectual abilities,
performance IQ scores, and verbal IQ scores in non-brain-damaged and
aphasic adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 28th Annual Meeting of the Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 1998
CL ASHEVILLE, NORTH CAROLINA
ID ESTIMATING PREMORBID INTELLIGENCE; WAIS-R; DEMENTIA; INDEX; INFORMATION;
EQUATIONS; UTILITY; SCALE
AB Multiple regression equations based on demographic information are often used to estimate verbal and non-verbal intellectual function in persons with brain damage. Although the use of these equations has been studied with various brain-damaged populations, no studies have focused on a single type of brain damage such as aphasia. We studied the relationship between IQ scores obtained on the Kaufman Brief Intelligence Test (K-BIT), and estimated IQ scores using equations developed by Barona et al. (1984). A total of 20 non-brain-damaged (NBD) adults and 10 aphasic adults participated. For both groups the estimated scores were significantly correlated with K-BIT scores for performance IQ. For the NBD group the estimated scores were significantly correlated with Full Scale IQ but not Verbal IQ. Implications of these findings are discussed.
C1 St Cloud State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, St Cloud, MN 56301 USA.
RP Brundage, SB (reprint author), St Cloud State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, 720 4th Ave S,EB Room A216, St Cloud, MN 56301 USA.
CR AMMONS RB, 1962, PSYCHOL REP, V11, P111
BARONA A, 1984, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V52, P885, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.52.5.885
Blair J. R., 1989, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V3, P129, DOI DOI 10.1080/13854048908403285
BOLTER J, 1982, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V4, P171
BROOKSHIRE R, 1992, INTRO NEUROGENIC COM
CATTELL RB, 1963, J EDUC PSYCHOL, V54, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0046743
CRAWFORD JR, 1988, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V153, P178, DOI 10.1192/bjp.153.2.178
Eisenstein N, 1997, PSYCHOL ASSESSMENT, V9, P57
EPPINGER MG, 1987, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V55, P86, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.55.1.86
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
GOLDSTEIN FC, 1986, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V8, P405, DOI 10.1080/01688638608401330
HILDMAN LK, 1993, J PSYCHOEDUC ASSESS, V11, P98, DOI 10.1177/073428299301100115
KARZMARK P, 1985, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V7, P412, DOI 10.1080/01688638508401273
Kaufman A. S., 1990, KAUFMAN BRIEF INTELL
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KLESGES R E C, 1981, Clinical Neuropsychology, V3, P32
KLESGES R, 1984, INT J CLIN NEUROPSYC, V7, P1
KLESGES RC, 1987, INT J CLIN NEUROPSYC, V9, P1
KLESGES RC, 1981, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V3, P13
LAW JG, 1981, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V52, P919
NELSON HE, 1975, BRIT J SOC CLIN PSYC, V14, P259
NELSON HE, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P234
NELSON HE, 1982, NATL ADULTS READING
OCARROLL RE, 1986, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V25, P157
PAOLO AM, 1992, ARCH CLIN NEUROPSYCH, V7, P135
Paolo AM, 1996, J CLIN PSYCHOL, V52, P335
Raven J. C., 1990, MANUAL RAVENS PROGR
RUSSELL EW, 1972, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V39, P133, DOI 10.1037/h0033212
RYAN JJ, 1992, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V6, P53, DOI 10.1080/13854049208404117
SCHOW R, 1982, EAR HEARING, V3, P134
SWEET JJ, 1990, PSYCHOL ASSESSMENT J, V2, P41
SWIERCINSKY DP, 1977, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V45, P808, DOI 10.1037//0022-006X.45.5.808
VanderLoop SL, 1995, BIOREMED SER, V3, P225
Wechsler D., 1958, MEASUREMENT APPRAISA
Wechsler D, 1997, WECHSLER ADULT INTEL, V3rd
Wechsler D., 1981, MANUAL WECHSLER ADUL
WILSON RS, 1978, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V46, P1554, DOI 10.1037//0022-006X.46.6.1554
WOOLF HB, 1974, MERRIAMWEBSTER DICT
NR 38
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 11
BP 1091
EP 1103
DI 10.1080/02687030050174647
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 369RY
UT WOS:000165081800002
ER
PT J
AU Seddoh, SA
AF Seddoh, SA
TI Basis of intonation disturbance in aphasia: Production
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID UNILATERAL BRAIN-DAMAGE; FUNDAMENTAL-FREQUENCY; RIGHT-HEMISPHERE; BROCAS
APHASIA; AFFECTIVE CONTEXTS; LINGUISTIC STRESS; SPEECH PROSODY;
LANGUAGE; CONTOURS; PERCEPTION
AB The purpose of the present study was to determine if abnormalities in intonation produced by patients with aphasia have their origin in linguistic or nonlinguistic deficit. Components of fundamental frequency (F0) contours that were either linguistically or nonlinguistically determined were examined in utterances produced by patients with fluent and nonfluent aphasia, as well as by a group of normal subjects. While the production of high components of the terminal F0 contours in interrogatives was difficult for both groups of aphasic subjects, in general, their performances on measures in the two categories of F0 components were comparable to the performance of the normal subjects. Discussion focuses on theoretical and methodological aspects of intonation evaluation in the aphasic population.
C1 So Univ, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Baton Rouge, LA 70813 USA.
RP Seddoh, SA (reprint author), So Univ, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, POB 9227, Baton Rouge, LA 70813 USA.
CR 't Hart J., 1975, J PHONETICS, V3, P235
Arvaniti A, 1998, J PHONETICS, V26, P3, DOI 10.1006/jpho.1997.0063
ASHBY MG, 1978, LANG SPEECH, V21, P326
Balan A, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P73, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2035
Baum SR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P581
Baum SR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P31
BAUM SR, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P33, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90003-Y
Baum SR, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P177, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248463
Baum SR, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P30, DOI 10.1006/brln.1999.2047
BEHRENS SJ, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P181, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90014-X
Benton A. L., 1974, REVISED VISUAL RETEN
Benton A. L., 1983, CONTRIBUTIONS NEUROP
BENTON AL, 1989, MULTILINGUA APHASIA
BOLINGER D, 1987, AM SPEECH, V62, P261, DOI 10.2307/454810
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1987, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V1, P113, DOI 10.3109/02699208708985007
Collier R., 1990, PERCEPTUAL STUDY INT
COLLIER R, 1975, J ACOUST SOC AM, V58, P249, DOI 10.1121/1.380654
Cooper W. E., 1981, FUNDAMENTAL FREQUENC
COOPER WE, 1984, LANG SPEECH, V27, P17
Cooper W.E., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P59
COOPER WE, 1979, SPEECH COMMUN, P265
DAMASIO H, 1991, LESION ANAL NEUROPSY
DANLY M, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P171, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90082-7
DANLY M, 1979, SPEECH COMMUN, P259
DANLY M, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90052-4
DUCHAN JF, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V9, P289, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90148-0
EADY SJ, 1986, J ACOUST SOC AM, V80, P402, DOI 10.1121/1.394091
Enderby P. M., 1983, FRENCHAY DYSARTHRIA
Ervin-Tripp Susan, 1974, PAPERS REPORTS CHILD, V8, P188
GANDOUR J, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P275, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90131-W
GANDOUR J, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P232, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90017-5
GANDOUR J, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V35, P201, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90109-5
GANDOUR J, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P177, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90063-4
Gandour J. T., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P45
Gandour J, 1998, APHASIA IN ATYPICAL POPULATIONS, P117
GARDING E, 1965, STUD LINGUISTICA, V19, P61, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9582.1965.tb00527.x
Gelfer C.E., 1983, VOCAL FOLD PHYSL BIO, P113
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GRAFFRADFORD NR, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P86, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90093-3
Grela B, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P151, DOI 10.1080/026870399402253
HADDINGKOCH K, 1964, PHONETICA, V11, P175
HAUSER MD, 1992, J ACOUST SOC AM, V91, P363, DOI 10.1121/1.402779
HWOARD D, 1987, APHASIA THERAPY HIST
JASSEM W, 1975, AUDITORY ANAL PERCEP, P523
Kertesz A., 1979, APHASIA ASS DISORDER
KLOUDA GV, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V35, P154, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90106-X
Ladd D. R., 1983, PROSODY MODELS MEASU, P39
Ladd D. R., 1984, PHONOLOGY YB, V1, P53, DOI DOI 10.1017/S0952675700000294
LADD DR, 1983, LANGUAGE, V59, P721, DOI 10.2307/413371
Ladd DR, 1999, J ACOUST SOC AM, V106, P1543, DOI 10.1121/1.427151
Ladefoged Peter, 1996, ELEMENTS ACOUSTIC PH
Li C. N., 1978, TONE LINGUISTIC SURV, P271
LOEB DF, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P4
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
NAESER MA, 1980, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V18, P389, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(80)90143-8
NAGEL HN, 1994, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V23, P473
Niemi J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P45, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1877
OSHAUGHNESSY D, 1979, J PHONETICS, V7, P119
OHALA JJ, 1973, J ACOUST SOC AM, V53, P345, DOI 10.1121/1.1982441
Osterrieth PA, 1944, ARCH PSYCHOL-GENEVE, V30, P206
PARKER F, 1985, AM SPEECH, V60, P337, DOI 10.2307/454911
Pell MD, 1998, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V36, P701, DOI 10.1016/S0028-3932(98)00008-6
Pell MD, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P80, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1638
Pell MD, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P195, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1736
Perkins JM, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248416
Pierrehumbert J, 1987, PHONOLOGY PHONETICS
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Rey A, 1941, ARCH PSYCHOLOGIE, V28, P286
ROSE P, 1987, SPEECH COMMUN, V6, P343, DOI 10.1016/0167-6393(87)90009-4
ROSS E, 1992, Neurology, V42, P411
ROSS ED, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P561
Ross ED, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P27, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1731
RUSSELL EW, 1975, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V43, P800, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.43.6.800
RYALLS JH, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P107, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248897
RYALLS JH, 1984, PHONETICA, V41, P103
RYALLS JH, 1982, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V20, P355, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(82)90110-5
Seddoh S. A. K., 1999, J ACOUSTICAL SOC A 2, V106, P2246, DOI 10.1121/1.427663
Seddoh SAK, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P590
SEDDOH SAK, 1997, P INT C COGN SCI ICC, P21
SHAPIRO BE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P19, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90118-X
SHAPIRO LP, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P240, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1047
SMITH BL, 1994, J ACOUST SOC AM, V96, P699, DOI 10.1121/1.410308
Snow D, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P576
So LKH, 1995, J CHILD LANG, V22, P473
Sorensen J.M., 1980, PERCEPTION PRODUCTIO, P399
SUNDBERG J, 1979, J PHONETICS, V7, P71
TAFF A, 1998, J ACOUST SOC AM, V103, P2889, DOI 10.1121/1.421800
t'Hart J., 1973, J PHONETICS, V1, P309
TONKOVAYAMPOLSK.RV, 1973, STUDIES CHILD LANGUA, P128
Vaissiere Jacqueline, 1983, PROSODY MODELS MEASU, P53
VANLANCKER D, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P963
WEINTRAUB S, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P742
Xu Y, 1998, PHONETICA, V55, P179, DOI 10.1159/000028432
NR 93
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 11
BP 1105
EP 1126
DI 10.1080/02687030050174656
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 369RY
UT WOS:000165081800003
ER
PT J
AU Vanhalle, C
Lemieux, S
Joubert, S
Goulet, P
Ska, B
Joanette, Y
AF Vanhalle, C
Lemieux, S
Joubert, S
Goulet, P
Ska, B
Joanette, Y
TI Processing of speech acts by right hemisphere brain-damaged patients: An
ecological approach
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APPRECIATION; REQUESTS
AB Four non-ecological studies (Heeschen and Reisches 1979, Hirst et al. 1984, Foldi 1987, Weylman et al. 1989) have shown that a lesion to the right hemisphere can cause deficits in the processing of indirect speech acts. The authors have suggested that an alternative interpretation based on contextual elements could underlie this difficulty. The purpose of this study was to verify whether subjects who suffer a right hemisphere lesion have as much difficulty interpreting context and speech acts in a natural communicative situation as in a non-natural or pseudo-natural situation. A group of 28 subjects (14 RHD subjects and 14 normal controls) were given three tasks, which represented three different communicative situations: natural, non-natural, and pseudo-natural. The results show that RHD subjects process speech acts as efficiently as controls when they occur in a natural or pseudo-natural situation. However, they process direct and indirect speech acts significantly worse than controls in a non-natural communicative context. These results suggest that the natural character of the situation is crucial to this type of study. The ecological validity of previous studies is questioned, and it is suggested that the types of tasks formerly used do not measure the processing of speech acts per se, but rather the ability to judge the plausibility of a statement expressing an indirect speech act based on the naturalness of the contextual elements.
C1 Inst Univ Geriatrie Montreal, Ctr Rech, Montreal, PQ H3W 1W5, Canada.
Univ Montreal, Fac Med, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
Ctr Readaptat Lucie Bruneau, Programme PIC, Montreal, PQ, Canada.
RP Joanette, Y (reprint author), Inst Univ Geriatrie Montreal, Ctr Rech, 4565 Queen Mary Rd, Montreal, PQ H3W 1W5, Canada.
CR Austin J., 1962, DO THINGS WORDS
Blum-Kulka Shoshana, 1989, CROSS CULTURAL PRAGM
Code C., 1987, LANGUAGE APHASIA RIG
FOLDI NS, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P88, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90062-9
FOLDI NS, 1983, LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS B, P51
Gardner H., 1983, COGNITIVE PROCESSING, P169
HEESCHEN C, 1979, ABILITY BRAIN DAMAGE
HIRST W, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P26, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90003-8
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
KLONOFF H, 1966, J GERONTOL, V21, P239
Levinson Stephen C., 1983, PRAGMATICS
PICARD C, 1993, THESIS U MONTREAL CA
Searle J., 1969, SPEECH ACTS ESSAY PH
STEMMER B, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1040
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
WEYLMAN ST, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P580, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90087-4
NR 16
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD NOV
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 11
BP 1127
EP 1141
DI 10.1080/02687030050174665
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 369RY
UT WOS:000165081800004
ER
PT J
AU Kemmerer, D
AF Kemmerer, D
TI Grammatically relevant and grammatically irrelevant features of verb
meaning can be independently impaired
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID RETRIEVAL; APHASIA; TRANSITIVITY; CONSTRUCTION; ACQUISITION; COMPLEXITY;
DEFICITS; BROCAS
AB According to the 'grammatically relevant semantic subsystem' hypothesis proposed by Pinker (1989), the meanings of verbs contain two different types of information: (1) a restricted set of semantic features that are visible to grammar and that influence the syntactic argument structure possibilities of verbs; and (2) an open-ended set of idiosyncratic perceptual and conceptual features that are not visible to grammar and that enable verbs to encode all kinds of subtle distinctions involving manner of motion, change of state, and so forth. If these two components of verb meaning reside at different levels of mental representation, as the hypothesis maintains, then it is possible that they could be independently disrupted by brain damage. This paper reports a series of experiments that confirmed this prediction.
Three brain-damaged subjects exhibited different performance profiles on two tests that evaluated their knowledge of grammatically relevant and grammatically irrelevant components of verb meaning. 1978JB and 1962RR performed well, but 2011SS performed poorly, on a word-picture matching test that required them to discriminate between verb triplets that differed only with respect to subtle, grammatically irrelevant perceptual and conceptual features-e.g., spill-pour-sprinkle. In contrast, 1978JB and 1962RR performed poorly, but 2011SS performed well, on a second test that required them to judge the grammaticality of sentences containing the very same verbs-e.g., Sam spilled beer on his pants vs. *Sam spilled his pants wi th beer. Linguistic analyses have shown that the grammaticality of these sentences depends on the compatibility between certain semantic features of the verbs and the inherent semantic content of the grammatical constructions. Finally, all of the subjects performed well on a third test that required them to judge the grammaticality of sentences that have purely syntactic violations. Taken together, these results suggest that 1978JB and 1962RR have a disorder that selectively involves the level of grammatically relevant semantic structure, whereas 2011SS has a disorder that selectively involves grammatically irrelevant aspects of verb meaning. This study therefore supports the hypothesis that grammatically relevant and grammatically irrelevant components of verb meaning are segregated in the mind/ brain.
C1 Univ Iowa Hosp & Clin, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
RP Kemmerer, D (reprint author), Purdue Univ, Dept Audiol & Speech Sci, 1353 Heavilon Hall, W Lafayette, IN 47907 USA.
CR Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Bickerton Derek, 1981, ROOTS LANGUAGE
BLEYVROMAN R, 1992, 1 ESL U HAW
Breedin SD, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1923
Breedin SD, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V69, P264
BREEDIN SD, 1984, COGNITIE NEUROPSYCHO, V1, P617
Breedin SD, 1996, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V13, P51, DOI 10.1080/026432996382060
Brinkmann U, 1997, LOCATIVE ALTERNATION
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
Caplan D, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P184, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1930
Cowart W., 1997, EXPT SYNTAX
DAMASIO H, 1992, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V49, P137
DAMASIO H, 1989, LEISON ANAL NEUROPSY
Damasio H, 1995, HUMAN BRAIN ANATOMY
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Frawley W., 1992, LINGUISTIC SEMANTICS
Goldberg A., 1995, CONSTRUCTIONS
GROPEN J, 1991, J CHILD LANG, V18, P115
Gropen J., 1991, COGNITION, V41, P143
GROPEN J, 1989, LANGUAGE, V65, P203, DOI 10.2307/415332
Jackendoff R, 1997, LANGUAGE, V73, P534, DOI 10.2307/415883
Jackendoff Ray, 1997, ARCHITECTURE LANGUAG
Jonkers R, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P33
Jonkers R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P245, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249453
Jonkers R, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P37
Kay P, 1999, LANGUAGE, V75, P1, DOI 10.2307/417472
Kay P., 1997, WORDS GRAMMAR CONTEX
KAY P, UNPUB CONSTRUCTION G
KEMMERER D, IN PRESS BRAIN LANGU
KEMMERER D, IN PRESS LANGUAGE CO
Langacker R. W., 1991, FDN COGNITIVE GRAMMA, VII
LEVIN B, 1991, LEXICAL CONCEPTUAL S, P123
LEVIN B, 1995, UNACOUSATIVITY
Levin Beth, 1993, ENGLISH VERB CLASSES
Marshall J, 1996, J NEUROLINGUIST, V9, P251, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(97)82797-2
Michaelis LA, 1996, LANGUAGE, V72, P215, DOI 10.2307/416650
Mohanan T., 1999, GRAMMATICAL SEMANTIC
Pinker S., 1984, LANGUAGE LEARNABILIT
Pinker Steven, 1989, LEARNABILITY COGNITI
Rappaport Hovrav M., 1998, PROJECTION ARGUMENTS, P97
Rosen ST, 1996, LINGUISTICS, V34, P191, DOI 10.1515/ling.1996.34.2.191
Shibatani Masayoshi, 1996, GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUC
Slobin, 1985, CROSSLINGUISTIC STUD, V2, P1157
SLOBIN DI, 1997, CROSSLINGUISTIC STUD, V0005
Talmy L, 1985, LANGUAGE TYPOLOGY SY, V3, P56
Talmy L., 1983, SPATIAL ORIENTATION, P225, DOI DOI 10.1007/978-1-4615-9325-6_11
Talmy L, 1991, P 17 ANN M BERK LING, P480
Talmy Leonard, 2000, COGNITIVE SEMANTICS
Talmy Leonard, 1988, TOPICS COGNITIVE LIN, P165
Thompson CK, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P473, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248485
Tomasello Michael, 1998, NEW PSYCHOL LANGUAGE
Tranel D, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A, P81
Van Valin Jr Robert D., 1997, SYNTAX STRUCTURE MEA
VERSPOOR M, 1997, LEXICAL SYNTACTICAL
WIERZBICKA A., 1988, SEMANTICS GRAMMAR
NR 55
TC 29
Z9 29
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 10
BP 997
EP 1020
DI 10.1080/02687030050156584
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 364RM
UT WOS:000089906800002
ER
PT J
AU Lu, CC
Bates, E
Li, P
Tzeng, O
Hung, D
Tsai, CH
Lee, S
Chung, YM
AF Lu, CC
Bates, E
Li, P
Tzeng, O
Hung, D
Tsai, CH
Lee, S
Chung, YM
TI Judgements of grammaticality in aphasia: The special case of Chinese
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE INTERPRETATION; AGRAMMATIC APHASICS; WORD ORDER; COMPREHENSION;
TIME; SENSITIVITY; JUDGMENTS; LANGUAGE; ONLINE; NORMALS
AB Theories of agrammatism have been challenged by the discovery that agrammatic patients can make above-chance judgements of grammaticality. Chinese poses an interesting test of this phenomenon, because its grammar is so austere, with few obligatory features. An on-line grammaticality judgement task was conducted with normal and aphasic speakers of Chinese, using the small set of constructions that do permit judgements of grammaticality in this language. Broca's and Wernicke's aphasics showed similar patterns, with above-chance discrimination between grammatical and ungrammatical forms, suggesting once again that Broca's aphasics are not unique in the degree of sparing or impairment that they show in receptive grammar. However, even for young normals, false-negative rates were high. We conclude that there is some sensitivity to grammatical well-formedness in Chinese aphasics, but the effect is fragile for aphasics and probabilistic for normals, reflecting the peculiar status of grammaticality in this language.
C1 Univ Calif San Diego, Ctr Res Language 0526, La Jolla, CA 92093 USA.
Natl Hsinchu Teachers Coll, Hsinchu, Taiwan.
Univ Richmond, Richmond, VA 23173 USA.
Natl Yang Ming Univ, Taipei 112, Taiwan.
Vet Gen Hosp, Taipei, Taiwan.
RP Bates, E (reprint author), Univ Calif San Diego, Ctr Res Language 0526, La Jolla, CA 92093 USA.
EM bates@crl.ucsd.edu
RI Lu, Ching-ching/F-7042-2010
CR BATES E, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P111, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248981
Bates E., 1991, BRAIN LANGUAGE, V41
Bates E, 1996, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V58, P992, DOI 10.3758/BF03206827
BATES E, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P123, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90149-U
BATES E, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P545
Bates E, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P104
BATES EA, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P323, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90072-7
BAYNES K, 1988, LANGUAGE COMMUNICATI
Blackwell A, 1996, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V11, P337, DOI 10.1080/016909696387150
BLACKWELL A, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P228, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.2.228
Blumstein SE, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P335, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1796
Bradley D. C., 1980, BIOL STUDIES MENTAL
Caplan D., 1987, NEUROLINGUISTICS LIN
CARAMAZZA A, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P572, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90048-1
Chao Yuen Ren, 1968, GRAMMAR SPOKEN CHINE
Chen Chung-yu, 1978, J CHINESE LINGUISTIC, V6, P76
COHEN J, 1993, BEHAV RES METH INSTR, V25, P257, DOI 10.3758/BF03204507
Devescovi A, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P543, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248490
Dick F, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P57
FEDERMEIER KD, 1997, CTR RES LANGUAGE NEW, V11
FRIEDERICI AD, 1985, COGNITION, V19, P133, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(85)90016-2
GARRETT M, 1992, COGNITION, V42, P143, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(92)90042-G
Goodglass H., 1993, UNDERSTANDING APHASI
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
GRODZINSKY Y, IN PRESS BEHAV BRAIN
GRODZINSKY Y, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P299, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1047
Grodzinslcy Y., 1990, THEORETICAL PERSPECT
HAARMANN HJ, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P493, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1028
HAGOORT P, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P189, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1043
HEILMAN KM, 1976, CORTEX, V12, P258
HICKOK G, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P371, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1051
HUANG CTJ, 1984, LINGUIST INQ, V15, P531
HUBER W, 1990, 28 ANN M AC APH BALT
JAREMA G, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P683, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1037
Levelt W., 1972, LINGUISTISCHE BERICH, V17, P18
Levelt W. J. M., 1974, FORMAL GRAMMARS LING, VIII
LEVELT WJM, 1977, ACCETABILITY LANGUAG
Levelt WJM, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P1
Li C. N., 1981, MANDARIN CHINESE FUN
Li P, 1998, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, V31, P33, DOI 10.1108/S0092-4563(1998)0000031005
LI P, 1993, J MEM LANG, V32, P169, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1993.1010
Li P., 1990, THESIS LEIDEN U NETH
Li P, 1996, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V58, P571, DOI 10.3758/BF03213091
LI SE, 1994, EVALUATION LANGUAGE, P285
LINEBARGER MC, 1983, COGNITION, V13, P361, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90015-X
LIU H, 1992, P 14 ANN C COGN SCI
LIU H, 1996, THESIS U CALIFORNIA
LIU H, 1992, APPL PSYCHOLINGUIST, V13, P451, DOI 10.1017/S0142716400005762
LIU S, 1999, UNPUB HEMISPHERIC SE
LU JM, 1980, ZHONGGUO YUWEN, V1, P28
MAUNER G, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P340, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1050
MENN L, 1990, GRAMMATIC APHASIA CR
MILBERG W, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P33, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.1.33
Newmeyer F. J., 1980, LINGUISTIC THEORY AM
OSTRIN RK, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P147, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1040
PLAUT DC, 1995, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V17, P291, DOI 10.1080/01688639508405124
PRATHER P, 1991, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V20, P271, DOI 10.1007/BF01067219
SHANKWEILER D, 1989, Language and Cognitive Processes, V4, P1, DOI 10.1080/01690968908406355
Shengshu Ding, 1961, XIANDAI HANYU YUFA J
SMYTH RH, 1986, COGNITIVE ASPECTS AN
VONSTOCKERT TR, 1976, CORTEX, V12, P49
WANG L, 1957, ZHONGGUO XIANDAI YUF
WILBERTZ A, 1991, STUD VIS INFORM PROC, V2, P353
WULFECK BB, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V31, P72
WULFECK B, 1991, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V3, P258, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1991.3.3.258
WULFECK B, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P311, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90158-W
ZURIF E, 1983, COGNITION, V15, P207, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90041-0
ZURIF E, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P448, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1054
ZURIF E, 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, P261
NR 69
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 10
BP 1021
EP 1054
PG 34
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 364RM
UT WOS:000089906800003
ER
PT J
AU Baum, SR
Leonard, CL
AF Baum, SR
Leonard, CL
TI The role of sound and spelling in auditory word recognition: Further
evidence from brain-damaged patients
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LEXICAL ACCESS; APHASIA
AB This follow-up investigation explored the effects of phonological and orthographic relatedness on auditory lexical access in left- and right-hemisphere-damaged individuals. Participants listened to prime-target pairs that shared word-initial phonology (e.g., definite-deaf), initial orthography (e.g., logic-log), both initial phonology and orthography (e.g., message-mess), or were unrelated (e.g., castle-green), presented at two different inter-stimulus intervals. All groups of subjects demonstrated facilitation of lexical decision latencies due to the combined influence of both orthography and phonology, confirming earlier findings concerning rime relations. The findings are briefly discussed in relation to the neural representation of formal lexical codes.
C1 McGill Univ, Sch Commun Sci & Disorders, Montreal, PQ H3G 1A8, Canada.
RP Baum, SR (reprint author), McGill Univ, Sch Commun Sci & Disorders, 1266 Pine Ave W, Montreal, PQ H3G 1A8, Canada.
CR Baum SR, 1999, CORTEX, V35, P647, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70825-6
Baum SR, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1829
Burton M. W., 1993, 34 ANN M PSYCH SOC W
Caplan D., 1992, LANGUAGE STRUCTURE P
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
GORDON JK, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P661, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1062
Hagoort P, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P287, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1849
JAKIMIK J, 1985, J MEM LANG, V24, P165, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(85)90022-1
Leonard CL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P1031, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249425
MANSLENWILSON W, 1989, LEXICAL REPRESENTATI
MERTUS J, 1989, BLISS USERS MANUAL
MILBERG W, 1988, B PSYCHONOMIC SOC, V26, P305
MILBERG W, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P33, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.1.33
MILBERG W, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P279, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90139-3
Prather PA, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P391, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1751
ZECKER SG, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P372, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90055-6
NR 17
TC 1
Z9 1
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD OCT
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 10
BP 1055
EP 1063
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 364RM
UT WOS:000089906800004
ER
PT J
AU Nagaratnam, N
Nagaratnam, K
AF Nagaratnam, N
Nagaratnam, K
TI Acute mixed transcortical aphasia with bihemispheric neurological
deficits following diffuse cerebral dysfunction
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID TRANSHEMISPHERIC DIASCHISIS; UNILATERAL STROKE; SENSORY APHASIA; VISUAL
GUIDANCE; INFARCTION; HAND; COMPREHENSION; MOVEMENTS; SPEECH; ATAXIA
AB A 78 year old man presented with acute mixed transcortical aphasia with intact naming and bilateral involvement of the motor systems following a left internal carotid artery stenosis. The CT scan showed hypodense areas in the border zones of the left hemisphere together with diffuse areas of ischaemia. Intact repetition the hallmark of transcortical aphasias and the exceptional preserved naming in this patient support the earlier findings that the contralateral hemisphere could mediate some aspects of language function. The patient also had bilateral motor abnormalities which could be explained on the occipito-parietal lesion. It is suggested that widespread hypofunction of the left hemisphere following cerebral ischaemia could give rise to bihemispheric neurological deficits which could be short lived and could possibly be attributed to bilateral cerebral blood flow changes that may occur with the hemispheric lesion.
C1 Blacktown Hosp, Blacktown, NSW, Australia.
Westmead Hosp, Westmead, NSW 2145, Australia.
RP Nagaratnam, N (reprint author), Blacktown Hosp, Blacktown, NSW, Australia.
CR ANDREWS RJ, 1991, STROKE, V22, P943
BERTHIER ML, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P431, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248708
BERTHIER ML, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1409, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.3.1409
Bogousslavsky J, 1988, BRAIN, V11, P631
DAMASIO AR, 1979, NEUROLOGY, V29, P170
DOBKIN JA, 1989, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V46, P1333
Fujii T, 1997, EUR NEUROL, V37, P193, DOI 10.1159/000117436
GESCHWIN.N, 1968, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V6, P327, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(68)90005-5
Goodglass H, 1972, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R
HAAXMA R, 1975, BRAIN, V98, P239, DOI 10.1093/brain/98.2.239
HEILMAN KM, 1981, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V38, P236
HEILMAN KM, 1976, BRAIN, V99, P415, DOI 10.1093/brain/99.3.415
KAPUR N, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P134, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90012-9
Kremin H, 1986, J NEUROLINGUIST, V2, P131, DOI DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(86)80008-2
LAPLANE D, 1977, J NEUROL SCI, V34, P301, DOI 10.1016/0022-510X(77)90148-4
MCFARLING D, 1982, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V45, P107, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.45.2.107
MCNABB AW, 1988, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V51, P218, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.51.2.218
METTER EJ, 1981, ANN NEUROL, V10, P173, DOI 10.1002/ana.410100208
Nagaratnam N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P489, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249550
Nagaratnam N, 1999, NEUROCASE, V5, P441
Nagaratnam N, 1998, J NEUROL SCI, V155, P204, DOI 10.1016/S0022-510X(97)00301-8
NAGARATNAM N, 1996, J NEUROLOGIC REHABIL, V10, P253
RAPCSAK SZ, 1990, STROKE, V21, P953
RONDOT P, 1977, BRAIN, V100, P355, DOI 10.1093/brain/100.2.355
ROSS ED, 1980, NEUROLOGY, V30, P144
RUBENS AB, 1983, LOCALIZATION NEUROPS, P245
SHIBASAKI H, 1993, BRAIN, V116, P1387, DOI 10.1093/brain/116.6.1387
SILVERI MC, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V49, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1019
Silvestrini M, 1998, STROKE, V29, P1305
NR 29
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 9
BP 893
EP 899
PG 7
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 351ZJ
UT WOS:000089189800002
ER
PT J
AU Raymer, AM
Maher, LM
Foundas, AL
Rothi, LJG
Heilman, KM
AF Raymer, AM
Maher, LM
Foundas, AL
Rothi, LJG
Heilman, KM
TI Analysis of lexical recovery in an individual with acute anomia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 28th Annual Meeting of the Clinical Aphasiology Conference
CY JUN, 1998
CL ASHEVILLE, NORTH CAROLINA
ID LANGUAGE RECOVERY; APHASIA; STROKE; SPEECH; COMPREHENSION; NONFLUENCY;
EVOLUTION; PATTERNS; FLUENCY; ERRORS
AB Observing recovery of cognitive functions may provide converging evidence about the organization of systems that mediate cognitive functions. We analyzed recovery of lexical abilities in a patient, HH, with an acute onset of anomic aphasia following a cerebral infarction confined to the left temporo-occipital junction (area 37). His initial assessment, described in detail elsewhere (Raymer et al. 1997a), indicated a cross-modal anomia arising at a stage in lexical processing at which semantic information accesses phonological and orthographic lexical mechanisms for speech and writing. We also documented reading and spelling impairments that we attributed to developmental deficits. We now report our patient's follow-up testing at 6 and 15 months post-stroke. Recovery testing demonstrated significant improvements in task performance across recovery phases: word retrieval in naming and spelling tasks recovered in the earlier recovery phase and reading improved at the later testing. Word frequency effects varied across observations. Over time, error patterns evolved from off-target and semantically related responses towards correct responses. The parallel recovery patterns in oral and written naming support our proposal that a common impairment was responsible for the cross-modal anomia. In contrast, recovery of reading and spelling skills contradicts our hypothesis that these problems were developmental in origin.
C1 Old Dominion Univ, Ctr Child Study, Dept ESSE, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
Georgia State Univ, Atlanta, GA 30303 USA.
Tulane Univ, New Orleans, LA 70118 USA.
VAMC, Gainesville, FL USA.
Univ Florida, Gainesville, FL USA.
RP Raymer, AM (reprint author), Old Dominion Univ, Ctr Child Study, Dept ESSE, Norfolk, VA 23529 USA.
CR Basso A, 1996, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V18, P77, DOI 10.1080/01688639608408264
Buchel C, 1998, NATURE, V394, P274, DOI 10.1038/28389
Cappa SF, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P55, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1737
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
CRARY MA, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P67, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248888
Ellis A. W., 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
GAINOTTI G, 1993, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V28, P227
KERTESZ A, 1977, BRAIN, V100, P1, DOI 10.1093/brain/100.1.1
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KNOPMAN DS, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P1461
KNOPMAN DS, 1983, NEUROLOGY, V33, P1170
Kohn SE, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P129, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0007
Laiacona M, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P441, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70229-6
LOMAS J, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V5, P388, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90034-2
Martin N, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P3, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0002
MICELI G, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P57
MITCHUM CC, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P261, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249079
NAESER MA, 1989, BRAIN, V112, P1, DOI 10.1093/brain/112.1.1
NAESER MA, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P73
NAESER MA, 1994, J CLIN NEUROPHYSIOL, V11, P150, DOI 10.1097/00004691-199403000-00002
NICKELS L, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P1281, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(95)00102-9
PASHEK GV, 1988, CORTEX, V24, P411
PIENIADZ JM, 1983, CORTEX, V19, P371
Raymer AM, 1997, NEUROCASE, V3, P173, DOI 10.1080/13554799708404052
RAYMER AM, 1990, UNPUB FLORIDAY SEMAN
Raymer AM, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P137, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1786
Rothi L J, 1991, Clin Commun Disord, V1, P7
SANDS E, 1969, Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, V50, P202
SARNO MT, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P607
Vandenberghe R, 1996, NATURE, V383, P254, DOI 10.1038/383254a0
NR 31
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 9
BP 901
EP 910
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 351ZJ
UT WOS:000089189800003
ER
PT J
AU Worrall, L
Yiu, E
AF Worrall, L
Yiu, E
TI Effectiveness of functional communication therapy by volunteers for
people with aphasia following stroke
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID RANDOMIZED CONTROLLED TRIALS; EFFICACY; SF-36; METAANALYSIS; OUTCOMES;
QUALITY
AB The aim of this study was to develop and evaluate a scripted modular intervention programme called Speaking Out. Speaking Out is administered by trained volunteers in the home and focuses on the everyday communicative activities of aphasic stroke patients. The experimental design used repeated measures to examine the effect of counterbalanced treatments across individual subjects and across two matched groups.
One group improved significantly on the Western Aphasia Battery (WAB) after the Speaking Out programme but there were no significant differences on any of the functional communication measures. Some change to health status scales was however found. There was a significant difference on both the WAB and the ASHA Functional Assessment of Communication Skills (ASHA FACS) for the other group following the Speaking Out programme. They also demonstrated some positive changes on the health status scales following the programme. There were more significant differences on intragroup comparisons than intergroup comparisons. For group 2, the ASHA FACS and the SF-36 showed significant differences between the Speaking Out programme and the recreational programme or no treatment at all. It was concluded that long standing aphasic speakers may benefit from a 10 week functional communication therapy programme delivered by trained volunteers.
C1 Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
Univ Hong Kong, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, Peoples R China.
RP Worrall, L (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RI Yiu, Edwin/A-3201-2010; Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR ATEN JL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P93
BRAZIER JE, 1992, BRIT MED J, V305, P160
CAMPBELL DT, 1977, EXPT QUASIEXPERIMENT
Emerson J, 1995, DOES SPEECH LANGUAGE
FITZGIBBON CT, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P117
Frattali C M, 1993, Disabil Rehabil, V15, P1
FRATTALI CM, 1995, ASHA FUNCTIONAL ASSE
HENDERSON A, 1993, THESIS U QUEENSLAND
HILL S, 1993, BRIT MED J, V307, P449
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
Holland AL, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, pS27
HOWARD D, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P89
JENKINSON C, 1994, QUAL LIFE RES, V3, P7, DOI 10.1007/BF00647843
JOHANSEN A, 1993, BRIT MED J, V307, P127
Kagan A., 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P199
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LALOR E, 1997, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V2, P195
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
MCHORNEY CA, 1994, MED CARE, V32, P551, DOI 10.1097/00005650-199406000-00002
*MED OUTC TRUST, 1994, SF36 MED OUTC TRUST
Parr S, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P469, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248426
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
PRING TR, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P103
Robey RR, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P172
SINGLETON N, 1993, BRIT MED J, V307, P126
SMITH L, 1986, B COLLEGE SPEECH THE, V409, P10
WERTZ RT, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V24, P580
*WHO, 1997, ICIDH 2 INT CLASSIFI
WHURR R, 1992, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V27, P1
WILSON IB, 1995, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V273, P59, DOI 10.1001/jama.273.1.59
World Health Organization, 1980, INT CLASS IMP DIS HA
Worrall L., 1999, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
Worrall L., 2000, NEUROGENIC COMMUNICA
WORRALL LE, 1990, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V18, P53
NR 34
TC 22
Z9 22
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 9
BP 911
EP 924
PG 14
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 351ZJ
UT WOS:000089189800004
ER
PT J
AU Del Toro, JF
AF Del Toro, JF
TI An examination of automatic versus strategic semantic priming effects in
Broca's aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LEXICAL-DECISION TASK; WORD RECOGNITION; SPREADING ACTIVATION;
TIME-COURSE; ACCESS; CONTEXT; INFORMATION; AMBIGUITIES; ATTENTION;
SENTENCE
AB This experiment examined the nature of automatic versus strategic priming effects in Broca's aphasia. Broca's aphasics, age-matched controls, and young controls participated in a visual pairwise lexical decision task in a 250 SOA condition. A neutral priming condition was included to measure the contribution of facilitatory and inhibitory influences to the overall priming effect. Unlike the young normal controls, the age-matched controls and the Broca's aphasics displayed inhibitory priming effects, indicating the use of strategic processing in this short SOA condition. The results suggest that automatic lexical processing is reduced in Broca's aphasia, and perhaps declines with normal ageing as well. Furthermore, they support the hypothesis that subjects will resort to the use of conscious strategies in the lexical decision task, even in short SOA conditions, if unable to process the stimuli automatically.
C1 Louisiana State Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Baton Rouge, LA 70803 USA.
RP Del Toro, JF (reprint author), Louisiana State Univ, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 163 Mus & Dramat Arts Bldg, Baton Rouge, LA 70803 USA.
CR BALOTA DA, 1988, PSYCHOL AGING, V3, P84, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.3.1.84
BALOTA DA, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V18, P485, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.18.2.485
BATTIG WF, 1969, J EXP PSYCHOL, V80, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0027577
BECKER CA, 1977, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V3, P389, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.3.3.389
BECKER CA, 1980, MEM COGNITION, V8, P493, DOI 10.3758/BF03213769
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P301, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90023-2
BURKE DM, 1984, DEV PSYCHOL, V20, P903, DOI 10.1037//0012-1649.20.5.903
Bushell CM, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V55, P264, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0104
CERELLA J, 1994, ACTA PSYCHOL, V86, P109, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(94)90002-7
CHENERY HJ, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P215, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90112-T
DEGROOT AMB, 1984, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V36, P253
DENHEYER K, 1983, MEM COGNITION, V11, P374
FORSTER KI, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P465
FORSTER KI, 1976, NEW APPROACHES LANGU, P259
GOODGLASS H, 1976, BRAIN LANG, V3, P359, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(76)90032-8
GROBER E, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P318, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90059-0
HAGOORT P, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P335, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90070-9
HAGOORT P, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V38, P215
Hagoort P, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P287, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1849
HOWARD DV, 1986, J GERONTOL, V41, P195
KATZ WF, 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V26, P747, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(88)90011-5
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Kucera H., 1967, COMPUTATIONAL ANAL P
MADDEN DJ, 1993, PSYCHOL AGING, V8, P490, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.8.4.490
Maxwell SE, 1990, DESIGNING EXPT ANAL
MILBERG W, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P138, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90065-4
MILBERG W, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P33, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.1.33
MILBERG W, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P371, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90086-9
Neely J. H., 1991, BASIC PROCESSES READ, P264
NEELY JH, 1977, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V106, P226, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.106.3.226
NEELY JH, 1989, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V15, P1003, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.15.6.1003
OSTRIN RK, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P147, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1040
Posner M. I., 1975, ATTENTION PERFORM, V5, P669
Posner M. I., 1975, INFORMATION PROCESSI, P55
PRATHER P, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P336, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90134-Z
Prather PA, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P391, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1751
SCHVANEVELDT R, 1977, CHILD DEV, V48, P612
SHELTON JR, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V18, P1191, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.18.6.1191
Small S. I., 1988, LEXICAL AMBIGUITY RE, P289
STANOVICH KE, 1981, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V7, P658
SWINNEY D, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V50, P225, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1046
Swinney D, 1989, J Cogn Neurosci, V1, P25, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1989.1.1.25
TYLER LK, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P131, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1007
WEST RF, 1982, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V8, P385, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.8.5.385
ZURIF EB, 1974, BRAIN LANG, V1, P167, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(74)90032-7
NR 45
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 9
BP 925
EP 947
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 351ZJ
UT WOS:000089189800005
ER
PT J
AU Bell, EE
Chenery, HJ
Ingram, JCL
AF Bell, EE
Chenery, HJ
Ingram, JCL
TI Strategy-based semantic priming in Alzheimer's dementia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LEXICAL DECISION; WORD RECOGNITION; SPREADING ACTIVATION; SENILE
DEMENTIA; OLDER ADULTS; DISEASE; MEMORY; FACILITATION; RETRIEVAL;
ATTENTION
AB The ability to engage semantic search strategies was assessed in a group of patients with dementia of the Alzheimer's type (DAT) (n = 11) and a group of age-matched control subjects (n = 13). The subjects performed a semantic priming task in which attentional priming was induced by manipulating the expected relationship between the primes and targets. Older control subjects were able to predict target words on the basis of expectancy, regardless of the semantic relationship between the prime and target. The DAT patients were also able to predict targets on the basis of expectancy, but only when the prime and target were semantically related. These results suggest that the structure of semantic memory remains intact in DAT, and that semantic memory retrieval may be facilitated by providing DAT patients with appropriate search strategies.
C1 Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Ctr Res Language Proc & Linguist, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
Univ Queensland, Dept English, St Lucia, Qld 4067, Australia.
RP Chenery, HJ (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Ctr Res Language Proc & Linguist, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RI Chenery, Helen/F-5194-2010
CR BALOTA DA, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P181, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90124-J
BALOTA DA, 1992, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V18, P485, DOI 10.1037/0096-1523.18.2.485
Battig W. F., 1969, J EXP PSYCHOL, V80, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0027577
Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
BOWLES NL, 1985, J GERONTOL, V40, P71
BURKE DM, 1987, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V13, P79, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.13.1.79
BUSCHKE H, 1984, J CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V6, P433, DOI 10.1080/01688638408401233
Carroll J. B., 1971, AM HERITAGE WORD FRE
CASEY PJ, 1988, AUST J PSYCHOL, V40, P323, DOI 10.1080/00049538808260053
CERELLA J, 1984, DEV PSYCHOL, V20, P235, DOI 10.1037//0012-1649.20.2.235
CHENERY HJ, 1994, BRAIN COGNITION, V25, P108, DOI 10.1006/brcg.1994.1026
Chenery HJ, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P1, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248396
CHERTKOW H, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P420, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90078-3
CHERTKOW H, 1994, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V16, P608, DOI 10.1080/01688639408402672
CHIARELLO C, 1985, J GERONTOL, V40, P593
COLLINS AM, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P407, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.82.6.407
DEGROOT AMB, 1984, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V36, P253
DEGROOT AMB, 1982, MEM COGNITION, V10, P358
DIESFELDT HFA, 1984, ARCH GERONTOL GERIAT, V3, P51, DOI 10.1016/0167-4943(84)90014-1
Ergis AM, 1998, CORTEX, V34, P357, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(08)70760-3
Gold M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P374, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1750
HARTMAN M, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P213, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(91)90083-K
HERLITZ A, 1991, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V13, P559, DOI 10.1080/01688639108401071
HUTTENLOCHER J, 1983, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V9, P486, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.9.3.486
JONIDES J, 1984, PSYCHOL BULL, V96, P29, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.96.1.29
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Knight RG, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V10, P96
Martin A., 1992, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MEMO, P220
McDonald C, 1996, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V18, P793, DOI 10.1080/01688639608408303
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
MEYER DE, 1971, J EXP PSYCHOL, V90, P226
NEBES RD, 1984, J ABNORM PSYCHOL, V93, P321, DOI 10.1037/0021-843X.93.3.321
NEBES RD, 1989, PSYCHOL BULL, V106, P377, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.106.3.377
Neely J. H., 1991, BASIC PROCESSES READ, P264
NEELY JH, 1977, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V106, P226, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.106.3.226
Neely JH, 1989, PSYCHOL LEARN MOTIV, V24, P207
Ober BA, 1995, AGE DIFFERENCES WORD, P247, DOI 10.1016/S0166-4115(06)80074-9
OBER BA, 1991, PSYCHOL AGING, V6, P647, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.6.4.647
Posner M. I., 1975, INFORMATION PROCESSI, P55
RAPP B, 1993, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V10, P113, DOI 10.1080/02643299308253458
SALMON DP, 1992, MEMORY FUNCTIONING D, P99
SEIDENBERG MS, 1984, MEM COGNITION, V12, P315, DOI 10.3758/BF03198291
Shenaut GK, 1996, PSYCHOL AGING, V11, P443, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.11.3.443
Silveri MC, 1996, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V18, P371, DOI 10.1080/01688639608408994
SPICER KB, 1994, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V16, P457, DOI 10.1080/01688639408402656
Tabachnick B.G., 1996, USING MULTIVARIATE S, V2nd
NR 46
TC 5
Z9 5
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 9
BP 949
EP 965
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 351ZJ
UT WOS:000089189800006
ER
PT J
AU Bartha, L
Knosp, E
Pfisterer, W
Benke, T
AF Bartha, L
Knosp, E
Pfisterer, W
Benke, T
TI Intra- and perioperative monitoring of language functions in patients
with tumours in the left perisylvian area
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID INTRAOPERATIVE STIMULATION; PREOPERATIVE ACTIVATION; GLIOMA; APHASIA;
LESIONS; SURGERY; SITES
AB Resections of brain tumours in the left perisylvian area (LPA) carry a risk of language impairment. Thus, intraoperative language monitoring devices are used to explore the functional anatomy of the LPA and to detect beginning aphasia. Following recent approaches (Reulen et al. 1997, Herholz et al. 1997), the present study explored a combined monitoring procedure in 5 right-handed patients who were operated on brain tumours in and adjacent to the LPA. In addition, language and verbal memory was assessed pre- and postoperatively. Preoperatively, no patient was aphasic; however, most subjects showed minor impairments of language and memory. During the operation, which was performed in the wakeful patient, language functions were repeatedly tested using both, a clinical monitoring and an extended electrocortical mapping procedure. The extent of tumour resection (total or subtotal) was adapted to the patient's intraoperative language status. Following these safety procedures, the outcome of surgery was generally favourable. Only one patient suffered an aphasia intraoperatively from which she recovered completely; in the other subjects sporadical and minor impairments of language were observed which largely recovered over a period of several weeks. In subjects who had a preoperative deficit of immediate and long-term prose memory, an improvement of memory was evident on postoperative follow-up testing. Language functions can be effectively monitored using clinical tasks and electrocortical mapping during the removal of rumours in the LPA.
C1 Univ Innsbruck, Neurol Klin, A-6020 Innsbruck, Austria.
SMZO, Dept Neurosurg, Vienna, Austria.
RP Benke, T (reprint author), Univ Innsbruck, Neurol Klin, Anichstr 35, A-6020 Innsbruck, Austria.
EM thomas.benke@uibk.ac.at
RI Bartha-Doering, Lisa/I-3150-2013
CR ALEXANDER MP, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P961, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.4.961
ANDERSON SW, 1990, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V47, P397
ARCHIBALD YM, 1994, J NEUROSURG, V80, P247, DOI 10.3171/jns.1994.80.2.0247
Bakay RAE, 1997, NEUROSURGERY, V41, P1260
BURNSTINE TH, 1990, NEUROLOGY, V40, P966
CABANTOG AM, 1994, CAN J NEUROL SCI, V21, P213
Cabeza R, 1997, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V9, P1, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1997.9.1.1
CROSSON B, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P257, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90085-9
DAMASIO AR, 1992, NEW ENGL J MED, V326, P531, DOI 10.1056/NEJM199202203260806
Damasio H., 1989, LESION ANAL NEUROPSY
FADUL C, 1988, NEUROLOGY, V38, P1374
HAGLUND MM, 1994, NEUROSURGERY, V34, P567
Herholz K, 1997, NEUROSURGERY, V41, P1253, DOI 10.1097/00006123-199712000-00004
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KARTUSH JM, 1992, NEUROMONITORING OTOL
Reulen HJ, 1997, NERVENARZT, V68, P813, DOI 10.1007/s001150050199
Schaffler L, 1996, EPILEPSIA, V37, P463, DOI 10.1111/j.1528-1157.1996.tb00593.x
Scheibel RS, 1996, J NEURO-ONCOL, V30, P61
Skirboll SS, 1996, NEUROSURGERY, V38, P678
STEINMETZ H, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P1149, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(91)90030-C
WALLESCH CW, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P357, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90090-2
NR 22
TC 2
Z9 2
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 8
BP 779
EP 793
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 344MK
UT WOS:000088762900001
ER
PT J
AU McCall, D
Shelton, JR
Weinrich, M
Cox, D
AF McCall, D
Shelton, JR
Weinrich, M
Cox, D
TI The utility of computerized visual communication for improving natural
language in chronic global aphasia: Implications for approaches to
treatment in global aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE PROCESSING DEFICITS; REHABILITATION; THERAPY; RECOVERY; SKILLS;
SYNTAX; SYSTEM
AB A computerized communication system (C-VIC) was employed as a diagnostic and therapeutic tool to identify propositional language abilities in a chronic, globally aphasic patient. The patient demonstrated the ability to construct sentences during training according to abstract syntax-like rules by manipulating iconic symbols representing nouns and verbs. Further, he produced correct symbolic order to express the thematic relationships in sentences. The effect of C-VIC as a therapeutic intervention to improve the patient's natural language abilities was examined using pre- and post-training assessments. Improvements specific to training were observed but neither improvements in natural language nor generalization to production of multiple sentences using C-VIC was found. The results are discussed with regard to current debates concerning treatment approaches and the use of augmentative communication devices for globally aphasic patients.
C1 Univ Maryland, Dept Neurol & Rehabil, Baltimore, MD 21201 USA.
RP McCall, D (reprint author), Kernan Hosp, 2200 N Forest Pk Ave, Baltimore, MD 21207 USA.
CR Aftonomos LB, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P841, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90197-0
BAKER B, 1982, BYTE, P186
BAKER B, 1986, BYTE, P160
BAKER EH, 1975, NATURE, V254, P609
BASSO A, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P190
Beck A. R., 1998, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V14, P184, DOI 10.1080/07434619812331278356
BERNDT RS, 1991, ACQUIRED APHASIA
Beukelman D., 1988, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V4, P104, DOI 10.1080/07434618812331274687
Beukelman D., 1985, COMMUNICATION AUGMEN
BOCK JK, 1982, PSYCHOL REV, V89, P1, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.89.1.1
BRUCE C, 1987, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V22, P191
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
CARLOMAGNO S, 1988, APHASIA TODAY
CARLOMAGNO S, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P419, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248544
COCHRANE RM, 1984, NEUROLOGICAL COMMUNI, V1, P4
Conlon C., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P185
Crerar MA, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P229, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0010
Davis G, 1985, ADULT APHASIA REHABI
Denes G, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P385, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248418
EDELMAN G, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P75, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248813
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
FUNNELL E, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P279, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248995
GARDNER H, 1976, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V14, P275, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(76)90023-3
Garrett M., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1, P177
GOODENOUGHTREPAGNIER C, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248208
GOODENOUGHTREPA.CX, 1990, P 1990 C IEEE ENG ME, V12, P1313
Goodglass H., 1983, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP, V2nd
JONES EV, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P63
KAGAN A, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P831
Katz RC, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P493
KEENAN JS, 1974, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V39, P257
KRAAT AW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249086
KREMIN H, 1989, J CLIN EXPT NEUROPSY, V11, P132
LOVERSO FI, 1994, CLIN APHASIOLOGY P
MARSHALL J, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P177, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249505
Marshall R. C., 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P59, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248812
Marshall R. C., 1997, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V6, P5
MARSHALL RC, 1982, FOLIA PHONIATR, V35, P305
MARSHALL RC, 1994, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
MCCALL D, 1994, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V2, P303
MITCHUM CC, 1994, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V1, P14
MITCHUM CC, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P71, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249500
PARSONS CL, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P81, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248814
PEACH RK, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P429
ROBERTSON I, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249090
SARNO MT, 1969, MONOGRAPH NEW YORK U, V42
SARNO MT, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V13, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90124-3
Schuell H, 1964, APHASIA ADULTS
Shelton JR, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P319, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248415
SHELTON JR, 1998, UNPUB SENTENCE PRODU
STEELE RD, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P185, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248590
STEELE RD, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90048-1
TAYLOR M L, 1965, Arch Phys Med Rehabil, V46, P101
THOMPSON CK, 1992, APHASIA THERAPY CURR, P117
WEINRICH M, 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P158
WEINRICH M, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P21, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1031
WEINRICH M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P501, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249018
WEINRICH M, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P343, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248209
Weinrich M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P327, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1759
WEINRICH M, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V48, P1
WEINRICH M, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P391, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90075-8
WEINRICH M, 1989, AC APH ANN M BALT MD
Wertz R. T., 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P87, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248815
NR 63
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 8
BP 795
EP 826
PG 32
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 344MK
UT WOS:000088762900002
ER
PT J
AU Jensen, LR
AF Jensen, LR
TI Canonical structure without access to verbs?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SENTENCE PROCESSING DEFICITS; WORD ORDER; THERAPY; RETRIEVAL; APHASIA;
AGRAMMATISM; NOUNS; ORGANIZATION; IMPAIRMENT
AB Agrammatic sentence production in aphasia has been connected to disturbances of verbs and the role played by verbs in determining the structural expression of thematic roles assumed by other words in the sentence. Apparently contradictory data are presented from an aphasic patient, who had difficulties in retrieving verbs in spite of a relatively well preserved use of canonical structure in written sentence production, where he frequently left a blank or dash between agent and theme to signal that a word was missing. A therapy study is reported where the focus was on differentiating verb meanings and integrating verbs in sentence production. After therapy the patient showed significant improvement in verb production, but only for trained items. He also showed a significant increase in use of canonical sentence structure on trials with trained, but not untrained verbs. It is suggested that the patient was relying on a general schema for canonical sentence structure which may interact with verb-specific knowledge in normal processing.
C1 Univ Copenhagen, Dept Gen & Appl Linguist, DK-2300 Copenhagen, Denmark.
RP Jensen, LR (reprint author), Univ Copenhagen, Dept Gen & Appl Linguist, Njalsgade 80, DK-2300 Copenhagen, Denmark.
CR BATES E, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P203, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90153-R
BATES EA, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P323, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90072-7
Berndt RS, 1997, CORTEX, V33, P99
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Bock J. K., 1987, PROGR PSYCHOL LANGUA, V3, P337
Bock Kathryn, 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC, P945
BRAINE MDS, 1995, BEYOND NAMES THINGS, P353
BYNG S, 1988, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V5, P629, DOI 10.1080/02643298808253277
BYNG S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P315, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248663
CARAMAZZA A, 1991, NATURE, V349, P788, DOI 10.1038/349788a0
Garrett M., 1980, LANGUAGE PRODUCTION, V1, P177
Goldberg AE, 1998, NEW PSYCHOLOGY OF LANGUAGE, P203
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Goodglass H., 1993, UNDERSTANDING APHASI
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HUTTENLOCHER J, 1979, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V18, P141, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(79)90091-4
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
LEVELT JM, 1989, SPEAKING INTENTION A
MARSHALL J, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P177, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249505
Marshall J, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P855, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250461
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
MARSHALL J, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P517, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248712
MCCARTHY R, 1985, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V23, P709, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(85)90079-X
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
Mitchum C., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P317
MITCHUM CC, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P71, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249500
NICKELS L, 1991, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V26, P175
Oswald W. D., 1997, Z DIFFERENTIELLE DIA, V18, P87
SAFFRAN EM, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P263, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90056-5
Schwartz M. F., 1987, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V2, P85, DOI 10.1080/01690968708406352
SCHWARTZ MF, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P19, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248639
Siegel S., 1988, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
Stark J., 1992, EVERYDAY LIFE ACTIVI
Stark J., 1995, EVERYDAY LIFE ACTIVI
TOMASELLO M, 1998, NEW PSYCHOLOGY LANGU, P7
Tomasello M., 1992, 1 VERBS CASE STUDY E
WECHSLER D, 1981, W AIS R MANUAL
ZINGESER LB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P14, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90002-X
NR 39
TC 12
Z9 12
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 8
BP 827
EP 850
DI 10.1080/026870300412223
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 344MK
UT WOS:000088762900003
ER
PT J
AU Wambaugh, JL
Martinez, AL
AF Wambaugh, JL
Martinez, AL
TI Effects of rate and rhythm control treatment on consonant production
accuracy in apraxia of speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID MELODIC INTONATION THERAPY; TIME PERCEPTION; MECHANISMS; APHASIA
AB A speaker with apraxia of speech and aphasia was trained to produce multisyllabic words using a combination of metronomic rate control and hand-tapping. A multiple baseline design was used to examine the effects of treatment on sound production. Treatment was applied to three syllable words with primary stress on the first syllable while generalization was measured to: (1) untrained exemplars; (2) three syllable words with different stress patterns; (3) four syllable words; and (4) s-blend words. Positive sound changes were noted for trained and untrained words. Treatment was extended to a second set of words to which generalization had been incomplete and additional improvement was observed.
C1 Univ Utah, Dept CMDIS, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
VAMC, Salt Lake City, UT USA.
RP Wambaugh, JL (reprint author), Univ Utah, Dept CMDIS, 1201 Behav Sci Bldg,1530 E 390 S, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
CR ALBERT ML, 1973, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V29, P130
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DWORKIN JP, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P280
DWORKIN JP, 1996, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V4, P105
FROMM D, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V10, P155
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Graco V.L., 1990, CEREBRAL CONTROL SPE, P3
Hardcastle W. J., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P113
HELM NA, 1979, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V44, P350
ITOH M, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P66, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90110-8
*KAY EL CORP, 1994, COMP SPEECH LAB
KEELE SW, 1985, ACTA PSYCHOL, V60, P173, DOI 10.1016/0001-6918(85)90054-X
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
NAESER MA, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P203
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
ROGERS MA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY
RUBOW RT, 1982, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V63, P150
Rybak IA, 1997, J NEUROPHYSIOL, V77, P2007
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SHANE HC, 1978, CORTEX, V14, P444
Simmons N. N., 1978, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P174
SMITH A, 1990, J NEUROPHYSIOL, V63, P645
Southwood H, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P277
Sparks R. W., 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P368
Square P. A., 1997, APRAXIA NEUROPSYCHOL, P173
SQUARE PA, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P467
TREISMAN M, 1992, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V45, P235
TREISMAN M, 1994, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V47, P241
WAMBAUGH JL, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P231
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
Yorkston K. M., 1981, ASSESSMENT INTELLIGI
NR 35
TC 17
Z9 17
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD AUG
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 8
BP 851
EP 871
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 344MK
UT WOS:000088762900004
ER
PT J
AU Miller, N
Willmes, K
De Bleser, R
AF Miller, N
Willmes, K
De Bleser, R
TI The psychometric properties of the English language version of the
Aachen Aphasia Test (EAAT)
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB This article reports results of a standardization study of the English language version of the Aachen aphasia test (EAAT). The EAAT was administered to 135 speakers with and 93 without aphasia. Aphasic speakers were divided into four groups (n = 30) representing EAAT standard syndrome groups (global, amnestic, Broca's and Wernicke's aphasia), and 15 speakers who could not be classified into the standard groups. Without aphasia were 24 nonhospitalized and 41 hospitalized speakers with no history of neurological illness or speech-language disorder and 28 speakers with a history of neurological illness, but no aphasia. Hierarchical cluster analysis (complete linkage) demonstrated the validity of the linguistically motivated construction of the EATT. This was further confirmed for the main subtests through nonmetric multidimensional scaling (smallest space analysis). The property of increasing complexity across subparts of subtests was also confirmed. Nonparametric discriminant analyses showed the high differential validity of the EAAT for distinguishing between aphasia-no aphasia and acceptably high validity for separating out subgroups of speakers. Consistency coefficients (Cronbach's alpha) illustrate the high to very high internal consistency of the subtests. We argue for the applicability to the EAAT of the original German reliability studies which showed retest and inter- and intra-rater reliability to be high. We conclude that the EAAT amply meets criterion levels for a psychometrically robust test.
C1 Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Dept Speech, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
Rhein Westfal TH Aachen, Dept Neurol Neuropsychol, D-5100 Aachen, Germany.
Univ Potsdam, Dept Patholinguist, Potsdam, Germany.
RP Miller, N (reprint author), Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Dept Speech, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
CR *AERA APA NCME, 1985, STAND ED PSYCH TEST
Borg I, 1987, MULTIDIMENSIONAL SIM
CRARY MA, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P29, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248575
Davis A, 1993, SURVEY ADULT APHASIA
DEJONGE I, 1996, STEM SPRAAK TAALPATH, V5, P89
DERENZI E, 1962, BRAIN, V85, P665, DOI 10.1093/brain/85.4.665
Edgington E. S., 1995, RANDOMIZATION TESTS
Goodglass H., 1972, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP
Graetz P, 1991, LOGOPEDIE FONIATRIE, V63, P58
GRAETZ P, 1992, AKENSE AFASIE TEST N
HABBEMA J, 1974, COMPSTAT 14974
HEMRANS J, 1982, MANUAL ALLOC80 DISCR
HITTMAIRDELAZER M, 1994, J NEUROLINGUIST, V8, P27
Huber W, 1984, Adv Neurol, V42, P291
Huber W, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P245, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90028-9
Huber W., 1983, AACHENER APHASIE TES
KRIPPEND.K, 1970, EDUC PSYCHOL MEAS, V30, P61, DOI 10.1177/001316447003000105
LINCOLN N, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P501, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248956
LINEBAUGH C, 1979, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
Lingoes J.C., 1973, GUTTMAN LINGOES NONM
Luzzatti C., 1991, AACHENER APHASIE TES
MARTIN AD, 1977, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V42, P547
NICHOLAS LE, 1986, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V51, P82
Orgass B., 1986, TOKEN TEST
PETRONDAS DA, 1983, J AM STAT ASSOC, V78, P949, DOI 10.2307/2288209
POECK K, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V20, P79, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90034-2
POECK K, 1975, AKTUELLE NEUROLOGIE, V2, P159
POECK K, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P471
Pracharitpukdee Nantana, 1998, Journal of the Medical Association of Thailand, V81, P402
PRACHRITPUKDEE N, J MED ASS THAILAND
Shye S., 1985, MULTIPLE SCALING
SKENES LL, 1985, J COMMUN DISORD, V18, P461, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(85)90033-4
SPREEN O, 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA
STEIGER O, 1978, THEORY CONSTRUCTION
WENIGER D, 1981, NERVENARZT, V52, P209
Westfall P. H., 1993, RESAMPLING BASED MUL
WILLMES K, 1985, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V7, P331, DOI 10.1080/01688638508401268
WILLMES K, 1987, THESIS U TRIER GERMA
WILLMES K, 1993, LINGUISTIC DISORDERS
NR 39
TC 29
Z9 30
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 7
BP 683
EP 722
PG 40
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 340AQ
UT WOS:000088511300001
ER
PT J
AU Arkin, SM
Rose, C
Hopper, T
AF Arkin, SM
Rose, C
Hopper, T
TI Implicit and explicit learning gains in Alzheimer's patients: Effects of
naming and information retrieval training
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SEMANTIC MEMORY; DISEASE; DISSOCIATION; DEMENTIA
AB The purpose of this study was to examine the effects of repeated exposure to words from a target category on implicit and explicit learning of seven mild to moderate Alzheimer's patients. Following 18-20 baseline fluency tests on the target category, subjects participated in eight sessions of a picture naming exercise and related quiz (study task) which exposed them to 33 words from the target category (exposure words). One hour after each study task session, the fluency test used at baseline was administered again (experimental fluency test). All subjects increased correct responses on the study task, demonstrating significant explicit learning. Six subjects produced exposure words on the experimental fluency tests that they had never named during the multiple baseline tests and all subjects unexpectedly named novel words (not exposure words and not produced at baseline) on the experimental fluency tests. Taken together, these results provide evidence of implicit and explicit learning and semantic activation. Implications for management and direction for future research are discussed.
C1 Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
Univ Arizona, Dept Physiol Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
Univ Arizona, Natl Ctr Neurogen Commun Disorders, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Arkin, SM (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
CR ARKIN S, 1999, INT NEUR SOC C JUN 2
ARKIN S, 1997, AM J ALZHEIMERS DIS, V12, P147, DOI 10.1177/153331759701200402
ARKIN S, IN PRESS AM J ALZHEI, V15
ARKIN S, 1994, 3 INT PRACT ASP MEM
Arkin Sharon M., 1992, Clinical Gerontologist, V12, P77
Arkin S. M., 1998, AM J ALZHEIMERS DIS, V13, P102, DOI 10.1177/153331759801300209
Arkin SM, 1999, GERONTOLOGIST, V39, P729
Arkin SM, 1996, AM J ALZHEIMERS DIS, V11, P12, DOI 10.1177/153331759601100103
BOURGEOIS MS, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P1344
BUB D, 1993, 31 ANN M AC APH OCT
BUTTERS N, 1987, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V9, P479, DOI 10.1080/01688638708410764
Camphuysen C.J., 1995, Sula, V9, P1
COLLINS AM, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P407, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.82.6.407
CUTCHER K, 1996, THESISI U ARIZONA
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Gonnerman LM, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V57, P254, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1752
HUFF FJ, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V28, P235, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90103-3
Becker S, 1997, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V23, P1059, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.23.5.1059
KERR JYK, 1988, PHOTO CUE CARDS
KERR JYK, 1994, MORE PHOTO CUE CARDS
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
MOLLOY DW, 1995, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI
Morris J. C., 1989, NEUROLOGY, V39, P159
MORRIS JC, 1993, NEUROLOGY, V43, P2457
MORRIS JC, MEMORY DIAGNOSTIC CT
Nebes R D, 1986, Psychol Aging, V1, P261, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.1.3.261
NEBES RD, 1984, J ABNORM PSYCHOL, V93, P321, DOI 10.1037/0021-843X.93.3.321
Roediger III H.L., 1993, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V8, P63
ROSENBERRY T L, 1980, Neurochemistry International, V2, P135, DOI 10.1016/0197-0186(80)90020-0
Rybash JM, 1996, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V12, P127
SALMON DP, 1988, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V10, P477, DOI 10.1080/01688638808408254
SALMON DP, 1995, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI
SCHACTER DL, 1987, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V13, P501, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.13.3.501
SCHACTER DL, 1992, AM PSYCHOL, V47, P559, DOI 10.1037//0003-066X.47.4.559
SILVERI MC, 1991, NEUROLOGY, V41, P545
Spreen O., 1991, COMPENDIUM NEUROPSYC
WARRINGTON EK, 1984, BRAIN, V107, P829, DOI 10.1093/brain/107.3.829
NR 38
TC 13
Z9 14
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 7
BP 723
EP 742
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 340AQ
UT WOS:000088511300002
ER
PT J
AU Ardila, A
Concha, M
Rosselli, M
AF Ardila, A
Concha, M
Rosselli, M
TI Angular gyrus syndrome revisited: Acalculia, finger agnosia, right-left
disorientation and semantic aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID GERSTMANN-SYNDROME
AB Angular gyrus (Gerstmann) syndrome is classically described as linger agnosia, right-left disorientation, agraphia and acalculia in association to lesions in the left angular gyrus. Aphasia is not typically described as part of this syndrome. Here we report a 58 year old right-handed male, with an ischemic lesion to the left angular gyrus, who developed sudden loss of speech expression and comprehension, and slowly recovered over the following few weeks. After several months he showed significant improvement on his language skills with only mild word-finding difficulties, but with substantial difficulties in understanding logic-grammatical relationships, comparison adverbs (e.g. bigger-smaller, younger-older etc., place adverbs (e.g. over-below, on-beneath etc, and time adverbs (e.g. before-after). These language deficits are compatible with a semantic aphasia. Writing difficulties are minimal. In addition, he has important impairments in finger agnosia, right-left discrimination, and in understanding numbers, using numerical concepts, and performing arithmetical operations. We propose that left angular gyrus syndrome should be restated to include acalculia, finger agnosia, right left disorientation and semantic aphasia. A single underlying deficit can account for the simultaneous presentation of these lour clinical signs.
C1 Inst Colombiano Neuropsicol, Bogota, Colombia.
Univ Miami, Dept Neurol, Miami, FL 33152 USA.
Florida Atlantic Univ, Davie, FL USA.
RP Ardila, A (reprint author), 12230 NW 8 St, Miami, FL 33182 USA.
CR ARDILA A, 1990, BEHAVIORAL NEUROLOGY, V3, P39
Ardila A., 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL E
Ardila A., 1989, BRAIN ORG LANGUAGE C, P177
ARDILA A, 1993, BEHAV NEUROL, V6, P89, DOI 10.3233/BEN-1993-6204
Benson D. F., 1985, HDB CLIN NEUROLOGY, V45, P457
Benson D F, 1972, Cortex, V8, P465
Benson D. F., 1996, APHASIA CLIN PERSPEC
Benson DF, 1979, APHASIA ALEXIA AGRAP
BENTON AL, 1992, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V49, P445
BENTON AL, 1977, BRAIN LANG, V4, P45, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(77)90005-0
Berger H., 1926, ARCH PSYCHIAT NERVEN, V78, P236
BOLES DB, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P59, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(91)90094-O
Botez M., 1985, HDB CLIN NEUROLOGY C, P63
Brown J. W., 1972, APHASIA APRAXIA AGNO
Cauty A., 1984, AMERINDIA, V9, P111
Conrad K., 1932, MONTSCHRIFT PSYCHIAT, V34, P11
CRITCHLEY M, 1953, PARTIAL LOBE
DAHMEN W, 1982, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V20, P145, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(82)90004-5
De Renzi E, 1982, DISORDERS SPACE EXPL
DERENZI E, 1970, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V23, P221
DEHAENE S, 1991, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V29, P1045, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(91)90076-K
Dehaene S., 1997, NUMBER SENSE
Frederiks J. A. M., 1985, HDB CLIN NEUROLOGY, V45, P373
Garcia-Albea JE, 1986, EVALUACION AFASIA TR, P129
Gerstmann J, 1940, ARCH NEURO PSYCHIATR, V44, P398
GOLD M, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P267
GOLDSTEIN K, 1948, LANGUAGE LANGUAGE DI
Grafman J., 1988, HDB NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V1, P415
Harvey S. L., 1993, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P91
Head H., 1926, APHASIA KINDRED DISO
HECAEN H., 1961, REV NEUROL [PARIS], V105, P85
Hecaen H., 1978, HUMAN NEUROPSYCHOLOG
Henschen SE, 1925, ARCH NEURO PSYCHIATR, V13, P226
HIER DB, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V10, P120, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90043-7
Hitch G., 1987, COGNITIVE PROCESS, P26
HITTMAIRDELAZER M, 1994, BRAIN, V117, P715, DOI 10.1093/brain/117.4.715
Kertesz A., 1979, APHASIA ASS DISORDER
LeDoux J. E., 1984, RIGHT HEMISPHERE NEU, P51
LEDOUX JE, 1982, BRAIN BEHAV EVOLUT, V20, P197
Levy-Bruhl L., 1910, FUNCIONES MENTALES S
LEZAK MD, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL A
LRING DW, 1999, INS DICT NEUROPSYCHO
Luria A. R., 1966, HIGHER CORTICAL FUNC
Luria A. R., 1973, THE WORKING BRAIN
Luria A. R., 1976, BASIC PROBLEMS NEURO
LYNCH JC, 1980, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V3, P485
MAZZONI M, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P459
MORRIS HH, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P877
Poeck K., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P421
Ratcliff G., 1979, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V13, P191
Rey A, 1941, ARCH PSYCHOLOGIE, V28, P286
REY GJ, 1991, EXAMEN AFASIA MULTIL
ROELTGEN DP, 1983, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V40, P46
ROSSELLI M, 1998, NEUROBASE
ROSSELLI M, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P607, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90107-3
Rosselli M., 1997, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, P353
Schilder P, 1931, ARCH NEURO PSYCHIATR, V25, P598
Strub R, 1983, LOCALIZATION NEUROPS, P295
Tucha O, 1997, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V63, P399, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.63.3.399
Varney N. R., 1984, CORTEX, V10, P378
WECHSLER D, 1974, W AIS R MANUAL
Zucker K., 1934, BRAIN, V57, P60
NR 62
TC 21
Z9 21
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 7
BP 743
EP 754
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 340AQ
UT WOS:000088511300003
ER
PT J
AU Bruce, C
Howard, D
Gatehouse, C
AF Bruce, C
Howard, D
Gatehouse, C
TI Why should recovery be a cause for concern? An investigation of an
unusual pattern of recovery in a man with aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WERNICKES APHASIA; RIGHT HEMISPHERES; LESION SIZE; LANGUAGE; STROKE;
COMPREHENSION; INFARCTION; PROGNOSIS; EXTENT; CORTEX
AB A man with dysphasia who showed an unusual pattern of recovery 11 months post-stroke is described. Models of brain recovery are used to try and explain the rapid improvement in his language functioning following heart failure. Assessments were administered at three separate phases: pre-heart failure, and one and two months post-heart failure. The results demonstrate that there was significant improvement in some tasks but not others: the pattern could be attributed to more effective semantic processing. The findings suggest that further investigation of clients with delayed improvements might help us understand the brain mechanisms underlying language recovery.
C1 UCL, Dept Human Commun Sci, London WC1N 1PG, England.
Univ Newcastle Upon Tyne, Newcastle Upon Tyne NE1 7RU, Tyne & Wear, England.
Northwick Pk Hosp & Clin Res Ctr, Rehabil Unit, London, England.
RP Bruce, C (reprint author), UCL, Dept Human Commun Sci, Chandler House,2 Wakefield St, London WC1N 1PG, England.
EM c.bruce@ucl.ac.uk
CR ADAMETZ JH, 1959, J NEUROSURG, V16, P85, DOI 10.3171/jns.1959.16.1.0085
BASSO A, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P17
BASSO A, 1979, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V36, P190
BASSO A, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P555
BASSO A, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P337, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248605
BRUCE C, 1987, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V22, P191
CAPPA SF, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P359, DOI 10.1080/02687039208248607
Cappa SF, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P55, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1737
CHOLLET F, 1991, ANN NEUROL, V29, P63, DOI 10.1002/ana.410290112
Coltheart M., 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P193
COLTHEART M, 1980, UNPUB ANAL ACQUIRED
CZOPF J, 1972, ARCH PSYCHIAT NERVEN, V216, P162, DOI 10.1007/BF00346417
Davis A., 1991, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V1, P135, DOI 10.1080/09602019108401387
DEPARTZ MP, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P149, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252674
FRANKLIN S, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P189, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248991
GAINOTTI G, 1993, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V28, P227
Giles GM, 1993, BRAIN INJURY REHABIL
GOLDENBERG G, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V47, P684, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1063
HOEDTRASMUSSEN K, 1964, ACTA NEUROL SCAND, V40, P41
Howard D., 1992, PYRAMIDS PALM TREES
Howard D, 1984, Adv Neurol, V42, P263
IRLE E, 1987, BRAIN RES REV, V12, P307, DOI 10.1016/0165-0173(87)90003-8
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
KEEFE KA, 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P88
KERR J, 1990, THESIS CITY U LONDON
KERTESZ A, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P153, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1010
KERTESZ A, 1977, BRAIN, V100, P1, DOI 10.1093/brain/100.1.1
KERTESZ A, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V8, P34, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90038-5
Kolb B, 1995, BRAIN PLASTICITY BEH
Kolb B, 1991, CEREB CORTEX, V1, P189, DOI 10.1093/cercor/1.2.189
MACKWORTH N, 1982, INTERPRETATION HEAD
NAESER MA, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P73
NICKELS L, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P155, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252057
Ponsford J., 1995, TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJU, P1
PRING T, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P479, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248788
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
RECANZONE GH, 1993, J NEUROSCI, V13, P87
ROBERTSON I, 1996, RECOVERY REHABILITAT
ROSEN J, 1971, SCIENCE, V173, P353, DOI 10.1126/science.173.3994.353
WEILLER C, 1995, ANN NEUROL, V37, P723, DOI 10.1002/ana.410370605
WEILLER C, 1993, ANN NEUROL, V33, P181
WILLMES K, 1993, BRAIN, V116, P1527, DOI 10.1093/brain/116.6.1527
WISE RJS, 1983, BRAIN, V106, P197, DOI 10.1093/brain/106.1.197
NR 43
TC 0
Z9 0
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JUL
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 7
BP 755
EP 769
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 340AQ
UT WOS:000088511300004
ER
PT J
AU Elman, RJ
Ogar, J
Elman, SH
AF Elman, RJ
Ogar, J
Elman, SH
TI Aphasia: Awareness, advocacy, and activism
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
AB To the public and the media, aphasia is an unknown disorder. In this paper we argue that the ramifications of being 'unknown' are far more than philosophical, with resulting economic, psychosocial, and political consequences. We compare aphasia to other neurological disorders and to other historically disenfranchised individuals. We offer some preliminary ideas for media and political action plans to raise awareness, increase funding, and reduce psychosocial isolation for those living with aphasia. The need to inform and unite is great. Only then will those impacted by aphasia begin to receive the resources to which they are entitled.
C1 Aphasia Ctr Calif, Oakland, CA 94602 USA.
San Francisco State Univ, San Francisco, CA 94132 USA.
RP Elman, RJ (reprint author), Aphasia Ctr Calif, 3996 Lyman Rd, Oakland, CA 94602 USA.
CR *AM ASS FUND RAIS, 1999, GIV US 1999 ANN REP
*AM SPEECH LANG HE, 1996, CONS MEMB ADV PARTN
*AM SPEECH LANG HE, 1998, REG ADV STAT FED LEV
*AM SPEECH LANG HE, 1998, POW 1 SELF ADV TRAIN
*AM SPEECH LANG HE, 1999, STAT FED PUBL POL AD
COHENSCHNEIDER R, 1996, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
Coles R., 1999, GROUP TREATMENT NEUR, P107
Gross CP, 1999, NEW ENGL J MED, V340, P1881, DOI 10.1056/NEJM199906173402406
PENMAN T, 1998, B COLL SPEECH LANGUA, P14
NR 9
TC 27
Z9 28
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 455
EP 459
PG 5
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400002
ER
PT J
AU Auther, LL
Wertz, RT
Miller, TA
Kirshner, HS
AF Auther, LL
Wertz, RT
Miller, TA
Kirshner, HS
TI Relationships among the mismatch negativity (MMN) response, auditory
comprehension, and site of lesion in aphasic adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID STIMULUS DEVIANCE; SPEECH; POTENTIALS
AB We evaluated the mismatch negativity (MMN) response to speech stimuli in aphasic adults to determine the relationships among aphasic patients' auditory comprehension, site of lesion, and the presence or absence of the MMN. Presence of a MMN response was significantly related to auditory comprehension performance. MMNs were present in 89% of the aphasic patients with good auditory comprehension and in 25% of the aphasic patients with poor auditory comprehension. Poor comprehension and the absence of a MMN were related to lesions in the temporal lobe. Good comprehension and the presence of a MMN response were related to lesions that spared the temporal lobe. However, the magnitude of these relationships was not perfect. Thus, the MMN as an index of auditory comprehension and its relationship to site of lesion may depend on where the lesion resides--primary auditory cortex and/or Wernicke's area--in the temporal lobe.
C1 Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Sch Med, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
RP Auther, LL (reprint author), Vet Affairs Med Ctr, 1310 24th Ave S, Nashville, TN 37212 USA.
CR AALTONEN O, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P139, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1009
AUTHER LL, 1998, 1 VA REH RES DEV M W
*AV INN, 1995, COMP SPEECH RES ENV
GIARD MH, 1990, PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY, V27, P627, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-8986.1990.tb03184.x
HALL JW, 1991, HDB AUDITORY EVOKED
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KORPILAHTI P, 1994, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V91, P256, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(94)90189-9
KRAUS N, 1993, HEARING RES, V65, P118, DOI 10.1016/0378-5955(93)90206-G
Näätänen R, 1987, Electroencephalogr Clin Neurophysiol Suppl, V40, P125
NAATANEN R, 1982, BIOL PSYCHOL, V14, P53, DOI 10.1016/0301-0511(82)90017-5
Näätänen R, 1995, Int J Neurosci, V80, P317, DOI 10.3109/00207459508986107
NYMAN G, 1990, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V77, P436, DOI 10.1016/0168-5597(90)90004-W
SAMS M, 1985, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V62, P437, DOI 10.1016/0168-5597(85)90054-1
SHARMA A, 1993, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V88, P64, DOI 10.1016/0168-5597(93)90029-O
Spreen O, 1977, NEUROSENSORY CTR COM
Wertz RT, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P499, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249553
NR 16
TC 10
Z9 11
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 461
EP 470
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400003
ER
PT J
AU Hillis, AE
Wang, P
Barker, P
Beauchamp, N
Gordon, B
Wityk, R
AF Hillis, AE
Wang, P
Barker, P
Beauchamp, N
Gordon, B
Wityk, R
TI Magnetic Resonance Perfusion Imaging: A new method for localizing
regions of brain dysfunction associated with specific lexical
impairments?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID ELECTRICAL-STIMULATION; DIFFUSION; APHASIA; STROKE; COMPREHENSION;
TOMOGRAPHY; INFARCTION; PLASTICITY; DEFICITS; LANGUAGE
AB We investigated correlations between lexical impairments and regional infarction versus hypoperfusion in hyperacute stroke (within 24 hours of onset). Seven patients with hyperacute dominant hemisphere stroke underwent a battery of lexical tasks, and investigational MRI techniques of Diffusion-Weighted Imaging (DWI) and Magnetic Resonance Perfusion Imaging (MRPI). Lexical performance was a function of regional hypoperfusion (on MRPI) rather than region of (probably) completed infarct (on DWI). Strong correlations were found between: accuracy in auditory word comprehension and volume of left temporal and parietal hypoperfusion, and accuracy of naming and left parietal hypoperfusion. Frequent errors in repetition were associated with left temporal and/or left frontal hypoperfusion, but the volume of infarct in these areas was not significantly correlated with the rate of repetition errors. Results of this preliminary study indicate that MRPI is a promising tool for investigating the regions of hypoperfused (dysfunctional, but not infarcted) brain tissue associated with specific language impairments in hyperacute stroke.
C1 Johns Hopkins Univ, Inst Med, Dept Neurol, Div Cognit Neurol, Baltimore, MD USA.
Johns Hopkins Univ, Inst Med, Clin Stroke Serv, Baltimore, MD USA.
Johns Hopkins Univ, Inst Med, Dept Radiol, Div Neuroradiol, Baltimore, MD USA.
Johns Hopkins Univ, Inst Med, Dept Med, Baltimore, MD USA.
Johns Hopkins Univ, Dept Cognit Sci, Baltimore, MD 21218 USA.
RP Hillis, AE (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Hosp, Dept Neurol, 600 N Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
CR Alexander M. P., 1997, BEHAV NEUROLOGY NEUR, P133
ALEXANDER MP, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V2, P219, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248913
Baird AE, 1997, ANN NEUROL, V41, P581, DOI 10.1002/ana.410410506
Barber PA, 1998, NEUROLOGY, V51, P418
BASSO A, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V26, P201, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90039-2
Beauchamp NJ, 1998, AM J ROENTGENOL, V171, P73
Beaulieu C, 1999, ANN NEUROL, V46, P568, DOI 10.1002/1531-8249(199910)46:4<568::AID-ANA4>3.0.CO;2-R
Binder J. R., 1994, LOCALIZATION NEUROIM, P185
CHERTKOW H, 1994, LOCALIZATION NEUROIM, P152
CHERTKOW H, 1993, NEUROLOGY, V43, pA19
DAMASIO AR, 1982, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V39, P15
DEMONET JF, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1753, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1753
FISHER M, 1995, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V274, P908
GESCHWIN.N, 1965, BRAIN, V88, P237, DOI 10.1093/brain/88.2.237
GOODGLASS H, 1987, ANOMIA
HART J, 1990, ANN NEUROL, V27, P226, DOI 10.1002/ana.410270303
HART J, 1992, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V4, P337, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1992.4.4.337
HART J, 1992, NATURE, V359, P60, DOI 10.1038/359060a0
Hillis AE, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P161
HILLIS AE, IN PRESS HYPOPERFUSI
Hillis AE, 1999, NEUROLOGY, V52, pA306
HOWARD D, 1992, BRAIN, V115, P1769, DOI 10.1093/brain/115.6.1769
Jenkins WM, 1987, PROG BRAIN RES , V71, P249
JENKINS WM, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V28, P573, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(90)90035-M
Karbe H, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V64, P215, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1961
LESSER RP, 1986, NEUROLOGY, V36, P658
Marshall J., 1984, ANNU REV PSYCHOL, V35, P377
MERZENICH MM, 1983, NEUROSCIENCE, V8, P33, DOI 10.1016/0306-4522(83)90024-6
METTER EJ, 1983, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V13, P262
METTER EJ, 1981, ANN NEUROL, V10, P173, DOI 10.1002/ana.410100208
METTER EJ, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P33, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90054-8
METTER EJ, 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V16, P97
METTER EJ, 1994, LOCALIZATION NEUROIM, P123
MOHR J. P., 1976, STUDIES NEUROLINGUIS, V1
NAESER MA, 1982, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V39, P2
OJEMANN GA, 1994, CORTICAL STIMULATION
PETERSEN SE, 1988, NATURE, V331, P585, DOI 10.1038/331585a0
Raymer AM, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V35, P211
Raymer AM, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P137, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1786
Schlaug G, 1999, NEUROLOGY, V53, P1528
*SCION CORP, 1998, SCION IM BET 3B VERS
Thulborn KR, 1999, STROKE, V30, P749
WALL JT, 1988, TRENDS NEUROSCI, V11, P549, DOI 10.1016/0166-2236(88)90184-1
WORRALL B, 1998, NEUROLOGY S, V4, pA363
NR 44
TC 3
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 471
EP 483
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400004
ER
PT J
AU Lehman, MT
Tompkins, CA
AF Lehman, MT
Tompkins, CA
TI Inferencing in adults with right hemisphere brain damage: An analysis of
conflicting results
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID PREDICTIVE INFERENCES; DISCOURSE COMPREHENSION; DRAWING INFERENCES;
OCCUR ONLINE; TEXT; INTEGRATION; REPRESENTATION; INFORMATION;
CONTRIBUTE; RETRIEVAL
AB Recent proposals have suggested that inferencing deficits may underlie many cognitive-communicative disorders following right hemisphere brain damage (RHD). However, there is conflicting evidence for these claims. The current review details two major factors that may contribute to the inconsistent findings. First, RHD inferencing studies do not take into consideration models of normal inferencing processes. Such frameworks suggest that inference generation may be modulated by inference type, stimulus characteristics, and the task used to measure inferencing. Few of these factors have been considered in the RHD literature. As a result, conclusions and interpretations may not accurately reflect the state of inferencing abilities after RHD. Predicting and evaluating results also are problematic without a guiding framework. The difficulties encountered in dealing with a heterogeneous population create a second source of inconsistent results. Common sampling biases contribute to inaccurate interpretations of RHD inferencing. Suggestions are provided for dealing with group heterogeneity and issues of generalizability.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Tompkins, CA (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
CR ALBRECHT JE, 1991, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V17, P932, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.17.5.932
ANDERSON JR, 1974, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V13, P149, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(74)80039-3
BEEMAN M, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P80, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1006
BENOWITZ LI, 1990, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V28, P231, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(90)90017-I
Bisset JD, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P217
BLOISE CGR, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P145
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
BROWNELL HH, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P310, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90022-2
Calvo MG, 1996, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V22, P57
DUFFY SA, 1986, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V12, P208, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.12.2.208
EDWARDS J, 1997, AM SPEECH LANG HEAR
FincherKiefer R, 1996, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V22, P225
GARDNER H, 1983, COGNITIVE PROCESSING, P167
GARROD S, 1990, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V16, P250, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.16.2.250
Gernsbacher M. A., 1990, LANGUAGE COMPREHENSI
GLENBERG AM, 1987, J MEM LANG, V26, P69, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(87)90063-5
GRAESSER AC, 1994, PSYCHOL REV, V101, P371, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.101.3.371
HARDEN WD, 1995, J COMMUN DISORD, V28, P247, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(94)00012-O
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
JUST MA, 1987, PSYCHOLINGUISTICS RE
KEEFE DE, 1993, J MEM LANG, V32, P446, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1993.1024
KEENAN JM, 1990, INFERENCES TEXT COMP
KINTSCH W, 1988, PSYCHOL REV, V95, P163, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.95.2.163
LEHMAN M, 1998, THESIS
Mackenzie C, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P929, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249420
MCDONALD S, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P68, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90034-9
MCKOON G, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P440, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.3.440
MCKOON G, 1989, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V15, P326, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.15.2.326
MCKOON G, 1990, INFERENCES TEXT COMP
MOYA KL, 1986, CORTEX, V22, P381
Myers P. S., 1997, APHASIA RELATED NEUR
MYERS PS, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P167
OBRIEN EJ, 1990, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V16, P241, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.16.2.241
OBRIEN EJ, 1988, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V14, P410, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.14.3.410
Purdy M., 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P135
RAU MT, 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P157
READ DE, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V12, P116, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90008-0
REHAK A, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P320, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90104-M
ROMAN M, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P151, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90066-6
SCHANK RC, 1972, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V3, P552, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(72)90022-9
SPEELMAN CP, 1990, J MEM LANG, V29, P119, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(90)90013-P
Stevenson R. J., 1993, LANGUAGE THOUGHT REP
Swinney D., 1990, INFERENCES TEXT COMP, P17
TOMPKINS CA, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P820
TOMPKINS CA, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P185, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90130-0
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Tompkins CA, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P725
TOMPKINS CA, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P1142
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
VANDENBROEK P, 1996, MODELS UNDERSTANDING
VANDENBROEK P, 1993, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V16, P169
VANDENBROEK P, 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC
WALKER CH, 1980, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V19, P263, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(80)90221-2
WAPNER W, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P15, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90061-4
WHITNEY P, 1990, INFERENCES TEXT COMP
WHITNEY P, 1992, MEM COGNITION, V20, P424, DOI 10.3758/BF03210926
NR 56
TC 23
Z9 23
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 485
EP 499
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400005
ER
PT J
AU Granier, JP
Robin, DA
Shapiro, LP
Peach, RK
Zimba, LD
AF Granier, JP
Robin, DA
Shapiro, LP
Peach, RK
Zimba, LD
TI Measuring processing load during sentence comprehension: Visuomotor
tracking
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID APHASIC PATIENTS; LEXICAL ACCESS; DETERMINANTS; ATTENTION
AB This investigation examined processing load during aspects of sentence comprehension in non-brain-damaged subjects. Our goals were to begin the process of quantifying the loads associated with on-line and off-line aspects of sentence processing and to evaluate the utility of visuomotor tracking as an index of the resource demand associated with elements of sentence comprehension. Subjects were required to track an unpredictable visual target with their forefinger while listening to sentences and answering Yes-No comprehension questions. In general, tracking performance declined during the off-line task of responding to questions compared to the on-line task of listening to sentences and questions. Performance was also poorer during the beginning and end of the sentence compared to the middle of the sentence. Results are discussed in relation to resource theories of normal and aphasic sentence comprehension.
C1 Univ Iowa, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
Univ Iowa, Natl Ctr Voice & Speech, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
San Diego State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, Joint SDSU UCSD Doctoral Program Language & Commu, San Diego, CA 92182 USA.
Rush Univ, Rush Presbyterian St Lukes Med Ctr, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Chicago, IL USA.
RP Granier, JP (reprint author), Univ Iowa, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, WJSHC 234E, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
RI Robin, Donald/F-2109-2010
CR Balogh J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P169, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1917
CAPLAN D, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P117, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90008-8
CAPLAN D, 1985, COGNITION, V21, P117, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(85)90048-4
Caplan D, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P542
Clark H. M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P143
Haarmann HJ, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P76, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1814
JUST MA, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P122, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.1.122
KLEIN RM, 1976, MOTOR CONTROL ISSUES, P143
MCNEIL M, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20
MILBERG W, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V31, P138, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90065-4
MIYAKE A, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V11, P671, DOI 10.1080/02643299408251989
Murray LL, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P91, DOI 10.1080/026870399402226
Murray LL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P993, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249423
Murray LL, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P401, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248480
NORMAN DA, 1975, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V7, P44, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(75)90004-3
PAYNE DG, 1994, HUM FACTORS, V36, P441
PRATHER P, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P336, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90134-Z
SHAPIRO LP, 1989, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V18, P223
Shapiro LP, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P254
SHAPIRO LP, 1987, COGNITION, V27, P219, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(87)80010-0
SHAPIRO LP, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P423, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1053
Swinney D, 1996, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V8, P174, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1996.8.2.174
SWINNEY DA, 1979, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V18, P645, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(79)90355-4
TSENG CH, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V45, P276, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1046
Wickens C.D., 1984, VARIETIES ATTENTION
NR 25
TC 8
Z9 8
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 501
EP 513
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400006
ER
PT J
AU Harris, JL
Qualls, CD
AF Harris, JL
Qualls, CD
TI The association of elaborative or maintenance rehearsal with age,
reading comprehension, and verbal working memory performance
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID OLDER ADULTS; LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION; LIFE-SPAN; DISCOURSE
AB Elaborative or maintenance rehearsal strategy-use during a verbal working memory task was the grouping variable for a study that tested whether group membership distinguished 53 healthy adults by age, education, or performance on reading comprehension and verbal working memory tasks. No significant differences in age or reading comprehension emerged as a function of strategy-use. However, the elaborative strategy group had significantly better performance on one measure of verbal working memory. Several within age-group differences as a function of strategy-use were also significant. Younger adults who used elaborative rehearsal had superior working memory measures, and older adults who used elaborative rehearsal had superior reading comprehension measures, suggesting elaborative rehearsal's memory-enhancing function in verbal working memory and reading comprehension tasks.
C1 Univ Memphis, Memphis, TN 38105 USA.
Penn State Univ, University Pk, PA 16802 USA.
RP Harris, JL (reprint author), Univ Memphis, 807 Jefferson Ave, Memphis, TN 38105 USA.
CR AU R, 1991, HDB GERIATRIC COMMUN, P293
Baddeley A. D., 1974, PSYCHOL LEARN MOTIV, V8, P47, DOI DOI 10.1016/S0079-7421(08)60452-1
Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
Belleville S, 1998, MEM COGNITION, V26, P572, DOI 10.3758/BF03201163
Brown J., 1993, NELSONDENNY READING
Caplan D, 1999, BEHAV BRAIN SCI, V22, P77
COHEN G, 1981, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V4, P253
COHEN G, 1979, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V11, P412, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(79)90019-7
Craik F. I. M., 1992, HDB AGING COGNITION, P51
Craik F. I. M., 1986, HUMAN MEMORY COGNITI, P409
CRAIK FIM, 1972, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V11, P671, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(72)80001-X
DANEMAN M, 1980, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V19, P450, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(80)90312-6
Daneman M, 1996, PSYCHON B REV, V3, P422, DOI 10.3758/BF03214546
DiVesta FJ, 1997, LEARN INDIVID DIFFER, V9, P215, DOI 10.1016/S1041-6080(97)90007-8
Folstein M, 1975, J PSYCHIATR RES, V12, P89
Fry AF, 1996, PSYCHOL SCI, V7, P237, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1996.tb00366.x
GICK ML, 1988, MEM COGNITION, V16, P353, DOI 10.3758/BF03197046
GILLUND G, 1988, LANGUAGE MEMORY AGIN, P191
GORDON SK, 1974, J GERONTOL, V29, P64
Harris JL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P603
Hartley J T, 1986, Psychol Aging, V1, P150, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.1.2.150
Hasher L., 1988, PSYCHOL LEARN MOTIV, V22, P193, DOI DOI 10.1016/S0079-7421(08)60041-9
Jenkins L, 1999, PSYCHON B REV, V6, P28, DOI 10.3758/BF03210810
Kausler D. H., 1994, LEARNING MEMORY NORM
KEMPER S, 1992, HDB AGING COGNITION, P51
KEMPER S, 1993, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V16, P405
KLATZKY RL, 1988, LANGUAGE MEMORY AGIN, P1
Light L, 1990, HDB PSYCHOL AGING, P275
Light L. L, 1996, MEMORY, P443, DOI [10.1016/B978-012102570-0/50015-X, DOI 10.1016/B978-012102570-0/50015-X]
LIGHT LL, 1985, J GERONTOL, V40, P737
Luszcz MA, 1999, GERONTOLOGY, V45, P2, DOI 10.1159/000022048
Meyer B. J. F., 1989, MEMORY IMPROVED READ
NORTH AJ, 1986, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V23, P267, DOI 10.2190/BPF0-2BWD-BGNQ-HWCW
Park DC, 1996, PSYCHOL AGING, V11, P621, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.11.4.621
Salthouse T. A., 1991, THEORETICAL PERSPECT
Salthouse T. A., 1994, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V8, P535, DOI [10.1037/0894-4105.8.4.535, DOI 10.1037/0894-4105.8.4.535]
SKA B, 1996, J SPEECH LANGUAGE PA, V20, P101
ULATOWSKA HK, 1986, AGING BRAIN COMMUNIC, P125
Van Dijk T. A., 1983, STRATEGIES DISCOURSE
Zabrucky K., 1994, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V49, P201, DOI 10.1093/geronj/49.5.P201
Zacks R. T., 1988, LANGUAGE MEMORY AGIN, P154
Zelinski E. M., 1988, LANGUAGE MEMORY AGIN, P117
NR 42
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 515
EP 526
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400007
ER
PT J
AU Park, GH
McNeil, MR
Tompkins, CA
AF Park, GH
McNeil, MR
Tompkins, CA
TI Reliability of the five-item revised token test for individuals with
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
AB Two trained raters and 11 aphasic subjects were used to evaluate test-retest, interrater and intra-rater reliabilities of the Five-Item (55 total) Revised Token Test (Arvedson et al. 1985). Results revealed high reliability for overall mean scores, and moderate to high reliability for individual subtests and linguistic elements scores. Standard error of measurement (SEM) values were also determined based on the aphasic subjects' data. A discrepancy between large SEM values and the mean absolute difference value suggests that further evaluation of SEM is required with a larger sample size. Results suggest that the Five-Item Revised Token Test is a reliable instrument to assess auditory processing impairments in adults with aphasia. Given the time constraints experienced in clinical and research settings, this assessment tool is useful due to its validity, reliability, and brevity.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Hlth Care Syst, Aphasia Rehabil Res Lab & Clin, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
RP Park, GH (reprint author), Vet Adm Med Ctr, 7180 Highland Dr, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
CR Anastasi A., 1988, PSYCHOL TESTING
ARVEDSON JC, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V15, P57
Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1974, ACTA SYMBOLICA, V1, P1
Denegar CR, 1993, J SPORT REHABIL, V2, P35
Fleiss JL, 1981, STAT METHODS RATES P, P216
Fritz JM, 1998, PHYS THER, V78, P1046
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LANDIS JR, 1977, BIOMETRICS, V33, P159, DOI 10.2307/2529310
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
Murray LL, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P792
Nelitz M, 1999, BRIT J RADIOL, V72, P331
Schuell H, 1964, APHASIA ADULTS
SHROUT PE, 1979, PSYCHOL BULL, V86, P420, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.86.2.420
SQUARESTORER P, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V33, P65, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90055-7
NR 15
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 527
EP 535
PG 9
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400008
ER
PT J
AU Doyle, PJ
McNeil, MR
Park, G
Goda, A
Rubenstein, E
Spencer, K
Carroll, B
Lustig, A
Szwarc, L
AF Doyle, PJ
McNeil, MR
Park, G
Goda, A
Rubenstein, E
Spencer, K
Carroll, B
Lustig, A
Szwarc, L
TI Linguistic validation of four parallel forms of a story retelling
procedure
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID CONNECTED SPEECH; APHASIA; ADULTS
AB This study reports the development and validation of four parallel forms of a story retelling procedure. The equivalency of forms was based on the performance of 15 adults with aphasia on 12 operationally defined productive language variables including measures of (a) verbal productivity, (b) information content, (c) grammatical well-formedness, (d) phoneme production, and (e) verbal disruptions. The results revealed no significant differences among the four forms of the test for any of the dependent measures, and strong, positive and significant correlations among forms for 11 of the 12 dependent measures. These results suggest that a wide variety of productive language variables can be reliably measured using parallel forms of the story-retelling procedure described herein.
C1 VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Aphasia Rehabil Res Lab & Clin, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Ctr Geriatr Res Educ & Clin, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Off Measurement & Evaluat Teaching, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Doyle, PJ (reprint author), Vet Adm Med Ctr, 7180 Highland Dr, Pittsburgh, PA 15206 USA.
CR Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
BOTTENBERG D, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P202
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P399
CAMPBELL TF, 1987, CONVENTIONS TRANSCRI
Doyle P. J., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P130
Doyle PJ, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P561, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249558
DOYLE PJ, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P135
McNeil M. R., 1978, REVISED TOKEN TEST
McNeil MR, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P575, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249559
McNeil MR, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P385, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248479
MCNEIL MR, 1988, HDB SPEECH LANGUAGE
Nicholas Linda E., 1995, Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, V38, P145
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
POTECHIN GC, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P216
Raven J. C., 1965, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SHADDEN BB, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P327
Shertzer M, 1986, ELEMENTS GRAMMAR
SPENCER KA, APHASIOLOGY, V14
ULATOWSKA HK, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V13, P345, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90100-0
WAMBAUGH JL, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P343
NR 23
TC 19
Z9 19
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 537
EP 549
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400009
ER
PT J
AU Beeson, PM
Rewega, MA
Vail, S
Rapcsak, SZ
AF Beeson, PM
Rewega, MA
Vail, S
Rapcsak, SZ
TI Problem-solving approach to agraphia treatment: Interactive use of
lexical and sublexical spelling routes
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID ACQUIRED DYSGRAPHIA; REMEDIATION
AB Two patients with acquired spelling impairments due to left hemisphere brain damage participated in a treatment protocol to improve their written spelling. Prior to the initiation of writing treatment, both patients showed some ability to take advantage of sound-to-letter correspondences that resulted in phonologically plausible spelling errors. A homework-based treatment was implemented to improve their ability to resolve spelling errors by increased reliance on phoneme-to-grapheme conversion, self-correction, and use of an electronic speller. Both patients improved their spelling abilities and provided evidence of interactive use of partially spared lexical and sublexical spelling routes to resolve their spelling difficulties.
C1 Univ Arizona, Natl Ctr Neurogenic Commun Disorders, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
Univ Arizona, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
VA Med Ctr, Neurol Sect, Tucson, AZ USA.
Univ Arizona, Dept Neurol, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
RP Beeson, PM (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Natl Ctr Neurogenic Commun Disorders, POB 210071, Tucson, AZ 85721 USA.
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
BARRY C, 1988, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V40, P5
BAXTER DM, 1985, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V23, P653, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(85)90066-1
BEAUVOIS MF, 1981, BRAIN, V104, P21, DOI 10.1093/brain/104.1.21
Beeson P. M., 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P367
BEESON PM, IN PRESS LANGUAGE IN
Beeson PM, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P621
BEHRMANN M, 1987, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P365, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252044
CAMPBELL R, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P153, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90061-5
Carlomagno S, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P485
De Partz M. P., 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P147
Ellis A. W., 1993, READING WRITING DYSL
GOODMAN RA, 1986, UNPUB J HOPKINS DYSG
GOODMANSCHULMAN R, 1987, CORTEX, V23, P143
HATFIELD FM, 1983, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V35, P451
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
Hillis A E, 1992, Clin Commun Disord, V2, P19
HILLIS AE, 1995, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V12, P187, DOI 10.1080/02643299508251996
HILLIS AE, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P255
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
RAPCSAK SZ, IN PRESS APHASIA LAN
RAPP B, 1997, ANN PSYCH M
Roeltgen D. P., 1993, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, P63
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
Southwood MH, 1999, BRAIN LANG, V67, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.2046
TRUPE AEH, 1986, CLIN APHASIOLOGY 198
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
WING A, 1980, COGNITIVE PROCESS SP
NR 30
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 551
EP 565
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400010
ER
PT J
AU Spencer, KA
Doyle, PJ
McNeil, MR
Wambaugh, JL
Park, G
Carroll, B
AF Spencer, KA
Doyle, PJ
McNeil, MR
Wambaugh, JL
Park, G
Carroll, B
TI Examining the facilitative effects of rhyme in a patient with output
lexicon damage
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID APHASIA; ACTIVATION; BUFFER; SPEECH; ACCESS
AB A theory-driven treatment was designed to facilitate access to the impaired output lexicons of a 47-year-old woman with aphasia resulting from a left parietal haemorrhage. In the context of a multiple-baseline design, lists of rhymed word pairs from four semantic categories were trained using a systematic cueing hierarchy. Performance measures were based on the subject's generation of targeted words, verbally and in writing, when presented with a rhyme of the target. Results demonstrated positive acquisition, generalization and maintenance effects for treated and untreated items across semantic categories. Delayed generalization patterns may be explained by retrieval inhibition (Blaxton and Bookheimer 1993) or lateral inhibition (McClelland and Rumelhart 1981).
C1 VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Aphasia Rehabil Res Lab & Clin, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Ctr Geriatr Res Educ & Clin, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
Univ Utah, Salt Lake City, UT USA.
Vet Affairs Med Ctr, Salt Lake City, UT 84148 USA.
RP Spencer, KA (reprint author), Univ Washington, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 1417 NE 42nd St, Seattle, WA 98105 USA.
CR Battig W. F., 1969, J EXP PSYCHOL, V80, P1, DOI 10.1037/h0027577
Bayles K. A., 1993, ARIZONA BATTERY COMM
BEST W, 1997, LANGUAGE DISORDERS C, P103
BLAXTON TA, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P221, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1015
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
CAMPBELL R, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P153, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90061-5
Cohen J., 1988, STAT POWER ANAL BEHA, V2nd
COHEN L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P469
COLLINS AM, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P407, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.82.6.407
CROSBIE J, 1993, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V61, P966, DOI 10.1037/0022-006X.61.6.966
CROSBIE J, 1995, ANAL CHANGE, P361
Dabul B., 1986, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Dell GS, 1997, PSYCHOL REV, V104, P801, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.104.4.801
ELLIS AW, 1988, HUMAN COGNITIVE NEUR, P113
FRIEDMAN RB, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P278, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90115-W
FRIEDRICH FJ, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V22, P266, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90094-4
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Gottman JM, 1981, TIME SERIES ANAL COM
KATZ RB, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P111
KAY J, 1981, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V33, P397
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
KAZDIN AE, 1982, SINGLE CASE RES DESI, P230
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Laine M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P283, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0050
LaPointe L. L., 1979, READING COMPREHENSIO
Lesser R., 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P65
MCCLELLAND JL, 1981, PSYCHOL REV, V88, P375, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.88.5.375
MCNEIL M, 1978, REVISED TOKE TEST
MCNEIL MR, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P21
MCREYNOLDS LV, 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT, P83
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
MILBERG W, 1988, BRAIN LANG, V34, P279, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(88)90139-3
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
NICKELS L, 1995, CORTEX, V31, P209
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
RAPCSAK SZ, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P334, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90118-Z
Raven JC, 1976, COLOURED PROGR MATRI
Robey RR, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P445
Robson J, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P675
ROSENBEK J, 1978, CLIN MANAGEMENT NEUR
Scruggs TE, 1998, BEHAV MODIF, V22, P221, DOI 10.1177/01454455980223001
Wilson B. A., 1987, BEHAV INATTENTION TE
Wilson BA, 1991, RIVERMEAD BEHAV MEMO
NR 43
TC 15
Z9 15
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 567
EP 584
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400011
ER
PT J
AU Murray, LL
Karcher, L
AF Murray, LL
Karcher, L
TI A treatment for written verb retrieval and sentence construction skills
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID LEARNING-DISABILITIES; APHASIC PATIENTS; JARGON APHASIA; NAMING ERRORS;
COMMUNICATION; VALIDITY; STUDENTS; LANGUAGE; THERAPY; SPEECH
AB This study examined the effects of a writing treatment on the verb retrieval and sentence construction abilities of a 50-year-old male with chronic, moderate Wernicke's aphasia. The treatment protocol consisted of a cueing hierarchy, word prompt software and home practice, and was applied in the context of a modified multiple-baseline across behaviours design. Following each treatment phase, the patient demonstrated improvements in writing trained verbs at both the word and sentence levels. During the final maintenance probe eight weeks following treatment cessation, the patient's handwritten accuracy had begun to decline but continued to exceed baseline accuracy rates. Furthermore, when he was allowed to use the word prompt software during this final probe, his writing accuracy approximated or exceeded that which he had achieved immediately following the termination of the last treatment phase. Generalization of improved verb retrieval and sentence construction abilities to written and spoken discourse as well as positive qualitative changes in verb retrieval error patterns were observed. Hypotheses regarding the cognitive mechanisms that may underlie these treatment and generalization effects are discussed.
C1 Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
RP Murray, LL (reprint author), Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, 200 S Jordan Ave, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
Basso A, 1996, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V18, P77, DOI 10.1080/01688639608408264
BASSO A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P185, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249069
Bastiaanse R, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P951, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249463
BEESON PM, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P767
BERNDT RS, 1993, AC APH TUCS AZ
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P107
Berndt RS, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P68
Breedin SD, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1923
Fink R. B., 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P263
Francis WN, 1982, FREQUENCY ANAL ENGLI
Fukkink R, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P741, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248447
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Goodglass H, 1997, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V3, P128
Higginbotham DJ, 1992, AUGMENTATIVE ALTERNA, V8, P258, DOI 10.1080/07434619212331276303
Hillis AE, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P648, DOI 10.1017/S135561779846613X
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Lewis R., 1998, LEARNING DISABILITIE, V13, P95
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
Loverso F L, 1988, J Rehabil Res Dev, V25, P47
MacArthur CA, 1996, J LEARN DISABIL, V29, P344
MacArthur CA, 1998, LEARN DISABILITY Q, V21, P151, DOI 10.2307/1511342
MacWhinney B., 1995, CHILDES PROJECT TOOL
Marshall J, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V63, P159, DOI 10.1006/brln.1998.1949
Miceli G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P150, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0008
Mitchum C., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P317
MITCHUM CC, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P71, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249500
Murray LL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P213
Pashek G, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V65, P177
RAPP BC, 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P187, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50009-9
RICHARDS SB, 1999, SINGLE SUBJECT RES A
Robson J, 1998, J INT NEUROPSYCH SOC, V4, P675
Robson J, 1998, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P305, DOI 10.1080/136828298247767
Rothi L J, 1991, Clin Commun Disord, V1, P7
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SAFFRAN EM, 1982, BRIT J PSYCHOL, V73, P317
SHEWAN CM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P308
Thompson C. K., 1995, BRAIN LANG, V51, P124
Tseng Chin-Hsing, 1997, P172
Weinrich M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P327, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1759
WILLIAMS SE, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P124, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90120-9
Wood LA, 1997, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V6, P57
NR 43
TC 20
Z9 21
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 585
EP 602
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400012
ER
PT J
AU Wambaugh, JL
Martinez, AL
AF Wambaugh, JL
Martinez, AL
TI Effects of modified response elaboration training with apraxic and
aphasic speakers
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID SPEECH
AB Response Elaboration Training (Kearns 1997) was modified for use with aphasic speakers with moderate to severe apraxia of speech. The modifications included additional clinician modelling, use of integral stimulation, and repeated practice of elaborated utterances. The acquisition, response generalization, stimulus generalization, and maintenance effects of treatment were examined with three chronic, apraxic-aphasic speakers. Increases in the number of CIUs produced in response to picture stimuli and in a personal recount task were found for all speakers. However, the magnitude of change varied greatly across speakers. Treatment was sequentially extended to the personal recount condition and additional positive changes were observed.
C1 Univ Utah, Dept CMDIS, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, Salt Lake City, UT USA.
RP Wambaugh, JL (reprint author), Univ Utah, Dept CMDIS, 1201 Behav Sci Bldg,1530 E 390 S, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
CR CONNELL PJ, 1986, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V51, P214
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
EDELMAN G, 1987, PROMOTING APHASICS C
Gaddie A., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P171
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Kearns K. P., 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V18, P223
KEARNS KP, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P223
KEARNS KP, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P196
Kearns Kevin P., 1997, P1
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P21, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248397
Porch B. E., 1981, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC, V2
SAFFRAN EM, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V37, P440, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90030-8
SQUARE PA, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P467
STOKES T, 1977, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V22, P157
THOMPSON CK, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P407
Wambaugh JL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P725
WAMBAUGH JL, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P231
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
YEDOR KE, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P213
Yorkston K. M., 1981, ASSESSMENT INTELLIGI
NR 24
TC 13
Z9 13
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 603
EP 617
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400013
ER
PT J
AU Haley, KL
Ohde, RN
Wertz, RT
AF Haley, KL
Ohde, RN
Wertz, RT
TI Precision of fricative production in aphasia and apraxia of speech: A
perceptual and acoustic study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID VOWEL PRODUCTION; SPECTRAL CHARACTERISTICS; INTELLIGIBILITY;
COARTICULATION; ARTICULATION; SPEAKERS
AB We examined the precision of fricative place of articulation production in speakers with aphasia and apraxia of speech. Articulatory precision was defined based on acoustic consistency across repeated productions of the same target words and on the acoustic distinction between similar fricative targets. Ten aphasic speakers with apraxia of speech, ten aphasic speakers without apraxia of speech, and ten normal control speakers produced words beginning with voiceless alveolar and palatal fricatives. The Bark transformed first spectral moment was computed in the middle of the fricative. For normal speakers, this measure varied little across repetitions and the target fricatives were clearly distinguished. For aphasic speakers with apraxia of speech, there was substantial spectral variability and overlap between targets. A similar pattern was found for aphasic speakers without apraxia of speech, although the effects were smaller in magnitude. Among these aphasic speakers, the greatest degree of spectral overlap was seen in speakers with low single-word intelligibility scores. The observed spectral imprecision is consistent with impaired phonetic-motor control, not only in the temporal, but also in the spatial domain of speech production.
C1 Univ N Carolina, Sch Med, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Med Ctr, Vanderbilt Bill Wilkerson Ctr Otolaryngol & Commu, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Nashville, TN 37240 USA.
Vet Adm Med Ctr, Nashville, TN 37203 USA.
RP Haley, KL (reprint author), Univ N Carolina, Sch Med, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Med Sch Wing D,CB 7190, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
CR BAUM SR, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P33, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90003-Y
BEHRENS SJ, 1988, J PHONETICS, V16, P295
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1979, J ACOUST SOC AM, V66, P1001, DOI 10.1121/1.383319
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V9, P153, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90137-6
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
FORREST K, 1988, J ACOUST SOC AM, V84, P115, DOI 10.1121/1.396977
GANDOUR J, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P337, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90105-N
HALEY KI, 1997, ANN CONV AM SPEECH L
Haley KL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P715, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249568
Haley KL, 2000, APHASIOLOGY, V14, P179
HALPERN H, 1976, CORTEX, V12, P365
Hardcastle W. J., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P113
HARMES S, 1984, J PHONETICS, V12, P367
HEWLETT N, 1985, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V20, P155
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
KENT RD, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P482
KLICH RJ, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P451
LAPOINTE LL, 1975, J COMMUN DISORD, V8, P259, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(75)90018-0
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MILENKOVIC P, 1996, CSPEECH
ODELL K, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P345
RYALLS JH, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P48, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90033-7
SERENO JA, 1987, J ACOUST SOC AM, V81, P512, DOI 10.1121/1.394917
SHINN P, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V20, P90, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90035-4
SOLI SD, 1981, J ACOUST SOC AM, V70, P976, DOI 10.1121/1.387032
WAMBAUGH JL, 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P186
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
ZIEGLER W, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P449, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249006
NR 28
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 619
EP 634
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400014
ER
PT J
AU Shuster, LI
Wambaugh, JL
AF Shuster, LI
Wambaugh, JL
TI Perceptual and acoustic analyses of speech sound errors in apraxia of
speech accompanied by aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID SPEAKERS; PATTERNS
AB In order to carefully characterise their speech errors, two individuals with apraxia of speech and aphasia were audiotape recorded producing 650 monosyllabic words in imitation. Each utterance was transcribed using the methods and diacritics for close phonetic transcription described by Shriberg and Kent (1995). In addition, utterances were analysed acoustically. Although the subjects demonstrated some differences, they also displayed similar patterns. Both produced perceived substitutions as well as perceived distortions. While errors on initial stops tended to be classified as substitutions, errors on initial fricatives were more often classified as distortions or distorted substitutions. Acoustic analyses confirmed and augmented perceptual judgements. The results indicated that this type of approach can be useful for furthering our understanding of the nature and underlying cause of the speech disorder in individuals with aphasia and apraxia. The implications of these findings for the distinction between phonetic and phonemic errors are discussed.
C1 W Virginia Univ, Morgantown, WV 26506 USA.
Univ Utah, Salt Lake City, UT 84112 USA.
VA Salt Lake City Healthcare Syst, Salt Lake City, UT USA.
RP Shuster, LI (reprint author), POB 6122,805 Allen Hall, Morgantown, WV 26506 USA.
CR Blumstein S. E., 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P157, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50008-7
BROWN H, 1995, MENT HANDICAP RES, V8, P3
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1987, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V1, P113, DOI 10.3109/02699208708985007
BUCKINGHAM HW, 1998, ACQUIRED APHASIA, P269, DOI 10.1016/B978-012619322-0/50011-7
Bybee JL, 1994, COGN LINGUIST, V5, P285, DOI 10.1515/cogl.1994.5.4.285
TROST JE, 1974, BRAIN LANG, V1, P63, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(74)90026-1
CANTER GJ, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P204, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90131-2
Code C, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P47, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985212
Dabul B. L., 1979, APRAXIA BATTERY ADUL
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
FLETCHER SG, 1991, J ACOUST SOC AM, V89, P850, DOI 10.1121/1.1894646
Goldinger S.D., 1997, TALKER VARIABILITY S, P33
HALEY KL, 1999, CLIN APH C KEY WEST
Hardcastle W. J., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P113
HENTON C, 1992, PHONETICA, V49, P65
JOHNS DF, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P556
KEARNS KP, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V31, P131
Kent RD, 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P7, DOI DOI 10.1044/1058-0360.0503.07
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KLATT D, 1981, COGNITIVE REPRESENTA, P11
Liss JM, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V62, P342, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1907
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MCNEIL MR, 1990, MOTOR CONTROL SPEECH, P349
MOWREY RA, 1990, J ACOUST SOC AM, V88, P1299, DOI 10.1121/1.399706
Nolan F, 1996, J PHONETICS, V24, P113, DOI 10.1006/jpho.1996.0008
ODELL K, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P67
ODELL K, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P345
Repp B. H., 1984, SPEECH LANGUAGE ADV, V10, P243
SHRIBERG LD, 1991, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V5, P225, DOI 10.3109/02699209108986113
Shriberg LD, 1995, CLIN PHONETICS
Square P. A., 1997, APRAXIA NEUROPSYCHOL, P173
SQUARE PA, 1982, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, P245
Stone M., 1997, HDB PHONETIC SCI, P11
van Turennout M, 1998, SCIENCE, V280, P572
Wambaugh J. L., 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V24, P97
WAMBAUGH JL, 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P186
WILSON R S, 1979, Journal of Clinical Neuropsychology, V1, P49, DOI 10.1080/01688637908401097
ZIEGLER W, 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES, P163
NR 38
TC 10
Z9 10
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 635
EP 651
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400015
ER
PT J
AU Knock, TR
Ballard, KJ
Robin, DA
Schmidt, RA
AF Knock, TR
Ballard, KJ
Robin, DA
Schmidt, RA
TI Influence of order of stimulus presentation on speech motor learning: A
principled approach to treatment for apraxia of speech
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID CONTEXTUAL INTERFERENCE; SKILL ACQUISITION; SCHEMA THEORY; KNOWLEDGE;
FEEDBACK; RETENTION; APHASIA
AB The present study was designed to examine whether applying principles of motor learning to a commonly used treatment approach for acquired apraxia of speech (AOS) would enhance relearning of speech production skills. In particular, we examined one main principle, random practice, and compared it to blocked practice. Of importance is the fact that many speech treatments utilize blocked practice, but the literature on motor learning clearly shows that blocked practice facilitates acquisition of target behaviours, but not retention and transfer. The latter two are considered true indices of learning. In two subjects with severe AOS, results showed that random practice facilitated retention whereas blocked practice did not. The present study provides preliminary evidence that these principles may have a similar effect on learning of skilled speech motor acts as they do on learning of limb movements. The results reported here are encouraging and provide justification and focus for further investigation.
C1 Univ Iowa, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
Univ Iowa, Natl Ctr Voice & Speech, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
RP Ballard, KJ (reprint author), Indiana Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Bloomington, IN 47405 USA.
RI Robin, Donald/F-2109-2010; Ballard, Kirrie/F-9558-2011
CR Carroll J. B., 1971, AM HERITAGE WORD FRE
CHAMBERLIN C, 1993, HDB RES SPORT PSYCHO, P213
Chumpelik D., 1984, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V5, P139, DOI 10.1055/s-0028-1085172
Clark HM, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P699, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249567
Darley F.L, 1975, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DELREY P, 1994, RES Q EXERCISE SPORT, V65, P120
Duffy J.R, 1995, MOTOR SPEECH DISORDE
DWORKIN JP, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P280
HAGEMAN CF, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P219
HALL PK, ASSESSMENT AGILIGY C
SPARKS R, 1974, Cortex, V10, P303
HILL B, 1978, VERBAL DYSPRAXIA CLI
HOLTZAPPLE P, 1977, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P46
Kelso J. A. S., 1995, DYNAMIC PATTERNS SEL
KENT RD, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P367
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
LAPOINTE LL, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH PHYSL, P277
Lee T. D., 1985, DIFFERING PERSPECTIV, P3
Lee T. D., 1988, COMPLEX MOVEMENT BEH, P201
LEE TD, 1987, HUM MOVEMENT SCI, V6, P233, DOI 10.1016/0167-9457(87)90014-5
LEE TD, 1983, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V9, P730, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.9.4.730
LEE TD, 1985, J MOTOR BEHAV, V17, P283
LEE TD, 1990, J MOTOR BEHAV, V22, P191
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
McReynolds L. V., 1983, SINGLE SUBJECT EXPT
ROBIN DA, 1999, SAN DIEG STAT U C SA
ROBIN DA, UNPUB VISUOMOTOR TRA
Robin D.A., 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P49
Robin DA, 1992, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V1, P19
ROBIN DA, 1999, WORKSH KANS SPEECH L
ROSENBEK JC, 1973, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V38, P462
RUBOW RT, 1982, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V63, P150
SALMONI AW, 1984, PSYCHOL BULL, V95, P355, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.95.3.355
SCHMIDT RA, 1991, TUTORIALS NEUROSCIEN
SCHMIDT RA, 1992, PSYCHOL SCI, V3, P207, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-9280.1992.tb00029.x
Schmidt RA, 1999, MOTOR CONTROL LEARNI
SCHMIDT RA, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P225, DOI 10.1037/h0076770
SHEA JB, 1979, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V5, P179, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.5.2.179
SHEA JB, 1991, RES Q EXERCISE SPORT, V62, P293
SMITH A, 1995, EXP BRAIN RES, V104, P493
SQUARE PA, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P319
SWINNEN SP, 1990, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V16, P706, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.16.4.706
Thelen E., 1994, DYNAMIC SYSTEMS APPR
Van Riper C., 1958, VOICE ARTICULATION
VANDERLINDEN DW, 1993, PHYS THER, V73, P79
Wambaugh JL, 1998, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V41, P725
WAMBAUGH JL, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P231
Weeks DJ, 1993, J HUMAN MOVEMENT STU, V25, P348
Wertz RT, 1991, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
WULF G, 1994, J MOTOR BEHAV, V26, P348
NR 51
TC 47
Z9 47
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 653
EP 668
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400016
ER
PT J
AU Hickey, EM
Bourgeois, MS
AF Hickey, EM
Bourgeois, MS
TI Health-related quality of life (HR-QOL) in nursing home residents with
dementia: Stability and relationships among measures
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article; Proceedings Paper
CT 29th Clinical Aphasiology Conference (CAC)
CY JUN, 1999
CL KEY WEST, FLORIDA
ID SICKNESS IMPACT PROFILE; OF-LIFE; PARKINSONS-DISEASE; STROKE;
PERCEPTIONS; VALIDATION; OUTCOMES; PATIENT; RATINGS; MEMORY
AB Assessing QOL in nursing home residents with dementia is potentially unreliable or invalid due to their reduced ability to understand and respond to test items. This study measured aspects of health-related QOL (cognition, activities of daily living [ADLs], pain, depression, frequency of problem behaviours, and nursing home satisfaction) in nursing home residents with dementia. The purpose of this analysis was to examine the stability of the measures over time, possible relationships between the measures, and possible differences among proxy and resident responses. Six nursing homes provided the setting for the testing. A total of 105 residents with dementia and 90 nursing assistants participated. Results showed stability over time for all measures. Cognition was positively correlated with ADL ability, and negatively correlated with problem behaviours. Nursing assistants' reports of resident depressive symptoms were positively correlated with their reports of resident problem behaviours. Residents' own reports of depressive symptoms were negatively correlated with nursing home satisfaction. There was no relationship between resident self-reports and nursing assistant proxy reports of depressive symptoms at either testing period.
C1 Florida State Univ, Reg Rehabil Ctr 302, Dept Commun Disorders, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
RP Bourgeois, MS (reprint author), Florida State Univ, Reg Rehabil Ctr 302, Dept Commun Disorders, Tallahassee, FL 32306 USA.
RI Bourgeois, Michelle/F-9397-2015
OI Bourgeois, Michelle/0000-0003-1458-6842
CR Adkins E R, 1993, Rehabil Nurs, V18, P144
ALBERT SM, 1997, MEASUREMENT ELDERLY
Allison PJ, 1997, SOC SCI MED, V45, P221, DOI 10.1016/S0277-9536(96)00339-5
BERGNER M, 1981, MED CARE, V19, P787, DOI 10.1097/00005650-198108000-00001
BERLOWITZ DR, 1995, J AM GERIATR SOC, V43, P799
BOURGEOIS MS, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P1344
BOURGEOIS MS, 1997, GER SOC AM ANN CONV
BROWNE JP, 1994, QUAL LIFE RES, V3, P235, DOI 10.1007/BF00434897
DODDS TA, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P531, DOI 10.1016/0003-9993(93)90119-U
Dorman PJ, 1997, STROKE, V28, P1883
EuroQol Group, 1990, HLTH POLICY, V16, P199
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
George L. K., 1980, QUALITY LIFE OLDER P
GERETY MB, 1994, J GERONTOL, V49, pM2
HAYS RD, 1995, QUAL LIFE RES, V4, P159, DOI 10.1007/BF01833609
Hobson JP, 1997, QUAL LIFE RES, V6, P213
HOWARD K, 1995, DEMENTIA, V6, P113, DOI 10.1159/000106931
KANE R, 1982, PREDICTING COURSE NU
KEMPEN GIJ, 1997, QUAL LIFE RES, V6, P3323
Kwa VIH, 1996, J NEUROL, V243, P599, DOI 10.1007/BF00900948
LAWTON MP, 1994, ALZ DIS ASSOC DIS, V8, P138, DOI 10.1097/00002093-199404000-00015
LUNGH U, 1996, BRIT J NURSING, V5, P1248
Nordeson A, 1998, QUAL LIFE RES, V7, P257, DOI 10.1023/A:1008882132084
Noro A, 1996, QUAL LIFE RES, V5, P355, DOI 10.1007/BF00433920
Orley J, 1994, QUALITY LIFE ASSESSM, P41
PARMELEE PA, 1993, J AM GERIATR SOC, V41, P517
PETO V, 1995, QUAL LIFE RES, V4, P241, DOI 10.1007/BF02260863
PHILP I, 1989, J CLIN EXP GERONTOL, V11, P11
RADOMSKI MV, 1995, AM J OCCUP THER, V49, P487
SIU AL, 1993, QUAL LIFE RES, V2, P253, DOI 10.1007/BF00434797
Sneeuw KCA, 1997, STROKE, V28, P1541
TERI L, 1992, PSYCHOL AGING, V7, P622, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.7.4.622
THAPA K, 1989, ACTA PSYCHIAT SCAND, V80, P267, DOI 10.1111/j.1600-0447.1989.tb01336.x
*UDS DAT MAN SERV, 1993, GUID UN DAT SET MED
vanStraten A, 1997, STROKE, V28, P2155
VIITANEN M, 1988, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V20, P17
WARE JE, 1992, MED CARE, V30, P473, DOI 10.1097/00005650-199206000-00002
Williams LS, 1998, NEUROEPIDEMIOLOGY, V17, P116, DOI 10.1159/000026162
Wu AW, 1997, QUAL LIFE RES, V6, P3
Wyller TB, 1998, STROKE, V29, P363
Wyller TB, 1997, CLIN REHABIL, V11, P139, DOI 10.1177/026921559701100207
YESAVAGE JA, 1983, J PSYCHIAT RES, V17, P37, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(82)90033-4
NR 42
TC 7
Z9 7
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAY-JUN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 5-6
BP 669
EP 679
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 316ME
UT WOS:000087170400017
ER
PT J
AU Turkstra, LS
AF Turkstra, LS
TI Should my shirt be tucked in or left out? The communication contest of
adolescence
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJURY; DISCOURSE; CHILDREN; LANGUAGE; SKILLS; RULES
AB Adolescence is a time of significant psychosocial development. Sophisticated communication skills also emerge during this time, helping adolescents to meet increasingly complex social needs. These developments shape the functional communication goals for adolescents with traumatic brain (TBI). The purpose of this paper is to present the major characteristics of psychosocial development in adolescence, and to relate this information to adolescents with TBI. Data on daily social communication in adolescence are also presented, to complement the psychosocial data and facilitate the identification of functional communication goals.
C1 Case Western Reserve Univ, Dept Commun Sci, Cleveland, OH 44106 USA.
RP Turkstra, LS (reprint author), Case Western Reserve Univ, Dept Commun Sci, 11206 Euclid Ave, Cleveland, OH 44106 USA.
CR ARGYLE M, 1985, BRIT J SOC PSYCHOL, V24, P125
ARGYLE M, 1986, INT J PSYCHOL, V21, P287, DOI 10.1080/00207598608247591
Begali V, 1992, HEAD INJURY CHILDREN
Belenky MF, 1986, WOMENS WAYS KNOWING
BLOSSER J, 1994, PEDIAT TRAMATIC BRAI
BLUMKULKA S, 1990, J PRAGMATICS, V14, P259, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(90)90083-P
BOURGAULT R, 1985, COMMUNICATION SKILLS, P241
Brice A, 1996, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V27, P68
Brown L. M., 1992, M CROSSROADS
CAMPBELL TF, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P567
CHAPMAN SB, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P42, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90020-F
COHEN B, 1989, AI EXPERT, V4, P22
COOPER DC, 1988, LATER LANGUAGE DEV A, P225
CSIKSZENTMIHALY.M, 1986, BEING ADOLESCENT CON
Damon W., 1983, SOCIAL PERSONALITY D
DENNIS M, 1991, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V7, P327
DONDERS J, 1992, J ABNORM CHILD PSYCH, V20, P233, DOI 10.1007/BF00916690
EHRLICH J, 1985, COGNITIVE REHABILITA, P32
Ehrlich J, 1989, Brain Inj, V3, P193, DOI 10.3109/02699058909004552
Erikson E. H., 1959, IDENTITY LIFE CYCLE, V1
Farmer JE, 1996, J LEARN DISABIL, V29, P532
FEENEY TJ, 1998, STUDENTS ACQUIRED BR, P229
Hansen DJ, 1996, BEHAV MODIF, V20, P281, DOI 10.1177/01454455960203003
Hartley LL., 1995, COGNITIVE COMMUNICAT
Hecht M., 1993, AFRICAN AM COMMUNICA
HOLMES CB, 1988, HEAD INJURED COLLEGE
Kenny D. A., 1991, STUDYING INTERPERSON, P275
Kim Young Y., 1986, INTERETHNIC COMMUNIC
LEHR E, 1990, COMMUNITY INTEGRATIO, P301
LURIA AR, 1973, MACLEANS MAGAZI 0119, P44
Muuss REH, 1996, THEORIES ADOLESCENCE
NIPPOLD MA, 1988, LATER LANGUAGE DEV
Paul R., 1995, LANGUAGE DISORDERS I
Piaget J, 1947, PSYCHOL INTELLIGENCE
RADER MC, 1993, WHAT WE KNOW ED STUD
RAFFAELLI M, 1989, J YOUTH ADOLESCENCE, V18, P567, DOI 10.1007/BF02139074
Sillars A. L., 1991, STUDYING INTERPERSON, P197
SMITH F, 1990, VOCATIONAL ED J NOV, P28
STEINBERG L, 1991, YUO YOUR ADOLESCENT
THOMSEN IV, 1984, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V47, P260, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.47.3.260
Towne RL, 1993, LANG SPEECH HEAR SER, V24, P100
*TUCS UN SCH DISTR, 1994, PROF 21 CENT GRAD
Van Leer E, 1999, J COMMUN DISORD, V32, P327, DOI 10.1016/S0021-9924(99)00008-8
Worthington J, 1989, Rehabil Nurs, V14, P118
Ylvisaker M, 1991, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V6, P10, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199103000-00006
Ylvisaker M., 1998, TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJU
NR 46
TC 32
Z9 32
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 4
BP 349
EP 364
DI 10.1080/026870300401405
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 315AV
UT WOS:000087091200002
ER
PT J
AU Togher, L
AF Togher, L
TI Giving information: The importance of context on communicative
opportunity for people with traumatic brain injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID HEAD-INJURY; DISCOURSE; ADULTS; CONVERSATION; POPULATION; LANGUAGE;
PARTNERS
AB This study is one of a series investigating everyday communication skills of people with traumatic brain injury (TBI) using communication partners other than speech pathologists or research assistants. The first of these studies examined telephone conversations where subjects were asked to request specific information during telephone interactions with a range of communication partners. Results indicated that people with TBI were disadvantaged in some of their interactions on the telephone with community agencies and family members during information-seeking interactions, when compared with matched controls. TBI subjects were given less information than matched controls and were also asked for less information. For example, therapists never asked TBI subjects questions to which they didn't already know the answer. This was in contrast to the control interactions, where subjects were asked for novel information.
In the current study seven subjects with TBI were compared with seven matched control subjects across two conditions: a community education information-giving session with two schoolboys, and an information-requesting interaction with the researcher. Exchange structure analysis showed that when placed in an information-giving role, TBI subjects gave similar amounts of information as control subjects. TBI subjects used joke telling as an information-giving device, serving a number of communicative functions, which are discussed. There was no significant difference in the amount of information requested or given by TBI and control subjects in the researcher condition; however there were significant qualitative differences in the nature of the requesting. It has been previously emphasized that people with TBI should be evaluated with a number of interlocutors as part of a thorough communication needs assessment (Hartley 1995). Merely varying the interlocutor is not sufficient, however, as the goal of the interaction and the primary speaking roles of participants are also important, and will determine the language choices available to both speakers. Exchange structure analysis is a useful way to delineate these language choices, as it is interpreted in light of the genre of the interaction and the tenor and communicative purpose of the participants.
C1 Univ Sydney, Sch Commun Sci & Disorders, Lidcome, NSW 2141, Australia.
RP Togher, L (reprint author), Univ Sydney, Sch Commun Sci & Disorders, POB 170, Lidcome, NSW 2141, Australia.
CR Adamovich B, 1992, SCALES COGNITIVE ABI
Bateson G., 1973, STEPS ECOLOGY MIND
Berry M., 1981, STUDIES DISCOURSE AN, P120
Bond F, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P319, DOI 10.1080/026990597123476
Braun C M, 1989, Brain Inj, V3, P345, DOI 10.3109/02699058909004559
CASHION JL, 1987, J LANGUAGE SOCIAL PS, V5, P303
Coelho CA, 1991, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V6, P92, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199106000-00011
COELHO CA, 1991, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V72, P465
Deser T., 1990, BRAIN LANG, V40, P67
EDELSKY C, 1981, LANG SOC, V10, P383
EGGINS S, 1990, THESIS U SYDNEY SYDN
Eggins Suzanne, 1997, ANAL CASUAL CONVERSA
EHRLICH J, 1985, COGNITIVE REHABILITA, P32
Ehrlich J, 1989, Brain Inj, V3, P193, DOI 10.3109/02699058909004552
Fairclough N., 1992, DISCOURSE SOCIAL CHA
FISHMAN PM, 1978, LANGUAGE GENDER SOC, P89
Giles G M, 1988, Brain Inj, V2, P75, DOI 10.3109/02699058809150933
GILES H, 1976, HUMOUR LAUGHTER THEO, P75
Halliday M. A., 1994, INTRO FUNCTIONAL GRA, V3rd
Hartley LL., 1995, COGNITIVE COMMUNICAT
Holmes J., 1995, WOMEN MEN POLITENESS
Jefferson G, 1987, TALK SOCIAL ORG, P152
JENNETT B, 1977, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V40, P291, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.40.3.291
HARTLEY L L, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P267, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008097
LILES BZ, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P356
MALIA K, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P697, DOI 10.3109/02699059509008226
Malts DN, 1982, LANGUAGE SOCIAL IDEN, P196
Martin J. R., 1992, ENGLISH TEXT SYSTEM
MCDONALD S, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P28, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1003
McTear Michael, 1991, MISCOMMUNICATION PRO, P195
MENTIS M, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P88
Mulkay M, 1988, HUMOUR
Norrick Neal R., 1993, CONVERSATIONAL JOKIN
PARSONS CL, 1989, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V17, P37
PETTERSEN L, 1991, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V73, P1139, DOI 10.2466/PMS.73.8.1139-1150
Poynton C., 1985, LANGUAGE GENDER MAKI
PRUTTING CA, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P105
MENTIS M, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P583
RUSSELL WR, 1961, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V5, P4
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
SCHLOSS PJ, 1985, APPL RES MENT RETARD, V6, P269, DOI 10.1016/0270-3092(85)90001-3
Togher L, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P559
Togher L, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P755, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249571
Togher L, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P709
Togher L, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P491, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248486
Togher L, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P169, DOI 10.1080/026990597123629
VENTOLA E, 1987, STRUCTURAL SOCIAL IN
WEST C, 1984, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V7, P107
NR 48
TC 23
Z9 26
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 4
BP 365
EP 390
DI 10.1080/026870300401414
PG 26
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 315AV
UT WOS:000087091200003
ER
PT J
AU Dennis, M
Barnes, MA
AF Dennis, M
Barnes, MA
TI Speech acts after mild or severe childhood head injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID WORKING-MEMORY; BURTON-ROBERTS; CHILDREN; PRESUPPOSITION; KNOWLEDGE;
DEFICITS; AGE; COMPREHENSION; CONSTRAINTS; ADOLESCENTS
AB Children with head injury have impairments in pragmatic language. We investigated speech acts, a form of pragmatic communication, after mild or severe childhood head injury in relation to two linguistic constituents of speech acts competence (lexical-semantic knowledge, pragmatic inference) and two cognitive resources (world knowledge, working memory). Children with head injury had difficulty producing speech acts, and the magnitude of this deficit varied with head injury severity. Within the head injury group, semantic reference and information were unimportant for speech acts, which were, however, significantly predicted by pragmatic inference and working memory. The results are discussed in relation to three general issues : the effect of severity of childhood head injury on linguistic and cognitive morbidity; the relation between semantic reference, pragmatic inference and more general cognitive resources in the production of speech acts; and why semantic competence at a lexical level may not be sufficient for the production of pragmatic utterances.
C1 Hosp Sick Children, Dept Psychol Res, Toronto, ON M5G 1X8, Canada.
Univ Toronto, Dept Surg, Toronto, ON, Canada.
Univ Toronto, Dept Pediat, Toronto, ON, Canada.
RP Dennis, M (reprint author), Hosp Sick Children, Dept Psychol Res, 555 Univ Ave, Toronto, ON M5G 1X8, Canada.
CR ABBEDUTO L, 1985, J CHILD LANG, V12, P621
Asarnow R., 1995, TRAUMATIC HEAD INJUR, P117
ASTINGTON JW, 1991, BRIT J DEV PSYCHOL, V9, P7
Bara BG, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V59, P7, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1812
Barnes MA, 1996, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V61, P216, DOI 10.1006/jecp.1996.0015
Barnes MA, 1999, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V15, P1
Beck W. S., 1982, B12, VII, P1
BEUN RJ, 1994, J PRAGMATICS, V21, P191, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(94)90019-1
BJORKLUND DF, 1986, J EXP CHILD PSYCHOL, V41, P367, DOI 10.1016/0022-0965(86)90045-7
Booth JR, 1995, COGNITIVE DEV, V10, P529, DOI 10.1016/0885-2014(95)90025-X
BOOTH JR, 1994, 14 U GEORG MAR NAT R
BURTONROBERTS N, 1989, J LINGUIST, V25, P437, DOI 10.1017/S0022226700014171
CAMPBELL TF, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P567
Carey S., 1982, LANG ACQUIS, P347
CARRELL PL, 1984, LANG LEARN, V34, P1, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-1770.1984.tb00993.x
Carroll J. B., 1971, WORD FREQUENCY BOOK
CARROLL JB, 1973, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V12, P563, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(73)80036-2
CHAPMAN SB, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P42, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90020-F
DENCKLA M B, 1974, Cortex, V10, P186
Dennis M, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P450, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1886
Dennis M, 1996, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V12, P77
DENNIS M, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P428, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90149-B
Eisele JA, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P376, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1883
ENGLE RW, 1991, J EDUC RES, V84, P253
EWINGCOBBS L, 1987, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V9, P575, DOI 10.1080/01688638708410770
Fillmore C. J., 1968, UNIVERSALS LINGUIST, P1
GAIDOLFI E, 1980, ITAL J NEUROL SCI, V1, P65
GOLDMAN R, 1974, GOLDMANFRISTOEWOODCO
Hall W. S., 1986, MODELS MODULES STUDI, P26
HALL WS, 1987, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V16, P289, DOI 10.1007/BF01069284
HOPMANN MR, 1978, J CHILD LANG, V5, P295
HORN LR, 1990, J LINGUIST, V26, P483, DOI 10.1017/S0022226700014766
HULME C, 1995, J CHILD PSYCHOL PSYC, V36, P373, DOI 10.1111/j.1469-7610.1995.tb01297.x
JORDAN F, 1990, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V18, P69
Jordan F M, 1988, Brain Inj, V2, P179, DOI 10.3109/02699058809150943
JORDAN F M, 1990, Brain Injury, V4, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699059009026145
JUST MA, 1973, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V12, P21, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(73)80057-X
KARTTUNE.L, 1971, LANGUAGE, V47, P340, DOI 10.2307/412084
KASHER A, 1991, J PRAGMATICS, V16, P381, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(91)90132-H
KELLEHER TR, 1975, THESIS U ROCHESTER R
KEMPSON RM, 1975, CAMBRIDGE STUDIES LI, V15
Kiparsky Paul, 1970, PROGR LINGUISTICS, P143
McDonald S, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P81, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0038
Miller G. A., 1976, LANGUAGE PERCEPTION
MORROW DG, 1990, INFERENCES TEXT COMP, P123
NATSOPOULOS D, 1987, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V16, P133, DOI 10.1007/BF01071999
Paradis M, 1998, J NEUROLINGUIST, V11, P1, DOI 10.1016/S0911-6044(98)00001-3
PHINNEY M, 1981, LANG ACQUIS, P116
Scholnick E. K., 1991, PERSPECTIVES LANGUAG, P397
SCOVILLE RP, 1980, J CHILD LANG, V7, P381
Searle J., 1969, SPEECH ACTS ESSAY PH
SEUREN PAM, 1990, J LINGUIST, V26, P425, DOI 10.1017/S0022226700014730
SINGER MS, 1988, J GENET PSYCHOL, V148, P189
Toglia M. P., 1978, HDB SEMANTIC WORD NO
VOSNIADOU S, 1982, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V11, P77, DOI 10.1007/BF01067503
Wechsler D, 1974, WECHSLER INTELLIGENC
Wechsler D, 1991, WECHSLER INTELLIGENC, V3rd
WEIGELCRUMP CI, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P1
WELLMAN HM, 1979, CHILD DEV, V50, P79, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1979.tb02982.x
WETZEL WF, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P286, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90102-K
WIIG EH, 1995, TEST LANGUAGE COMPET
WINOGRON HW, 1984, J CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V6, P269, DOI 10.1080/01688638408401218
Yeates K., 1999, PEDIAT NEUROPSYCHOLO, P3
YEATES KO, 1999, PEDIAT NEUROPSYCHOLO, P92
NR 64
TC 28
Z9 28
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 4
BP 391
EP 405
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 315AV
UT WOS:000087091200004
ER
PT J
AU Ylvisaker, M
Feeney, T
AF Ylvisaker, M
Feeney, T
TI Reflections on Dobermanns, poodles, and social rehabilitation for
difficult-to-serve individuals with traumatic brain injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLOSED-HEAD-INJURY; FOLLOW-UP; BEHAVIORAL MOMENTUM; FRONTAL-LOBE;
CHILDREN; COMPREHENSION; DISABILITIES; METAPHOR; DAMAGE; INTERVENTIONS
C1 Coll St Rose, Dept Commun Disorders, Albany, NY USA.
Wildwood Inst, Wildwood TBI Behav Resource Project, Schenectady, NY USA.
RP Ylvisaker, M (reprint author), 1171 Van Antwerp Rd, Schenectady, NY 12309 USA.
CR ADAMS JH, 1980, J CLIN PATHOL, V33, P1132, DOI 10.1136/jcp.33.12.1132
Alderman N, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V6, P161, DOI 10.1080/713755505
BAER DM, 1987, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V20, P313, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1987.20-313
BANNERMAN DJ, 1990, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V23, P79, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1990.23-79
BARKLEY RA, 1987, DEFIANT CHILDREN CLI
BILLOW RM, 1975, DEV PSYCHOL, V11, P415, DOI 10.1037/h0076668
Blumer D., 1975, PSYCHIAT ASPECTS NEU, P151
Bond M. R., 1990, REHABILITATION ADULT
BROOKS DN, 1983, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V46, P336, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.46.4.336
Brooks N., 1987, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V2, P1, DOI 10.1097/00001199-198709000-00003
BROWN F, 1993, EDUC TRAIN MENT RET, V28, P318
BROWN G, 1981, PSYCHOL MED, V11, P63
Carney N, 1999, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V14, P277, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199906000-00008
Carr EG, 1998, ANTECEDENT CONTROL, P3
Carr E. G., 1994, COMMUNICATION BASED
CARR EG, 1997, POSITIVE BEHAV SUPPO, P403
Conger John Janeway, 1984, ADOLESCENCE YOUTH
CZIKSZENTMILHAL.M, 1984, BEING ADOLESCENT
Damasio A., 1994, DESCARTES ERROR
DAMASIO AR, 1991, FRONTAL LOBE FUNCTION AND DYSFUNCTION, P217
DENNIS M, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V39, P428, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90149-B
Dunlap G, 1994, J Appl Behav Anal, V27, P505, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1994.27-505
FEENEY TJ, 1995, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V10, P67
FEENEY TJ, 1997, CHILDREN ACQUIRED BR, P229
FILLEY CM, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P194
Fletcher JM, 1995, HDB PEDIAT PSYCHOL, P362
FOWLER R, 1996, OREGON C MONOGRAPH, V8, P137
Frankl V. E., 1984, MANS SEARCH MEANING
GARDNER H, 1974, CHILD DEV, V45, P84, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1974.tb00562.x
HALL KM, 1994, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V75, P876, DOI 10.1016/0003-9993(94)90112-0
Hallowell E., 1994, DRIVEN DISTRACTION
Harchik A E, 1993, Ann Clin Psychiatry, V5, P151, DOI 10.3109/10401239309148979
HARLAN D, 1994, MAPPING MOTIVATIONAL
Jacobs HE, 1993, BEHAV ANAL GUIDELINE
KAVALE K, 1983, J LEARN DISABIL, V16, P165
KENNEDY CH, 1995, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V28, P97, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1995.28-97
KLONOFF PS, 1986, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V8, P469, DOI 10.1080/01688638608405171
Lakoff G., 1980, METAPHORS WE LIVE
Lakoff George, 1998, PHILOS FLESH EMBODIE
LEVIN HS, 1991, FRONTAL LOBE FUNCTION AND DYSFUNCTION, P318
LEWIN J, 1998, COLLABORATIVE BRAIN
LEWIS L, 1990, J NERV MENT DIS, V178, P69, DOI 10.1097/00005053-199002000-00001
LEZAK MD, 1986, REHABIL PSYCHOL, V31, P241, DOI 10.1037//0090-5550.31.4.241
Lezak MD, 1987, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V2, P57, DOI DOI 10.1097/00001199-198703000-00009
Livingston MG, 1988, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V3, P6, DOI 10.1097/00001199-198812000-00004
MACE FC, 1988, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V21, P123, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1988.21-123
Mace FC, 1997, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V30, P1, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1997.30-1
MACE FC, 1990, J EXP ANAL BEHAV, V54, P163, DOI 10.1901/jeab.1990.54-163
Mann L., 1979, TRAIL PROCESS HIST P
MCINTOSH R, 1991, J LEARN DISABIL, V24, P451
MCKINLAY WW, 1981, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V44, P529
MENDELSOHN D, 1992, CHILD NERV SYST, V8, P445, DOI 10.1007/BF00274405
Nippold M. A., 1998, LATER LANGUAGE DEV S
PEARSON BZ, 1990, J CHILD LANG, V17, P185
PETTERSEN L, 1991, PERCEPT MOTOR SKILL, V73, P1139, DOI 10.2466/PMS.73.8.1139-1150
POLLACK I, 1994, ED DIMENSIONS ACQUIR, P303
Prigatano GP, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL R
Robinson TR, 1999, J EDUC PSYCHOL, V91, P195, DOI 10.1037//0022-0663.91.2.195
ROLLS ET, 1994, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V57, P1518, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.57.12.1518
Shammi P, 1999, BRAIN, V122, P657, DOI 10.1093/brain/122.4.657
Singley M. K., 1989, TRANSFER COGNITIVE S
Skinner B. F., 1938, BEHAV ORGANISMS EXPT
STUSS DT, IN PRESS MEMORY CONS
Stuss DT, 1986, FRONTAL LOBES
THOMSEN IV, 1984, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V47, P260, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.47.3.260
Thomsen I V, 1974, Scand J Rehabil Med, V6, P180
Thomsen I V, 1987, Brain Inj, V1, P131, DOI 10.3109/02699058709034452
WAGGONER JE, 1985, CHILD DEV, V56, P1156, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1985.tb00184.x
WEDDELL R, 1980, PSYCHOL MED, V10, P257
WIENER J, 1998, LEARNING DISABILITIE, V12, P40
World Health Organization, 1980, INT CLASS IMP DIS HA
World Health Organization (WHO), 1998, COMM LANG FUNCT DIS
Ylvisaker M., 1998, COLLABORATIVE BRAIN
YVLISAKER M, 1998, TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJU, P271
YVLISAKER M, 1996, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V17, P217
YVLISAKER M, 1995, SEMINARS SPEECH LANG, V16, P32
YVLISAKER M, 1987, COMMUNITY REENTRY HE
YVLISAKER M, 1985, CLIN MANAGEMENT NEUR, P243
YVLISAKER M, 1994, TOP LANG DISORD, V15, P37
YVLISAKER M, 1999, CLIN PRACTICE MANAGE, P117
YVLISAKER M, 1998, TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJU, P221
ZARAGOZA P, 1991, 42ND ANN M EUR ASS A, V1, P260
NR 82
TC 14
Z9 16
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 4
BP 407
EP 431
PG 25
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 315AV
UT WOS:000087091200005
ER
PT J
AU Godfrey, HPD
Shum, D
AF Godfrey, HPD
Shum, D
TI Executive functioning and the application of social skills following
traumatic brain injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLOSED-HEAD-INJURY; ADJUSTMENT; IMPAIRMENT; REHABILITATION;
COMMUNICATION; CONVERSATION; DYSFUNCTION
AB Many adults with a traumatic brain injury (TBI) are less competent conversationalists following their injury. Reduced conversational competency is a clinically significant problem. It is associated with a variety of adverse psychosocial outcomes following TBI. Unfortunately, direct attempts to improve the conversational competency of adults with TBI using social skills training has had limited success.
This article applies McFall's (1982) social skills model to conversational competency following TBI. This social skills model is based on two critical assumptions. First, in order to be judged socially competent, a person needs to possess the social skills required in a given social context. Second, that social competence requires the ability to apply social skills flexibly according to the rules of social interaction. It is argued that the inability to flexibly apply behaviour according to rules (executive dysfunction) could account for many characteristics of conversation following TBI. This argument is illustrated through the detailed application of Norman and Shallice's (1986) theory of executive functioning to research on conversational behaviour following TBI. It is concluded that fostering appropriate social environments, and providing support are more likely to be effective than remedial social skills training.
C1 Univ Otago, Dept Psychol, Dunedin, New Zealand.
Griffith Univ, Sch Appl Psychol, Brisbane, Qld, Australia.
RP Godfrey, HPD (reprint author), Univ Otago, Dept Psychol, POB 56, Dunedin, New Zealand.
RI Shum, David/A-3914-2008
CR ALEXANDER MP, 1987, NEUROBEHAVIOURAL REC
Argyle M., 1969, SOCIAL INTERACTION
ARGYLE M, ANATOMY RELATIONSHIP
BARCH D, 1994, J ABNORM PSYCHOL, V103, P241, DOI 10.1037/0021-843X.103.2.241
Bond F, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P319, DOI 10.1080/026990597123476
BROTHERTON FA, 1988, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V69, P827
Coelho CA, 1991, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V6, P92, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199106000-00011
DERLEGA VJ, 1986, FRIENDSHIP SOCIAL IN
ELSASS L, 1987, PSYCHOL MED, V17, P67
GAJAR A, 1984, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V17, P353, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1984.17-353
Gale S D, 1995, J Int Neuropsychol Soc, V1, P17
Godfraind T, 1996, NAT MED, V2, P2
GODFREY H P D, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P207, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008091
GODFREY HPD, 1988, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V69, P458
GODFREY HPD, 1993, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V15, P503, DOI 10.1080/01688639308402574
GODFREY HPD, 1993, NEW ZEAL MED J, V106, P301
GODFREY HPD, 1989, PSYCHOL MED, V19, P175
HALFORD WK, 1991, CLIN PSYCHOL REV, V11, P23, DOI 10.1016/0272-7358(91)90136-I
Heaton R. K., 1981, MANUAL WISCONSIN CAR
HORNER RH, 1990, J ASSOC PERS SEVERE, V15, P125
JOHNSON DA, 1987, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V26, P289
LEVIN HS, 1976, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V39, P1062, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.39.11.1062
LEZAK MD, 1986, REHABIL PSYCHOL, V31, P241, DOI 10.1037//0090-5550.31.4.241
Linscott RJ, 1996, BRAIN INJURY, V10, P397, DOI 10.1080/026990596124269
Mandler JM, 1984, STORIES SCRIPTS SCEN
McDonald S, 1998, BRAIN LANG, V61, P88, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1846
MCFALL RM, 1982, BEHAV ASSESS, V4, P1
MENTIS M, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P88
NEWTON A, 1985, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V24, P225
Norman D. A., 1986, CONSCIOUSNESS SELF R, V4
ODDY M, 1985, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V48, P564, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.48.6.564
PONSFORD J, 1992, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V14, P822, DOI 10.1080/01688639208402865
Prigatano GP, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL R
REASON JT, 1982, ABSENTMINDED PSYCHOL
RIPICH DN, 1994, ALZ DIS ASSOC DIS, V8, P95, DOI 10.1097/00002093-199404000-00011
SchmitterEdgecombe M, 1996, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V11, P17, DOI 10.1097/00001199-199604000-00003
SHALLICE T, 1982, PHILOS T ROY SOC B, V298, P199, DOI 10.1098/rstb.1982.0082
Shallice T, 1991, FRONTAL LOBE FUNCTIO
Shum D. H. K., 1990, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P151, DOI 10.1080/13854049008401508
SHUM DHK, 1990, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V12, P247, DOI 10.1080/01688639008400971
Smith LM, 1995, FAMILY SUPPORT PROGR
SPENCE SE, 1993, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V32, P309
STAMBROOK M, 1990, Brain Injury, V4, P183, DOI 10.3109/02699059009026164
TATE RL, 1989, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V52, P1128, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.52.10.1128
THOMSEN IV, 1984, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V47, P260, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.47.3.260
Trower P, 1978, SOCIAL SKILLS MENTAL
WEDDELL R, 1980, PSYCHOL MED, V10, P257
Williamson J. G., 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY CLIN
NR 48
TC 32
Z9 34
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD APR
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 4
BP 433
EP 444
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 315AV
UT WOS:000087091200006
ER
PT J
AU Ulatowska, HK
Sadowska, M
Kadzielawa, D
Kordys, J
Rymarczyk, K
AF Ulatowska, HK
Sadowska, M
Kadzielawa, D
Kordys, J
Rymarczyk, K
TI Linguistic and cognitive aspects of proverb processing in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID BRAIN-DAMAGED PATIENTS; COMPREHENSION; METAPHOR; ADULTS
AB The main purpose of this study was to explore proverb competence in aphasia within an ethnographic framework. A battery of proverb tests and a questionnaire were constructed to collect the data. The battery was designed to explore the changes in the form and the meaning of proverbs resulting from aphasia, while the questionnaire served the purpose of tapping aphasics' knowledge of proverb use. The experimental battery was designed to include the dichotomy of in-context and out-of-context tasks. The basic assumption that underlay the analysis of the experimental data was that, to understand the mechanism of proverb use in aphasia, one should include qualitative as well as quantitative analyses. The aphasic subjects, who exhibited a mild level of language impairment, to a great extent preserved the ability to comprehend proverbs and the ability to use them under experimental conditions. Methodological guidelines coming from this research are discussed.
C1 Univ Texas, Callier Ctr Commun Disorders, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
Polish Acad Sci, Warsaw, Poland.
Univ Warsaw, Warsaw, Poland.
M Nencki Inst Expt Biol, PL-02093 Warsaw, Poland.
RP Ulatowska, HK (reprint author), Univ Texas, Callier Ctr Commun Disorders, 1966 Inwood Rd, Dallas, TX 75235 USA.
CR ACHUTINA TW, 1989, POROZDENIJE RIECHI N
ANDREASEN NC, 1977, COMPR PSYCHIAT, V18, P465, DOI 10.1016/0010-440X(77)90046-3
Benjamin J, 1944, LANGUAGE THOUGHT SCH, P65
BENTON AL, 1968, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V6, P53, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(68)90038-9
BROMLEY DB, 1957, J GERONTOL, V12, P318
BRONNER AF, 1927, MANUAL INDIVIDUAL TE
BROWNELL HH, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P310, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90022-2
Bryan K., 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LAN
BUEHLER K, 1907, ARCH GESAAMTEN PSYCH, V9, P297
Burgess C., 1996, METAPHOR SYMBOLIC AC, V11, P67, DOI 10.1207/s15327868ms1101_4
Chapman SB, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P337, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248475
Cummings J. L., 1985, CLIN NEUROPSYCHIATRY
DELIS DC, 1984, UNPUB CALIFORNIA PRO
DOUGLAS M, 1987, AINSI PENSENT I
Dundes Alen, 1975, PROVERBIUM, V25, P961
ELMORE CM, 1957, J CLIN PSYCHOL, V13, P263, DOI 10.1002/1097-4679(195707)13:3<263::AID-JCLP2270130308>3.0.CO;2-C
FILLMORE CJ, 1976, STAT METHOD LINGUIST, P5
Gibbs R. W., 1994, POETICS MIND FIGURAT
GIBBS RW, 1995, PSYCHOL BULL, V118, P133, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.118.1.133
Goldstein K, 1941, PSYCHOL MONOGR, V53, P2
Goodglass H, 1983, ASSESSMENT APHASIA R, V2nd
Gorham D. R., 1956, PROVERBS TEST
Hodges J. R., 1994, COGNITIVE ASSESSMENT
HONECK RP, 1980, COGNITION FIGURATIVE, P127
HONECK RP, 1994, METAPHOR SYMB ACT, V9, P85, DOI 10.1207/s15327868ms0902_1
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KEMPER S, 1981, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V10, P179, DOI 10.1007/BF01068037
KRIKMANN AA, 1978, PAREMIOLOGICHESKY SB, P82
Lakoff G., 1980, METAPHORS WE LIVE
LURIA AR, 1979, JAZIK SOZNANIJE LANG
LURIA AR, 1973, SCHEMA NEJROPSICHOLO
Nippold MA, 1997, J SPEECH LANG HEAR R, V40, P245
Nippold MA, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, P166
Permyakov G. L., 1979, PROVERB FOLK TALE NO
Piaget J, 1923, ARCH PSYCHOLOGIE, V18, P273
Piaget J., 1969, LANGUAGE THOUGHT CHI
RAVEN Y, 1969, COLOURED PROGRESSIVE
REVZIN II, 1977, SOVREMENNAYA STRUKTU
ROGERS TB, 1986, CANADIAN FOLKLORE CA, V8, P87
Terman L. M., 1937, MEASURING INTELLIGEN
TERMAN LM, 1973, STANFORDBINET INTELL
ULATOWSKA HK, 1993, NARRATIVE DISCOURSE IN NEUROLOGICALLY IMPAIRED AND NORMAL AGING ADULTS, P171
ULATOWSKA HK, 1997, PORADNIK JEZYKOWY, V9, P22
ULATOWSKA HK, 1996, PORADNIK JEZYKOWY, V7, P32
Ulatowska HK, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P619, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249562
ULATOWSKA HK, 1993, P CLIN APH C SED AR
ULATOWSKA HK, 1998, PROVERBIUM YB INT PR, V15, P329
Van Lancker D, 1990, Behav Neurol, V3, P169, DOI 10.3233/BEN-1990-3304
VANLANCKER DR, 1987, BRAIN LANG, V32, P265, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(87)90128-3
VOIGT V, 1978, PAREMIOLOGICHESKY SB, P230
Wechsler D., 1955, WECHSLER ADULT INTEL
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
Wechsler D, 1981, WECHSLER ADULT INTEL
WEYLMAN ST, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P580, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90087-4
WINNER E, 1977, BRAIN, V100, P717, DOI 10.1093/brain/100.4.717
ZEIGARNIK BW, 1962, PATOLOGIJA MYSCHLENE
NR 56
TC 3
Z9 3
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 3
BP 227
EP 250
PG 24
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 294DV
UT WOS:000085896800001
ER
PT J
AU Douglas, JM
O'Flaherty, CA
Snow, PC
AF Douglas, JM
O'Flaherty, CA
Snow, PC
TI Measuring perception of communicative ability: the development and
evaluation of the La Trobe communication questionnaire
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJURY; CLOSED-HEAD-INJURY; SPEECH STYLE; DEFICITS;
ADULTS; RELATIVES; GENDER; ISSUES
AB The La Trobe communication questionnaire (LCQ) was designed to measure perceived communicative ability. It was developed to enable collection of information from various sources including the self-perceptions of individuals as well as the perceptions of close others. In this paper we report the development of the questionnaire, its psychometric properties and normative data for the perceptions of young adults and the comparative perceptions of their close others. Participants in the study were 256 adults comprising 147 primary subjects and 109 close others. Primary subjects ranged in age from 16-39 years with a mean age of 20.6 years. The 30 item questionnaire was structured using a modified Likert-type scale with four possible levels of response: (1) never or rarely; (2) sometimes; (3) often; and (4) usually or always. Internal consistency was high (Cronbach's alpha = 0.8596) and good stability over time for self-report was demonstrated (r = 0.7558). There was a significant difference (p < 0.0001) between the perceptions of primary subjects and close others with primary subjects perceiving themselves to have more frequent communication difficulties, than did their close others. Overall, our findings suggest that the LCQ is a promising means of measuring perceived communicative ability in young adults.
C1 La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Melbourne, Vic, Australia.
RP Douglas, JM (reprint author), La Trobe Univ, Sch Human Commun Sci, Melbourne, Vic, Australia.
RI Douglas, Jacinta/C-2380-2009
CR ALLEN C C, 1990, Brain Injury, V4, P7, DOI 10.3109/02699059009026143
Anastasi A., 1982, PSYCHOL TESTING
CAVALLO M M, 1992, Brain Injury, V6, P327, DOI 10.3109/02699059209034947
Chelune G. J., 1986, ADV CLIN NEUROPSYCHO, V3, P95
COELHO CA, 1991, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V72, P465
COMREY AL, 1992, FIRST COURSE FACTOR
CRAWFORD M, 1987, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V16, P83
CROWNE DP, 1960, J CONSULT PSYCHOL, V24, P349, DOI 10.1037/h0047358
Damico J. S., 1985, COMMUNICATION SKILLS, P165
DEPOMPEI R, 1989, TOP LANG DISORD, V9, P78
DILLER L, 1981, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V49, P822, DOI 10.1037//0022-006X.49.6.822
DOUGLAS J, 1994, THESIS U VICTORIA BR
Ehrlich J, 1989, Brain Inj, V3, P193, DOI 10.3109/02699058909004552
ELSASS L, 1987, PSYCHOL MED, V17, P67
Enderby P, 1997, THERAPY OUTCOME MEAS
FORDYCE DJ, 1986, REHABIL PSYCHOL, V31, P217, DOI 10.1037//0090-5550.31.4.217
FURROW D, 1990, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V19, P375, DOI 10.1007/BF01068885
GILLIES S, 1990, UNPUB PERCEPTIONS CO
GODFREY HPD, 1993, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V15, P503, DOI 10.1080/01688639308402574
GOLDSTEIN G, 1995, INT J REHABILITATION, V1, P23
Grice H. P., 1975, SYNTAX SEMANTICS, P41, DOI DOI 10.1017/S0022226700005296
Hagen C, 1984, LANGUAGE DISORDERS A, P245
HARTLEY L L, 1992, Brain Injury, V6, P271, DOI 10.3109/02699059209029669
HARTLEY LL, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P353, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249088
Kreutzer JS, 1996, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V77, P116, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(96)90155-0
MARTIN CL, 1990, CHILD DEV, V61, P1891, DOI 10.1111/j.1467-8624.1990.tb03573.x
MCKINLAY WW, 1984, J CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V6, P87, DOI 10.1080/01688638408401199
MCKINLAY WW, 1981, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V44, P527, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.44.6.527
McNeill-Brown D., 1997, INT PERSPECTIVES TRA, P247
Prigatano G. P., 1990, CLIN NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P163, DOI 10.1080/13854049008401509
Prigatano G. P., 1991, AWARENESS DEFICIT BR, P111
PRIGATANO GP, 1990, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V71, P1058
Prigatano GP, 1986, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, P1
ROMANO MD, 1974, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V6, P1
RUBIN DL, 1983, LANG SPEECH, V26, P273
SELLTIZ C, 1976, RES METHODS SOCIAL R
SNOW P, 1999, 22 ANN BRAIN IMP C S
SNOW P, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P365, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248210
Spender D., 1981, MAN MADE LANGUAGE
STRAHAN R, 1972, J CLIN PSYCHOL, V28, P191, DOI 10.1002/1097-4679(197204)28:2<191::AID-JCLP2270280220>3.0.CO;2-G
Tabachnick B.G., 1996, USING MULTIVARIATE S, V2nd
Tanner D. C., 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P79, DOI 10.1080/02687038808248889
TYERMAN A, 1984, INT J REHABIL RES, V7, P11, DOI 10.1097/00004356-198403000-00002
NR 43
TC 43
Z9 45
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 3
BP 251
EP 268
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 294DV
UT WOS:000085896800002
ER
PT J
AU Garcia, LJ
Barrette, J
Laroche, C
AF Garcia, LJ
Barrette, J
Laroche, C
TI Perceptions of the obstacles to work reintegration for persons with
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID MODEL
AB The Handicap Creation Process Model (HCPM) suggests that persons with disabilities may experience difficulties at work because of environmental barriers. The present study reports on the perceptions of persons with aphasia, of speech-language pathologists and of employers regarding the potential barriers to job (re)integration. Statements were gathered using a focus group and a nominal group technique, and analysed according to whether the barriers were perceived as residing with the individual, with the organization or with society. Qualitative differences were noted among the perceptions of the three groups. Speech-language pathologists focused on the personal and societal barriers where employers focused on the organizational barriers. Persons with aphasia perceived barriers at all levels. Suggestions for strategies for eliminating these barriers for persons with communication disorders were also collected.
C1 Univ Ottawa, Fac Hlth Sci, Sch Rehabil Sci, Audiol & Speech Language Pathol Programme, Ottawa, ON K1N 6N5, Canada.
Univ Ottawa, Fac Adm, Ottawa, ON K1N 6N5, Canada.
RP Garcia, LJ (reprint author), Univ Ottawa, Fac Hlth Sci, Sch Rehabil Sci, Audiol & Speech Language Pathol Programme, 545 King Edward, Ottawa, ON K1N 6N5, Canada.
CR BLACKSCHAFFER RM, 1990, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V71, P285
BROTHERSON MJ, 1994, TOP EARLY CHILD SPEC, V14, P101
BRUNELLE J, 1988, TECHNIQUES PRELEVEME, P179
CAREY ML, 1992, BLS B, V2402
CARRIERO MR, 1987, CORTEX, V26, P667
ELLIOTT G, 1996, FACTS AGEING CANADA
Fougeyrollas P, 1997, ICIDH ENV FACTORS IN, V9, P32
FOUGEYROLLAS P, 1997, REVISION QUEBEC CLAS
Johnson R, 1987, Int Disabil Stud, V9, P49
KUTSCHER RE, 1992, OCCUPATIONAL OUTLOOK, V36, P2
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Lepage C, 1998, PHYS THER, V78, P458
Morgan DL, 1988, FOCUS GROUPS QUALITA, V16
Petheram B, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P435, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249542
ROLLAND J, 1991, LAPHASIQUE, P195
World Health Organization, 1997, ICIDH 2 INT CLASS IM
World Health Organization, 1980, INT CLASS IMP DIS HA
NR 17
TC 20
Z9 20
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 3
BP 269
EP 290
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 294DV
UT WOS:000085896800003
ER
PT J
AU Cholewa, J
AF Cholewa, J
TI The Neurolinguistic Evaluation System (NES): A computer-based tool for
single-case therapy research
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APHASIA
C1 Univ Educ, D-69120 Heidelberg, Germany.
RP Cholewa, J (reprint author), Univ Educ, Keplerstr 87, D-69120 Heidelberg, Germany.
CR BASSO A, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P17
BERNDT RS, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P503
BROOKSHIRE RH, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V48, P342
Caramazza A., 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P383
Coltheart M., 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P193
DeBleser R, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOL REHABIL, V7, P339, DOI 10.1080/713755540
Ellis A. W., 1982, NORMALITY PATHOLOGY, P113
Ellis A. W., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P287
Hays W. L., 1981, STATISTICS
Hillis A. E., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P449
HOLLAND AL, 1992, NIDCD MONOGRAPH, V2, P147
HOWARD D, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P39
HOWARD D, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P89
KEARNS KP, 1992, NICD MONOGRAPH, V2, P7
KLAUER KJ, 1987, KRITERIUMSORIENTLIER
Kuhn T. S., 1970, STRUCTURE SCI REVOLU
MCREYNOLDS LJ, 1983, SINBLE SUBJECT EXPT
Nickels L, 1996, APHASIOLOGY, V10, P109, DOI 10.1080/02687039608248401
PRING TR, 1986, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V21, P103
RIDDOCH MJ, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P1
SCHWARTZ MF, 1992, NIDCD MONOGRAPH, V2, P17
SERON X, 1989, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P1
Shallice T., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY MENT
Siegel S., 1956, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
WILLMES K, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P415, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249092
WILSON B, 1990, APPL COGNITIVE PSYCH, V4, P247, DOI 10.1002/acp.2350040403
NR 26
TC 0
Z9 0
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD MAR
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 3
BP 291
EP 310
PG 20
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 294DV
UT WOS:000085896800004
ER
PT J
AU Zipin, LM
Tompkins, CA
Kasper, SC
AF Zipin, LM
Tompkins, CA
Kasper, SC
TI Effects of foregrounding on predictive inference generation by normally
ageing adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID TEXT COMPREHENSION; NARRATIVE TEXT; OCCUR ONLINE; CONTRIBUTE; RECALL
AB Foregrounding, a technique that highlights concepts in discourse, was investigated as a facilitator of predictive inferencing by normally ageing and young adults. Study participants listened to two versions of short discourse stimuli. In foregrounded versions, two consecutive sentences referred to concepts that led to an implied outcome. Control passages contained the same key lexical elements, but did not predict the outcome. Inference generation was evaluated implicitly, using a word recognition task with a response deadline. Target words reflected predictive inferences from the foregrounded passages. An influence of foregrounding was evident in recognition accuracy for both groups and in response times for the older subjects. Discussion centres on the partial age-group discrepancy in results, possible mechanisms for the foregrounding effect and potential future clinical implications.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Tompkins, CA (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
CR Adams C, 1997, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V52, pP187
ALBA JW, 1983, PSYCHOL BULL, V93, P203, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.93.2.203
BEEMAN M, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P80, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1006
Brookshire R., 1993, DISCOURSE COMPREHENS
Calvo MG, 1996, DISCOURSE PROCESS, V22, P57
CARROLL JB, 1971, AM WORD FREQUENCY BO
CHAPE WL, 1972, LANGUAGE COMPREHENSI
Dixon W, 1990, BMDP STAT SOFTWARE M, V1-2
DRY HA, 1992, LANGUAGE CONTEXT ESS
DUFFY SA, 1986, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V12, P208, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.12.2.208
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
GLENBERG AM, 1987, J MEM LANG, V26, P69, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(87)90063-5
GRAESSER AC, 1994, PSYCHOL REV, V101, P371, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.101.3.371
HAMM VP, 1992, PSYCHOL AGING, V7, P56, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.7.1.56
Hasher L., 1988, PSYCHOL LEARN MOTIV, V22, P193, DOI DOI 10.1016/S0079-7421(08)60041-9
HAVILAND SE, 1974, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V13, P512, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(74)80003-4
KASPER SC, 1995, THESIS
KEEFE DE, 1993, J MEM LANG, V32, P446, DOI 10.1006/jmla.1993.1024
LEHMAN M, 1998, THESIS
Light L. L., 1988, LANGUAGE MEMORY AGIN, P133
MCKOON G, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P440, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.3.440
MCKOON G, 1986, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V12, P82, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.12.1.82
MYERS PS, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V20, P167
OBRIEN EJ, 1988, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V14, P410, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.14.3.410
PAUL R, 1995, LANGUAGE DISORDERS I, P424
POTTS GR, 1988, J MEM LANG, V27, P399, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(88)90064-2
Tompkins C. A., 1998, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V5, P29
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Tun PA, 1998, PSYCHOL AGING, V13, P230, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.13.2.230
VANDENBROEK P, 1994, HDB PSYCHOLINGUISTIC
WARE JE, 1994, S F 36 PHYSICAL MENT
WHITNEY P, 1992, MEM COGNITION, V20, P424, DOI 10.3758/BF03210926
WILSON R S, 1979, Journal of Clinical Neuropsychology, V1, P49, DOI 10.1080/01688637908401097
WINGFIELD A, 1995, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V50, pP257
Zacks R. T., 1988, LANGUAGE MEMORY AGIN, P154
Zelinski E. M., 1988, LANGUAGE MEMORY AGIN, P117
NR 37
TC 5
Z9 5
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 2
BP 115
EP 131
PG 17
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 289DB
UT WOS:000085604300001
ER
PT J
AU Coelho, CA
McHugh, RE
Boyle, M
AF Coelho, CA
McHugh, RE
Boyle, M
TI Semantic feature analysis as a treatment for aphasic dysnomia: A
replication
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Semantic Feature analysis (SFA) is a treatment technique designed to improve lexical retrieval by increasing the level of activation within a semantic network. The purpose of this study was to replicate the Boyle and Coelho (1995) study in which SFA was applied with a mild non-fluent aphasic individual resulting in improved confrontation naming of trained and untrained items but no generalization to connected speech. The present study investigated whether a comparable treatment effect could be demonstrated, and to what extent severity and type aphasia might impact overall outcome. SFA was applied to an individual with a moderate fluent aphasia secondary to a closed head injury. Gains in confrontation naming of both trained and untrained stimulus pictures were noted as well as measures of connected speech. Potential explanations for these findings are discussed.
C1 Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
Brooklyn Hosp, New York, NY USA.
Cornell Univ, Coll Med, Burke Rehabil Ctr, White Plains, NY 10605 USA.
RP Coelho, CA (reprint author), Univ Connecticut, Dept Commun Sci, U-85,850 Bolton Rd, Storrs, CT 06269 USA.
CR BENSON DF, 1996, APHATIA CLIN PERSPEC
Boyle M., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P135
COLLINS AM, 1975, PSYCHOL REV, V82, P407, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.82.6.407
DUFFY JR, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P146
FREED DB, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1081
German DJ, 1990, TEST ADOLESCENT ADUL
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KERTESZ A, 1982, W APHASTIA BATTERY
LI EC, 1987, J COMMUN DISORD, V20, P469, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(87)90034-7
LIEBAUGH CW, 1977, P CLIN APH C MINN, P248
Lowell S., 1995, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V4, P109
Massaro M. E., 1992, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V22, P245
NICHOLAS LE, 1993, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V36, P338
PEASE D M, 1978, Cortex, V14, P178
ROSENBECK JC, 1989, APHATIA CLIN APPROAC
SCHNEIDER SL, 1997, CLIN APH C WHIT MT J
SNODGRASS JG, 1980, J EXP PSYCHOL-HUM L, V6, P174, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.6.2.174
STOKES TF, 1977, J APPL BEHAV ANAL, V10, P349, DOI 10.1901/jaba.1977.10-349
Thompson C. K., 1989, GEN STRATEGIES TREAT, P82
THOMPSON CK, 1981, P CLIN APH C MINN, P35
YLVISAKER M, 1985, ANN C ILL SPEECH LAN
NR 21
TC 69
Z9 72
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 2
BP 133
EP 142
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 289DB
UT WOS:000085604300002
ER
PT J
AU Cruice, MN
Worrall, LE
Hickson, LMH
AF Cruice, MN
Worrall, LE
Hickson, LMH
TI Boston naming test results for healthy older Australians: A longitudinal
and cross-sectional study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID NORMATIVE DATA; PERFORMANCE; AGE; ADULTS; ABILITIES; DEMENTIA; APHASIA
AB This study reports on a sample of normal Australian elderly who were assessed for naming ability using the Boston Naming Test (BNT). The study aimed to examine and compare the changes in naming ability, using both longitudinal and cross-sectional analysis, and determine the relationships between naming ability and age, educational level, visual acuity and gender and cultural relevance. Contradictory findings were produced regarding age and were dependent on the research design. Longitudinal analysis showed no age-related change in naming ability in subjects over a four-period. In contrast, cross-sectional analysis showed a weak but significant correlation between age and naming ability. Educational level, visual acuity and gender were unrelated to changes in naming ability over time, and unrelated to naming ability across the cohort of elderly. The Australian elderly performed better on the modified Australian version of the BNT than on the original American version. Thus, clinicians need to be cautious when interpreting the results of the BNT for elderly and for populations outside North America. The results of this study also indicate a need for further longitudinal research of a greater duration to establish age-related decline in naming ability.
C1 Univ Queensland, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RP Cruice, MN (reprint author), Univ Queensland, Commun Disabil Ageing Res Unit, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Brisbane, Qld 4072, Australia.
RI Hickson, Louise/F-8748-2010; Worrall, Linda/D-2579-2010
OI Worrall, Linda/0000-0002-3283-7038
CR ALBERT MS, 1988, PSYCHOL AGING, V3, P173, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.3.2.173
ARMSTRONG L, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P371
Au R, 1995, AGING COGNITION, V2, P300, DOI 10.1080/13825589508256605
BAILEY IL, 1980, AM J OPTOM PHYS OPT, V57, P378
BAYLES KA, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P98, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90057-3
BEELE KA, 1984, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V19, P169
BOROD J C, 1980, Journal of Clinical Neuropsychology, V2, P209, DOI 10.1080/01688638008403793
COHEN G, 1986, BRIT J DEV PSYCHOL, V4, P187
CORMACK RA, 1994, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V22, P74
Deloche G, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P105, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0039
FARMER A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P293, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249081
Goodglass H., 1980, LANG COMMUN, P37
GOULET P, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P629
HUNTLEY RA, 1995, COMMUNICATION LATER
JOHNSTON AW, 1991, PROBLEMS OPTOMETRY, V3, P394
Kaplan E, 1983, BOSTON NAMING TEST
KIMBAROW ML, 1996, CLIN APHASIOLOGIST, V24, P135
KOHN SE, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P266, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90135-X
KRAUSS LK, 1980, AGING 1980S, P542
LABARGE E, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P380, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90026-X
LEDORZE G, 1992, J SPEECH LANGUAGE PA, V16, P21
MAXIM J, 1994, LANGUAGE ELDERLY CLI
MITRUSHINA M, 1995, AGING-CLIN EXP RES, V7, P123
NEILS J, 1995, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V38, P1143
NICHOLAS LE, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249023
NICHOLAS M, 1985, CORTEX, V21, P596
SILVER LS, 1992, J PSYCHOLINGUIST RES, V21, P317, DOI 10.1007/BF01067919
SMITH SR, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P314, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90068-0
STEUER J, 1981, AGING BIOL BEHAV, P231
VANGORP WG, 1986, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V8, P702, DOI 10.1080/01688638608405189
Welch LW, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P260, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0047
Worrall L, 1998, EDUC GERONTOL, V24, P129, DOI 10.1080/0360127980240203
WORRALL LE, 1990, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V18, P53
WORRALL LE, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P541, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248713
NR 34
TC 25
Z9 25
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 2
BP 143
EP 155
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 289DB
UT WOS:000085604300003
ER
PT J
AU Singh, S
AF Singh, S
TI Designing intelligent interfaces for users with memory and language
limitations
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID HARD-COPY; TEXT; DISPLAYS; PERFORMANCE; FATIGUE; SCREENS; COMPREHENSION;
INFORMATION; RETRIEVAL; SENTENCE
AB The main contribution of this paper is to discuss in depth the issues related to the design of computer interfaces for users with language limitations. Language limitations are found to various degrees in different users because of their age or health. In this paper, one of the largest applications of human-computer interaction, the Internet, is explored. This paper will discuss syntactic and semantic language limitations in brief and their implication on human computer communication. A number of solutions are offered that will lead to intelligent interfaces that facilitate not only visual needs of the user, but also their language needs.
C1 Univ Exeter, Dept Comp Sci, Exeter EX4 4PT, Devon, England.
RP Singh, S (reprint author), Univ Exeter, Dept Comp Sci, Exeter EX4 4PT, Devon, England.
CR BAUER D, 1983, ERGONOMIC ASPECTS VI, P137
BAUER D, 1987, WORK DISPLAY UNITS 8
BELDIE IP, 1983, HUM FACTORS, V25, P271
BING J, 1987, LAW LIBR J, V79, P187
BLAIR D, 1985, COMMUN ACM, V28, P288
BURKE DM, 1991, J MEM LANG, V30, P542, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(91)90026-G
Caplan D., 1993, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V2, P59
CLAUER CK, 1977, HFC25 IBM HUM FACT C
COLLEY AM, 1987, COGNITIVE APPROACHES, P113
COOK M, 1969, BRIT J SOC CLIN PSYC, V8, P13
Crowder R. G., 1992, PSYCHOL READING INTR
CUSHMAN WH, 1986, HUM FACTORS, V28, P63
DALE R, 1996, P 1 AUSTR DOC COMP S, P47
DANIEL DB, 1987, REDING COMPUTERS ISS, P24
DEBRUIJN D, 1992, BEHAV INFORM TECHNOL, V11, P71
DILLON A, 1992, ERGONOMICS, V35, P1297, DOI 10.1080/00140139208967394
EGAN DE, 1989, ACM T INFORM SYST, V7, P30, DOI 10.1145/64789.64790
Egan D.E., 1989, P COMP HUM INT C CHI, P205, DOI 10.1145/67449.67490
FISHER DL, 1989, HUM FACTORS, V31, P17
GOULD JD, 1984, HUM FACTORS, V26, P323
HARPSTER JL, 1989, HUM FACTORS, V31, P247
HARRIS VM, 1997, SPEECH LANGUAGE PATH, V7, P9
JUOLA JF, 1982, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V111, P208, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.111.2.208
Kak A. V., 1981, Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 25th Annual Meeting
KEMPER S, 1987, J GERONTOL, V42, P323
Kempler D., 1994, DEMENTIA NORMAL AGIN, P331
KINTSCH W, 1973, COGNITIVE PSYCHOL, V5, P257, DOI 10.1016/0010-0285(73)90036-4
KOLERS PA, 1981, HUM FACTORS, V23, P517
LAANSDALE M, 1988, APPL ERGON, V19, P55
LAAR D, 1988, PEOPLE COMPUTES, V4, P373
LUNN R, 1986, HUM FACTORS, V28, P457
MARCHIONINI G, 1989, J AM SOC INFORM SCI, V40, P54, DOI 10.1002/(SICI)1097-4571(198901)40:1<54::AID-ASI6>3.0.CO;2-R
MCNIGHT C, 1989, HYPERMEDIA, V1, P166
MILLS CB, 1987, ACM COMPUT SURV, V19, P329, DOI 10.1145/45075.46162
KANG TJ, 1989, BEHAV INFORM TECHNOL, V8, P33
MUTER P, 1991, BEHAV INFORM TECHNOL, V10, P257
Muter P., 1996, COGNITIVE ASPECTS EL, P161
NAS G, 1988, HUMAN COMPUTER INTER, P125
NES F, 1986, BEHAV INFORMATION TE, V5, P99
Preece J., 1994, HUMAN COMPUTER INTER
RUDNICKY AI, 1984, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V10, P231, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.10.2.231
SAVOY J, 1994, ARTIF INTELL, V2, P205, DOI 10.1007/BF00871890
SCHWARZ E, 1983, HUM FACTORS, V25, P279
Shneiderman B, 1987, DESIGNING USER INTER
Singh S, 1998, J COMMUN, V48, P86
STEELE RD, 1989, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V27, P409, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(89)90048-1
Stroop JR, 1935, J EXP PSYCHOL, V18, P643, DOI 10.1037/0096-3445.121.1.15
SWINNEY DA, 1979, J VERB LEARN VERB BE, V18, P645, DOI 10.1016/S0022-5371(79)90355-4
TOMBAUGH J, 1987, INT J MAN MACH STUD, V26, P597, DOI 10.1016/S0020-7373(87)80073-1
Tullis T., 1988, HDB HUMAN COMPUTER I
TULVING E, 1963, J EXP PSYCHOL, V66, P319, DOI 10.1037/h0048802
VARTABED.AG, 1971, HUM FACTORS, V13, P363
Weinrich M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P23, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1757
Weinrich M, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P327, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1759
WEINRICH M, 1989, BRAIN LANG, V36, P391, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(89)90075-8
WILKINS A, 1986, HUM FACTORS, V28, P75
WILKINS AJ, 1987, ERGONOMICS, V30, P1705, DOI 10.1080/00140138708966059
WILKINSON RT, 1987, BEHAV INFORM TECHNOL, V6, P125
WRIGHT P, 1984, VISIBLE LANG, V18, P186
YANKELOVICH N, 1985, IEEE COMPUT, V18, P15
NR 60
TC 14
Z9 14
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 2
BP 157
EP 177
DI 10.1080/026870300401531
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 289DB
UT WOS:000085604300004
ER
PT J
AU Haley, KL
Ohde, RN
Wertz, RT
AF Haley, KL
Ohde, RN
Wertz, RT
TI Single word intelligibility in aphasia and apraxia of speech: A phonetic
error analysis
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID VOICE-ONSET TIME; VOWEL PRODUCTION; SPECTRAL CHARACTERISTICS; ACOUSTIC
ANALYSIS; STOP CONSONANTS; VELAR MOVEMENTS; PATTERNS; ARTICULATION;
DYSARTHRIA; INVARIANCE
AB This study examined the phonetic differences between word productions attempted by aphasic speakers and listeners' perceptions of these productions. Ten speakers with aphasia and apraxia of speech, ten with aphasia only and ten normal speakers produced 70 monosyllabic words. Listeners orthographically transcribed the words they thought the speakers were saying. The target and transcribed words were compared and phonetic differences noted. There was no significant difference in the frequency of target-transcription discrepancies between vowels and consonants or between consonants in prevocalic and postvocalic position for any of the speaker groups. In addition to a greater number of errors, the phonetic error profiles of aphasic speakers with and without apraxia of speech were different from that of normal speakers. Among apraxic speakers, different error patterns were found in speakers with high overall intelligibility than in speakers with low to moderate overall intelligibility. The frequency of errors affecting place of articulation for stops and nasals was highly correlated with overall speech intelligibility. Other common phonetic confusions for the apraxic speakers included confusions between singleton and consonant clusters, and between presence and absence of word initial /h/. There was substantial individual variability across apraxic speakers for several other phonetic contrasts.
C1 Univ N Carolina, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Sch Med, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
Vanderbilt Univ, Med Ctr, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Vanderbilt Bill Wilkerson Ctr Otolaryngol & Commu, Nashville, TN 37240 USA.
Nashville Vet Adm Med Ctr, Nashville, TN USA.
RP Haley, KL (reprint author), Univ N Carolina, Div Speech & Hearing Sci, Dept Allied Hlth Sci, Sch Med, Med Sch Wing D,CB 7190, Chapel Hill, NC 27599 USA.
CR ANSEL BM, 1992, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V35, P296
BAUM SR, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P414, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1025
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1977, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V15, P371, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(77)90089-6
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1979, J ACOUST SOC AM, V66, P1001, DOI 10.1121/1.383319
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1980, J ACOUST SOC AM, V67, P648, DOI 10.1121/1.383890
BLUMSTEIN SE, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V9, P153, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90137-6
TROST JE, 1974, BRAIN LANG, V1, P63, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(74)90026-1
CANTER GJ, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P204, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90131-2
DUNLOP JM, 1977, CORTEX, V13, P17
FREEMAN FJ, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V6, P106, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90048-2
GANDOUR J, 1984, BRAIN LANG, V23, P206, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(84)90064-6
GANDOUR J, 1992, APHASIOLOGY, V6, P535, DOI 10.1080/02687039208249490
HALEY KL, 1997, AM SPEECH LANGUAGE H
Haley KL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P715, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249568
HARDCASTLE WJ, 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES
ITOH M, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P283, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90071-8
ITOH M, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V7, P227, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90019-1
ITOH M, 1980, BRAIN LANG, V11, P66, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(80)90110-8
JOHNS DF, 1970, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V13, P556
KENT RD, 1983, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V26, P231
KENT RD, 1990, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V55, P721
KENT RD, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P482
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
KLICH RJ, 1979, CORTEX, V15, P451
KUROWSKI K, 1984, J ACOUST SOC AM, V76, P384
LAPOINTE LL, 1975, J COMMUN DISORD, V8, P259, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(75)90018-0
McNeil MR, 1997, CLIN MANAGEMENT SENS, P311
MCNEIL MR, 1990, BRAIN LANG, V38, P135, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(90)90106-Q
MCNEIL MR, 1989, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V17, P173
MONOI H, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V20, P174
ODELL K, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P67
OHIDE RN, 1992, PHONETIC ANAL NORMAL
Oller D K, 1975, Phonetica, V31, P288
PISONI DB, 1973, PERCEPT PSYCHOPHYS, V13, P253, DOI 10.3758/BF03214136
Ryalls J., 1987, PHONETIC APPROACHES
RYALLS JH, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V29, P48, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90033-7
Shankweiler D., 1966, CORTEX, V2, P277
SHINN P, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V20, P90, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90035-4
TULLER B, 1984, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V22, P547, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(84)90019-8
Wertz RT, 1984, APRAXIA SPEECH ADULT
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J COMMUN DISORD, V13, P15, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(80)90018-0
ZIEGLER W, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P449, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249006
NR 42
TC 6
Z9 6
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 2
BP 179
EP 201
PG 23
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 289DB
UT WOS:000085604300005
ER
PT J
AU Leiwo, M
Klippi, A
AF Leiwo, M
Klippi, A
TI Lexical repetition as a communicative strategy in Broca's aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB This study examines the lexical self- and other repetition and the strategic use of repetition by two aphasic speakers (J and M) with agrammatic and severe word-finding difficulties in group discussions. Whereas the speakers' aphasia profiles were rather similar, as defined by clinical testing (Western Aphasia Battery), their use of lexical repetition as a communicative strategy was significantly different. One speaker (speaker M) had more contextually supported words, especially other-repetitions. M sometimes repeated her own lexical elements and elaborated the repetitions morphologically and prosodically and expanded them syntactically. These elaborated and expanded repetitions were attempts at communicative clarity and grammatical acceptability. After encountering problems in production, speaker M used self-and other-repetition both in affective confirmations and in meaning negotiations. Speaker J, on the other hand, did not attempt to produce grammatical well-formed utterances, but relied on his interlocutors' interpretations of his turns. Speaker J did not elaborate or expand his one or two word utterances, but frequently repeated fillers and polite idiomatic phrases. He used more self-repetition, typically in confirmations, to express emotion and in turn keeping, and less other-repetition, which only occurred in negotiations to reach mutual understanding. The methods and results are discussed in the framework of the adaptation theory of agrammatism. We suggest that pathological and communicative repetitions form a continuum and that the study of strategic choices can contribute to the development of communicative speech therapy.
C1 Univ Jyvaskyla, Finnish Dept, SF-40351 Jyvaskyla, Finland.
Univ Helsinki, Dept Phonet & Logoped, SF-00100 Helsinki, Finland.
RP Leiwo, M (reprint author), Univ Jyvaskyla, Finnish Dept, POB 35, SF-40351 Jyvaskyla, Finland.
CR Ahlsen E, 1985, GOTHENBURG MONOGRAPH, V5
BLALYSTOK E, 1990, COMMUNICATION STRATE
Brown Penelope, 1978, QUESTIONS POLITENESS, P56
CORDER SP, 1977, STRATEGIES INTERLANG, P15
GOODWIN C, 1992, ADV DISCOURSE PROCES, V31, P147
HEESCHEN C, 1988, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P299
HOFSTEDE BTM, 1994, BRAIN LANG, V46, P278, DOI 10.1006/brln.1994.1017
Karlsson Fred, 1987, FINNISH GRAMMAR
Kean M. L, 1985, AGRAMMATISM
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Klippi A., 1996, STUDIA FENNICA LINGU, V6
KLIPPI A, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P373
KOLK H, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P221, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249075
Kolk H. H. J., 1985, AGRAMMATISM, P165
KOLK HHJ, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P347, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252666
LEHTIHALMES M, 1986, W APHASIA BATTERY
LEIWO M, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P467, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248671
Menn L., 1985, AGRAMMATISM, P1
PERSSON LB, 1995, CONNECTIONISM LANGUA, P106
SCHEGLOFF EA, 1977, LANGUAGE, V53, P361, DOI 10.2307/413107
SNOW C, 1978, SPEECH
WALLESCH CW, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P133, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249066
NR 22
TC 7
Z9 7
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA 11 NEW FETTER LANE, LONDON EC4P 4EE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD FEB
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 2
BP 203
EP 224
PG 22
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 289DB
UT WOS:000085604300006
ER
PT J
AU Le Dorze, G
Julien, M
Genereux, S
Larfeuil, C
Navennec, C
Laporte, D
Champagne, C
AF Le Dorze, G
Julien, M
Genereux, S
Larfeuil, C
Navennec, C
Laporte, D
Champagne, C
TI The development of a procedure for the evaluation of communication
occurring between residents in long-term care and their caregivers
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID INTERVENTION
AB An evaluation procedure was developed for describing communication occurring between residents and their caregivers in long-term care institutions, the MECQ-LTC. The procedure was based on previous work describing communication in long-term care (Le Dorze ef dl. 1994) and is divided into two major sections examining: (1) the frequency of use of various means of communication used by residents and caregivers; and (2) the number of communication acts realized by a resident. After extensive pre-tests, a content validity study was undertaken with speech-language therapists and other health professionals. A criterion validity study with 31 residents with aphasia (n = 15) or with dementia (n = 16) and 62 nurses relatively familiar with these residents, demonstrated significant correlations between the number of communication acts realized and another measure of functional communication, the REFCP-interaction analysis (Wirz el al. 1990). Inter-judge and intra-judge reliability was sufficient and satisfactory. An evaluation of the MECQ-LTC's sensitivity pointed out differences in communication impairment associated with aphasia and dementia. The results of this psychometric study are discussed in terms of further research and in terms of clinical uses.
C1 Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
Ctr Hebergement & Soins Longue Duree Jacques Vige, Montreal, PQ, Canada.
RP Le Dorze, G (reprint author), Univ Montreal, Ecole Orthophonie & Audiol, CP 6128,Succ Ctr Ville, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RI Le Dorze, Guylaine/A-1790-2014
CR BLOMERT L, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P381, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248666
CLARK LW, 1995, TOP LANG DISORD, V15, P47
DANIEL WW, 1995, BIOSTATISTICS FDN AN
ERBER NP, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P269
Frattali C. M., 1995, FUNCTIONAL ASSESSMEN
HALLBERG IR, 1990, J ADV NURS, V15, P410, DOI 10.1111/j.1365-2648.1990.tb01833.x
HOLLAND A, 1980, COMMUICATIVE ABILITI
JORDAN FM, 1993, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V28, P63
KAAKINEN J, 1995, TOP LANG DISORD, V15, P36
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
KOURY LN, 1991, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI, P279
LEDORZE G, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P241
LOMAS J, 1989, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V54, P113
Lubinski R, 1993, ASHA, V35, P59
LUBINSKI R, 1988, COMMUNICATION BEHAV, P294
LUBINSKI R, 1991, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI, P257
LUBINSKI R, 1981, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V46, P405
Mueller P B, 1981, ASHA, V23, P627
Nespoulous J, 1992, PROTOCOLE MONTREAL T
PORCH BE, 1969, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Sarno MT, 1969, FUNCTIONAL COMMUNICA
*STAT CAN, 1997, ANN CAN 1997, P82
Tully P, 1995, Health Rep, V7, P27
Wirz SL, 1990, REVISED EDINBURGH FU
NR 24
TC 8
Z9 8
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 1
BP 17
EP 51
PG 35
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 279LX
UT WOS:000085046200003
ER
PT J
AU Martin, N
Laine, M
AF Martin, N
Laine, M
TI Effects of contextual priming on impaired word retrieval
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LEXICAL RETRIEVAL; NAMING DEFICITS; MATCHING TASKS; APHASIA;
FACILITATION; MODELS
AB We investigated the effects of contextual priming on picture naming in a severely anemic patient suffering from Wernicke's aphasia. The contextual priming method attempts to facilitate impaired lexical retrieval with massive repetition priming of target names, coupled with manipulation of relationships among pictures to-be-named (semantic, phonological and unrelated). We were interested in comparing our patient's results with those of a previously reported case whose underlying mechanisms of anemia were different (Laine and Martin 1996). Both case studies show similar contextual effects on naming error patterns, confirming that the present method has the potential of activating multiple lexical entries in aphasics. At the same time, the two patients show different contextual effects on their rates of correct responses. In particular, only the present case is facilitated by a phonologically related context in naming. The implication for treatment studies is that it: is useful to match priming treatments to the deficit that underlies word retrieval difficulty.
C1 Temple Univ, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
Univ Turku, Turku, Finland.
RP Martin, N (reprint author), Temple Univ, Philadelphia, PA 19122 USA.
CR Arbuthnott KD, 1996, J EXP PSYCHOL GEN, V125, P261, DOI 10.1037//0096-3445.125.3.261
Baum SR, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V60, P347, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1829
DELL GS, 1986, PSYCHOL REV, V93, P283, DOI 10.1037//0033-295X.93.3.283
HOWARD D, 1985, BRAIN, V108, P817
HOWARD D, 1985, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V2, P49, DOI 10.1080/02643298508252861
LAINE M, 1997, BRAIN LANGUAGE
Laine M., 1997, BOSTONIN NIMENTATEST
Laine M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P283, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0050
Laine M., 1997, BOSTONIN DIAGNOSTINE
Laine M, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P126, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403842
LEDORZE G, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P127
LEVELT WJM, 1983, COGNITION, V14, P41, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90026-4
MARSHALL J, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P167, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249068
MARTIN N, 1989, J MEM LANG, V28, P462, DOI 10.1016/0749-596X(89)90022-3
MARTIN N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P299
MILBERG W, 1981, BRAIN LANG, V14, P371, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(81)90086-9
Nettleton J., 1991, J NEUROLINGUIST, V6, P139, DOI 10.1016/0911-6044(91)90004-3
PATTERSON KE, 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P76
PRING T, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P479, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248788
RAYMER AM, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P27, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249498
Siegel S., 1988, NONPARAMETRIC STAT B
WIEGL E, 1961, Z PHONETIK SPRACHWIS, V14, P337
NR 22
TC 21
Z9 21
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 1
BP 53
EP 70
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 279LX
UT WOS:000085046200004
ER
PT J
AU Bucks, RS
Singh, S
Cuerden, JM
Wilcock, GK
AF Bucks, RS
Singh, S
Cuerden, JM
Wilcock, GK
TI Analysis of spontaneous, conversational speech in dementia of Alzheimer
type: Evaluation of an objective technique for analysing lexical
performance
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LANGUAGE FUNCTION; SENILE DEMENTIA; SEMANTIC MEMORY; INTERNATIONAL
WORKSHOP; HUNTINGTONS-DISEASE; AD PATIENTS; EARLY-ONSET; APHASIA;
IMPAIRMENT; DEFICITS
AB Spontaneous, conversational speech in probable dementia of Alzheimer type (DAT) participants and healthy older controls was analysed using eight linguistic measures. These were evaluated for their usefulness in discriminating between healthy and demented individuals. The measures were; noun rate, pronoun rate, verb rate, adjective rate, clause-like semantic unit rate tall per 100 words), including three lexical richness measures; type token ratio (TTR), Brunet's Index (W) and Honore's statistic (R). Results suggest that these measures offer a sensitive method of assessing spontaneous speech output in DAT. Comparison between DAT and healthy older participants demonstrates that these measures discriminate well between these groups. This method shows promise as a diagnostic and prognostic tool, and as a measure for use in clinical trials. Further validation in a large sample of patient versus control 'norms' in addition to evaluation in other types of dementia is considered.
C1 Blackberry Hill Hosp, Clin Res Ctr, Bristol BS16 2EW, Avon, England.
Blackberry Hill Hosp, Mem Disorders Clin, Bristol BS16 2EW, Avon, England.
Univ Exeter, Dept Comp Sci, Exeter EX4 4PT, Devon, England.
RP Bucks, RS (reprint author), Blackberry Hill Hosp, Clin Res Ctr, Manor Rd, Bristol BS16 2EW, Avon, England.
RI Bucks, Romola/B-9164-2011
OI Bucks, Romola/0000-0002-4207-4724
CR Alzheimer A., 1907, CENTRALBLATT NERVENH, V30, P177
American Psychiatric Association, 1987, DIAGN STAT MAN MENT
American Psychiatric Association, 1994, DIAGN STAT MAN MENT, V4th
ANDREASEN NJC, 1976, ARCH GEN PSYCHIAT, V33, P1361
APPELL J, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P73, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90006-2
Barr A, 1996, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V18, P810, DOI 10.1080/01688639608408304
Bayles K. A., 1987, COMMUNICATION COGNIT
BAYLES KA, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V16, P265, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90086-4
BAYLES KA, 1993, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V9, P131
BAYLES KA, 1991, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V48, P155
BAYLES KA, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V42, P455
BAYLES KA, 1989, DEV NEUROPSYCHOL, V5, P335
BECKER JT, 1988, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V45, P263
BINETTI G, 1993, DEMENTIA, V4, P321, DOI 10.1159/000107340
BLANKEN G, 1987, COGNITION, V27, P247, DOI 10.1016/S0010-0277(87)80011-2
BOLLER F, 1991, CORTEX, V27, P9
CHUI HC, 1985, NEUROLOGY, V35, P1544
CODE C, 1994, CORTEX, V30, P527
CROCKFORD C, 1994, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V29, P165
Croisile B, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P1, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0033
CUMMINGS JL, 1985, NEUROLOGY, V29, P315
Dallal G. E., 1990, AM STAT, V44, P243, DOI 10.2307/2685347
DESANTI S, 1994, DISOURSE ANAL APPL S
EASTERBROOK A, 1982, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V17, P93
FILLENBAUM S, 1961, LANG SPEECH, V4, P91
FILLY CM, 1986, ANN NEUROL, V23, P365
FOSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIATR RES, V12, P189
Fu L. M., 1994, NEURAL NETWORKS COMP
FUNNELL E, 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V9, P135, DOI 10.1080/02643299208252056
Garrard P, 1998, BRAIN, V121, P633, DOI 10.1093/brain/121.4.633
GOLDBLUM MC, 1994, DEMENTIA, V5, P334, DOI 10.1159/000106743
Goodglass H., 1964, CORTEX, V1, P133, DOI [10.1016/S0010-9452(64)80018-6, DOI 10.1016/S0010-9452(64)80018-6]
GRADY CL, 1987, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V25, P807, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(87)90118-7
Grossman M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V53, P369, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0054
HACHINSKI VC, 1975, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V32, P632
HENDERSON VW, 1994, NEUROLOGY, V44, P90
HIER DB, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P117, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90124-5
HOCKEY S, 1988, OCP USERS MAWNUAL
HODGES JR, 1991, BRAIN, V114, P1547, DOI 10.1093/brain/114.4.1547
HODGES JR, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGIA, V33, P441, DOI 10.1016/0028-3932(94)00127-B
HOLMES DI, 1992, J ROY STAT SOC A STA, V155, P91, DOI 10.2307/2982671
Holmes D. I., 1996, LIT LINGUISTIC COMPU, V11, P45
HOLMES DI, 1994, COMPUT HUMANITIES, V28, P87, DOI 10.1007/BF01830689
Honore A, 1979, ASS LIT LINGUISTIC C, V7, P172
Hutchinson J.M., 1980, LANGUAGE COMMUNICATI
IRIGARAY L, 1973, LANGUAGE DEMENTS
Johnson MK, 1997, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V11, P392, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.11.3.392
JONES LV, 1963, LANG SPEECH, V6, P94
KEMPER S, 1997, J GERONTOLOGY B, V3, P147
KEMPLER D, 1991, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI
Kempler D., 1994, DEMENTIA NORMAL AGIN
KEMPLER D, 1995, NEUROPSY NEUROPSY BE, V8, P33
KERTESZ A, 1986, CAN J NEUROL SCI, V13, P415
Koss E, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V46, P136
Lesser R., 1993, LINGUISTICS APHASIA
MARTIN A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P124, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90059-7
MARTIN A, 1985, NEUROLOGY, V35, P394
Martin A, 1992, MEMORY FUNCTIONING D
McKeith IG, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V47, P1113
MCKHANN G, 1984, NEUROLOGY, V34, P939
MICELI G, 1984, CORTEX, V20, P207
MOHS RC, 1986, CLIN MEMORY ASSESSME
NEBES RD, 1989, CORTEX, V25, P305
NEBES RD, 1989, PSYCHOL BULL, V106, P377, DOI 10.1037//0033-2909.106.3.377
NEBES RD, 1994, HDB AGEING COGNITION
NICHOLAS M, 1985, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V28, P405
Nicholas M, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V54, P184, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0070
Norusis MJ, 1997, SPSS WINDOWS ADV STA
OBLER L, 1983, LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS B
Obler L. K., 1981, ACQUIRED APHASIA
Phillips LH, 1996, EUR J NEUROL, V3, P102, DOI 10.1111/j.1468-1331.1996.tb00200.x
POST SG, 1994, ALZ DIS ASSOC DIS, V8, P58, DOI 10.1097/00002093-199400000-00007
PRINS RS, 1978, BRAIN LANG, V6, P192, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(78)90058-5
RIPICH DN, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V40, P330, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90133-L
RIPICH DN, 1995, NEUROLOGY, V45, P299
RIPICH DN, 1988, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V53, P8
Robinson KM, 1996, NEUROLOGY, V47, P178
ROMAN GC, 1993, NEUROLOGY, V43, P250
Romero B, 1996, DEMENTIA, V7, P35, DOI 10.1159/000106850
ROSSER A, 1994, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V57, P1389, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.57.11.1389
SABAT SR, 1994, LANG COMMUN, V14, P331, DOI 10.1016/0271-5309(94)90025-6
SCHWARTZ MF, 1979, BRAIN LANG, V7, P277, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(79)90024-5
SELNES OA, 1988, NEUROLOGY, V38, P1053
SELTZER B, 1983, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V40, P143
SEVUSH S, 1993, J NEUROPSYCH CLIN N, V5, P66
Singh S, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P829, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250459
SINGH S, 1995, P 3 INT C STAT AN TE, P355
Singh S., 1997, INT J APPL LINGUISTI, V7, P165, DOI 10.1111/j.1473-4192.1997.tb00113.x
SINGH S, 1994, P 5 INT C SPEECH SCI, P486
Singh S., 1996, THESIS U W ENGLAND U
SMITH S, 1995, BRAIN LANG, V49, P263, DOI 10.1006/brln.1995.1033
THOMPSON IM, 1987, INT J GERIATR PSYCH, V2, P145, DOI 10.1002/gps.930020304
Tippett LJ, 1996, CORTEX, V32, P143
ULATOWSKA H, 1991, DEMENTIA COMMUNICATI
Ulatowska Hanna K., 1988, NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL S, P108
NR 95
TC 20
Z9 22
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 1
BP 71
EP 91
PG 21
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 279LX
UT WOS:000085046200005
ER
PT J
AU Armstrong, L
MacDonald, A
AF Armstrong, L
MacDonald, A
TI Aiding chronic written language expression difficulties: A case study
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID APHASIA; PLATEAU
AB This paper describes some progress made in helping a young aphasic man (MD) to overcome what had appeared to be intractable written language expression difficulties, which continued to be significant for him. Traditional therapy methods based on cognitive neuropsychological assessment had failed to help MD to generalize improvement in his spelling particularly, but not exclusively, of longer and irregular words. Both a splint which allowed him to use his dominant hand for writing directly onto a computer screen and a simple word-processing programme with synthesized auditory feedback and lexical and grammatical prediction (Write:OutLoud(R) and Co:Writer(R)) enabled him to produce more normal written output (increased quantity and more normal quality). The discussion also focuses on how effectiveness of language therapy can be measured in this man with chronic aphasia.
C1 Queen Margaret Univ Coll, Dept Speech & Language Sci, Edinburgh EH12 8TS, Midlothian, Scotland.
RP MacDonald, A (reprint author), Queen Margaret Univ Coll, Dept Speech & Language Sci, Clerwood Terrace, Edinburgh EH12 8TS, Midlothian, Scotland.
CR BLUESTONE R, 1998, 8 INT APH REH C KWA
BROWN JW, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V19, P204, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90065-2
Crerar MA, 1996, BRAIN LANG, V52, P229, DOI 10.1006/brln.1996.0010
ENDERBT P, 1995, DOES SPEECH LANGUAGE
Hersh D, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P207, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249447
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
King J., 1995, AAC, V11, P187, DOI 10.1080/07434619512331277309
LEISCHNER A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V18, P1, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90001-9
LORCH MP, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P257, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248199
MACDONALD A, 1998, SPEECH LANGUAGE THER, P15
Newell Alan F., 1992, AAC (Augmentative and Alternative Communication), V8, P304, DOI 10.1080/07434619212331276343
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA LIVI
Pound C, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P222, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249449
Rostron A, 1996, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V31, P11
SASANUMA S, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P273, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248201
Waller A, 1998, INT J LANG COMM DIS, V33, P45
WERTZ RT, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P309
WHURR R, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P411, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248543
WIIG EH, 1991, TEST WORD KNOWLEDGE
Wood LA, 1997, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V6, P57
NR 21
TC 4
Z9 4
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD JAN
PY 2000
VL 14
IS 1
BP 93
EP 108
PG 16
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 279LX
UT WOS:000085046200006
ER
PT J
AU Servaes, P
Draper, B
Conroy, P
Bowring, G
AF Servaes, P
Draper, B
Conroy, P
Bowring, G
TI Informal carers of aphasic stroke patients: stresses and interventions
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SUPPORT FAMILY CAREGIVERS; SPOUSES; IMPACT; ADJUSTMENT; RELATIVES;
EFFICACY; MODEL
C1 Tilburg Univ, Tilburg, Netherlands.
Univ New S Wales, Prince Henry Hosp, Sydney, NSW, Australia.
Sutherland Hosp, Rehabil Unit, Taren Point, NSW 2229, Australia.
Univ New S Wales, St Georges Hosp, Sydney, NSW, Australia.
RP Conroy, P (reprint author), Tilburg Univ, Tilburg, Netherlands.
CR ANDERSON CS, 1995, STROKE, V26, P843
Artes R., 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P383
BARDACH JL, 1969, INT J GROUP PSYCHOTH, V19, P361
BEASLEY DD, 1981, AGEING COMMUNICATION, P229
BORENSTEIN P, 1987, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V19, P51
Bowling J. H., 1977, AUSTR J HUMAN COMMUN, V5, P29
BROCKLEHURST JC, 1981, SOC SCI MED-MED SOC, V15, P35, DOI 10.1016/0271-7123(81)90043-2
BRODATY H, 1994, INT J GERIATR PSYCH, V9, P195, DOI 10.1002/gps.930090304
CARNWATH TCM, 1987, BRIT MED J, V294, P409
CHRISTENSEN JM, 1989, J COMMUN DISORD, V22, P225, DOI 10.1016/0021-9924(89)90018-X
DERMAN S, 1967, J AM SPEECH HEARING, V9, P175
DRAPER BM, 1992, J AM GERIATR SOC, V40, P896
EVANS RL, 1988, STROKE, V19, P1243
GOODKIN R, 1973, MODIFICATION LANGUAG, P218
GREVESON GC, 1991, AGE AGEING, V20, P337, DOI 10.1093/ageing/20.5.337
HELMICK JW, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P238
KINSELLA GJ, 1979, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V11, P129
KNIGHT BG, 1993, GERONTOLOGIST, V33, P240
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Linebaugh C. W., 1978, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P304
LOVETT S, 1988, BEHAV THER, V19, P321, DOI 10.1016/S0005-7894(88)80005-4
MALONE RL, 1970, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V5, P174
MALONE RL, 1969, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V34, P146
MEIJER RP, 1995, HUISARTS WETENSCHAP, V38, P255
Mittelman MS, 1996, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V276, P1725, DOI 10.1001/jama.276.21.1725
Mykyta L J, 1976, Age Ageing, V5, P87, DOI 10.1093/ageing/5.2.87
Rau M. T., 1991, FAMILY CARE GIVING C, P129
Rice B, 1987, APHASIOLOGY, V1, P247, DOI 10.1080/02687038708248841
ROBINSON KM, 1988, ADV NURS SCI, V10, P59
ROSS S, 1988, INT J REHABIL RES, V11, P383, DOI 10.1097/00004356-198812000-00008
SCHULZ R, 1988, PSYCHOL AGING, V3, P131, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.3.2.131
Schure L M, 1992, Tijdschr Gerontol Geriatr, V23, P141
TOSELAND RW, 1989, GERONTOLOGIST, V29, P465
TOSELAND RW, 1989, GERONTOLOGIST, V29, P438
TOSELAND RW, 1990, SOC WORK, V35, P209
TOSELAND RW, 1990, PSYCHOL AGING, V5, P256, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.5.2.256
WADE DT, 1986, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V49, P11, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.49.1.11
WEBSTER EJ, 1977, J AM SPEECH HEARING, V19, P244
WEBSTER EJ, 1991, FAMILY CARE GIVING C, P129
WHITLATCH CJ, 1991, GERONTOLOGIST, V31, P9
WILLIAMS SE, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P361
WILLIAMS SE, 1986, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V67, P250
World Health Organization, 1996, INV HLTH RES DEV
ZARIT SH, 1987, PSYCHOL AGING, V2, P225
ZRAICK RI, 1991, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V34, P123
NR 45
TC 21
Z9 21
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 12
BP 889
EP 900
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 267CX
UT WOS:000084338400001
ER
PT J
AU Cant, R
AF Cant, R
TI Aphasic stroke support - a route forward?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 Univ Oxford Christ Church, Dept Appl Social Sci, Canterbury CT1 1QU, Kent, England.
RP Cant, R (reprint author), Univ Oxford Christ Church, Dept Appl Social Sci, Canterbury CT1 1QU, Kent, England.
NR 0
TC 1
Z9 1
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 12
BP 900
EP 902
DI 10.1080/026870399401641
PG 3
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 267CX
UT WOS:000084338400002
ER
PT J
AU Tompkins, CA
Spencer, KA
Schulz, R
AF Tompkins, CA
Spencer, KA
Schulz, R
TI Evaluating stresses and interventions for informal carers of aphasic
adults: taking a broader perspective. A commentary on Servaes, Draper,
Conroy, and Bowing (1999)
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CARDIOVASCULAR HEALTH; STROKE; CAREGIVERS; OUTCOMES; SUPPORT; PEOPLE
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Ctr Social & Urban Res, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
VA Pittsburgh Healthcare Syst, Aphasia Rehabil Res Lab & Clin, Pittsburgh, PA USA.
Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Psychiat, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Tompkins, CA (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, Dept Commun Sci & Disorders, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
CR ASTROM M, 1992, STROKE, V23, P527
Biegel D, 1991, FAMILY CAREGIVING CH
Bookwala J, 1996, PSYCHOL AGING, V11, P582, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.11.4.582
Bourgeois MS, 1996, INT J AGING HUM DEV, V43, P35, DOI 10.2190/AN6L-6QBQ-76G0-0N9A
CASSILETH BR, 1984, NEW ENGL J MED, V311, P506, DOI 10.1056/NEJM198408233110805
Herrmann M, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P717, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249418
Hoen B, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P681, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249415
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
SARNO MT, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P321, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249514
SCHULZ R, 1993, J GERONTOL, V48, P39
Schulz R, 1997, ANN BEHAV MED, V19, P110, DOI 10.1007/BF02883327
SCHULZ R, 1995, GERONTOLOGIST, V35, P771
SCHULZ R, 1988, PSYCHOL AGING, V3, P131, DOI 10.1037//0882-7974.3.2.131
SCHULZ R, 1987, J APPL SOC PSYCHOL, V17, P401, DOI 10.1111/j.1559-1816.1987.tb00321.x
Schulzs R, 1990, J GERONTOL PSYCHOL S, V45, P181
Servaes P, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P889
Spencer KA, 1997, PSYCHOL BULL, V122, P132
SPENCER KA, 1992, THESIS U PITTSBURGH
TOMPKINS CA, 1992, APHASIA TREATMENT CU
TOMPKINS CA, 1988, J CONSULT CLIN PSYCH, V56, P502, DOI 10.1037//0022-006X.56.4.502
Tower RB, 1997, J GERONTOL B-PSYCHOL, V52, pS270
Vitaliano PP, 1997, ANN BEHAV MED, V19, P117, DOI 10.1007/BF02883328
Williamson GM, 1998, HEALTH PSYCHOL, V17, P152, DOI 10.1037//0278-6133.17.2.152
World Health Organization, 1980, INT CLASSIFICATION I
NR 24
TC 0
Z9 0
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 12
BP 902
EP 907
PG 6
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 267CX
UT WOS:000084338400003
ER
PT J
AU Oddy, M
AF Oddy, M
TI Carers and aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJURY; REHABILITATION; INTERVENTIONS
C1 Ticehurst House Hosp, Brain Injury Rehabil Unit, Ticehurst TN5 7HU, E Sussex, England.
Unsted Pk Hosp, Brain Injury Rehabil Unit, Ticehurst TN5 7HU, E Sussex, England.
RP Oddy, M (reprint author), Ticehurst House Hosp, Brain Injury Rehabil Unit, Ticehurst TN5 7HU, E Sussex, England.
CR Florian V, 1989, Brain Inj, V3, P219, DOI 10.3109/02699058909029637
FRANK RG, 1994, BRAIN INJURY, V8, P193, DOI 10.3109/02699059409150972
GLECKMAN AD, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P385, DOI 10.3109/02699059509005778
GOODKIN R, 1973, MODIFICATION LANGUAG, P218
KNIGHT BG, 1993, GERONTOLOGIST, V33, P240
Mittelman MS, 1996, JAMA-J AM MED ASSOC, V276, P1725, DOI 10.1001/jama.276.21.1725
PORTER JL, 1977, J AM SPEECH HEARING, V19, P244
ROSIN AJ, 1977, SCAND J REHABIL MED, V9, P1
Sandel ME, 1996, BRAIN INJURY, V10, P719, DOI 10.1080/026990596123981
Wood RL, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P491, DOI 10.1080/713802183
ZARIT SH, 1987, PSYCHOL AGING, V2, P225
NR 11
TC 1
Z9 1
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 12
BP 907
EP 911
DI 10.1080/026870399401669
PG 5
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 267CX
UT WOS:000084338400004
ER
PT J
AU Wells, A
AF Wells, A
TI Family support systems: their role in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID LIFE
C1 York Durham Aphasia Ctr, Stouffville, ON L4A 3N6, Canada.
RP Wells, A (reprint author), York Durham Aphasia Ctr, 12184 9th Line S, Stouffville, ON L4A 3N6, Canada.
CR Artes R., 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P383
GAILEY G, 1995, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V2, P3
Gainotti G, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P635, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249412
GITTERMAN A, 1986, MUTUAL AID GROUPS LI
KAGAN A, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO
Lyon JG, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P693, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249416
PATTERSON R, 1994, APHASIA NEW LIFE
Rolland J. S., 1994, FAMILIES ILLNESS DIS
Sarno MT, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P665, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249414
Walsh F., 1991, LIVING BEYOND LOSS
WELLS A, 1995, TOPICS STROKE REHABI, V2, P3
NR 11
TC 7
Z9 7
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 12
BP 911
EP 914
DI 10.1080/026870399401678
PG 4
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 267CX
UT WOS:000084338400005
ER
PT J
AU Pring, T
AF Pring, T
TI Who cares for carers
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID STRESS; DEMENTIA; SPOUSES; BURDEN; PEOPLE
C1 City Univ London, Dept Clin Commun Studies, London EC1V 0HB, England.
RP Pring, T (reprint author), City Univ London, Dept Clin Commun Studies, London EC1V 0HB, England.
CR ALLEN K, 1994, REHABIL PSYCHOL, V39, P29, DOI 10.1037//0090-5550.39.1.29
BECK AT, 1961, ARCH GEN PSYCHIAT, V4, P561
Bowling A, 1997, MEASURING HLTH REV Q
Chwalisz K, 1996, REHABIL PSYCHOL, V41, P91, DOI 10.1037//0090-5550.41.2.91
CHWALISZ K, 1992, REHABIL PSYCHOL, V37, P188
Goldberg D. P., 1988, USERS GUIDE GEN HLTH
HOOKER K, 1994, GERONTOLOGIST, V34, P386
Knight RG, 1997, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V19, P7, DOI 10.1080/01688639708403832
LAZARUS RS, 1993, PSYCHOSOM MED, V55, P234
MATSON N, 1994, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V33, P333
McKee KJ, 1997, BRIT J CLIN PSYCHOL, V36, P323
PEARLIN LI, 1990, GERONTOLOGIST, V30, P583
Servaes P, 1999, APHASIOLOGY, V13, P889
NR 13
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 12
BP 914
EP 917
DI 10.1080/026870399401687
PG 4
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 267CX
UT WOS:000084338400006
ER
PT J
AU Herrmann, M
Wallesch, CW
AF Herrmann, M
Wallesch, CW
TI Caring for carers of aphasic stroke patients - Is this really state of
the art?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PSYCHOSOCIAL ADJUSTMENT; THERAPY; FAMILY
C1 Univ Magdeburg, Div Neuropsychol & Behav Neurol, D-39106 Magdeburg, Germany.
Univ Magdeburg, Dept Neurol, D-39106 Magdeburg, Germany.
RP Herrmann, M (reprint author), Univ Magdeburg, Div Neuropsychol & Behav Neurol, D-39106 Magdeburg, Germany.
RI Herrmann, Manfred/H-3931-2011
CR Artes R, 1976, RECOVERY APHASICS, P31
BROWN BB, 1969, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V4, P176
BRUMFITT S, 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P89
BRUMFITT S, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P18
Code C., 1992, CODE MULLER PROTOCOL
CODE C, 1996, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V1, P91
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P513, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249019
Herrmann M, 1997, DISABIL REHABIL, V19, P6
Herrmann M, 1996, DISABIL REHABIL, V18, P509
Herrmann M, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P717, DOI 10.1080/02687039708249418
HERRMANN M, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P527, DOI 10.1080/02687039008248505
Herrmann M., 1993, LIVING APHASIA PSYCH, P187
Herrmann M, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P5
HERRMANN M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P491, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249013
JOHANNSENHORBAC.H, 1993, APHASIA TREATMENT WO, P319
Johannsen-Horbach Helga, 1999, Seminars in Speech and Language, V20, P73, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064010
Kiresuk T, 1994, GOAL ATTAINMENT SCAL
MALONE RL, 1969, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V34, P146
MULLER DJ, 1983, APHASIA THERAPY, P101
PIMENTAL PA, 1986, NURS CLIN N AM, V21, P321
RADERSTORF M, 1984, J REHABIL, V50, P23
SMITH DS, 1995, DISABIL REHABIL, V17, P15
Testa MA, 1996, NEW ENGL J MED, V334, P835, DOI 10.1056/NEJM199603283341306
WAHRBORG P, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P479, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249009
WAHRBORG P, 1990, APHASIOLOGY, V4, P371, DOI 10.1080/02687039008249089
WERTZ RT, 1995, TREATMENT APHASIA TH, P309
NR 26
TC 0
Z9 0
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 12
BP 918
EP 921
PG 4
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 267CX
UT WOS:000084338400007
ER
PT J
AU Le Dorze, G
Croteau, C
Brassard, C
Michallet, B
AF Le Dorze, G
Croteau, C
Brassard, C
Michallet, B
TI Research considerations guiding interventions for families affected by
aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PEOPLE
C1 Univ Montreal, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
RP Le Dorze, G (reprint author), Univ Montreal, CP6128 Succ Ctr Ville, Montreal, PQ H3C 3J7, Canada.
EM ledorze@med.umontreal.ca
RI Le Dorze, Guylaine/A-1790-2014
CR Blomert L, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P64
BOISCLAIRPAPILL.R, 1993, LIVING APHASIA PSYCH, P173
Boles L., 1997, ASIA PACIFIC J SPEEC, V2, P43
BOUGHER N, 1997, ICIDH ENV FACTORS IN, V9, P40
BRUMFITT S, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P569, DOI 10.1080/02687039308248631
Buck M., 1968, DYSPHASIA PROFESSION
CROTEAU C, 1997, IT CLIN PHOMETICS LI, P36
Fiske V, 1991, J FAMILY PSYCHOL, V5, P4, DOI 10.1037/0893-3200.5.1.4
FOUGEYROLLAS P, 1995, DISABIL REHABIL, V17, P145
HELMICK JW, 1976, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V41, P238
HOLLAND AL, 1977, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V42, P307
Kagan A, 1995, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V2, P15
Kinsella G, 1978, MANAGEMENT APHASIA, P26
KVALE S, 1983, J PHENOMENOL PSYCHOL, V14, P171, DOI 10.1163/156916283X00090
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIE SELON PERSPE
MULLER DJ, 1983, BRIT J DISORD COMMUN, V18, P23
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
Radley A., 1994, MAKING SENSE ILLNESS
Yin RK, 1994, CASE STUDY RES DESIG, V2nd
NR 22
TC 4
Z9 4
PU PSYCHOLOGY PRESS
PI HOVE
PA 27 CHURCH RD, HOVE BN3 2FA, EAST SUSSEX, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 12
BP 922
EP 927
PG 6
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 267CX
UT WOS:000084338400008
ER
PT J
AU Servaes, P
Draper, B
Conroy, P
Bowring, G
AF Servaes, P
Draper, B
Conroy, P
Bowring, G
TI Informal carers of aphasic stroke patients. A brief response
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 Sutherland Hosp, Rehabil Unit, Taren Point, NSW, Australia.
RP Conroy, P (reprint author), Sutherland Hosp, Rehabil Unit, Locked Bag 21, Taren Point, NSW, Australia.
NR 0
TC 1
Z9 1
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD DEC
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 12
BP 927
EP 928
PG 2
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 267CX
UT WOS:000084338400009
ER
PT J
AU Kearns, KP
AF Kearns, KP
TI Qualitative research methods in aphasia: a welcome addition
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 Northeastern Univ, Dept Speech Language Pathol & Audiol, Boston, MA 02115 USA.
RP Kearns, KP (reprint author), Northeastern Univ, Dept Speech Language Pathol & Audiol, 133 Forsyth, Boston, MA 02115 USA.
CR BACHRACH AJ, 1972, PSYCHOL RES, P36
Campbell D. T., 1963, EXPT QUASIEXPERIMENT
KEARNS KP, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
Sidman M., 1960, TACTICS SCI RES
THOMPSON CK, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY
NR 5
TC 3
Z9 3
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 649
EP 650
DI 10.1080/026870399401759
PG 2
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200002
ER
PT J
AU Damico, JS
Simmons-Mackie, N
Oelschlaeger, M
Elman, R
Armstrong, E
AF Damico, JS
Simmons-Mackie, N
Oelschlaeger, M
Elman, R
Armstrong, E
TI Qualitative methods in aphasia research: basic issues
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CONVERSATION; STRATEGIES; MODEL
AB As clinical aphasiologists seek different ways to understand the complexity of aphasia within naturalistic and social contexts, there is an increasing need to provide background information on various research paradigms not widely used in the field. Consistent with recent calls for qualitative research in clinical aphasiology, this article provides information on the rationale, design characteristics, strengths and weaknesses of this research paradigm and its usefulness in clinical aphasiology.
C1 Univ SW Louisiana, Doris B Hawthorne Ctr, Lafayette, LA 70504 USA.
SE Louisiana Univ, Hammond, LA 70402 USA.
No Arizona Univ, Flagstaff, AZ 86011 USA.
Aphasia Ctr Calif, Oakland, CA USA.
Univ Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia.
RP Damico, JS (reprint author), Univ SW Louisiana, Doris B Hawthorne Ctr, POB 43170, Lafayette, LA 70504 USA.
CR Agar M., 1986, SPEAKING ETHNOGRAPHY
Bateson G, 1972, STEPS ECOLOGY MIND
BLOOM L, 1971, LANGUAGE DEV FORM FU
BROWN R, 1973, 4 LANGUAGE
Bruner J. S., 1975, J CHILD LANG, V2, P1, DOI 10.1017/S0305000900000866
Bryman A., 1988, QUANTITY QUALITY SOC
Campbell D. T., 1966, EXPT QUASI EXPERIMEN
Creswell JW, 1998, QUALITATIVE INQUIRY
Damico JS, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P83
DARLEY FL, 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P9
Denzin N, 1994, HDB QUALITATIVE RES
Denzin N. K, 1989, INTERPRETIVE INTERAC
Denzin N. K., 1970, RES ACT SOCIOLOGY
DURANTI Alessandro, 1992, RETHINKING CONTEXT L
Eisner E. W, 1991, ENLIGHTENED EYE QUAL
Elman RJ, 1995, CLIN APHASIOL, V23, P77
Ferguson A, 1996, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V10, P55, DOI 10.3109/02699209608985161
Fielding Jane L., 1986, LINKING DATA
FIELDING NG, 1988, ACTIONS STRUCTURE
FLICK U, 1992, J THEOR SOC BEHAV, V22, P175, DOI 10.1111/j.1468-5914.1992.tb00215.x
Garfinkel H., 1967, STUDIES ETHNOMETHOLO
Geertz C., 1973, INTERPRETATION CULTU
Glaser B., 1967, DISCOVERY GROUNDED T
Goffman E, 1959, PRESENTATION SELF EV
Goodwin C., 1981, CONVERSATIONAL ORG I
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
Guba E. G., 1994, HDB QUALITATIVE RES, P105
Hammersley M., 1992, WHATS WRONG ETHNOGRA
Hammersley M., 1983, ETHNOGRAPHY PRINCIPL
Harre R., 1980, SOCIAL BEING THEORY
Heritage John, 1984, GARFINKEL ETHNOMETHO
HOLLAND A, 1994, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V3, P34
HOLLAND AL, 1982, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V47, P50
Holland A., 1980, COMMUNICATIVE ABILIT
JACKSON JH, 1874, NATURE DUALITY BRAIN
Janesick VJ, 1994, HDB QUALITATIVE RES, P209
Kearns K. P., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P31
KERK J, 1986, RELIABILITY VALIDITY
Kerlinger F. N., 1973, FDN BEHAV RES
KLIPPI A, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P373, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248538
LEDORZE G, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P239
Levi-Strauss C., 1966, SAVAGE MIND
Lincoln Y. S., 1985, NATURALISTIC INQUIRY
Luria AR, 1970, TRAUMATIC APHASIA
Lynd Robert, 1929, MIDDLETOWN STUDY MOD
Lyon J, 1992, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V1, P7
Malinowski B, 1922, ARGONAUTS W PACIFIC
Maxwell J., 1996, QUALITATIVE RES DESI
Meehl PE, 1954, CLIN STAT PREDICTION
MILROY L, 1992, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V6, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699209208985517
MOUSTAKIS C, 1990, HEURISTIC RES DESIGN
Nelson C., 1992, CULTURAL STUDIES, P1
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P971, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249464
OXENHAM D, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P477, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248710
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
Piaget J., 1974, LANGUAGE THOUGHT CHI
PIKE KL, 1967, LANGUAGE RELATION UN
Popper K. R., 1959, LOGIC SCI DISCOVERY
Porch B. E., 1967, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
Ragin CC, 1987, COMP METHOD MOVING Q
Sacks H., 1992, LECT CONVERSATION, VI
Sacks H., 1992, LECT CONVERSATION, VII
SCHEGLOF.EA, 1968, AM ANTHROPOL, V70, P1075, DOI 10.1525/aa.1968.70.6.02a00030
SCHUELL H, 1965, DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOS
Sidman M., 1960, TACTICS SCI RES
SILVERMAN D, 1993, INTERPETING QUALITAT
SimmonsMackie NN, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P761, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250455
SMITH NC, 1970, AM PSYCHOL, V25, P970, DOI 10.1037/h0029774
Spradley J., 1980, PARTICIPANT OBSERVAT
TAYLOR M L, 1965, Arch Phys Med Rehabil, V46, P101
Thompson C. K., 1991, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V19, P41
Veblen T., 1918, HIGHER LEARNING AM M
Vidich A., 1994, HDB QUALITATIVE RES, P23
Weber M, 1949, METHODOLOGY SOCIAL S
WERTZ RT, 1987, TOP LANG DISORD, V8, P1
Whyte W. F., 1943, STREET CORNER SOC SO
WILKINSON R, 1995, CASE STUDIES CLIN LI, P277
Wolcott HF, 1994, TRANSFORMING QUALITA
NR 79
TC 36
Z9 37
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 651
EP 665
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200003
ER
PT J
AU Damico, JS
Oelschlaeger, M
Simmons-Mackie, N
AF Damico, JS
Oelschlaeger, M
Simmons-Mackie, N
TI Qualitative methods in aphasia research: conversation analysis
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SUPPORTED CONVERSATION; STRATEGIES; REPAIR; ADULTS
AB The conversational behaviours of individuals with aphasia are becoming a more important consideration in clinical aphasiology. This is due to the increased focus on conversational dyads and conversational partners via supported conversation for adults with aphasia. This article provides an overview of a well-established analytic framework to investigate conversation in authentic settings. This framework, conversation analysis, is described according to its development and primary principles. Several examples of its application to clinical aphasiology are provided.
C1 Univ SW Louisiana, Lafayette, LA 70504 USA.
No Arizona Univ, Flagstaff, AZ 86011 USA.
SE Louisiana Univ, Hammond, LA 70402 USA.
RP Damico, JS (reprint author), Univ SW Louisiana, Lafayette, LA 70504 USA.
CR Atkinson J. M., 1984, STRUCTURES SOCIAL AC
Button Graham, 1987, TALK SOCIAL ORG
COPELAND M, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P301, DOI 10.1080/02687038908249001
DURANTI Alessandro, 1992, RETHINKING CONTEXT L
Ferguson A, 1996, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V10, P55, DOI 10.3109/02699209608985161
FERGUSON A, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P143, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248647
Garfinkel H, 1967, STUDIES ETHNOMETHODO
GARFINKEL H, 1964, SOC PROBL, V11, P225, DOI 10.1525/sp.1964.11.3.03a00020
GARFINKEL H, 1960, BEHAV SCI, V5, P72
Goffman E, 1959, PRESENTATION SELF EV
Goffman Erving, 1964, STIGMA NOTES MANAGEM
GOODWIN C, 1987, SOC PSYCHOL QUART, V50, P115, DOI 10.2307/2786746
Goodwin C., 1981, CONVERSATIONAL ORG I
GOODWIN C, 1990, ANNU REV ANTHROPOL, V19, P283, DOI 10.1146/annurev.an.19.100190.001435
Goodwin C, 1992, CONFLICT TALK SOCIOL, P85
Goodwin Charles, 1979, EVERYDAY LANGUAGE ST, P97
GOODWIN C, 1995, RES LANG SOC INTERAC, V28, P233, DOI 10.1207/s15327973rlsi2803_4
Heritage John, 1984, GARFINKEL ETHNOMETHO
Holland AL, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P844, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249578
Jefferson G, 1973, SEMIOTICA, V9, P47, DOI 10.1515/semi.1973.9.1.47
Jefferson G., 1974, LANG SOC, V3, P181
Klippi A., 1996, STUDIA FENNICA LINGU, V6
KLIPPI A, 1991, APHASIOLOGY, V5, P373, DOI 10.1080/02687039108248538
LAAKSO M, 1997, STUDIA FENNICA LINGI, V8
MCDERMOTT RP, 1987, POWER DISCOURSE, P153
MILROY L, 1992, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V6, P27, DOI 10.3109/02699209208985517
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, CLIN LINGUIST PHONET, V12, P459, DOI 10.3109/02699209808985238
Oelschlaeger ML, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P971, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249464
PARR S, 1994, APHASIOLOGY, V8, P457, DOI 10.1080/02687039408248670
PERKINS L, 1995, EUR J DISORDER COMM, V30, P372
Psathas G, 1995, CONVERSATION ANAL ST
Sacks H., 1963, BERKELEY J SOCIOL, V8, P1
Sacks H., 1992, LECT CONVERSATION, VI
Sacks H., 1992, LECT CONVERSATION, VII
SACKS H, 1974, LANGUAGE, V50, P696, DOI 10.2307/412243
Sacks Harvey, 1972, STUDIES SOCIAL INTER, P31
Schegloff E. P. A., 1992, LECT CONVERSATION, V1, pix
SCHEGLOFF EA, 1981, ANAL DISCOURSE TEXT, P77
SCHEGLOF.EA, 1968, AM ANTHROPOL, V70, P1075, DOI 10.1525/aa.1968.70.6.02a00030
SILVERMAN D, 1993, INTERPETING QUALITAT
Simmons-Mackie N, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P831, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249576
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 1998, SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION
Simmons-Mackie N. N., 1996, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V5, P37
SimmonsMackie NN, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P761, DOI 10.1080/02687039708250455
WILKINSON R, 1995, THESIS U CENTRAL ENG
Wilkinson R., 1995, CASE STUDIES CLIN LI, P271
NR 46
TC 35
Z9 36
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 667
EP 679
PG 13
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200004
ER
PT J
AU Simmons-Mackie, N
Damico, JS
AF Simmons-Mackie, N
Damico, JS
TI Qualitative methods in aphasia research: ethnography
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 SE Louisiana Univ, Dept Special Educ & Commun Sci & Disorders, Hammond, LA 70402 USA.
Univ SW Louisiana, Lafayette, LA 70504 USA.
RP Simmons-Mackie, N (reprint author), SE Louisiana Univ, Dept Special Educ & Commun Sci & Disorders, Hammond, LA 70402 USA.
CR Agar M., 1986, SPEAKING ETHNOGRAPHY
Atkinson P., 1990, ETHNOGRAPHIC IMAGINA
Hammersley M., 1992, WHATS WRONG ETHNOGRA
Hammersley M., 1983, ETHNOGRAPHY PRINCIPL
KIRK JEROME, 1986, RELIABILITY VALIDITY
Lincoln Y. S., 1985, NATURALISTIC INQUIRY
Parr S., 1997, TALKING APHASIA
SIMMONS N, 1993, ETHNOGRAPHIC INVESTI
SIMMONSMACKIE N, 1996, ANN M AM SPEECH LANG
SIMMONSMACKIE N, IN PRESS AM J SPEECH
Spradley J., 1980, PARTICIPANT OBSERVAT
Spradley J., 1979, ETHNOGRAPHIC INTERVI
Strauss A., 1990, BASICS QUALITATIVE R
WESTBY C., 1990, J CHILDHOOD COMMUNIC, V13, P101
NR 14
TC 18
Z9 19
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 681
EP 687
PG 7
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200005
ER
PT J
AU Lyon, JG
AF Lyon, JG
TI A commentary on qualitative research in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
C1 Living Aphasia Inc, Mazomanie, WI 53560 USA.
RP Lyon, JG (reprint author), Living Aphasia Inc, 6344 Hillsandwood Rd, Mazomanie, WI 53560 USA.
NR 0
TC 3
Z9 3
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 689
EP 690
DI 10.1080/026870399401795
PG 2
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200006
ER
PT J
AU Yorkston, KM
Jaffe, KM
Liao, SQ
Polissar, NL
AF Yorkston, KM
Jaffe, KM
Liao, SQ
Polissar, NL
TI Recovery of written language production in children with traumatic brain
injury: outcomes at one year
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID COHORT; DISCOURSE
AB The purpose of this study is to determine if the pattern of deficits in written language production persists at one year after resolution post traumatic amnesia. Seventy-one children, aged 8 to 15 years, with mild, moderate and severe closed head injury were compared with controls who were individually matched on the premorbid characteristics of age, gender, school grade, behaviour and academic performance. For children with severe injury, deficits in written language persist at 1 year. Although the extent of the deficits lessens somewhat, the pattern of deficit at 1 month and 1 year are similar.
C1 Univ Washington, Dept Rehabil Med, Seattle, WA 98195 USA.
Univ Washington, Dept Biostat, Seattle, WA 98195 USA.
RP Yorkston, KM (reprint author), Univ Washington, Dept Rehabil Med, Box 356490, Seattle, WA 98195 USA.
CR Chapman S. B., 1997, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V6, P66
Chapman S. B., 1997, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V6, P50
CHAPMAN SB, 1996, DIAGNOSIS THERAPY PA, P41
CHAPMAN SB, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P42, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90020-F
COELHO CA, 1995, APHASIOLOGY, V9, P409, DOI 10.1080/02687039508248707
FAY GC, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P895
FAY GC, 1994, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V75, P733
Hammill D. D., 1978, TEST WRITTEN LANGUAG
JAFFE KM, 1995, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V76, P17, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(95)80037-9
JAFFE KM, 1993, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V74, P587, DOI 10.1016/0003-9993(93)90156-5
JAFFE KM, 1992, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V73, P540
JENNETT B, 1975, LANCET, V1, P480
Snedecor G. W., 1967, STAT METHODS
Yorkston KM, 1997, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V78, P1096, DOI 10.1016/S0003-9993(97)90134-9
NR 14
TC 5
Z9 5
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 691
EP 700
PG 10
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200007
ER
PT J
AU Robin, DA
Max, JE
Stierwalt, JAG
Guenzer, LC
Lindgren, SD
AF Robin, DA
Max, JE
Stierwalt, JAG
Guenzer, LC
Lindgren, SD
TI Sustained attention in children and adolescents with traumatic brain
injury
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID CLOSED-HEAD INJURY
AB We studied sustained attention in 64 subjects, 49 of whom had suffered a traumatic brain injury (TBI) and 15 who served as orthopedic controls. Subjects were required to respond to the appearance or disappearance of a star on a computer monitor, embedded in 250 stars. Results showed that subjects with TBI had lower accuracy than controls and a significant vigilance decrement. Severe TBI resulted in much greater attentional deficits, than mild injuries.
C1 Univ Iowa, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Natl Ctr Voice & Speech, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
Univ Iowa, Dept Psychiat, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
SW Missouri State Univ, Dept Commun Disorders, Springfield, MO 65802 USA.
No Illinois Univ, De Kalb, IL 60115 USA.
Univ Iowa, Dept Pediat, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
RP Robin, DA (reprint author), Univ Iowa, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Natl Ctr Voice & Speech, 120B WJSHC, Iowa City, IA 52242 USA.
RI Robin, Donald/F-2109-2010
CR BLOSSER J, 1994, PEDIAT TRAUMATIC BRA
LODGEMILLER KA, 1993, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V1, P133
LOKEN WJ, 1995, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V9, P592, DOI 10.1037//0894-4105.9.4.592
Lustig AP, 1998, J MED SPEECH-LANG PA, V6, P13
PARASURAMAN R, 1991, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V13, P789, DOI 10.1080/01688639108401090
RIMEL RW, 1981, NEUROSURGERY, V9, P221
Rizzo M, 1996, BRAIN, V119, P951, DOI 10.1093/brain/119.3.951
RIZZO M, 1990, NEUROLOGY, V40, P447
STIERWALT JAG, 1997, CLIN APH C JUN BIGF
TEASDALE G, 1974, LANCET, V2, P81
TIMMERMANS SR, 1991, COGNITIVE REHABILITA, V9, P26
Veltman JC, 1996, NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, V10, P357
NR 12
TC 7
Z9 7
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 701
EP 708
PG 8
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200008
ER
PT J
AU Togher, L
Hand, L
AF Togher, L
Hand, L
TI The macrostructure of the interview: Are traumatic brain injury
interactions structured differently to control interactions?
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID HEAD-INJURY; DISCOURSE; POPULATION; ADULTS
AB Previous descriptions of discourse deficits following traumatic brain injury (TBI) at a macrostructural level have used analyses such as cohesion and story structure. This paper proposes a macrolinguistic analysis called generic structure potential analysis (GSP) (Ventola 1979) which describes the overall structuring of the unfolding process of two types of interviews. Seven TBI subjects are compared with matched control subjects across two conditions: a community education information-giving encounter to two 16 year old school students and an information requesting interaction with the researcher. The possible GSP elements of these types of encounters include greeting, identification, approaches which enable interactants to establish interpersonal links, centring which directly relate to the purpose of the interviews, leave-taking and goodbye. The GSP of student interactions was similar for TBI and control subjects but differences were noted in the researcher condition. The value of placing TBI subjects in information giving roles and the importance of the communication partner's contributions to the interaction is highlighted. GSP analysis allows the clinician/researcher to analyse the interview context by taking the contextual configuration into account. It map provide a valuable clinical tool in the assessment and treatment of discourse deficits which commonly follow TBI.
C1 Univ Sydney, Sch Commun Sci & Disorders, Fac Hlth Sci, Lidcombe, NSW 2141, Australia.
Liverpool Area Hlth Serv, Brain Injury Rehabil Unit, Sydney, NSW, Australia.
RP Togher, L (reprint author), Univ Sydney, Sch Commun Sci & Disorders, Fac Hlth Sci, POB 170, Lidcombe, NSW 2141, Australia.
CR Adamovich B, 1992, SCALES COGNITIVE ABI
BONDCHAPMAN S, 1995, J HEAD TRAUMA REHAB, V10, P36
CHAPMAN SB, 1992, BRAIN LANG, V43, P42, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(92)90020-F
COELHO CA, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P471, DOI 10.3109/02699059509008206
EGGINS S, 1990, THESIS U SYDNEY SYDN
FLANAGAN S, 1995, BRAIN INJURY, V9, P321, DOI 10.3109/02699059509005773
Hartley LL., 1995, COGNITIVE COMMUNICAT
JENNETT B, 1977, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V40, P291, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.40.3.291
HARTLEY L L, 1991, Brain Injury, V5, P267, DOI 10.3109/02699059109008097
MARSH NV, 1991, J CLIN EXP NEUROPSYC, V13, P729, DOI 10.1080/01688639108401086
MENTIS M, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V30, P88
Perkins M. R., 1995, CASE STUDIES CLIN LI, P293
PRUTTING CA, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P105
RUSSELL WR, 1961, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V5, P4
Szekeres Shirley F., 1992, Seminars in Speech and Language, V13, P293, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1064204
Togher L, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P491, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248486
Togher L, 1997, BRAIN INJURY, V11, P169, DOI 10.1080/026990597123629
VENTOLA E, 1979, J PRAGMATICS, V3, P267, DOI 10.1016/0378-2166(79)90034-1
NR 18
TC 10
Z9 11
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 709
EP 723
PG 15
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200009
ER
PT J
AU Tompkins, CA
Lehman, MT
Baumgaertner, A
AF Tompkins, CA
Lehman, MT
Baumgaertner, A
TI Suppression and inference revision in right brain-damaged and
non-brain-damaged adults
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID GENERAL COMPREHENSION SKILL; RIGHT-HEMISPHERE; WORKING-MEMORY; DISCOURSE
AB This study examined the extent to which participants were able to inhibit, or suppress, initial inferences that were rendered inappropriate by subsequent information and the relation between suppression ability and discourse comprehension in adults with right hemisphere brain damage (RBD). Two-sentence stimuli were presented auditorily to 32 adults with RED and 17 control subjects. An ambiguous initial stimulus sentence elicited both dominant and less-preferred inferences and the second sentence resolved the ambiguity toward the initially less likely interpretation. Subjects judged whether a probe word fit with the meaning of the entire stimulus. To evaluate suppression function, probe words were chosen to represent the dominant, but eventually inappropriate inference for the first sentence. In a comparison condition, the same probes were paired with inferentially unambiguous stimuli. Accurate 'no' judgments of the probe words were slower in the ambiguous condition than in the unambiguous condition, reflecting interference from the dominant but eventually inappropriate interpretations of the ambiguous stimuli. This interference did not subside for either group over two probe intervals (850 and 1200 ms), indicating that neither group as a whole suppressed the unwanted inferences over time. However, on a within-group level, RED subjects' effectiveness at suppressing these inappropriate inferences was related to their comprehension of discourse stimuli that required inference revisions.
C1 Univ Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
RP Tompkins, CA (reprint author), Univ Pittsburgh, 4033 Forbes Tower, Pittsburgh, PA 15260 USA.
CR BEEMAN M, 1993, BRAIN LANG, V44, P80, DOI 10.1006/brln.1993.1006
Benton A. L., 1983, JUDGMENT LINE ORIENT, P44
BLOISE CGR, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P145
Brownell H., 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LAN
BROWNELL HH, 1986, BRAIN LANG, V27, P310, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(86)90022-2
CARROLL JB, 1971, AM WORD FREQUENCY BO
Stemmer B, 1998, RIGHT HEMISPHERE LANGUAGE COMPREHENSION, P329
CONNELLY SL, 1993, J EXP PSYCHOL HUMAN, V19, P1238, DOI 10.1037//0096-1523.19.6.1238
Dunn L. M., 1981, PEABODY PICTURE VOCA
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Gernsbacher M. A., 1990, LANGUAGE COMPREHENSI
GERNSBACHER MA, 1991, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V17, P245, DOI 10.1037/0278-7393.17.2.245
GERNSBACHER MA, 1990, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V16, P430, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.16.3.430
Joanette Y., 1990, RIGHT HEMISPHERE VER
JUST MA, 1992, PSYCHOL REV, V99, P122, DOI 10.1037/0033-295X.99.1.122
KANE MJ, 1994, PSYCHOL AGING, V9, P103, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.9.1.103
Lehman MT, 1998, APHASIOLOGY, V12, P771, DOI 10.1080/02687039808249572
MCKOON G, 1986, J EXP PSYCHOL LEARN, V12, P82, DOI 10.1037//0278-7393.12.1.82
MOLLOY R, 1990, DISCOURSE ABILITY BR
SHAW RJ, 1991, PSYCHOL AGING, V6, P595, DOI 10.1037/0882-7974.6.4.595
Tompkins C. A., 1998, TOP STROKE REHABIL, V5, P29
TOMPKINS CA, 1992, COMPREHENSION RIGHT
Tompkins CA, 1997, APHASIOLOGY, V11, P505, DOI 10.1080/02687039708248487
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
Tompkins CA, 1998, AM J SPEECH-LANG PAT, V7, P68
TOMPKINS CA, 1994, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V37, P896
Wilson B. A., 1987, BEHAV INATTENTION TE
WILSON R S, 1979, Journal of Clinical Neuropsychology, V1, P49, DOI 10.1080/01688637908401097
NR 28
TC 8
Z9 9
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 725
EP 742
PG 18
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200010
ER
PT J
AU Hillis, AE
Selnes, O
AF Hillis, AE
Selnes, O
TI Cases of aphasia or neglect due to Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID PROGRESSIVE APHASIA; SPATIAL NEGLECT; LANGUAGE
AB Two patients with CJD whose deficits are attributable to damage to selective cognitive mechanisms are described. One patient presented with 'pure word deafness' with severe anemia and progressed to Global aphasia. EEG and SPECT showed left cortical abnormalities. The other presented with progressive left neglect and digressive speech with meager interpretive content, but never developed aphasia. EEG showed right cortical abnormalities. These cases provide evidence that CJD can begin focally and unilaterally. Several cases of progressive aphasia due to CJD have been described, but this may be the first reported case of progressive right hemisphere dysfunction due to CJD.
C1 Johns Hopkins Hosp, Dept Neurol, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
RP Hillis, AE (reprint author), Johns Hopkins Hosp, Dept Neurol, Pathol 509,600 N Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD 21287 USA.
CR CALVANIO R, 1987, NEUROLOGY, V37, P1179
CARAMAZZA A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V18, P128, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90011-1
CHATTERJEE A, 1994, J NEUROL NEUROSUR PS, V57, P1236, DOI 10.1136/jnnp.57.10.1236
CRYSTAL HA, 1982, ANN NEUROL, V12, P186, DOI 10.1002/ana.410120210
DRIVER J, 1991, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V8, P475, DOI 10.1080/02643299108253384
DUFFY JR, 1987, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, V17, P349
ELLIS AW, 1983, COGNITION, V15, P111, DOI 10.1016/0010-0277(83)90036-7
FOLSTEIN MF, 1975, J PSYCHIAT RES, V12, P189, DOI 10.1016/0022-3956(75)90026-6
Goodglass H., 1972, BOSTON DIAGNOSTIC AP
Hillis AE, 1995, NEUROCASE, V1, P189, DOI 10.1080/13554799508402364
HILLIS AE, 1995, J COGNITIVE NEUROSCI, V7, P396, DOI 10.1162/jocn.1995.7.3.396
HOLLAND AL, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V24, P36, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90096-3
Hsich G, 1996, NEW ENGL J MED, V335, P924, DOI 10.1056/NEJM199609263351303
KIRK A, 1994, CAN J NEUROL SCI, V21, P350
MANDELL AM, 1989, NEUROLOGY, V39, P55
MESULAM MM, 1982, ANN NEUROL, V11, P592, DOI 10.1002/ana.410110607
MYERS P, 1979, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V7, P38
Osterrieth PA, 1944, ARCH PSYCHOL-GENEVE, V30, P206
SHUTTLEWORTH EC, 1985, J NATL MED ASSOC, V77, P649
SHUTTLEWORTH EC, 1989, NEUROPSYCHIATRY NEUR, V4, P283
TRUPE AEH, 1985, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V15, P83
VICTOROFF J, 1994, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V51, P269
WECHSLER D, 1972, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
YAMANOUCHI H, 1986, NEUROLOGY, V36, P1517
YORKSTON KM, 1980, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V45, P27
NR 25
TC 8
Z9 8
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 743
EP 754
PG 12
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200011
ER
PT J
AU Schneider, SL
Wijdicks, EFM
Duffy, JR
O'Brien, TJ
AF Schneider, SL
Wijdicks, EFM
Duffy, JR
O'Brien, TJ
TI Wernicke's aphasia after putaminal hemorrhage: Unusual clinical and
SPECT findings
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SUBCORTICAL APHASIA; BASAL GANGLIA; LESION SITES; LANGUAGE; RECOVERY;
CT; IODOAMPHETAMINE; PROFILES
AB We present a case of a man with a putaminal hemorrhage who presented in the acute stage with a 'classic' Wernicke's aphasia. CT and MRI scans showed a large left basal ganglia hemorrhage involving the posterior putamen. A SPECT scan performed acutely demonstrated decreased perfusion in the left temporal cortex, frontal cortex and white matter and to the left basal ganglia from the hemorrhage itself. Within five days his language abilities improved dramatically, with complete resolution of his aphasia over the course of six weeks. Repeat SPECT scans continued to show the structural changes to the left putamen and left hemisphere hypoperfusion, suggesting that the resolution of the language symptoms did not correlate with the structural and perfusion changes. Various theories advanced in the literature regarding the pathophysiological mechanisms causing aphasia due to subcortical lesions cannot completely explain the findings of our case. These hypotheses are reviewed and discussed.
C1 Mayo Clin & Mayo Fdn, Dept Neurol, Rochester, MN 55905 USA.
Mayo Clin & Mayo Fdn, Sect Speech Pathol, Rochester, MN 55905 USA.
RP Schneider, SL (reprint author), 14939 Rangeline Rd, Buchanan, MI 49107 USA.
RI O'Brien, Terence/L-8102-2013
CR ALEXANDER GE, 1986, ANNU REV NEUROSCI, V9, P357, DOI 10.1146/annurev.ne.09.030186.002041
ALEXANDER MP, 1987, BRAIN, V110, P961, DOI 10.1093/brain/110.4.961
ALEXANDER MP, 1980, NEUROLOGY, V30, P1193
ASSO D, 1969, BRIT J PSYCHIAT, V115, P541, DOI 10.1192/bjp.115.522.541
BELL DS, 1968, BRAIN, V91, P619, DOI 10.1093/brain/91.4.619
BUSHNELL DL, 1989, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V46, P665
CROSSON B, 1992, SUBOCRTICAL FUNCTION
CROSSON B, 1984, PSYCHOL BULL, V96, P491, DOI 10.1037/0033-2909.96.3.491
CROSSON B, 1985, BRAIN LANG, V25, P257, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(85)90085-9
DAMASIO AR, 1982, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V39, P15
DAMASIO H, 1984, SEMIN NEUROL, V4, P151, DOI 10.1055/s-2008-1041544
DEFER G, 1987, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V44, P715
DESPOSITO M, 1995, NEUROLOGY, V45, P38
GUIBILEI F, 1990, STROKE, V21, P895
HERMANN K, 1996, CONTINUA NEUROLOGICA, V27, P197
Hogan RE, 1996, AM J NEURORADIOL, V17, P793
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
METTER EJ, 1981, ANN NEUROL, V10, P173, DOI 10.1002/ana.410100208
METTER EJ, 1995, HDB NEUROLOGICAL SPE, P187
METTER EJ, 1986, NEUROLOGY, V36, P1155
MOUNTZ JM, 1990, J NUCL MED, V31, P61
Nadeau SE, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V58, P355, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1707
NAESER MA, 1982, ARCH NEUROL-CHICAGO, V39, P2
OJEMANN GA, 1968, BRAIN, V91, P99, DOI 10.1093/brain/91.1.99
OLSEN TS, 1986, BRAIN, V109, P393, DOI 10.1093/brain/109.3.393
Penfield W, 1959, SPEECH BRAIN MECH
RIKLAN M, 1969, J NEUROL SCI, V8, P307, DOI 10.1016/0022-510X(69)90115-4
SCHALTEN.G, 1965, BRAIN, V88, P835, DOI 10.1093/brain/88.4.835
VANBUREN JM, 1963, J NEUROSURG, V20, P148, DOI 10.3171/jns.1963.20.2.0148
VANBUREN JM, 1966, J NEUROSURG, V24, P416
VANBUREN JM, 1966, ELECTROEN CLIN NEURO, V21, P114, DOI 10.1016/0013-4694(66)90119-2
von Monakow C., 1969, BRAIN BEHAVIOR, V1, P27
Wallesch CW, 1988, APHASIA, P256
NR 33
TC 1
Z9 1
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 755
EP 765
PG 11
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200012
ER
PT J
AU Beeson, PM
AF Beeson, PM
TI Treating acquired writing impairment: strengthening graphemic
representations
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
ID SEMANTIC ERRORS; REMEDIATION; DYSGRAPHIA; WRITTEN
AB A writing treatment protocol was designed for a 75 year-old man with severe Wernicke's aphasia. Four treatment phases were implemented: (1) a multiple baseline design that documented improvement in single-word writing for targeted words; (2) a clinician-directed home program that increased the corpus of correctly-spelled single words; (3) another multiple baseline series that documented acquisition of additional written words, as well as pragmatic training in the use of single-word writing to support conversational communication; and (4) a self-directed home treatment to further expand written vocabulary. The patient's acquisition of targeted words suggested an item-specific treatment effect that strengthened weakened graphemic representations. The patient's continued acquisition of correctly spelled words during the self-directed home treatment supported the use of this approach to supplement more traditional clinician-directed treatment.
C1 Univ Arizona, Natl Ctr Neurogen Commun Disorders, Tucson, AZ 85737 USA.
RP Beeson, PM (reprint author), Univ Arizona, Natl Ctr Neurogen Commun Disorders, POB 210071, Tucson, AZ 85737 USA.
CR ALIMINOSA D, 1993, APHASIOLOGY, V7, P55, DOI 10.1080/02687039308249499
BEHRMANN M, 1987, COGN NEUROPSYCHOL, V4, P365, DOI 10.1080/02643298708252044
Behrmann M., 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
BLACK SE, 1989, APHASIOLOGY, V3, P265, DOI 10.1080/02687038908248994
BUB D, 1982, BRAIN LANG, V17, P146, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(82)90011-6
CARAMAZZA A, 1987, COGNITION, V26, P29
CARAMAZZA A, 1990, CORTEX, V26, P95
CARAMAZZA A, 1983, BRAIN LANG, V18, P128, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(83)90011-1
Carlomagno S, 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P485
ELLIS AW, 1987, PERSPECTIVES COGNITI, P189
Goodman R. A., 1986, LANG COGNITIVE PROC, V1, P263, DOI 10.1080/01690968608404678
GOODMAN RA, 1986, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, V3, P179, DOI 10.1080/02643298608252675
Goodman RA, 1985, J HOPKINS DYSGRAPHIA
HILLIS AE, 1989, ARCH PHYS MED REHAB, V70, P632
HILLIS AE, 1995, MEMORY, V3, P333, DOI 10.1080/09658219508253156
Kay J., 1992, PSYCHOLINGUISTIC ASS
Kertesz A., 1982, W APHASIA BATTERY
Margolin D. I., 1992, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH
MARGOLIN DI, 1984, Q J EXP PSYCHOL-A, V36, P459
PARNWELL EC, 1993, NEW OXFORD PICTURE D
Patterson K., 1994, COGNITIVE NEUROPSYCH, P425
RAPCSAK SZ, 1991, BRAIN LANG, V41, P510, DOI 10.1016/0093-934X(91)90171-V
Rapp B, 1997, BRAIN LANG, V56, P248, DOI 10.1006/brln.1997.1735
Raven JC, 1976, COLOURED PROGRESSIVE
Wechsler D., 1987, WECHSLER MEMORY SCAL
NR 25
TC 23
Z9 23
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 767
EP 785
DI 10.1080/026870399401867
PG 19
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200013
ER
PT J
AU Lapointe, LL
Katz, RC
Braden, CL
AF Lapointe, LL
Katz, RC
Braden, CL
TI Clinical significance of change in language performance: social
validation of writing response improvement in aphasia
SO APHASIOLOGY
LA English
DT Article
AB Evaluation of change in performance based on feedback from people other than the experimenters has became known as 'social validation' and assumes an increasingly important role in models of treatment efficacy. This study selected a sample of 141 community members diverse in age, education and occupation to judge the accuracy of changes in writing samples from individuals with aphasia. Counterbalanced pairs of writing samples derived from sentences on the Porch Index of Communicative Ability (PICA) were judged. Subjects were able to discern and judge changes in writing samples when compared to actual measured changes at levels far above chance. These findings lend social validation support to measured improvement in writing performance of individuals with aphasia.
C1 Arizona State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tempe, AZ 85287 USA.
Carl T Hayden VA Med Ctr, Dept Speech Pathol & Audiol, Phoenix, AZ USA.
RP Lapointe, LL (reprint author), Arizona State Univ, Dept Speech & Hearing Sci, Tempe, AZ 85287 USA.
CR DOYLE PJ, 1987, J SPEECH HEAR DISORD, V52, P143
GOLDSTEIN H, 1990, TREATMENT EFFICACY R, P91
Holland AL, 1996, J SPEECH HEAR RES, V39, pS27
KEARNS K, 1993, CLIN APHASIOLOGY, V21, P67
PORCH B, 1983, PORCH INDEX COMMUNIC
THOMPSON C, 1984, CLIN APHASIOLOGY C P, P195
TOMPKINS C, 1994, LANGUAGE INTERVENTIO, P571
MASSARO M, 1994, CLIN APHASIOL, V22, P245
Tompkins CA, 1995, RIGHT HEMISPHERE COM
NR 9
TC 9
Z9 9
PU TAYLOR & FRANCIS LTD
PI LONDON
PA ONE GUNPOWDER SQUARE, LONDON EC4A 3DE, ENGLAND
SN 0268-7038
J9 APHASIOLOGY
JI Aphasiology
PD SEP-NOV
PY 1999
VL 13
IS 9-11
BP 787
EP 792
PG 6
WC Clinical Neurology
SC Neurosciences & Neurology
GA 248MM
UT WOS:000083279200014
ER
EF